{"id": "CandTComputerActiveAtariPublicDomainSoftwareCatalog", "title": "C&T ComputerActive Atari Public Domain Software Catalog", "year": 1990, "seq": 0, "text": "We have one of the world\u2019s largest and the best organized collection of PD software for the Atari 800/XL/XE computer. We are constantly adding new disks to our catalog so watch for more coming soon. We have spent a lot time and have gone to much expense in making these programs available and we would like to share them with you. This library was formed as an alternative to paying high prices for commercial software. We provide you a low cost copy service for public domain software. Most disks have a large number of programs on them making them one of the best values anywhere. The small fee we charge is to cover the cost involved in copying, labeling, packaging, mailing and other expenses involved in making these programs available. I know you will like our disks; Like them, You\u2019ll love them! We have a large selection to choose from. The disks are packed full of programs I am sure you will find very entertaining, educational, and very useful as well. We have disks for programmers and ham radio enthusiasts, astronomy, educational, business, and of course lots of games to choose from. Some of the disks have documentation files on them, some of the disks are Menu Driven, and with others you just follow the instructions on the screen. We guarantee our disks to load or we will replace them at no charge. Just return it within 60 days with a note explaining the problem, and we will send out a replacement for it immediately. We will also trade for public domain software that is not listed in our catalog. We will trade disk for disk. For every disk of public domain software you send to us, we will send you the disk of your choice from our catalog."}
{"id": "alistair-shearer-effortless-being-the-yoga-sutras-of-patanjali", "title": "SpiritualQuest - Alistair Shearer - Effortless Being. The Yoga Sutras Of Patanjali", "year": 1982, "seq": 0, "text": "These details of art in the cave sanctuaries, temples and ancient rustic shrines are the work of artists whose training was either analogous to methods propounded here by Patanjali or influenced by traditional yogic experience. Some of the photographs are directly linked with the practice of yoga. For example, the rock sanctuaries were actually used by monks and hermits for their yoga, in some cases at a date contemporaneous with the writing of the Yoga Sitras. Sculptures from Aihole and Mahabalipuram portraying venerable sages in meditation have been eroded over a period of fifteen hundred years \u2014 a veritable metaphor for that marmoreal stillness to which the practice of yoga aspires. The exploitation of natural accidents of configuration, as in a seam of laval rock left raw ina ceiling at Ajanta, communicates the essence of yoga: its irreducible innerness. Amongst its many characteristics, yogic experience is a penetration of the perennial enigma: illusion and reality. The Indian architect deliberately exploits this fact, placing images beside a shimmering pool, or leaving massive boulders unhewn beside the most highly finished detail to sharpen paradox. Some of the relief carvings and paintings of organic forms are a visual analogue to the experience of yogic meditation. The vertical strata of temple towers and rigorously geometrical masonry are likewise analogues of yogic states, though in no sense illustrative. Particularly striking is the sculptor\u2019s feeling for the metamorphic quality and texture of stone: its crumbliness or polish, its rough granular surface or its inner luminosity seem to have been subtly exploited to convey the \u2018sensation\u2019 or \u2018atmosphere\u2019 of deep yogic absorption. The weathering of stone happily causes the mellowing of detail so that it drowns in shadowed or lustrous calm. Temples deserted for centuries or covered with the patina and lichen from monsoon torrents harmonize with the landscape and evoke a feeling of peacefulness which may persuade us to discover a similar tranquillity within ourselves."}
{"id": "alistair-shearer-effortless-being-the-yoga-sutras-of-patanjali", "title": "SpiritualQuest - Alistair Shearer - Effortless Being. The Yoga Sutras Of Patanjali", "year": 1982, "seq": 1, "text": "It says that the human nervous system is the crowning glory of creation, because it alone has the ability to reflect the unbounded source of life in its immaculate and radiant purity. Man is made in the image of God. The desire to know the Self is implanted deep within each of us; a memory of Eden as old as the mind. However dimly perceived, this longing is the most refined expression of the dynamic urge to grow and progress which energizes all life and motivates every aspiration. Only when we realize our true nature, and the individual mind becomes infinite, shall we be satisfied. This Enlightenment is the first and last freedom; it is the state of effortless Being. We shall not cease from exploration, And the end of all our exploring Will be to arrive where we started And know the place for the first time TS. ere! The quest for the Self has enthralled mankind since the dawning of desire. Ancient myths of every culture tell the same story of our search for wholeness. As the mind explores its own depths, it uncovers archetypal images which sustain and guide the journey inwards. These are the signposts on the old road home, half-remembered from long ago. Each society hands down its stories of the great heroes who have made the journey before us as reminders and examples to those who follow. In Mesopotamia the King of Erech, Gilgamesh, leaves his city and sets forth to find the plant of immor- tality \u2018never-grow-old\u2019 that sprouts at the bottom of the Cosmic Sea. In ancient Greece the nobly born Odysseus seeks his island home of Ithaca, while Jason sets sail on the search for the Golden Fleece. And in the very different setting of Arthurian England, the Knights of the Round Table ride out on that most sacred of missions, the quest for the Holy Grail."}
{"id": "alistair-shearer-effortless-being-the-yoga-sutras-of-patanjali", "title": "SpiritualQuest - Alistair Shearer - Effortless Being. The Yoga Sutras Of Patanjali", "year": 1982, "seq": 2, "text": "Though the details of the myths differ with time and place, their pattern is the same. First comes the initial challenge, the call to a fuller life, the promise of a new state of being. If the hero has the courage to accept the challenge, with all its awesome implications of metamorphosis, he embarks on the crossing of the initiatory threshold that marks the beginning of the journey. This death and rebirth will have to be repeated many times before the quest is accomplished, for there are trials and dangers to be encountered on the way, and every transformation suffered is a dying to the old and a resurrection into the new. Such travelling requires fortitude and perseverance. The decisions to be taken are not easy \u2014 the unwary are soon tranquillized by triviality, the song of the sirens is alluring and for every Galahad there are countless Launcelots. But the deserving seekers are sustained by unseen help, those hidden agencies of fairy tale and legend. For the dedicated there will in time come the final achievement: the apotheosis. Now the traveller can return, transfigured, to live as an example and inspiration to all those yet to complete the quest. These returned heroes are the great Teachers, the seers, saints and prophets, the spiritual leaders of mankind. Complete in themselves and reintegrated with the cosmos of which they are now a conscious instrument, they have reached the goal of yoga. With the seer of the Taittiriya Upanishad, their song rings out to all creation: \u2018Oh wonderful! wonderful! wonderfull\u2019 10 If any country has traditionally considered the Quest to be the central purpose of human life, it is India. Her civilization has from earliest times been built on the bedrock of yoga. Yoga itself is not Indian, it is universal, but it 1s to that primaeval land that we must look to trace the background of the Yoga Siitras."}
{"id": "alistair-shearer-effortless-being-the-yoga-sutras-of-patanjali", "title": "SpiritualQuest - Alistair Shearer - Effortless Being. The Yoga Sutras Of Patanjali", "year": 1982, "seq": 3, "text": "This enigmatic seal, barely two inches square, is imprinted with the Indus Valley script that remains undeciphered to this day. It is one of the very few pieces of archaeological evidence that acts as a link between the great cultural unity that spanned the Indo-Mediterranean world in prehistoric times, and the first Indian civilization that succeeded it. Like some mysterious cypher, encoded with the essential wisdom of yoga, the seal transmits a teaching that, since the dawn of history, has been inseparably linked with the primaeval and regenerative forces that govern both man and beast. The Indus Valley culture lasted until the middle of the second millennium BC. No one knows how or why it disappeared. All we do know is that at about this time the first waves of nomadic pastoral tribes from central Asia began to enter north-west India. These people, the Aryans, brought with them the Vedas, which are mankind\u2019s oldest records of knowledge and the only surviving evidence of the Aryan civilization. They are richly poetic, sensuous descriptions of the eternal drama of the creation, maintenance and dissolution of the universe, and are said to be truths intuited by enlightened seers (rishis) at the beginning of this cosmic cycle. They have been passed down orally through an hereditary succession of pandits to the present day. Although these recondite chants have remained virtually unfathomed by Western scholarship, they have been of immense importance in shaping the whole of subsequent Indian culture. In their written form they are the sacred books of Hinduism \u2014 that loosely related group of religious beliefs and practices which is the offspring of the Vedic and indigenous cultures. Indeed, they are still revered as the fount of all knowledge by orthodox Hindus, who regard them as the textbooks of eternal truth (sandtana dharma). 12 Life in Vedic India revolved around the necessity of maintaining contact with the myriad celestial energies which uphold the universe."}
{"id": "alistair-shearer-effortless-being-the-yoga-sutras-of-patanjali", "title": "SpiritualQuest - Alistair Shearer - Effortless Being. The Yoga Sutras Of Patanjali", "year": 1982, "seq": 4, "text": "This contact was essential to preserve the harmony of the cosmic hierarchy in which the human realm is only one among many. The way to sustain this universal order was twofold: through the perfor- mance of sacrificial ritual and the practice of yoga. The Vedas reiterate that, if the cosmic order is disrupted and the harmony between the various planes of creation broken, then suffering is the inevitable result. The Aryans saw no fundamental difference between the material and the spiritual worlds, or between the realms of mind and matter. Therefore it was of the utmost importance that thought, speech and action be life- supporting \u2014 in harmony with all other levels of the universe. As they lived by a code that sought to embrace all aspects of life, their society was organized as a microcosm of the natural order. This was probably the origin of the later caste system. The specialized knowledge of sacrificial ritual was the province of the brahmins. Because of this tradition of priestly expertise, the brahmins have continued to command enormous respect among the orthodox up until modern times. One group of Vedic texts, the Upanishads, is especially concerned with yoga. The oldest of the Vedas tells us that this knowledge is eternal and absolute, because it \u2018dwells in the imperishable transcendental field of life\u2019 (Rig Veda). In the forest hermitages of Vedic times, a group of pupils would gather around a teacher who instructed them in yoga and supervised their progress. We know that many such schools were still active at the time of the Buddha, and that he studied with several teachers before the great awakening. As a practical and non-ritualistic way to expand awareness, yoga was considered a vital means of ensuring individual evolution. Whereas only the brahmins had access to the ritual procedures which maintained integration on a general level in society, yoga was open to all."}
{"id": "alistair-shearer-effortless-being-the-yoga-sutras-of-patanjali", "title": "SpiritualQuest - Alistair Shearer - Effortless Being. The Yoga Sutras Of Patanjali", "year": 1982, "seq": 5, "text": "Moreover, the whole atmosphere of Patanjali\u2019s siirras is one of an assured and tranquil lucidity reminiscent of the classical Buddhist scriptures. Scholars have taken such parallels as proof that the sitras were heavily influenced by Buddhist teachings. It is more fruitful to see them as indications that both sets of texts drew on a common body of non-sectarian knowledge that had been available from time immemorial. Both were responses to the needs of the time, looking to a wisdom that is perennial. It was this same wisdom which inspired a contemporary of the Buddha, Mahavira. He also turned to yoga, and applied its methodology to a dogmatic system that was austerely monastic, and outside the tradition of Vedic orthodoxy. The result was Jainism. In fact each of the disparate elements of the Indian religious tradition are united by yoga; it is the hub around which they all revolve. The esoteric Tantric cults of Bengal adopted yoga as a means to ecstasy, and it was their baroque form of the teaching which was to provide techniques and ritual for the various sects, both Hindu and Buddhist, which flourished encapsulated in the remote Himalayan kingdoms. Bur yoga is not confined to the esoteric. At the other end of the Indian religious spectrum lie the great epics; the Mahabharata and the Ramayana. Finalized at the beginning of the Christian era, they originated much earlier. The epics are the life-blood of popular religion in the sub-continent, and their stories are told, sung, danced and acted by itinerant troupes who travel the length and breadth of the country even today. In many villages this is still the main form of education. A kaleidoscopic mixture of history, myth and religious instruction, the epics proudly proclaim the exploits of the gods and heroes who practised yoga and gloried in its power."}
{"id": "alistair-shearer-effortless-being-the-yoga-sutras-of-patanjali", "title": "SpiritualQuest - Alistair Shearer - Effortless Being. The Yoga Sutras Of Patanjali", "year": 1982, "seq": 6, "text": "Yoga is a way to restore our lost wholeness, our integrity as complete human beings, by unifying the personality around a centre which is silent and unbounded. Yet yoga itself is not a religion. It is undenominational, relying not on faith but on a number of techniques that gradually lead the individual to the direct experience of those truths on which religion rests. We can call it the inner spirit of religion, the colourless sap which nourishes and strengthens all parts of the tree of life impartially. When the knowledge of yoga is lost or distorted, the sap withdraws and the branches become brittle, wither and eventually die. These are times of spiritual drought, the dark nights of the soul when humanity is cut off from itself and the Divine: The Puranas, India\u2019s oldest sources of mythological lore, call them kali yuga, the times of blackness, when the Goddess of destruction stalks the land, and ignorance and suffering prevail. This is how the Vishnu Purana describes these times of spiritual aridity: Society reaches a stage where property confers rank, wealth becomes the only source of virtue, passion the sole bond of union between husband and wife, falsehood the source of success in life, sex the only means of enjoyment and outer trappings are mistaken for inner religion. We live in such times today. Indeed, it would be hard to imagine a period in the history of the world which had greater need of the teachings of our text. Fortunately, it is a natural law that action provokes reaction. One reaction to the crisis of modern civilization is a tremendous growth of interest in the teachings of yoga over the past few years. Yoga is relevant to our age because, far from being mystical or other- worldly, it is a teaching firmly grounded in physiological reality and can be understood in contemporary terms."}
{"id": "alistair-shearer-effortless-being-the-yoga-sutras-of-patanjali", "title": "SpiritualQuest - Alistair Shearer - Effortless Being. The Yoga Sutras Of Patanjali", "year": 1982, "seq": 7, "text": "Yoga itself is neutral. It is a catalyst that allows us to grow in whichever direction is natural and life-supporting. Its methods work on the physical seat of consciousness, the nervous system and, as far as yoga is concerned, a Hindu nervous system is no different from an Islamic or agnostic one. Each obeys the same laws that govern the operations of mind and body. Whoever practises yoga will be enlivened in his or her own way. Every morning put your mind into your heart and stand in the presence of God all the day long An anonymous monk of the Eastern Orthodox Church All the great religions have used the techniques of yoga to lead the mind inwards to that silence which is the heart of the religious life. Each tradition has developed its own variations on the theme of our text. The dance and ritual movement of Islamic Sufism, the \u2018Jesus prayer\u2019 practised by the Hesychast Monks of Mount Athos, the martial art techniques of the Taoists in China \u2014 these are just some of the many ways of stilling the mind and reaching the silence within. Performed in the context of different faiths, they may differ in expression, but in essence they are one. Such universality may seem strange to those brought up in the Judeo- Christian tradition. The hallmark of these religions is their emphasis on historical uniqueness and, by their own admission, they worship a jealous God. But evena cursory look at Christianity, for example, shows that its aims are perfectly compatible with the teachings of yoga. The ultimate goal of the Christian life is union with God through loving contemplation. All the contemplative practices of the Catholic, Eastern Orthodox and Protestant churches have their roots in the teachings of the desert Fathers of Egypt and Syria."}
{"id": "alistair-shearer-effortless-being-the-yoga-sutras-of-patanjali", "title": "SpiritualQuest - Alistair Shearer - Effortless Being. The Yoga Sutras Of Patanjali", "year": 1982, "seq": 8, "text": "Each new commentator brings the light of his own understanding to bear on the original gnomic texts; his conclusions then become part of the tradition. The earliest commentary on the Yoga Sitras dates from the fifth century, and is attributed to Vyasa, of whom we know little. Tradition loosely identifies him with the compiler of the Mahabharata and the Puranas, but vyasa means \u2018the arranger\u2019, and may well be a title given to renowned scholars rather than the name of an individual. Vy4sa\u2019s interpretation has been con- sidered virtually indispensable for an understanding of the si#tras, and has been the starting point for nearly all subsequent commentary. As the nodes of what was, and still is, essentially an oral teaching, the sutras are almost like lecture notes, mnemonics. Each sittra resembles a knot of the finest thread that must be teased out and unravelled, so that every inch of its meaning is displayed. Only then can the whole fabric of the teaching be woven together. The spinning of this thread which guides us back out of the maze of ignoranee is the work of a teacher (guru). He, by definition, is one who enjoys the higher levels of consciousness described in the text. Teaching from his own experience, he is able to lead the pupil from darkness (gu) to light (rw). For those without such guidance, the structure of the Yoga Stitras has caused much confusion. Because the text appears to be disjointed, modern scholars have set about dissecting it in an attempt to uncover the \u2018original text\u2019 and identify later additions and influences. The consequence of such investigations 1s a tattered remnant composed of unrelated pieces. Each section is pronounced to be of a different age and origin and to represent a different view. Asa result the unity of the whole is destroyed and its practical value as a vital teaching is completely lost."}
{"id": "alistair-shearer-effortless-being-the-yoga-sutras-of-patanjali", "title": "SpiritualQuest - Alistair Shearer - Effortless Being. The Yoga Sutras Of Patanjali", "year": 1982, "seq": 9, "text": "Given the innate conservatism of this tradition, it is extremely unlikely that the text of the Yoga Sutras has altered significantly since it was compiled. Any innovative insight into its meaning will have taken the form of a fresh commentary, not an alteration of the text itself. Over the centuries the siitras have been thoroughly examined by some of the most acute minds in India. Early in the eleventh century the celebrated scholar al-Biruni made a translation into Arabic which exerted a seminal influence on Sufism. In practical terms the Yoga Siitras have remained a guiding light for generations of seekers after truth in both East and West, and are still considered the most authoritative source book on yoga today. Such continued esteem cannot be baseless. 20 Either we assume that Patanjali knowingly cobbled together a teaching that is inconsistent and in parts contradictory, or we accept that the text has an inner unity which has to be approached on its own terms. Our difficulty in understanding Patanjali\u2019s work as a unified whole lies not so much in the text itself as in our expectations of it. The first thing to realize is that the siitras are not intended to be a literary work. Nor are they concerned with presenting a linear, sequential argument which is to be debated, and then accepted or refuted. Their purpose is to describe the stages of a journey that is unfamiliar to most of us. They view life from a vantage point which few of us realize exists. Imagine a climber on the mountain slopes. He looks down on the villages with their cultivated fields spread out below. Another person, who has reached the summit, sends down a report that beyond these fields lie dense forests and then open plains, stretching to a vast and shoreless sea."}
{"id": "JOHNWESLEYSUNDERSTANDINGOF", "title": "Hartzog - JOHN WESLEY' S UNDERSTANDING OF", "year": 1985, "seq": 0, "text": "How are we to understand and interpret sexual violence as an experience of suffering in light of our faith? How does the relationships between sexuality and sexual violence affect our under\u00ac standing of Christian sexual ethics? How has our understanding of Christian sexual ethics contributed to our unresponsiveness to sexual violence? For the theological community to begin to address these kinds of ques\u00ac tions would be to introduce a new reality for the sexually abused victims. 9 Ibid., p. 43 10\u2014. \u2022 j Ibid. 11 Ibid. Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 7 This project will build on my understanding of Wesley's Order of Salvation as a reference and beginning point for moving toward a new reality for sexually abused victims. It will seek to develop this overarching reality by integrating both theological and clinical realities in a model for use by pastoral counselors. Thesis It is my contention that the time has come for pastoral counselors and religious leaders to join with secular clinicians and agencies in order to bring together our specialized skills, insights and personal gifts for the purpose of healing, intervening and addressing the catastrophic devastation of incest on the victims, offenders. and society at large. As Marie Fortune points out: The crisis of family violence affects people physically, psy\u00ac chologically and spiritually. Each of the dimensions must be addressed, both for the victims and for those in the family who abuse them. Approached from either a secular or religious perspective alone, certain needs and issues tend to be disregarded. This reflects a serious lack of understanding of the nature of family violence and its impact on people's lives. Treatment of families experiencing violence and abuse requires interpreting the needs of the whole person. Thus, the importance of developing a shared understanding and cooperation between secular and religious helpers to deal with family violence cannot be emphasized too strongly."}
{"id": "JOHNWESLEYSUNDERSTANDINGOF", "title": "Hartzog - JOHN WESLEY' S UNDERSTANDING OF", "year": 1985, "seq": 1, "text": "People confronting the problem of good and evil are all \"indications of their efforts to understand their experiences and to place the experience in a context of meaning for their lives. John wesley refers to this kind of growth as working out our own salvation, becoming sanctified moving toward health and wholeness. This project will focus on the contribution of Wesley's understanding of the Order of Salvation and the contribution of clinical expertise each being in dialog with the other in the healing of persons, especially women, who have been sexually assaulted as children. Brought together, each correcting and contributing to the other, bring a new quality of life to the survivor. In addition, this project is designed to assist and inform pastoral counselors in introducing a survivor into a new reality, by breaking the silence of her kept secret, in order that she might enter into the process of sanctification, that journey of being made whole. As pastoral counselors we have at our disposal those means by which we can bring together the healing of the whole person. The pastoral counselor holds a unique position within the social services community. We not only have at our disposal psycholog\u00ac ical methods and techniques but we are the channels of God's grace in the world. We are, in the words of Henri Nouwen, the \"living reminders\"^ Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 9 of God's presence. If we are to take seriously that sexual violence affects the whole person, physically, psychologically and spiritually, the pastoral counselor then provides the means by which all three are brought together by introducing the sexually abused person into the new reality of relationship with herself, her God, and her neighbor. Definition of Major Terms The term incest comes from the Middle English and Latin \"incestus, unchaste, impure.\" The meaning given in the American Heritage Dictionary is Sexual union between persons who are so closely related that their marriage is illegal or forbidden by custom."}
{"id": "JOHNWESLEYSUNDERSTANDINGOF", "title": "Hartzog - JOHN WESLEY' S UNDERSTANDING OF", "year": 1985, "seq": 2, "text": "As Christians our faith informs 28 Rosemary Radford Ruether, New Woman New Earth: Sexist Ideologies and Human Liberation (New York: Seabury Press, 1983) p. 14. Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 14 us that there is a God, the Creator, Redeemer and Sustainer of the world. And further that while God bestows on us free will, the ability of discernment, and the power of free choice, God's own \"prerogative re- 29 mains uncompromised.\" In light of this we can believe that God redeems good out of bad, power out of powerlessness; and healing out of alienation. God's reality transcends our reality and creates for us a new quality of life. The term quality of life is defined as ...that which makes for a society that is just, participatory and sustainable... The biblical conception of the quality of life is not limited to spiritual life nor is it hedonistic in nature. Rather, the spiritual and the material belong together. The spiritual life is the intrinsic good which ultimately defines the meaning of quality. Material existence is the instrumental good and makes it possible. Quality of life is ultimately a non-materialistic point of reference, but there can be no quality of life unless the material base is sufficient to sustain it.30 The quality of life for the incest survivor has enormous impli\u00ac cations. The reality out of which they define their quality of life is one of bankruptcy and fear\u2014bankruptcy in the sense of personal power and self-esteem and fear of losing what little they have in the way of food, shelter and clothing. Oftentimes when a child does report incest they are the ones punished, taken out of the home and placed elsewhere. For the adult survivor, it often means leaving an abusive situation in their marriage and moving into a shelter."}
{"id": "JOHNWESLEYSUNDERSTANDINGOF", "title": "Hartzog - JOHN WESLEY' S UNDERSTANDING OF", "year": 1985, "seq": 3, "text": "Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 20 (Psychiatric Director of the Women's Mental Health Collective in Somerville, Mass.), Joan Robbins and Rachel Siegal (both are feminist therapists in private practice), Florence Rush, psychiatric social worker and Sandra Butler. Feminist theologians such as Ruether, Florenza and ethicists and educators and pastoral counselors such as Harrison, Gilligan and Fortune have been drawn upon to help in the exploration of a new reality for women in which the redemption of women's lives can be real. I have used John Wesley's own sermons as a primary source for building the framework and defining the method that helps both survivor and pastoral counselor transcend the traditional and oppressive realities that has entrapped, blamed, subjugated and punished women. Together, these authors have provided the impetus for my thinking, understanding and construction of what is available to counselor and survivor through the means of dialog between feminist therapy, theology and Wesley's understanding of the Order of Salvation. The literature I have chosen is by no means exhaustive of the available literature, but rather it is representative of the work currently being done by feminists in the field of child sexual abuse. The Project Outline In the second chapter, the problem of incest will be examined historically with special attention being given to the impact of biblical and cultural influences. The problem of family violence can no longer be ignored, pushed aside or erased. It has been said that family violence has reached epidemic proportions crossing all lines of Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 21 class, race and nationality. Family violence no longer is just the ill of those on the wrong side of the tracks but has found its way into white, upper middle-class churches."}
{"id": "JOHNWESLEYSUNDERSTANDINGOF", "title": "Hartzog - JOHN WESLEY' S UNDERSTANDING OF", "year": 1985, "seq": 4, "text": "No longer does one have to make a trip to the prisons in order to find out about family violence: our pews will provide the same information. As responsible persons called into participation in the Kingdom of God we must look at how we are informed and what informs us as Christians. To understand our illness (for family violence and incest are not individual ills, but the illness of the collective community), we must know our history. We must also know our cultural inheritance in order to make the Kingdom of God a reality for all. Our biblical and cultural inheritances are passed on from generation to generation through story. Chapter 3 is the story of an incest survivor and her family. In addition, it includes a clinical examination of the dynamics of her story in order to inform us of the patterns of behavior indicative of an incestuous family. Treatment of incest will be examined in Chapter 4. The history of treatment for the incest survivor is a relatively recent phenomenon beginning in the early 60s. With the advent of the women's movement and feminist therapy in the 70s we find a significant amount of work being done. A's story will first be looked at clinically in light of feminist research and treatment and secondly in light of theological insights from Wesley's Order of Salvation in dialog with feminist therapy. Treatment for the survivor, understanding the family dynamics and patterns, being in dialog with the clinical community are all essential elements in the healing of the individual. However, even this Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 22 is not enough. Until we begin as a society to look at how we perpetuate this crime, incest will continue to haunt us. Theological Fields of Study \"Sexual violence as a topic for ethical (and theological) dis- OO course among Christians has gone unaddressed\" says Marie Fortune."}
{"id": "JOHNWESLEYSUNDERSTANDINGOF", "title": "Hartzog - JOHN WESLEY' S UNDERSTANDING OF", "year": 1985, "seq": 5, "text": "Hutchinson, Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 26 Historical writings record religious myths in such a way that the subordination of women has been continually perpetuated. This fact is illustrated by numerous feminist theologians, most notably Rosemary Ruether and Mary Daly. Only since the 1960s have women begun asking questions about the origins of their subordination to men. To reconstruct women's history has just now only begun. Such theologians as Daly, Fiorenza, Ruether, Russell, and Trible have brought to light that significant numbers of historians have assumed the authority and superiority of men, never questioning who ordained them superior. The very early concept of a matriarchy, according to Ruether, has virtually vanished from the pages of history. Instead what we have inherited are religious writings of men, structured to ensure that they are given their full and due respect through the obedient, and submissive position of women. Religions from around the world, although they acknowledge a feminine side to them, have come down through the ages translated in a hierarchial structure of what is to be valued. They have arrived and been sustained on lofty principles of moral and ethical behavior, but nonetheless they have still relegated women as inferior beings. Many theologians argue this is simply not so, but a closer look at how religions have, either implicitly or explicitly, relegated women into inferior positions informs us today that there is much validity to our concern. Rosemary Ruether in her book New Woman New Earth questions how the hierarchal structure came into being. She begins by dividing her inquiry into three main developmental categories: 1) The Conquest of the Mother; 2) The Negative of the Mother; and 3) the Sublimation Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. of the Mother. She begins by addressing the two critical turning points in the socio-economic history of women."}
{"id": "JOHNWESLEYSUNDERSTANDINGOF", "title": "Hartzog - JOHN WESLEY' S UNDERSTANDING OF", "year": 1985, "seq": 6, "text": "In addition it has previously been pointed out that incestuous involvements between father and daughter while not condoned are easily overlooked as long as he gives her away in marriage. The only valid reason given for him not to have incestuous relations with his daughters is not so much because it is a personal affront to them but would result in their devaluation in the marriage dowry. The Biblical law is quite clear regarding incest'laws' and is clearly addressed to men presupposing and assuming that men indeed are the givers and receivers of women. The Biblical law as outlined in Leviticus 18 clearly articulates the social law theory in that it names every conceivable kind of incest except that between father/daughter! None of you shall approach to any that is near of kin to him, to uncover their nakedness: I am the Lord. The nakedness of thy father, is the nakedness of thy mother, shalt those not uncover: she is thy mother; thou shall not uncover her nakedness. The nakedness of the father's wife shalt thou not uncover: it is thy father's nakedness. The nakedness of thy sister, the daughter of thy father, or daughter of thy mother, whether she be bom at home, or born abroad, even their nakedness thou shalt not uncover. The nakedness of thy son's daughter, or of thy daughter's daughter, even their nakedness thou shalt not uncover: for theirs is thine own nakedness. The nakedness of thy father's wife's daughter, begotten of thy father, she is thy sister, thou shalt not uncover her nakedness. Thou shalt not uncover the nakedness of thy father; sister; she is thy father's near kinswoman. Thou shalt not uncover the nakedness of thy mother's sister for she is thy mother's near kinswoman. Thou shalt not uncover the nakedness of thy father's brother, thou shalt not approach to his wife: she is thine aunt."}
{"id": "JOHNWESLEYSUNDERSTANDINGOF", "title": "Hartzog - JOHN WESLEY' S UNDERSTANDING OF", "year": 1985, "seq": 7, "text": "Her father has since moved to Southern California while her mother remains in New York City. Presenting Appearance: A. is oriented to time, place and date and can give an accurate history of her life events. Her affect is flat, her mood labile. Her relational attitude is that of being clingy until someone hurts her, doesn't understand her, or doesn't any longer care about her. She is short and stocky. Her dress is polyester, mix and match, not all the time matching. Her appearance is neat and clean on her good days, disheveled and unkempt on her bad days. Her gate is that of a shuffle, aimlessly maneuvering herself from place to place. On occasion she does walk with a bounce, usually when she first meets someone who likes her and hasn't done anything to hurt her (i.e., confront her about anything). Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 45 Presenting Problem: A. presented as depressed and feeling suicidal. She claimed that she could no longer live with her husband's jealousy. She felt trapped, alone, lonely and isolated\u2014\"I am just going crazy.\" She came to the hospital after an unsuccessful suicide attempt and became so depressed she could no longer get out of bed and begin the day. She was also sexually dysfunctional which aggrevated her husband and made him accuse her of \"getting it elsewhere.\" Significant Others: A. is very dependent on her husband and daughter. She has tried to reincorporate her father into her life but he has remarried and no longer has time for her or her daughter which angers A. considerably be\u00ac cause of his previous involvement and support\u2014both financially and materially. A. does not get along with her mother who remains in New York although her mother has tried to reestablish contact with A."}
{"id": "JOHNWESLEYSUNDERSTANDINGOF", "title": "Hartzog - JOHN WESLEY' S UNDERSTANDING OF", "year": 1985, "seq": 8, "text": "A. has no outside support group, friends or working acquaintances, although she is now part of a CETA training program as well as daytime therapy group. Work History: A. has a long work history consisting mainly of jobs as dishwasher, janitor, cook and housekeeper. She has not been able to keep a job for longer than five months. She reports the reason for this as being because of her husband's jealousy of her being out of the house. Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 46 Counseling History: A. has a history of multiple hospitalizations. Her first hospital\u00ac ization at age seventeen in New York was for a nervous breakdown and depression. She spent approximately eight months in the state mental hospital. Her other hospitalizations have occurred here in Southern California. Diagnosis is major depressive disorder. As far as I know A. received no outpatient therapy after her hospitalizations except for medication checks until this last hospitalizations when she was referred to a daytime treatment program in her community. Personal History: A. is an only child born into an Italian working class. Catholic family in New York City. She was educated in the public school system, however, dropped out during her senior year when her grades began to sharply decline. Up until her senior year A. reported that her grades were satisfactory but that she began losing interest in her school rapidly toward the end of her senior year. She further reported that when her senior year came all she was interested in was just getting through. According to A. she had dates but found that the only reason the boys asked her out was to \"simply go to bed with me.\" A. does not recall anything especially good about her childhood except for the special times she spent with her father."}
{"id": "JOHNWESLEYSUNDERSTANDINGOF", "title": "Hartzog - JOHN WESLEY' S UNDERSTANDING OF", "year": 1985, "seq": 9, "text": "Shen she was young her father, a television repairman, would take A. with him to work. They would spend many hours in his workshop, he teaching her how to fix televisions, and work with her hands on simple projects. These were the special times for A.; although these times too would change for her. Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 47 According to A. her parent's marriage really wasn't a marriage, although she imagined at one time they must have loved each other. Their trouble seemed to begin when she was bom, but these were only vague memories. Her current memories of her parent's marriage were that her father virtually ignored her mother except for those times when they had to rush her to the hospital (usually 2-3 times per week). Her mother, a hypochondriac according to A., was very demanding and showed little to no love or affection toward A. or her father. A.'s mother was incessantly sick oftemtimes screaming out in the middle of the night that she was dying, demanding that A. and her father take her to the hospital. Then, they would bring her home again even more demanding than when they had left the house. Her mother lay lifeless and listless on the couch in their small one bedroom flat calling out on those occasions when she wanted something or a special favor from A. A.'s father all but abdicated his role as husband, as did A.'s mother abdicate being wife and mother. This left A. in the roles of daughter, housekeeper, cook, nurse, wife, companion and daughter. A.'s mother refused to sleep in the bedroom choosing instead to use the family's couch as her bed (formerly A.'s bed). Not wanting to upset her mother A. slept on a makeshift bed on the floor close to her mother."}
{"id": "IndiaBurma", "title": "CMH Pub 72-5 India-Burma: The U.S. Army Campaigns of World War II", "year": 1992, "seq": 0, "text": "Stilwell told the crowd of reporters in the Indian capital of New Delhi. It was May 1942, and the American general, who had only recently arrived in the Far East to assume the position of chief of staff to Chinese leader Chi- ang Kai-shek, was chafing at failure in his first command in the field. Following the surprise attack on Pearl Harbor the previous Decem- ber, the Japanese had won victory after victory, extending their em- pire from Wake Island in the Pacific to Malaya and Singapore in Southeast Asia. When Stilwell had arrived in the embattled Chinese capital of Chungking in March, the Japanese were already driving into Burma, capturing the capital of Rangoon on 6 March. The American general took command of two Chinese divisions and, in cooperation with the British and Indians, tried to stem the Japanese onslaught. Defeated, he and his staff endured a rugged, 140-mile hike over jun- gle-covered mountains to India. By occupying Burma, the Japanese had not only gained access to vast resources of teak and rubber, but they had dosed the Burma Road, 700 miles of dirt highway that rep- resented China's last overland link with the outside world. The re- opening of an overland route to China would be the major American goal, indeed obsession, in the theater throughout the campaign. Strategic Setting The objective of restoring a land route to China originated in part in hard strategic considerations, specifically the need to keep China in the war to tie down Japanese troops and serve as a base for future operations against the Japanese home islands. But it also re- flected an idealistic American view of China as a great power, ca- pable of a major contribution, and the romantic image held by many Americans of China's heroic struggle against superior Japanese equipment and arms."}
{"id": "IndiaBurma", "title": "CMH Pub 72-5 India-Burma: The U.S. Army Campaigns of World War II", "year": 1992, "seq": 1, "text": "He simultaneously served as chief of Chiang's joint Allied staff, President Roosevelt's personal representative to the Chinese leader, administrator of Lend-Lease, and commanding officer of the China-Burma-India (CBI) Theater of Operations, which he es- tablished on 22 June. With headquarters at Chungking, a branch office in New Delhi, and a primary mission to supply China, the CBI theater was largely logistical in nature. Cargoes entered the theater at Karachi, Pak- istan, and, once the threat from Japanese air power lifted, at Cal- cutta, India. They then proceeded by railroad, road, and ferry to Assam, the Indian province closest to the Burma border. Theater communications suffered from the fact that the British had designed the defenses of India to meet an attack from the western ap- proaches, leaving the transportation network in the east less well de- veloped. Not only were lines of communications unusually long \u2014 Assam was an incredible 67-day journey by rail from Calcutta \u2014 but they also were congested and inefficient, plagued by differing rail- road gauges, slow construction, and differing national attitudes on allocation of resources. The situation improved somewhat in No- 6 vember 1943 when the Allies reached an agreement for 4,600 Amer- ican railroad workers to help operate key sections of the lines. Once the goods reached Assam, rickety transport planes had to fly them over the Himalayas to China. Pilots flying this route, called the \"Hump,\" had to contend with poor weather, 15,000-foot mountain peaks, and enemy fighter planes operating from a base at Myitkyina. Two major American units operated under the CBI theater. The first American troops to arrive in the theater \u2014 air force personnel from Java \u2014 got to Karachi in March 1942. They formed the nucleus for the India Air Task Force, later the Tenth Air Force, which pro- cessed and trained crews for combat and transport activities."}
{"id": "IndiaBurma", "title": "CMH Pub 72-5 India-Burma: The U.S. Army Campaigns of World War II", "year": 1992, "seq": 2, "text": "As pleased as they were with such a performance, Stilwell and Mer- rill were anxious to keep down Galahad's losses, particularly given its status as the only available American combat unit. They relieved the Marauders with a Chinese regiment on 7 March. By that time, Tanaka had decided to withdraw south along a hastily built bypass of the American roadblocks to a strong position on the Jambu Bum, a range of low hills at the southern end of the Hukawng Valley. In his plan for the campaign, Stilwell had hoped to reach the Jambu Bum before monsoon rains forced suspension of active oper- ations. His divisions were practically the only Allied force making progress in the campaign. Not only had Chiang postponed Y Force's advance, but the British, far from moving into Burma, were trying to hold against a major Japanese offensive into India. This Japanese ad- 14 vance, which began on 8 March, threatened both the British Army in Assam and Stilwell's supply line to India. For the moment Stilwell could still proceed, but he would have to keep a close watch on de- velopments to the southwest. He accordingly laid plans for the Chi- 15 nese to continue their advance on the 18th Division's front, while Galahad would split into two parts, again envelop the Japanese right flank, and cut Japanese communications in two different places. In this flanking movement, Galahad had to march through some of the most difficult terrain of the campaign. The Marauders needed to climb out of the Hukawng Valley onto the hills to the east and then move south through territory in which only the extremely steep, narrow valley of the Tanai offered an avenue of approach. Fortunately, the Marauders in their march unexpectedly encoun- tered the Kachin guerrillas, who served as guides, screened the ad- vance, and even provided elephants as cargo bearers."}
{"id": "IndiaBurma", "title": "CMH Pub 72-5 India-Burma: The U.S. Army Campaigns of World War II", "year": 1992, "seq": 3, "text": "The Marauders anticipated a lengthy rest, but Stilwell had other ideas. The CBI chief received assurances from the British in April that the situation to the south was under control, but he was under pressure from the Joint Chiefs of Staff to seize Myitkyina as soon as possible. Thus in late April, as the Marauders read their mail, re- ceived new issues of clothing, relaxed from their labors, and looked forward to the long rest in the rear which they believed they had earned, \"a grotesque rumor began to be heard, passed along in dep- recating tones, pretty much as a joke.\" The rumor proved true. Stil- well was forming a task force of the Marauders, two Chinese regi- ments, and some Kachin guerrillas to carry out a quick overland march to seize the airfield at Myitkyina. The American commander recognized the poor condition of Galahad, but he believed he had no alternative. He promised Merrill that he would evacuate Gala- had without delay \"if everything worked out as expected.\" Stilwell's promise sustained the Marauders through the grueling 65-mile march over the 6,000-foot Kumon range to Myitkyina. De- spite the efforts of an advance party of Kachins and coolies, the trail followed by the task force proved treacherous to negotiate. Mud transformed sections of the path into slides, and in places the Ma- rauders had to cut steps out of the ground for their supply mules to obtain a foothold. Even so, a number of mules lost their footing and fell to their death. The smothering heat and humidity, the rugged ter- rain, and disease caused some Marauders to drop out of formation along the way. On 6 May advance patrols clashed with the Japanese garrison at Ritpong, leading Galahad's commanders to worry that their task had been compromised. Nevertheless, the Marauders pressed on, finally reaching the vicinity of the airfield on 16 May."}
{"id": "IndiaBurma", "title": "CMH Pub 72-5 India-Burma: The U.S. Army Campaigns of World War II", "year": 1992, "seq": 4, "text": "Despite the concerns of the commanders, the attack on the air- field on the morning of 17 May caught the Japanese completely by surprise. While Galahad's 3d Battalion feinted toward the northern end of the defenses and the 1st Battalion seized the Irrawaddy ferry terminal at Pamati on the right flank, a Chinese regiment overran the airstrip and probed toward Myitkyina itself. Lacking accurate intel- ligence on the defenders, this initial attack on the city fell into con- fusion and was easily repulsed. Nevertheless, exultation reigned at Stilwell's headquarters when word arrived of the capture of the air- field. The general made arrangements to fly in Chinese reinforce- 17 A 75-mm. pack howitzer supports GALAHAD 's siege operations at Myitkyina. (DA photograph) merits and, exuberant over his success despite British skepticism, he wrote in his diary, \"WILL THIS BURN UP THE LIMEYS!\" The jubilation over the capture of the airfield soon dissolved in the gloom of a siege. Houses and railroad cars around the city and roads that rose twelve feet above flooded rice paddies provided nat- ural fortifications for the defenders, who may actually have outnum- bered their besiegers. Fortunately for the Allies, the Japanese grossly overestimated the strength of their opponents and stayed on the de- fensive. To fill gaps in the Allied line, Stilwell and his staff scrambled to find whatever troops they could. Swallowing his pride, Stilwell requested help from the British 36th Division, only to be informed that no troops would be available for another two months at the ear- liest. Engineers and Galahad replacements went into the line, fre- quently without sufficient infantry training. The arrival of the mon- soon and the lack of heavy weapons further slowed the operation. A series of attacks made little headway against the defenses, and by 2 June, the Allies had resigned themselves to a lengthy investment."}
{"id": "IndiaBurma", "title": "CMH Pub 72-5 India-Burma: The U.S. Army Campaigns of World War II", "year": 1992, "seq": 5, "text": "The Allies possessed nearly complete command of the air. CBI's logistics apparatus was well established, and the leading bulldozer on the Ledo Road had pushed to within eighty miles of the road from Myitkyina south to Bhamo. From that point the engineers needed only to improve existing routes to the old Burma Road, fifty miles south of Bhamo. Myitkyina had grown into a massive supply 20 center with an expanded airfield and a pipeline. Sensing victory, the Allies planned to continue their advance in two phases, first to Bhamo and Katha, then to the Burma Road and Lashio. The offensive resumed on 15 October. While the main British force to the southwest completed its push to the Chindwin, Sultan advanced three divisions toward the Katha-Bhamo line. To the west 21 Aerial view of the first convoy to go from India to China over the re- opened Burma Road. (DA photograph) the British 36th Division, after overcoming stubborn Japanese resis- tance at the railway center of Pinwe, encountered no opposition until its occupation of Katha on 10 December. In the center the Chinese 22d Division likewise encountered little initial opposition, occupying its objective of Shwegu without incident on 7 November. South of Shwegu the 22d ran into advance elements of the 18th Division near Tonkwa on 8 December. Since the 22d Division was scheduled to leave the front for China, the 475th Infantry replaced the Chinese and held its ground against repeated assaults until the Japanese with- drew. Meanwhile, the Chinese 38th Division on the left flank had skillfully used flanking movements to drive the Japanese on its front into Bhamo. After a delaying action the Japanese evacuated Bhamo on 15 December and withdrew south toward Lashio. Reaching the Burma Road now lay within the grasp of the Allied forces. The next phase of the campaign would involve a larger role for the Mars Task Force."}
{"id": "IndiaBurma", "title": "CMH Pub 72-5 India-Burma: The U.S. Army Campaigns of World War II", "year": 1992, "seq": 6, "text": "Willey, were anxious not to risk the unit's de- struction by leaving it in an exposed position astride the road. The Mars Task Force may not have actually cut the Burma Road, but its threat to the Japanese line of retreat did hasten the enemy's withdrawal and the reopening of the road to China. While Y Force advanced southwest from the Chinese end of the Burma Road toward Wanting, the Chinese 30th and 38th Divisions moved southeast toward Namhkam, where they were to turn northeast and move toward a linkup with the road at Mong Yu. To oppose this drive, the Japanese had deployed the 56th Division at Wanting, troops of the 49th Division at Mong Yu, and a detachment at Namh- kam, but these units planned to fight only a delaying action before retreating south to join the defense of Mandalay. They withdrew as 23 soon as the Chinese applied pressure. As the Marsmen were estab- lishing their position to the south, the 30th and 38th Divisions cap- tured Namhkam and drove toward Mong Yu. On 20 January ad- vance patrols of the 38th linked up with those of Y Force outside Mong Yu. Another week proved necessary to clear the trace of any threat from Japanese patrols and artillery fire, but on 28 January the first convoy from Ledo passed through on its way to Kunming, China. In honor of the man who had singlemindedly pursued this goal for so long, the Allies named the route the Stilwell Road. Analysis Historians have found it fashionable to characterize the CBI as a forgotten theater, low in the Allied list of priorities. To be sure, the European, Mediterranean, and Pacific theaters all enjoyed greater access to scarce manpower and material than the CBI, which had to cope with an extended line of supply back to the United States."}
{"id": "IndiaBurma", "title": "CMH Pub 72-5 India-Burma: The U.S. Army Campaigns of World War II", "year": 1992, "seq": 7, "text": "A fine tacti- cian, he maneuvered his Chinese-American forces with considerable skill in the campaign to drive the Japanese from the Hukawng Val- ley, and he showed commendable boldness in the decision to strike for Myitkyina before the monsoon. In the end the gamble barely paid off, but it did succeed. Stilwell 's record indicates that he would have likely performed quite well as a division commander in Eu- rope, the role that Army Chief of Staff General George C. Marshall had in mind for him before his appointment to the CBI theater. Un- fortunately, most of Stilwell's responsibilities at the CBI empha- sized administration and diplomacy, areas for which he possessed much less aptitude than for field command. He had little patience for paperwork, and he lacked the tact to reconcile the differing viewpoints of the nations involved in the CBI. Admittedly, in his three years in the theater, he probably held more concurrent posi- tions than should ever have devolved on one man. In Stilwell's record, though, perhaps no aspect has stirred greater controversy than his treatment of Galahad. After the Myitkyina campaign numerous reports appeared in the American media about a breakdown of morale in the unit. Marauders complained that the- ater headquarters seemed to view them as expendable, bastard stepchildren, not worthy of medals or promotions. Many also protested that recruiters had told them that Galahad would serve for only ninety days of combat before returning to the rear for rest and rehabilitation. It seems clear that Stilwell and his staff could have done more to make the Marauders feel welcome in the theater, whether through decorations or some other means of recognition. Here Stilwell's personality played a key role. As a man who viewed himself as a regular doughboy, he looked with displeasure on indi- viduals who seemed to demand more than their fair share of atten- tion."}
{"id": "toy-story-official-game-book", "title": "Toy Story Official Game Book", "year": 1995, "seq": 0, "text": "JUMP AROUND To get the toys into the box, Woody st be on top of the pump. Then p straight up in the air and when ands, he'll inflate the balloon and launch whatever\u2019s on the balloon straight into the box. There are some dice, blocks, and other items stacked at the end of ; the shelves. You need to climb on these to reach the stars. After you've collected the stars, use Woody's pull-string to knock the dice and blocks to the floor. This allows-the trapped toys to jump &\u0431 the ground. \u00ae \u0422\u04bb\u0435 only way to reach the stars above the crane is to jump from the bucket as it is being raised by the crane. \u00d3n the SNES version, you need ta jump from Rocky's table, to the white table, to the lower shelf, or jump from the Tennis Ball to the shelf. Chairs block your path along the way, but you can always use blocks or balls as springboards to jump over them. | No one will hurt you. \u00ae Collect the fifty Tin Stars. \u00ae This is a timed stage, so move fast. ; As in every stage, there are fifty stars to be collected. You should collect the stars on the bed before the toys are.all put away. You don't need to collect all the stars to move on to the next level. Before you release the toys, jump up onto the letter blocks and dice to ` collect the stars. You can collect ars above the drums while jumping over them. The only way to reach the five stars above the crane is to ride on the bucket as it is being raised by the crane. One jump should collect the two stars on the left, while a second jump up and to the right should collect the other three."}
{"id": "miscellaneouses03saingoog", "title": "Miscellaneous essays", "year": 1972, "seq": 0, "text": "A little of its sub- stance has previously appeared in different forms, first in a Florentine periodical some seven or eight years ago, and then in the Fortnightly Review for February 1888. But this old matter is the smallest part of it, and I have endeavoured to adjust the whole in a different fashion from that followed in either of these papers, so as to make it less of a review of particular works and par- ticular writers, more of a discussion and presentment of the moment in literature. Of the other pieces, which have all under- gone more or less revision, that which has been included with most misgiving is the viii Preface third essay, that on ** Modern English Prose,\" which was written at Mr. John Morley's re- quest for the Fortnightly Review nearly seven- teen years ago. I have been more often asked to reprint it than in any other case save that of the essay on Baudelaire, which also reappears. But \" request of friends \" is a notoriously inadequate plea, and cannot easily be allowed too little influence. I was, though not a very young man, a very young writer at the date of the appearance of the ** Prose\" essay, and it seems to me rather amateurish in parts, besides being subject to the drawbacks inseparable from all reviews of literature which is no longer contemporary, and has not acquired the interest of history. But its inclusion seemed desirable, because, though it is written in regard of a different side of the matter, it to a certain extent supplements and completes the more elaborate paper on much the same subject with which the book opens, and for another reason which may be thought to possess still greater force. It will strike every one who reflects for a moment Preface ix that a great many other people, some of them scriptores haud paullo meliores quant ego, must have been thinking very much as I did at the time when this essay was written, and that their thought has impressed itself remarkably on later English literature."}
{"id": "miscellaneouses03saingoog", "title": "Miscellaneous essays", "year": 1972, "seq": 1, "text": "The splendour, however, of the poetical production of the later Georgian period in poetry no doubt eclipsed its production in prose, and as a general rule that prose was rather even and excellent in general characteristics than eminent or peculiar in special quality. The same good sense which banished the artificial vocabulary of poetry achieved the banishing of it from prose. But except that it is always a little less stiff, and sometimes a little more negligent, the best prose written by men of middle or advanced age when George the Third was dying does not differ very greatly from the best prose written by men of middle or advanced age when he came to the throne. The range of subjects, the tone of thought, might be altered, the style was very much the same ; in fact, there can be very little doubt that while the poets deliberately rebelled against their predecessors, the prose writers, who were often the same persons in another function, deliberately fol- lowed, if they did not exactly imitate them. It was not until the end of this period of brilliant poetry that certain persons more or less deliberately set themselves to revolutionise English 2 2 Miscellaneous Essays prose, as the poets for a full generation had been revolutionising English verse. I say more or less deliberately, for the revived __^^\"f?,_ fashion of \" numerous \" prose which one man of genius and one man of the greatest talent, Thomas de Quincey and John Wilson, proclaimed, which others seem to have adopted without much of set purpose, and which, owing especially to the great example of Mr. Ruskin, has enlisted so large a following, was in its origin partial and casual. The introducers of this style have hardly had due honour or due dishonour, for what they have done is not small, whatever may be thought of its character."}
{"id": "miscellaneouses03saingoog", "title": "Miscellaneous essays", "year": 1972, "seq": 2, "text": "The wit of the salons promptly became a pamphleteer on one side or the other, and helped to point and wing the darts which both sides so freely flung. This group \u2014 Rulhi^re, Chamfort, Rivarol, Champcenetz, Laclos, Garat, and the rest \u2014 not merely figure as links between the chamber -wits of the eighteenth century and the journalists of the nineteenth, but in their persons, for the most part, served first in one class and then in the other. Indeed, in the condition to which they had brought the business of wit, it was only a variety of journalism, save that the sharp things said on current events were said to 46 Miscellaneous Essays a smaller public, and were reproduced by a less trustworthy medium than the press. Of this group the most remarkable chamfort beyond doubt were the two men whose rivarol. names stand at the head of this essay. They were both (to use a cant phrase which has been invented since their day) self-made men, they both illustrated in ways slightly different some of the most remarkable aspects of the French literary genius, and they have both left on record some of the sharpest and strongest -winged sayings that human ingenuity has ever framed. Neither \u2014 Chamfort even less than Rivarol \u2014 has left any single or definite literary work of great or decided value. One, from the accidents of his history as well as from his temperament and disposition, took the popular side in the great schism of the last decade of the eighteenth century, and had oc- casion amply to repent it. The other, less im- pulsive and more clear -sighted, took the side of precedent and authority, supported it with all his might, and derived profit from it, though he died long before its temporary triumph. Since their death the so-called works of both have been collected into what Mr."}
{"id": "miscellaneouses03saingoog", "title": "Miscellaneous essays", "year": 1972, "seq": 3, "text": "At last the crowning moment of incredulity is reached when the prophet announces the fate of La Harpe. \" La Harpe sera chr^tien.\" The com- pany are almost consoled when they think that their own misfortunes depend necessarily upon such an impossible contingency as this. But there is still an unpleasant impression from the gravity and the mystical reputation of the speaker. To dissipate it Madame de Grammont makes some light remark about the hardship which, by the conventions of society, prevents women from reaping the fruits of the Revolution. Cazotte replies to her promptly. There is no exemption for women in the Golden Age. She herself, her Miscellaneous Essays 53 friends, and even her betters will share the fate of Bailly and Roucher. \"At least,\" she CHAMFORT crfes, \" you will give me the consola- RivAROL. ^^on of a confessor.\" \"No,\" is the answer. \"The last victim who will be so attended will die before you, and he will be the King of France.\" This is too much even for such an assembly, and the host interferes. But the valiant duchess is irrepressible. She asks Cazotte whether he alone is exempted from all these evils, and receives for answer only a gloomy quotation from Josephus, relating to the fate of the madman who at the siege of Jerusalem ended his forebodings by crying, \"Woe to myself!\" Then Cazotte makes his bow and leaves the room. Before six years had passed every word of his prophecy was fulfilled. Vicq d'Azyr had suc- ceeded, and Chamfort had failed, in their attempts to copy the high Roman fashion. Roucher and Bailly and Madame de Grammont and the rest had looked through the dismal window, and Cazotte himself had been the hero of perhaps the most famous and most pitiful of the revolu- tionary legends."}
{"id": "miscellaneouses03saingoog", "title": "Miscellaneous essays", "year": 1972, "seq": 4, "text": "Mais ses vers ont prouv6 qu'il a I'esprit d'un Ange ! It is needless to say that this publication provoked some rather warm displays of feeling from the brother men of letters, who found themselves classed with these fantastic personages. But before long the Revolution broke out, and Rivarol at once and without hesitation took the Royalist side. It does not appear that his motives were altogether sordid, and he was probably in- fluenced to a great extent by the same hatred which his countryman, Gautier, afterwards bore and expressed to la stupidity igcditaire. His articles in the Journal Politique National are vigorous enough, and have the curious tone of laboured conviction which is characteristic of Rivarol's serious work, and of which one is at a loss to gauge the sincerity, though it induces us to believe him insincere. He very soon had occasion to leave the country, and spent the last ten years of his life in Brussels, London, Hamburg, and Berlin, rejoicing a good deal in the society first Miscellaneotis Essays 57 of a certain Manette, then of a Russian princess ; writing a little under strong stress of CHAMFORT publishers, and often delighting young RivAROL. Frenchmen who were introduced to him by the brilliancy of his conversa- tion. It is to one of these neophytes that we owe not merely the best account of his ways, but also the preservation of some of the best of his good things. This was Ch6nedoll6, an amiable man of letters, a poet as poets went between the days of Andr6 Ch^nier and of Lamartine, and the friend of Joubert, of Chiteaubriand, and of a great many other persons more distinguished than himself. Rivarol died at Berlin in the spring of 1 801, being then just fifty years old. Before discussing the work from which these two men derived their principal and most per- manent reputation, it may be well to say a very few words on the absolute and relative literary merit of their longer and more regular composi- tions."}
{"id": "miscellaneouses03saingoog", "title": "Miscellaneous essays", "year": 1972, "seq": 5, "text": "Sainte- Beuve acknowledges that he is presque un grand ecrivaiut and I venture to think that the presque expresses very close contiguity. But what is more remarkable about him even than his manner is his matter. His essay on the French language, his essay on Dante, are written with very insuf- ficient knowledge, and from a critical standpoint entirely opposed to our present points of view. Yet it is remarkable how Rivarol's divination sup- plies his lack of knowledge ; how just his thoughts are ; how strikingly they differ from the accepted notions of the La Harpes and the Suards. His translation, or rather paraphrase, of the Inferno, shows him chiefly as a master of language ; but the essays which precede it give him independent rank as a student and critic of thought. We may now pass from the work which did not give our authors their reputation to that which did. This latter is of an exceedingly miscellaneous and in parts of a rather prob- lematical kind. It consists partly of regular Miscellaneous Essays 59 pensies or maxims of the kind produced by Pascal, La Rochefoucauld, Vauvenar- CHAMFORT gues, and Joubert But it consists RivAROL. ^^i and in still larger measure, of anecdotes and of actual conversation and table-talk collected and handed down by authorities more or less trustworthy. To this may perhaps be added the Petit Almanack des Grands Hommes^ which Rivarol and Champcenetz launched at their contemporaries, and the axioms drawn from De V Homme, The total has served hundreds of writers since the time of the originals as a quarry, or perhaps, to use a more appropriate metaphor, as a spice-box. Its contents rarely possess the weight and fulness of the g^eat pens^e- writers ; the truths expressed are generally alloyed to no small extent, and there is much of mere personality and of the spite of the moment."}
{"id": "miscellaneouses03saingoog", "title": "Miscellaneous essays", "year": 1972, "seq": 6, "text": "It is striking, and carefully abstains from committing the speaker to details ; a frequent characteristic of Chamfort's political maxims. Here is one, however, of far sharper point and more definite aim: \"La noblesse, disent les nobles, est un interm^diaire entre le Roi et le peuple. . . . Oui, comme le chien de chasse est interm^diaire entre le chasseur et les li^vres.\" It is remarkable, again, to find a professed man of letters aiming such a shot as this at a favourite literary paradox on politics. \" There are people who pardon all the ill that Miscellaneous Essays 6 1 priests have done, because had it not been for the priests we should never have had CHAMFORT Tartuffc.\" On the whole, however, his RivAROL. political sayings seem to me his worst. They are animated, indeed, by a really genuine if not fanatical enthusiasm for the popular cause, and by a clear, and, as I think, on the whole unselfish comprehension of the evils of the old regime. But they are decidedly one- sided, and there are traces about them of the personal prejudices of a nameless man who felt himself injured, in rank if not in pocket, by a convention of society. This element of person- ality may probably account to some extent for the speedy revulsion which came over him, and made him so soon \"suspect\" Chdteaubriand, who knew him, has remarked that he could not himself understand how Chamfort could ever have seriously espoused any political cause what- ever. There must have been something in his manner which caused this wonder, for his language is expressive enough of conviction. A remarkable sourness reappears in his speeches on other subjects. He is always complaining \u2014 very unjustly as it seems in his own case \u2014 of the scanty encourage- ment given to men of letters."}
{"id": "miscellaneouses03saingoog", "title": "Miscellaneous essays", "year": 1972, "seq": 7, "text": "He said of the Allies, \" lis ont toujours ^t^ en arri^re d'une ann^e, d'une armte, et d'une id^e,\" and of the nobles, \"lis prennent leurs souvenirs pour des droits.\" The Lettre d la Noblesse, written when Brunswick's victorious advent was confidently expected, is a really admirable appeal for moderation and justice in the moment of presumed victory. His religious maxims have the air of being 72 Miscellaneotcs Essays made to order, but fortunately there are few of them. In ethics he is more copious, and on both these subjects his chief chamfort utterances are to be found in a series rivarol. of letters to Necker, who was one of his chosen objects of attack. There is, however, in some of his moral sentences a fair measure of the spirit of La Rochefoucauld. ** L'indulgence pour ceux qu'on connatt est bien plus rare que la piti^ pour ceux qu'on ne connatt pas \" is not un- worthy of the great anatomist of the seventeenth century. The following, too, from the Treatise \" de THomme,\" a strange mixture of dulness and vivacity, is a fine image : \" Les pavots de la vieil- lesse s'interposent entre la vie et la mort pour nous faire oublier Tune et nous assoupir sur Tautre.\" In another saying, verbally good as it is, Rivarol is surely unjust towards his century. \"Que pouvait faire,\" he asks, \" le bon sens dans un si^le malade de m^taphysique ou Ton ne permettait plus le bonheur de se presenter sans preuves?\" This is probably the only time that the eighteenth century has ever been charged with too great nicety in its admittance of things enjoyable. In dealing with literary subjects we might expect greater copiousness from st lover of letters and of language such as Rivarol, who, like Gautier and some other writers, had a genuine affection for words in themselves."}
{"id": "miscellaneouses03saingoog", "title": "Miscellaneous essays", "year": 1972, "seq": 8, "text": "But perhaps the best measure of his faculty is to be found in some remarks on Shakespeare. It does not appear that these remarks were founded 74 Miscellaneous Essays on any real knowledge of the poet, and Rivarol was too much a man of his time to divine fully the phenomenon which he chamfort was not able, or did not care to examine, rivarol. But his view is exactly that which a man of great faculty would take of Shakespeare, from secondhand knowledge of what had been said of him by enthusiasts on the one side, and detract- ors on the other. There are few anecdotes recorded of RivaroVs telling. \" Dieu de la conversation,\" and \" Saint Georges de T^pigramme,\" as his admirers called him, his speech does not seem to have been that of the raconteur. His faculty, in short, was almost entirely critical, and he knew it so well that he abstained from any attempt at constructive work, except on the smallest scale. He was a bom journalist and reviewer, and perhaps under press- ure he might have made a historian. But it is difficult to imagine him either poet, dramatist, or writer of fiction. Chamfort, on the other hand, had novel-writing come into fashion in his days, might very well have anticipated Charles de Bernard, though his graver would have drawn deeper lines. To weigh either of these men in the balance, and assign them their exact place among writers, is not very easy. As we have seen, nothing that they did of any magnitude, with a partial excepn tion in the case of some work of Rivarol's, deserves high estimate. We are therefore forced to judge Miscellaneous Essays 75 them by their maxims, independent or imbedded in larger works, by their reported CHAMFORT conversation, and by doubtful and AND RivAROL, treacherous collections of apophthegms and anecdotes."}
{"id": "miscellaneouses03saingoog", "title": "Miscellaneous essays", "year": 1972, "seq": 9, "text": "The paucity of words which it necessarily affects may be suggestive of much thought : on the other hand it may serve to con- ceal the want of any thought at all. The writer o{ pensdes always and legitimately claims that his readers shall read between the lines, and some- times it seems as if he relied a little too much on this license. There is also a vast amount of mere trick in this style of composition. Let any man of fair ability and some knack of writing spend a few days over La Rocliefoucauld and Joubert, and he will find himself almost unconsciously framing sentences on their model, the goodness or badness of which he can hardly, for the time at least, estimate. In these two writers there is scarcely any alloy, but the same can hardly be said of any other composers of maxims, and it certainly cannot be said of the two who are before us. To write pens^es with supreme felicity there is required, either such long experience and keen observation of men as La Rochefoucauld and Chesterfield possessed, or else such familiarity with books, and such a habit of meditation, as was the equipment of Pascal and Joubert Neither Chamfort nor Rivarol possessed either of these advantages in 76 Miscellaneous Essays the highest degree. They knew men, but only from the outside, and from certain limited, superficial, and accidental points chamfort of view. They knew books too, but rivarol. their knowledge was circumscribed by the fashions of a time which, whatever its other merits may have been, was a time as little favour- able to literary criticism and valuation as any that the world has seen. Hence their axioms are rather personal than general, rather amusing than instructive, rather showing the acuteness and ingenuity of the authors than able to throw light on the subjects dealt with."}
{"id": "torture-in-israeli-jails", "title": "Torture in Israeli Jails", "year": 1977, "seq": 0, "text": "He was kept under a cold shower; jammed into a barrel of freezing water: and suspended from his wrists once more while the interrogator Orli squeezed his genitals. \u2018\u201cThe mind cannot imagine how that hurts. It was so bad, it made me forget all the other pain.\u201d The last assault Abdel-Karim remembers is being shut in a small cell into which some kind of gas was squirted through the judas-hole in the door. \u201c\u2018| couldn\u2019t stop coughing, My eyes and nose were running. The whole world started turning round me.\u201d He remembers \u2018a piece of glass like a finger\u2019 which was finally slid into each nostril to ease his breathing. From that point, Abdel-Karim\u2019s alleged recollec- tions are confused and fragmentary. We have established that at the end of November, for example, he spent a week in the main Israeli prison hospital at Ramleh. He says he does not remember this. Then on December 12, his wife Nijmi says, she and their 12-year-old son visited him back in Hebron and he did not recognise the boy. Hesays he does not remember this episode either. About this time, the Israelis took him to the Jordanian border; but the Jordanians refused to accept him because no arrangements had been made. Abdel-Karim says he just recalls someting like that. Of his eventuai journey to Salt in February through the mediation of the International Red Cross, he remembers very little. IT IS AN APPALLING story, but how much of it is true? In the nature of torture, only two parties are present: torturer and victim. As Amnesty Internatio- nal has said: \u2018\u201cThe confrontation between the individual and the limitless power of the state. .. 15 takes place in the darkest recess of political power.\u201d\u2019 Failing a confession by the torturers, we have to look for other things: corroboration of verifiable details; or the consistency of one account with others, in circumstances where collusion can be ruled out."}
{"id": "torture-in-israeli-jails", "title": "Torture in Israeli Jails", "year": 1977, "seq": 1, "text": "Israel is a Jewish state, determined to remain so. Yet it rules 1.7 million Arabs\u2014for a decade 1.2 million of these have been under military occupation. The reasons why Israel has since 1948 steadily increased its dominion over Arabs and their land go back into the infinite regress of cause - and - effect, charge and counter-charge that makes up modern Middle Eastern History. That is outside the scope of our inquiry. The fact is that most Israelis see no choice but tocontinue military occupation; while some Israelis actively want to do so, on the grounds of historic Jewish rights to the land. Because Israel is so dependent on what Weitzmann saw as the judgment of the world it must try to ensure the judgment is favourable. The conflict between this international need and the domestic reality of military rule and Arab resistance expressed 23 sometimes through terrorism seems to us the most concrete explanation of why torture has become, on the evidence, an accepted Israeli practice. There are, of course, many whowill passionately reject our evidence as literally unthinkable. Many more will find in the idea of a persecuted race becoming in turn the persecutors a paradox so distasteful as to demand better evidence than perhaps would be needed against other countries. Even more will point out that Israel claims\u2014and undoubtedly feels itself\u2014to be at war for its life; and that the Arab\u2019s record on civil liberties is, to say the least, poor. The point, of course, is that Israel itself does not, in theory, accept the unspoken implications of their argument. Israel does not admit that torture is justified by its situation. It denies that torture is ever used. Nor does Israel justify failures in civil rights by comparisons with Arab deficiencies. On the contrary, it is fundamental to Israel's ethos and to its claims for international support that it is part of the West\u2014thus to be judged by Western standards."}
{"id": "torture-in-israeli-jails", "title": "Torture in Israeli Jails", "year": 1977, "seq": 2, "text": "Thus Israel can demonstrate to itself and to the world that it has no political prisoners\u2014only convicted terrorists. As Israel\u2019s ambassador to the United Nations, Jacob Doron, asked in a speech last November: \u2018What is wrong with the holding of trials and the conviction of those found guilty after due process of law? \u2019\u2019 The answer is: when those public convictions are gained by means of secret torture. THE MILITARY COURTS are the fulcrum of Israel\u2019s claim to rule the occupied teritories according to the rule of law. We have talked with six lawyers\u2014two Israelis and four Palestinians\u2014who regularly appear in them to defend those accused of security offences. For the record, their names are: Felicia Langer, Lea Tsemel, Wasfi Masri, Anton Jaser Elias Khoury and Fayez abu Rahmeh. Their unanimous opinion is that the military courts collude in and knowingly conceal the use of torture by 27 Israel\u2019s intelligence and security services. The mechanism is, in its way, elegant, almost syllogistic. Most convictions in those courts are based on confessions by the accused; most of those confes- sions, the lawyers are convinced, are extracted by ill-treatment or torture; almost without exception the courts reject that contention. A security suspect in the occupied territories is usually arrested by Israeli soldiers or border police, accompanied mostly by one or more men in civilian clothes. Most Palestinians we spoke to referred to the plain-clothes men as Shin Beth, Israel\u2019s internal security service. (In fact, we have learned they are just as likely to belong to Israel\u2019s military intelligence. ) The suspect can be held for up to 18 days before being taken before a military judge. He can order further detention of up to six months. In this time the suspect is interrogated. When eventually he is brought to trial\u2014up to a year later\u2014the prosecution is almost invariably equipped with a statement, signed by the suspect, confessing to at least some of the charges."}
{"id": "torture-in-israeli-jails", "title": "Torture in Israeli Jails", "year": 1977, "seq": 3, "text": "On December 18 the complaint against Hillel was dismissed. Dr a ep A A) FOUR STORIES IN SUPPORT Te IE a TT EEA WE KNOW , as we have said, of eight other Palestinian Arabs who appear to have been in the special interrogation centre at about the same time as Harb. Two are still in custody, but of the six who were freed we traced and interviewed four: Mohammed abu-Ghabiyr, Jamal Freitah, Kaldoun Abdul Haq, Husni Haddad. Only Haddad was in exile in Jordan. (He died in Amman in May this year; we retain the tape of our interview with him.) The other three still live, like Harb, on the West Bank. None was ever charged. In view of what they say, it is important to consider whether these four and Harb could have colluded their accounts. Harb and three of them were certainly together for some days in Yagur, immediately after interro- gation. But then they were split up, and only two served in the same prison (Haq and Freitah in Nablus) Haddad had not been in Yagor with the others, but 45 he saw Harb for a few days in Ramallah when he was taken there for a hearing to extend his detention. This gives the theoretical possibility that the five men could have conspired to fabricate a story. But only during those days at Yagur could a story have been cooked up\u2014to be passed to Haddad later. And there are two further points. After his deportation to Jordan, Haddad had no chance to meet the others. Secondly, we first interviewed two of those still on the West Bank\u2014Hag and abu-Ghabiyr\u2014without any warning and before the final pair, Harb and Freitah, had been freed. We questioned them only days after their release. In our view these facts and the weight of detail the men volunteered 30 months after their experiences argues reality rather than some long-remembered fabrication."}
{"id": "torture-in-israeli-jails", "title": "Torture in Israeli Jails", "year": 1977, "seq": 4, "text": "The most likely answer is that it lies behind the high wire fence that all tourists see as they drive the last stretch from Jerusalem to Tel Aviv. The wire, the Military checkpoints at a couple of entrances, and a few low scruffy buildings in the distance are virtually all thatis visible of the ten square miles of Israel\u2019s biggest army ordnance and supply depot, Sarafand. (The Jewish National Fund also uses part of Sarafand to house the equipment for roadbuilding in its new settlements in Israel and the occupied territories. ) Sarafand occupies a prominent place in Palestinian demonology. Scores of statements talk of it; and most of those who have been through the interrogation centre refer to it automaticaly as Sarafand. But that is an assumption on their part, as qtiestioning soon shows. There are, nevertheless, historical reasons why they could be right. Sarafand was built as the main 49 British ordnance depot in Palestine before World War Two. When Britain then needed two camps to house Arab detainees during the riots of the late 1930s, one was built inside Sarafand. (The other was in Sinai.) So many of the old British mandate buildings were taken over, function and all, by the Israelis that Sarafand would have been a logical choice to house a new generation of Arab detainees. For it is clear from detainees\u2019 accounts that the mysterious new interrogation centre run by the military came into operation after the 1967 war. And it was another three years or so before its buildings\u2014ramshackle at first, as if disused for a time \u2014had been renovated. (Some detainees, taken there at intervals, observed the process.) The assertion that they were in Sarafand comes most confidently from those early alumni. Yet each in turn seems to have learned this only from inmates already there."}
{"id": "minicoursecatalo03shep_0", "title": "Mini Course Catalog (1975-1976)", "year": 1975, "seq": 0, "text": "Baltimore, Philadelphia and New York. Students have numerous opportunities to visit the metropolitan areas and places of historical significance. Summer Session The summer session at Shepherd College is an integral part of the college year. All general college requirements relating to high academic General Information/7 standards, sound scholarship and good citizenship are maintained by the faculty. The summer session is organized into two terms of five weeks each. Off Campus Program Off campus classes may be organized where fifteen or more students desire a class to be taught by a regular college instructor. Classes meet for a minimum of sixteen clock hours for each semester hour of college extension credit. A graduate program in cooperation with West Virginia University is now in effect. Community College Component In order to provide career and technical Community Colleqe programs throughout 'Eastern West Virginia a community College Component was established in 1974 within the Administrative framework of Shepherd College. The Community College philosophy subscribes to the concept of learning for all ages whenever and wherever needed in the service area. Continuing education, community services and certificate and associate degree programs are provided under the auspices of the Community College Component. Ideally Located Shepherd College is situated within ninety minutes drive of downtown Washington or Baltimore. The curriculum of the college is vastly enriched by making field trips to that metropolitan area a part of the learning activities. Observation trips to the United States Supreme Court, the United States Congress, and other Federal agencies are easily accomplished. The cultural program of the college is likewise enriched by the scheduling of artists and performing groups from the city. In their recreational life, students find the location of the college most advantageous. SHEPHERD COLLEGE CAMPUS The campus of Shepherd College comprises an area of approximately one hundred fifty-six acres of rolling limestone land extending from Main Street in Shepherdstown to the banks of the Potomac River."}
{"id": "minicoursecatalo03shep_0", "title": "Mini Course Catalog (1975-1976)", "year": 1975, "seq": 1, "text": "Each case shall be determined on an individual basis by the Admissions and Credits Committee. Students will be awarded credit for the successful completion of any or all of the CLEP Subject Examinations presently offered or developed in the future. They must achieve a score equal to or above the recommended score of the model policy of the College Board's Council on College-Level Examinations current at the time the examination was taken. Credit shall be awarded for the number of semesters for which the examination was designed. A grade shall not be assigned and the credit will not be included in the computation of the student's grade point average. Admissions/ 11 If credit in general education does not meet specific program requirements of Shepherd College, the credit shall be used as elective credit. The permanent academic record of the student shall indicate which credit was earned by CLEP examination. Students must be enrolled at Shepherd College in order to receive credit from the institution. Students who have taken CLEP examinations prior to enrollment must submit an official CLEP transcript. The Chancellor of the West Virginia Board of Regents shall appoint a committee to review these regulations periodically. Students currently enrolled at Shepherd College may take the CLEP examinations on campus. Persons desiring to enroll at Shepherd College who wish CLEP credit as part of their admission must take the examinations at another testing center. At present the closest center to Shepherd College is located at Frederick Community College, Frederick Maryland. WAIVING FRESHMAN ENGLISH English 101 may be waived by special examination or on the basis of freshman placement tests, but no credit is allowed. Students are expected to take an advanced English course as a substitute. Students who score 26 or better on the English portion of the ACT may request the Chairman of the Division of Languages and Literature to waive the requirement of English 101."}
{"id": "minicoursecatalo03shep_0", "title": "Mini Course Catalog (1975-1976)", "year": 1975, "seq": 2, "text": "In this event, the Division Chairman will refer the student to the Freshman Evaluation Committee, which will give him a Division English 101 test and one or more themes. On the basis of this test and theme (s) the committee may waive the requirement of English 101. No credit will be allowed for the waived requirement; the student must still complete 128 hours for graduation, and he must select some other class in English in lieu of the English 101. COLLEGE TRANSFER STUDENTS Any applicant for admission to Shepherd College who has attended another institution of collegiate rank will be classified as a transfer student whether he has earned credit or not. The College does not under any condition disregard college or university credits earned elsewhere. Credit earned at other accredited colleges and universities will be allowed toward a degree at Shepherd College if applicable. In addition to other required materials college transfers are expected to have a 2.00 overall average on all courses attempted and eligibility to return to their former college. A student who is on either academic or social probation is not considered eligible for admission to Shepherd College. 12/Shepherd College All grades and credits transferred to Shepherd College are posted on the permanent record exactly as received from all other colleges. Grades earned at another institution cannot be used to make up a deficit of quality points at Shepherd College. Transcripts must be mailed directly to Shepherd College- from all colleges which the prospective student has previously attended. Transcripts received by Shepherd College become the property of the College and carmot be returned to the student. Graduates of regionally accredited junior or community colleges are assigned a maximum of seventy-two (72) semester hours of credit. Admissions/ 13 HIGH SCHOOL HONORS PROGRAM High School students who have completed the junior year of study may be admitted to Shepherd College to enroll in not more than 17 semester hours per semester if the following conditions are fulfilled: 1."}
{"id": "minicoursecatalo03shep_0", "title": "Mini Course Catalog (1975-1976)", "year": 1975, "seq": 3, "text": "Recommendation of the high school principal. 2. Completion of all high school subjects prerequisite to enrolling the desired college course. 3. Attainment of at least a \"B\" average in high school subjects required for college admission. 4. Completion of at least thirteen (13) units of high school credit. Courses must be approved in advance of registration by Shepherd College. Official college credit will be recorded only after institutional receipt of high school graduation certification. All high school credit should be completed within a year after the initial college registration. PROJECT AHEAD (Army Help for Education & Development) Shepherd College has approved participation in the Army's new educational program, Project AHEAD. Under this program the College will admit qualified men and women as degree candidates at the time of their enlistment in the Army and provide counseling assistance to help them plan academic programs that will take advantage of approved course offerings wherever they may be stationed. Individuals designated as Project AHEAD students will be accepted for the Bachelor degree, Associate degree or One-Year Certificate programs. After qualifying for Army service and fulfilling the \"home school's\" (Shepherd College) cooperative education requirement, the Project AHEAD student-soldier is counseled on how to apply credits earned for college courses while on or off Army duty. Army counselors in on-post educational centers provide local guidance to make sure that the soldier-student takes the right courses to complement his or her education program at Shepherd College. When the Project AHEAD student is discharged from the Army and returns to the Shepherd campus, the course work he has taken while in the service is accumulated and credited toward his degree program. College Level Examination Program (CLEP) tests, College Entrance Examination Board (CEEB) Advanced Placement tests, and USAFI course work can also be used for college credit. Individuals interested in learning more about the Project AHEAD program at Shepherd College should contact the Director of Student Development at Shepherd College. 14/Shepherd College REGENTS B.A."}
{"id": "minicoursecatalo03shep_0", "title": "Mini Course Catalog (1975-1976)", "year": 1975, "seq": 4, "text": "After his application and official transcript have been received, he will be notified of his acceptance or denial. Every student should familiarize himself with the College catalog and all requirements for certification and degrees, and will be held primarily responsible for meeting these requirements. A student who has been officially admitted to the College will receive instructions and information regarding the Orientation Program and Registration from the Office of the Registrar. An advisor will be appointed for all first-time enrollees. A student should feel free at all times to contact his advisor to plan and discuss his schedule and academic program. Advisors are chosen in the field in which the student is majoring. Ordinarily, a student has the same advisor until he graduates unless he changes his field of study. COLLEGE CREDIT FOR MILITARY SERVICE Institutions of higher learning in West Virginia will grant credit of four (4) semester hours to an individual who presents a copy of his DD- 214 Form after completing a minimum of one year of active military service. This credit shall be assigned to physical education, hygiene, miltary training or appropriate electives. The four semester hours allowed for basic or recruit training may be counted as lower division physical education unassigned, or may be counted toward the following requirements: two hours, Health Education; two hours, First Aid; four hours, Recreational Activities; four hours, Team Sports. Correspondence work completed at accredited institutions of higher learning cooperating with the Armed Forces Institute will be accepted by institutions of higher learning in West Virginia for the amount of credit allowed by the institution with which the credit was earned, but not to exceed 28 semester hours. SUMMER ORIENTATION, TESTING AND EARLY REGISTRATION New freshmen and transfer students who will be entering Shepherd College for the first time have the opportunity to attend an orientation, testing and early registration session held on one of several dates in June and July."}
{"id": "minicoursecatalo03shep_0", "title": "Mini Course Catalog (1975-1976)", "year": 1975, "seq": 5, "text": "During this one day visit to campus, new students have an opportunity to meet with faculty advisors, counselors, members of the Student Affairs staff and other administrators. Students are given an introduction to the academic program. They plan a tentative schedule for the fall semester. Students are also given an opportunity to participate in discussion groups covering various phases of the academic program, campus services, and extra-curricular activities. Since these programs are designed to help students make a satisfactory adjustment to college, all new students accepted for admission in the fall semester are expected to attend. Dates are announced to newly admitted students early in the spring. STUDENT DEVELOPMENT A student development staff has been employed to help students make the most of their opportunities to develop personally, socially, and intellectually. One of the primary concerns of the staff is that of helping students adjust to the total college environment. Within this department are found counseling, testing, and placement services along with federally funded Student Special Services. Three professionally qualified counselors are part of this staff. They are eager to work with students who have concerns in the personal- social, vocational, or academic areas. Confidential treatment of things the student feels are \"personal\" is the byword in the counseling center. In addition to counseling, this office arranges employment or placement interviews for graduating seniors or alumni in the non-teaching fields. Representatives of business, industry, and government are invited to the campus for the purpose of recruiting Shepherd graduates. This office also serves as the clearing-house for any off-campus part-time jobs which may be available to students. Student Special Services is designed to assist college students through reading/study skills development, counseling, and tutoring. Through a qualified reading/study skills specialist, students can improve their reading skills and develop effective study habits."}
{"id": "minicoursecatalo03shep_0", "title": "Mini Course Catalog (1975-1976)", "year": 1975, "seq": 6, "text": "Activities, programs and counseling services are planned and carried out for the benefit of all residents, providing them with opportunities to learn to live happily and comfortably within groups. A major value of the experience is learning to live in such a manner as not to infringe upon the rights of others and to this end the residence halls have specific standards developed by the staff and residents to assist in group living and citizenship education. By accepting a room reservation in a residence hall, students 22/Shepherd College consent to an agreement with Shepherd College that they will adhere to the rules and regulations found in the Residence Hall Manuals and the Student Handbook and will not conduct themselves in any way that will infringe upon the rights and privileges of other individuals or the group. Rooms are furnished with single beds, dressers, chests, desks and chairs. Students supply linens (a rental plan is available), pillows, blankets, spreads, rugs and accessories to suit their tastes. The college is not responsible for the personal property of students in a residence hall. Normally, all personal property is removed when a student withdraws, but in unusual circumstances the college will keep personal property for two weeks. Any property left two weeks after a student has withdrawn will be discarded. FOOD SERVICES To provide for the eating pleasure and nutritional needs of students, the College operates a well equipped Dining Hall. This facility is catered by an outstanding national food catering service. The Dining Hall is conveniently located on Residence Hall Circle between Kenamond and Turner Halls. Off campus students may take advantage of the College food service by either purchasing a meal ticket from the College Business Office or by paying for meals at the time they are purchased. All Residence Hall students are required to purchase meal tickets."}
{"id": "minicoursecatalo03shep_0", "title": "Mini Course Catalog (1975-1976)", "year": 1975, "seq": 7, "text": "The following requirements pertain to the specific major performing area: Applied Applied Applied Instrumental Voice Keyboard Instrumental students 12 hours 2 hours 4 hours Voice students 6 hours 8 hours 4 hours Keyboard students 6 hours 2 hours 10 hours Note: Instrumental students are required to take five hours, and Vocal and Keyboard students three hours of Instrumental Group Applied courses, as a part of the Applied Instrumental commitment. Creative Arts/57 PRIVATE APPLIED MUSIC Private applied lessons are available to all college students by consent of the appropriate professor, and may be taken for one or two hours of credit per semester. One credit hour is based on one half-hour lesson plus a minimum of three hours of practice per week. Two credit hours are based on two half-hour lessons plus a minimum of six hours of practice per week. The same course number can be applied any number of times for credit. Students are rated according to six performance levels spelled out for each applied area in the office of the department chairman. Music majors must take private applied lessons on their major instrument (with or without credit) every semester of their college careers, regardless of other applied considerations. Music majors must perform at level four or better on their major instrument prior to graduation before they can be considered as having successfully met music curriculum requirements. The Jazz Ensemble in action. 58/Shepherd College DIVISION OF EDUCATION The Division exists to prepare people for competent professional service in the public schools and related areas, and to develop the knowledge, skills and critical ideas on which significant educational growth depends. The Division achieves this broad goal in a variety of ways; it provides historical and philsophical perspectives that bear on an understanding of the nature of the learner and of learning, it develops the technical and human skills necessary for effective teaching, and it concerns itself with the growth in professional understanding and attitudes of future teachers."}
{"id": "minicoursecatalo03shep_0", "title": "Mini Course Catalog (1975-1976)", "year": 1975, "seq": 8, "text": "Propaganda and Public Opinion 62-310 Electives from the field of journalism . . . 3 3 3 3 3 6 LIBRARY SCIENCE The Library Science curriculum is designed primarily to prepare students for effective school library work. The program is based on the following specific objectives: 1. To train school librarians for effective service in the elementary, junior and senior high schools. 2. . To provide future teachers with an opportunity to acquire library skills, which will enable them to direct pupils in the effective use of school libraries. 3. . To provide a foundation for possible graduate study in the field of librarianship. Students who expect to enter the Library Science program should contact the Library Science Department no later than the beginning of their sophomore year to plan their program. All students in the Library Science program must earn a 2.0 grade in each library science course. Those students in the Teacher Education program must have an average of 2.5 for secondary education and 2.3 for elementary education in Library Science and must have received unqualified admission to the Professional Education Block as prerequisite to enrollment in 63-318, Library Practice. Students who expect to attend graduate school should strive for an average of 3.0. They should plan their courses so as to obtain a background of general knowledge. Electives should be selected from the areas of social studies, English, economics, sociology, political science, psychology, education, accounting, speech, business education, modern foreign languages (French or German). The ability to type is a necessity. The School Librarian specialization must be selected in combination with specialization for classroom teaching in grades 7 through 12, 7 through 9, 1 through 12, or with the diversified (self- contained classroom) specialization. A minimum of 21 hours of credit is Languages & Literature/77 required for West Virginia certification of school librarians with these specializations. Student teaching will be done in the student's first field in order to give the prospective librarian not only the teacher's viewpoint but also certification in that field."}
{"id": "montanastatewide00unse", "title": "Montana statewide angling pressure mail survey", "year": 1992, "seq": 0, "text": "There are six types of fishing licenses available to residents: a season license, a combo license, a sportsman\u2019s license, a \"senior\" license, a \"youth\" license and a disabled license. A season license is required for those resident anglers between the ages of 15 and 61 inclusive (a conservation license is required as a prerequisite to purchasing any fishing license). Residents between the ages of 12 and 14 inclusive, are required to purchase a conservation license to fish. These were determined by using the date of birth on the Conservation license and were classified as \"youth\" license holders. The combo license combines a season fishing license and a conservation license. A sportsman\u2019s license provides a deer \"A\" tag, elk tag, bear tag, conservation license, a game bird stamp and a fishing license. Residents 62 years of age and older are entitled to fish by purchasing a conservation license. These were determined by using the date of birth on the Conservation license and were classified as \"senior\" license holders. Residents who are certified as permanently and substantially disabled may purchase a \"Disabled Persons Conservation License\". The \"senior\", \"youth\", and \"disabled\" licenses were combined for the \"SYD\" population. Nonresidents 15 years of age and older must have a valid Montana fishing license to fish. Those nonresidents under the age of 15 may fish by buying a nonresident license or by being in the company of an adult with a valid Montana fishing license. If the latter the combined limit may not exceed the limit for one adult. Nonresidents have four types of licenses available for fishing in Montana; a combo license, a seasonal license, a two-day permit, and the big game combo. A nonresident conservation license is required as a prerequisite to purchaasing any nonresident fishing license. The combo license combines a nonresident conservation license and seasonal fishing license."}
{"id": "montanastatewide00unse", "title": "Montana statewide angling pressure mail survey", "year": 1992, "seq": 1, "text": "In the \"winter\" the rate dropped to 5,000 residents and nonresidents. Since waves 1 and 2 had fewer license holders from which to sample, these two waves were sampled at a less intense level. Two survey questionnaires were used, one for residents and season nonresidents and the other for 2-day nonresidents. The resident/nonresident questionnaire (see appendix A for examples), included questions on: what water was fished; nearest landmark , town, or county; date fishing occurred; and number of days fished; hours fished; species of fish caught; number of that species caught; number of that species kept; and whether the fishing was primarily from shore, boat or ice. Also included were two questions for an economic study being done to determine the value of a day of fishing. The questions were: was the main purpose of the trip to fish, and round trip distance traveled. The 2-day questionnaire was the same basic design but included questions to ascertain if the respondent was a valid 2-day fishing permit holder and how many permits they bought. The survey also asked about their entire year of fishing versus a single month. To ease the sorting process different colored forms were used for each wave. Different colors were also used for initial and remail mailings. Remail questionnaires were mailed, to those individuals who had not yet responded, from two to four weeks after the initial mailing. Returns for each wave were monitored and when they slowed down to a few each day the remail was sent. Included in the remail was a letter of explanation, (see appendix A for examples), a duplicate questionnaire and a return envelope. Returns were grouped and counted according to type of license, wave and mailing (initial or remail). Phone surveys were made to those individuals who had not responded in either the initial or remail mail survey."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1978-01-11", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1978-01-11 : Volume LXXII, Issue 10", "year": 1978, "seq": 0, "text": "Not only were the freshmen in happy but the Office of the Dean of Students had \u201ca horrible time\u201d getting everybody organized in that short time. The week-long Thanksgiving vacation was not particularly helpful in decreasing the number of Friday \u201ccuts\u201d. Daniel pointed autthatmany of the students who live far away could not afford to gohome anyway. These students found they could not even use the Library during the break since it closed on Saturday. Daniel added another dimension to the problem saying \u201cafter all its easier to pawn yourself off on your roomate for four days than for a whole week. The problem of cuts still remains to be solved. One suggestion under discussion is hold registration on the Monday of Thanksgiving week and prohibit registration by proxy. The Calendar Committee has also succeeded in changing the October Mid-term break to Thursday and Friday (as op\u00ac posed to Monday and Tuesday). This corresponds to the vacation of public schools in the area and allows faculty members with children to make the most of the break. Another proposal was to lengthen Christmas vacation and shorten the February break, but the faculty has claimed this did notallow them sufficient time to grade winter term work or prepare for spring term. By JIM LABE In two related moves, Mid\u00ac dlebury College recently spent more than $140,000 buying large sections of land, all of which are located in the path of the state\u2019s proposed Route 7 easterly bypass. The land purchases have enra ged several selectmen and at least one state representative, who charge that the College is interfering with town politics and attempting to influence the state and town\u2019s eventual decision as to whether the Route 7 bypass, if built, will follow the proposed westerly or easterly route. The proposed westerly bypass would mean the construction of a high speed highway crossing College land and passing ex\u00ac tremely close to Pearsons, Kelly, Lang, and Hadley dormitories."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1978-01-11", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1978-01-11 : Volume LXXII, Issue 10", "year": 1978, "seq": 1, "text": "There are no reliable statistics on the success of Middlebury graduates in finding jobs. \u201cIt would be helpful if we could get more information on what happens to our graduate students.\u201d said Moyer. \u201cA few years ago there was a sixty ,percent response rate to a questionnaire but that\u2019s forty percentthat we don\u2019t know about. Welackfeedback.\u201d Responses to a questionaire sent out by the Dean\u2019s Office to 1976 graduates are just coming in. In 1977 seventeen out of thirty, or 56.7% of those who applied to medical school , dental and veterinary schools were ac\u00ac cepted. Forum Attempt to Pick Talk Topics Fails By CAROL HUBREGSEN At a brief meeting Sunday night, Student Forum discussed what college problems and procedures they should deal with, and possibly revise during the spring semester. Forum chairman Clark Hin\u00ac sdale \u201978 suggested that the tenure system, the town\u2019s use of the college ice rink and other facilities, the student advisory system and the selection of student advisory chairmen were some topics Forum might need to investigate. A few representatives discussed Hinsdale\u2019s ideas, but because of a general lack of response from other Forum members, no working groups were formed. Nancy Ryan \u201978 argued that faculty probably wouldn\u2019t respond to a student-run evaluation of the tenure system. However, the Forum asked her to tak to some professors about tenure before the idea of forming a working group on the topic is dropped altogether. And Lucy Newell \u201978 said that Assistant Dean of Students Karl Lindholm plans to evaluate the student advisory system, which was begun this year, later in the spring. Valerie Cohen '78 said that noise in dormitories, particularly loud stereoplaying, is a problem. Forum discussed forming a working group to tighten existing rules. One member suggested, however, that the formation of some kind of dorm government with the dorm\u2019s residents making and enforcing their own rules might be more effective."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1978-01-11", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1978-01-11 : Volume LXXII, Issue 10", "year": 1978, "seq": 2, "text": "There is more at stake in the gay rights issue than just the liberty to express one\u2019s sexuality as one chooses. There is also theissue of whether or not American society should give the Gay movement the right, inherent in the American tradition, to express its views free of any prejudice or societal interference, regardless of what prejudices the individual members of our society may hold. Homosexuality was con\u00ac sidered immoral in Biblical times; yet our judicial system has progressed from \u201can eye for an eye\u201d\u2014should we not then apply this enlightenment in the same way towards a policy of tolerance consistant with American traditions? The Middlebury College community should champion such a cause, whether under the veil of a liberal arts education or not In doing so, we protect a freedom integral to the best in\u00ac terests of Middlebury College and to those of American society itself - the freedom to organize, and express oneself in a free society. KEVIN WILLIAM LOCKHART McNIFF Indigestion TO THE EDITOR Although a constant diet of unleaded gas may seem a mundane diet to most people, my car has survived quite well for the 2 1 /2 years that it has been in my care. During cold winter months, this diet has been sup\u00ac plemented by an occasional can of dry gas (to prevent cold- weather induced indigestion). While involved in this past Halloween\u2019s night time festivities, some thoughtful person, while passing through the SDU parking lot at the college, apparently concluded that my car looked mal-nourished and, sincetheFarmer\u2019s Almanac says that this winter will be a tough one, decided to add several eggs to the gas tank. Unfortunately, this high protein supplement did not agree with tne car s aencaie intestines. Although it is generally assumed that the students of an exclusive New' England liberal arts college are rich, this particular student hardly falls into that category, and the added expenses (especially welcome at Christ\u00ac mas) of having the car\u2019s innards cleaned is one I can w'ell do without."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1978-01-11", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1978-01-11 : Volume LXXII, Issue 10", "year": 1978, "seq": 3, "text": "But the Service is not limited to students. The AFS also coor\u00ac dinates a high school teacher exchange between the US and the Soviet Union The program has also diversified geographically. Today students from one part of thee ounlry can live with a family in an entirely different cultural and social enviroment in another part of the country. Exchanges between two foreign countries is also coordinated by the National AFS chapter. The domestic exchange is available to high school sophomores while the foreign program is limited to juniors and seniors. Applications for in\u00ac ch sion in a program abroad is carried out through the local chapter. Mark Holzbach, '80, Chairman of the Middlebury College AFS chapter, and Sara Morissey, '80, are on the board which reviews applications from Middlebury Union High School. Says Holzbach \u201cwe look for flexibility and try to find out something about their family life and hobbies.\u201d He added, \u201cthis is a good link between the town and the college.\u201d The townspeople are also on the board. Compiled applications are sent to the International Headquar\u00ac ters in New York City where 280 staff members attempting to, match these applications with offers from families in other parts of the world. Knowledge of a fanguage is not required for participation. Holzbach, who visited Finland under the AFS program, spoke no Finnish when he arrived and stayed with a family in which only the son \u2014who was reluctant to do so\u2014spoke English. I n order to ease students intc their new enviroment AFS arranges a two week orientation during which participants un\u00ac dergo an intense introduction to the culture and language of their host country. The goal, then, is total assimilation. The AFSer becomes a part of his or her foreign family and the family in turn accepts all financial responsibility for their guest child."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1978-01-11", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1978-01-11 : Volume LXXII, Issue 10", "year": 1978, "seq": 4, "text": "Other goal scorers, besides O\u2019Hara, were linemates Tom Plant and Tom Harris, Chip Hagy, John Crawford, and Bob King. The first period was not in\u00ac dicative of the Panther\u2019s 28 day examination and Christmas vacation, as they skated fast and hard. Forbes kept his lines fresh at all times; making quick changes and running four lines, as well as 3 defensive pairings. \u201cI played 19 players tonight and was very happy with all of them. Angers and Nelson (the Sophomore defense pairing) played really well.\u201d After numerous scoring chances by both teams, and great goaltending, Mike O'Hara con\u00ac nected at the 10:55 mark, sending the Panthers up 1-0. Watson carried the puck down ice, hesitated at the blue line, then drilled a pass to the penetrating O\u2019Hara, who sent it across Caswell\u2019s body to the lower lefthand corner of the net. The action continued to fly as no team could gain full control. Excellent forechecking and hustle, expecially by the Harris and Bellew lines, helped to stall the Continental\u2019s attack, The Panther\u2019s set up 3 walls of defense, and when the forwards broke down Hamilton had to contend with the very visable barriers of A.J. Fitzpatrick, John Crawford and the other defen\u00ac semen. With 3:12 to go in the period Tom Plant converted a beautiful pass by Perry Babcock from the right face off circle to double the Panthers\u2019 lead, 2-0. Tom Harris also assisted on the play. The period ended with a flurry of shots on Llovd, but the puck was finally cleared away by Jack Doyle to stifle the threat. The second period started slowly, but the atmosphere heated up quickly when a superbly set up goal by Mark Femberg was nullified. Roger Nicholas showed more moves than a Bourbon St. hooker to asset Fernberg, but it was all for naught."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1978-01-11", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1978-01-11 : Volume LXXII, Issue 10", "year": 1978, "seq": 5, "text": "Barnum\u2019s big top may wel contain the greatest show on earth, but last Saturday night Middlebury\u2019s Memorial Rink was the site of the greatest show on ice. On Saturday, the Dartmouth Women's Hockey team slid into town, accompainied by a fawning entourage of television cameramen and statisticians. The team was greeted by a Middlebury contingent that was determined to preserve its un\u00ac beaten record in this young season. For the Greenies, this game was the first contest of the year. The game was a see-saw battle all the way, with the lead changing hands four times before Dartmouth's Lea Bollings slid home her third goal of the game after only twenty-six seconds of a sudden death overtime period had lapsed. That goal ended the contest and set the final score at 6-8 for Dartmouth. The game had begun rather ingloriously tor Middlebury, as the Panthers, coming off an easy 6-0 trouncing of Williams thenight before, were stunned by the sharp skating of the Dart\u00ac mouth squad. Before two and a half minutes had gone by the tartmouth team was ahead 1-0. Soon, however, the home team settled down, and before the period ended, the all out hustling of captain Janet Behnken had evened the score. B ehnken was as pesky and quick as a mosquito during her shifts, as she hounded the puck carriers and set up offensive plays. Towards the end of the period, Behnken set up Sue King, who drove the puck home to close the first period scoring. With a 1-1 tie going into the second period, the Panthers had their confidence up. It w ; as only a matter of time before Mary Porter with a beautiful assist from defenseman Lucy Newell, brought the vociferous Mid\u00ac dlebury crow'd to their feet with a go ahead goal. After that tally, the Midd kids were riding high, but a rash of untimely penalties soon brought them down."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1978-01-11", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1978-01-11 : Volume LXXII, Issue 10", "year": 1978, "seq": 6, "text": "Ellen Starr was sent off for tripping, leaving the Middlebury team with only three skaters in front of goalie Cathy Butterfield. Middlebury coach Mike Karin chose Alison Aiken, Sandy Busby, andMary Porter, to shoulder the defensive responsibilities, but the trio never really got a chance to perform. Before the echoes of Starr's penalty whistle had died dcwn, Alison Aiken was sent off for tripping. Faced with the prospect of a one man disad\u00ac vantage for almost four minutes, the Midd kids lost their edge and the Greenies tied the game. Middlebury w'as still a man short when the action resumed, and the Dartmouth skaters took advantage of the situation to go up3-2. That goal set the stage for a roDicking third period. The Dartmouth skaters padded their lead with a goal early in the third period, and ten minutes late r M iddlebury was still on the wrong end of a 4-2 score. Then Sandy Shaw, with an assist from Gwen Blaine, tucked the puck into the comer of the net pulling Middlebury close again. With the skaters and the hometown crowd in a frenzy, the tempo of the game became furious. The Middlebury skaters started pressing hard, and with six minutes left Mara Quigley, a freshman standout, sent the puck in front of the goal mouth where a flustered Dartmouth defender tipped it by her own goalie. With the drop of the puck at center ice the rink went wild as the Panther skaters continued their attack. Action was tight for a few minutes until Anna Gebelein handled a tough pass and knocked home the go ahead goal with just 68 seconds remaining. In the final minute of the period Dartmouth was playing with the incentive of desperation. The tension was enough to melt the ice as the Middlebury defense tried vainly to get the puck out of their own end."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1978-01-11", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1978-01-11 : Volume LXXII, Issue 10", "year": 1978, "seq": 7, "text": "I don't know what else to say. They have a tremendous coach and are just a superior team.\u201d A friend of his responded similarly. \u201cDallas (will win), unfortunately. Because they\u2019re just incredible; they have hardly any weaknesses.\u201d Many people agreed that Dallas will win, but hoped the opposite would happen One woman told me. \"I think Dallas is going to win but I want Denver By DUSTY McNICIIOI 1977 has ended, and it ended not with a bang but an awards ceremony. Athletes everywhere have received awards as cor\u00ac porations and merchants clamber all over each other for the right to present trophies to deserving athletes. The reason for this beneficence is, of course, the free advertising that these presentations afford the sponsor. The Kodak All-American team developed as a result of this corporate kindness, as did the in\u00ac stitution of the Chevrolet offensive and defensive players of the game awards. In the bestowal of awards, as in many other fields of endeavor, the corporate big wigs have gotten totally out of hand. The commercial desire to fabricate new honors has given rise to bizarre awards such as the Getty Unleaded Regular Award. That award is given to the athlete who, according to the Getty people, has managed to get the lead out, and still be just a regular guy. Another coveted award is the Rolaids Relief Pitcher award.. No matter how you spell it, .he award turns out to be a pitch for Rolaids. Using the two aforementioned awards as a springboard, it is possible to dive into a whole sea of similar honors. For instance what player wouldn't smile upon being told that he had received the Colgate Toothpaste Award. That prize could be given to the athlete who most often comes through in the squeeze. The maker\u2019s of Alpha-Bits could present the Cereal Bowl for outstanding post season play."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1978-01-11", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1978-01-11 : Volume LXXII, Issue 10", "year": 1978, "seq": 8, "text": "The women wasted no time in proving their abilities as they took eighth place in both the Howe Cup Tournament at Yale and the National Championships at the University of Penn\u00ac sylvania. The 1978 schedule includes eight team matches as well as the Howe Cup Tourney and the Nationals. Captain Nancy Rome has been thrilled w'ith the team\u2019s showing thus far, and expects to see the improvement continue through this season. The men\u2019s program is also in its third year, but the college is yet to recognize the team. It has not been given varsity status, a coach, or even any financial support. Despite this handicap, senior Ty Howe and junior Brian Miller have arranged matches for every weekend this winter. The men\u2019s opponents include Dartmouth, Amherst, Williams, aMiddlebury Faculty team and a team from the Court Club in Burlington. In addition to the in\u00ac tercollegiate programs, the college offers instructional classes in the physical education program, and the courts are available on a sign-up basis when they are not being used for practices. The sign-up sheet is posted in the vestibule of Flet\u00ac cher, and each I.D. card holder may bring one guest. The sign-up sheet for the tennis courts is also located in the vestibule. During the winter, the in\u00ac tramural program will sponsor a college squash tournament. The paddle tennis program, like the courts themselves, is brand new. But several students, notably Darren Zecher, Anne Vernon and Dave Halsey, have worked hard to organize an intercollegiate/ int imural program whhich incluats about fifty students. In addition to their practices each afternoon, they have arranged matches with the UVM team. The two teams had their first confrontation before vacation, and they expect to meet again before the winter ends. The organizers have not yet discovered other schools nearby with paddle tennis teams."}
{"id": "militarychaplain12unse", "title": "The Military Chaplains' Review", "year": 1972, "seq": 0, "text": "And, I thought, with our knowledge of possible cures at such a primitive level, isn't it an excursion into flights of fancy, as wild as anything psychedelic drugs can offer, to spend this much money and this much time on such a conference? At that point the light came on. Here is what I mean. FINDING MEANING IN LIFE Whatever else is bugging the steady user of alcohol or other mind-affecting drugs, one generalization seems to hold : life itself is not providing the positive feedback that the drug user wants. He has not found the personal relationships with family and friends that help him believe in himself and in life itself. He has not found a way of relating to life that makes sense for him with- out the need for some extra kick or some dulling of the edges of daily realities. There is not sufficient evident meaning in the way he is called upon to expend his energies, whether physi- cal or emotional or both. I am now talking about the whole pack- age of life \u2014 including work, play, and a sense of meaning. It is true that the individual who is caught up in drug patterns began primarily because he had no over-all goal in life, the reach- ing of which was more important to him than anything else. With a goal, with a sense of meaning, and with some self-rewarding personal relationships, we have no real need for substitute grati- fications. Without a goal, a system of meaning and values, and without some sense of belonging, we are sitting birds for all sorts of inadequate life-styles, including those of the drug world. When we make sense of who we are and where we are and where we want to go, then we have the strength we need to accept frustra- tion, conflict, fatigue, boredom, and depression, without reaching out frantically for destructive dependencies, chemical or other- wise."}
{"id": "militarychaplain12unse", "title": "The Military Chaplains' Review", "year": 1972, "seq": 1, "text": "Allpori some time ago made a similiar point in an outline of what he caled \"attitudinal therapy.\" 1 It was his concept that no psychological or sociological problem is handled without assisting the troubled person to work through to a system of meaning and values and a set of goals that he could appropriate for himself. He saw the clergyman as essential to such an approach because he felt that the seriously religious person could hear another per- son in the throes of that person's struggle for meaning. He felt that the clergyman, whom he called \"intrinsically\" religious, could provide the atmosphere of honesty and acceptance in which another person could be supported in his own search for life. He felt that the intrinsically religious person could allow other life styles that were not destructive to the individual or to those with whom he relates and could provide the non-possessive warmth needed during the struggle for a better way. It is true, as Allport saw, that not every clergyman meets the requirement. Many are what he called \"extrinsically\" religious. They are dedicated to the perpetuation of an institution or the maintenance of inflexible doctrine, and they can be destructive in their work with others who are outside of that institution and who cannot accept the doctrine offered. Such an approach, reject- ing and judgmental as it is, can cause more problems than it cures. The present emphasis in the on-going training of the Army chaplain, therefore, is to place him in a setting of crisis in such a way as to involve him with other members of a helping team 1 \"Mental Health: A Generic Attitude,\" Religion and Medicine, David Belgum, ed. (Ames, Iowa: Iowa University Press, 1967) pp. 45-60. trained in many and varied approaches, and to do so in such a way as to promote mutuality of communication and thus to encourage growth for all members of the dialogue."}
{"id": "militarychaplain12unse", "title": "The Military Chaplains' Review", "year": 1972, "seq": 2, "text": "It may be a struggle to iden- tify with goals that are more important even than whether the individual lives or dies. Thus the chaplain is vital to any lastingly effective rehabilita- tive approach, but he is valuable only to the extent that he shares in the process both with other members of the team and with those the team is striving to help. What I am saying is that medi- cal techniques and chemical substances have a vital place in our program. So also do psychological techniques and insights, as well as sociological, legal, recreational, and occupational insights, observations, and approaches. Never forget, furthermore, that probably one of the greatest sources of strength in any such pro- gram must be that of sound leadership. It is essential to provide as a model a leader who believes in himself, in what he is doing, and in life itself, and who is unself -consciously so dedicated to what he is doing that he tends to forget about himself. This is the strong leader so idolized by the military community, both in fan- tasy and in reality, through the ages. The chaplain is indeed needed, but only as a member of the great fraternity of those who work together for a better way of life. The Chief of Chaplains, Department of the Army, has asked that chaplains be included in each of the rehabilitative teams now being formed throughout the world. This does not mean that other chaplains are not a part of the answer wherever they serve, but the incorporation of a chaplain in each team demonstrates nonverbally the realization that we have here a problem deeply caught up in the significant question of the purpose of life itself. THE TYPE OF PEOPLE THE MILITARY NEEDS I am convinced that what I have attempted to spell out as a part of the approach to the drug problem is not a negative attack against chemical substances and their usage; it is rather a posi- tive attempt to turn people on to life itself."}
{"id": "militarychaplain12unse", "title": "The Military Chaplains' Review", "year": 1972, "seq": 3, "text": "It is not by getting people off of drugs that they find meaning. It is rather that in finding a meaning for themselves, people no longer have the need for artificial means of turning on. I am emphasizing here a mat- ter of absolute concern for all of us. It is not only the drug depen- dent person who needs to find meaning and value and purpose. It is every one of us. It is certainly evident that what the military needs is people who are dedicated to a way of life, people who are not simply seeking a parasitic way of existence within a large institution that has both continuity and stability. The military needs people who believe that our civilization needs to be improved and perpe- tuated. It needs people who feel that in the military they find an opportunity to serve the best values that man stands for. It needs people committed to peace, to the protection of the weak, to the need to translate concern and care into effective action. It needs people who believe that the way of life they have chosen is in it- self more important than whether or not they advance with their peers up the ladder of institutional approval. It needs people who are willing to take a stand against trends in the institution that may work against the attainment of a better world. It needs peo- ple of integrity, and integrity comes only from those who have a goal that is greater than their own comfort or their own accept- ance by any system. When I have said that, I have said in addition that such people are what the world needs, and without them the matter of living is only a matter of putting in time. Until we find for ourselves a reason for living greater than the details of what happens to us while we live, we are subject to all sorts of dependencies."}
{"id": "militarychaplain12unse", "title": "The Military Chaplains' Review", "year": 1972, "seq": 4, "text": "Duncan Lack of agreement on a definition of drug abuse makes it diffi- cult to understand the problem, much less plan a constructive program. Drug abuse is variously defined as a legal, moral, medi- cal or social problem. The legal definition equates drug abuse with the mere action of using proscribed drugs or using a drug under proscribed conditions. The moral definition is similar, but greater emphasis is placed on the motivation or purpose for which the drug is used. The medical model opposes unsupervised usage but emphasizes the physical and mental consequences for the user. The social definition stresses social responsibilities and adverse effects on others. Furthermore, drug abuse has not re- mained constant; it has been changing. It is therefore not sur- prising that pragmatic goals and actions frequently conflict. Thus the drug scene today does not look the same as it did five years ago, ten years ago, or twenty years ago. As recently as ten years ago, I think I could reasonably say I knew personally most of the opiate derivative users in the Southwest, because they came in and out of the hospital for treatment. I think perhaps the drug scene today almost defies imagination, because it's here, it's there, it's everywhere, and in no two instances does it look the same. REACTIONS TO DRUG ABUSE Let's look closer at the drug scene in an attempt to try to un- derstand it. First of all, it is both a symptom and a cause. It is not an isolated or unitary phenomenon but is, on the contrary, a pow- erful social and cultural indicator that reflects the quality and the character of life in the society. Whatever it is that we are trying to describe, it has stimulated society to react \u2014 and often to over- react\u2014 to the actual and threatened consequences of widespread illicit drug usage, especially among the young."}
{"id": "militarychaplain12unse", "title": "The Military Chaplains' Review", "year": 1972, "seq": 5, "text": "Part of society's overreaction to the problem can be attributed to the common tendency toward nonthinking which does not recognize any re- fined or subtle distinctions between the concept of illicit use and the realities of hard core abuse. The net result is a lumping to- gether in the public mind of all kinds of illicit behavior which ex- tends from minor technical transgressions up to and through de- pendency and serious involvement. In this type of thinking the danger is seen as equivalent to the total number of people who have used drugs illicitly. Thus, by definition, we have on our hands an overwhelming and very threatening problem. We may have failed to recognize the extent to which unexamined attitudes, values and opinions are embedded in the issue and the tendency of most people to react on the basis of a priori feelings and assump- tions rather than on the basis of a careful analysis of the facts. Current reaction frequently borders on hysteria, which seriously impedes the kind of constructive thought and action which is re- quired to mount a significant attack on the core problems of acts, casualties, and consequences of drug abuse. At the risk of oversimplification, positions currently being taken by individuals and groups in the society can be character- ized in ideological terms as hawk, moderate and dove. The distri- bution is neither uniform nor bell-shaped, and there are many in- dications that the majority, primarily older persons and those with adolescent children at risk, are hawkishly disposed. A sig- nificant vocal minority, mainly recruited from the young, white, middle class, can be classified as doves. And the much smaller heterogeneous group of individuals who hold moderate attitudes and opinions can be found in various age and social class strata. Unfortunately, moderate, informed voices are seldom heard above the general din."}
{"id": "militarychaplain12unse", "title": "The Military Chaplains' Review", "year": 1972, "seq": 6, "text": "Many of the hawks have mixed feelings, because they do not want to see their children arrested or exposed in a fashion that will threaten future careers. In this highly charged atmosphere of contrary attitude and opinion, rational discourse is rare and difficult. Without special effort on the part of opinion leaders, it will continue to be difficult to entertain novel solutions and to develop, implement or gain acceptance for realistic pro- grams of remedial action that go contrary to invested prejudices. Perhaps a part of our difficulty is that we have been trying to de- scribe and deal with an \"it\" rather than with people. You see, without people that would be no \"it.\" People create the \"it.\" When discussing drug abuse, it is common practice to refer to dangerous drugs rather than dangerous people and to assume that the fault lies solely with the drug. Examination of this very complex issue may help to clarify matters. The question is : Why do people use drugs? ALTERNATIVES The use of psychoactive drugs can be seen as but one alterna- tive among many for coping with the subjective needs, desires, and problems of life. The critical questions are: Why this alter- native as opposed to some other? Why this alternative to the ex- clusion of all others? What are doctors doing to increase or de- crease the likelihood that the individual will resort to drugs? Most drug usage can be viewed as a matter of choice, whether 8 taken inside or outside the medical system, for seldom is the per- son so ill or in such distress that there is no other recourse. This implies that there are wide individual differences in personal cri- teria of illness and toleration for discomfort. Decisions to visit the physician or to seek drugs directly need not be rational or de- liberate, but the action suggests that at some level a choice among available alternatives has been made."}
{"id": "militarychaplain12unse", "title": "The Military Chaplains' Review", "year": 1972, "seq": 7, "text": "I will even let you vomit on me, if only you will let me belong.\" Grandiose claims for marijuana have diminished as the drug has become more widely used, but they persist for LSD and other hallucinogenic agents because of their impressive potency. The marked alterations of consciousness produced by LSD can be in- fluenced by prior expectations and lend themselves to various in- terpretations by the user, a situation that tends to promote belief in the original contentions. The user finds it hard to believe that a drug with such powerful, active, subjective effects cannot in some way produce a significant and lasting change in his personality or outlook. He may then take the drug repeatedly in search of these changes and become increasingly confused to the point of losing touch with reality. Therein lies one of the great dangers asso- ciated with hallucinogenic drugs. The interaction between myths .or expectations and the clinical effects of the drugs tend to rein- force one another in circular fashion. In the case of marijuana, LSD, and other psychedelic drugs, the myths and claims have taken on the character of a party line which is very difficult to dispel. CONCLUSION In summary, allow me to oversimplify what I have been lead- ing up to. Drug abuse may be related to a man's inability to face and deal with the problems of life, especially those which result in feelings of boredom, helplessness, hopelessness and frustration. The realities of military life at times contribute to a person's ex- 10 periencing some of these uncomfortable feelings. Unfortunately, not every soldier's past experiences have provided him with the inner strength sufficient to continue to function in spite of these discomforts. Thus if we have an unprepared person who is experi- encing stress, and in addition the availability of drugs, the sanc- tion of significant others, and a conscience structure that will per- mit, he may turn to drugs for relief."}
{"id": "militarychaplain12unse", "title": "The Military Chaplains' Review", "year": 1972, "seq": 8, "text": "Shockley The issue to which we will address ourselves is that of the early religious experience of black people in this country. We are going to touch on a few dimensions of that experience which have been affected by African backgrounds and by slavery. As morale officers in the Armed Forces, I am sure that you have the duty of understanding the changing attitudes that ser- vicemen have toward the organized church and of coping with some of the misunderstandings which have arisen. In order to do this, it is helpful to know something of black religious history. /. AFRICAN BACKGROUNDS The black religious experience in this country cannot be seen as something separate from the black religious experience on the African continent. There are two points of view with regard to the origin of the black religious experience here. On the one hand, some sociologists point out that there is not a single institu- tion in all of black American culture that has not been deeply af- fected by its African backgrounds. They tell us that almost every- thing in black American culture has been strongly influenced by the African experience. On the other hand, there are sociologists who say that the black African culture was so nearly destroyed by the experience of slavery that there is little or nothing left of it. The truth probably lies somewhere between these two ex- tremes. Perhaps one of the best ways to speak about some of the factors in the African religious experience is to address ourselves to some survivals \u2014 continuities which were brought from Africa and which remained a part of Negro life in America. We will therefore speak about the nature of the African religion as it af- fected the black experience here. RELIGIOSITY We will explore five basic factors, although these do not ex- haust the possibilities."}
{"id": "militarychaplain12unse", "title": "The Military Chaplains' Review", "year": 1972, "seq": 9, "text": "The first is the deep religiosity of the black person in this country which can be traced to the religious experience of the black African. What we are saying is that there was a religious bent, a religious proclivity or inclination, which 13 carried over to America. In spite of the fact that cultural ties had been cut, in spite of the fact that very few cultural vehicles were available, black religiosity did survive, manifesting itself in and adapting itself to Christianity. Thus, religiosity was a basic fac- tor in the black experience in Africa which continued to be ex- pressed here. WHOLENESS OF LIFE The second basic factor is the integration of the life experience. There is a pronounced capacity in the black person to look at life and to see it whole, to observe it not only in terms of the here and now, but also to see its origins, its present reality, and its future. SIMPLICITY A third factor is the simplicity of black African faith which has persisted in the black American. By simplicity I do not mean to imply something that is less than profound ; I mean the capac- ity of a person to reduce life and reality to basic forms. There is a simple relationship between that which is seen and that which is not seen. African \"gods\" took their places in the midst of the seen and the unseen, so that eternal, spiritual truths were explained in terms of those temporal, physical realities which were encoun- tered daily. This, perhaps, can partially account for the general framework of black theology, that of certain categories of reli- gious experience which were found here in the Protestant formu- lation and which subsequently became channels and vehicles for the expression of the black experience. The concept of God, for example, stands out very clearly."}
{"id": "mileverhaeren00bithgoog", "title": "E\u0301mile Verhaeren", "year": 1970, "seq": 0, "text": "A new age calls for new poets, poets whose conceptions have been nurtured by their environment, poets who, in the expression they give to this new environment, themselves vibrate with the feverish rotation of life. But so many of our poets are pusillanimous. They feel that their voices are out of harmony with reality ; they feel that they are not incorporated with the new organism and a necessary part of it ; they have a dull foreboding that they do not speak the language of our contemporary hfe. In our great cities they are like strangers stranded. The great roaring streams of our new sensations are to them terrific and inconceivable. They are ready to accept all the comfort and luxury of modem life ; they are quick to take advantage of the facihties afforded by technical science and organisation ; but for their poetry they reject these phenomena, because they cannot master ) by Google THE NEW AGEi i them. They recoil from the task of transmuting poetical values, of sensing whatever is poetically new in these new things. And so they stand aside. They flee from the real, the contem- porary, to the immutable ; they take refuge in whatsoever the eternal evolution has left un- touched ; they sing the stars, the springtime, the babbling of springs which is now as it ever was, the myth of love ; they hide behind the old symbols ; they nestle to the old gods. Not from the moment, from the molten flowing ore, do they seize and mould the eternal \u2014 ^no, as ever of old they dig the symbols of the eternal out of the cold clay of the past, like old Greek statues. They are not on that account insignificant ; but at best they produce something important, never anything necessary. For only that poet can be necessary to our time who himself feels that everything in this time is necessary, and therefore beautiful."}
{"id": "mileverhaeren00bithgoog", "title": "E\u0301mile Verhaeren", "year": 1970, "seq": 1, "text": "From the right the Teu- tonic tide dashes in, the Protestant faith ; from the left, sumptuous and rigidly orthodox, Roman Cathohcism. And the race itself is the restlessly strugghng product of two races, the Flemish and the Walloon. Naked, clear, and direct are the contrasts which here defy each other ; and the whole battle can be surveyed at a glance. But so strong, so persistent is the inexorable pressure of the two neighbouring races, that this blend has already become a new ferment, a new race. Elements once contrary are now unrecog- nisably mixed in a new and growing product. Teutons speak French, people of Romance stock are Flemish in feehng. Pol de Mont, in spite of his Gallic name, is a Flemish poet ; Verhaeren, ) by Google THE NEW BELGIUM 15 Maeterlinck, aad van Lerbeighe, though no Frenchman can pronoxmee their names rightly, are French poets. And this new Belgian race is a strong race, one of the most capable in Europe. Contact with so many foreign cultures, the vicinity of such contradictory nations, has fer- tilised them ; healthy rural labour has steeled their Umbs ; the near sea has opened their eyes to the great distances. Their consciousness of themselves is of no long date : it can only be reckoned from the time when their country became independent, hardly a hundred years ago. A nation younger than America, they are in their adolescence now, and rejoicing in their new, unsought strength. And just as in America, the blend of races here, together with the fruitful, healthy fields, has pro- created robust men. For the Belgian race is a race pulsing with vitahty. Nowhere in Europe is life so intensely, so merrily enjoyed as in Flanders, nowhere else is sensuality and pleasure in excess so much the measure of strength. They mxist be seen particularly in their sensual life ; it must be seen how the Flemish enjoy ; with what greediness, with what a conscious pleasure and robust endurance."}
{"id": "mileverhaeren00bithgoog", "title": "E\u0301mile Verhaeren", "year": 1970, "seq": 2, "text": "It is among them that Jordaens found the models for his gluttonous orgies ; and they could be found still at every kermesse, at every wake. Statistics prove that in the consumption of alcohol Belgium stands to-day \u00df.t the head pf Europe. Every second house is ) by Google 16 EMILE VERHABREN an iim* an estamin^ ; every town, every vill^e has its brewery ; and the brewers are the wealthiest men in the country. Nowhere else aw festivals so loud, boisterous, and imbridled ; nowhere else is Kfe loved and lived with such a superabundant zest and glow. Belgium is the I luid of excessive vitality, and ever was so. They have fought for this plenitude of life, for this enjoyment full to satiety. Their most heroic exploit, their great war with the Spaniards, was only a struggle not so much for religion as for sensual freedom. These desperate revolts, this immense effort was in reality not directed against Roman Catholicism, but against the morality, the asceticism it enforced ; not so much against Spain as against the sinister malignity of the Inquisition ; against the taciturn, bitter, and insidious Puritanism which sought to curtail eajoyment; against the morose reserve of Philip II. All that they wanted at that time was to preserve their bright and laughing life, their free, dionysiac enjoyment, the imperious avidity of their senses ; they were determined not to be hmited by any measure short of excess. And with thens life conquered. Health, strength, and fecundity is to this very day the mark of the Belgian peofde in town and country. Poverty itself is not hollow-cheeked and stunted here. Chubby, red-cheeked children play in the streets ; the: peasants working in the fields are straight and sturdy ; even the artisans are as muscular ) by Google THE NEW BELGIUM 17 and strong as they are in Constantin Meunier's bronzes ; the women are moulded to bear children easily ; the mibroken vigour of the old men persists in a secure defiance of age."}
{"id": "mileverhaeren00bithgoog", "title": "E\u0301mile Verhaeren", "year": 1970, "seq": 3, "text": "The imagination of great nations is for the most part absorbed by the practical demands of their development. Tlie best strength of a great nation is claimed by polities, by administration, by the army and navy ; but where political life is of necessity poor, where the problems of administration are forcibly restricted, men of genius almost exclu- sively seek their conquests in the domains of art. Scandinavia is one example, Belgium another, of countries in which the aristocracy of intellect have with the happiest results been forced back on art and science. In such young races the vital instinct must a priori make all artistic activity strong and healthy ; and even when they produce a decadence, this reaction, this con- tradiction, is so decided and consequent, that strength lies in its very weakness. For only a strong Ught can cast strong shadows; only a strong, sensual race can bring forth the really great and earnest mystics ; because a decided reaction which is conscious of its aim requires as much energy as positive creation. The towering structure of Belgian art rests on a broad foundation. The preparation, the grow- ing under the sod, took fifty years ; and then in another fifty years it Was reared aloft by the youth of one single generation. For every healthy evolution is slow, most of all in the Teu- tonic races, which are not so quick, supple, and ) by Google THE NEW BELGIUM 19 dexterous as the Latin races, who leam by life itself rather than by studious application. This hterature has grown ring by ring like a tree, with its roots deep in a healthy soil nourished by the unyielding perseverance of centuries. Like every confession of faith, this literature has its saints, its martyrs, and its disciples. The first of the creatoi^, the forerunner, was Charles de Gaster ; and his great epic Thyl Ulenspiegel is the gospel of this new literature."}
{"id": "mileverhaeren00bithgoog", "title": "E\u0301mile Verhaeren", "year": 1970, "seq": 4, "text": "Nor was he more allured by the prospect, held out to him, of directing his uncle's workshop. It is not yet definitely the poetic vocation which appeals to him, but he does desire a free active calling with unlimited possibihties. To gain time for his final decision, he studies jurisprudence, and becomes a barrister. In these student years in Louvain Verhaeren gave free rein to his untame- able zest in life ; as a true Fleming he eschewed \u25a0 moderation and laimched into intemperance. To this very day he is fond of telling of his liking for good Belgian beer, and of how the students got drunk, danced at all the kermesses, caroused and feasted, when the fury came over them, and got into all kinds, of mischief, which often enough brought them into conflict with the poUce. Un- certainty was never a feature of his character, and so his Roman Cathohcism was in those years no silent and impersonal faith, but a militant orthodoxy. A handful of hotspm^ \u2014 the ) by Google 32 \u00a3MILE VERHAEREN publisher Deman was one of them, and another *as the tenor van Dyek\u2014 set a newspaper going, in Which they lashed away mercilessly at the corruption of the modem world, and did not forget to blow their own trumpets. The uni- versity was not slow to veto th^e immature manifestations ; but ere long they started a second periodical, which was, however, more in harmony with the great contemporary move- ments. Betweenwhiles verses were written. And still more passionate is the yoxmg poet's activity when, in the year 1831, he is called to the bar in Brussels. Here he makes friends with men of great vitality : he is welcomed by a circle of painters and artists, and a c^nacle of young talents is formed who have the authentic en- thusiasm for art, and who feel that they are violently opposed to the conservative bourgeoisie of Brussels."}
{"id": "mileverhaeren00bithgoog", "title": "E\u0301mile Verhaeren", "year": 1970, "seq": 5, "text": "In Belgium, it is true, it was less acclaimed than declaimed against ; but nevertheless it every- where excited a commotion, and that grum- bling unrest which always heralds the advent of a new force. ) by Google 'LES FLAMANDES' *LES FLAMANDES' Je snis 1\u00ab fils de eette race Tenace, Qui veut, apres avoir vonln Eocore, encore et encore pins. \u00b1 v., Ma Raet. The life-work of great artists contains not only a single, but a threefold work of art. The actual creation is only the first, and not always the most important ; the second must be the life of the artists themselves ; the third must be the har- moniously finished, organically connected rela- tionship between the act of creating and the thing created, between poetry and life. To sur- vey how inner growth is connected with external formation, how crises of physicaf reality are con- nected with artistic decadence, how development and completion interpenetrate as much in per- sonal experience as in the artistic creation, must be an equal artistic rapture, must disengage as pure a \u00dcne of beauty as the individual work. In Verhaeren these conditions of the threefold work of art are accomplished in full. Harsh and abrupt as the contrasts in his books seem to be, the totality of his development is yet rounded off to a clear line, to the figure of a circle. In the beginning the end was contained, and in the end ) by Google 86 \u00a3MILE VERHAEREN the beginning : the bold curve returns to itself. Like one who travels round the world and circles the vast circumference of the globe, he comes back in the end to his starting-point. Beginning and end touch in the motive of his work. To the country to which his youth belonged his old age returns : Flanders inspired his first book, and to Flanders his last books are dedicated."}
{"id": "mileverhaeren00bithgoog", "title": "E\u0301mile Verhaeren", "year": 1970, "seq": 6, "text": "All vitality that is strongly conscious of itself produces its counterpart, seclu- sion and asceticism; it is just the healthiest, the elemental races\u2014 the Russians of to-day for in- stance \u2014 who among their strong have the weak, among their gluttons of life those who avert their faces from it, among those who assent some who deny. By the side of the ambitious, teeming Belgium we have spoken of, there is a seques- tered Belgimn which is falling into ruins. Art exclusively in Rubens's sense could take no accoimt of all those sohtary cities, Bruges, Ypres, ) by Google 44 EMILE VERHAEREN Dixmude, through whose noiseless streets the monks hasten like Socks of ravens in long pro- cessions, in whose canals the dumb white shadows of ghding nuns are mirrored. There, mid life's raging river, are broad islands of dream where men find refuge from realities. Even in the great Belgian cities there are such sequestered haunts of silence, the higuinages, those little towns in the town, whither ageing men and women have retired, renouncing the world for the peace of the cloister. Quite a& much as the passion of life, the Roman Catiiolic faith and monkish renunciation are nowhere so deeply and finnly rooted as in this Belgium, where sensual pleasure is so noisy in its excess. Here again an extreme of contrasts is revealed : frowning in the face of the materialistic view of life stands the spiritual view. While the masses in the exuberance of their health and strength proclaim life aloud and poiuice on its eternal pleasures, aside and cut off from them stand another, far lesser company to whom life is only a waiting for death, whose silence is as persistent as the exultation of the others. Everywhere here austere faith has its black roots in the vigor- ous, fruitful soil."}
{"id": "mileverhaeren00bithgoog", "title": "E\u0301mile Verhaeren", "year": 1970, "seq": 7, "text": "For religious feeling always remains alive among a people that has once, although centiuies may have passed since, fought with every fibre of its being for its faith. This is a subterranean Belgium that works in secret and that easily escapes the ciu^ory glance\u00bb for ) by Google THE MONKS 45 it lives in shadows and silence. From this silence, however, from this averted earnestness, Belgian art has derived that mystical nourish- ment which has lent its baffling strength to the works of Maeterlinck, the pictures of Fernand Khnopff and Georges Minne. Verhaeren, too, did not turn aside from this sombre region. He, as the painter of Belgian hfe, saw these shadows of a vanishing past, and, in 1886, added to his first book Les Flamandes a second, Les Moines. It almost seems as though he had first of all been obuged to exhaust both the historical styles of his native land before he could reach his own, the modem style. For this book is essen- tially a throw-back, a confession of faith in Gothic art. Monks are for Verhaeren heroic symbols ofl mighty periods in the past. In his boyhood he was familiar with their grave aspect. Near the cheerful house where his youth was passed,\"'there was at Bomhem a Bemhardine monastery, whither the boy had often accompanied his father to confession, and in whose cold corridors he had often waited in astonishment and with a child's timidity, listening to the majestic chant of the liturgy married to the organ's earnest notes. And here, one day of days, he received, with a thrill of pious terror, his first communion. Since that day the monks had been to him, as he trod the beaten track of custom, beings in a strange World apart, the incarnation of the beautiful ) by Google 46 EIWILE VERHAEREN and the supersensual, the unearthly on his child's earth."}
{"id": "mileverhaeren00bithgoog", "title": "E\u0301mile Verhaeren", "year": 1970, "seq": 8, "text": "Nothing was allowed in the deep light of the colours, in the grave repose of the theme, save what could be fitted into the strictly rel^ous frame of the pictm\u00ab. But here the pictorial method proved to be insufficient for the poetic effect. The problem of religious feeling is too close to the heart to be reached by outward, even by plastic manifesta- tions. A thing which is so eminently hostile to the sensuous, nay, which is the very symbol of all that is contrary to sensuousness, cannot be reached by a picturesque appeal to the senses ; the description of an intellectual problem must cease to be descriptive and become psychology. And so, thus early in his career, Verhaeren is forced away from the picturesque. First, how- ever, he attempts the plastic method : he gives us sombre statues of monks ; but even as statues they are only types of an inner life, symbols of the ways to Gtod. Verhaeren develops in his monks the difference of their characters, which are still effective even under the soutane ; and by his dehcate characterisation he shows the manifold possibilities of religious feeling. The feudal monk, a noble of ancient lineage, would make a conquest of God, as once his ancestors ) by Google 48 \u00a3MILE VERHAEREN conquered castle and forest lands with spur and sword. The moine flambeau, he that is burn- ing with fervour, would possess Him with his passion like a woman. The savage monk, he that has come from the heart of a forest, can only comprehend Him in heathen wise, only fear Him as the wielder of thimder and lightning, while the gentle monk, he that loves the Virgin with a troubadour's timid tenderness, flees from the fear of Him. One monk would fathom Him by the learning of books and by logic ; another does not tmderstand Him, cannot lay hold on Him, and yet finds Him everywhere, in all things, in all he experiences."}
{"id": "mileverhaeren00bithgoog", "title": "E\u0301mile Verhaeren", "year": 1970, "seq": 9, "text": "Les Moines was the last of Verhaeren's de- scriptive books, the last in which he stood on the outer side o\u00a3 things contemplating them dis- passionately. But already here there is too much temperament in him to allow him to look at things as altogether unconnected and imdis- cipUned ; the joy of magnifying and intensifying by feeling already stirs in him. At the end of the book he no longer sees the monks as isolated individuals, but gathers them all together in a great synthesis in his finale. Behind them the poet sees order, a secret law, a great force of life. They, these hermits who have renounced, who are scattered over the world in a thousand monas- teries, are to the poet the last remnants of a great departed beauty, and they are so much the more grandiose as they have lost all feeling for our own time. They are the last ruins of moribund Christianity in a new world, projecting, in tragic loneliness, into our own days. ' Seuls vous sur- vivez grands au monde chr^tien mort I * ^ he hails them in admiration, for they have built the great House of God, and for many generations sacrificed ) by Google 50 \u00a3:mile verhaeren their blood for the Host eternally white. In admiration he hails them. Not in faith and love, but in admiration for their fearless enei^, and above all becaxise they go on fighting undaunted for something that is dead and lost ; because their beauty serves none other than itself; because they project into our own time like the ancient belfries of the land, which no longer caU to prayer. In a land where everything else serves a purpose, pleasure and gold, they stand lonely ; and they die without a cry and without a moan, fighting against an invisible enemy, tiiey, the last defenders of beauty."}
{"id": "gigers-alien", "title": "Giger's Alien", "year": 1979, "seq": 0, "text": "At last he reaches the floor of the pyramid. The light from his torch falls on unknown, mysterious shapes in the form of hieroglyphics on the walls. On the ground he catches sight of some Strange objects, like spore-capsules or eggs. He passes all this information up to his companions by radio, as they wait for him at the entrance up above. Cautiously he goes up to one of the capsules and gently touches it. At once a lid springs open and a loathsome creature jumps out of the opening straight into his face and forces a tube down the petrified man\u2019s throat. The long radio silence has made the watchers at the entrance anxious. After some time, when there is still no sign of life from below, they decide to haul their companion up again. As they pull him into the light, they see with horror what has happened to their still unconscious companion. They cannot prise the disgusting creature loose from his face, so there is nothing for it but to take them both back to the mother-ship Nostromo, There he is taken at once to the operating-theatre and X-rayed. The picture shows a tube-like proboscis reaching down inside him, ending at the top of his lungs; it has given a dark colour to the tissue. They try to cut the brute away with a scalpel. At the first incision a yellow, acid fluid spurts out and instantly eats through the table with a sizzling noise. Ata loss, the crew withdraws to discuss what action they should take. When someone looks at the sick man again the beast is lying on the floor, rolled up and lifeless. The astronaut has recovered consciousness, but cannot remember anything and feels no pain at all."}
{"id": "gigers-alien", "title": "Giger's Alien", "year": 1979, "seq": 1, "text": "The embassy from the fantastic kingdom of films consists of Gordon Carroll, Ridley Scott and David Giler. Scott carries out the introductions and then gets going. He tells the story of A/ien over again with the aid of sketches, goes into more detail and tells me about the first changes. We shan't have much time, he says; shooting will be starting in three and a half months time, the studios are reserved and the dates must be stuck to strictly, since the premiere has already been announced for May 1979. The most important thing of all is A/ien Ill, the superstar, the great monster \u2014 the creature by which the film lives and almost the whole of the cast dies. The film is to be shot in Shepperton Studios in England. Preparations have already begun in the offices of Scott Free Productions in Lexington Street. (Before his first production, The Duellists, Scott had produced advertising films with his brother) | am told | must negotiate my fee with Twentieth Century Fox. All this tumbles over me, and Scott talks so fast that I'm afraid | shall only understand half of what he \u2018says. Even during lunch the torrent of words never stops. After I've taken the three of them to the airport in the evening and am alone again, my head is still buzzing. I'm absolutely exhausted, and a bit worried too that in these circumstances | may not become creative in time. 14 February 1978 Zdrich to London by air, first class. A liveried chauffeur from Twentieth Century Fox meets me at the airport and takes me straight to the Hyde Park Hotel. With my black leather suitcase in one hand and a plastic brief-case in the other, | feel very out of place in this famous hotel. The commissionaires stare at me as if they thought I'd got the hotel mixed up with a museum."}
{"id": "gigers-alien", "title": "Giger's Alien", "year": 1979, "seq": 2, "text": "The cross-vagina bit is now made in rubber latex from the plaster negative and dried in an oven. The rest of the egg is cast in the rubber mould in transparent polyester. The polyester egg and the rubber vagina are joined together and the whole thing finally handed over to the special effects department, which has to fit the opening mechanism to the egg. The other 130 eggs are made either of plaster or of polyester. 3 September 1978, Shepperton Studios, plasterers\u2019 workshop In the original film the floor where the eggs stand was meant to give the impression of being slimy and full of worms. Working in day, | model a sort of carpet with streaks and snaky folds, in the shape of a half-segment of a circle. The plaster form is spread with a thin coat of latex (plates 381a-d) and then frothed up. Even before it's painted, one begins to get the feeling that this long shape could become life-like. 9 October 1978, Shepperton Studios, Stage A Another great day. My eggsilo is filmed. The turntable with the pilot is replaced by a central track and the eggs. Some laser specialists, based in a villa next to the studios belonging to Roger Daltry of The Who, have installed two laser-guns. A blue film of light permeated by smoke and drizzling rain now lies mysteriously over the eggs. Above, from the scaffolding, the astronaut is slowly let down into the depths. John Hurt, the actor, doesn't do this himself; it's done by a stunt-man. He uses the chest- elements that the wall is made of as steps. Cautiously he gropes his way along the track between the eggs, slips and falls into the middle of them. Picking himself up, he staggers forwards as if drunk on the slightly yielding floor."}
{"id": "gigers-alien", "title": "Giger's Alien", "year": 1979, "seq": 3, "text": "Giger 56 ALIEN 23 February 1978, Shepperton Studios Alien lil is the monster, the superstar, the title-role of the film, O'Bannon had used a monster before, in his film Dark Star. For that they used a balloon the size of a medicine-ball which hopped about on two hands. To begin with we weren't clear what the Alien in Alien ought to look like. Scott definitely wasn't going to have some ordinary cinema monster stamping stiffly and awkwardly through the film. We carried out some tests in Scott's office with a group of people, including some children. Scott thought that a big man with some children strapped to him and the whole group \u2018wrapped up\u2019 in rubber might produce a monster with a number of movable extremities. We tried the idea out several times, but had to accept that it gave rise to too many problems. The possibility of building a robot Alien was rejected for reasons of safety. There could be no absolute control over it when it was armed; the actor might get hurt, or even killed, during a fight. After endless discussion we decide to make our Alien insect-like and elegant. It adds to the horror through the swift, fierce attacks it makes and by the way it's filmed. There's very little time to design it, especially since experience has taught us that the real problems only arise when the designs are being executed. It seems almost an impossibility to me to create a really credible monster. Behind every film monster | always see a human being, well or less well disguised; they give me no sort of shock at all, My sketches, completed in a very short time, are discussed. I've given a function to the long shape of the head; it conceals a long tongue, with sharp teeth, which the Alien can flick out like an anteater (plates 372, 373 and 378)."}
{"id": "gigers-alien", "title": "Giger's Alien", "year": 1979, "seq": 4, "text": "Rambaldi, a charming, extraordinary man, can virtually only speak Italian, although he\u2019s been several years in America. The great cases are carefully unpacked and we monster-makers wait on tiptoe to see what has happened to our polyester. We are not disappointed. Rambaldi had done a marvellous job. This is confirmed by the English engineer who is working on the spare head. It looks like a fossil that has fallen victim to a brilliant amateur carpenter. Carlo has built a substructure on the lines of our model cranium, housing a highly complex mechanism. The face muscles etc. can be moved individually by hand, using ten cables. Scott has the idea of covering the face muscles with preservatives. 30 August 1978, Shepperton Studios Rambaldi has now been here a week. Originally he was only going to stay for three days. He has to remodel his Alien\u2019s head, which looks a bit like an ape. We've got six Allen's heads \u2014 one mechanized, one distance- controlled and fully mechanized (but not working properly yet), one half mechanized, two unmechanized and one made of plastic foam, which the stunt-man wears for falling from a great height. All these heads have to represent Alien Ill, so we 8 405: Model for silver Alien walking-stick handle 405a: Final preparations for entrance of Alien Ill 405b: Alien lil in action (actual scene) 405c: Alien Illin action (actual scene) can't have a version looking like King Kong. Meanwhile Shirley, Patty and Butler have got the Alien's two-metre (six-foot) tail ready. The engineer is given the job of bringing it to life. There's a demonstration in his workshop every week, which always shows that it isn't working yet. | believe Rambaldi when he says that the mechanism in the tail is too heavy and that it will never work properly."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1973-09-27", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1973-09-27 : Volume LXIX, Issue 2", "year": 1973, "seq": 0, "text": "This is particularly true for populous Third World nations, which must then face the prospect of violent revolution to establish some form of socialism, or of continued exploitation and neglect from developed capitalist or state-capitalist countries. The first alternative \u2014 violent revolution \u2014 results all too easily in dictatorial government in nations which have no established democratic tradition. The second alternative, a continuation of matters as they stand now, can only result in a slow and collective death for millions of individuals and for the \u201cThird World\u201d as a whole. And so what of Chile and Sweden, these grand ex\u00ac periments in establishing the century-old dream of democratic socialism? The existence of socialist governments in both seems somewhat anomalous; in geopolitical and economic terms, they are peripheral nations in the international system. But neither is so far removed that events in them have no applicability elsewhere. Though it is somewhat developed economically, Chile remains a Third World nation, with a colonial heritage, a sizeable lumpen-proletariat, a markedly unequal distribution of land and wealth, and an un\u00ac favorable economic position internationally. Sweden boasts highly developed technology and industry, and an educated and affluent populace. Some 40% of Swedish investments lie in other countries. It is a tribute to the Marxist intellectual tradition, if not to its political one, that recent events in Chile and Sweden are best understood in Marxist terms. Chile It is not generally known that state ownership and control of industry and mining has been practiced since the 1930\u2019s in Chile. The government which preceded Allende\u2019s, that of Eduardo Frei and the Christian Democrats, hoped to extend this control. Consequently, it was not through direct appropriation of the means of production that the established order in Chile was threatened. A large part of problem was simply bad economic practice by Allende\u2019s government."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1973-09-27", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1973-09-27 : Volume LXIX, Issue 2", "year": 1973, "seq": 1, "text": "It issued far too much currency in attempting to better the fate of the many urban and rural squatters, and the dispossessed in general. With inflation rampant, the economic position of the middle class was being undermined; it reacted with a series of strikes, most notably that of the vital trucking industry. Lenin claimed that the final phase of capitalism was imperialism. Whether we are witnessing the final phase of capitalism is a moot point, but as the primary capitalist power, the United States is not wholly blameless for the fall of Chilean socialism. ITT plans for preventing the installation of Allende as president, and then for toppling his govrnment by exerting American economic muscle; were, as such, rejected. But it is important to note that key elements of that plan eventually became American policy. Credit was cut off to Chile by the American-controlled World Bank and Export-Import Bank, and the U.S. demanded immediate payment of Chilean debts and cut off most other forms of aid to Allende. Some labor unions were also instrumental in fomenting the economic crisis which now plagues Chile. It is ironic to note that many of the leaders of these unions received training in labor relations from the AFL-CIO through beneficent Uncle Sam\u2019s \u201cforeign aid\u201d program. It is easy to imagine other more overt subversive American activities in Chile, though speculation has not yet been substantiated. As Allende\u2019s widow points out, for instance, how did the striking truck drivers and owners manage to survive through a fifty-day strike with no visible means of support? Allende, of course, was also hurt by political factions on the all-too-fragmented Left who urged more rapid, and if necessary, violent, appropriation of bourgeois continued on p. 10 the middlebury campus page 2 Dr."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1973-09-27", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1973-09-27 : Volume LXIX, Issue 2", "year": 1973, "seq": 2, "text": "Highway Dept. representatives estimated that the new or refurbished Rt. 7 would not be completed for six to ten years. As federal money will be used in the construction of Rt. 7, the road is subject to federal regulations. These regulations require that no construction take place on floodplains or above 2500 ft., and that the road have a four-lane right-of-way. The four-lane right-of-way regulation has created quite a stir in certain sectors. Some people envision an interstate high\u00ac way through Middlebury. One highway public relations man tried to allay these fears by assuring residents that a four-lane road from Connecticut to Burlington is not an interstate. The four-lane right-of-way requirement is made so that when traffic increases and more lanes are required, the land will be available along the existing roadway. The need for future highway expansion makes the present decision on where to locate this bypass crucial. The state does not have enough money now for a four- lane road along the whole Rt. 7 corridor. It will only build four lanes where present demand is great \u2014 in and around towns. In ten to fifteen years when traffic on Rt. 7 is expected to be double what it is now, the sections btween the four-lane bypasses will become four-lane as well to meet this demand. After the presentation by the Highway Dept., the meeting was opened to discussion. A Waltham Selectman questioned any attempts to cover more farm land with concrete when there is already a food shortage. He also worried about the future of businesses along the present Rt. 7 if a new Rt. 7 were built. He favored limiting construction to im\u00ac provement of the present road. John Clagett, an English professor at the College, asked if there were any truth to a headline that appeared in the Addison Independent which said \u201cEastern Bypass: \u2018Take It or Leave It\u201d."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1973-09-27", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1973-09-27 : Volume LXIX, Issue 2", "year": 1973, "seq": 3, "text": "What exists now is at rock bottom, but at least it is not get\u00ac ting any worse. It is equally puzzling why the Army has not closed down its outpost in Middlebury on its own initiative. Off- the-cuff estimates of the total costs to the Army for maintaining the unit here run as high as $200,000 per year (mostly financial aid, allowances, and salaries). make the infirmary as complete and comfortable as possible. ' Along this line another important development oc\u00ac curred only two years ago. Until that time Dr. Parton had operated under the assumption that students were primarily under the care of family physicians, who were responsible for any major or long term treat\u00ac ment. During a discussion with several students, he realized that today\u2019s more mobile college students often are away from home most of the year, and do not have a family physician any more. It has become necessary for many students to depend on Dr. Parton for treatment he would once have referred to family doctors. The problem was considered, and the expansion of campus medical services was planned. After presenting the new policy to the Trustees, services which were more complete than ever before were offered in the fall of 1972. This new policy came into being at a time when the Student Sex Information Service (then the Student Sex Counseling Service) was still an infant organization. In fact, individuals from the SSCS had been proponents of the policy. Birth Control Measures At that time there was a appalling number of un\u00ac wanted pregnancies at Middlebury \u2014 30 to 50 a year were reported to the infirmary. One of the long term treatments added to the services offered in 1972 was prescriptions for the birth control pill. The number of pregnancies has shrunk to about ten. Although many things have influenced this im\u00ac provement, Dr."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1973-09-27", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1973-09-27 : Volume LXIX, Issue 2", "year": 1973, "seq": 4, "text": "Four women are in the program this year (three freshman women and one sophomore) as part of a national effort to reach the young women of college age who would be willing to serve in the Army. In addition to making ROTC appear more progressive and open-minded, it serves to increase overall enrollments at a time when \u2018\u2018body counts\u201d are very important to the program. The Army can no longer afford to turn willing volunteers away on the basis of sex. Another enrollment-boosting scheme is to permit students ( men and women) at Castleton State to take ROTC through the Middlebury unit. This program could be expected to draw ten or fifteen freshmen and sophomores this year, and the potential exists for expansion as the program gathers momentum there. This would bolster the Middlebury program and make it less likely to be eliminated. As can be seen, ROTC at Middlebury is moving out of the doldrums this year. New ideas are being tried out, and new constituencies are being appealed to. New money is flowing into the program (seven out of ten scholarship applications in the last three years were successful), and graduate and medical school fellowship programs are receiving renewed attention. What remains to be seen, however, are the results of these initiatives. The real attitudes of the student body are now a great unknown to the Army, since three years of a tactfully low profile reduced two-way communications to a near standstill. The Army and the student body have been way out of touch with each other for this period of time. The Army could get its young officers elsewhere, but for its own reasons it is trying to get them here. The student body has changed in these years too, but no one knows yet how or how much."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1973-09-27", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1973-09-27 : Volume LXIX, Issue 2", "year": 1973, "seq": 5, "text": "Advertising executive Mel Helitzer candidly noted one of the goals: \u201cChildren can be very successful naggers. By and large parents quite readily purchase products urged upon them by their youngsters. In Helitzer Advertising\u2019s research, it was found that a parent will pay 20% more for an advertised product with child appeal \u2014 even when a less expensive, non- Rambling and Scrambling By NATHANIEL FORBES Yahoos on the Run Middlebury\u2019s traditional yahoos are looking over their shoulders these days. Rumors about a change in the structure and function of fraternities at Midd. hit print this summer with the College\u2019s official statement of their position in an epistle which we all received, covered with a letter from the Pres. All fraternity presidents were warned in a personal letter that the omnipotent eyeball was watching them. Seems the college wants to wrangle financial control of the old mansions, beer and brethren notwithstanding. Now that the academic year is under way, some backfield maneuvers appear to be in progress. Fraternal financiers have been looking deep into their ledgers, calculating what it\u2019s going to take to dodge the tackle. Some folks, we understand, have informally engaged counsel to find out what kind of legal ground they stand on, and phones have been ringing at national fraternity offices (DU, Chi Psi, Zeta Psi, and KDR are nationals) with cries for some extra-legal downfield blocking. The College (that is, the Administration) thus far has been silent on the subject of frats, largely due to the hoopla which is certain to be heard in the near future over the Committee on the College Report. Not a good idea to be caught fighting on two fronts at the same time. This week, however, the Deans of the College, as promised, \u201cwill be entering into discussion . . . regarding fraternities at Middlebury.\u201d End of the week, the Deans and the frat presidents will be getting together for a little confab."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1973-09-27", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1973-09-27 : Volume LXIX, Issue 2", "year": 1973, "seq": 6, "text": "Little Pamela Kastner of Rochester, New York, had the right initiative when she wrote us complaining of deceptive advertising. \u201cI\u2019d like to know what I can do about things like that,\u201d she asked. The New Republic Feature Syndicate fine idea, but one that\u2019s sure to put some people on pins and needles for some time to come ... What Else Will We Drink? It was observed at the Student Forum Breadloaf Retreat that the before-lunch beverage was none other than good old Chablis Blanc in the half-gallon bottle. The bottles were empty before someone realized that some farmworker out West was probably starving or taking a beating at the hands of the Teamsters who bring Gallo wine to Middlebury, Vermont. Yes, indeed, connoisseurs, the vintages of Ernest and Julio Gallo have joined the list of produce items the United Farm Workers have labeled taboo. According to a press release from the New York Interfaith Committee to Aid Migrant Farmworkers, the Gallo Corporation \"has repeatedly rejected the idea of free union elections. It is siding with the Teamsters against the workers (UFW leader, CesariChavez represents.\u201d College students everywhere will no doubt greet this new boycott with dismay. Gallo produces several Saturday night favorites, such as Spanada, Boone\u2019s Farm, and the familiar variety poisons in the green glass bottles at your local super. A no-no on those reliables will force many of us to reach for more expensive substitutes such as.Almaden, Paul Masson, and New York\u2019s Taylor brands. Middlebury students have in the past found it somewhat difficult to express their opposition to the Teamsters with respect to the lettuce and table grape boycott. The College, as far as we know, still buys non- UFW lettuce (and grapes) and serves it up twice a day. day."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1973-09-27", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1973-09-27 : Volume LXIX, Issue 2", "year": 1973, "seq": 7, "text": "Can we go from two lanes to four to eight, and then to sixteen lanes? If the doubling factor is the reasoning behind the first increase then we can only hope that some other reasoning is used when the next doubling time comes. Before it is too late we must ask whether or not Vermont can afford to give way to the growth syn\u00ac drome. Most of the state\u2019s economy is based on farms and touristry, which require open space. We can\u2019t cater to the automobile forever or we\u2019ll cover all of our land with concrete. 1 can\u2019t help but wonder why mass transit was not seriously discussed as an alternative at the meeting. If we plan now we won\u2019t have to commit ourselves to the automobile, as New York and New Jersey have. When I asked one of the highway planners about the possibility of developing an integrated mass transit system to supply the transportation needs of the future, he said that it was not economically feasible because it would necessitate coming through every half hour. How quickly they forget their own arguments; if demand requires a four-lane road then we must sup\u00ac ply it at all costs. For some reason the law of supply and demand does not seem to apply to mass transit. It is pretty obvious that there are limits to growth and that the growth of the automobile can not continue much longer without a major shift in technology. There is not an infinite amount of land, fuel, or raw materials with which to accomodate the automobile. There is only so much air pollution and congestion that we can cope with. Another issue that was not covered at the meeting was whether or not there is a real \u201cneed\u201d for a four- lane road."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1973-09-27", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1973-09-27 : Volume LXIX, Issue 2", "year": 1973, "seq": 8, "text": "The townspeople at the meeting who have convinced themselves that there is a real need for a lour-lane bypass spent most of the meeting fighting over whose land the bypass should go through. Only one person questioned the sanity of the con\u00ac tention that there is a \u201cneed\u201d or, if there really is, whether or not we should cater to it in this way. Since road improvements generally lead to increased traffic, we may be faced with a self-fulfilling prophesy. Those people who previously decided to come to Vermont via train, bus or plane, and those who didn\u2019t come at all because of road conditions, may decide to come by car next time. We must also consider that a lot of the traffic that presently takes Rt. 89 and Rt. 91 to New York will want to take the more direct Rt. 7 once it is improved. This will draw more traffic through Middlebury. If we are ultimately going to have a bypass, we must consider where it will go. Any decision that is made now as to location must recognize that all of Rt. 7 will someday be four lanes. Therefore, it isn\u2019t wise to have the relocated or ex\u00ac panded Rt. 7 going through present or potential residential land, such as the proposed eastern bypass would do. Nor is it a good idea to have it go through farmers\u2019 pastureland, as the proposed western bypass would do. A four-lane road through town past the elementary and high school is definitely out of the question. Since there doesn't seem to be any good solution to the highway dilemma we should re-examine the whole premise that it is built on. This premise, however, is probably much more far reaching than Vermont can cope with on its own. Admittedly, the highway department is doing its job, catering to supply and demand."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1973-09-27", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1973-09-27 : Volume LXIX, Issue 2", "year": 1973, "seq": 9, "text": "This film is a benefit for the Bristol Buyers Club, a food cooperative for low income people. On October 5 Marion Edey, Chairperson for the League of Conservation Voters, will speak in Proctor Lounge at 7:30 on \u201cDavid vs. Goliath; Environmental Lobbying.\u201d She will discuss what is involved in the lobbying process and what it is like to be up against the well-paid lobbyists of the big corporations. The recycling program will begin in the next week or so. Start saving your papers and we\u2019ll let you know where to put them in the next issue of the Campus. For those of you who have complaints or suggestions; the following is a list of EQ\u2019s officers: Tom Plumb, President Sherry Haydock, Vice President , Julie MacLeod, Treasurer Cindia Cameron, Secretary John Germanow, Activities Coordinator Peter Glick, Speakers Chairperson Sheara Friend, Publicity Director Sally Skinner, Films Chairperson Threats to socialist states: continued from p. 1 wealth. In the light of recent events, however, the party .of the revolutionary Left may have been right in insisting that their workers\u2019 army was the best means of in\u00ac suring socialism in Chile. But it will be some time, it seems, before we again see any form of socialism in that corner of the world. Sweden Sweden, of course, is a different case. In that country the united Left \u2014 the Social Democrats and the much smaller Communist Party \u2014 have ruled for some 35 years, and will continue to rule for at least another three years as a result of the recent election. Their majority in the Richstag, the Swedish parliament, has narrowed, however, and the Center- Right coalition opposing them may now hold as many seats as the Left. A Visit to Sweden The results of the election were not wholly unan\u00ac ticipated. I visited Sweden for a week in March of this year, and the feeling then was that the Social Democrats were facing a tough election."}
{"id": "worldwide-dismay-at-kim-dae-jung-martyrdom", "title": "Worldwide Dismay at Kim Dae Jung Martyrdom", "year": 1980, "seq": 0, "text": "Pedaling Too Softly on Chun\u2019s Crackdown by Mike Chinoy, The Asian Wall Street Journal, Oct. 22, 1980 Mike Chinoy, a Hong Kong\u2014based reporter for NBC News, recently completed a month-long assignment in South Korea. KWANGJU \u2014 The death sentence ordered a month ago for former pre- sidential candidate Kim Dae-Jung is merely the most visible manifestation of a nationwide wave of repression harsh even by the authoritarian standards of South Korea. While international attention has focused primarily on the sedition case against the 54-year-old opposition leader, hundreds of other Korean dissidents have also been facing military trials at the hands of President Chun Doo- Hwan\u2019s martial law regime. Thousands more, deemed by the government to be politically or socially undesirable, have been forced from their jobs, expelled from their schools or detained as \u201chooligans\u2019\u2019 and sent to re-education camps. The most significant and potentially most explosive of the trials which have followed the Kim verdict is taking place in Kwangju, the scene of a bloody anti-government insurrection last May. Hundreds of people were killed in the uprising when soldiers clashed with demonstrators demanding an end to martial law and the restoration of democracy. Since then, there has been an uneasy calm in the city, due in large part to the continued presence of armed soldiers on the streets, military checkpoints, a greatly expanded network of police informers and a continuing roundup of dissidents. But beneath the surface, Kwangju is bitter and tense. Posters hailing Presi- dent Chun\u2019s recent inauguration were repeatedly defaced, and eventually had to be protected by armed guards. Copies of the government\u2019s just-published constitution have been torn from local billboards. The atmosphere has been further inflamed by the current trial. Unlike the proceedings against Kim Dae-Jung, which were open to diplomatic observers and local and foreign journalists, the Kwangju trial is being held in absolute ee secrecy before a five-man military tribunal at an army base just outside the city."}
{"id": "worldwide-dismay-at-kim-dae-jung-martyrdom", "title": "Worldwide Dismay at Kim Dae Jung Martyrdom", "year": 1980, "seq": 1, "text": "The only acknowledgement of it the authorities have made was a report published in two local newspapers on September 18 that the trial of 175 people accused of participating in the springtime protests was underway. The government gave no details and has suppressed all other domestic and foreign press reports. Dissident sources say the 175 have been charged with offenses ranging from disturbing public order to sedition. The sources report that most of those fac- ing lesser charges have already been convicted and given jail terms of up to 20 years. Now, the trial has moved into its final phase, with the arraignment on sedi- tion charges of 13 prominent local citizens described by the government as the ringleaders of the uprising. The 13 include Myong Ro-Kuen, a distinguished professor of English at Kwangju\u2019s Chonnam National University, Oh Byong- Moon, a former dean of the university, the president and secretary-general of the Kwangju Young Men\u2019s Christian Association, two priests and several well- known lawyers and academics. All of them could face the death penalty. The government\u2019s indictment claims the 13 maintained clandestine links with Kim Dae-Jung and incited the population to revolt. The defendants have denied the charges, pointing out that they were members of a committee which tried to mediate between the protesters and the army last spring in the hope of avoiding further bloodshed. Whatever the truth, those on trial have been denied lawyers of their choice and provided instead with government-appointed attorneys. Moreover, friends and relatives of the 13 claim they have been beaten and in some cases stripped naked and interrogated while in prison. The trial in Kwangju is not the only sign of the regime\u2019s continuing cam- paign to eliminate its political opponents and consolidate its hold on power. In recent weeks, several hundred young dissidents have been secretly tried in Seoul for participating in protest rallies last spring."}
{"id": "worldwide-dismay-at-kim-dae-jung-martyrdom", "title": "Worldwide Dismay at Kim Dae Jung Martyrdom", "year": 1980, "seq": 2, "text": "They would rather see these handled roughly by the generals\u2019 popu- list rhetoric than challenged by workers\u2019 demands. The silence of some Koreans, the evasive answers given by others, and the indifference or resignation of those who do agree to talk about their country\u2019s predicament, contrast with noisy demonstrations of support for the \u201cnew leader.\u201d In Seoul, Chun Doo Hwan\u2019s swearing-in as President was feted on everything from bunting to cigarette packs. The truth is that for many Koreans there is virtually no alternative solution to restoring \u201cParkism.\u201d\u2019 Impotence and apprehension are part of the numbness that has seized Koreans. The new regime began its rule with the political trial of opposition leader Kim Dae Jung, symbol during the past decade of the democratic strug- gle, and 23 codefendants. Memories of the repression of the Kwangju riots by paratroops are still fresh: whatever the number of dead (179 according to the authorities, at least twice as many according to other sources), the event made a deep impression because of the army\u2019s brutality when it went in. The newspapers are more restricted than ever in what they can publish, but nobody remains uninformed about what happened, and there\u2019s little doubt in the minds of many that Chun played a part. The lesson drawn from the event by circles hostile to the regime is that now that Chun has the country in his grasp he will brook no opposition: all protest is likely to be regarded as sedi- tion and put down as such. Tradition of Dissidence There is a tradition of intellectual dissidence and opposition in Korea which dates back to the beginning of the century: even the Japanese colonial jugger- naut wasn\u2019t able to crush it. The Chun regime is accepted with resignation by many Koreans and out of self-interest by others, but intellectuals find it much harder to swallow."}
{"id": "worldwide-dismay-at-kim-dae-jung-martyrdom", "title": "Worldwide Dismay at Kim Dae Jung Martyrdom", "year": 1980, "seq": 3, "text": "They\u2019d be after the people at the top.\u201d Eee oe Attitudes toward the US In the past the human rights movement in south Korea has been unclear on the question of what kind of action it wanted from the US government. Those who wanted strong sanctions by the US against Park Chung Hee \u2014 for example, withdrawal of the support of military aid and troops \u2014 were in the minority and were not among the internationally best known Christian leaders. Most appeals boiled down to requesting symbolic actions, quiet diplomacy or lec- tures from the US. Many people seemed to believe that despite the long years of US support for Park Chung Hee, that in the end the US would help Koreans establish democracy. An American reported that in Kwangju he was repeatedly begged to \u201cPlease get the American troops to come to Kwangju and save us.\u201d It was ironic that the official appeal of the Kwangju Citizens Committee for US mediation was censored off the air of Armed Forces Radio in Korea, on orders of a US General. American support of Chun during the Kwangju incident and during the past two months seems to have created major changes in activists\u2019 attitudes toward the US. In Kwangju an American told us he saw cans of tear gas with \u201c\u201cMade in the USA\u201d on them, and that Koreans he knew assumed that all the weapons used against them came from America. Over and over we heard of Koreans\u2019 horror that US General Wickham released Korean troops under his command to reimpose Chun\u2019s power in Kwangju. It was pointed out to us that in 1960, when people rebelled against Syngman Rhee, the US refused to release soliders to put down the civil disturbances. The US is perceived as much more con- cerned about maintaining its friendship with Chun and the other generals than with the Korean people."}
{"id": "montanarailplann6433mont", "title": "Montana rail planning newsletter", "year": 1980, "seq": 0, "text": "This study is being undertaken jointly by the Departments of Highways and Agriculture. This article is intended to provide in- sight into the approach being utilized by the contractor \u2014 Roger CREIGHTON ASSOCIATES, Incorporated of Delmar, NY. Similar studies have often relied on analytical techniques such as linear programming to accomplish market distribution and costing functions. The former refers to allocating the grain pro- duced among the various receiving markets generally on the basis of minimizing total transport costs. Unfortunately, this ap- proach ignores the competition taking place in the marketing of grain \u2014 that overall transport costs will never be minimized when multiple firms compete for available business. On the other hand, a grain company or cooperative will seek to minimize its own transport costs to improve its efficiency, expand its share of the market, and increase its profits. The markets for Montana wheat and barley are quite well known. A majority of wheat produced winds up at export houses located in Portland or nearby ports on the Columbia River. A smaller portion is shipped to flour mills in Washington. Barley destinations vary depending upon the quality of the product, which is heavily influenced by weather. It either moves to malt houses (most of which are located in the midwest) or feed lots in Oregon or Washington. Only export wheat moves in sufficient quantities to take advantage of the economies of scale offered by the unit train. Flour mills and malt houses generally have con- gested rail unloading facilities; they have neither the track capaci- ty nor the annual volume necessary to support unit train opera- tions. Nor is their any concentration of such facilities in a par- ticular area. Starting in 1975, the Montana Department of Agriculture has maintained extensive transport information on grain originating within the State. This coupled with other shipment data obtained from the Burlington Northern and Milwaukee, as well as other sources, has provided a fairly complete historical picture of the variation in grain shipments, destinations and model usage over time."}
{"id": "montanarailplann6433mont", "title": "Montana rail planning newsletter", "year": 1980, "seq": 1, "text": "Given the above, the contractor has been able to allocate wheat movements among the different export markets and modes on an empirical basis. Up until late 1976, most (say 90 percent) Montana wheat moved by rail; since then, car supply and local service problems coupled with the construction of grain terminals at Lewiston, ID and other downstream river ports has resulted in a sizable diversion of Montana-produced wheat shifting to motor carrier transport. Also a factor is the competitiveness of rail and truck rates. Having solved the allocation problem, the work comes down to costing out the various transport alternatives between farm and market. In considering solutions such as the grain subterminal, the underlying premise is that its feasibility first depends upon establishing whether the unit costs are less and the quantities great enough to economically justify the facility, assuming initial- ly that the institutional problems can be worked out. The follow- ing discussion and schematic figures are designed to illustrate the process involved. Figures 1 and 2 depict the present grain marketing system in Montana. Rather than deal with individual farms, counties pro- ducing significant amounts of wheat and barley have been divid- ed into a series of grain-producing units (GPU's) for which in- dependent data are available from the Montana Soil Conservation Service on total grain production by year. Nearly all of the grain produced is marketed through country elevators or grain public warehouses (GPW's), as illustrated by Figure 1. Transport is by five district modes or modal combinations as indicated in Figure FIGURE 1 \\^_ Wheat/Barley Markets FIGURE 2 (gpuj farm vehicles \\ \\ grain truck, truck / water, or rail \"track buyers\" grain truck or ' farm vehicle/ rail j Markets | FIGURE 3 grain truck I Markets i FIGURE 4 Domestic Markets Export Markets 2. Most grain moves by farm truck to grain public warehouses, although increasing amounts are moving directly to markets via grain trucks or farm vehicle/rail, thus bypassing the elevators."}
{"id": "montanarailplann6433mont", "title": "Montana rail planning newsletter", "year": 1980, "seq": 2, "text": "Roughly, two-thirds of the grain marketed by grain public warehouses still moves by rail, although sizable amounts are presently moving by grain truck/barge through the Port of Lewiston and other Snake River ports. A small amount of grain traffic moves all-the-way by truck. The addition of a grain subterminal to the transport pipeline is illustrated by Figure 3. As visualized, this facility supplements rather than replaces existing elevators by functioning as an assembly point for large quantities of wheat, which can then move by unit train to the export houses in and around Portland. Grain would be transported to the subterminal by grain trucks. This concept differs somewhat from the multi-car rate structure presently being developed by the Burlington Northern. Under pro- posed rate structures, elevator operators located along a seg- ment of track serviced by the same local freight could jointly ar- range for the spotting of some 52 to 54 covered hoppers compris- ing a full train. Applicable rates would be a function of the number of loading points; the fewer the number, the lower the rate. Ship- pers would be given a minimum time period within which to load out the cars, which would then be reassembled into a train for movement to a single destination. This concept is similar to the \"grain train\" previously tried and still advocated by some. The Burlington Northern concept is short-term \u2014 it cannot of- fer the transportation cost reductions potentially possible through the operation of a dedicated train. The main difference is that under the grain subterminal concept, movements would be from a single point to a single destination on a regularly schedul- ed basis, rather than as a one-time or irregular movement. The multiple car rate structure being developed by the Burlington Northern does offer the possibility of immediate transport cost savings if the elevator operators are willing to cooperate in their marketing and transportation decisions."}
{"id": "montanarailplann6433mont", "title": "Montana rail planning newsletter", "year": 1980, "seq": 3, "text": "It does get around pres- ent infrastructure limitations (mainly the lack of suitable trackage and the ability to load out 50 or more carloads in 24 hours without additional switches) which effectively preclude unit train opera- tions today. Figure 4 illustrates what might happen were a grain subter- minal implemented. Some grain would bypass both present elevators and the grain subterminal, as illustrated by possibility #1. Under possibility #2, a large portion of the grain would be marketed through the grain subterminal, although domestic markets would continue to be served by conventional service. Some elevators may choose not to market grain through grain subterminals at all, as illustrated by possibility #3. On the other hand, an elevator may choose to change past marketing patterns or the types of grains handled and route all of its grain through the subterminal, as illustrated by possibility #4. Finally some of the larger farmers might seek to deal with the subterminal direct- ly, by-passing existing elevators as indicated in possibility #5. The key is determining specifically the conditions (if any) under which transport cost reductions potentially achievable through unit train operations are greater than the amortized capital and operating cost of a grain subterminal plus any added truck transport costs involved in moving grain to the subterminal. To do this, the contractor will be testing three hypothetical scenarios. The first assumes that each elevator will make its own par- ticipatory decision based solely on which routing (i.e., direct to market or through a grain subterminal) costs less. The second, which represents the opposite situation, assumes that all elevators will participate in the program and market their export wheat through the nearest subterminal. The third scenario is bas- ed on the concept that all marketing and transport decisions will be transferred to operators physically located at grain subter- minals, and that the role of present elevators will be reduced to adjunct storage."}
{"id": "patientcaremanag19unit_1", "title": "Patient care management manual", "year": 1980, "seq": 0, "text": "Later, the United States Department of Health, Education, and Welfare (HEW) assumed an advocacy role. On June 21, 1974, HEW announced a campaign to upgrade the quality of care provided in the Nation's nursing homes. Phase I of the campaign was a fact-finding study. The study was designed by agencies involved in long- term care and health care consultants and was implemented by teams of professionals who visited selected long-term care and health care facilities to review the care provided and a sample of patients. One of its most important specific findings was that the survey and certification process focuses on a facility's capability to deliver care, rather than determining if quality care was provided. A New Focus and Approach Emphasis on the capability of the institution to provide care was shifted to a new focus \u2014 the improvement of the patient's total care within the institution. To sharpen this focus, the goals for long- term care were defined in terms of maintaining or improving the patient's physical and psychosocial status at an optimal level. It was further concluded that a holistic approach to total patient health care was needed to meet these goals. Originally, a tool (PACE I) and a process were developed so that health personnel could systematical- ly identify needs of patients, plan appropriate care to meet those needs, and evaluate the outcomes of that care. Followinga Feasibility Study conducted in 19 States encompassing all 10 HEW Regions, PACE I was revised to incorporate suggestions from over 500 individuals, including providers. State and Federal personnel, professional and consumer organizations. The revised version is presented as PACE II in this document. The Patient Care Management ( PCM ) process is not only a group of structured activities leading to individualized patient care, but is a way of thought. Providers of nursing care will be able to either use the PACE II instrument or their own patient appraisal form."}
{"id": "patientcaremanag19unit_1", "title": "Patient care management manual", "year": 1980, "seq": 1, "text": "It should be remembered, however, that 1 whatever instrument is used, patient assessment is only the first part of the process. Care planning and evaluation must be included as well. This document will explain how the process works with the sample instrument (illustrated with two case studies). Hints for teaching and how the PACE student can test himself with review questions will be found in the PCM Coordinator's Manual Supplement. The PCM Process Patient Care Management is a systematic process of patient assessment, care planning, and evaluation of care in both institutional and non-institutional settings. Beginning with patient appraisal, an appro- priate assessment instrument guides the user through orderly procedures designed to make it easier to identify a patient's problems and needs. Problem identification, in turn, allows for individualized care- planning. Later the patient is reappraised, the outcomes of previous care evaluated, and new care plans devised, if necessary. The process is always patient-centered. As the patient's dimensions of care change, his needs are measured, and responded to with repeated care- planning and goal-setting by the health care team. It is important to maintain this pattern in order to reflect the broader orientation of socio-medical needs instead of medical dependency. An appropriate patient appraisal instrument ensures that background and appraisal data are collected. Based on these data, appropriate care planning is undertaken to meet identified needs. Care evaluation is done periodically to assess the outcomes of care. Based on the evaluation, new goals may need to be set and the care plan revised. A sample appraisal form with detailed schedules, and Care Planning and Goal Achievement Summary Forms appear in a later section (pages 27-41) of this document. Although references are made to specific portions of the sample instrument, the principles may be applied to the comparable portions of the facility's own documents."}
{"id": "patientcaremanag19unit_1", "title": "Patient care management manual", "year": 1980, "seq": 2, "text": "Development of an Appraisal Instrument The appraisal instrument should be developed so that the health care team can get a comprehensive and objective picture of a patient. In review, the underlying principles that were followed in the development and structuring of PACE and selection of its contents were : \u2022 Patient-Centered \u2014 All items of information are ' oriented toward the patient. They describe an individual as he is at the time of the appraisal or reappraisal, rather than describing the setting in which he is located. \u2022 Multidimensional \u2014 The information obtained is multidimensional. It describes the patient's status from the perspectives of his socio-demographic background, his strengths, weaknesses, impair- ments, physical functions, social and psychologi- cal capacity, and the care he is receiving. \u2022 Objective \u2014 The items of information are objec- tive, rather than subjective in form. This promotes agreement among persons who observe patients and record their observations by using standard- ized definitions and terminology. \u2022 Relevant \u2014 All items are relevant to the ultimate purpose of the process. The completed appraisal becomes the basis for individualizing care planning where the ultimate goal is to optimize the functioning status of the individual. The sections of the sample instrument (PACE II) and their six major content elements include: 1. Admission data \u2014 Examines the current setting, the provider of the most previous care, and demographic characteristics of the patient; 2. Medical data \u2014 Includes current diagnosis for which the patient is receiving care as well as clinical tests and measurements; 3. Impairment record \u2014 Indicates the physical status of the skin, extremities, sensory/ commu- nication system, as the bowel and bladder; 4. Functional capacity \u2014 Summarizes the patient's capacity to move safely, carry out activities of daily living, eat and maintain his nutrition, and adjust to the social and physical environment; 5. Patient care data \u2014 Records information on special procedures or services the patient is receiving as well as current medications; 6."}
{"id": "patientcaremanag19unit_1", "title": "Patient care management manual", "year": 1980, "seq": 3, "text": "Aside from the basic data it contains, it may be necessary to complete schedules that describe the patient's status in greater detail, e.g., if the patient has a new diagnosis or is nearing discharge. (See Schedules A, B, C, PACE II.) TIMING THE APPRAISAL A Care Plan should be completed and implemented for every newly admitted long-term care patient as soon as the initial appraisal is finished, a health team care planning meeting has taken place, and a care plan devised and reviewed with a physician. THE INITIAL APPRAISAL Although much patient profile data may be obtained from records soon after admittance to a facility, when the appraisal process has started, it is wise to allow enough time to observe the patient and thus obtain accurate information about his functional and psycho- social status and any impairments he may have. If possible, these sections (especially psychosocial status) should be the last portions to be completed prior to the first care planning session. The Care Planning Process From the initial appraisal, the health care team abstracts and records multidimensional information about the patient, defining dysfunctions, impairments, and problems. Working together with the patient and his family, wherever possible, the team identifies and explores these concerns, establishes priorities, sets goals and puts together a care plan designed to help move the patient's function as close to those goals as possible. By determining the present level of function, the team, including the patient and his family, can decide on realistic, feasible, measurable goals designed to either maintain a current level or attain a new level of functioning. The care plan, including needed services and time- limited goals, is recorded on the Care Planning Form, that eventually becomes part of the patient's perma- nent record. However, while it is in use, it is kept in such a place to be readily available as a guide to all care givers."}
{"id": "patientcaremanag19unit_1", "title": "Patient care management manual", "year": 1980, "seq": 4, "text": "On the accuracy, the depth of inquiry, and the understanding of the patient it reflects, rests the potential for effective planning, providing, evaluating, and replanning care. During the appraisal process \u2014 the recording of observations \u2014 information will merge to form a multidimensional profile of a person. By using this initial process, various members of a health care team record the attributes that, carefully interpreted, can describe a unique individual's strengths and weak- nesses\u2014 physical, emotional, and social. These items, however, have no significance until they are interpreted by the collective judgment of the health care team. It is a prime purpose of the appraisal to go beyond the individual's problems that precipitated the need for long-term care, and to consider the dimen- sions of the patient's functioning status. The initial appraisal, and any reappraisal after giving care, becomes the unique base from which the health care team formulates a specially tailored total care plan. The PCM process in a facility is used to assess, plan, provide and evaluate care and reassess and replan care for reappraisal of patients on a continuing basis. To manage the system, if possible, one individual should be designated to coordinate and direct the activities in a small institution. In a large institution, different individuals may assume the following roles: PCM Coordinator may be a nurse administrator, or Director of Nursing Services, or a designated staff person in the long-term care facility who has the primary responsibility for guiding facility personnel in using the facility's appraisal instrument, and for organizing, directing, and facilitating the system. This person is responsible for assuring that personnel understand PCM (Patient Care Management), assist- ing personnel in learning how to use the facility's assessment instrument, and monitoring the quality of the PCM process within the facility. The PCM Coordinator also serves as liaison between the facility and quality assurance activities, including survey and certification, PSRO, utilization review and the like."}
{"id": "patientcaremanag19unit_1", "title": "Patient care management manual", "year": 1980, "seq": 5, "text": "In a small facility, the PCM Coordinator may also be the Chief PCM Appraiser. Chief PCM Appraiser is a staff person, usually a nurse in an administrative or supervisory position, in a long-term care facility who has the lead responsibility for the administration and completion of the facility's appraisal instrument for a group of patients. In a large facility, there may be more than one Chief Appraiser, where one Chief Appraiser may be assigned to each wing of the facility. PCM Appraiser is a staff person in a long-term care facility who applies various components of the facility's appraisal instrument to a patient at regular intervals (e.g., daily, monthly, or bimonthly). This person is most familiar with the patient and is responsible for working with appropriate members of the health care team from the various health disciplines who contribute to the appraisal. PROBLEM IDENTIFICATION Having completed the assessment for a patient, in whatever format the facility has chosen to use. the next step is to identify the problems affecting the patient and the care and supervision required. Even though a patient has an impairment or a problem, its existence may or may not be significant. An impairment becomes identified as a problem, if, in combination with other observations made throughout the appais- al, it is apparent that it contributes to some functional disability and that intervention is necessary and appropriate. Appraisal instruments provide a format for channeling and disciplining observations so that questions are asked that might not have been asked under other procedures. The Appraiser together with the health care team take the observations made in any one section of the instrument and examine them in the light of observa- tions made in other sections, as to their effects on functioning. The collective judgment of the team will lead to identification of different problems that are pertinent to the individual's health status and how they relate to one another."}
{"id": "patientcaremanag19unit_1", "title": "Patient care management manual", "year": 1980, "seq": 6, "text": "It clearly says when the new status is to be measured or compared with the old. In a large number of instances, goals exhibiting these characteristics can follow these models: Mrs. X Will (Change) (What) From (How Much) To (How Much) By (When) Staff Will (Do) (What) By (When) In coming to grips with the clear specifications of goals, the most common difficulties lie in stating goals in measurable terms, in clearly describing outcomes, and in assigning time frames. It should also be remembered that there can be goals for the staff as well as the patient, e.g., \"by the 15th of next month teach Mrs. X proper foot hygiene.\" When the goal is of the kind that expresses quality, look for an observable action or behavior that represents, is caused by, or is evidence of a change in that quality. For example, pain, which is entirely subjective, may be inferred from the number of requests for medication; or hostility by the number of angry exchanges with residents and staff. Try always to attach a quantifiable value to the evidence and specify the change desired in numerical terms. Outcomes will usually be expressed as a new condition or state of being. Try to find expressions that denote a state or condition \u2014 \"Blood pressure will be 150/90,\" or a behavior \u2014 \"Patient will demonstrate understanding,\" etc. Time limits must be stated so that they can be identified by a fixed reference. Specify both the beginning time and ending time, when possible, and attach dates or times of day. Say, \"By October 15th rather than \"By next month\" or \"In a month from now.\" Goals should be clearly stated and be congruent with the individual's medical regimen. Goals should be realistic, attainable and appropriate. Goals set too high cannot be met and may result in feelings of failure; goals set too low will not enable the patient to achieve his optimal level of functioning."}
{"id": "patientcaremanag19unit_1", "title": "Patient care management manual", "year": 1980, "seq": 7, "text": "The health care team will then decide the extent of the goal achieve- ment. By using the reappraisal data, a judgment is made as to whether 1) the patient's condition remains unchanged with respect to the goal; or 2) his behavior or condition indicates that the goal has been partially met; or 3) he has totally achieved the goal. At the same time, a review of the reappraisal, particularly the section on Patient Care (pp. 23-25, PACE II), will reveal whether services planned were actually given or not. The last column for comments provides an opportunity to indicate problems encoun- tered such as \"patient had second small stroke,\" or \"family continues to bring in foods not on diet, etc..\" Entries explaining reasons for failure to meet goals can be made in the columns. If a goal has only been partially met or not met at all. the team will decide if goals were unrealistic and reset them, if this is the case. It may be that the care plan needs modification so that the goal will be met. The team will then change the approaches to providing care so that the goal will be achieved. New goals will be set for achievement where the reappraisal data indicate new problems, impairments, or dysfunctions and care planned to meet these goals. SUMMARY The translation of data collected by means of the assessment to create an appropriate care plan requires a high degree of sensitivity and awareness on the part of each member of the health care team. In this phase the collective judgment, expertise, and experience of the team is brought to bear on drawing conclusions from data. It is here that facts and observations assessed and recorded on the appraisal must be related to each other. The solution for one individual will not necessarily be the same as for another, no matter how similar the problem."}
{"id": "patientcaremanag19unit_1", "title": "Patient care management manual", "year": 1980, "seq": 8, "text": "Record \"Tube Fed\" or \"Fed Parenterally\" under Remarks DENTAL/ORAL STATUS GENERAL INFORMATION Dental/ Oral Status block (QI-C), when completed, provides indications of the status of the natural teeth, if any, whether the individual has dentures (full or partial), and the status of the oral soft tissue. The Dental/ Oral Status examination may be completed by the Appraiser, who needs to use only a dental mirror and flashlight to observe the patient's teeth and mouth. Instructions Natural Teeth For each finding, as described below, put a check mark in the appropriate boxes. If there is no finding, put a dash in the appropriate box to indicate the test was performed, unless otherwise directed. If the patient has no natural teeth, check space titled : None. If none, go on to block entitled : Dentures: Complete or Partial. If the patient has natural teeth, indicate the approximate number present (upper and lower jaw, combined). Indicate if any tooth is decayed or fractured. Examine for looseness and pain by pushing gently against each natural tooth with the dental mirror. Indicate if any tooth appears to be painful or loose. Inspect for the presence of debris, film, plaque, calculus (tartar), or stain, using the flashlight and dental mirror. Use space titled: Unclean: If there is no decay, fracture, pain, looseness or uncleanliness, check the space titled: Satisfactory. Dentures, Complete or Partial: For each finding, as described below, put a check mark in the appropriate boxes. If there is no finding, put a dash in the appropriate box to indicate the test was performed, unless otherwise directed. If the patient has no complete or partial dentures, check space titled, None. If none, go on to the block titled: Oral Soft Tissue. If the patient has dentures, indicate whether upper or lower plate, or both. Indicate if the patient uses the upper or lower plate for chewing. 96 Examine for fit and comfort by pushing gently against each plate with the dental mirror while observing -with the flashlight."}
{"id": "patientcaremanag19unit_1", "title": "Patient care management manual", "year": 1980, "seq": 9, "text": "Usual Dining Location The place where the patient eats his main meal (generally the noon meal). If in room, indicate whether patient dines while in chair or bed 8. Weight (this appraisal) Patient's weight on day of appraisal or most recent measurement 9. Weight Change Significant change of weight within the last three months (e.g., more than five lbs.) PSYCHOSOCIAL FACTORS Psychosocial Factors describe the patient's adjustment to care, his social interaction, his adjustment to the facility, and his usual behavioral patterns. Instructions These sections should be completed by placing check marks in the appropriate space or column. The sections should be completed by the nurse appraiser eliciting information from the person or persons most able to describe the patient's pattern of psychosocial behavior. Note the A. 1-6, Patient's Adjustment to Care Plan, may not be applicable during initial appraisal, but should be completed during each subsequent appraisal. B. 1-17, requires one check mark in one of the three categories for each item; if four or more items are checked Never, then consideration should be given to having patient examined by a psychiatrically oriented professional such as a psychiatric or other qualified social worker, psychiatric nurse, clinical psychologist or psychiatrist. It is advisable that an amount of time suitable for the patient to adjust to the facility be permitted following admission. Complete the section just prior to the first care planning meeting. For each Behavioral Problem item in C. 1-15, identify first whether or not the patient exhibits such behavior. If not, place a check mark in column (A) opposite that item. If he does, then indicate whether his behavior is affecting his functional capacity or necessitates additional care and/ or supervision and check the appropriate column opposite that item. If behavior affects functional capacity of the individual or necessitates additional care and/ or supervision, then consideration should be given to having the patient examined by a qualified professional as indicated above in section B."}
{"id": "in-their-time-a-history-of-the-chicago-training-school", "title": "In their time : Lucy Rider Meyer (1849-1922) and Josiah Shelley Meyer (1849-1926) : one hundredth anniversary, Chicago Training School, 1885-1985", "year": 1985, "seq": 0, "text": "This in essence is the story of two restless individuals who started early life climbing mountains. When they reached the mountain peaks, they saw visions; and, believing in those visions, they set about making them a reality in their lives and in the lives of all who came in contact with them. They did not linger on the mountain peaks, as frequently happens to many who are overcome by the experience; no, they did not retire after their mountain top experiences\u2014they remained fulfilled to the end of their earthly lives. This is a chronological story of what developed in their lives (and later in the lives of countless others) as they started back down the mountain. - 1 - facing every challenge that the visions had presented to them. They were wholly absorbed in fulfilling the visions they had seen, and this mission continued to the completion of their earthly sojourn. In presenting this story, I am in no sense imposing the past on the present, but I hope we can celebrate together the presentness of the past. At the end, I believe this encounter with the past can produce new experiences for each of us (and others who may read it in years to come) as we participate in bringing new ideas into reality for all peoples and all conditions we may face. It can be rewarding for Methodists in particular to consider their \"roots,\" a popular pastime for many today. The United Methodist Church is a com\u00ac posite of many institutions we have come to accept, possibly giving little thought to the romance of their beginnings. All of the events in this story have made an invaluable contribution to the history of the Methodist Church and its movements, a period of 33 years in which 40 institutions came into being. Some were reconstructed, others were fostered."}
{"id": "in-their-time-a-history-of-the-chicago-training-school", "title": "In their time : Lucy Rider Meyer (1849-1922) and Josiah Shelley Meyer (1849-1926) : one hundredth anniversary, Chicago Training School, 1885-1985", "year": 1985, "seq": 1, "text": "According to Lucy Rider in later years, this book was con\u00ac sidered her most successful literary venture and brought her quite a sum of money 20 years later. (Every dollar was used for charitable purposes.) At the age of 31 (1880), Oberlin College, her alma mater, conferred on her the honorary degree of Master of Arts. During the 4 years at McKendree College, Miss Rider\u2019s interests were grow\u00ac ing in Sunday School Work. On weekends she participated in conferences and gave lectures. Toward the close of the first school year at McKendree (in 1880) came the thrilling announcement that she had been chosen a delegate to the World\u2019s Sunday School Convention to be held in London, beginning on June 26, 1880. She immortalized this experience in a carefully kept, 100-page Morocco- covered journal; this journal was complemented by numerous accounts in periodicals of the day. Her plans permitted a few weeks' hurried travel through Belgium, Switzer\u00ac land, Italy, France, then back to London\u2014\u2014less than 3 months from start to finish. Several poems written by Lucy Rider while on these jaunts appear in her journal. - 4 - A time-yellowed, old-fashioned \"album 11 accompanies the journal. In it are stored tokens of friendships. These are not the formal collections of the professional autograph hunter, but concluding lines from friendship's little notes and letters taken from their settings and pasted into this book of happy memories. These amputated signatures with disrupted sen\u00ac tences clinging to them are tantalizingly suggestive of things we should like to know. While in Europe, Miss Rider met socially (and intellectually) world famous men and women who became more involved in her life in the years ahead. - Found in her album were the following names; - Dwight L. Moody - Sankey, his \"sweet singer\" - William Booth, veteran of Salvation Army - Frances Willard - Dio Lewis - John Wanamaker, the Wew York financier - Mary Maple Dodge - Emily Huntington Miller - A thick sheet stamped with the embossed seal of the House of Lords bears the signature of the most distinguishable illegi\u00ac bility - \"Shaftsbury\" (the famous philanthropist, Earl Shaftsbury)."}
{"id": "in-their-time-a-history-of-the-chicago-training-school", "title": "In their time : Lucy Rider Meyer (1849-1922) and Josiah Shelley Meyer (1849-1926) : one hundredth anniversary, Chicago Training School, 1885-1985", "year": 1985, "seq": 2, "text": "Meyer remained an invalid in bed for the remainder of the year and well into the following year. From her bed she wrote articles and directed the functioning of the School, wrote music, and directed lf her girls 11 in their field work activities. Just when the Meyers were reaching a state of sickening anxiety over their indebtedness, Mrs. Meyer\u2019s vivid attention was given to a new and wonderful plan for raising a large amount of money by very small gifts\u2014a chain letter* Her imagination leaped to the possibilities. The chain letter had all the charm of the nickel fund, but with even more adventure. She prepared the letter against the better judgment of Mr. Meyer even before the annex was ready for occupancy. She reasoned that, the recipient was only asked to return 10c and make three copies of the letter to mail to three friends. During the first year, the experiment was an immediate success from the standpoint of financial returns; $10,000 was received from the chain letters, and more than 200,000 responses were received. The advertising value was even more successful in that thousands now heard of the School. At the end of the first year the Meyers had $9,000 over and above all the expenses. Many letters of protest were received by the Chicago Chief of Police, so many that he made a quiet investigation of the Chicago Training School. Detectives watched the School, and followed the girls to their field work assignments for 1 week until the police chief was convinced the work the School was doing was good. The police chief sent out hundreds of letters of explanation with a descriptive booklet from the School to answer the complaints. One hitch with the letters received was that half of the money was in 2c postage stamps! The post office refused to purchase the stamps, so Mr."}
{"id": "mound1981fair", "title": "MOUND", "year": 1982, "seq": 0, "text": "During half time of the game, Cathy O'Dell was crowned Homecoming queen. Sponsored by Delta Zeta fraternity and Sigma Pi fraternity, she is a regular per- former in stage productions. Miss O'Dell was the first to be elected by the new method proposed by Student Government for selection of Homecoming queen. A candidate had to be a full time stu- dent in her sophomore, junior, or senior year, and have a 2.0 average. Lynicia Edi- son was chosen as an attendant by the Freshman Class. Judges picked the five finalists after an informal interview, a dinner, and a fashion show a week before the game. The fourteen candidates were intro- duced and the five finalists announced at the disco Thursday night. Students voted on Friday for the Homecoming queen. Those chosen as finalists with Miss O'Dell were Cheryl Minnix, Jennifer Herr- mann, Toni Parker, and Melinda Sue Tay- lor. The Black Student Union sponsored a dance at the American Legion Saturday night with disc jockey Les Diamond from Oak Hill. Approximately 250 people attended the dance during which the court and queen of BSU were introduced. The can- didates were Lynicia Edison, Valerie Goldson, Ruby Brooks, and Stephanie Green. Miss Green, a senior psychology major, was crowned queen. L: Float stuffing is everywhere as members of Phi Mu and Theta Xi prepare for the parade. 8 ' Homecoming Better late than never could be said of Harry Cha- pin. He had difficulties getting here and was an hour late giving his concert. 8c/Homecoming No dampened spirits The rain came down but spirits re- mained high as students attended Home- coming festivities. \"The largest crowd ever turned out for the Homecoming activities,\" said Greg Tinnell, programming committee chair- man. The big event of the week took place Sunday night when Little River Band and Tom Chapin performed in the Feaster Center."}
{"id": "mound1981fair", "title": "MOUND", "year": 1982, "seq": 1, "text": "The Homecoming kick off is returned by Frank llacqua. Former 'Make a Wish' star Tom Chapin warms the crowd before Little River Band. 8a /Homecoming Horses are being made by Stacy Vickers and Kathy Delaney for a merry-go-round to go on the Sigma Sigma Sigma float. Homecoming /8b The rain keeps falling as candidates Cheryl Minnix and Jennifer Herrmann along with their escorts await half time activities. Western wear is worn by Robyn Girondo at the disco to announce the finalists. Shock and pleasure are shown on the faces of Cathy O'Dell and Melinda Sue Taylor as they are announced as finalists at the disco. Homecoming/8d During half time of the game, Jennifer Herrmann awaits the announcement of the queen. . spirits (cont.) *w Another concert was given during the week when Harry Chapin gave a benefit concert for the Commission on World Hunger. Following tradition, it rained on Thurs- day but the rain subsided for the parade. Campus organizations supporting a can- didate were required to decorate floats to the theme \"Under the Big Top.\" The cheerleaders performed a dance routine at the disco on Thursday night and also at the disco that took place on Satur- day before the game. Everything was a nickel in the Nickel the morning of the game while the Caba- ret Mobile disco was there. The week's activities varied for student and alumni's interest. There was some- thing for everyone and no dampened spir- its. Homecoming /9 Part of a cheerleader's routine sometimes means Being a cheerleader sometimes calls for doing some sprains and pulled muscles, but Vicki Hughes takes strange movements, as demonstrated by Emil Lehosit. precaution by wearing an elastic bandage. Shouts of praise What do students go through just to be cheerleaders? They cheer in the rain and cold, yell for two hours with just a short break, practice six to eight hours a week, the men do almost continuous lifting through the game, and all work on activities to motivate school spirit."}
{"id": "mound1981fair", "title": "MOUND", "year": 1982, "seq": 2, "text": "Those on the squad this year were Tammy Tennant, Vicki Hughes, Donna Knotts, Julie Gainer, Cheryl Minnix, Micki Edens, Tim Belotte, Emil Lehosit, Jay Messenger, Jim Richardson, Mike Hill, Rick Morris and substitute Stephanie Sayre. Jeff Morris and Tracy Thompson were on the squad; then after football season Richardson and Hill took their places. The cheerleaders met several week- ends during the summer to practice be- fore attending camp in Knoxville, Tenn., in August. They brought back blue ribbons and spiritsticks. Porter Stiles' selection as Best Mascot at the camp led to him being named as a National Cheerleading Association All-American mascot. Miss Minnix was chosen as best indi- vidual cheerleader at the state basket- ball tournaments in Charleston in Febru- ary. The hard work and dedication brought recognition to the squad and the college. As the football team gets ready to kick a field goal, Donna Knotts and Jeff Morris lead the \"FSC\" cheer. 10/Cheerleaders Captain Crazy, Porter Stiles, seems to get in on everything. Here he cheers with Tim Belotte, Micki Edens and Rick Morris. Being able to cheer in nice weather is a rare treat and Micki Edens and Rick Morris take advantage of the opportunity. After a mount, Julie Gainer falls safely into Jay Messenger's arms. Cheerleaders/ 1 1 Under a hillside tree, one of Michael Elliott's classes meets on a beautiful June afternoon. A June morning storm overshadows Wallman Hall and outdoor lights appear all over campus. Warm weather gives students a chance to walk around the beautiful campus. The hill in front of the Feaster Center becomes a place to relax as these students take a break from class. *3*,-jlJ 12/The weather Mother Nature 101 Small water puddles formed at the foot of every occupied chair. Students left the warmth of home a few minutes early to trudge through snow to reach class on time."}
{"id": "mound1981fair", "title": "MOUND", "year": 1982, "seq": 3, "text": "Firemen and police did everything they Bailing out! could to evacuate everyone, so no one would be injured. Firemen had to break out the window of one building to remove two students who were trapped inside. Their refrigerator had floated across the door blocking it and making it impossible to get out. All this added to the excitement of freshman orientation. The electricity was off for several hours, hindering the regis- tering of freshmen, the purchasing of books and supplies in the Bookstore, and freshman activities. When power was restored around 11:30 a.m., residents began cleaning up what could be saved and students re- turned to their daily routines. \"Mess\" is not a good word to explain the condi- tions that were left when the water had gone down. President Hardway and Lee Karlen watch as the flood waters go down in the Morgan Hall parking lot. 18 Flood Morgan Hall residents wait as the water goes down so that they can return to their building. The flood waters lifted cars up and floated them on top of each other in the parking lot at Morgan Hall. Flood/ 19 Performers of \"Night Sky,'' a bluegrass band, sing behind the LRC Building for a special event of the Spring Fling. TOMMY OiT TONIC Hand accuracy juggling is one of the featured acts of the Tommy Scott Old Time Medicine Show. Michael Belmear discusses the ins and outs of bet- ting on horses to students who attended A Nite at the Races, fund-raiser for United Way. 20/Campus entertainment Odds & ends entertainment After going to classes, writing essays and research papers and studying every now and then, students needed some sort of enjoyment to break the monotony of ordinary college life. FSC answered this need by offering several campus activities to relieve the pressures of college."}
{"id": "mound1981fair", "title": "MOUND", "year": 1982, "seq": 4, "text": "It was a real live beach party. Surrounded by summer decorations, boppin' beach music and swimwear and shorts, students enjoyed a beach party away from the beach. Competition was held for a muscle beach showdown where male physiques were judged by crowd reaction, a dance contest and an Annette Funicello look- alike contest. To end the year, a Spring Fling, a week- end full of contests, prizes, concerts and fun, was held May 1-2 to promote a re- laxed atmosphere before finals began. Events included a hot dog munch, the winner designated by the person who ate the most weenies in three minutes, a fris- bee distance throw, a co-ed frisbee relay race and a co-ed tug-of-war. \"Bad Boy,\" a rock and roll band of FSC students, performed Friday, May 1, in the Nickel. Saturday's activities began with a Fun- Run at 10 a.m. which covered a 1.2 mile distance around campus. Later that even- ing \"Night Sky,\" a bluegrass band, per- formed behind the LRC/Library Building. They not only sang bluegrass, but also folk-rock, country and jazz. Many students were reached through these fun-loving odds and ends entertain- ment. They brought good times, laughter and many memories. Several students are on hand to enjoy jazz, coun- try and mainly bluegrass music provided by \"Night Sky.\" Voted best dancers are Darlene Brown and Steve Dawson while beach boppin' at the first beach party held in the Nickel. Campus entertainment /21 Graphics major Mike Sauro prepares a layout for a local business. Reaching for the top 40 record is Crystal Rogers, part-time employee at Camelot Music. 22 Jobs 'We need money' \"What are you doin' tonight?\" \"Can't go out; I gotta work,\" is a com- mon statement made by students. Besides attending classes, many stu- dents work part-time in jobs ranging from fast foods to nurses aides."}
{"id": "mound1981fair", "title": "MOUND", "year": 1982, "seq": 5, "text": "Sherman was a series of small skits. Auditions for Masquers productions were open to everyone and were held three different nights approximately two weeks in advance of the rehearsals. Rehearsals were held five days a week for five to six weeks before opening night. The plays usually ran three nights; how- ever, this year the lighting in Wallman Hall auditorium was damaged, and the pro- ductions were held in the Ballroom and in a small dinner theatre in the Wallman Hall Building. Because less seating was avail- able in these rooms the productions were held three extra nights. Back from one dream, and before going to another, Walter Mitty (Mark Lemasters) drives his wife (Kim McDowell) to the hairdressers. Upon arrival at her new location the nun (Cathy O'Dell) questions where she will be staying. It is time for a discussion between Father Rivard (Tom Stevick) and Amos (Tim Pirlo) about the killing of the nun. Theatre/33 Problems impose Future Miss FSC Cindy Phillips poses for the judges in her streetwear attire. Thirteen coeds vied for the Miss FSC 1982 title April 6 in the Wallman Hall audi- torium. Atter viewing each girl in streetwear, swimsuits and evening gowns, the five judges announced four finalists. Masquers candidate Kim McDowell, Miss Morgan Hall Cindy McWhorter, Phi Mu representative Amy Phillips and Miss Prichard Hall Cindy Phillips each stepped out of the line as their names were an- nounced. Later in the pageant, each fina- list chose an envelope, containing a question by the judges, from emcee Rick Donko. Cindy Phillips, a freshman physical therapy major from Paden City, was named Miss FSC and crowned by Kelly Carr, Miss FSC 1981 and Miss West Vir- ginia-USA. Prior to the pageant, each candidate or her sponsor paid a registration fee of $30, five more than in previous years."}
{"id": "mound1981fair", "title": "MOUND", "year": 1982, "seq": 6, "text": "\"When I was in seventh grade, I won Little Miss Peters- burg; that was my first title,\" the 19 year- old coed related. With her new title, Kelly represented the state in parades and at the Miss Pennsylvania and Miss Ohio pageants. \"Ohio, Pennsylvania, and West Virginia are all under the same Miss USA pageant director, Carmine Verno. From the time I was crowned, I signed a contract stating he's over me whenever I wear my crown and banner,\" Kelly continued. The three state winners each won trips sponsored by Thomson's Vacations. Along with Miss Ohio, who was later crowned as Miss USA, Kelly spent a sev- en-day vacation in Aruba in January. Carmine prepared the three for the USA pageant. \"He helped me polish my speaking and wording. However, he said he loved my accent,\" the junior retail management major added. Kelly's state costume for Miss USA, a futuristic hillbilly, was Carmine's idea and designed by Dick Frank. \"I love my outfits for the pageant, which include the cos- tume, a gown and an outfit for my inter- view.\" Kelly left for Buloxi, Miss., the site of the pageant, May 6. The 51 contestants arrived there two weeks before the May 21 pageant. \"I was a little nervous,\" Kelly said. \"There were 50 other pageant winners there also. I went with the attitude to have a good time.\" And with a smile she added, \"I was proud to represent FSC and the state.\" Miss FSC/ 35 Arms swayed in the air, students boo- gied in the bleachers and music rang out on the campus as Student Government brought five major concerts to Fairmont State. The concerts, ranging from cultural shows to hard rock performances, gave students a break from classes and daily routines as they came to share five even- ings with famous groups on stage."}
{"id": "mound1981fair", "title": "MOUND", "year": 1982, "seq": 7, "text": "Glenn Miller Orchestra: Shouts of \"whooh,\" people dancing in the aisles and sounds of clapping hands filled the Feaster Center Sept. 10 when the Glenn Miller Orchestra brought the 40's era back to Fairmont. The 8 p.m. concert was filled with two hours of famous tunes such as \"Tuxedo Junction,\" \"Pennsylvania 6-5000\" and \"Chattanooga Choo-Choo.\" Jimmy Hen- derson directed the 17-man brass or- chestra which featured two soloists and the Moonlight Serenaders, a sixtet. The audience of 2,000 ranged from longtime Miller fans to recent rock lovers. For the spectators, it was an evening of fun, and for some, it was an evening of memories. Harry Chapin: Starting Homecoming festivities on Oct. 20, singer-songwriter Harry Chapin performed two and one-half hours of his music in the Ballroom. The music, covering a span of a dec- ade, included his \"Cats in the Cradle,\" which led him to be nominated for a Grammy in 1972 for new best artist. Other songs, \"Taxi\" and its \"Sequel,\" inter- twined with audience participation tunes such as \"Bananas.\" \"I enjoyed Harry's concert,\" stated student Karl Miller. \"He had good one-to- one correspondence with the audience. He was really down to earth.\" Chapin's 'down to earth' style brought him his fame. \"Songs are like a book or a movie, they tell a story, and that is what I try to do with my music,\" Chapin stated. Chapin did the concert as a benefit for World Hunger after he was appointed to that Commission by former President Jim- my Carter. This concert was one of 150 benefits performed each year by Chapin On stage and his band. Little River Band: A major arena show came to the Feast- er Center Oct. 26 via the Little River Band. Prior to the Australian band's perfor- mance, former \"Make a Wish\" star Tom Chapin helped the audience receive the group."}
{"id": "mound1981fair", "title": "MOUND", "year": 1982, "seq": 8, "text": "Chapin, lone with guitar, had fans clapping and singing with his seven bal- lads and audience participation songs and tales. As Chapin introduced the band, the 4,000 in attendance jumped to their feet in roaring applause. Little River Band hit the stage with \"Happy Anniversary\" and a spectacular light show. The two-hour show spanned years of hits such as \"Lady,\" \"Reminiscing\" and \"Lonesome Loser\" as the crowd begged for more at the show's close. After minutes of non-stop applause, the vocal harmony group presented two en- cores to cap the evening and Homecom- ing Week. Entertainment sometimes comes in solo form for Harry Chapin. Chapin appeared in Fairmont without his back-up band. Vocals and strings lend harmony as a Little River Band guitarist joins in with \"Lonesome Loser.\" Another Chapin, this time it's brother Tom, sings a tale of love for the Homecoming audience. 36 /Concerts Talented on the trombone, Jimmy Henderson takes a break from directing to play a solo. Even without a guitar, Little River Band's lead singer gets into the act. Concerts/37 A more relaxed tune is presented as Nantucket prepares the audience for Cheap Trick. 38; Concerts On stage (cont.) Kool and the Gang: March 17 was an evening of \"Celebra- tion\" for area fans as Kool and the Gang hit the stage in the Feaster Center. Attired in jumpsuits, the nine-manned group treated everyone in the audience. Female fans were honored when the group sang their special \"Lady's Night.\" The concert mood changed during a mellow tune when the group asked the audience to join hands and have a mo- ment of silent prayer for the children and victims of the Atlanta killings. The pounding tempo of \"Celebration\" ended the evening as the Feaster Center once again came alive with dancing, clap- ping, and singing."}
{"id": "mound1981fair", "title": "MOUND", "year": 1982, "seq": 9, "text": "They opened the concert with \"Hello There\" from their first album and contin- ued to work the crowd into a frenzy with songs like \"Surrender\" and \"Dream Police.\" The highlight of the concert came when a group of FSC coeds, who were hiding behind Carlos' masks, came dancing on stage to a deep jungle tune. All in all, it was quite an evening for rock fans in Fair- mont. \"It's too hot\" sings Kool and the Gang's lead singer Behind stage, a member of Cheap Trick's stage James Taylor. Taylor has been with the group since crew checks the sound equipment prior to the con- 1969. cert. Two Little River Band members jam with the group. Concerts/39 Art students view one another's outcomes of a days work. Not only are students artists, but also creative cooks as seen here by Hank Orr. Porter Stiles dances with one of his fellow artists during a time out from painting at Rehoboth Beach. 40 Student trips HittirT the road Rehoboth Beach: Summer was not meant to be spent in a classroom. Especially if you were en- rolled in an art class. These art students, their guests and Dr. Stephen Smigocki packed their bags and migrated north to the beaches of Delaware for 10 days of painting and drawing the coastline's na- ture and natives. They explored Lewes, Cape Henlopen, Dewey and Rehoboth Beaches, the boardwalk, and even ventured into Ocean City, Md., for one night. Not only were they artists, decent cooks, dishwashers, fish cleaners, shop- pers, but also people who thrived on hav- ing a good time. However, on the sixth evening of their trip, a storm hit the coast which left the artists relieved that their tents were among the few in the campground spared of any damage. Once in a great while, they found the time to trot off to the marinas, sand dunes and towns, paint box in one hand, water colors in the other and a portfolio shoved under the arm."}
{"id": "from-myst-to-riven", "title": "From Myst To Riven: The Creations & Inspirations [Hyperion] (1997)", "year": 1997, "seq": 0, "text": "After noticing the toy ship submerged in the fountain, the player must first discover the related clue in the tower behind the library before he will be able to figure out which three symbols (above) to press in order to access the Stoneship Age book. Rough sketches and handwritten notes were made for all the Ages in Myst, including Stoneship (above), in order to develop the mysterious character and plot of each setting. Among other places to explore in Stoneship are the lighthouse and telescope plateau (above right), the submerged ship\u2019s darkened cabin (below), and the bedroom in which the \u201cred\u201d page is found (bottom). When Myst first appeared, it was hard to know what to make of it as a game. It was clearly something new, something no one had seen before. There were no guns in Myst, no overt violence, no time limit, and no score- board. You, the player, were literally dropped onto a strange island with no instructions and no apparent goal. There were no people, only artifacts in a weirdly beautiful landscape\u2014a wharf harboring a sunken boat, a planetari- um, a library, a spaceship, a clock tower. Instinctively, you asked the first questions without being prompted: Who created this island, what were all these buildings for, and why were there no people? And then you began to explore. The eerie music and sound effects that accompanied your every step only heightened the sense of mystery. Myst was a game because it contained puzzles the player had to solve in order to learn anything about the island. It was a challenge that rewarded observation and brains over reflexes. Secrets were revealed through audi- tory as well as visual clues. Within Myst\u2019s dreamlike structures the player came upon smaller, but equally fascinating, objects and machines with dials, levers, and buttons that all had a reason for being there, that made sense only if the player could figure them out."}
{"id": "from-myst-to-riven", "title": "From Myst To Riven: The Creations & Inspirations [Hyperion] (1997)", "year": 1997, "seq": 1, "text": "They also had more capital to support their software company, Cyan, and to hire additional people if need be. It was at a computer conference in California a few months later when the Millers encountered Richard Vander Wende, who, among other compa- nies, had worked at Industrial Light & Magic and Disney. Richard's keen interest in Myst impressed Rand and Robyn, as did a portfolio of art that was breathtaking. After talking with him for three straight hours, the brothers invited Richard to visit them in Spokane. While they immediately sensed the value of adding Richard's perspective and talents to their plans for the sequel, it was important to explore a little further how their relationship would work. But after that visit, it was clear to them that he could fit right in. Once Richard agreed to join them, Riven\u2019s creative team consisted of six people: Robyn, Rand, and Richard, plus Chris Brandkamp (who, in addition to being Cyan's financial officer and business manager, had recorded the sounds for Myst), Rich Watson and Joshua Alton Staub, the computer graph- ics production director. With their combined skills and the money Myst was pumping into the company, they figured they could knock out Riven in a couple of years at most, They couldn't have been more wrong. While there are many recognizable structures and objects in Riven, there are also some of the most imaginative and eerie images ever created, including the bulbous, podlike dome the rebels use as a hideout in their own secret Age (left). Richard Watson Joshua Alton Staub Robyn Miller fine-tunes one of the maps used to describe the physical layout of the five Islands of Riven Robyn M. car-net Many at Cyan, Inc., fondly recall the days spent crammed into Chris Brandkamp\u2019s garage (above) where Riven was started."}
{"id": "from-myst-to-riven", "title": "From Myst To Riven: The Creations & Inspirations [Hyperion] (1997)", "year": 1997, "seq": 2, "text": "The certain parts thet you The D'ni symbol (above) From a visual standpoint alone, however, Riven builds on the oddly Guitefame mmadel for 2 aratanate Soe munDeL Ne: entrancing surreal styling of Myst and then surpasses it in ways that will Stoneship Age from Myst through them. blow these tourists off their feet. With SoftImage software, Cyan's computer artists were able to construct incredibly complex and refined computer models for all the game's objects\u2014everything from the largest islands and buildings right down to a machine's levers and tiniest bolts. Over these models the artists applied highly detailed and realistic texture maps, which are the skins the artists wrap around the models\u2019 wireframe skeletons\u2014like bark over a tree, if you will, or steel over a sub- marine\u2019s frame. If done right, a player entering a scene might pause to wonder if this were actually a photo of a real place or object, not something contrived out of computer program code. \u2018Total believability\u2014that's our goal,\u201d says = al Robert Grace, a CG artist at Cyan. For the people : = ; iW at Cyan, there could be no higher compliment But the Riven team\u2019s ambition didn\u2019t stop at designing realistic scenes and objects. They wanted Riven to be alive. This The tower rotation map in the library on Myst : island presented\u2019tke meant not only creating fantasy flora and fauna for the game, but animating first significant test of the player's puzzle : Sold to a wooden hut or a steel submarine, but how did one bring to life the wahrk, Riven's enormous whalelike ocean predator? them as well. This added new challenges. It's one thing to animate the door V4 Gehn to Atrus fter their Seattle trip, Rand and game elements that would become Riven, although details and names would continue to change right up to the very end."}
{"id": "from-myst-to-riven", "title": "From Myst To Riven: The Creations & Inspirations [Hyperion] (1997)", "year": 1997, "seq": 3, "text": "They first called the game Equiquay (the idea being that Riven had become a common linking port). Ultimately, they settled on Riven, the name for the island in Gehn's fifth Age book, where Atrus previously conspired with Catherine to entrap his father, whose delusions of grandeur had made him ultimately dan gerous to everyone. Catherine, unfortunately, has been tricked into return ing to Riven by her sons, who were also seduced by the power of Age books And she is now Gehn\u2019s prisoner. Riven's world is a collection of islands Unlike Myst's world, Riven is inhabited, both by forest-dwelling villagers and a rebel faction opposed to Gehn\u2019s heavy-handed rule. Even some of the most important goals of the game were clear from the start: the player had to entrap Gehn by enticing him with a false Linking book, rescue Catherine and jump into the fissure of stars at the end. The added twist was that the Linking book is stolen from the player at the very beginning of the eS game and it\u2019s up to him to figure out how to get it back before he encounters Gehn There were, however, major differences and possibilities discussed during the game's early design phase. In Rand's 4 yf D) @) oh FV asdina Mr, 7th, Wh tl curl lt Pee ne..SLOry a /) mud Ptges. Uayins of Then. / 5 ee till, oll Ved! TE prety Hy ) ) Dink, Pt@iw, lanl won ah Ou aactd Tash. if A ROE Fay original notes, he wrote that Catherine was being held pris- poplale Dhan. 2 fll \u201cyo Th oner in another completely separate Age, but then the idea of FES wilh wa ith Wolk, we other Ages was dropped because Gehn was supposed to be ik! Any Pree govn, 10 Thal trapped on Riven without any books to write in or link z% Di wi Si, Sm Prin. 5 through."}
{"id": "from-myst-to-riven", "title": "From Myst To Riven: The Creations & Inspirations [Hyperion] (1997)", "year": 1997, "seq": 4, "text": "They built scaled-down versions of some of the more complicated and frequently used models. It was frustrating aesthetically. In the case of the trees, Robin Foley had modeled a lifelike 3-D version of them, and the artists would have preferred to use that as-close-to-perfect-as- they-could-get version as much as possible. The full version was smooth and lifelike, whereas the simplified model was always faceted\u2014its edges covered with the tiny shark-fin ridges that are a dead giveaway fora computer graphic. But most of these images were small enough that the facets wouldn't be visible to the naked eye, and therefore drop- ping ina simplified version of the model often meant the difference between a scene that rendered and one that didn't. Polygons weren't the only thing the Riven team had to worry about when it came to rendering. Each scene required properly organized schematic flow charts that verified for the computer system how an object in a scene related to each of its parts and to other objects, which In order to save time in rendering, several versions of a model with varying complexity were created and used accordingly. The two models of the trees (left top) on Temple Island, for example, illustrate the differences in complexity of the inner structure. Depending upon the scene, Cyan would use the simpler model (on tight) when less detail was needed and the more complex one when very fine detail was required. The same two models are shown in shaded and partially colored form (left middle). In certain cases, an image might contain examples of both kinds of models (left). Note the tree in the background (simple model) and the one in the foreground (complex model). Schematic flow charts created in the software to track the hierarchical relation between every scene, object, and detail, including animations, were the blueprints for analyzing the structural integrity of the image."}
{"id": "from-myst-to-riven", "title": "From Myst To Riven: The Creations & Inspirations [Hyperion] (1997)", "year": 1997, "seq": 5, "text": "The prison itself sits atop a massive tree that has been hacked off at its base, no doubt for Gehn\u2019s bookmaking experiments. The core elements of the design for this wretched outpost are seen here, including the color (above right) and bump maps (below right) applied to the shaded model (far right). The finished design appears on the following spread. 66 Michael Bostick View of Catherine\u2019s prison from the top of the stairs leading to the elevator. Concept designs for the huge boiler on Book Assembly Island. The sketch at right is closer to the final design seen in the game. 7o As with every other aspect of creating Riven, Cyan\u2019s greatly expanded resources and computing power allowed the designers and artists to push to reme levels of detail and uniqueness in creating the textures to be rather ex applied to the models. In Myst, the surface of a tree, for instance, was com posed of a small section of barklike texture repeated as many times as need ed over the model of the tree. With Riven, in addition to creating much larger maps, a texture composed of seemingly repetitive materials would, in fact, consist of an untold number of uniquely customized surfaces. The boiler on Book Assembly Island, which Gehn uses to turn trees into pulp fo paper, is a case in point. A look from closeup on the catwalk surrounding the boiler reveals that in every place careful thought has gone into designing the textures that cover the model. Levers are not just metal colored. They have grunge on them and are worn down in the appropriate places from 2 years of handling. The bricks are pocked and discolored- all of them differently! And the assortment of drips smears, and corrosion that have been applied to the metal pipes and plates is, simply put, excessive But Cyan wouldn't want it any other way."}
{"id": "from-myst-to-riven", "title": "From Myst To Riven: The Creations & Inspirations [Hyperion] (1997)", "year": 1997, "seq": 6, "text": "Jeremy Engleman the world from six feet off the ground in a hallway and suddenly find your- self eight or ten feet in the air after entering a room. It would also not make very much sense if the player having, s y, moved a lever in one shot, turned around in another only to find the lever back in its or iginal position. Because the player can change things in the game, the designers went to some extra- ordinary lengths to make sure every possible combination of events was included, so that there would be no break in continuity This series of images (from top to right) follows the path down to the sunners lagoon on Jungle Island. Approach too fast or make a noise and those sunners will take right off, which is too bad since they provide an important clue. While the transitions between scenes is important for main- taining a concrete sense of place and perspective in the play- er\u2019s mind, it is equally significant as an opportunity to create dramatic tension and heighten the emotional response of see- ing. Riven takes full advantage of these moments. A good exam- ple is the walk down to the sunners lagoon, modeled by Jeremy Engleman, on Jungle Island. You begin in daylight by moving down a set of stone stairs cut through a solid wall of rock. As you progress, the rock walls climb higher around you, until it almost feels as if you are in a cave. The light has vanished sounds have deadened. The sense of the island as a whole has diminished to this claustrophobic crack in a dense slab of granite. Then, barely visible ahead, a crescent of light shines faintly around a bend in the path. The light begins to pull you through the gloom."}
{"id": "from-myst-to-riven", "title": "From Myst To Riven: The Creations & Inspirations [Hyperion] (1997)", "year": 1997, "seq": 7, "text": "Upon linking to Riven, the player is rudely greeted by a cage of bars that imprison him. These bars, in fact, are both CG and real. After they rise up trapping the player, they change from CG to real because moments later a guard steps into view and approaches the cage. For this live action portion of the scene, real bars were included because the guard bumps into and reaches through them and also in order to produce the proper shadows and reflections. The guard grabs the Linking book the player received from Atrus and steps back, but he is Michael Sheets The stage crew prepares to film one of the scenes with Atrus's wife Catherine, played by Sheila Goold (left), The filmmakers setting up to shoot the cage (below) which springs up imprisoning the player upon his arrival in Riven. All of these segments were shot on video and composited along with the computer graphics into the game. Richard Vander Wende spent three weeks directing the video shoot at the PVR studios in San Francisco with Tim suddenly darted and dragged off stage. A rebel appears and picks up the Linking book. He pulls a lever and disappears. The cage begins to descend, and Greenberg acting as assistant director. Getting to that point, however, involved ten months of prep work. Richard and Tim co- scripted all the scenes, sections of which had to be translated into the D\u2019ni and Rivenese languages developed by Richard Watson for the game. Once actors were cast, they had to learn their parts phonetically. Additionally, the scenes had to be blocked out on the computer, so that the actors movements could be accurately staged to fit the shot. Finally, they needed an assortment of costumes and props, including bolos, Gehn\u2019s dart- gun, his fire marble pipe, the guard\u2019s knife and sheath, a small rebel knife, and a scythelike rebel tool."}
{"id": "from-myst-to-riven", "title": "From Myst To Riven: The Creations & Inspirations [Hyperion] (1997)", "year": 1997, "seq": 8, "text": "In his hands is the rifle pictured at the top of the opposite page. From left to right, Rand Miller, Richard Vander Wende, and Tim Greenberg observe the action. If something could not be set just right, there was always the option of tweak- ing it in the computer later in the process, perhaps adding some additional lighting or shadows that weren't but should be there. In one case, it was not a blocking or lighting issue that called for some creative retouching. Rather it was a problem created by scripting the scene in Gehn\u2019s Age without any cuts. John Keston, who played Gehn, found it dif- ficult to act the long scene out in a completely satisfying manner from begin- ning to end. Being digital artists, however, the Cyan team resorted to \u201cmorph\u201d editing, using Elastic Reality software to combine their favorite parts at points where Gehn was basically in the same position in two differ- ent takes. He simply morphed from one portion of one take to another in the same sequence. As easy as Ultimatte was to use, however, it didn\u2019t solve all of the artists problems when it came to combining video and computer graphics, particu- larly when the graphics involved animation. At another point in the game, as the player is making her way down a stone corridor toward the Wahrk Throne Room she sees one of Gehn\u2019s ministers duck into a side tunnel. If she chooses to follow, she eventually catches a glimpse of him inside the Mag-Lev car. Simple enough except that the car then turns 180 degrees and speeds away. This meant that not only did the animators have to place the actor in the car, but they had to match the speeds of the actor and the car animation as the vehicle turned."}
{"id": "from-myst-to-riven", "title": "From Myst To Riven: The Creations & Inspirations [Hyperion] (1997)", "year": 1997, "seq": 9, "text": "For Josh, \u201cThe key is to cut corners in ways that don't affect the quality of the image.\u201d In every stage of the process, the artists resort to \"previewing\" as a way to view a model or a textured polygon without actually having the computer render it. In this way, they could move as fast as possible, making quick edits and tweaks before choosing to render that particular stage of the shot. If they were working with an object, they didn\u2019t bother including the setting behind it until it was necessary. And if the resolution appeared low and the edges of things a little jagged, they knew it would be crunched up later when, in the final stage of rendering, anti-aliasing is applied, Along the way, the artists maintained a close eye on the problems that might be developing in a scene. While in certain cases the software itself threw in its own bugs, it was usually a case of too many polygons or textures\u2014or a combination of several things\u2014in the shot. When Jason Baskett was modeling and con- structing the jungle scenes, he had to deal with an enormous amount of 98 Considering how long it could take to render some of Riven\u2019s gargantuan shots, section by section (above), it was also a good time to make some phone calls or eat some lunch. Jason Baskett Gehn\u2019s writing desk (detail above) would probably have died in the rendering stage if the designers had chosen, arbitrarily or not, to place one glass in front of the other, requiring massively more computing power to ray trace the light paths properly. In the beginning, the Riven team thought it would create and render the whole game with the three original SGI workstations. By the end of production\u2014after reality had settled in hard, and early\u2014Cyan had invested in four massive SGI Challenge servers to do the rendering."}
{"id": "US.NN.FIT.SC.362.2.1.20.199110-11", "title": "Fashion International, October/November 1991", "year": 1991, "seq": 0, "text": "We offset that by giving them a discount which covers the duty and the freight in order to be competitive.\u201d And, even with the hurdles they have had to overcome, Miller believes that there are some excellent oppor- tunities for retail distribution in the U.K. In her ranking of the European TOM SMITH swings the skirt on a viscose/linen suit, adds decorative matte gold buttons on the four pock- ets and neckline of the long and shapely fly front jacket, and colors the whole in bright sunflower! At CLAUDE RAP, the soft shouldered wool gabardine suit in dusty powder blue is beautifully detailed with three heart shaped pockets and curved seaming on the fitted jacket. Designers are having fun with pat- tern and texture. Fall\u2019s tweeds, plaids, and checks are being reinter- preted in new colors. Novelties too are getting a fresh play. CHRISTIAN DIOR\u2019s lovely black/ white silk glen plaid one-button suit with shawl collar is a great look for the executive; and for dressy day- time\u2014the jewel buttoned coral and white silk blend houndstooth check. Its long slim jacket eases over a slim skirt. LIZ CLAIBORNE\u2019s black and white check city suit is prettily detail- ed with curved black piping around the single-breasted jacket, and fin- ished off with a coordinating silk print scarf. At OLEG CASSINI, there\u2019s a terrific black/white check gingham suit banded at the flap pockets in bright red, green, pink, and violet. The four colors alternate on the four buttons of the jacket. Also smart is their black/white viscose plaid cutaway double-breasted jacket over box pleated skirt. OSCAR DE LA RENTA\u2019s outstand- ing new suit collection offers a fringe countries in terms of distribution dif- ficulty, she places Italy at number one and Germany second."}
{"id": "wayne-rochelle-ecstasys-dawn-1983", "title": "Ecstasy's Dawn (1983)", "year": 1983, "seq": 0, "text": "The so- lemnity of her thoughts was written all over her youth- ful face. Completely unaware that she was being observed, she did nothing to conceal the torment in her eyes. Al- though she was a distance away from him, her observer had no difficulty in studying her. The moonlight shin- ing down on Rachel illuminated every feature of her face. Leaning his tall frame against the wagon wheel, John Reynolds concentrated on the lovely girl standing apart from the others, when it was so obvious that she would rather have been dancing. He found it quite easy to read what was on her mind and he also knew that her fear of not being asked to dance would be short-lived. She was too attractive to go unnoticed for very long. Not taking his eyes from her, he reached into his pocket, removing a cigar and match. As he struck the match across the wagon wheel it flared into life. The sudden glow from the match startled Rachel, and she whirled quickly in his direction. She recognized him to be the same man she had seen from her hotel window, only now he had exchanged his Yankee uni- form for buckskins. Dressed this way, in the frontier tradition, she found him even more attractive than be- fore. Rachel knew that his eyes had been watching her over the glow of the match before he extinguished it. Now in the darkness, she couldn\u2019t tell for sure if he was still watching. During those few seconds when she had seen him so distinctly, his face seemed to become im- planted in her mind. If she were never to see him again, 28 she felt she would forever remember his face. Rachel had no way of explaining to herself the effect his presence had on her."}
{"id": "wayne-rochelle-ecstasys-dawn-1983", "title": "Ecstasy's Dawn (1983)", "year": 1983, "seq": 1, "text": "She noted he was shrewd enough not to look at her that way when her father was near. She only caught a glimpse of Josh a few times. She wondered if she\u2019d ever have the opportunity to speak with him again. Rachel found the tedious journey not only terribly boring, but extremely tiring. Sometimes she didn\u2019t 70 know which was worse, being roughly tossed about in a wagon, or wearily placing one foot in front of the other and trying to walk the dreary miles. The wagon train crossed into Nebraska at Cotton- wood Creek and then headed northwest to the Platte River. The green fields of Kansas were gone, replaced by the sandy hills of Nebraska. Rachel was walking beside the wagon when she caught her first sight of the Platte River. She was aston- ished to find it was so unbelievably flat. It also appeared eerie to her because nothing seemed to be moving, or to be alive, over the vast landscape close to the river. Then with repulsion, she saw there was life on the banks of the Platte. Lizards were busily squirming over the sand and darting through the tall grass. At the sight of the disgusting creatures, she hurridly climbed into the wagon, deciding it was better to ride than to walk. Rachel forgot her disappointment over the Platte River when she was astounded by her first glimpse of the natural landmark called Courthouse Rock. Its sum- mit, resembling a castle, towered four hundred feet above the plains. Even though the wagon train made twenty-five miles a day along the Platte, for two days and nights the colossal Courthouse Rock remained in view. The next landmark, Scotts Bluff, materialized as a blue mound on the horizon. It became larger as the wagon train traveled along the Platte."}
{"id": "wayne-rochelle-ecstasys-dawn-1983", "title": "Ecstasy's Dawn (1983)", "year": 1983, "seq": 2, "text": "As far as she was concerned, if the wives or soldiers found her apparel disgraceful, then that was their problem. Because Rachel lacked conceit or expe- rience, she was too modest and naive to realize how sensual and enticing the soldiers would find her. Wom- \u2018en were so scarce on military forts that even the homely ones became immediately popular. But the spectacular vision of the beautiful young woman riding into the fort, wearing tight pants that outlined the shape of her long slim legs and feminine full hips, would curse many a soldier with sleepless nights on his lonely bunk. As John Reynolds and Rachel rode into Fort Lara- mie, the settlers on the wagon train began to set up camp nearby. The women excitedly left their wagons to 106 hurry inside and shop at the trader\u2019s store. The men headed straight for the enlisted men\u2019s bar, where wine and beer could be bought. They had stopped at other forts along the Oregon Trail but none of them had been as large as the well- known Fort Laramie. It was built resembling a hollow square, with adobe walls fifteen feet thick. Heavily fortified blockhouses stood at each corner, and inside was a vast courtyard. A large number of trappers and trading Indians visited the fort, and traveling wagon trains always camped and remained for a few days. Rachel was finding the fort stimulating after the lonely barren plains. Then, suddenly, she became con- scious of the admiring stares she was receiving from the soldiers and the fur trappers. She wondered if John had noticed how the men were following her with their eyes. Glancing over toward him, Rachel was surprised to find that he was watching her. When he smiled at her, and winked knowingly, she completely forgot the sol- diers and the trappers."}
{"id": "wayne-rochelle-ecstasys-dawn-1983", "title": "Ecstasy's Dawn (1983)", "year": 1983, "seq": 3, "text": "But shit, as hot as I am fer her, you ain\u2019t gonna have to wait fer long.\u201d\u2019 Rachel knew her only hope to be rescued was to scream, even though she realized the huge man would ruthlessly punish her. But there was no way she could elude the two men, and if by some miracle she did, she\u2019d never outrun them. Finding the bravery that had been born and bred into her, Rachel screamed! Tightening his grip on her hair, he jerked Rachel to- ward him, striking her across the face with the back of 116 qe his other hand. \u2018\u2018Shut up, you damned bitch! Scream again and I\u2019ll kill you!\u201d\u2019 Using the strength in his pow- erful arms, he shoved her violently to the ground be- hind the low bushes, as a deep blackness overcame her. Coming slowly out of that peaceful state of uncon- sciousness, she was horrified to see Judd kneeling be- tween her legs lifting her skirt. Rachel tried in vain to move her arms to push him away, but became terrify- ingly aware that they were being held forcibly over her head by Luke. Noticing she was again conscious, Judd grinned down at her hideously as he moved his tongue back and forth across his saliva-covered lips. When he placed his large hand over her breast, Rachel tried desperately to scream, but alertly Luke put one of his hands over her face as he whispered hoarsely, \u2018\u2018Does that feel good, bitch? Ya just wait, ole Luke is gonna kiss on \u2019em.\u2019\u2019 The man became uncontrollably aroused from watching Judd caressing the beautiful young breasts and unconsciously he removed his hand from Rachel\u2019s mouth. Courageously Rachel took a deep breath, and once again her agonized scream carried piercingly through the quiet night."}
{"id": "wayne-rochelle-ecstasys-dawn-1983", "title": "Ecstasy's Dawn (1983)", "year": 1983, "seq": 4, "text": "Often during the long journey to California, he and Zeke would stop by her wagon to visit, but always John had an aloofness about him that she couldn\u2019t understand. For some reason, the man she loved had made himself a stranger to her. Zeke, sensing Rachel\u2019s loneliness and love for John Reynolds, charitably gave Rachel most of 124 his time. The moments they shared soon developed into a deep friendship. Following long weary weeks of traveling, the wagon train finally reached Hasting\u2019s Cutoff which led to the California Trail. From the northwest tip of Utah they moved southwest across Nevada to the sluggish Hum- boldt River, which was inseparable from the California Trail for two hundred miles. The Humboldt offered needed water and green intermittent meadows for the oxen and livestock. Along the river could be seen the shallow graves where emigrants before them had buried their dead. Also there were the skeletons of oxen and mules, that had perished because their owners had left too late to take advantage of the scarce grazing land in the barren localities. The crumbling wood and rotting canvas from abandoned wagons would remain beside the river for years to come. Diggers, the tribe of Indians along the Humboldt, were unfriendly. Often they could be seen hiding be- hind the tall grass, peering at the passing train. They would silently wait for their prey, then discharge their arrows into the oxen. A dead or injured ox would have to be left behind, supplying the Indians with fresh meat. A few of the emigrants on the wagon train never sur- vived to reach the Forty-Mile desert, but considering the dangers of the perilous journey, the loss of lives had been minimal. Before crossing the desert, the pioneers rested and camped for two days."}
{"id": "wayne-rochelle-ecstasys-dawn-1983", "title": "Ecstasy's Dawn (1983)", "year": 1983, "seq": 5, "text": "Neither of the O\u2019Brian girls possessed enough busi- ness knowledge to question how their small sum of money had purchased a prosperous dress shop in the respectable area of town. They unquestioningly al- lowed Edward to handle the whole unfamiliar transac- tion. The two present employees, worried they would lose their jobs when the store was sold, happily agreed to stay on. The girls foolishly believed that the former owner came to the shop every day to teach them the op- erating procedures strictly out of the kindness of her charitable heart. The furnished living quarters above the shop were small, but adequate for their needs. It had a comfort- able sitting room, a modern kitchen, and two separate bedrooms. It wouldn\u2019t have filled up a fourth of the space in their former beautiful mansion at the Knolls, but after six months of living out of a covered wagon, the tiny rooms looked like a heavenly refuge to them. 140 Quickly and with comparative ease, Edward man- aged to see that the girls were properly taken care of. Convincing the owner to sell the shop was very simple. He generously, with John Reynolds\u2019 money, offered her twice what the place was worth, and she gladly agreed to teach the young ladies the business when he charmingly informed her of how much he would pay her for the inconvience. It was\u2019 Deborah who willingly learned about the busi- ness and how to profitably operate it. Rachel half- heartedly tried a few times to concentrate and take an interest in the dress shop, but it bored her immensely. Her social life was so full and so exciting, that she ex- cused her indifference to their livelihood by telling her- self she didn\u2019t have the time to learn. . . . After all, Deborah very seldom went anywhere unless Edward was taking them out; otherwise, she seemed to be per- fectly contented ordering fabrics, sewing dresses, and being proud of herself when the profits started to stead- ily grow."}
{"id": "wayne-rochelle-ecstasys-dawn-1983", "title": "Ecstasy's Dawn (1983)", "year": 1983, "seq": 6, "text": "Except this time, there was only the single wagon rolling endlessly over the empty plains. She missed the sound of whips cracking through the air to encourage the oxen to continue plodding steadily on- ward. Rachel wished she could hear the constant com- forting voices of the other emigrants talking and yelling to one another, as their wagons covered the long, fatiguing miles. Zeke guided them down through California and into the hot territory of Arizona. Even in late spring, the sun was unmerciful and unyielding as it shone down on the weary travelers. Although the trip was tiresome and exhausting, Rachel was glad to be away from life in the city. She had found San Francisco exciting and exhilarating, but surprisingly Rachel now realized that nothing stimu- lated her senses more than the wide-open plains. She could understand why men like John Reynolds and Zeke loved their untamed wilderness with a passion, and finally she understood what John had meant that 7/3 day when he told her he could never have stayed in Bos- ton or behind a desk.\u2019 The vast plains of Arizona, however, weren\u2019t in the least stimulating to Deborah. She was too deeply en- grossed in bitterness. She despised and hated herself for still being in love with Edward Phillips. All her life she had heard that it was terribly wrong and sinful for a white woman to desire a man with Negro blood. Debo- rah believed that she was not only sinning against God, but also against the memory of her parents. Appalled, she knew during the rare moments when she\u2019d forget her parents and God, that if only Edward had loved her, she\u2019d have willingly married a Negro. With deter- mination and constant effort, Deborah finally learned to bury those thoughts so far back in her mind that they no longer surfaced; but losing the one man she had so desperately loved, and the shocking discovery of his heritage had turned Deborah into a hard and cold woman at the tender age of seventeen."}
{"id": "wayne-rochelle-ecstasys-dawn-1983", "title": "Ecstasy's Dawn (1983)", "year": 1983, "seq": 7, "text": "Cavalry raised a storm of dust across the horizon. Zeke realized they had sent a scout ahead, who had seen the trouble, and rode hastily back to the troops to report the incident. The sound of the bugle sent the remaining Apaches fleeing for their lives. While walking away from his rifle, Zeke had his back turned to the Indian he mistakenly thought to be dead, and he did not see the slight movement the injured brave made. The girls, overjoyed at the arrival of the soldiers, were happily hugging one another. The wounded Apache soundlessly pulled out his knife and leaped towards Zeke. With the alertness and instinct of a mountain lion, Zeke pivoted away from the deadly blade in the warrior\u2019s hand. The Apache was young and strong. He knew, even wounded, that killing the old man would be easy. Sneering at him, he raised the knife once more with intentions of ramming it into the white man\u2019s heart. Rachel had moved away from her rifle, and she real- ized the closest weapon to her was Zeke\u2019s old shotgun. With a speed she never knew she possessed, she reached for the gun. Rachel lifted the heavy weapon and aware of its wide pattern she didn\u2019t waste precious time aiming but fired in the direction of the Apache. As the deadly buckshot tore parts of the Indian\u2019s body into bloody pieces, the fierce kick from the huge gun sent Rachel sprawling backwards. Violently she hit the ground, the side of her head striking a protruding rock. The last she heard was Deborah\u2019s ghastly scream as blackness engulfed her, and she fell into the depths of unconsciousness. 183 As Rachel slowly regained consciousness, she be- came aware of being gently lifted into strong, comfort- ing arms."}
{"id": "wayne-rochelle-ecstasys-dawn-1983", "title": "Ecstasy's Dawn (1983)", "year": 1983, "seq": 8, "text": "He 217 wished Deborah would give him the same kind of warmth and passion he was sure Rachel gave to John Reynolds. For different reasons, their secret was per- fectly safe with Deborah and Josh. Deborah kept quiet out of embarrassed shame for their disgraceful conduct, and Josh was silent out of his deep respect\u2019 for both Rachel and the Colonel. Slowly Rachel walked a short distance from the others, and with an expression of adoring love obvious on her pretty face, she ignored the marching drill as she stared openly at John Reynolds. She watched him standing at attention and saluting the American flag as her mind began to drift back over the past three months since they had become lovers. Smiling to herself, she contentedly thought about the fulfilling nights they spent together in the privacy of his quarters and their long, quiet conversations which made her feel she could sit for hours just listening to his deep, clear voice. To stop the others from hearing, she brought her hand to her mouth to smother an uncontrollable giggle, as she remembered her boldness on the afternoon the Colonel had ridden in with his troops after a three-day absence. She had missed him so desperately, she had no inten- tions of waiting until evening before seeing him. Try- ing to appear casual, she had walked to his office and cautiously glanced around her to be sure no one was watching. Quickly she had opened the door and rushed into the room. By the splashing sounds coming from his bedroom, it had been apparent that he was in the pro- cess of taking a bath. Smiling slyly, as she remembered that night in Kansas when he had brazenly invited her 218 to join him for a bath in the river, she had swiftly pushed in the bolt, securely locking the door."}
{"id": "wayne-rochelle-ecstasys-dawn-1983", "title": "Ecstasy's Dawn (1983)", "year": 1983, "seq": 9, "text": "Similar to John Reynolds\u2019 home, it was white 280 adobe with a red tile roof, but there the resemblance ended. Rachel\u2019s new home was built like a fortress with a large fountain in the center of the courtyard. It was sur- rounded by a radiant flower garden of bright and multi- ple colors. The bedrooms situated upstairs were com- pletely separated from the lower floor, accessible only by one of the flights of stairs located on the outside, one in each corner of the hacienda. They were married in the spacious and beautiful parlor inside the Spanish hacienda. The room was so large, that in order to comfortably heat it, there was a fireplace at each end of the room. The furniture was covered in wine colored velvet, and the tables were all of a dark mahogany wood. An enormous crystal chan- delier hung from the ceiling in the center of the room. During the ceremony, the patio doors were left open and a constant breeze kept the lace curtains over the glass doors blowing gently back and forth. Rachel fixed her gaze on these curtains, and willed herself to become hypnotized by the swaying fabric. She refused to listen to the marriage ceremony, or to look at the man stand- ing beside her. When it came time for her to speak the marriage vows, the priest had to ask her twice to please repeat them. She forced herself to look away from the hypnotic swaying of the curtains, and unconsciously, she spoke the words that made her Sefiora Granger. There had been no guests invited to the wedding, ex- cept for Deborah and Josh. William Granger had a few friends he considered to be his equals, but they all lived too far away to attend his wedding on such short notice."}
{"id": "montanaoutdoors1341982mont", "title": "Montana outdoors", "year": 1982, "seq": 0, "text": "A newly hatched duckbill was less than 14 inches long and weighed about one and one-half pounds. Evi- dence from their bone structure indi- cates they grew very rapidly, more rapidly than is typical for a cold- blooded animal. This assumed rate of growth, together with the fact that they were apparently cared for, in- dicates that at least these kinds of dinosaurs were warm-blooded, Hke birds and mammals. We have found juvenile dinosaurs over five feet long in association with adults and therefore assume that once they reached approximately this length, they were able to leave the nest and forage for food, with their parents and in the protection of a herd. Some of the herds may have comprised several hundred individu- als. Another kind of dinosaur found in this area, called a hypsilophodont, al- so nested in colonies but, unlike the duckbills, apparently did not raise its young in the nests. Hypsilophodonts laid about 25 eggs, each of which was carefully pushed into the mud so that only the top half of the egg was visi- ble. Vegetation was probably used for incubation in this species as well, since adults were about eight feet long. The young hypsilophodonts hatched through the tops of the eggs, leaving the bottom half in the nest, undisturbed. The parents may have gathered the babies from all of the nests into groups to take them to forage for food very soon after hatch- ing. Although much of the information we have been gathering is to deter- mine how dinosaurs lived and in- teracted, we have also learned a great deal about how some of them died. For example, one deposit contains the remains of an estimated 100 adult and juvenile duckbills apparently killed in a massive volcanic mud slide similar to the recent Mount St."}
{"id": "montanaoutdoors1341982mont", "title": "Montana outdoors", "year": 1982, "seq": 1, "text": "Weeds fl^IlCl JVlSin by Paul Garrett MOST OF us refer to them as \"water weeds,\" often pre- ceded by several expletives \u2014 especial- ly if they happen to foul our hooks as we are fishing, or entwine themselves around our propellers and interfere with our boating. In spite of these ob- noxious aspects, aquatic macrophytes are an integral part of the aquatic en- vironment. They perform many im- portant, beneficial functions, the most obvious of which are the pro- duction of food for waterfowl and cover for fish. The question involving aquatic macrophytes is usually: How many are enough, without being too many? Literally defined as \"large water plants,\" aquatic macrophytes com- prise a wide spectrum of plant species visible to the naked eye. Most have specialized conducting tissues which carry inorganic nutrients obtained from soil and water, and organic compounds synthesized by the plant itself, from one part of the plant body to another. These are more properly called \"vascular hydrophytes.\" Some kinds of algae form many- celled organisms resembling higher plants and these are included in the general term. Examples in Montana lakes are Chara, often called muskgrass because of its distinctive odor, and Nitella, recognizable by the whitish bands around the stems. Common submerged macrophytes in Montana include the pondweed family (Potamogeton genus), which includes over 20 species; water- milfoil (Myriophyllum exalbescens); coontail {Ceratophyllum demersum); water buttercup (Ranunculus aquatilis), and elodea {Elodea canadensis). Water weeds of some type occur in almost all aquatic habitats and what kind depends on the type of soil; depth, mineral con- tent, and clarity of water; current speed, and seasonal variations in water levels. Most water weeds are rooted in the soil and obtain mineral nutrients from it, as opposed to algae which must obtain nutrients from dissolved substances in the water. Research shows that many species of water weeds obtain from 70% to 90% of their mineral needs from the soil, depending on the soil type and mineral concentrations in the water."}
{"id": "montanaoutdoors1341982mont", "title": "Montana outdoors", "year": 1982, "seq": 2, "text": "Rocky, coarse gravels or poor, sandy soils are much less conducive to growth of rooted aquatic plants than fine, rich sediments, which have more available minerals and allow easy penetration of root systems. A few macrophytes, such as coontail, have poorly developed root systems and take most of their nutrition from the water. Others, such as duckweed (Lemna genus), are free-floating and have vastly reduced root systems. It isn't surprising that these species are often indicators of cultural eutrophication, with which high con- centrations of dissolved inorganic nutrients are associated. Clarity of the water influences macrophyte growth by regulating the intensity of available light. Aquatic plants are limited at a light intensity lower than or equal to, or slightly less than, 5% of the average light intensi- ty at the water's surface. This usually occurs at depths between five and 20 feet, although light penetrates some very clear lakes (such as Yellowstone) to allow growth at depths up to 30 feet. Water turbidity, which limits light penetration, may be due to plankton algae, sediment, or dissolved substances. Suspended sediment af- fects rooted aquatic plants by reduc- ing light penetration and by smother- ing young plants as it settles out. In some cases, sediment deposits provide a rich habitat for rooted plant growth, demonstrated by the diked dust control ponds at Canyon Ferry Reservoir near Townsend. Water levels and flow are contrcl'ed in these ponds by headgates, which maintain adequate depth and water clarity and allow abundant plant growth on the silt deposits laid down by the river. This has created ex- cellent feeding areas for waterfowl. Other factors influencing rooted aquatic plants are current speed and water level fluctuations. In rivers, In many locations on Georgetown Lake, water weeds such as big-leaf pondweed now cover up to 70'Vo of the lake's surface area."}
{"id": "montanaoutdoors1341982mont", "title": "Montana outdoors", "year": 1982, "seq": 3, "text": "But they also con- sume oxygen through respiration dur- ing growth, and decomposition after death. This can lead to problems of oxygen deficiency when the plants are overabundant, particularly in shallow lakes (Freezout Lake near Great Falls is an example). During decomposition, much of the organic material of these plants is released into the water as inorganic nutrients and recycled in the aquatic system. Thus, they act as nutrient pumps, cycling nutrients into the water. Conversely, they compete with algae for nutrients and light during much of the growing season and may suppress algal gowth below levels desirable for best fish growth. They are food for aquatic invertebrates, in- cluding zooplankton, mollusks, and insects, which, in turn, are important food for young waterfowl as well as fish. Decomposition is usually in- complete so the plants leave an organic residue which gradually ac- cumulates and is a major cause of the filling-in process inherent in natural lake succession. Rooted aquatic plants modify aquatic habitats by stabilizing bottom sediments and improving water clari- ty. They cool sediments by shading out sunlight, creating a layer of cooler water beneath the leaf canopy which provides a refuge for fish dur- ing the summer. They provide cover for game fish and forage fish \u2014 in some cases, too much cover, so that forage fish are less available to predaceous species and game fish are inaccessible to the angler. The leaf surfaces are habitat for tremendous numbers of aquatic insects vital to trout, and the vegetation is used as food and nesting material for water- fowl and furbearers. In view of the beneficial aspects of many aquatic plants, why are they so often objectionable in waters whose primary use is recreation? Simply, because they are capable of physically obstructing a waterway, as well as limiting the accessibility to fisheries resources. continued on page 13 photo: Larry Dech Don't Risk the Water by Christine Deveny You ARE hot and dry, and that beautiful, clear, cascad- ing mountain stream promises sweet, refreshing relief."}
{"id": "montanaoutdoors1341982mont", "title": "Montana outdoors", "year": 1982, "seq": 4, "text": "Once a cyst is ingested by an unsus- pecting mammalian host, it begins a precarious journey through the host's digestive tract. In the stomach, acidic conditions cause the organism to shed its protective cyst wall, and to emerge in a free-living form (the tropho- zoite). The trophozoite is much more vulnerable to the harsh stomach envi- ronment and, in order to survive, the organism quickly moves into the small intestine. There it attaches to the intestinal wall. Within a few days, it divides, multiplies, and colonizes the intestine with thousands of pro- geny in the trophozoite form. Some of the offspring remain attached to the wall, continuing to colonize the intestine, while others are excreted from the host's body. During this ex- odus, some trophozoites are capable of enveloping themselves in a cyst, which once again allows survival out- side the host. The less fortunate trophozoites which leave the host without forming cysts soon perish. Besides being the source of new Giardia organisms able to infect new hosts, the trophozoites remaining in the intestinal tract are also responsi- ble for causing the unpleasant symp- toms of giardiasis, of which diarrhea, abdominal cramps, bloating, fatigue, and weight loss are the most com- mon. Persistence of the symptoms varies from case to case. More \"for- tunate\" victims might have them for only a week, but others might be debiUtated for months. A visit to a physician is necessary for diagnosis and treatment. Giardiasis can be diagnosed when Giardia cysts are identified in stool specimens by a common microscopic examination \u2014 but it isn't always as easy as it sounds. In some cases, symptoms of giardiasis will develop before a significant number of detect- able cysts are excreted; it may take as many as three stool sample examina- tions or more before the cysts are found."}
{"id": "montanaoutdoors1341982mont", "title": "Montana outdoors", "year": 1982, "seq": 5, "text": "Not all persons who harbor Giardia in their intestinal tracts become ill with giardiasis. However, these so- called \"asymptomatic carriers\" of the Giardia cysts can shed them for years and spread the parasite. High concentrations of Giardia cysts found in water near beaver habitat led to the early belief that beavers were the main carriers of Giardia. However, researchers have also found Giardia cysts in cats, dogs, horses, cattle, rabbits, marmots, ground squirrels, mountain sheep, elk, and many other mammals. Despite this large range of hosts, some Colorado researchers have found the incidence of Giardia organisms to be lower in areas where human contact is minimal and higher in popular backcountry recreationed areas. This indicates that humans are the primary sources and spreaders of Giardia. In turn, improper body waste disposal is the primary cause of contamination. As a hiker, skier, backpacker, hunter, or camper, you can prevent contamination of water supplies by utilizing a little backcountry hygiene and courtesy in disposal of body wastes. Wastes should be kept at least 100 feet from any streams, springs, or drainage areas, and then covered with several inches of soil. The soil will aid in the rapid decomposition of the wastes and keep them away from in- sects and animals. When you consider that a single human stool specimen can contain over 300 million cysts, and that from 10 to 25 can cause in- fection, one incidence of careless backcountry hygiene can be disastrous. To avoid becoming a victim of giardiasis, consider the following pre- cautions: 1 . When out on a short day hike or cross-country ski trek, carry drinking water obtained from a safe source. 2. When camping overnight, boil the water you will use for cooking, drinking, and brushing your teeth for at least 10 minutes to ensure the destruction of all cysts. (To remove the flat taste that boiling gives, aerate the water by pouring it back and forth between two clean containers.) 3."}
{"id": "montanaoutdoors1341982mont", "title": "Montana outdoors", "year": 1982, "seq": 6, "text": "Iodine purification tablets are quite effective in destroying Giardia cysts, but they can impart an objec- tionable taste to the water. (Chlorine purification tablets won't do the job.) 4. Some small filters have been de- veloped which have been effective in removing the cysts under laboratory conditions. However, they may be unreliable after jostling around in a backpack, and their additional weight is another consideration. 5. As sources for drinking water, avoid slowly moving streams, swam- py areas, shallow ponds, and drain- age areas because Giardia cysts are more likely to be found in higher con- centrations in these areas. The fewer the organisms present, the fewer you are likely to ingest. The high incidence of giardiasis in mountain backpackers and campers led to the condition's nickname, \"backpackers' diarrhea.\" But this description is no longer completely accurate because increasing numbers of giardiasis outbreaks are now at- tributed to municipal water supplies (see sidebar). In most, the water source is surface water in which mild chlorine disinfection is the only treat- ment provided. (Don't be surprised to learn that many of these municipal water supplies originate within popular outdoor recreational areas.) Strong concentrations of chlorine over a long period of time are necessary to destroy the hardy Giar- dia cysts, especially when the water is turbid and cold. Therefore, normal chlorine disinfection of municipal cyst of Giardia lamblia water, particularly in mountainous northern states like Montana, is inef- fective against Giardia cysts. Filtration, preceded by chemical flocculation (processes which coa- lesce and settle out suspended par- ticles in the water) and sedimentation, is considered best for removing Giar- dia cysts from municipal water sup- plies. The best available filters are those made from the hard silica re- mains of diatoms, a type of algae (DE), or a graded sand and gravel medium. However, unless the system is properly operated and the water pretreated, cysts can slip through the filters because of their variable size and flexibility."}
{"id": "montanaoutdoors1341982mont", "title": "Montana outdoors", "year": 1982, "seq": 7, "text": "\"Montana Fishing\" with 140 pages of text, photographs, and maps, will provide the first-ever listing of the state's new stream fishery ratings and an overview of fishing throughout the state, according to author Dale Burk, Stevensville. \"Montana Fishing\" is the first to detail fishing potential in the warm-water fisheries of northeastern and southeastern Montana as well as the cold-water trout fisheries in the western part of the state, Burk says. Chapters detail fishing poten- tial in Montana on a regional basis. \"Where-to\" and \"how-to\" informa- tion is provided for larger streams, lakes, and reservoirs. There is an extensive look at fishing in both Glacier and Yellowstone National parks, a chapter on Montana state fishing records, and a chapter titled \"Fishing Partner,\" teUing the story of Burk's relationship with the late Len \"Buck\" Collier of Kalispell, to whom the book is dedicated. Two guest chapters are included, one on fishing the Madison, Yellowstone and Gallatin rivers by writer/wildlife biologist Hugh Zackheim and another by this writer on fishing in north central Mon- tana. The stream rating chapter is the most likely to become a Montana fisherman's choice for reference. The chapter details new stream rating listings \u2014 Class 1 (highest valued fishery resource). Class 2 (highest priority fishery resource), or Class 3 (high priority fishery resource) \u2014 for 5,436 miles of Montana streams. Burk compiled the listing after working through the ratings for 17,196 miles of streams rated by the Montana Department of Fish, Wildhfe and Parks with the help of computers. The book lists ratings for 353 stream reaches in Montana included in the top three rating categories. \"Montana Fishing\" is Burk's 10th book and the third in his series on Mon- tana's outdoor recreation pubUshed by Stoneydale Press. He recently revised and updated the \"Montana Fishing Guide\u2014 West of the Continental Divide,\" published by Moun- tain Press Publishing Co."}
{"id": "montanaoutdoors1341982mont", "title": "Montana outdoors", "year": 1982, "seq": 8, "text": "Burk is also author of \"A Brush with the West,\" about western art, and he collaborated with photographer Russell Lamb to pro- duce \"Montana,\" a large-format book about the state. \u2014 Wayne Arnst, Great Falls Tribune outdoors editor 10 The Catchall Counting \"Prairie Goats\" I feel the Super Cub surge forward and rapidly gain speed as I smoothly open the throttle. A few stabs on the rudder pedals keep the ship heading down the runway. The wheels lighten and with a little back pressure on the stick, we're airborne and heading into the sunrise. Shortly before dawn on many isolated runways throughout the West, numerous small aircraft follow suit. Through most of July, when winds are calm and skies are clear, these planes carry a pilot and a wildlife biologist into the early morning skies to count and classify pronghorn antelope. This morning, we'll be flying about 25 miles northeast of Roundup, to survey subunit 9 of antelope Hunting District 530. Subunit 9 comprises about 210 square miles of grasslands, sagebrush basins, a scattering of winter wheat fields, and badlands. There are few occupied ranches or gravel roads on the boundaries of the subunit, and none within it. As we fly to the starting point, the sun blazes into view. A few jackrabbits, a golden eagle, and a coyote scurry about as we interrupt the quiet prairie dawn. The Department of Fish, Wildlife and Parks has seven administrative regions in Montana. Five have huntable populations of antelope. Biologists in each census a portion of the region's antelope range every July. In Region 5 (Billings), half of the hunting districts are flown annually so the complete region is covered every two years. As we approach the beginning of sub- unit 9, 1 throttle back, add a notch of flaps, and settle to a cruise speed of about 60 miles per hour."}
{"id": "montanaoutdoors1341982mont", "title": "Montana outdoors", "year": 1982, "seq": 9, "text": "I then look for adult and yearling bucks. The yearlings have horns about the length of their ears, while those 2 years or older have horns a foot or more long. This herd has 16 total animals, in- cluding six fawns and a very respectable buck. As Orville heads back to our sec- tion line, I jot down the numbers in their columns. Most of the herds we see are yearling and adult does and fawns of the year, often with an adult buck in the group. The yearling bucks are mostly in separate herds. We also see many lone bucks, and single does with a fawn or two. An hour or so of this kind of flying gives you a good case of \"numb-butt,\" so we occasionally lemd on a relatively flat piece of real estate to take a break. Orville is the chief pilot, but I've been learning to fly the Cub for about a year, so I fre- quently take the controls for the less de- manding maneuvers. When it comes to tight banks at slow speed, or landing on the edge of a coulee, Orville is definitely at the stick. We've been flying for nearly four hours now. We've seen hundreds of antelope, although there were long stretches when we saw nothing but an occasional band of domestic sheep, a golden eagle now and then, or a coyote. At other times, the prairie seemed alive, with antelope in every direction. While driving through a land so open and apparently flat, it seems that you could see every antelope within miles. Yet, frequently you see few or none. Hunters and ranchers often tell me they believe antelope numbers are way down, but our annual census tells a different story. Even though we cover every square mile of a hunting district during optimum viewing conditions, we probably miss at least a third of the antelope there."}
{"id": "weba-00808", "title": "Insitute For Networking Design Information Reponse", "year": 1990, "seq": 0, "text": "Cyberthon is the name of an event the Whole Earth Institute is hosting for 24 hours from noon on October 6th to noon on October 7th, 1990 at Colossal Pictures in San Francisco. This event will focus on the cultural and social impact of Virtual Reality. What is Virtual Reality? According to Howard Rheingold, author of Tools for Thought, \"Virtual Reality is the name for a new science and technology that is emerging worldwide. Head- mounted visual displays create the illusion of immersion in a computer simulated world, and special sensor-equipped gloves makes it possible to manipulate simulated objects by direct contact. Head-tracking devices enable the computer to update the world model, thus making it possible to navigate and explore the three-dimensional models known as virtual worlds. The technology already is used for scientific visualization, architectural design, and medical imaging. Future uses include advanced computer interfaces and communication technologies. Research is actively moving forward at NASA, the University of North Carolina, MIT and MIT Media Lab, and scores of other sites in the U.S., Japan and Europe.\" How will Cyberthon be different from other Virtual Reality Conferences? As stated above, Cyberthon will focus not on the technological advances in this field, but on the cultural and social impact of Virtual Reality. People from diverse backgrounds will get some hands-on experience with various forms of Virtual Reality and then be given the opportunity to think of how this innovative technology may impact their lives and culture in the foreseeable future. Is this going to be a 24-hour conference? This conference will run for 24 hours from Saturday October 6th to Sunday October 7th at the Colossal Pictures studios in San Francisco. Adding to the general ambience of virtual reality, the conference will follow a \"Club Med\" format -- e.g. once a visitor has paid his/her admission price no other exchange of money will occur."}
{"id": "weba-00808", "title": "Insitute For Networking Design Information Reponse", "year": 1990, "seq": 1, "text": "Closing Address and presentation of the \"Build Your Own World\" contest awards Who is going to participate in this event? As of now Jaron Lanier, Eric Gullichsen, Margaret Minsky, Chris Hardman, Michael Naimark, Wendy Kellogg, William and Meredith Bricken, Tom Furness, VPL Research, Autodesk, Sense8, Broderbund, and Antenna Theater have already committed to participating in the event. Marvin Minksy, Max Behensky, Randy Farmer, Steve Arnold, Warren Franklin, Lucas Films, Scott Foster, Beth Wenzel, Steven Beck, Louis Brill, Brenda Laurel, Kathelin Hoffman and Stephanie Sutton have all expressed a strong interest in doing likewise. The Cyberthon Steering Committee has compiled a comprehensive list of people and companies who are going to be invited to participate (see attached list). While some of these are indeed involved with Virtual Reality -- like Dr. Marvin Minsky of the Media Lab, Warren Robinett of UNC and Tom Furness of the University of Washington -- others are being asked because they are involved with creating alternative realities -- like story tellers, magicians and actors -- or because of their interest in V R and how it can affect their future. Cyberthon - 2 Who are you inviting as guests? As stated above, Cyberthon will focus on the cultural and social impact of Virtual Reality. Much like computers, this technology promises to affect the lives and work of many of us in the future, and for this reason we are inviting many non- technical individuals to attend. Various areas of interest and endeavor we would like to see represented are: anthropologists, artists, biologists, educators, environmentalists, musicians, politicians, philosophers, photographers, poets, psychologists, social critics, and writers. To get a well-rounded audience for discussions, it is important to make sure the attendees are diversified in interest and occupations, not just an event for the affluent, middle aged hacker. How many people are you inviting?"}
{"id": "monmouthcoll197273monm", "title": "Monmouth College Catalog", "year": 1972, "seq": 0, "text": "In addition to speakers brought to the campus by the Student Convocations Com- mittee, several speakers, as well as musical and dramatic organizations, appear on the campus under the auspices of the Concert-Lecture series and as guests of Academic Departments. Monmouth College students assist in the work of the Warren Achievement School for the Handicapped as teachers' aids, helping teach basic physical and mental skills. The program of the Jamieson Center, a local neighborhood youth assistance center, would be severely limited without the thousands of volunteer hours of service provided by Monmouth College students. During Christmas vacation each year a group of student and faculty members spend the better part of a week in an urban area studying firsthand the problems of inner city environ- ment. Under the sponsorship of the Chaplain of Monmouth College, the Rev. Paul McClanahan, study groups have studied problems of the Indian minority in Minneapolis and Spanish Americans living in Chicago's inner-city. The Student Center provides a focal point for student life on the Monmouth College campus. Offered at the Student Center are social and cultural programs, planned and budgeted by the Student Center Board of Directors. Physical facilities in the Student Center are available for activities ranging from bowling and billiards to music. The Alpha chapters of the nation's first two sororities, Pi Beta Phi and Kappa Kappa Gamma, are located on campus. Other sorori- ties at Monmouth College are Alpha Xi Delta and Kappa Delta. The fraternities are Alpha Tau Omega, Tau Kappa Epsilon, Theta Chi, Sigma Alpha Epsilon, Sigma Phi Epsilon, and Zeta Beta Tau. Religious Life Throughout its history, Monmouth College has retained an affiliation with the church of its founders, today the United Presbyterian Church, U.S.A. Many demoninations are repre- sented among the students and faculty and the College Chaplain encourages students to associ- ate with a local church of their choice while at Monmouth."}
{"id": "monmouthcoll197273monm", "title": "Monmouth College Catalog", "year": 1972, "seq": 1, "text": "In accepting the responsibility of challenging each student to explore the spiritual dimensions of life, the College actively supports college- community cooperation in ecumenical pro- grams to attract religious leaders of many faiths to the campus and community. Furthermore, the College encourages local clergy to design spiritual programs which are contemporary and meaningful to today's student. No attempt is made to intrude on or change a student's religious or spiritual beliefs. However, the College and the Chaplain provide oppor- tunities for students to be exposed voluntarily to leading interpreters of religious thought through seminars, lectures, and personal coun- seling. Athletics Monmouth is a member of the Midwest Inter- collegiate Athletic Conference which maintains competition at the varsity level among 10 of the institutions in the Associated Colleges of the Midwest. Monmouth's \"Fighting Scots\" battle in nine varsity sports: football, cross country, basketball, swimming, wrestling, base- ball, track, golf, and tennis. In addition, soccer competition with several colleges and univer- sities is on a club basis. Freshmen are eligible to compete in all varsity sports. Monmouth has a proud record of support for its athletic teams, and approxi- mately one of every four men participate in intercollegiate athletics. The Women's Extramural sports program includes competition in basketball, softball and volleyball with other IlUnois universities and colleges. Intramurals The intramural sports program provides an opportunity for every student to participate in some type of competitive sports activity as regularly as his interest, abihty, and time will permit. Students representing dormitories, fra- ternities, sororities, and independents are organ- ized into teams competing for trophies and awards. Activities include: archery, badminton, base- ball throw, basketball, billiards, bowling, cross country, decathlon, football, free throws, golf, handball, punt football, softball, swimming, table tennis, tennis, volleyball, and wrestUng. Recreation The department encourages the widest possible use of its facilities and staff in supporting the recreational needs and interest of the college community."}
{"id": "monmouthcoll197273monm", "title": "Monmouth College Catalog", "year": 1972, "seq": 2, "text": "The gymnasium is reserved for recreational activities at specified times throughout each term. Student Organizations \"M\"Club The varsity letter winners of Monmouth College join together in the \"M\" Club in order to promote team work and sportsmanship in all athletic events. Soccer Club Soccer enthusiasts and those interested in learn- ing soccer are encouraged to participate in this exciting sport. The club competes regularly against Knox and other colleges in the midwest. Dolphin Club The Dolphin Club is an organization for women who have a special interest in aquatics. To obtain membership one must pass the Dolphin requirements. The club presents a bi-annual water show in the fall and spring. Departmental Clubs Departmental clubs are organized for the bene- fit of students with interests in particular fields of study. The American Chemical Society, and the Clio (History), French, German, Spanish, Psychology, and Sociology Clubs are open to all students. Crimson Masque Crimson Masque is the College dramatic soci- ety. Three or four full-length plays plus experi- mental one-acts are produced under its auspices each year. Membership is open to any inter- ested student and no previous dramatic exper- ience is necessary. Black Action and Affairs Council The BAAC promotes a desire for higher acade- mic achievement, a better social acceptance within the College, and good fellowship within its membership. Membership is open to any person affiliated with Monmouth College, with an understanding of an effective black brother- hood, sharing mutual black interests, and a desire for black unity. International Club ^^ Membership is open to all interested in partici- pating in programs that further the causes of better international relations. Politics Club The Pohtics Club is open to anyone with an interest in government or related fields. A variety of campus seminars have been planned for the 1972-73 academic year involving a number of state and local government officials."}
{"id": "monmouthcoll197273monm", "title": "Monmouth College Catalog", "year": 1972, "seq": 3, "text": "Economics and Business Club With the assistance of the faculty, the officers of the Economics and Business Administration majors plan programs of interest and frequently invite students and faculty of other depart- ments to attend. The programs frequently cross departmental lines and provide general chal- lenge and interest. Programs have included presentation of student papers; discussions of careers by graduates, and reviews of business problems and activities by corporate officers. Collegium Musicum The Collegium Musicum is an organization consisting of instrumentalists and vocalists dedi- cated to the performance of old or seldom played music. This ensemble has gained notice for the reintroduction of older instruments such as the recorder and harpsichord. Monmouth College Highlanders In keeping with Monmouth College's Scottish tradition, a bagpipe band was created in 1956. The band, with its complement of Highland Dancers, performs at school and off-campus activities. New members\u2014 pipers, drummers, dancers- are welcome at any time. Honorary Organizations Sigma Omicron Mu Sigma Omicron Mu is the upperclass honorary scholastic fraternity on campus. To be eligible for membership, one must have completed 24 term courses, 12 of which must have been taken at Monmouth or on a Monmouth- sponsored program, with a grade-point equiva- lent to an (A) in 19 courses and a (C) in the other five. Alpha Lambda Delta This is the national honorary scholastic frater- nity for outstanding freshmen women. To gain membership, a freshman woman must earn a 3.5 average during the first term, or a cumula- tive 3.5 average at the end of second or third terms. Phi Eta Mu This is the freshmen men's honorary scholastic fraternity. Any freshman man is eligible who has attained a 3.5 grade-point average at the end of his first term, or a 3.5 cumulative grade-point average at the end of second or third terms. Mortar Board Mortar Board is a national honorary senior women's society."}
{"id": "monmouthcoll197273monm", "title": "Monmouth College Catalog", "year": 1972, "seq": 4, "text": "Qualifications include leader- ship, service, and scholarship. Election is held in the third term of the junior year. Beta Beta Beta This is the national honorary biology society. Membership is open to those students who meet the necessary grade and course require- ments. Eta Sigma Phi Eta Sigma Phi is the international college classics honorary fraternity. Membership is open to those undergraduates who have main- tained a 3.0 grade average in coDege Latin or Greek. National Collegiate Players Membership in the Monmouth College chapter of National Collegiate Players is open to juniors and seniors who have outstanding records of dramatic participation and are in the upper 30% of their graduating class. Phi Alpha Theta This is the international honorary history fra- ternity on campus. Beta Phi chapter promotes the diligent study and evaluation of history. Membership is open to upperclassmen who meet its high scholastic requirements. Pi Kappa Delta Pi Kappa Delta is a national honorary forensic fraternity, whose purpose is to stimulate prog- ress in and to further the interests of inter- collegiate speech activities and communication. Sigma Delta Pi Sigma Delta Pi is the national Spanish fraternity whose purpose is to further knowledge and interest in Hispanic culture. Membership re- quires the completion of a 300 course in Spanish at Monmouth, with a minimum grade average of B in all Spanish courses. In addition, the over-all average must be at least 2.6. Sigma Tau Delta Sigma Tau Delta is a national EngUsh fraternity which fosters creative writing and appreciation of good literature. Pi Gamma Mu The national social science honor society Pi Gamma Mu grants the privilege of membership to those who have shown unusual interest and aptitude in the study of the social sciences. Blue Key Blue Key is the honor fraternity for junior and senior men of outstanding character and ability who have won campus distinction for service, leadership, and scholarship."}
{"id": "monmouthcoll197273monm", "title": "Monmouth College Catalog", "year": 1972, "seq": 5, "text": "Tomahawk The Monmouth Sioux chapter of Tomahawk, a national service and scholastic honorary for unaffiliated students, promotes social and ser- vice activities among the campus and com- munity. Student Services The advising and counseling of each student is primarily in the hands of his faculty adviser, assisted by the personnel deans, the Chaplain, and a clinical psychologist. In many ways mature students are helpful to students who are just beginning college, and therefore student counselors are located in all areas in the halls where freshmen are assigned. An orientation program is scheduled before the start of classes each fall to provide entering students with information about classes, cur- riculum, residence hall living, student organiza- tions, and student life, and to help them to meet new classmates and faculty members. Both students and alumni are assisted in obtaining employment through the Career Development Office. This office maintains a library of career materials and offers vocational counseHng. Recruiters from industry, school systems, federal and state government, and the military come to campus during the year for the purpose of interviewing students. The Director of Student Aid administers an extensive program of college scholarships and loans, National Defense Loans, Educational Opportunity Grants, and the 350-odd student jobs on the campus. The Health Service provides a well-equipped infirmary and liaison with the new Monmouth Community Memorial Hospital. Physicians and nurses staff the services and are available for treatment of minor illnesses as well as for emergencies. Full details of the Health Service program are given to students and their parents at the beginning of the College year. THE CAMPUS The Monmouth College physical plant is con- tinually being expanded and improved; the Haldeman-Thiessen Science Center and Hewes Library are the most recent additions to the Monmouth campus building program. Three new residence halls and the three-fraternity complex have been completed since 1965."}
{"id": "monmouthcoll197273monm", "title": "Monmouth College Catalog", "year": 1972, "seq": 6, "text": "Experiment in International Living Independent study in Europe is available under a program sponsored jointly by Monmouth College and the Experiment in International Living, a non-profit, non-sectarian organization which places students as guest members of families in foreign countries. Under this pro- gram, students may receive academic credit for independent study and travel by special ar- rangement. Geology in the Rocky Mountains* High school graduates who have been accepted for admission to Monmouth College are eligible to register for a summer program in introduc- tory geology in a field setting which includes most of the mountainous and foothills region of Colorado and the canyon country of eastern Utah. Participants are housed at Colorado College in Colorado Springs, Colorado, and have use of the lecture and laboratory faciHties of the Geology Department. At least three- quarters of the course is spent in the field. High School Seniors' Honors Program Now in its seventh year, a cooperative program with Monmouth High School enables a limited number of highly qualified high school seniors to take a course for college credit. India Studies Program* Following a preparatory study and orientation period at an ACM college, students travel to Deccan College in Poona, India, a cultural and educational center about 120 miles from Bombay. Here they continue their language instruction in the Marathi dialect, pursue an independent research project, and participate in a seminar designed to give historical perspective to many aspects of Indian culture, especially religion, politics, art, and music. Junior Year Abroad in Puerto Rico Monmouth College sponsors a Junior Year Abroad Program at the University of Puerto Rico. Students may spend either a semester or an academic year at this school. Other programs with a variety of foreign study centers can be arranged through the faculty Off-Campus Study Committee and the Associate Dean of the College."}
{"id": "monmouthcoll197273monm", "title": "Monmouth College Catalog", "year": 1972, "seq": 7, "text": "Law The major field for the student planning to enter law school can be quite varied but the student should prepare himself in communica- tive skills and understanding of human institu- tions and values. Courses in economics, govern- ment, philosophy, psychology, sociology, and speech are recommended. After receiving the A.B. degree, a student may qualify for a library science degree with one year of training in a professional school. Busi- ness and industry have opened new fields in specialized library work for students with scien- tific training. There are opportunities for stu- dents with an interest in library science to work in the Monmouth College Library. Medicine Although specific requirements for each medi- cal school vary, the minimum science require- ments for admission to most medical schools are listed as: 1 year of Biology, 2 years of Chemistry, and 1 year of Physics. In order to handle the mathematical concepts inherent in modern science, a strong background in mathe- matics is recommended for medical school preparation. Medical schools also wish strong preparation in the humanities and social sciences. Biology and Chemistry majors fulfiUing the departmental requirements at Monmouth meet the course requirements for admission to medi- cal school with the modest additions to their science programs suggested by the minimum requirements above. The program of study for each student is planned in consultation with faculty members in consideration of current medical school requirements. Medical Technology Under a program similar to that for medicine or dentistry, students may major in any field providing certain basic course requirements are met. Generally, an A.B. degree with a major in biology or chemistry is taken. A fifth year at a professional school and successful completion of the registry examination will lead to the certificate in medical technology. Ministry and Christian Education The American Association of Theological Schools recommends a broad liberal arts back- ground as the best preparation for the modern ministry."}
{"id": "monmouthcoll197273monm", "title": "Monmouth College Catalog", "year": 1972, "seq": 8, "text": "Concentration in philosophy, religion. history, English, sociology or psychology is acceptable, and some knowledge of Greek is a valuable asset. Monmouth's program for training of church education assistants is approved by the United Presbyterian Church Joint Committee of Nine. The committee notes that the program \"has value for students of other communions who are preparing for service in the field of Christian education.\" The program includes general liber- al arts requirements in humanities, social sciences, physical sciences and mathematics and 14 term courses in education, psychology, religion, and music. Teaching Teacher preparation programs have been de- signed to implement the objectives of Mon- mouth College and also to meet the general and professional education requirements of the lUinois State Teacher Certification Board. The programs provide students preparing to teach in 3 elementary and secondary schools with oppor- tunities to develop attitudes and behaviors needed to become effective teacher-scholars. The programs allow for development of breadth through the general education component, depth through the study in a major field, and teaching competence through the professional courses. Students expressing an interest in teaching as a career are advised to pursue programs of study which take into account their subject interests, personal aptitudes, and desire to quahfy for various teaching preparation pro- grams. Special study programs, one of which is the Urban Teaching Program of the Associated Colleges of the Midwest, offer special opportun- ities to the Monmouth student. Other programs may be started at Monmouth and completed in graduate school. See page 46 for more specific information concerning the teacher education program. w \u25a0^: I 4 COURSES OF INSTRUCTION Students are urged to note the requirements listed for each academic department and con- sult with their faculty adviser and the depart- ment concerned for more specific information. Prerequisites or co-requisites for a course, if any, are listed following the course description."}
{"id": "monmouthcoll197273monm", "title": "Monmouth College Catalog", "year": 1972, "seq": 9, "text": "PETERSEN, Professor, Chairman BERWYN E. iONES, Associate Professor TERRY M. ^AGEL, Assistant Professor The study of chemistry offers opportunities for the interpretation of natural phenomenon of an immense variety. Therefore, examples of the ways in which an education in chemistry can serve both society and its individual professionals are almost unlimited in num- ber and kind. Whatever the variety, many of our most pressing social concerns such as public health, mental illness, environmental deterioration, and the famine- overpopulation problem certainly cannot be resolved without attacking their scientific aspects. These as- pects are, to a large extent, chemical in nature. Thus, alone or coupled with aspects of the sister discipUnes of biology, geology, psychology and phy- sics, the major in chemistry provides preparation for a career applicable to society's most pressing concerns. For the student who recognizes that the promise of any significant post-graduate activity demands firm preparation and serious study, the Department of Chemistry offers a flexible curriculum. This flexibility provides a wide variety of approaches to challenging . the unknown and gaining knowledge and confidence sufficient to examine nature with the anticipation of independent discovery. Many career opportunities in chemistry and chemi- cally related fields require only a bachelor's degree. Others require graduate education or professional training beyond the bachelor's level. The concentra- tion in chemistry is designed to open all of these possibilities. Opportunities for immediate post-graduate employ- ment exist in both the educational and experimental areas. The former would include not only teaching but also library, technical writing, pubhcation, government or consumer advocacy and business specialties. Careers involving design or performance of experimental in- vestigations are found in medical research areas, such as cancer chemotherapy, and in the pharmaceutical industries which employ many persons with a bache- lor's degree as members of research teams. Many laboratories engaged in bio-chemical research and problems in oceanography, air and water pollution, agriculture, pesticides and plastics are in constant need of college trained chemists."}
{"id": "misosys-catalog-1984", "title": "Misosys Catalog", "year": 1984, "seq": 0, "text": "The XFLIP command will create a mirror image of the screen about the Y-axis. The graphics will be a true mirror image and the order of text characters will be reversed. The YFLIP is similar to the XFLIP except rotation is about the X-axis. ZGRAPH uses all available memory (to HIGHS) as in-memory screen buffers in addition to the video display screen. All but one of these buffers are qeneral purpose buffers and are available to the user to store displays. This is useful when creating a large graphic consisting of several ZGRAPH images or in creating those images using the MERGE function. ZGRAPH can also load and save images to disk files. All data moving to and from the disk passes through the primary video display. The reserved internal display buffer is used for error recovery in case you make a mistake (perish the thought!). GET is the function for loading the video display screen from a disk file or one of the buffers. Any one portion of the screen can be saved to a buffer or file by using the SAVE command. MERGE allows you to superimpose one graphic image over another. If you want to exchange the screen display with a buffer, use the XCHANGE command. The INPUT and OUTPUT functions reference all of the in-memory buffers for use as a multiple-image-file. Such a file is used with the BINPLAY program to provide slide-show type operations. ZGRAPH provides functions to make your graphics generation easier. The DUPLICATE command replicates a block defined by markers to other areas of the screen LINE will establish the best fitting line between the marker SET and the current cursor position. The marker position will be updated to the current cursor position after each line is drawn providing an easy way to construct lines connected end-to-end."}
{"id": "mimbresresourcemunit_0", "title": "Mimbres resource management plan : record of decision", "year": 1993, "seq": 0, "text": "A right-of-way (NMNM66383) has been granted to the National Aeronautics and Space Administration and a subsequent Memorandum of Understanding (NM-030-45) was signed in April 1990 reserving the public land for ground water monitoring wells. Based on the ground water studies, these lands may need to be withdrawn from multiple use management to protect public safety.\" P. 2-38, Column 1, paragraph 5, last line. After \"Appendix H-2\", add: \"The route identified would be adhered to as much as possible in the development of the trail, but trail development would not necessarily be limited to the corridor. If deviation from the identified corridor is necessary because of water needs or to facilitate easement acquisition, this would be addressed through the plan amendment process.\" P. 2-44, Column 2 under Land Treatments, line 7. Beginning with the word \"Creosotebush\", delete all text through line 18 ending with \"breaks\". Replace with the following: \"Chemical herbicides will be used for control of noxious weeds, during ROW maintenance, and control of competing or unwanted vegetation consistent with the New Mexico Record of Decision (ROD) for Vegetation Treatment on BLM Lands in the Thirteen Western States (August 1991). Such actions will be identified in site-specific environmental analysis on proposed vegetation control plans, which will be documented using an interdisciplinary approach. Minimum width buffer strips and other criteria stipulated in the New Mexico ROD (see page 10) will provide an adequate level of protection in almost all situations. For those situations when additional protection is warranted, the buffer may be extended or other criteria developed that is appropriate to the local area. Within the Mimbres Resource Area, additional protection of perennial streams will be provided by utilizing a 0.5 mile buffer when pelletized Tebuthiuron is used to treat creosotebush, mesquite, and mixed desert shrub, except during ROW maintenance operations. For economic reasons, usually only areas two sections in size or greater (1,240 acres) would be treated."}
{"id": "montanajournalof48mont", "title": "Montana journal of health, physical education, recreation, and dance", "year": 1983, "seq": 0, "text": "(' Since that time, the Office of Public Instruction has conducted regional training workshops involving over 20 Mon- tana schools. Participants have included physical educators, health educators, counselors, school nurses, home economics teachers, and school foods personnel. Interest in this type of program has been tremendous from parents, school administrators, teachers, students, and even physicians. The Physical Management program can be established at virtually no cost to a school district, beyond the initial train- ing for instructors. Training workshops may be arranged by contacting the persons listed above. All necessary materials and testing skills are provided to workshop participants. Program Components Behavioral Modification is intended to make students aware of the poor eating and exercise habits which may have led to their current obesity and to replace those habits with better ones, which will lead to weight control and maintenance. Situational management techniques are taught which allow the student to deal appropriately with the food cues encountered in their individual environments. Physical Conditioning starts with an evaluation of body composition and determination of fitness level. The condi- tioning program is geared toward the development of flexibility, strength, and cardiorespiratory endurance. Students participate four days a week in a form of aerobic exercise during ciass, and continue with a self-monitored exercise pro- gram on weekends. Nutrition Education involves students in a \"food exchange\" plan from which they learn proper food group selection, portion control, and caloric density of foods. This method of nutrition education prevents the use of potentially dangerous \"fad diets\" and allows the student to see a slow, consistent rate of weight loss. Self-Concept encourages overweight students to challenge the negative images they may have of themselves a^ unattractive, lazy, and lacking self-control. Through the use of assertiveness training, goal-setting, and social skills development, students are able to experiment and practice appropriate behavior in a safe and accepting environment."}
{"id": "montanajournalof48mont", "title": "Montana journal of health, physical education, recreation, and dance", "year": 1983, "seq": 1, "text": "From epidemicological studies, which have examined the behavioral and psychological variables it has been concluded that there is a risk for both heart attack and hypertension. One example of this is in the research which connects depression, psychophysiological complaints, anxiety, emotional drain, feeling of dissatisfaction and strife with other people as a cause of angina pectoris (chest pains cause by lack of blood to the heart) . Perhaps then, in addition to physical exercise as a way of dealing with emotional \u2022 stress, one should not harden his attitude or harden his heart, but remain flexible enough to look at something from another viewpoint. It is what we believe about what is occurring that affects our behavior. Changing one's outlook on events surrounding him and changing his behavior in order to reduce anxiety has to come from within a person. To change one's attitude is to change one's heart, so to speak. This is the spiritual^ part of man, his belief system and his values. Living up to one's values or not living them may cause stress due to the conviction of his conscience and his heart. As Solomon so wisely stated, \"A merry heart maketh a cheerful countenance, but by sorrow of the heart the spirit is broken.\" What causes sorrow in our hearts and breaks our spirit varies for each and every person. Statistics show that heart disease is the number one cause of death in our nation. These deaths may be attributed to a lack of harmony in one of these areas discussed or all three. The heart is definitely affected physically, mentally, and spiritually. To have a balance of these three areas will result in a healthy and joyful heart. Again quoting from Proverbs, \"a cheerful heart does good like medicine, but a broken spirit makes one sick.\" Therefore, the heart can affect a person physically, mentally and spiritually."}
{"id": "montanajournalof48mont", "title": "Montana journal of health, physical education, recreation, and dance", "year": 1983, "seq": 2, "text": "He/she should understand Newton's Laws of Motion and the principles of leverage as they relate to human movement. 5th level: The basic movement skills can be used as a basis for learning individual skills for all the many games, sports, dances, gymnastics, and aquatics that are included in a good physical education pro- gram. The physically- educated individual should develop reasonable skill in several lifetime sports, essential in at least one. His/her leisure-time education should be closely related to physical education. 6th level: The physically educated individual learns to control his/her body for purposes of relaxation. He/she learns to recognize tension, stress, and anxiety, and to eliminate it through conscious effort. This physical skill is important for coping with stress in today's society. 3. THE PERSONAL SELF The physically-educated person has become fully aware of himself/herself and how he/she can express himself/ herself in and through movement experiences. He/she has developed a \"phyitaal pesuonaLUy\" that appreciates physical activity and can express joy and satisfaction in movement experiences like games, sports, dance, and play activities. He/she has learned how to play and has become self- initiating so that he/she can reap all the benefits. He/she has learned to communicate and express himself/herself through non-verbal channels. He/ she recognizes beauty and artistry in human movement as it expresses form, rhythm, harmony, and mood. The truly physically-educated individual has accepted the encouragement to create new, original forms of move- ment. His/her movement habits help him/her to adjust to, adapt to, and recover in an ever-changing environ- ment. He/she appreciates the role of all kinds of movement forms in dance, sports, and culture, and their meaning in society. Most of all, he/she has experienced ion through physical activity."}
{"id": "modulus1979tris_0", "title": "Modulus", "year": 1979, "seq": 0, "text": "In the search for a discovery of ourselves there is, at least in part, an inherent urge to define what we are by determining where we came from. If this thesis has any merit, it might explain the interest of the young adult in an era that ended before he or she was born. If generalization can be allowed, the young adult of twenty-five years ago came to discover a growing awareness of self as he discovered the role-models which were more clearly defined and more arbitrarily accepted at that time. Perhaps he defined himself as he attempted to conform to the role that his society expected him to accept as his destiny. Today, an awareness of self takes on new and, in many cases, personalized aspects: recent popular publications, catchy com- mercial jingles, and quasi-militant slogans have told us that, among other things, we are O.K., we can have it our way, and we have a right to our own space. Our needs, an important consideration in any evaluation of the self, seem more autonomously deter- mined and less societally governed. It does not seem as selfish as it once was to consider what we want, what we need, what we have a right to expect. Though the basic needs seem never to change, the manner in which the individual asserts and achieves his needs can be seen to be changing. Just as minority groups have urged and are still urging their voices to be heard and their needs | satisfied, the individual is asserting his right to be recognized as an important, though singular, voice in the society to which he belongs. Perhaps the most dramatic demonstration of a new awareness of self can be found in the emergence of the woman as a viable, powerful, and valuable force in contemporary life."}
{"id": "modulus1979tris_0", "title": "Modulus", "year": 1979, "seq": 1, "text": "After a long colonization, the local chapter of Acacia Fra- ternity was fully installed at Tri-State College in 1967. Acacia aims to assist those who are striving for a better and more use- ful existence in the world, while working for wisdom and understanding, above all else. The Acacia Fraternity was conceived in the fall of 1903 at the Library of the University of Michigan. Acacia\u2019s goal is to help the individual in two common endeavors: the develop- ment of the mind and growth in right conduct and character. Acacia is unique in that its name is a whole Greek Word, not just letters. Acacia is the name of a far-eastern evergreen that symbolizes strength, ruggedness and the ability to endure. Acacia, as a brotherhood will endure. Come visit sometime. 92 Alpha Epsilon Pi Bottom to Top\u2014Left to Right: Todd Walters, Tom Leas, Rich Steiner, Don Lyons, Randy Holdren, Norm Reed, Rodney Johnson. Alpha Epsilon Pi was founded in 1970 as the Tau Sigma Fraternity and is now known as the Tau Sigma Colony of Alpha Epsilon Pi. It is one of the largest national social frater- nities. The colony itself is one of the smaller houses on campus. This smallness gives the house an imformal, friendly atmos- phere which in larger houses is difficult to obtain. Each indi- vidual brother is allowed to play an active part in running the house, learning responsibility, and building lifetime friend- ships. Alpha Epsilon Pi\u2019s main social events are the semi-annual pig roasts which are held every fall and spring quarters. Inde- pendents are always welcome at AEPi, which is located on College Street one block south of the campus. We have a small brotherhood now, but watch out for us next year TSU. 93 Alpha Sigma Phi Left to Right: Mike DeBruyne, Jeff Schoch, Mark Frogstone, Mike Murray, Paul Hollenbeck, Dave Scheirer, Bill Golden, Paul Ruegamer, Bill Adams, Rob Schoenberger, Jim Small, Pebe, Doug Libey."}
{"id": "modulus1979tris_0", "title": "Modulus", "year": 1979, "seq": 2, "text": "As you are thumbing through these pages you should notice several changes from previous years. The book this year has more pages than in the past and could use many more but the budget does not permit that. Then you should notice the use of more color in the pages of this book. Thanks to some great photographers, the pictures are of good quality and seem to be more exciting. Those photographers are: Scott Lundi, Tom Thrasher, Noah McClain, Scott Timmis, Ralph Sampson, Tom Metzler and a host of others. The division pages and the opening section are all a part of the theme of this book, which is \u201cOur New Awareness.\u201d This year we used bigger pictures on all the pages to keep with current standards in the yearbook layout objectives. Because of this, not every student, faculty member, or administrator can be pictured or mentioned in 180 pages. We tried to cover only the highlights of this school year to represent a true picture of life on the Tri-State University campus. Every year something seems to happen to cause some part of the Modulus to be lacking in one or two areas. This year the dark- room was vandalized and some very valuable film was destroyed. So if you see an event or team not in the book it is due to the fact that no pictures were available to properly cover that event or team. I would like to thank the people who contributed to the task of putting together this book. Jerry Brown, did a fine job as assist-_ ant editor. He was always there when I needed him. Shelly Saunders and Cindy Walker handled the senior section and a lot of the \u2014 typing duties. Other workers were: Cindy Huyser, Tom Sundling, and the photographers already mentioned."}
{"id": "NAG105", "title": "New Amberola Graphic 105", "year": 1998, "seq": 0, "text": "Victor records were only 75 cents apiece as opposed to Edison Records at a dollar. The Edison \u201cArmy & Navy\u201d Model has all the indications of having been designed by someone who never experienced front-line conditions. As many returning doughboys could have attested, despite the Edison\u2019s cumbersome indestructibility, the filthy, noisy conditions in the lines were no place for a phonograph. Artillery batteries and rear areas were the obvious venues for such comforts, and the Edison was overbuilt for the purpose. If the little Victrolas of the period could survive behind the front, why lug around the 1 00 pound Edison? As a final, fatal blow to the \u201cArmy & Navy\u201d Model\u2019s prospects for long-term survival, the usual method of dispersal of these machines after the war was for the unit to hold a lottery to determine which soldier would take the machine home with him. One can well imagine the reaction of the soldier\u2019s wife or mother when he deposited this olive-drab crate in the parlor! Far more welcome would have been a small Victrola, designed as it was for the home. Indeed, collectors today who are \u201clucky\u201d owners of this machine, can attest to its lowly status in the eyes of guests. Despite its rarity and the oddities of its construction, this model remains generally unloved (especially by those of us with collections on the second-floor!). Only those who are drawn to the lunacy of its design and the tragedy of its intended application are likely to fully appreciate this phonographic white elephant. Fig. 3: With the grille removed, the horn clamp may be seen. The crank is stowed alongside the wooden block in the right foreground. The turntable is bolted beneath the lid for transport. Some Columbia Controversies by Tim Brooks In the course of compiling volumes one and four of the Columbia Master Book Discography the volumes covering the earliest, least-documented period of Columbia disc production \u2014 I was forced to confront a number of long-standing discographical controversies."}
{"id": "NAG105", "title": "New Amberola Graphic 105", "year": 1998, "seq": 1, "text": "The only way to date the long-lived take 12 would be to detennine the earliest label style on which that take is found. This writer\u2019s earliest copy of take 12 is on a disc bearing the black and silver label, with \u201cColumbia Phonograph Co., GenT\u201d arched across the top and a single prize shown next to the spindle hole \u2014 \u201cGrand Prize Paris 1900.\u201d Sherman and Nauck, in their fine label guide Note the Notes, (4) date this label (III.B. 1) as in use only during 1905. Does anyone have take 12 bearing an earlier label? Other takes that have been reported (less frequently) are seven-inch takes 2 and 7, and ten-inch takes 1, 2, 3 and 13. Ironically, it is possible \u2014 though not certain \u2014 that Harry Spencer, not Len, may have had the best-selling single version of this famous routine. (Considering versions on all labels, Len would have sold more.) Early Columbia pressings turn up often, and Columbia A406 remained in the catalog until 1926 (with artist credit given simply as \u201ctalking\u201d). The master was also issued on numerous other labels, which are frequently found. Len\u2019s Victor version was last remade in 1908, reissued on no other label, and I believe is found somewhat less often (although it too stayed in the catalog until the 1920s). Comparative sales of Edison wax cylinders are difficult to judge, since they are fragile and not as many survive as discs. Len\u2019s four-minute Edison cylinder version was reissued on Blue Amberol 3745, but not on Diamond Discs. The postscript on Harry Spencer is sad. He seems to have done little recording after 1902, although he continued to work for his brother at the latter\u2019s theatrical agency. After Len died suddenly in 1914 Harry briefly ran the agency, but due to his mismanagement it dissolved. He then started several unsuccessful businesses and worked for some years for the Pennsylvania Railroad."}
{"id": "NAG105", "title": "New Amberola Graphic 105", "year": 1998, "seq": 2, "text": "Catalogs and labels identified the singer only as \u201cSignor Giannini,\u201d but collectors and writers have always assumed that meant Ferruccio Giannini, the pioneering tenor who was the first \u201cserious\u201d operatic artist to make recordings, for Berliner in 1896, and later for Victor and Zonophone. It was certainly a surprise, therefore, to discover that in later Columbia catalogs these 1903-1904 recordings were credited not to Ferruccio but to Diego Giannini, an obscure tenor then recording in the Columbia \u201cE\u201d series. In the early 1900s Columbia did not routinely identify artists in its catalogs, and sometimes not on the labels either. However with the advent of double-discs in 1908 this policy was gradually reversed, and in July 1912 the general catalog underwent a major overhaul, with many artist names added or expanded. \u201cSignor Giannini\u201d became \u201cDiego Giannini,\u201d which it remained until the last of his discs was deleted in 1914. Several collectors I contacted were surprised by the discovery, and suggested that since it was from an original source, it might well be true. In this case, however, collectors are right and the Columbia catalog editors were wrong. I subsequently obtained copies of some of the original 1904 single-face discs, and they are announced as by Ferruccio Giannini. The announcements are delivered with a wonderful flourish (\u201cFerr-UUCH-io!\u201d), in a heavily accented voice that is no doubt that of the tenor himself. These announcements, which by the way are worth the price of the disc, had been physically deleted from the master by the time the double face versions were issued, and the 1912 Columbia editors probably assumed the artist was the only Giannini then recording for the company. Diego, who was apparently not related to Ferruccio, continued to record until the 1920s.(6) The moral? Don\u2019t believe everything you read, even if it comes from a period source."}
{"id": "NAG105", "title": "New Amberola Graphic 105", "year": 1998, "seq": 3, "text": "She is not always billed on the label; for example her name does not appear on \u201cUncle Josh\u2019s Courtship\u201d (nos. 1906 and A396), although her voice is clearly heard. The original Uncle Josh-Aunt Nancv productions are found only on Columbia, since at the time (1904-1905) Stewart was recording exclusively for that label\u2019s cylinders and discs. When the exclusive disc arrangement ended Stewart and his wife recorded the routines for Victor, in early 1907. . Most references are vague as to when Ada Jones took over the role of Aunt Nancy, implying that it was soon after this. McNutt in his Cal Stewart biography says that it was in 1910.(8) However the earliest I can find Ada Jones billed on a record with Stewart is in 1919, the year he died. Ada Jones seems to have taken the role only at the very end of Stewart\u2019s career. One of my favorites from this period, incidentally, is \u201cEvening Time at Pumpkin Center\u201d (A2789), in which the usually stuffy Henry Burr affects a ridiculous rural accent m a vain effort to fit in. The real-life missus seems to have been Stewart\u2019s preferred female partner on record. #4: The Case of Madame Noe. The celebrated sextette from Lucia di Lammermoor was one of the most famous and frequently performed operatic arias of the early 1900s. It was sung by all manner of artists, burlesqued by vaudeville troupes, even arranged as a fox trot. Irving Berlin\u2019s comic version, as sung by Billy Murray with the Vaudeville Quartette on Victor 17 1 19, is a delight (\u201cThat note alone is worth a dollar!\u201d). You could cut a mg with the cheery fox trot version by Paul Specht and His Orchestra on Columbia A3 708. Victor made a splash in 1908 when it released an all-star version of the Sextette, featuring major names from its Red Seal roster \u2014 Sembrich, Caruso, Scotti, Joumet, Severina and Daddi (Victor 96200)."}
{"id": "NAG105", "title": "New Amberola Graphic 105", "year": 1998, "seq": 4, "text": "While it is true that earlier celebrity versions usually included one or two voices of lesser rank (Severina, Cilia), Noe was totally unknown to the collectors I surveyed. The name seems to have been unknown to Columbia customers in 1920 as well. It appears on no other known Columbia recordings, or for that matter on any label I have been able to trace. Columbia said nothing about the singer in its announcement of the record. The sextette is composed of a soprano (Barrientos), two tenors (Hackett, Meader), baritone (Stracciari), bass (Mardones) and mezzo-soprano. By process of elimination, Noe must be the mezzo, so at least we know it\u2019s a woman. A first thought was that perhaps the catalog editors meant Doris Doe (I\u2019m not making this up!), a rather obscure contralto who recorded duets with Homer Rodeheaver and others, and was a member of the Columbia Light Opera Company later in the 1920s.(9) Then opera expert Larry Holdridge came to the rescue. He had wondered about the mysterious Mme. Noe as well, until he turned up a clipping from the June 26, 1919, Musical Courier, regarding one Emma Noe. Larry explained, \u201cShe was with the Chicago Opera, singing contralto. She then worked with Minnie Tracey who \u2018mended her voice,' and \u2018made her over into a dramatic soprano.\u2019 She was offered a Covent Garden engagement, but she couldn't accept it as she was busy with other contracts accepted earlier. Although she had been converted to a soprano, there\u2019s no reason she couldn\u2019t have done the recording, particularly as she probably knew the role.\u201d(10) Of course this does not prove that the mystery voice on the Columbia recording was that of Emma Noe, but it seems likely. After all, how many Noe\u2019s do you know? #5: The Case of Cal Stewart and the Negro Laughing Song One of the most interesting stories in the early days of recording is that of George W."}
{"id": "orthodox-herald-gb_1999-06_48_565", "title": "Orthodox Herald 1999-06: Vol 48 Iss 565", "year": 1999, "seq": 0, "text": "We consider it impossible to have a break between the two. By traditional doctrine is meant the coherence and the awareness that the Church has its roots in the early centuries. In this regard, tradition joins us to all the centuries of faith without locking us in the past, although thanks to the teachings of the past we are able to cope with the present. Today the world is demystified; increasingly it moves away from the sacred, and different sects and cults offer a false sacredness. On the other hand, we believe that man needs a liturgy full of a sense of the sacred in which the visible signs help him understand the invisible. What do you think about the interactive Divine Liturgy? It seems that more and more parishes have turned to congrega- tional singing and responses. Choirs can- not recruit new members if young people are not familiar with choral responses. Baba has a prayer book and its pages are marked by prayer cards which are given at funerals. In her private prayers, she includes the names of those whose cards she has. There has to be a category in heaven for the \u201cperohi ladies.\u201d The style of the Byzantine ikons was angular, subdued and stiff. It was in Russian churches that ikons acquired a more natural style and brilliant colors so that they could be better seen through the incense smoke and wavering candlelight of Orthodox churches. Do you remember when it was unthink- able to do laundry, wash the car or do yard work on Sunday? In the Orthodox wedding service, vows are not exchanged and the bride is not given away. In some parishes on Father\u2019s Day, all for- mer altar boys serve at the Divine Liturgy. In Wilkes-Barre we have a newspaper which has a feature called SAYSO."}
{"id": "middleeastpeacep00unit", "title": "Middle East peace process : hearing before the Committee on International Relations, House of Representatives, One Hundred Fourth Congress, first session, September 20, 1995", "year": 1996, "seq": 0, "text": "Arafat's commitment to end violence, it has continued; and the Palestinian Covenant still calls for the de- struction of the State of Israel. While Chairman Arafat is quoted in the international news media as deploring incidents of violence, there are numerous re- ports that his comments are far different to Arabic audiences. Another aspect of the peace process to be explored is the eco- nomic aid that has been authorized under MEPFA. There have been serious questions concerning the PLO's assets, its ability to effectively utilize that aid, and whether aid funds will in fact go to assist people in the self-rule areas and not be siphoned off for other purposes. Last year, I requested that the GAO conduct a financial survey of the PLO in order to establish that it has the necessary structure and could provide the accountability that is usually called for in connection with our economic assistance activities. Regrettably, the GAO report has been submitted, but it is classi- fied; so we have been unable to share its findings with other inter- ested parties. I understand that a representative of the GAO is with us today, and hopefully he will be able to shed some light on this situation. The search for peace in the Middle East has been among the most important and most contentious of the challenges facing the international community. The end of the cold war has brought an opportunity for peace in that region which cannot and must not be ignored. However, there are those who have serious concerns about the current negotia- tions. The purpose of today's hearing is to try to address some of those concerns and to shed some light on these issues. Today we will hear from a series of panels that include Members of Congress, the General Accounting Office, research institutions, and membership organizations."}
{"id": "middleeastpeacep00unit", "title": "Middle East peace process : hearing before the Committee on International Relations, House of Representatives, One Hundred Fourth Congress, first session, September 20, 1995", "year": 1996, "seq": 1, "text": "Chairman, I am most delighted to have an opportunity to hear from our colleagues on such an important issue. But I do put a couple of questions. If the peace process were to disintegrate today, what would be the result? Is it possible to re- turn to the preaccord status? This peace process, like this legislation, is far from perfect; but there is no turning the clock back to, nor would anyone want to bring back, the Intifada. Any fair-minded person has to concede that we are better off in the peace process today than we were 5, 3, or even 2 years ago or even a year ago before the Oslo Agreement was signed. Our objective should be how to make the process better, not to how to allow fringe groups to kill it by saying we are making it bet- ter. There are those who say we want peace, but we are placing such demands as to undermine the sincerity of such statements. What we hear from some of these groups is so uncompromising as to be- tray their true motives and undermine any claims that they make that they truly want peace. Most of us know Prime Minister Rabin, and I know his history. He is not some naive dove who is going to sell out his country to the likes of Yasir Arafat. He is a tough and proven warrior and a tried and tested political leader. I must say I have much more faith in his political judgment about the current situation between the Israelis and Palestinians and making peace with the Palestinians than I do with many of the persons who stop by my office to complain about the process. I believe that we are holding these hearings today because par- tisan Israelis political pressures are spilling over into the United States political agenda."}
{"id": "middleeastpeacep00unit", "title": "Middle East peace process : hearing before the Committee on International Relations, House of Representatives, One Hundred Fourth Congress, first session, September 20, 1995", "year": 1996, "seq": 2, "text": "I want to first commend my colleague from Florida for his state- ment. Those of us who have spent some time watching the develop- ments in the Middle East can remember the critics of the Camp David process. And even after peace was achieved, there were those who continued to criticize the quality of the peace. But, indeed, it is that peace, the peace that began at the Camp David process, that has enabled this administration to take the next step in the process. And it really has been the position of the American people, throughout the history of this country, to support the peace process in the Middle East. From Harry Truman's courageous act in rec- ognizing the State of Israel to Bill Clinton and his efforts at bring- ing Palestinians and Israelis together, the American Congress and the American people have stood with their Presidents on this issue. President Carter's Camp David accord, as I have said before, had many of its critics during the process and afterwards. With some history behind us now, we can see how critical that process at Camp David was to developing what we have seen in the last year, that memorable handshake at the U.S. Capitol between Prime Min- ister Rabin and Mr. Arafat, and with President Clinton at the White House. The Israeli peace agreement with Jordan has taken the peace process a major step forward, really the longest border that Israel shares with another country. There is now serious discussions ongoing with the Syrians. And for the millennium that there has been conflict in the Mid- dle East, we now have the first real opportunity to see peace, and a lasting peace, for the people of that region. The cost of not pursuing the peace process has risen exponentially in recent years."}
{"id": "middleeastpeacep00unit", "title": "Middle East peace process : hearing before the Committee on International Relations, House of Representatives, One Hundred Fourth Congress, first session, September 20, 1995", "year": 1996, "seq": 3, "text": "In the past, we had to worry about a hand grenade, a sniper, a shotgun in the crowd. Today, chemical and biological weapons, nuclear weapons, put the entire populace of the region into continuous and every-growing danger. Without the Palestinian peace with the Israelis, there could not have been the progress that has already occurred with the govern- ments that Israel has now made agreements with, the Jordanians, and with the talks going on with the Syrians. There is always, in human nature, a resistance to moving past the status quo. There is that feeling that if you can just hold onto the present situation, it may be safer. That certainly is not what history has taught us about the Soviet Union. It is not what it taught us about the history of Yugoslavia. Strong military govern- ments, dictatorships, held those countries together and did not re- solve the underlying tensions; and today there is no mailing ad- dress for the Soviet Union. There is none for Yugoslavia. Their peo- ple live in pain and in torture. We have seen the very difficult situations, without any question. And there are still challenges to be met. But those challenges have been dealt with by an able Israeli Government meeting directly with the Palestinians. The reference to the language in the Palestinian Charter is dealt with by Mr. Rabin's agreement and the Israeli Government's agree- ment with the Palestinians. It says after elections, within 2 months of those elections, they will remove that defensive language. Some people argue that the PLO and Mr. Arafat are not good managers. It would leave you with the sense that if you got one of the big accounting firms to move into the West Bank and Gaza to- morrow, that somehow the situation would be better."}
{"id": "middleeastpeacep00unit", "title": "Middle East peace process : hearing before the Committee on International Relations, House of Representatives, One Hundred Fourth Congress, first session, September 20, 1995", "year": 1996, "seq": 4, "text": "And I want to thank you very much for having this hearing. I think it is very timely and very important. I do not think anybody is against the peace process, in Israel or here in the United States. I think we all want to see peace brought to the Middle East, to Israel, to the entire region. The problem is what kind of land mines or risks are involved in the current process in the way we approach it? I remember back in the early 1980's when Ronald Reagan asked me and you and many other members of the Foreign Affairs Com- mittee to support putting troops in Beirut as a peacekeeping force. And we all said, well, he is our President, our Commander in Chief, he knows best. And we went ahead and allowed several hun- dred Marines to be placed in Beirut; and a terrorist bomber, with a truckload of dynamite, drove through a very loose barricade and blew up the headquarters and killed over 230 Marines. It was a tragic day for the United States and, I think, for the entire world. Now we are talking about such things as putting American troops on the Golan Heights as an intermediary or peacekeeping force to make sure that a long-term peace agreement between Is- rael and Syria will survive, will last. And I want you to know that I have great reservations about that kind of a policy, and I think anyone who really thinks about it should have reservations. First of all, even though the peace process has been going for- ward between the PLO and the Israeli Government, the fact re- mains that there have been terrorist bombings at bus stops, on buses, at various locations in Israel. And those who oppose the peace process are not going to stop."}
{"id": "middleeastpeacep00unit", "title": "Middle East peace process : hearing before the Committee on International Relations, House of Representatives, One Hundred Fourth Congress, first session, September 20, 1995", "year": 1996, "seq": 5, "text": "And for the United States to put American troops in harm's way, when it is not really in our national interest, is a terrible, terrible mistake. And I can see the same thing happening on the Golan Heights with a Hezbollah terrorist or a Hamas terrorist blowing up a bunch of American troops, who are sitting ducks over there, that just like that which happened back in the early 1980's in Beirut. Now I have expressed my concern to Shimon Peres. I do not take a back seat to anybody in this Congress in my support of Israel. Since the day I arrived in Congress, I have been a supporter of Is- rael, I have voted for support for Israel, and I will continue to. But I can tell you that I truly believe if we put our troops in harm's way and some of them get killed, there is going to be a hue and cry in this country from the American people to curtail foreign aid, and it will hurt our relationship with Israel. And I do not think that that need occur. But there are those who continue to say that we must do this in order to further the peace process. If everything had been working as we wanted it to and there had been no terrorist attacks, I would say, well maybe that is something worth looking at. But today and every single day we know terrorism still exists on the West Bank, in Jerusalem itself, and in other parts of Israel; and I just cannot see the logic of it. And so I would once again say, if Mr. Peres was here, or Mr. Rabin, I think you are making a terrible mistake; and I think our administration here in Washington is making a terrible mistake if we get into a quagmire that is going to involve American troops being placed on the Golan Heights."}
{"id": "middleeastpeacep00unit", "title": "Middle East peace process : hearing before the Committee on International Relations, House of Representatives, One Hundred Fourth Congress, first session, September 20, 1995", "year": 1996, "seq": 6, "text": "They have been listed year after year after year by the State Department as a terrorist state. Now, Yasir Arafat and the Government of Israel have signed an accord. And we all applaud that. I watched with great admiration and respect when I saw the leaders of Israel and Yasir Arafat shake hands at the White House. I said, my gosh, maybe the mil- lennium has come and we are going to see peace over there. So I think we all applauded that. But there still are major problems in the West Bank. And the PLO still has not been able to contain or control those terrorists that are perpetrating these attacks on various parts of Israel. And because of that, I think we should think long and hard be- fore we give large sums of American taxpayers' dollars to the PLO while this kind of a problem exists. In addition to that, and this is very important, Mr. Chairman \u2014 British intelligence has told us that the PLO has up to $8 billion in foreign banks, in Switzerland and elsewhere, $8 billion. And for the United States to give them $500 million over the next 5 years at a time when they simply do not need those re- sources makes absolutely no sense to me. The fact of the matter is we were under severe budgetary con- straints here in the Congress of the United States. We are trying to balance our Federal budget. The American people just do not like foreign aid in any form. And those of us who support some for- eign aid for our allies in important causes around the world are subject to criticism on a regular basis. How do we defend giving the PLO $500 million over the next 5 years when they have $8 billion in the bank? 8 I just do not see how you can justify that, especially with the problems we are having fiscally here at home."}
{"id": "middleeastpeacep00unit", "title": "Middle East peace process : hearing before the Committee on International Relations, House of Representatives, One Hundred Fourth Congress, first session, September 20, 1995", "year": 1996, "seq": 7, "text": "It is easy at a time when we are looking at the past to conclude that it is incon- ceivable to move in the direction of peace. Germany and France had warfare stretching over generations, culminating in the most horrendous war of history in the Second World War. Yet Germany and France today are fully integrated po- litically, economically, culturally, and socially. I have no such illusions with respect to the Middle East. It will take many generations before comparable developments can emerge. But it is self-evident that the leadership of the State of Israel, represented by Mr. Rabin \u2014 who has devoted a lifetime, a lifetime to the protection and building of his country \u2014 is fully conscious of all the dangers, all of the problems and all of the difficulties that lie along the way of the process of the peace negotiations. If there is anything I find objectionable \u2014 because I presume ev- erybody coming to this table comes with good intentions \u2014 it is the virulent attacks against individuals who have devoted a lifetime to building the State of Israel and to making it safe and secure. I have never hesitated to take a position contrary to this admin- istration. I have taken a position contrary to this administration on a broad range of issues ranging from NAFTA to my resolution passed by the Congress unanimously of issuing a visa to the Presi- dent of Taiwan. But I must say that in this case, the Clinton administration is pursuing the right policy, the only rational policy, the only policy which is in the interests of the United States, in the interests of the State of Israel, and all elements in the Middle East that are committed to a constructive and peaceful development. And I want to conclude by giving my full and unqualified support to the administration in its pursuit of supporting the peace process."}
{"id": "middleeastpeacep00unit", "title": "Middle East peace process : hearing before the Committee on International Relations, House of Representatives, One Hundred Fourth Congress, first session, September 20, 1995", "year": 1996, "seq": 8, "text": "Chairman, along with the other members who have appeared this morning, I want to thank you for giving us the opportunity to conduct this public dialog on the objective and goal that we all share; and, of course, that is a true and lasting peace. As I sat and listened to my good friend Mr. Lantos' testimony here this morning, my mind went back a year or so to a time when Mr. Lantos and I and, I think, you, Mr. Chairman, and probably Mr. Deutsch, and others had the opportunity to have lunch with President Mubarak of Egypt. And we discussed at great length at that luncheon, as you will remember, the peace process; and he put it in a very different context than I had thought of before. He put it in the context \u2014 he used an example, a metaphor, I guess, and said that the peace process is like a giant rolling stone and that it started rolling many years ago and that sometimes it rolls fast and sometimes it rolls slow. We went through Camp David, and we have been through bad times; and with the signing of the peace accords by Mr. Arafat and Prime Minister Rabin, it was thought that this was a good time and that the stone was roll- ing faster. So the question to Mr. Mubarak \u2014 and I think this is an excellent perspective within which we can deal with it is \u2014 is that the peace process is moving forward. Sometimes we like it, sometimes we do not. It has problems with it, but it will move forward. And it is all of our responsibilities to see that it does so in the most expeditious way so that we arrive at our final objective; and that, of course, is a true and lasting peace for all of the parties in the Middle East, which is also, I might note \u2014 needless to say to you, Mr."}
{"id": "middleeastpeacep00unit", "title": "Middle East peace process : hearing before the Committee on International Relations, House of Representatives, One Hundred Fourth Congress, first session, September 20, 1995", "year": 1996, "seq": 9, "text": "Moreover, Omar called it \"the despised peace\" and asked \"how we can accept such humiliation of our religion... 0 messenger of Allah\" And we when we signed the accord in Oslo, if any of you has in objection to that agreement, I have a hundred ones From here 0 brothers we speak in candor and in clarity. In Israel as I said in the beginning of my address, there is an attempt to obstruct the accord so as not to implement what they have signed on. And Unfortunately, there are some who give them the pretext of the so-called security, security, and security. They kill us with the word security. From here I say my brothers, we managed with the help of our brothers in the Palestinian team, the heroes who represented Palestine. They actually succeeded to become the Palestnian team, not the joint Jordanian Palestinian team. With all due respect and appreciation to our brothers in Jordan. But It is the right of this people we, who for a hundred years since 1897, since the first Zionist congress in Basel, This people are in the frontline. As the prophet said: And they are in the frontline until the judgement day. Yes, we are for a hundred years on the front line. The Balfour Declaration was proclaimed and called you \"minorities\". After that World War II, I am just reminding you, nothing more. The Yalta Conference came, not Malta, Yalta, Malta is a different thing and I will tell you about it later. The Yalta Conference came and they agreed to create the state of Israel and they passed it in the United Nations. With a majority of one vote, and they postponed the voting for two days until they got this majority. Until they got this vote. 40 Isn't that true, this is international legitimacy."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1994-12-08", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1994-12-08 : Volume 93, Issue 11", "year": 1994, "seq": 0, "text": "The first element of the proposal would lengthen the time between classes from the current time of ten minutes to 15 minutes. The 10- minute interval between classes, said Davis, seems obsolete. It dates back to the time when the principal teaching spaces were the Chateau, Wright Theater, Johnson, Sunderland, the Science Center, Munroe and Warner. All of these are within relatively close walking distance. In the time since the creation of the 10-minute interval, however, teaching spaces have been added in Old Chapel, Gifford, Adirondack House, Twilight Hall, Hillcrest House, Hepburn, the Center for the Arts and Freeman International Center. (continued on page 4) Winter sports demand training over vacation By Bradley Orschel Athletics at Middlebury College require dedication and sacrifice, a consequence most athletes accept when they begin participation in their given sport Throughout the season, sports teams practice rigor\u00ac ously and the time commitment is substantial. Over the Christmas holiday, practice and game sched\u00ac ules change. Some schedules be\u00ac come more relaxed, but others use the vacation from academics to pick up the pace in preparation for the remainder of the season. According to the New England Small College Athletic Conference (NESCAC), practices and games are not allowed to be scheduled during finals. Over breaks and holi\u00ac days, schedule design is at the dis- cretion Of the coach. Over Christ\u00ac mas break at Middlebury, sports teams do various activities depend\u00ac ing on what they have done in the past and on what the coach feels is best for the team. The swim team and the women\u2019s basketball team participate in the A. Scott After a festive holiday tree-lighting ceremony last week, this pine j in the middle of the main quad was electrified for the season. most rigorous and intense holiday training. Alter finals are over on December 20, the swim team has until Christmas day to return home* spend time with friends and family, and to catch up on rest Christmas night, swimmers fly to Florida where they practice until Decem\u00ac ber 31, returning January 3."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1994-12-08", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1994-12-08 : Volume 93, Issue 11", "year": 1994, "seq": 1, "text": "The language schools are re\u00ac nowned, the campus is beautiful, the professors are great, but the underlying cause for all of this quality is the quality of students that attend die college. True as this may be, the majority of time that is spent on and around campus trying to improve the school is devoted to issues that are of secondary importance. We debate the curriculum, the tenure process and the residential life system. All of these issues tend to focus on providing for the students who attend the college. And while none would deny the importance of these areas, another issue is being neglected. Beyond satisfying the students who end up here, it is at least as important that the students who arrive on campus are as high^aliber as the institution is trying to make itself. Last spring, a professor wrote to The Campus and said that the majority of the students at the college were less-than stellar students. Likewise, when students criticize the character of the school, they talk about the \u201ctype\u201d of students who attend the coljpge. There is a great deal of time and effort that goes into providing for students at Middlebury. People work hard to bring in the best possible faculty and to maintain the best facilities. These factors are all fairly easy to control. The types of students who come to Middlebury ate what really define the school and this has little or nothing to do with anything but the makeup of each class. The admissions office, then, wields an enormous amount of power over the school and its character. Every student at Middlebury has one thing in common: They were chosen out of thousands by the folks at Emma Willard House. Despite the central role that admissions plays in the college\u2019s ultimate makeup, the admissions process is somewhat foreign to the average student or faculty member."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1994-12-08", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1994-12-08 : Volume 93, Issue 11", "year": 1994, "seq": 2, "text": "The trustees, for instance, recently decided that at least ten percent of the college\u2019s graduating classes should be students of color. Now everyone knows that Middlebury could use a bit more diversity and admissions is the entity that is ultimately going to do it Do we know exactly how admissions operates? Few do, and even fewer are actually involved in the process. When students arrive in the our classrooms they ate evaluated by professors. But the evaluation process that actually gives students the opportunity to sit in front of our distinguished faculty is generally divorced from this same community of scholars. There is at least a touch of irony in the fact that there is an exhaustive tenure review process with rigorous and well-defined guidelines, while prospective students are reviewed under a process that is nebulous and multi-dimensional. This is necessarily so due to the myriad factors that must be taken into account. The fact that there is no simple admissions formula does not deny the existence of such a formula. Student input is vital to the tenure process, but how vital is the input of professor in the admissions process? Students and faculty at the college have committed themselves to leading an examined life, and the functions of the school should not go unexamined in the process. Our admissions staff works hard and they make every effort to be accessible. Their mission, as everyone will agree, is to insure that each crop of incoming students is the best that it can be. Unfortunately, it is difficult for anyone to define exactly what the best student body consists of. Anyone bent on changing the school should not ignore the feet that Emma Willard House has a lot more to do with our college\u2019s character than the SGA ever will. __ \u2022 Cije JWtbbleburn Campus Editor in Chitf R."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1994-12-08", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1994-12-08 : Volume 93, Issue 11", "year": 1994, "seq": 3, "text": "For a vegetarian friend, The Enchanted Broccoli Forest will help add spice to all those veggies. There are also any number of hot and spicy cookbooks for a South of the Border flare that will warm someone up even when the days are cold. Do-it-yourself If you feel like doing something (continued on page 12) Successful dating requires thought and skill By Emily Stone Yes, I am serious. You may have thought dating at Middlebury was an oxymoron, nonexistent and you are partially correct. Scientific stud\u00ac ies have determined that 95% of Middlebury students fall into one of two categories when it comes to romantic relations. The first group is those students who are involved in long-term, monogamous relationships which to spend a few hours alone together, engaged in an activity of mutual interest. The most common ex\u00ac amples of such activities are eating, movies, plays and concerts. Now that you all understand the premise of dating, I want to go on the record by saying that I firmly believe more dating can occur here at Middlebury. My saying that alone probably will not create a massive wave of dating on campus, so I have tried to compile a helpful guide to If you ask someone out on a date, you should have a plan in mind from the get-go. So here is a list I have compiled after extensive research on campus, which de\u00ac scribes the best places to go on a date from Middlebury College. We will begin with bargain dates. The safe lunch is a good inexpen\u00ac sive, low pressure date. The Storm Cafe in town is the recommended lunching spot. If the lunch is going well and you are looking for a way Duncan Btum Two Middlebury students try to relax on a recent date-like experience at a restaurant in Burlington. rial."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1994-12-08", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1994-12-08 : Volume 93, Issue 11", "year": 1994, "seq": 4, "text": "The Middlebury women\u2019s ice hockey team has concluded the pre- Christmas portion of its 1994-95 schedule in possession of a 3-2 record, but well aware of the prow\u00ac ess of the rest of the powerful ECAC league. The Panthers rolled to vic\u00ac tories in their first three games against Williams, Wesleyan and the University of Vermont (all non-ECAC op\u00ac ponents), but fell this past weekend against ECAC powers Provi\u00ac dence and Brown. In the three victories, Middlebury outscored its op\u00ac ponents by a combined 29-4. The Providence game on Saturday was equally lop\u00ac sided, but in the other direction. The Friars, ECAC champions last season, rolled past the visiting Pan\u00ac thers 12-1, offering a reminder of just how tough ECAC competition can be. According to Coach Bill Mandigo, Providence is simply on a different level than the Panthers. He is quick to point out, however, that Middlebury is on a different on the bench. The defense is anchored by the incredibly steady SaraVintiadis \u201997, who Mandigo cites as one of the most valuable players on the squad. Mandigo uses a rotation of five defenders to make up the defensive pairs to go along with the three offensive lines. Behind Vintiadis and company is goaltender Christy Picard \u201996, who posts a 5.18 goals against aver\u00ac age that is deceivingly high be\u00ac cause of the Providence contest Picard and the rest of the Pan\u00ac thers were encouraged by their pi ay in their last contest against one of the best teams in the Ivy League and in the ECAC, Brown. Middlebury bounced back after being crushed by Providence and played Brown evenly throughout. Parks and Jen Hefner scored for the Panthers before they ultimately fell 5-2, but the game was closer than the score indicated. Mandigo was particularly impressed with the work ethic and resiliency of his club, which was forced to play back- to-back games on the road against tough teams."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1994-12-08", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1994-12-08 : Volume 93, Issue 11", "year": 1994, "seq": 5, "text": "The Panthers will look to build on the Brown experience as they regroup for a grueling Winter Term schedule that begins with yet an\u00ac other powerhouse, the University of New Hampshire, on January 5 at home. Men\u2019s cagers continue to combat early woes (continued from page 23) nate that Amherst missed as many easy shots as they made. Middlebury\u2019s defensive woes were not limited to the inside players, but extended itself to the guards as well. Amherst\u2019s point guard, who had the ugliest shot that I have ever seen, (yet it still found its way through die hoop often) should not have been allowed to penetrate as much as he did. In the second half the Lord Jeffs came out on fire, getting some easy baskets in transition and from Middlebury turnovers. Further\u00ac more, the Panther\u2019s inside game, although able to create plenty of chances, never got on track and shots from inside the paint kept clanging off the rim. Middlebury\u2019s outside shooting was still alive as they made six of twelve three point\u00ac ers, but Amherst found its own out\u00ac side game and countered with five from downtown. With ten minutes left, Amherst took a ten-point lead they would not relinquish. Panther frustration began to show and the team did not handle the ball well. Nor did they exhibit the offensive patience that was so impressive in the first half and started forcing their scoring opportunities. In the team\u2019s attempt to free up Prenevost, who was always tightly guarded, ball handling duties were given to first-year Greg Poulos. Al\u00ac though Poulos bad a solid game.it seems dear that, for now, die team functions most effectively when Prenevost brings the bail up the court All of these factors led to a final tally of 79-63, with the Pan\u00ac thers on the short end of the 16- point difference."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1994-12-08", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1994-12-08 : Volume 93, Issue 11", "year": 1994, "seq": 6, "text": "The most obvious ta'get of this controlled violence is the quarterback. A few weeks ago, in a game against, yes, you guessed it, the Arizona Cardinals, Troy Aikman of the Dallas Cowboys suffered a concussion and had his chin split open as the result of a Wilbur Marshall hit. Aikman did not have possession of the ball; he had already thrown a pass. Of course, that certainly did not deter Marshall. Marshall was not penalized on the play. In his career, Aikman has suffered six concussions; unless the assault abates, he will consider leaving football after just seven seasons. Aikman would not be the first to leave out of fear of long-term effects of head or other injuries: In 1992, A1 Toon of the New York Jets decided to retire after he was unable to shake the effects of one concussion. Toon still suffers from memory loss and slurred speech. In 1992, Jets defen\u00ac sive lineman Dennis Byrd paralyzed himself after he missed hitting quarterback Dave Krieg and hit his own teammate. The NFL recognizes that the problem must be solved. It has looked into the possibility of introducing a penalty box where referees could send players who commit dangerous plays. The NFL has not figured out how the system would work. For example, would the penalized team play a man down, like in hockey? And if so, for how long? a couple downs? five minutes? Personally, I thinks teams should be forced to play a man down. Some teams, like the Dallas Cowboys, have plenty of good defensive linemen, so forcing Charles Haley to sit out a play is not that painful when you have Jim Jeffcoat coming off the bench. Additionally, there should be a number of different levels. If the first level of punishment is too tough, then referees will hesitate to call it, which often happens in hockey."}
{"id": "minoritieswomeni00data", "title": "Minorities and women in the arts, 1970 : a study", "year": 1978, "seq": 0, "text": "These established artists included 19% of all women artists in the labor force and 38% of all men artists in the labor force. Thus, half the proportion of women be- came established artists as did men. Earnings among women artists were considerably below the earnings of black and minority artists, as described in Section II. More than 30% of all established women artists had annual incomes of less than $3,000 per year, compared with only 5% for establish- ed male artists. At the other extreme, 9% of established men in the arts had incomes over $25,000 per year, while only 1 1/2 % of women artists attained this level of earnings. Also, the National Endowment for the Arts has previously re- ported that unemployment in eight artist occupations in 1970 was higher for women than for men \u2014 at about 7% for women compared with 4.2% for men.* In every artist occupation large gaps existed between male and female incomes in 1970. Architecture and design provided higher earnings for women than any other artist field. They also provided higher earnings for women, in relationship to male earnings, than any other artist field. But even for fe- male architects and designers, median incomes were 30% lower than the earnings of men in those fields. The musician oc- cupation gave women the lowest earnings of any artist field. With median incomes less than $2,000 per year, established women musicians earned about one-fifth the incomes of men who were established in the field. The radio/TV announcer occupa- tion also provided median earnings for women that were less than half the earnings of men. Table 4 ranks the artist occupations according to the comparative earnings of men and women artists. Appendix Table G provides median annual in- comes for men and women artists in each occupation. These large differences in earnings between men and women are not unique to the art field."}
{"id": "montanajusticequ12montrich", "title": "Montana justice quarterly : a publication of the Office of Attorney General", "year": 1986, "seq": 0, "text": "Nelson likens the victim's first-time experience with the criminal justice system to major surgery. \"You don't know what to expect You're afraid to ask stupid questions. You want to ask questions, but you don't know what to ask,\" he said. The notification requirements of the law provide one way for victims to familiarize themselves with criminal procedure. For those who work in the criminal justice system daily, the ins and outs of criminal procedure are a matter of form. But for victims, it is often a frightening and confusing process. Unless prosecutors keep them informed of procedures and scheduling changes, victims are left in the dark. The experience of one Montana family is a good example of the need for notification requirements. The family went to the courthouse to testify at a hearing on the murder of their daughter. When they arrived, they discovered the hearing had been pxastponed. No one had told them of the postponement \u2014 they read about it on the courthouse bulletin board. Another time they were sitting in the hall, waiting to testify at the trial. They saw the defendant's mother and girlfriend jumping up and down elatedly. It wasn't until they were allowed inside the courtroom that they learned a mistrial had been declared. Says the father, \"We found out more from the newspapers and TV than from the police or county attorney.\" While, as in the case of the mistrial, the swiftness of some legal decisions might preclude personally notifying victims in every instance, the impact of human contact cannot be overestimated in dealing with victims. James Nelson said he has made an effort to become more sensitive to victims' needs. After passage of Senate Bill 45 1 , he developed a letter to victims that notifies them of what to expect from the criminal justice system."}
{"id": "montanajusticequ12montrich", "title": "Montana justice quarterly : a publication of the Office of Attorney General", "year": 1986, "seq": 1, "text": "As a result of the law, Attwney General Mike Greely has initiated a project to help prosecutors assist victims. The Attorney General's office is preparing a handbook for prosecutors to distribute to victims and witnesses. The handbook wiU explain victims' rights under the new law; describe criminal procedures; and list treatment programs available on a statewide and community basis. In addition, the Attorney General's office is preparing a set of guidelines for coimty attorneys to use in helping victims and witnesses cope with Uie criminal justice system. Various law enforcement agencies throughout the state are also undertaking victim/witness projects. Despite the reservations of some, advocates who have worked with victim/witness assistance programs in the criminal justice system say the advantages outweigh any inconvenience the law might cause. John Collins, district attorney of Yamhill County, Oregon, was one of the fust prosecutors to implement a victim/witness program in Oregon. Speaking to a group of Montana prosecutors in early April, he urged them to adopt programs in their counties. Better communication between prosecutors and victims can make a stronger case, he said. \"Victims are better communicators, better witnesses when they trust you,\" he said. \"It is less traumatic on the victims and, hence, they communicate better to juries.\" ColUns said better understanding of the victim's perspective can also also enhance a prosecutor's performance. \"It provides a spark of prosecutorial zeal to help argue your case better,\" he said. \"When you've got it in the heart, it gives you the incentive to go for the throat\" Collins and Nelson agree that establishing rapport with victims can help prosecutors deal with sensitive issues during a criminal case. Plea bargaining and restitution are two areas that often cause victims chagrin. Some victims view plea bargaining as an insult, believing that it diminishes the severity of the offender's actions."}
{"id": "montanajusticequ12montrich", "title": "Montana justice quarterly : a publication of the Office of Attorney General", "year": 1986, "seq": 2, "text": "The actual substances that make up hair tissue are proteins called keratins, which\u2014 because of their chemical structure-make hair very resistent to biological and chemical breakdown. Microscopic examination of hair can yield information that is important to the process of determining guilt or innocence in a court of law. The first question that a forensic hair examiner wants to answer is whether the hair sample in question is from a human being. If it proves to be nonhuman in origin, the examiner wants to fmd out what biological family or species it came from. This feat is possible through analysis of the scale pattern on the outside covering of the hair and the microscopic characteristics of the pigment and medulla pattern (figure 1). Human hair, unlike other mammals', has no medulla at all, or it has a comparatively small medullary index , which is the width of the medulla divided by the width of the cortex (thickness). In most nonhuman mammals, the scale jjattem is definite and regular, but human hair shows a scale pattern that is completely irregular. Individual humans produce hair that is very different from that of their fellow humans in shape, length, thickness and color; for that matter, the same individual grows hairs of remarkably different characteristics on various parts of his own body. Hair from the head and the pubic area have the greatest number of individual microscopic characteristics, and for this reason are the most useful of all types in determining whether a questioned hair sample comes from a specific individual. The forensic hair examiner can often help the criminal investigator by identifying the race of a suspect who has inadvertently left a hair sample at the scene of a crime (figure 3). Considerably more difficult is determining the racial origin of an individual of mixed race."}
{"id": "montanajusticequ12montrich", "title": "Montana justice quarterly : a publication of the Office of Attorney General", "year": 1986, "seq": 3, "text": "Stated simply, the hair standard is the criterion \u2014 in terms of quality, quantity and type \u2014 of the samples to which the examiner will compare the questioned samples. Suppose that a police department wants a microscopic comparison of a suspect's hair with samples found at the scene of the crime. In order to ensure a proper comparison of head hair, the investigating officers should obtain a representative sample from the suspect's head, i.e., at least five hairs pulled from each of the following areas: the top of the head; the left and right sides of the head; and the back of the head. In order to ensure a proper comparison of pubic hair, the investigators should obtain at least 15 hairs sampled at random from the suspect's entire pubic area. As a forensic hair examiner I have handled more than 500 cases in which I have compared hair samples from two or more people. I have seen only five cases in which two people's head hair samples were so similar that a microscopic examination could not distinguish one from the other. I have seen only three cases in which two people's pubic hair were so similar as to defy microscopic differentiation. Some people make the mistake of equating the accuracy of forensic hair examination to fingerprint examination. Latent fingerprint identification is more accurate, because the fingerprint examiner is comparing a specific fingerprint impression (taken at the crime scene, perhaps) to the pattern on a specific finger of an individual. The forensic hair examiner, however, must compare a sample to a whole range of hair characteristics. Though the hair examiner caimot conclude that the hair in question came from a specific individual, he can conclude that it came from a given individual or another individual whose hair has the same range of characteristics."}
{"id": "montanajusticequ12montrich", "title": "Montana justice quarterly : a publication of the Office of Attorney General", "year": 1986, "seq": 4, "text": "Suppose that a rape occurs, and investigators recover samples of the perpetrator's head hair and pubic hair from the scene. The forensic hair examiner subsequently determines that both the samples \u2014 head hair and pubic hair \u2014 have the same range of characteristics as the suspect's head hair and pubic hair. This identification is more specific, and legally more valuable, than an identification based on examination of either head hair or pubic hair alone. Identification of the two kinds of hair are two independent procediu^es which show that the samples taken from the scene match the suspect's range of characteristics for both head hair and pubic hair. The combination of these two results show a very high probability that the head hair and pubic hair in question came from the suspect. Forensic hair examination is very tedious, time- consuming and therefore costly to the criminal justice system. The average case involves microscopic examination of 150 separate hairs, but some cases involve examination of as many as 500 separate hairs. Forensic hair examination should thus be the last resort, the final step after all other forensic procedures have failed to relate the suspect to the crime adequately. In the interest of employing scarce resources wisely, investigators should use common sense in calling upon the services of the crime lab. They should not, for example, ask the crime laboratory to examine hairs from a suspect who lives in the same dwelling as the rape victim. The suspect's hair will obviously be scattered throughout the dwelling, and perhaps throughout the car that the victim has used. Samples of the suspect's hair could have been inadvertently carried on the victim's clothing to the scene of the crime. In short, forensic hair examination in such a case will not produce good evidence. Forensic Fiber Examination One of the most highly publicized murder cases in recent years was the Wayne Williams case in Atlanta, Georgia, (next page) Montana Justice Quarterly/Spring 1986 in which carpet fibers were the major physical evidence that linked Williams to a string of child homicides."}
{"id": "montanajusticequ12montrich", "title": "Montana justice quarterly : a publication of the Office of Attorney General", "year": 1986, "seq": 5, "text": "Identifying an unknown fiber is the forensic examiner's first step in the scientific investigation. Identification enables the examiner to compare the sample in question to known fibers of the same chemical composition. The examiner compares the diameters, cross sections, dye components and other factors to determine whether the fibers could have come from the same source. A word of caution, however: Though a forensic examination may not be able to distinguish between a questioned fiber and a known fiber, the examiner cannot state unequivocally that the two came from a specific garment; the questioned fiber sample, after all, could have come from any of the thousands of garments manufactured with that fiber. Most of today's living room carpet is made of nylon fiber, and most nylon fibers are Irilobular in cross section (brand names include Anso, Anso FV, Antron, Cellanese 81, Ultron and others). The forensic examiner can determine the manufacturer by matching a cross sectional shape of the carpet fiber to a chart that breaks down the various cross sections and trilobular shapes by manufacturer. the upstairs fireplace. Wanting to ensure that investigators would find no trace of the clothes, the defendant collected the debris and took it to the downstairs fireplace to bum it more thoroughly. Unfortunately for her, investigators sifted the debris in the downstairs fireplace and found partially burned nylon carpet fiber that matched the carpet in the motel room where her husband died. Forensic Glass Examination Most people know glass when they see it, but few know how it is made. The process is relatively simple: Heat sand, soda and lime together until the mixture becomes transparent. Then let it cool and harden. It becomes glass, one of mankind's earliest manufactured materials. The crime laboratory most often analyzes glass samples that are chips (from windows, headlights or bottles) or fibers (from glass insulation or glass-insulated filters)."}
{"id": "montanajusticequ12montrich", "title": "Montana justice quarterly : a publication of the Office of Attorney General", "year": 1986, "seq": 6, "text": "The Montana Laboratory of Criminalistics does not yet have this multi-element, nondestructive capability. Forensic Paint Analysis Paint can also be a useful tool in solving crimes. Crime laboratories frequently compare crime-scene samples of paint with known samples to determine whether they are microscopically and chemically indistinguishable. A painted surface usually has multiple layers of substance, one of which is often a thin primer. An object that someone has repainted many times will have many separate paint layers. The first stage of a forensic paint examination is a microscopic inspection of the paint layers to determine the thicknesses and colors of each layer of paint and primer. If the questioned paint sample and the known sample have four or more layers that match, the examiner concludes that there is a high probability that the two came from the same source. The next step is the chemical analysis of the individual layers of paint and primer, using either infrared spectroscopy or pyrotysis gas chromatography, or both. The former measures the molecular vibration pattern within a material, and is very useful in determining the type of paint present (acrylic, lacquer, urethane, epoxy, acrylic and vinyl resins, etc.). The latter, or pyrolysis gas chromatography, requires only a very small sample, and can differentiate similar paints that came from different manufacturers. The process involves thermal decomposition of the paint, which forms a large number of different chemical constituents. The forensic scientist then analyzes the decomposition products, using gas chromatography, in the same instrument The one major disadvantage of this process is that it is a destructive analysis procedure. It destroys the sample in order to analyze it. Paint pigments are usually inorganic compounds. Forensic scientists use many different instruments to analyze them, the most useful of which is the X-ray fluorescence spectrophotometer, since it is nondestructive and requires only a very small sample."}
{"id": "montanajusticequ12montrich", "title": "Montana justice quarterly : a publication of the Office of Attorney General", "year": 1986, "seq": 7, "text": "Law enforcement agencies cleared 30 of these, either by arrest or some other means, chalking up a statewide clearance rate of 83.3 percent.' The track record of Montana law enforcement on homicides is impressive, compared to clearance rates for other crimes against persons, like robbery (26.4 percent), rape (48.1 percent) and aggravated assault (44 percent). Several factors explain why law enforcement has been so successful in clearing homicide cases. First, people seldom let a homicide go unreported, so it has one of the lowest \"unreported rates\" among serious crimes. Second, more than half of all homicides (55 percent) are committed by relatives or acquaintances of the victims, giving police a good starting point in the investigation.^ And third, murderers often commit their crimes with witnesses watching. With respect to that 55 percent of homicides in which the murderer is a relative or acquaintance of the victim, law enforcement agencies in Montana usually have little trouble establishing motives and identifying suspects and witnesses. A helpful factor has been the improved quality and availability of homicide investigation training for law enforcement officers throughout the state. The remaining 45 percent of homicides, however, are not so easily cleared, and statistics in some urban areas show a continuing decrease in \"acquaintance\" homicides with a corresponding increase in \"stranger-to-stranger\" homicides.^ In San Diego, for example, police cleared 93 percent of their homicide investigations in 1970. In 1980, the clearance rate had dropped to 67 percent During the same period, the percentage of stranger-to-stranger homicides climbed firom 30 percent to 47 percent \"* Premeditated homicides and those that involve strangers are vastly more complex than acquaintance homicides, from the investigator's point of view. Such crimes usually have motives other than anger or domestic trouble; they are planned; they present tougher problems in the development of evidence, motives and suspects. Premeditated homicides often involve other serious offenses like solicitation, burglary, robbery, theft and conspiracy."}
{"id": "montanajusticequ12montrich", "title": "Montana justice quarterly : a publication of the Office of Attorney General", "year": 1986, "seq": 8, "text": "Havre police officers responded to a call at a local motel. The complainant was the wife of a 68-year-old retired man from Great Falls. The couple was in town to attend the husband's 50th high school reunion. The wife, who told the officers that she was nearly blind, said that two men had entered their motel room, and had beaten and robbed them. She could not fmd her husband, she said, and had gone to the motel office to get help. In the room, officers found the beaten and strangled body of the woman's husband. Thus began an investigation that produced evidence to support charges of deliberate homicide and conspiracy to commit homicide against the wife, her son, and two acquaintances whom the son had met in prison. Although the police identified and arrested the four principals within a week of the murder, the investigation lasted six months. It produced 122 pieces of physical evidence for analysis by the Montana Division of Forensic Science and the Criminal Identification Bureau (both agencies of the state Department of Justice). It involved writing 55 separate officers' reports by investigators, and taking 52 statements from witnesses. It required the application for numerous search warrants and issuance of investigative subfxjenas for bank records, airlines documents, savings and loan records, and credit card company data, all of which consumed thousands of man- hours and thousands of dollars to pay for overtime. From the very beginning the case was a problem in budget and manpower. The Havre Police Department has 15 sworn officers, including the Chief; the department cannot afford full-time investigators to devote exclusively to criminal cases. A case officer or a shift supervisor normally assigns a case to an individual officer. When possible, assignments go to those officers who have training and experience in the relevant fields."}
{"id": "montanajusticequ12montrich", "title": "Montana justice quarterly : a publication of the Office of Attorney General", "year": 1986, "seq": 9, "text": "Constitution \u2014 guarantees an accused person a speedy trial by an impartial jury. Embodied in these constitutional rights are values that inevitably conflict with each other. Unquestionably the rights are of equal value, but prosecutors and police have a clear duty to pay special attention to the fair-trial interests of the accused. In this age of immediate and exhaustive news coverage, that duty weighs heavy, for news coverage can have a profound effect on the \"fairness\" of a criminal trial. Police and prosecutors are often at the center of news media attention. Shouldering the duty to protect a defendant's fair-trial interests does not mean that police and prosecutors must operate under a shroud of absolute secrecy, or that they should refuse to give any information at all to the news media. The public has a right to know certain information. A police officer or a fffosecutor can fulfill his or her obligations with respect to the defendant's fair-trial interests by steadfastly refusing to give a personal opinion about the case publicly. In addition, police and prosecutors must guard against releasing too much information too sooa Typically, a police officer or a prosecutor gives a personal opinion or releases too much information immediately after the crime occurs. It is at this time that news media attention is as intense as it will ever become, especially if the crime is bizarre, brutal or grisly. At this point the urge is strong to give out information, opinions and theories. It is also the time period (the initial stage of a criminal investigation) during which restraint is more important than at any other time in the progress of the case. Extrajudicial comments and disclosures by law enforcement officers and prosecutors, if publicized, can compromise the state's ability to provide a fair trial."}
{"id": "css_002439", "title": "State Hornet 1975-09-26", "year": 1975, "seq": 0, "text": "The president is supposed to administer the affiars of the ASCSUS to the best of his ability, and it is my position that John Giannoni was acting in this capacity when he instructed Larry Bliss to negotiate for sale of the Ink Machine. As I have stated before, Bliss is res- ponsible to the President. Perhaps that will also clarify to Ms. Hoffman why Bliss is \u201cdoing what the executive branch says.\u201d 4) Bliss was not negligent of Senate wishes. He complied with the President to negotiate for sale and the Senate to negotiate for partner- ship. Your staff's ability to edit or leave out certain facts has the un- dying ability to make me sick. If the grounds are there, I feel they should be printed. But the State Hornet is not the place to carry out personal vendettas. As editor, you are the one who is fully responsible for the paper, so to you I say, your coverage of the ASCSUS Senate meeting in Friday's Hornet was inaccurate and misleading. Please correct this type of reporting or do not feel welcome to report on ASCSUS Senate meetings. Sincerely, Jim Hollenback ASI Senate Chair We're not picky Editor, the Hornet: May | correct a misconception published under the heading \u201cBlood Donors Needed\u201d in your is- sue of Sept. 17, 1975. It is not necessary that the donors re- quested have type O blood. The Blood Bank will accept any blood type, credit it to Carl Moman, and release an equal number of units of the type he needs for his use. The rest of the information is essen- tially correct. There is a Blood Reserve Fund on campus available for the use of students, staff, faculty, alumni, and their immediate relatives. All it takes is a call tothe Student Health Center, attention Mrs."}
{"id": "css_002439", "title": "State Hornet 1975-09-26", "year": 1975, "seq": 1, "text": "Instead, it named Miller as interim editor until the impasse could be resolved. Two meetings later, by more than a two-thirds vote, the Senate vetoed Giannoni\u2019s attempt to name the editor and gave the top Hornet position to Miller for the current school year. By way of background, no cam- pus in the state university system gives the student president authority to name the newspaper editor, and for good reasons. For- tunately, the new CSUS Senate is in the process of undoing the previous Senate\u2019s mistake. That mistake led Giannoni to believe the Hornet is his newspaper \u2014-- that he is the publisher. The Campus Media Board is made up of five students and two faculty members. It sets general policy for radio station KEG and for the Hornet. It also interviews and recommends candidates to head these media | have been a journalism faculty member on the CMB for five years. CMB decisions have never been in- fluenced by student politics or by the administration of this univer- the right tools for scientists, engineers, now and studying-to-be Texas Instruments SR-51A super slide rule calculator Performs linear , roots, powers for 20 often used conversions. Prof defends involvement sity, Our sole criteria in choosing a Hornet editor has been ability. Opposition to Dave Miller can be attributed to hard-hitting inves- ligative reporting he has done in recent years. Understandably, some university administrators and some student politicians would rest easier if Miller devoted himself to covering rock concerts for Aardvark. Some student politicians and university administrators appear to have thinner skins than their counterparts in Sacramento and Washington. Experience has demonstrated that editors and poiiticians are natural-born adver- saries. As a member of the faculty, I consider myself part of the campus community. Therefore I\u2019m pleased that the Student Senate and the CMB put the Hornet into capable hands for another year That's the way it ought to be both on-campus and off."}
{"id": "mitochondriadnar00leeh", "title": "Mitochondria DNA restriction endonuclease patterns in sorghum", "year": 1986, "seq": 0, "text": "BamH I digestions: The BamH I digestions (Fig. 4) produced many large fragments that were difficult to separate even in a 0.7% agarose gel. However, it was possible to recognize some of the important dif- ferences. The BamH I restriction patterns were very similar among CMS lines except that KS45 A (lane 9, small arrow) had one extra band, and one band was missing in KS5 A (lane 6, small arrows). In the male fertile lines, Sumac and KS5 B continued to be dif- ferent from other fertile lines by missing one band (lanes 1 and 2 , small arrow) . In BamH I digestions, the differences between CMS and male- fertile lines continued to follow the patterns of EcoR I and Hind III. The CMS lines (lanes 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10) had two extra bands and one band was missing. 14 Comparison of restriction patterns from different germinating conditions : The limited source of seeds and difficulty of germinating S. halepense and S. versicolor prompted the idea of germinating the seeds on a nutrient medium. Seedlings grown on the medium in darkness increased the amount of tissue per seed, avoid chloroplast DNA contamination, and retained the softness of the tissue which is essential for the isolation of sorghum mt-DNA with this particular method. There might be concerns that culture medium may alter mt- DNA. Sumac was used as the standard sample to study the effect of culture medium on mt-DNA. Sumac seeds were germinated on a cul- ture medium and also in Petri dishes. The mt-DNAs, isolated from Sumac that had been germinated in the two different conditions, were digested by EcoR I and analyzed by agarose gel electrophoresis. The two restriction patterns were exactly the same indicating that alteration of sorghum mt-DNA was not induced by the culture medium. This observation supports the previous ob- servation of Nagy et al."}
{"id": "mitochondriadnar00leeh", "title": "Mitochondria DNA restriction endonuclease patterns in sorghum", "year": 1986, "seq": 1, "text": "It is important to note that the EcoR I restriction pattern of S. halepense had the bands that characterized the male fertile lines (Fig. 5, large arrows). The EcoR I restriction pattern of S. versicolor was completely different from other sorghum ex- amined (Fig. 5, lane 4). The EcoR I restriction pattern of S. halepense similar to KS5 B (Fig. 6, lane 1) but it had extra bands (Fig. 6 upper small arrow) and did not have the band near 4.3 Kb (Fig. 6, lower small arrow) . S. versicolor , on the other hand, had its own unique mt-DNA restriction pattern that did not resemble the mt-DNA restriction pattern of any other sorghums in this study (Fig. 6, lane 4). 16 DISCUSSION The procedure of isolating sorghum mt-DNA used in this study requires less time, equipments, and chemicals than other known procedures. The restriction patterns were clear enough to resolve most of the large fragments, but the small fragments, less than 1 kb, were not separated clearly in a 0.7% agarose gel. There have been many efforts to relate plasmid-like DNAs to CMS (Chase and Pring, 1986). However, plasmid-like mt-DNAs were not observed in this study. At present, no conclusion can be drawn regarding the role of plasmid-like mt-DNAs in cytoplasmic male sterility of sorghum. The mt-DNA restriction patterns of 20-chromosome sorghums were very similar except Sumac, KS5 A, and KS5 B. KS45 B and Mar- tin B had one extra band than others in Hind III digestions and KS45 A had one extra band in BamH I digestion. Sumac, KS5 A and KS5 B were clearly distinguishable from others based on the restriction patterns obtained from each of the three restriction enzymes. Therefore, use of Sumac, KS5 A or KS5 B cytoplasms could increase the cytoplasm diversity of sorghum and help avoid vul- nerability to cytoplasmic-related disease outbreaks."}
{"id": "moisturehomeener1983nati", "title": "Moisture and home energy conservation how to detect, solve a", "year": 1983, "seq": 0, "text": "As the air is cooled, the amount of water vapor it can hold decreases, and condensa- tion can take place. The cooled air then falls until it is reheated, and the process begins over again. Convection currents occur throughout the interior space of the home, powered by temperature differences. Air movement through convection can also hap- pen in wall cavities and other enclosed areas of the building, which can reduce the thermal effectiveness of the insulation, as well as cause moisture problems (see Fig- ure 5). In cold climates, after a house has been weatherized by sealing, caulking and weath- erstripping air leaks, air movement is reduced, and less heat and moisture escape. Tighter homes usually have greater comfort levels and lower fuel bills. However, if there are a significant number of moisture sources in a tight home, ventilation may not be great enough to remove moisture as fast as it is produced. And, in extremely tight houses, controlled ventilation through heat-recap- turing devices, such as air-to-air heat exchangers, must be employed to remove normal moisture build-up and potential indoor air pollution. After a house has been thoroughly sealed , moisture transfer through c/iffiision becomes more important. Because the amount of water vapor that escapes through air move- ment has been cut to a minimum, water vapor must find another avenue of exit. Water vapor always attempts to move from high vapor pressure areas to low vapor- pressure areas; thus, water vapor will pass directly or \u201cdiffuse\u201d through building materials. Water vapor that penetrates a surface may be cooled to the point where it turns to liquid or ice, which creates the potential for damage. Vapor retarders (also known as vapor \u201cbarriers\u201d) are allowed to slow diffusion through building materials. Good vapor retarders allow very little water to pass through them; they should always be located on the warm side of the wall, ceiling or floor surface."}
{"id": "moisturehomeener1983nati", "title": "Moisture and home energy conservation how to detect, solve a", "year": 1983, "seq": 1, "text": "Insu- late windows with additional glazing or treatments that seal around all edges. If insulation is impossible, continuous circula- tion of air with a fan in the problem area will help prevent condensation. For closets or other out-of-the-way places, better air and heat circulation can be achieved by leaving doors open or installing louvered doors. Lack of or Improper Placement of Vapor Retarders \u2014 If you are in a cli- mate where vapor retarders are called for, action may be needed. New, tightly built and well-insulated homes or homes that have been thoroughly weatherized have a greater need for a durable vapor retarder that has been carefully installed on the warm side of the surface to stop moisture transfer through building materials. If the vapor retarder is installed haphazardly, every point subject to air leakage will expe- rience pressure, and condensation may be damaging. Improper placement of vapor retarders is not uncommon. For example, if a building material that is, in fact, a vapor retarder has been installed on the cold side of the wall surface, moisture may be con- densing in the walls. If a low-perm vapor retarder is used on two sides of a wall surface, moisture may build up without an avenue of escape. In areas of high ground water, the lack of a gound-cover vapor retarder in the crawlspace may allow water vapor to consttuitly enter the dwelling, lead- ing to a variety of problems. Possible Solutions: Inspect materials on the cold side of the home\u2019s envelope to determine whether a sheathing or siding may be acting as cm unwcmted vapior retemder. Search for places where the vapor retarder may not have been installed, such as the rim joists, between floors. Install vapor retard- ers where they are needed, in conjunction with insulation work."}
{"id": "moisturehomeener1983nati", "title": "Moisture and home energy conservation how to detect, solve a", "year": 1983, "seq": 2, "text": "Elxample:A V^ermont Appropriate Tech- nology grantee, working with air-to-air heat exchanger, reported that construction drying can be speeded by installing and using the heat exchanger before construction is complete. In one test, an air-to-air heat exchanger was installed in one house on a multi-house construction site, and it was operated to reduce interior humidity from the newly installed gypsum board. The grantee reported that the walls of the house with the heat exchanger in use were dry and ready for paint in one-quarter to one- fifth the time required by the other houses (see Figure 1 0). Faulty or Problem Flame-fired Heat- ing Plants \u2014 F aulty flame-fired appliances used for heating, water heating or cooking can be sources of moisture problems. With- out adequate combustion air, these appli- ances can spill water vapor and deadly, odorless carbon monoxide gas into the liv- ing area. Incomplete combustion is revealed by an excessively yellow or wavy flame, and can cause drowsiness, recurring head- aches or even death. Windows that fog for no apparent reason are another clue. Other types of heating systems may also influence moisture\u2019s behavior in the home. Note that liquid propane gas produces more moisture during combustion than other systems. If wood heat is used, wood stored inside the home may be producing excess moisture. And, in tightly built all-electric homes that have no chimneys, normal internal moisture sources can occasionally present problems. Possible Solutions: Check for blocked furnace vents, a chimney blockage, a chim- ney that is too short, insufficient combus- tion air or whether the system is vented at all (unvented gas and kerosene heaters). If you suspect the flame-fired heating plant is faulty in any way, call for help from the local utility or a contractor."}
{"id": "moisturehomeener1983nati", "title": "Moisture and home energy conservation how to detect, solve a", "year": 1983, "seq": 3, "text": "Check for air conditioning ducts , Plumbing Leaks \u2014 ^The best way to check for plumbing leaks is to run each part of the system for 1 0- 1 5 minutes and watch and listen for leaks. Check all accessible connections, emd thoroughly inspect the house during the process. Leaking pipes may be buried in a concrete slab floor or hidden in the walls. Find and fix all leaking plumbing. Attached Horticultural Green- houses\u2014 Because of its many moisture sources, the attached greenhouse can cause moisture problems indoors. Plants prefer relative humidity levels under 70 percent; higher levels cause greater leaf production at the expense of the fruit or vegetables. Check relative humidity in the greenhouse over time. Attached greenhouses can cause moisture problems in the wall they are attached to, through condensation. In addition, drainage may be a problem. Possible Solutions: Above all, provide adequate circulation and ventilation in the greenhouse. If greenhouse relative humidity is high, avoid venting into the home. Pro- vide proper exterior drainage away from the house and the greenhouse. Avoid excess watering of pl0mts. Use proper vapior retarder and insulation techniques. Elxample:A Vermont Appropriate Tech- nology grantee, developed a simple concen- tric tube air-to-air beat exchanger for greenhouses that may have applicability for residential greenhouse use. This type of heat exchanger could be employed to deliver iow-humidity warm air to the living space, thus avoiding moisture problems that stem from direct venting of greenhouse air into the home. I2 Outdoor Causes P oor drainage \u2014 This is the major exte- rior moisture dilemma. With bermed or earth-sheltered construction cmd for founda- tions in general, proper drainage is espe- cially critical. If drainage problems cannot be properly corrected, try increasing resis- tance to moisture through the use of wood preservatives, dampproofing and water- proofing. General solutions to each prob- lem au'e described below (see Figure 1 1 )."}
{"id": "moisturehomeener1983nati", "title": "Moisture and home energy conservation how to detect, solve a", "year": 1983, "seq": 4, "text": "Check on the situation several 13 times during the year. Watch for seasonal change periods: spring and fall. High Outdoor Humidity \u2014 Consistently high outdoor humidity can cause a variety of problems , particularly higher cooling costs and constant mold, mildew and decay. Ven- tilating crawlspaces, attics and interior liv- ing spaces with this high humidity air can aggravate all existing moisture problems, or even cause new ones. Possible Solutions: On the exterior of the home, take measures to increase resis- tance of wood to moisture, using pressure- treated wood or wood that has been treated with a fungicide preservative. Caulk and seal to stop moisture transfer and reduce heating or cooling costs. In cooling climates. tighten up the home with weatherization techniques, provide dehumidification, and avoid ventilating crawlspaces in times of high outdoor humidity and temperature. Example: An Iowa Appropriate Tech- nology grantee wanted to use cool base- ment air to reduce his air conditioning costs during the summer. High outdoor relative humidity was a problem, however, causing discomfort, sweating of walls and pipes in the basement and mold and mildew. The grantee developed a system that circulates warm, humid air from the upstairs to the basement, where the air was mechani- cally dehumidiBed and then cooled by con- tact with the basement wall and floor surfaces. The cool air is then pumped back to the living space through the ductwork for the heating system. Before installing his system, the gran tee reported reduced rela ti ve h umid- ity in the 40 percent range. The grantee found his system to be a successful way to reduce cooling costs and increase comfort, through dehumidification. Note that this technique may not be advisable in areas where soil radon levels are high unless the basement is first monitored for radon. Blocked Elxterior Circulation \u2014 Foliage close to the dwelling or items stored next to the house (such as firewood), can block air circulation cmd lead to mold, mildew and other moisture damage."}
{"id": "moisturehomeener1983nati", "title": "Moisture and home energy conservation how to detect, solve a", "year": 1983, "seq": 5, "text": "Vapor Retarders Vapor retarders have been used in conjunction with insulation in colder cli- mates for the last several decades. The familiar term \u201cvapor barrier\u201d has recently been replaced with the term \u201cvapor retcU'der\u201d to avoid the misconception that vapor barri- ers stop all moisture transfer, when they actually only reduce the rate of moisture tramsfer. In cold-climate locations, vapor retard- ers have traditionally been employed to avoid condensation by stopping water vapor from diffusing outward under pressure through building materials. But, new infor- mation shows that much more moisture is transferred by air movement than through diffusion. Thus, to truly block most mois- ture transfer, the vapor retarder must be carefully installed to stop air leakage, as well as diffusion. Vapor retarders that stop air leakage are a major feature of the new, energy-efficient construction and retrofit applications. Vapor retarders should edways be located on the warm, or high-vapor pressure, side of the wall surface. TTie cold side of the wall must be allowed to breathe, to allow any moisture that does not pass through to escape (see Figure 1 2). Wall and ceiling vapor retarders are not recommended in areas outside the conden- sation zone (see Figure 2) because if both wintertime heating and considerable sum- mer cooling are called for, the vapor retarder may be on the wrong side most of the time. In addition, in warm climates the tempera- ture difference across the insulation tends to be less, thus less moisture will migrate through the surface, and it is less likely that condensation will occur because dew point temperatures will be higher. Using Perm Ratings V apor retarder effectiveness is measured in \u201cperms,\u201d which stands for the perme- ance of the material; one perm equals one grain (or drop) of water per square foot per hour per unit vapor pressure difference."}
{"id": "moisturehomeener1983nati", "title": "Moisture and home energy conservation how to detect, solve a", "year": 1983, "seq": 6, "text": "The lower the perm rating of a material, the better the material is at slowing mois- ture transfer. Knowing the perm rating of a material is critical when choosing materials for walls. To allow any moisture that does pass through the vapor retarder to escape, the outer skin of the wall should be at least five times more permeable than the vapor retarder. This 1 :5 ratio should be applied when choosing a vapor retarder and also when choosing sheathing materials for the outer skin of the house (see table. Generic Perme- 15 ance of Materials to Water Vapor). In the past, materials with a perm value of 1 or less were considered to be vapor \u201cbarriers.\u201d However, the current state of the art is to use vapor retarders of 0. 1 perm or less. For this reason, polyethylene films, which have extremely low perm ratings in the .02 to .08 range, are generally the material of choice. Asphalt-coated laminated papers and kraftbaclced aluminum foil were once com- monly used, but installation problems, lack of airtightness, and the breakdown of some flame-retardant aluminum foils when exposed to high humidity tend to make them less effective and popular than polyethylene films. Special Problems with Vapor Retarders While vapor retarders are meant to avoid condensation problems, improper placement, installation errors and incomplete use of vapwr retcU'ders Ccm cause moisture problems. Common errors include: \u2022 Vapor retarder installation on the wrong side of the wall surface. If low-perm prod- ucts are used on the outer skin of a wall and indoor humidity is high, moisture can become trapped inside the wall. Examples of low- perm exterior-use products include vinyl or metal sidings, insulating sheathings with foil coverings and low-perm plastics that cU'e substituted for breathable building papiers. Low-perm sidings are typically outfitted with small vents or perforations that allow moisture to escape, but sometimes these points can become blocked or are intention- ally closed off."}
{"id": "moisturehomeener1983nati", "title": "Moisture and home energy conservation how to detect, solve a", "year": 1983, "seq": 7, "text": "If some areas of the house are missed or avoided during vapor retarder installation, these areas can become escape routes for water vapor. If the home has constantly high indoor humidity, these areas can suffer deterioration over time. A typi- cal example is when the vapor retarder is installed over walls and ceilings, but not rim joists (see Figure 1 3). \u2022 Haphazard installation of vapor retarders. Vapor retarders are not effec- tive if they are not tightly installed. If used to stop air infiltration as well as moisture transfer, the installation must be extremely conscientious. With polyethylene sheeting, this means sealing seams completely with non-hardening sealant (acoustical sealant is recommended) and taking care to carefully seal all breaks caused by electrical and plumbing runs. Conventional Insulation Retrofits Walls Millions of houses have had wall cavities retrofitted with insulation in the last decade, usually with the insulation being blown in and no vapor retarder added. TTie ques- tion of the need for vapor retarders was raised by utilities and other agencies who were sponsoring insulation work. A num- ber of studies have found that while conden- sation does occur, usually next to the cold inner surface of the exterior sheathing, wood rot and decay problems seem to be depen- dent on local climatic conditions and are not prevalent. Researchers note that if moisture buildup within an insulated wall isn\u2019t extreme, it tends to correct itself. As the insulation gets wet, the insulating power decreases, and heat losses increase. The temperature inside the wall then increases, and this slows fur- ther condensation cmd steps up evaporation. Wet insulation can pose problems in severe cases. First, insulating power can decrease dramatically if moisture content is high. In addition, wet insulation touching electrical fixtures may cause a fire hazard, and some researchers are finding evidence that moisture may rob cellulose insulation of its flame retardancy as the moisture evapo- rates away."}
{"id": "moisturehomeener1983nati", "title": "Moisture and home energy conservation how to detect, solve a", "year": 1983, "seq": 8, "text": "For this reason, air leakage points should be sealed from the inside of the house as a first step in a conventional wall insulation job. TTiis means sealing pen- etrations around windows, doors, where the wall meets the ceiling and floor, and any cracks or holes in wall surfaces. Once air leakage points are closed off, then vapor retarder paint can be applied to give wall surfaces some resistance to water vapor diffusion (see Figure 14). Attic and Ceilings Attic ventilation is the main strategy to avoid moisture problems in attics, and until recently, it has been common not to use tightly installed vapor retarders with attic insulation, except in the coldest climates. The reason for this was that if a good 17 vapor retarder was used in the walls, too much moisture might accumulate in the house if the ceiling also had a vapor retarder. Any water vapor that passes through the ceiling insulation would then be vented away through attic vents. However, with the move toward using vapor retarders to stop both air and mois- ture transfer, tightly installed ceiling vapor retarders are becoming more common in all condensation-zone locations for new con- struction and sometimes in comprehensive retrofits. And, a carefully installed vapor retarder is the only way to avoid moisture damage if attic ventilation is likely to be inadequate, particularly with flat roofs or cathedral ceilings. With conventional attic insulation retrofits, batt insulation with attached vapor retard- ers can be carefully and tightly stapled to the rafters. For loose fill attic insulation, polyethylene can be cut into strips and tightly fitted between the joists (see Figure 1 5). Existing vents at the eaves must not be blocked during the insulation retrofit. With greater thickness of attic insulation, care must be taken to provide additional ventilation at the eaves. Rigid vent troughs can be installed on the underside of the roof sheathing to provide this ventilation and prevent thicker levels of insulation from blocking air flow (see Figure 1 6)."}
{"id": "moisturehomeener1983nati", "title": "Moisture and home energy conservation how to detect, solve a", "year": 1983, "seq": 9, "text": "Windows The same concept of putting a tightly installed vapor retarder on the warm side of the surface applies to storm windows, which act as both air and vapor retarders as well as additional insulation. Condensa- tion Ccm result when the outer sash is tighter than the inside window. A good rule of thumb with older win- dows is to always tighten the existing win- dow first with weatherstripping and caulk. If an outer storm window is being added, a product with small weep holes at the bot- tom is recommended to allow moisture to escape. With interior-side storm windows, make sure that the seal is tight around all edges. If storm windows are properly installed and fogging and icing still happens, indoor humidity levels may be too high, or the window may need still emother glazing layer. In the coldest climates, triple-glazing is recommended. Newer window insulation products that have a built-in vapor retarder must provide for a tight seal around all edges to avoid condensation problems. Similarly, traditional drapery cmd blinds Ccui ciggravate window condensation because the window surface gets colder, heat circu- lation is impeded and the window covering doesn\u2019t provide for a tight seal. Vapor Retarders for New Construc- tion \u00abmd High-R Retrofits In new construction or substantial retrofit in colder climates, great care should be taken when installing a continuous vapor retarder that is intended to stop air infiltra- tion as well as moisture transfer. Care must be taken to provide an unbroken vapor retarder between floors, ceilings and inte- rior walls (see Figure 1 8). If these locations are left open to moisture, degradation can occur because these are the only open paths for moisture\u2019s transfer. An excellent insulation cuid vapor retcu-der installation will result when a polyethylene vapor retarder is used over insulation that is friction-fit between the framing."}
{"id": "montanasciencete1986mont", "title": "Montana Science & Technology Alliance", "year": 1986, "seq": 0, "text": "The MSTA Board of Directors meets quarterly and provides funding support on a selective basis for proposals deemed to have high levels of technical and economic significance. Investments are based on a rigorous evaluation of the technological and business merits of the proposals as well as on their relevancy to Montana's economy. Investment agreements are the usual mechanism for funding these proposals. All agreements require operations to be performed within the state of Montana and provide for a specified return on investment to the Alliance. The MSTA investment process is designed to provide an equitable and thorough review of funding requests within a reason- able timeframe. The rigor imposed by the evaluation process tests the technical feasibility and commercial viability of each proposal, and, it is hoped, helps build a foundation for a high probability of success for the funded projects. Return on Investment The Alliance is required by statute to achieve a return on investment commen- surate with its original investment plus the degree of risk involved. Due to the usual high risk and early stage nature of the projects considered, conventional financing is not typically available to the applicant. Accordingly, the Alliance expects to receive a rate of return of between seventeen and twenty-two percent, compounded annually. The return to the Alliance is paid by the funding recipient as a percentage of gross sales (usually from one to five percent) once the project is commercialized. The board may also request a sales override position if it is deemed appropriate. This return on investment policy differenti- ates the Alliance's technology investment from a loan or grant in two ways. First, there is no set payment schedule which com- mences upon the initial Alliance dis- bursement: all payments are instead triggered by sales levels. Second, the investment is not collateralized: if the company fails to realize sales there is no obligation to repay the Alliance."}
{"id": "ministrytoperson00rake", "title": "Ministry To Persons of Other Faiths", "year": 1973, "seq": 0, "text": "Messing requested the Chief of Ecclesiasti- cal Relations to insert in the monthly newsletter a statement on proselytism. In this statement Chaplain Messing gave guidelines which he felt should be used. This statement as published in the newsletter elicited a request for explanation from the executive secretary of the Commission on Chaplains and to the Military Personnel of the National Association of Evangelicals. He raised several questions and issues that must be considered. In this we can see that there are differing opinions among those who fall into the present Judeo- Christian faith groups. Obviously, there is no simple answer to the question of the fairness of evangelism and proselytism. This author can only suggest that we res- pect the beliefs of individuals outside of our faith, that we recognize that they are also searching for a meaningful relationship with their God, and that God speaks to men in different ways. Rather than to try and convert them, why not support and help them? This endeavor on our part could do more to show them our teachings and beliefs than we could by trying to win them over to our side. This does not mean that in those instances where an individual, as Chaplain Messing stated in his paragraph, of his own volition expressed a desire to convert, should be turned away. He should be directed to a chaplain or minister of that denomination of the individuals choice who should counsel with hlra and proceed in accord with the tenets of his denomination. The chaplain in the military is oharged with responsibility of assisting the commander In providing for the religious needs of all people 16H lstorleal Review, pp. 32 and 33. 8 within the military. This does not mean that h\u00a9 has to go against the \u25a0tenets of his own faith or the requirements of his own denomination. 2h view of this, however, his \"ecumenical obligation\" does not go against his denominational requirements and restrictions."}
{"id": "US.NN.FIT.SC.362.2.1.22.199301-02", "title": "Fashion International, January/February 1993", "year": 1993, "seq": 0, "text": "Crepes with high twist yarns, stretch wools, and small patterns in 4 tonal shadings were suggested for lean silhouettes. Checks made a strong statement in patterned woolens. These were bi-colored or tri-colored mini designs, or giant in scale, with very little in between. The newest colors were combinations of neutrals, or misted dusty tones. Luxe iridescent taffetas, velvets, pannes, smocked and quilted treatments, tapestries, brocades, and jacquards were rich favorites. Floating chiffons, lustrous charmeuse, and supple crepes were selling both printed and in solid shades. Silks were divided into two groups. \"Top of the Range\u201d stressed elegance and opu- lence. \"Silk Aspects\" was for a younger, trendier set. Multi-fiber blends in \"Silk Aspects\" turned up frequently, with as many as 5 or 6 different fibers in one fabric. Coordinating patterns and fabrics of different weights showed up, with washable viscose, crinkled or pebbled surfaces, and stretch among the leaders. Blends, stretch, and soft surfaces were also evident in the knit sector. Bulky fake furs and blanket cloths, flat boucles, tweeds, double-faced fabrics, and shaggy looks were heavy winners. Ethnic jacquards, classic argyles, and cable stitches were patterns of note. Lacy open stitches, sheer crepe, glitz, and iridescent fluid sheers went from day to night. Technology here includes washable viscose, stretchy coated knits, microfiber blends, aged finishes, and napped felted surfaces. In the casual area, double-faced fabrics, chines and iridescents, velvety peach finishes, aged looks, protective coatings, quiltings, and microfiber blends were strong. Stretch fake leathers for pants, grainy washable leather look alikes, oiled or Teflon treatments, and \"noisy\" lightweight taffeta were among the popular items. Denim, chambray, and canvas continue to sell. Prints were generally very small mono- tones, frequently with several small coordinates, or very large in scale with more colors than one could count. These were so subtly done that the look was chic, often elegant, and far from garish."}
{"id": "missionfocus19721973v01", "title": "Mission Focus, Vol. 01 (1972-1973)", "year": 1972, "seq": 0, "text": "It is not a foe of theology. But its theology can no longer be that of a cold and sterile scholasticism. It is rooted in a story of what has happened in history and is an attempt to expound its meaning. It is more like a living organism than a dissected corpse. It is more of a commentary on a narrative than an exercise in logic. It is a creed to be sung, not merely signed. Again, the element of experience is not ignored or minimized. But when it is seen in the framework of the gospel story certain safeguards are provided against its distortion. This might be illustrated in various ways, but space will allow only one reference. The gift of the Spirit is part of God\u2019s beneficence toward us in the gospel. As Christians we are to be full of the Spirit (Eph. 5:18). But the category of \"Spirit\" in and of itself is a rather nebulous one. It is like a wax nose that can be turned in any direction desired. It is like the wind without form or shape and unpredictable. All sorts of inexplicable and bizarre experiences can be attributed to the Spirit, if the Spirit is largely severed from rootage in the gospel story, that is. When the Spirit is seen as tied firmly to the figure of Jesus, then definite structure is given to our understanding of the Spirit and His work in our lives. Experience is prevented from being swallowed up in the morass of subjectivism. Ethics, likewise, do not lose their importance but are seen in a new light when they are rooted in the gospel story. Abstracted from that context the ethical injunctions of the New Testament may be reduced to a \"do it yourself\" morality. The door stands open to move on the one hand in the direction of a legalistic moralism or on the other toward a flabby \"situation ethic.\" But Christian ethics in the New Testament sense are not like flowers that can be cut and arranged at will."}
{"id": "missionfocus19721973v01", "title": "Mission Focus, Vol. 01 (1972-1973)", "year": 1972, "seq": 1, "text": "Keck in his recent book A Future for the Historical Jesus has suggested that today Jesus needs to be presented in the form of a question rather than a dogmatic answer. Men must be allowed to keep company with Him in such a way that He provokes again the ancient question \"What sort of man is that?\" (Matt. 8:27). To be sure, there is room for witness as to what faith has found in Jesus both from the pages of the New Testament and contemporary experience. But a declaratory mood which provides only answers and does not invite exploration does not do justice to the historical mode in which the gospel first came to us. Second , to see the gospel in terms of the totality of Jesus\u2019 ministry means as we have already noted that it consists of both word and deed. It will not do to regard the miracles as merely seals attesting the truth of a gospel that finds it essence in a non-miraculous ministry. They too are a part of the gospel of the new order that was breaking into the old. Jesus was concerned about the abuse of the temple and took action to correct it. He warned against the dangers of wealth. He spoke out in defense of the poor and the helpless. He defied the conventions of the day that robbed men and women of the freedom and fullness of life intended for them. This means that the familiar antithesis between evangelism as a soul-saving function and social involvement in the so-called non-spiritual aspects of human existence breaks down. To perpetuate this dichotomy is to misunderstand the meaning of the incarnation as the expressed form of the gospel. What particular shape our involvement with the physical, social, policital and economic needs of men will take cannot be spelled out in the abstract."}
{"id": "missionfocus19721973v01", "title": "Mission Focus, Vol. 01 (1972-1973)", "year": 1972, "seq": 2, "text": "It must be tailored to specific situations. It should be said, however, that the methods employed in these areas will need to be consistent with spirit and goals expressed in Jesus\u2019 ministry. The means must not invalidate the gospel that seeks expression through them. Third , to take the historical character of the gospel seriously involves the necessity of its translation if it is to speak meaningfully to contemporary man. The warrant for this is found in the New Testament itself. Interesting changes can be discerned both in the way in which the gospel was conceptualized and in the forms of its cultural expresssion as it moved out from Palestine into the broader Roman world. To some extent this was inevitable because of the change in the linguistic medium. No translation from one language into another can be made without the risk of some loss or distortion of meaning. Beyond the shift from- Aramaic to Greek were some deliberate changes in ways of conceptualization. Jewish Christians, for example, made use of the category of \"Messiah\" to express the significance of Jesus. In the Greek world this was a meaningless term. Consequently, among Greek-speaking Christians the term, insofar as it was retained, was used not as a title but as a proper name. The title Lord was more meaningful and, therefore, preferred. One might speak also of the different ways in which the person of Christ and the meaning of His work are articulated in Colossians as compared with Hebrews. The former presents a historic-cosmic Christ as the Christian answer to a syncretistic theology. The latter offers an interpretation of Christ in the framework of the Jewish cult for a Jewish-Christian audience. The Jerusalem conference represents an attempt to distinguish between the gospel and Jewish ethnocentric piety. It was decided that Greek Christians need no longer become Jews by the adoption of circumcision and all that it stood for before they could be good Christians."}
{"id": "missionfocus19721973v01", "title": "Mission Focus, Vol. 01 (1972-1973)", "year": 1972, "seq": 3, "text": "Editorial Comment The decision to launch Mission-Focus rests on several factors. The first is the belief that many members of the Mennonite Church constituency have a deeply-held commitment to the mission of the church, but clouds of confusion have been stirred by vigorous criticism of the church and her missionaries from various sides. There are admittedly grounds for criticism. We live in a \"fishbowl\" situation and history rises up in judgment of what has been done. Much of Christian witness and service will stand the test well but some of it will not. It is a sign of inner strength to be able to face up to what we are and the works we have done and let it all be judged honestly. A second reason for Mission-Focus is the conviction that we are edging into an era of missionary opportunity which is so novel that we urgently need to begin exploration into its meaning. We now know very well the extent to which the missionary movement of the past has been activated and molded at crucial points by the economic, social and political realities of the day. This led to fatal compromises so that the church lost her prophetic vocation. In the third place, we believe that there is a readiness on the part of many in our constituency to be challenged to a larger commitment to the missionary task and that this will happen as we return to the main sources of understanding. The Bible provides the norm against which we test all else. Out of the Bible come depths of insight and inspiration without which there is no missionary vision and response. We must also turn to church history and remind ourselves of the achievements and compromises of the past. (A recent example of this is John A."}
{"id": "missionfocus19721973v01", "title": "Mission Focus, Vol. 01 (1972-1973)", "year": 1972, "seq": 4, "text": "Shenk The mission of the people of God has its origin in the intention of God Himself. It can be placed in its proper perspective only if we understand this to be the very means by which God is achieving His purposes in history. A deformed understanding of mission allows it to be viewed as a special function for which special personnel and financial resources must be recruited. This understanding stems from a long process throughout church history by which the church accommodated to the purposes of the worldly order and was seen as the chaplain to society. The Message of Jesus: \"The Kingdom of Heaven is at Hand\" The synoptic gospels characterize Jesus' ministry from the very outset as being messianic. They linked His ministry directly to the messianic expectation expressed in Isaiah 61. These, in turn, were based on the proclamation of Jubilee (Lev. 25: lOff). \"The acceptable year of the Lord\" was understood to be that time when God's reign (or kingdom) would literally begin. It is noteworthy that when John the Baptist sent a delegation to Jesus to inquire whether in fact Jesus was the Messiah, Jesus quoted Isaiah's description of the Messiah's work and suggested that they \"Go and tell John what you hear and see . . .\" (Matt. 11:4-5). Matthew, Mark and Luke each describe in essentially the same way the inauguration of Jesus' ministry: first the baptism, then the manifestation of the Spirit, the temptation experiences and finally He begins to preach. In baptism Jesus publicly indicated his identification with God's purposes in the world. The visible coming of the Spirit upon him was the confirming sign that He was indeed the Messiah for it was always understood that the Messiah would be the one in whom God's Spirit was fully sovereign. It is not by accident that Jesus is thereupon faced with a decisive period of testing through the temptation experiences."}
{"id": "missionfocus19721973v01", "title": "Mission Focus, Vol. 01 (1972-1973)", "year": 1972, "seq": 5, "text": "Christian thought in the western world during the past 200 years has been strongly influenced by rationalism and an evolutionary view of human progress. Unprecedented economic and techno\u00ac logical progress throughout these two centuries gave modern western man an unusual sense of self- confidence and optimism about human potential\u2014notwithstanding the occurrence during these years of a series of the most costly wars in human history. This basically optimistic view of man had obvious effects on the way we have read our Bibles and have gone about theological reflection. There has been a strong tendency to see the future as futurum , as an unfolding of what is already present, a projection of our own desires and designs. However, the biblical orientation is otherwise. The kingdom of God is the divine incursion into history, the \"adventus.\" It is not a reformulation of what has been but represents \"the new creation.\" The establishment of God\u2019s reign among men began with the Christ-event and will be brought to completion in the final coming of Christ. The resurrection itself was an eschatol\u00ac ogical event. In the resurrection we have already been given the final answer as to what the outcome will be (I Cor. 15:12-28). Therefore, in the Christ-event revelation became history and the present experience is now illumined by the hope we have in Christ Jesus. Our instructions as to how we carry out the establishment of God\u2019s kingdom, consequently, are to be drawn from this assured final victory. The Kingdom of God is already present in judgment and redemption. The presence of the kingdom is a judgment on the existing world order and its rebellion against God, but it is a judgment which holds within it the possibility of repentance and, therefore, redemption. Those who accept God\u2019s reign are assured of continuity within His purposes because of the resurrection."}
{"id": "missionfocus19721973v01", "title": "Mission Focus, Vol. 01 (1972-1973)", "year": 1972, "seq": 6, "text": "Although the kingdom of God is already present and we know the outcome, it is not yet completed, that is, God's reign is not yet fully established. The demonic forces are still at large and doing their work. Thus the work of establishing God's reign is a frontal attack on Satan's kingdom with the consequence that until the consummation there will be conflict and tension both for the individual and among men corporately. Th e Kingdom of God Is Mediated by the Holy Spirit The mission of God is the establishment of His reign among men and the Holy Spirit is the agent of that mission. The very presence and action of the Spirit is our \"guarantee\" (II Cor. 5:1-5) that it is God\u2019s work and final victory is assuredly His. The Spirit's work among the people of God is the down payment on the divine promise, the fulfillment of which we eagerly await. Christ's presence in the world throughout this eschatological age is mediated to us by the Spirit. His role is to represent to men the person and work of Christ for it is through acceptance of Jesus Christ as the messiah that the reign of God is established in the lives of men. For those who have made that fundamental response in grace to the Spirit's bidding, the Spirit continues to work to bring about the \"fulness of Christ\" in anticipation of the final consummation. The Apostle Paul concludes his exposition on this point by saying that we \". . . are being changed into his likeness from one degree of glory to another; for this comes from the Lord who is the Spirit\" (II Cor. 3:18b). It is, finally, the Holy Spirit who inspires and equips the people of God for their role in the mission of God. This is accomplished by the giving of gifts to His people."}
{"id": "missionfocus19721973v01", "title": "Mission Focus, Vol. 01 (1972-1973)", "year": 1972, "seq": 7, "text": "They are now living self-consciously as part of a new people even though they remain very much within the world. What is significant about the people of God is not simply that they are a people for there are many peoples. Rather what distinguishes them is that they have been constituted into this people- hood by God Himself. Allegiance to Him requires a completely new orientation which places His people in tension with their environment in the world. It is characteristic of human communities that the basis and boundaries of communal relations tend to be egocentric and ethnocentric. God is often reduced to nothing more than a tribal deity. The God revealed in Jesus Christ calls His followers to a self-emptying and His appeal is to all men. (In John\u2019s Revelation it has been disclosed that indeed God\u2019s will is to be achieved and His people will be comprised of persons from all languages and peoples. Rev. 5:9-10.) Furthermore, this peoplehood is based on voluntary membership. God\u2019s grace alone is the basis for the existence of this new people and that grace does not contradict itself by coercing men into acceptance. Because the hallmark of this peoplehood is God\u2019s grace, the only instrument or power available is agape and the posture is that of servanthood (Phil. 2:5-8). The audacity of this power is that they can confront a hostile world with a strategy of diliberate powerlessness. It is this example and message which makes the gospel a \"stone of stumbling, a rock of offense.\" God\u2019s reign is being actualized through His people because they exist as a missionary people. This means that they are sent by God into the world to achieve His purposes. It is God\u2019s intention that His reign be extended ever more widely until it encompasses all who will follow Him and be joined to His people."}
{"id": "missionfocus19721973v01", "title": "Mission Focus, Vol. 01 (1972-1973)", "year": 1972, "seq": 8, "text": "It would also be unfortunate not to mention the significant work done by Harry R. Boer in Pentecost and Missions . When one turns to the New Testament, particularly Acts, it is abundantly clear that in the expe\u00ac rience of the early church the Holy Spirit was the central figure. All of the reasons for this significant discrepancy between New Testament experience and the modern missionary movement have yet to be identified. There is a similar contrast when we examine the theme of eschatology in the New Testament and contemporary missionary thought and practice. The eschatological dimension is intimately related to the Holy Spirit. The vital presence of the Spirit always impressed on the people of God their true status in this world. When the fires of the Spirit die down, the church is apt to seek accommodation with the world in order to minimize the church-world tension. It is also possible that the understanding we have of the nature of the church is at issue. It has been said that in the early years of the church the struggle revolved around order and ardor. Ultimately it was order that prevailed with the result that the church came to view herself as another one of the institutions of society. The church understood her role as a pillar of society, a protector of the status quo , rather than the prophet announcing God\u2019s word of judgment to men. A possible additional reason for the loss of Holy Spirit-eschatological perspective is the way systems of biblical interpretation compartmentalize the scriptures. It becomes easier to see the many trees than the forest in its totality and grandeur. Undoubtedly, some who read \u2019\u2019The Dynamics of Mission\" will be left feeling frustrated and asking for more specific application. We have assumed here that we have for too long neglected theol\u00ac ogical reflection on the significant issues confronting the missionary church and there will sub\u00ac sequently be opportunity to draw out some of the major conclusions which for now remain only implicit."}
{"id": "missionfocus19721973v01", "title": "Mission Focus, Vol. 01 (1972-1973)", "year": 1972, "seq": 9, "text": "Even more basic as a clue to strategy is the apostle\u2019s appeal to the mindset of the Crucified. Any note of triumph, or conquest, or empire based on the essential and primitive confession of faith that Jesus is Lord must needs be seen in the light of that prior mindset which conditioned that Lordship and shaped its strategy. The shape of strategy that you should have is the one that Christ Jesus had: He always had the nature of God, but He did not think that by force He should try to become equal with God. Instead, of His own free will he gave it all up, and took the nature of a servant. He became like a man, he appeared in human likeness; he was humble and walked the path of obedience to death\u2014his death on the cross. For this reason God raised him to the highest place above, . . . so that in honor of the name of Jesus all beings . . . will openly proclaim that Jesus Christ is Lord to the glory of God the Father. The persuasive appeal continues to be addressed to the Church of Christ in the world today as the sine qua non of mission strategy. If, as Emil Brunner once wrote, \"the church exists by mission as fire exists by burning,\u201d we can add\u2014 with two thousand years of history to substantiate the apostolic word\u2014Christian mission is shaped by the cross as both strategy and message. The Lordship of the life-giving Spirit is the same as the incarnate servanthood of the self- denying, obediently humble, crucified-one. Our strategy should also be shaped by the same understanding. The Johannine great commission parallels the Pauline appeal: \u201dAs the Father sent me, so send I you.\u201d The appeal addresses the whole people of God, both in the Philippian letter and in the resurrection-word given to the disciples."}
{"id": "montanadnrconver31montrich", "title": "Montana DNRConversation", "year": 1997, "seq": 0, "text": "On June 28, 1995, Glasgow became the site of the first co-location of a field office from the former De- partment of State Lands with a field office from the old DNRC. The move has been beneficial for both the Glasgow Unit Office and the Glasgow Water Re- sources Regional Office in several ways, including the quality and downtown location of the rental space, cost- effectiveness of the facilities, parking, cleaning services, and shared expenses for telephones and major equip- ment. Glasgow Unit Office The vastness of the Glasgow Unit is impressive \u2014 nearly 1 million (944,605) acres of state-owned land in the northeastern comer of Montana. A subdivision of the Northeastern Land Office (Lewistown), the Glasgow Unit Office serves the Trust Lands Manage- ment Division (TLMD) in managing and administer- ing all state-owned land, and navigable rivers and streams, in a geographic area that includes seven coun- ties (Daniels, Garfield, McCone, Phillips, Roosevelt, Sheridan, and Valley). The office serves those who use state-owned land now, and those who seek to use it under such arrangements as leases, easements, and per- mits. As is the case with all state-owned land, mon- etary receipts go to benefit Montana's public schools and other endowed institutions. The office has supervisory and administrative du- ties, performs all operational field activities for the four TLMD bureaus, and is responsible for all day-to-day operations within the region. Responsibilities include lease administration, improvements, rights-of-way, graz- ing, agricultural production, federal farm program com- pliance, oil and gas permits, seismic permits, metallif- erous and non-metalliferous permits, land use licenses for other uses, and administration of recreational use. The office provides assistance with resource manage- ment, state lands production, and payment review. It also provides wildland fire suppression support on all private and state lands within the seven counties, as well as assistance throughout the area."}
{"id": "SCHISMINAPROTESTANTCHINESE1", "title": "Fung - SCHISM IN A PROTESTANT CHINESE ( 1)", "year": 1982, "seq": 0, "text": "Of this number almost all are Chinese with the exception of one Black, two Japanese, and two Caucasian members. The majority of its members are young and middle-aged, with a few who are over 50. There are both American-born and Overseas-born Chinese in the congregation. Although the church has a Doctrinal Statement and a Statement of Faith in its Constitution, neither is con\u00ac sidered a test for membership. Rather they are an expres\u00ac sion of the spirit in which the church interprets God's Word. Instead, \"membership of this church shall be open to all persons of Christian faith and intent, who assent 4 to the church Covenant.\" Constitution and By-Laws of The Chinese Community Church, San Diego, California, Revised ed., 1966, p. 3. Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 25 New members may be received in any of the following ways: 1. Letter of transfer from another church. 2. \"Re-affirmation of faith\" on recommendation of the Board of Deacons. 3. On confession of faith and baptism. 4. \"Confirmation\" for those who had received child baptism and are now old enough to profess their faith in Christ. Prospective members are usually urged to attend a membership class and at the conclusion of the training period are received into the church at a designated worship service. Nature of the Worship Services Every Sunday a bilingual morning service would be held from 11:00 a.m. to 12 noon. Prior to the service, a short Singspiration would help the early comers to \"get in the mood\" for worship. A stated order of service in a printed program in both the Chinese and English languages was utilized to give movement and direction to the service. The pastor usually gave a thirty to thirty-five-minute ser\u00ac mon in English and then immediately followed it with a brief summary in Chinese."}
{"id": "SCHISMINAPROTESTANTCHINESE1", "title": "Fung - SCHISM IN A PROTESTANT CHINESE ( 1)", "year": 1982, "seq": 1, "text": "The most dominant characteristic of the OBC is his essential conservatism. This colors every aspect of his life. To understand fully the role that conserva\u00ac tism plays in Chinese culture one must necessarily view this from the perspective of Chinese education. The philosophy of education throughout the Orient (and this includes the OBC outside mainland China), is inclined toward authoritarianism. This involves a respect for the elders\u2014for the simple reason they have lived longer than all others. Their experience is broader. They have seen more things and have made many more mistakes. On this basis, it is presumed that they are the wisest segment of the community. The root of this respect may be found in the Confucian teaching of filial piety. This deeply ingrained Chinese respect for the aged and the sage is in striking contrast to g Eddie Lo, \"Toward a Greater Cooperation between the Overseas-born Chinese and American-born Chinese\" (a paper presented to the North American Congress of Chinese Evangelicals, August 1974), pp. 13-14. Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 53 the American father-son relationship in which the father is a pal to his son.9 Conservatism as described above has a tendency to breed absolutism. Truth is regarded as permanent, appl - cable today as to the time when first promulgated, whether it be from Confucius, Mencius, or Jesus Christ. And so a conservative finds himself developing a perspective that is intolerant of the views of others. The OBC tends to be socially conservative. OBC's tend to stick together and appear disinclined to intermix with others. One of the major reasons for this perhaps lies in their consciousness of limited language skill. To live in a strange country as a mem\u00ac ber of a minority people is not an easy task, especially when one has difficulty speaking the language."}
{"id": "SCHISMINAPROTESTANTCHINESE1", "title": "Fung - SCHISM IN A PROTESTANT CHINESE ( 1)", "year": 1982, "seq": 2, "text": "The ABC abdication of leadership responsibilities made it possible for the OBC to fill the void. Some of the ABC \"old-timers\" viewed with alarm what they considered the \"taking over of their church\" by these \"newcomers.\" Their feeling, though not widely expressed, was: \"These interlopers had no part in the building of the church. We poured our monies and sweat into it. They are Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 56 not only enjoying the 'fruits of our labor,' but are taking over everything!\" This tension between the OBC and the ABC was further intensified when under the leadership and urging of Rev. Wong the question of paying off the mortgage debt to the denomination, relocating the church, and establishing an independent church was considered. The OBC had no denomi\u00ac national loyalty to the United Church of Christ and were not averse to the idea. The ABC were angered at such a proposal since many of them had strong denominational ties and did not want to sever that relationship. A more serious source of conflict was in the area of authority and power between the pastor and the various boards of the church. Although the responsibilities of both pastor and boards are defined in the Church Consti\u00ac tution, there were occasions when the issue was in the \"grey\" area. It was in these undefined areas that the pas\u00ac tor felt that his decision should prevail on an issue. Ac\u00ac cording to the Church Constitution, each church officer has one vote on any issue. The pastors are ex-officio and have no voting power. This means that the pastor can only exert whatever personal, moral, spiritual, or intellectual influ\u00ac ence he can muster on any question being considered. If an issue is decided on and it turned out to be adverse to his desire, the result is that there is really nothing more the pastor can do about it."}
{"id": "SCHISMINAPROTESTANTCHINESE1", "title": "Fung - SCHISM IN A PROTESTANT CHINESE ( 1)", "year": 1982, "seq": 3, "text": "Established a mission church to meet the spiritual needs of ethnic Chinese refugees from Vietnam in the Linda Vista area. A part-time graduate student was hired to assist the pastor in this new parish. Funds to undergird came entirely from denomina\u00ac tional headquarters, as well as from concerned sister UCC churches in San Diego. 13. Installation of a telephone-answering machine in the pastor's office. This device will enable peo\u00ac ple who wish to contact the pastor when he is not on the premises to do so. The current pastor now works from the church. He has regular office hours there and is very accessible to whoever needs him. 13. The current pastor does not use the pulpit as a vehicle to scold people\u2014a decided and welcome change. 15. Set aside one Sunday of each year in the church calendar for the observance of Chinese Cultural Weekend. This event allows for all segments of the Chinese community in San Diego to express pride in their identity and cultural heritage under the umbrella of the church. When this celebration is held, it helps to offset the previous allegation that the church was only interested in promoting religious events and was just concerned in Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 77 propagating itself with absolutely no regard for the other legitimate interests of Chinese people. 16. The current pastor is very much an integral part of the Chinese community. He is a board member of the Chinese Language School as well as the church representative to the Chinese Social Serv\u00ac ice Center and other community organizations. And so the Chinese Community Church is able not only to remain viable as an institution, but actually is \"going great guns!\" It has moved from a position of great uncertainty to one of strength and purpose and, under God's guidance, will continue to do so."}
{"id": "SCHISMINAPROTESTANTCHINESE1", "title": "Fung - SCHISM IN A PROTESTANT CHINESE ( 1)", "year": 1982, "seq": 4, "text": "Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 93 the authoritarian personality like? Hamby lists and de\u00ac scribes certain basic patterns of behavior which identify such people. He states that authoritarian personalities: (1) have a \"closed-orientation\" toward life\u2014they are rigid and unable to be open-minded toward new understandings, in\u00ac sights, evidence, and considerations; (2) invariably harbor strong underlying aggressive impulses which cause them to make unconscious attempts to prove their competence and power to themselves and to others. They try to dominate others and to do everything themselves when they are mem\u00ac bers of a group; (3) are prejudiced and generally think in stereotyped terms of people at a distance from themselves socially. Persons in a minority group, for instance, become suspect and often scapegoats for all the troubles that the \"in-group\" suffers. It is again the old story of \"people who aren't like us are bad\"; ( 4 ) have a tendency to overemphasize the power-motif in human relations. If they get involved in a conflict, the modus operandi is \"beat the other guy down\"; (5) tend to be legalistic. They are most often fascinated by rules, regulations, and the \"let\u00ac ter of the law.\" Church constitution and by-laws can become more than guidelines for them; they quite often become in\u00ac flexible arbitrators of right and wrong; (6) cast social, religious, and political issues in axiomatic terms. Every\u00ac thing is seen in terms of black or white, and rarely in shades of gray. Therefore points of contention are Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 94 generally considered as totally in error or defended as altogether right and good. Obviously anyone with this at titude is unable to compromise\u2014a necessary ingredient 25 toward the solution of any problem. Style of Leadership Best for a Parish What style of leadership should a pastor adopt in order to be an effective leader in his parish?"}
{"id": "SCHISMINAPROTESTANTCHINESE1", "title": "Fung - SCHISM IN A PROTESTANT CHINESE ( 1)", "year": 1982, "seq": 5, "text": "Harvey Seifert, \"The Uses and Abuses of Minis\u00ac terial Leadership,\" Pulpit Digest , LXIV (September 1963) 25. Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 95 opportunities to participate. The leader who makes the decisions also manufactures resentment and dis\u00ac content. Followers are likely to slap at each other when they cannot strike back at an autocrat. 27 To many people, the image of the democratic leader is that of one who is inefficient and ineffectual. Seifert points out that this picture is a caricature. Rather, the democratic leader . . . neither browbeats verbally nor abstains from re\u00ac sponsible declaration. He neither rigs the situation to gain his own ends nor allows group plans to be frustrated by his lack of administrative vigor. He is a member of a team, sharing in a decision. He is an administrator within the framework of group policy. Such a balanced contribution by minister and people paves the road to exciting interaction, creative plan\u00ac ning, and the release of fuller spiritual power. Hamby undergirds Seifert's plea for the necessity of a pastor to practice democracy: A pastor who is equalitarian shares power, knowl\u00ac edge, responsibility, and mutual respect for others in the congregation. He is democratic when he uses ap\u00ac proaches and methods which release the creative ener\u00ac gies in the lives of others. Rather than debating in his mind as to whether he can make a given decision, he is asking if it is possible to find a group to make it. He purposely avoids the concentration of author\u00ac ity in his person and makes every effort to diffuse responsibility throughout the church. He is open- minded and not so sure of the correctness of his opinions. He is approachable on any subject and strives to be fair-minded in his judgments. y A pastor who exercises democratic leadership will be more likely to find success in accomplishing goals."}
{"id": "SCHISMINAPROTESTANTCHINESE1", "title": "Fung - SCHISM IN A PROTESTANT CHINESE ( 1)", "year": 1982, "seq": 6, "text": "Since it is more comfortable psychologically to see the opponent as totally bad, the antagonism increases to a point of total personal animosity. At the same time, changes take place in the social organization of the parties. Relationships among opponents wither away, and the com\u00ac munity becomes polarized. Ad hoc combat groups are Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 97 formed to replace the more compromising permanent in\u00ac stitutions. Radical leaders emerge and begin a process of propaganda and demagoguery. The normal channels of communication break down , and the combatants increas\u00ac ingly receive information through unreliable word-of- mouth communication. In short, the conflict situation moves toward maximum intensity and polarization. The second fundamental assumption about conflict progression is that this cycle of intensification and polarization is not inevitable. If these patterns can be broken, then the conflict can be channeled into more constructive paths. The obvious fact, however, is that the dangerous cycles can only be broken by conscious decision and effort. In other words, conflict will tend to get out of control unless the group plans how to manage it. The positive functions of conflict may be forfeited unless there is \"conflict management\" in the form of prior controls or determined interventions in the actual conflict. Since we have argued that con\u00ac flict is unavoidable for the church, it becomes impor\u00ac tant to determine whether the church has adequate at\u00ac titudes toward the tools for conflict management.3\u00b0 Meaning of Creative Conflict Management Conflict must be managed, and it can be managed creatively. Creative conflict management refers to the application of the methods and techniques by which conflict is resolved constructively; its detrimental effects avoided or lessened, and growth, change, and development are maxi\u00ac mized in individuals involved in the conflict. Lewis defines creative conflict management in the following manner: Creative conflict management means forging new relational possibilities, new alternatives for action that presently do not exist and that are satisfying on Robert Lee and Russell Galloway, The Schizo- phrenic Church (Philadelphia: Westminster Press, 1964), pp. 176-177."}
{"id": "SCHISMINAPROTESTANTCHINESE1", "title": "Fung - SCHISM IN A PROTESTANT CHINESE ( 1)", "year": 1982, "seq": 7, "text": "Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 102 There are three possible ways to do this: (1) keep\u00ac ing a journal which is an orderly reflection in one's head. Certain patterns will emerge if we remember our history in chronological sequence\u2014the kinds of conflicts engaged in and the various styles used. (2) Next, we need an unbiased loving critique from others in which they share with us how they perceive our actions to impinge upon them. (3) Final\u00ac ly, we could use a psychological instrument such as the Conflict Management Survey to provide additional data. This Survey reveals how a person is likely to act in a con\u00ac flict situation. Moreover, it can provide a conceptual framework within which to organize the information about one's style. IS it possible for one to change one's conflict management style? The answer is yes, but it is difficult and involves risk. Lewis proposes six stages in a change process: 1. Identify your current conflict management styles and how you use them in different settings. Are you satisfied with them? 2. Identify which style it is you want to change and to what. 3. Identify what behaviors would be characteristic of the new style. What actions would enable you to do and be who you want to be? 4. Practice these behaviors first in settings that have lower risk and are supportive. 5. Practice these behaviors in daily settings. 37 Jay Hall, Conflict Management Survey (1969) (Tele- ometrics, Conroe, Tex.). Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 103 Develop means of getting feedback on the impact of your actions. 6. Are you satisfied with the results? If so, rein\u00ac force or support these new behaviors so that they become natural patterns of action. 38 A Case Study Approach for Conflict Resolution An exceedingly helpful mode for understanding the resolution of conflict (including church conflicts) is to analyze case studies involving conflict."}
{"id": "SCHISMINAPROTESTANTCHINESE1", "title": "Fung - SCHISM IN A PROTESTANT CHINESE ( 1)", "year": 1982, "seq": 8, "text": "Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 105 of conflicts for each. 2. Who in the case is in the best position to inter\u00ac vene constructively and deal with a particular conflict? You might identify all the characters and decide what would be the most helpful action they could take in managing the conflicts. 3. What alternatives can you propose for each con\u00ac flict? Can you propose alternatives that deal with two or more of the different types of conflicts simultaneously? 4. What principles would be most important to apply in each conflict and by whom? 5. Are there resources of faith present in the case that could be drawn upon in dealing with the con\u00ac flicts? What are they, and how could they be used? 6. Did you gain any insight into the types of con\u00ac flicts you are experiencing in your own life? Have you, for example, been treating a conflict as if it was an interpersonal conflict when it was truly an intrapersonal one? 7. Commit yourself to share one of your conflicts with at least one other person and explore how he or she might help you to deal with it.**- After answering some or all of the above questions which are applicable, the reader is ready to consider the possible uses of this case, which are: 1. With churches with multiple staff to train them in how they can work together effectively and how to manage their conflicts. 2. With lay leaders and pastors to address issues of governance and how pastors are selected, evaluated, and retired. 3. For individuals, both pastors and laity, to explore their own expectations of pastors and lay leaders, how their unexamined assumptions create destructive conflict, and how they might share these expecta\u00ac tions and assumptions with each other.* 2 The author of this paper strongly urges the wider use of case studies in learning how to deal with conflicts 41 Ibid., pp. 165-166."}
{"id": "SCHISMINAPROTESTANTCHINESE1", "title": "Fung - SCHISM IN A PROTESTANT CHINESE ( 1)", "year": 1982, "seq": 9, "text": "Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 106 as they are the closest thing to a real-life conflict. Psychologists tell us that people learn better when they are not under stress. Certainly, case studies are in a low risk environment. This in turn can help to maximize growth and learning. Simulation Games In helping churches to understand the functions of conflict and in teaching leaders the dynamics of conflict, it is often very useful to use simulation games. The reader is advised to look at one of the least expensive books 43 of games and experiences by Pfeiffer and Jones. The game most recommended and used by Speed Leas and Paul Kittlaus 44 was David Popoff's Cities Garner\" In their book Church Fights, both men maintain that they have developed a number of refinements in the use of this game as well as ways to use the experience for maximum learning. They say: Using the \"Cities Game\" in the context of training is not unlike teaching in parables. The similarity is that a story is either told (as a parable) or acted out (as in the game) and the trainee is able to 43 William Pfeiffer and John Jones, A Handbook of Structural Experience for Human Relations Training (iowa City: Iowa University Association Press, 1970), III. **David Popoff, \"How to Play the Cities Game,\" Psychology Today , II (August 1968) 38 ff. Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 107 identify roles, issues, behavior, and conflict from which he might learn without the level of risk in\u00ac volved in actual situations.^ Outside Consultants Often a church facing deep unresolved conflict may wish to call in consultants from their denominations or sister churches who have had conflict experience. These consultants can act as referees or mediators-arbitrators in a dispute."}
{"id": "montanastatep19771978mont", "title": "Montana state plan for rehabilitation facilities", "year": 1977, "seq": 0, "text": "MONTANA STREET BUTTE, MT 59701 The Butte Sheltered Workshop is a private, non-profit corporation that has been providing services for handicapped people for twelve years. The Workshop is governed by a twenty-one member board of directors. The services are carried out by a nineteen member staff, composed of an executive director, vocational evaluator, client services supervisor, contracts manager, placement supervisor, executive secretary, three department supervisors, assistant supervisor, food service instructor, four special ed teachers, and four clerical personnel. PROGRAMS: The existing program of services offered by the Workshop consists of the following: (1) vocational evaluation, (2) work adjustment training, (3) food service training, (4) extended employment, (5) prevocational training, and (6) job placement. Vocational Evaluation The purposes of the evaluation phase of the Workshop are as follows: 1. To assess a person's functioning. 2. To assess his/her potential functioning. 3. To determine if potential functioning, v/hen obtained, will be adequate for employment. 4. To determine the remediation procedures that will enable the person to move toward his/her potential functioning. 5. To determine, from the attitude patterning, the type of employment for which the client is best suited. \u25a020- Various methods are used in the evaluation process, such as work samples (available via the Singer Graflex and Valpar systems), psychometric tests, interviews and actual work tryouts, both within the agency and also on outside job slots. Work Adjustment While evaluation centers on the handicapped person, per se, the activities are highly personalized. Since the activities are aimed at an appraisal of the individual's deficiencies and remain- ing capabilities, it can be said that, activities are of a psycho- logical nature. In work adjustment, the climate is more of a group structure and the emphasis is placed and aimed at the intermediate point between dependence and independence. The opportunity is provided for the client to become gradually oriented to other people and become active in a large environment, simulating a competitive work atmosphere."}
{"id": "montanastatep19771978mont", "title": "Montana state plan for rehabilitation facilities", "year": 1977, "seq": 1, "text": "Care and use of equipment, stationary pieces, small appliances, and hand tools. 6. Sanitation in food handling. 7. Food preparation, salads, beverages, vegetables, baked products, desserts, soups, and etc. 8. Methods of service, table setting, etc. 9. Kitchen maintenance, dish washing, cleaning of all equipment, floors, tables, etc. The type of instructional methods to be used are demonstration for the most part, accompanied by observation and instruction, super- vised job instruction, repetition, audio-visual materials and, if feasible, some printed instruction. The program is designed to provide actual situations as realistic as possible, that a client would find in restaurants, hospitals, and institutions. It provides on-the-job training as they assist in preparing one meal a day for approximately 50 people. Extended Employment Extended Employment provides an opportunity for those clients who are not ready for competitive employment to improve their work skills. Examples of the work that clients perform in the extended employment program are: packaging of nuts and bolts, which includes weighing, sorting, counting, labeling, assembling, stapling, folding, and etc. There is also the fabrication of redwood planters and other products made of wood. Sewing, arts and crafts, and miscellaneous contracts provide a wide variety of paid work experience for these people in ^ the work activities area. -22- Functional Living Skills This phase of the service provided by the Workshop, gives the clients training in those skills, other than specific vocational skills that are necessary to decrease dependency. General vocational prerequisite skills are taught, as well as, basic personal care, cooking, budgeting, shopping, self help techniques, with regard to obtaining assistance from agencies, such as banks, hospitals or social services departments. Community awareness is provided through this program, in the form of tours and excursions which broaden the experiences of the clients and give them information on where to look for other services."}
{"id": "montanastatep19771978mont", "title": "Montana state plan for rehabilitation facilities", "year": 1977, "seq": 2, "text": "BOX 636 MILES CITY, MT 59301 U During the sixth year of its operation, this private, non-profit facility is offering the following service system. Work Activities Center: The Work Activities Center provides for Vocational Training, In- dependent Living Skills Training, Sexuality Training, and Vocational Training in a wide variety of skills. Vocational Training is the primary emphasis of the program but it is supplemented by Independent Living Skills Training, Sexuality Training, and Intensive Training. Intensive Training Unit; The Intensive Training Unit (ITU) was created late in FY77 to meet individual training needs for skills prerequisite to entry to one of the other programs or advancement to another step of training. An extremely wide variety of programs are available to all Work Activity Clients (WAC), ranging from basic self-care skills, elementary on-task behavior, to functional academic training. The ITU also acts as an intake and orienta- tion program for new WAC clients. Each newly enrolled client spends his or her first two weeks to a month at EMI in the ITU where precise observation and evaluation are used to develop the Individualized Habilitation Plan. Independent Living Skills Training: Independent Living Skills Training covers the whole gamut of skill training. Basically this is broken into two areas, Self-Management Skills and Communication Skills. Self -Management Skills include: Food prepara- tion, budgeting and money management, time tellinq, grooming, socialization, / -26- recreation, laundry, use and upkeep of kitchen appliances, house cleaning, telephone usage, traffic sign recognition, and general hygiene skills. Communication Skills include speech, language, writing, and reading. Sexuality Training Program: The Sexuality Training Program provides assistance to clients who have misconceptions or are confused about their sexuality. The program provides for a spectrum of sexual needs varying from learning how to act in a heterosexual group activity, to understanding the structure and function of the human reproduction system."}
{"id": "montanastatep19771978mont", "title": "Montana state plan for rehabilitation facilities", "year": 1977, "seq": 3, "text": "Job Placement: The Job Placement Program at Eastern Montana Industries is a program of Vocational Training and training in job seeking and job survival skills for the handicapped. The goal of this program is the placement of handicapped individuals in competitive employment and ultimately their assimilation into the main-stream of everyday life. Vocational Evaluation Program: This program is a Work Sample Evaluation System. This process assesses the client's productive potential through simulated work stations. Clients are exposed to a number of simulated job tasks they might encounter on a job, which range in complexity from simple assembly through complex tasks which require reasoning, judgment, and overall organizational ability. The client is then rated on attitude, speed, quality, dependability, and punctuality. This process determines physical skills, and areas of job interests. An attempt is made to realistically assess the vocational potential of each client. This program remains mobile in order to serve clients in their home towns, and covers an area encompassing over 90,000 square miles. \u25a028- e Group liome Program: The Group Home is a seven day a week, full time program involving two full time Group Home Operators and a Relief Group Home Operator. The operators are involved in the training of eight clients in personal care skills, self-help skills, and community living skills. Training includes areas such as dressing, grooming, bathing, cooking, laundering, money management, use of community services such as transportation and recreation. Again, the emphasis of the home is to individualize the program to aid the client in acquiring the skills necessary to become an active, integral member of a home living situation. Transportation: Transportation services are available to all individuals partici- pating in any program at Eastern Montana Industries, for the purposes of, but not limited to, transportation to and from the facility, medical and dental appointments, and any ancillary services provided for in the resident community."}
{"id": "montanastatep19771978mont", "title": "Montana state plan for rehabilitation facilities", "year": 1977, "seq": 4, "text": "The program is funded in part by a contract between the Easter Seal Society for Crippled Children and Adults of Montana, Inc. and the State of Montana, Department of Social and Rehabilitation Services. The Easter Seal Society is the program vendor with Adult Training being a division of Easter Seal's statewide services. Other funding is provided through Easter Seal contributed income, local school district service fees, income generated in the Adult Training Production Area and other sources. The Adult Training Center is responsible to the Easter Seal Society State Board of Directors and to the local Adult Training Advisory Board. The Adult Training Center itself is administered by one Director and 25 other staff con- sisting of: Work Adjustment Supervisor, Marketing Director, Work Activity Program Director, Work Activity Academic Manager, Work Activity Prevocational Manager, Production Program Director, Production Training Manager, seven (7) work activity trainers, six (6) production supervisors and trainers, one ad- ministrative assistant, one secretary, one bookkeeper, and two bus drivers. Other staff provided by the State Easter Seal Society for use by the Adult Training Center are: two (2) Speech Pathologists, and one (1) Accountant. Program and Progress Reports The mission of the Adult Training Center is to provide community based independent living skill training, vocational development, placement and supportive services to vocationally handicapped persons who are physically and/or mentally disabled in order to maximize independent living skills, cornnunication skills and earned income ability. Referrals to the Adult -31- Training Center may come through a variety of agencies including: The Montana Department of SRS, School District, and others. The community-wide Habilitation Team is responsible to finally determine the most appropriate program of services for the client. The following training emphases are included within the Adult Training Center, Work Activity Training programs in Work Activity are pre-vocational and vocational in nature."}
{"id": "montanastatep19771978mont", "title": "Montana state plan for rehabilitation facilities", "year": 1977, "seq": 5, "text": "BOX 685 KALI SPELL, MT 59901 Flathead Industries for the Handicapped was incorporated in December of 1973 and, at that time, assumed from Flathead Association for Retarded Citizens the responsibility of establishing a work activity program for developmental ly disabled adults in Flathead County. Its purpose is to provide evaluation services, living skills and employment skills training, recreation, residential and supportive services to developmental ly disabled adults in order to enhance their integration into the cormiunity and to assist them in obtaining an earned income. In the past few years programming and services have expanded in an effort to increase the actual number and types of services offered, as well as to upgrade the quality of current services provided. Work Activity, Vocational Evaluation, and Work Adjustment/Extended Employment Training Programs are currently provided. Residential services include Winterhawk Group Home for Women, and the newly established Childrens Group Home for severely or multiply handicapped children. An independent living project for those individuals previously living in the community group homes has also been established. This project currently consists of 3 apartment living facilities for men and women. In addition to these facilities, Flathead Industries also sponsors two other independently operated adult group homes here in Kalispell. Loutherback Group Home for Men presently houses 10 male clients, and the Schweigert Group Home for Women provides residential facilities for four clients. The Work Activity Center provides a comprehensive daily program consisting of vocational training, basic education and independent living skills training, as well as orientation and involvement in socialization -35- e and recreational related activities and skills acquisition. In conjunction with the Work Activity Progran, Flathead Industries also operates a recycling center and a thrift store which provides additional v\u00abrk training for many of its clients, on either a part or full-time basis. Both of these operations are now fully operational and plans are presently underway to make each of the operations totally self-sustaining and both located in a centralized location within the city limits of Kali spell."}
{"id": "montanastatep19771978mont", "title": "Montana state plan for rehabilitation facilities", "year": 1977, "seq": 6, "text": "It is a non-profit organization whose purpose is to make available rehabilitation services to the physically handicapped. The Rehabilitation Center was most recently accredited by the Commission on Accreditation of Rehabilitation Facilities in 1975. The goal of the Rehabilitation Center is to provide rehabilitation services to physically handicapped individuals, helping them to return to society as physically responsible as their disabilities will allow. The concept of working as a team is fundamental in treatment and rehabilitation. Members of the team are doctors, physical therapists, occupational therapists, audiologists, speech pathologist, clinical psycho- logist, nurse, work evaluator, placement specialist, coordinator, vocation- al rehabilitation counselor, and patient. Team members meet regularly to discuss rehabilitation programs for each patient. PROGRAMS Rehabilitation Committee This committee meets on a monthly basis. It is comprised of an orthopedic surgeon, clinical psychologist, physical therapist, occupational therapist, work evaluator, placement specialist, vocational rehabilitation counselors, insurance carriers, private insurance adjusters and Worker's Compensation Division personnel. Clients with injuries insured by any of the above agencies are reviewed and the Committee determines if the Rehabilitation Center can help them. -46- w Persons referred to the Center through the Rehabilitation Committee receive an orthopedic examination, psychological evaluation, vocational work evaluation, and any other evaluation deemed useful for rehab- ilitation of the injured. Evaluations are discussed at Committee meetings. A Committee member is appointed to work closely with the injured and his family throughout the rehabilitation process. Following the clinic team's evaluations, the findings are discussed at a Committee meeting, and a follow-up conference is held with the injured workman. He is informed of the results of his evaluation and the Committee's recommendations. Two or more follow-up confer- ences may be necessary to help the injured workman to pursue all avenues toward gainful employment. Vocational Work Evaluation Unit Work evaluation is a method used to determine the employability of clients unable to compete in the job market due to some limitation, whether physical, psychological or developmental."}
{"id": "montanastatep19771978mont", "title": "Montana state plan for rehabilitation facilities", "year": 1977, "seq": 7, "text": "Upon entering the unit, the client is given a series of work samples which are graded and evaluated to determine his functioning ability and potential. A work sample is part of an actual industrial job or a simulated industrial job which enables the evaluator to judge a person's aptitude and interest in that specific field. A commercial work sample series developed for the industrially injured by VALPAR is used in conjunction with 50 other work samples. The evaluation unit has been set up to simulate an actual work day. A placement specialist works closely with the injured workman and the evaluator in seeking employment or placement of those persons enrolled in this program. \u25a047- Pain Clinic The Pain Clinic specializes in the diagnosis and treatment of individual chronic pain problems. The goals of this clinic are to help persons understand, cope, and live with their pain and to reduce pain. Chronic pain sufferers who have had all the usual treatment with little or no success are candidates for this program. Upper Extremity Clinic This clinic meets as needed to evaluate and recommend treatment for patients with upper extremity injuries. An orthopedist, plastic surgeon and an occupational therapist evaluate each patient. The recommendations are sent to the referring agents. Amputee Clinic The team of an orthopedic surgeon, physical therapist, occupational therapist, orthotist, prosthetist, insurance carriers, Worker's Compensation Division, Vocational Rehabilitation Counselors, and other interested people meet once monthly to evaluate and prescribe artificial limbs for amputees. Each amputee returns to insure a proper fit and that the artificial limb is satisfactorily constructed. Crippled Children's Clinic Children with physical, neurological, or developmental disabilities are evaluated by a rehabilitation team of an orthopedic surgeon, physical therapist, audiologist, and other specialists. Recommendations are made by the team for treatment. Transportation Transportation is available for non-ambulatory patients on a need basis."}
{"id": "montanastatep19771978mont", "title": "Montana state plan for rehabilitation facilities", "year": 1977, "seq": 8, "text": "The Rehabilitative Services Division's Special Projects Bureau continues to receive many requests for federal funds to establish or expand rehabilitation facilities. The concerns in making a judgment on such requests are the need for what is requested and the needs of already existing programs. In other words, a discrete decision is called for that will promote the quality of the already existing facilities. The priority regarding Montana's rehabilitation facilities is the strengthening and expansion of the eight (8) current quality facilities to their highest level of achievement in service provision. Four (4) ways of achieving this priority are: 1. The inclusion of facility staff in as many RSD staff development sessions as appropriate. This has been and will continue to be an ongoing policy. 2. The specific provision of some state and/or regional in service tailored to facility staff needs. 3. The provision of facility technical assistance (TA) under both the Federal TA and the proposed State TA programs. 4. The awarding of limited grants when the need is well justified. In addition, the Rehabilitative Services Division will maintain close relationships with all planning and funding agencies so that cooperative projects and joint funding can continue to be implemented to increase services to all disabled individuals in Montana. -50- IDENTIFICATION OF REHABILITATION SERVICE DEFICIENCIES The following facility service needs are still outstanding in Montana. 1. The need for more facility services for the visually handicapped and legally blind. Technical assistance to help facilities satisfy this need was provided during fiscal year 1977. The VR agency serving the blind in Montana will be providing specialized diagnostic equipment to certain of the rehabilitation facilities to assist in the satisfaction of this first need. 2. The need to locate appropriate housing especially for the handicapped population utilizing the facilities. This second need is being met for the developmental ly disabled. Other disability groups need special assistance over and above that provided by the rehabilitation counselor in locating housing."}
{"id": "montanastatep19771978mont", "title": "Montana state plan for rehabilitation facilities", "year": 1977, "seq": 9, "text": "Physical and occupational therapy; 5. Speech and hearing therapy; 6. Psychological and social services; 7. Evaluation of rehabilitation potential; 8. Personal and work adjustment; 9. Vocational training with a view toward career advancement (in combination with other rehabilitation services); 10. Evaluation or control of specific disabilities; 11. Orientation and mobility services and other adjustment services to the blind; and 12. Transitional or extended employment for those handicapped individuals who cannot be readily absorbed in the competi- tive labor market; provided, that all medical and related health services must be prescribed by, or under the formal supervision of, oersons licensed to prescribe or supervise the provision of such services in the State. Vocational (Work) Evaluation Vocational (Work) Evaluation: a comprehensive process that system- atically utilizes work, real or simulated, as the focal point for assessment and vocational exploration, the purpose of which is to assist individuals in vocational development. Vocational (Work) ^ Evaluation incorporates medical, psychological, social, vocational, educational, cultural, and economic data in the attainment of the goals of the evaluation process. Work Adjustment Work Adjustment is a treatment/training process utilizing individual and group work, or work related activities, to assist individuals in understanding the meaning, value and demands of work, to modify or develop attitudes, personal characteristics, and v/ork behavior; and to develop functional capacities, as required, in order to assist individuals towards their optimum level of vocational development. Each facility providing work adjustment service for RSD clients will be required to submit a description of their work adjustment program to the state RSD office for approval prior to its acceptance of v^ork adjustment fees. In addition work adjustment will be authorized for a period of only three months at one time. At the end of the three months a report on the necessity of continuing work adjustment will be required from appropriate facility staff."}
{"id": "millsapscollegec1990mill", "title": "Millsaps College Catalog, 1989-1990", "year": 1989, "seq": 0, "text": "(b) At least 12 units in English, mathematics, social studies, natural sciences, or for- eign languages must be included. Normally, four units of English are required. Transfer Admission A transfer student is one entering Millsaps as a full-time student from another insti- tution of higher learning. A completed application for admission and an official transcript from each college or university in which the applicant has been enrolled is required. These polioies apply to the transfer applicant: 1. Full credit is normally allowed for work taken at other accredited institutions. Some courses which are not regarded as consistent with a liberal arts curriculum may not be credited toward a degree. Work done at non-accredited institutions may be vali- dated if the student makes a satisfactory record at Millsaps. 2. After earning 62 semester hours at a junior or senior college, a student may not take additional work at a junior college and have it apply toward a degree from Mill- saps College. 3. A student must complete the work necessary to fulfill requirements for a major at Millsaps or for pre-professional work or teaching licenses. 4. Grades and quality points earned at another institution will be recorded as they are on the transcript. The student must earn at Millsaps quality points at least double the number of hours of academic credit remaining on graduation requirements after transfer credits are entered. 5. In the case of a student transferring to Millsaps with partial fulfillment of a core re- quirement, the chair of the department concerned may approve a course to substi- tute for the remainder of the requirement. Students should consult with the Office of Records for college policy on courses that will substitute. 6. The student is subject to the regulation on advanced placement and credit by examination. 7. Credit is not given for correspondence courses. Part-Time Admission A part-time student is one enrolled in a degree program but taking fewer than 12 hours."}
{"id": "millsapscollegec1990mill", "title": "Millsaps College Catalog, 1989-1990", "year": 1989, "seq": 1, "text": "Applicants for the Master of Business Administration degree should apply directly to the director of the MBA Program. Orientation and Advisement Many members of the college community are involved on an ongoing basis with orienting new students to college life and advising students to help them accomplish maximum success in their academic work. ORIENTATION: Freshmen and transfer students are expected to be on campus on dates specified in the college calendar. It is a cooperative effort involving students, faculty, and staff designed to prepare students for college life at Millsaps. FACULTY ADVISORS: New students are assigned to faculty members who serve as academic advisors. When a student chooses the major field, a professor in that field becomes the advisor. The faculty advisors provide students with advice on courses to take to reach their degree objectives and on other academic concerns. Counseling Services Counseling services are available to all students in the Guidance and Career Coun- seling Center. Students can receive counseling for a wide range of concerns. A coun- selor can assist in improving academic performance by helping a student develop study skills techniques such as time management, note-taking, problem-solving, and test-taking. Help is also available to students wishing to engage in self-exploration and goal-setting, to discuss relationships or other personal concerns, to develop better coping skills, to obtain information on other community resources, and to discuss other probelms or concerns. Referrals to professionals or treatment programs off campus will be made when it is believed to be appropriate. 10 Career Planning and Placement Career planning begins in the freshman year with an emphasis on exploring both career fields and academic majors. Through interest testing, planning and consulta- tion, students can explore academic disciplines relevant to their interests and over time, establish realistic career directions, develop career strategies and set goals."}
{"id": "millsapscollegec1990mill", "title": "Millsaps College Catalog, 1989-1990", "year": 1989, "seq": 2, "text": "Frequent contact with the career counselor is encouraged to ensure continued de- velopment and movement toward a satisfying career choice. Students are invited to utilize resources in the career library, to participate in off-campus internships and to take advantage of opportunities for part-time and summer employment as bases of ex- perience. These resources are available through the Guidance and Career Counseling Center. Developing skills in resume writing, interviewing and job search strategies are em- phases for junior and senior students. Workshops on these topics are presented on a regular schedule and students are urged to come in for private conferences. Current listings of employment opportunities are available and on-campus interviews are sched- uled with representatives from graduate and professional schools, businesses, indus- tries and government agencies. Student Housing I The dean and associate dean of student affairs coordinate housing in cooperation with residence hall directors and resident assistants. Men who are active members of a fraternity may live in its house after their freshman year. All freshman men and women, unless they are married or live with members of their immediate families in Jackson or vicinity, are required to reside on campus in col- lege residence halls and to dine on campus, also. Exceptions to this policy are unusual and must be authorized through the Office of the Dean of Student Affairs. Residence hall rooms are designed to house two students each. Students should send the completed housing form and the college deposit as soon as possible. Assign- ments are made in the order in which the deposit and a completed application are received. Students wishing to room together should make every effort to pay the col- lege deposit at the same time and to specify their desire to room together. Room prefer- ences are honored unless the rooms are already taken by students who are eligible for them."}
{"id": "millsapscollegec1990mill", "title": "Millsaps College Catalog, 1989-1990", "year": 1989, "seq": 3, "text": "REFUNDS- Room rent cannot be refunded after the semester has begun. Un- used amounts paid in advance for board are refundable. A student who withdraws with good reason from a course or courses will have seven days including the date of the first meeting of classes to receive a refund of 80 percent of tuition and fees; within two weeks, 60 percent; within three weeks, 40 percent, and within four weeks, 20 percent. If a student remains in college as long as four weeks, no refund will be made except for board. The date of withdrawal from which all claims to reductions and refunds will be referred is the date on which the director of records is officially notified by the student of the intention to withdraw. (See regulations relative to withdrawals.) The college reserves the right to cancel the registration of any student at any time. In such a case, the pro rata portion of tuition will be returned. Students withdrawing or removed under disciplinary action forfeit the right to a refund. MEAL PLAN -Students living in college or fraternity housing are required to par- ticipate in the college meal plan. STUDENTS ROOMING IN FRATERNITY HOUSES- Rules regarding payment of board and fees applicable to other campus residents will be observed by these students. 16 REVISION OF CHARGES- Millsaps College reserves the privilege of changing any or all charges at any time without prior notice. Scholarships and Financial Aid Millsaps College grants scholarships and financial aid to students on two bases: academic excellence and financial need. Information may be obtained from the Dean of Student Aid Financial Planning. Financial aid is not available to international students. In instances of financial need, the amount of aid granted is based on information submitted by the College Scholarship Service of the College Entrance Examination Board. The College Scholarship Service assists in determining the student's need for financial assistance."}
{"id": "millsapscollegec1990mill", "title": "Millsaps College Catalog, 1989-1990", "year": 1989, "seq": 4, "text": "Slay Ministerial Loan Fund United Methodist Student Loan Fund George R. and Rose Williams Endowed Loan Fund Additional Financial Aid Opportunities Part-time Employment: Students who want part-time work on campus must ap- ply through the Awards Committee. Students seeking employment off campus may con- tact the Placement Office. The College Work-Study Program has been established from funds contributed by the federal government and the college to provide financial assistance through em- ployment. State Student Incentive Grants are provided by Millsaps, the state of Mississippi and the federal government. These funds are to help qualified students with substantial financial need. Supplemental Educational Opportunity Grants are provided by the federal government to provide supplemental grants to other aid to assist in making available the benefits of higher education to qualified students of exceptional financial need who, for lack of financial means of their own or their families, would be unable to obtain an education without such aid. The Pell Grant was established by the Educational Amendments of 1972 and is funded by the federal government. When the grant is fully funded, each student is enti- tled each academic year to a grant of $2,100 less family contribution (method of deter- mining this contribution to be set by the U.S. Commissioner of Education), or half the college cost, whichever is less. 21 Student Life Campus Ministry Religious life at Millsaps centers around the churches of the city of Jackson and the religious life program coordinated through the Campus Ministry Team and other organizations on campus. Churches provide communities of faith for students, faculty, and staff. The campus religious life program works to enhance the spiritual growth of members of the community. The emphasis is on the development of an informed com- mitment to a life of faith in the world. To meet this goal, the campus ministry program at Millsaps utilizes as fully as pos- sible the experiences of students in the classroom and the questions raised about the meaning of a life of faith as a point of departure."}
{"id": "millsapscollegec1990mill", "title": "Millsaps College Catalog, 1989-1990", "year": 1989, "seq": 5, "text": "Programs concerning the relationship of faith to issues raised in the classroom, to questions about the focus of one's life and to questions about the relation of faith to global concerns are a focal point of the cam- pus ministry program of the college. Campus ministry at Millsaps is coordinated through the Campus Ministry Team, a group of approximately 70-80 students and staff, with faculty advisor, who plan for the college community. The team works through task groups responsible for the vari- ous programs and projects of the Team: the weekly chapel services, voluntary service opportunities, faculty-student forums on various issues, sponsorship of events on the Friday Forum Series, devotional booklets written by students, faculty and staff; events in connection with the annual Student Symposium and others. In addition to the Campus Ministry Team, the Fellowship of Christian Athletes spon- sors a group on campus, as does the Catholic Church in the form of Catholic Campus Ministries. All campus ministry is strongly ecumenical. Furthermore, in addition to the College Chaplain, the college has been fortunate to have additional parttime and fulltime persons at various times working on campus through the United Methodist Mission In- tern Program, the Catholic VOICE program and Inter-Varsity Christian Fellowship. The Office of the Chaplain serves as a liaison with churches, the United Methodist conferences and other groups and agencies in the city and state, provides resources for events on and off campus related to various campus ministry concerns and actively participates in the work of the United Methodist conferences to which the college relates. Public Events Committee The Public Events Committee receives funds from the student government to sponsor programs of general interest to the campus and community. Its major activity is the Fri- day Forum Series\u2014 a continuing slate of speakers presented each Friday during the academic year."}
{"id": "millsapscollegec1990mill", "title": "Millsaps College Catalog, 1989-1990", "year": 1989, "seq": 6, "text": "The objective of the series is to provide information and stimulate in- terest in current issues, to explore historical events, and to present differing perspec- tives on controversial subjects. Faculty members, local authorities and national experts are invited to present their thoughts on a variety of literary, cultural, scientific, political, religious and historical topics. In addition to the Forum Series, the Public Events Committee sponsors special events throughout the academic year. It provides funds to student organizations and academ- ic departments interested in organizing programs open to the entire campus. These include films, guest speakers, and music recitals. All of these activities have to do with the true aim of liberal education: the liberation of the mind to grasp the world of nature and of human experience and action in all its richness and complexity, and to respond with awareness, sensitivity, concern, and mature judgment. Athletics The athletic policy of Millsaps College is based on the premise that athletics exist for the benefit of the students and not primarily to enhance the prestige and publicity of the college. Competitive sports conducted in an atmosphere of good sportsmanship and fair play can make a significant contribution to the complete physical, emotional, moral, and 24 mental development of the well-rounded individual. They are thus an integral part of a program of liberal education. An attempt is made to provide a sports-for-all program and to encourage as many students as possible to participate. Intercollegiate The program for men includes football, basketball, baseball, tennis, golf, and soc- cer. The women's program includes basketball, tennis, soccer, cross country, and golf. The programs are conducted on guidelines established by the National Collegiate Athletic Association for Division III institutions. Those who participate in intercollegiate athletics are required to observe and main- tain the same academic standards as other students."}
{"id": "millsapscollegec1990mill", "title": "Millsaps College Catalog, 1989-1990", "year": 1989, "seq": 7, "text": "Intramural The program for men provides competition among campus organizations in basket- ball, volleyball, softball, tennis, and soccer. The program for women includes volley- ball, tennis, basketball, softball, and soccer. Publications The Purple and White is the official student newspaper of the college, and its staff is composed of individuals interested in campus journalism. The P&W endeavors to provide coverage of all Millsaps events, as well as to serve as a forum for discussion and exploration of ideas. Now in its eighty-first year, the Bobashela is the annual student publication of Mill- saps College, attempting to give a comprehensive view of campus life. Bobashela is an Indian name for good friend. Through Stylus, the college literary magazine, students interested in creative writ- ing are given an opportunity to see their work in print. The publication comes out twice each year and contains the best poetry, short stories and essays submitted by Millsaps students. Music and Drama The Millsaps Singers Open by audition to all students, the Singers represent Millsaps in public perfor- mances, campus programs and annual tours throughout the state and other areas of the United States. In recent years the choir has traveled to Colorado; to Washington, D.C.; to Atlanta to record for the National Protestant Hour; and to Mexico. The choir has sung with the Memphis Symphony Orchestra three times, the Jackson Symphony many times, the Chicago Chamber Orchestra and the New Orleans Philharmonic. The Troubadours Auditions are held each fall for membership in the Troubadours, a show choir of 16 students selected from the Singers. The Troubadours represent the college at numer- ous campus, high school, and cultural functions throughout the region. The Wind Ensemble The Wind Ensemble is an important performing group within the Music Department. Made up of brass, woodwinds, and percussion, this ensemble is open to all students with instrumental and musical experience."}
{"id": "millsapscollegec1990mill", "title": "Millsaps College Catalog, 1989-1990", "year": 1989, "seq": 8, "text": "They enjoy giving performances alone or in concert with the Millsaps Singers. The Millsaps Players The Millsaps Players, now in their seventh decade, produce four full-length plays each year. In addition, they present several one-act plays directed by senior theatre majors. Casting for all plays is done by audition, open to all students. Participation in Players productions, either onstage or backstage, earns credit toward membership in Alpha Psi Omega, national honorary dramatics fraternity. Among the major productions staged in recent years are The Tempest, Ring Round the Moon, Biloxi Blues, Ghosts, 25 Equus, A Midsummer Night's Dream, Camino Real, West Side Story, Sweet Bird of Youth, l-iedda Gabler, She Stoops to Conquer, Summer and Smoke, Dar\\< of the Moon, AH My Sons, Much Ado About Nothing, Shenandoah, and Tea and Sympathy. Student Organizations Student Body Association All regularly enrolled students of Millsaps are members of the Student Body As- sociation. Those taking at least 12 hours or part-time students who pay the Student Body Association fee have full power of voting. The Millsaps Student Body Association is governed by the Student Senate, the Student Judicial Council, and the Student Body Association Officers. The Student Senate is composed of 36 voting members elected from the Millsaps Student Body Association. Members of the Student Senate are chos- en by the fhird Tuesday in September and serve their constituency the length of the academic year. Student Body Association Officers of the Student Senate are elected at large from the Millsaps Student Body Association. The officers are president, first vice-president, second vice-president, secretary, and treasurer. The officers serve a term beginning and ending in January. Student Senate meetings are held on a regular basis with special meetings called by the secretary at the request of 1) the president of the Senate, 2) the Senate, 3) seven members of the Senate, 4) the president of the college."}
{"id": "millsapscollegec1990mill", "title": "Millsaps College Catalog, 1989-1990", "year": 1989, "seq": 9, "text": "Membership is open to all full-time freshmen who achieve a grade-point average of 3.5 in either the first semester or both semesters of the freshman year. Pi Delta Phi is a national French honor society which recognizes attainment and scholarship in the study of the French language and literature. Its purpose is to honor those students having earned a minimum of 18 semester hours in French, and who have a high scholastic average in all subjects. Schiller Gesellschaft was founded in order to give recognition to those students who have shown excellence in the study of German and in order to provide a forum for the study of all aspects of German civilization. Sigma Delta Pi, the international Spanish honorary, was established at Millsaps College on Feb. 24, 1968. This honor society recognizes attainment and scholarship in the study of the Spanish language and literature. Membership is open to students with a high scholastic average in all subjects who also possess at least a B average in Spanish. Membership is limited to those having at least three college years of Span- ish including a minimum of three hours of literature. 27 Sigma Lambda is a leadership and service honorary society whose members are primarily sophomores selected on the basis of character, scholarship, and involvement in college and community activities. It brings together student leaders from many phases of campus life along with a limited number of faculty members to provide opportunities for service to the Millsaps community and to act as a channel for the exchange of infor- mation about campus events and concerns. Sigma Pi Sigma, a national honor society in physics, was established at Millsaps in February 1988. Its purpose is to honor excellence in physics. Sigma Tau Delta is the national English honor society. The purposes of the socie- ty are (a) to confer distinction for high achievement in English language and literature in undergraduate, graduate, and professional studies; (b) to promote interest in litera- ture and the English language on local campuses and their surrounding communities; and (c) to foster the discipline of English in all its aspects, including creative and critical writing."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1987-03-13", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1987-03-13 : Volume 82, Issue 17", "year": 1987, "seq": 0, "text": "King also emphasized the ability of corporate America to discriminate against minorities. He asked a group of students to join hands in a circle and not to allow anyone to penetrate the group. He demonstrated that, as individuals, no one in the group would exclude \u201coutsiders\u201d, but as a part of a larger whole, the individual's beliefs and values were over\u00ac shadowed by the desire to keep the group as it was. He explained that all too often we allow society\u2019s institutions to perpetuate themselves without questioning their moral sensitivity. continued on page 4 By Beth C. Winters Anger, frustraton, disgust, and confusion were just some of the emotions present in Mead Chapel Wednesday evening as Dr. Charles King delivered a lecture on racial sensitivity. King\u2019s long awaited arrival came after his lecture was postponed from two previous dates this winter due to illness on one occassion and bad weather conditions on the other. King began his presentation in quite an aggressive man\u00ac ner by angering much of his audience with statements such as \"The basic problems are white attitudes.\u201d And he explained that part of the pro\u00ac blem was that blacks and whites alike were often un\u00ac willing to come right out and state that whites are responsi\u00ac ble for racism in America. He proceeded with this tactic un\u00ac til he sensed that the au\u00ac dience understood his fun\u00ac damental point: that blacks are oppressed by whites much in the same way that he oppressed his audience. He remarked that just as the au\u00ac dience was upset by the rules that he placed upon the com\u00ac munity in Mead, blacks were angered by the rules of white America. King used a variety of other tactics to reinforce his point. He asked a number of black students to express their sen\u00ac timents on being black in the white dominated society of Middlebury College."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1987-03-13", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1987-03-13 : Volume 82, Issue 17", "year": 1987, "seq": 1, "text": "We believe the time has come when high school seniors across this country should stop having to pay to take a test which in\u00ac dicates the socio-economic position of the student's parents rather than the stu\u00ac dent\u2019s ability to work. Why do minorities do worse on the test than their educational disadvantages can account for? How substantive can the test be if some coaching com\u00ac panies regularly improve scores more than 150 points? How genuine are the scores if so many people are known to cheat on such poorly proc- tored exams? How can Educational Testing Services (ETS), which makes the SAT, be trusted to monitor its own performance when this, their most profitable test, accounts for much of their revenue? The Scholastic Aptitude Test is not objective: it is not a Valid or reliable standard. Great as it might be to have such a touchstone, this test is not it. As David Owen writes in his devastating book, None of the Above, \u201cThere is nothing ge\u00ac nuinely objective about a test like the SAT: it is written, compiled, keyed, and inter\u00ac preted by highly subjective human beings. The principal difference between it and a test that can't be graded by a machine is that it leaves no room for more than one cor\u00ac rect answer.\u201d ETS does not have a monopoly on knowledge, though we are measured by its reasear- need not require their students to take the SAT, because most colleges no longer admit selectively. If they are going to let everyone in anyway, why should they require their applicants to spend time and money on a test they don\u2019t need? This means that Brown, and your school, as well as a few continued on page 3 chers\u2019 judgments. Needless to say, many who think creative\u00ac ly or split hairs do not do well on such a test, though they do well in school."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1987-03-13", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1987-03-13 : Volume 82, Issue 17", "year": 1987, "seq": 2, "text": "We\u2019re just frustrated because whoever is stealing is actually taking the lifeblood of the station. It\u2019s really a sign of disrespect for WRMC.\" denial still seen as major problem During Levin\u2019s captivity, Lucille Levin organized the OND to raise consciousness, help under-developed countries force would be drafting its report in the next four to six weeks which will include their recomendations as to what should be done. A student then asked if the task force had found any com\u00ac mon denominators in drug abuse. Megathlin said that alcohol abuse seemed to be a common factor, but agreed that not everyone who drank would become a drug abuser. Dean Lindholm said he thought that the main pro\u00ac blem was with addiction, not the individual substances. Lindholm noted that Nick Lieder had said that when he stopped using cocaine, he turned to alcohol and mari\u00ac juana instead, replacing one substance with another. He remarked that in dealing with drug use, one cannot only focus on drugs besides alcohol. Professor Riess add\u00ac ed at this point that he per\u00ac sonally was very sensitive to the issue of personal freedom and personal privacy. He said that he would be \u2019appalled\u2019 at the use of drug testing and would do anything he could to oppose its implementation. The members of the task force concurred that testing would not be one of their recomendations. One student brought up the possibility that lack of weekend activity might be a cause of drug and alcohol problems. Several other students agreed, saying that the only activities on weekends, such as going downtown or to fraternity parties, seemed to be alcohol related. Another student countered that people should be creative and be able to find activities on campus on weekends which do not in\u00ac volve drinking."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1987-03-13", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1987-03-13 : Volume 82, Issue 17", "year": 1987, "seq": 3, "text": "The students\u2019 project is centered in Alegieias, a rural area in Western Columbia where most of the people are involv\u00ac ed in agriculture. The women of the area have a long tradi- tion of making acepas (tortillas) from a white com dough. There is a large de\u00ac mand for the product in Cali- Valle, which is 70 km away. Unfortunately, the collec\u00ac tion of the com, its processing into acepas, and the final marketing is expensive both in time and money needed for transportation. The project helps increase the income of the women producers by cut\u00ac ting down these costs. For in\u00ac stance, a store will be built to house a grinder so that the women will be able to grind the com in their own village. Five tons of com will also be purchased to initiate the pro\u00ac ject. Profits from this project will be channeled into improv\u00ac ing the educational facilities of the village. Once students at Mid\u00ac dlebury become educated in and aware of the preceding issues, we will begin our own development project. The ODN will cover the funding of the project, while we will sup\u00ac ply both knowledge and com\u00ac mitment to the effort. Students can become actively involved in a grassroots pro\u00ac ject through a special intern\u00ac ship program, in which several students will be chosen to go to the develop\u00ac ment project and help in its organization; helping the peo\u00ac ple to help themselves. The ODN will be sponsoring numerous campus events in the coming years. We hope that through our efforts more students will become concern\u00ac ed with the problems of developing countries and that through ODN this concern can be channeled into con\u00ac structive measures for the developing world. The ODN has arranged a weekly lec\u00ac ture series in which various faculty members will speak on the issue of development from their respective fields."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1987-03-13", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1987-03-13 : Volume 82, Issue 17", "year": 1987, "seq": 4, "text": "The accompa\u00ac nying soundtrack album, available now, is a compilia- tion of diverse music that argues convincingly that more lives and rocks in Athens than REM and post- REM imitation bands. All the tracks on the album except for Pylon's \u201cStop It\u201d are recorded live, which preserves what seems to be the only common denominator of Athen\u2019s music: a strong minimalist dominance. The Squall's \u201cNa Na Na Na,\u201d recorded at The 40 Watt Club, is certainly one of best tracks on the album and is distinct from the rest of the bands in that it incor\u00ac porates keyboards and a very audible female backup singer. Hie song itself, lyrical\u00ac ly and vocally, conjures up By Zach Egan and Scott Desimon It seems that whenever Athens\" Georgia, is mention\u00ac ed by music critics, REM is sure to be mentioned in the next breath. Although, REM is the most popular band from Athens, it is by no means the only. IRS records and a film crew set out to shed new light on Athens and expose the proverbial new music gold mine that exists there. Ever since the release of REM's in\u00ac dependent single \u201cRadio Free Europe/Sitting Still\" in 1980, Athens seems to have been producing more than its share of creative and highly innovative new bands. There is no doubt that the Universi\u00ac ty of Georgia, which is located in Athens, deserves much credit, as most of the bands either are, or have been students there. In fact, one track on the album was recorded at the SAE fraterni\u00ac ty house. Aware of the Athens scene, director Terry. Gayton and director Bill Cody spent The Arts Calendar Beginning next weekend, the Vermont Repertory Theatre will present Dancing With the Devil, a play about Eugene O\u2019Neill written by Jeff Ryback of Burlington."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1987-03-13", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1987-03-13 : Volume 82, Issue 17", "year": 1987, "seq": 5, "text": "Every great restaurant has its own house specialty and Proctor Hall is no different. It offered brown lettuce salad, which is certainly on the cut\u00ac ting edge of culinary art. Needless to say the salad was the best part of the meal, if one does not count the milk and orange juice. Not only does one find ex\u00ac cellent house specialties in the finest bistros, but also a certain distinct atmosphere as well. Here again Proctor Hall follows that trend. There seemed-'to be a garrulous, talkative ambience in the restaurant. It was as though everyone knew one another and were eating in large groups. My colleague and I concluded that it was most impressive that Proctor Hall could maintain this unique dining atmosphere. Everyone must have been talking about the wonderful plastic place mats that his of her plates rested upon. Proctor Hall was a most in\u00ac teresting eating experience. I would give it a five stars for atmosphere, two and a half for service and none for the meal. I may eat at Proctor Hall again in the future, but the next time I am in Mid\u00ac dlebury, Vermont I think I am going to try the Crest Room. Keeping students\u2019 issues in the students 9 hands continued from page 3 ing drinking on campus. In general, adminstrations are not striving to regain the authority relinquished fifteen years ago. Most instances of increased administration con\u00ac trol have resulted from the failure of students to police themselves, as well as the threat of increased litigation. Here at Middlebury, Dean Wonnacott has repeatedly said that she is displeased by students' increasing unwill\u00ac ingness to take responsibility for their own lives, but also added that if the situation demanded it, she could forsee greater intervention in student-governed areas. Yet, at Middlebury the outlook is perhaps not as bleak."}
{"id": "IzvestiiaOfTheProvisionalRevolutionaryCommitteeOfSailorsSoldiersAnd", "title": "Izvestiia of the Provisional Revolutionary Committee of Sailors, Soldiers and Workers of the town of Kronstadt", "year": 1992, "seq": 0, "text": "Our country is enduring a difficult moment. Hunger, cold and economic ruin have held us in an iron vice these three years already. The Communist Party, which rules the country, has become separated from the masses, and shown itself unable to lead her from her state of general ruin. It has not faced the reality of the disturbances which in recent times have occurred in Petrograd and Moscow. This unrest shows clearly enough that the party has lost the faith of the working masses. Neither has it recognized the demands presented by the workers. It considers them plots of the counterrevolution. It is deeply mistaken. This unrest, these demands, are the voice of the people in its entirety, of all laborers. All workers, sailors and soldiers see clearly at the present moment that only through common effort, by the common will of the laborers, is it possible to give the country bread, wood, and coal, to dress the barefoot and naked, and to lead the Republic out of this dead end. This will of all laborers, soldiers and sailors was definitively expressed at the Garrison Meeting of our town on Tuesday, March 1st. At that meeting, the resolution of ships' crews of the 1st and 2nd Brigades was passed unanimously. Among the decisions taken, it was decided to immediately carry out new elections to the Soviet, for these elections to be carried out on a fairer basis, and specifically, in such a way that true representation of the laborers would be found in the Soviet, and that the Soviet would be an active and energetic organ. On March 2nd of this year, delegates from all sailor, soldier and worker organizations gathered in the House of Education. It was proposed to form at this Conference a basis for new elections, in order to then enter into peaceful work on redesigning the Soviet structure."}
{"id": "IzvestiiaOfTheProvisionalRevolutionaryCommitteeOfSailorsSoldiersAnd", "title": "Izvestiia of the Provisional Revolutionary Committee of Sailors, Soldiers and Workers of the town of Kronstadt", "year": 1992, "seq": 1, "text": "In view of the fact that the present Soviets do not express the will of the workers and peasants, to immediately hold new elections to the Soviets by secret ballot, with freedom of pre-election agitation for all workers and peasants. 2. Freedom of speech and press for workers and peasants, anarchists and left socialist parties. 3. Freedom of assembly of both trade unions and peasant associations. 4. To convene not later than March 10th, 1921 a non-party Conference of workers, soldiers and sailors of the city of Petrograd, of Kronstadt, and of Petrograd province. 5. To free all political prisoners of socialist parties, and also all workers and peasants, soldiers and sailors imprisoned in connection with worker and peasant movements. 6. To elect a Commission for the review of the cases of those held in prisons and concentration camps. 7. To abolish all POLITOTDELS, since no single party should be able to have such privileges for the propaganda of its ideas and receive from the state the means for these ends. In their place must be established locally elected cultural-educational commissions, for which the state must provide resources. 8. To immediately remove all anti-smuggling roadblock detachments. 9. To equalize the rations of all laborers, with the exception of those in work injurious to health. 10. To abolish the Communist fighting detachments in all military units, and also the various guards kept in factories and plants by the communists, and if such guards or detachments are needed, they can be chosen in military units from the companies, and in factories and plants by the discretion of the workers. 1 1 . To give the peasants full control over their own land, to do as they wish, and also to keep cattle, which must be maintained and managed by their own strength, that is, without using hired labor. 12. We appeal to all military units, and also to the comrade cadets to lend their support to our resolution. 13."}
{"id": "IzvestiiaOfTheProvisionalRevolutionaryCommitteeOfSailorsSoldiersAnd", "title": "Izvestiia of the Provisional Revolutionary Committee of Sailors, Soldiers and Workers of the town of Kronstadt", "year": 1992, "seq": 2, "text": "Com., the sailor Petrichenko, on the Committee's actions from the moment of its election up to the previous day. Comrade Petrichenko underscored the full battle readiness of the entire garrison of the fortress, and of the ships, and the enthusiasm which filled all together and each individually, from the workers to the soldiers and sailors. The meeting greeted the newly elected members of the Committee and the President's concluding words with stormy applause. Moving on to business, the Conference considered first of all the question of produce and heating material. It was made clear that the town and garrison are fully provided for both produce and heating material. On the question of arming the workers, the Conference mandated the arming of the working masses. This was completed to the loud approval of the workers themselves, and cries of \"victory or death.\" The workers were assigned the internal guard of the town, since the sailors and soldiers are bursting for active work in the combat detachments. Further, it was decided to newly elect within three days the administrations of all unions, and also the Soviet of Unions. This is the leading organ of the workers, and will be in constant contact with the Provisional Revolutionary Committee. Then reports from various places were given by comrade sailors who had broken through to Kronstadt from Petrograd, Strelna, Peterhof and Oranienbaum. From their information it is seen that the populace and workers of these towns are being kept by the Communists in total unawareness of what is being done in Kronstadt. Provocative rumors are being let out to the effect that some kind of gang of White Guards and generals is running things in Kronstadt. This last information called forth the general laughter of the sailors and workers at the assembly. It reached an even more comical mood during the reading of a \"Communist manifesto,\" tossed on Kronstadt from an airplane."}
{"id": "IzvestiiaOfTheProvisionalRevolutionaryCommitteeOfSailorsSoldiersAnd", "title": "Izvestiia of the Provisional Revolutionary Committee of Sailors, Soldiers and Workers of the town of Kronstadt", "year": 1992, "seq": 3, "text": "With the attendance, also, of commissions and delegations elected at factories and plants, among whom were hundreds of non-party workingmen, workingwomen, sailors and soldiers. A little bunch of adventurers and counter-revolutionaries has led Kronstadt astray. Under cover of the Petropavlovsk sailors, spies sent by French counterintelligence have unquestionably been active. They tell the sailors that the whole matter is a struggle for \"democracy,\" that they do not want the shedding of blood, and that the mutiny is passing without a single shot, for some kind of \"democracy.\" French capitalists' spies, tsarist generals, and their faithful helpers the Mensheviks and SR's can struggle for such democracy. If it had ever been fated for them to achieve success, the exploits of this gang of thieves and traitors would inescapably have led to the reestablishment of bourgeois power, and to bloody reprisal against the workers and peasants. The Mensheviks and SR's, pointing to the difficult economic situation of the Soviet Republic, say that the Communists have been incapable of economic construction. But who, for three years, did not allow the Russian workers and peasants the possibility of peaceful economic construction? If anyone worked to create hunger and economic ruin, then it was the Mensheviks and SR's. They have supported every counterrevolutionary rebellion, tirelessly fanned the flames of civil war in the name of re-establishing the power of landlords and capitalists, and directed international imperialists against Soviet Russia. The leaders of the conspiracy say that they captured power in Kronstadt without a shot. But this occurred only because Soviet power wished to overcome this conflict by peaceful means. It cannot continue thus. The international bourgeoisie is raising its head. There is exultation in the camp of the enemies of the working class, exultation which may any day pour out in a new campaign against Soviet Russia."}
{"id": "IzvestiiaOfTheProvisionalRevolutionaryCommitteeOfSailorsSoldiersAnd", "title": "Izvestiia of the Provisional Revolutionary Committee of Sailors, Soldiers and Workers of the town of Kronstadt", "year": 1992, "seq": 4, "text": "You will deceive the laborers no more! Your hopes are futile, Communists, and your threats powerless. The ninth wave* of the Laborers' Revolution has arisen, and will wash the stinking slanderers and tyrants, with the defilement brought by their actions, from the face of Soviet Russia. We will not be needing your mercy, Lord Trotsky! THEY CONTINUE TO SLANDER The Communists have well mastered the old Jesuit tactic, \"slander and slander, and with luck something will stick.\" And they slander. In powerless spite, pathetic and confused, they spread the most outlandish rumors about events in Kronstadt among the workers and soldiers of Petrograd. At work here, as radio messenger Rosta would have you believe, are the Entente, and French spies, and White Guards, and tsarist generals, and Mensheviks, and SR's, and the Estonian bourgeoisie, and Finnish bankers, and the Entente's counterintelligence. In a word, the entire world has taken up arms against the poor Communists. Moreover, they assure the Petrograd workers that \"French agents and former tsarist officers sneaked into Kronstadt, and, using gold, corrupted elements lacking class consciousness.\" Well imagine that! And we, the Kronstadters, didn't know a thing about it! And just in case these \"facts\" didn't convince the Peter workers, Rosta reports such horrors. \"By coincidence at the very moment when a new Republican government is coming into administration in America, and displaying a bent to enter into trade relations with Soviet Russia, the spread of provocative rumors and rigging of disorders in Kronstadt clearly works toward influencing the new American President, and preventing change in American policy relative to Russia. At the same time, the London Conference is conferring, and these provocative rumors must certainly act on the Turkish delegation, making it obedient to the Entente's demands.\" This then is what the Communists, confused by an unexpected blow, agreed upon: French agents brought gold to Kronstadt, in order to influence the American President and the pliability of the Turkish delegation!"}
{"id": "IzvestiiaOfTheProvisionalRevolutionaryCommitteeOfSailorsSoldiersAnd", "title": "Izvestiia of the Provisional Revolutionary Committee of Sailors, Soldiers and Workers of the town of Kronstadt", "year": 1992, "seq": 5, "text": "(radio messenger Rosta) The French newspaper Matin reported, from the words of its Helsingfors correspondent, that an uprising against Soviet power had begun in Kronstadt. On February 14th, there was report of a rebellion in the Baltic Fleet, and of the arrest of the commissars of the Baltic Fleet. The Soviet Government supposed, based on previous experience, that agents of French capitalists in league with former tsarist generals were preparing a mutiny in Kronstadt. As has now become clear, French agents and former tsarist officers sneaked into Kronstadt, and, using gold, corrupted elements lacking class consciousness. The fantastic reports by counterintelligence, spreading legends three weeks ago about an uprising in Kronstadt, were simply ahead of events. Recently, White Guard leaflets have appeared in Kronstadt and Petrograd, and known French spies have been captured during the arrests. At the same time, the SR's began an increased agitation among the workers and sailors in Kronstadt and Petrograd, using the difficult situation with produce and heat. On February 28th, a reactionary resolution was passed on the ship Petropavlovsk. However, by demand of the sailors it was reworked, and passed on the following day in a new edition. In this was included the demand for new elections to the Soviet. Our comrades did not object, and proposed to form a Commission of sailors' and workers' representatives at the House of Education, to decide the question finally. Elections began, but counterrevolutionary elements decided to ruin this Commission, and demanded before all else that it take place on the Petropavlovsk. On March 2nd, open action against Soviet power was already occurring on the Petropavlovsk, with the participation of Mensheviks and SR's, who hid under the non- party banner. The official president of the mutineers' organization is the former clerk Petrichenko, and the secretary is Tukin, a sailor, but in fact everything is run by Captain Burkser, and General Kozlovsky is a prominent figure among the former tsarist officers."}
{"id": "IzvestiiaOfTheProvisionalRevolutionaryCommitteeOfSailorsSoldiersAnd", "title": "Izvestiia of the Provisional Revolutionary Committee of Sailors, Soldiers and Workers of the town of Kronstadt", "year": 1992, "seq": 6, "text": "On March 2nd, the Soviet of Labor and Defense, decided to declare former general Kozlovsky and his co-conspirators outlawed, to declare the city of Petrograd and Petrograd province under martial law, and to hand over all power in the Petrograd consolidated region to the Defense Committee of the City of Petrograd. The following day, demoralization began to show among the supporters of the mutinous organization on the Petropavlovsk. The organization's leaders, in order to raise the spirits of their supporters, announced that in the end it would be possible to leave for the Finnish shore. At the same time, the White Guard press spread lying reports, talking as if the Estonian bourgeoisie supported the insurgents. On March 4th, at an expanded session of the Petrograd Soviet, Comrade Zinoviev gave a thorough report on the events in Kronstadt, after which the meeting unanimously passed an appeal to the workers, sailors and soldiers of Kronstadt. This exposed the dirty work of the spies sent by French counterintelligence, and of the Mensheviks and SR's who had worked on the events which were occurring.** The appeal notes that Soviet Power is able to differentiate unknowing, mistaken toilers from intentional counterrevolutionaries. In a military sense, Kronstadt does not present a danger to Petrograd, for the fort of Krasnaya Gorka has command over Kronstadt, and can crush it at any moment. The entire Krasnaya Gorka garrison curses the mutineers, and is bursting for battle. There is complete calm in Petrograd, and even those small factories where gatherings with attacks on Soviet power by individuals occurred earlier, have recognized the provocation. They have understood what the agents of the Entente and counterrevolution are pushing them to do. An 8 thousand person meeting of Peter seamen unanimously passed a resolution supporting Soviet power, and the Petrograd garrison has not wavered for a moment."}
{"id": "IzvestiiaOfTheProvisionalRevolutionaryCommitteeOfSailorsSoldiersAnd", "title": "Izvestiia of the Provisional Revolutionary Committee of Sailors, Soldiers and Workers of the town of Kronstadt", "year": 1992, "seq": 7, "text": "Demoralization grows among the sailors, and a meaningful number of the sailors have a dislike for General Kozlovsky and the officers. The number of those deserting to us grows. Radiograms and newspapers received from abroad show that, simultaneous with the events in Kronstadt, the enemies of Soviet Russia are spreading the most fantastic fabrications abroad, saying that there are disorders in Russia. They say that the Soviet Government has supposedly fled to the Crimea, that Moscow supposedly is in the hands of the rebels, that blood pours in torrents through the streets of Petrograd, and so on. The SR organization abroad has received from somewhere a huge quantity of tsarist banknotes, and is letting out rumors in order, among other reasons, to raise the rate for tsarist money, and dump it more profitably. By coincidence at the very moment when a new Republican government is coming into administration in America, and displaying a bent to enter into trade relations with Soviet Russia, the spread of provocative rumors and rigging of disorders in Kronstadt clearly works toward influencing the new American President, and preventing change in American policy relative to Russia. At the same time, the London Conference is conferring, and these provocative rumors must certainly act on the Turkish delegation, making it obedient to the Entente's demands. There is no doubt that the actions taking place on the Petropavlovsk are merely a component part of a grandiose plan of provocation. This plan, besides creating internal difficulties for Soviet Russia, is intended to shatter her international standing. Before us in the case at hand is the provocation work of the world reaction of Entente stockbrokers, and of agents of Entente counterintelligence agencies working by their orders. In Russia itself, the main figures carrying out these policies are a tsarist general and former officers, whose activities are supported by Mensheviks and SR's."}
{"id": "IzvestiiaOfTheProvisionalRevolutionaryCommitteeOfSailorsSoldiersAnd", "title": "Izvestiia of the Provisional Revolutionary Committee of Sailors, Soldiers and Workers of the town of Kronstadt", "year": 1992, "seq": 8, "text": "NOTICE The Town Health Department brings to the attention of all doctors, doctors' assistants, and citizens, that under issuance of prescriptions for additional food, the following rules must be followed: in the prescription must be specified the first and family names of the patient, the exact diagnosis and the address. First in order of fullfillment are prescriptions issued to children suffering from infectious diseases, and then from pulmonary and renal diseases, and then adults with infectious diseases. Prescriptions are given to the selection commission at the Town Hospital from 10 to 12 A.M. daily. Return issue takes place on the following day from 1 1 to 12 A.M., with prescriptions not picked up in 3 days being considered annulled. All prescriptions issued before March 5th are also annulled. The present rules were worked out in consultation with doctors, doctors' assistants, a representative of the Town Hospital and the Gorkommuna of the City Health Department. This consultation requests all comrade doctors and doctor's assistants to view the issuance of prescriptions with the highest degree of care, keeping in memory the produce difficulties being suffered by the Republic. PLUME, Head of the City Health Department FROM THE ADMINISTRATION DEPARTMENT OF KRONSOVDEP 1) The Administration Department instructs all Uchkoms to take measures to clean the footpaths of the town of snow, and also to bring the courtyards into order, involving the broad masses of the populace in the work. The Audit Commission is instructed to take active part in the completion of the works. 2) All Uchkoms having gathered passports from citizens are instructed to return such to the citizens into their own hands. ANNOUNCEMENT All military units, workers' associations and organizations may receive Izvestiia of the Provisional Revolutionary Committee' and pamphlets at Sevtsentropechat in accordance with the set norm. * By tradition, the ninth wave is the highest in a series (Akhmanova et al., p. 64). ** This appeal was printed by us in full, in No 4, of March 6th."}
{"id": "IzvestiiaOfTheProvisionalRevolutionaryCommitteeOfSailorsSoldiersAnd", "title": "Izvestiia of the Provisional Revolutionary Committee of Sailors, Soldiers and Workers of the town of Kronstadt", "year": 1992, "seq": 9, "text": "Well, so be it; we're ready. We will measure our strengths. They rush to act, and yes, they are forced to hurry. The laborers of Russia, despite all the Communist lies, understand what a great endeavor of liberation from three years' slavery is being created in Revolutionary Kronstadt. The butchers are unnerved. The victim of their shameless bestiality, Soviet Russia, is slipping from their torture chamber, and with her, dominion over the laboring people is slipping finally from their criminal hands. The Communist government will send an SOS. The weeklong existence of Free Kronstadt is proof of their powerlessness. One moment more and the worthy answer of our glorious revolutionary ships and forts will sink the ships of the Soviet pirates. They are forced into battle with Revolutionary Kronstadt, which has raised the banner, \"Power to Soviets, and not Parties.\" WE AND THEY Not knowing how to retain the power which is falling from their hands, the Communists are resorting to the most putrid, provocative methods. Their base newspapers have mobilized all forces to set fire to the people's masses, and to paint the Kronstadt as a White Guard movement. Now the gang of \"patented\" scoundrels has thrown out the slogan, \"Kronstadt has sold out to Finland.\" Their shameless press is already spattering poisonous spit, and now that there has been no success in convincing the proletariat that White Guards were working in Kronstadt, they are attempting to play on national feelings. All the world already knows from our broadcasts what the Kronstadt garrison and workers are fighting for, but the Communists attempt to twist the meanings of events before the Peter brothers. The Communist oprichnina has surrounded the people of Peter with a tight ring of cadet bayonets and the party \"guard,\" and Maliuta Skuratov *(Trotsky) does not allow delegates from the non-party workers and soldiers to enter Kronstadt."}
{"id": "dino-crisis-2-strategy-guide_202404", "title": "Dino Crisis 2 Strategy Guide", "year": 2000, "seq": 0, "text": "Ah, you can see the know-how of our staff shining through. They've been creating dinosaurs for a long time now since they began with Dino 1. We basically studied animals that are similar to each of the dinosaurs. How were the sounds for the dinosaurs created? Were they created or are they based on actual animal calls? For both the sounds and the animals we used living creatures for inspiration. Then we created the sounds based on those images. Another innovation is the use of Sub Weapons. How did the idea for them come about? Sub Weapons were added after we considered what would be the weapons that would best suit our concept of \u2018the exhilaration of defeating a succession of dinosaurs.\" Defeating dinosaurs is fun, but we wanted the player to decide how best to do it. Then the player could PRIMAGAMES.COM Career Highlights: He was a planner of Dino Crisis and has made his producer debut on Dino Crisis 2. Also, he has been involved in the creation of the Resident Evil series since its premier. He worked as a programmer in Basident Eviland Resident Evil 2, and as-a planner in Resident Evil 3 Nemesis Hobbies: Going to the movies, playing tennis, and skiing. experience a new level of fun by choosing different combinations. To accomplish this we decided to provide players with two types of weapons. What was the most challenging aspect of the Dino Crisis 2 project? \u2014 It was the challenge of creating a game that was completely different from Resident Evil series and Dino 7. We had 3 to think up all sorts of new elements that _ \u201cwould make the game enjoyable so a player could have \"fun shooting at and killing dinosaurs!\" What are you most proud of in Dino Crisis 2? What was the most satisfying aspect of the development process?"}
{"id": "x-the-practice-of-zen", "title": "The practice of Zen", "year": 1970, "seq": 0, "text": "Pure self-awareness is intrinsically and experientially non- dualistic, as the Buddhist sages and those of other re\u00ac ligions have testified over many centuries. Self-aware\u00ac ness (the nature of mind) is not the function of know\u00ac ing, but the knowing itself in its most intrinsic form. When one discovers this self-awareness, he finds his whole being changed. While engaging in any activity, he feels as though he were transcending the activity; he talks and walks, but he feels that his talking and walk\u00ac ing is not the same as before\u2014he now walks with an opened mind. He actually knows that it is he who is doing the walking; the director\u2014himself\u2014is sitting right in the center of his mind, controlling all his actions with spontaneity. He walks in bright awareness and with illumined spirit. In other words, the man who realizes self-awareness feels that he is no more the obedient servant of blind impulse, but is his own master. He then senses that ordinary people, blind to their innate, bright awareness, tread the streets like walking corpses! If this self-awareness can be retained and cultivated, one will experience the illuminating aspect of the mind called by many mystics Pure Consciousness. When this illuminating consciousness is cultivated to its fullest ex\u00ac tent, the whole universe is clearly seen to be in its em\u00ac brace. Many mystics and Buddhists who have been misled consider this to be the highest state\u2014the state of Nirvana, or the final stage of unification with the great Universal or \u201cCosmic\u201d Consciousness. But, according 44 The Practice of Zen to Zen, this state is still on the edge of Sangsara. Yogis who have reached this state are still bound by the deep- rooted monistic idea, unable to cut off the binding-cord of subtle clinging and release themselves for the \u201cother shore\u201d of perfect freedom."}
{"id": "x-the-practice-of-zen", "title": "The practice of Zen", "year": 1970, "seq": 1, "text": "The corpse stood there solidly, with its clothes adhering to it\u2014 nothing falling down. The monks then held a conference over this em\u00ac barrassing corpse, and finally decided to cremate it. The news spread like wildfire, and people from near and far came to see this unique spectacle, all moved to astonishment by such a miracle. But the problem of how to take the corpse to the cremation ground still remained unsolved, as no one could move it. In the meantime Yin Feng\u2019s sister, who was a nun, happened to pass by. Seeing the commotion, she pushed her way forward, approached the corpse, and 56 The Practice of Zen cried, \u201cHey! You good-for-nothing scoundrel of a brother! When you were alive you never did behave yourself; now you won\u2019t even die decently, but try to bewilder people by all these shenanigans!\u201d Saying this, she slapped the corpse\u2019s face and gave the body a push, and immediately it fell to the ground. [From then on, the funeral proceeded without interruption.] B. Tao Tsung was the teacher of the famous Zen Master, Yun Men. It was he who opened the mind of Yun Men by hurting his leg. Later Tao Tsung re\u00ac turned to his native town of Mu Chow, as his mother was very old and needed someone to support her. From then on he lived with his mother and earned a living for her and himself by making straw sandals. At that time a great rebellion broke out, led by a man called Huang Tsao. As the insurgent army ap\u00ac proached Mu Chow, Tao Tsung went to the city gate and hung a big sandal upon it. When Huang Tsao\u2019s army reached the gate they could not force it open, no matter how hard they tried."}
{"id": "x-the-practice-of-zen", "title": "The practice of Zen", "year": 1970, "seq": 2, "text": "According to geo- mancy, this is not an auspicious day! I had better die tomorrow in the south suburb.\u201d So the following day they all went out of the south gate. But then Pu Hua changed his mind again, and said to the people that he would rather die the next day in the west suburb. Far fewer people came to escort him the following day; and again Pu Hua changed his mind, saying he would rather postpone his departure from this world for one more day, and die in the north suburb then . By this time people had grown tired of the whole business, so nobody escorted him when the next day came. Pu Hua even had to carry the coffin by himself to the north suburb. When he arrived there, he sat down inside the coffin, holding his staff, and waited until he saw some pedestrians approaching. He then asked them if they would be so good as to nail the coffin up for him after he had died. When they agreed, he lay down in it and passed away. The pedestrians then nailed the coffin up as they had promised to do. Word of this event soon reached town, and people began to arrive in swarms. Someone then suggested that they open the coffin and take a look at the corpse inside. When they did, however, they found, to their surprise, nothing in it! Before they had recovered from this shock, suddenly, from the sky above, they heard the familiar sound of the small bells jingling on the staff which Pu Hua had carried with him all his life. At first the jingling sound was very loud, as if it came from close at hand; then it became fainter and 58 The Practice of Zen fainter, until finally it faded entirely away."}
{"id": "x-the-practice-of-zen", "title": "The practice of Zen", "year": 1970, "seq": 3, "text": "Mere words cannot sustain a religion; empty talk cannot convince people nor uphold the faith of believers. If Zen had not consistently brought forth \u201caccomplished beings\u201d who, on the one hand, realized the Inner Truth and, on the other, gave concrete evidence of their Enlightenment, it could never have overshadowed all the other Schools of Buddhism in its motherland and survived for over a thousand years. Buddhist Enlightenment is not an empty theory or a matter of wishful thinking. It is a concrete fact that can be tried and proved. In the preceding story, when the Chief Monk was challenged by Chiu Feng, he courageously testified to his understanding by actually liberating his consciousness-soul from his physi\u00ac cal body within a few minutes. Who, without having some inner realization of Zen Truth, could possibly per\u00ac form such a remarkable feat? But, surprisingly, even this outstanding achievement failed to meet the standard of Zen! To be able to free oneself from life and death in their literal sense is still far from the objective of the Zen Masters\u2019 teaching! The Nature of Zen 61 Judging Zen from this standpoint, how pitiful we find the babblings of those \u201cexperts\u201d who know nothing but Zen prattle, and who not only abhor the existence of this type of koan, but purposely misinterpret it in their \u201cZen\u201d preachings and writings\u2014or completely omit it as if it had never existed! It is suggested, therefore, that the reader of this book look carefully for the differences between genuine and imitation Zen\u2014between the Zen which comes from the heart and that which comes from the mouth, between the Zen of concrete realization and that of mere words, between the Zen of true knowledge and that of prevarication. Drawing these discriminatory lines, the reader will no longer be mystified, or be\u00ac wildered by false prophets of Zen."}
{"id": "x-the-practice-of-zen", "title": "The practice of Zen", "year": 1970, "seq": 4, "text": "Each of them had one outstanding disciple, namely Ma Tsu (7-788) and ShihTou (700-790), respectively; and they, in turn, had several remarkable disciples who founded, either directly or indirectly, the five major Zen sects existing in those times, i.e., Lin Chi, Tsao Tung, I Yang, Yun Men, and Fa Yen. As time went on all five of these major sects were consolidated into either the Tsao Tung (Japanese: Soto) or the Lin Chi (Japanese: Rinzai) sect. The Tsao Tung and Lin Chi are thus the only sects of Zen Buddhism extant today. Zen, after the period of Hui Neng, spread to almost every corner of China and gradually became the most popular school of Buddhism in that country. It was widely accepted and practiced by both monks and lay\u00ac men from all walks of life. Through the efforts of Hui Neng and his disciples, the unique styles and traditions 64 The Practice of Zen of Zen, which I have outlined briefly in the preceding chapter, gradually emerged. The first two hundred years of Zen produced in suc\u00ac cession six Patriarchs\u2014Bodhidharma being the first and Hui Neng the sixth. During this time Zen kept its plain and original Indian style without the introduction of any radical or bizarre elements such as are found in the later periods of Zen history. In this early period Zen was unembellished, understandable, outspoken, and matter-of-fact. Because of a lack of documentation con\u00ac cerning Zen practice in this early period, we do not know very clearly the exact manner in which Zen was actually practiced. We can only say with assurance that there were no koan exercises, and no shouting, kicking, crying, or beating \u201cperformances\u201d such as those found at the present time. Several things, however, happened during this epoch. First, certain verbal instructions con\u00ac cerning Zen practice must have been handed down thr ough the succession from Bodhidharma to Hui Neng."}
{"id": "x-the-practice-of-zen", "title": "The practice of Zen", "year": 1970, "seq": 5, "text": "Objectively speaking, both of these approaches possess their merits and demerits, their ad\u00ac vantages as well as their disadvantages. If one wants to by-pass the recondite and cryptic Zen elements and try to graph directly a plain and tangible instruction that is genuinely practical, the Tsao Tung approach is prob\u00ac ably the more suitable. But if one wants to penetrate more deeply to the core of Zen, and is willing to accept the initial hardships and frustrations, the approach of the Lin Chi sect\u2014the most prevalent and popular Zen sect in both China and Japan today\u2014is probably pref\u00ac erable. I personally do not think the Tsao Tung ap\u00ac proach is a poor one, although it may not produce a realization as deep and as \u201cfree\u201d as that of the Lin Chi in the beginning stages. However, the plain, tangible approach of Tsao Tung may be much better suited to 66 The Practice of Zen the people of the twentieth century. This is mainly be\u00ac cause the koan exercise\u2014the mainstay if not the only stay of the Lin Chi practice\u2014is too difficult and too uncongenial for the modern mind. Besides, in practicing Zen by means of the koan exercise, one must constantly rely on a competent Zen Master from beginning to end. This again presents a difficult problem. A third objec\u00ac tion to the koan exercise is that it tends to create a con\u00ac stant strain on the mind, which will not relieve, but only intensify, the deadly mental tensions which many people suffer in this atomic age. Nevertheless, if one can receive constant guidance under a competent Zen Master and live in a favorable environment, the koan exercise may prove to be a better method in the long run. Nowadays, when Zen practice is mentioned, people immediately think of the koan (or Hua Tou) exercise as though there were no other way of practicing Zen."}
{"id": "x-the-practice-of-zen", "title": "The practice of Zen", "year": 1970, "seq": 6, "text": "The Hua Tou exer\u00ac cise did not gain its popularity until the latter part of the Sung Dynasty in the eleventh century. From Bo- dhidharma to Hui Neng, and from Hui Neng all the way through Lin Chi and Tang Shan\u2014a total period of ap\u00ac proximately four hundred years\u2014no established system of Hua Tou exercises can be traced. The outstanding Zen Masters of this period were great \u201cartists\u201d; they were very flexible and versatile in their teaching, and never confined themselves to any one system. It was mainly through the eloquent Master Tsung Kao (1089- 1163) that the Hua Tou exercise became the most pop\u00ac ular, if not the only, means by which Zen students have practiced during the past eight centuries. Here the in\u00ac teresting question is, How, before the popularization and standardization of the koan exercise, did students of older times practice Zen? How did those great figures, Hui Neng, Ma Tsu, Huang Po, and Lin Chi, themselves practice Zen? We have sufficient reason to believe that The Practice of Zen 67 in the old days the \u201cserene-reflection\u201d type of medita\u00ac tion now found in the teaching of the Tsao Tung sect was probably the mainstay of Zen meditation tech\u00ac niques. Now precisely what are the teachings of both sects; and exactly how does the Tsao Tung approach differ from that of the Lin Chi? To answer these questions as concisely as possible, the Tsao Tung approach to Zen practice is to teach the student how to observe his own mind in tranquility. The Lin Chi approach, on the other hand, is to put the student's mind to work on the \u201csolu\u00ac tion\u201d of an unsolvable problem known as the koan, or Hua Tou, exercise. The former may be regarded as overt or exoteric, the latter as covert or esoteric."}
{"id": "x-the-practice-of-zen", "title": "The practice of Zen", "year": 1970, "seq": 7, "text": "It is not an easy job for beginners to work well on the Hua Tou , but you should never be\u00ac come afraid or discouraged; neither should you cling to my thought of attaining Enlightenment, because you are \u201cight now practicing the Seven Days\u2019 Meditation, whose /ery purpose is to produce Enlightenment. Therefore my additional thought of attaining Enlightenment is as mnecessary and as foolish as to t hink of adding a head :o the one you already have! You should not worry ibout it if at first you cannot work well on the Hua Tou; what you should do is just to keep remembering md observing it continuously. If any distracting thoughts irise, do not follow them up, but just recognize them or what they are. The proverb says well: 78 The Practice of Zen Do not worry about the arising of distracting thoughts. But beware if your recognition of them Arises too late! \u201cIn the beginning everyone feels the distraction of continuously arising errant thoughts, and cannot remem\u00ac ber the Hua Tou very well; but gradually, as time goes on, you will learn to take up the Hua Tou more easily. When that time comes you can take it up with ease and it will not escape you once during the entire hour. Then you will find the work is not difficult at all. I have talked a lot of nonsense today! Now all of you had better go and work hard on your Hua Tou\u201d The Second Day of the First Period, January 10th: The Master again addressed those in attendance, as fol\u00ac lows: \u201cThe Seven Days\u2019 Meditation is the best way to attain Enlightenment within a definite and predeter\u00ac mined period. In the old days, when people were better endowed, many Zen Buddhists did not pay special at\u00ac tention to this method."}
{"id": "x-the-practice-of-zen", "title": "The practice of Zen", "year": 1970, "seq": 8, "text": "They do not know how to work these matters out. The impor\u00ac tant thing is to stick to your Hua Tom at all times\u2014 when walking, lying, or standing\u2014from morning to night observing the Hua Tou vividly and clearly, until it appears in your mind like the autumn moon reflected limpidly in quiet water. If you practice this way, you can be assured of reaching the state of Enlightenment. In meditation, if you feel sleepy, you may open your eyes widely and straighten your back; you will then feel fresher and more alert than before. \u201cWhen working on the Hua Tou, you should be neither too subtle nor too loose. If you are too subtle you may feel very serene and comfortable, but you are apt to lose the Hua Tou. The consequence will then be that you will fall into the \u2018dead emptiness.\u2019 Right in the state of serenity, if you do not lose the Hua Tou , you may then be able to progress further than the top of the hundred-foot pole you have already ascended. If you are too loose, too many errant thoughts will at\u00ac tack you. You will then find it difficult to subdue them. In short, the Zen practitioner should be well adjusted, neither too tight nor too loose; in the looseness there should be tightness, and in the tightness there should be looseness. Practicing in such a manner, one may then gain improvement, and merge stillness and motion into one whole. \u201cI remember in the old days when I practiced the circle-running exercise in Golden Mountain Monastery and other places, the supervising monks made us run like flying birds! Oh, we monks really could run! But when the warning board suddenly sounded its stop- 82 The Practice of Zen signal, everybody stopped and stood still like so many dead poles!"}
{"id": "x-the-practice-of-zen", "title": "The practice of Zen", "year": 1970, "seq": 9, "text": "Under these circumstances, how could any drowsiness or distracting thoughts possibly arise? \u201cWhen you are meditating in the sitting posture, you should never bring the Hua Toil up too high; if you bring it up too much, you will get a headache. Nor should you place the Hua Tou in your chest; if you do, you will feel uncomfortable and suffer a pain there. Nor should you press the Hua Tou down too low; if you do, you will have trouble with your stomach and see delu\u00ac sive visions. What you should do is to watch the word \u2018Who,\u2019 softly and gently, with a smooth mind and calm, steady breath, like that of a hen as she hatches her egg or a cat when she watches a mouse. If you can do this well, you will find that one of these days your liferoot will suddenly and abruptly break off!\u201d The Fourth Day of the First Period, January 12th: \u201cNow three days of the seven have already passed. I am glad you are all working so hard. Some of you have brought me some poems and stanzas you have composed and asked me to comment on them. Some of you say that you saw Voidness and light, and so on. Well, these are not bad things; but judging from them, I am sure that you must have forgotten all that I told you in the first two days. Last night I told you that to practice Tao is nothing more than to follow and to recognize the Way. What is the Way? To look into the Hua Tou which is like a royal sword. With it you kill the Buddha when Buddha comes, with it you slaughter the devil when the devil comes. Under this sword not a single idea is al\u00ac lowed to remain, not a solitary dharma is permitted to exist."}
{"id": "performanceaudit1981mont", "title": "Performance audit of selected energy grant programs", "year": 1981, "seq": 0, "text": "Chapter I pre- sents an introduction to the report and summarizes the objectives and scope of our performance audit. Chapter II examines the Fuel Assistance and Weatherization Grant Programs administered by the Community Services Division of the Department of Community Affairs (DCA). Fuel assistance funds are provided by the federal government lo low income per- sons to help pay fuel bills. Federal grant funds are also dis- tributed by DCA for the weatherization program. These grants are for conservation of energy and are implemented by providing money to individuals for home repairs which reduce energy use. Recommendations are made to improve program monitoring and state administration of funds. Chapters III, IV, and V deal with three energy grant pro- grams administered by two divisions within the Department of Natural Resources and Conservation. The Energy Division is responsible for the Renewable Alternative Energy Grant Program, which provides grants for projects dealing with non-fossil fuel energy production. This program is covered in Chapter III. This same division administers the Institutional Building Grant Program, which supplies funds for energy conservation measures for state and local institutions. Chapter IV reviews the Institutional Build- ing Grant Program. A third program, examined in Chapter V, is administered by the Department's Water Resources Division and is called the Renewable Resource Development Grant Program. This program funds projects to enhance the use of renewable resources, such as land, water, recreation facilities, etc. It is peripherally related to energy in that some grant projects promote energy conservation or production. Recommendations are made to improve the monitoring, administration, and accountability of these pro- grams. Chapter VI presents inrormation on the Solid Waste Manage- ment Gram Program administered by the Solid Waste Management Bureau of the Department of Health and Environmental Sciences. Grants from this program fund studies by localities for the dis- posal of solid waste."}
{"id": "performanceaudit1981mont", "title": "Performance audit of selected energy grant programs", "year": 1981, "seq": 1, "text": "Commercial solar collectors, rock storage tanks, wind generators, and heat pumps are cited as examples of equipment. This category may also include items such as cameras, tape recorders, and calculators, even though they may cost less than $100. Appendix E of the formal grant agreement requires a list of tangible items which are the property of DNRC. This includes, \"Any and all equipment . . . purchased with grant money (sub- stantiated by receipts).\" The general grant provisions of all formal agreements also include the following requirements regarding tangible property purchased in the course of completing a grant project. \"All tangible property listed in Appendix E purchased by Grantee under this grant is the property of the DEPART- MENT, and at the completion of the twelve (12) month agreement period such property shall be delivered to the DEPARTMENT. At the discretion of the DEPARTMENT, the Grantee may purchase such property from the DE- PARTMENT at its market value.\" Contrary to this, our review indicated that very little action has been taken by the department to either collect, or sell back to the grantee, tangible property which has been purchased. According to officials of DNRC, the intent of the tangible property provision was that all equipment listed in \"Appendix E\" was to remain the property of the department. This includes 37 property which has been incorporated into the grantee's residence, property, or business. This may present problems when a prop- erty is sold, in that the buyer may not know that DNRC has a claim against the property. We noted one house which has a solar heating system funded through DNRC is for sale. The tangible property provision of the contract makes the program one of loans rather than grants. The law does not state the program is for loans; therefore, the tangible property provi- sion should be changed."}
{"id": "performanceaudit1981mont", "title": "Performance audit of selected energy grant programs", "year": 1981, "seq": 2, "text": "Qualifying institutions include schools, hospitals, local government buildings, and public care institutions (nursing homes). The program is a combination fed- eral/state effort with the Energy Division of the Department of Natural Resources and Conservation being the administrative agency in Montana. The Energy Division has responsibility for approving some grants, reviewing others, and monitoring those grants which it reviews or approves. The program consists of four phases. First, each institution must conduct a preliminary energy audit at its own expense. This review simply requires a listing of building characteristics, such as size, window area, type of furnace, etc., and energy consump- tion from the previous year. Once the first step is completed, the institution may conduct an energy audit. The audit consists of a review of the building by a person who has attended an energy audit workshop sponsored by the state. This review outlines low cost/no cost operational and maintenance procedures which can reduce energy consumption. Institutions performing such an audit may receive reimbursement from federal funds for 50 percent of the cost, providing they match the federal funds with their own money. Once an institution has implemented all of the cost effective operational and maintenance procedures outlined in the energy audit, it may apply for a 50 percent matching grant to conduct a 41 technical assistance review. The technical assistance review is conducted by a professional engineer or engineer-architect team to determine what, if any, more costly measures can be taken to conserve energy (i.e. insulation, conversion to coal or renewable energy sources, etc.). The final step in the process is the installation of the more costly energy conservation measures. Only schools and hospitals are eligible to participate in this phase of the program. An institu- tion which chooses to participate in this step may receive 50 per- cent of the cost of installing energy conservation measures iden- tified during the technical assistance review."}
{"id": "performanceaudit1981mont", "title": "Performance audit of selected energy grant programs", "year": 1981, "seq": 3, "text": "Source: Compiled by the Office of the Legislative Auditor. Illustration 9 STATE ACTIVITY The responsibility of the state lies in administering funds for energy audits, reviewing and recommending applications for tech- nical assistance and energy conservation measures, and monitoring approved project grants. The state receives federal funds to carry out these responsibilities. One of the primary administrative functions of the program staff is monitoring of the operational and maintenance procedures to be implemented after the energy audit is completed. The State Plan for the program describes three ways in which operational and maintenance procedures are to be monitored. One method is the submittal of written certification that procedures have been implemented. A second method is inspection of a sample of build- ings. The third monitoring process is the comparison of the energy consumption of a building before the energy audit was 43 conducted with the consumption after the operational and mainte- nance procedures recommended in the energy audit have been implemented. We reviewed the monitoring system and found con- cerns in the following areas. Submittal of Energy Consumption Sheets The State Plan for the Institutional Building Grant Program states \"... each participating building is required to submit reports of its fuel consumption by month for twelve months immedi- ately following completion of its energy audit.\" Institutions are also required to submit fuel consumption by month for the twelve months prior to the energy audit. These figures are then com- pared to determine the effect of the operational and maintenance changes. A sample of 20 institutions was drawn from the list of institu- tions having completed energy audits to determine if there were comparisons of energy consumption and if the operational and maintenance procedures reduced the amount of energy consumed. Eight of the twenty institutions had not sent post-audit energy consumption sheets to DNRC."}
{"id": "performanceaudit1981mont", "title": "Performance audit of selected energy grant programs", "year": 1981, "seq": 4, "text": "The Water Resources Division devotes part of two positions to administration of the grants. In addition, other division staff members provide assistance in evaluating proposals and for clerical services. This program is only peripherally related to energy. The primary focus has been water development, with recreation, range, and timber as lesser aspects. The relationship to energy comes from two sources. First, energy production or conservation has been a secondary benefit of some grants, such as solid waste management and gravity flow rather than pump fed sprinklers for irrigation. Also, the law authorizing the program is so broadly written that energy development projects could be funded, although none have been to date. Our review revealed five areas of concern related to the program. Monitoring and Follow-up Current DNRC monitoring of projects is limited to planning and construction plans of the program and does not extend beyond project completion. During our review, we noted that DNRC staff members perform limited analysis and evaluation of projects using application screening, on-site inspection, and quarterly and annual report review. 50 To evaluate the monitoring efforts, we selected a sample of grants, reviewed the appropriate files, and interviewed the pro- gram staff and the grantees. Our review indicates that the moni- toring efforts are inconsistent. Grant files show that some pro- jects are visited and submit progress reports, while others submit only an occasional report, and still others have virtually nothing in the files. Evidence in the program files and discussions with grantees indicate that few on-site inspections are performed. In fact, department personnel indicated that there is no policy on progress reports or on-site visits, only that the contract requires a final report. This lack of monitoring is not conducive to adequate oversight and does not provide for good program continuity. Therefore, DNRC needs to implement a system of periodic monitoring during construction."}
{"id": "performanceaudit1981mont", "title": "Performance audit of selected energy grant programs", "year": 1981, "seq": 5, "text": "Illustration 11 PROGRAM ADMINISTRATION All grants to date under the program have been for planning. HES has applied for additional funding from the Renewable Re- sources Development Grant Program to continue issuing planning grants and to begin giving grants to implement the plans. The Solid Waste Management Grant Program is administered by the Solid Waste Management Bureau. The bureau also administers the junk vehicle program and the state's efforts to assure compli- ance with federal and state solid waste disposal regulations. The program utilizes part of the time of seven HES employees. Time involved amounts to approximately one FTE. Solid waste management planning grants involve a two-level process. HES grants money to a local government or a group of local governments. A local government(s) in turn contracts with a consulting firm to do the actual planning. Throughout the plann- ing process, HES serves as technical assistant to the local govern- ment(s) and monitors the progress of the plan. In addition, HES must accept the final planning document before the grant terms are fulfilled. 56 Files show that the solid waste grants are being audited by HES. When the HES auditor goes to the counties once a year to audit the junk vehicle accounts, solid waste program grants are also reviewed. Seven of the grants have been audited and there were no significant problems with the grants according to the HES auditor. Both waste recovery and recycling projects have been recom- mended in the completed studies. One grantee has implemented the waste recovery system suggested by the consultants. The system consists of large containers into which area residents deposit their garbage. The containers are then periodically hauled to one central landfill. This system cuts down on the number of landfills in the region and ensures there is enough bulk garbage to recycle when a recycling system in the area is feasible."}
{"id": "performanceaudit1981mont", "title": "Performance audit of selected energy grant programs", "year": 1981, "seq": 6, "text": "Gillett: MONTANA LEGISLATIVE AUDITOR As the audit report points out, approximately 9,000 homes have been completed by the ten local agencies under contract with DCA for delivery of the weatherization program. Last years fuel bill assistance program served approximately 16,000 needy households in Montana. Under the weatherization program the Community Services Division monitors between 400 and 600 homes each fiscal year and visits each local agency once every quarter. In addition, DCA is under federal mandate to monitor ten percent of all households receiving fuel bill assistance. Weatherization Recommendation # l.A and # 1.13 At the present time, DCA does require a consistent and standardized documentation system. All documents which are necessary in order to track a home from the point of application through completion are identified in the State's yearly Grant Application. These requirements are then translated into a contractual obligation on the part of the local agency. Contractual compliance is then monitored on a quarterly basis by DCA staff. The first step in monitoring the Weatherization program is a review of documentation in individual client files. Are the required documents in each file? Are they properly filled out? All deficiencies are noted in writing and a copy of the state's findings are given to the local agency director and the pro- gram operator. Each local agency is then required to respond in writing to this report and is required to detail what corrective action the agency will take in regards to the noted deficiencies. Finally, DCA is also developing a manual for program operators. This manual will specify all required program documents and will provide infor- mation on how each document is to be properly completed. Recommendation # 2 While DOE regulations make no provision for quality control, it has always been the position of DCA that unless the program provided stress AM lOUAl OPPOIIIIINny fMPI oyfH Gillett 3/10/81 Page 2 quality of workmanship the end product (conservation of domestic energy) will be negligible."}
{"id": "performanceaudit1981mont", "title": "Performance audit of selected energy grant programs", "year": 1981, "seq": 7, "text": "The second phase of the agency monitoring (referred to above) is an on-site review at the home of the client. This phase of the monitoring process is the most time consuming and has the following objectives. First, it is a means of assuring that what materials were charged to that client have actually been installed. Second, it is a mechanism for DCA to assess the quality of workmanship. This second factor is of primary importance because no matter how well the Regulations are understood or how complete the documen- tation, if the work is not well done it affects the amount of savings a client receives. I also believe, that if the job is well done by the agency it helps to instill an incentive for the client to maintain the materials. Quality control will continue to be of primary importance in DCA's enforce- ment policy. Recommendation #3 Because DCA is committed to delivery of a quality product to each eligible client, \"quality\" will be quantified in a manual of operations. Once these standards are established and agency personnel have been trained as to what constitutes quality application of weatherization materials, DCA will modify the weatherization contract to specify that no agency will receive additional funds if they are not meeting these standards regardless of the number of homes being completed. Conversely, DCA will not allow any local agency to carry over funds when they are doing quality work but not meeting mutually agreed upon production schedules. Particularly when those funds could be expended in behalf of eligible clients elsewhere in the state. Recommendation #4 DCA has gone on record with DOE requesting that client education be made an eligible activity for DOE training and technical assistance funds. Client education was at one time an allowable activity, it is not an allowable activity under current DOE regulations."}
{"id": "mrac_ARES_Net_Control_Guildlines_1993-03-02", "title": "MRAC ARES Net Control Guildlines 1993-03-02", "year": 1993, "seq": 0, "text": "As much as possible, the NCS must keep the air clear so that emergency calls can be responded to without delay. ; In Military, Law Enforcement, and Fire/Emergency Medical Response communications,air time is treated as a very precious commodity, as lives are at stake. Even during routine operations, delayed communications, means delayed response and that delay could be the difference between life and death. In severe weather conditions we must treat our air time with that same respect. The Sullivan Weather Service Office depends on our ability to communicate information needed in their evaluation of serious weather conditions. Any delay slows down the whole process. As in the past ARES operations \u2014 like parades and other public service events \u2014 are great opportun- ities for training our members how to operate during severe weather nets. The NCS's for these public service events should maintain the same control of air time and net discipline, that they would during a severe weather operation. The ARES Monday night net is a very popular gathering of stations in Southern Wisconsin and beyond. There is a lot of information given out. A lot of stations check in just to find out how a weekend event went or when the next one begins. People check in for many different reasons. With the linking of several repeaters, many stations are checking in each week. Because the same repeaters are linked during a severe weather net, this is a great opportunity to train some of the same statics that check into both the severe weather_nets and the Monday net. The ARES Monday night net could be a great training ground for ARES members on proper net operation. The Net Control Stations for the Monday net should be selected on the basis of suitability for severe weather net operations."}
{"id": "mod17radiofrequencycommunicationsprinciples", "title": "Radio-Frequency Communications Principles", "year": 1998, "seq": 0, "text": "Written by, and with the advice of, senior technicians in these ratings, this series provides beginners with fundamental electrical and electronic concepts through self-study. The presentation of this series is not oriented to any specific rating structure, but is divided into modules containing related information organized into traditional paths of instruction. The series is designed to give small amounts of information that can be easily digested before advancing further into the more complex material. For a student just becoming acquainted with electricity or electronics, it is highly recommended that the modules be studied in their suggested sequence. While there is a listing of NEETS by module title, the following brief descriptions give a quick overview of how the individual modules flow together. Module 1, Introduction to Matter, Energy, and Direct Current, introduces the course with a short history of electricity and electronics and proceeds into the characteristics of matter, energy, and direct current (dc). It also describes some of the general safety precautions and first-aid procedures that should be common knowledge for a person working in the field of electricity. Related safety hints are located throughout the rest of the series, as well. Module 2, Introduction to Alternating Current and Transformers, is an introduction to alternating current (ac) and transformers, including basic ac theory and fundamentals of electromagnetism, inductance, capacitance, impedance, and transformers. Module 3, Introduction to Circuit Protection, Control, and Measurement, encompasses circuit breakers, fuses, and current limiters used in circuit protection, as well as the theory and use of meters as electrical measuring devices. Module 4, Introduction to Electrical Conductors, Wiring Techniques, and Schematic Reading, presents conductor usage, insulation used as wire covering, splicing, termination of wiring, soldering, and reading electrical wiring diagrams. Module 5, Introduction to Generators and Motors, is an introduction to generators and motors, and covers the uses of ac and dc generators and motors in the conversion of electrical and mechanical energies."}
{"id": "mod17radiofrequencycommunicationsprinciples", "title": "Radio-Frequency Communications Principles", "year": 1998, "seq": 1, "text": "Module 6, Introduction to Electronic Emission, Tubes, and Power Supplies, ties the first five modules together in an introduction to vacuum tubes and vacuum-tube power supplies. Module 7, Introduction to Solid-State Devices and Power Supplies, is similar to module 6, but it is in reference to solid-state devices. Module 8, Introduction to Amplifiers, covers amplifiers. Module 9, Introduction to Wave-Generation and Wave-Shaping Circuits, discusses wave generation and wave-shaping circuits. Module 10, Introduction to Wave Propagation, Transmission Lines, and Antennas, presents the characteristics of wave propagation, transmission lines, and antennas. v Module 11 , Microwave Principles, explains microwave oscillators, amplifiers, and waveguides. Module 12, Modulation Principles, discusses the principles of modulation. Module 13, Introduction to Number Systems and Logic Circuits, presents the fundamental concepts of number systems, Boolean algebra, and logic circuits, all of which pertain to digital computers. Module 14, Introduction to Microelectronics, covers microelectronics technology and miniature and microminiature circuit repair. Module 15, Principles of Synchros, Servos, and Gyros, provides the basic principles, operations, functions, and applications of synchro, servo, and gyro mechanisms. Module 16, Introduction to Test Equipment, is an introduction to some of the more commonly used test equipments and their applications. Module 17, Radio-Frequency Communications Principles, presents the fundamentals of a radio- frequency communications system. Module 18, Radar Principles, covers the fundamentals of a radar system. Module 19, The Technician's Handbook, is a handy reference of commonly used general information, such as electrical and electronic formulas, color coding, and naval supply system data. Module 20, Master Glossary, is the glossary of terms for the series. Module 21, Test Methods and Practices, describes basic test methods and practices. Module 22, Introduction to Digital Computers, is an introduction to digital computers. Module 23, Magnetic Recording, is an introduction to the use and maintenance of magnetic recorders and the concepts of recording on magnetic tape and disks. Module 24, Introduction to Fiber Optics, is an introduction to fiber optics."}
{"id": "mod17radiofrequencycommunicationsprinciples", "title": "Radio-Frequency Communications Principles", "year": 1998, "seq": 2, "text": "TELECOMMUNICATIONS refers to communications over a distance and includes any transmission, emission, or reception of signs, signals, writings, images, or sounds. Intelligence produced by visual means, oral means, wire, radio, or other electromagnetic systems are also included. Electrical, visual, and sound telecommunications are all used in the Navy. In this chapter we will talk only about electrical types of telecommunications. ELECTRICAL The types of electrical communications are radio and wire. Radio uses electromagnetic waves to transmit and receive intelligence. The waves are not guided by a physical path between sender and receiver. Wire uses conductors to carry these waves. Radio is the most important method the Navy has of communicating between widely separated forces. The transmission methods we will be discussing are radiotelegraph, radiotelephone, teletypewriter, and facsimile. Radiotelegraph Radiotelegraph transmissions are referred to as continuous wave (cw) telegraphy. Cw is a manual or automatic system of transmitting signals using a wave of radio-frequency (rf) energy. The radio operator separates a continuously transmitted wave into dots and dashes based on the Morse code. This is accomplished by opening and closing a telegraphic hand key. Radiotelegraphy was the first means of radio communications that had military and commercial importance. Radiotelegraph still is used as a means of communication to, from, and among widely separated units of the Navy. Relative slow speed of transmission and the requirement for experienced operators are the major disadvantages of radiotelegraph. The main advantage is reliability. A thinking person at both sending and receiving stations provides a capability of being understood not present in automated systems. Radiotelephone Radiotelephone is one of the most useful military communications methods. Because of its directness, convenience, and ease of operation, radiotelephone is used by ships, aircraft, and shore stations. It has many applications and is used for ship-to-shore, shore-to-ship, ship-to-ship, air-to-ship, ship-to-air, air-to-ground, and ground-to-air communications."}
{"id": "mod17radiofrequencycommunicationsprinciples", "title": "Radio-Frequency Communications Principles", "year": 1998, "seq": 3, "text": "The landline tty is used both by the military services and by commercial communication companies. The Navy uses radio teletypewriter (rtty) mainly for high-speed automatic communications across ocean areas. The tty unit is equipped with a keyboard similar to a typewriter. When the operator presses a key, a sequence of signals is transmitted. At receiving stations, the signals are fed into terminal equipment that translates the sequences of signals into letters, figures, and symbols and types the messages automatically. The rtty mode of transmission and reception is rapidly becoming more efficient and reliable for communications between ships and from ship-to-shore. Ships copy what is known as \"fleet broadcast\" messages on rtty. The speed at which message traffic is transmitted on rtty circuits depends on the equipment in use. Normal speed of operation is 100 words per minute, but it may be faster or slower. You may find high-speed equipment, capable of printing a line or even a page at a time, in some communications centers. The use of rtty has brought about a considerable savings in manpower. Facsimile Facsimile (fax) is the process used to transmit photographs, charts, and other graphic information electronically. The image to be transmitted is scanned by a photoelectric cell. Electrical changes in the cell output, corresponding to the light and dark areas being scanned, are transmitted to the receiver. At the receiver, the signal operates a recorder that reproduces the picture. The fax signals may be transmitted either by landline or radio. Facsimile transmissions suffer distortion from all of the common sources of interference experienced with ordinary radiotelegraph and radio teletypewriter. Certain characteristics of TIF transmission make it less susceptible to complete loss of intelligence. For example, picture quality will be downgraded by any noise bursts, since facsimile recording is a continuous recording of signals coming from a receiver."}
{"id": "mod17radiofrequencycommunicationsprinciples", "title": "Radio-Frequency Communications Principles", "year": 1998, "seq": 4, "text": "Secondary applications of the vlf range include worldwide transmission of standard frequency and time signals. Standard frequency and time signals with high accuracy over long distances have become increasingly important in many fields of science. It is essential for tracking space vehicles, worldwide clock synchronization and oscillator calibration, international comparisons of atomic frequency standards, radio navigational aids, astronomy, national standardizing laboratories, and communications systems. A vlf broadcast of standard time and frequency signals has more than adequate precision for the operation of synchronous cryptographic devices, decoding devices, and single-sideband transmissions. Low-Frequency Communications The LOW-FREQUENCY (If) band occupies only a very small part of the radio-frequency spectrum. This small band of frequencies has been used for communications since the advent of radio. Low-frequency transmitting installations are characterized by their large physical size and by their high construction and maintenance costs. Another disadvantage is low-frequency signal reception being seriously hampered by atmospheric noise, particularly at low geographical latitudes. Over the years, propagation factors peculiar to the low-frequency band have resulted in their continued use for radio communications. Low-frequency waves are not so seriously affected during periods of ionospheric disturbance when communications at the high frequencies are disrupted. Because of this, the Navy has a particular interest in the application of low frequencies at northern latitudes. The Navy's requirement to provide the best possible communications to the fleet requires operation on all frequency bands. Constant research is being done to improve existing capabilities and to use new systems and developments as they become operationally reliable. In the past, the fleet broadcast system provided ships at sea with low-frequency communications via cw telegraph transmissions. As technology advanced, the system was converted to single-channel radio teletypewriter transmission. Today If communications is used to provide eight channels of frequency- division multiplex rtty traffic on each transmission of the fleet multichannel broadcast system."}
{"id": "mod17radiofrequencycommunicationsprinciples", "title": "Radio-Frequency Communications Principles", "year": 1998, "seq": 5, "text": "If desired the distress frequencies may be monitored. When this is done the transmitter usually is kept in the standby position. Ashore, the mf receiver and transmitter equipment configuration is usually affiliated with search and rescue organizations, which are generally located near the coast. Only the upper and lower ends of the mf band have naval use because of the commercial broadcast band (AM) extending from 535 to 1,605 kilohertz. Frequencies in the lower portion of the mf band (300 to 500 kilohertz) are used primarily for ground-wave transmission for moderately long distances over 1-12 water and for moderate to short distances over land. Transmission in the upper mf band is generally limited to short-haul communications (400 miles or less). High-Frequency Communications The Navy began using HIGH FREQUENCIES for radio communications around World War I when only a few communications systems were operated on frequencies near 3 megahertz. When we look at the extensive present-day use of high frequencies for long-distance communications, the fact that those Navy systems were intended for very short-range communications of a few miles seems curious. The general belief at the time was that frequencies above 1.5 megahertz were useless for communications purposes. One of the prominent features of high-frequency, long-distance communications is the variable nature of the propagation medium. (You studied this in NEETS, Module 10, Introduction to Wave Propagation, Transmission Lines, and Antennas). Successful transmission of hf signals over a long distance is dependent upon refraction of radio waves by layers of the ionosphere. The height and density of these layers is formed mainly by ultraviolet radiation from the sun. They vary significantly with the time of day, season of the year, and the eleven-year cycle of sunspot activity. Because of these variations, you must generally use more than a single frequency, sometimes up to four or five, to maintain communications on a circuit."}
{"id": "mod17radiofrequencycommunicationsprinciples", "title": "Radio-Frequency Communications Principles", "year": 1998, "seq": 6, "text": "In spite of the difficulties we encounter with hf propagation, the economic and technical advantages of using high frequencies have led to rapid expansion of the use of the hf band. Because the number of users has increased, the hf spectrum is approaching saturation. The hf band is shared by many domestic and foreign users, and only portions scattered throughout the band are allocated to the military services. Like other agencies, Navy requirements have grown; the capacity of the Navy's assigned portion of the hf spectrum has become severely taxed. The use of single\u00ac sideband equipment and the application of independent sideband techniques have increased the capacity, but not enough to catch up with the demand. Some predict that satellite communications will eventually relieve congestion in the hf band and that, for some types of service, it will replace hf for long-distance communications. We will present more information to you concerning satellite communications in chapter 3. Even with new technology the hf spectrum most likely will continue to be in high demand for some time. Naval communications within the hf band can be grouped into four general types of services: point- to-point, ship-to-shore, ground-to-air, and fleet broadcast. All but the fleet broadcast are normally operated with two-way communications. Some of these services involve ships and aircraft that present special problems because of their physical characteristics and mobility. Generally, the less than optimum hf performance of this shipboard equipment is at least partially offset by powerful transmitters and sensitive receiving systems at the shore terminals. POINT-TO-POINT. \u2014Point-to-point systems are established to communicate over long-distance trunks or links between fixed terminals. A trunk is normally a message circuit between two points that are both switching centers or individual message distribution points."}
{"id": "mod17radiofrequencycommunicationsprinciples", "title": "Radio-Frequency Communications Principles", "year": 1998, "seq": 7, "text": "A link is a transmitter-receiver system connecting two locations. Generally, enough real estate is acquired at the terminals to permit the use of large, high-gain antennas aimed at opposite terminals of each link. This increases the effective radiated power and the sensitivity of the receiving system; it also reduces susceptibility of a circuit to interference. With the path length and direction fixed, other propagation factors are simplified and highly reliable communications can be achieved. 1-13 SHIP-TO-SHORE. \u2014This application of the hf band is more difficult than point-to-point since the ship is moving and constantly changing its position. In ship-to-shore the path length and direction are variable. Aboard ship, limited space and other restrictions prohibit installation of large, efficient hf antennas. Because of the mobility of ships, shipboard antennas are designed to be as nearly omnidirectional as possible. Our problems are not as severe at the shore terminal where we have sufficient space for efficient omnidirectional antennas or arrays designed for coverage of large areas of the earth. At shore stations, rotatable, high-gain antennas or fixed, point-to-point antennas are used. For example, a rhombic antenna ashore may work well for long-haul, ship-to-shore communications when the ship is within range of the antenna. Several frequencies are usually assigned for each circuit. Therefore, a frequency can be selected that best matches the propagation path conditions between the shore terminal and the ship. GROUND-TO-AIR. \u2014The use of hf radio for ground-to-air communications is similar to ship-to- shore. The only exception is an aircraft moves more rapidly than a ship. All major circuit improvements must be made at the ground station. For example, higher powered transmitters, lower noise receivers, and more efficient antennas must be used on the ground."}
{"id": "mod17radiofrequencycommunicationsprinciples", "title": "Radio-Frequency Communications Principles", "year": 1998, "seq": 8, "text": "FLEET BROADCASTS. \u2014As the name implies, this service involves broadcast area coverage from shore-based transmitters to ships at sea. Messages to be sent to ships are delivered by various means to the proper broadcast station. They are then broadcast for shipboard reception. To overcome propagation problems, naval communicators send the messages on several frequencies at once. This is known as frequency-diversity transmission. This type of transmission allows the ship to choose the best frequency for reception. Space-diversity with physically separated receive antennas also helps to overcome this problem. Very-High-Frequency and Above Communications Frequencies above 30 megahertz are not normally refracted by the atmosphere and ground-wave range is minimal. This normally limits our use of this frequency spectrum to line of sight. The exception to this is increased range through the use of tropospheric scatter techniques. Some communications using vhf and above frequencies use a technique called forward propagation by tropospheric scatter (fpts). This method will be discussed in more detail in chapter 5. Certain atmospheric and ionospheric conditions can also cause the normal line-of-sight range to be extended. Frequencies at the lower end of this band are capable of overcoming the shielding effects of hills and structures to some degree; but as the frequency is increased, the problem becomes more pronounced. Reception is notably free from atmospheric and man-made static. (The VERY-HIGH- FREQUENCY (vhf) and ULTRAHIGH-FREQUENCY (uhf) bands are known as line-of-sight transmission bands.) Because this is line-of-sight communications, the transmitting antenna is in a direct line with the receiving antenna and not over the horizon. The line-of-sight characteristic makes the vhf band ideal for amphibious operations (beach landing from sea craft) and the uhf well suited for tactical voice transmissions (maneuvering of ships traveling together)."}
{"id": "mod17radiofrequencycommunicationsprinciples", "title": "Radio-Frequency Communications Principles", "year": 1998, "seq": 9, "text": "SEMIDUPLEX. \u2014The semiduplex (sdx) uses an arrangement of equipment where one terminal is simplex configured and the other uses two channels or frequencies in full duplex. A clarifying example is 1-15 a ship in a simplex mode terminated full duplex with a shore station. The ship may send or receive but not do both at the same time. FULL DUPLEX. \u2014The full-duplex (fdx) mode is a method of operation in which telecommunications between stations takes place simultaneously in both directions using two separate frequencies. In other words, a ship may send and receive different messages at the same time. The term \"full duplex\" is synonymous with \"duplex.\" BROADCAST. \u2014Broadcast (be) is the type of operation in which one station transmits information on one or more channels directed to more than one station and/or unit. The broadcast system has no provision for receipt or reply; however, special arrangements may require the receiving station to reply or receipt for the message at a later time by other means. Broadcasts are the primary means of delivering messages to the fleet. Since Navy units copying broadcasts are not required to receipt for messages received, they can maintain radio silence while still receiving essential messages. Message traffic is normally sent to the fleet by three methods: broadcast, intercept, and receipt. The first two are \"do not answer\" methods; the third, as its name implies, requires a receipt from the addressee (addee) for each message. Broadcast and intercept methods allow the fleet to preserve radio silence, which is a great advantage from the standpoint of security. By the intercept method, a shore radio station transmits messages to another shore station that repeats them back. Ships intercept and copy all of this message traffic. Broadcast is preferable to intercept chiefly because it is faster. It is the method by which nearly all fleet traffic is handled."}
{"id": "montana1982employmen4thrich", "title": "Montana employment and labor force", "year": 1982, "seq": 0, "text": "On the bright side, Richland County still has the best success ratio of wildcat drilling with 50 percent positive results. In 1982 a westward shift of activity occurred in oil and gas development. The Sweetgrass Arch and adjacent Sweetgrass Hills over- took the Williston Basin in the total number of wells drilled. Seismic surveying and land leasing reached an all time peak in the western Montana Overthrust Belt. \"Copper is king\" is a statement that has for many years floated around Butte, but now the saying might be changed to \"copper is a culprit\". The massive layoffs by the copper company will end with the last 700 employees losing their jobs by June. In June, 1983, a \"suspension\" will stop all remaining operations of the mining and processing of copper ore from the Berkeley Pit, concentrator and general office in Butte. Management will reopen their facilities when the price of copper makes mining profitable. A weak agricultural economy has persisted for three years. The farmers outlook for the next year does not appear good because of the state's and nation's record crops in 1982 and an expected weak over- seas market. The government has added another agricultural program called Payment In Kind (PIK). The farmer who wishes to set aside ad- ditional acreage will be paid with grain that is in government storage. The PIK program is aimed at reducing the surplus grain stock. The Payment In Kind program is a short-time solution to aid agriculture. The depressed agriculture status has affected manufacturers of farm equipment perhaps more than other manufacturing. Several bankruptcies were filed and large layoffs were the result. Agriculture equipment manufacturing in Montana has, for the most part, come into existence in just the past three years. GREAT FALLS SMSA In 1982, two of the three months that had total building permits valued over one million dollars were in the fourth quarter."}
{"id": "montana1982employmen4thrich", "title": "Montana employment and labor force", "year": 1982, "seq": 1, "text": "Other projects included the building of a new warehouse office complex for a drilling company in Sidney, and some light remodeling of local business establishments. The months of November and December had very little construction activity as winter weather had curtailed most jobs. Several contrac- tors indicated that they are finding themselves with no anticipated jobs for the first time in 10-20 years. The number of active oil drilling rigs working in Montana (including Williston Basin) has declined by 70% compared to 86 reported during the same period one year ago. This reduction in drilling ac- tivity continues to boost the unemployment rate in the LMA. Callbacks by various drilling companies were temporary, primarily for them to maintain their leases. There was some work for various seismic crews, however it was sporadic due to weather conditions. Several Canadian drilling companies have moved their rigs to Canada due to more favorable programs adopted by the provincial governments. 9 The sugar beet harvest got off to a slow start due to bad weather conditions. By the third week of October the harvest ranged from 70-75% and by mid-November was about 98% finished. The delay in the harvest- ing of the beets also affected the manufacturing of the sugar, however it picked up and should continue into February. In the retail/wholesale industry merchants were being cautious about hiring any new employees for the holiday season until they deter- mined what the business trends were going to be like. The number of business closures continue to be plagued by the economy in this area as a clothing store, a saddlery and a realty of- fice closed their doors. Hotels and motels are experiencing about 30-40% fewer occupancies compared to previous years. Although there were some brightners in the jobless picture for the months of July and August the area job situation for the last three months remains bleak as there were seven times the number of people out of jobs in the six-county area this year than last."}
{"id": "montana1982employmen4thrich", "title": "Montana employment and labor force", "year": 1982, "seq": 2, "text": "Negotiations between the beet growers and a sugar company on the price for the 1983 crop have stalled. If a settlement is not reached the growers in the area probably won't plant any beets this year. Coal deals are being explored by the Crow Indian tribe. They are looking into the development of a coal fired generating plant and perhaps a synthetic fuels project. Currently, however, adequate sup- plies of oil and natural gas have made these alternative energy projects less attractive. In 1982 production of coal in Montana did not reach projected levels and some mines in the area have laid off their work force. HAVRE IMA A tractor manufacturing firm out of Havre is recalling some of its administrative personnel but has no plans for starting up production for a few months. The company is in the process of bidding on an Army Corps of Engineers job. 10 With only 9 employees working, a drilling rig manufacturing plant decided to close its doors. Previously the plant had employed 40 people. Plans are to reopen in a couple of years. The Havre LMA reports a few business closures during the fourth quarter. They are: a Chinook clothing store, and a Havre bed and bath store, auto dealer, and department store. Construction projects in Havre include two grain loading facilities. Also a remodeling project is underway at the College. Other construction projects in the Havre area are the Junior High School building and a new clinic. Most new businesses in the area are trade related businesses. They include: a music and sound store, jewelry store, Chinese restaurant, wig shop and a art gallery. Other new businesses includes two tax con- sulting businesses. . .One in Rudyard and one in Chinook and one in a new laundry center in Chinook. A new doctor has opened a practice in Havre."}
{"id": "montana1982employmen4thrich", "title": "Montana employment and labor force", "year": 1982, "seq": 3, "text": "Most of this activity came from multifamily housing and commer- cial projects. The residential activity was largely limited to remodels, and do-it-yourselfers' projects. Winter activity resorts started hiring during the quarter with most looking for a good year.... if the weather cooperates. The Troy silver-copper mine continues to show a profit and gives employement to 340 area residents. .. .putting $9.2 million annually into the area economy from payroll alone. If interest rates stay down, spring may bring new life to the area's woods products and associated industries. LEWISTOWN LMA Most components of the Lewistown area economy slowed during the fourth quarter. The major portion of this decrease in activity was the normal seasonal slowdown. Agriculture slowed considerably as area farmers and ranchers finished up the harvest and other summer activities. Most ag activity 13 this quarter was in winter crop seeding and preparation for winter cat- tle feeding. Area manufacturers were affected by the state and national economic slump. Two lumber mills closed completely until their inventories are decreased. About 45 workers have been idled by the temporary shutdowns. On the plus side, operations were nearly back to normal at the drywall plant, and an aircraft manufacturer is considering locating a plant in Lewistown. Construction activity has generally slowed due to weather conditions. Most housing, street repair, and sewer projects have halted until better weather arrives. The inside remodeling of a Lewistown motel is continuing with a projected completion date of April/May 1983. Christmas sales brought a much needed boost to area retailers. For many retailers this Christmas was a make or break situation. The next few months will tell if the Christmas sales volume was enough. Holiday sales couldn't have helped a Lewistown automobile dealer that closed permanently. Even with the slump in retailing several new businesses opened during the quarter."}
{"id": "montana1982employmen4thrich", "title": "Montana employment and labor force", "year": 1982, "seq": 4, "text": "A few stores closed their doors due to lack of business. Christmas buying was about the same as last year, but not enough to make up for lack of sales over the rest of the year. 14 MISSOULA LMA As the prime interest rate continues to drop, real estate sales started an upward swing and the area's estimated September unemployment rate made a modest decrease of 0.6 percent from August's 10.2%. This trend provided some optimism that maybe the soft economy in the LMA area may soon show signs of steady recovery. Just as rapid as the residential real estate sales increased in September, they began to start a dramatic drop downward in October. Sales remained low for the rest of the report period, with residential sales down by $4 million this year to date (October) and $51.6 million compared to 1981 sales (October). Although prognosis of the economy may indicate that nationally we are bottoming out of the recession, the known fact locally is the Mis- soula area's economy is still in a deep slump. The Missoula LMA includes Missoula, Mineral, Sanders and Ravalli counties. In this area the estimated unemployment rates for the months of October, November and December continued to climb. Traditionally unemployment rises this time of year and stays relatively high throughout the winter because of the type of industries that are af- fected such as construction, logging and tourism. Presently, three of the four counties in the LMA are represented in Montana's 6 counties that has the highest unemployment rates. They are: Mineral, Ravalli and Sanders counties. Orders for lumber products are still below the trend for the rest of the lumber industry in the northwest, and projections are expected to remain \"sub-par\" through 1983. Other contributing factors also help spur on the problems of high unemployment as railroad officials announced that they will trim their work force another 4% in the coming months."}
{"id": "microcomputersim00reid", "title": "Microcomputer simulation of a Fourier approach to ultrasonic wave propagation.", "year": 1992, "seq": 0, "text": "The Guyomar/Powers approach differed by the use of linear systems theory. Linear systems theory revealed the importance of the total impulse response and its equivalence to the Green's function. Furthermore, the spatial impulse response functions are found in the spatial transform (Fourier) domain. Working in the transform domain allowed propagation of the wave to be viewed as a time-varying spatial filter applied to the spatial spectrum of the input excitation. The advantage of this method is that it provides the diffracted field from an insonifying wave with arbitrary temporal and spatial dependence in a computationally efficient form. By use of the Fourier transform, an amenable computer implementation of this technique using FFT routines is possible. The desired benefit of a fast, time-efficient computer implementation to calculate the acoustic potential or pressure is to aid in ultrasonic transducer design for medical, acoustic imaging, and mine warfare applications. With a knowledge of wave diffraction phenomenon a diffracted wave reflected from an unknown object can be used to provide information about the object. This type of system must be portable as well as time-efficient, which is very achievable given the trends in computer technology. Computers have become faster and have increased memory capacity while their size has decreased. Other benefits are derived from the use of the matrix manipulation program, MATLAB, and the ability to expand this implementation to cases involving lossy media. Because MATLAB is readily available on the commercial market, it requires no special equipment for computer implementation. Previous computer implementations have been Fortran coded [Ref. 11] to be run on mainframes and microcomputers. The specific goal of the microcomputer implementation by Merrill [Ref. 11] was a run time under 30 minutes; this goal was achieved. Merrill first attempted to use MATLAB, but failed due to limitations on computer memory and MATLAB array size."}
{"id": "microcomputersim00reid", "title": "Microcomputer simulation of a Fourier approach to ultrasonic wave propagation.", "year": 1992, "seq": 1, "text": "AC_FIL generated the time-varying filters, the most time consuming process, while AC_PROP accomplished the remaining computations making use of MATLAB's \"fft2\" function. Details of both modules as well as the source code have been included in the Appendices for the interested reader. Several examples were delineated in the body of this thesis. First, the Table and 45 the Circle were presented as the program verification excitations; the results conformed to those found in the literature. Then two newer excitation functions, the Gaussian and the Bessel, were presented. More examples of the Gaussian and the Bessel have been included in the Appendices. The underlying result was an accurate and efficient computer implementation of the linear systems approach to ultrasonic wave propagation. The efficiency was derived from the modularization of the program so that consecutive runs could be made without recomputing the most time consuming portion, the filters. Also, the use of MATLAB's \"fft2\" function bypassed tedious and time-inefficient convolution integrals. Finally, both modules made use of symmetry by computing only one quadrant of data which was then manipulated into the remaining quadrants. An advantage to using MATLAB was the ease of expansion that could be accomplished with the program. The work of this thesis concentrated on a source with rigidly baffled boundary conditions and a lossless media. Cases that include free space and resiliently baffled boundary conditions as well as lossy media, linear and quadratic lossy media, could be incorporated. A few facts worth noting here are that the free space and resilient baffle boundary conditions can be expressed in terms of the rigid baffle case [Ref. 8] and that the lossy media and lossless media transfer functions are interdependent [Ref. 10]. Furthermore, new excitation functions such as a phased array or a focused source could also be incorporated. Improvements are needed in the area of analysis such as the Gaussian versus Bessel propagation comparison and extending the 46 technique to sources that are not time and space separable such as new non- diffracting waves [Ref. 14]. 47 APPENDIX A."}
{"id": "minimumrequireme00alya", "title": "Minimum requirements for municipal solid waste landfill in the state of Kuwait", "year": 1999, "seq": 0, "text": "The disposal of wastes in Kuwait frequently results in environmental degradation even with spending that amount of money. A logical approach to reduce such waste disposal problems is to establish a minimum requirement for landfill siting and design methods (Boll et at. 1995). As a result, cost will be reduced and the environment and hunuin health will be protected. For a small country like Kuwait, land value is precious for both the government and the conserve money, Kuwait should esU^lish minimum guidelines that regulate wasle management and increase the level of awareness for the iuture dangers of such inadequate practices in waste disposal. Problem Statement Municipal solid waste (MSW) disposal practice in the state of Kuwait creates a great threat to the country's environment and human health. The current pcacdce of disposal is dumping waste into a group of sand quarries, on average depth of S-l 8 meters, and then covering them with sand. Municipal solid waste disposal sites receive all sons of waste materials like sewage wasle, chemical waste, and debris. The different wastes are commingled, with rarely a sorting procedure or a compaction operation. Also, most of the wastes are exposed to the high lempeialure of Kuwait and placed in steep slopes. The cuneni disposal sites are operated by companies lacking any sanitary engineering experience in terms of designing, opeialing, or monitoring environmentally safe landfills. Municipal Solid Wasle Landlills (MSWLFs) that ensure the protection of human health and the environment. MSWLF units In Kuwait act as dumping grounds rather than safe disposal sites. These units include non of the components thsi provide basic environmental protection, such as a base liner, final cover system, gas collection system, and leachate collection system (if needed). From the curreui practice, comaminauon of the ground- water table is possible due to the nearby location of the water table beneath the bollom of waste disposal sites."}
{"id": "minimumrequireme00alya", "title": "Minimum requirements for municipal solid waste landfill in the state of Kuwait", "year": 1999, "seq": 1, "text": "Because Kuwait has an arid climate, a relatively small amount of leachate will be developed in landfill sites. Neverthclea.s. an assumed increase of the amount of leachate will develope due to the improper disposal of liquid sewage and chemical wastes with municipal wastes. The lack of proper MSW guidelines that ensure the protection of the environment and human health Is a major problem for the Kuwait Municipality, the only government agency that deals with MSW disposal practices. The need for such guidelines that follow proper disposal practice is a must for the country's environment. These guidelines will enable Kuwait Municipality to implement safe disposal methods for new landfills and use the proper closure systems for the old sites. The proposed research will not only control the waste piaclice, but also it will address the applicability of natural resources, such as Kuwait's impermeable calcareous layer of sand (Gatch), as liners and covers. Furthermore, the research will provide new specific guidelines that will apply to countries with arid climates. Finally, there is a great demand to protect the environment and human health. Therefore, a comprehensive study that defines the problem, develops practical solutions, and drafts a government document is very essential to Kuwait. Research Purpose The principal elective of this research is to help the Kuwait Municipality to build safe MSW disposal sites that protect the environment and human health. The outcome of the research will be based on field and lab tests that will be performed to achieve this goal. The research will shed light upon the applicability of using high-density polyethylene (HOPE) liners in Kuwait and calcareous saitd (gatch) as a natural liner and cover. Furthermore, the research will study the effects of improper dumping practices on the environment, soil, and groundwater analytically by using contaminant transport computer programs."}
{"id": "minimumrequireme00alya", "title": "Minimum requirements for municipal solid waste landfill in the state of Kuwait", "year": 1999, "seq": 2, "text": "The Kuwait Municipality Counsel, which controls all the funding to solid waste projects, lacks the ability to fund and approve a safe municipal solid waste landfill due to the absence of a decision-based model which illustrates the following: 1. The problem, prescni and fonire Impacts on human life and the environment, and the importance for future safe disposal solutions. 2. A well-drafted regulation that suits Kuwait's environment and complies with the latest technology of MSW practices in the developed countries. 3. A complete description for economic saving with environmentally sound integrated waste systems; operational cost effecdve plans for future invesunent and profit from the industry. Politics and economics are the major Issues that customarily play a role in ^fting from sub-standard practice to a safe technology. The Department of Environmental Affairs in Kuwait Municipality is acting positively to diiect the Kuwait Municipality Council to consider the options available for municipal waste disposal practice. Public attitudes toward the problem of wa.stc disposal practices are still not very powerful compared to other developed countries. Sharmaand SaDgeeUi(l994) stated that the increasing public awareness of environmental issues has resulted in various federal and slate environmental regulations in the United Stales of America. Lack of general knowledge about the danger that faces the public and the environment from recent waste disposal practices is the mode for the Kuwaiti people. Public outcry usually comes from individual groups in certain locations that have been affected by the disposal process. For example, people reacted positively to stop the disposal in the Jalecb Al-Shuyoukh site because of foul odors and a nest of insects and animals that accompanied the unsanitary method from the increase in volume of waste arriving or the site during the Iraqi occupation and the post-liberation period. Also, in 1992 public outcry increased at the Al- that caused disgusting odors, gas emissions, and spontaneous firas."}
{"id": "minimumrequireme00alya", "title": "Minimum requirements for municipal solid waste landfill in the state of Kuwait", "year": 1999, "seq": 3, "text": "The sites receive all kinds of wastes such as food wastes, oii produ- debris, agricultural wastes, chemical materials, and sewage wastes. Although the sites have some employees from the contracted company or from Kuwait Municipality, th is DO obvious control on the sites. Dumping can be performed as easily os throwin tissue from your car in most locations, illegal night dumping is a usual practice for wi carriers if officials did not accept what you wanted to dump during daytime. Lack security and responsibility are obvious at these sites. Keisuke (1996) stated that landftlling processes should be selected in a fashion which maximize the accotnmodat capacity of a landfi)). select the method of cooslnictioo io accordance with the volume waste to be curried into the landfill site, and to minimize the harmful effirots on surrounding environment after or before closure. Neither of the previous objectives londftll management bos been implemenicti in Kuwait's waste disposal sites. The si have many operation and management problems, which can be described briefly by following points: 1 . All the sites were not designed for dumping wastes 2. No permit is granted to the private operator at any lime. As a resuil operator has no obligation in protecting the environmeoi 3. Absence of clear and illustrative task plans 4, ImproperdisposaJ strategies 3. Lack of order and security 7. Lack of sufficiem equipment and tools The process of waste disposal in those sites is mainly to dump the waste as close twice. Usually compaction is not performed. After that, the Rubber-Tired Front End Loader pushes the waste to the quarry until the ground level is reached. At the end of day. the waste Is coveted with a thin layer of sand. Many paitsof the waste pile, especially the sides, are not covered periodically due to the steep slopes. This procedure is causing more bad odors, and self waste combustion due to high temperature and humidity in the country."}
{"id": "minimumrequireme00alya", "title": "Minimum requirements for municipal solid waste landfill in the state of Kuwait", "year": 1999, "seq": 4, "text": "Items II, 13. and 14 mandate the contractor to hire une qualified employee as a supervisor that can manage the site. The items also describe the financial responsibilities of the contractor based on the bid. 6. Item 10 demands that every site should have steel fences covered by plastic with specified height and distances. Clearly, the IS Items that address site operation in the N 1/96 bid lack to the establishment of appropriate operation criteria for sanitary landfills. Many of the tools missing in the contmcl, which are widely mandated by different regulations all over the I. Operation plan ihal conraina, ol minimuin, detailed inslructioDS for the daily operation of the landfill, contingency operations for waste handling In case of emergency, method and sequence of filing waste, and operation of gas, leachate, and stormwater controls. 2. Records of weighing incoming waste. 3. Detailed handling of hazardous wastes if identified by random waste 4. Placement of waste methods that specify the required thickness before and after compacdon and assure slope stability requirements. 5. Daily and intermediale cover plana. 6. Erosion control measures, dust control methods, and Ere protection and Ere-Eghting capabilities. 7. Inspecdon plans including frequency, personnel, and training prograiru for the facility employees. The operator is obliged waste sites and the current waste inch diameter plastic pipes wi Egures. as follows: 1 and operate gas vendng systems for the old stated in Item 1 6. The system consists of 6 to 8 nch thickness. Lengths of these pipes range 1. Place perforated plastic pipes vertically on the last layer of waste and pouring a light cement mix to hold it. The pipes sha 4, The distance between the pipes shall be no more than 100 meters. N 1/96 bid from the landfill engineering prospective is lacking many of the different systems of MSW landfill design that cause a public nuisance or create a potential hazard to public health, welfare or the environment."}
{"id": "minimumrequireme00alya", "title": "Minimum requirements for municipal solid waste landfill in the state of Kuwait", "year": 1999, "seq": 5, "text": "The soil being tested must have sufficient cohesion to stand open during excavation of borehole and have a uniform permeability end pore space distribution (ASTM Z2d09Z). lO-cm (4-inch) inside diameter ffD) casing has been used in virtually all of the known tests. To avoid violating boundary conditions assumed in the equations, the thickness of the unit tested must be 61-cm (24-ioches) or 81.3-cm |32-inches) if the barrier is not underlain by dminoge blanket or by a material far less permeable than the unit tested (ASTM Z2509Z). Also, the minimum casing embedment below ground surface must be 2S.4 cm (lO-incbes) to prevent uplift and minimize hydraulic fracturing (Boutwell 1 992). Furthermore, the minimum horizontal distances between tests or lesu to free surface are 3-m (120-inches). A typical test program consists of five TSB's and a temperature effect gauge (TEG). The TEG is used as a control device to determine changes in head caused by variations in temperature and barometric pressure (Benson et al. 1997). TEG is a TSB that has a sealed bottom to prevent flow and is filled with digital thermometer for tracking temperature changes in the infiltration water. The signiflcance of TSB is the fact that it can measure hydraulic conductivity in vertical and horizontal direction. Most of tire field permeability tests do not have this advantage. Also, TSB is easy to install and can be used at great depths and on slopes (Danial 1 989). ADparatua and Field Procedure TSB field procedure is taken from long-established US Bureau of Reclamation methods, flush bottom borehole test (E-18) and borehole packer test (E-19) (Boutwell 1992). American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM) has recently approved a standard method for field measurement of hydraulic conductivity limits of porous materials using TSB (ASTM Z2509Z). This method is utilized for compacted fills or natural deposits, above or below the water Uible. that has a mean hydraulic conductivity less than or equal to IxlO\u2019\u2019 cm/sec."}
{"id": "minimumrequireme00alya", "title": "Minimum requirements for municipal solid waste landfill in the state of Kuwait", "year": 1999, "seq": 6, "text": "Schematic Diagr data on the computer screen. During the test, constant pressures for the cell pressure (o, } and bock pressure (pi) were supplied frora rwo independent pressure supply sources while an overhead water tank, located at 3 m high, was used to supply the pressure, pj. The water tank was also used for Initial satuniljon of the specimen. A volume transducer was connected to the pi line to measure the amount of water passing through the specimen. The specimens for testing were saturated prior to testing and, 03 was held higher than the net pressure causing a flow of the water through the specimen by at least 20 KFa during saturation as well as testing. Preparation of lest specimen The program of permeability deteimination in the laboratory was carried out on specimens having a nominal dimension of 71-mm in diameter and ISO-mm in height (Figure 6-8), using a backpressure, p]. All specimens were aniricially prepared at the optimum moisture content at their corresponding maximum dry densities given in Table 6-4. The preparation method involved lamping soils in five equal layers in a standard laboratory cylindrical mold of the same nominal dimension as the specimen. The specimen preparation as well as the testing procedure followed ASTM DS084. The soil was air-dried and was then mixed as uniformly as possible. The quantity required for one layer was weighed, mixed evenjy with an appropriate quantity of water, and then poured into the cylindrical mold. The soil was compressed using a meiai tamper until the layer thickness, marked on the inner wall, was attained. The upper side of the tube containing the specimen was leveled off, once the whole quandey had been introduced. The specimen was then extruded from the mold and measured for true dimensions and placed on the pedestal base of the triaxial cell. The specimen ends were covered with the water-saturated filter blocks (porous stones), and a Figure 6-8 Trianiel Semple of South Sum Soil ptessuie pad placed on the top of upper porous stones."}
{"id": "minimumrequireme00alya", "title": "Minimum requirements for municipal solid waste landfill in the state of Kuwait", "year": 1999, "seq": 7, "text": "FIELD TESTS Site Descriplion Field tests were conducted ol two sites, Shuwaik IndusirioJ Area and Shuaiba Industrial Area (Figure 7-1). The Shuwaik site was designated by the Kuwait Municipality (KM) to perform a Two-Stage Borehole Tests (TSB) and a temperature monitoring program on constructed galch pads. On the other band, the Shuaiba site was investigated after receiving permission of the Shuaiba Area Authority (SAA) to conduct a series of TSB tests on the Inert Waste Cell located at the Solid Waste Treatment and Reception Station (SWTRS). The SWTRS is sUll not in operation due to management problems, although SWTRS facilities were constructed and it was ready to receive waste in 1996. Shuwaik Site The Shuwaik Industrial Area (Site 1) is located in the center of Kuwait City, within Kuwait suburbs, along the major Fourth Ring Road that extends from east to west. The area is bounded on the north by the Shuwaik port, on the south by the Al-Ray area. Shuwaik is famous for its automotive repair and supply industry that is associated with area units and administrative facilities that occupy parts of the Shuwaik area. Moreover. vaier table in the area ranges between 4 to 5 1 surface. Tbe site for the testing program was located in the soccer field of the Kuwait Municipality (KM) storage complex area, which is located at the south sector of the and used equipment. The site is fenced and has one main entrance gate controlled by The soccer field was about 100x100 meters and can be described as a flat area that consists of smooth windblown dune sand with sparse vegetation. KM ofncials designated an area of 40x40 meters for the construction of the gatch pads. The selected area was located at the south pan of the soccer field, and was surrounded by a paved road The Shuaiba Industrial Area (SIA), (Site 2). is located about 50 kilometers south of Kuwait City while the SWTRS is located in ihe northern pan of the SIA."}
{"id": "minimumrequireme00alya", "title": "Minimum requirements for municipal solid waste landfill in the state of Kuwait", "year": 1999, "seq": 8, "text": "Apparently the cracks were not deep enough to affect the permeability of the soil. Also, cracks over tune, seem to seal when desiccation cycles are involved. Overall gatch .its that lay at great depths may be considered os a sufficieni barrier if protected environmental distraction by a drainage layer or similar systems. CHAPTER 8 POLLUTE PROGRAM Concepl and Featufcs PolIuuv6 is a computer program that provides a solution to the one<dimen5ionaJ dispersioR'adveclion equation for a layered deposit of Anite or inAnile extent. The advection'dispersion equations are sImpliAed by introducing the Laplace ironsform. The program faJls Into a semi-analytic class of models known os Finite Layer Models that are applicable to idealizing hydrostradgraphy. horizontally layered with the soil properties being the same at any horizontal location within the layer (Rowe el al. 1995). The main diAerence between anaiytical solutions and Anile layer techniques is the fact that the Laplace transfonn in the Anile layer Is inverted numerically rather than analytically, which allows examination of more realistic cases (Rowe 1 990). By using of finite layer solutions in Polluiev6. contaminant concentrations and the total mass Aux into barriers can be accurately calculated al specified limes and depths. Also, the accuracy of the solution does not depend on the number of layers into which the deposit is subdivided in contrast to numerical solutions, and the concentration of contaminant can be determined instantly al a speciAc lime without prior determination of die concentradon al the preceding lime. Ihe pit^ram has been used internationally for about ten years, and is currenUy being used in Australia, Germany, Great Britain, New Zealand, United Slates of America, and in Canada where the program was used in the design of numerous landfills. For a detailed accoiml of Pollulev6 program applications and workability, refer to the Pollute user guide by Rowe el al. <1994)."}
{"id": "minimumrequireme00alya", "title": "Minimum requirements for municipal solid waste landfill in the state of Kuwait", "year": 1999, "seq": 9, "text": "The Department of Environmental Affaires (DEA)al KM formed a team of five members headed by the GUF member. The team made several field visits os existing landfills and conducted borehole tests on selected proposed landfill sites. Furthermore, the team contacted government authorities and research institutions to collect specific data such as topography, water table levels, soil types, location of water wells, and waste types and quantities etc. that were required to conduct the study. The purpose of conducting this project was to select future solid waste landfill sites, to draft a design manual for solid waste landfill faculties, to prepare terms of reference, and then possibly lender the project. The site selection study consisted of evaluating the proposed sites in two stages. The first siege (Stage I) was a Yes or No case for each site, and the second stage (Stage 11) was conducted by using the total weight selection method. Initially, nine proposed landfill locations were Idenlifled In different locations of Kuwait; two in the north, three in the center, and four in the south. According to the Kuwait Municipality (1998). the project should develop a total of three landfills that would be constructed in two phases. The fim phase (Phase I) would consist of two service zones with two landfills: one in centra] Kuwait and another one in the southern area. The second phase (Phase H) would consist of three service zones and include the addition of another landfill sle located in the northern area of Kuwait. The Phase II new landfill would propose to receive waste oAer at least five years of esiobllshing Phase (I). Zone selections for the two phases were determined based on the Kuwait Master Plan (1997). and considering the following factors (Kuwait Municipality 1998): 1 . Distribution of solid waste production based on population figures 2. Distance, time and convenience for collecting wastes 3."}
{"id": "montereynews1983unse_2", "title": "Monterey news", "year": 1983, "seq": 0, "text": "The resurrection accounts in each of the gospels will be studied, as well as I Corinthians 1:15-58. Some of the questions and issues being dealt with are: What are the quali- ties of the resurrected Christ? What are the implications of Christ\u2019s resurrection for our lives here and now? What are the implications of Christ\u2019s resurrection for the future of our lives? What suggestions do we have regarding the \u201cshape of the life to come\u201d as regards our body-soul nature? Why is the resurrection one of the principal centers around which Chris- tian belief is formed? Does the resurrection have implications that help us shape\u2014not only a belief about the present and future of persons\u2014but also the world? As the study proceeds other questions will arise and will be addressed. Anyone in the community who desires is invited to come to any or all of these Thursday evening classes. NEW INITIATIVES IN CHURCH DEVELOPMENT \u201cNew Initiatives in Church Development\u201d is the name given to the campaign to raise funds throughout the United Church of Christ for the establishment of new churches and for the revitalization of existing churches. The Monterey Church is engaged in advancing this program during the spring season, The diaconate has taken especial responsi- bility to help develop this program in Monterey. Jean Stowell is helping coordinate the educational phase of the program. In time each person in the church will be asked to consider the support he/she will give to help the church deepen its ministry to people through this process. \u2018USED CLOTHING COLLECTION | It\u2019s time for the annual used clothing collection. Since 1946, when 17 Protestant denominations banded to- gether to meet needs in the aftermath of World War II, Church World Services has been offering compassionate as- sistance to people caught in disasters and other events of criti- cal need."}
{"id": "montereynews1983unse_2", "title": "Monterey news", "year": 1983, "seq": 1, "text": "The actual means of growth is often resisted. We honor the growing up process, yet we frequently try to avoid the experiences through which growth comes. The emergence of personhood is surrounded with puzzling paradoxes. Alternating rhythms flow through all of nature; night and day, summer and winter, high tide and low tide, seedtime and harvest\u2014and the list has barely begun. It should not surprise us, then, that the development of personality also has its rhythms. \u2014 There is a rhythm between agony and joy that is an integral part of growth. Can anyone have lived long enough without encountering it? Do not there come those times of early prom- ise and movement when it appears that success and happiness are certain? Yet often, seemingly without rhyme or reason things start to go wrong, and a period of readjustment ensues. What sort of perversity is built into the life process that returns again and again to threaten the forward movement? Here, for instance, is a marriage. Everyone is impressed with what a well-matched couple they are. In fact, they even think so themselves. Yet in two or three years things happen that threaten their happiness. Why now do their personalities start to rub on one another? Is there a perversity built into the scheme of things that seems determined to crush hope and joy? Certainly it dppears that way when the rough places appear. Would not all of us sidestep these rocky places if we could? Passing through enough of these times we begin to see a pattern emerging. The agonies of life force us into periods of change. We simply are not permitted to stay as we are. There is no way to stay fixed, set in our ways, no matter how hard we try. Life seems determined to throw us off balance."}
{"id": "montereynews1983unse_2", "title": "Monterey news", "year": 1983, "seq": 2, "text": "During the month of March the second grade has been working on Easter projects\u2014fluffy bunny baskets and hand- painted Easter eggs for the classroom egg tree. They com- pleted the unit on rocks and water, and on March 31 they en~ joyed hot cross buns which they frosted themselves. The fourth grade traveled to Gould Farm on March 25 to see maple syrup being made. Cory Loder, father of Brooke Loder (a fourth grader), gave the class a tour of the barns also, They loved seeing all the farm animals. The entire class and their teacher, Roberta Roy, were luncheon guests at the home of Cory and Nancy Loder. They had a delicious lunch of oat- meal pancakes, bacon and Gould Farm maple syrup. The fourth grade Tag & Bake Sale was a huge success: $345, was raised for the class trip to Mystic Seaport. Roberta Roy would like to thank all the parents and people of the com- munity who donated items and support. On March 31, the fourth grade held a scavenger hunt on the school grounds. The winning team consisted of Kenny Nicholson and Shane Stevens. } Cooking projects for the fourth grade during March were white gingerbread and Irish soda bread. Delicious! j An awards ceremony was held at the school on March 25, and Paul Langer, principal, gave awards to those childreil who participated in the MS Read-a-thon, St. Jude Math-a- thon and Partners in Reading (second quarter). For the MS Read-a-thon Jennifer Stevens, Colin Storti and Sean Storti were each awarded cameras for being the top money raisers The following students were given a frisbee and heat transfer Heather Gunther, Stacy Palfini, Naomi Sutphen, Ange Davis, Kimberly Gillette, Tiffany Stephens and Jennife Swann. Michael Ohman won a book; Darlene Bushey, a pe Kimberly Gillette, a stuffed dog."}
{"id": "montereynews1983unse_2", "title": "Monterey news", "year": 1983, "seq": 3, "text": "Once a year Fire Company members are instructed in cardiopulmonary resuscitation, CPR. It\u2019s what one does for victims of sudden illness or accident who have stopped breathing, or have no pulse or both. Members, augmented by a few wives and friends, met on a Wednesday night in March and sawa film in which CPR techniques were demonstrated; then everyone practiced the method on specially made manikins with rubber lungs and compressible sternums. Copies of a book put to- gether by the American Red Cross were made available to everyone for the week, and there was a written test to pass for certification as a person trained in CPR. Although these one- evening intensive training programs come a year apart, aftera few years, even without regular practice, and without an emergency that demands the skills, the techniques of CPR be- come familiar. This time around, it was a noticeable pleasure being in the new firehouse. Manikin practice was a grim and dusty chore at the old firehouse, something I for one was hardly aware of until I noticed how comfortable practice was in the clean, spacious, carpeted meeting room. When I mention this as a little practice, I speak for myself. There are six Fire Company members who have completed a lengthy course in medical emergency practices. Of these trained EMTs, Pat Andrus and Wayne Dunlop are now members of the Southern Berkshire Volunteer Ambulance Squad. They have a rotating schedule that gives each three nights of duty in a month, when they go to the Volunteer Ambulance garage at Fairview Hospital by 6 in the evening, and stay on until 8 next morning. Each also has duty one daya month on a weekend. Donald Whitbeck, who you may recall was too young to take the EMT certification test after he com- pleted training last year, has been working for three hours every weekday since last September with the Fairview Hospi- tal ambulance crew, as part of a program sponsored by the Southern Berkshire Educational Collaborative."}
{"id": "montereynews1983unse_2", "title": "Monterey news", "year": 1983, "seq": 4, "text": "The most common salamander in the country, and the one most often seen in the Berkshires, is the red eft or newt. Liiinaeus must never have seen an eft. His description of \u201cfoul and loathsome animals\u201d cannot be applied to the delicate orange sprite of damp leafy paths. The red eft is the teen-ager of the red-spotted newt, an olive- green salamander of lakes and ponds. Eggs are laid in the water and young hatch out with gills for oxygen exchange in the water. In late summer or early fall they lose their gills, leave the water, and turn bright orange or vermillion, with two rows of red spots along their backs, handsomely edged with black. They have rough, moist skin and beautiful golden eyelids. Efts may spend one to three years in the woods, ven- turing out by day to eat tiny snails and insects. Their only protection against predators is a poison they secrete through their skin, and the bright coloring they sport is a warning. The neurotoxin is harmless to people, but a blue jay who once picks up an eft spits it out hastily and will never grab a red salamander again. As it reaches maturity, the eft darkens and develops fins on its tail. It heads for water on a warm spring night and spends the rest of its life there in olive drab. Only the black-edged red spots of its flashy adolescence remain. The female is stimulated to lay her eggs by the wild thrashing and tail- waving of the male. They stay clasped together for as long as an hour, when the male lets go and deposits sperm-capped gelatin bundles called spermatophores on the bottom of the pond. The female follows close behind him, walks over the spermatophores, and draws them up into her cloaca."}
{"id": "montereynews1983unse_2", "title": "Monterey news", "year": 1983, "seq": 5, "text": "Its golden brown color is from smoking, a process the Indians discovered which keeps leather pliable even after repeated soakings. The side flaps are covered with dark green cloth and edged with white beads. Smaller pan- els of blue cloth, inside the green area, are criss-crossed with meanders of white beads. The instep is decorated with delicate porcupine quill em- broidery and a central panel of large plaited quills. The panel is dyed in blocks of color, read- ing up from the toe: yellow, blue, red, blue, then the same sequence again. The embroi- dery is done by wrapping very fine quills around a close- stitched design in sinew thread. Both quills and thread are wet when the work is done, then shrink very hard and tight as they dry. The panel is framed by an embroidered line of red, then another of white. Flank- ing this are yellow meanders in pairs, each pair separated by a line of blue. They repeat the motif of the cloth panel but with a subtle variation, meeting but not criss-crossing. Each outer curve on the lateral meanders is decorated with a small red crescent with a white border. The moccasin is one of a pair given to Israel Dickinson of Stockbridge by Captain Konkapot around 1780. Dickinson\u2019s great-grandson, Alan Peck, presented them to the Berkshire Museum in 1958. Very few of the Europeans living in Stock- bridge or even Boston or New York at that time had shoes of such delicate beauty. Only the party slippers of a wealthy, aristocratic woman could equal them. In fact, the Indians were criticized for their love of finery and were accused of having childlike, barbaric minds because of it. A strong enjoy- ment of leisure was another Mahican failing that they shared with the aristocrats of the period."}
{"id": "montereynews1983unse_2", "title": "Monterey news", "year": 1983, "seq": 6, "text": "INFORMATIVE PUBLICATIONS MADE AVAILABLE BY RON KUJAWSKI Several books and a number of pamphlets have been donated to the Monterey Food Project by Extension Agent Ron Kujawski as a result of a suggestion by Monterey Energy Project member Bud Rodgers at the close of a workshop on winter storage. The books are a selection of United States Department of Agriculture yearbooks describing agricultural research, ideas for landscaping and gardening, and methods of maintaining quality in food. Written in the \u2019sixties, the books provide a partial history of the origins of our present food system and are replete with a telling blend of naivete, boastfulness and earnest effort. The pamphlets cover a range of planting information from house plants of all types to outdoor ornamentals, lawn care, gardens, fruits, shade trees, shrubs, and even greenhouses. All publications will be on display at Monterey Food Project Workshops and meetings. If there is demand for it, Project members will investigate possibilities of making the publications available in the Monterey Library during the summer. FARMTRAILS MAP Local produce growers and farmers may have their road- side stands and farms listed free of charge in a Southern Berk- shrre Farmtrails Map, to be published this spring by Southern Berkshire Community Action, Community Action Executive Director Thomas Rathbun announced this week. The map will indicate growers\u2019 locations, hours and products, and will be printed on an attractive road map of South County. Farmers from any of the 17 towns of South Berkshire are eligible for listing. Donna Tunkel of Monterey is Farmtrails Project Coordi- nator. She says the map will be a big help for growers who wish to sell directly to the public from their own farms and stands. \u201cIt should also foster healthy contact between con- sumers and growers and will give growers easier access to markets while encouraging local agriculture,\u201d Ms."}
{"id": "ppds-1986-complete", "title": "1986 Pittsfield Parks Department Scrapbook", "year": 1986, "seq": 0, "text": "Garner, vice president; Robert Briggs, \u2018Secretary; Charles Thomp- Sei, treasurer, and John E. Callag-\" han, nominating chairman. | \u201cCrafts poe offered for children The Department of Recreation, in cooperation with Morningside School, will once again offer an af- ter-school crafts program for chil- dren at Morningside School, beginning today. \u201cCrafts for Kids\u201d a six-week series designed for children in grades 3 to 6. Instructor Frank Mon- terossa will teach ways of creating \u201cjunkyard crafts\u201d from ordinary materials found around the house.\u201d - More information about the pro- Newly elected to the board Wired, Langlois and Fred agen P ublic hearing \u00abIs Slated on plan - Stor Park Square a, The Park Commission will hold a public hearing on a $100,000 pro- ee posal 1? ue! Park Square Mon- day at 7: .m. at Springsi = House, 874 North St. eg The commission will seek a public response to the plan presented to them by the city\u2019s Office of Commu- nity and Economic Development the Central Berkshire Chamber of Commerce and the Pittsfield Cen- tral City Development Corp.,. ac- cording to chairman Anthony Massimiano. The plan is envisioned as a joint public and\u2018private project. The Cen- tral Berkshire Chamber of Com: merece\u2019 has said it wants to raise $75,000 toward its cost. 9 Supporters have described \u00a9 the plan, proposed \u2018by Urban Design As- sociaties of Wyncote, Pa., as a way to spruce up the focal point of the city\u2019s downtown. But they have also said it could serve as a \u00abstarting: point for community discussion. Changes proposed include paving os that are now crushed stone; installing brick paving around the fountain and the monuments at the east, and West Ends; planting five. or six large.maple trees and several bushes; installing period lighting, and encircling the perimeter with granite uprights and iron pipe. The plan would balance the Civil War soldier\u2019s statue on the west side by placing the proposed Viet- nam veterans\u2019 monument on. the east side. | (GPR 8.1966 - gram is available from the Recrea- tion Office or Morningside / community School."}
{"id": "ppds-1986-complete", "title": "1986 Pittsfield Parks Department Scrapbook", "year": 1986, "seq": 1, "text": "OCT 6 1986 ae Joel Librizzi | Off to Italy j TV and video cassette recorder. | day, 19-member delegation gets ready _ special bus, which has a bar, TV and. : : ts ated digs diner first leg of trip to Pittstield\u2019s sister city They were due to arrive by jet in Rome at about 11 this morn in Italy, Cava de\u2019 Tirreni. They rode to Kennedy Airport in the ing. | Welcome, home 7/Ae| 8G Whether the Pittsfield sister- city delegation\u2019s trip to Cava de\u2019 Tirreni was mostly \u2018business~ or mostly pleasure, it obviously served the purpose of helping to make this connection more. than a merely formal match between two distant communities. One way to improve links, from this end, would be to explore the possibility of introducing the study of Italian (on a formal or informal basis) at an early . grade level in city schools. It\u2019s a Safe bet that a large share of the school kids in Cava de\u2019 Tir- reni are learning English. pa WEED HARVESTER with a 7-foot cutting swath rests outside the Springside House on North Street. It is mounted on a trailer that can be converted into a weed conveyor. A county search for a home to state-funded program to clean William J. Carey smaller, 4-foot harvester is stored nearby as the city and store the equipment, used in a up Pontoosuc Lake. ~ Weed-control gear arrives in county By William J. Carey Berkshire County\u2019s weedbusters have arrived. _ The County Commissioners an- \u2018hounced at their regular meeting Tuesday that two aquatic weed har- vesters and a trailer-conveyor, the first shipment of a $224,736 cargo of weed-control equipment for the Pon- toosuc Lake, had arrived at the Springside House on North Street. The long-awaited harvesters are being kept under plastic wrap at the site until a permanent home is found."}
{"id": "ppds-1986-complete", "title": "1986 Pittsfield Parks Department Scrapbook", "year": 1986, "seq": 2, "text": "Rand fired a two-hit shutout in the Pittsfield 13-year-old Babe Ruth League as his Quality Auto Body team tae i a 9-0 win over reenleaf Auto Body. oKren Roedell ripped three hits to \u2018lead the Quality attack, while Scott Schultz added a pair of safeties. In other 13-year-old action, Alex- ander\u2019s used a five-run third inning to down Price Chopper by a 9-4 count. Scott Ziter and Chris Sickell had two hits apiece for Alexander\u2019s, . with: Mike Somerville gaining the pitching win. | Paul Callahan was the mound winner as Gildo\u2019s Auto Body topped Im-Press Printing 6-2. Bob Porter i\" CELA and Mark Chenail led the Gildo\u2019s at- tack with two hits apiece. Winning pitcher Jason Goldsmith. pounded out four hits and had three RBI as Im-Press roared to a 10-4 triumph over Quality Auto Body. Matt Touhey also had four hits for the Printers with two RBI. A slugfest between Price Chopper and Greenleaf Auto Body was sus- ) pended as a 12-12 tie because of. darkness. The game will be com- leted on July 29. : Gar Traverse had three hits to lead Greenleaf, while Cliff Harris, Jim Keefner, John Beattie and Steve Wood had two hits apiece for Price Chopper. Babe Kuth\u2019s North Adams game Continued from Page 1 did so well against the Dodgers, yielding three hits and no runs in five innings, that they offered him a contract. He had to tell them he was already signed up. aft But his hopes for fame and for- tune were tragically short-lived. Playing outfield in Adams Jater that summer, he injured his arm. ir- retrievably in an attempt to throw out a man at home plate. Recalling that injury the other day, Pasierbiak said, \u201cBaseball was my life. It -was everything to me. . . . | cried like a baby.\u201d Pasierbiak became foreman of the shipping de- partment at Sprague Electric Co., retiring in 1974."}
{"id": "ppds-1986-complete", "title": "1986 Pittsfield Parks Department Scrapbook", "year": 1986, "seq": 3, "text": "Old-timers stil] tell stories not only about Ruth\u2019s golfing and hunting but his enthu- Siastic boozing. 3 In 1941, playing golf at the Wyantenuck Country Club, he told an Eagle reporter that it was his first visit to the Berkshires. But he was wrong. The first visit had been three years earlier, to North . Adams. \u2014 m | The story of that visit is not a par- v \u2018home run that he tried for and. which everyone was hoping to see. ticularly cheerful one, especially since Ruth could not connect for the It is mostly a story of faded dreams. \u2014 as | But people who were there 48 ter about it. Among those who possess memo- ries is Henry Adams, brother \u2018the Sons of Italy Manager. Henry was \u2018batboy\u2019 that poster on exhibit at the Western R25 1986 Puppolo of North of John Puppolo, day, and the old years ago still like to talk about the Gateway Heritage Park is his game, and a number of stories clus- Pe Area Sports Baseball, hockey coaches highly valued souvenir. To 6/23/86 ; \u00ae name scholarship winners SCHOLARSHIPS: The Berkshire County hockey and baseball coaches associations have named their Scholarship award winners for the 1985-86 school season. In baseball, Sean Berry of Mount Greylock Regional has been named the recipient of the Pete Cimini Scholarship award by the county baseball coaches. : Berry was a Mounties\u2019 outfielder, The Cimini Scholarship is funded annually by the Cimini All-Star Game, which was held May 31 at Wahconah Park. Five players have been named re- Cipients of scholarships from the Berkshire County Hockey Coaches\u2019 Association. Those awards went to Eric Hauge of Mount Greylock, Jeff Furlano of St. Joseph\u2019s, Matt Kelly of Taconic, Mike Chapman of Pittsfield High, and Jim Pecon of Lee. All are for- wards but Kelly, who played de- fense for the Braves. ake ele _ cer League."}
{"id": "ppds-1986-complete", "title": "1986 Pittsfield Parks Department Scrapbook", "year": 1986, "seq": 4, "text": "Rand earned the mound win in relief of Somerville. Sixth-inning RBI hits by Craig Ga- leucia and Keith Reynolds enabled Dalton to rally past the Central Berkshire League yesterday. John, Fitzgerald was the winning pitcher\u2019 and also helped his own cause with a pair of singles. Galeucia had three hits peserdey after pounding out a pair of doubles He Saturday\u2019s loss to South Berk- shire. . 15-year-old tourney The Pittsfield Nationals and the South Berkshire League all-stars' have advanced to third-round play: in the winners\u2019 bracket of the: county 14- and 15- \u201cyear-old Babe | Ruth tournament. The Nationals opened their title bid with a 6-2 Saturday win over Dalton and rolled to a 12-1 second- round triumph over Central Berk- shire yesterday, while South Berk- shire, which had a first-round bye, scored a dramatic second-round win yesterday by rallying for a 9-8 triumph over the Pittsfield Ameri- cans. The Americans edged defend- ing champion Adams 1-0 Saturday in eight innings. The Nationals and South Berk- shire will meet Sunday at 1 at Dem- tars gain \u201813\u2019 finals ing Field, with the winner of that game advancing unbeaten to the county finals July 12. In losers\u2019 bracket games Saturday, Adams will meet Central Berkshire at War Memorial Field in Lenox and the Americans will host Dalton at Ben- edict. The winners of those two games will then meet Sunday at 1 at the home of the Adams-Central sur- vivor. South Berkshire overcame a 6-3 Aout iit eball Continued \u2018from Page 30 could not get the equalizer. Jan Law picked up the pitching \u2018win with a 1-inning relief stint, _ while Al Reynolds led the Southern attack with three hits. Jeff Jones had two hits and two RBI for the Americans. Jones also singled in the winning run for the Americans on Saturday in their win over Adams."}
{"id": "ppds-1986-complete", "title": "1986 Pittsfield Parks Department Scrapbook", "year": 1986, "seq": 5, "text": "Auto Body losing pitcher gaine downe ee: Ins gain a tuale satur- to play in the Se , eos ae Friday C ounty LL tourney Opens Nays 990. Follow and look for b left out of te I The Berkshire County Little | mdervay Fi tournament will get \u201cunderway Friday when Pittsfield_ est hosts Williamstown in a first- ound game at Clapp Park. | The game is the only first-round clash scheduled \u2018in the nine-team tournament, with the other seven teams drawing byes to the quar- . terfinals. The winner of the West-Williams-\u201d town game will host defending - county champion Dalton-Hinsdale in one of four quarterfinal games on Monday. In_ other quarterfinals, - Adams will be at Great Barrington, \u2018Lanesboro will play at Lee, and Pittsfield North will play at Pitts- field South. ~All games in the single-elimi- nation tournament are slated for 6 \u201cp.m., with the semifinals slated for \u2018July 15 and the finals on July 18. The tournament champion will then move on to state and potentially re- gional and World Series competi- tion. - South Little League \u00a9 ~~ Jason Virgilio pitched a four-hit- ter and helped his own cause with a three-run homer as Stevenson Insur- Pittsfield South Little League. Mike Danylieko also helped Stevenson\u2019s cause with a single and a double. Virgilio also had a \u2018single and double to back winning pitcher Dan- ylieko as Stevenson\u2019s nipped the Italian-American Club 5-4. Steve Thompson banged out three hits and Sean Albert added a single and double for the losers. | In other South action, Brian Diehl knocked in three runs with two sin- gles and a double and Sean Hurley hammered out three hits as Burger. King whipped City Savings Bank 9- 1, Jeff Zuccalo was the mound win- ner. Josh Zolkowski had two singles and a double for the Bankers."}
{"id": "ppds-1986-complete", "title": "1986 Pittsfield Parks Department Scrapbook", "year": 1986, "seq": 6, "text": "This is the first year Springfield has com- peted in any Babe Ruth League-af- -filiated tournament. If the Pittsfield stars win tomor- row, they will play in a second- round game Sunday at 2. If they lose, they will next play in a losers\u2019 bracket game at 2 on Monday. Closer to home, the Pittsfield Na- \u00bb tionals and Pittsfield Americans will meet tomorrow at 1 at Deming Field to determine the county 14- and 15-year-old Babe Ruth League champion. The Nationals go into the finals unbeaten and need just one - win to capture the title. The Ameri- \u2018cans must sweep a double-header to win the crown. . South Little League The Pittsfield South Little League has named its all-star team for the Berkshire County tournament. The South will meet Pittsfield North in a quarterfinal game at Deming Field on Monday. ie Members of the South team in- clude Christian Anthony, Brendan Collins, Mike Danylieko, Brian Diehl, Sean Hurley, Erie Hulland, Josh Zolkowski and Steve Litster. - Other members are Kevin O\u2019Donnell, Ryan O\u2019Donnell, Mark Stodden, Sean Sultaire, Tony Tul- lock and Jason Virgilio. The team will be coached by Hank Sultaire and Ted Brutnell. In regular-season South League action, winning pitcher Sultaire helped his own cause with a\u2019 pair of doubles as the Italian-American Club downed Tank Shop 7-4. Paul Morse also had two doubles for the winners, while Sean Zatorski pounded out a pair of doubles for Tank Shop. | Danylieko gained the pitching win and Virgilio hit two doubles as Ste- venson Insurance downed East Side Pizza by a 5-4 count. Ryan O\u2019Donnell had a two-run homer for East Sidgm afte MikeM@pinini had a single and as double and Zo three runs with a pa City Savings topped vin Rayner drove 1 a trio of singles, -Q\u2019Donnell added a doubl for Teo\u2019s."}
{"id": "ppds-1986-complete", "title": "1986 Pittsfield Parks Department Scrapbook", "year": 1986, "seq": 7, "text": "Police Department also posted a 15-3 win over Quality Printing and 16-i1 victory over Fire Department. Ladley and Mike Paglier pounded orth |-hitter: out four hits apiece in the game against Quality Printing, with Pag- lier and McHugh on the mound. Mickle had a double and a single for Quality. Matt Robare went 3-for-3, including a double, in the win over Fire Department. Robare also pitched for the winners, along with John Paglier and McHugh. Paul Dowd had three hits and Dave Tar- jick rapped two doubles for Fire De- partment. pay Steve Poneck and Dan Giardina split the pitching duties in Colt In- surance\u2019s 5-4 victory over Quality Printing and 9-1 win over Fire De- partment. Giardina .also had two Joel Librizzi zeo, Brian Rilla, Gary Traversa and Jason Goldsmith; back row \u2014 Josh Tobin, Mike Filiault, Chris Sinopoli, Bill Quadrozzi, head coach Damian Giardina; Matt Touhey, J.R. Rand and Scott Ziter. Assistant coaches Ed Barzottini and Tim Brennan were absent when the picture was taken. J a. ae 1} : to capture the county crown, while the Americans must sweep a double-header to eliminated the Na- tionals and claim the title. If the Americans win the first game, a decisive second game would be played 20 minutes later, also at Deming Field. The county champion will then move on to play | | \u2019 ounty Ruth finals in the Western State 14- and 15-year- old tournament beginning July 19 at Leominster. : Besides-earning a berth in the county finals, the Americans last night gained revenge for a second- round loss suffered at the hands of South Berkshire 10 days earlier. Coco, who is now 3-0 in the tourna-. ment, walked just three and struck out 15 in hurling the Pittsfield team to victory, while Jones\u2019s home run snapped a 3-3 tie and gave the Americans the lead to stay in the fourth."}
{"id": "ppds-1986-complete", "title": "1986 Pittsfield Parks Department Scrapbook", "year": 1986, "seq": 8, "text": "Trophies will be awarded to the first three top finishers in each category. \u00a9 Cites rules Przedpelski said that only wooden, U-shaped toboggans will be permitted, that the proper wax should be applied, according to snow and weather conditions and that people participating should wear heavily padded clothing. To- boggans will be available for loan, he said. 2 Entry forms are available at the Department of Recreation office at 874 North St. and will be available on Sunday at the park from 11 to noon. Przedpelski said applicants under 18 years of age must have a oarent\u2019s signature on the entry blank. There is no charge to enter this event. Additional information may be ob- tained by contacting Przedpelski at a : Fourteen to participate ary a a 10\u2014The Berkshire Eagle, Friday, J anuary 17, 1986 in carnival queen contest The annual Winter Carnival - queen\u2019s contest will begin this eve- -ning when the 14 queen contestants and their mothers are entertained at a dinner at the Stanley Club to kick off the contest. The contest is sponsored by the Pittsfield Winter Sports Committee Inc., as part of its 4ist annual Winter Carnival. Each contestant must sell a mini- mum of 1,000 Winter Carnival but- tons to become eligible to compete for the title of Winter Carnival queen and lady-in-waiting. The queen and lady-in-waiting will be se- lected at the queen\u2019s coronation ball Feb. 14 at the Itam Lodge. A panel of three judges will make their se- lection based on poise, appearance, personality, expression and under- standing of the carnival activities. The sale. of buttons is a separate contest and has no bearing on the . judging of the queen or lady-in-wait- ing. A special award will be pre- sented to the contestant selling the most buttons by the Winter Sports Committee."}
{"id": "SocialismItsEconomicAspect", "title": "Socialism, Its Economic Aspect: I. The socialistic platform II. The theory explained III. The theory applied", "year": 1982, "seq": 0, "text": "The collectivism advo- cated in these programmes is often limited to those industries where capital has already become sufficient- ly centralized to manifest the tyranny of monopoly and where the centralization is sufficiently organized to make the transfer to public control an affair of mere- ly passing a law, signing a paper and paying a price. We are not considering here the advantages or dis- advantages of certain municipal ownerships, as of water, lighting and passenger transport; or of certain national ownerships, as of railways, telegraph lines, etc. We are occupied solely with the question of ul- timate complete centralization, the abolition of pri- vate capital and the common ownership of all the means and instruments of production. The tenden- cy of the broad socialistic movement is to this, as to an ideal, a goal. We are told that it is only by an Digitized by Google 6 Socialism: Its Economic Aspect. ultimate reconstruction of society upon the basis of common ownership that all men will be enabled to receive a wage commensurate with their labor, a compensation due to them for the benefit which by their labor they bestow upon the community. It is seriously important, therefore, to understand at the beginning and to bear constantly in mind that in dealing with the collectivist theory we are dealing with a political theory of labor and not with a theory of idleness, anarchy, nihilism, dynamite or free plunder. The fundamental In face of this latest scheme for the principle. amelioration of the condition of labor, all the old systems for the reconstruction of so- ciety, the systems of St. Simon, of Fourier, etc., have passed into the history of theory. The new system itself is far from being clear, whether as to the de- tails of method or of practically distributed results."}
{"id": "SocialismItsEconomicAspect", "title": "Socialism, Its Economic Aspect: I. The socialistic platform II. The theory explained III. The theory applied", "year": 1982, "seq": 1, "text": "Though socialists feel that just now they cannot get this majority for the estab- lishment of the social state, yet they are sanguine of ultimate success. They rely upon the enemy as their best ally in the destruction of the enemy. Under the conditions of industry which have been brought about by machinery and rapid transport, they are waiting for the competitive system to run its course. Within fifty years, the old-time conditions \u2014 under which the tradesman owned his lot, his shop, his tools and the fruit of his labor, under which he found his own market and regulated supply to de- mand \u2014 have practically disappeared. Small pro- prietorships of peasant, mechanic, merchant, have given way to huge agricultural, industrial and mer- cantile capitalizations. The process goes on with Digitized by UjOOQie 8 Socialism: Its Economic Aspect. giant strides. To use the expression of Karl Marx, \u201cone capitalist kills many.\u201d The socialist, then, is waiting for large capitals to absorb the smaller. He will thus find created for him a few millionaires on the one hand and a race of wage-earners on the other. The essential preparatory work will be done for him (as he could not do it himself) by the trusts and monopolies, the inevitable outcome of competi- tion. As the capitalists by absorption grow fewer, the workers must increase in numbers, and they must also increase in misery, since they can have nothing to say about production, market or price. This development must go on until the workers re- volt by using the legal means of suffrage which has been put into their hands. But when they revolt, it will be as a united, organized, disciplined body, into which they shall have been formed by the very methods of the capitalist system. Then, as capital- ists expropriated the many for the benefit of the few, the many will turn around and expropriate the few for the benefit of all."}
{"id": "SocialismItsEconomicAspect", "title": "Socialism, Its Economic Aspect: I. The socialistic platform II. The theory explained III. The theory applied", "year": 1982, "seq": 2, "text": "The indi- vidual capitalist is not blamed for this. He is not accused of personally robbing the wage earner of the surplus value of hiswork. He is recognized as being the fortunate one in what is called the \u201canarchy\" of , Google Socialism: Its Economic Aspect . 11 competition, an anarchy upheld by civil statute ; and so long as he wishes to compete he must abstract as much as he can from the fruit of labor. It is the system, then, which has to be changed. The root has to be dug up. Competition must be eliminated and in its place there must be substituted, also by law, a collective ownership in which there will be no wage earners and no capitalists as persons ade- quately distinct. All must be producers for their own benefit in the benefit of all. Once more, we must be on our guard A false notion. \u2019 b against a prevalent vague notion that the main tenet of the actual socialism, collectivism, is the periodical dividing up and redistribution of all properties, so as to preserve equality of possessions amongst the citizens. Whatever may have been the meaning of some old forms of communism, the so- cialism of to-day does not contemplate this at all. It aims simply at common ownership of all the means of production, to the end that each one may receive a wage, a compensation due to him for the labor which he has expended upon the common produc- tion. Still further, we must know that the Methods. socialistic system does not propose to dispossess the capitalist brutally, whilst depriving him of the privilege of drawing an interest on his capital or his plant. It will, of course, prohibit all private industry for profit, and thus all instruments, and machinery, as private capital, will become use- less."}
{"id": "SocialismItsEconomicAspect", "title": "Socialism, Its Economic Aspect: I. The socialistic platform II. The theory explained III. The theory applied", "year": 1982, "seq": 3, "text": "Politics would be a thing of the past, just as rival show rooms and warehouses and those obsolete terms, wholesale and retail. The interest of Where, then, would the interest of the the individual, individual be supposed to come in? In this simply, as we have stated, that every man would be supposed to obtain a wage that would be consid- ered to represent the full value of his labor. And this leads us to speak of what we placed as a second requisite in the modern civilized state, namely, some approximately fixed and determinable unit measure of value for the purposes of exchange. In the new state there could be no No more money. real money, as we understand the term. With us real money is both measure of value and medium of exchange. In the new state the two func- tions of money would have to be distributed. They could not be combined in the same article or instru- ment. As each member of the community would be supposed to be remunerated according to his contri- bution in labor to the general store or service, labor itself , in some way or other, would necessarily have to be the measure of value. The medium of exchange, then, since the labor or the product could not be passed around, would needs have to be a certificate Digitized by Google 18 Socialism; Its Economic Aspect. of labor contributed. This certificate could not be in the form of gold or silver or anything which might have its own value, as a commodity, over and above the labor represented. In the socialistic state, then, the measure of value would be the labor contributed ; and the certificate of labor would be the medium for the purchase of the common produce and the utiliza- tion of the common service."}
{"id": "SocialismItsEconomicAspect", "title": "Socialism, Its Economic Aspect: I. The socialistic platform II. The theory explained III. The theory applied", "year": 1982, "seq": 4, "text": "The system was certainly very sim- ple. Its simplicity brought it adherents, especially among the indolent. The simple system helped to cre- ate the party, and we see it still practically set forth to-day in the unwise demands of some local labor organizations. But, Marx and other leading collect- ivists of his day found themselves obliged to recede from too much insistence upon the time measure for the value of the labor hour. Minimum produc If we take the thin g in reason, and in tlon \u2022 its entirety \u2014 as we must always do when discussing a scheme \u2014 we have to see that scrip cer- tificates for hours of labor cannot possibly have a purchasing power beyond amount and value pro- duced. A labor hour can give purchasing power to a scrip only by reason of some definite amount pro- duced in the hour of labor. If a thing has not been produced it cannot be purchased. Now, there are no two men whose hour of labor can be counted upon to give exactly the same results. Neither is the la- bor hour of the same person always uniformly pro- ductive. Thus the value of the scrip to have any definite purchasing power must be measured by the minimum production. It stands to reason, then, that each one will produce his minimum, seeing that he can receive no more for the scrip that testifies to his labor. We cannot conceive of the long continuance of a state where every citizen is doing as little as he possibly can, to the end that he may not be imposed upon by the idleness of all the other citizens. Digitized by Google Socialism: Its Economic Aspect. 2 1 to amount produced The other > as We have said > \u00aef the value i making the hour of labor the measure of value is to take account of what is produced."}
{"id": "SocialismItsEconomicAspect", "title": "Socialism, Its Economic Aspect: I. The socialistic platform II. The theory explained III. The theory applied", "year": 1982, "seq": 5, "text": "You cannot do it. Half the world believes that a working equivalent cannot be found between two pure metals, silver and gold. How shall it be found between a million, between fifty million arti- Digitized by Google Socialism: Its Economic Aspect . 2$ cles produced, between all the various kinds of labor results contributing to their final production? What are the precise relative values of the labor hour em- ployed in weeding a potato patch and the labor hour devoted to sewing on glove buttons? How many dozen glove buttons will balance an acre of potatoes? If you are a socialist and do not wish to commit yourself to paying for mere time, independently of what is done, you will be obliged to establish this little ratio, together with a million more. You will, besides, be obliged to re-establish the ratios everyday according to the fluctuating value put upon anything and everything by the changing tastes of the com- munity. Wk0 will have first But ^ US 8u PP ose that you have SUC- chok * T ceeded in laying down a few ratios be- tween commodities or various kinds of public ser- vice, say between street cleaning, making ice cream, playing the bass drum and pulling teeth. The ratios could not be established with anything like the ex- actness of the ratio that can be established between silver and gold. But let us suppose that you have succeeded in working out the six ratios, showing the value of each of these kinds of labor hour in terms of each of the others. How are you going to decide who is to have the privilege of applying himself to the most lucrative kind of labor? Who shall be obliged to take the labor that is less remunerated, even whilst he is willing and anxious and competent to do the better rewarded labor?"}
{"id": "SocialismItsEconomicAspect", "title": "Socialism, Its Economic Aspect: I. The socialistic platform II. The theory explained III. The theory applied", "year": 1982, "seq": 6, "text": "Will it select according to previous examinations in schools of art and letters? Knowledge of arts and letters is not a criterion of certain very important qualifications which should be looked for in those to whom the lives of the community are to be entrusted. There are certain moral and physical qualities which Digitized by v^-ooQie 26 Socialism: Its Economic Aspect. can exhibit themselves only in the course of practice, ami which \u2014 any physician will attest it \u2014 go far to make up the necessary equipment of the medical practitioner who is to be of real value to the com- munity. These things cannot be foreseen by and committee. Hence, no committee can make a fit se- lection of subjects for education in medicine. We shall, nevertheless, suppose that the com- mittee does make a selection of the three hundred who are to pursue the medical studies. As we have said, these students will have to receive their salary or wages for study. What guarantee can we have that they will really fit themselves for the best pub- lic service? For, the practice of medicine will have to be a public service, since there can be no compe- tition. No more can be done than to establish a min- imum percentage which one must reach in order to be accepted as the public servant. And in the doing of this the entire medical profession is reduced to a minimum of excellence. For, nine-tenths of those who, under the system of private competition, would have labored for a maximum of excellence, will, un- der the new system, labor only for the minimum which is demanded for the earning of the daily wage in the public service \u2014 the only thing they can aspire to. In a word, the entire profession is degraded, and the entire community is put at the mercy of the half-educated charlatans."}
{"id": "SocialismItsEconomicAspect", "title": "Socialism, Its Economic Aspect: I. The socialistic platform II. The theory explained III. The theory applied", "year": 1982, "seq": 7, "text": "Drugs, medicines, under the new system, will have to be as free as water. The members of the community, on labor hour certif- icates, cannot be expected to lay by enough to cover the expenses of a long illness. Everything for the Digitized by v^-ooQie Socialism: Its Economic Aspect . 27 infirm and incapacitated will have to be done by pub- lic hospital service. But where nurses and doctors and all persons entrusted with the health of the citi- zens are qualified for their service by a minimum examination, we may well pity the community that is subjected to the collusion of such servants whose wages are independent of the efficiency of their service. And all this is only a meagre outline of but one illus- tration taken at random from a hundred thousand. wa^es of the We ma y remark here that it is a nec- tnempioyed. essary consequence of the socialistic scheme that every person who is at least willing to work must be entitled to the labor wage. Hence it must be a socially inevitable fact that at all times there shall be many who shall receive the labor wage whilst doing no work. For it is impossible that all persons in the same locality shall always be produc- ing. Yet such persons are fully entitled to the labor wage, for the principle of equality demands that it be not arbitrarily given to one in preference to another. If, however, actual labor should be counted a necessary condition for the receipt of the wage, then those for whom there would be nothing to do in a locality would have to be transported at public expense to another locality where labor would be possible. Thus there would be an endless shifting of popula- tions ; there would be a continual breaking up of families \u2014 a vital blow given to one of the funda- mentals of human liberty."}
{"id": "SocialismItsEconomicAspect", "title": "Socialism, Its Economic Aspect: I. The socialistic platform II. The theory explained III. The theory applied", "year": 1982, "seq": 8, "text": "We have said nothing of the attitude Point of view. . . . of the new socialism toward religion. This would afford matter for special consideration. We have undertaken solely to consider the possi- bility of the economic scheme as judged by its funda- mental principle. In this view we have to remember that there is no temporal advantage which can com- pensate a man for the repression of his individuality, of his native autonomy. The development of his individuality implies freedom in the exercise of the right to earn. An absolute collectivism must stand in the way of this development, since its first meas- ure is to forbid the untramelled exercise of the right to earn. There is another tiling which is implied in the development of individuality, namely, the right to learn. The restrictions which an absolute collec- tivism must necessarily put upon this right would furnish matter for a separate study. In discussions like unto the one which A distinction. _ . . . . we have here outlined, it is necessary and of very great consequence that we know how to distinguish between official documents and unofficial commentaries. The official declarations, several of which wc presented in the beginning, tell us that socialism is a system of government by which it is pro- posed to establish an economic equilibrium through the absolutely collective ownership of all the means and instruments of production. Hence the name, socialism, is radically misapplied when it is made to stand for national or municipal ownership of certain public utilities. If that were socialism, then socialism exists wherever there is a civil community. For there Digitized by Google Socialism: Its Economic Aspect. 31 is no State or City in which there is not national or city ownership of something or other. When a city runs its own plants for light, water and rapid transit, that is not socialism any more than when the city runs its own court-house, jail and hospital."}
{"id": "x-women-reformation", "title": "Women of the Reformation, from Spain to Scandinavia", "year": 1977, "seq": 0, "text": "Price checked the manuscript. Suzanne Selinger has identified bibliographical references and the help of Andrea Foster for interlibrary loans has been invaluable. I am indebted to Marjorie Wynne for help and permissions in the Beinecke Library of Yale University. I have permission from the Student Christian Movement Press of London to reprint with some changes the article which ap\u00ac peared with the title \u201cFeminine Piety in Tudor England\u201d in the volume Christian Spirituality; Essays in honour of Gordon Rupp, edited by Peter Brooks. Similarly I am permitted to reprint with alterations the article \u201cQueen Katarina Jagellonica,\u201d which appeared in Theological Soundings, Notre Dame Seminary Jubilee Studies, 1923-73. Per\u00ac mission is granted by this seminary in New Orleans. 8 A few reflections are in order at the close of these three vol\u00ac umes. Why was the study undertaken? Because of a lifelong interest in those who have not had their due. In 1955 the Dud- leian lecture at Harvard was on The Office of the Ministers Wife in New England. The larger study followed the death of Ruth Woodruff Bainton in the hope of rendering a posthumous tribute to one widely loved but little acclaimed. A further purpose is to correct historical distortions. Women were not enslaved throughout the past, as some seem to think. To be sure, they had a rough time by reason of circumstances which affected all. In the sixteenth century the average length of life was around twenty five years, because of high infant mor\u00ac tality. To replenish the population after devastating plagues families of ten or so were required. Women in consequence spent one segment of their lives mothering and another grand\u00ac mothering. They had to be supported by men and were glad to be. And think not that the lot of men was easy with families of a wife and some ten children to support."}
{"id": "x-women-reformation", "title": "Women of the Reformation, from Spain to Scandinavia", "year": 1977, "seq": 1, "text": "One was the romanticizing of marriage. Courtly love was at first extra-matrimonial, though not promiscu\u00ac ous. Prior to the Reformation it was beginning to be conjoined with marriage. And romantic love is obviously an individual affair. The Reformation broke with the authority of the church and at times with the authority of parents. Unity of faith was deemed needful for a successful marriage and since faith was individualized, marriage was personalized. Is there any evidence in these volumes that such was the case? There is some, but an extensive verification of the hypothesis calls for a study of the following century. 12 Preface Of incidental personal interest to me has been the heightened awareness of the interrelations of European society. I knew al\u00ac ready the contacts of the English printers with Basel, the resi\u00ac dence of the Marian exiles on the continent and of the English Recusants in Spain, of the Italians in Geneva and Poland, of the Poles in all of the universities of Europe and of the half dozen nationalities in the Church of the Strangers at London. But I was startled to find that the Italian queen of Poland needed a safe conduct from the queen of England in order to return to her own country. The real point was permission from Philip of Spain and lord also of Naples. He was married to the English queen. Hence the safe conduct was from Philip and Mary. I was surprised to discover that the king of Sweden was bargaining to sell a fleet either to Spain to crush the Netherlands or to the Netherlands to throw off Spain. I had not looked to find Sir Philip Sidney in Cracow, let alone to read a letter from the king of Poland to the Sultan beginning \u201cdearest brother.\" I had not expected to find Lady Russell clandestinely disemmi- nating in England the views of Caspar Schwenckfeld."}
{"id": "x-women-reformation", "title": "Women of the Reformation, from Spain to Scandinavia", "year": 1977, "seq": 2, "text": "Three groups came under attack: the Alumbrados or Illu\u00ac minists, the Erasmians and the Lutherans. The differences be\u00ac tween these three are not to be overdone. The Alumbrados had in common with the Erasmians the view that the rites of the church are valueless as external performances. They agreed with the Lutherans on the worthlessness of good works for the attain\u00ac ment of salvation and on the denial of purgatory and indul\u00ac gences. The big difference was the focusing of their piety on God the Father and the Spirit rather than God the Son. The Luther\u00ac ans, in turn, were not as remote as is often assumed from the Erasmians. The main point of difference was that Erasmus was still in the church whereas Luther had been cast out. The Alumbrados were groups with little formal organization, who met in conventicles under inspired leaders. Their total num- i6 Spain bers were considerable. The constituency drew heavily from three sources: con versos, Franciscans and women. The conversos from Judaism were attracted by a type of Chris\u00ac tianity which did not center on Christ, though his words could be used to justify reliance on the spirit, for did he not say, \u201cIt is the spirit that gives life, the flesh is of no avail\u201d? They could see in his sufferings a foretaste of their own, but. hesitated to call him God save in the sense that there is \u201cthat of God\u201d in all. The oppressed find solace either by way of time or of the timeless. The device of time is to posit surcease in a future age, in a restoration of paradise, when the spirit of the Lord will cover the earth as the waters cover the sea. Spain in this period had many apocalyptic movements, but we find no such dreams among the Alumbrados."}
{"id": "x-women-reformation", "title": "Women of the Reformation, from Spain to Scandinavia", "year": 1977, "seq": 3, "text": "These can be cultivated and increased. The spark may be fanned, the seed sprinkled. Dionysius posited three stages which Alcaraz elaborated as: 1) purification through contrition; 2) illumination through contemplation of God's gifts in creation and redemption. Here he allowed meditation on the passion of Christ, which Isabel rejected; 3) union of the soul with God, the most perfect of the three. 35 Here is an example of what this doctrine meant to him in his own experience. He wrote: It is of God that there is in me no honor or preferment that any should envy, save that God dwells in my heart and works (Italics mine). These are my riches. Though I be but a foul sinner, I question not the goodness of God. I am blessed with the knowledge of the truth and the love of it. In the writings of the saints I have abundant examples and this is why I steep myself in holy exercises to free myself from many ills, to give me good desires and to withdraw me from evil doers. Although it is I that say this, I do so because God has done it, that I may give the glory unto him from whom proceeds every good coming down from the Father of Lights. 30 Some interpreters see in Isabel and Alcaraz anticipations of Luther. To be sure Isabel, like Luther, rejected indulgences, but the reasons were different. Luther's point was that there is abso\u00ac lutely no treasury of the saints transferable by the pope to those in arrears. Isabel stressed rather that, even if there were, to seek from it a benefit for oneself would be abhorrent. There is a measure of similarity between the Alumbrados and the early 24 Isabel cle la Cruz THE CELESTIAL LADDER OF CLIMACUS Climacus was one of the sources of the ideas of Alcaraz and presumably of Isabel."}
{"id": "x-women-reformation", "title": "Women of the Reformation, from Spain to Scandinavia", "year": 1977, "seq": 4, "text": "The spiritualizing of religion was also alien to Luther. The dichotomy of God and man did not carry over into the relation of spirit and body. Therefore in worship he responded to pic\u00ac tures, liturgy and music. Especially when it came to Scripture he would not lay claim to the key of David to unlock the Word through the spirit, regardless of scholarship. Above all, Luther was aghast at such individualizing of religion that corporate forms dissolve into vague fellowships. His word for the spiritual\u00ac ists was Schwdrmer, fanatics. He had in mind the ilk of Denck, Franck, Munster and Schwenckfeld, whom he called Stenckfeld (Stinkfield). What now in the views of Isabel and Alcaraz offended the In\u00ac quisition? Not the mild mysticism of Climacus, Dionysius, Ber\u00ac nard, Bonaventura and Gerson, although the church is always leery of mysticism because it tends to undercut history. Chris\u00ac tianity is a historical religion, arising from an event in time when the Word became flesh. This is a historical event which the mys\u00ac tics tended to transform into a universal experience of the divine in the human. Again the spiritualizing of religion imperils the external structures, prized alike by Wittenberg and Rome. The rejection of established forms of worship, though not heresy, offends popular piety and defies public authority. How seriously this was taken is revealed in the statement of one of the inquisitors, who in the case of Isabel voted for the penalty of death. The arguments which he put into the record were in part traditional. The accused were repeating the heresies of the Beghards and Beguines, of Hus and Wyclif. Another rea\u00ac son, equally current, was that if lese-majesty against an earthly king is worthy of death how much more lese-majesty in the form of heresy against the King of kings!"}
{"id": "x-women-reformation", "title": "Women of the Reformation, from Spain to Scandinavia", "year": 1977, "seq": 5, "text": "She exerted an astounding influence on a circle of men seriously concerned for religion. A number of Franciscans looked upon this untutored lay woman as a miracle-working saint. Her vogue illustrates how easily an intense religious experience can merge with eroticism. She was active first at Salamanca, then at Valladolid. Beyond this our information is largely drawn from testimony before the Inquisition on the part of one of her devo\u00ac tees, the Franciscan Francisco Ortiz. This brief sketch is really more a biography of him than of her, but at the same time re\u00ac veals the catastrophic power of a woman to shatter the career of one of the great preachers of his age. Ortiz thus describes her: \u201cShe was small, fair, winsome and charming, so delicate as to frighten her doctor, for frequently she fainted. In her were combined the air of a child and the wisdom and prudence of heaven. . . . Her eyes were a trifle too merry for a saint. . . . She dressed elegantly to show that piety does not consist in a habit/' For the same reason she did not become a nun, since she agreed with Erasmus that monasticism is not piety. Ortiz had been delivered by her from a grievous affliction. During a period of four years he had been so tormented by erotic dreams and frequent emissions that he made an attempt at sui\u00ac cide. Word reached him that through her miraculous power 28 Fra n risen Hern an dez 29 others had been delivered from a like affliction. He sought her out that he might be cured like the woman in the gospel whose issue of blood was staunched by the Savior. At first Francisca refused to see him but yielded to his importunity when he stayed for a week in her area, persistently renewing his request."}
{"id": "x-women-reformation", "title": "Women of the Reformation, from Spain to Scandinavia", "year": 1977, "seq": 6, "text": "She gathers up all that is known about Fran- cisca. This work supersedes Eduard Boehmer, Franzisca Hernandez und Frai Franzisco Ortiz (Leipzig, 1865), which, however, is not to be over\u00ac looked since it contains informative notes, such as that on the history of the term recogimiento, p. 251 and an excursus on the role of women in church history, pp. 48-52. m ana The Inquisition never ceased to distrust mysticism. The Span\u00ac ish mystics survived by avoiding the errors of the Alumbrados condemned in 1525. The Inquisition then turned to the school of Erasmus whose Dagger of the Christian Soldier in Spanish translation contained much to disparage the external aids to reli\u00ac gion. He did not call for an absolute rejection, but so spiritual\u00ac ized the external as to make it appear superfluous if not detri\u00ac mental. Take this passage from the Dagger, and remember the figure of the ladder dear to Climacus. Do you think you will move God by the blood of a bull or by incense? \u201cThe sacrifices of God are a broken spirit.\u201d You venerate the wood of the cross and have no regard for the mystery of the cross. You fast, refraining from that which does not defile, but you do not refrain from obscene conver\u00ac sation. You adorn a temple of stone, but of what use is this if the temple of the heart is full of abominations? With the mouth you bless, with the heart you curse. You enclose your body in a cell, while your mind wanders over the earth. Creep not upon the earth, my brother, like an animal. Put on those wings which Plato says are caused to grow on the soul by the ardor of love. Rise above the body to the spirit, from the visible to the invisible, from the letter to the mysti- 33 34 Maria Cazalla cal meaning, from the sensible to the intelligible, from the involved to the simple."}
{"id": "x-women-reformation", "title": "Women of the Reformation, from Spain to Scandinavia", "year": 1977, "seq": 7, "text": "Rise as by rungs until you scale the ladder of Jacob. As you draw nigh to the Lord, he will draw nigh unto you. If with all your might you strive to rise above the cloud and clamor of the senses he will descend from light inaccessible and that silence which passes understanding in which not only the tumult of the senses is still, but the images of all intelligible things keep silence. One can understand why in an atmosphere of paranoia the works of Erasmus were placed in toto on the Index by Pope Paul IV and in part by the Council of Trent. Among the Spanish Erasmians investigated by the Inquisition only one woman have I been able to discover. The reason may well be that while his piety would attract, his scholarship might repel. He would scoff at looking for a spiritual interpretation of a text which was not so much as to be found in the manuscripts of the Bible. This is not to say that women as a whole had no interest in such questions. Those who did were the products of Renaissance education and there were few such in the toils of the Spanish Inquisition. The exception was Maria Cazalla. Even she was not concerned for all matters of scholarship, but only for those which minis\u00ac tered to piety. Take the debate about the three Marys, whether Mary Magdalene, Mary the sister of Martha and the woman that was a sinner were one person or three. Maria would leave that to the judgment of Mother Church. And she would have left Erasmus also to the judgment of Mother Church had he at that time been condemned. Seeing that the translation of his work had passed the scrutiny of the Grand Inquisitor, she could say there was not a jot or tittle contrary to the gospels in the works of Erasmus. \u201cI hold what Erasmus holds, because Erasmus holds what Holy Mother Church holds/\u2019 The local inquisitors nonetheless pried into her views on Erasmian tenets."}
{"id": "x-women-reformation", "title": "Women of the Reformation, from Spain to Scandinavia", "year": 1977, "seq": 8, "text": "Had she said that in the act of conjugal union one can be closer to God than in prayer? This was a charge brought several times against Alcaraz and may have been applied to her simply because she was regarded as his disciple. Her answer was a trifle ambiguous. Maria Cazalla 37 She had had pleasure with her husband, but it was possible to procreate without carnal pleasure. A particularly heinous offense was ascribed to her that, though a woman . she had dared to preach. Among others Alcaraz had made this accusation, saying that she was arrogant, presumptuous and inspired by self love. She had preached to conventicles, he said. She replied that no conventicles had met in her house. This left open the possibility that they might have met in some other house. After compiling the charges and her responses the inquisitors decided to put her to the torture. \u201cWhy do you need to torture me?\u201d she asked. \u201cI have told the truth and can say no more.\u201d She was taken to the torture chamber and informed that if she were killed, or maimed or bled, the fault would not be theirs. She was ordered to disrobe. \u201cYou do this to a woman? I dread more the affront than the pain.\u201d When stripped, she cast down her eyes. The torture took two forms. One consisted in tying cords around the thighs and arms with a belt around the waist from which in front cords went up over the shoulders and down to the belt in the back. Tourniquets dug the cords into the flesh at any point of the body. The other method was the water torture. The victim was bound to a trestle like a ladder with sharp rungs. The head was lower than the feet. The head was clamped immobile and the mouth pried open."}
{"id": "x-women-reformation", "title": "Women of the Reformation, from Spain to Scandinavia", "year": 1977, "seq": 9, "text": "But she was insistent and he became reconciled. She was then twenty. 3 Now began a quarter of a century of wrestling with the angel, questing to experience the presence of God, to be utterly united with him in the bond of unfeigned love. The way was tortuous with risings and fallings in the course of a steady progression. She delineated the stages by the analogy of the modes of filling the cisterns. 4 The first was laboriously to draw water from a well with a bucket and a rope. The next was to employ one of those little Moorish windlasses in use on every Castillian farm. This was easier than the first and harder than the third which was to dip a pan into a living stream and the water would be purer than in any well. The fourth stage was to lay out vessels in the open to catch the rain coming down from above. The first three involved degrees of human effort. The last was solely the gift of God. Her fourfold scheme is not that of the traditional demarcation of the stations along the mystic way of purification, illumination and unification. She was familiar with the pattern but like other mystics did not relish geometrical precision. Yet her delineation Teresa of Avila 49 of her spiritual struggles corresponds very well with the threefold course. The first is purification. It affects the body and even more the soul and spirit which are not to be distinguished. In the case of the body, the object is by disciplined living to subdue the lusts of the flesh, the gratification of passion, the coddlings of com\u00ac fort. The extreme device is the mortification of the flesh through self-inflicted pain, the wearing of hair shirts, flagellation, fasting. Teresa did not absolutely eschew such methods and used them herself to a degree but mortifications were not of themselves an end in her eyes and should not be taken to excess to the detri\u00ac ment of health."}
{"id": "montanas199798waterpol00montrich", "title": "Montana's water policy -- 1997-98: an EQC communique to the Montana Legislature : working draft", "year": 1998, "seq": 0, "text": "Interpretive guidance has not been prepared, so many are wondering the extent of its sweep. According to FWP staff, the FWS has one person assigned to bull trout consultation and recovery in Montana. This person, though very experienced, has a very big job. According to FWP staff, he is focussing his current efforts on working with the Forest Service, as these lands are where the FWS feels they can get the biggest conservation \"bang for the buck\" in Montana. With any listing, there is encouragement of developing pooled conservation plans, rather than a plan for each \"incidental take\" permit needed. Questions loom as to; potential impacts to 310 projects, water diversions, the extent of \"adjoining\" associated with \"uplands\" in subsection (7) of the rule, the definition of discharge of \"silt\" in subsection (6), etc. There may be answers to many of these interpretive questions by looking at experiences with other listed species, but Montana has many questions at this point. There are a few things Montana is doing, however. The FWP is moving forward under a special section of the ESA to get their fisheries-related projects approved under the Act (for state fish and wildlife agencies only). They are also moving forward on their westslope cutthroat trout recovery plan, with the hope that early movement will avoid a \"warranted for listing\" finding fi-om the FWS next year. The range for this species is basically, the west slope, plus the upper Missouri drainage. FWP is also considering moving forward on a Yellowstone cutthroat plan (headwaters to just above Billings), which may have even more likelihood of approval, since there has been no court action on this species yet. The FWS appears to be trying to support these state-initiated efforts, as long as court decisions do not \"force their hand\" in these matters."}
{"id": "montanas199798waterpol00montrich", "title": "Montana's water policy -- 1997-98: an EQC communique to the Montana Legislature : working draft", "year": 1998, "seq": 1, "text": "McCarthy) are currently included in the six-member Montana delegation to the Council. Relevant Federal Activities Related to Water \u2022 On October 18, 1997, Vice President Gore announced a set of Clean Water Initiatives to celebrate the 25th anniversary of the Clean Water Act. This directed federal agencies to develop a comprehensive Action Plan within 120 days to improve water pollution control efforts across the country. President Clinton also addressed the new initiatives in his 1998 State of the Union address. His budget proposal for FY99 includes $145 million of new funding for a new Clean Water Action Plan to prevent polluted runoff, as well as protect and restore critical watersheds. . Updates of action items and proposed budget items for the Clean Water Action Plan can be accessed at a new EPA web page: (http://www.epa.gov/cleanwater). \u2022 Also associated with the Clean Water Action Plan, the Environmental Protection Agency 15 released for public comment a draft stratei^y for additional controls on animal feedlot runoff. The draft called for new water pollution control requirements, immediate inspections znd.0 increased enforcement for larger animal feeding operations. EPA intended to foster a dialogue between the regulated community and other members of the public on how to better protect public health and the environment, as well as encourage voluntary actions. News articles following the issue of this draft indicated concern among livestock owners about the implications of these new regulations. An EPA and Department of Agriculture joint draft was expected in July, with final regulations slated for November, 1998. Updated information on this plan can be accessed through the EPA web page: (http://www.epa.gov/owmitnet/afo.htm). In October, 1997, the Western Water Policy Review Advisory Commission (Commission) presented a draft report for public review, culminating two years of research, field investigation, public discussion, and commission deliberation. The Commission was appointed by President Clinton under the Westem Water Policy Review Act of 1992."}
{"id": "montanas199798waterpol00montrich", "title": "Montana's water policy -- 1997-98: an EQC communique to the Montana Legislature : working draft", "year": 1998, "seq": 2, "text": "Forest Service 16 assisted District-hired contractors in stabilizing the dam. The spillway channel was lowered 10 feet and a rock buttress was constructed on the downstream side of the dam. Phase 2 of this project began in late August and is continuing. Land Use-Related Issues \u2022 The stream access issue received some coverage in the papers during spring and summer of 1997. Some property owners in the Ruby River area reportedly began raising funds to finance a legal challenge of Montana's stream access law in federal court. Advocates of stream access formed a counter-challenge group, and raised awareness of the issue by holding a \"protest float\" on the Ruby. The issue was twofold: stream access in general, and the more specific concern of access to rivers at County bridges. In June of 1998, FWP issued a request for an Attorney General's opinion on stream access firom road rights-of-way at bridges. As of July, 1998, the opinion had not been issued nor (regarding the broader issue) was a legal challenge filed. (On a related topic, the counter-challenge group is currently discussing with sportsmens' groups, legislators and FWP, the viability of proposed river management legislation similar to that introduced to the 1997 legislature.) \u2022 On March 30, 1998 a major landslide entered the Blackfoot River, blocking 200 yards of river two miles upstream firom River Junction campground, southeast of Ovando. The landslide involved 15 acres owned by a timber company. It was later determined by DEQ officials that the landslide was caused naturally, and not directly by human activity. State officials planned to stabilize the slide by planting willows and other riparian greens, but otherwise left the landslide alone. Meanwhile, the state alerted river floaters by placing warning signs at access points upstream fi-om the landslide. \u2022 During the 1997 legislative session, the Montana Consensus Council was asked by a group of legislators to assess trends, issues, and concerns related to development pressure and management along Montana's stream corridors."}
{"id": "montanas199798waterpol00montrich", "title": "Montana's water policy -- 1997-98: an EQC communique to the Montana Legislature : working draft", "year": 1998, "seq": 3, "text": "Each vmteup also includes a series of staff- or presenter- generated options for further Council analysis and comment, and a space for any recommendations made. (Please Note: These writeups are intended as intermediate versions \u2014 to stimulate further Council analysis and comment, and any recommendations that may be relevant. It is intended that, based upon full-Council review in September, and resulting conclusions and recommendations, these sections could be shortened, to make their overall treatment more succinct.) STATE WATER PLAN Section 85-2-105(3), MCA, requires the EQC to: (a).. .analyze and comment on the state water plan required by 85-1-203, [MCA] when filed by the department... Section 85-1-203, MCA, also describes necessary components and procedures of the State Water Plan process: 26 (2) The department shall formulate and adopt and amend, extend, or add to a comprehensive, coordinated multiple-use water resources plan known as the \"state water plan\"... The state water plan must set out a 0 progressive program for the conservation, development, and utilization of the state's water resources and propose the most effective means by which these water resources may be applied for the benefit of the people, with due consideration of arternative uses and combinations of uses. Before adopting the state water plan or any section of the plan, the department shall hold public hearings in the state or in an area of the state encompassed by a section of the plan if adoption of a section is proposed. (3) The department shall submit to the environmental quality council. ..and to the legislature at the beginning of each regular session the state water plan or any section of the plan or amendments, additions, or revisions to the plan that the department has formulated and adopted. (4) The legislature, by joint resolution, may revise the state water plan... (7) In developing and revising the state water plan as provided in this section, the department shall consult with the environmental quality council established in 5-16-101 and solicit the advice of the committee in carrying out its duties under this section."}
{"id": "montanas199798waterpol00montrich", "title": "Montana's water policy -- 1997-98: an EQC communique to the Montana Legislature : working draft", "year": 1998, "seq": 4, "text": "Moy believed it did. Another member commented that this was an opportunity to better coordinate between water quality and water quantity. The Subcommittee began in this capacity at their June meeting. (Comments on the Chapter to be summarized later...) The Water Policy Subcommittee as State Water Plan Advisory Committee for 1997-98. As noted above, the Water Policy Subcommittee granted a request by DNRC that they serve as the State Water Plan Advisory committee for the 1997-98 Interim. This involved the following steps and results: (EQC staff to summarize efforts/comments/questions related to Ground Water Chapter. The Subcommittee and/or Council may wish to insert recommendations and/or comments on the result, f^ depending on progress achieved by working group/DNRC. 31 Options for Further Council Analysis and Comment on the State Water Plan 1. Regarding composition and oversight of the State Water Plan (SWP), the Council and/or Water Policy Subcommittee could continue to serve as the SWT Advisory Committee. Presuming such Subcommittees were created by subsequent Council's, they could serve as the focal point for review and comment in the development of the plan sections, but the full EQC involvement would be needed for final discussion and approval of each plan section. 2. The EQC or the Subcommittee could designate water policy issues which DNRC could take through the State Water Plarming process. 3. The Governor's MOU which was signed by the directors of 22 state and federal agencies is designated to enhance effective and efficient coordination among these agencies with the goal of providing better service and assistance to local watershed groups in Montana. The MOU is being implemented, in part, by the Montana Watershed Coordination Council which consists of professional staff fi-om these above agencies. The key ingredient missing fi^om the implementation of the MOU is the active coordination and involvement of the directors that signed the MOU and representatives of the Governor's Office."}
{"id": "montanas199798waterpol00montrich", "title": "Montana's water policy -- 1997-98: an EQC communique to the Montana Legislature : working draft", "year": 1998, "seq": 5, "text": "Patton remarked that GWIC routinely sends data to various groups and that coordination is a Steering Committee issue addressed at each meeting. Options for Further Council Analysis and Comment on Water Research 1. The Montana chapter of the American Water Resources Association's annual meeting is planned for October. This gathering brings together water-related researchers and practitioners from across the state to present their work and discuss the work of others. EQC and/or Water Center staff could request and facilitate an agenda item at the upcoming meeting, tailored to further addressing the question of what should be the priorities for water research in Montana. This could be used to supplement Ms. Bradley's e-mail questionnaire, or to focus on other questions the Council would like the group to address (related to Ms, Bradley's request for guidance from the EQC, or otherwise). 2. Regarding the issue related to lack of predictability (and level) of funding for the Ground Water Assessment Program, the Council could request an update on any known proposals to restructure the RIT accounts, and provide input to those proposals. Or, individual Council members could track any such proposals during the Legislative session, to determine whether to integrate the ground water program issue into the deliberations. 3. In their role as the State Water Plan Advisory Council for this Interim, the Water Policy Subcommittee could ensure in their review of the proposed Ground_Water chapter of the State Water Plan that it appropriately address any research-related roles already set forth in public policy, or recommend that be the case. 4. Their have been murmurings of Legislator intent to eliminate the funding for the Ground Water Assessment program all together. The Council could attempt to determine whether those proposals are still active, and determine whether they wished to take a position (either collectively, or individually) on such a proposal. 5."}
{"id": "montanas199798waterpol00montrich", "title": "Montana's water policy -- 1997-98: an EQC communique to the Montana Legislature : working draft", "year": 1998, "seq": 6, "text": "Stimson has continued to coordinate with several committees, increasing data sharing and reducing 46 duplication of effort among such groups as the Watershed Coordination Council, Wetlands Coordination Council, Volunteer Water Monitoring Advisory Group and Drought Monitoring Committee. ^ Water Information System staff are continuing their efforts to enhance the content and accessibility of the System by: 1. Improving water supply/drought monitoring capabilities by providing maps monitoring precipitation and soil moisture conditions statewide with the continued assistance of DNRC and the National Weather Service 2. Supporting development of base-level information on Montana's Wetlands by revitalizing efforts to complete the National Wetland Inventory for Montana and creating a wetland clearinghouse web page to notify users that this information is available. 3. Developing easy-to-use GIS Applications to support and improve management of water-related information. This includes providing the capability for Internet users to develop and print out their own maps using GIS information, and the possibility for Intranet use of information within an agency. Currently this software exists on a six-month trial basis. Challenges and Issues facing the Water Information System include: 1. Replacing the Palmer Drought Severity Index maps. Improved data availability and ftinding to ^ calculate the replacement index locally are needed. Water Information staff will continue to work with the DNRC and other cooperators on this issue. 2. A mobile computer lab is needed to support training of state agency persormel and citizen groups on the use of geographic information systems, databases, and the Internet for water-related applications like volunteer water monitoring, watershed management, and TMDL education and outreach. NRIS is exploring grant and contract opportunities to help meet this need. Council members were invited to visit the NRIS site at the library. Council Analysis and Comment A Council member questioned how many potential users would have the necessary software to be able to use the information."}
{"id": "montanas199798waterpol00montrich", "title": "Montana's water policy -- 1997-98: an EQC communique to the Montana Legislature : working draft", "year": 1998, "seq": 7, "text": "The report summarized the Committee's final action of 1990 as well as the University System Action Summary. The three-page report is attached. (The purpose of this outline is to Identify the various studies which have focused on an upgraded Water Resources Center. This outline by no means does justice to the groups' efforts, and the quality and detail of their recommendations. Complete copies are available at the Water Center for those desiring more information.) Dorothy Bradley, Director Montana University System Water Resources Center October 1994^ , Section 8. - Water Research Introduction Since its creation in 1985, the Water Policy Committee has considered the question - How can water research best serve Montana? Despite progress this interim, to a large extent, a satisfactory answer remains elusive. Last interim, the Committee made the following recommendations regarding water research in general and the Water Resources Center specifically: 1990 Final Action Vie Wcuer Policy Committee endorses a strong and effective Water Resources Center. The Committee believes that before the legislature increases its commitment to water research and the Water Resources Center, the university system must demonstrate its commitment to these important state issues. At a minimum, the university system should restructure the Center charter to reflect the following goals: a. The Water Center should become vitally involved in all water issues in Montana. b. The Water Center should foster and nurture a network of water researchers and water research users in the state. c. The Water Center should become the focus of water research in Montana. d. The Water Center should pursue externally funded research through an aggressive grant proposal writing program. e. The Water Center should facilitate the development of academic programs in water resources. f. The Water Center should maintain an aggressive information transfer program. Additionally, the university system should provide increased funding to allow the Center to move towards the attainment of these goals."}
{"id": "montanas199798waterpol00montrich", "title": "Montana's water policy -- 1997-98: an EQC communique to the Montana Legislature : working draft", "year": 1998, "seq": 8, "text": "TransTJortation Ground- Water Assessment Program: Status Report Environmental Quality Council May 8, 1998 Program History The Legislature established the Ground- Water Assessment Program (85-2-901 et seq.) in 1991 after considering the recommendations of a Ground- Water Task Force organized by the Environmental Quality Council in 1989. Within the Assessment Program, it specifically created the Ground-Water Monitoring and Ground-Water Characterization efforts as mechanisms to improve imderstanding of Montana's ground-water resources. As part of the mandate to make ground-water information more available, the Assessment Program includes the Ground-Water Information Center databases at the Montana Bureau of Mines and Geology. The Legislature also created a Steering Committee to address the need for better coordination among the state, federal and local government imits and to oversee progress in the program. Ground-Water Information Center (GWIC) The data collected by the Characterization and Monitoring Programs would be of little use if not properly handled and made easily available. Our only view of the ground- water resource is through the borehole, and by interpreting measurements made at wells. All data gathered by the Monitoring or Characterization Programs are immediately stored in GWIC and become available for use by the people of Montana. Other agencies such as the Department of Natural Resources and Conservation use GWIC as a location to archive project data such as that fi-om their recently completed Flint Creek Return Flow Study or the Beaverhead Groimd- Water Study. To address the problems shown below, the Legislature decided to \"systematically assess and monitor the state 's ground water and to disseminate the information...\" 85-2-902(2) MCA. The Legislature recognized that ground-water information is the key to dealing with these problems. \"Montana's citizens depend on groimd water...\" \"groimd- water supplies are threatened...\" \"there is insufficient information characterizing...\" \"ground-water information deficiencies are hampering..\". \"...focus on preventing ground-water contamination... but better ground-water information is required\" \"there is a need for better coordination among those numerous units of state, federal, and local government...\" (85-2-902(1) MCA) Information Center staff update records in the Ground-Water Information Center (GWIC) databases daily."}
{"id": "mls_f6.03slscatalog.1992", "title": "Language School bulletin, 1992", "year": 1992, "seq": 0, "text": "The Language Schools are at the forefront of innova- tion in language teaching. Our language laboratory and computer center represent state-of-the-art technology. Our Master of Modern Languages degree prepares teachers to teach two foreign languages or a foreign language and English. In addition to our regular programs we hold workshops and institutes on topics such as teaching for proficiency and the new technologies. During the academic year, Middlebury College offers a baccalaureate curriculum which is unusually rich in op- portunities for language study. These opportunities in- clude intense and varied programs in Chinese, French, German, Classical Greek, Italian, Latin, Japanese, Russian and Spanish. Enrollments in language courses are particu- larly high. Middlebury also has a high percentage of lan- guage-proficient juniors studying abroad. Many double and joint majors involve advanced language study. The international major enables students in fields other than languages and literature to demonstrate functional foreign language competence by taking advanced courses in their disciplines at a Middlebury school abroad. Middlebury College thus in fact is an international uni- versity with a student body of international orientation. Faculty and program directors represent prestigious uni- versities here and abroad. Rather than a narrowly defined \"language school\" we see ourselves as a school for lan- guage. We believe that successful study of a language in its cultural context belongs in the mainstream of any curricu- lum as one of the most enlightening and humanizing activi- ties in which one can engage. Middlebury Language Pledge: Language Schools students make a formal commitment to use the foreign language as the only means of communication during the entire session. The pledge, strictly enforced, plays a major role in the success of the program, as both a symbol of one's commit- ment and an essential part of the language learning process itself."}
{"id": "mls_f6.03slscatalog.1992", "title": "Language School bulletin, 1992", "year": 1992, "seq": 1, "text": "Summer in Vermont Middlebury College sits on a hill overlooking a small Vermont town to the east, and the rolling countryside of the Champlain Valley to the west. The campus, self-contained yet only a short walk from town, is especially suited to the Language Schools and their unified approach to learning. Students and faculty live in dormitories assigned to their schools and take meals in dining halls where only the language of study is spoken. The summer climate is usually delightful, with warm days and cool nights. Classes meet in the morning and early afternoon. The schools reserve late afternoons, evenings, and weekends for social and cultural events including plays, films, lectures, concerts, amateur nights, and other enriching diversions from the academi- cally rigorous program. Such activities center on the use of the foreign language and often involve active student par- ticipation in planning and performance. Campus facilities include Starr Library, which houses extensive foreign language collections, and the Music Li- brary with over 10,000 recordings. The Freeman Language Laboratory has individual and group facilities and a large selection of audio and video materials to assist students in the development of their skills. The Ballenger Computer Center offers computer facilities for word processing in a variety of languages. Students can become involved in foreign language programming at the College's radio sta- tion, and make use of a wide range of audio-visual equip- ment, including a video studio, for class projects. Middlebury College's athletic facilities include an 18- hole golf course, a field house, an indoor pool, eighteen outdoor and eleven indoor tennis courts, racquetball and squash courts, and a fully equipped fitness center. There are jogging, running, and bicycling trails around the campus and in the surrounding countryside. 4 5 German at Middlebury In German, graduate and undergraduate courses are of- fered during the summer on the Vermont campus, and during the academic year, graduate and junior year study is offered at the Middlebury School in Mainz."}
{"id": "mls_f6.03slscatalog.1992", "title": "Language School bulletin, 1992", "year": 1992, "seq": 2, "text": "All programs of study emphasize both the development of language skills and the understanding of German culture. Classes from beginning courses through the doctoral level are taught in German, and all summer programs are intensive. Students may enroll in courses in one language school only and normally enroll in courses at one level only. We deter- mine placement by language proficiency rather than by length of previous exposure to the language. A summer at the Language Schools is an intensive one by design. Students can expect to spend approximately four to six hours per day in class, drill, and laboratory, in addition to other homework. Because English is not al- lowed, it can also be strenuous and even stressful, particu- larly for students attending for the first time. All students should come rested and in good physical and mental shape. Intensive language programs in Arabic, Chinese, French, Italian, Japanese, Russian and Spanish, and gradu- ate programs and opportunities for study abroad in French, Italian, Russian and Spanish are described in the bulletins of the respective schools. Graduate Degrees Master of Arts: Candidates for the degree of Master of Arts must hold a baccalaureate degree or equivalent from an accredited institution of higher education. Students must successfully complete a preliminary summer in Vermont before being officially accepted to degree candidacy. A highly qualified undergraduate stu- dent may accumulate a maximum of six graduate units toward a Middlebury M.A. degree before receipt of the B.A. degree or equivalent, but these units may not count toward both degrees. The M.A. degree in German requires twelve courses to be taken over a series of summers on the Vermont campus or in a combination of a summer in Vermont and an academic year in Mainz. It is designed as a broadly-based program of study in itself, rather than as the first stage of a doctoral program."}
{"id": "mls_f6.03slscatalog.1992", "title": "Language School bulletin, 1992", "year": 1992, "seq": 3, "text": "Financial Aid Middlebury College offers financial assistance toa substan- tial percentage of students attending the summer sessions and the graduate academic year programs abroad. Aid for the summer is in the form of grant and /or work. Loans may also be available to students enrolled in a Middlebury College degree program. Aid for the academic year abroad is in the form of grant and loan. (Please note:Financial aid for study abroad is not avaliable to undergraduates from other institutions. Consult the financial aid office at your home institution.) Financial aid is offered on the basis of financial need as determined by the Office of Financial Aid. The Language Schools Financial Aid Application and current federal tax returns are the primary documents used in determining eligibility, although additional information may also be requested. If you are not a U.S. citizens, a permanent resident alien, or a Canadian citizen, you should also complete the Foreign Student Financial Aid Form, which is available from the Office of Financial Aid. Our financial aid budget is limited and does run out, so you should send a COMPLETE application to the office of Financial Aid as soon as possible after January 1, 1992 to insure the best possible chance of receiving aid. A complete application includes all relevant documents as listed on the checklist on the first page of the Language Schools Financial Aid application. We will begin reviewing your application for completeness upon receipt of the first document you send. Aid decisions for students going abroad are made at the same time as those for students in the summer session; 8 9 we will make aid decisions on a rolling basis for those students whose applications are complete AND who have been accepted for admission. The only cost for the academic year which is payable to Middlebury College is tuition."}
{"id": "mls_f6.03slscatalog.1992", "title": "Language School bulletin, 1992", "year": 1992, "seq": 4, "text": "After successfully completing three courses at the summer session of the German School, M. A. candidates take at least ten courses, most of them in Fachbereich 13 (Deutsche Philologie, Vergleichende Literaturwissenschaft , Theaterwissenschaft and Volkskunde ) at the Johannes Guten- berg-Universitat. With the permission of the Director of Studies, courses may be taken in related areas such as philosophy, history, political science, economics or art history. Any student who passes fewer than four courses in either semester may be asked to withdraw from the pro- gram. Graduate students are required to write four papers each semester and will be tested in a fifth course. Students submit a copy of each paper to the Director of Studies for inclusion in a Middlebury portfolio. The Director's judg- ment of each student's portfolio of papers will play a major role in the decision to award the M.A. degree. Each year the Johannes Gutenberg-Universitat awards a scholarship to a Middlebury College graduate student who is an American citizen. In addition, one graduate student is nominated for a DA AD fellowship funded by the German government. The Junior Program In order to qualify for the Junior Program, undergraduates must have junior standing and an average of B or better, plus at least two courses above the Middlebury College GN 201-202 level. Non-Middlebury College students normally meet this requirement during a preliminary summer on the Vermont campus. Juniors may enroll for the Sommerse- mester , the W intersemester, or the entire academic year. Juniors enroll in four courses for credit and write papers for at least three of these. The bulk of the students' work will be 18 19 in the Deutsches Institut , but juniors, especially those major- ing in departments other than German, may take one course in an area other than language and literature. Mid- dlebury welcomes applications from undergraduates en- rolled at other colleges and universities."}
{"id": "mls_f6.03slscatalog.1992", "title": "Language School bulletin, 1992", "year": 1992, "seq": 5, "text": "The Language Schools are at the forefront of innova- tion in language teaching. Our language laboratory and computer center represent state-of-the-art technology. Our Master of Modern Languages degree prepares teachers to teach two foreign languages or a foreign language and English. Our Doctor of Modern Language degree offers a combination of scholarly and practical training, and is conferred upon those who have demonstrated ability in research and teaching in two foreign languages. In addition to our regular programs we hold workshops and institutes on topics such as teaching for proficiency and the new technologies. During the academic year, Middlebury College offers a baccalaureate curriculum in the liberal arts which is un- usually rich in opportunities for language study. These op- portunities include intensive and varied programs in Chi- nese, French, German, Classical Greek, Italian, Latin, Japa- nese, Russian and Spanish. Middlebury also has a high per- centage of language-proficient juniors studying abroad. Many double and joint majors involve advanced language study. The international major enables students in fields other than languages and literature to demonstrate func- tional foreign language competence by taking advanced courses in their disciplines at a Middlebury school abroad. At Middlebury we believe that study of a foreign language in its cultural context , and study of a discipline in a foreign language and from the perspective of another culture, are among the most enlightening and humanizing activities in which one can engage. As such, they occupy an essential place in any liberal arts curriculum. Admission as an undergraduate to Middlebury College's baccalaureate program is entirely separate from admission to one of the Language Schools. Students wishing to apply for admission to the baccalaureate program may receive information and appli- cation materials by writing to: Dean of Admissions, The Emma Willard House, Middlebury College, Middlebury, VT 05753-6002. 4 5 Middlebury Language Pledge Language Schools students make a formal commitment to use the foreign language of study as the only means of communication during the entire session."}
{"id": "mls_f6.03slscatalog.1992", "title": "Language School bulletin, 1992", "year": 1992, "seq": 6, "text": "This pledge, strictly enforced, plays a major role in the success of the pro- gram, as both a symbol of one's commitment and an essen- tial part of the language learning process itself. A summer at the Language Schools is an intensive one by design. Students can expect to spend approximately four to six hours per day in class, drill, and laboratory, in addition to other homework. Because English is not al- lowed, it can also be strenuous and even stressful, particu- larly for students attending for the first time. All students should come rested and in good physical and mental shape. Summer in Vermont Middlebury College sits on a hill overlooking a small Vermont town to the east, and the rolling countryside of the Champlain Valley to the west. The campus, self-contained yet only a short walk from town, is especially suited to the Language Schools and their unified approach to learning. Students and faculty live in dormitories assigned to their schools and take meals in dining halls where only the language of study is spoken. The summer climate is usually delightful, with warm days and cool nights. Classes meet in the morning and early afternoon. The schools reserve late afternoons, evenings, and weekends for social and cultural events including plays, films, lectures, concerts, amateur nights, and other enriching diversions from the academi- cally rigorous program. Such activities center on the use of the foreign language and often involve active student par- ticipation in planning and performance. Campus facilities include Starr Library, which houses extensive foreign language collections, and the Music Li- brary with over 10,000 recordings. The Freeman Language Laboratory has individual and group facilities and a large selection of audio and video materials to assist students in the development of their skills. The Ballenger Computer Center offers computer facilities for word processing in a variety of languages."}
{"id": "mls_f6.03slscatalog.1992", "title": "Language School bulletin, 1992", "year": 1992, "seq": 7, "text": "The faculty: student ratio in the summer is approximately 1:6. The School in France has programs designed for undergraduates wishing to spend their junior year in Paris and for graduates who complete their M.A. degree with an academic year in Paris. Academic Program Credits A full summer program of study is roughly equivalent to three college semester courses. Credit is defined in terms of units with one unit equivalent to three semester hours.The courses numbered 100-499 offered in the seven-week ses- sion normally carry a total of three units. The full six-week graduate session, levels 501-900, is open to students work- ing towards a Master's degree, a doctoral degree, or the degree of Master of Modern Languages. It is comprised of three graduate courses for a total of three units of credit. For transfer purposes, the student's home institution determines how many graduate or undergraduate credits it will grant for the summer's work at Middlebury. Middle- bury College considers the academic year abroad equiva- lent to an academic year in the U.S., but a student's home in- stitution determines the number of credits it will ultimately award for work abroad. Undergraduates are therefore urged to discuss the question of transfer credits with their advi- sors before leaving their own campus. All credits to be applied towards a Middlebury de- gree must be earned within a ten year period. The Middle- bury College Language Schools do not calculate grade point average or class rank. Graduate Degrees Master of Arts Candidates for the degree of Master of Arts must hold a baccalaureate degree or equivalent from an accredited institution of higher education. They must also have com- pleted course work equivalent to a major in French. Highly qualified undergraduate students may accumulate a maxi- mum of six graduate course units toward a Middlebury M.A. degree before receiving their B.A. degree, but these units may not count toward both degrees."}
{"id": "mls_f6.03slscatalog.1992", "title": "Language School bulletin, 1992", "year": 1992, "seq": 8, "text": "Financial Aid Middlebury College offers financial assistance to a substan- tial percentage of students attending the summer sessions and the graduate academic year programs abroad. Aid for the summer is in the form of grant and/or work. Loans may also be available to students enrolled in a Middlebury College degree program. Aid for the academic year abroad is in the form of grant and loan. (Please note: Financial aid for study abroad is not available to undergraduates from other institutions. Consult the financial aid office at your home institution.) Financial aid is offered on the basis of financial need as determined by the Office of Financial Aid. The Language Schools Financial Aid Application and current federal tax returns are the primary documents used in determining eligibility, although additional information may also be requested. If you are not a U.S. citizen, a permanent resident alien, or a Canadian citizen, you should also complete the Foreign Student Financial Aid Form, which is available from the Office of Financial Aid. Our financial aid budget is limited and does run out, so you should send a COMPLETE application to the office of Financial Aid as soon as possible after January 1, 1992 to insure the best possible chance of receiving aid. A complete application includes all relevant documents as listed on the checklist on the first page of the Language Schools Financial Aid application. We will begin reviewing your application for completeness upon receipt of the first document you send. Aid decisions for students going abroad are made at 8 9 the same time as those for students in the summer session; we will make aid decisions on a rolling basis for those students whose applications are complete AND who have been accepted in the School. The only cost for the academic year that is payable to Middlebury College is tuition."}
{"id": "mls_f6.03slscatalog.1992", "title": "Language School bulletin, 1992", "year": 1992, "seq": 9, "text": "To obtain a language school application, call the language school to which you are applying. Scholarships The following scholarships honor students, friends or fac- ulty of the French School: The Frieda Derdeyn Bambas Scholarship, The Lea Z. Binand Scholarship Fund, The Stella Christie Scholarship Fund , The French Center in New England Fund, L' Amicale (French School Alumni Associa- tion) Scholarship Fund, The Claude Levy Scholarship Fund, and The James Richardson Scholarship Fund. The Lois Behrman Watson '51 Scholarship fund was established in 1987 to provide financial aid to teachers who are attending the Masters or Doctoral program of any of the Language Schools on the Middlebury campus or at the schools abroad. Candidates for financial aid need not apply for a specific scholarship. We will automatically consider all financial aid applicants for an award from the appropriate scholar- ship listed above or from the general grant fund. Award The Frieda Derdeyn Bambas Prize in French Literary Stud- ies is awarded annually to a student who has a grade point average of at least 3.5 and who has demonstrated excellence in French literary studies, preferably of the medieval, ren- aissance, or neo-classical period. Fees A non-refundable fee of $40 must accompany each new student's application. Upon acceptance, all students must pay a $180 enrollment deposit to be applied to the tuition charges. This deposit guarantees a place in the school, but will be refunded in full provided that students notify the school in writing by May 1, 1992 of their decision to cancel their enrollment. After May 1 st and until registration at the summer session, students who cancel will lose the enroll- ment fee, but receive a refund for any other payments made. Other refunds are subject to the schedule published in the Language Schools Handbook mailed to enrolled stu- dents in May. The extra course fee for the six week session is $815."}
{"id": "the-bible-and-the-bermuda-triangle", "title": "The Bible And The Bermuda Triangle", "year": 1976, "seq": 0, "text": "CAT could possibly explain the loss of some of the light planes in the Bermuda Triangle, tearing them apart accord- ing to the amount of pressure exerted (the G factor) or suddenly forming a vacuum and dropping the plane into the sea. . . . Nevertheless, it is doubtful that sudden pressure change could have been the reason for all of the many planes lost in the Triangle and could have knocked out their radio communications as well.\u201d \u00ae a. TSUNAMIS\u2014These huge waves are caused by earth- quake disturbances. They have been known to reach a height of two hundred feet. The giant waves can come with- out warning and can easily sink a ship. Not only do small ships sink, but larger ones have been known to break in half from the tension. @ | The USS Ramapo on February 6, 1963 reported one wave 112 feet high. Underwater landslides can cause huge waves (seiche). 14 the Bermuda Triangle _ The Spray was Joshua Slocum\u2019s boat, on which he sailed into oblivion in November, 1909. Photo: Courtesy, The Mariners Museum, Newport News, Va. a The Bible and These are caused by the pulling apart of a fault in the Karth\u2019s crust. These waves, though smaller in height, are more deceptive. They have great amounts of powerful tides of water built up behind them. Such a wave could smash a ship and leave its wreckage strewn over long distances, losing parts of it as it travels. Could these sudden waves be the cause of some of the disappearances? ) road The Ancient Past PLATO\u2019S ATLANTIC ACCOUNT\u2014The mystery surround- ing the Bermuda Triangle is ancient and legendary. Plato told of a lost continent in the Atlantic four hundred years before Christ. - His account came from an earlier one written by Solon, an Athenian statesman, which describes a conversation be- tween Egyptian priests and Solon on one of his frequent visits to Egypt."}
{"id": "the-bible-and-the-bermuda-triangle", "title": "The Bible And The Bermuda Triangle", "year": 1976, "seq": 1, "text": "It has an average thickness of 30 miles. This was the original earth. The crust was caused by volcanic,\u2019 seismic and mountain upheavals according to Henry M. Morris in The Genesis Flood (p. 219). 33 The Bible and structures as the Columbian Plateau and the Canadian Shield. ~ ; THE COLUMBIA PLATEAU\u2014In Washington and Oregon remains of an enormous volcanic eruption cover two hundred thousand square miles with a lava flow two thousand feet thick in some places. This happened in recent geological history because some of the old peaks rise out of this lava bed. . : CANADIAN SHIELD\u2014There are many great volcanic shields in the world, and one of the biggest in the North American continent is the Canadian Shield. It comprises two million square miles of lava flow. Only a tremendous catas- trophe could cause this kind of eruption; nothing in the present day compares with this.? . CRUSTAL MOVEMENTS\u2014Great thicknesses of rocks are uplifted thousands of feet, strata are buckled, folded, some- times have been thrust laterally or completely overturned on a gigantic scale. Such is the case in the Rocky Mountain Chain and the Appalachian System. APPALACHIAN SYSTEM\u2014Believed to be the uplifted and eroded remnant ofa great geosynclinal trough in which a thickness of some forty thousand feet of sedimentary rocks was deposited. The crust of the Earth seems to have been distorted, fractured, elevated, depressed and contorted in almost every conceivable way at some time or times in the past. & SEAMOUNTS\u2014Many of these have been found in the last few years. These are nothing more than drowned islands in the middle of the ocean. SUBMARINE CANYONS\u2014These are canyons that were cut before the ocean basins were depressed during the del- uge period. Two deep undersea canyons were formed by the Hudson River off of New York, with a depth of fifteen 34 the Bermuda Triangle thousand feet, and the Congo River off West Africa."}
{"id": "the-bible-and-the-bermuda-triangle", "title": "The Bible And The Bermuda Triangle", "year": 1976, "seq": 2, "text": "Plato did not invent the name of Poseidon; the worship of Poseidon was universal in the earliest ages of Europe. Ernest Curtius, quoted by John Denison Baldwin, says: \u201cPoseidon worship seems to have been a peculiarity of all the colonies previous to the time of Sidon.\u201d* \u2018Curtius says this worship was carried to Spain and to Northern Africa, but most abundantly to Italy, to many of the islands and regions around the Aegean Sea. Poseidon is represented in Greek mythology as a sea god; astanding figure drawn by horses in a chariot. Donnelly says: Poseidon was a sea god because he ruled over a great land in the sea, and was the national god ofa maritime people. He is associated with horses be- cause in Atlantis the horse was first domesticated with race courses and chariots which were in- vented by them... .\u00ae Donnelly, referring to Plato\u2019s dialogues, says horses were the favorite sacrifice of Poseidon; they were killed and cast into the sea from high precipices. The religious horse- feasts of the pagan Scandinavians were a survival of this Poseidon worship, which once prevailed along the coasts of | Europe until suppressed by Christianity. Not only was Poseidon represented as a sea god drawn by war horses, but upon his head was a trident crown. The three-pronged scepter of Poseidon reappears constantly in ancient history. We find itin the hands of the Hindu gods and at the base of the religious beliefs of antiquity. According to Arthur Schott: AT The Bible and Among the numerals, sacred three has ever been considered the mark of perfection and was there- fore exclusively ascribed to the Supreme Deity, or toits earthly representative\u2014a king, emperor or a sovereign. For this reason triple emblems of vari- ous shapes are found in belts, neckties or any en- circling fixture, as can be seen on the works of ancient art in Yucatan, Guatemala, Chiapas, Mexico, etc."}
{"id": "the-bible-and-the-bermuda-triangle", "title": "The Bible And The Bermuda Triangle", "year": 1976, "seq": 3, "text": "This forms a giant vortex of floating seaweed whose mass covers an area of 1.5 million square miles. Occultists believe this is the residue of vegetation that floated on the surface of the ocean when the lost continent Atlantis sank. | The Sinuous Trail of Eels Each year North American and European eels migrate to the depths of the Bermuda Triangle. Some suggest the eels at one time were like salmon, which go out to sea and return again to spawn. They came up the rivers and tributaries of the lost continent Atlantis until it finally sub- 56 the Bermuda Triangle merged beneath the sea. Now they still return to spawn in. the same place, but in the depths of the sea where Atlantis once existed. Here is an interesting Scripture in this context: Though they dig into Sheol, From there shall My hand take them; And though they ascend to heaven, From there will I bring them down. And though they hide on the summit of Carmel, I will search them out and take them from there; and though they conceal themselves from My sight on the floor of the sea, from there I will command the serpent and it will bite them. . . (Amos 9:2-3). \u00bb Here is a Scripture that connects the underworld com- partment, Sheol, and the serpent in the bottom of the sea. It _was a serpent in the Garden of Eden that ensnared Eve. This same creature is used in Rev. 20:2 as a description of Satan. It is interesting to note the connection between the stagnant refuse pool and sinuous serpentine eels that mi- \u2018grate there and the Scripture which links sea serpents with Sheol, an underground abode of departed spirits. Submarine Rivers Huge canyons continue out under the ocean at the mouths of the Hudson, Delaware, St. Lawrence and Congo Rivers."}
{"id": "the-bible-and-the-bermuda-triangle", "title": "The Bible And The Bermuda Triangle", "year": 1976, "seq": 4, "text": "Spirit forces from the parallel world are the perpetra- tors of the mysterious. They are masters of illusion and half-truths. But could their passion for mystery be a cover. for their real activity in the Triangle? 65 \u00b0 The Bible and Their purpose is to set the stage for prophetic events and bring glamor to Lucifer\u2019s former kingdom, part of which is now beneath the sea. Let\u2019s examine some of these lies: GLOBEMASTER\u2014A United States Air Force Globemas- ter was said to have disappeared on the northern edge of the Triangle en route to Ireland in March 1950. The New York Times Index has no record of such an incident in 1950. But a United Press International story from London, carried in the March 30, 1951 issue of The New York Times, refers to a Globemaster that crashed at sea a few days earlier. The dispatch said the plane was blown to bits by an explosion, killing all fifty-three persons aboard. The plane had exploded and crashed at sea about 600 miles southwest of Ireland, the Air Force concluded. Says Kusche: The disappearance . . . is too similar to the one mentioned in the Legend of the Bermuda Triangle not to be the same. It was a Globemaster, the incident occurred in March, and search headquar- ters were in Ireland, although the plane was not on a flight there, but to Britain. The loss occurred far away from the Bermuda Triangle, and it appeared to have been caused by an explosion. at BILL VERITY\u2014The Fort Lauderdale, rilesidas ocean voyager was reported vanished in August: 1969, north of Puerto Rico in a twenty-foot sailboat, Brendan the Bold. He had set out from Ireland earlier that year in a craft he thought may be similar to one an Irish monk, Brendan the Bold, used to sail to Florida in A.D. 550."}
{"id": "the-bible-and-the-bermuda-triangle", "title": "The Bible And The Bermuda Triangle", "year": 1976, "seq": 5, "text": "The owner radioed Miami Coast Guard a few hours later saying the Witchcraft was in trouble: she had a damaged - propeller and was drifting near the harbor channel entrance in view of Miami. The Coast Guard was therein ten minutes, but there was no sign of the cruiser. Lonsdale explains it this way: The night was windy, and one propeller was dam- aged, which reduced her speed. She had a Bermuda top\u2014a canvas covering which acted like a sail. Be- tween the action of the currents, the effect of the wind on her top, and her reduced speed, she was probably- carried north toward Fort Lauderdale. From the sea, Lauderdale looks like Miami. When Witchcraft radioed that she was off Miami, she was actually off Lauderdale. We were looking in the wrong place. She must eventually have been carried out to sea, and that was the end of that.\u2019\u00ae The wind was brisk enough to create white caps and | waves were predicted to be as much as six feet high. It is easy to see how the cruiser could either be swept out to sea or swamped. We have talked with Kusche since this article was pub- lished in The Reader\u2019s Digest. He has personally investi- gated this incident and discovered that parts of.it were fabricated by one of the occult authors. PIPER APACHE\u2014This legend states that ona sunny day in April 1962, a twin-engine Apache radioed the Nassau control tower for guidance. The pilot was not able to deter- mine his position, despite the excellent weather, implying he was flying in a dense fog. Radio contact was lost after a few minutes of confusion. The legend states that the wing of the plane was found the Bermuda Triangle later that day about twenty miles from Nassau."}
{"id": "the-bible-and-the-bermuda-triangle", "title": "The Bible And The Bermuda Triangle", "year": 1976, "seq": 6, "text": "Jacques Bergier, a French scientist and Fellow of the Royal Society of Arts, also suggests there are secret doors \u2014 to the Earth, phenomenal passageways to other worlds within the visible Earth. He tells of seven energy levels, called dwipas, which are \u2014 worlds like ours. At least one of the dwipas is inhabited, he says. \u201cOnit there lives the King of the World, who safeguards that which is essential to humanity, its spiritual aspira-_ tions,\u201d he says. \u201cIt is possible to go to the city of the King of the World and come back. It is also possible to encounter on Earth its messengers just returning. And lastly, it is possi- ble to receive a teaching that originates from this city.\u201d 7 . The Bible, of course, doesn\u2019t support his dwipa theory, but it does have some interesting parallels. For example, it calls Satan the \u201cgod of this world\u201d (II Cor. 4:4), and it describes Satanic influence on human spiritual aspirations. _ The Bible also supports the idea of travel to and from the spiritual and physical realms. -- Demonic beings, of course, are the Bible\u2019s definition of Bergier\u2019 s dwipa messengers. And that it is possible to re- ceive teaching from the spirit world is not only indicated by Scripture, it is evident in all the cultic religions of the world. Bergier believes the frontier between Earth and other \u2014 Earths, though invisible, is easily crossed, which could ac- count for occult experiences. He concludes, \u201cIf our Earth is a place of passage, there . must be doors that lead to the unknown. We have not the 94 F Kelvin Seamount -5412 N yA\u2019 Hudson Canyon Blake Plateau E UERTO ag ENG GZ ye DEEPEST POINT Yi > Lae i are The Bible and the Bermuda Triangle slightest idea how a door is created._Once it is created, however, such a door makes possible accidental passages, and this could explain the aeeeance of things and ) people.\u201d 8 ."}
{"id": "the-bible-and-the-bermuda-triangle", "title": "The Bible And The Bermuda Triangle", "year": 1976, "seq": 7, "text": "Frontier of Mysteries The ocean is a great thermal engine. Most of the sun\u2019s energy passes virtually unimpeded throughout the atmos- 97 The Bible and phere into the ocean where it is absorbed and transformed. Nearly a third of the solar energy reaching the Earth\u2019s surface goes to evaporate sea water. The thermal inertia of the sea, the circulation of the water and the geographic distribution of ocean and land profoundly influence our planet\u2019s weather and climate.? The ocean has locked many secrets in its depths, such as the living fossils recently found that were supposedly ex- tinct. And other species of marine life have been found, bringing their number to more than two hundred thousand with new finds on every oceanographic expedition. What other secrets will man find in the coming years? Sound in the ocean travels much farther than inthe air. An explosion of a one-pound block of dynamite in the air can be heard for about a half mile. Such an explosion at mid- depths in the Ocean can be heard for many thousands of miles. r What will man hear as he listens to the sounds of the inner Earth from the depths of the Bermuda Triangle and the Devil\u2019s Sea in coming years? The fluid character of water on our planet is the miracle that makes life possible. But because the oceans fill the low places of Earth, they are the ultimate sink of ever increasing human and industrial wastes. ee Undersea Civilization Yes, the sea has many mysteries, and it serves many purposes. Not only is it the depository of man\u2019s wastes and the thermal engine of the world, the sea is a cover for a vast underworld civilization consisting of the departed spirits of the human race and of fallen angels."}
{"id": "the-bible-and-the-bermuda-triangle", "title": "The Bible And The Bermuda Triangle", "year": 1976, "seq": 8, "text": "This is the only time this word is used in the Bible, and in Greek writings Tartarus was be- \u201cHieved to be a place lower in the Earth than Hades, where lived the Titans (giants), the primeval deities who were supposed to be the first children of the Earth, even older than the Greek gods. These deities, according to Greek mythology, were cast into Tartarus when they lost their war with the head god, Zeus.\u201d ; This is the first historical mention in the Bible of a nether world compartment. Tartarus came into existence for the Nephilim during the time of Noah. It is probably out of this lowest compartment in Sheol-Hades that many of the demonic beings are released during the tribulation. We have no evidence that any fallen angels were put into Sheol-Hades before the Noahic Flood. The angels who fell with Lucifer could have remained loose until the Noahic Flood. This is speculation, of course, but we know that many fallen angels still are not confined; they are free to roam the Earth under Satan\u2019s control. It will be during the tribulation that the ones chained in-Tartarus will rejoin their comrades on Earth to prepare for the battle of Armageddon (Rev. 9). It is during this seven-year period that \u201call hell breaks . . loose.\u201d : Until the resurrection of Christ, all departed spirits were kept in Sheol-Hades. : In the previous chapter, we Saw how this nether region was divided into two areas. One was called Abraham\u2019s bosom, or Paradise, and was for the righteous. The unright- 107 The Bible and eous were kept in an area apart from Paradise. The sections. were separated a great distance so that residents of either side could not cross to the other, the Bible says. After the resurrection, Christ took those in Paradise and \u201cwhen He ascended on high, He (Christ) led captive a host of captives\u201d (Eph. 4:8) into Heaven."}
{"id": "the-bible-and-the-bermuda-triangle", "title": "The Bible And The Bermuda Triangle", "year": 1976, "seq": 9, "text": "In that day the LORD will punish Leviathan the flee- ing serpent, with His fierce and great and mighty sword, even Leviathan the twisted serpent; and He will kill the dragon who lives in the sea (Isa. 27:1). Are sea monsters real or imaginary? Are they spiritual | entities from a-civilization under the sea who assume the | physical appearances of monsters? Are these creatures of | the deep responsible for some of the unexplainable disap- } pearances in the Bermuda Triangle and the Devil's Sea? Or, are they merely grotesque, but innocent, mutations 1 of prehistoric creatures living in the deep? The conjecture of some oecultists is that sea monsters \u2014 | are real and that from time to time they pluck down into : their abysmal abodes vessels sailing the high seas. | There have been many sightings of sea monsters in the 117 The Bible and vicinity of the Bermuda Triangle. Could the occultists be right? If so, what can we expect from these creatures in the future? Sea Monsters of the Bible In chapter 3 we noted two outstanding indications of the entrance to Sheol-Hades in the Bermuda Triangle\u2014the migratory spot of the North American and European eels and the giant vortex of the floating Sargasso seaweed. We turn now to Scripture to see what it says about sea creatures and their relationship to Sheol-Hades and its en- trances. The prophet Amos, in describing remote places where a fugitive may hide from God, says: Though they dig into Sheol. . . and though they conceal themselves from My sight on the floor of the sea, from there I will command the serpent and it will bite them (Amos 9:2, 8). Note the association of Sheol with the floor of the sea in Job 41. But this is not the only reference to the word serpent where it is associated with the sea."}
{"id": "milestone1975east", "title": "Milestone", "year": 1975, "seq": 0, "text": "With a sense of independence not present before college, each individual shaped his own future. Whether gater- ing with friends outside the student center or captur- ing nature's beauty in the campus ampitheater. each day furnislied a record 12.571 Eastern students the opportunity to express their inner feelings. Responsibilities accomapnied students throughout their four years of higher education. Speculation, deliberation, and application were the residts of long hours of labor. Vet college life was more than just work. Acquiring nf\\\\' friends, partying on Thursday nights, and sharing experiences with dormmates were also vital parts of a persons learning process. Right: Lnthusiastic senior Keith Buenher supplies vocal support for the (;olonel basketball team. EJelow: Free mini-concerts during the first week of school allow freshmen to make new acquaintances. 20 University Life Above: As classes resume, students flock to the fountain to welcome back returning friends. Left: In deep contemplation, Joanne Lepera absorbs the intricate designs found in nature. University Life 21 Top: The Burnaiii Hall dorm mother aiid her assislaiils try to speed up room registration process as students arrive on eampus. Above: Trailers make the long trip of moving possessions easier tor both parents aird students. Right: Susie MiKee and Jean Leadingam find teamwork helpful when moving in those heavy objeets. 22 University Life Roommates Assist With Moving In After driving long hours with a carload of clothes, books, and other necessities they just couldn't leave behind, the students arrived to once again fill the dormitory rooms. The long waiting periods to obtain their room assignments, keys, and to find out who their roommates were, added to the frustrations of the day. Then came the job of unloading all those \"valuable possessions\" they had acquired over the years. With the aid of roommates and parents they finally got the rooms cleaned and things put in place."}
{"id": "milestone1975east", "title": "Milestone", "year": 1975, "seq": 1, "text": "Whether the student had money to spend or just time to waste. EKU provided a variety of aetivities to release the building up of tensions aeeonipaning eollege hfe. Loeated in the Powell Building, a recreation center provided facililies such as a bowling alley, pool tables, foosball, and air hockey, if an outdoor envirunnieni better suited the personality, relaxation was found in the ravine or on the tennis court during the warmer months. On week- ends students spent free time viewing campus movies, playing racquet ball at the Begley Building, and taking ad\\antage of the increased luimber of open houses. Free time was a needed facet of the college student. How it was spent depended on each iiulividu- ai's philosophy. Whether it was just rapping with friends, viewing a sport event, or participating in a recreational activity. Eastern provided facilities adapt- able to eaeii personality. Top: Proving their skillful ability, Mariko Kanamori and Manit Wong- somboom challenge Linda Davis and Sitlii Assanlivat to fast moving game of foosball. Above: The trees in the ravine provide a convenient place for students to test their tree climbing abilities. University Life 35 Rising Food Costs Strain Student Budgets \\\\ith the rising fuoii costs eating became a diffi- cult necessity in which the student had to search for the best buys. Tlie canijius grill and cafeteria, cen- trally located in the Powell Building, maintained last year's prices which contributed to their increased popularity Lunch specials aided those students on tight budgets and \\et provided them with nourishing meals. Many students preferred to go off campus in search of a varietv of different foods. From grabbing a (juick hamburger to hours of enjoying a large meal, one could find satisfaction at one of the many restau- rants in and around Richmond. Others preferred to run to the grocery and pick up caiuied goods and the like."}
{"id": "milestone1975east", "title": "Milestone", "year": 1975, "seq": 2, "text": "Such things as pre-cooked dinners and cans of tuna and soup were among the more popular items found in the students' shopping cart. Once back to their quarters, students could prepare these foods rather quickly as they maintained a busy college schedule. Top: Drive-in restaurants proMdr iioiinshnn'nt tor tlie student on the go. Right: Many students tind the Powell cafeteria loaded with nutri- ious dinner meals. Bottom Right: Grabbing a quick burger is a common practice among students with achve schedules. .36 UniversitN Life Left: Dawn Crisp purchases food items in order to prepare a quick sandivich between clajsses. Above: Grill specials entice students to save money wliile still obtaining good food. Below: These students find the grill a convenient place for a snack and to spend some time rapping with friends. University Life 37 Transportation Adds To Student Lifestyles Transportation needs xaried in each ol' thie stu- dents' lifestyles as tlie year progressed. lMan> loiind that rising prices of gasoline and oil made operating a car too expensive while living on a student budget. Others found the need outweighed the cost as autcj- mobile service centers continued to be filled witli students gasing up for tho.se weekend trips to visit parents and friends. However, the budget eonseious student found less expensive melhods of getting aroinid (he campus and Richmond communities. Walking, of course, was everyone's basic method. The central location of Eastern among the business dis- tricts of Richmond made the walks bearable. Other means such as bicycles, motorcycles, and golf carts were found dotting the eam[)us .surroundings. The campus parking facilities were again crowded. In contrast to rising fuel prices an increased number of student owned automobiles decreased the number of parking spaces available. Illegal parking citations were issued to those who chose to park out of zone."}
{"id": "milestone1975east", "title": "Milestone", "year": 1975, "seq": 3, "text": "The early facial washes in the bathrooms, social gatherings on special occasions, and late-night slu<lying all became a special pari ol the lives ihey touched. Noisy halls made studying that much m(jrc hectic, yet the friend- ships which developed had nuniiM\\)Us far-reacliing re- sults. l)(jrmatory living provided students with a chaiue to share experiences, gel along with other people, and dr(\\im of Ihc I'll lure to come. Left: Preparations for the following day's appearance often begin the night before. Eielow: Reading during the late hours serves as a relaxing way to end the day's aetivities. University Life 41 Men Benefit From Residential Programs Li\\iiiu; closlv with nicii Iroiii arross the nalidii. lili' in one ol' Easlcrii's eight men's dorms proved to be botli a trying as well as rewarding experience, floor residents eombined their physical talents and entered teams in intramural competition. House councils pro- vided special programs such as Commonwealth's mo\\ie presentations and Palmer's karate demonstra- tion. All dorms conducted table tennis and rook tournaments to initiate rt'sidcnl participation. Other \\arious activities in( luding several iuterdorm cl'I'orts rounded out a bu.sy schedule. Inconvenience was also a residt of the close con- finement. Card parties and loud music sometimes hampered slud\\ el forts while I'irccracker attacks could result in irregidar sleeping habits. Kegardlc>s ol the disadvantages, dorm life proved to be an educa- tional experience. Right: Ueveloping a feeling of comradery, gatlierings in tlie liall result in the ambusli of an unsuspecting floor mate. Below: Winning the rush to the sink, these men prepare for ttieir day ahead. 42 University Life Top Left: Late night card games provide competi- tion among men's dorm residents. Above: A result ol carelessness, a room on the eleventh floor of Dupree suffers damage. Lett: Greg Lamping uses an old family receipt to prepare a midnight snack."}
{"id": "milestone1975east", "title": "Milestone", "year": 1975, "seq": 4, "text": "As a result, current lifestyles were broken away from the traditional ex- tended family idea of generational ties by developing independent marital relationships. Top: In Uieir warm aiid secure Brocklon apartment. Ish and Donna Jolinson take a break from study aiid work by enjoying a night of televised entertainment. Left: The bicycle, a popular sight on Eastern's summer campus, is the mode of local transportation to the Jones Building for both mother aiid cliild. University Life 45 Right: Oil campus living allows .students the opportunity to study in a independent atmosphere. Below; Relaxed in the living room of her apartment just off campus. Sheila Maynard listens to an album while preparing for her sociology class. 46 University Life Off Campus Living Appeals To Students Taking advantage ol university policy, some stu- dents chose to live off-campus. Local apartment com- plexes as well as trailer courts were popular choices. These living quarters eliminateil some of the disadvan- tages of dorm life. However, disadvantages accompanied students in iiomes off campus. Besides rent payments, monthly light and gas bills had to be taken care of. Finding transportation to classes was an added responsibility. Top: Apartment residents anticipate visits from neighbors and campus friends. Above Left: Four burner electric stoves and ample kitchen space make the preparation of home cooked dinners less of a chore. Left: Sharing an apartment with her older sister, sophomore Danita Maynard entertains guests with her Lvely guitar music. University I,ife 47 Commuters Embark On Daily Journey Many shideiits in siirroimding comities chose to spend early morniiiff and late afternoon hours travel- ing lo anil from the ltii\\crsit\\. The inonev saved Ironi dorm Ices was put toward fuel expenses and wear and tear of their transporlation \\ chicles. Due to the innnerous obstai les encountered ;ilong the wav. extra time often had to be considered when departing for the day's classes."}
{"id": "milestone1975east", "title": "Milestone", "year": 1975, "seq": 5, "text": "Below: Steve Bailer finds the living room of the Sigma Nu house a quite and relaxing environment to catch up on la.^t minute fraternity matters. University Life 51 Downtown Provides Thursday Night Entertainment \\\\eekeiul a(ti\\ itifs In-gaii on Thur-da) evenings as Ea.-tern students flooded Richmond's '\"niglit\"' spots tor a louple hours of dancing and refreshments. Fri- day mi)rning tests failed to silence the sounds of partying as local Listroe> provided Hve entertainment. Action downtown typically started around [):'M) and lasted until midnight at which time private parties were organized. Off-campus parties gave students the opportunitN to socialize until the wee hours of the morning. % eariness often accompanied those students attending first period classes the next morning. A long weekend of partying begins with a smile, a wave, and a [iat on the hack. A long weekend of partying begins with a smile, a wave, and a pat on the bacli. .52 University Life University Life 53 Nostalgic Dancing Highlights Student Events The weeks were filled with varied interests of entertainment and one of the most growing was an interest in daneing. From tlir rhursday night down- town excursions to social events sponsored by cam- pus organizations, many enjoyed this Inn l.ning art. As new dances appeared on tlie scene it was no time till they hit the student entertainment spots. Filled with laughter and loud music these places were the sight of many hours of enjoyment. The sponsoring of a'sadie Hawkins Day dance during the tail semester found the feminine role playing a strong part in the days events. In the >pring. the fifties came to life as greased hair and pony tails danced to the music of the Phi Mu Alpha honorary rock and roll gioup. \\ aried as the dames were the students enjoyed the socializing that came with these activities."}
{"id": "milestone1975east", "title": "Milestone", "year": 1975, "seq": 6, "text": "Below Various signs around campus remind students that it is tune to pull out the letter sweaters and saddle shoes to roek and roll as they did i,, the 5(rs. Bottom: Executing the dances of a past decade, these >tudenls enjoy Ihe lun involved in doing the hunuy hop. Top: Dressed in country attire tlie captives of Sadie Hawkins Day festivities enjoy dancing at one of the many Interdorm activities. Left: Recreation of the 5()'s art of bubble blowing is a challenge for this young coed. Above: The jukebox in the Powell Center grill is the sight of nemerous dancing exhibitions as this young couple demonstrate their version of the bump. University Life 55 Above: To L.yiin Kriday. iT^uisporling dirty ilotlics home tor mom to wash .seem.s to be aii easier ciiore thaii keeping them at school to do herself. Right: Limited trunk space presents an obstacle to over- come as this yomig mail wonders where the next suitcase is goins to be stored. 50 University Life Suitcasing Vacates Campus Community The grand exodus of Eastern students on Friday afternoons gave the ap[)earanee of a suitcase campus. Preferring home to the dorm life, students left to see friends, to work, and to enjoy home-cooked meals. Eastern's relative closeness to major cities and in- creased school holidays gave rise to weekend visits away from the campus area. Escaping the studious atmosphere, they found refuge in modern shopping centers, at spectator sporting events, and at concerts of popular performing artists. The reality of college life brought refreshed travelers back .Sunday night ready to begin a week of concentrated study. Above Left: MartJia Ballard and Sylvia Smith find a short inconvenient walk to the car a small price to pay for a ride home. Above: Searching for a glimpse of a familiar car."}
{"id": "milestone1975east", "title": "Milestone", "year": 1975, "seq": 7, "text": "Presenting advantages not available in large cities. Richmond's appeal attracted many to Eastern Keiiluckv L'uiversitv . Right: Madi,-on County larmers \\isit tlie couiih seat to take care of legal affairs. Below: A dowitowii restaurant sen es homecooked plate lunches to students and residents on lunch breaks. 58 University Life Left: KunniM|J llirout;li llu' center of tomi. Main Street bustles with aetivity during a work day. ESottom Left: Whittling to consume some free time, this resident wails for the arrival of friend.s. Below: To understand the citizens\" needs, an offi- cer of the Richmond police force communicates with the townspeople. University Life 59 Above: Pinball machines ajid billiard.^ are two of llie recreational facilities offered an arcade. Right: Checkini\u00bb the designs of tlouer pots, Helen Graves and Jean Pohlniann compare pnces in an import noveltv* shop. 00 L niiersity Life The Strip Offers a Multitude of Emporia Tlie most rapidly expanding area in Richmond, the \u25a0'Strip\" provided an extremelv wide variety ol stores, restaurants, and enlertainnienl eslahlishments. Lo- cated on the Eastern liy-Pass. this l)nsiness district was within easv walking distance ol the campus. Shopping centers offered a multitude of enterprises, including an ice cream parlor, drug stores, department stores, and novelty shops. Privately-owned and chain restaurants lined both sides of the By-Pass. Those desiring a me;d were able to choose among the numerous hamburger, chicken, and pizza establishments. Recreational facilities of tlie '\"Strip\" attracted many students and town resi- dents. Two new modern cinemas displayed the latest screen hits. By continually expanding throughout the year, the \"Strip\" offered even more advant;iges to Eastern and the city of Richmond. Top Left: Students compete on the simulated speed racing game Trak Ten at tlie Strip's amusement center. Top Right: Nationally advertised fast food restaurants offer community residents and visitors a wide selection of food."}
{"id": "milestone1975east", "title": "Milestone", "year": 1975, "seq": 8, "text": "The observance of the Centennial Year of Higher Ediualion on the EKll campus ended September '22 with (he Centemiial Awards laincheon at which 34.'5 Kaslern alumni were honored for excellence in teach- ing. The date marked the one hundredth anniversary of the founding of (Central University on the EKU campus and ended a year-long series of special events that dramatizeil higher education's history and ])aid tribute to outstanding graduates of Eastern and its predecessors. The Division of Alumni Affairs expanded its ser- vices to graduates with the initiation of a program of overseas tours in cooj)eration with other Kentucky institutions, and informing alumni of the opportuni- ties a\\ailable to them, either as prosp(!ctive employers or employees, through the Placement Service. The established alumni activities such as Homecoming, Alumni Day and a comprehensive publications pro- gram were continued as alumni rolls approached the ;30,0()0 mark. Stemming from rccomineiidalions iro\\n (he insti- tutional self-study prepared for the Southern Associa- tion of Colleges and Schools came revisions within the Placement Service. Following a series of meetings with each of the college deans and dcj)arlment chair- men, steps were taken to further increase the services of the Division of Placement to meet the diverse needs of the graduates of each of the llniversity's colleges. UnivcTsity-School Relations continued to com- municate the programs of the lini\\ersit\\ to schools and prospective students through comprehensive in- school visitations and coordinated several on-campus events which attracted high school students to the campus. These included the amiual Band Day. drama, music, speech, and debate festivals, and high school summer band camps. The Division of Public Information in a diverse number of ways, communicated the University's pro- grams and purposes to the varied publics. In addition to its regular programs in news and [)ublications. considerable emphasis was placed on cost-saving tech- niques which resulted in (be broadening of the scope of administrative and informational publications without increase in cost."}
{"id": "milestone1975east", "title": "Milestone", "year": 1975, "seq": 9, "text": "This represented an in- crease of over twelve percent above last year's figures. -Many new academic programs and special projects were implemented in the College of Applied Arts and Technology. Three different degrees were offered in Agriculture. (j\\er four new degrees openeil in Indus- trial Education and Technology, expansion of the Dietetics Program was seen in Home Economics, and a three-year grant was provided for students in a cooperative nursing education program. As of July, the School of Law Enforcement was elevated to academic college status and redesignated the College of Law Enforcement. Since its inception and implementation in 1965, the School of Law Enforcement was an administrative department of the College of Applied Arts and Technology. As such, it developed within tliis college from a single class of forty-seven students, during the spring semester of 1966, to its present status as a nationally recognized program whicli enrolled more than two thousand majors this year. . .y.^f'j-i:ji->- 1- Top: Dean William Sexton enjoys a free moment working with his miniature office arboretum. Above: The ground breaking ceremony for the new health and sanitation building is a big step forward for the tuture of many departments. 142 Academics/ Applied .^rts And Technology Top: Precision and care are exercised in bandaging a patient's leg. Above: This young student nurse checks the glucose level uf an intra- venous apparatus. Nursing Plans For A Promising Future Ccleliratiiig its (cnlli vcar. the Dt-partiiiciit of Nursing continued to experiemc an iiu rease in .stu- dent enrollment. Directed i)y Charlotte Detun . nurs- ing offered a wide \\ariel\\ of medical programs of interest to the students of medicine. In an effort to achieve career mobilit} . several courses were implemented for different programs. For example, a course of interpersonal relations in health care was required for a degree in l)otli Medical Terminology and Transcripti(jn."}
{"id": "montgomerywashin1319sanf", "title": "Montgomery-Washington Building : environmental impact report : draft", "year": 1981, "seq": 0, "text": "In \u2014 FIGURE 22 Projected Shadow Patterns in Vicinity of Project Mid-December 64 IV. Environmental Impacts SHADOW The project, in replacing existing low-rise structures on the site, would create more extensive shadow patterns than exist at present. Much of the project shadow patterns would coincide with those cast by existing structures in the area (601 Montgomery, Holiday Inn, and the Transamerica building). The project would not shade any existing public parks. Washington and Montgomery Sts. are shaded by existing structures throughout the day at all seasons of the year. Portions of Columbus Ave. are shaded from mid-morning to early afternoon hours in the fall, winter and spring months. Portions of the lower floors of the Transamerica Pyramid are shaded in the late afternoon year-round. Sansome St., one block east of the site, is shaded in the late afternoon year-round, and in the early afternoon in the fall through spring months. At all seasons of the year, early-morning shadows due to the project would generally coincide with shadows from existing structures. New shadows from the project would begin to occur during mid-morning and would continue through most of the day; primary shadow effects would be on the portions of Washington and Montgomery Sts. adjacent to the site. Portions of the widened sidewalk and seating area on the north side of the Transamerica Pyramid would be shaded by the project in the late afternoon at all seasons of the year. During the mid-morning hours in the winter months the project would complete the shading of Columbus Ave. from Washington St. to Pacific Ave., eliminating the existing corridor of sunlight between shadows cast by the 601 Montgomery St. building and Transamerica Pyramid. Towards midday the project would eliminate the existing corridor of sunlight between the shadows of the Holiday Inn and 601 Montgomery St. building, shading Washington St. adajacent to the site, and Montgomery St., north to Jackson St."}
{"id": "montgomerywashin1319sanf", "title": "Montgomery-Washington Building : environmental impact report : draft", "year": 1981, "seq": 1, "text": "Because the project would exceed the allowable FAR of 14:1 plus identified bonus space, it would not conform to the City Planning Code. An amendment to the City Planning Code, and possibly a change in the Interim Controls, would be required to allow approval of the project. According to the Department of City Planning housing formula, the project would generate demand for about 210 units of housing in San Francisco; the project would provide about 40 on-site residential units, containing about 90 bedrooms. The proposed project would be stepped down in its upper northeast and southeast-facing facades. The architect intends the design to visually complement adjacent buildings and provide a transition between nearby high-rises and the smaller structures of the Jackson Square Historic District to the north and northeast. The project would be visible in the downtown skyline from some long-range viewpoints. The structure would be visible from Telegraph Hill, obstructing existing views of the 601 Montgomery St. building. From Chinatown, the project would be visible between the Holiday Inn and the 601 Montgomery St. building, obstructing views of lower portions of the Transamerica Pyramid building. When viewed from long-range viewpoints to the northeast, north and west, the project would not be a major visual focus in the downtown panorama due to the prominence of taller structures, such as the Transamerica Pyramid and Bank of America headquarters. The project would not be visible from the southern approaches to the City on the James Lick and Bayshore freeways or from Potrero Hill, due to intervening structures. The project, in replacing existing low-rise structures, would create a more extended shadow pattern than exists at present, especially north and northeast 3 I . Summary of the site. Much of the project shadow pattern would coincide with those shadows cast by existing structures in the area (601 Montgomery St., Holiday Inn, and the Transamerica Pyramid)."}
{"id": "montgomerywashin1319sanf", "title": "Montgomery-Washington Building : environmental impact report : draft", "year": 1981, "seq": 2, "text": "Ground-floor retail space is expected to rent for approximately $50 per sq. ft. per year. Office space is expected to rent for approximately $35 per sq. ft. per year. Residential units are expected to sell for about $300 per sq. ft., or from about $300,000 to 350,000 in 1981 dollars. /3/ APPROVAL REQUIREMENTS Following a public hearing before the City Planning Commission, responses to all written and oral comments will be prepared, and this EIR will be revised as appropriate and presented to the City Planning Commission for certification, as to accuracy and completeness. No permits may be issued until the Final EIR is certified. Because the project would exceed the allowable FAR of 14:1 plus identified bonus space, it would not conform to the City Planning Code. Therefore, the City Planning Commission could not approve the project as proposed. An amendment of the City Planning Code, and possibly a change in the Interim Controls, would be required to allow approval of the project. 07 II. Project Description The provisions of the City Planning Code are administered by the Zoning Administrator and other staff members of the Department of City Planning. The Zoning Administrator is responsible for recommending appropriate changes in the Code to the City Planning Commission. According to Section 302 of the Code, an amendment may be initiated by the Board of Supervisors or by a resolution of intention by the City Planning Commission. An interested property owner may not initiate changes in the text of the Code. The City Planning Commission is required to hold a hearing on any proposed amendment. Following a public hearing, the Planning Commission may approve an amendment if it finds that, \"the public necessity, convenience and general welfare require the proposed amendment.\" Once approved by the City Planning Commission, a proposed amendment must be presented to the Board of Supervisors and the Board must adopt the amendment by a majority vote."}
{"id": "montgomerywashin1319sanf", "title": "Montgomery-Washington Building : environmental impact report : draft", "year": 1981, "seq": 3, "text": "Pedestrian views of the site from the Montgomery St. corridor, north of the site, would include the full height of 52 IV. Environmental Impacts the tower. South of the site on Montgomery St. portions of the project tower would be blocked by the adjacent 601 Montgomery St. building. The project would represent the northern end of the high-rise building \"wall\" on the west side of Montgomery St. The project would interrupt some views of the Bay from the upper stories of the 601 Montgomery St. building. Similar views from the proposed structure would be created. The project would interrupt few views to the west from portions of the Transamerica Pyramid, because affected views are already blocked by the Holiday Inn. The Holiday Inn is a north/south-facing structure and occupants would not have a view of the project building. (See photos taken from the Holiday Inn, on file at the Office of Environmental Review.) The project would not block any long-range views from structures north of the site as these are blocked by existing development. From Portsmouth Square, west of the site, the project would partially block short-range views of some buildings, but it would not obstruct any views of the Bay, as buildings east of the site presently block views of the Bay from the Portsmouth Square Area. The project would be visible in the downtown skyline from some long-range viewpoints. The proposed structure would be visible from Telegraph Hill, obstructing existing views of the 601 Montgomery St. building and buildings to the south such as the Aetna and Pacific Telephone buildings (see Figure 18, p. 56). From Chinatown, the project would be visible between the Holiday Inn and the 601 Montgomery St. buildings, obstructing views of the lower portions of the Transamerica Pyramid (see Figure 19, p. 57). The upper level project setbacks on the corner of Washington and Montgomery Sts. are intended by the architect to preserve views from upper Columbus Ave (see Figure 20, p. 58)."}
{"id": "montgomerywashin1319sanf", "title": "Montgomery-Washington Building : environmental impact report : draft", "year": 1981, "seq": 4, "text": "When viewed from long-range viewpoints to the northeast, north and west, including Russian Hill, the project would not serve as a major visual focus in the downtown panorama, due to the prominence of taller structures such as the Transamerica Pyramid and Bank of America Building. The project would not be visible from the southern approaches to the City on the James Lick and Bayshore freeways or from Potrero Hill, due to intervening structures. 53 IV. Environmental Impacts The residential portion of the project would generally be oriented with views towards the north and east, with the exception of 16 units which would have a south or west orientation. To the north, views would be unobstructed towards Telegraph Hill, Coit Tower, and the Bay. To the south and east, views would be directed to nearby buildings in the Financial District. The tapering form of the Transamerica Pyramid, and its approximately 100-ft. distance from the site, would reduce the apparent mass of this structure as seen by east-facing occupants of the project. Nighttime views of the lighted Transamerica Pyramid would also be seen from the east-facing units. The residential portion of the project would be above the adjacent 19- story 601 Montgomery St. building, allowing short-range unobstructed views to the south. In some cases, direct views to the west would be blocked by the Holiday Inn; the base of the Holiday Inn is located approximately 10 ft. from the base of the project. Views to the north or south would be available from all residential units with views blocked to the west by the Holiday Inn. DESIGN The project is intended by the architect to relate architecturally to existing buildings in the site vicinity. The project design includes a series of upper level setbacks, \"stepping down\" in the northeast and southeast-facing facades of the building (see Figure 21, p. 59)."}
{"id": "montgomerywashin1319sanf", "title": "Montgomery-Washington Building : environmental impact report : draft", "year": 1981, "seq": 5, "text": "Environmental Impacts SHADOW The project, in replacing existing low-rise structures on the site, would create more extensive shadow patterns than exist at present. Much of the project shadow patterns would coincide with those cast by existing structures in the area (601 Montgomery, Holiday Inn, and the Transamerica building). The project would not shade any existing public parks. Washington and Montgomery Sts. are shaded by existing structures throughout the day at all seasons of the year. Portions of Columbus Ave. are shaded from mid-morning to early afternoon hours in the fall, winter and spring months. Portions of the lower floors of the Transamerica Pyramid are shaded in the late afternoon year-round. Sansome St., one block east of the site, is shaded in the late afternoon year-round, and in the early afternoon in the fall through spring months. At all seasons of the year, early-morning shadows due to the project would generally coincide with shadows from existing structures. New shadows from the project would begin to occur during mid-morning and would continue through most of the day; primary shadow effects would be on the portions of Washington and Montgomery Sts. adjacent to the site. Portions of the widened sidewalk and seating area on the north side of the Transamerica Pyramid would be shaded by the project in the late afternoon at all seasons of the year. During the mid-morning hours in the winter months the project would complete the shading of Columbus Ave. from Washington St. to Pacific Ave., eliminating the existing corridor of sunlight between shadows cast by the 601 Montgomery St. building and Transamerica Pyramid. Towards midday the project would eliminate the existing corridor of sunlight between the shadows of the Holiday Inn and 601 Montgomery St. building, shading Washington St. adajacent to the site, and Montgomery St., north to Jackson St."}
{"id": "montgomerywashin1319sanf", "title": "Montgomery-Washington Building : environmental impact report : draft", "year": 1981, "seq": 6, "text": "Vertical vortices form off both the north and south downstream edges of the Transamerica Pyramid under existing conditions. For west winds, existing wind speed ratios in the vicinity are generally low to moderate, varying from 0.13 to 0.46. The intersection of Columbus Ave. and Washington St. is gusty, but less so than with northwest winds. Wind speeds on Washington St. are moderate (wind speed ratios of 0.35 to 0.46), being highest north of the Transamerica Pyramid. Vertical vortices, stronger than those under northwest winds, occur off both the north and south downstream edges of the Transamerica Pyramid, creating turbulence at the Transamerica Redwood park, east of the Pyramid. The local wind direction is variable along 68 IV. Environmental Impacts Montgomery St. between the project site and the Transamerica Pyramid, but wind speeds are generally low over most of the block. Wind speeds at other locations near the site are low to moderately low. The project would change the existing wind environment of the site vicinity. Under prevailing northwest wind conditions, the project would have several effects. The intersection of Clay and Montgomery Sts. to the south would be less windy (a wind speed ratio of 0.50 would be reduced to 0.40) and less gusty than existing conditions. The vortex mid-block on Kearny St. between Washington and Jackson Sts. would be eliminated due to \"shelter\" from the project. A moderately high wind speed ratio (a ratio of more than 0.55, or about 2.5 times the existing wind speed ratio) would prevail on Montgomery St. east of the project site./3/ There would be steady, moderate winds around the northeast corner of the proposed building, under the covered walkways and at the project entrances. Street-side glass walls, vegetation, or other screening at the covered walkway area would provide pedestrian protection from these winds. Wind speed ratios would more than double (from a moderately low ratio of 0.20 to a moderate ratio of nearly 0.5) at the southeast corner of the Columbus Ave. intersection with Montgomery and Washington Sts."}
{"id": "montgomerywashin1319sanf", "title": "Montgomery-Washington Building : environmental impact report : draft", "year": 1981, "seq": 7, "text": "The ABAG projection indicates that 1.25 million additional sq. ft. of office space will be occupied each year. This could be because no more than that would be demanded or because no more would be supplied. If occupancy is limited by supply, then more than 1.25 million sq. ft. of new space would be occupied each year if more than that amount were built. Vacancy rates and the rate of rent increase suggest a backlog of demand. One commercial real estate broker foresees that by 1984, 9.1 million sq. ft. of office space will be available, and all but about 2 million of this amount is presently 1 eased. /3/ The growth of office space would continue the trend of regional growth in service- sector and office headquarters activity and employment. The larger, newer buildings would be occupied primarily by larger tenants and those with 72 IV. Environmental Impacts the ability to pay higher rents. Because rent levels are lower for older buildings, the space which becomes vacated by tenants relocating to newer buildings could become available for tenants who cannot afford the higher rents for new office space. /4/ New increases in downtown office space and employment would increase the demand for retail goods, food and business services in the area. To the extent that the new space would not be occupied by firms providing these services, demand would increase for existing space and possibly for further devel opment. Multiplier effects would support additional employment in San Francisco and throughout the Bay Area in a number of different industrial and occupational groups. In addition, the construction industry would continue to be active while contributing to the area's economy through its own multiplier effects. HOUSING As indicated in the previous subsection, (p. 71), the project would result in an increase in downtown office employment of approximately 950 jobs by 1985. To the extent that the project would attract out-of-area employees and contribute to the formation of additional households by existing area residents, it would also contribute to increase local housing demand and a jobs/housing imbalance."}
{"id": "montgomerywashin1319sanf", "title": "Montgomery-Washington Building : environmental impact report : draft", "year": 1981, "seq": 8, "text": "Peninsula residents, for example, could find Southern Pacific commuter trains more attractive if they could get no closer to downtown with their cars than the train terminal at Fourth and Townsend Sts. All transit options would add to the burdens of the regional and local transit system, particularly Muni . TRUCK DELIVERIES AND LOADING The project is proposed to have service vehicle access on the second-floor level of the building via a ramp from Merchant St. Two loading bays would be provided, as required by the City Planning Code, Section 152. The bays would be sized to handle standard single unit trucks and smaller vehicles. Analysis of the ramp and mezzanine geometry indicates that single-unit trucks and large delivery vans would be able to negotiate the ramp into the loading area. Semi -trailer trucks would not be able to use the loading bays, and would be expected to unload from Merchant, Montgomery or Washington Sts. Project demand would be for about four loading spaces. /6/ The project would not meet the average demand for loading space with off-street loading facilities, as proposed. The existing loading zones on the Montgomery St. frontage would be able to handle the excess demand. However, due to the possibility of illegal parking in the loading zone, double parking might occur. Access to the project's freight elevator from the loading docks would be provided via an accessway to the core of the building. The loading dock would be separated from the freight elevator by about 100 ft. of parking area. There would be direct access from the freight elevator to the building lobby and street-level uses. 90 IV. Environmental Impacts Access to the on-site passenger vehicle parking areas is proposed via Merchant St. A ramp to the garage is proposed from Merchant St. and would provide sufficient maneuvering space for passenger vehicles."}
{"id": "montgomerywashin1319sanf", "title": "Montgomery-Washington Building : environmental impact report : draft", "year": 1981, "seq": 9, "text": "Under these conditions passenger loading times are increased; schedule adherence and passenger comfort are adversely affected. Although the other carriers operate at less than seated capacity during a one-hour period, specific routes are shown to experience peak-of-the-peak loadings in excess of seated capacity for periods from five to 30 minutes during the peak hour. An analysis was made of the cumulative transit impacts attributable to development in Downtown San Francisco. For all systems except the Muni, the analysis was conducted on a system level which considered the lines or groups of lines that serve the project area. For the Muni, a line-by line analysis was conducted according to the Department of City Planning guidel ines./2/ Increased transit ridership from 29 proposed downtown developments was included in the 1984 base values (see Appendix D, Table D-8 p. 208). In addition, growth from other developments not specifically analyzed was considered through the use of a growth factor. The ridership from the projects was added to the estimated 1984 base ridership, and the demand-to-capacity ratios, or load factors, attributable to the project were determined. 91 IV. Environmental Impacts As shown in Table 9, project ridership during the p.m. peak hour would not increase the transit loading by more than 0.3% on any of the non-Muni systems. This would not be a statistically significant change. /8/ Analysis of the transit data leads to a reasonable assumption that for short periods of time (15 to 30 minutes) certain routes experience loadings nearer to 100% of total capacity than the loadings shown in Table 9. The loadings shown are the result of averaging ridership of full vehicles with partially empty vehicles, thus equalizing the loads over the one-hour period. As the cumulative demand increases, the length of time of peak loadings will increase, thus forcing a spreading of peak-of-the-peak conditions over time."}
{"id": "montanaforestpr1987mont_2", "title": "Montana forest products bulletin", "year": 1987, "seq": 0, "text": "Anotiier estimated $5.5 million pa'/ment from national grassland and land utiliza- tion project receipts in calendar year 1987 will be shared by 19 states. 4 F. Dale Robertson, Chief of USDA's Forest Service, said advance estimates of the state payments help local budget planners complete their work earlier in the fiscal year. He said the final payments will be based on actual receipts collected and may vary from the estimates announced today. Robertson said 25 percent of the total national forest receipts for the fiscal year will be returned by the end of December to states with national forests. Revenues are collected by national forests for timber harvesting, grazing, recreational activities, mineral development, and other special uses. States are required by law to use their shares of the receipts for public schools and roads . MADISON AREA RANCHERS TURN LOGS INTO DOLLARS The Madison Conservation District and Madison area ranchers have teamed up to diversify rancher income by developing a cooperative program for converting their timber resources into lumber, enhancing forage production and planning for improved long-term productivity of both resources on iocal ranches. On September 29, 1987, the nuts and bolts of this cooperative program will be presented during a field demonstration at the Peter V. Jackson ranch In Norris. This demonstration is free and open to the public. The demo will be of interest to forest landowners including farmers and ranchers, industry and agency forest managers, forestry consultants and conservation district employees interested in starting a similar program in other parts of the State. The Madison Conservation District in cooperation with the Headwaters RC&D, has applied for a grant to purchase a portable sawmill which will be used to manufac- ture lumber from logs harvested on ranches on the Madison district. Ranchers who develop a forest management plan for long term production of timber and forage resources, will contract with the mill operator to have their logs sawn to their specifications."}
{"id": "space-family-robinson-lost-in-space", "title": "Space Family Robinson Lost in Space No. 48: Pirates of the Asteroids (August 1976)", "year": 1976, "seq": 0, "text": "Let's leave Earth forawhile and take an imaginary trip to some other parts of our solar system. We can start with the smaller planets. Judging from present scientific beliefs, we would encounter some worlds far different from our own... Our spaceship speeds toward Mercury, the planet closest to the sun. It is also the smallest planet, having a diameter less than half of earth\u2019s, Ithas no moon. ~ Mercury has the same side always facing the sun. On this dayside, it is terrifically hot, for the surface receives ten times more heat than Earth does. The nightside of Mercury is dark and frozen. A twilight belt, about 200 miles wide, exists between the night and day\u2019sides, where temperatures ar\u00e9 less extreme. Land- ing there, we find Mercury has little, if any, atmosphere, Looking toward the sunlit side, we need goggles to cut down the brilliant glare of the sun\u2019s corona. The sun itself appears three times larger and brighter than from Earth. Because there is little air on Mercury, the sky is black and there is no weather \u2014 no wind, no rain, no clouds. The gravity, three- tenths that of Earth, makes us feel light and aids in an easy take-off. ' Leaving Mercury behind, our spaceship. travels away from the sun toward Venus, our neighboring planet. From Earth, Venus is the brightest of the planets, because of its thick cloud cover which reflects. sunlight. We. find that these clouds, seen from below, look dark gray. Because Venus is Asa to the sun: than. Earth is, surface temperatures are much hotter, though not as extreme as on Mercury. The atmosphere contains an abundance of carbon dioxide, so we cannot breathe it. Since Venus is only/slightly smaller than the- Earth, there is not much difference in the pull of gravity."}
{"id": "minutespr79newj", "title": "Minutes of the votes and proceedings of the ... General Assembly of the State of New Jersey", "year": 1979, "seq": 0, "text": "In preparation for that show, my staff and I spent untold numbers of hours in research and collecting data on this 86 MINUTES OF THE GENERAL ASSEMBLY issue, as well as the issue of alcohol abuse and potential legislative solutions. Therefore, any views or conclusions reached by me or since enunciated by me were formed based on that research and collection of data no later than June of 1978. Likewise my point of view has been long discussed with members of the media (in fact on occasion reported in the papers) many months prior to any known or possible contemplation by way of representation or ac- quiring a financial interest in reference to the Bull's Head Inn. 3. I have assured Senator Graves that I would personally support release of Senate No. 1126 from committee in what- ever final form the Judiciary Committee, after due delibera- tion, recommends \u2014 and that I would urge other members of my committee to do likewise, so the full membership of the General Assembly can have an opportunity to vote on this measure. I, therefore, have come to the following conclusions: 1. To fulfill the spirit and intent of the Legislative Code of Ethics that the integrity of the process would best be served by full disclosure of my interest, and that of my associates in the Bull's Head Inn. I believe that this docu- ment represents that full disclosure; and 2. Having committed to Senator Graves to support re- lease of Senate No. 1126, and having determined in my mind, without any reservation whatsoever that Senate No. 1126 would have minimal or no financial impact, if enacted, for me or with those whom I am associated; and 3. That any views publicly expressed by me on this issue predated the Bull's Head Inn transaction. I therefore conclude that my chairing of these hearings would not violate in any way either the spirit or letter of the Code of Ethics ; that I believe that I can fully participate in a fair and objective manner in these committee delibera- tions."}
{"id": "minutespr79newj", "title": "Minutes of the votes and proceedings of the ... General Assembly of the State of New Jersey", "year": 1979, "seq": 1, "text": "Clerk of the General Assembly State House Trenton, New Jersey 08625 Honorable Robert E. Gladden Secretary of the Senate State House Trenton, New Jersey 08625 Gentlemen : After years of litigation and struggle, employees of the former Raybestos-Manhattan Company, Passaic, New Jer- 174 MINUTES OF THE GENERAL ASSEMBLY sey plant have reached a financial settlement with the com- pany involving pension rights. The lengthy court battle was engendered in part by a desire of the workers to gain a measure of economic justice under an Act of the New Jersey Legislature signed into law in 1973. As a Senator from Passaic County at that time, I vigorously supported the legislation for the sole purpose of aiding Raybestos em- ployees or any other New Jersey company employees found to be in similar circumstances due to the unconscionable actions on the part of their employers. Approximately seven months after the passage of the bill by the Senate and five months after then Governor Cahill signed the bill into law, several former Raybestos' employees contacted Pat Di Ianni, Esq., with whom I was sharing offices. As a result of these initial discussions, Mr. Di Ianni was retained either in October or November 1973 by a committee of former employees of Raybestos-Man- hattan to undertake legal action on behalf of the employees to procure their pension rights. On March 1, 1978 I entered into an agreement to establish the law firm of Bate, Di Ianni & Pogorelec as a partnership. At my insistence that agreement contains the provision that I would not, either as a partner or as an individual, share in or receive any legal fees resulting from the settlement of Raybestos' case. While there appears to be no legal prece- dent that would prevent me from sharing such fees, it is my firm conviction that it would be morally wrong to do so."}
{"id": "minutespr79newj", "title": "Minutes of the votes and proceedings of the ... General Assembly of the State of New Jersey", "year": 1979, "seq": 2, "text": "The Clerk read the following messages from the Gover- nor : State of New Jersey, Executive Department, \\ June 11, 1979. J Assembly Bill No. 573 To the Assembly: Pursuant to Article V, Section I, Paragraph 14(a) of the Constitution, I herewith return Assembly Bill No. 573, with- out my approval. This bill would require every municipality which issues identification cards to its volunteer or part-paid firemen to include on such identification cards, the date of issue and the name, address, photograph, right thumbprint and signa- ture of the fireman to whom it was issued. The statement of the Assembly Municipal Government Committee indicates that this information would be identical to that provided on New Jersey State Police identification cards. The reason for the bill set forth in that committee state- ment is that firemen frequently are engaged in hazardous duty on private premises and therefore should be able to identify themselves. However, if a fireman is engaged in lighting a fire, I do not see why he would need a detailed identification card. Proponents of the bill argue that these identification cards would aid in identification of persons fighting fires who die in those fires. While this seems to be the most plausible reason for the bill, if a fire is serious enough to disfigure a person to the degree he cannot be recognized, I question whether the identification card, in whatever form, would survive. At present, various municipalities voluntarily issue iden- tification cards to their volunteer firemen and include such MONDAY, JUNE 11, 1979 293 information as they deem appropriate. There is no legal requirement that such cards be issued. This bill would man- date that municipalities which issue such cards include cer- tain detailed information. However, if a municipality does not issue such cards, this bill would not require it to do so. Further, if a municipality wanted to stop issuing such cards altogether, this legislation would not prevent it from doing so."}
{"id": "minutespr79newj", "title": "Minutes of the votes and proceedings of the ... General Assembly of the State of New Jersey", "year": 1979, "seq": 3, "text": "L. 1977, c. 110) primarily to increase the annual tax on the gross revenues of casinos from eight percent to 11 percent when two casinos are in operation, nine percent when three are in operation and eight and one-half percent when four are in operation. \"When five casinos are in operation, the tax will return to eight percent. The proposed casino tax increase is linked with Assembly Bill No. 3526 which would establish a Lifeline Credit Pro- gram. The program would provide a $100 line of credit to all gas and electric utility customers eligible to receive benefits under the Pharmaceutical Assistance to the Aged (PAA) Program or the Supplemental Security Income (SSI) Program in order to defray a portion of their utility THURSDAY, AUGUST 23, 1979 479 bills for the coming and succeeding winters. By its terms, x\\.-3526 will remain inoperative until the funding for the program is provided by an increase in the casino tax. I am returning this bill together with a recommendation to expand the category of eligible recipients in A.-3626 to include disabled persons who have the same income quali- fications as PAA recipients, in addition to those receiving- SSI benefits. Casino tax revenues ore intended to benefit both senior citizens and disabled persons. I find no reason not to include disabled persons who have identical income limitations as eligible senior citizens. An estimated 60,000 disabled persons could be assisted by such an amendment and, at that level of participation, the additional cost of the program would be $6 million. I urge the Legislature, therefore, to amend this bill to increase the rate of taxation to 14 percent for two casinos, 12 percent for three, 10 percent for four and 8 percent for five or more. Furthermore, 1 ask thai the provision direct- ing a special assessment on the casinos to accelerate repay- ment to the Casino Control Fund of the moneys appropri- ated from the General State Fund for the start-up costs of the Casino Control Commission and Department of Law and Public Safety be reinstated."}
{"id": "minutespr79newj", "title": "Minutes of the votes and proceedings of the ... General Assembly of the State of New Jersey", "year": 1979, "seq": 4, "text": "The stated purpose of Assembly Bill No. 1285 (3rd OCR) is to regulate the performance of abortions in the State of New Jersey. I have expressed my personal and moral reservations on abortion. My recent veto of the capital punishment bill demonstrates my concern for human life. On that occasion I stated: Clearly the preservation of human life and protection of the safety of our citizens are among the highest goals of state government. 704 MINUTES OF THE GENERAL ASSEMBLY I do not believe we have the right to impose our moral views on society even though we might be the clear ma- jority. With this in mind and despite personal feelings, I feel it inappropriate for me to approve a bill which will substantially impair a woman's constitutionally recognized right to privacy in the matter of abortions. I respect the Legislature's deliberations and efforts to fashion a bill in this area which is fraught with legal pit- falls. Nevertheless, there are still questions about the con- stitutionality of the bill. After careful consideration, I have concluded that the cumulative effect of the provisions of Assembly Bill No. 1285 would not be to regulate reasonably but rather to erode substantially the right of a woman to choose to have an abortion in this State. I am troubled by certain aspects of the informed consent provisions of the bill, specifically those provisions which require a physician to advise a woman of a detailed list of factors she should consider. I am informed by Commis- sioner Finley that many of the statements required to be included on the consent form regarding risks of abortion have not been medically proven. The listed factors empha- size only the negative aspects of abortions rather than presenting a balanced framework for an intelligent, in- formed choice. A reasonable regulation would explain all of the factors to a woman making this choice."}
{"id": "minutespr79newj", "title": "Minutes of the votes and proceedings of the ... General Assembly of the State of New Jersey", "year": 1979, "seq": 5, "text": "Other areas of legal concern include the procedure for parental notification, the twenty-four hour waiting period and the requirement that all abortions after the twelfth week be performed in a hospital. This latter requirement is in direct conflict with pertinent regulations of the State Department of Health and the State Board of Medical Examiners which permit licensed independent clinics 10 perform abortions, in certain instances, up to the fourteenth week of gestation. In addition, the proposed law requires physicians per- forming abortions to undertake numerous record keeping and reporting responsibilities. It requires that under tain circumstances a physician present written justification for his medical decisions. These difficult medical determi- nations and reports must be made under the pressure that the physician may face criminal liability if he contra v the proposed law. Many of these record keeping and re] ing requirements may infringe upon the practice of medi- THURSDAY, JANUARY 3, 1980 705 cine and are of no public health significance or value to the Department of Health. The total impact of the record keeping and reporting requirements, the difficult medical determinations and the threat of criminal liability is likely to deter many physicians from performing abortions in this State. As a former prosecutor of criminal abortion cases, I know the human tragedy that can result from illegal abortions. Now that abortions within constitutional guidelines are permitted it would be distressing to see the return of the back alley abortion because licensed physicians are reluctant to perform abortions. Finally, if abortions become difficult to obtain in New Jersey, those of our citizens who are financially able to do so will seek them in our neighboring states. Thus to many New Jersey residents our regulation will be meaningless. While this bill has the effect of going beyond its stated purpose of reasonably regulating abortions in the State of New Jersey, some regulation in this area may be in order."}
{"id": "cawsahs_000279", "title": "West Sacramento News-Ledger 1999-05-05", "year": 1999, "seq": 0, "text": "At the age of ten Sara be\u00ac gan to question her Chris\u00ac tian faith, and wonder if By Olivia I)e Mars Staff Writer By Danielle Meaux and their sins. Bryon (Jroesbeck W i /777TT77*77 [FT, Catholics have many ceremo\u00ac nies and rituals to go through There are so many religions in such as baptism and confirma- the world, just counting them tion. Baptism is the liturgical would be a complex task. One of celebration in which a child or the largest groups at River City adult is cleansed of sin and be- is Catholicism,the largest de- gins a new life with God. Water nomination of Christianity in the is sprinkled on the the persons world. head as a sign of the person\u2019s The week of a Catholic could cleansing from sin. include church on Fridays and During confirmation, a bishop Saturdays and definitely on Sun- or priest, puts holy oil, called days, the day of rest. Thesurvice Chrism, on the forehead of the is called a mass, whereCathlics person being confirmed. The take holy communion, in which Chrism signifies that these the priest symbolicly turns bread people have been strengthened and wine into the body and blood by the Holy Spirit so that they of Jesus Christ. A Catholics also may live up to their faith, pray to the Virgin Mary and of- Stephanie Luna said, \u201c1 felt truly ten go to confession to ask the connected with God\u2019\u2019 when she priest to forgive them for all was confirmed. Atheism/Agnosticism The Positive Atheist Home Page www.aracnet.com/-atheism/ index.htm humans evolved from simple organ- there was a god, I believe that isms to the complicated humans we that god would not have made are today. It had to do with chemi- this world what it is.\u201d cals and chemical reactions, not Salina Salas, another atheist, added, \u201cIf there was a god, how could he allow innocent chil\u00ac dren to be raped, molested, and murdered?"}
{"id": "IllustratingTheSermonAnIn2", "title": "Mullins - Illustrating The Sermon An In ( 2)", "year": 1990, "seq": 0, "text": "In recent years story and inductive preaching have become popular. Fred Craddock in his books As One Without Authority . Overhearing the Gospel . and Preaching along with Steimle, Niedenthal, and Rice's book, Preaching the Story , have Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 5 impacted preaching and the use of illustrations tremendously. These books point us to the simple fact that the illustration is the message. This may be seen in the parables of Jesus. The parable of the good Samaritan was not to clarify the point. The parable was the point. A more in-depth understanding of illustrations would seem to be in order. My thesis is that a more significant understanding of how illustrations work in preaching may be gained if one studies how illustrations worked in sermons in the twelfth, thirteenth, and fourteenth centuries. This project investigates the use of illustrations in sermons from three medieval texts, one from the twelfth century, one from the thirteenth century, and one from the fourteenth century. The texts to be investigated are The Art of Preaching by Alan of Lille, Treatise on the Formation of Preachers by Humbert of Romans, and The Form of Preaching by Robert of Basevorn. While each of these texts has a great deal of informa\u00ac tion concerning preachers, preaching, and audiences, this project will only seek to understand the functions of illus\u00ac trations found therein. Chapter 2 has three parts: the background of Christian preaching in Judaism and in the \"works\" of Jesus and Paul; the background provided for late medieval theoreticians of sermons by Augustine, Gregory the Great, and Guibert of Nogent? and the five general characteristics of medieval sermonizing. Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 6 Chapter 3 has three parts: a brief biography of Alan of Lille; a discussion of Alan's book The Art of Preaching ; and a discussion of Alan's understanding of illustrations."}
{"id": "IllustratingTheSermonAnIn2", "title": "Mullins - Illustrating The Sermon An In ( 2)", "year": 1990, "seq": 1, "text": "Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 22 heretics, a theological dictionary as well as the Art of Preaching . The Art of Preaching is divided into forty-eight divi\u00ac sions following the author's Preface. Only the Preface and the first chapter speak about preaching. The remaining forty- seven chapters are topics to be preached or audiences to be addressed. Chapter two is called \"On Despising the World\" while chapter three is entitled \"On Despising Oneself.\" Other chapter titles include \"Against Sloth,\" \"Against Anger,\" and \"Against Loquaciousness.\" Positive topics such as \"On Peace\" and \"On the love of God\" are also included. The eight audi\u00ac ences addressed by individual chapters are. Soldiers, Orators, Princes and Judges, the Cloistered Religious, Priests, the Married, Widows and Virgins. Alan used four authorities to lend support to his discussion of the divisions. He used the Biblical text. Patristic writings, secular quotations, and examples. For example in his chapter \"Against Dissipation\" Alan begins with a number of scriptural supports and then quotes Gregory the Great. Toward the end of the chapter, Alan contrasts Biblical examples. Jezebel is contrasted with the Virgin Mary. Joseph and Daniel are contrasted with David and Ammon. In the middle of this chapter Alan uses several mathematical formulas to drive home the case against dissi\u00ac pation. He speaks of three things in hell, three loathsome things in this vice, five steps of dissipation, three things that drive a man from his house. Alan uses multiple metaphors as well, such as filth, dung-pits, flies, emasculation, she- Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 23 goat of stinking lust, wolves, and intoxication to mention a few. This chapter is concluded by Alan stating that gluttony is the beginning of lust and dissipation and should be avoided at all costs."}
{"id": "IllustratingTheSermonAnIn2", "title": "Mullins - Illustrating The Sermon An In ( 2)", "year": 1990, "seq": 2, "text": "Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 56 sources familiar to the listeners, and can be humorous. Robert uses illustrations that compare to make meanings clear. Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 57 CHAPTER 6 Conclusion The modern preacher can learn something about illustrat\u00ac ing sermons from the three medieval sermon manuals discussed. While each manual discusses illustrations in different ways and from different viewpoints some general conclusions can be made. A variety of strategies for illustrations is to be preferred. Alan used contrasts, sequences, comparisons, and vivid language. Humbert used anecdotes, comparisons, and sequences. Robert used examples and comparisons. The use of comparisons was preferred by all three of the texts. The second most preferred method of illustration was sequences. Illustrations were drawn not only from Scripture, but also from classical authors, current books of illustrations, common life situations, and lives of the saints. Illustrations were used for a variety of reasons. The obvious reason was to make clear the intent of the preacher. Illustrations were used to gain and maintain the listener's attention. Illustrations were used as supports for the preacher's arguments. Illustrations were used to appeal to the emotions of the listeners. Because certain important people used illustrations, the texts discussed recommended using illustrations. Among those who were to be emulated were Jesus, Paul, Augustine, Gregory and Bernard. Different Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 58 illustrations were to be used for different audiences. Illustrations meant different things for the different authors. In fact, it would seem that for each sermon preached a different meaning for each story, contrast, or comparison could be made. The three texts all cautioned the preacher to be sure that the illustration not only suited the sermon and audience, but also did not call attention to itself."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1970-10-16", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1970-10-16 : Volume LXVI, Issue 4", "year": 1970, "seq": 0, "text": "The proposal that Mr. Carey remain a non-voting member, while the other deans would be given two-thirds of a vote each was also refuted for lack of a common denominator between ad\u00ac ministrators and students. Dean O\u2019Brien presented a motion stating that the president would designate the deans who would represent the administra\u00ac tion. The motion was seconded, but could not be passed, as the students\u2019 voting status had not yet been settled. The suggestion that just the student officers vote illuminated another decision the representa\u00ac tives had come to am >ng them\u00ac selves - that they would take turns serving in each office. They were asked to consider the effect of rotating offices on accepting re\u00ac sponsibility for decision-making. The officers of the week then voted in favor of Dean O\u2019Brien's motion, and it was passed unan\u00ac imously. A discussion of whether all eight student members would be invited to faculty meetings closed with the assurance of one stu- Continued on Page 7 However, used out of propor\u00ac tion, repetion becomes ex\u00ac pressionless and monolithic. One has the distinct impression that something is being repeated more for practical reasons than for the poetic as in such a work as \u201cBeware The Fury of A Patient Man\u201d where it seems rather to substitue for something better. In spite of these certain idio- syncracies of style Espace Libre presents some beautiful expres\u00ac sions of the simplicity of child\u00ac hood, of highly personal emo\u00ac tions, and of captured thoughts in a lyrical outpouring that seems foreign to our all too structured thought. Its greatest value lies in its ability to create an emo\u00ac tional link between poet and reader that serves as the readers own first step toward the reali\u00ac sation of his personal values. Worke rs To the Editor- There are two classes of peo\u00ac ple at Middlebury College."}
{"id": "montereynews1992unse_2", "title": "Monterey news", "year": 1992, "seq": 0, "text": "Bohn suggested obtaining up-to-date figures on the town's financial situation before including this item on the warrant for town meeting. The Selectmen announced that all warrant articles for the annual town meeting on May 2 must be submitted by March 30. The warrant will be submitted to town counsel for review on April 6, and the Board will sign the finalized warrant on April 13. Last month, we reported in this space that the troubles of the Monterey Water Company has ended. Our information came from a story in the Berkshire Eagle. Unfortunately, that information was incorrect. In fact, the Monterey Water Company is not exempt from the federal requirements outlined in the 1986 amendments to the Safe Drinking Water Act. The exemptions were granted for gravel-packed wells. The Monterey well in question is a bedrock well, According to Mark Makuc, in a letter to the editor printed in the Eagle, \u201cOur well is a backup to a spring which is our ~ primary supply. The DEP would like us to stop using that spring despite its history of excellent water quality, unless we filter, which is financially beyond our means.\u201d The bottom line is that the Monterey Water Company is back to square one. They don't have the type of water sources that have been exempted from regulations and are still being threatened with shut down unless they make massive, expensive, seemingly unnecessary improvements. The Selectmen voted unanimously to grant Shirley Clute of Art School Road a conflict-of-interest exemption in her funding application to the Monterey Arts Council for the Following Bidwell House projects: security improvement, oral history project and photographic preservation project. The following building permit applications were approved: Steven and Barbara Hillenius, for a living room addition to their Hupi Woods Circle home; Tom Gillis, for the construction of an outside deck at his Harmon Road home. \u2014 Maggie Leonard CANDIDATES FOR TOWN OFFICE Elections for town officers will be held at the annual town meeting on May 2."}
{"id": "montereynews1992unse_2", "title": "Monterey news", "year": 1992, "seq": 1, "text": "The first horse we looked at was perfect, but it turned out someone else had first refusal on her. Since she was perfect, these people of course bought her. We sat home heartbroken for a day or two, and then went to look at another horse. It was zero degrees out, and windy: bad weather for-doing anything. But we had the bit in our teeth, so to speak, and if there were horses out there, we were going tocheck them out. This second horse, despite the weather, was also perfect! Can you believe it? He was different in almost every respect from the first horse we'd seen, and yet, he too was wonderful. We did not buy him because he was the ugliest horse we had ever encountered, and we had to go home and search our souls as to whether or not we could stand to be seen with him. It was our vanity, our imperfection, that was the problem here, not his. I said to myself, \u201cMostly, I won't have time to ride this horse. My pleasure will come from looking at it as I am dashing up to the garden, jumping in the car, doing all the things I do which will not leave me much time for riding. Will my heart leap up like I want it to when I look at this ugliest of horses?\u201d While thinking this one over and tossing it back and forth with the other family members, we drove off to see another horse. She was also perfect! Oh, maybe she hadn't been ridden much, maybe never learned a thing, really, about that special bond between rider and horse, that silent, instantaneous communication by means of body signals. Actually, we couldn't tell if 10 Sul she'd ever had a bridle on in her life."}
{"id": "montereynews1992unse_2", "title": "Monterey news", "year": 1992, "seq": 2, "text": "All the elements are meshing. \u2014 Nancy Adams 12 OVER THE RAINBOW: MARJ'S BURIAL An arc of folk huddle on this hillside, ache among tombstones and thyme, face the Scotsman who drives your dirge through an inflated bag. The air crowds; he competes, defeats the military helicopter overhead. (You drew the khaki dragonfly yourself, a wry wrinkle in the corner of the page; a sop to out solemnity.) Grieve this, you call, if grieving suits you: sleeping children proud and trained in weapons of war fly over funerals, and each of them a Wilfred Owen. As for me, salute me with a shout. Send me on, my way Satisfied, awake and aware with a rousing. Amen. \u2014 MaryKate Jordan ENIGMA My first in in happy, not in sad. My next not in lonely, but it is in glad. My third is in friendly, not in hate. And my last is in month, though not in date. Find the letters that spell the answer. \u2014 Eleanor Kimberley Answer on page 18 FAREWELL TO WINTER Farewell old winter with ice and snow And chilly blasts with each breath you blow, With Jack Frost's paintings on window panes, And sparkling diamonds from freezing rains Crowning the hillsides and valleys too Whenever the sun comes smiling through. On mountain tops bright sunsets glow As the time draws near when you must go. Now we long for spring to come once more With juncos hopping near our door; With robins' songs at break of dawn And crocuses to deck the lawn. Farewell old winter and welcome spring! Welcome the flowers, and birds that sing. Welcome the sunshine bright and warm, And farewell to you with your cold and storm. \u2014 Eleanor Kimberley FROST HEAVES Winter has returned After this taste of spring; The thaw reached deeply Into my thoughts And my buds were green Under thinning winter shells."}
{"id": "middleburyCourseCatalogs_a10-3_1980", "title": "Middlebury College Catalogue, 1980", "year": 1980, "seq": 0, "text": "Although Middlebury is in fact highly selective, it is in keen competition with other colleges for students of exceptional promise. Why does a student accepted at a major university or another fine liberal arts college finally decide on Middlebury? Students cite as prime factors coeducation, size, academic pro\u00ac gram and, very frequently, geography. Located on the western edge of the Green Mountains in a small Vermont town, Mid\u00ac dlebury exists in an especially attractive natural setting. Those who rejoice in urban pleasures may not at first be enchanted with the great national forest, mountains and streams which surround the campus; but they can, if adventurous, explore the resources of the closest great city, Montreal, which is only three hours away by car. The rest of this publication will describe the people, pro\u00ac grams and facilities that compose Middlebury College. Al\u00ac though there is much that is common to other institutions of high academic quality, and although much has been borrowed from long association with the other New England colleges and universities, an independence born out of a splendid solitude among the rugged Vermont hills finally defines Middlebury. The College has been forced to be self-reliant because it could not take easy borrowings from close academic neighbors or major cities. The books, the gadgetry and the people which make up a college have been brought to Middlebury for the sole and single purpose of undergraduate education. It was not the natural and easy course to found a college in a Vermont village in 1800, it had to be a matter of conscious choice. Edu\u00ac cation at Middlebury continues to be a matter of choice, not drift. This will to education creates a particular spirit and pride which stamps Middlebury, for all it shares with others, as unique. 9 The Middlebury Student In a recent guidebook to American colleges, Middlebury was listed along with a handful of other colleges and universities as among the most selective in the country."}
{"id": "middleburyCourseCatalogs_a10-3_1980", "title": "Middlebury College Catalogue, 1980", "year": 1980, "seq": 1, "text": "Fortunately with such a range of enthusiasms, students display extraordinary tolerance. There seems to be very little pressure at Middlebury to conform to any present image. Fraternity men, ballet dancers, rock faddists, violinists, electronic experts, and gourmets not only coexist but interact in a series of social pat\u00ac terns which defy normal stereotypes. 12 The Faculty Approximately 80% of the Middlebury faculty who teach in degree granting programs have received their Ph.D. degree or the equivalent terminal degree in their field. Harvard is most strongly represented on the faculty, followed by Yale, Prince\u00ac ton, Columbia and the University of Chicago. Faculty choose Middlebury because of the teaching opportunities it affords. Excellent faculty like to have excellent students, it is as simple as that. Here is how one faculty member characterizes teaching at Middlebury: \u201cProfessors have a relationship with students that makes teaching at Middlebury an experience of joy and self- fulfillment. Many classes are seminars. Lecture courses with large enrollments have generally one hour of group discus\u00ac sion each week. Senior majors write a thesis under the direc\u00ac tion of a professor. Because of the structure of learning, teachers and students communicate with each other in a personal and dynamic way. After lectures, students do not shuffle out of classrooms mutely and indifferently. There are always some deeply involved and responsive students who re\u00ac main to ask questions and to dispute the instructor\u2019s inter\u00ac pretation or argument. Facing the challenge of such intellec\u00ac tually aggressive and critically alert young minds, professors cannot rest contentedly with the knowledge that they have acquired in graduate school. At Middlebury, teachers must be students, learning con\u00ac tinually, posing new questions, looking at old questions from a fresh perspective, and re-evaluating old views. Because of close and frequent contacts with students as individual per\u00ac sons, teachers have the opportunity to observe them develop in mind and spirit from the beginning to the end of the semester, from freshman year to graduation."}
{"id": "middleburyCourseCatalogs_a10-3_1980", "title": "Middlebury College Catalogue, 1980", "year": 1980, "seq": 2, "text": "Literature confronts in an immediate and moving way the complexities of the human heart. Learning to criticize and analyze literature is not just an arid exercise in prosody. To be able to read and write accurately and self-reflectively is a major accomplishment which the English department hopes to foster while acquainting students with the range of sensibili\u00ac ties within the English literary tradition. MUSIC It is often difficult to perceive exactly what the philosophy of the music major at Middlebury is \u2014but whatever it is, students seem to enjoy it immensely. Music may well be one of the most action-oriented departments at the College. Students are con\u00ac tinually asked to do musical things, not just passively listen or 25 scan the scores. In an elementary course everyone will construct and perform a musical composition \u2014 standard instruments disallowed. Anyone who has sat through a multi-media per\u00ac formance of a Sonata for Ping-pong Balls and Oil-drums is not likely to forget it and, amazingly, the bare bones of musical composition become apparent. Doing music is the essence of the department\u2019s performance seminars which center on the classical musical repertoire. The diversity of the department\u2019s program reflects the diversity of the faculty: a composer-theorist, a performer, and two music historians. Surrounding the core of departmental courses there is a penumbra of performance activities. Instruc\u00ac tion is offered in several instruments, in choir, orchestra, col\u00ac legium, concert, and stage band. Organ instruction is par\u00ac ticularly popular because of the presence of a gifted performer on the regular faculty and two new instruments: a baroque organ and a Gress-Miles 48 rank instrument. Music offers special opportunities for cooperation and \u201cdouble effect.\u201d The 26 electronic music studio is not only a place for composing in a modern idiom, but for theoretical analysis of musical textures."}
{"id": "middleburyCourseCatalogs_a10-3_1980", "title": "Middlebury College Catalogue, 1980", "year": 1980, "seq": 3, "text": "As a matter of fact, philosophy is probably as fine a training for law school as any major, since it requires constant, dispassionate attention to intricate arguments on very complex and often emotionally charged issues. It is the apparent overwhelming nature of the questions which phi\u00ac losophy considers that often dissuades students from pursuing the subject. The questions are so important, that the kind of rational, \u201carms length dealing\u201d which philosophy requires seems almost to deny the urgency of the issue. But one of the clear attractions of philosophy to its practitioners is the oppor\u00ac tunity of discoursing in depth and at length on topics which most people consider too loaded for polite conversation. Students intersect with the philosophy program in three ways. There are the majors who are asked to explore three central areas: ethics and social philosophy, philosophy of sci\u00ac ence and theory of knowledge, and history of philosophy. Stu\u00ac dents looking for a quick once-over of a discipline where tourism is never leisurely are offered a variety of historical and problem- centered courses. Finally, many students have their primary contact with philosophy through various \u201cphilosophy of\u2019 courses \u2014art, law, religion, education, history, science, language, and social science\u2014which relate to their major fields of study. RELIGION The study of religion cannot be confined in a single discipline. The Department of Religion presents the manifold of religious phenomena from various methodological viewpoints but two points of view predominate\u2014the historical and philosophical. An historical approach presents the forms of religious life in 27 their social and cultural setting, and attempts to discover ele\u00ac ments of universal human significance inherent in these his\u00ac torical forms. The philosophical and theological approach in\u00ac quires into the truth as well as the meaning of religious beliefs. Because of the interdisciplinary nature of religious studies, the department works cooperatively with other departments, in particular."}
{"id": "middleburyCourseCatalogs_a10-3_1980", "title": "Middlebury College Catalogue, 1980", "year": 1980, "seq": 4, "text": "Philosophy and Sociology-Anthropology, to develop courses for its program. Very few students come to college expecting to major in Religion\u2014and yet a significant number eventually do. This is not surprising. College years are a traditional time of testing for values and beliefs. Many students take a relipon course \u201cto give religion a last chance,\u201d to strengthen a faith, to have an opportunity to read the Bible or the Vedanta, out of curiosity or because they have heard good things about Professor X. Al\u00ac most inevitably they are struck with the range and depth of religious phenomena, the intellectual and emotional power of the texts, and the interest and concern of the faculty in their subject matter. Very few who then decide to study further intend to be priests, ministers, or rabbis \u2014 though the College has produced graduates in each category\u2014but if undergradu\u00ac ate education aims to evaluate values, the study of religion can be central to that education. THEATER and DANCE Students in theater arts courses have a unique opportunity to synthesize the whole spectrum of academic disciplines. Faculty in this department argue persuasively that their curriculum amounts to a whole liberal arts education in miniature: literature, psychology, artistic design, dance, music, elec\u00ac tronics, engineering, and certainly some moral discipline to get through rehearsal and master the performance. The de\u00ac partment offers a kaleidoscope of subjects, including courses in acting, directing, design, film study, dramatic literature, and playwrighting. Performance provides a vital and rewarding aspect of the program. Students and faculty work together to stage approx\u00ac imately a dozen works each year. Productions occur chiefly in two theater spaces: the 400 seat Wright Theatre, which boasts one of the few computerized lighting systems in this region, and the Hepburn Zoo, which accommodates production of ex\u00ac perimental theater pieces."}
{"id": "middleburyCourseCatalogs_a10-3_1980", "title": "Middlebury College Catalogue, 1980", "year": 1980, "seq": 5, "text": "Another part will focus on the abnormal or disturbed manifestations of these behaviors. A third part will focus on intra-individual processes which mediate these be\u00ac haviors, whether normal or disordered. Course offerings in psychology at Middlebury College serve at least these three functions and give the student related prac- ticum or laboratory work where such is relevant to tl^ course material. Many students are surprised by the \u201cscientific bent of psychology at Middlebury. Popular images of \u201cpsychology as an instant key to and sudden cure of, the troubled human self, distort the theoretical and practical complexities ot the subiect. Psychology is truly a young science although its rise has been extraordinary in this century. The Departinents interest in precision, control, and experiment reflects a legiti\u00ac mate desire to substitute validated truth for mere conjecture and opinion. SOCIOLOGY-ANTHROPOLOGY Sociology-Anthropology has the distinct advantage of combin\u00ac ing exposure to two disciplines within a single department. A special effort is made to help students to capitalize on these two complementary perspectives. Students are encouraged to study comparatively those social institutions covered by both anthropologists and sociologists: family and kinship, stratifi\u00ac cation and inequality, and political behavior. Students can usually devise their own program of area studies using the resources of other departments. Sociology-Anthropology offers course work in Latin America, the Far East (especially China and Japan), and North American Indian cultures. Several 34 courses deal with American society and its social problems: education, population, deviance, and majority-minority relations. The department blends both the scientific and humanistic dimensions of Sociology and Anthropology. For the science- oriented, there is the opportunity to engage in original research or to perform analyses on data bases already available on the computer. For the humanities-oriented, there is the oppor\u00ac tunity to consider the human implications of social-science research."}
{"id": "middleburyCourseCatalogs_a10-3_1980", "title": "Middlebury College Catalogue, 1980", "year": 1980, "seq": 6, "text": "Languages at Middlebury are innovative and creative, offering the opportunity to stu\u00ac dents not only to increase their knowledge of the spoken language but to have direct contact with the cultural tradition of the country of their language, either through specially designed courses on campus, participation in the summer Language Schools, or foreign study. CHINESE Middlebury has recently introduced an undergraduate pro\u00ac gram in Chinese to complement and expand its very successful long time summer program in that language. Courses are of\u00ac fered in Mandarin Chinese, and the College also offers courses in translation covering major literary and ideological movements in Chinese culture. Students may pursue an ex\u00ac panded program of Chinese studies by coordinating under\u00ac graduate work with the Middlebury College summer program. Chinese language augments a constellation of course materials in Asia offered in History, Religion, Art and Anthropology. CLASSICS The Classics Department offers students the opportunity to study great works of Classical literature, history and philosophy 37 in their original languages as well as in English translation. Be\u00ac ginning courses in Greek and Latin introduce students very quickly to authentic selections from such authors as Homer and Plato, Cicero and Virgil, as well as the New Testament and medieval poetry. The department also offers courses on a wide range of topics from archaeology to Greek Science which are taught entirely in English. FRENCH The French Department seeks to develop in its students the linguistic ability to pursue in French their various personal and intellectual interests. Intensive beginning and intermediate courses bring students up to a level where they can begin to branch out, and students with more advanced preparation may take upper level courses in language, literature and civilization. Most recently, members of the department have been developing courses in the French film, women\u2019s studies and comparative literature."}
{"id": "middleburyCourseCatalogs_a10-3_1980", "title": "Middlebury College Catalogue, 1980", "year": 1980, "seq": 7, "text": "In addition to the program of study offered by the French Department, there are varied extracurricular activities, centered in the Chateau with its forty French speaking resi\u00ac dents. In the Chateau dining room members of the French Department faculty eat on a regular basis with students, dis\u00ac cussing not only their course work but perhaps a recent film, preparation for the annual French play, or an upcoming visit to Montreal. An opportunity for foreign study is also provided through the Junior Year program in Paris. Each year many Middlebury students, usually a 50 - 50 mixture of majors and non-majors, attend the School in France. The first few weeks, beginning in early September, constitute an intensive preliminary session of language work and an introduction to contemporary France. Upon completion of these preliminary courses and through consultation with the resident Director, students select from a wide range of courses including art, history, language, linguis\u00ac tics, literature, philosophy, political science and sociology. GERMAN German is not a language which many entering students have already studied, or in which they plan to major. It says some\u00ac thing about the Middlebury German Department that it pro\u00ac duces a very respectable number of German majors. Key to their success is a very carefully thought out, witty, and imagina\u00ac tive set of elementary teaching materials devised by the staff (a best seller nationally). These materials are then set into a 39 unique teaching pattern which minimizes out-of-class prepa\u00ac ration but maximizes intensive drill with faculty. This obviously calls for dedication from both student and teacher but the excess energy of the department appears to make the whole exercise both profitable and enjoyable. The Germans were first in the field with a Middlebury overseas undergraduate program at Mainz. The program is deliberately limited to a single term since experience strongly suggested to the department that most of the linguistic gains are made in that period."}
{"id": "middleburyCourseCatalogs_a10-3_1980", "title": "Middlebury College Catalogue, 1980", "year": 1980, "seq": 8, "text": "The relationship with the University of Mainz is unique in that Middlebury students are permitted to enroll directly in regular courses. Recently, through Mainz, the department has begun to import from the second German TV network television programs for experimental teaching purposes. RUSSIAN Middlebury s Russian Department offers a varied curriculum covering language instruction on beginning, intermediate and advanced levels as well as a range of courses in literature, civili\u00ac zation and culture. The program of each student may empha\u00ac size either the language, literature, culture or civilization and is planned individually in consultation with the chairman. In addition to the academic year activities in Russian studies with opportunities to explore Soviet contributions to the literary world, the College has an established nine week summer Russian School that provides students with intensive study in beginning, intermediate and advanced Russian as well as ad\u00ac vanced courses in culture and civilization offered during the six week session. The Russian experience may also be broadened through foreign study. Middlebury College now sponsors its own semester-length program at the Pushkin Institute in Mos\u00ac cow, open to qualified students who have completed three or more years of study of the language. SPANISH-ITALIAN Spanish \u2014 the twofold aim of the Spanish Department is to develop in its students a full command of the language as well as a mastery of the rich literature and culture of the Hispanic peoples. The introductory courses concentrate on a thorough and rapid development of language skills that will enable the student to become involved in advanced courses in language, literature, and culture and civilization. In addition to the diverse courses offered by the Department, juniors may 40 participate in the Spanish School in Madrid. Majors as well as non-majors are encouraged to take advantage of this oppor\u00ac tunity to widen their educational horizons by studying in one of the Spanish-speaking countries abroad."}
{"id": "middleburyCourseCatalogs_a10-3_1980", "title": "Middlebury College Catalogue, 1980", "year": 1980, "seq": 9, "text": "Middlebury also offers intensive language instruction at the beginning, intermediate and advanced levels as a part of the summer sessions of the Spanish School. In addition, a number of graduate courses are open to qualified undergraduates during the summer. The Spanish Club organizes various activities throughout the academic year, and students have the opportunity to dine with faculty members at the Spanish tables in the Chateau. Italian \u2014 the Italian courses are designed to meet the needs of Italian majors, other foreign language majors and students from related fields such as art, literature, music and sociology who are working toward a double or joint major or concentration. The aim of the program is to develop, not only a working command of the language, but involvement in the Italian contribution to literature, art, music and philosophy. In recognition of the needs of the college community at large, the Department also offers courses in translation. The Italian experience may be further enriched through participation in the summer session of the Italian School. Intensive instruction is offered at both the beginning and intermediate levels. Quali\u00ac fied students may also participate in advanced graduate courses offered at the summer session of the Italian School. An opportunity for foreign study is provided through the Junior Year Program in Florence, Italy. Majors and non-majors ac\u00ac tively participate in either the one-semester or full-year pro\u00ac grams in Italy under the guidance of a resident director. NATURAL SCIENCE Since the dedication of a new Science Center in 1968, Mid- dlebury has continued to improve its science facilities. A new academic computing center was installed in Voter Hall in 1975; Warner Science, the home of psychology, geography, mathematics, and botany, was completely renovated in 1978; the Science Center library and computing facilities were redesigned and renovated in 1979. Middlebury offers something that is not found in a large research oriented university; a program geared in size and philosophy toward undergraduate teaching and undergraduate participation in research."}
{"id": "theselfandtheobjectworld", "title": "The self and the object world.", "year": 1973, "seq": 0, "text": "Many ideas in that paper were further amplified and elaborated on in subsequent works: thus this Monograph is both a summary and an exten\u00ac sion of these contributions. However, it is not merely an expanded version of \"The Self and the Object World,\u201d nor is its scope limited to the subject matter of its title. In its greater comprehensiveness it offers a systematic frame of ref\u00ac erence for a psychoanalytic genetic psychology which encom\u00ac passes the early phases of psychic development, latency, adolescence, and adulthood. Superb accounts of the adoles\u00ac cent phase of development as well as of the role of the ego and superego in guilt and shame are welcome additions to the understanding of these complicated problems. Most illuminating are Dr. Jacobson\u2019s discussions of ego [vii] FOREWORD goals and ego ideal, of the precursors of the superego, and of the factors which eventually lead to the formation of this psychic structure, unique to man. In doing so, she emphasizes the influence of ego maturation upon the development of the superego, calling attention to the reciprocal interplay of forces which eventuates in the formation of particular psychic structures. The author is especially aware of such interaction and of the multidimensional aspects and the genetic contin\u00ac uity of psychic life. She repeatedly demonstrates that no single event in psychic development remains uninfluenced by any other one, and all of them must be integrated. Thus she does not fall prey to the too common error of exaggerating the importance of one particular aspect of development. In discussing the different stages of psychosexual develop\u00ac ment, the author examines, reviews, and amplifies many con\u00ac troversial subjects, such as the concepts of identity, infantile orality, and narcissism. The differentiations between ego, self, and self representations are explained with special clarity. Concepts of undifferentiated drive energy, the undifferen\u00ac tiated ego-id and their gradual emergence into functioning psychic structures, are incorporated into a conceptual scheme which illuminates our understanding of many obscure clinical phenomena."}
{"id": "theselfandtheobjectworld", "title": "The self and the object world.", "year": 1973, "seq": 1, "text": "John Frosch and to the Editorial Board for encouraging me to write this book. I am especially grateful to Dr. Max Schur for his thorough study and his very helpful discussion of this volume with me. I also want to extend my sincere thanks to Dr. Nathaniel Ross and to Mrs. Lottie Newman for their valu\u00ac able editorial assistance, and to Miss Paula Gross and Miss Mona M. Karff for their tireless work in preparing the manuscript. [ix] Introduction In recent years, psychoanalysts have paid increasing atten\u00ac tion to the fascinating problem of identity. Of course, a fruit\u00ac ful discussion of this problem presupposes precise definitions of such terms as self, ego, and identity or ego identity, which are indispensable for constructive analytic approaches to this and many related questions. Whereas Hartmann (1950) intro\u00ac duced and carefully defined the distinction between the con\u00ac cepts of ego, self, and self representations, there exists no such generally accepted psychoanalytic definition of the concept of identity. In fact, the authors who have lately explored this subject attach quite different meanings to these terms and consequently arrive at seemingly different conclusions. 1 In the context of several studies published during the past decade (1953b, 1954a, 1954b, 1959), I have discussed different aspects of self awareness, identity, and certain disturbances in the feeling of identity. Comparing my ideas with those expressed in recent papers and books on this subject, I have discovered considerable 1 As far as I know, the term identity has been introduced into the psycho\u00ac analytic literature by Victor Tausk in his brilliant paper on the \u201cinfluencing v'' machine\u201d (1919). In this article he examines how the child discovers objects and his self; he asserts that man, in his struggle for survival, must throughout life constantly find and experience himself anew (p. 22). INTRODUCTION differences of opinion, which have stimulated my own think\u00ac ing and caused me to expand and reorganize my earlier paper on \u201cThe Self and the Object World\u201d (1954a) into this volume bearing the same title."}
{"id": "theselfandtheobjectworld", "title": "The self and the object world.", "year": 1973, "seq": 2, "text": "Rapaport (1956) criticized me for supposedly equating the \u201csej\u00a3\u2019 with the \" self rep resentations,\" a metapsychological concept which will be defined later. AlthougirT'discnmihated quite carefully between these concepts, it is true that for semantic reasons I occasionally referred to the self or the objects when it seemed to be clear that I actually meant their psychic representations. In this volume I shall make special efforts to avoid confusing terminological inaccuracies. However, this is not always possible. It may be recalled that Freud, too, often briefly referred to objects when he clearly meant their psychic representations. \" ^ [6] NARCISSISM, MASOCHISM\u2014CONCEPT OF SELF display narcissistic or masochistic sexual or social behavior document clearly enough the tendency to withdraw object cathexis and to make their own persons the objects of either love, admiration, and libidinal gratification, or of hate, depreciation, and destructiveness. But what precisely is the meaning of narcissism and masochism in the primitive psy\u00ac chic organization prior to the child\u2019s discovery of his own self and of the object world? To obtain an answer, we obvi\u00ac ously must turn to a study of the drive manifestations of the infant and try to give a precise metapsychological description of his state and behavior. Between the brief feeding periods the infant spends most of the time either in a sleeping or in a half-awake, dozing state of passivity with as yet little expression of even primi\u00ac tive affects or of perceptive and motor functions. Sleep is the state which we are accustomed to designate as a truly narcis\u00ac sistic situation. In \u201cA Metapsychological Supplement to the Theory of Dreams\u201d (1917a), Freud said: Somatically, sleep is an act which reproduces intra-uterine existence, fulfilling the conditions of repose, warmth and absence of stimulus: indeed, in sleeping, many people resume the foetal position. The feature characterizing the mind of a sleeping person is an almost complete with\u00ac drawal from the surrounding world and the cessation of all interest in it [pp. 137-138], [And, further on:] The narcissism of sleep does indeed signify the withdrawal of cathexis from all ideas of objects, both from the unconscious and the preconscious parts of them [p. 140]."}
{"id": "theselfandtheobjectworld", "title": "The self and the object world.", "year": 1973, "seq": 3, "text": "We may now return to my previous statements suggesting that psychic life originates in physiological processes which are independent of external sensory stimulations. From birth on, however, the discharge processes expand with the open\u00ac ing up of biologically predetermined and preferred pathways for discharge in response to external stimulation. They lead at first only to primitive, patterned motor, species-specific (instinctive) reactions, and to pleasurable or unpleasurable sensory experiences which cannot yet be called feelings. Evi\u00ac dently these phenomena are no more than genetic fore\u00ac runners of the emotional and thought processes and of the complex functional activities whose development sets in with the beginning of ego formation. In fact, during the first infantile stages, the predominant expression of the child\u2019s emotional and fantasy life is still \u201cpsychophysiological,\u201d the so-called \u201caffective organ language\u201d which encompasses, how\u00ac ever, not only the \u201csilent\u201d inner physiological processes emphasized above but also visible vasomotor and secretory phenomena and manifestations in the realm of oral and excretory functions. I may point out that this affective organ language survives, to some extent, even in the emotional life of normal adults in anxiety states and in other manifestations of \u201cresomatization\u201d of affects (Schur, 1955). The foregoing considerations were intended to underline the correlation of the original psychoeconomic state and the earliest type of drive discharge within the self to the psycho- physiological forerunners of adult affective and ideational expression. The value of such considerations is proved by [in INFANTILE, PREOEDIPAL, AND OEDIPAlL PHASES observations on patients with psychosomatic diseases or psy\u00ac chotic disorders, which confirm these correlations. These two groups of disorders show what we call, albeit somewhat imprecisely, signs of severe narcissistic regression. With regard to psychosomatic patients we may, in the light of my proposition, speak of a pathological partial retrans\u00ac formation of ideational and emotional into somatic, physio\u00ac logical expressions, which are then perceived only as painful body sensations (Schur, 1955)."}
{"id": "theselfandtheobjectworld", "title": "The self and the object world.", "year": 1973, "seq": 4, "text": "But for no good reason, he separates this feeling aspect entirely from the conceptual components of the self representations. 12 Fedem's (1952) assumption of an originally uniform ego feeling is noi contradicted by what I said above. As soon as the \"I\u201d experience arises, there may be a feeling awareness of the self as a whole, despite the fluidity and variety of self images. [ 20 ] NARCISSISM, MASOCHISM\u2014CONCEPT OF SELF ment of self and object images further in connection with the problems of identity and identifications. At present it may suffice to point to the enormous and rather disruptive influences which the processes of infantile denial and repression exert upon the formation of our im\u00ac ages of the self and the object world. Since these images arise essentially from the memory traces of pleasurable and unpleasurable experiences and are only gradually linked up with and corrected by the perceptive memories which reflect reality, the cutting out of a considerable sector of unpleasur\u00ac able memories by infantile repression eliminates a large amount of unacceptable aspects of both the self and the out\u00ac side world. The defects caused by the work of repression may be filled in by screen elements, by distortions or embellish\u00ac ments produced by the elaborate maneuvers of the ego\u2019s defense system. Moreover, to the extent to which the repressed fantasies that have remained cathected in the unconscious can find their way to the surface, they will lend the coloring of past infantile images to the self and object representations. The universal persistence in women of the unconscious fantasy that their genital is a castrated organ, frequently with simultaneous denial and the development of illusory penis fantasies, may best exemplify how far the impact of infantile emotional experiences prevents us from forming cor\u00ac rect body images. This is all the more true with regard to the image of our mental self, which arises only with the growing capacity for self awareness and introspection, i.e., with the capacity for perception, discrimination, and evalua\u00ac tion of our own feelings, thoughts, and actions."}
{"id": "theselfandtheobjectworld", "title": "The self and the object world.", "year": 1973, "seq": 5, "text": "Greenacre (1958) states that \u201cIdentity is closely related to identification, whether as an inner process of psychic development or an act of recognition by a human being toward an outer object, animate or inani\u00ac mate\u201d (p. 613). Spiegel (1959) concentrates on the \u201cframe of reference regarding internal states\u201d and on the \u201cpooling\" (p. 99) of isolated self representations, ari issue definitely related to the synthetic aspects of identity formation that are stressed by Erikson. Spiegel describes disturbances in the self feeling and the related reality feelings arising from rapid changes of the ratio of single self representations to the whole self as frame of reference, or from oscillations between nar\u00ac cissistic and object cathexis, or else from oscillations of this very framework. In connection with this last point he refers to the relations between self feelings and identifications, without further discussion. To return once more to Erikson: he believes that \u201cThe final identity ... is superordinated to any single identifica\u00ac tion with individuals of the past\u201d (1956, p. 112) and that \u201cIdentity formation . . . begins where the usefulness of identification ends\u201d (p. 113). This drastic statement deserves thorough examination and clarification. It certainly shifts the emphasis from the infantile stage to the adolescent and post\u00ac adolescent period. Quite in contrast to Erikson, Lichtenstein (1961), in a fascinating paper on identity and sexuality, places the origin of identity formation back to the earliest [28] RECENT LITERATURE ON IDENTITY mother-child relationship. I must discuss at least some of the challenging ideas expressed in his comprehensive study. Like Eissler and Erikson, Lichtenstein emphasizes the experiences of continuity in the normal feeling of identity. Thus his concept of identity \"characterizes the capacity to remain the same in the midst of change,\" while the sense of identity is the \u201cconsciousness of such continuity of sameness\u201d (p. 193). His definitions show that he shares my main criti\u00ac cisms of Erikson\u2019s ambiguous concept of ego identity, which fails to distinguish objective identity formation from the corresponding experience, and which, besides, restricts iden\u00ac tity formation to the ego alone."}
{"id": "theselfandtheobjectworld", "title": "The self and the object world.", "year": 1973, "seq": 6, "text": "Whenever he is fed by his mother or is physi\u00ac cally close to her body, his wishful fantasies of complete reunion with the mother by means of (oral and visual, respira\u00ac tory, skin) incorporation will be gratified. Hence, with the achievement of gratification, his images of the self and of the love object will temporarily merge, only to be severed again with the increase of instinctual needs and experiences of hunger, frustration, and real separation, which are apt to arouse aggressive and libidinal desires. Thus the hungry infant\u2019s longing for fodd, libidinal grati\u00ac fications, and physical merging with the mother, which is the precursor of future object relations, is also the origin of the first, primitive type of identification, an identification achieved by refusion of self and object images. This refusion of self and object images will be accompanied by a temporary weakening of the perceptive functions and hence by a return from the level of beginning ego formation to an earlier, less differentiated state. This type of identification plays a preidominant role in the mental life of the baby throughout the preoedipal and early oedipal phase, and to some extent even later. In fact, it still finds its place within the mature psychic organization. I have referred above to the sexual experience in which the whole self seems to merge with the partner. I now wish to add that the adult ego will make extensive juse of introjective and projective mechanisms, based on such fusions between self and object images, for the special purpose of establishing feeling and fantasy identifications at any lcjvel, not only with our love objects but with our whole environment. Our sub\u00ac tle, empathic understanding of others, especially those we love, depends on such temporary\u2014either short-lived or more lasting\u2014identifications. However, such temporary fusions [ 40 ] FUSIONS OF SELF AND OBJECT IMAGES induced in the service of the ego do not normally weaken the boundaries between the images of self and objects, whereas in the early infantile stage such firm boundaries have not yet been established."}
{"id": "theselfandtheobjectworld", "title": "The self and the object world.", "year": 1973, "seq": 7, "text": "We may surmise that the child\u2019s imitation of parental emotional expression arises on this basis and that early reciprocal affecto- motor identifications between mother and child precede and [ 42 ] FUSIONS OF SELF AND OBJECT IMAGES usher in the child\u2019s imitations of the parents\u2019 functional activities. The child's expanding motor activities, his learning to walk and to talk and to behave like the parents, his cleanli\u00ac ness training, which is expressive of a beginning instinctual control\u2014all these accomplishments certainly mark the prog\u00ac ress of ego formation. But his playful imitations of what the parents do are at first only forerunners of true ego identifi\u00ac cations, just as his beginning reaction formations are but the precursors of superego formation. In fact, we must not speak of ego identifications before the child begins to develop ego attitudes and character traits taken over from the parents, and before he manifests true ego interests and practices meaningful ego functions guided by their example and their demands. In the beginning the baby\u2019s imitations of the mother, of her gestures, her behavior, her actions, are indeed only formal \u201cas if\u201d activities without awareness of their meaning, founded merely on the close links of empathy with the mother. It is not yet their essential goal to achieve a real likeness to the love objects. At this stage the child is still apt to believe that imitating the mother, \"playing mother,\u201d means being or becoming the mother. Such magic, illusory fantasies indicate how much the child wants to maintain the mother as a part of himself and to adhere to the primitive aim of merging with her without distinction and consideration of the exter\u00ac nal and his own, inner reality. The main progress manifests itself in the child\u2019s growing desire to achieve this goal no longer only through sensual gratifications and physical closeness with the love object but also by activity of his own."}
{"id": "theselfandtheobjectworld", "title": "The self and the object world.", "year": 1973, "seq": 8, "text": "Her concepts are all the more misleading, since she equates the \u201cintrojects\u201d with the infantile superego. To begin with, the terms introjection and projection refer to psychic processes, as a result of which self images assume characteristics of object images and vice versa. The mecha\u00ac nisms of introjection and projection originate in early infan\u00ac tile incorporation and ejection fantasies and must be distinguished from them. They undergo elaborate vicissi\u00ac tudes, may be employed in the service of defense, and, in psychotics, are used for purposes of restitution. During the preoedipal-narcissistic stage, gross primitive [46] FUSIONS OF SELF AND OBJECT IMAGES introjective and projective mechanisms, in conjunction with pleasure-unpleasure and perceptive experiences, participate in the constitution of self and object images and, hence, of object relations. The small child\u2019s limited capacity to distin\u00ac guish between the external and internal world, which is responsible for the weakness of the boundaries between self and object images and the drastic cathectic shifts between them, promotes the continuous operation of introjective and projective processes. Thus, it is quite true that during the first years of life the child\u2019s self and object images still have more or less introjective and projective qualities. But the establishment of realistic object and self represen\u00ac tations rests increasingly on the maturation of perceptive and self-perceptive functions, i.e., on reality testing, at the expense of projective and introjective mechanisms. However, while becoming more and more subtle and refined, the latter continue to play an essential part in the processes of identifi\u00ac cation and in the advance from primitive fusions to those selective identifications on which infantile ego and superego development rests. Hence, in adult patients, we must not confuse transference processes based on displacement from one object image to another, such as from the mother onto the analyst, with pro\u00ac jections."}
{"id": "theselfandtheobjectworld", "title": "The self and the object world.", "year": 1973, "seq": 9, "text": "Freud, 1936), pave the way to these new processes of identification. In contrast to his magic fantasies of fusion and his primitive affective identifications and merely formal imitations, they have a meaningful content and a realistic aim. Such an aim can be reached by way of deep-seated modi\u00ac fications of the ego, which now really assumes certain char\u00ac acteristics of the admired object. This presupposes a new stage in the development of the self images: the distinction between realistic and wishful self [50] DISCOVERY OF ONE\u2019S IDENTITY images. In fact, the ego cannot acquire a realistic likeness to the love object unless admired traits of this object become enduringly introjected into the child\u2019s wishful self images. These wishful self images thus become expressive of both: of the child\u2019s own ambitions, of his own strivings for narcissistic expansion and ego growth, and of admired char\u00ac acteristics of his love objects. In so far as the realistic self representations become a mirror of the ego, they now begin to reflect the traits actually taken over from the object of identification, so that a likeness between object and self images can now be experienced on a realistic basis. This new step in the development of the self images and the growing distinction between wishful and realistic images of the self are so meaningful because they are a prerequisite for the establishment of ego ideal and ego goals, i.e., of realistic goals regarding the future. This will be discussed below. But I may here emphasize that the growing distinction between wishful self images and realistic self representations has very significant implications regarding the development of the feelings of identity. Whereas the child\u2019s wishful self images increasingly give him direction by pointing to potential changes in the future, his representations of the actual self point to his present state and to the past stages in his development."}
{"id": "montanabusinessi1982montrich", "title": "Montana business & industrial location guide", "year": 1982, "seq": 0, "text": "Bureau o( Mines Water Montana is a headwaters state for two major river systems \u2014 the Columbia and the Missouri \u2014 and annually produces about 29.6 million acre-feet of water within its borders. The state's rivers and streams are fed largely by melting snow and spring rains. Natural stream flows peak in May and June, and some of the excess water is typically stored in private, municipal and industrial reservoirs for use during later, low-flow periods. Like all the western states, Montana's water users are governed by a \"doctrine of prior appropriation,\" meaning users with an earlier right have precedence over users with a later right. Users are not entitled to water rights unless they put the water to beneficial use. About 95 % of current water use in Montana is for irrigation of farmland, with the balance going for thermo- electric power generation, industrial, commercial, residential and livestock purposes. Montana's water reservation system allows municipalities to reserve water for future use, which can include industrial use. The State of Montana is implementing aggressive new legislation initiated by Governor Schwinden for the development and storage of Montana's water resources. Most areas of Montana have adequate or abundant surface or ground water for future industrial growth. There are some constraints, however, including low-flow periods and existing rights on certain rivers and reservations for in-stream flow on the Yellowstone River, a major tributary of the Missouri. State resource officials can advise potential users on water availability in various parts of the state. Water from Montana's snow-fed rivers and streams is a significant natural resource, well- managed for agricultural and industrial use. vha:^.' Land The nation's fourth largest state, Montana is a land of vast and varied dimensions \u2014 500 miles long and 300 miles wide, with a land area of 93,157,952 acres. The eastern two-thirds of the state consists of plains broken by occasional mountain ranges."}
{"id": "montanabusinessi1982montrich", "title": "Montana business & industrial location guide", "year": 1982, "seq": 1, "text": "Montana legislators are striving to create a favorable financial environment for business. During the 1981 legislative session alone, Montana lawmakers repealed the inventory tax, increased small- business investment tax credit by 50%, and cut red tape by creating a small-business licensing center. In financial and investment circles, Montana stands out as a good risk. In 1981, when Moody's Investors Service refined its rating system, only two states \u2014 Montana and New Mexico \u2014 were upgraded. Montana's rating advanced from Aa to Aa-1. The upgraded rating reflects the state's growing mineral resources, conservative debt and financial policies, and low debt burden. In the 1980 COSMA report on Manufacturing Business Climates in the 48 contiguous states, Montana ranked 8th lowest in state debt per capita, and 9th lowest in percentage change in state and local taxes per capita. Many sources of financing are available to business and industry locating in Montana. Sources of Industrial Financing Industrial Revenue Bonds At least $250 million in Industrial Revenue Bonds have been issued since Montana's Industrial Revenue Bond Act was declared constitutional in 1970. Local governing bodies are almost universally willing to issue revenue bonds if the project will provide jobs for the community. Industrial Revenue Bonds may be issued to buy land, construct buildings and purchase equipment for a variety of new or expanding industrial projects, including manufacturing, commercial and agricultural enterprises, recreation or tourist facilities, medical and governmental structures and multi- family housing. Interest earned on the bonds is exempt from both state and federal taxes when the bonds are sold in compliance with IRS regulations. Investment Banking Firms The state's investment banking firms are involved in developing capital for business and industry through underwriting Industrial Revenue Bonds, corporate bonds, and raising equity capital through stock issues and other innovative means of financing. One of the nation's leading regional investment banking firms is headquartered in Montana, offering new and expanding businesses a thorough knowledge of the region together with a willingness to handle smaller issues."}
{"id": "montanabusinessi1982montrich", "title": "Montana business & industrial location guide", "year": 1982, "seq": 2, "text": "Industrial Tax Incentives The following is a general outline of taxes and industrial tax incentives in the State of Montana. It should not be considered a substitute for the actual tax laws. Complete information on taxes and incentives that apply to your business may be obtained by contacting the Montana Department of Commerce. Property Tax Reductions Subject to the approval of the local governing body, new or expanding industries may receive a 50% or a 73% reduction in property taxes. The 50% reduction applies to the first five years after construction permits are issued on In recent years, Montana has aggressively redesigned its tax structure to attract new employers. improvements to real property. The percentage increases by 10% annually after the 5th year until the full taxable values are attained in the 10th year. The 73% property tax reduction applies only to new manufacturing industries, and is effective during each of their first three years of operation in the state. No Inventory Tax Business inventories of individuals and corporations are exempt from property taxes. No Use Tax Montana has no use tax on the purchase of equipment, and no general sales tax. Corporate License Tax Credit New and expanding industries engaged in the mechanical or chemical transformation of materials or substances into new products are eligible for a 1% corporate license income tax credit in each of their first three years of operation. The credit is based upon total new wages paid, and for labor-intensive firms, virtually eliminates the Corporate License Tax. Mill Levy Funding A one-mill levy is authorized for purposes of economic development within any Montana city, county or town, if approved by local voters. These funds may be used for developing industrial parks, buildings to house manufacturing operations, feasibility studies, and other activities associated with economic development. Investment Tax Credit Individuals and corporations that qualify as \"small business corporations\" may use 30% of their Federal Investment Tax Credit as a credit against state income tax liability or corporation license tax liability."}
{"id": "midlander66midd", "title": "Midlander", "year": 1991, "seq": 0, "text": "When a friend of a friend suggested I go out with Dana, I thought to myself, 'Hey, why not? What have I got to lose?' As it turned out, just about everything. First of all, when we talked on the phone Thursday to set up the date for Friday, I got real ex- cited. She sounded nice and we had a mutual interest in art. So we decided to go out to dinner and see an art exhibit. She told me to pick her up at 6:00 and that's where the problem start- ed. See, I didn't have any wheels so 1 had to borrow some guy's car. She didn't seem real thrilled when I pulled up, but when 1 told her we were going to the 101st she perked up. However, after we ate and I discovered that I didn't have enough cash to pay, her nagging started. Is it really my fault she's such a pig that she ate so much and ran up the tab? She didn't have enough money either, so we had to wash dishes. I was seeing this as an adven- ture, but all she did was whine. You would have thought the world was about to end when she broke a nail. 1 told her that it wasn't a big deal, she could just go out and buy another one. Then she really blew a gasket! I finally got her calmed down in the car after 1 apologized for the millionth time. I told her that we could go seen an art exhibit, and she settled down into a sulky si- lence. That's when I headed straight on over to The Classic Cat. Before I even found a park- ing spot she was complaining again. 'I thought we were sup- posed to see some art,' she yelled."}
{"id": "midlander66midd", "title": "Midlander", "year": 1991, "seq": 1, "text": "When Eddie left huge black tire marks in front of the parking at- tendants at the 101st Airborne, that tree was looking better and better. We sat down to dinner and found that we had absolutely nothing to talk about. Maybe that was because his fat cheeks were stuffed the whole time. I was so thankful that I didn't have to pay for the pig's meal. When the check came. Stuffed Eddie conveniently didn't have enough money to cover it. Even with my money we couldn't pay for all that he ate. So, what did that mean? We had to go into the kitchen to scrub pots and pans. I thought those things only hap- pened in the movies. Eddie had a stupid smirk on his face the whole time. 1 wanted to dunk his head in the sink for do- ing this to me. By the time we finished, I was sweaty and cov- ered with soapy dishwater. On top of that, I broke two nails and ruined my new suede pumps. The jerk didn't even apologize for ruining my evening. All he could say was, 'The night is still young. Let's go see some art.' 1 was just too mad to say anything, so we drove along in silence until he pulled into the parking lot of the Classic Cat. At first 1 thought he was turning around, but then I realized that nude dancing was his idea of entertainment. 1 po- litely asked to leave, but the slime continued to drool over some big-boobed 'entertainer.' We finally left Classic Cat, and my excitement began to grow. I was going home and would never have to see Eddie again. Of course it couldn't be that simple. Not with this date anyway. Eddie decided to save some time by cutting through the seedy section of town."}
{"id": "midlander66midd", "title": "Midlander", "year": 1991, "seq": 2, "text": "A video screen was placed above the entire audience and showed the concert and the audience dancing. People left the concert with ears ringing and en- ergized! Everyone met back at the Gar- den Plaza Hotel after the concert where Hammer was staying. He camped out in his room for the rest of the night while others hung out and associated at a little bar inside the hotel, \"Ezra's.\" Student Life 21 ^^i\"^ POST OFFICE BOX BLUES I just couldn't believe it. Final- ly, after 13 years of the back- room beaurocracies inherent in a public school system, I had made it to college. Here, we would be allowed the personal and aca- demic freedoms we have always desired, while campus adminis- trators, in their all-encompassing wisdom, provided us with a struc- tured environment and at the same time filled all of our basic needs with our low, state-subsi- dized tuition. I was told that there was even a post office on cam- pus. Amazing, we wouldn't even have to leave campus to make use of America's super-efficient postal service. We would have our very own postal servants happily installed downstairs in the University Center, waiting to serve us with a friendly smile and wave. At any rate, this is what I was led to believe, it soon became ap- parent that our postal \"workers\" were almost, but not quite, as ef- fective as Saddam Hussein's de- fense against allied forces. At registration, 1 was told that 1 would have to pay $4.00 for the privilege of having a campus post office box. 1 was surprised, feel- ing betrayed by our omnipotent, benevolent administrators. Then 1 thought, \"Well, it's just $4.00, and it will be more convenient having a box on campus. Maybe it's worth it.\" My faith in the sys- tem renewed, 1 followed orders and went to the University Cen- ter to receive my box assign- ment."}
{"id": "midlander66midd", "title": "Midlander", "year": 1991, "seq": 3, "text": "Kentucky, Nash- ville, and Alabama showed up for the bash. 26 Student Life Photos by CW ^1 Student Life 27 \\>;) Love and relationships in college CHRIS WHITE \"When 1 was in high school it was the loudest stereo and bad- dest car, but now it's much more.\" High school dating was one thing, but the college dating scene is another. When you gain that freedom from home, you open many doors. There Is no longer a curfew or parents wait- ing up for you to come home. The quality of the people that you date is different. The dates are even different. What is it about college dating that is so ap- pealing? The MTSU nightlife isn't the hottest in the state, but simplicity is now the key. Tara Stout put it into perspective when she said, \"Dates spend less on you be- cause they have a budget.\" That's the truth! The individuality of each stu- dent shines through and the de- pendence washes away. The stu- dents learn that without mom and dad around money is much harder to come by. This often leads to creativity. Trips to the park for a picnic, campus mov- ies, and midnight runs to Krystal are common dates now. Men and women have to be equally cre- ative if they want to impress their dates. Steve Ryan enjoys getting out of town while on his dates. Nash- ville and all of it's attractions are a tasty treat for the weekends. When I came to college 1 discov- ered dutch dating, this opened many doors for the dates. Eating out became more of a reality when two tabs were placed on the table. The humility that must be learned from this is great in- deed, but that's part of college poverty. Money isn't the only change, but also the type of people."}
{"id": "midlander66midd", "title": "Midlander", "year": 1991, "seq": 4, "text": "The men and women who have made it into college possess a different type of goal, usually it's a career. Some people go off to college in search of a mate, or feel that this is the last chance to do so. Soon, age prevails and maturity be- comes a real factor. The high school men stay away from 'long- term' relationships according to junior Teresa Flynn. The two week dating thing is out and long term more meaningful relation- ship is in. This allows people a variety of goals to be met before marriage. It also allows people more time to get to know one another as young adults. Length of relationships and quality of partners are some of the benefits of the college life. The variety of men is one of Nicole McPherson's favorite as- pects of college dating. It is true that MTSU is like a city for peo- ple between the ages of 16 and 25, which allows for much great- er choices in a condensed area. The male to female ratio is slight- ly in favor of the men, but there is always one out there for you. The size of the student body out numbers the populations of many cities that the students have come from. The small-town syndrome of everyone knowing everone else is no longer a prob- lem according to a Cummings Hall R.A. Parents are forced into trusting their child's judgement, and can no longer screen your dates. In smaller towns the moth- er vine is always keeping it's eyes \\\u00a3Q^ 28 Student Life open for you, which makes you nervous about any of your ac- tions or who your seen with. Gos- sip about who you spend your time with moves fast, but the un- familiarity of the students with one and another slows this down to a crawl."}
{"id": "midlander66midd", "title": "Midlander", "year": 1991, "seq": 5, "text": "We spend days listening to our teachers and developing ideas, but what thanks do we get? We get mystery meat at the Grill, a library that closes when the students need it, rafting in the parking lots, and overpriced bookstore, and many other little benefits. The school has a few kinks that need to be worked out. Have you ever gotten out of your car and found that you parked in the middle of a lake? Parking lots at MTSU are known for such pleasant surprises. The campus is infested with puddles that develop into small ponds even when it isn't raining. Does it bother you that a raft is suggest- ed as an alternate mode of trans- portation to class? Rumor has it that this campus, and the entire community, was built on a dried swamp bed. Were they absolutely positive that it was dry? There is a vast network of underground caves that all must lead to the MTSU campus. These caves turn into huge water pipes whenever the sun even slightly looks like it's going to stop shining. During a long period of sporadic rain showers recently, I saw a sign in the middle of someone's flooded front yard that read \"Thank you city of Murfreesboro.\" i don't know if the owners had placed the sign out in their yard before or after the rain, but it was very fitting. We all understand that much of this campus was built before the stone age, but when I have to borrow my fathers fishing waders in order to get to class I think that it's a little out of hand. But to all of those hardy students that love to play football in the ocean next to Deere Hall, my best to you during the next season, that's the rainy season that I'm talking about."}
{"id": "midlander66midd", "title": "Midlander", "year": 1991, "seq": 6, "text": "I had to hunt down two of my texts in Nashville because the bookstore never carried them. The supply side of Phillips was closed one day because they were having the carpet cleaned. Can't any- one work when the bookstore is closed? I don't have a problem with the book prices or the mo- nopoly that it has on many of the required items, but the inventory needs a little work. The teachers don't cancel assignments when the texts sell out at the book- store. By the way, to those teach- ers that are keeping Kinko's in business, please don't revise the books every semester. The deco- rative ashtrays, designer coast- ers, and the fuzzy golf clubs cov- ers need to make way for the ex- tra books and supplies that I'm sure that they will be getting in next year. I don't have a problem with paying a little more tuition for an extra building or a parking lot, but I'd like to meet the person who planned Peck Hall. I mean no disrespect toward the Pecks, but that building doesn't quit fit, neither does the Cope Adminis- tration Building. The new Mass Communication Building was built in a progressive manner that still fits with the rest of the campus. The Jones Hall addition looks like they paid attention to what the rest of the building looks like. I'm sure that the rusted sculptures were attractive at one time, but now they're a great place for tetanus. The campus needs a focal point besides the concrete pillar on Main St. How about a clock tower? Too expen- sive, but what about a new name, the University of Middle Tennes- see. We've got a new president so maybe now something will be- gin to change. The story isn't complete with- out the business office and the records office being mentioned."}
{"id": "midlander66midd", "title": "Midlander", "year": 1991, "seq": 7, "text": "The offense was unstoppable with the fleet feet of Wade John- son and fullback Joe Campbell. The golden arm of quarterback Phil Ironside was also figured into the game plan. Defensively, Middle Tennes- see returned with Anthony Cole- man, the 1989 OVC Defensive Player of the Year, and Marty Carter, one of the nation's best safeties. However, despite all of MTSU's assets. Head Coach Boots Donnelly warned that a tough season lay ahead. Obsta- cles included an opening season game against a tough Tennessee State, and defending National Champion, Georgia Southern the following week. Middle success- fully climbed these walls and was billed as the top 1-AA team in the nation. Tennessee State proved to be no match for the powerful Raiders. Campbell and senior speedster Ricky Martin led a 399 yard running attack that gave the Big Blue a 38-6 win. Georgia Southern proved to be much tougher. Georgia en- tered the game with the nations longest winning streak of 16 games, along with the current no. 1 seeding in the 1-AA polls. But Middle took the lead early in the game when Matt Crews kickied three field goals to give MSTU a 9-0 lead. Georgia Southern battled back with Ail-American tailback Joe Ross, who muscled his way across the goal line twice in the second half to give them a 13-9 lead in the final quarter. Ironside and the Raiders were not ready to give up the fight, and Ironside drove a 47 yard run to the Eagle 11. One play later, Johnson bul- lied in for the winning score. Middle \"D\" withstood a final drive, anchored by Scott Boykin who had 20 tackles, and Geor- gia's winning streak was snapped with MSTU's 16-13 win. In the third week of play. East Tennessee challenged the Raid- ers and quickly took a 14-2 lead. An 85 yard kickoff return sparked the Raiders to claim the next 46 points of the game for a 48-14 win, and a no. 2 position in the polls just behind Furman."}
{"id": "midlander66midd", "title": "Midlander", "year": 1991, "seq": 8, "text": "The offense was dominated by sensational surges of team play plagued by stretches of indi- vidualism that would allow early conference opponents Austin Peay and Murray State to es- cape with gut-wrenching victo- ries that frustrated coaches, players, and fans alike. As the Raiders traveled to Death Valley to battle the Colo- nels of Eastern Kentucky, Stew- art began to shape and mold his young team. The Raiders battled back from a 20 point deficit, but the team still dropped to an 0-3 conference mark. The Raiders got their first con- ference victory as Ingram, Chris- tian, and Taylor led the Raiders past Morehead State. The Raid- ers returned to Monte Hale Are- na a week later, allowing Tennes- see Tech a 73-68 victory. The first half of the conference race was completed when MTSU gave Tennessee State a 92-80 thrashing, as Kidd pulled down 17 rebounds. Although the conference championshipo seemed unrea- chable, the Raiders were begin- ning to play as a team. With Christian substituting for an ail- ing Tom Corder, the Raiders be- gan to show signs of life. The Raiders began the second half of the conference schedule by reeling off seven straight vic- tories including conference victo- ries against TSU, Tech, and Mor- ehead. A two game losing streak against Eastern Kentucky and Murray State dashed any hopes of a home play-off game in the tournament. The Raiders closed their conference schedule with a victory over Austin Peay, in which they overcame a 15 point deficit behind the play of Quincy Vance to shock the Governors 94-90. This win ended the con- ference schedule with a 6-6 re- cord, and an overall record of 19- 8. The Raiders returned to Clarksville for the first round of the conference tournament. Rob- ert Taylor exploded for 37 points as the Raiders overcame a 12 56 Basketball cw point deficit with six minutes to play, posting a 87-83 victory, which allowed the Raiders to compete in the championships at Murray State."}
{"id": "midlander66midd", "title": "Midlander", "year": 1991, "seq": 9, "text": "Before the sea- son even began, they had earned the billing of being perhaps the best team in school history. Although they never saw a na- tional ranking, they didn't disap- point head coach Dale Short as they netted their first conference crown in 12 years. During the early stages of the season, it appeared as if the hype might have been a fluke as the team was struggling. The Raiders took their knocks, but it wasn't a matter of them playing poorly. It was the fact that they were playing some of the nation's toughest teams which included the likes of the national power- house, Tennessee. This provided the squad with vast experience, and mid-season the tide turned. The Raiders began to domi- The Raiders had an awesome season in both singles and doubles play. nate their opposition and emerged as the OVC favorite after dominating many confer- ence schools in the Greg Adams Invitational. Most of the time, it wasn't un- characteristic to see a 9-0 score, and often the opposition was not even allowed to win a mere set. The wins became so routine that the OVC matches seemd to simply be another stride \u2014 until the final one against Murray State. MTSU hadn't defeated Mur- ray in 11 years. Both teams were undefeated in conference action and this was their final match. The outcome would play a major role in the seedings at the confer- ence tournament. But after years of domination, Murray could only watch a deter- mined Blue Raider squad rip them 6-3 and gain the title of be- ing the team to beat. Middle's win couldn't have come at a better time either with emotions running high and the tournament being only days away. The last time MTSU took the crown was in 1979 when coach Short was a member of the team himself."}
{"id": "Introduction_201803", "title": "An Introduction to Revolutionary Anarcho-capitalism", "year": 1979, "seq": 0, "text": "The libertarian movement is dead because it was never fully alive as a distinct philosophy and political ideology. Only under the denominational rubric of \"Anarcho-capitalism\" have clearly distinguishable advances in \"libertarian\" theory been contributed. But even these have not constituted a complete program for victory in our time. Revolutionary anarcho-capitalism, however, goes beyond merely repudiating the State; it unequivocally demands and details the abolition and dismantlement of the State wherever it exists. It is more than philosophically an-archist : it is actively anti-archist! Revolutionary anarcho-capitalism identifies an approach to the problem of the State no longer content with updating and correcting parochial American libertarian sentiments but one seeking a complete theory and method for overthrowing the State worldwide. For us, the State is more than a set of ordinary and individual criminal actions, it is the broadly successful attempt to gain the sanction and/or acquiescence of a controlling part of a population for the ongoing violation of individual rights. As such, it presents a special world-historical problem which can only be effectively resolved by an organized class war between the oppressed and the oppressors. The enemy must be brought to justice. This situation is no mere misunderstanding, it is warfare. Marxism, in the form of its \"revolutionary\" offshoots (Bolshevism, Castroism, Maoism, etc.), has attracted fervent supporters and destroyed governments because it demands justice and proposes effective means for overthrowing oppressors. The Marxists have generally won in the marketplace of ideas because they offered what activists really wanted: power for justice and change. In spite of the shoddiness of their results, they have had no significant competition as the only visible and viable opponents to oppression. Libertarian thinking (including the pacifist -reformist anarcho- capitalism) has failed in the marketplace of political ideas for three basic reasons."}
{"id": "Introduction_201803", "title": "An Introduction to Revolutionary Anarcho-capitalism", "year": 1979, "seq": 1, "text": "Most fundamental has been the inability to translate an ostensibly \"objective\" rational egoist ethic into empirical standards applicable to existing realities. Little explicit understanding exists that rational egoism is a method for fulfillments not an end in itself. Instead of a philosophy which motivates persons to fight for the best which human nature has to offer, rational (?) egoism has been rationalized into entrepreneurialist - 2 - escapism and the pseudo self-esteem of intellectual!zed hedonism. We posit that a true rational egoist must place ethical identity at the pinnacle of his pyramid of values in order to achieve authentic fulfillment. A conscious entity not only needs general rules by which to operate, it needs specific empirical directives as well. In this world, at this time, the only -empirically defensible and overriding consideration facing the individual is the injustice of the State and the ethical necessity to terminate the State. Choosing anything less as one's main objective in life represents an acceptance of a lower condition of personal ethical identity. The failure to translate rational egoism has induced the second major problem of \"Libertarianism\": its willingness to stomach minimal statism, or at least, to cohabit the same party with \"minarchists\". Just as a truncated rational egoism has blinded them to the primacy of personal moral identity, and its revolutionary empirical consequences, anarcho-capitalists have slid into a political marriage which cannot work philosophically or in political practice. We oppose the idea of reforming the State, not because some reformist tactics used within the frame of organized revolution are not worthy, but because a reformist movement is corrupted by its ideological acceptance of the State. Authentic anti-statists cannot long coexist in the same political vehicle with minimal statists once the contradictions are made clear. Though we can have fruitful alliances at times, we must travel different itineraries leading to antipodal destinations."}
{"id": "Introduction_201803", "title": "An Introduction to Revolutionary Anarcho-capitalism", "year": 1979, "seq": 2, "text": "There is no better way to destroy a nascent anarcho-capitalist movement than to link it with \"minimal\" statist or, for that matter (for different reasons), with the maximal statist Left. These two deficiencies have of necessity led to the third and crucial failure of libertarianism: to meet the Marxist challenge - the revolutionary demand for justice. The forsaking of forceful action against the State and the failure to empirically define the enemy has made the erstwhile anti-statist position insipid, and impractical. The masses as well as the activist intelligentsia intuitively see through this weakness. \"Libertarianism\" has been, is, and will continue to be, a hackneyed wing of American Conservatism no matter how hard its ideologues seek to \"disabuse\" it from those links in the public eye. A movement which is congenitally reformist is conservative and no amount of shadow-boxing against Conservatism can disabuse Libertarianism from itself. Revolutionary anarcho-capital ists go beyond the righteous assertion of the rational egoist credo to assert that the essence of human nature requires the attainment of an ethical identity objectively consistent with the world- historical context. Selfishness is indeed a virtue but the method of living must not be confused with the end sought. In a world in which the State makes a war on all who would attempt to live free, we propose the ultimate logical extension of rational egoism - the Warrior Ethic. It posits that the fulfillment of human nature presupposes absolute personal sovereignty and that in a condition of slavery the crucial objective is to destroy the system of oppression. The Warrior Ethic requires an integrated personality in which physical existence and even the realm of conscious experience are hierarchically subordinated to the premises of one's ethical identity. To be a Warrior is to live as a rational egoist to the fullest, i.e., - 3 - by never willfully sacrificing one iota of one's ethical identity."}
{"id": "Introduction_201803", "title": "An Introduction to Revolutionary Anarcho-capitalism", "year": 1979, "seq": 3, "text": "Specifically, it is to identify and pursue a mission in one's life whatever the costs or discomfort. All life is a struggle against adversity; but in our era, the natural antagonist of all who choose the best that human nature has to offer is the State. To live ethically is to do what must be done. Anything less than total personal dedication to that objective, once it is understood, must be judged as a willfull acceptance of a lower identity. The Warrior Ethic poses to the individual these main questions: are you willing to live as a full human being, i.e., never willfully sacrificing one iota of your moral identity, or not? If you are, then how do you choose to fight your natural antagonist, the State? The only reasonable answers are \"yes\" and \"with every means at my disposal.\" The integration of fact and premise is the essence of a rational self-identity (which in turn is the only basis for a mature and healthy happiness but to act upon what one knows to be true is all-necessary for the maintenance of that identity. Fighting the State with all of one's capacities is the only objective ethical resolution open to a rational egoist in the present empirical context. Any other course of action logically entails loss of identity because it is at odds with the necessary course of action to live qua ethically conscious being. With this question settled we proceed to the basic ethical question of who can do what to whom in fighting the State. Our methodology for defeating the State is based on the Doctrine of Retaliatory Recapture. This recognizes the State as an ongoing system of violations. Within this context, an individual is ethically justified in recapturing property from the State, not only in his own momentary self-defense, but also in an attempt to end the obvious future threat of the State."}
{"id": "Introduction_201803", "title": "An Introduction to Revolutionary Anarcho-capitalism", "year": 1979, "seq": 4, "text": "Those who passively permit (or are ineffective in preventing) the State from (ab)using their possessions in violating the rights of others have no moral claim against those who would make use of these means to defend themselves against the State. Thus, in a coordinated defensive war against the State* individuals and organized groups are entitled to use, occupy and consume property stolen by the State as long as these actions aid in terminating the aggression of the State. After the State is effectively defeated, restoration or property insofar as is possible must be made. Revolution against the State can only take place within the context of a political army. A voluntary underground political army of international scope, under contractual discipline affords the only reasonable approach to fighting the State as well as providing a private agency of strategic area- defense during the process of abolition. Free institutions such as courts, police and military defense must be organized and appropriately visible to the masses during the transition to a stateless society. These institutions are integral to the functioning of a political army and the revolutionary process That these \"underground\" courts and forms of enforcement horrify the constitutionalist minarchists is another obvious reason why we cannot cohabit the same political vehicle. The fact that the reformist anarcho-capitalists have not proposed these measures is just another symptom of the emasculation of their ideology by their ecumenical strategy. - 4 - In contrast, our strategy is not only revolutionary but global in scope. For instance, we do not propose to turn the USA into a \"big Switzerland\" because it is evident to us that little Switzerland could not 'long exist as such without the USA remaining strong in world affairs. As in any complex enterprise, our strategy ascends logically step-by- step to its final end product."}
{"id": "Introduction_201803", "title": "An Introduction to Revolutionary Anarcho-capitalism", "year": 1979, "seq": 5, "text": "Only an anarcho-capitalist revolution can succeed in persuading the Soviets of the non-threatening nature of the U.S. military strategic forces because of what will appear (to the Soviets) as a mass paralysis of central institutions. The Soviets will want to believe this. Simultaneously, however, we will have to convince the American population of the superiority of our military defense and the efficacy of abandoning the Chinese. (This won't be too hard when we put a half-trillion or so dollars back into production). In sum, we must withdraw the U.S. from the Third World War (which began long ago) to permit the self-destruction of the Communist empires and the construction of our revolutionary base. The problem of strategic continental area-defense in post-statist America poses no conceptual difficulty for us as it has for others. The revolutionary political army apparatus, or some offshoot, will likely become the main defense agency. Its income will be derived in good part from its rightful possession of the so-called \"Federal Lands\" (minus the return of stolen private properties). These largely unexploited areas will generate a huge income under the press of an unleashed laissez-faire economy. Thus, without taxes, or coercion of any kind, the nascent anarcho-capitalist society will be able to flourish under the protection of the revolutionary defense agency which vanquished the State. The \"problem\" of competing defense agencies which draws so much fire from residual statists poses no insurmountable difficulty for us. Living free is worth the risk and the trouble. We don't expect Utopia with the abolition of the State, merely the demise of the greatest engine of institutionalized injustice. For us, the world-historical victory of the absolute right of the individual to his own life and justifiably-acquired property is necessary and (for our time ) a sufficient fulfillment."}
{"id": "midasjointventur00unse", "title": "Midas Joint Venture, Midas Project : environmental assessment", "year": 1996, "seq": 0, "text": "The area of the Project is zoned by Elko County for open space and provides for a wide variety of rural land uses. Mining exploration is a land use consistent with current zoning. Project activities would not restrict public access within the area of the Project or through Midas Canyon. e Wilderness: The nearest designated wilderness area to the Project is the Santa Rosa Wilderness located approximately 50 miles northwest. There are currently 102 units of public land managed by the BLM in Nevada which are classified as Wilderness Study Areas (WSAs). The BLM has conducted studies for each WSA to recommend to the Secretary of the Interior which WSAs are suitable or unsuitable for inclusion in the National Wilderness Preservation System. The WSA closest to the area of the Project is the Little Humboldt River WSA, approximately 0.8 mile north of the Dempsey Project area (USDI, 1992). About 70 percent of the Little Humboldt WSA has been recommended as suitable for wilderness designation (USDI, 1987). The entire WSA is managed to prevent impairment of the wilderness values and will continue to be administered under the Interim Management Policy (1995) until Congressional action is taken. 3.1.1. Soils Soils in the area of the Project are typical of mountain slopes. Slopes are gentle to steep and runoff is medium to rapid. Erosion potential by water is moderate to high, and erosion potential by wind is slight. Soils consist of cobbly and very cobbly loams, gravelly and very gravelly loams, rock outcrops and rubble. The soil associations underlying the majority of the area of the Project are the Bregar, moderately steep-Bregar-Carstump Association and the Alyan, steep- Bregar-Alyan Association. Soil characteristics for soil series occurring in two different map units are different, because of varying slope and aspect. The characteristics of the soil series comprising the soil associations underlying the majority of the area of the Project are outlined in Table 2."}
{"id": "midasjointventur00unse", "title": "Midas Joint Venture, Midas Project : environmental assessment", "year": 1996, "seq": 1, "text": "Sha ee eo RS kay oe ie is determined eligible for nomination to the National Register of Historic Places under criteria \"a\" and \"d\". The Gold Circle Mining District encompasses approximately 3,000 acres, in an arc north and east of the town of Midas. This inventory examined about 20 percent of the district. Twenty-six (26) localities were recorded within the surveyed portion of the site. Of these locations within the Gold Circle Mining District site, the survey identified four (4) localities as contributing elements to the National Register value of the district. In addition, one (1) locality remains unevaluated and is potentially a contributing element. 3.1.7. Native American Religious Concerns Consultation with the Western Shoshone is in progress and no specific information concerning traditional issues is available. In general, traditional Shoshone people hold all the land to be sacred and are concerned with activities that disturb the earth\u2019s surface or affect water sources. Some locations possess special significance, and play a continuing role in traditional religion and maintenance of ethnic identity. 3.1.8. Visual Resources The landscape of the area consists of a steep, complex terrain of hills and ridges. Soil colors consist of browns, tans and grays, but are generally obstructed by the overlying vegetation. Dominant vegetation colors are greens, grays, yellows and tans. The Dempsey Project area is located in a Class III Visual Resource Management (VRM) area. The objective of this class is to partially retain the existing character of the landscape. The level of change to the characteristic landscape should be moderate. Management activities may attract attention but should not dominate the view of the casual observer. Changes should repeat the basic elements found in the predominant natural features of the characteristic landscape. The remaining Project areas (Elko Prince, Rex-Grande and Acme) are located in a Class IV VRM. The objective of this class is to provide for management activities which require major modification of the existing character of the landscape."}
{"id": "mirror198678unse", "title": "Mirror, 1986", "year": 1986, "seq": 0, "text": "Professor: \"It's all relative . . . ' A Twenty Year Perspective My mind seems a spinning chiaroscuro compounded of dreams awaiting fulfillment and new areas of endeavor along with poignant memories of lives that have deeply touched my own, and of exciting and often sensitive discussions which, I am sure, have shifted my own views as often as those of you who were my students. Future fireside reminiscences will be immeasurably enriched by letters from graduates whose career decisions resulted from work here at Bates College, by the many heartwarming and sometimes tangy comments on final exam bluebooks, and by echoes of strident voices in class which challenged, \"how can you say that?\" There have been many changes at the College since 1965, my first year. It has been a source of incalculable satisfaction to have aided and abetted the growth of the Department of Sociology and Anthropology from two persons to its present complement of seven. Moreover, the Bates' Faculty has dou- bled over the past twenty years, and given the fact rising costs and shrinking applicant pools have forced many schools to close their doors permanently, this must be seen as a major ac- complishment of the Administration. The quality of this Facul- ty has increased commensurately with its numbers . . . although given the amount and color of my hair, I wince a little at hearing about our bright, dynamic, and young Faculty as though each of those adjectives presumed the existence of the others! The range and quality of offerings, coupled with the in- telligence, training and dedication of this excellent faculty have placed Bates College among the finest colleges of its kind in the country \u2014 and certainly one of the most academically demanding. There are, to be sure, some danger signals on the horizon. One bridles under the increasing and arguably inordinate and, thus, debilitating pressure for faculty publication at a teaching oriented institution without allotting time to do so, as is the case in large universities."}
{"id": "mirror198678unse", "title": "Mirror, 1986", "year": 1986, "seq": 1, "text": "A second concern arises from a glance at curricular changes and reports of classroom ap- proaches providing reason to wonder if some faculty members who were undergraduates in the heady and cause-oriented days of the 1960's are making the crucial distinction between soap- box polemicism and objective classroom analysis in which all views are carefully considered. There most assuredly has been a change in the nature of the student body as is evidenced not only by the Porsches, Jaguars, Mercedes and Lamborghinis in student parking areas, but also by the discussions of social stratification in American Society class. This past semester we learned that sixty percent of the class came from backgrounds where parental income ex- ceeded $85,000 per year (almost double my salary in the last year of my career) and that these students were astonished to learn that this placed them in the top two or three percent income-wise in our society. The increasing affluence of students is affecting the College in ways too numerous to cite here. This is in no way intended as a criticism of the Ad- ministration, it is simply one of the \"givens\" of our time if col- leges are to survive, particularly under the Reagan philosophy. However, I think that students are more diligent now, albeit not as socially aware and concerned as the conscience-troubled students of the 1960's and early 1970's. Students generally work very hard, but the goals seem less oriented toward chang- ing the society than toward moving up within that society. Yet, there is a very clear thread of quality in Bates students which weaves its way through all time periods and is very appealing. It is compounded of very high intelligence, basic decency, predisposition to give the benefit of the doubt, ebullience and a positive view of life, which makes this place a joy in which to work."}
{"id": "mirror198678unse", "title": "Mirror, 1986", "year": 1986, "seq": 2, "text": "It really gives a new perspec- tive on Bates and on life in general. Moreover, you realize that there is a Lewiston out there. You may like or dislike Lewiston, but either way you should not forget that it is there. Bates can be too close-knit and tidy at times. You need to get out into the real world. So, as you can see, off campus life has both benefits and deficiencies. But on campus students shouldn't forget that off campus students go to Bates as well. Some of us, are actually fairly normal-if such a thing is possi- ble! But, at least when off campus, you can be abnormal; in fact you can go stark raving mad whenever you want! \u2014 by Jon Green foreign language tables Foreign Lan- guage Tables at Bates are a popular and suc- cessful way for many Bates stu- dents to try out what they have learned in the classroom. Pro- fessors and students meet once a week for dinner to chat and discuss whatever is on their minds in a language that they do not nor- mally speak. Majors and non-majors alike are provided with the opportunity to speak informally and enhance their verbal skills. Native speakers, students planning to go abroad, and students recently returned from foreign countries all attend to listen and learn with their peers. Most students find the Foreign Language Tables to be inspiring; they see the potential for in- creased proficiency in their language. One of the greatest assets of a foreign language is be- ing able to speak and com- municate in that language. The op- portunity for students and pro- fessors to get to know one another is also invaluable. The unrestricted and comfortable atmosphere at the Foreign Language Tables themselves allows for better verbal performance by alleviating the academic pressure of the classroom."}
{"id": "mirror198678unse", "title": "Mirror, 1986", "year": 1986, "seq": 3, "text": "And have you seen who's on page 3 today . . . ? Thus the reasons may be varied, but the results are the same, junior Year Abroad can be the best learning experience that you may ever have outside a classroom (unfortunately, JYA classroom work is also man- datory). So the word is Go! You have nothing to lose! \u2014 by Sean Carlos THE BATES GAZETTE \u2022 107 ECEMBER 1 December for many people may just have been the month for finals, however, there were other events that took place in the two weeks that we were at Bates. Human Rights Week, sponsored by Amnesty Inter- national, began this chilly month on a serious tone. Movies and a lecture il- lustrated the suffering that many of our brothers have undergone and still live under. Our awareness of world injustices was heightened. The noonday concert series con- tinued through December, beginning with a recorder quartet. The combi- nation of Bates faculty members Mary Hunter, Anne Lee, and Georgia Nigro, along with Lewiston resident Todd Hollister, proved to be en- joyable one. This was only one of the many instances where the Bates com- munity and the community at large joined forces to share their talent. The Bates Choir and Chapel Singers gave a wonderful seasonal concert. Also taking advantage of the holiday season were the Bates Deansmen and Merimanders who, along with the Williams E-Phlats, entertained an en- thusiastic crowd in Commons. Many students took advantage of the last weekend before finals to catch up on missed readings and reviewing. Although some took in the Film Board movie. Dirty Harry, the Bates campus was overwhelmed with silence and an attitude of concentra- tion. There was not a single empty carrel to be found in the library and students were scattered on the floor and in the stairwells. However, many did enjoy a few study breaks, in- cluding the Folk Music Coffeehouse with Jenny Levison in Chase lounge."}
{"id": "mirror198678unse", "title": "Mirror, 1986", "year": 1986, "seq": 4, "text": "The need for the center arose out of the increasing financial demands placed on the adult members of our society. To retain a comfortable lifestyle, both parents of many households have to work, which causes a problem if young children are also in the household. Child care centers are one solution to this problem. The Rocking Horse Child Care Center fulfills the need of both local Lewiston residents and members of the Bates faculty by providing a \"home away from home\" for the children of these working parents. Often many parents are hesitant to place their children in someone else's hands for fear that the children will not receive the atten- tion that they deserve. This local center combats this fear by employ- ing more than twenty teachers at the center, all who have had some type of previous experience working in child care. Therefore these teachers are aware of the children's needs and can help care for them \u2014 to the satisfaction of both the parent and the child. The type of program offered at the Rocking Horse Child Care Center also caters to the different developmental needs of the child including intellec- tual, social, physical, and emotional needs. The activities used in the pro- gram are arranged in relation to the different age groups of the children. The infants that are cared for (the youngest averaging six weeks old), are exposed to a greater variety of visual stimulation and are \"encour- aged to develop their own special skills faster.\" The preschool children are involved in a greater amount of physical activities, and are taught to develop \"readiness skills\". They are encouraged to ask questions and solve problems. The older children, ages six through twelve, take part in a variety of activities since they are generally at the center after school is out."}
{"id": "mirror198678unse", "title": "Mirror, 1986", "year": 1986, "seq": 5, "text": "We continued our vacation a little the first weekend; afterall who could resist the fun of Winter Carnival? The activities, ranging from creating snow sculptures to the Winter Olympics, all contributed to make \"Snowbiz\" a great success. The comedy team of Abrams and Anderson started us off on Thursday followed by the amazing talents of hypnotist James Mapes Fri- day. After a hard day of fraying, we danced the night away to the sounds of the Drive. Sunday night was filled with the Winter Carnival Concert with Eddie Kendricks and David Ruf- fin of The Temptations, New Man, an up-and-coming band from Boston, as well as the hilarious antics of come- dian Jay Leno. it was certainly a night to remember and the perfect way to round out a fantastic weekend. The next weekend held equal pro- mise with WRBC's Trivia Night and the Bates College Imperialists Casino Night. The hectic race to answer questions about nothing continued again this year as teams stayed up all night vying for points and prizes to determine who was the king of trivia at Bates. Saturday we chanced Lady Luck as Chase Hall was converted in- to a Las Vegas casino. While some of us lost, others won small fortunes and the evening was enjoyed by all. In ad- dition to gambling we were treated to a dose of the latest fad \u2014 wrestlemania. All was not fun and games however, as we remenisced about Dr. Martin Luther King and his valuable contributions during a mov- ing Candlelight Service. Our con- cerns with minority rights continued as we examined discrimination against homosexuals at Bates with gay politician David Scondras. Finally in a much awaited decision, the Board of Trustees voted total divest- ment from South Africa. The campus seemed to unanimously support this decision, hoping at the same time to set an example for other colleges."}
{"id": "mirror198678unse", "title": "Mirror, 1986", "year": 1986, "seq": 6, "text": "We ended the month with an effort to Bust MS; the first of the Multiple Sclerosis Dances raised five hundred dollars for this worthy cause. At the same time we enjoyed watching friends dress up and lip synch to the sounds of our favorite rock artists. Overall, it was a great way to help others while having a good time. As the month closed we were looking forward to February, to break, and perhaps even anticipating the coming of spring and a little bit of color. Afterall, how much snow can a per- son take? THE BATES GAZETTE \u2022 113 olin arts center To the graduates of 86 the Olin Arts Center will be remembered as a pile of earth or a partially con- structed building. To many of us the Olin Arts Center will serve as a symbol of Bates progress in the years that we spent here. The building is named for the Olin Foundation of New York City which contributed the funds \u2014 the largest grant ever received by Bates \u2014 to build and equip the structure. The arts center was designed by the Architects Col- laborative of Cambridge, Massachusetts, the same firm which created the designs for the Ladd Library and the Merrill Gymnasium. The focal point of the new com- plex is a 300 seat multi-level auditorium, intended primarily for music and dance performance, as well as films and lectures. Other music facilities will include a rehearsal hall, individual and group practice rooms, a music library, and two electronic music labs out- fitted with state-of-the-art equipment for composing computer generated music. The gemstone of the visual arts facilities at the Olin Arts Center will be a new enlarged gallery. The Olin grant attracted much at- tention as one of the largest single amounts awarded to any college by any foundation during the 1983-84 academic year."}
{"id": "mirror198678unse", "title": "Mirror, 1986", "year": 1986, "seq": 7, "text": "The week before vacation was packed with midterms, papers and all around general frenzy as we tried to get ahead so that we could leave for the vacation. Some athletic teams went as far as California to \"practice\" during break, while other Batesies headed south to Florida. Still others preferred to move north for a week of skiing. Then, of course, there were many of us who stayed home and slept. After such a vacation, we returned to face the music of our midterms or even to start round two of the testing process. Moreover, we all also had to face a much more serious reality of life upon our return to Bates. A memorial service was held for student Elizabeth Casey in the College Chapel on the Tuesday after break. This week proved to be a very trying time for us all. However, just as we started to wonder if we would ever make it through the semester. Short Term enrollment gave us hope for a future of fun and sunshine without quite so many pressures. The final week in February hosted a heated International Debate which asked the question \"Are Chopsticks Better than Flatware?\" Though the question was never really answered, members of the Bates Debate Coun- cil and students from Kitakyushu University of Japan presented convin- cing arguments in support of both sides. On Wednesday of this week through the Bates College Concert Series , Speculum Musicae presented \"The Fugitive Slave,\" a narrative of a nineteenth century Cuban slave that was composed of baritone, flute, guitar, and sixty percussion instruments. Finally, the last day of February marked the opening nights of both theatrical productions Miss Julie and Extremities . In addition, the Bates Christian Fellowship sponsored a dance in the upstairs lounges of Chase Hall, and the Senior Class held a \"95 Days Until Graduation\" party at Quality Inn."}
{"id": "mirror198678unse", "title": "Mirror, 1986", "year": 1986, "seq": 8, "text": "Although most people would tend to account this never-ending month to the fact that it is the only month throughout the academic year which does not have a vacation, I would suggest that the longevity of this month is caused by the overwhelm- ing list of due dates, events, and ac- tivities which occur annually during this time. Many Seniors spent this month researching, writing (and writing and writing), and revising that infamous \"Senior Thesis.\" For many, I am sure, much of this month remains a blur. This was also a time for Senior presentations; music majors Scott Steinberg and Dan Ludden per- formed for the Bates Community. Most Seniors did not question the length of March, but rather, whether they would make it through the month in one piece! March proved to be a very interna- tional month on Campus. The first of March brought a taste of the Old Country \u2014 there was a Pipe Band Concert with Highland Dancers and Bagpipes in the Chapel. The Foreign Language Department also sponsored a Film Festival; this year's festival, America(ns) through foreign Lenses in Foreign Lands , brought a variety of movies to Bates: Stroszek (West Ger- many, 1977), Kagemusha (Japan, 1980), One Sings, the other doesn't (France, 1977), Reds (Russia), and The Good Fight (Spain, 1983). The annual International Dinner in Chase Lounge happened to fall in the mid- dle of this film festival, making the beginning of March a very busy time for the internationally oriented students on Campus. In mid-March, the Bates College Concert Series continued with the performance of Music from the Peo- ple's Republic of China. Seven in- strumentalists from the Beijing Con- servatory played traditional music from several regions of China. The week of March 1 6-24 was Cen- tral America Week nationwide and at Bates. The week was to mark the an- niversary of the assassination of Archbishop Oscar Romero of El Salvador."}
{"id": "mirror198678unse", "title": "Mirror, 1986", "year": 1986, "seq": 9, "text": "Although pre- dominantly a library cliche, this phrase can be heard all over campus day and night. Generally, the Bobcat Den seems to be one of the most popular spots on Campus \u2014 for students, faculty, and staff members. In the early morning hours, there are usually a number of people enjoying a first cup of coffee before class or work . . . Lunchtime brings in a varied crowd \u2014 many library and Lane Hall peo- ple have been spotted there along with the \"off campus\" people (who do not have to eat upstairs with the other 99% of Bates students!) In the late afternoon and eve- ning, the Den is quite relaxing. It is usually not too crowded \u2014 while, on the other hand, it is still full enough to provide an interesting partner for some interesting con- versation. At this time of day, however, students are more likely to be sitting alone studying, reading, or sleeping. It is at this time also that the \"Den Rats\" tend to appear. This group of Bates students have yet to be accepted formally as a College Organization; however, they probably meet more regularly than any other group on campus. The purpose of this \"club\" is to drink large amounts of coffee or tea at one sitting and always make sure that one corner of the Den is fully occupied at all times. By late evening, the Den becomes a pit of procrastination. Although no formal studies have been done, there must be times when there are more people in the Den than in the library. This is a time of exuberant conversa- tion and much noise (in fact, you usually end up trying to yell over the noise of the juke box!!) and equally exuberant munching. During the in- famous \"Den break at 10\" there is often a line extending back towards the entrance."}
{"id": "montnov1977anaemployrich", "title": "Montana employment and labor force", "year": 1977, "seq": 0, "text": "Indicative of this improving trend was the continued contraction of Statewide unemployment. From September to October the jobless rolls decreased 600 individuals, sending the unemployment rate to 5.0%. This is well below the 6.2?^ rate posted in October a year ago. At the same time movement on the employment side was encouraging. In the past month the only significant decreases were noted in agriculture - hardly unexpected with the close of the harvest season. Signs from manufacturing were equally favorable. The commencement of sugar beet processing in eastern Montana and the resumption of activity in the primary metals industry did much to enhance the conditions in the industrial sector. Average weekly hours in manufacturing edged upward to 42.7 hours this month, the highest level recorded in the past ten years. In addition, the layoff, quit, accession, and new hire rates all displayed positive economic movement. It should be noted, however, that uncertainty is being nurtured in some local economies by the recent announcement of plans for layoffs in the Butte-Anaconda Labor Market Area. Further indication of the strength of the economy was the unseasonal stability in building construction. Despite the reports of work slowdowns in many areas of the state, the overall level of activity has remained unchanged during the past six months. Indeed, there has been some general decline in highway construction which has affected total employment in the industry. However, the building trades should enjoy a good winter season, barring extremely harsh weather conditions. On the whole Montana appeared to be on solid economic ground during the month of October. Although some weaknesses exist (e.g. the restlessness in the copper industry), most sectors of the economy are entering the winter months on a positive note. Some seasonal fluctuation in the unemployment rate is to be expected (initial claims for unemployment insurance were up in November), but the general outlook for the coming months is good."}
{"id": "montnov1977anaemployrich", "title": "Montana employment and labor force", "year": 1977, "seq": 1, "text": "Silver Bow County \\ ^ I had the highest rate of unemployment - 7.1\"'. ^\\ ' \u2014 -f Economic Highlights and Employment Outlook: The economic situation in the Butte area is plagued by the continuing uncertainty over the future of the area's Important copper industry. Prices being received by producers remains low (under 61(t/pound), because of the excess supply of copper on the world market. With production costs increasing for the extraction of the metal in the domestic market, many industry analysts fear further labor cutbacks. If such events occur, other derivative industries in the Butte and Anaconda communities would also be adversely affected. Despite this situation, Butte \"main street\" merchants have generally shown optimism concern- ing prospects of a good holiday season. In fact, area retailers have noted good sales during the past month. In addition, four new retail stores opened in the city's main shopping center. The complex has undergone a general remodeling program and by next spring, a total of 21 new firms are expected to occupy space. The Butte Job Service office reported that the majority of new openings have been in the service and hospital related fields. In Granite County, construction work began on a new senior citizens center in Phillipsburg. Also, the local hospital has announced plans for remodeling and expanding its present facility. These two projects will likely provide an added stimulus to the area's construction industry. Some additional layoffs have been noted in Phillipsburg, as a local mill cut back - its workshifts from 3 to 1 until the completion of repairs at the mill. The primary activities in the agriculture Industry have centered on general repairs and live- . stock feeding. Demand for hired help is generally minimal, at this time of the year. BOZEMAN LMA Employment and Unemployment Situation: The civilian labor force in the Bozeman LMA this month showed another decrease from its peak of 26,400 last August."}
{"id": "montnov1977anaemployrich", "title": "Montana employment and labor force", "year": 1977, "seq": 2, "text": "This downward movement in all categories effected only a slight decrease in the rate of unemployment, which now stands at 4.2\";^ compared with 4.3; in September and 5.0' in October a year aoo. uLASGOW LMA (Cont.) The lowest rate in the labor market area was posted in both Daniels and Sheridan Counties with 1.6%. (The only lower rate in the entire state was recorded in Petroleum County.) The labor market area's highest rate came in Valley County at 6.9'=. Economic Highlights and Employment Outlook: Building construction continues to be a main support of the Glasgow area economy. In Glasgow, projects undenvay include a bank, a retirement home, a hospital, a bentonite plant, business offices, and several new homes. In Poplar work centers on additions to schools, a new clinic, and a tribal museum. Employment is steady and, although there are some new hires, they are usually of a temporary nature and for unskilled workers. Oil field employment has shown gains lately, particularly in Sheridan County, nevertheless, some local unemployment persists as several working crews are commuting from out of state. n the retail sector sales have been slightly below last year's totals yet in some are _dditional clerks for the busy holiday season are being hired. Meanwhile in agricultu activity has slowed considerably with the completion of harvesting. General repair \u2022\u25a0\"\" and supplemental winter feeding of cattle are the main tasks for area farmers and In a reas re, work ranchers. GLENDIVE LMA Employment and Unemployment Situation: Statistics on employment and unemployment in the six-county Gl endive LMA compare very favorably with most of the other areas of the state this month. In many areas, the civilian labor force and total employment are exhibiting seasonal declines. This situation also holds true for Glendive; however, whereas some other locations are also experiencing increases in unemployment this month, the CI endive LMA has enjoyed a decline in both the number of unemployed persons and the overall unemployment rate."}
{"id": "visual-function-an-introduction-to-information-design", "title": "Visual Function: An Introduction to Information Design", "year": 1997, "seq": 0, "text": "Nonetheless, such ships contained plenty of features that had nothing to do with utility. The size and num- ber of funnels were deliberately chosen to create a powerful impression of grandeur. The interior was designed to please and above all reassure the passengers, and to divert their attention from less agreeable aspects like seasickness and the dangers inherent in any sea voyage. These, too, were important functions. ~ Thus, confusion about the notions of functionalism and beauty is nothing new, for emotion and social and cultural needs also play a role in deter- mining function. Many felt that a scrupulously honest approach to construction and materials would automatically take care of these needs. Frank Lloyd Wright was not alone in stating that \u2018the machine, with its tendency towards simplification, is capable of revealing the true nature and beauty of materials\u2019. In 1992 Edward Tufte concluded anew that aesthetics are a happy by-product of the visual presentation of informa- tion.= \u2018Form\u2019, in other words, meant above all \u2018beauty\u2019, a notion that later appeared to fall into discredit, with beauty often being regarded as a bonus. Design became first and foremost a tool for welding together construc- tion and function. If the result was pleasing and showed good taste, the aesthetic dividend followed automatically. Walter Gropius, director of the Bauhaus, a school that cannot be omitted from this account, remar- ked in 1926 that designing houses and their interiors for the mass market was \u2018more a matter of ingenuity than of passion\u2019. And in his conviction that the artistic designer should attend the same school as the technical designer and design engineer, he was forty years ahead of Delft University\u2019s Faculty of Industrial Design Engineering.\u2019 To the relief of many, it seems that \u2018beauty\u2019 can be successfully excluded from industrial design on the grounds of its alleged elusiveness."}
{"id": "visual-function-an-introduction-to-information-design", "title": "Visual Function: An Introduction to Information Design", "year": 1997, "seq": 1, "text": "Perhaps we find something beautiful because it reminds us of the pleasure of an earlier experience, when something useful was experienced as pleasing. The experience of beauty has remained while the awareness of usefulness has disap- peared.- \u2018This accords with the verdict of the Belgian architect, furni- ture designer, and graphic designer, Henry van de Velde (1863-1957) who said: \u2018Beauty is the result of clarity and system\u2019, adding, \u2018and not of optical illusion\u2019. The only conclusion possible is that design always involves three inextricably related elements, however much their rela- tive proportions may differ from one application to the next, namely: durability, usefulness, and beauty. In this respect, design is an activity that unites the elements of durability and usefulness and intensifies the perception of beauty. Without noticing it, we have gone back almost two thousand years to the Roman architect Vitruvius. In his ten-volume treatise on architecture he stipulated that it should satisfy the follow- ing criteria: Firmitas durability, firmness Utilitas usefulness, commodity Venustas_ beauty, delight | have attempted to turn these qualities into a practical three-point for- mula: Reliability, Utility, Satisfaction. What sort of combination of these qualities produces a good product? To measure this | have devised a simple, star-shaped diagram consisting of three thermometer-like axes that can be used to register the relative strength of the three criteria in any given product. The length of these thermometers is theoretically unlimited. Since none of these qualities should ever register zero in my opinion, this value has been excluded from consideration. A circle indicates an average level below which no good product should fall, although it may, of course, always do better. This diagram makes it possible not only to indicate in advance the precise mix of qualities required in a given product, but also to analyse existing products."}
{"id": "visual-function-an-introduction-to-information-design", "title": "Visual Function: An Introduction to Information Design", "year": 1997, "seq": 2, "text": "Although he was speaking of literature and not, like Henry Greenough, of architecture, Multatuli illustrated this maxim with an example that is nonetheless equally relevant to product design. The discussion about form and content reminded him of the \u2018beggar who debates whether he would keep his gold in a purse or a pouch... if he had any gold!\u2019 Ideas are all and they are in short supply, according to Multatuli. Without content there is no form. The major part of this book has been devoted to content, to the \u2018idea\u2019, because it is in understanding and interpreting this that design begins.= It is nice to know that even before the American Sullivan made his famous pronouncement, a Dutch writer had already managed to state the issue so succinctly. Regarding Training and Designers | have the impression that design has come under increasing pressure from disciplines that work with seemingly tangible and measurable data. However important these may be for future designers, the binding element in product design is the act of shaping. It is this that provides the \u2018look\u2019 that consumers recognize as a mark of quality and integrity and it is the only part of the design process capable of supplying wit, youth and gaiety (to quote Hartmut Esslinger- of frogdesign) and aes- thetic satisfaction. It is the task of scientists and designers to uncover the many still-hidden but unmistakably operative laws of design and to develop tools designers can use to give shape to their ideas. Clients have always been the motivating force spurring designers to garner knowledge, invent models and methods, and devise solutions. The best designs come about in collaboration with critical clients who give careful consideration to the often subjective arguments advanced by designers and who are not prepared to take things at face value."}
{"id": "cabepcc_000046", "title": "La Pe\u00f1a newsletter, March 1981", "year": 1981, "seq": 0, "text": "Pena Fiesta with the Linda Tillery Band. These Olivia recording artists are among the most creative and exciting performers of contemporary music on the West Coast. 9:00 pm, $3.50 Pena Concert with Alive! Rooted in the growing women's culture movement, the members of Alive! create a rich new polyrhythmic sound which suggests a multiplicity of musical forms. With vocalist, piano, bass, trap drums, congas, and small percussion, Alive! is an entirely acoustic group. 8:30 pm, $3.50 America 8 Caribbean. Slides, tapes, & presentations by members of the CRG, Puerto Rican Socialist Party, & SF Mime Troupe, Antonio Maceo Brigade & others. Help build a Bay Area Cuba Resource Center. 7:30 pm, $2.50 Concert with Mariposa This trio of women musicians, Juanita Newland, Blue Wilder, and Francisca Wentworth, weave together an exciting blend of Latin, North American, and European folk music. Come hear their unique sound which combines pre- Columbian instruments with piano, flute, and tight 3-voice harmonies. 8:30 pm, $3.00 speakers & a slide show will outline the key aspects of the nuclear threat to Pacific Islanders & other peoples of the Pacific rim. 7:30 pm, $1.99 4 Pe\u00f1a concert with Robin Flower and Nancy Vogl. Whether playing a quick-paced fiddle tune or singing close harmonies, Robin and Nancy will touch your heart and put your toes to tapping. This ever-popular duo will be singing old and new songs from their albums. 8:30 pm, $3.50 4 Step by Step/Paso a Paso\u2014 a multimedia show by La Pena Cultural Productions Committee with Grupo Raiz, the San Francisco Labor Theater, La Pena Community Chorus, Black Pearl Troop. The show explores workers\u2019 unity and conflict in the Americas. Benefit for the Chilean Resistance. 8 pm, $3.50 1 4 Pena film series Women (94 min, color, dir by Marta Meszaros, 1977, in Hungarian with English subtitles) A story of 2 women, one fortyish, the other in her twenties \u2014 one placidly married, the other tumultuous- ly \u2014 & the galvanizing effect of their friendship."}
{"id": "iraq-refugees", "title": "Iraq Refugees 1991", "year": 1991, "seq": 0, "text": "UN officials reported that they were willing to coordinate the humanitarian relief efforts by UN agencies and other non- governmental organizations. However, they indicated that significant additional financial support would be necessary and that Iraqi consent, at least informally, would be necessary to operate in the camps established in northern Iraq by the coalition, Moveover, Prince Aga Kahn told the delegation that the UN could not provide security protection without further action and authorization by the UN Security Council. 9. Some government and relief agency representatives indicated that certain private organizations were having difficulty gaining clearance from the Turkish government to enter the country. The delegation received assurances from Turkish officials, including President Ozal, that Turkey would fully cooperate with all relief organizations. However, they did urge that relief efforts by the non-governmental organizations be better coordinated. The UNHCR has been designated as the coordinator of such efforts, and the Deputy Commissioner told the delegation that the UNHCR would be accelerating its coordination activities. 10. The costs associated with the relief and repatriation efforts are very uncertain at this time, but will be significant. The United States has drawn down approximately $133 million in emergency funds, supplies and equipment during the first 19 days of the relief effort. International appeals to address the emergency total approximately $722 million. This includes $400 million in United Nations appeals to address refugee assistance in the border areas for the first threa months of the relief effort. Additionally, the UNHCR has issued an appeal for $178 million for emergency health programs and assistance for people displaced in Iraq. The International Red Cross has issued an appeal for $73 million and the International Red Crescent has issued an appeal for $32 million. : CONCLUSIONS i The Iraqi refugee situation is a human crisis of major proportions requiring a prompt and significant response from the international community. 2."}
{"id": "iraq-refugees", "title": "Iraq Refugees 1991", "year": 1991, "seq": 1, "text": "SUMMARY OF KEY FINDINGS nit ssues e Iraq's civil war has cost tens of thousands of lives in the Kurdish and Shi\u2019a regions of the country, and has precipitated an immense humanitarian catastrophe. In northern and southern Iraq, forces loyal to Saddam Hussein have shelled cities intensely, have leveled neighborhoods, and have engaged in wholesale massacres of civilians. More than 2 million Iraqi Kurds have sought refuge on the Iraq-Turkey and the Iraq-Iran borders and they are dying at a rate of up to 2,000 a day. e The safe havens created by U.S. and coalition forces around the northern Iraqi city of Zakho will draw thousands of Kurdish refugees out of the mountains. However, the Kurds are likely to remain in the Zakho vicinity only as long as foreign forces are there to protect them. Other refugees may not go to the safe havens because of uncertainty over the duration of international protection. The Kurds are at risk of slaughter as long as Saddam Hussein remains in power, and so the foreign protection will need to continue indefinitely. e The more than one million Kurds languishing in Iraqi resettlement areas are the invisible victims of Iraq\u2019s civil war and repression. The resettlement areas, euphemistically known as \"victory cities\" but really concentration camps, were set up to accommodate rural Kurds made homeless by the regime\u2019s program to destroy all the villages of Kurdistan. Mostly unemployed since their arrival in the settlements in the mid-1980\u2019s, these Kurds have had little food and no transport to facilitate an escape to the mountains. Prior to the collapse of the Kurdish rebellion, the plight of these concentration camp Kurds was precarious. After a month of possible starvation and retribution, the death toll in the resettlement areas could be very high. @ Only an expanded safe haven encompassing towns along Iraq's borders with Turkey and Iran can accommodate all 2 million Kurdish refugees. \u2018The large size of the zone required is one by-product of Iraq\u2019s policy of destroying the villages in Kurdistan."}
{"id": "iraq-refugees", "title": "Iraq Refugees 1991", "year": 1991, "seq": 2, "text": "To many in the Kurdish leadership the AS calls made by President Bush for the Iraqi people to overthrow Saddam Hussein and, in particular, the promise\u2019 to shoot down Iraqi aircraft (\"You fly, you die\") provided such an assurance. The spearhead of the Kurdish rebellion was not, however, the longtime leadership of the anti-Saddam Kurdish political parties. As in the south, there was a spontaneous popular uprising followed by the near simultaneous defection of some 300 officers of an all-Kurdish territorial military force. The defection of these officers and their units, locally known as the \"jash\" (or \u201cmules\") and long on the payroll of the Baghdad vegime, effectively brought all the cities of Kurdistan under Kurdish control. It was only at this point that the two principal Kurdish leaders --- Massoud Barzani of the Kurdish Democratic Party and Jalal Talabani of the Patriotic Union of Kurdistan --- emerged to take control of the rebel forces. For a brief 2-week period at the end of March euphoria reigned in Iraqi Kurdistan. The Kurds set up local administrations, restored basic services including electricity (Zakho in far north Iraq had electricity on Easter weekend; Baghdad did not), and prepared defenses. The Kurds inherited vast quantities of Iraqi military equipment including trucks, tanks, artillery, mortars, and light arms. They even captured an airfield with several Iraqi war planes. =5= For the first time the Kurdish population at large was exposed to the Kurdish insurgent movement and to the recent history of the movement. In the cities there were town meetings providing for give-and-take between Kurdish leaders and community leaders and professionals. Movie houses showed video footage of the Halabja poison gas attacks, including documentaries made by Western television networks. Kurds were able to visit the torture centers of the regime as well as the 15 or more extravagant palaces owned by Saddam Hussein in the Kurdish mountains."}
{"id": "iraq-refugees", "title": "Iraq Refugees 1991", "year": 1991, "seq": 3, "text": "Ba\u2019ath party headquarters were torched as were the local mukhabarat (secret police) offices. Abandoned army barracks were stripped of their tin roofs as well as other valuables. The Kurds distributed weapons to every able-bodied man and claimed to have more than 400,000 men under arms. An observer could see that virtually every man in the Kurdish-controlled cities was armed but, as the Kurds discovered, an armed population does not an army make. The Kurds also took large numbers of Iraqi prisoners. Jalal Talabani, head of the Patriotic Union of Kurdistan , estimated the total to be more than 100,000 but noted the Kurds could not hold these prisoners as they had no food or other means to take care of them. Interestingly the Kurds reported that their prisoners included more than 100 members of the Peoples Mojahideen, an anti-Khomeini Iranian group led by Massoud Rajavi, that apparently was fighting with Saddam Hussein in Iraq\u2019s civil war. 2 C. Meanwhile in the South Kurdish euphoria proved short-lived. In the south, forces loyal to Saddam Hussein recaptured the main cities and engaged in a brutal campaign of repression. According to refugees, captured rebels typically were lined up, nooses strung from the lowered barrel of a tank gun were placed around their necks, and then the rebels were hanged as the gun barrel was raised. Shi\u2019a holy shrines in Najaf and Karbala became abattoirs for the slaughter of rebels, clerics, and alleged sympathizers. In addition to these activities, the Ba\u2018ath regime apparently indulged its favorite pacification technique in the south. Whole neighborhoods were destroyed in March and early April, depriving urban rebels of sanctuary and punishing a hostile population. lone People\u2019s Mojahideen have sent a crude propaganda video to Members of Congress alleging that Iranian Revolutionary Guards, disguised as Kurds, launched a broad attack on northern Iraqi cities including Sulaymaniyah."}
{"id": "iraq-refugees", "title": "Iraq Refugees 1991", "year": 1991, "seq": 4, "text": "The Collapse of the Kurdish Insurgency in the North By March 28 the military tide was beginning to turn against the Kurds. Iraqi forces, backed up by helicopter gunships, launched a ferocious assault on the city of Kirkuk. As parts of the city were retaken, Kurdish insurgents reported that remaining residents of Kurdish neighborhoods were machinegunned and slaughtered. Within days Iraqi army forces moved into other Kurdish cities and towns: Dihok and Irbil fell on March 31, Zakho, and Sulaymaniyah on April 1. Partly the Kurdish defeat is explainable by the ferocity of the Iraqi attack. Cities were subject to intense bombardment. Dihok, for example, was shelled incessantly the night before it fell. Phosphorous shells, which can instantly cremate their victims, were used extensively and with maximum =e terror impact. Unlike the Iraqis, the Kurdish leaders were unwilling to subject their own people to this sort of devastation. Kurdish forces pulled out of cities not only because they believed they could not hold them over the long term, but also because they wanted to spare civilians and \u2018 facilitate their flight to safety. While the Kurds captured large quantities of Iraqi weapons, they were unable to make effective use of them. Artillery pieces were often idle for lack of firing pins. The Kurds had quite a collection of captured Soviet-made tanks (some disabled in the capture were restored by the Kurds) but did not necessarily have the ordnance to go with the tanks. All Kurdish military operations were hampered by a lack of gasoline and in some cases food for the guerrillas. The Kurds also suffered from command and control deficiencies. Communication between commanders was often by written note and, when they had electronic communications, these were limited and not effectively utilized. Logistically, the Kurds had difficulty matching ordnance with weapons. The tank drivers would not necessarily know of a supply of ordnance stockpiled in a different part of Kurdistan. \u00a2 From the cities of Kurdistan hundreds of thousands of Kurdish refugees fled to the high mountains along the Turkish and Iranian borders."}
{"id": "iraq-refugees", "title": "Iraq Refugees 1991", "year": 1991, "seq": 5, "text": "Kurds fleeing the cities at the end of March could find no food in the countryside and no village shelter in a still freezing mountain environment. The absence of indigenous food and shelter have greatly exacerbated the humanitarian crisis overtaking the Kurds. c. once! tio: 8 Perhaps as many as two million Kurds, Assyrians, and Chaldeans were moved from their villages after 1985. The luckier ones went to the cities to stay with relatives. There they were able to find employment or at least could live off the income of employed relatives. When the Kurdish military collapse came, these newly urbanized villagers, along with other city dwellers, had the food resources (often acquired at exorbitant blackmarket rates) and sometimes even the transport to flee. Not so the inhabitants of the concentration camps, who number, according to Massoud Barzani, 1.1 million in 104 separate settlements. (This writer\u2019s independent estimate of the population was one million.) Mostly unemployed since the destruction of their villages, the concentration camp dwellers do not have the money to acquire food reserves. -14- In 1987 the Iraqi authorities would not permit a visit to the victory cities; in 1991 these a GnieeR eon camps were liberated and thus accessible. They were also every bit as grim as they seemed from the highway four years ago. Ina sprawling settlement of more than 10,000 near Zakho,, a man was carrying grain treated with a vermin poison. To feed his family, the man intended to wash the poison off the grain. He said that several washings would be required. In this particular concentration camp, there was just one well and it was highly polluted. Camp leaders said several children were dying each day of dysentery. The plight of the 10,000 Kurds in this Zakho area victory city is emblematic of the one million or more concentration camp inhabitants."}
{"id": "iraq-refugees", "title": "Iraq Refugees 1991", "year": 1991, "seq": 6, "text": "One alternative would have a large enough Iraqi administrative and police presence to maintain order. Of course, the refugees would not return home with such a presence. A more workable alternative would leave the civil administration and policing of Kurdish towns and camps in the safe haven to the Kurds themselves. When the Kurds governed Zakho, Dihok, and Amadiyah, the law and order situation in these towns seemed very good. When not under Iraqi military attack, the atmosphere was far more relaxed than that of towns under Ba\u2019ath regime administration and business seemed to be conducted almost as usual. Leaving the administration and policing of towns and camps in the protected zone to the Kurds and other local peoples would increase the confidence of the refugees and avoid coalition involvement in conflicts between the people and the Baghdad representatives. The more serious impediment to the success of the safe haven plan is the unwillingness of the United States and its coalition partners to guarantee the physical safety of the civilian population for as long as the threat remains. The Bush Administration talks only of a short-term military presence in northern Iraq, and the suggestion is that after the -19- camps are established, they will be turned over to the United Nations. A United Nations relief presence, not backed up by military force, is likely to leave most Kurdish refugees unpersuaded of the efficacy of the safe haven pines Many are unlikely to return to Iraq under these circumstances, and those who do return are likely to go back to the mountains as the coalition forces withdraw. The Kurds know Saddam Hussein and their fears are almost certainly justified. Without foreign military protection the Kurds face the risk of a renewed slaughter. The current discussion of a United Nations police force in northern Iraq may assuage legitimate Kurdish security concerns, but only if the mandate of the U.N. police extends to protection against the Iraqi police and army."}
{"id": "iraq-refugees", "title": "Iraq Refugees 1991", "year": 1991, "seq": 7, "text": "It did not comprehend the depth of popular anger inside Iraq at Saddam Hussein and therefore did not anticipate the uprisings either in the south or the north. The Administration in its policy assessments seemed to mischaracterize the positions of the Kurdish and Shi\u2019a rebels. As a result, an opportunity to overthrow Saddam Hussein in mid-March may have been lost. Purther, neither anticipating the rebellion it had called for nor the brutal nature of the Iraqi response, the Administration was unprepared to cope with the subsequent humanitarian crisis. Being caught by surprise may be directly traceable to a policy of no-contact with the Iraqi opposition. In April 1988, during a call at the State Department the Kurdish leader Jalal Talabani met with the Director for Northern Gulf Affairs, the Iraq desk officer, and the Assistant Secretary for Human Rights. (Talabani also met Foreign Relations Committee Chairman Claiborne Pell during the same visit). This meeting, of which Secretary Shultz was unaware, produced an explosive reaction from Iraq and Turkey. Secretary Shultz felt blindsided and an edict went forth mandating no contact with the Iraqi opposition. Subsequent developments -- -23- Iraq\u2019s use of chemical weapons on the Kurds, an evolution of Turkey\u2019s policy towards a more generous view of its own Kurdish population, Iraqi violations of international law, and even the invasion of Kuwait -- did not change this policy. When Talabani came to the United States in August 1990, he met with Senators Pell and Kerry but was again cold-shouldered by the State Department. After the war began on January 16, the Iraqi opposition approached the Administration with offers of military cooperation and of military intelligence. They were again spurned. Ultimately a channel to provide military intelligence was established by having information pass through the office of a Senate staffer. However, by the time this channel was established the war was nearly over."}
{"id": "iraq-refugees", "title": "Iraq Refugees 1991", "year": 1991, "seq": 8, "text": "The Iraqi sition Iraq is a nation divided on confessional and ethnic grounds. Fifty-five percent of the population are Shi\u2019a, 40 percent are Sunni, and 5 percent are Christian. Ethnically the division is 70 percent Arab, 25 percent Kurd, 5 percent Assyrian, Chaldean, and others. The Iraqi opposition is as diverse as the country itself. However, it has achieved a degree of coherence that its critics (especially those who do not talk to the opposition) never imagined. The Iraqi opposition consists of Shi\u2019a parties, Sunni Arab parties, Kurdish parties, and ideologically-based parties. The Shi\u2019a parties include religious parties (the Dawa, or \"Call\" party, the Islamic Action party of the Ayatollah Mudarassi, and the Supreme Assembly of the Islamic Revolution in Iraq of Bagir Hakim) and secular independents, of which the London-based leader Ahmad Chalabi is the most articulate spokesman. The Kurdish parties include the Kurdish Democratic Party (KDP) of Massoud Barzani and Jalal Talabani\u2019s Patriotic Union of Kurdistan (PUK). The ideological parties, which are dominated by Sunni Arabs, include the Iraqi Communist Party and a dissident Ba\u2018ath Party. The most prominent Sunni Arab -25- opposition figure is Damascus-based former Iraqi General Hassan Nequib. In March these parties met in Beirut to forge an alliance and a common program. Brought together by a shared objective -- the removal of Saddam Hussein -- they achieved pee aee ts on a broad program for a democratic and federal Iraq with very substantive provisions for Kurdish autonomy. Strikingly, each of the parties in the Joint Action Committee -- the cumbersome name the opposition coalition arrogated to itself -- made tangible concessions in the interests of opposition unity. The Kurdish parties abandoned their dream of an independent Kurdistan, accepting that their rights can only be accommodated within Iraq. The Shi\u2019a religious parties abandoned the idea of an Islamic state, recognizing the rights of religious minorities as well as those of the more secular Sunni Arabs and Kurds."}
{"id": "iraq-refugees", "title": "Iraq Refugees 1991", "year": 1991, "seq": 9, "text": "An Opportunity Lost As the anti-Saddam rebellion gained force in early March, several strategically located Iraqi military figures contacted the Joint Action Committee, according to both Arab and Kurdish opposition leaders. As the Iraqi military figures contemplated bringing possibly decisive force to the side of the rebels, they looked for a sign that the sponsors of the rebellion had the support of the United States, the one country preeeminent militarily and politically in Iraq. No such signal was given. On the contrary, the public snub of Kurdish and other Iraqi opposition leaders was read as a clear indication the United States did not want the popular =26- rebellion to succeed. This was confirmed by background statements from Administration officials that \u2018they were looking for a military, not a popular, alternative to Saddam Hussein. As one NSC aide put it on March 1, \u201cOur policy is to get rid of Saddam Hussein, not his regime.\" Any potential defector to the rebel cause put everything at risk: his position, his life, his family\u2019s lives, the lives of his relatives. Given the negative signals from Washington, the potential military defectors sat on the fence. And while they did so, the anti-Saddam rebellion was crushed. Other countries in the region were eager to assist the forces battling Saddam Hussein. Syria was the country in the region most strongly supportive of the anti-Saddam rebels and provided significant support to Shi\u2019a, Sunni, and Kurdish opposition groups. Parties from all three ethnic/confessional groups make their headquarters in Damascus. During the time the Kurds controlled northern Iraq, Syria generously permitted access to liberated Kurdistan through its territory. Syrian officials responded enthusiastically to suggestions of assistance from coalition countries to the Iraqi opposition ea oust Saddam Hussein. However, Syrian officials were reluctant to go too far alone and looked to the United States for leadership."}
{"id": "el_croquis_alberto_campo_de_baeza", "title": "Alberto Campo Baeza : works and projects", "year": 1999, "seq": 0, "text": "Significantly, Cam- po Baeza locates the ration d'etre of architec- tural process and product in transcendental values that lie in the world of the beyond, and whose physical materialization therefore transcends the geographical and temporal constraints of chronological history. \"Archi- tecture must offer human beings that myste- rious yet tangible 'other' which is beauty. The intelligent kind of beauty that emanates from constructed ideas. This is something much, much more than construction in the normal sense.\" Since gravity -an invisible static force- and light -the invisible electromagnetic radiation that makes objects visible to the human eye- i to Campo Bat school in Asp . Mica,, have by definition almost no contingent attributes in the philosophical sense, Campo Baeza tends to see them as absolute, eternal values. So we must now try to see what these 'supe- rior categories' mean in relation to historical events and places, tin- specificities of time and space. Campo Baeza himself gives some idea of their meaning when he says, for example, that mod- ern inventions like plate glass and metal framework are directly related to gravity and light. The fact that plate glass can make the upper horizontal surfaces of buildings transparent, while steel frames can separate the skin of a building from its structural support, suggests new tectonic solutions to the problem of gravity. In other words, Campo Baeza's kind of architecture is by definition incluswe of inescapable realities like context, function, composition and construction, but claims to be exclusive in formal terms; or as he himself puts it, it is \"essential\" but not \"minimalist''. Minimalism is just another *ism\\ whereas essentiality -a more conceptual notion in that it suggests both sim- plification and purification, an expression of essence- is what bodies forth the \"constructed idea\" and determines the poetics of its formulation. Paraphrasing Mies van der Robe's less is more, Campo Baeza demies his concept of \"more with less\" ( mds con menos) as \"... a more which keeps human beings and the complexity of then- culture firmly at the center of the cre- ated world, at the center of architecture."}
{"id": "el_croquis_alberto_campo_de_baeza", "title": "Alberto Campo Baeza : works and projects", "year": 1999, "seq": 1, "text": "In this particular case, Campo Baeza's repertoire of compositional motifs translates into primary geometrical con- figurations, while the archetypal \"cube' of the primitive hut achieves greater prominence through a carefully balanced contrast between cool expanses of glass and brilliant white cladding. The same principles arc also at work in the sequence of detached houses that fol- lowed - the Garcia Marcos House in Madrid (1991), the four villas in Algiers (1992)* and the L5 Aihi rto ( 'ampo Baeza, villas for Spanisli Embassy, 998 16 Gaspar House in Cadiz (1992) -whose graphically etched volumes at last stand alone in splendid isolation. These eloquently introverted clusters of sun-drenched solids are so pow- erful precisely because they convey a sense of total separation, irrevocable detachment from the 'other'. Differences of level, self-contained courtyards, volumes delimited by boundary walls- everything is totally and systematically decontextualized. And yet. what looks like a Starkly delineated set of closed, box-like prisms is, in fact, open to the sky. What I have elsewhere called a \"state of alienation\" is more than evident in the much-pub- lished photographs of the Gaspar House patios, in which treetops -traces of external reali- ty- crowd the borders of a 'sacred compound' like abstract presences forming the static backdrop to a sophisticated stage design. Inside the courtyards, brilliant surfaces sculpted by reflected light encircle, subjugate, enfeeble, reduce to simulacra the concrete manifesta- tions of a physical world excluded from the Initiatory rites that place the house apart from everyday reality. Trees, mirror pools, even some of the masses themselves, have a ghostly lack of solidity, while the natural landscape seems weirdly de-natinvd, subtly recontextual- ized and aestheticized as a decontextualized visionary setting for the house. The sense of solitude is heightened not only by this explicit segregation of attendant pseudo-natural ref- erences that serve to introduce the development of the architectural setting, but also by the isolation of the human figures who inhabit the house."}
{"id": "el_croquis_alberto_campo_de_baeza", "title": "Alberto Campo Baeza : works and projects", "year": 1999, "seq": 2, "text": "Ga&par . /(ilmn,. only our view of the sky, which for (\"ami in Baeza is literally the place where \"our phys- ical world penetrates a world beyond\". Although our atmosphere is suffering Hie consequences of uncontrolled urbanization and the air around us is often unbreathable, the view front one of Campo Baeza's houses -whoso interaction with theoutside world is regulated by glass expanses trained by white wall panels- can offer a comfortingly sublimated perspective on life. In this sense, his buildings convey a 'primal nostalgia' for pre-historical existence and a Inst spiritual plenitude, for a \"paradise of identities'\" car denced by the primeval dialectic of light and darkness, where the light of the sun. moon and stars makes visible the abstract space of possibility in all its power. Clearly, wo arc speaking here of nothing less than the re- deeming power of art. the ovation of an ar- tificial, imaginary universe capable of restoring the harmonies which modern men and women have lost in then* distorted relationships with the physical world. In an article in A+U magazine (July L985), Campo Baeza says: \"I feel emotion, therefore I exist. [...] but then, isn't architecture all about emotion? We should tell i he w< aid that architecture is a syn- thesis of rational construction and irrational emotion, precept and passion. This architecture. which is made of and arouses emotion, will always be cultured architecture. Unlike today's erudite architecture, which more often than not is unashamedly exhibitionist, cultured ar- chitecture speaks a silent language which can sometimes be difficult to explain, but is always easy to understand.\" One of the most wonderful historical examples of light-redeeming* architecture is i he I ioth- ic cathedral, whose very stone seems to emanate light. As Hans Sedlmayr say.- in Das Licit t in semen h&nstlerischei) Mai/ifextafioneu (Mittenwald Maunder. 1979): \"The light inside a cathedral does not seem to come from the outside."}
{"id": "el_croquis_alberto_campo_de_baeza", "title": "Alberto Campo Baeza : works and projects", "year": 1999, "seq": 3, "text": "Typologically it resembles a convent: the inward- looking complex has the usual stereometric features and relates to the coastal scenery through windows set in blind expanses of wall, which thus become framed views of the out- side world. And although the building is organized around a square distribution courtyard to remedy the unevenness of the site, all the communal spaces hug the inside of the west wall. The only two windows in the main facade -eyes gazing at the horizon- are there to bring- light to major functional areas. The Smaller one illuminates the triple-height entrance lobby. while the larger beach-fadng one. which is twice the size, illuminates the library and cafete- ria, adding a public register to the dazzling whiteness of the sea view. This is more than a standard patio configuration with all the usual domestic connotations, them; it is also an as- sembly of architectural feat n n-s semantical ly polarized to form a densely meaningful thresh- old between town and house, public and private. The concepts of 'stereotomic' and \"tectonic\" construction -they are borrowed from Semper, and have been studied in some depth by Kenneth Frampton in StwtU s in T<ct<>uu- Culture. The Poetics of Construction in Nineteenth- and Tivenfieik-Century Architecture (1995)- are central to the contrast between the inertia of mass and the leavening effects < \u00bbf light in ( 'am- po Baeza's architecture. The two building methods they imply are exemplified in Campo Baeza's project for the Dalmau House in Burgos (1990), whose ordinary domestic functions are grouped in a hollow, whidowless base, while an upper glass volume provides a setting for AUh rta ( 'ampo \u25a0!>,;i,,,/ school. Cadiz, 1992. the intellectual activities the house also had to accommodate. This duality, which is also a fea> turo Hi' the competition project for the Philharmonic Hall in Copenhagen (1993), is virtually a paradigm of the process by which light can progressively dematerialize. both conceptually and physically, the solid stone and almost total darkness of the primitive cave dwelling."}
{"id": "el_croquis_alberto_campo_de_baeza", "title": "Alberto Campo Baeza : works and projects", "year": 1999, "seq": 4, "text": "On the other hand, and also by learn- ing the lesson of history in relation to what already exists there, said vol- umes rise up from the rock on which they sit in material continuity with it. The colossal concrete of goldish aggre- gate with winch the building would be realized appears, then, like fresh stone. And between these fragments, the in- terior and exterior spaces would be continually conjoined, framing, in a va- riety of ways, all of them interesting, the beautiful surrounding countryside. Model, sit* plan, and ground-floor plan. 27 Garcia del Valle House, Ciudad Santo Domingo, Algete, Madrid, 1974 This is the architect's \"opera prima', al- though the first .-ketches for it had been committed to paper while he was .still a student. A deck-like architecture of a markedly 'Wrightean' kind is set out on a steeply sloping, elongated plot with fine views towards the north. As a result, the house strives to bond itself firmly to the terrain by means of a series of hor- izontal planes which are staggered in order to gain a purchase on the site. This serene hurizontality has its coun- terpoint in the vertical core of the staircase and. above all, in the extre- mely tall protruding chimney which gives the house its identity. The planes are subsumed by imposing breast- works which further accentuate, if such is possible, their horizontal char- acter, one that is also emphasized by the reduced height of the roofs. Ground-floor plan, and mot 28 \u00bb \u2666 - Tin roo) and ' overhangs. flB^^M Fominaya House, Ciudad Santo Domingo, Algete, Madrid, 1974 Dating from the same period as the previous house, the Fominaya House displays greater formal restraint in the brick volumes corresponding to its dif- ferent functions. The living area, with its large picture window open to the north and a more tranquil and sober patio looking south, already posits the kind of horizontal continuity that will become a feature of subsequent de- signs."}
{"id": "el_croquis_alberto_campo_de_baeza", "title": "Alberto Campo Baeza : works and projects", "year": 1999, "seq": 5, "text": "To do this the original facade is left etear, thus highlighting the well-con- ceived composition ofthe lower part of the original building, with its four stone arches. An extremely diapho- nous mterior is created by glazing the narrow street front and strategically positioning mirrors opposite the longi- tudinal walls. Entirely black above a certain height, the ceiling is set with spotlights which, reflected in the paired mirrors, are repeated ad infini- tum like some star-studded sky. To end with, the space giving onto the street is closed off with a number of strong and thick doors of blaek-lacquered panel which, apart from being secure, look as if they must be. A horizontal in- cision is made in these at the passer- by \"s eye-level, which provides a tanta- lizing view of the shop interior when dosed. The subtle separation of this door from the et\\\\xe^ ofthe stone door- way enhances both the image of the door's strength and the clean lines of the facade aperture in an adroit play of contrasts. As if these were the gates of that starry sky. 7> 79 Public school, Loeches, Madrid, 1989 North a Nil soutfi The village of Loeches is set on a hill overlooking the wide expanse of flat countryside surrounding it. It was there, between two massive 17th-cen- tury church and convent buildings. that a number of ill-starred schools had been constructed, totally at odds with their surroundings. The problem resolved by fusing the same stone as in the convents to create a rampart wall. This structure was intended to partition off the former and yet affirm a sense of continuity with the history of the place. The program unfolds intramurally. The self-effacing north facade appears as one more wall, while the classrooms face south towards the sunshine."}
{"id": "el_croquis_alberto_campo_de_baeza", "title": "Alberto Campo Baeza : works and projects", "year": 1999, "seq": 6, "text": "It was decided, therefore, to create a completely walled enclosure, an 'hortus eonclusus\". This originates in an 18 x 18 meter square, defined by four 3.5 meter-high walls, which Is di- vided into three equal parts. Only the central part is roofed over. Divided obliquely by a pair of 2 meter-high walls into three parts, having the pro- portions A: 2A: A. the service units are included at the sides. The roof over the central space is higher. -1.5 meters above the ground. Where the low and high walls intersect there are four 2 x 2 meter glazed openings. The horizon- tal plane of the stone floor extends through these four openings, giving a real sense of continuity between inside and outside. The omnipresent whiteness con- tributes to the clarity and continuity of the architecture. The dual symmetry of the composition is rendered more evident by the likewise symmetrical placing of the four lemon trees, which make for a spectacular effect. The Light in this house is horizontal and continuous, and reflects off the walls of the east-west oriented pa- tios. In fine, this is a continuous hor- izontal space tautened by horizontal light. 100 conclusus', wrchitect's sketck, and the i ritmnce I 'utaway model, ground-floor plan, and the entrance court Kil The courtym trees and pool, and an metric. IQ2 'Drago' school, Cadiz, 1992 The building, with its vast white fac- ade overlooking the sea, is devisod as a continuation of the long and high white walls of the old 'maritime' cemetery of Cadiz. The entire volume ifi handled in such a way that it repairs the fabric of the city at the point where its streets end. The overall space is laid out on an ir- regular, trapezoidal base, and uses the simple device of a regular, square courtyard around which the corridors run."}
{"id": "el_croquis_alberto_campo_de_baeza", "title": "Alberto Campo Baeza : works and projects", "year": 1999, "seq": 7, "text": "Tin- openings are long, narrow and flush with the wall. The balconies overlooking the courtyard appear as lightweight elements. On the ground floor the conference-hall volume juts out over the courtyard like a fan being opened. The main stairway rests on it and follows the same unfolding rhythm. The gesture is completed by the forceful and sharp-ended prismatic volume which contains the common stairs. Lastly, a third element makes its ap- pearance: the metal structure, paint- ed white, that supports the win- dowed skylight covering the court- yard. This tectonic element throws the stereotomic stone box containing it into relief. The white structure of telescopic pillars and delicate trian- gular trusses has a i win function: on the one hand it serves as an effective architectonic device for making the light shimmer where the two inter- sect, thus lending it material form. On the other, the compositional axis formed by the main facade and the huge entrance arch is turned through ninety degrees, ordering the space longitudinally by means of the pil- lars. positional drawing, modeli the neu w plans of second, fust and ground floors, \"ml \"'\" rebuilt original facade. The central courtyard crossi d by tin- stahivay, detaM of balcony (i mi metal roof supported by pillars, and cutaway axonorru ofcourtyaaxL 113 Cultural center, Villaviciosa de Odon, Madrid, 1992 The site, alongside the former high- way t<> .Madrid and with a previously adapted space, is defined on its other three sides by a number of not very in- teresting apartment blocks. The solution is a stone box whose trapezoidal ground plan follows the layout of the site. A robust and heavy 'stereotomic' box, then, of gray gran- ite. On the inside, with a reduced floor- plan, and sticking out above so as to catch the light from on high, a light- weight and 'tectonic\", white cubic box forming the geometric and conceptual center of the proposed system, and perforated all over like a piece of gruyere cheese."}
{"id": "el_croquis_alberto_campo_de_baeza", "title": "Alberto Campo Baeza : works and projects", "year": 1999, "seq": 8, "text": "Our proposal was for a \u2022belvedere' beside the canal. A rock be- side the water, hollowed OUt inside and carved outside. On the inside, enclosed within the rock like a treasure, a series of acoustically well-appointed spaces - a concert hall, I he ( Jopenhagen Philharmonic Hall, an auditorium - in which to hear and take in the music. On the outside, set down mi the nick like a 'belvedere', a series of visually well-sited spaces - a central square, a restaurant, a library - from which to see and take in the landscape. Perfect- ly protected within a class box. The huge carved rock would be el' stone, sawcut light-gray granite, sup- ported en a strong monolithic struc- ture of reinforced concrete. The musi- cal boxes hollowed out inside would be finished in Danish beech wood. The glass box would lie made using a pre- cise lightweight structure of steel, plus glass. A rock hollowed out to acoustically safeguard and isolate those musical boxes, ami carved to visually enhance and underscore the very beautiful landscape of Copenhagen. An architec- ture with the strength simplicity brings. With the elegance sobriety confers 116 lect's sketcttes, and cutaway First-jloorp mid tin- model seen from above, 117 Public housing, Ibiza, 1994 /'. ,.--/\u00bb ctivi shouting light tory, plans of ground and first flows, arid longitudinal \u25a0\u25a0\u25a0 of a fmcsing unit. This involved ;i competition for 40 pub- lic housing units in Ibiza. on an irregu- lar city lot and with various planning regulations As the design brief put it. the apart- ments were intended to engage with the following factors: expertise, con- structional simplicity, maximum priva- ffective control of the light, clarity and flexibility. All this in a functional 90 nv that again offered, in purer form this time, a diagonal space with diago- nal light in the main room, plus an ad- joining private patio."}
{"id": "Color_Computer_Operation_Manual_1980_Tandy", "title": "Radio Shack Hardware Manual: Color Computer Operation Manual (1980)(Tandy)", "year": 1980, "seq": 0, "text": "Antenna Connection You need to route your television's VHF antenna through the Antenna Switchbox. If there are wires presently connected to the VHF terminals on your TV set, disconnect them. What you do next depends upon the type of antenna installation you have. Read the following paragraphs and study Figures 2 through 6 to decide which installation you have. Connection to a TV with a 75-Ohm Coaxial Lead-in and Matching Transformer (Figure 6) Connect the short twin-lead from the transformer to the screw terminals on the Antenna Switchbox. Connect the short twin-lead from the Antenna Switchbox to your TV's \"VHF\" screw terminals. Connection to a TV with Screw Terminals and an Internal Antenna (Figure 2) Connect the internal antenna leads to the terminals labeled \"CON- NECT TO ANTENNA\" on the Antenna Switchbox. Then connect the short twin-lead from the Antenna Switchbox to your TV's \"VHF\" screw terminals. Connection to a TV with Twin-Lead and External vr \"Rabbit Ears\" Antenna (Figures 3 and 4) Connect the lead-in from your antenna to the terminals labeled \"CONNECT TO ANTENNA\" on the Antenna Switchbox, Connect the short twin-lead from the Antenna Switchbox to your TV's \"VHF\" screw terminals. Connection to a TV with a 75-Ohm Coaxial Lead-in (Figure 5) You will need to obtain a special 75-ohm to 300-ohm matching transformer such as Radio Shack's Catalog Number 15-1140, Con- nect your coaxial cable lead-in to the transformer and connect the transformer's twin-lead to the screw terminals on the Antenna Switchbox. Next move the slider to the \"closed\" position. Connect the short twin lead from the Antenna Switchbox to your TV's \"VHF\" screw terminals. Before Internal Antenna Twin-Lead To Computer Figure 2. Rear View of TV with Screw Terminals and Inter- nal Antenna. \u00a5 Before 3 After To Computer To Computer Figure 3. Rear View of TV with Twin-Lead and an External Antenna."}
{"id": "Color_Computer_Operation_Manual_1980_Tandy", "title": "Radio Shack Hardware Manual: Color Computer Operation Manual (1980)(Tandy)", "year": 1980, "seq": 1, "text": "These are nominally defined as: Black, Green, Yellow, Blue, Red, Buff, Cyan, Magenta, and Orange, However, the actual color tones produced by your set, and the degree of difference between tones, will depend on the quality and color adjustment of your television set\u2014 not on the Computer. If you are using a plug-in ROM cartridge, the color will be deter- mined by the cartridge program. If you are using the built-in COLOR BASIC language, you can choose the colors that appear on the screen. If you are using COLOR BASIC, the display will normally be green with black characters (although the lowercase mode inverts this by displaying green characters on a black background. See Using the Keyboard later in this manual). COLOR BASIC also displays a blinking \"cursor' colors throughout the available spectrum. which changes (Note: The following is an example of simple programming. For further examples of programs which display color as well as sound, see Troubleshooting and Maintenance. For more information on programming in general, refer to Getting Started with TRS-80 COLOR BASIC) To control the background color of the television display, type in a \"command\" like this: CLS code (HUE) Code For This Color Black 1 Green 2 Yellow 3 Blue 4 Red 5 Buff 6 Cyan 7 Magenta 8 Orange For example, type: CLS 3 (ENTER) for a blue background. Whenever the screen is cleared (by pressing (CLEAR) ) the display will automatically revert to green no matter what background color was previously displayed. To help you adjust the color and alignment of your television set, we've included two test programs in the Troubleshooting and Maintenance chapter. 16 Sound TRS-80 COLOR COMPUTER BASIC will also control the sound com- ing from your televion's speaker. The sound volume can be deter- mined manually by the volume setting on your television and \"automatically\" by the cartridge program; the. sound quality (pitch, timbre, and duration) is determined by the Computer."}
{"id": "molecularlevelde6275nyde", "title": "The molecular level design of fire retardants and suppressants", "year": 1999, "seq": 0, "text": "Lyon and from the Industrial Consortium for Environmentally Friendly Flame Retardants. The author is grateful to Dr. Wing Tsang (NIST) for suggesting the kinetic study of pentyl radical. Abstract The various methods that comprise the field of molecular modeling are reviewed in the context of their potential for application to the molecular level design of new fire retardants and suppressants. The capabilities of these techniques are demonstrated by performing calculations on systems ranging in molecular complexity from small gas phase molecules to polymers. As a consequence of its fundamental basis, molecular modeling can be used to predict the properties of new materials in ways that macroscopic models cannot and, thereby, offers an unrivaled potential for computer aided molecular design. Unfortunately, the amount of computational effort required to obtain this level detail currently restricts the domain of these calculations to infinitesimal scales of time and distance, which limits their application to model systems. These boundaries, however, are receding as advances in computer technology enable calculations on increasingly more complex systems. Based on the rapid pace of the progress attained so far, it seems likely that molecular modeling will soon become an integral part of industrial research and development programs in materials flammability. The purpose of this chapter is, therefore, to provide a meaningful introduction to the field with an emphasis on how these teqhniques can be applied to the design and development of fire retardants and suppressants. IV 1 Introduction The flammability of materials is an important concern that must addressed before they can be used in buildings, ships, aircraft and clothing. However, the present generation of fire retardant additives and fire resistant polymers has come under increasing public scrutiny because of the perception that they may contribute to environmental problems [1,2]. Some materials, more specifically those containing chlorinated or brominated additives and polymers, have been implicated in studies that suggest that they contribute to the formation of dioxins and furans during incineration [2]."}
{"id": "molecularlevelde6275nyde", "title": "The molecular level design of fire retardants and suppressants", "year": 1999, "seq": 1, "text": "On the other hand, the implementation of kinetic and/or transport models requires specific information about reaction mechanisms, rate constants, and viscosities that are not generally available. This is especially true when the purpose of the investigation is to predict the properties of hypothetical materials, for which there are no experimental data. Furthermore, the capability to examine a process at a molecular level can provide the basis for a deeper understanding of the operant mechanisms. As a consequence of this generality, molecular modeling can be used to predict the properties of new materials in ways that macroscopic models cannot, and thereby offers an unrivaled potential for computer-aided molecular design. On the other 1 hand, the capability to study structure and reactivity at the molecular level of detail does not come without cost. The computational effort involved in performing simulations on polymers can be prohibitive and often restricts the scope of the investigation to infinitesimal times and distances, which may not always provide an adequate representation of the processes of interest. For this reason, molecular modeling is, at least for the time being, a complementary approach that must be combined with experimental measurements and macroscopic modeling to provide a complete picture of polymer flammability and fire resistance. In this chapter, the various methods that comprise the field of molecular modeling will be reviewed and the viability of using these techniques to identify factors which alter the thermal degradation chemistries of polymers in ways that effect a reduction in their flammability will be assessed. The purview of this exposition will be extended to include consideration of quantum mechanical calculations performed on a series of small gas phase molecules that were advanced as candidates for the replacement of halon fire extinguishants [12]. These calculations were performed to assess the potential environmental impacts of these chemicals."}
{"id": "molecularlevelde6275nyde", "title": "The molecular level design of fire retardants and suppressants", "year": 1999, "seq": 2, "text": "Thus, despite the mathematical rigor inherent in the formulation of the theory, the implementation of molecular quantum mechanics almost always involves approximations. The accuracy of the energy and other molecular properties are determined by the completeness of the basis sets used in the expansion of the wavefunction. This is a two-fold problem. The many-body basis functions in the Cl expansion of the wavefunction presented in Eq.( 3 ), are products of one-body functions (orbitals) which are also expanded in a basis set. The level of accuracy obtained from a quantum mechanical calculation is dependent on the size and quality of both the Cl and orbital basis sets. Thus, an increase in accuracy can only be attained at the expense of a concomitant increase in computer time. Indeed, the computational effort involved in performing a full Cl expansion, which in principle is the exact solution of the Schrodinger equation in the space spanned by the basis set, increases as the number of one-electron basis functions (NBF) to the number of electrons (n) power. Recent advances in computer technology and in the development of approximate methods, however, have now made it possible to calculate the properties of small gas phase molecules, some of which are of major importance to the chemical industry, to chemical accuracy. This assertion will be supported using examples of bond energy calculations to estimate the atmospheric lifetimes of candidate compounds for the replacement of halon fire extinguishants in the following section. Based on the analysis presented in the preceding paragraph, it may be inferred that the limiting factor in the application of molecular quantum mechanics is the number of electrons in the molecule. Not surprisingly, the larger the molecule the more computer time is required for the calculation. At the time of this writing, it is exceedingly difficult to obtain chemically accurate information for molecules that contain more than about 10 carbon atoms [16]."}
{"id": "molecularlevelde6275nyde", "title": "The molecular level design of fire retardants and suppressants", "year": 1999, "seq": 3, "text": "When transformed to Hamiltonian form, Eq.( 7 ) becomes 4 (8) dH _ dq. ^ p. dt dH _ dp^ d dt The classical Hamiltonian is obtained by replacing the derivative terms in the quantum mechanical operator by the classical formula for the kinetic energies of the nuclei. This result is given in Eq.( 9 ). 3N H m, (9) The next step in the simplification of the problem is to represent the electronic energy by introducing functions that account for the potential energy associated with the relative motions of the atomic centers. In the parlance of molecular modeling, these functions are collectively referred to as a forcefield. The source of this misnomer is that the forces that affect the motion of the atoms are calculated as the negative of the gradient of these functions, as indicated in Eq.( 7 ). The forcefield is parameterized using data obtained from experimental, measurements and/or quantum mechanical calculations on representative compounds [17]. In principle, the result of this process is a generic potential energy function that can be used to describe an entire class of compounds. There are several types of calculations that are routinely performed using forcefields. Molecular mechanics is one of these. The objective of these calculations is usually to determine the geometry of a molecule by finding the coordinates that correspond to the minimum potential energy at absolute zero. The effect of temperature is taken into account in molecular dynamics, which consists of solving the equations of motion that are represented in Eq.( 7 ), or equivalently, in Eq.( 8 ). Yet another type of calculation that is frequently used in conjunction with forcefields is the Monte Carlo method. This is a statistical approach, whereby the equilibrium properties of molecules, which correspond to ensemble averages, can be computed by sampling the conformational space. The relative importance of a random change in molecular geometry is commonly determined by the criterion proposed by Metropolis et al. [18]."}
{"id": "molecularlevelde6275nyde", "title": "The molecular level design of fire retardants and suppressants", "year": 1999, "seq": 4, "text": "Periodic display of the model polypropylene/graphite nanocomposite. retained their shape longer than the polymers in the non-interacting mixtures with the same densities. The most obvious difference was that the fragments generated by the degradation of the model polymer in the nanocomposites had a pronounced tendency to collide with the graphite and bounce back into the central unit cell where they could undergo recombination reactions with other free radical polymer fragments, rather than escape from the melt as combustible fuel. The observation that the thermal stability of the polymer increases when it is intercalated but is not affected by the presence of the graphite when the layers delaminate is consistent with thermogravimetric data that indicate that intercalated nanocomposites are more thermally stable than delaminated nanocomposites [48,49]. Indeed, Gilman et. al. noted that the derivative thermogravimetric (DTG) curves obtained from the delaminated nylon-6/clay nanocomposites are almost identical to the values corresponding to pure nylon-6, whereas the peaks in the DTG of intercalated polystyrene/clay nanocomposites are shifted by 50 from the pure polymer [49]. The fact that the delaminated nylon-6/clay nanocomposites exhibit a reduction in flammability comparable to what is observed for the intercalated nanocomposites, even though the DTG results indicate that polymers are not stabilized when present in delaminated nanocomposites, suggests the possibility that the clay layers reorganize after some of the polymer is gasified. That is, the nanocomposite undergoes a phase change from a delaminated to an intercalated structure as a result of the change in composition brought 25 about by the thermal degradation of the polymer. Once the intercalated nanocomposite is formed, it is stabilized by the mechanism discussed in the preceding paragraphs. This hypothesis is supported by transmission electron microscopy (TEM) of the char that remained after burning samples of the delaminated nylon-6/clay nanocomposites under a thermal flux of 35 kW/m^ on the cone calorimeter."}
{"id": "molecularlevelde6275nyde", "title": "The molecular level design of fire retardants and suppressants", "year": 1999, "seq": 5, "text": "The TEM images clearly reveal an organized layered structure that was not present prior to combustion [48,49]. Time Averaged Rate of Mass Loss distance between graphite layers (nm) Figure 11. The average rates of mass loss from the nanocomposites (open circles) and non-interacting mixtures (closed circles) of the polymer and graphite as a function of the distance between the graphite sheets. 3,2d Bromine- Containing Fire Retardant Additives A series of computer simulations were performed on polypropylene in the presence of some representative bromine-containing fire retardants. These included an aromatic compound, decabromobiphenyl, and two aliphatic hydrocarbons, tetrabromoethylene and a vinyl bromide oligomer. The purpose of this study was to make a qualitative comparison of the thermal degradation products and, thereby, to gain further insights into the nature of the mechanisms by which these additives affect a reduction in the flammability of the polymer. The procedures followed in this study were the same as described above in the 26 case of the silica gel additives, except that all of the degrees of freedom, including the atoms that comprised the additives, were dynamic. Bromine, in the form of Br, Br2, and small gas phase hydrocarbons, was released early in the simulations. These products are apparent in Figure 12, which is a still frame from the simulated thermal degradation of a polypropylene blend containing both decabrombiphenyl and vinyl bromide oligomer. Additional simulations performed on the additives in the absence of the polymer indicated that Br2, as opposed to HBr, is a major product of the thermal degradation of both decabromobiphenyl and tetrabromoethylene. This is in sharp contrast to what we observed in the simulated thermal degradation of the vinyl bromide oligomers. In this case, which should be representative of the general class of alkyl bromides, the major products were monomer and HBr. Large amounts of atomic Br were also released, but the formation of molecular Br in the form of Br2 was not observed."}
{"id": "ACURRICULUMRESOURCEMODELFO", "title": "Crist - A CURRICULUM RESOURCE MODEL FO", "year": 1978, "seq": 0, "text": "V ABSTRACT The basic thrust of the Professional Project is to provide a resource model for junior high camping in which the major theme is Paul\u2019s concept of the church as the body of Christ. The first chapter deals with the particular perspective from which I write and concerns how one becomes Christian and the nature of conversion. Also in this section is a delineation of the developmental tasks of junior highs in the areas of biological changes, psychological and social tasks and cognitive development. The overall concern is the transitory nature of junior highs. In Chapter II, I characterize the junior high person as a searcher. Their main task both developmentally and in the church as the body of Christ is to search. The adult role in relation to junior highs is to facilitate their search. The framework that I have developed in understanding Paul's concept of the church as the body of Christ is this: that Paul's un\u00ac derstanding is rooted in the Gospel, i.e. the kerygma. The Gospel can be appropriately appreciated in the categories of incarnation, cruci\u00ac fixion, and resurrection. It is from this point of reference, the Gospel, that Paul develops a sense of being for the church. The cate\u00ac gories of Sacrament, Celebration, and Teaching all instruct us in an understanding of the body of Christ as the church. This particular section was designed for counselors of junior high camp. This is not a curricular resource, but a resource for counselors. It is intended to provide information to help mature and develop their vision of the Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. church as the body of Christ. Then with their own individualized and unique resources they can transmit and translate their own vision which has been developed and matured."}
{"id": "ACURRICULUMRESOURCEMODELFO", "title": "Crist - A CURRICULUM RESOURCE MODEL FO", "year": 1978, "seq": 1, "text": "Do we participate in it? The message of Christianity is not Christianity, but a New Reality. A New State of Things has appeared, it still appears; it is hidden and visible, it is there and it is here. Accept it, enter into it, let it grasp you. 8 Experience informed by data in the process of nurture has the poten\u00ac tial for bringing about integration or conversion. This is the basic foundation from which I develop curricula. Junior High Development Now that I have briefly placed myself in theological perspec\u00ac tive, I think it is important that I share with you where junior highs ^Ibid., p. 102. ^Tillich, p. 24. Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 7 are in light of recent scholarship. These young teenagers are in a period of transition; they are developing a new awareness of their body and its function, new modes of social behavior, experiencing psychological development, new cognitive understanding and new cate\u00ac gories for faith. Rather than understand this time of transition as abnormal, young teenagers need to be treated as normal humans going through normal periods in their life. Because junior high youths are moving so rapidly from stage to stage in their development, they need the support, encouragement, and sensitive guidance of adults who won't panic when things be\u00ac come confusing or disorganized .... Junior highs respond best when adults treat them as persons undergoing normal growth and development \"Normal growth and development\" is different for each and every person, including junior highs. But there have been such per\u00ac sons as Erikson, Piaget, Goldman, Kohlberg, and Fowler who have tried to help us understand \"Normal growth and development\" in more meaning\u00ac ful categories. Each of these persons has delineated a developmental scale which persons travel through during their journey of growth."}
{"id": "ACURRICULUMRESOURCEMODELFO", "title": "Crist - A CURRICULUM RESOURCE MODEL FO", "year": 1978, "seq": 2, "text": "Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 18 period of transition in their physical, psychological, social and cognitive development. In each area they are going through some very specific changes. These areas have been researched and in each case the crisis of identity is at the root of the change. Up to this point in their lives the main portion of their identity has come from others. Parents, extended family, other children, and to some extent the media have all placed upon them their own contrived sense of identity, what they would like junior highs to be. As they begin adolescence, the picture is changed. They begin to look at adults as models. In ad\u00ac olescence they begin to take the initiative. They become imitators of adult models in search of their own unique identity. \"They are some\u00ac times morbidly, often curiously, preoccupied with what they appear to be in the eyes of others.\" It is in the midst of these changes, physical, psychological, social and cognitive and their transitori\u00ac ness, that they are searching for someone or something to be true to, to have faith in. Erikson terms this fidelity. As to youth and the question of what is in the center of its most passionate and most erratic striving, I have concluded that fi\u00ac delity is the vital strength which it needs to have an opportunity to develop, to employ, to evoke\u2014and to die for.^ Fidelity is at the core of adolescents' being. It provides the ego strength necessary to traverse this period in their lives. They are searching but in their search they need a base to come back As we have indicated, fidelity is that virtue and quality of adolescent ego strength which belongs to man's evolutionary 'Ibid., p. 128. f Ibid., p. 255."}
{"id": "ACURRICULUMRESOURCEMODELFO", "title": "Crist - A CURRICULUM RESOURCE MODEL FO", "year": 1978, "seq": 3, "text": "Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 30 The essential character of the kerygma, as I understand it, is Jesus Christ through whom God has acted for our redemption, and who was a person who lived in the midst of history to give all of his\u00ac tory meaning and purpose. And we can find this in the proclamation of church. The fact that the kerygma is as simple as Jesus Christ adds difficulty to the problem of understanding it in any systematic or logical manner. This particular schemata that I offer is tentative at best, and I heed Barclay's advice when he states: In the highest possible sense, and not in any time-serving sense, Paul's theology was an adaptable theology. It was always deepen\u00ac ing and developing and widening to meet the new situations which the life of the growing Church brought to him. That is why it is not possible to make a neat pattern of Paul's thinking about Je\u00ac sus, for as the years went on Jesus became ever more wonderful to Paul.15 In the kerygma or myth I think we have the foundation from which Paul understands the body of Christ as the church. The kerygma has as basic elements the death (which includes life), burial and res\u00ac urrection of Jesus the Christ. It is from this understanding of kerygma that Sacrament, Celebration, and Teaching can be understood. From the kerygma comes the need to re-present these events, the death, burial, resurrection, of Christ's life (Sacrament) and from this comes the need to concretize these events in worship that all can partici\u00ac pate in. Finally, as a result of Kerygma, Sacrament, and Worship, we find the necessity to tell of our experience (Teaching). 15 Ibid., p. 55. Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner."}
{"id": "ACURRICULUMRESOURCEMODELFO", "title": "Crist - A CURRICULUM RESOURCE MODEL FO", "year": 1978, "seq": 4, "text": "Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 32 18 means, for the purpose of this discussion sacrament is understood as essential events in Christ's life, which are re-presented in the con\u00ac text of a worship experience. This helps us to see that the gospel, the word of God, is not to be identified with a particular set of sermons; the word of God is the act of God, re-enacted in the worshiping life of the church. Baptism, like the Lord's Supper, is also a dramatic event of salvation, through it the Christian is united with the death and resurrection of Christ, and to the observer, this ancient ritual of immersion in water was a representation of the Christ who was crucified, buried, and raised (Romans 6:3-11).^ Baptism . Baptism as a re-presentation is a sacrament. I think that Paul, in discussing baptism with his contemporaries made the assumption that this act was not something they were unfamiliar with. The act of baptism was not something he concocted himself. At the very least he was relying on the baptism of Jesus by John, if not other historical traditions. And since the kerygma is based on the person Jesus the Christ, the act of Jesus' baptism is also very im\u00ac portant for our consideration. \"The Christian rite was a distinctive one by reason of its connection with the kerygma.\"^ He [Paul] was no inventor, but displayed in many ways a depen\u00ac dence upon the teaching which earlier Christian preachers had delivered to the members of the Churches to which he wrote (Romans 6:17) (Romans 6:8). He assumes that baptism for them all without apparent exception will be a familiar Church practice and experi\u00ac ence .... At least this fact is common to both writer and 18 \"There is a dispute as to whether the word 'sacrament' can be used at all to describe the significance of baptism and eucharist in Paul . . . .\" Hans Conzelmann, An Outline of the Theology of the New Testament (New York: Harper $ Row, 1969), p. 269. \u2022^Baird, Paul's, p. 91. 20price, p. 154."}
{"id": "ACURRICULUMRESOURCEMODELFO", "title": "Crist - A CURRICULUM RESOURCE MODEL FO", "year": 1978, "seq": 5, "text": "Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 35 not a concept that those to whom Paul was writing were unfamiliar. Secondly, Paul is not an innovator, but developed and matured the whole concept of the Lord's Supper. Third, the Lord's Supper was a very significant and distinctive event in the life of Christ; and with its re-presentation in the context of worship, it takes on a sac\u00ac ramental character as I have described it. Past, present, and future are thus gathered up in one sacred and joyful festival of the Lord's Table in the Apostolic practice and teaching. Indeed, in this Sacrament the whole of what one re\u00ac ligion means is expressed; for one Lord Jesus Christ, incarnate, atoning and triumphant, is the sum and substance of it all.26 There is a school of thought that interprets the Lord's Supper as parallel to the Passover meal. Paul seems to have in view the purpose of the bread and wine as signifying to the Christian what the Passover dishes mean to the Jew. As we have seen, we are to understand the latter as the means by which the Jew is taken back in dynamic fashion and made to relive the experience of his forbears in the land of Egypt. By the same token, the Christian is to look upon the elements as taking him back to the scenes of his redemption, as leading him to receive again the benefits of his Lord's passion, and as rep\u00ac resenting his response to that love which bore the Cross.^ This is a beautiful and logical way to understand the Lord's Supper. The historical illusions would provide many opportunities for extrapo\u00ac lation. But the end result would leave us with a real sense of in\u00ac completeness. I think Paul may very well have had this in the back of his mind when writing to the Corinthians."}
{"id": "ACURRICULUMRESOURCEMODELFO", "title": "Crist - A CURRICULUM RESOURCE MODEL FO", "year": 1978, "seq": 6, "text": "As I stated earlier, this is a starting point. I think Paul matured and developed this understanding by pointing beyond sacrifice to participation. Hans Conzelmann believes that those who eat of the bread and drink of the cup become part of the body of Christ, with the body of Christ identified as the church. 31 Conzelmann, Commentary , p. 172. \u2022^Ridderbos, p. 417. Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 38 Paul takes up the notion of Bread/Body, because he has the thought of the body of Christ in mind. \"Body\" as a designation of the church is not meant figuratively, but in the proper sense: the church is not \"like\" a body, but is \"the\" body of Christ. The sacramental participation in Christ's body makes us into the body of Christ. The unity that comes by celebrating in the participation of the Lord's Supper is felt in two arenas, first with Jesus the Christ and second with our fellow man. And once we have made this commitment it can be made no where else. In the Supper, therefore, the foundations of the Church are laid bare. The Supper is no personal affair between the individual believer and Christ. It is the covenant meal, the congregational meal par excellence . And it points to the sacrifice made by Christ, the reconciliation that has taken place in his blood, as the only ground of this communion between God and his people and of the unity of the Church. Only in the eating of the body then understood and in the drinking of this cup representing the recon\u00ac ciling power of his blood is the church one. In that sense, therefore, the Supper is the foundation and criterion for the unity of the Church as the new people of God.34 In summary then we see that in baptism and participation in the Lord\u2019s Supper we commit ourselves to, become part of, and feel at one with, the body of Christ understood as the church."}
{"id": "ACURRICULUMRESOURCEMODELFO", "title": "Crist - A CURRICULUM RESOURCE MODEL FO", "year": 1978, "seq": 7, "text": "Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 43 nature, the church as the body of Christ is ever-changing. Paul's un\u00ac derstanding was a dynamic, creative approach which by necessity called for adaptability. There is within everyone that particular understand- ing of the church as the body of Christ which is unique. Therefore, this particular framework, as I have chosen to develop, is in reality unique to me; but if it helps anyone else to understand the church as the body of Christ, then praise be to God who through Jesus Christ makes us one in the Spirit. 2. As I stated earlier, I think there is a logical progres\u00ac sion of thought in this framework that may give us a glimpse at the whole. Each particular step, the Gospel, Sacrament, Celebration, and Teaching, if viewed by itself would lend little to the enrichment of thought concerning the body of Christ as the church. After investi\u00ac gation of each component, considering it in light of the previous one and the one to follow, we can begin to build a vision, which is greater that all of its parts. It points us in a direction of excitement. It inspires us to a vision of the church which is beyond that which we already have. One of the reasons for Paul's adaptable theology, the need to understand what he is doing as developing and maturing, is that he had a vision and found it hard to express in terms that all might understand and still do justice to it. 3. Finally, this vision needs to be shared. The whole pur\u00ac pose of doing this particular project is to share it, specifically with junior highs. The material in Chapter 1 dealt with junior high development. The material in Chatper 2 dealt with junior highs and the body of Christ."}
{"id": "ACURRICULUMRESOURCEMODELFO", "title": "Crist - A CURRICULUM RESOURCE MODEL FO", "year": 1978, "seq": 8, "text": "In many regions and districts the particular camp site is predetermined by ownership. If this is the case, then the only al\u00ac ternative is to work with what is available and maximize the possibil\u00ac ities. If there is an opportunity for choice, there are several as\u00ac pects to consider. First, the anticipated number of participants needs to be known as this will be a determining factor. Along this same line will be the anticipated cost both for the participant and the use of the camp, plus subsidizing, if any. Assuming that the camp is based on small groups, based on our investigations into the nature of junior highs, the next major con\u00ac sideration is the actual physical setting and arrangement of the camp. Does the camp setting lend itself to a greater appreciation of the outdoors? Is there sufficient opportunity to experience God's cre\u00ac ation? Is the camp arranged so that the total group will have space Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 55 to work, play and worship together? Are the dining facilities such that groups may eat together? These are just a few questions to help understand the nature of the task in choosing and utilizing a site. In light of the material to be used, there is one more important ques\u00ac tion of site that must be asked. Does the camp aesthetically and physically lend itself to a sense of feeling like the church as the body of Christ? Planning camp then is a critical issue, one that deserves a lot of time and care. Camps that are well planned demonstrate it by providing an experience that is meaningful for those who attend. Camp During the planning stages of a camp the concern of schedule will have to be dealt with in a meaningful way."}
{"id": "ACURRICULUMRESOURCEMODELFO", "title": "Crist - A CURRICULUM RESOURCE MODEL FO", "year": 1978, "seq": 9, "text": "Every camp will have a different scheduling pattern. There are, however, general considerations that need to be understood. Every camp will have a predetermined get-up and go-to-bed time, meals will be the same, there will be time for small group study, time for recreation, time for rest, time for devotions, time for worship, time for crafts, time for the total group, and time to be free. These will be a part of all camps in some fashion. As you may notice these par\u00ac ticular events all revolve around a group. It is important that we have at least a basic understanding of the types of groups that are evident in a camp setting. There are essentially four types of groups in a camp setting: Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 56 the total group, the primary group, the secondary group, and the spontaneous group. Examples of these groups would be: total group-- organized evening recreation; primary group\u2014the small group everyone is assigned to; secondary group--a volleyball team; and finally the spontaneous group\u2014the friendships that develop apart from any organ\u00ac ized activity. These groupings are an indispensable part of any camp. There\u00ac fore in light of scheduling, there are certain questions that must be asked about each of these groups if they are to be effective. In the final analysis these groups will provide a barometer for the camp ex\u00ac perience. The questions to be asked of groups are these: What is the purpose of this group? What kind of action does it represent? What skills are needed to make this group happen? An important part of the scheduling process is the consider\u00ac ation of these groups. The process of scheduling is primarily the scheduling of particular groups at particular times."}
{"id": "providence-rule-book", "title": "Providence Rule Book", "year": 1997, "seq": 0, "text": "She would have welcomed his advice in recent years when she desperately needed his counsel. It was her only regret. Behind the closed doors of her chambers, Caiylus was simply that, Caiylus. Here she was not the leader of the Alliance of Kings. Here she could be whomever she wished, Caiylus the woman, Caiylus the philosopher, Caiylus the warrior, Caiylus the little girl) who missed her more innocent beginnings. Her symbol of rule, the crown of regency, was not set upon her black hair, but rested lightly in her hands. The weight of Providence seemed trapped in that frail bauble; removing it did much to ease her heart and soul. As she held the thin crown, she twirled it lightly between her fingers, treating the symbol of her station with frivolous disrespect. It was a nervous habit, indicative of her current mood, If that habit had been known, however, it would have scandalized the royal courts. Regent Caiylus was a woman of noble bearing. She looked like a strong mother, one who stood firm against the onslaught of years, but someone whose sad but kind eyes revealed the wisdom that came with age. Her black hair seemed all the darker for the faint wisps of white that ran their course down her braided tresses. Her white wings, decorated with coloured string and precious stones, added to her noble demeanour. Nobody could accuse her of weakness. Caiylus was of Troupial Eagle, a race of warriors. Those who were not strong in combat were still resolute in ~. spirit or commanding with words. She was all three. Despite the magnificent view that graced her eyes, Caiylus was lost in her memories, trying not to think of She stood upon a railed marble platform that extended over the spire city of Cliff-Spider. The balcony easily dwarfed most of the homes dotting the distant landscape below."}
{"id": "providence-rule-book", "title": "Providence Rule Book", "year": 1997, "seq": 1, "text": "Her chamber was at least half a mile above the surrounding countryside, offering her a perfect vantage point to view the rest of the world. Providence is trapped inside a bubble world which is surrounded by rock. This does not stop the lush verdant jungles and crystal blue lakes from spreading across its interior. There are four towers of rock, one of which contains the city of Cliff-Spider. These immense arches extend for hundreds of miles and touch the stone and jungle sky like remote fingers. One spire, the Great Bridge, rises to the very centre of the sky, piercing the sun. Legends claim that the Great Bridge anchors the sun to the world. How the sun came to be here, in this hollow sphere, is the source of legends that do not seem to trouble the small orb of light and heat. It faithfully pulses through cycles of night and day, waning to dusk, waxing to dawn. Caiylus continued to watch the jungle, wondering how many eyes stared back at her. When her race first came through the gates to this world nearly two thousand years ago, they did not know that other races made their homes here. Eventually, they discovered each of the four races they called the Lost Tribes. First were the Swarm Dancers, a tribe of insect-like humanoids. The Swarm Dancers possessed a hive-like mentality that often made them alien even to the other Lost Tribes. They were allied with the Alliance of Kings, but nobody knew how long that would last. Next were the Serpenkine, reptilian humanoids who had split on whether to help the Alliance of Kings or to destroy them.The third tribe was the Green People, a race in symbiotic harmony with the plant life of Providence. They were completely belligerent to Caiylus\u2019 people."}
{"id": "providence-rule-book", "title": "Providence Rule Book", "year": 1997, "seq": 2, "text": "Elevated a hundred feet, it was here that the king made proclamations to his subjects. Standards bearing the coat of arms for the Alliance of Kings, the city state of Cliff-Spider and her ruling household all waved gently in the breeze. Set into the balcony\u2019s white marble surface was a throne upon which King Raldowin IV sat when he came to hear public grievances. The platform could only be reached through - flight or by gliding, meaning the upper castes alone could reach the ears of the king. The flightless Fallen, the lowest members of society, were denied the privilege. Such, however, were the inadequacies of the rigid caste system within the Alliance of Kings. When the stage was empty, as it was now, the surrounding area was normally tranquil. That was not true this evening. Tens-of-thousands of spectators waiting for the appearance of Regent Caiylus, filled the ground and air. Upon a great field at the base of the spire, a sea of people stood in anticipation. In the air, all manner of citizens flew or glided on wings of feather or leathery membranes. The sharply dressed and diplomatic Dragons, heavy in flight, only launched themselves when necessary. A few people tried to upset their rigid sense of decorum by grabbing their spiked tails as they took to the air.A sharp snap with their tails, however, deterred more than one troublemaker. The impressive Eagles, powerful in stature and every bit the solemn knights, remained standing on the lips of the surrounding platforms overlooking the Stage of Kings. They did not consider it dignified to flitter about aimlessly, and remained at attention until Regent Caiylus appeared. The jovial and stocky Doves, however, loved flying too much to miss any opportunity to do so. Those with wings screamed through the air, completing aerial stunts which the streamlined Hawks generally did slightly better."}
{"id": "providence-rule-book", "title": "Providence Rule Book", "year": 1997, "seq": 3, "text": "Within the crowds, members of the other Troupials waited patiently, Those with blackened eyes were members of Troupial Jackal. They believed in usurping the unfair caste system, and were quite vocal about it. The entire Troupial had been branded as dangerous when a faction of the group took to terrorism.Another Troupial believed in its own inferiority, and supported the caste system. Known as Hyenas, they had no real affiliation with one another.A third group, the almost childlike Rats, earned some respect due to their \u201csiblings.\u201d Any member of Dragon born without a means of flight was placed in this Troupial. Rather than casting their Fallen by the wayside as Eagle and Hawk had done, the diplomatic Dragons watched over their brethren and supported them openly. The only group not present in any numbers were the reclusive Bats. Similar to Dragons but born with glider membranes, the Bats were sensitive to noise and generally distrustful of those who were not Rat, Dragon or of their own Troupial. Their absence from this gathering was hardly surprising. Tonight, all the differences that separated Troupials and Castes seemed lessened by the importance of what was to come. Regent Caiylus had called a general assembly, to share with the citizens of the Alliance what she had called \u201can important matter\u2019\u2019 Despite the multitude of people tonight, many shared the same worries and fears.A time of great reckoning was coming, one sure to change the face of society. For some, this meant the herald of something good, for the status quo offered them little. For others, they suspected that after tonight their comfortable lives would never be the same. Many tried to drown their anticipation through chatter and gossip, lending the gathering a festive POP WR WC A, peat atmosphere. It only served to fill the air with noise and more tension."}
{"id": "providence-rule-book", "title": "Providence Rule Book", "year": 1997, "seq": 4, "text": "The cacophony faded to silence as a sharp chime rang from an unknown source. It reverberated through the ground, instantly quietening everyone. The rock wall behind the Stage of Kings melted, revealing a large open arch.A pair of Hawk knights stepped through in slow, but uniform cadence. Five pairs of knights followed them bearing long thin air lances. The articulated resin sections that sheathed their wings were much like the amber coloured armour covering their bodies. Resin was far lighter than metal, and the magic of Wird made it just as strong. The knights walked to the edge of the platform and stood at attention. A thunderous ovation greeted King Raldowin IV and Regent Caiylus as they came through the archway. Eagles flared their wings, Dragons, Ravens and Doves bowed, Hawks and Swans kneeled, Gargoyles pushed a few people around, and the Jackals and Rats did their best to look uninterested, Despite their reaction, everyone stared at Regent Caiylus with respect. She demanded attention due to her position, her presence and her being a noted Wylder, a practitioner of a very impressive and potent form of magic. Few could challenge her in a duel and win. Caiylus allowed the roar to subside as she came to the edge of the platform. Staring at the gathering, she realized that even using her peripheral vision, the crowd below her balcony was too large to see all at once. She had to sweep her gaze across the collage of colour to capture the enormity of this panoramic view. A mixture of admiration, apprehension and respect was relayed back in the few faces she could discern. The overwhelming sense of responsibility almost caused her to falter, but she gathered strength from what she saw and went on. \u201cChildren of a failed rebellion,\u201d Caiylus began."}
{"id": "providence-rule-book", "title": "Providence Rule Book", "year": 1997, "seq": 5, "text": "Caiylus brought him close to her, and immediately noticed he had no wings; he was Fallen. The crowd went silent, waiting to see how the regent would treat the old Dove. Something within the eyes of the old man touched Caiylus deeply. It was a sense of vulnerability and fear she knew she, as a ruler, could dispel. Caiylus cupped her hand below the Dove's chin and smiled sadly. \u201cWe leave here together, father. We leave here together.\u201d She returned him to the ground as gently as she had lifted him, then floated higher into the air. \u201cAllay your fears,\u201d Caiylus cried out to the crowd.\" will leave nobody behind. We will leave this place together. For that purpose, | have summoned the Guilds.\u201d As she spun in the air to face the spire, four immense platforms emerged from it. As the new balconies formed across the rock face, archways appeared in the walls. The announcement of the Guilds silenced everyone. It was born from a mixture of fear and respect. While Fallen, Winged and Gliders represented the major strata of the caste system, there were smaller sub-tiers, like the Guilds. They consisted of Shards, people blessed with innate \u201cOne-Spell\u201d abilities similar to the magic of Wird, The Alliance created a special tier for them, placing Shards under the immediate supervision of the royal castes. Initially known as Gifted, they eventually gathered around Guilds to improve their standing within the royal courts of Providence. Although they were a minor segment of the population, their political and financial powers were unprecedented. The ones who appeared upon the balconies were from the strongest of the Guilds. The first to march out were twelve members of the Guild of Archers, their right shoulders covered with red cloth bearing their coat of arms."}
{"id": "providence-rule-book", "title": "Providence Rule Book", "year": 1997, "seq": 6, "text": "The Drummers had once again made an entrance. The Drummers were the most powerful Alliance Guild in all factors. They were the richest and most influential, the populace loved them, and they were closer to a knightly order than many royal guards. Renowned for placing candidates through a gruelling enlistment process, they accepted only the strongest and most honourable Shards. Their ranks consisted of those blessed with super strength and endurance, courage and nobility. The Drummers earned their name heralding the arrival of Alliance armies by beating the ground with their fists. They were heard from miles away. Another of their distinctive features was the massive war-hammer each carried. Popular folklore had it that the strongest Drummer could crack the very air with a swing of his weapon. Regent Caiylus watched as twenty-one Drummers marched up the avenue created by the splitting crowd. At the head of the Drummers was Guild Mistress Jeba Sunfierce, a female Hawk glider with a solid frame. The Drummers marched to her tempo, stamping their feet into the ground in time with one another. Every few steps or so, they all dropped to one knee and swung their hammer out and to the side, striking the ground to emphasize a particular note. They left scores of impact crates in their wake, and more than one unbalanced onlooker on their rear end. Regent Caiylus smiled at this display. Everyone knew fully well she would not have accepted this behaviour from any other Guild, but the Drummers had proven their value too often. In the war to come, the Alliance knew it could never truly lose, for among the bodies of the slain and the sea of rubble that were once cities, the Drummers would still be standing, fighting till old age claimed their spirits, Regent Caiylus knew this as she settled closer to the ground."}
{"id": "providence-rule-book", "title": "Providence Rule Book", "year": 1997, "seq": 7, "text": "ACT Il Deep within the spire heart of Cliff-Spider was the Regent's Hall, Each city in the Alliance of Kings had one such chamber for entertaining the visiting regent. Because Caiylus had to represent everyone without any hint of favouritism, she essentially had no city to call her own. She was a citizen of all member-states and required to live in each Alliance domain for equal time. Cliff-Spider\u2019s hall, second to Water-Sister in beauty, was a circular chamber two hundred feet in diameter. The domed ceiling glictered with mosaics of reflective glass. Light spells were always cast before meetings, creating a dazzling display of colours along the surface of the roof. It glittered like a million gems. With walls of darkest obsidian, the chamber contained dark-green marble columns and statues of former Alliance regents in its alcoves. A sheet of green marble sealed away one alcove from public scrutiny. It belonged to the traitor Jenobay, the Eagle regent who ruled before Caiylus; few spoke of him in casual conversation. It was discovered that Jenobay had secretly been a Blight Crow, a corrupt Distinction of Wird [) Hero's Prolowue ss practitioner who uses necromancy. During his execution, when one wing had already been sheared away, he escaped with the help of the White Crow. He had not been found since, much to the embarrassment of the Alliance. The floor of the Regent's Hall was a lighter sea-green marble engraved with the Alliance\u2019s coat of arms. Light spells gave the illusion that the engraving was liquid gold. When the Regent held private meetings with other Alliance rulers, the crest and the marble rose to form a large circular table and four chairs. The Regent's throne, elevated on a platform stage, was the only piece of the furniture within the room used during general assemblies."}
{"id": "providence-rule-book", "title": "Providence Rule Book", "year": 1997, "seq": 8, "text": "Such was the case tonight. Having just concluded her petition to the populace, Caiylus retired to the Regent's Hall to receive the numerous guests not belonging to the Guilds. Standing upon the stage, to the left of Caiylus\u2019 throne, were King Raldowin IV and Watcher Preventine of Water-Sister. Both Preventine and Caiylus were strong willed individuals who had clashed on several occasions over the caste system.Watcher Preventine, a female Dove strongly versed in the arts of Wird as a Wird Weaver, believed the caste system was unjust. Regent Caiylus did not support all the animosity it engendered against the Fallen, but believed the system was necessary to maintain the purity of the winged nobility. While they disagreed with one another, and perhaps even resented each other, neither openly challenged the other person. To the right of Regent Caiylus was King Gunther of Cry-Star, the prime city of the Alliance. Gunther, an Eagle and former friend to Caiylus, had little to say to her tonight. Some suspected Gunther was upset over Caiylus' treatment of Guild Mistress Melisrian of the Chirurgeons, his personal physician and reputed lover. His behaviour seemed proof of that. With Regent Caiylus holding open forum, members of the royal courts filled the hall. Many made their introductions to the regent and rulers present, then swiftly made their way off the stage. Several lingered to offer their support. A few made enough of an impression to stop the conversation within the hall. One couple captured everyone's attention from the moment they entered, right up to the point of their departure. Regent Caiylus had been expecting them, and warned the guards not to stop them or confiscate their weapons. The first was a D\u2019Shau Monk named Brother Allovin, a glider of Raven stock without the dark robes or ~ white tattoos that one would expect of his Troupial."}
{"id": "providence-rule-book", "title": "Providence Rule Book", "year": 1997, "seq": 9, "text": "They bowed again and left the stage, allowing the next batch of visitors to come forward. The heralds continued to announce more visitors as they entered the rapidly filling hall. Caiylus knew it was going to be a long night. EPILOGUE It was late in the evening when the heralds announced that the regent would no longer be receiving anyone. The royal court bid Regent Caiylus a final farewell as she retired from the festivities, her smile growing harder to maintain. After parting company with Raldowin at her chamber door, and dismissing the guards, she was back upon her balcony, watching the landscape below burn with encampment fires. Caiylus\u2019 feet ached, her body was stiff, her mind clouded by the events of the day, but still, she could not bring herself to sleep. Closing her eyes did not bring her the solitude she expected. The impression of thousands of people and colours remained with her, their chants trapped within the confines of her skull. So she remained awake, watching the landscape and hoping that the wind would blow away the ghosts of the day still nestled in her head. Something within the air, however, gave her pause. Looking around the balcony, Regent Caiylus realized she was not alone. Hesitation between calling for her guards or unleashing a Light spell to illuminate the darkness was all the intruder needed to make his presence known. A man faded into view, floating in the air above the balcony. He was a Dragon with metal sheathing his tail. His wings were stonelike and marked with eldritch sigils; his eyes glowed like two torches. Form-fitting crystal armour covered his body, and a thin knife-like smile stretched across his cold face. He appeared to be alone, but Regent Caiylus knew better; she could sense others around her as well."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1991-11-07", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1991-11-07 : Volume 90, Issue 8", "year": 1991, "seq": 0, "text": "He has been on an unpaid leave of absence as a tenured professor since he resigned last year. In May he pleaded guilty to using his position to earn- $25,000 in extra compensation. Governor Carroll Campbell has called for an investigation into the re\u00ac cent allegations, and the current presi\u00ac dent of the university plans to begin proceedings to revoke Holderman\u2019s tenure as soon as possible. New classes on video questioned at MSU Seven thousand students at Michi\u00ac gan Slate U. in Eist Lansing are pro\u00ac testing a required course that is taught by television, rather thanliveppifesson. The students view the concept of the data as \"assembly line education.\" The class, entitled \u201cThe United States and the World,\" will be led by graduate students and will feature vid- aos (ram over 30 faculty members mores. The students opposing die course signed a petition and deliver edit to the Academic Council on October 1, but the council approved the class the fol\u00ac lowing week. Ben Emory, the president of Stu\u00ac dents for Quality Education at MSU, said he feels like students are being . \u201cIf we pay fell tuition, we have a right to a professor. This class has no student-to-faculty contact. You sit there, watch videos and absorb knowledge. This is supposed to be education after all, not a video rental,\" he said. Emory promised more grassroots activism, including a potential class boycott. Is the National Lampoon real? New York University and its Jfatorfrateraity Council are investigat\u00ac ing the campus chapter of Phi Gimrai Delta because members of the frater\u00ac nity posed for National Lampoon pho\u00ac tographs depicting violent and sexual pledge hazing. The articfemwhkh the photographs appear is entitled \u201cDumb Fraternity Games: Acted out by Authentic Dumb Frat Guys,\" and provoked a great deal of comment on campuses everywhere after the humor magazine went on sale in mid-September."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1991-11-07", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1991-11-07 : Volume 90, Issue 8", "year": 1991, "seq": 1, "text": "More people should take themselves less seriously.\u201d UC Berkeley struggles in aftermath of massive brush fire The recent brash fire outside of San Francisco, CA burned more than 3,400 houses and apartment buildings, in\u00ac cluding the homes of faculty members, staff and administrators from several area colleges. Berkeley's campus was the closest to the fire; the blaze reportedly came within a half mile of the campus, prompting the evacuation of four fa\u00ac cilities, student residence halls, and 18 fraternity and sorority houses on the edge of campus. About 168 faculty members and administrators at Berkeley lost their houses, and an estimated 300 students who live off-campus were also left homeless. In loud, 23 people were killed, and two are still missing in the aftermath of die worst brash fire in California his\u00ac tory. One Berkeley student is believed to have died. Sources: The of HigKor tvtm-thwi lW National GoBage Newspaper The Naricnel Stndear News Service TheNew YoricThnss By Peter Walsh The Middlebury College faculty voted Monday afternoon in favor of the Revised Motion of the Committee on Sexual Harassment but some faculty members expressed concern with some of the.,definitions of harassment in\u00ac cluded in the report. The endorsed motion states that, \u201cthe Faculty of Middlebury College accepts die Report of die Sexual Ha\u00ac rassment Committee\u201d and goes on to endorse in particular four principles. The first principle is a recommen\u00ac dation that the College adopt a general policy concerning harassment, which addresses sexual harassment as well as racial, ethnic, rel igious and other forms of harrassmen. The statement goes on to recom\u00ac mend that this policy and its procedure should be college-wide. The statement also endorses the creation of a college-wide program to promote education with respect to ha\u00ac rassment. This program would be up for review in three years."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1991-11-07", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1991-11-07 : Volume 90, Issue 8", "year": 1991, "seq": 2, "text": "Bell said that she thought the boy came from a good family, and said Beck / loved and cared for him greatly. When Becky discovered that she was pregnant after visiting the Planned Parenthood Center, she confronted her boy friend with the news. She had hoped that he would be accepting and even\u00ac tually marry her. According to Bell, when Becky told her boy friend that she was pregnant, he said, \u201cjust get the hell out of my life, I don\u2019t want to see you anymore.\u201d Becky returned to Planned Parenthood to get an abortion. When she discovered that she needed parental consent or a judge\u2019s approval, Becky decided to find other means to have an abortion. One evening, Becky told her parents that she wanted to go to a party on the south side of Indianapolis on the fol\u00ac io wing Saturday night, in order to spend time with a friend in need. Although Bell said she was initially apprehensive about allowing Becky to go to a party which was located in what she called a bad neighborhood, she agreed to let her go. Becky returned home around 1:00 am, but she had not gone to a party. Instead, Becky had gotten an illegal. back-alley abortion. The next day, Becky went to work as a cashier at a food store. The day after, Becky went to school, but later in die afternoon developed a fever. Al\u00ac though Becky was burning up, she claimed only to have the flu, and begged her mom not to call the doctor. Bell said dial she had no reason to believe her daughter otherwise, as Becky had al\u00ac ways told the truth. During that week, Becky continued to remain home from school. There had been no noticeable symptoms of bleeding or hemorrhaging at this point By Friday, Becky\u2019s condition had not improved, and she agreed to go to the doctor\u2019s office, though she had still not told her parents about the abortion."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1991-11-07", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1991-11-07 : Volume 90, Issue 8", "year": 1991, "seq": 3, "text": "Tolkin deserves no felt no pain when her husband was not love him because she feels that he small amount of applause for trying to killed by a disgruntled employee with has made her suffer incredibly, tackle tough questions of religious be- a shotgun, because she knew that he In all. The Rapture is a thinking lief, especially considering the mtel- was in Heaven. At times I felt I was person\u2019s movie, and despite its flaws lectual level of the topic. The film has being brutally beaten over the head has some very thought-provoking big ideas at the core-a substance, not a with a heavy brick. qualities. It is certainly not a typical veneer-but I felt the points were often The final portion of The Rapture Hollywood effort. The film has a made at the expense of realism. easily redeems the second and poses vision which it portrays concretely. At its center is Sharon, a telephone such difficult philosophical questions and it also takes on the important task operator in L.A. who lives an empty life that it cannot be ignored. Explaining of asking questions instead of simply of robotic work and shallow sexual the decision that Sharon must make at providing pat answers for them. encounters. The sequence of the movie \"ZT \u201c\u2014 --\u2014 is divided into three basic parts: first, Jx6Q vjTOOITlS Sharon is sinful and unhappy, sterile, (Continued from page 11) i explaining the many varieties of let- and seemingly incapable of love. She is photograph by Brassai. Grooms loves tuce and the task it was assembling the unhappy with her life, feels that there artists, and they fill the gallery. Oppo- three dimensional spoof on Salvador must be something more to it, but can\u2019t site from Matisse teems a variegated Dali. Butterflies alight on his hands as seem to find anything."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1991-11-07", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1991-11-07 : Volume 90, Issue 8", "year": 1991, "seq": 4, "text": "Thursday, November 7,1991 The Middlebury Campus SPORTS \u2022Si \\r_ ' r 1 page 13 Costly errors, injuries hobble Panthers\u2019 defense at Colby By Elyse Napolitano The Panther trip to Waterville, Maine proved a disappointing one, as the team fell 31 -16 to the Colby Mules. Although at times Middlebury played well enough to win the game, several mistakes at critical points in the game prevented them from coming out on top. Middlebury was without defensive contributors Dave Middleton \u201994 and KanTanabe *93, who were taken out in the game against Hamilton over Octo\u00ac ber break and remain questionable for . next week\u2019s game. The Panthers missed running back Matt Whitcomb \u201994, also injured in the Hamilton game, who previously led the team in scoring and maintained the highest yards per carry average in the NESCAC. 0 Coach Mickey Heineken stated that. the team displayed outstanding inten\u00ac sity in the game against Colby. How\u00ac ever, the intensity of the team was not enough to compensate for Colby's consistenty, which included the ability to capitalize on Panther slip-ups. Heineken felt that, \u201cWe have shot ourselves in the foot..the Panthers are a frustrated team. We know there is more out there for us.\u201d Middlebury committed six turn\u00ac overs, including a fumble on their second play of the game. The Mules recovered, and two plays later, found an open hole and rushed from the Middlebury 33-yard line for the first touchdown of the game. Middlebury moved the ball well on their next drive, which culminated in Eric Sevigny \u201993 rushing three yards for a retaliatory touchdown. With the score at 7-7, the Panthers seemed to have recovered from their early blun\u00ac der. However, Panther momentum was halted as the Mules intercepted a Dyson pass and completed the drive for an\u00ac other touchdown. Middlebury opened up the second quarter with possession of the ball, but was unable to put together a scoring drive and had to punt away."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1991-11-07", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1991-11-07 : Volume 90, Issue 8", "year": 1991, "seq": 5, "text": "By Adam Gliden with Neall Currie In case you don\u2019t realize it, and you probably don\u2019t, because it isn't very well publicized, the United States will play France in the Davis Cup (that\u2019s tennis) Ryder is golf,-Americas is sail\u00ac ing) finals from November 29th to De\u00ac cember 1st. The, Americans are the defending world champions, and it is even less well publicized that Davis Cup team captain Tom Gorman has not yet chosen his team for the match. Because he has made the mistake of waiting until the last minute to name his players, several American players have become alienated and are ques\u00ac tioning whether they even want to play. Combined with the fact that many of the new wave of young American stars have been reluctant to play DaVis Cup matches in the past, this Alienation could prove fatal in getting a team together to beat France. In other words, if our best guys aren\u2019t going to play because they 're irritated with Gorman, we don\u2019t stand a chance). / The main reason Gorman is waiting it out is that he wantk to see who is playing well and Who isn\u2019t during the last few weeks before the match. France chose to play on a fast indoor surface, and Gorman is planning to choose his team by looking at the resets of the tournaments that are being played right now on similar surfaces. Mis hesitation is a mistake because he has an amaz\u00ac ingly large number of choices. He does not have u) wait until the last minutp, forcing players to change their already booked schedules. The Davis Cup for\u00ac mat calls for two singles players and one doubles team, and Gorman has at least three choices for each position. Although the former #1 ranked team in the world, Rick Leach and Jim Pugh, has split, Gorman could still ask Ken Flach and Robert Seguso, a former Davis Cup doubles team with a stellar record."}
{"id": "montanarailplann6341mont", "title": "Montana rail planning newsletter", "year": 1979, "seq": 0, "text": "Assuming the grain subterminal concept to be feasible, the se- cond phase would develop public support and prepare necessary legislation to bring such terminals into being. A third phase would be to proceed with project planning, preconstruction activities, land acquisition, tariff negotiations, etc. for a pilot grain subter- minal project. The transportation of grain, development and pro- motion of foreign markets, research, and alternate sources of energy were listed as the most important concerns of Montana grain growers in a survey conducted by the Montana Grain Growers Association last October. The unavailability of railroad grain cars (until recently), the relatively slow and unreliable transit times for shipments by rail, the increase in grain movements by truck/barge along with the resulting impact upon diesel fuel usage, and the impact of truck traffic upon major highways, especially Route 200 west of Great Falls, together add a sense of urgency to this study. Unless grain transportation is significantly improved, Montana grain growers will become increasingly disad- vantaged in comparison with producers located in other states. With Asian markets increasing at three to five percent a year, a loss in competitiveness is something which Montana producers can ill afford. Grain subterminals by themselves cannot solve all of Montana's grain transport problems. They do offer promise in in- troducing economies of scale to a transport mode which other- wise has changed very little over the past 40 to 50 years. Basically, elevators order empty cars from the railroad which are then located and forwarded (under single car rates) to a variety of destinations in the northwest and midwest. In spite of the prob- lems identified above and gradually increasing diversion to truck/barge, railroads still dominate in the movement of Montana grain. Consequentiy little incentive presently exists by which railroads would improve service or offer economic incentives to elevator operators to use the rail system."}
{"id": "montanarailplann6341mont", "title": "Montana rail planning newsletter", "year": 1979, "seq": 1, "text": "Over the years, various alternatives have been proposed, such as multi-car rates, grain trains, subterminals, and unit trains. While these concepts have been discussed off and on for quite some time, nothing has happened. The explanation lies in the sheer magnitude of the marketing changes required to achieve the volumes necessary to induce railroad rate reductions. So far, private enterprise has not been able to assemble the point-to- point grain volumes necessary to sustain more efficient forms of rail transport. It is important to appreciate the major strengths and weaknesses of the proposed concepts from both railroad and elevator operator perspectives. Multi-car shipments today are quite feasible at the larger elevators and are being made today, although no rate reduction is being offered by the railroads serv- ing Montana. While some switching time is saved over that re- quired in handling single cars, the reduction in terminal costs is relatively small in comparison with the total cost of the move- ment. No savings occur in terms of transit time, car utilization, or in the number of points served or miles of track operated. In the past, the BN has concluded that multi-car shipments do not pro- vide sufficient operational economies to warrant the introduction of multi-car rates. However, recently the UP instituted such rates on its lines through Wyoming, Idaho and Oregon. Whether this will eventually affect BN's stance remains to be seen. Grain trains were tried briefly some years ago. Such a train con- sists solely of loaded or empty grain cars rather than the mixed freight typical of rail service in Montana. The only advantage of such trains is the elimination of some switching operations due to the concentration of traffic for fewer West Coast destinations with some reduction in transit time. The major disadvantage is that additional local train operations may be required to handle non-grain traffic."}
{"id": "montanarailplann6341mont", "title": "Montana rail planning newsletter", "year": 1979, "seq": 2, "text": "While the concept may be appealing, such trains apparently offer little in operating savings. Both multi-car shipments and grain trains require practically no institutional and/or marketing changes and thus would be popular with elevator operators. In short, it represents the continuation of business \"as is\". The Montana Rail Planning Newsletter Number 3 contains a succinct explanation of grain subterminals and unit trains, which are expected to provide appreciable operating and car ownership economies to railroads, and thus offer far greater potential than multi-car rates and grain trains. A 60-car unit grain train can carry approximately six thousand tons or 200 thousand bushels of wheat. Such a train, if efficiently utilized, could conceivably make upwards of 50 round trips per year between Montana and west coast ports. This amounts to ten million bushels of wheat annual- ly. Total wheat production in Montana in recent years has ranged between 85 and 167 million bushels annually. Thus, one unit train operating in a shuttle-type service has a tremendous capacity to move grain. As previously indicated, multiple west coast destina- tions do exist, thus mitigating against the introduction of unit train service. Of the approximately 260 elevators in Montana, none is presently equipped to handle unit trains efficiently. While a few may have sufficient storage capacity, none is today approaching the volumes required to make such service feasible. No elevator presently has this throughput. To achieve this scale of throughput, either the large elevators are going to have to grow larger (presumably at the expense of smaller elevators, the independents, or the financially weaker firms) or elevators are going to have to voluntarily join together in the marketing and transport of grain, with or without governmen- tal encouragement. Provided that the capital can be raised, it isn't too difficult to construct the storage and loading facility required for servicing unit trains."}
{"id": "montanarailplann6341mont", "title": "Montana rail planning newsletter", "year": 1979, "seq": 3, "text": "It is well to remember that present single-car rates are an \"equalizer\" between elevators of all sizes. Givon the importance of this study to the grain industry in Mon- tana, future editions of this newsletter will describe the analytical processes being utilized and the overall results obtained as the different tasks and subtasks are undertaken and completed. 'Associated with RCAI is Radermacher & Associates (a Billings- based transportation and marketing firm) and Robert Peccia & Associates (a Helena-based transportation planning and civil engineering firm) Update of Milwaukee Situation Readers of previous Rail Planning Newsletters probably recall a series of articles of interest to those who closely follow the trials and tribulations of the Milwaukee Road. The following attempts to briefly summarize the many events which have transpired since September, 1979. In the aftermath of the Court's early June decision, which nar- rowly averted an embargo of rail service on the western lines, a group of shipper and employee interests agreed to form a Washington-based non-profit corporation, known as the \"New Milwaukee Lines\" (New Mil), to serve as a mechanism for putting together a new railroad corporation. This organization has, and continues to receive strong Montana support and encouragement. The objective of New Mil is to ensure continued, competitive rail service in regions currently served by the bankrupt Milwaukee. In September, SORE and New Milwaukee Lines each filed a preliminary plan of reorganization for the Milwaukee's estate with the District Court. SORE's plan proposed a reorganized system operating the Milwaukee's lines west from the Twin Cities to the west coast. New Milwaukee Lines proposed a configuration stretching from Louisville. Each plan was filed under substantial time pressure and recognized the need for subsequent develop- ment and amendments. Because of the magnitude and complexity of the problems fac- ing the Milwaukee and the public it serves, and because of perceived inadequacy of normal abandonment and reorganization procedures, considerable pressure was exerted on Congress to provide a more appropriate means for restructuring the Milwaukee."}
{"id": "montanarailplann6341mont", "title": "Montana rail planning newsletter", "year": 1979, "seq": 4, "text": "Many legislators felt that the option of an employee or employee-shipper-owned railroad needed to be considered and analyzed more fully. A second issue was the magnitude of the labor protection claims upon abandonment or embargo. A third issue was the taxpayer cost of directed service over embargoed lines and the fact that this action would only postpone the day of total cessation of rail service.' Congress passed the Milwaukee Railroad Restructuring Act (MRRA) on November 2, 1979; the President signed the Act on November 4, 1979. The legislation directs the ICC and the District Court to give prompt and ex- pedited consideration to a plan for saving the railroad by reorganizing the Milwaukee into an employee-shipper-owned car- rier operating a restructured and self-sustaining system. The statute provided funding to keep the entire railroad operating dur- ing the period required for consideration of this alternative, and granted the reorganization court-sweeping powers to quickly ap- prove abandonments on all lines not included in the employee- shipper-owned system. If the resulting plan is not approved by the ICC and the Court, the Act precludes any directed service on the Milwaukee system until April 1, 1981. The Act includes a series of tight deadlines which have to be met by the principal parties. On December 1, 1979, the New Milwaukee Lines filed its employee-shipper-ownership plan for the reorganization of the Milwaukee Railroad with the ICC and Reorganization Court. The plan prepared by the New Milwaukee Lines proposed that a new employee and shipper-owner corporation be formed to operate a scaled-down system, amounting to approximately half of the Milwaukee's present total route mileage. The new railroad would have extended from the northwest ports of Seattle, Tacoma and Portland across the transcontinental mainline through the Twin Cities to Milwaukee, Chicago and Louisville, KY."}
{"id": "montanarailplann6341mont", "title": "Montana rail planning newsletter", "year": 1979, "seq": 5, "text": "Ogilvie, Trustee of the pro- perty of the Chicago, Milwaukee, St. Paul and Pacific Railroad Company, whereby the Trustee offered to the State of Montana the opportunity to acquire Milwaukee properties in Montana, Idaho, and eastern Washington for $55 million, Governor Judge on February 1, 1980, forwarded to the Federal government an applica- tion to provide for the acquisition and rehabilitation of Milwaukee Lines in Montana, Idaho, and eastern Washington. Montana has not in the past, nor does it now seek, long-term ownership or operation of Milwaukee Lines in Montana, and is taking this step only because there no longer appears to be any practical way to ensure continued operation of these lines after March 1, 1980. Under this application, the State of Montana would acquire title to the rail properties between Miles City, MT and Marengo, WA. A Montana-based non-profit corporation would be established to oversee the acquisition and rehabilitation financing and the general operation of rail lines acquired by the State. To do this, the corporation would execute a lease-purchase agreement with a qualified operator selected on the basis of available investment capital and railroad operating experience to provide the required rail services and eventually acquire the property from the State. Thus, Montana ownership of Milwaukee Lines is viewed as an ex- pedient solution to an immediate problem and not an end in itself. While there are some who think that reorganization will go on indefinitely, the mood of the Federal government, the Reorganiza- tion Court and Congress appears to be one of settling the issue and not dragging it out further. Should Montana be suc- cessful (1) in raising necessary venture capital, (2) securing the re- quest loans and grants from the Federal government, and (3) con- cluding negotiations with the Trustee, then it should be possible to establish a successor rail operation in May-June."}
{"id": "montana1979annualruralrich", "title": "Montana annual rural manpower report", "year": 1979, "seq": 0, "text": "Farm Employment Trends Overall farm employment was comparable to 1978, except during the sweet cherry harvest when the in-migration of harvest hands exceeded the previous year. 1) As to major characteristics of seasonal workers, all ages above 16 are employed. The elderly are utilized well in agriculture on general . farm and ranch work. Age, sex and race play no important part in Montana's agricultural employment. Women workers have increased on both farms and ranches as tractor operators, general farm workers and sheepherders. They are also frequently employed as truck drivers during small grain and sugar beet harvests. 2) Major activities are field corn, cherries, grain, hay, livestock, potatoes and sugar beets. Less than 1,000 Texas-Mexicans in crews or family groups weed and thin Montana's sugar beets, which for the most part, are located in the Yellowstone Valley. Weedicides, mechanical thinners and weeders will continue to reduce hand labor needs each year. Only two of the previous five sugar beet companies now process sugar beets in the state, which has resulted in a yery substantial reduction of sugar beet acreages and reduced the demand for migrant workers. One thousand, two hundred (1,200) cherry pickers take care of the cherry harvest. This is still hand picking except 'for the sour cherries which are harvested by mechanical shakers. The sweet cherry harvest in the Flathead Valley has become an important link in some of the migrant fruit workers itineraries who follow the fruit harvests in the states west of Montana. Wheat and other small grains are harvested mostly by custom combines and crews migrating into the state following the harvests from Texas to Canada. A substantial amount of the general farm and ranch work is taken care of by individuals entering the state each year for seasonal employment. Local students have become an important source of labor to fill vacancies during their summer vacation periods."}
{"id": "AGuideToUseOfToolSoftwareForTheAppleIIComputerNYCBoardOfEducation", "title": "A Guide To Use Of Tool Software For The Apple II Computer - NYC Board Of Education", "year": 1986, "seq": 0, "text": "Goldberg, were responsible for planning, writing, coordinating and sequencing the first eidition of this guide. They were assisted by Peter Brennan and Joseph Eaione with file design, data management, and editing. The manuscript was prepared for publication by the Editorial and Production Unit under the direction of Alaire Mitchell, Assistant Director of Curriculum Research (Acting). Vincent Puglia of the Editorial and Production Unit was responsible for the final editing, sequencing, and overall production of the manuscript\u2022 Victor Roseman designed the cover and Ernest Mortuzans designed the chapter title pages. Word Processing: Janet Taylor, Patricia Broadnick and Bessie Jones VI INTRODUCTION The use of computers in the classroom has become more prevalent during the past few years. Through this use we have developed a knowledge of their functions and a better vision of their potential. We encourage our colleagues to freely experiment and attempt new approaches. Only with all of us working in concert, can we fulfill our vision for an effective integration of school technology into all subject areas. From these beginnings, we will nurture the critical thinking and practical skills our students will need to succeed in the information age. If children are not comfortable with computers, they will be as unprepared for the future as an adult who cannot read or write. The purpose of this guide is to give teachers and supervisors a working knowledge of various approaches to enhance pupil learning. Our guides are intended to be open ended and flexible in nature. As a 1920 car is not efficient by 1980 standards, outmoded computer education ideas of the seventies have been replaced by the new visions of the eighties. Classroom use of technology has doubled and redoubled in the past few years. Teachers are continually devising new ideas for the use of this technology. Our primary responsibility in this area and our reason for writing this book, is to see that computers are used as an efficient classroom tool."}
{"id": "pressons-of-york-york-county-public-library", "title": "Pressons of York", "year": 1982, "seq": 0, "text": "It is my will and desire that my negro man Robin be hired by my Executors annually on the best terms for and during the term of my sister Elizabeth Freeman's natural life and at her death it is my will and desire and I hereby devise the said Robin to my Nephew Callohill Presson. 4th. It is my will and desire that my negro girl Judah be sold as soon after my death as possible by my Executors to the best advantage and the money arising from the sale there of to be applied immediatley to the discharge of my debts. 5th. It is my will and desire and I hereby devise my yellow boy Tom to my Nephew John Presson. 6th. I hereby devise my negro woman Fanny and her two smallest children to my sister Elizabeth Freeman for her sole and separate use and for her exclusive benefit for and during the term of her natural life and at her death to be disposed of in the order of my land herein before devised. 7th. It is my will and desire that my Crop of Corn not made be sold by my Executors on the best terms and that all the perishable part of my Estate be sold on a credit of twelve months, as soon as possible. 8th. It is my desire that my Executors will settle my accounts and make collection of my debts of every description and allow no indulgence but persue the shortest course in the recovery thereof as soon as possible. 18 9th. It is my will and desire and I hereby appropriate the annual hires of Juby and Hannah with the interest of the sum of One Thousand Dollars as soon as collected, for the sole and separate use of my sister Elizabeth Freeman for and during the term of her natural life. 10th."}
{"id": "US.NN.FIT.SC.362.2.1.24.199510-11", "title": "Fashion International, October/November 1995", "year": 1995, "seq": 0, "text": "The Spring story concentrates on orchid pink in combination with black and white. There are 40MM sandwashed silk crepes in solids and dots, pure cotton yarn dyed striped pique, printed satin, stretch cotton hound\u2019 s-tooth, and ribbed and jacquard knits. Typically Kenzo is the one-button jacket in orchid worn over a floral/dot pique vest and fluid polka dot pants. CORINNE BRICAIRE is a Paris based line specializing in day- into-evening casual clothes with a minimalist slant. Fabrics are unusual and colors are offbeat. There are unique crinkled metallic plisses, and a lot of iridescents and sheers. Some of the best styles are the reversible tunic and front wrap sarong, and a magnifi- cent coat that reverses from bronze to peach. PORTARA is dedicated to the young career customer. She\u2019!I find total lifestyle dressing in shades rang- ing from seashell and vanilla to pebble, granite and black. For Spring/Summer there are new hip length striped jackets and trousers in wool blends, Madras plaid blouses to pair with soft floral print skirts, and striped tailleurs. Skinny spaghetti strapped dresses in crimson, off white, and black span the seasons easily. EMANUEL takes a versatile approach to Spring with a collec- tion that encompasses soft suit dressing and cool casual wear. Highlights are his dress and coat combinations, the suited looks with long and short jacket ver- sions, and the fresh take on sueded chino, denim stripes, and beautiful Indian paisley cotton prints. The subtle color palette includes important shades of cafe, flax, peridot, roselite, paprika, blush, tobacco, ore and ink. Fabrications include topstitched tropical wools, silk georgette, reversible twill stripe, satin back crepe, melange twill, organza paisley jacquard, boucle, linen jersey, and much more. The collection is self-assured, modern, stunning. ANNIE REVA pays homage to the \u201960s with sophisti- cated, well-defined silhouettes in classic colors."}
{"id": "US.NN.FIT.SC.362.2.1.24.199510-11", "title": "Fashion International, October/November 1995", "year": 1995, "seq": 1, "text": "So, we decided to open our own boutique in order to know our customers better, and to give them an opportunity to see the whole collection and not just a few pieces. The Spring \u201996 collection is more forward than Fall; it features more complicated cuts and has been upscaled to a cou- ture level. It\u2019s day-into-evening for the career woman, but it\u2019s fun, younger, elegant ... very fifties!\u201d They both stress that the evening looks in the collection are very strong thanks to the fact that glamour is back. As an added bonus, along with their signature collection of coats, jackets and dresses, they have designed a line of shoes, bags, and jeans that retail from $100 to $200. Their strategy is to give the customer a choice of bags and shoes to go with each outfit, so that she can create a whole wardrobe. The Spring \u201996 collection from EV & EL comprises five groups in a variety of fabrics and colors, including a cotton/ Lycra blend in solid blue or gray and white stripe, and a sky blue silk group that has an elegant Audrey Hepburn aura. Also featured is a black and white color blocked cotton group, that is clearly inspired by the Carnaby Street of the \u00b060s, and a lime green and peach group, in solids or in a Grecian patterned textured silk blend. Silhouettes run the gamut from ladylike coats and dress/jacket combinations to little shifts and Capri pants. Detailing includes 3/4 sleeves, boat necks, and Peter Pan collars. Standouts are the blue silk herringbone jacquard, double-breasted jacket that is belted over slightly flared pants, and an elegant double- breasted knee-hovering coat that gracefully fits the form. A great looking short shift is color blocked in black and white; while an equally eye- catching blue cotton/Lycra dress has a square neckline, waist emphasizing peplum, and slim long skirt with front slit \u2014 all detailed with intricate top stitching and a front zipper. 575 Eighth Avenue, 22nd fl."}
{"id": "mirror199587unse", "title": "Mirror, 1995", "year": 1995, "seq": 0, "text": "The weather was extraordinary! More incredible was the football team. No, they didn't win, although a couple of snowflakes did fall in Hell as the Bates Bobcats took the lead over the more experienced Williams team. Rumor of the long forgotten tradition of ringing the Hathorn bell signifying victory on Garcelon field quickly spread. That wasn't to be - the Universe quickly re- turned to its normal working order, with Bates unfortu- nately capitulating the lead and the game. Parents were treated to the whole works, with the College staff putting on an excellent exhibition (\"Sure, mom, we eat like this all the time\"). The OUn Arts Center offered several exhibits, as did other departments. Did any of us go on the Bird Sanctuary expedition? As a sign of our maturity, this year we actually allowed our par- ents to be seen with us in pubUc, and did not sneak them in and out of the dorms when we were sure that nobody was looking. Some of us even brought them to Com- mons for a quick bite to eat. As usual, the Deansmen and Merrimanders concert was packed. Overall, it was a terrific weekend, as our parents who have now been partying on with one another for four years really felt comfortable with each other. So com- fortable, that in an odd sort of way, they are sorry that they won't be doing it again next year. Parents Weekend \u20229 I lO'Halloween The Annual Chase Hall Com- mittee Halloween Bash reached its usual high peak of festivity this October 30th. A record num- ber of Bates students (over 1,200 all told) turned out in full regalia to enjoy one of the biggest nights of the year. CHC did its usual great job of putting on a party, with groovy music and video screens on the dance floor."}
{"id": "montanarailplan0485mont", "title": "Montana rail plan", "year": 1985, "seq": 0, "text": "Finally, the Supplement will focus on an evaluation of Burlington Northern's (BN) southern mainline rail system between Mossmain (near Laurel) and Sandpoint, Idaho. METHOD OF ANALYSIS The method of analysis used in this publication is the same as that used in the 1984 Update. Please refer to pages 4-1 through 4-14 of the 1984 Montana Rail Plan Update for a thorough understanding of the approach used on the aforemen- tioned construction projects. REVISIONS TO THE UPDATE The majority of the information presented in the 1984 Montana Rail Plan Update accurately presents the rail situation in Montana as of this date. The Rail Planning Process, the State Rail Policies and Objectives, and the State Energy Policy presented in the introduction of that document have not been changed and will not be restated here. FUNDING PROCESS Local Rail Service Assistance (LRSA) funds available to the individual states are allocated by the Federal Railroad Administration (FRA) based on the number of eligible rail line 1-2 miles in each state in relation to the national eligible rail mileage. The formula requires that each state receive at least one percent of the available funds; however, due to declining appropriations in the LRSA program in 1987, each state is allo- cated $50,000 for rail planning. The remaining national rail appropriations are administered on a discretionary allocation by the Secretary of Transportation on a national project-by- project basis. By federal law, a maximum of 70 percent of a rail project may be funded by this program. The other 30 percent must come from a nonfederal source. The State of Montana does not utilize any state funds for this purpose and requires other parties (such as the owning railroad) to participate. Table 1-1 gives a breakdown of the federal funds received for Montana's rail planning program. Federal funds available to the State of Montana have dwindled considerably since the inception of the program."}
{"id": "montanarailplan0485mont", "title": "Montana rail plan", "year": 1985, "seq": 1, "text": "(2) Includes 78.6 miles owned by the South Dakota Rail Authority (SDRA) and operated by BN under a lease/purchase agreement . (3) Do no calculate in total mileage; it is included in the mileage for Rarus since it operates over their track. 2-1 Montana Western Railway Co. In August, 1986, two former Rarus Railway officials purchased the 52-mile Butte to Garrison line from BN. They named their company the Montana Western Railway Co. and began operations with 11 employees. They have increased that figure to 19. Their headquarters are located at 700 $ Railroad Avenue in Butte, and John Greene serves as President of the company. The shortline primarily serves as a bridge carrier between the Union Pacific (UP) at Silver Bow and the BN at Garrison. Among the commodities hauled are phosphate rock, fertilizer, lumber, grain and a variety of items out of the Port of Montana at Butte . The company currently leases locomotives from Rarus Railway, which took over the Butte, Anaconda & Pacific Railway (BAP) . Future Montana Western plans include the purchase of their own locomotives. Butte-Anaconda Historical Park and Railroad Corporation (BAHP) In an agreement dated May 11, 1987, Rarus Railway agreed to lease a portion of railroad line known as the Missoula Gulch, Butte Hill line to the newly formed and organized BAHP for operation of a recreational intrastate railroad while maintaining trackage rights to fulfill their common carrier obligation. The subject line extends from Rocker to Badger mine located entirely in Silver Bow County. BAHP, headquartered in 2-3 Butte, began operating the portion of line extending from the Mining Museum to just short of the Kelly Mine, a distance of approximately two miles, in May, 1987. Future plans are to expand the route all the way to the old viewing stand over- looking the Berkeley Pit. Initially the railroad is operating seven days a week from Memorial Day through Labor Day."}
{"id": "montanarailplan0485mont", "title": "Montana rail plan", "year": 1985, "seq": 2, "text": "The proposed Spring Creek Wye project addressed in this Supplement consists of the construction of approximately 4300 feet of new track connecting two existing rail lines, see Figure 4-1. The purpose of the project is to alleviate the need to rehabilitate the Spring Creek trestle. The project will also shorten running times for trains operating from the Geraldine line to Moccasin for interchange with BN . The status and issues concerning the subject project are summarized below: Trains operating from CMR connect with BN at Spring Creek Junction. However, the interchange track is located at Hanover which makes it necessary for CMR trains to cross the Spring Creek trestle to reach the interchange track. BN has plans to turn this section of track over to CMR. When CMR gains control it will be necessary for them to take their traffic to Moccasin for interchange. With- out the construction of the Spring Creek Wye project, it will be necessary to continue to maintain and use the Spring Creek trestle to reach Hanover in order to place 4-1 ExU;f 4-1 Tb Oenfda 47\u00b0I0' locomotives on the headend of trains. The Spring Creek trestle is a 1,392 foot timber bridge over Spring Creek. The 87 span structure has a maximum height of 85 feet above the waterline and is built of untreated timber piles and framing. There are two fire- break steel spans and supporting towers located approxi- mately at the third points of the structure. The upper portions of the trestle appear to be in good condition. The lower portions of support bents have been extensively remodeled to replace piles and timber framing that have deteriorated since construction in 1912 and rebuilding in 1931. Many posts are banded with steel strapping to avoid replacement of split timbers. Extensive rehabilitation was done on the structure by a private firm in 1970. It is recognized within the trade that rehabilitation of structures of this construction need major work every 15 years."}
{"id": "montanarailplan0485mont", "title": "Montana rail plan", "year": 1985, "seq": 3, "text": "While the state does not necessarily oppose such a sale, it is important that the terms of the sale agreement be in the best interest of Montana shippers and Montana's economy in general, bearing in mind that reliable, efficient, cost-compe- titive rail service is essential to the state. The agreement provides for MRL to lease the mainline until the underlying mortgages have been paid, at which time MRL will have an option to purchase the line. Additionally, MRL will purchase approximately 222 route miles of BN's branchlines from Missoula to Darby; Dixon to Poison; Sappington to Harrison; Whitehall to Alder; Helena to Montana City; and Logan to Whitehall. The buyer will have the right to acquire the Phillipsburg to Drummond line if the state does not exercise certain rights to purchase the property. MRL will also have 5-12 trackage rights from Phosphate to Helena and Sandpoint to Spokane, Washington. A map of the subject rail properties can be found on Figure 5-2. The branchlines, the Livingston Shop, and all operating assets and personal property necessary to operate the line will be acquired for cash. MRL will assume operation of the line prior to the end of the year (1987) . The state and shippers are worried about changes in their service that could result from the sale. Service to shippers could be curtailed or changed immeasurably, markets could be closed, effective competition could be stymied, and predatory pricing and practices could occur if proper sale conditions are not provided. The sale could also erode the tax base causing higher taxes for each remaining taxpayer. The economic impact of the sale could mean loss of jobs resulting in loss of income to local businesses. BN employs approximately 900 workers on the subject line representing 14 counties, and there is genuine concern they could be laid off or face drastic pay reductions because of the sale."}
{"id": "montanarailplan0485mont", "title": "Montana rail plan", "year": 1985, "seq": 4, "text": "The majority of traffic generated along this line con- sisted primarily of lumber and wood products and was trans- ported by rail from a lone shipper in Pablo. A very limited amount of fertilizer was shipped by rail into Ronan for distribution to area farmers. While the shippers agree that rail is more convenient, the lower rates and faster service provided by the truckers on bulk fertilizer shipments makes trucking an attractive alternative. Furthermore, since trucks characteristically handle smaller volumes, the shipper has less money tied up in inventory costs which is beneficial to businesses struggling to survive in today's economy. 6-4 For lumber and wood products, rail rates are currently lower than truck rates. Since the customer dictates how a commodity is to be shipped, with the lower rail freight rates it is predictable that rail shipments will prevail. This line is included in the proposed sale to MRL and as of this writing we are uncertain of its future status. The following section describes previously studied lines and reports any changes since the time of the original analy- sis . Sappington to Harrison - BNRR, 9.08 miles This line, previously classified as Category 1 in the 1984 Update, has been restored to Category 5 (no immediate abandon- ment plans) . This change is somewhat misleading because there has been very little traffic generated over the line in the past five years and that trend is not expected to change in the future. There is speculation that the reclassification is tied to the proposed sale of the southern line. Three Forks to Whitehall - BNRR, 31.7 miles This line was designated a Category 5 line in the 1984 Rail Plan Update and the designation remains unchanged. The majority of the traffic originated on the Whitehall to Alder branchline, but with the relocation of the major shipper to Three Forks traffic volumes on this segment will be reduced."}
{"id": "montanacountypro32ward", "title": "Montana county profiles", "year": 1985, "seq": 0, "text": "Classifications are based on the 1972 edition of the Standard Industrial C lass i f icat ion Hanua I and its 1977 supplement The SIC System facilitates the collection, tabulation, presentation, and analysis of data relating to business industrial, and other types of establishments. It also promotes uniformity and comparability in the presentation of statistical data collected by various government agencies, trade associations and private research organizations. Labor Force: Persons 16 years old and over, employed or unemployed, constitute the civilian labor force The civilian labor force and members of the Armed Forces constitute the labor force. \"Not in labor force\" refers to persons 16 years old and over consisting mainly of students, housewives, retired workers seasonal workers in an off' season who are not looking for work, inmates of institutions disabled persons, and persons doing only incidental unpaid family work (fewer than 15 hours a week). Also included are the discouraged workers\" who do not have a job and have given up actively looking for work B - 1 Mean/Med i an/Per Capita Averages: An arithmetic mean is the sum of the values of all items divided by the number of items. Sometimes called the simple average, the mean is used most frequently although it is not always the most meaningful descriptor. Because a mean is affected by very large or very small numbers, a median value may be more useful when considering small sets of numerical data. Median is the value that divides the distribution (lowest to highest or vice versa) into two equal parts, one half the items falling below this value and one half exceeding this value. If there is an even number of items, the median is the average of the two middle items. Per Capita is an average computed for every person in a specified population; the total value of an item divided by the number of persons in the specified population."}
{"id": "migratorybirdhun1990unse", "title": "Migratory bird ... hunting regulations, State of Montana", "year": 1990, "seq": 0, "text": "GENERAL REGULATIONS Means of Taking \u2014 Migratory birds may be taken only with bow and arrow or shotgun not larger than ten gauge incapable of holding more than three shells fired from the shoulder. May not be taken from or by means, or aid of, or use of a sinkbox, air\u00ac craft, motor vehicle, or motor-driven conveyance of any kind, except a motorboat when the motor has been shut off and the boat has stopped. Use of any electronic or phonographic waterfowl-calling de\u00ac vice is illegal. Steel shot \u2014 It is unlawful for anyone to use or possess a shotgun shell or ammunition loaded with or containing other than steel shot, while hunting, taking or attempting to take waterfowl or coots. Possession of \u201cother than steel shot\u201d means in the gun, or in the pockets, or within reach while in the process of waterfowl hunting. Shot, other than steel, left in a vehicle, while parked in the waterfowl hunting area, would not be considered \u201cin posses\u00ac sion\u201d forthe purpose of hunting. Restrictions \u2014 No person shall take migratory birds by driving, rallying, or chasing birds with any motorized conveyance or any sail boat to put them in range of the hunter; by the aid of baiting (placing feed such as corn, wheat, salt, or other feed to con\u00ac stitute a lure or enticement). Hunters should be aware that a baited area is considered to be baited for 10 days after the removal of the bait, and it is not necessary for the hunter to know an area is baited to be in violation. Hunting Hours \u2014 One half hour before sunrise to sunset except on the Flathead Indian Reservation, the hunting hours shall be sunrise to sunset. Leave Wing Attached \u2014 One fully feathered wing must remain attached to the carcass of each bird (except doves) in the field for identification and aging."}
{"id": "encyclopedia-of-arabic-literature-1998_202401", "title": "Encyclopedia of Arabic Literature", "year": 1998, "seq": 0, "text": "Equally arbitrary has been the inclusion of some North African writers writing mainly (or in a few cases, exclusively) in French, where the gen- eral cultural context has suggested an exception to the usual principle that \u2018Arabic literature\u2019 is \u2018literature written in Arabic\u2019. For the medieval period, the scope of \u2018literature\u2019 has not been restricted to belles-lettres but has been extended to other types of writing \u2014 history, biography, geography, philosophy and so on \u2014 as medieval writers and readers did not make the same distinctions between various types of \u2018literature\u2019 as do modern ones. The principles on which the volume has been organized are largely self-explanatory. Medieval and transitional period authors have been entered under their shuhra (the best known element of their name), with cross- references where necessary. Modern authors have been entered under the final, or family, element of their name, with cross-references in the few cases where readers might perhaps have expected to find the entry elsewhere. For the medieval and transitional periods, dates have been given according to both the Islamic (AH/hijri) and Christian (AD/CE/miladi) calendars, but for the modern period hijri dates have not been included. Cross-references (in bold) within entries, and \u2018See also\u2019 refer- ences at the end of some entries, indicate other, related entries. For transliteration from Arabic and Persian the International Journal of Middle East Studies system has been used, as set out in detail on page xvii. Further informa- tion on Arabic names and some other technical points may be found in the Glossary (pp. 830-4); for further information on chronol- ogy, readers should consult the dynastic tables on pp. 835-41. For reasons of space, no attempt has been made to compile exhaustive bibliographies for individual entries. The primary object has been to list translations and to refer the reader, where possible, to other secondary sources for further information on the subject of the entry; entries for classical authors may list published editions of the writer\u2019s main works, but this has not been thought practicable in the case of modern writers."}
{"id": "encyclopedia-of-arabic-literature-1998_202401", "title": "Encyclopedia of Arabic Literature", "year": 1998, "seq": 1, "text": "Baghdad became a magnet for scholars and men of letters, and retained politi- cal and cultural importance throughout the \u2018Abbasid period. The cities of Basra and Kufa conducted a lively cultural exchange with the capital, and as the \u2018Abbasids extended their hegemony, other regions \u2014 notably Khurasan \u2014 came under their cultural influence. The \u2018Abbasid \u2018revolution\u2019 had been fuelled in part by the aspirations of the mawali (Muslims of non-Arab descent), who hoped that the new dynasty would make good the egalitarian principles preached by Islam. The administrative system was established on the Sasanian model, and mawali (especially of Persian descent) entered the state bureaucracy in increasing numbers. Persian, Greco-Byzan- tine and Aramean traditions were absorbed into the Arabic-Islamic milieu, producing a cultural florescence hitherto unequalled \u2014 even though, in many ways, literary develop- ments built on tendencies already seen in the late Umayyad period. The influence of Sasanian imperial traditions led gradually to the caliph being seen as an absolute monarch who, addressed as \u2018shadow of God\u2019, was \u2018a magnificent figure, remote in a world of awesome luxury, walled off by an elaborate courtly etiquette, whose casual word was obeyed like divine law\u2019 (Hodgson, Venture, 1: 283). Veiled from ordinary mortals by a screen, approachable only through a chain of officials and with elaborate rituals of submis- sion, his power of life and death over his subjects was symbolized by the executioner who was always at his side. The actual admin- istration was left largely to powerful viziers, such as the Barmakids, and to court officials. A second consequence of non-Arab cultural influence was the growth of the Shu\u2018ubiyya, a reaction on the part of non-Arabs (in particular, secretaries and poets) to Arab claims of literary \u2018Abbasids and cultural superiority, which was at its most intense in the third/ninth and fourth/tenth cen- turies."}
{"id": "encyclopedia-of-arabic-literature-1998_202401", "title": "Encyclopedia of Arabic Literature", "year": 1998, "seq": 2, "text": "Ibn al-Hajjaj and Ibn Sukkara cultivated both mujiin and the style of sukhf; Abii Dulaf composed his Qasida Sasaniyya for the Sahib; Aba al-Mutahhar al-Azdi\u2019s Hikadyat Abi al- 8 Qasim al-Baghddadi described the low-life of Baghdad. Such tendencies reflect the generally tolerant atmosphere of the period; to see the Biyid age as one of unrestrained licence and corruption is to diminish its very real achievements. These include a massive burst in the anthologizing of both earlier and contem- porary poetry and prose by al-Abi and al- Raghib al-Isfahani, to name only two exam- ples. Abi: al-Faraj al-Isbahani\u2019s Kitab al- Aghani was composed for the vizier al- Muhallabi. Ibn al-Nadim\u2019s Fihrist is a com- prehensive list of Arabic works produced to the end of the fourth/tenth century, with valuable comments; al-Tha\u2018alibi\u2019s Yatimat al-dahr (continued by al-Bakharzi and \u2018Imad al-Din al-Isfahani) provides informa- tion on poets and prose writers of the period, with often extensive samples of their work. Major works of literary criticism were pro- duced by such writers as al-Amidi and al- Qadi al-Jurjani, along with important com- mentaries like that of al-Marziiqi on Abi Tammam\u2019s Hamdsa. Not least among the achievements of this period was the elabor- ation of Shi\u2018i law and theology by such scholars as Ibn Babawayh, and of Mu'tazili theology by, for example, the Qadi \u2018Abd al- Jabbar of Rayy. Shi\u2018i-orientated poetry was written by the likes of Mihyar al-Daylami (the chief exponent of what S. Sperl has termed the \u2018mannerist\u2019 style) and the brothers al-Sharif al-Murtada and al-Radi; the latter is also credited with compiling the Nahj al- balagha, a compendium of sayings attributed to \u2018Ali ibn Abi Talib, and his correspondence with Abu Ishaq al-Sabi\u2019 and others became a model of epistolary style."}
{"id": "encyclopedia-of-arabic-literature-1998_202401", "title": "Encyclopedia of Arabic Literature", "year": 1998, "seq": 3, "text": "Al-Nasir (whose efficient spy-system, and tolerance of Shi\u2018 and other heterodoxies, did not meet with universal approval) aspired to restore the authority of the caliphate. Perhaps his most remarkable achievement was his patronage of the futuwwa brotherhoods; in 578/1182 he officialized one such brotherhood and placed himself at its head, inviting other Muslim rulers, both Sunni and moderate Shi\u2018t, to join under his leadership. In 604/1207 he declared all other brotherhoods illegal and announced that he, the caliph, entrusted with maintaining the sacred Law, was the model for others to follow; and in 608/1211 al-Nasir succeeded in wooing the leader of the Nizari Isma\u2018ilis into his following, under the aegis of Sunnism. One of his advisers, the famous Sifi Shaykh \u2018Umar ibn Muhammad _ al- Suhrawardi, conceived a theory for unifying the caliphate, the futuwwa, and Sufism. Al- Nasir\u2019s activities reflect a tendency towards synthesis of various esoteric and heterodox doctrines under Sunni Islam; the teachings of the futuwwa and of Sufism have much in common both with each other and with those of the Isma\u2018ilis \u2014 and in this period, all three were moving towards a coalescence. Mysti- cism and mystical writings, orthodox and heterodox theology, and gnosticism (reflected in the interest in astrology, alchemy and magic), all heavily coloured by esotericism, flourished. Al-Nasir\u2019s dream of a restored caliphate was not to be realized. The caliph, involved in a succession struggle among the Saljiaq atabeks, sought the help of the Khwarazmshah Takesh against the sultan Tughril II and his supporters; after defeating and killing Tughril in battle in 693/1194, Takesh occupied the former Saljiq territories. Iran and Iraq were devasted by successive waves of invaders, and were briefly absorbed into the Khwarazm- shah\u2019s empire, which \u2014 stretched from Transoxiana to the Caspian, and which itself fell to the Mongols shortly after (see further Khwarazm)."}
{"id": "encyclopedia-of-arabic-literature-1998_202401", "title": "Encyclopedia of Arabic Literature", "year": 1998, "seq": 4, "text": "SADGROVE abridgements (Ar. mulakhkhas, mukhtasar, tahdhib and re- lated terms.) Abridgements scarcely appear in Arabic writing before the fourth/tenth century; this is not surprising, since they presuppose the existence of lengthy works in a fixed form, and early books often underwent revision and reformulation in the course of transmission. In fact, the appearance of abridgements can be said to mark the emergence of a concept of the written work similar to the one we are familiar with today. The motives for making abridgements were various. In some cases it was felt that a book was simply too long and could easily be shor- tened by omission of the isnads; al-Tabari\u2019s Koran commentary was one work subjected to this treatment. In other cases the impulse was didactic, as for instance with the seventh/ thirteenth-century grammarian and legal scholar Ibn al-Hajib, who owed much of his reputation to his ability to abridge and com- ment on the works of his predecessors. Again, a work might be considered too complicated for the average cultivated reader to peruse: this was one of the reasons why Ibn Rushd abridged Aristotle\u2019s works. Finally, parts of the original work might have ceased to be understood: as far as can be established, all the abridgers of Abii al-Faraj al-Isbahani\u2019s Kitab al-Aghani leave out the musical indications for performing the songs, and one writer admits that they were meaningless to singers in his day. Sometimes the abridger was the author of the original work \u2014 like al-Mas\u2018iidi, who claims to have extracted from his historical summum an intermediate (awsat) study \u2014 but usually another writer took the task upon himself. The abridgement is almost always an interpretation of the original; this is especially evident in adab books, with their multifarious content, where one adapter may prefer the poetry, another the entertaining anecdotes, and a third historical narratives."}
{"id": "encyclopedia-of-arabic-literature-1998_202401", "title": "Encyclopedia of Arabic Literature", "year": 1998, "seq": 5, "text": "Though blind from an early age, he made a career in Syria as a poet and scholar. In his thirties he set out for Bagh- dad, but left after a short period: the city did not agree with him, and vice versa. He was, it seems, not prepared to make a living with flattering panegyrics; there are reports of friction with such leading Baghdadi figures as al-Sharif al-Murtada. After his return to Ma\u2018arra in 400/1010 he chose a life of seclu- sion at home, until his death almost fifty years later. His brilliant early poetry, collected in Saqt al-zand (The Spark from the Fire-stick), owes much to al-Mutanabbi. It includes a group of poems (called al-Dir\u2018iyyat) devoted to the description of armour; some of them are dramatic monologues put into the mouths of 24 coats-of-mail. His second collection of poems, Luziim ma la yalzam or al-Luziimiyyat, is very different and unconventional. It owes its title to the self-imposed constraint of \u2018rich rhyme\u2019, with two rhyme-consonants, and the inclusion of poems on every rhyme-letter, including unusual ones, in four forms (ending in each of the three vowels or unvowelled). The style is highly ornate, with much _ paronomasia, unusual diction and many learned allusions. Instead of conventional gasidas the collection contains mostly short poems of hikma and zuhd (see zuhdiyya). The poet shows himself a pessimist, full of scepticism and fatalism. No consistent philosophy is to be extracted from the Luzimiyyat \u2014 though some later writers have accused al-Ma\u2018arri, probably unjustly, of heresy and unbelief. Among his prose works, by far the most famous is Ris@lat al-ghufran (The Epistle of Forgiveness), in which a scholar, Ibn al-Qarih, is mockingly depicted as a hypocrite who visits heaven and hell and engages in discus- sions with poets, scholars and heretics from earlier ages."}
{"id": "encyclopedia-of-arabic-literature-1998_202401", "title": "Encyclopedia of Arabic Literature", "year": 1998, "seq": 6, "text": "The book is a strange mixture of highly imaginative and sometimes daring satire - among other things, on popular ideas on the hereafter \u2014 and philological pedantry. Original too is al-Sahil wa-al-shahij (The Neigher and the Brayer), rediscovered only in recent times, in which political events of the time are discussed by a horse, a mule and other animals. It is addressed to the Fatimid gover- nor of Aleppo \u2014 but not, it seems, without a measure of irony. This work, too, contains lengthy philological digressions. It shows, as do some of his other works, that al-Ma\u2018arri, in spite of his seclusion and ascetic way of life, was not entirely cut off from contemporary society and politics. He was, after all, a much respected figure and was visited by numerous pupils and scholars. A work with religious and moralistic admonitions in rhymed prose, alphabetically arranged and entitled al-Fusul wa-al-ghayat (Paragraphs and Periods), was supposed by some later writers to be a blasphemous attempt to surpass the Koran (see i*ja@z al-Qur\u2019an and mu\u2018 arada). He wrote commentaries on the poetry of al- Mutanabbi, Abi Tammam and al-Buhturi, as well as on some of his own works. Many other works are listed by the biographers, but most of them have not been preserved. Al-Ma\u2018arri liked to call himself \u2018twice- confined\u2019, i.e. by his blindness and his seclu- sion; in an epigram he mentions a third prison: his soul in his body. One might add several more: as a writer, he is imprisoned in a style dominated by philology (grammar, lexico- graphy, prosody) and poetry; as a thinker, he is the prisoner of his pessimism and misan- thropy. His extraordinary knowledge of Arabic language and poetry is employed in highly intricate ways, disguising his ideas in the form of riddies and rhetorical ornament."}
{"id": "encyclopedia-of-arabic-literature-1998_202401", "title": "Encyclopedia of Arabic Literature", "year": 1998, "seq": 7, "text": "Ibn al- Mu\u2018tazz, Safi al-Din al-Hilli) are all depen- dent on him. In his khamriyyat, Abi Nuwas describes the appearance of the wine (often through comparisons with jewels or light), its age, its effect on the drinkers \u2014 but also the young man or girl who serves the wine, the male or female singer who entertains the boon companions, and many more things. His hunting-poems were composed pre- dominantly in the rajaz metre (urjiizas). Very often, they begin with a description of the early morning and the riding out to the hunt, and then mainly contain descriptions of the animals trained for hunting (e.g. the hound, the falcon) and of different kinds of game. These poems excel because of their rich and difficult bedouin vocabulary. (See fardiyya.) Abii Nuwas\u2019s panegyrics consist partly in qasida form and partly in longer or shorter monothematic poems (qit\u2018a). The gasidas are usually in-two parts (prologue and madih, rahil and madih), less often in three (nasib, rahil and madih). Remarkable in this respect is the fact that the poet frequently replaces the nasib, which conventionally forms the prologue of the gasida, with a parody of the topic (mocking the weeping at the deserted traces of the camp) or a completely different topic (description of wine, a hunting scene). The main part of the poem consists of the (mostly hyperbolic) praise of the addressee\u2019s virtues. Concerning the love poems it is noteworthy that al-Sali (and also the other diwan redac- tors) divide them into those addressed to young men (:mudhakkarat \u2014 about two-thirds) and those addressed to women (mu annathat \u2014 about one-third). However, these two types can usually scarcely be distinguished and in many cases the redactors disagree as to how to classify a poem, all the more so as the girls are sometimes denoted \u2018ala al-tadhkir with the pronoun of the masculine gender."}
{"id": "encyclopedia-of-arabic-literature-1998_202401", "title": "Encyclopedia of Arabic Literature", "year": 1998, "seq": 8, "text": "In addition, he composed four dramas in verse. He spent most of his professional career in the diplomatic service of his country, holding ambassadorial posts in Brazil, India and Austria. Abi Risha is the most prominent Syrian representative of the Romantic mode in mod- ern Arabic poetry. His poetry demonstrates the main strands of his cultural formation, namely a profound knowledge of and expertise in classical Arabic poetry, and an enthusiasm for the later English Romantics such as Keats, Shelley and Byron. His enthusiasm for French literature was more muted, apart from a clear admiration for the work of Baudelaire. In terms of form and language, Abi Risha is probably the most \u2018conservative\u2019 of the Arab Romantics, although few if any of his more radical contemporaries could rival his com- mand of the language of poetry. His clear concern for social and political issues also lifts his verse beyond their largely egocentric limits \u2014 yet his highly subjective approach to such themes situates him firmly among the Romantics. The close fusion of the socio- political and the subjective makes him akin in some respects to the Tunisian Abi al-Qasim al-Shabbi. Abi Risha\u2019s amatory poetry reveals the traditonal Romantic preoccupation with the dualism of physical passion and platonic love, although to a much less intense degree than the work of Abu Shabaka. He will be remem- bered primarily for his concern with political issues, and the succession of defeats suffered by Arab aspirations in the twentieth century. One of his best-known treatments of such a theme is his poem Nisr: the humiliation of an aged eagle is simultaneously a natural tragedy, and a symbol of the sorry state to which the Syrian nation and Arab nationalism has been reduced \u2014 and, one suspects, a symbol of the poet\u2019s own existence."}
{"id": "encyclopedia-of-arabic-literature-1998_202401", "title": "Encyclopedia of Arabic Literature", "year": 1998, "seq": 9, "text": "After pursuing medical studies in England from 1912 to 1922, Abi Shadi returned to Egypt, where he embarked on a career of remarkable talent and variety. His consuming passions were liter- ature, painting and bee-keeping, and he founded a number of scientific and agricultural societies; in the course of a distin- guished academic career he was appointed to the Chair of Bacteriology in the University of Alexandria in 1942. Abii Shadi was outstanding among the academics, intellectuals and men of letters who graced Egyptian cultural life from inde- pendence to the Second World War. Most literary histories pay fulsome tribute to his contribution to modern Arabic literature as the founder and editor of the Apollo magazine and as the creator of the Apollo Society. There is no doubt that, without his tireless efforts and financial backing, the review might not have seen the light of day, and many younger writers would have missed this crucial outlet for their work, as well as the unflagging sup- port and encouragement which Abu Shadi gave them. The evaluation of his own poetry is sometimes obscured by his role as editor of Apollo and position as figure-head in the movement as a whole; it is also made more difficult by the enormous bulk of his work, and by its uneven quality. He was the author of no fewer than nineteen collections of poetry, some of them extremely lengthy, as well as scripts intended as operas, some translations and literary studies. Two aspects of Abii Shadi\u2019s poetic oeuvre stand out: his love-poetry and his nature- poetry. Throughout his collections, numerous poems are written to Zaynab, a female figure who may have originated in an unrequited love-affair dating from before his studies in England. This was also the title of his first diwan published in 1924 after his return to Egypt."}
{"id": "militarychaplain00unse", "title": "The Military Chaplains' Review", "year": 1974, "seq": 0, "text": "My task, as I understand it, is to show how certain traditional philosophical positions have identified and illuminated what or- dinary people are doing when they think about morality and when they try to make moral decisions. I shall choose for analysis those positions which, to my mind, have caught hold of some en- during feature or features of moral decision-making \u2014 enduring from the point of view of persons living in modern industrial societies, with whom the Army is most likely to deal. I shall both examine and evaluate these positions, suggesting their de- ficiencies, as well as what it is about them that is \"most likely to retain more than ephemeral usefulness\" (in the words of the outline describing the paper topics) . It is assumed in this paper that moral instruction consists, in part at least, in helping people to learn to participate con- sciously and competently in moral discussion and in moral re- flection about their own and other people's behavior. Of course people frequently do these things, but they are not always fully aware of what they are doing, nor do they always have full understanding of \"the rules of the game\" that implicitly guide conversations and reflection in the moral area. One way to get a feel for these rules, and to begin to develop competence in moral discussion and deliberation, is to observe prominent figures in the field. To see how they argue, what issues concern them, how they resolve difficulties that are thrown up to them \u2014 such observation is, I believe, a central part of moral instruction. In this paper I have chosen three moralists who are very prominent in the tradition, figures who have exerted and continue to exert considerable influence on the way people think about morals. In many ways, their arguments are paradigms of arguments one still hears all the time."}
{"id": "militarychaplain00unse", "title": "The Military Chaplains' Review", "year": 1974, "seq": 1, "text": "If, when you ask me why you oughtn't to lie, I tell you that lying will cause large rocks to fall on your head, we would not think much of that justification. The explanation is that the reasons given in support of the action-guide are not relevant. As we shall see, several moral positions rely heavily on being able to show that lying, stealing, murdering and the like cause bad consequences to the performer. Obviously, these positions fall to the ground unless they can make their case stick. If they cannot make it stick, then they will be in the same boat I am in when I assert that lying causes large rocks to fall on liars' heads. The first test any justification must pass, then, is that of relevance. Another test that must be passed is that of consistency. If I claim that lying is bad, and go around censuring people who lie, and yet I exempt myself from the prescription without any \"good reason/* you will smell a rat. But not only does the test of consistency dictate that like cases be judged alike, it also dictates, generally speaking, that satisfactory justification pro- ceed in an \"appellate\" fashion, in such a way that \"lower,\" more specific action-guides can be shown to derive consistently (or logically) from higher, more general principles. Thus, as- suming one could show, for instance, that lying undermines the fabric of trust on which human cooperation depends, and assum- ing that human cooperation is considered to be \"good,\" the re- striction against lying would seem justified, since the reasons given in support appear to be consistent with one another. It is worth stressing that an important part of moral reason- ing has to do with this appellate pattern of justification, by which an individual attempts, when pressed, to appeal to \"higher courts\" or to more general principles, until he reaches the \"su- preme court\" of his moral system, or what we shall call his basic moral prescription."}
{"id": "militarychaplain00unse", "title": "The Military Chaplains' Review", "year": 1974, "seq": 2, "text": "In other words, the law of life, according to Nietzsche, consists of active disregard for the welfare of all others, and that which is the true and basic guide to human action ought, if this side of Nietzsche has its way, to become the law of life in practice. To work out a set of action-guides according to this understand- ing of the true law of human action would be very revolutionary so far as our concept of morality is concerned. However, as I say, one part of Nietzsche's own purpose was precisely to effect such a revolution in basic human concepts. Another example of the utility of this proposed definition of morality in helping to distinguish between moral and nonmoral systems is the case of Theravada Buddhism and other similar mystical points of view. Though there is evidence in Theravada Buddhism of a system of action-guides that conforms to our definition of morality, the ultimate objective of the devout Bud- dhist is, in attaining Nirvana, to enter a state of \"equanimity,\" or \"serene unconcern\" so far as the earthly welfare either of oneself or of others goes. In fact, the whole concept of \"self\" and \"other\" is dissolved in Nirvana. Consequently, the system of monastic action-guides that characterizes the preferred pattern of activity is finally \"transmoral\" or \"postmoral.\" Again, this sort of distinction appears to conform exactly to the intentions of archaic Theravada Buddhism. It is my suggestion that all mysti- cal positions drive eventually in this same sort of transmoral direction. We may conclude from this cursory reference to the trans- moral character of mystical systems that to the degree a code of conduct diminishes other-regardingness, it becomes, corres- pondingly, less and less a \"moral\" code of conduct. If, for ex- ample, in our own Western context, self-regarding virtues like temperance, physical fitness, aesthetic sensibility, and so on, came systematically to be considered as weightier or more important than the more distinctly other-regarding, welfare-oriented ac- tivity, then a new, more or less \"postmoral\" code of action would be emerging in our society."}
{"id": "militarychaplain00unse", "title": "The Military Chaplains' Review", "year": 1974, "seq": 3, "text": "The Modified Egoism of Thomas Hobbes. Hobbes' brand of moral philosophy is of great importance for our purposes be- cause he stands at the beginning of the \"modern age\" so far as moral and political philosophy are concerned. It was during the 17th century in England, when Hobbes wrote, that the estab- lished standards of moral and political life were breaking up. As the result of the deep alterations wrought by the Puritan Revolution, England began \u2014 uncertainly, to be sure \u2014 to move from what Max Weber called a \"traditionalistic\" to a \"legal rational\" pattern of authority, or one based on a theory of indi- vidual achievement and rational consent, rather than on tradi- tion and inherited status. Consequently, Hobbes highlights certain aspects of moral reasoning that are still with us, especially the importance of ra- tional self-interest as a starting-point for moral reflection. In- deed, in his belief that self-interest is what, after all, underlies all human motivation, Hobbes continues to attract a following, perhaps a greater one than we like to admit. But can Hobbes* egoism be classed as a moral philosophy at all, according to our definition? It is clear he is concerned with action-guides and with all of our \"legitimacy words,\" like good/ bad, right/wrong, as they apply to action, as well as with duty, obligation, etc. Moreover, he regards his proposed directives as superior, in the sense we use the term, and he is at great pains in his various writings to show how action-guides are properly and consistently validated and vindicated. Yet, is his position other-regarding? The essence of egoism would appear to be to leave the welfare of others out of account and to favor one's own self-interest. So it does, and had Hobbes developed his position in the thoroughly anti-social direction that is suggested in at least part of Nietzsche's thought, he would fall outside the arena of moral thinkers altogether."}
{"id": "militarychaplain00unse", "title": "The Military Chaplains' Review", "year": 1974, "seq": 4, "text": "He does so by contending that the conditions of peace (and fair treatment), as opposed to the conditions of war, are more advantageous to each individual's realizing his own good. And since every individual's seeking his own maximum good amounts to Hobbes* basic moral prescription, we have a fairly consistent justification, providing of course that one buys Hobbes' basic prescription. In technical language, this is a teleological and prudential argument. It is teleological because it validates particular action- guides by showing that they are instrumental toward achieving a desired end (the self's interest, in this case). It is prudential in that it recommends that the overriding end of all the self's action is to watch out for oneself and one's own, which is to say, \"Be prudent.\" Hobbes' manner of vindicating his basic prescription sheds light on why he stresses the need to seek peace. In support of his basic prescription, Hobbes urges his readers to make some psycho- logical observations regarding the nature of man and to see if these observations do not confirm Hobbes' view that men are so constituted that they seek their own good to the exclusion of everyone else's. Hobbes' picture of \"a war of all against all\" in the state of nature is but a dramatization of a fact about man's vicious egocentricity that appeared to him to be self-evident. Hobbes, then, believes that men are faced with the following antinomy: they naturally seek gratification without any re- straint or regulation, but the more avidly they seek gratification without restraint, the more they raise the probabilities of war and self-destruction, and, in turn, diminish their chances for ob- taining what they seek. Reason and prudence, therefore, dictate that men in their own interest yield to the sacrifices imposed by peace and order so as to minimize their losses."}
{"id": "militarychaplain00unse", "title": "The Military Chaplains' Review", "year": 1974, "seq": 5, "text": "There are many criticisms of Hobbesian egoism. Let me cite two, one on the level of vindication, and one on the level of vali- dation. As to Hobbes' vindication for his position, we may wonder whether his theory of human nature is quite adequate. Is man so utterly incapable of altruistic impulses as Hobbes alleges? More directly, how could we be sure that Hobbes* ac- count of man's incapacity for altruism, for seeking ends other than those exclusively his own, is correct? It seems that no evidence could be imagined that might call Hobbes' egoistic the- ory into question. Whenever people tried to provide evidence, Hobbes displayed an ingenious ability to reduce even the most sublime of human actions and motives to egocentricity. But if no evidence could be imagined that might falsify the theory, then the theory is tautological. Hobbes has simply stipulated, rather than demonstrated, that all human action is exclusively egoistic. That seems rather an arbitrary maneuver, and, as such, does not provide much incentive for adopting Hobbes' basic prescription. On the level of validating, Hobbes' brand of prudentialism raises severe problems so far as our common moral understanding is concerned. According to Hobbes, one ought to abide by the moral rules of justice, non-injury to others, etc. only if one could not get away with breaking them. For, logically, if the end I seek is my own interest (as the basic prescription dictates), then I \"ought\" to live by the rules of peace and order only so long as my interest is served in so doing. Obviously, if I can violate the rules with impunity by means of fraud, then I am bound by my position to do that. In Hobbes' view, the end clearly justifies any expedient means. Hobbes' position is worth considering, not only because it ex- presses an outlook that is still found today, but more importantly because it identifies one of the key problems for moral reflection, namely, how to find a justifiable common standard for settling disputes over desired objectives."}
{"id": "militarychaplain00unse", "title": "The Military Chaplains' Review", "year": 1974, "seq": 6, "text": "This matter is one of the severest problems posed in the current literature on decision theory. With respect to measuring and comparing values, there is a question whether Bentham took as seriously as he should have the matter of compromising among values, or of determining \"trade-offs.\" The explanation for this shortcoming was his confi- dence in the natural identity of interests, and in the coincidence of the self's happiness and the happiness of all. We are surely losing our faith in these convictions, convictions which served to vindicate many of the basic action-guides of the 18th-century English world, most notably of Adam Smith's economic advice. The next difficulty is, of course, Bentham's peculiar belief that his felicific calculus enabled him to explain how people assess the worth of the values they espouse. Bentham may have been per- suaded that if the quantities of pleasure produced by pushpin and by poetry are equal, then that settles the matter of their respective worth, from everyone's point of view. But it is not hard to imagine some one disputing this, much as John Stuart Mill did. Mill was so perplexed by the implausibility of Bentham's method for determining the worth of values, that he developed his own, more objective scale of \"lower\" and \"higher\" pleasures, without abandoning the principle of utility as a basic moral prescription. But Mill's perplexity over this aspect of Bentham's position locates a key problem in the history of thinking about mor- ality, namely, Is there an objective or transsubjective way of de- ciding what the worth of desired or valued objects is? Is there some way, other than Bentham's unsuccessful procedure, for de- termining not simply what people do value, but what they ought to value? These questions are very relevant to the specifically moral aspects of Bentham's position, for unless we can decide precisely what constitutes the \"right kind of happiness,\" how shall we be able to know what means we ought to adopt in order to bring such happiness to pass ?"}
{"id": "militarychaplain00unse", "title": "The Military Chaplains' Review", "year": 1974, "seq": 7, "text": "Thus, rather obviously, all forms of arbi- trary treatment, including the deprivation of the basic welfare of others, is something no one has a right to perpetrate without first providing for the right to consent of the affected parties. In this way, our moral species-terms such as restrictions on fraud, deception, cruelty etc., are accounted for. Furthermore, on the logic of his position, Kant might have argued (though, to my knowledge, he did not), that the condi- tion of respect for persons requires a positive concern, a disposi- tion of benevolence to those rendered incompetent, by circum- stance, from determining their ends and pursuing them freely. Here special treatment for children and involuntarily disadvan- taged people would appear to be required by the basic prescrip- tion. In short, respect for persons obliges action calculated to increase the competence of persons as independent decision- makers. To refuse to engage in such action, such as refusing to enable one's children to become independent, would be an example 14 of treating another as a means to one's own ends, rather than as an end-in-himself . The form of Kant's argument, in contrast with the teleological form employed by Hobbes and Bentham, is called deontological. This simply means that we have an argument that takes a means of action as right-in-itself, rather than as right because it serves some special end. Kant's attempt was to undercut the very form of argument employed by Hobbes and Bentham, in which the end is held to justify the means, and replace it with a form of argu- ment in which the means of action impose some limiting condi- tions on the kinds of ends that may be pursued. Kant's mode of vindicating his basic moral prescription takes the form of an elaboration of the sort of argument I provided above."}
{"id": "militarychaplain00unse", "title": "The Military Chaplains' Review", "year": 1974, "seq": 8, "text": "That is, one tries, by analyzing the moral concepts that people use to discover what is built into or assumed in those concepts, and then try to show people what the consequences of such assumptions are for living out their moral life. Whatever may be one's final assessment of Kant's position, and I have shamelessly oversimplified it here, one will have to agree, I think, that Kant is, more than Hobbes or Bentham, the philosopher of a liberal society. That is true because he provides a foundation (whether successful or not, every man must judge for himself) for a society with a strong moral emphasis upon individual rights, autonomy and respect for persons. Kant, unlike Bentham, is able to provide a moral basis for such things as the bill of rights, which is clearly for the protection of the rights of minorities, and is considered binding no matter what the majority may decide to do. And Kant, in distinction from Hobbes, can give a reason why one \"ought\" to refrain from cruelty or discriminatory treatment, even though such action might be carried out with impunity. CONCLUSION Rather than survey broadly many of the traditions and de- velopments in the history of moral philosophy, I have decided to analyze only a few positions. My principle of selection was not random. I chose three positions which have exerted and con- tinue to exert enormous influence on the moral reflection of Anglo-Saxon men and women. Moreover, I set the positions up as I believe they should be set up, in the form of a disputation. It is in dispute that these positions (and all positions) were born, and it is by means of an examination of the dispute that we can appreciate what is deficient and what is of enduring value in them."}
{"id": "militarychaplain00unse", "title": "The Military Chaplains' Review", "year": 1974, "seq": 9, "text": "Some Methodological Problems The necessity of thinking through the methodological im- plications of this task has brought me up against some problems that were not acknowledged (and possibly not foreseen) in the commissioning statement. One of these problems concerns the implications of ethical theory per se for the concept of \"value ed- ucation\" and the centrality of the concept in the educational process. The other concerns the manner in which the stipulations \"utility in value education in the Army\" influence the selection of ethical theories to be studied. Because both of these methodo- logical problems must be taken into account in rethinking \"value education in the Army,\" I shall begin my presentation with an attempt to explain their meaning and importance. 1 James Gustafson writes in the introduction to Niebuhr's The Responsible Self (New York: Harper & Row, 1963), p. 41, \". . . no one wishes more than he [i.e., Gustafson] that H. Richard Niebuhr could have written for himself a volume on 'The Principles of Christian Action,' and a third on 'Christian Responsibility in the Common Life.' \" Dr. Weber is Professor of Social Ethics at Candler School of Theology, Emory University, in Atlanta, Georgia. 17 1. Ethics is the critical study of moral reasoning and moral action. When we approach the matter of \"value education\" from the standpoint of a general study of ethical theory, we assume, of course, that we are considering moral values and not some other kind such as aesthetic or monetary values. From that stand- point we recognize that values are not fixed as to nature and role in human life but are contingently related to particular ethical orientations. What the moral values are and what kind of role they play in the moral process depend in large part on the kind of ethical theory accepted and employed. Perhaps the point can be clarified by a brief consideration of the three major types of ethical theory identified by H."}
{"id": "mississippilawjo46thom", "title": "Mississippi Law Journal Winter 1975 Book 1", "year": 1975, "seq": 0, "text": "If the reason for the existence of equity courts is the lack of an adequate remedy at law, then this situation demands intervention. The federal courts ap- pear to be relegating the class action litigation to the state courts ;211 if there is no remedy in the state courts, there is no remedy at all. The Liddell and Evans cases may have been correctly decided; the potential loss to the defendants accused of exacting usurious rates was in great disproportion to their alleged misdeeds. A class suit for the interest charged or at least for the usurious increment, however, would seem appropriate. The narrow allowance of multiparty suits in the past was apropos to a different situation and rationale. Generally, there was an attempt by a powerful corporation to bring individual suits from circuit court jury trials, aggregate them, and have them heard as a group before a chancellor. In the contemporary class action, however, the class has not attempted to bring individual suits, and often would not be able to do so. Further, in addition to efficiency, there is a public need for contem- porary class actions; the old multiparty suit, however, was primarily for convenience. Although class actions have grown from the same seed as the earlier multiparty actions, the narrow, archaic common-law concep- tual analyses of privity are not appropriate to class actions. Generally, the analyses are applications of conceptual and formal substantive law to prevent the use of a modern functional procedural device. Although the recent Mississippi cases are discouraging to those who would seek such a remedy, there is prior Mississippi case law upon which one apparently can rely. The exceptions to the old multiparty actions provide areas for growth of a more tolerant class action atmos- phere. Absent court acceptance of the class action device, legislation is strongly recommended to provide this much-needed relief."}
{"id": "mississippilawjo46thom", "title": "Mississippi Law Journal Winter 1975 Book 1", "year": 1975, "seq": 1, "text": "In a lengthy dissent, Justice Robertson cogently argued that allowing one spouse to enlarge the lien on the homestead by way of future advances erodes the special protection the Mississippi Legislature has accorded the homestead by dealing with it separately from business or investment property. Quoting at length from a Kansas case,55 Justice Robertson argued that the future advance clause could not secure Mr. Jones' new and separate loans because the trial court in the instant case had made no finding that Mr. and Mrs. Jones or the bank had intended for the deed of trust to secure payment of new and separate business loans to one spouse alone. Justice Robertson warned that the majority had opened the door for uncontrolled spousal chicanery and that the result was harsh and unconscionable and one which the legislature had specifically at- tempted to guard against. Justice Robertson concluded that Davis required the consent of both the husband and the wife to an enlargement of the debt secured by a deed of trust on the homestead and that the amount secured by the deed of trust should be stated in order to comply with the clear and unambiguous language requirements of Hudson. The Mississippi Supreme Court, in the instant decision, has put the home- stead in an untenable position \u2014 that of competing with economic, social and political forces which strongly influence the decisions of legislatures and courts. Throughout the history of this case the court has faced the dilemma of who is to bear the loss of the money due on the notes executed by Mr. Jones and secured by cattle he allegedly owned but which the bank could not find. The solution to the dilemma should lie either in precedent or legislative pronounce- ment. However, there is no statute bearing on the issues of future advances, and the case precedent is vague and conflicting."}
{"id": "mississippilawjo46thom", "title": "Mississippi Law Journal Winter 1975 Book 1", "year": 1975, "seq": 2, "text": "DeHart* Arbitration of Interest Disputes: Proceedings of the Twenty-Sixth Annual Meeting, National Academy of Arbitrators is a compilation of papers prepared for and presented to the Academy's membership. The title, Arbitration of Inter- est Disputes, is slightly misleading since only two chapters are related directly to that topic; the remainder of the book is devoted to other matters of current interest in the field. The overview of interest arbitration shows its conception some 75 years ago, but its subsequent use has been restricted largely to the transit and newspaper publishing industries. While the treatment of interest arbitration in those indus- tries is interesting and informative, it appears that the potential of the process in resolving interest disputes in the burgeoning field of public employee bargain- ing will create much wider interest. Moving into another area, the chapter entitled \"Updating Arbitration\" contains a splendid presentation of the recently instituted program for expe- dited arbitration of minor disputes in the steel industry along with some pene- trating comments by experts in the field of labor relations. Two other areas presented are worthy of comment for divergent reasons. The chapter devoted to discipline for refusal to cross picket lines presents a thorough tracing of case law devoted to this perennial problem for labor attor- neys, while the chapter treating arbitration of disputes between professional athletes and club owners provides something of a behind-the-scenes view against which we can better evaluate those articles in the sports section. Harold Davey's presentation, \"Situation Ethics and the Arbitrator's Role,\" providing as it does a large measure of deserved self-criticism and suggested improvements for the body of professional arbitrators composing the Academy, is perhaps the most worthwhile contribution to the book. In fact, looking back, those readers who are from time to time called upon to explain or justify the awards of arbitrators will find the asides more helpful in that task than the direct commentary. * Partner, Weintraub & DeHart, Memphis, Tennessee; and Adjunct Professor of Law, University of Mississippi."}
{"id": "totten_facingthedanger", "title": "Facing the Danger: Interviews with 20 Anti-Nuclear Activists", "year": 1984, "seq": 0, "text": "Many were very angry, and others, of course, related their stories in calm, even voices. These individuals have been through a lot; some have had contact with the survivors of Hiroshima who are physically suffering from the effects of the bomb, and some are slowly dying from exposure to radioactive fallout received during bomb tests. Some of these people have been slandered and maligned because of their work; others have met with violence or imprisonment for following the dic\u00ac tates of their own conscience and a higher moral law. All of them fear for their lives and for the lives of future generations. It is highly instructive to listen to these voices as they ar\u00ac ticulately delineate their own growing awareness of the threat posed by nuclear weapons. Implicit in each story one gets the sense that once each person became aware of the dangers and threats of the nuclear weapons race he/she had no choice but to XVI Introduction act. But in reality none of the situations were quite that simple. These people chose to act and/or become involved only after they had thoroughly pondered and mulled over the ramifica\u00ac tions of what it means to live in a world bristling with nuclear weapons. They all, in their own way, studied the issues, dis\u00ac cussed them, and then eventually took it upon themselves to act in accordance with their convictions. The point is, their journeys to activism were not easy. The people in these pages are what Henry David Thoreau describes as \u201cawake.\u201d Thoreau said, \u201cTo be awake is to be alive ... moral reform is the effort to throw off sleep.\u201d Today, it is imperative that we all wake up to the grave danger posed by nuclear weapons. If we do not face this imminent danger, there is an awful chance that life itself will be extinguished."}
{"id": "totten_facingthedanger", "title": "Facing the Danger: Interviews with 20 Anti-Nuclear Activists", "year": 1984, "seq": 1, "text": "I was work- )\"t 4 mi the penetration of electrons into solids and the interac- Mmii id radiation with matter, and I had some ideas on the iIm'mi y of that phenomena that were closely related to Einstein\u2019s mi the photoelectric effect. So I wrote a letter to Einstein. I in just a youngster of 22 or 23, and I wrote a brief note saying that I had some ideas on electron emissions from solids which wain related to his photoelectric effect, and that he might be in- \u2022 \u2022*i anted in knowing about them. Three days later I got an invitation to come and visit him. I Ills is really quite extraordinary as I think about it \u2014 one would think that Einstein would be busy, that he wouldn\u2019t have time to talk to young, unknown students. But it turned out that this wasn\u2019t so; I think he was interested in me because I was at the age when he had had his most fruitful ideas. It was a very, very emotional experience for me to meet this man, who was a legendary kind of figure, almost a saint in the scientific community. And of course, he was a saint not only because of what he did as a scientist, but also for his great con\u00ac cern for the future of man in the nuclear age. I was really overawed. As I walked from the train station to Einstein\u2019s home I was all shaken up inside. To me, this man represented the essence of all that the human mind had been able to produce over the cen\u00ac turies. When I got to his house, which was just a little clapboard house in Princeton on Mercer Street, I waited for him in the din\u00ac ing room. And as he came down the hall, I saw that he was every bit the image that I had seen in photographs \u2014 baggy trousers, a sweatshirt, and his white hair standing up."}
{"id": "totten_facingthedanger", "title": "Facing the Danger: Interviews with 20 Anti-Nuclear Activists", "year": 1984, "seq": 2, "text": "I atm on, we went upstairs to his study. There were all these papms lying around, and he pointed to them and said \u201cLook limit I\u2019m working on this unified theory, and I\u2019ll never know d it has any meaning whatsoever.\u201d It was incredible \u2014 I really Mot the sense of a man who felt that his whole life had been a I allure. I think coloring everything was the fact that he had, of i nurse, been the one who initiated the Manhattan Project through his letter urging Roosevelt to investigate the possibility that a bomb could be made from uranium. Meeting him was certainly a great influence on my thinking. And over the years, as I stayed in touch with him by mail, I read what he was writing and listened to his efforts to warn people about the danger of nuclear weapons. I began to sense, increas\u00ac ingly, that I would never abandon that part of his concerns. This sense of responsibility was heightened when I went back to Cornell in 1949, because my principal Ph.D. advisor, Dr. Philip Morrison, had been very active in the Manhattan Project and he was under bitter attack for his advocacy of nuclear arms control. That was also the year when the Russians detonated their first bomb \u2014 and so Hans Bethe and others began to talk about the pressure to build a hydrogen bomb. So you see, all of these people around me were involved with nuclear weapons in one way or another. I knew the arms race that Einstein feared was about to take place, and I knew that it had to be contained in some way before those weapons could be used. This has been with me ever since; it\u2019s the basis of my real concern. I became convinced that there was an inadequate understanding of physics and mathematics by the general public, partially because physics has become so abstract."}
{"id": "totten_facingthedanger", "title": "Facing the Danger: Interviews with 20 Anti-Nuclear Activists", "year": 1984, "seq": 3, "text": "My wife and I first noticed that our baby was having difficulty sitting up \u2014 our pediatrician couldn\u2019t tell if anything was wrong, but I began to get very worried about it. As the baby got sicker, it produced an enormous amount of internal upset in me. I guess I felt that it was somehow my responsibility, or my wife\u2019s, or that I was doing something wrong.... Actually I had a very serious nervous breakdown as a result of that enormously awful experience. Watching as your child becomes increasingly unable to function, without knowing why, can just tear a person apart. We eventually found out that the baby had Tay Sachs disease, a rare genetic condition which could have been partial\u00ac ly induced by years of background radiation. The baby died within a year after that diagnosis. It made an enormous impression on me to see what it really means when there\u2019s suffering in a family \u2014 to see the effects of suffering on human life, beyond all the statistics on death and injury. That is an enormously terrible experience to go through. At that time, of course, I had no inkling that the disease could have been connected to radiation. But many years later, when I began to uncover the possibility of damage to babies from fallout, it occurred to me that my child may have died as a result of damage from x-rays received by my father, my wife or myself. And I do believe that my suffering contributed, in a sense, to my willingness to undergo an awful lot of attack and upset to speak out about these things. Just at the time I was finishing my Ph.D. at Cornell, I was ap\u00ac proached by Westinghouse Research Laboratories. I joined them in 1952 and began to work on ways of improving diagnostic x-ray technology."}
{"id": "totten_facingthedanger", "title": "Facing the Danger: Interviews with 20 Anti-Nuclear Activists", "year": 1984, "seq": 4, "text": "Segi had gathered World Health Organization statistics on cancer and leukemia rises, and his report showed a three to five-fold increase in leukemia in Japan after Hiroshima. In a sense, then, I began to feel that I had stumbled on an ear\u00ac ly effort to minimize the apparent effect of nuclear weapons on mankind, including their ability to produce leukemia. And when I realized that, I began to see that I would have to com\u00ac pletely devote myself to these issues. I wanted to expose the tremendous cover-up that I had come across \u2014 I wanted to make public the enormous health impact that fallout from nuclear weapons had already produced. Essentially, that meant I would have to set aside my work on fundamental particles. I decided to leave Westinghouse and to accept a job in the Department of Radiology at the University of Pittsburgh Medical School. You have to understand that my heart was still in trying to understand the nature of elementary particles. What makes the universe tick? What are the basic structures and how did they originate? This was my deepest intellectual satisfaction. This was my job. To give that up was a major wrench. The conflict between what I wanted to do and what I had to do was so over\u00ac whelming that I had to deliberately choose not to even look at the journals any more for years, because it would tear me apart. I suppose you could say that my decision was a sort of parallel to the decision Einstein made \u2014 writing articles on the danger of fallout, urging other scientists to warn the public, is\u00ac suing the manifestoes and holding the news conferences. This is a totally foreign kind of role to a scientist who really loves nothing more than to have his privacy and a quiet space to think."}
{"id": "totten_facingthedanger", "title": "Facing the Danger: Interviews with 20 Anti-Nuclear Activists", "year": 1984, "seq": 5, "text": "In order to keep testing bombs, the government had to keep the permissible levels of radiation in the environment high. The nuclear in\u00ac dustry and the government couldn\u2019t admit that nuclear reactors were exposing people to 500 millirems of radiation, enough to increase by sixfold the risk of leukemia to a first trimester fetus. So you see, the necessity to lie about the effects of nuclear weapons also forced them to lie about the effects of nuclear reactors for peaceful purposes. Thanks to John Gofman\u2019s work in 1970,1 learned for the first time that I had to look at infant mortality statistics around nuclear reactors. Infant mortality shows up sooner than cancer, you see. It shows up within a few months of a radiation release. I knew that I could use these arguments from reactors to argue against nuclear war, which is my real interest. A few more babies dying from radioactivity around nuclear reactors will not mean the end of the world; the real battle is for the mind of the public on the nature of nuclear weapons. So I determined, on my own, that in order to learn about what a war would really do, we would first have to look at what the bomb testing had done. Then we needed to look at what peaceful reactors had done to area residents during normal con\u00ac ditions and during accidents. And the easiest numbers to track were the ones on infant mortality. I knew that by touching on the deaths of babies, I would be entering a highly emotional issue. I would encounter opposition from doctors who gave x-rays to pregnant mothers, from public health and government agencies which had given their blessing to nuclear power, and from every scientist who had also done this. But I felt that the only way to expose the danger of nuclear war is to force the public to look at the statistics."}
{"id": "totten_facingthedanger", "title": "Facing the Danger: Interviews with 20 Anti-Nuclear Activists", "year": 1984, "seq": 6, "text": "I wanted to do work in my I mi la I f ield, though, so I applied for a summer research grant in l< oh well Park Memorial Cancer Research Institute in Buffalo, Mow York. I got the grant, and the work they assigned me to was to analyze the tri-state leukemia survey. I became pretty V nowledgeable about that survey, and so they asked me to stay mu tor the year. I didn\u2019t have any special interest in radiation at that time, you see. I was just trying to figure out ways to use math in order to be helpful. The survey, which had been done in New York, Maryland and Minnesota, followed sixteen million people over a three- vour period to find out what was increasing the leukemia rate. I upocialized in adult leukemias and the direct results of exposing people to ordinary diagnostic x-rays. And I began to get in\u00ac terested in the whole thing when I realized that leukemia is not a primary effect of radiation exposure \u2014 it\u2019s a secondary effect. The primary effect is to make a person age faster. Now, many cancers are old-age diseases. What is happening to us at this chronic low-level exposure to radiation is that we\u2019re aging f aster, and we\u2019re getting the old age diseases sooner. I first became involved in nuclear issues when a nuclear power plant was being planned for Barker, New York, which is within thirty miles of Buffalo. The citizen\u2019s group which was op\u00ac posing the plant called the Roswell Institute and asked for someone to come and speak before the county legislature on low-level radiation, and the Institute asked me to go. When I got to the hearing, I found that it had been set up; the speakers from the public came in, and the utility people im\u00ac mediately handed us the legislators\u2019 questions that we were sup\u00ac posed to answer that night."}
{"id": "totten_facingthedanger", "title": "Facing the Danger: Interviews with 20 Anti-Nuclear Activists", "year": 1984, "seq": 7, "text": "In every one of my books, there is some Barry Commoner 27 discussion of nuclear war. I\u2019ve also been interested from the beginning in the \u201cAtoms for Peace\u201d program, which was developed as a way of putting a friendly screen in front of nuclear weapons. One of the most interesting reports we did was an analysis of Project Chariot, the government\u2019s proposal to create a harbor in Alaska by blowing up an atom bomb. They were going to use the bomb because there were so few people on that stretch of Alaskan coast \u2014 but as we pointed out, the whole area there is traversed by Eskimo trails which are used for hunting and fishing. The Eskimos lived ecologically off of that whole area. The article we wrote analyzed the native lichens in that area, which are at the bottom of the food chain. We pointed out that lichens have a very heavy affinity for anything that falls on them, such as dust, and so they tend to be heavily contaminated by fallout. We were literally able to show in our study that there were already extraordinarily high levels of radioactivity from fallout in lichens, caribou and Eskimos. Project Chariot was ultimately blocked by the Eskimos. In fact, people who were up there told us that the Eskimo leaders were traveling around with copies of our report in their pockets. And on a wider scale, this was the experience that convinced many of us that the nuclear power problem and the nuclear war problem were ex\u00ac amples of a more general environmental crisis. My thinking about the interrelation between nuclear power and weapons is based on the realization that as long as you have nuclear power you\u2019re going to have the weapons. This is a very good reason for stopping nuclear power; the proliferation of power plants potentiates the proliferation of nuclear weapons."}
{"id": "totten_facingthedanger", "title": "Facing the Danger: Interviews with 20 Anti-Nuclear Activists", "year": 1984, "seq": 8, "text": "This is the patriotic thing to do.\u201d This was a complete reversal of my feelings at Berkeley. I had written a letter home to my parents once, right after the Hiroshima bomb was released, saying that while I was very uncertain about the future I was quite certain that I would never work on nuclear weapons. And there I was! As I spent more time at Los Alamos, I got more into the weapons design \u2014 in fact, I spent virtually all my time de\u00ac signing fission bombs with great enthusiasm and a sense of mis\u00ac sion. I had somehow seen the light, and my calling was to con\u00ac Ted Taylor 33 tinue developing nuclear weapons to make quite sure that war disappeared. I also found that I was good at what I was doing. But all of this fascinating work was coming together in a device designed to kill hundreds of thousands of people \u2014 that\u2019s its purpose. I thought that they insured a permanent peace. I thought that from now on war would be too irrational and too destructive for people to contemplate. That\u2019s what I kept saying to my wife and my mother, at least. I still don\u2019t know how much of it was just rationalizing to justify this fascinating work I was being exposed to as a young man. By the time I was twenty-five I had gotten on very close terms with some people I enormously admired \u2014 Enrico Fermi, Hans Bethe, Edward Teller and others. They were at Los Alamos at that time, trying to figure out how to make the H-bomb. Their interest in me and their support really negated the damage to my ego that happened when I flunked out of grad school. To have these men listening intently to me inspired a lot of con\u00ac fidence which has never left."}
{"id": "totten_facingthedanger", "title": "Facing the Danger: Interviews with 20 Anti-Nuclear Activists", "year": 1984, "seq": 9, "text": "The heat from the fireball was quite intense, as I remember, and it lasted a lot longer than I had expected. I had forgotten that a shock wave was going to come after the light, and so I got caught unaware; it was a very loud and sharp crack. I remember being very serious about it for the rest of the day. I was very worried that something like that bomb might go off over my head one day. When the Korean War broke out in 1950, I began to see that we were wrong, because we had not stopped war by any means. I decided that I should put my energies into using nuclear 34 Facing The Danger physics for peaceful purposes; so in 1956, I moved to a new company called General Atomic in San Diego. We had a gather\u00ac ing of physics stars that summer to try to decide on what this in\u00ac fant company should do. That was a very exciting summer. I was very much turned on by the idea of the peaceful atom, and I had no sense whatsoever that what I was doing was wrong. I worked at General Atomic very happily for seven years, designing a safe research reactor called TRIGA which was very successful, and then working on the applications of atomic energy in space. But in 1963, the Defense Department offered me a job that I really couldn\u2019t turn down. I was the first civilian in charge of nuclear testing at the Pentagon; I took the job because my work at General Atomic had convinced me that there was a lot we didn\u2019t know about nuclear explosions, and we\u2019d better damn well find out. It didn\u2019t matter which way you looked at it \u2014 from a military point of view or a humanist point of view \u2014 it was just the simple fact that here were these thousands of nuclear weapons lying around, and their effects were unknown."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1977-05-11", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1977-05-11 : Volume LXXIb, Issue 20", "year": 1977, "seq": 0, "text": "Last chance for the Seniors! Saturday Morning Inter-Fraternity Council Raft Ra ce on Otter Creek EC AC Division II Lacrosse Championships Saturday Afternoon Spring Concert behind the Field House\u2014sponsored by MCAB and the IFC 1 PM Road Apple 3:30 PM Chris Rhodes Band Free Beer with college I.D. block draw and food rebates. In its two week history, the proposal to institute popular elections of Forum officials has already been tabled twice. At their last meeting, the 1976-77 Forum voted that next year's Forum should properly decide the issue. The proposal, if adopted, would have made two major changes. The titles of chairman and vice- chairman would have been changed to president and vice- president for symbolic impact. The major change, however, was election of the top two of\u00ac ficers by the student body. In the original proposal, Carolla suggested candidates should already be members of and be nominated by the Forum. He also continued on p. 6 College Predicts Frats Will Die Out Soon By JIM LABE The College in a meeting of administration and fraternity officials last week announced that fraternities at Middlebury, which have existed since 1843, will probably \u201cdie out\u201d within the next few years. The announcement came in conjunction with an Ad\u00ac ministrative decision not to in\u00ac crease the room and board rebates for fraternity members nextyear on a level that would be equal with the percentage in\u00ac crease in the comprehensive fee. The action has touched off a battle between the college fraternities and the Ad\u00ac ministration. A similar battle occurred in 1974, when the College made an attempt to abolish fraternities. In a meeting of the Inter- Fraternity Council and several Administrative officials, Assistant Dean of Students Ar\u00ac nold McK innev said that \u201cThe College does not foresee fraternities existing in l() years.\u201d \u201cWe a re at (he point now where w'e have to consider the future of the College."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1977-05-11", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1977-05-11 : Volume LXXIb, Issue 20", "year": 1977, "seq": 1, "text": "Road Apple stated that they \u201cwould really like to play outside.\" Three months after the start of their search, Howe and Small finally had constructed a spring concert. Why does Middlebury have such a hard time booking good concerts? There are three main reasons: the remoteness of the campus, the limited budget and faciities, and, most importantly, the relationship with the necessary intermediary, the Don Law Agency. Little can be done about the first two problems. And the relationship with the Don Law Agency simply gives them total control. Howe feels trapped because \u201cwe don't have enough information to know how to deal, so we have to go to them.\u201d The drawback about working with the Don Law Agency is that the Agency is a promoter and not anagent. An agent simply sets up deak between bands and those whowant to stage concerts for a fee. A promoter likes to hire a hall, put on a show, promote it, and rake in big profits. As an afterthought, the promoter will act as an agent. Middlebury must throw itself at the feet of a promoter because the students demand the names of performers who only work tiirough large promoters. For settingup his own concert, Don Law can reap huge profits; for settingup a concert for anyone etee. they only get an agent\u2019s fee. They use colleges and other private organizations to fill in gapsin the tours they set up. This is the specific reason that Mid\u00ac dlebury has such difficulty getting high quality performers. Next fall, Howe and Small should have a new plan. They hope to enlist several other schools in a block-booking effort Block-booking would entail a group playing approximately four concerts in a row at four colleges like Middlebury. Hopefully, the schools involved in a block-booking venture could come up with a comprehensive list of preferred performers, prices and dates which, when submitted to the Don Law Agency, would receive active response.__ Roger McGuinn in Mead Chapel."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1977-05-11", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1977-05-11 : Volume LXXIb, Issue 20", "year": 1977, "seq": 2, "text": "The candidates seemed to dwell on the lack of communication among students, rather than between the students and administration. There were various suggestions for making students aware of what is happening on campus and for rallying student support, but there seemed to be an ignorance of student feelings that the administration is largely responsible for the communications gap. Whether it\u2019s true or not no one can truly say, but many students believe that a great many of our recent gripes and grumbles could have been avoided if we\u2019d been consulted, or even if \"The Administration\" made minimal efforts to have everyday--rather than scattered, official-contact with the Student Body. The new Student Forum should realize first that there is a lot of general grumbling going on, and next that much of it is due to the fact that most of us know our administrators only through gossip with other students. Forum members should try to get to know their constituents (goddumit, who elected \u2019em ennyhow.) and the administration. At the same time, the ad\u00ac ministration should realize that maybe if they got to know more students a little better, they might not earn the vicious gossip and cruelty we are always heaping on them--as individuals and as a collective whole. Even though the author of this editorial has gotten a lot of good editorial material from the blunders and will not be here next year tosee what happens, he hopes that everyone will try to be good next year and keep out of trouble, be nice and of course \"strive to be happy\". A warm summer and thawed feet <hould do us all a little good... Fraternity Living Fraternities are a part of Middlebury. Although sometimes they seem more dominant than they ought to be considering their minor constituency, they are as much a part of the College life as Proctor, as meal rebates, as Frisbees on a spring weekend, or as ten hours a day in the Library for the last month of the semester."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1977-05-11", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1977-05-11 : Volume LXXIb, Issue 20", "year": 1977, "seq": 3, "text": "Fraternity alumni constitute a large contingent among Middlebury\u2019s economic supporters; the College depends on the fraternities to house up to one hundred students who wouldn\u2019t fit anywhere else. Despite these factors, however, thb College seems to be interested in making the fraternity alternative less attractive than the College\u2019s offerings and far less economically feasibb than at the other New England Colleges with which Middlebury often compares itself. The Colle#.* should recognize the fraternity alternative as legitimate, or it should announce publicly its considerations for the future of fraternities at Middlebury. It seems obvious that a lot of problems on campus resu k from poor communication between the Administration and the Students; therefore, the Administration should start announcing its long-term as well as its short-term gdals and programs. The fraternity question offers a good chance for a smooth, bvelh aided futuristic resolution and plan. If we are to believe the Students and the Ad- minis tration--who both claim they want to be logical and solve the ptpble'm rather than prolong it-then it would seem that openness is the best way to deal with this matter. Other matters may then fall in line. Commentar y Ruminations on Place Holding By PETER LIGHTE Professor of History Leaving Middlebury will not be easy. My year here has been an unexpected pleasure, all the more so after having had two nightmarish tangles with the Oriental schoofe in the summers of 1972 and 1973. Despite my memories of those days, I chose to return. The decision is best ap\u00ac preciated as an escape from a year in Ohfa! The prospects were unsettling. Filling in for a seasoned pro, I was initially looked upon as a place holder. But the very intimidation of the task coupled with thevalie I place on the days of our lives engendered an enthusiasm I had never felt before."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1977-05-11", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1977-05-11 : Volume LXXIb, Issue 20", "year": 1977, "seq": 4, "text": "But it\u2019s not supportable to say we cannot come up with that figure. I think students have a right to be more informed with what goes on at tlie college. That doesn't mean I think they have a right to know everything I think there are some things that shouldn\u2019t be given out Tree ! II CHW Photos by Tom Arcidiacono and Richard Tarl ov Tony\u2019s Pizza -DELICIOUS- Italian Food and Pizza f Middlebury The Middlebury Campus The Middlebury Campus page 10 English Department Grows... continued from p. 3 instance, limiting the size of the classes leaves those students who do not gain admission to the courses they like feeling cheated. Alsothose turned away may turn to other popular departments, creating an overcrowding problem there. Limiting papers tends to \"water down the program,\u201d leaviigt he student little room for improvement. Additional faculty seems to be the- most plausible answer although even that solution runs ink) problems. The need for more faculty is especially urgent now because, according to Professor Mill, \"there are now fewer full\u00ac time Faculty (in the English Department) than when I came here 11 years ago\u2014and there were only 14(X) students then.\u201d Pack has designed a proposal which would compensate for flu cti at ions in enrollment A-ithin a department. He believes \"the college should establish a minimum student faculty ratio per department - For English it should be60 students a semester per p rofessor \u201d Deanof the Humanities Stanley Bates is aware of the problem, but has had little success in g a in in g more faculty.. The Teaching Resources Committee allocates faculty per department, taking both enrollment and program into consideration. But, as Bates stressed \u201cthey are bound by budget restraints.\u201d However, he added that \"ultimately if there is a solution\u2014it is more faculty.\u201d Professor Pack summed it up, \u201cAt a college like Middlebury, courses that require a degree of interpretation have to be recognized as such- English courses necessitate coversation."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1977-05-11", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1977-05-11 : Volume LXXIb, Issue 20", "year": 1977, "seq": 5, "text": "If we\u2019re not conversing it might as well be the University of Mic higan.\u201d Papers, along with individual participation, are an essential element in the departmental philosophy. Effective critisism both of the form and the content ..Midd Reviews Winter Term continued from p. 1 find it more difficult in this en\u00ac vironment. In reviewing Winter Term coursechanges, Leng said that he and Assistant to the Vice President for Academic Affairs John Emerson (Mathematics) found that a large majority of the drop\u2014adds were students dropping harder courses and enrolling in easier ones. Ac\u00ac cording to Leng, the better professors found enrollment declining in their classes because the course's work load was more than what a student wanted. Leng pointed out that it is difficult for faculty to work hard 1 if the students expressed a desire not to work hard. Minor structural changes that have been instituted in the past five years which were designed to solve thses problems have not helped said Leng. The Educational Council has received a great deal of positive and negative reactions from the faculty and students about Winter Term. The Council does not have any formal plan or proposal about the future of Winter Term at this time. What lies open to the status of Winter Term? Leng and Olinick feel that there is some agreement that this type of experience should be available in every colege curriculum. It seems unlikely at this point that it will tota fly be abolished. Leng believes that the problem is the college community achieving a consensus on the purpose of Winter Term. One possible option that is being considered is making it voluntary with only three nut of four Winter Terms. Another idea Olinick believes possible is changing it to a dif\u00ac ferent part of the year, perhaps in the beginning of the fall."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1977-05-11", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1977-05-11 : Volume LXXIb, Issue 20", "year": 1977, "seq": 6, "text": "Luciano Nicasio 78 and Bob Yeadon \u201980 polled off a double stealin the fourth inning, Nicasio sliding home with the third Middlebury run. Mike O'Hara, No. 5, at bat in the Lyndon State game Photo bv Gwendolyn Blaine Photo by Gwendolyn Blaine That was all the Middlebury batters could manage, but it was more than enough as Birsky scattered the six Williams hits and was never in serious trouble. In fact he seemed to get stronger as the game progressed, blazing through the last three batters to record the victory. In his last 26 innings, Birsky has allowed just two runs. Fortunately the hitters, who took a backseat on Wednesday, were able to recuperate in time to demolish Castleton on Thursday. They scored early and often, amassing six runs in the first four innings, on their way to a 12-9 win. These were the first runs the team had scored all year for right hander Rob Race 78. But as Race\u2019s luck would have it a sore ami prevented him from pitching with his usual effectiveness and he was unable to take advantage of this hitting support. He was really hammered by the opposition for the first time this year, allowing six runs ( five earned) on nine hits in just lour innings. Race was relieved with noouts in the fifth by Mike Souza 79. Souza started out shakily, giving up three runs in the sixth, as Castleton took a short-lived 9-7 lead. But he fired a shutout the rest of the way, allowing the Panthers' five run explosion in the seventh to carry the Pan\u00ac thers to victory. The big gun was co-captain Bob Carroll '78 who is showing signs of breaking his early season slump. Carroll drove home three runs with a single and a triple. Two home games remain: against Norwich on May 10th and against Albany on May 12th."}
{"id": "mississippilawjo62robe", "title": "Mississippi Law Journal Spring 1992 Book 1", "year": 1992, "seq": 0, "text": "Conclusion This article has dealt with the more notable differences between the existing Mississippi law of intestate succession, wills, and administration of estates, and the provisions of the proposed Mississippi Uniform Probate Code. It should be clearly understood that there are many other differences that have not been mentioned, and that the MUPC article dealing with protection of persons under disability has not been ad- dressed at all. However, it is obvious from what has been covered that the enactment of the MUPC would bring a multi- tude of very significant changes to the law of Mississippi. Few would contend that the law of Mississippi in these areas is perfect. Many governing statutes are over one hun- dred years old. Numerous changes have occurred in Mississip- pi in the interim. While the legislature has made significant changes from time to time, many would contend that more needs to be done to improve the state of the law. By the same token, many people do not think that the official Uniform Probate Code is perfect. After some twenty years, only fifteen states have adopted it. Further, many states have adopted parts of it, while presumably rejecting the other parts. The heavily revised Article II, which is a part of the MUPC, has not yet been adopted by any state. Therefore, for those who believe that the law of Mississip- pi needs further improvement, the issue would appear to be whether the improvement should come in the form of specific statutes designed to correct specific problems, or whether the better course is to repeal all of the statutes and replace them with the MUPC. In other words, if the entire MUPC is enacted, most of Mississippi's current law on this subject will be repealed. If one believes that most of the current law is objectionable then this is the desired result."}
{"id": "mississippilawjo62robe", "title": "Mississippi Law Journal Spring 1992 Book 1", "year": 1992, "seq": 1, "text": "Introduction Presently, every state has some type of juvenile court or special treatment for child criminals. However, each state also recognizes that some juveniles may need more severe punish- ment than the maximum punishment available in juvenile courts. In recognition of this fact, all of the states have some type of waiver process, whereby, a juvenile may be removed from juvenile court and transferred to criminal court. Transfer of a juvenile to criminal court may be accomplished by judicial waiver, legislative waiver or prosecutorial waiver. However, special points should be considered in deciding whether to try a juvenile as an adult. First, generally the punishment a juvenile receives in juvenile court is less than the punishment he would receive in criminal court. Although, it is possible that a juvenile who has a long prior record in juvenile court may be treated more leniently if he is trans- ferred to criminal court. Second, juveniles do not have the same mental capacity as adults. Every person goes through a series of mental stages called egocentrism, before he or she becomes an adult. Thirdly, the possibility of a class bias 95 96 MISSISSIPPI LA W JO URNAL [vol. 62 should be considered in the transfer decision. Many juveniles are from lower class families and are members of a minority group. Further, prison experience is typically more harsh and less helpful to youths than the experience in juvenile training centers. The latter provide better training to help youth fit into society after being released. Finally, a very important consideration in the transfer decision is that a juvenile may receive capital punishment if he is tried as an adult. Egocen- trism should be a factor in this capital punishment decision also. This comment will give a brief history of the juvenile court system, discuss the three methods of waiving a juvenile case to criminal court and discuss the points that need to be considered in the transfer decision."}
{"id": "thefriendsofthebridegroombobhallstromocr", "title": "The Friends Of The Bridegroom Bob Hallstrom Ocr", "year": 1991, "seq": 0, "text": "It is much easier to determine what the pearl is not than it is to identify what the pearl is. Christ is not the pearls as there is only one Christ and Christ is not a commodity to be bought and sold in any marketplace. Salvation is not the pearl as salvation is the free gift of God and what is given by God cannot be bought or sold as in a marketplace. The church is not the pearl as the church is not 14 hidden from man. It may be a mystery to some but certainly it is not hidden. The man is not the general population of the world, Israel, or the church; the man is Christ and the pearl of great price is Israel. In the previous parable, the treasure in the field was Israel and so it is in this parabie as in this parable. The man (Christ) was seeking goodly pearls from among all the inhabitants of the world, and having found Israel, \" He \"went and sold (gave) all that He had (His life), and bought (redeemed) it,\" as in the previous parable. Christ is the redeemer of Israel (pearl) and Saviour of the entire world. Christ has paid the price for Israel and the world. He came and died on the cross, paying the price to redeem the only nation on earth that was under the curse of the law, and thus the only people who could be bought back or redeemed, Israel (His treasure and pearl); and to purchase salvation for the entire world (all pearls). Scripture abounds with factual evidence that Israel is the bride of Christ, God\u2019s peculiar treasure, hidden treasure, pre\u00ac cious living stones, and the one pearl of great price. (For a complete study on the issue of the parables con\u00ac cerning the kingdom of God refer to the author\u2019s book entitled 'The Parables of Matthew 1 3.\") BODY OF CHRIST The Church Scripture contains no direct evidence that the church is the bride of Christ."}
{"id": "thefriendsofthebridegroombobhallstromocr", "title": "The Friends Of The Bridegroom Bob Hallstrom Ocr", "year": 1991, "seq": 1, "text": "Ephesians, chapter 5, is often referred to as proof that the church will be the bride of Christ, but under close examination, such a conclusion is not warranted. This is a story of the relationship between a husband and his wife, a married woman ~ not a relationship between a bridegroom and his future bride. In biblical days, bridegrooms and their future brides may never see each other before the wedding day. A case in point is Isaac and Rebecca. How can two people love each other as Christ loved the church when they have never even seen 15 each other? Even today, newlyweds do not love each other as Christ loved (agaped) the church; love in a marriage grows with time. Marriage does not start out as \"one flesh\" (Gen 2:24), but the goal is \"to become one flesh\" and for two people \"to become one\" takes time. Christ, as the head of the body, loves the body, and man as the \"head of the wife,\" should likewise, strive to love his wife as he loves his own body. Just because Christ loved the church does not mean that the church is the bride of Christ. There is little controversy over the definition of the church or the body of Christ; however, for the purposes of this paper it will be considered a given biblical fact that \"Christ is the head of the body, the church,\" and that 'the church is the body of Christ.\" Col 1:18,24; Eph 1:22-23, 5:23. Many people would conclude from the above that since the church is the body of Christ, the church is the bride of Christ. This is a vivid example of an illogical conclusion that is not supported by the statement given. Another example of illogic would be to conclude from the same statement that the church or the body of Christ is Christ."}
{"id": "thefriendsofthebridegroombobhallstromocr", "title": "The Friends Of The Bridegroom Bob Hallstrom Ocr", "year": 1991, "seq": 2, "text": "\" Isa 60:14 FRIENDS OF THE BRIDEGROOM In the beginning of this book it was noted that John 3:29 establishes three major figures at a wedding ceremony: 1 ) the bride, 2) the bridegroom, and 3) the friends of the bridegroom. The bridegroom and the bride had already been addressed and now it is time to take a look at the friends of the Bridegroom. In ancient Israel customs, the friends of the bridegroom played an important part in wedding ceremonies and sometimes even conducted negotiations between parents of the bride and groom. In this regard, the friends of the bridegroom were well respected and very close to the bridegroom. In many cases the groom never saw the bride before the marriage and in these cases the duties of friends was extreme\u00ac ly important. Among their responsibilities was the requirement to examine the prospective bride and determine whether she was physically and mentally fit. It may also have been the friends responsibility to examine and exhibit the tokens of the bride's purity according to the law of Deut 22:13-22. Once it was determined that the prospective bride was chaste and otherwise suitable for marriage the friends rejoiced in triumph over having found someone who was marriageable as their character and the happiness of their friend was at stake. Once selected, the friends would act as a messenger between the Groom and a the family of the bride conveying messages one to the other. The friends were responsible for the seven day wedding feast insuring that all went well and if necessary, having investigated the bride before marriage, they defended the chastity and character of the bride. Sometimes the friends even stayed in a room near the newlyweds to protect them from injury. 22 Thus we see the importance of the friends of the Bridegroom but this does not reveal their identity."}
{"id": "transferofpowervol6", "title": "The Transfer of Power 1942-7. Volume 6 The post-war phase: new moves by the Labour Government 1 August 1945 \u2013 22 March 1946 (Constitutional Relations Between Britain and India)", "year": 1976, "seq": 0, "text": "It was generally held that the approach should be made by the parties to the Governors and not by the Governors to the parties. 1 (d) Governors were generally agreed that Provincial elections should be held as soon as possible, and a majority of them seemed to think that they should be held simultaneously or nearly so. With some exceptions, Governors thought Provincial elections should be held before Ministries were formed. In reply to the GOVERNOR OF ASSAM, the VICEROY said that he did not contemplate an amendment of the law so as to compel the dissolution of Provincial Legislatures. The decision to dissolve them would therefore rest with Governors in their discretion. 1 (e) It seemed that there would be no great difficulty about the removal of the ban on Congress organisations with the possible exception of the Forward Bloc, about which the Home Member said there was some doubt. Governors were in favour of maintaining the present policy for the release of political AUGUST 1945 17 prisoners and detenus unless Ministries came into office, in the Section 93 Provinces, in which case these matters would be largely for the Ministries. THE VICEROY added that if the Governors\u2019 views were accepted there would certainly be a loss of efficiency, and delays in planning for development. In the Provinces the elections would take up a great deal of the time of the officials, and at the Centre it would be difficult to get the Executive Council to take decisions on big issues. He recognised that this might be inevitable. At the same time he felt that we should, if possible, have in our minds something beyond a vague idea that after the elections Jinnah might be in a better frame of mind. It was unlikely that Jinnah would co-operate except on his own terms."}
{"id": "transferofpowervol6", "title": "The Transfer of Power 1942-7. Volume 6 The post-war phase: new moves by the Labour Government 1 August 1945 \u2013 22 March 1946 (Constitutional Relations Between Britain and India)", "year": 1976, "seq": 1, "text": "THE VICEROY explained that if Ministries resumed office in the Provinces, there might, in his opinion, be some advantage in replacing or supplementing the National Defence Council by a Council of a new kind. If the Provincial Premiers and four or five ministers from the States agreed to serve, there would be a fairly compact body which could consider and advise on war problems (e.g., coal, cloth, and food) like the present National Defence Council, and could also deal with post-war development. It could be consulted on big prob- lems on which co-operation between the Centre and the Provinces is essential, e.g., the Educational Report, Road Development, Industrial Planning, Agricul- tural Planning, and the Bhore Committee\u2019s Report. It would be a purely advisory body, but if a \u201c\u2018political\u201d Executive Council were out of the question, Provincial Premiers might feel that through it they were assisting in framing Central policy on matters of general importance. The Viceroy asked Governors to think this matter over with a view to discussion at the next meeting. \u00a9 Printed on p. 18, c 18 THE TRANSFER OF POWER MEMORANDUM BUDGET In Provinces at present under Section 93, expenditure is authorised by a \u201cBudget\u201d sanctioned by the Governor in his discretion. If a Ministry comes into power, this authorisation ceases to be valid; the Ministry must obtain voted supply for anything they spend. They may incur expenditure in anticipation of sanction by the Legislature\u2014 and Audit will allow this\u2014but they must get their Grants passed by the Legislature. It is impossible to close the accounts on the day before the Ministry assume office (unless it be 31st March); therefore nobody can say how much money the Governor has spent and how much the Ministers must get authority to spend. Therefore, before the end of the year in which they assume office, the Ministry must get a budget passed for that year even if it be only a rough one, despite the previous authorisation by the Governor for the whole year."}
{"id": "transferofpowervol6", "title": "The Transfer of Power 1942-7. Volume 6 The post-war phase: new moves by the Labour Government 1 August 1945 \u2013 22 March 1946 (Constitutional Relations Between Britain and India)", "year": 1976, "seq": 2, "text": "For obvious reasons the Muslims in these areas have a good deal to lose by Pakistan. They are politically dominant now, and though they have minority problems, they can keep them under control. If Pakistan became a reality in the form in which Jinnah professes to want it, the Punjab would have minority problems which might be uncontrollable. The Sikhs who form a more or less solid block in the middle of the Punjab, would never acquiesce in their inclusion in a Muslim Sovereign State; and the Punjabi Hindus who are more widely scattered but are in a majority in the eastern districts, would also have a great deal to say. Most of the Governors believed that the crudity of Jinnah\u2019s ideas ought to be exposed. But there is no easy way of doing so. There seems little doubt that the League will win most of the Muslim seats at the elections, since the question for the average Muslim voter will be put in the form of whether he prefers Islam to Hinduism. I do not see how a Committee of Indian politicians, an impartial Committee of foreigners, or a mixed body including both British and foreign members, could demolish Pakistan. Jinnah would undoubtedly boycott the proceedings\u2014the League have adopted the Congress technique in most matters\u2014and we should simply get recommendations based on evidence which Jinnah would represent as inadequate. 5. We shall therefore, I think, have to hold the elections for the Central Assembly and the Legislatures in the Section 93 Provinces, and see what happens. I have discussed the matter with the Commander-in-Chief, and he thinks that the elections will not affect operations or upset the Army in any way. If Ministries return to power in the Section 93 Provinces, we may in time be able to build something on them."}
{"id": "transferofpowervol6", "title": "The Transfer of Power 1942-7. Volume 6 The post-war phase: new moves by the Labour Government 1 August 1945 \u2013 22 March 1946 (Constitutional Relations Between Britain and India)", "year": 1976, "seq": 3, "text": "We are required to observe certain con- ditions, e.g., the Gurkha battalions are not sent overseas except on active service, and they all have permanent accommodation in hill stations so that the men are not kept for long periods in the plains between spells of duty on the Frontier. The Gurkha units have always had British Officers and we know that the Nepal Government would at present object to any other arrangement. We have before very long to determine the future strength and composition of the Indian Army, and we cannot foretell what the attitude of an Indian Government responsible for Defence policy would be to the Gurkha units. Nor do we know what the relations of the Nepal Government with such an Indian Government would be. The Indian attitude must remain a matter of speculation. The Gurkhas are Hindus, and much would depend on the form of the Constitution, the state of communal feeling, and the extent of the pressure, e.g., from the Punjab and the Mahratta areas, for the exclusion of \u201cforeigners\u201d from the Indian Army. Professional advice would favour the retention of the Gurkhas, but the Indian Government might or might not be guided by it. The Indian Government might wish to exclude Gurkhas altogether, in which event the Nepal Government would probably expect His Majesty\u2019s Government to employ them, since service in the Army is the livelihood of a considerable pro- portion of the population. If the Indian Government decided to retain the Gurkha units at their old strength or in reduced numbers, it is probable that they would insist on their being officered in the same way as the rest of the Indian Army, that is by Indian Officers and British Officers seconded from the British Service. They would probably make Gurkhas eligible for commissions both in Gurkha and Indian units, but we cannot be sure of this."}
{"id": "transferofpowervol6", "title": "The Transfer of Power 1942-7. Volume 6 The post-war phase: new moves by the Labour Government 1 August 1945 \u2013 22 March 1946 (Constitutional Relations Between Britain and India)", "year": 1976, "seq": 4, "text": "General\u2014Governors considered that His Majesty\u2019s Government\u2019s pro- posals had generated widespread interest and goodwill and that we should AUGUST 1945 35 endeavour to retain the initiative and divert political! energy into legitimate channels. They then examined possibility of action at Centre or in Provinces or both. 3. Future of Central Government.\u2014Possibilities put to Conference were: (1) attempt to form \u201cpolitical\u201d Executive Council on lines discussed at Simla but without Muslim League; (2) retention of present Executive Council; or (3) reconstruction of Executive Council with a view to improve its efficiency and ensure the respect if not the support of the Legislature and the political parties. Governors advised definitely against (1) and (3). They felt, though some of them with regret from their own Provincial standpoint, that dis- regard of Muslim League would be unsound and dangerous. They also felt that if we could not establish \u201cpolitical\u201d executive radical change in present Council would be unpopular and unwise. They therefore advised in favour of (2) subject of course to any individual changes I might think necessary. 4. Timing of Central elections \u2014All Governors except Governor of Punjab favoured Central elections before end of 1945 so as to produce new Assembly for next budget session. Owing to condition of rolls Council of State elections cannot be held until after budget session. Punjab Ministers and Governor fear effect of early Assembly elections on relative positions of Unionist Party and Muslim League in Punjab. 5. Restoration of Ministries in Section 93 Provinces and timing of Provincial elections. \u2014All Section 93 Governors except Bombay favoured early Provincial election and would prefer formation of Ministries to follow and not (repeat not) precede elections. Governor of Bombay said he would like Ministry to take Office first and elections to follow but would fall in with any general policy. Governors of Bombay, United Provinces, Bihar, the Central Provinces said that if they were approached now or after announcement of Provincial elections by party leaders with proof of Parliamentary backing and guarantee of support for war effort they could not (repeat not) oppose the formation of Ministries before elections were held."}
{"id": "transferofpowervol6", "title": "The Transfer of Power 1942-7. Volume 6 The post-war phase: new moves by the Labour Government 1 August 1945 \u2013 22 March 1946 (Constitutional Relations Between Britain and India)", "year": 1976, "seq": 5, "text": "General\u2014There was strong feeling that Jinnah\u2019s attitude was obstructive, that dangers and disadvantages of Pakistan both from political and economic point of view should be exposed, and that in particular His Majesty\u2019s Govern- ment should make it clear that they are unable to agree to partition of India on purely Muslim vote. Various methods of bringing Pakistan into the open were suggested, e.g., an examination by Indian politicians; the appointment of a mixed Commission including British and possibly American experts; the appointment of a fact-finding Committee composed entirely of foreign experts; or the formation of a Constituent Assembly. One or two Governors thought that a further declaration by His Majesty\u2019s Government should be made to indicate clearly that Jinnah\u2019s idea of partition on a Muslim vote would not be accepted by His Majesty\u2019s Government. I do not think any of these expedients would work as Jinnah would demand a declaration by His Majesty\u2019s Government of self-determination for the Muslims before the League parti- cipated in any discussions or assisted any enquiring body, while new declara- tion by His Majesty\u2019s Government at this juncture would precipitate crisis without helping us much. 3. Central Government.\u2014Much as I should like to establish a \u201cpolitical\u201d executive I agree with the final view of Governors that it is impossible to do so at present. An executive dominated by prominent Congress politicians with a non-League Muslim element would not work and would lead us into grave dangers. On the other hand I do not altogether accept the Governors\u2019 view 38 THE TRANSFER OF POWER about reconstruction of the Executive Council. I shall have to think this over and report to you again. Some of my present Indian colleagues behaved badly during the recent political proposals and several of them are incompetent."}
{"id": "transferofpowervol6", "title": "The Transfer of Power 1942-7. Volume 6 The post-war phase: new moves by the Labour Government 1 August 1945 \u2013 22 March 1946 (Constitutional Relations Between Britain and India)", "year": 1976, "seq": 6, "text": "I hope this prognosis is not correct, and that we may still have a decently representative interim Government of India in place of the present Executive Council, and without waiting for long- drawn-out discussions over a permanent Constitution. An early date for holding elections in all Provinces we should welcome from every point of view. New Provincial Governments, following these elections, may create an atmosphere for a fresh attempt to reach an interim solution, and it may be more successful than the Simla Conference, especially if the procedure I recommend, namely one based on territorial units and representation of Provincial Governments, were to be followed.\u201d As regards a permanent solution, Mr. Rajagopalachariar presumes that the Labour Government will follow the plan adumbrated in the 1942 Declaration, and suggests that the time-table and procedure should be modified as follows: \u201cLet Provincial elections be held on any early date. Then let each Provincial Assembly vote on the issue of forming a union. We may be sure that at least seven Provinces will vote for forming an Indian Union. All Provinces voting in this manner should proceed with the election of members to the Constitution- making body by the method of proportional representation, and the body so formed should proceed to frame the Constitution for a union. We will thus 1 This summary is reprinted from India and Burma News Summary for the week ending 9 August 1945 issued by the Information Department, India and Burma Offices, p. 5. 2 Sir S. Cripps was reported by the U.P.A. to have said that the Labour government would imme- diately pursue their aims for a permanent settlement of the Indian question and to have strongly implied that new action would be taken very soon \u2018probably within a month\u2019. A footnote in the India and Burma News Summary reads: \u201cSir Stafford Cripps, President of the Board of Trade, made the following statement on August 7: \u201cI am sorry that, owing to quite false reports of an interview which did not take place, certain misconceptions have arisen in India as to my views on the immediate situation."}
{"id": "transferofpowervol6", "title": "The Transfer of Power 1942-7. Volume 6 The post-war phase: new moves by the Labour Government 1 August 1945 \u2013 22 March 1946 (Constitutional Relations Between Britain and India)", "year": 1976, "seq": 7, "text": "I can well imagine that volume of interest displayed here in the question of executing these long deferred death sentences is negligible in comparison with the agitation against it in India and you must be experiencing considerable anxiety as to whether and to what degree you are called upon to exercise your power to modify the sentences. 3. I fully recognise that there is much to be said for letting the law take its course. The prisoners have been duly convicted after the most thorough hearing and re-hearing of the charges against them, and the appeals which were made on points of law have been carried to and rejected by the highest tribunal. As a matter of policy I recognise that it is essential to protect the police by ensuring that brutal attacks upon them are visited with adequate punishment, and it is no less desirable to avoid encouraging the belief that persistent use of the law\u2019s delays will finally be rewarded by a mitigation of the original sentence. 4. But while allowing all this there are other considerations which I feel bound to mention at this stage. It is now almost exactly three years since the original crime was committed and for over 2} years these persons have been under sentence of death. That is an inordinate length of time in the eyes of public opinion here. It has to be borne in mind also that the majority if not all were cases of constructive murder and there was no evidence of premeditation. The popular demand is not that the sentences should be remitted but only that the death sentences should be commuted as in the case of their fellow-prisoners. 5. There are also considerations of a more political nature of which I feel particularly conscious at the present time."}
{"id": "transferofpowervol6", "title": "The Transfer of Power 1942-7. Volume 6 The post-war phase: new moves by the Labour Government 1 August 1945 \u2013 22 March 1946 (Constitutional Relations Between Britain and India)", "year": 1976, "seq": 8, "text": "But they will allow the law to take its course and will try by Court-martial the leaders and those who were guilty of particularly heinous crimes. The offence of going over to the enemy and fighting against his former comrades is the most serious that a soldier can commit. It is punishable with death by the laws of almost all countries, and those who have committed this offence and been recaptured can claim no rights as belligerents or prisoners of war. The Government of India feel however that allowance must be made for the circumstances in which the rank and file found themselves placed after their capture in Malaya and Burma. From that date they were in no position to learn the truth of the progress of the war or to hear any news but false and propagandist Japanese reports. Some of them were misled by this propaganda or gave way to pressure or the desire for better treatment and joined the enemy with no motives beyond an immediate improvement in their living conditions. Those men therefore who seem to have been merely misguided\u2014 and they are the great majority\u2014will be treated with clemency. There can, of course, be no question of retaining in the Indian Army anyone who has violated the soldiers\u2019 code and betrayed his companions. Men of this category will therefore be discharged, but, as an act of grace, they will be given leave with pay for 42 days, and will not be required to refund the allowances paid to their families during the time they were in Japanese hands and in Japanese pay. This will be the treatment of the majority of those who joined the enemy. But there are some who were so imbued with enemy propaganda that their immediate release would be a danger to security."}
{"id": "transferofpowervol6", "title": "The Transfer of Power 1942-7. Volume 6 The post-war phase: new moves by the Labour Government 1 August 1945 \u2013 22 March 1946 (Constitutional Relations Between Britain and India)", "year": 1976, "seq": 9, "text": "Caroe, omitted.] 20 Field Marshal Viscount Wavell to Mr Pethick-Lawrence L/PO/10/22 PRIVATE AND SECRET No. 30 THE VICEROY S HOUSE, NEW DELHI, 12 August 1945 Hostilities against Japan are likely to end about six months earlier than my Departments here expected, and there will be a good many problems for which we are not yet fully prepared. As soon as the demand for munitions stops, the Ordnance factories will be idle, and a very large labour force will be out of work. The same difficulty will arise to some extent in private industries doing war work, though some of them (e.g., the cotton textiles industry) can con- tinue to work multiple shifts to meet civilian needs. We had hoped to be able AUGUST 1945 59 to see the end coming in time to taper off production and the change from war to peace would have been less of a shock. Another immediate problem will be the winding up of the Supply Department contracts. An elaborate procedure has been worked out for the application of break clauses, and for payment for half finished products and raw materials. But I shall be surprised if in Indian conditions this procedure works smoothly. Many other problems will occur to you, and apart from those concerned with the winding up process we have to consider the resumption of peace-time activities curtailed or suspended during the war, and our various development schemes. My Central Depart- ments which have worked under great strain during the war years, and are not very well staffed, are in for a bad time. I will do what I can to see that the most urgent problems are dealt with systematically. I have written to Provincial Governors drawing their attention to the probable effect of this sudden ending of the war, for the Provinces will have similar problems of their own. 2."}
{"id": "us-policy-towards-the-use-of-iraqi-chemical-weapons", "title": "US policy towards the use of Iraqi chemical weapons 1988", "year": 1988, "seq": 0, "text": "UN action would be more immediate but is problematic. (Possinie UN options are Gescribe\u00e9 at Tab 9.) As a first step at the UN, we anc several of our allies or the Security Council (UK, FRG, Japan) requested on Sepremdec 1z that the UR Secretary General sence a tear of experts to Turkey and Iraq on an urgent basis to investigate reports of Cw use. UNSC Resolution 620 (1986) calls for such investigations when use of chemical weadons in violation of internationel lav is reportec. Wwe are also seeking support for this initiative fre- the Soviets, Chinese, ano others Council members. Assuming Cw use ty Iraq against the <urds is sufficiently Gocumentec, we could then seek Council agreement to take certain actions. The strongest response (an@ most \u00a2ifficule to achieve) would bv\u00a2 mancgatory sanctions under Chapter VII of the UN Charter. nce: this authority, for example, the ON could impose a total embargo of all exports to Iraq of chemicals and chemical processing ecuioment. The imposition of mandatory UN sanctions would recuire automatic participation by members in the embarco an\u00e9 would thus eliminate for many countries the neec to seek Gomestic statutory authorities for such action. However, there have been very few cases of mandatory ganctions in UN history end strong orposition would be expected. Possible alternetives inclu\u00e9e Council con\u00e9emnation wf Iraq, 4 call on Iraq to Gismantle Cr production facilities, or a renewed call on Membe: states to control exports to Iraq of chemicals ano equiprent used to manufacture CW. There are potentially significant benefits to 4 multinational approach. It would make Iraqi CW use less of a bilateral issue ano Gemonstrate that the international community is prepared to take forceful action against Iraq. It would also strengthen the international standard against Ch use and thus bolster the credibility of our global CW non-proliferetion policy. u.s. efforts to organize UN action against [rag alceaay have triggered a negative Iraqi reaction."}
{"id": "us-policy-towards-the-use-of-iraqi-chemical-weapons", "title": "US policy towards the use of Iraqi chemical weapons 1988", "year": 1988, "seq": 1, "text": "(* 444\" FINNEESTLAN HSA A ww. -j3- -- Egyptian forces employed chemicals in the Yemeni civil war during the 1960s. -- There have been occasional, unconfirmed reports of CW vse in Ethiopia and Angola. prafted:INR/PMA: CJefferson/ChcKee:7-8869:9/9/88 peepee BNHARERIOD VO STRAITS Y Overview of the Kurdish Insurgency The Kurds and their Insurgency. A largely tribally organized people of some 15 million, spread mainly in a contiguous area in eastern Turkey, northern Iraq, and north-western Iran, the Kurds have historically formed an indigestible lump in the states in which they reside. Kurdish nationalism, however, has been espoused by only a fraction of the Kurdish population; tribes traditionally opposed to the paramount rebel leaders have. provided loyalist fighters for the governments combatting insurgency. Differences in dialect also have divided. the Kurds and there has been little effort to combine with Kurds in neighboring states to form a wider national movement. The strength of central governments in Iraq, Turkey, and Iran has thus been a major determining element in how serious Kurdish dissidence has been in each state. : wee Iraa In Iraq, suppression of the Kurds was a disaster waiting to happen. Forming sone 4 million of Iragi'\u2019s 18 million population, a large proportion of the Kures in the mountains of northern Irag have historically been at odds with the central qivernment. The military balance of power between these two opponents gradually shifted. By 1975, armed with Soviet supplied weapons, Saddam Hussein's regime so dominated the conflict that even Iranian military assistance was unable to prevent the rout of an insurgency that had continued for over & decade and a half in the hills of northern Iraq under the tribal leadership of the Barzanis. The Algiers accord of 1975 confirmed the defeat of the Barzanis ard their aggregation of Kur@ish clans and tribes. It led to the resettlement of some of the Kurdish population away from the borders with Turkey and Iran."}
{"id": "us-policy-towards-the-use-of-iraqi-chemical-weapons", "title": "US policy towards the use of Iraqi chemical weapons 1988", "year": 1988, "seq": 2, "text": "The remnants of the Barzani organization, egged on by Khomeini's regime and with Syrian assistance, took advantage of the outbreak of the Iran-Iraq war to resume the insurgency in northern Iraq. Saddam Hussein's regime attempted to maintain light control of the Kurdish area through playing off the Barzanis and their traditional rivals, while pelicing the area with locally recruited National Defense Battalions; its crack A SPeRIGK 2 LIT EGADD 2 0 TRICE troops were reserved for policy allowed Kurdish i =>) = use against the main enemy, Iran. This nsurgents great freedom of action in the north, forming a fifth column behind Iraqi lines when Iran launched attacks across after Baghdad's negotiat the border in the region in 1985. Also, fons with Barzani\u2019s traditional rival Jelal Talabani broke down, the Talabanis joined in the insurgency. 19 1987, however, as the Iraqis began to turn the tide of battle against Iran, Saddan Hussein opened a new resettlement campaign to move disside land on the edge of the nt Kurds out of the mountains into flat desert. This campaign involved the use of chemical weapons. It was clear that a3 soon as the battle against Iran permitted, he would settle accounts with the Kurds. Thus, with the ceasefire in August 1988, Iraq threw the full force of its regulac for insurgency once and for resettlement policies. and Iran of nearly 100,0 At the same time, Sa ces into the Kurdish area to put down the all and to enforce even more rigorous This has caused the flight into Turkey 00 Kurds. Adam is doing away with the National Defense Battalions, sending joyalist Kurds instead into the reqular army. This will make sure that the traditional tribal leaders no longer have armed men who could respond to their call. As a result, the customary bases of Kurdish power in the north are being broken and military defiance by the Kurds will become far more difficul c \u2014 t in Iraq. 2 eR 3 LIME EAO-1 CO EE IOT ORES \u00a5 FIMIAAYS AIUTHRENTD 2 ERITREA Y Iran In Iran the Kurdish problem has been less significant, partly because Kurds there number only some 2 million."}
{"id": "Mobilization", "title": "CMH Pub 72-32 Mobilization: A World War II Commemorative Pamphlet", "year": 1994, "seq": 0, "text": "SULLIVAN General, United States Army Chief of Staff Mobilization in World War II The modern process of preparing armies for war originated in the middle of the nineteenth century. The recruitment of volunteers to fill the ranks no longer sufficed. Governments turned to conscription, cre- ated huge forces, and harnessed their national economies to conduct war. The word mobilization was first used in the 1850s to describe the preparation of the army of Prussia for deployment. The American Civil War marked the appearance in the United States of the draft and mass armies, along with the organization of productive resources to sustain them. The volunteer tradition of the minutemen was on its way to becoming little more than a sacred memory, and the logistical sim- plicity of the American Revolution was gradually falling by the way- side. The era of mobilization\u2014 the reallocation of a nation's resources for the assembly, preparation, and equipping of forces for war\u2014 had arrived. The very size of the forces assembled during the Civil War, with millions of men under arms at one time or another, bespoke a new era. Moreover, the principle of a national military obligation was success- fully asserted by both sides, and the Confederacy sought to organize its economy to prosecute the war. In the years that followed, as the United States became an industrial power with interests beyond its borders, this growing stature and the wartime experience in Cuba, the Philippines, and along the Mexican border compelled Congress and military leaders to think more about mobilization issues. In 1903 the Army acquired a General Staff, whose mission included planning for mobilization and defense. Thereafter, signs of a broader conception of the Army's role appeared in revised field service regulations and in training exercises involving ever-larger troop organizations. World War I The United States went to war on the side of the Allies in April 1917 without stockpiles of equipment or plans for creating them."}
{"id": "Mobilization", "title": "CMH Pub 72-32 Mobilization: A World War II Commemorative Pamphlet", "year": 1994, "seq": 1, "text": "Goethals of Panama Canal fame in charge. The process forced the Army to settle its own questions of priority before dealing with the board. After the bureaus resolved their internal priori- ties, they sent their requests to the A rmy priorities officer in Goethals' Purchase, Traffic, and Storage Division. There, conflicts among bureaus were resolved before requests went to the War Industries Board. Though success was a long time coming and the effort was always hindered by a lack of data regarding requirements and resources, the board, under Baruch, went a long way toward achieving the central control needed to manage the wartime economy. The industrial performance of the nation in support of mobiliza- tion was remarkable. At the war's end, the United States had an army of over 3.5 million and huge equipment surpluses. There was no longer any question about the nation's ability to marshal the resources for war. As logistics historian James Huston noted, the United States \"had revealed the greatest war-making capacity that the world had ever seen.\" Still unclear was the nation's willingness to learn the war's lessons about preparedness. It was plain that the materiel side of mobilization was the most costly, complex, and time consuming. The war, Assistant Secretary of War Benedict C rowel I said, had \"upset the previous opin- ion that adequate military preparedness is largely a question of trained manpower.\" Thelnterwar Years The next two decades saw the first serious peacetime efforts to deal with shortcomings on the materiel side, but a full awareness of the challenge came only gradually. The National Defense Act of 4 June 1920 charged the assistant secretary of war with planning for industrial mobilization and responsibility for the War Department's procurement. The act represented a first step toward recognizing that modern warfare, with its demands for huge mechanized ground forces armed with sophisticated weapons and the ability to move over large fronts, demanded that the entire national economy be harnessed."}
{"id": "Mobilization", "title": "CMH Pub 72-32 Mobilization: A World War II Commemorative Pamphlet", "year": 1994, "seq": 2, "text": "Recognizing the scope of this relationship between the economy and the capacity to make war, Baruch suggested in the 1920s that mobilization be placed on a broader footing. He proposed planning for procurement of industrial materials in wartime through joint commit- tees of industrialists and military officers. But his suggestions were never acted upon. At the time, America had retreated into isolation- ism, and the prospect of having to engage in another large conflict seemed remote. So, recognition that mobilization required government control of the economy did not lead immediately to the establishment of a central mobilization planning agency. With the assistant secretary in charge, actual planning for identifi- cation of the Army's needs was done in the War Plans Division of the General Staff. Two major innovations marked the early years of Army staff planning. One was the establishment of the joint Army and Navy Munitions Board in June 1922. This board, made up of the assistant secretaries of the two services, brought the Navy, a potential competi- tor for wartime resources, into the planning process. By 1929, the board adopted a joint strategy, and, two years later, the board expanded to include a permanent executive committee. The other innovation was the creation of the Army Industrial College, the first institution of its kind. The one-year curriculum gave officers the chance to study mobi- lization from a wide variety of perspectives. Faculty and students con- tributed to the preparation of the industrial mobilization plans that emerged in the 1930s. The establishment of the board and college showed vision and an understanding that mobilization transcended the Army. In 1923 the General Staff produced its first peacetime plan for the assembly of an army. The plan called for six field armies with a strength rising from 400,000 on the day of mobilization\u2014 known as M-day\u2014 to 1.3 million in four months and increasing every month thereafter."}
{"id": "Mobilization", "title": "CMH Pub 72-32 Mobilization: A World War II Commemorative Pamphlet", "year": 1994, "seq": 3, "text": "It acknowledged that the availability of supplies and equip- ment determined the rate at which troops could be absorbed. However, the plan neglected the critical issue of the resources needed to create the supplies on which mobilization depended. It assumed that produc- tion would adjust to strategic plans, expanding when necessary and contracting when not. It also left unresolved the question of whether different plans were needed for different contingencies. This initial plan incorporated the outmoded World War I concept of M -day as the basis for planning. In the summer of 1914 the European armies, one after the other, had mobilized on specific M- days, triggering complex and apparently irreversible processes that fol- lowed rigid timetables. These mobilizations generated similar respons- es from adversary armies and made hostilities almost inevitable. But M-day as a concept and tool for planning was more convenient than helpful. It made no allowances for gradual changes in preparedness or a measured transition to a mobilized state. Instead, it posited an overnight complete conversion. In theinterwar period, the M-day fixa- tion kept American planners from visualizing any situation that required implementation of mobilization measures before the official outbreak of war. The plan's first thorough revision in 1925 failed to correct this short- coming. In fact, the 1928 plan represented a step backward, giving sup- ply a secondary position and putting the emphasis back on manpower. Materiel, only recently considered the pacing factor, was assumed to take care of itself. M en would simply be equipped, supplied, and trained as they entered service. While these plans for the assembly of forces for war were being developed, separate plans for wartime procurement were under way in the War Department. The assistant secretary's office relied on the sup- ply services for detailed planning on wartime procurement, a task that was clearly understood to be part of the military mission."}
{"id": "Mobilization", "title": "CMH Pub 72-32 Mobilization: A World War II Commemorative Pamphlet", "year": 1994, "seq": 4, "text": "Overall, the 1939 version was sound enough to become the per- manent basis for mobilization. The plan provided for training, incor- porating the location, size, and schedule for establishing training cen- ters; outlined detailed unit and individual training programs; and pro- vided for the production of manuals and associated training material. It established a point of departure, a system for mobilization of the men and equipment already available. Like the industrial plan of the same year, the protective plan stepped back from the M -day assump- tion and began to see mobilization as a process that should begin well before the U nited States became involved in a war. The plan neglect- ed the important area of construction of adequate troop housing and other facilities, but otherwise it was a succinct, coherent proposal based on realistic assumptions. Political variables that mobilization planners could not control and may not have understood were still significant. The soundest plan was useless if the country was not prepared to accept it. Although Japan, Italy, and Germany actively pursued policies of imperial expansion in 1939-40, domestic realities in the United States included a public largely alienated from participation in world affairs. The twenty years since the end of the Great War had seen the breakdown of an interna- tional system based on the League of Nations and arms limitation agreements. The resultant American disillusionment with international affairs expressed itself in strong isolationist and pacifist sentiments. Although President Roosevelt neither shared nor pandered to this viewpoint, he understood the strength of the isolationist position. With one eye on his upcoming reelection bid in 1940, he acted carefully. Some of his New Deal supporters, notably labor leaders, feared that a preparedness drive centered on a powerful War Resources Administration would undermine much recent social legislation. So, rather than begin a massive central rearmament effort, he launched a limited preparedness campaign at the start of 1939, with his emphasis on increasing the striking power of the Army Air Corps."}
{"id": "Mobilization", "title": "CMH Pub 72-32 Mobilization: A World War II Commemorative Pamphlet", "year": 1994, "seq": 5, "text": "By the time of Pearl Harbor, Congress had spent more for A rmy procurement than it had for the A rmy and the N avy during all of World War I. While the industrial mobilization plan indirectly influenced rear- mament, the protective mobilization plan had a more direct impact. The latter plan prevented some of the foundering that had taken place in April 1917 by providing the basis for the Army's initial expansion. The A rmy still saw its role as protecting the United States and the Western Hemisphere from hostile European forces rather than participating in global coalition warfare, an assumption that limited and impeded planning. But the protective mobilization plan at least gave the A rmy a starting point in preparing for a hemispheric defense mission. The gradual and somewhat experimental path of mobilizing the economy during 1940 went contrary to public expectations. M-day continued to exist in the popular mind, and few understood that mobi- lization was, in fact, already under way. Mobilization was essentially an evolving situation, in which the United States was not formally at war and was reacting to the spread of conflict by moving from one set of expansion goals to another. Although the president had taken control of mobilization, the Army still had a central role in shaping it. The Army was the single most important claimant on productive resources and manpower, so its needs largely determined the nature and extent of the process. Both industrial mobilization and procurement started with the formulation of requirements by the Army. Once the Army knew the kinds and quantities of materiel it needed, facilities, materials, manpower, ener- gy, and other resources could be brought to bear on production. Beyond the need for an authoritative Army shopping list lay a web of relationships between troop mobilization, which depended on the available supplies, equipment, and facilities; materiel requirements; 12 and the availability of industrial capacity and raw materials that limit- ed the scale and pace of mobilization."}
{"id": "Mobilization", "title": "CMH Pub 72-32 Mobilization: A World War II Commemorative Pamphlet", "year": 1994, "seq": 6, "text": "Its goals included the procurement by October 1941 of all items needed to equip and main- tain an army of 1.2 million, including the Air Corps, and creation of production facilities to support an army of over four million. Directed by the Army and Navy Munitions Board, this program set up a priori- ties system, apportioned industrial capacity between the services, cleared foreign contracts for munitions production in the United States, and compiled military needs for strategic raw materials. Procurement districts, arsenals, depots, and other establishments were activated and expanded. The $6 billion that was allotted was only half of the War Department's request, but it was almost as much as the nation had spent on the department between 1922 and 1940 and a major turning point in the rehabilitation of the Army. In terms of the production of the materiel needed for any expan- sion of the Army, the start of the munitions program constituted M - day. However, the concept was not invoked at the time. Passage of selective service legislation awaited the return of Congress in the autumn. In fact, the first peacetime draft in the nation's history became law in September, one month after the president federalized the National Guard. There was little point in announcing an M -day for materiel and then waiting three months to announce another for manpower. Those who thought about the sequence, though, knew that if the two aspects of mobilization had to be separate, materiel should come first. Even though the sequence was correct, the needs of the force of 1.5 million that was assembled by June 1941 were largely unmet. As had so often happened in the past, troops were being mobilized before equipment was available. Although the idea of a central agency to manage mobilization never really took hold before the United States declared war, a net- work of agencies, activities, and controls was emerging to manage war production."}
{"id": "Mobilization", "title": "CMH Pub 72-32 Mobilization: A World War II Commemorative Pamphlet", "year": 1994, "seq": 7, "text": "M adigan, a canny million- aire construction engineer, to his office as special assistant to deal with construction. M obilization severely strained extant facilities for hous- ing, training, and supplying the troops. Just as important were con- struction and expansion in conjunction with industry of factories to produce supplies and equipment for the expanding Army. M adigan and Patterson agreed that this system was too slow and complex. Construction for production and for troops had been divided between the Corps of Engineers and the Quartermaster Corps after the engi- neers took over Air Corps construction from the overburdened quarter- masters late in 1940. Early in December 1941 Stimson agreed to their proposal to make the Corps of Engineers responsible for all military construction. Then they took their nine-page memorandum to the pres- ident, who jotted \"OK FDR\" in the margin. And so, a multibillion dol- lar mobilization issue was settled, and construction, a pacing factor for both production and troops, was in the hands of the engineers. There was more to this problem than finding a capable construc- tion agent. Troop construction ultimately mushroomed into a $7.5 bil- lion program, but the lack of industrial facilities constituted a greater barrier to mobilization during the defense period. The Depression had created much idle but largely obsolete industrial capacity. With demand low, there had been no incentives to modernize. The govern- ment had to encourage industrial expansion before its armed forces were engaged. \"To have delayed the construction of such facilities until the United States was actually involved in battle,\" R. Elberton Smith observed in his book on industrial mobilization, \"might have lost the war before it began.\" The Roosevelt administration thus encouraged private expansion of facilities for war production, first through accelerated depreciation, then by government financing. Private construction companies did most of the actual building, while other private contractors then received man- agement fees to operate the plants."}
{"id": "Mobilization", "title": "CMH Pub 72-32 Mobilization: A World War II Commemorative Pamphlet", "year": 1994, "seq": 8, "text": "Somervell controlled a vast logistical system. His authority ranged over six technical services, eight administrative services, nine corps areas, six ports of embarkation, and nine general depots. Formerly, all of these components of the Army supply system had reported directly to the chief of staff. Together, under Army Service Forces, this network bought, stored, and distributed the Army's equipment and supplies. The program involved over 600,000 prime contractors and an untold num- bers of subcontractors and had a price tag of over $68 billion. The Army Supply Program provided the blueprint for this huge procurement effort. First published in April 1942, the plan was reissued periodically during the war. Each edition contained revised long-range estimates of military needs for all items of supply, honed by teams that studied and updated replacement factors in light of operational experi- ence. The supply program lists were translated into terms of raw mate- rials, skilled labor, and productive capacity. With this plan in hand, the War Production Board adjusted the allocation of priorities to balance strategic plans with resources and manage possible shortages. 19 The Pentagon under construction. (DA photograph) In Army Service Forces, the Corps of Engineers played an impor- tant part in the mobilization process. One of the six technical services under Somervell's command, the corps had a construction program of unprecedented size and scope. So much of mobilization\u2014 production of small arms ammunition and the myriad other items in the Army Supply Program, assembly of vehicles and airplanes, and training and housing for the millions of soldiers who were filling the ranks- hinged on engineer construction that it was a pacing factor for the entire effort. The program included factories, camps, and other facili- ties for troops; the Manhattan District's atomic bomb project; con- struction of the Pentagon; and even a few major civil works projects that were continued through the war."}
{"id": "montereynews1997unse_3", "title": "Monterey news", "year": 1997, "seq": 0, "text": "Berkshire County, however, does not and maintains a bal- anced budget. A recent Berkshire County Task Force survey showed that county gov- ernment provides some real needs, espe- cially for the smaller towns. Among those receiving the most approval are surveyor service, emergency communi- cation (911), Clean Rivers and Lakes programs, health and retirement benefits, Registries of Deeds, and County Court Houses. The bigger towns have their Own communication centers for emer- gency service. The smaller towns have this service only because it was put under the County Sheriff\u2019s Department. Be- cause the larger towns now have their own surveyors, the smaller towns are all dependent on one surveyor while before there had been three. Monterery Select Board Chair Gige O\u2019Connell serves on the Berkshire County Advisory Board, which approves the County budget. She explained to the Monterey News that because of weighted voting on the Board, the larger towns can control the county budget, and hence county services. She views the county as essential to maintaining important ser- vices for Monterey. The Task Force has 14 questions for state legislators to answer if the state takes Over county government. A few are as follows: How will programs not taken over by the Commonwealth sur- vive on a County/Regional level if the state takes all of the County assets and funding sources? How will County prop- erty be disposed of in a State takeover? Will the Commonwealth end assess- ments to cities and towns for the former county services assumed by the State? How will County property be disposed of in a State takeover? If the Common- wealth assumes the forty-four million dollars in assets from the Berkshire County Retirement Fund, will the State assume the liabilities of the Berkshire County Retirement System? How will County historical records be stored, and what entity will be responsible for the preservation of these documents?"}
{"id": "montereynews1997unse_3", "title": "Monterey news", "year": 1997, "seq": 1, "text": "She has the part of Anita mastered.\" Katie is also academically distin- guished and belongs to the band and chorus. George says she is \"awesome\" in soccer and softball, even though the Mt. Everett record is not exceptional. Katie will be studying performing arts at John- son State College in Vermont next year. George Norian is a retired commu- nity member at Gould Farm whose inter- est in children and the arts is legendary. He has helped a number of students finance Shaylan Burkhart, Katie Kopetchny and George Norian their educations and has simply \"adopted\" others as part of his extended family. \"I remember when Shaylan was eight or nine - I took him to Tanglewood, and after that to see the road company of Cats. I remem- ber my father taking me to the St. James Theater on Broadway for Oklahoma like it was yesterday.\" George was on his way to see other friends in the Monument Mountain Re- gional High School production of Annie - for the third time - when I spoke with him. Two hundred senior citizens were in- vited for a sneak preview of Annie. The technical crew included Eoin Higgins of Monterey (see accompanying article). \"To me,\" says Norian,\"These are the kids the Record and the Eagle should be writing about.\" Laura Gaccione WORKING ON ANNIE Working on the musical Annie was an interesting experience, although I joined the actual production in the week of the performance. The actors were not teenagers, itseemed, but true profession- als who had a clear idea of how to put on a show which received many compli- ments from audience members old and young. This demonstrates the appeal of a musical like Annie. Set in the era when many grandparents grew up, it also has that enduring childlike sensibility which reaches the orphan in us all."}
{"id": "montereynews1997unse_3", "title": "Monterey news", "year": 1997, "seq": 2, "text": "Ted continued determinedly down Main Street under signals that no longer functioned: I, believing quite strongly we were defying every basic tenet for survival alternated hysterically between demanding and begging. Ihadn\u2019t yetresorted to threat or tears by The Monterey border, on Rt. 23 at the entrance to the Appalachian trail - yards - but in my best shrew-pitched-shrill I screamed \u201cLet\u2019s go back to Monterey!\u201d Like some obstinate Mr. Magoo with disaster all about him, the stubborn stranger next to me in command of our vehicle ignored the chaos that was gradu- ally engulfing us. He made a right turn opposite Searles Castle to head to Egre- mont, following a caravan of bumper to bumper cars going over the railroad tracks. (Their signal, by the way, was flashing red with danger) Then they, like some carefully choreographed car ballet, each executed the first in a series of 3 point turns. And then we saw them. Massive maple & pine trees, curi- ously frightening in their unfamiliar hori- zontal position, straddled Rt. 23 in front of the nursing home. Downed electrical wires floating above us with their trans- formers dangling only slightly above the roofs of our cars pushed me closer to the edge... Ted did his 3-point turn, still insist- ing \u201cIt\u2019s nothing, It\u2019s nothing,\u201d and headed back to Main Street, intent on turning right, heading south on 7, through Sheffield and the scenic antique shop route we sometime take. I, by now a \"basket case\" noticed that we were sur- rounded by floating debris from Wards Nursery, and started to consider divorce proceedings from the alien seated next to me. pti scensiapt nivale eetsis eens LAURA GACCIONE from where the fatalities occurred. Once again we were stunned with the reality of a repeat of the previous scenario - enormous downed trees, wires, transformers, but by now, people had emerged from the shelters, arms stretched toward the sky in disbelief at the devas- tation that had struck the landscapes in an instant."}
{"id": "montereynews1997unse_3", "title": "Monterey news", "year": 1997, "seq": 3, "text": "I had dropped the begging to return to Monterey, and made outright death threats, when the \u201cenemy\u201d swiftly com- pleted his latest 3-point turn, his silence this time confirming surrender and ac- knowledgment that, indeed, something dreadful had happened. Ted headed north on darkened Main Street and then east on 23 to attempt to return to Monterey but discovered we were blocked again as we approached the intersection of 23 and 57. We made our last U turn out of there, hearts pounding as we viewed the familiar mammoth trees straddling the roadway with electrical wires floating in the debris and trans- formers swaying frightenly close to the roof of our car. I ran into the Panda West where the patrons noisily enjoyed their dinner oblivious to the chaos that awaited their departure. The equally unaware manager permitted me to report what we had seen to the Great Barrington Police and at- tempted to call my son Daniel who, hav- ing spent the holiday with us, chose to depart from Monterey even later than we. By now the telephone service was out and we gambled that heading north to Stockbridge, east to Lee, and south on Tyringham Road would get us home. Holding my breath for the final portion we returned to \u201cThe Villa\u201d - grateful it had been spared any damage. Several weeks passed before we witnessed the heartbreaking devastation to which Monterey was subjected. When we pass the Eagleton School now and the small structure memorializing the 3 people that died within a few moments of the time we drove through the very same spot, we wonder what our fate might have been, had Ted succumbed to my initial pleas to return home. Dorothy Silverstein Before: Stately pines on the Appalachian Trail After 10 LAURA GACCIONE LAURA GACCIONE = CoRtUE U EI BY TG Buyers of forest land, standing timber, and logs."}
{"id": "montereynews1997unse_3", "title": "Monterey news", "year": 1997, "seq": 4, "text": "It is not surprising, since the automobile is so much a part of our lives, that a majority of our wildlife sightings are made as we course about, swiftly visiting every part of town and the neighboring regions, where roads have penetrated. Now buds are fawn- colored and dusky red in the treetops even in the high places, while down in the Housatonic bottom red maples are frankly in bloom. Animals Seen from Cars: A moose near Algerie Rd. in East Otis (Dale Duryea, early April); a beautiful, big black bear crossing Rt. 23 just east of Keyes Corner (Beverley Kimberley, April 10); three deer just west of Keyes Corner (Eleanor . Kimberley,:March. 30); over 100 snow geese and as many Canada geese in adja- cent fields north of Monterey Road and West of the main Tyringham Road (J oe Baker, March 24); two herons on their nests off Smith Hill Road (David and Beryl McAllester, March 24); two pairs of loons on the river in Housatonic (Dale, April 10). Ironically, the same roads and cars have led to the demise of several small mammals in this same period: a skunk, two muskrats, a raccoon, a gray squirrel, all seen on Rt. 23. Wildlife in the Blizzard of April 1. The combination of warm open weather fol- lowed by 20 inches of snow brought a towhee to the McAllester feeder at Dowd Corner where he sometimes sat for a half-hour at a time. This \u201cvery large sparrow\u201d is dramatic with his black head, white breast and chestnut sides and is usually only seen in dense woods lustily scratching in the leaves on the ground. A more drastic visitor was a bear who came to the Shapiro/Dean feeder on Hupi Road in the night of Apr. 2-3 and destroyed it entirely. Every part was knocked down, crunched up and emptied."}
{"id": "montereynews1997unse_3", "title": "Monterey news", "year": 1997, "seq": 5, "text": "Here is a personal accountof her \"coming-up\" in the church. \u2018I started spending my summers in Monterey in 1947. My grandparents bought a little house on the north side of Garfield in the thirties, and proceeded to expand it in every direction - up, down, and sideways - to accommodate their own family and myriad guests. They chose Monterey to escape the doldrums of the New Jersey summer, and because longtime friends from Oberlin College, where my grandfather had taught, had built along the road they entitled \"El- ephant..Reck.\". after. a piece of glacial humor at the head of the road. They were Protestant Midwestern- ers born and bred, and Victorians, whose sense of order in the world depended on the unfolding o f patterns and rituals in properly prescribed ways. My grand- mother, for example, did not leave the house without a hat. Gloves were worn if one was going in to town - meaning Great Barrington. Dinner was at 7 p.m., and one did not appear at the table wearing the same outfit in which one had spent the day mucking about. The ladies all wentto the Wednesday matinee at Stock- bridge, the men played golf, everyone played bridge, and everyone we knew N YT Choo aa g ef | es 1 a = Vat fe \u201ceee \u2018 Kaa went to church on Sunday, as regular as the day of the week. And so, particular care was taken in dressing after Sunday breakfast. My grandmother had a variety of hats, all with netting across the front, which she wore in rotation through the month, My grandfather wore red ties - red was his favorite color, and he had a substantial collection built by many birthday and Christmas presents. I was given a quarter for the collection plate, always handed over with strict instructions not to lose it and to be sure to put it in the plate."}
{"id": "montereynews1997unse_3", "title": "Monterey news", "year": 1997, "seq": 6, "text": "There were dra- matic presentations, imaginatively staged without a curtain, and an occasional string quartet or pianist. The fact that it was a sanctuary on Sunday, a place reserved for examination of conscience and de- velopment of spiritual life, did not im- pede the music and laughter and ap- plause for other occasions. The line be- tween the spiritual and the cultural seemed nonexistent; two sides of the coin of higher expectations. Downstairs was called (rather grandly) the Social Room, where com- munity suppers were - and still are - a regular event and were usually accompa- nied a program of someone's slides or a talk by a traveler. Men set out long tables and folding chairs. Women organized easily andimmediately in the tiny kitchen, pulling out the wildly unmatched china, setting places with stiff paper napkins , and popping pans in and out of the oven. Home made baked beans, quivering jello molds, rich noodle casseroles with an occasional piece of chicken, tossed salad with fluorescent orange French dressing were the offering... urns of coffee and cake of several varieties appeared: staples of inexpensive, made-for-a-crowd, middle American 1950's cooking. The food was unvaried, nourishing, always needed a little salt, and I loved it. The women set the dishes to soak while we attended the program, hearing the speaker and then discussing what could be done about the refugees, the less fortunate, those in need of some small help Monterey could give, and then women washed up the dishes, in thought- ful quiet, and men went outside to smoke. Of course, eventually I began to lis- ten to the lessons learned upstairs and down, and hear how they demanded that I be involved in the world. Ray Ward talked about respect and kindness to neighbors, a word he gave the broadest possible definition."}
{"id": "montereynews1997unse_3", "title": "Monterey news", "year": 1997, "seq": 7, "text": "The fact is that it is a major hardship anywhere and I do not know of any other region in Massachusetts where their residents must do this. Boston needs to realize that we will not stand to be Forgotten County. The Governor can not balance the state budget by penalizing the taxpayers of Berkshire County. Through Berkshire Fair Share, the Berkshire County offices of the Depart- ment of Transitional Assistance, Depart- ment of Social Services, Department of Employment and Training, Department of Youth Services, Department of Men- tal Retardation, Mass Highway, Elder Services and the Department of Revenue would be retained with no danger of closing or relocation. This amendment was modeled as a follow-up to my suc- cessful bid to retain Mass Highway\u2019s Regional Office in Lenox when the Gov- ernor proposed to relocate that office to Northampton. The Berkshire Fair Share amend- ment was adoped under my leadership with the support of the entire Berkshire legislative delegation. No one in Berk- shire County will have to drive to Spring- field for state services. Those services will always be available in Berkshire County as they should be, because we deserve equal access to equal levels of state services. It\u2019s just getting our fair share and I am proud to have won this battle for Berkshire County. Representative Chris Hodgkins made by Joe Baker & Bonner MccAlester , Hupt Road, Monterey, Mass. 20 ENJOYING THE BENEFITS OF TAURUS (April 21 - May 20) A few decades ago -- just an instant according to the sensibilities of folks born under the the zodiac sign Taurus, who often have a deep and abiding rever- ence for history and antique -- Julie Andrews played Queen Guinevere on Broadway. One of the now familiar songs she sang let the audience know \u201cIt\u2019s May, it\u2019s May, the lusty month of May...\u201d Andrews conveyed the double meaning of the word lust enthusiastically, her voice and facial expression communicating clearly Guinivere\u2019s delight in the bur- geoning of spring, both in the world and in her body."}
{"id": "montanaforestins1995unit", "title": "Montana forest insect and disease conditions and program highlights", "year": 1995, "seq": 0, "text": "Information for this report was derived from ground and aerial surveys conducted across most of Montana. SUMMARY OF CONDITIONS Across the State, bark beetle populations have been in a general decline, although in some areas increased bark beetle outbreaks continue to occur due to ongoing outbreaks and the dry, wild fire summer of 1994. Ongoing outbreaks include the mountain pine beetle mortality to lodgepole pine in extreme western Montana, and the mortality to subaipine fir at higher elevations in southwestern Montana on the Gallatin and Beaverhead National Forests (NFs). Douglas-fir beetle and spruce beetle populations increased in fire-weakened trees in western Montana. The summer of 1995 was the first year that no western spruce budworm defoliation was visible from the air in Montana since the annual aerial survey began in the late 1940's. Low western spruce budworm populations generally prevail across the entire western United States. No Douglas-fir tussock moth or pine tussock moth defoliation was observed in 1995. Other defoliator activity includes isolated outbreaks of western false hemlock looper near Helena, and light pine sawfly in the southeastern portion of the State on the Custer NF southeast of Ashland. With the exception of foliage diseases, forest disease populations fluctuate very little compared to forest insect populations. Mortality and growth losses from root diseases and dwarf mistletoes continue to be high throughout the State. Root disease-caused mortality is more common west of the of the Continental Divide, though large root disease patches can be found east of the Divide. Dwarf mistletoes continue to cause extensive growth losses and mortality across the State; losses total approximately 33 million cubic feet annually. Douglas- fir west of the Continental Divide, western larch and lodgepole pine are the tree species most severely affected. White pine blister rust continues to be present throughout the range of 5-needle pines in the State."}
{"id": "montanaforestins1995unit", "title": "Montana forest insect and disease conditions and program highlights", "year": 1995, "seq": 1, "text": "Ideal weather for flying the survey is a sunny day with calm winds but due to the short time available to conduct the survey, it is flown under most weather conditions. Observed forest disturbances are sketch mapped in the form of point or polygons and attributed. Priority forest disturbances include bark beetle caused mortality, defoliators, and windthrow. If forest disturbance activity levels are low, secondary attributes such as diseases, needle damage and high-water damage are sketch mapped. This is a detection survey and, therefore, some forest disturbances are mapped and ground checked later for identification. The survey is conducted once a year during which time the observer sketch maps as many forest disturbances as possible under the above conditions. INSECTS Bark Beetles Though bark beetle populations have recently been in a general decline, there were remarkable exceptions to that trend in 1995. Because 1994 had been unusually hot and dry, and warm late into the fall, bark beetle species which are especially responsive to increased host stress took advantage of that opportunity to expand their populations. Also in 1994, wild fires burned over thousands of acres in the State. Some bark beetle species, such as spruce beetle and Douglas-fir beetle, took advantage of the availability of large numbers of their fire-weakened hosts. In some areas, aggressive salvage programs may be required to prevent bark beetle populations from expanding to well beyond endemic levels. Because 1995 was a more nearly normal year, relative to precipitation, it may be that many of the increases noted in some infested areas will be short lived. Others may continue for a year or more- until weakened hosts return to more vigorous growing conditions. The following table, and many of the subsequent summaries, reflect infested areas and mortality levels based on aerial survey estimates. A relatively small proportion have been followed by more-definitive gfound surveys."}
{"id": "montanaforestins1995unit", "title": "Montana forest insect and disease conditions and program highlights", "year": 1995, "seq": 2, "text": "Many, but mostly small groups of ponderosa pine faders, killed by MPB, were observed on private land, south of the Island Unit and east of Lake Mary Ronan. Scattered mortality caused by MPB in lodgepole pine, was noted throughout the Island Unit, itself. In the southern portion of the district, into the Swan Valley, scattered MPB in western white pine, as well as damage caused by DFB and WBBB was observed along and south of Swan Lake. The same scattered pattern of mortality, and occasionally including MPB in lodgepole pine, were noted south to Holland Lake and around Lindbergh Lake. None were considered significant epidemics. On the Tally Lake RD, little remains of the once expansive MPB outbreak. Some scattered trees killed by DFB and WBBB were located throughout the RD, with higher concentrations around Tally Lake. A potentially explosive ESB population has been found in down and weakened Engelmann spruce, in stands affected by the Little Wolf Fire, southwest of Whitefish. Salvage of that infested material is being planned. The Glacier View RD experienced scattered mortality caused by WBBB at higher elevations throughout the district. Mountain pine beetle populations in western white pine were observed in Big Creek, Coal Creek, and Canyon Creek drainages, but totaled only about a tree per acre over 30 acres. On the adjacent Stillwater SF, MPB is also killing western white pine north of Whitefish Lake\u2014 and scattered to Upper Whitefish Lake. Elsewhere, minor amounts of beetle-killed white pine were found. Total infested acres of western white pine oft State and private land in the reporting area was 130 acres, on which 200 trees were killed. Gallatin NF Many large groups of subalpine fir killed by WBBB were observed throughout the Gallatin Canyon, Bozeman RD, in both the Madison and Gallatin Mountain Ranges. Heaviest concentrations were seen in the Taylor Creek drainage, northwest of Yellowstone NP."}
{"id": "montanaforestins1995unit", "title": "Montana forest insect and disease conditions and program highlights", "year": 1995, "seq": 3, "text": "Stands along the Clark Fork corridor showed significant mortality, as previously described. On the Seeley Lake RD, several small groups of subalpine fir killed by WBBB were mapped above Lake Marshall and Alva Lake. Late-summer windthrow, near Colt Lake and Summit Lake, was salvaged in order to prevent future mortality caused by ESB. Groups of dead subalpine fir, attributed to WBBB, were found near Matt Mountain and Morrell Mountain. Those were the most significant bark beetle outbreaks on the district, and totaled 100 trees killed on about 70 acres. Scattered ponderosa pine killed by was noted in the lower Clearwater River drainage, near Harpers Lake; within the Monture Creek drainage; and near the Blackfoot Clearwater Game Range. Minor amounts of Douglas-fir killed by DFB and whitebark pine killed by MPB are scattered throughout the respective type. Garnet Mountains (BLM) Many, small groups of ponderosa pine, killed by either IPS, MPB, or WPB, were recorded east of Bonner; along the Blackfoot River in the vicinity of Potomac; and near Clearwater Junction. Other, similar groups were found along 1-90, in the southern part of the reporting area, from Missoula to Rattler Gulch. Much less numerous groups were observed east to Garrison Junction. In the reporting area, slightly more than 1,900 trees were killed on an approximate 1,100 acres. 7 Flathead IR Though no large groups were recorded, many small groups of ponderosa pines were killed by MPB or IPS throughout the Reservation. Lodgepole pine, killed by MPB took on the same, scattered pattern. Many groups of ponderosa pines killed by MPB were found within the northern portion of the Reservation, from Flathead Lake, westward to the Reservation boundary. Scattered dead ponderosa pine, killed by WPB, MPB, or both, were mapped along the western edge of the Reservation^ south to Rainbow Lake. South and west of Hot Springs, numerous small groups of lodgepole pine killed by MPB were observed."}
{"id": "montanaforestins1995unit", "title": "Montana forest insect and disease conditions and program highlights", "year": 1995, "seq": 4, "text": "Acres of defoliation recorded during aerial surveys. Douglas-fir Tussock Moth Douglas-fir tussock moth populations continue to be very low in Montana as well as in most western states. No defoliation was detected from aerial survyes or from ground surveys in 1995. For the first time since annual pheromone trapping of adult males began, zero moths were caught. Gypsy Moth For the second year in a row no gypsy moths {Lymantria dispar) were caught in the detection traps placed throughout the State of Montana. Over 1,300 detection traps were placed by USDA Forest Service, Animal and Plant Health Inspection Service (APHIS), Montana Department of Agriculture, and the Montana , Department of State Lands. There was a report of a suspicious moth sighting from Eureka, Montana which APHIS will investigate in 1996.Moths were trapped in neighboring states. Wyoming reported six moths (two in Yellowstone NP), South Dakota caught eight moths (four in the Black Hills), and Idaho caught one. Asian gypsy moths were again detected in the State of Washington. As neighboring states continue to detect gypsy moths and Asian/ European hybrids are introduced to the Region, the importance of detection trapping increases. Thanks to those who participate in this annual program, we are able to assess the threat that the Asian and European gypsy moths pose to Montana's natural resources. Pine Tussock Moth The pine tussock moth {Dasychira grisefacta (Dyer)) population on the Sioux RD of the Custer NF collapsed in 1995. No defoliation was detected in the aerial survey and District personnel were unable to find any larvae in the stands defoliated in 1994. No mortality from this insect is expected. Since the population has apparently crashed, the six plots established in 1994 to follow pine tussock moth activity were not remeasured. Pine Sawflies Stand exam crews on the Ashland RD of the Custer NF detected a population of pine sawflies between Tenmile and Fifteenmile Creeks."}
{"id": "montanaforestins1995unit", "title": "Montana forest insect and disease conditions and program highlights", "year": 1995, "seq": 5, "text": "The needle diseases that seem to be on an upswing are Elytroderma needle cast {Elytroderma deformans) and Diplodia tip blight {Diplodia pinea), both in ponderosa pine. These two diseases seem to be more widespread every year. The hardest hit areas have been the lower Clark Fork drainage, the Bitterroot drainage, and the western shore of Flathead Lake. Steve Kohler, Montana State entomologist, recalls a similar \u201coutbreak\u201d of Elytroderma needle cast along the western edge of Flathead Lake back in the early 1970's. The outbreak subsided after a few years and the trees appeared to recover. We anticipate recovery to occur With the present resurgence of the disease as well. Limber pine needle cast {Lophodermella arcuata) continued to be present on and bordering the Lewis and Clark National Forest, but like most of the other foliage diseases, it was not as severe as the previous year. This disease was prevalent in several local areas including the Belt Creek and Lick Creek drainages and around Black Butte, all in the Little Belt Mountains southeast of Great Falls. Diseases of nurseries, ornamentals and tree improvement areas 1 . Caragana with heart rot decay from shelterbelts in eastern Montana were infected with Phellinus punctatus. Affected stock was fairly young and the problem was common. 2. Container-grown Douglas-fir and lodgepole pine seedlings destined for planting in western Montana were extensively colonized with Botrytis cinerea. The fungus had developed during storage of seedlings over the winter and was discovered when boxes of seedlings were opened prior to spring planting. 3 . Container-grown ponderosa pine were extensively infected with Fusarium oxysporum and other Fusarium spp. at the Montana State Nursery in Missoula. Seedlings exhibited typical root disease and cotyledon blight symptoms. 18 4. Western larch container-grown seedlings transplanted into an early selection trial at the Bigfork Tree Improve- ment Area (Flathead NF) showed top dieback symptoms during the spring of 1995."}
{"id": "montanaforestins1995unit", "title": "Montana forest insect and disease conditions and program highlights", "year": 1995, "seq": 6, "text": "Isolations from roots of affected trees yielded Fusarium spp., particularly from plug roots. Root and soil samples failed to yield Phytopthora, which was suspected as being involved. Cause of the extensive dieback was unknown. 5. Container western larch being grown for a seed orchard displayed dieback and decline symptoms. Isolations from roots and container soil yielded unidentified Phytophthora from several of the trees. Source of infection was unknown. 6. Container-grown western larch seedlings at the Montana State Nursery in Missoula had extensive dieback and wilt symptoms. Potentially pathogenic organisms were not con- sistently isolated from diseased stock. The problem was likely due to extensive desiccation of seedlings located in outer rows because of uneven distribution of irrigation during the summer. Common and Recurring Nursery Diseases 1 . The most common and damaging diseases of conifer seedlings in Montana nurseries continued to be root diseases caused by Fusarium spp. These fungi caused damping-off, seed decay, and root diseases on many different conifer hosts in both bareroot and container nurseries. The most common soil-borne pathogen in bareroot nurseries was F. oxyspor- um, although several other species were commonly isolated from infected seed, soil and roots of diseased seedlings. The major pathogen in container nurseries was F. proliferatum, although F. oxysporum and several other Fusarium spp. also occurred at high levels in some nurseries. Fusarium diseases in nurseries were very difficult to control. Although all conifer species were susceptible, most damage occurred on Douglas-fir, western larch, ponderosa pine, western white pine, and Engelmann spruce. 2. Cylindrocarpon destructans caused severe losses to container-grown western white pine at several nurseries. Although damage occurred to other conifer species, root decay of five-needle pines was most serious and efforts to reduce damage were largely unsuccessful. 3 . Botrytis cinerea was serious on several conifer species in container nurseries and on stock from storage."}
{"id": "montanaforestins1995unit", "title": "Montana forest insect and disease conditions and program highlights", "year": 1995, "seq": 7, "text": "Coordinated and led by Bill Schaupp (R-2) and Jose Negron (RM Station), the objective of this project is the development of a \"loss prediction (risk-rating) model\" for stands infested or threatened by DFB. Over the 2 years, we collected data from areas previously infested by DFB--gathering as much site and stand data as could be reasonably measured by a two-person crew using basic stand-exam procedures. Analyses are now being performed to determine which site and/or stand factors are most correlated with mortality caused by DFB, and how those factors may help assess potential mortality during an outbreak. During two field seasons, and covering infested areas in Colorado, Idaho, Utah, Wyoming and Montana, data has been collected on more that 700 plots. We gathered data on about 120 plots in Montana and north Idaho alone. Data analysis, begun following the 1994 field season, is continuing. We hope that a model, to help predict tree mortality attributable to DFB, thereby becoming a significant management tool, will be available to the land manager within the next year or two. Insects Affecting the Reproduction of Whitebark Pine in the Western United States During 1995, Sandy Kegley and Nancy Campbell, in cooperation with other western entomologists in Regions 4, 5 and 6, initiated a study to examine the insect complex affecting the reproduction of whitebark pine. Seven sites in the western United States were chosen with three sites in Idaho and one in Montana. The sites in Idaho are ( 1 ) on Gisborne Mountain outside of Priest River, (2) near Seven Devils lookout tower outside of Riggins, and (3) on Snowbank Mountain outside of Cascade. The site in Montana in near Daisy Pass outside of Cooke City. Fourteen treatments, which consisted of excluding insects with mesh bags at different times during the 2-year cone development cycle. were replicated on each of 15 trees at each site."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1977-09-21", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1977-09-21 : Volume LXXII, Issue 1", "year": 1977, "seq": 0, "text": "The committee is a positive approach to the fraternity situation because, as Dean of the College John Spencer stated, \u201cit allows all of the concerned parties to play an active role from the begining of the evaluation process.\u201d There are several crucial elements to the situation which we would all do well to keep in mind, however. First and foremost is that the committee has not been established to find nor is it likely to find an ideal solution to either the fraternities\u2019 or the college\u2019s financial c ircumstances that will guarantee the two may continue to exist as they currently do in relation to each other. This result is desirable but improbable. Second, the committee is not apt to discover or devise any scheme that will call for no sacrifice from parties on either side of the issue. If anything the committee should attempt to see that sacrifice is not only minimal but mutual. Third, the alternative lifestyle made possible by the frater\u00ac nities' existence is something which should never be denied students. Residential, social and dining preferences of Mid\u00ac dle bury College students will continue to change in the future just asthey have in the past. The more avenues a college has available to pursue different interpretations of those trend changes, the better off the college is. Deliberate Overcrowding The Administration\u2019s policy of deliberate overcrowding and having some students start the school year living off campus is not a good one. Even for sophomores who have a years\u2019 ex\u00ac perience atadapting tocollege predicaments, living off campus is an unfair and unfortunate inconvenience. Having to relocate and resettle after a full week of classes is, in and of itself, disruptive and cause for dismay. The hours a student has available for study and the pursuit of activities become precious and few soon after the school year starts."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1977-09-21", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1977-09-21 : Volume LXXII, Issue 1", "year": 1977, "seq": 1, "text": "A pipe in the sprinkler system cameloose and filled the space above the drop ceiling with water until it finally gave way. By the time the lights were turned on again and the water turned off, Slug s first floor was virtually ankle-deep. The twelve people in wet and the room were \u201cvery Students may earn up to $75 by pieces: how to join an ar- travel, will be available at submitting a short account of cheological dig, a climbing ex- college study abroad offices, their travel study experiences to pedition, or a bicycle tour; how to bookstores, and libraries. The TRANSITIONS, a new quarterly find a course to suit a special focus of the fall issue will be on review of educational travel and interest; how to find a temporary foreign summer and January study abroad. The editor, a job to help pay travel expenses; interterm study programs. More literature professor at Hamp- how to REDUCE travel ex- information and a copy of the shire College, is looking for in- penses; how to find families who recently published pilot issue formative first-hand accounts of takepaying guests... The reports may be obtained by writing the significant learning experiences should be brief--ususally not editor, TRANSITIONS, 18 Hulst and travel adventures which can more than 1,000 words- and be Road. Ameherst, Ma. 01002. be duplicated by the readers- accompanied, when appropriate, Payment depends on quality z- mostly students and teachers. with illustrations. The copy as well as length. Submissions In addition to informative deadline for the ?iT. issue is should be accompanied by a feature-length articles on study, October 21. stamped self-addressed en- work, and travel abroad, the TRANSITIONS, a resource velope. editor wants short how- to publication on foreign study and SSIS Seeks Student Attitude Change By RICK LEGRO Puns. The members of the Student Sex Information Service (SSIS)have come to hate them."}
{"id": "expanding-images", "title": "Expanding Images", "year": 1990, "seq": 0, "text": "Twenty-five years ago this usage was foreign to most. Similarly, attention is WORDS, WORDS, WORDS 11 Dictionaries commonly give two definitions of the word 'man': a human being and a male human being. When con\u00ac fronted with the words 'man' and 'men', one must decide which definition is correct in the particular situation. Most often, a male human being is pictured in the mind of the hearer. After citing several studies which address the confusion over making these decisions, linguistic in\u00ac vestigators Casey Miller and Kate Swift conclude: Whatever may be known of the contributions of females made to early human culture, an effective linguistic barrier prevents the assimilation of that knowledge in our present culture. Studies ... clearly indi\u00ac cate that man in the sense of male so overshadows man in the sense of a human being as to make the latter use inaccu\u00ac rate and misleading for the purposes both of conceptualizing and communicating. (Words and Women, p . 25) Miller and Swift also give example upon example of the ex\u00ac clusionary power of these words and their failure to com\u00ac municate reality. Women, in our common linguistic desig\u00ac nations, are invisible unless specifically noted other\u00ac wise. The problem is especially difficult for children. A boy hears the terms 'man', 'he', 'men' and can correctly identify himself with them. These terms tend to have positive connotations such as powerful, strong, brave, noble, authoritative. The boy can associate himself with positive images which enhance his self-esteem. When a girl hears these terms, she must decide if she is inclu\u00ac ded. She must constantly determine if she is different from what is being said. And when she is specifically identified by the terms 'woman' and 'she', she soon learns that its connotations are more negative and often sexual: passive, gentle, modest, emotional, flirtatious, seduc\u00ac tive, temptress, mistress."}
{"id": "expanding-images", "title": "Expanding Images", "year": 1990, "seq": 1, "text": "This affects how their values and beliefs are established and transmitted. For instance, anthropologists tell us Eskimos have eighteen different words in their language for \"snow.\" The German word \u201dgemutlichkeit\u201d describes the German experience of fel\u00ac lowship, conviviality, well-being. We Americans have no word which conveys this experience. It is not a shared part of our common life. The Hebrew word shalom is likewise not directly trans\u00ac lated to a single English word. It is rich with meaning: wholeness, blessing, peace, well-being. Shalom is a ba\u00ac sic concept in the Old Testament and Jewish tradition reflective of what was valued by the ancient Hebrews. It helped shape and give meaning to their lives. It also helped shape their thinking, ways of living, and self i- dentity. By contrasting the German gemutlichkeit and the Hebrew shalom with American word concepts of suc\u00ac cess, upward mobility, self-improvement, we get clues a- bout how language is intertwined with the identity of a community and the individuals within it. Language has meaning within the context in which it is used. It is part of the reality it expresses. We know who we are through our language. CHMs In the United States (and in the majority of other countries), language is dominated by the masculine. 2 words, words, words The story of Helen Keller is widely known. Deaf, blind, and unable to speak as a child, she lived in an unmanage\u00ac able world. When her teacher painstakingly helped her to associate experiences with hand movements, Helen Keller first learned language and began to order her world. She began to identify who she was in that world. Language is integral to our identity as human beings. Its mysteries have fascinated philosophers and scientists through the ages. What would our life be if we did not have words to form thoughts and communicate with others?"}
{"id": "expanding-images", "title": "Expanding Images", "year": 1990, "seq": 2, "text": "That's the way language is.\" Absurd? Does the language sound strange? Do the images projected seem foreign? How did you feel during the imaginary trip? Is there anything you would like to change? 4. Discuss questions and issues raised by the chapter. Ask group members about statements which they liked, questioned, or were troubled by. 5. Have group members share the understanding of God which they would like communicated to the children of the church. WHAT\u2019S THE PROBLEM? 5 Methodist Church states, \"We affirm all persons as equal - ly valuable in the sight of God . We therefore work toward societies in which each person 1 s value is recognized, maintained and strengthened . \" It specifically addresses the rights of women: 11 We affirm women and men to be e- qual in every aspect of their common life . We, there\u00ac fore, urge that every effort be made to eliminate sex role stereotypes in activity and protrayal of family life and in all aspects of voluntary and compensatory participation in the church and society. 11 This cannot be done unless the familial and social metaphors for God are expanded to be meaningful in the experience of each person. Examples of the ways United Methodists are ex\u00ac panding tile images of God used in worship have been in\u00ac cluded in later chapters. Some people may say, \"Why should I worry about this? It doesn't affect me.\" These women and men may not have been exposed to or considered the ways in which language permeates every aspect of our lives. Or they may choose a faith stance and theological tradition which has been meaningful in the past. Each person approaches their understanding of God from a different place, and these positions deserve respect and consideration. As we sen\u00ac sitively listen to one another, we will hear the pain and separation which sometimes results from our use of language. ^fonae,: J&t/ Change is frequently difficult and threatening, es\u00ac pecially when the whole world seems to be changing faster than we can manage."}
{"id": "expanding-images", "title": "Expanding Images", "year": 1990, "seq": 3, "text": "Exclusive use of masculine ima\u00ac gery for God restricts the ways in which we can share the message of reconciliation and liberation. It ruptures the unity of the Christian community. If we limit God by our use of language, we insist that part of the truth about God is the whole truth. 4 EXPANDING IMAGES When asked to describe God, our children often image God as an old man with a long white beard, wearing a long, flowing robe as he emerges out of the clouds. This ima\u00ac ging of God supports one prevailing argument against the ordination of women as ministers and priests, because they lack the biological image of God as male necessary to represent God to the people. When God is associated with maleness, the implication is that male is therefore superior. This encourages a double standard for the evaluation of human beings. And the extent to which our identities and self-perceptions as men and women are affected cannot be overestimated. Stereotypical dualisms in our society, where men are in authority and women are submissive tend to be reinforced. The use of male terminology for God along with the stress on the sovereighty and absolute power of God tends to uphold societal expectations that men are dominant and gives them permission to seek powerful rule over others and all the earth. Many women and men are questioning whether the mascu\u00ac line symbols for God are really consistent with the Bib\u00ac lical witness and valid for our lives today. Do they not encourage a double standard for the evaluation of human beings? Do they not support dividing our social and psychic sides into masculine and feminine \"sides?\" And do they not express an idolatrous concept of the Divine? God can never be fully comprehended nor adequately expressed in language."}
{"id": "expanding-images", "title": "Expanding Images", "year": 1990, "seq": 4, "text": "Franklin Avenue, Min\u00ac neapolis, Minnesota, 55404.) Yes, that's what all the fuss about language is about. In recent years, many women have challenged tradi\u00ac tional social systems in which men and masculine imagery have been dominant. They have struggled to claim equal\u00ac ity in the work force, political structures, marriage and family relationships. In order to become liberated from the stereotypical role expectations of subserviance and passivity, women are attempting to claim and value their own experiences and self-definition. Traditional bar\u00ac riers which prevent women from becoming all they are potentially able to become are no longer being accepted. And the church is being asked to respond to their needs and join with them in breaking chains which limit all people's possibilities for wholeness. &71& UJl/ The Biblical witness has always invited us to break those chains as we relate to God and to each other. The message of the Gospel stresses that we are all God's people, that al1 are included in God's promise. \"There is neither Jew nor Greek, there is neither slave nor free, there is neither male nor female; for you are all one in Christ Jesus\" (Galatians 3:28). And yet, by our use of language, some of God's children feel exclu\u00ac ded . The words \"man\" \"brotherhood,\" \"sons of God,\" and \"Father\" do not generate feelings of inclusive community for many. Despite the claims that masculine terminology includes all people, many studies have documented the strong tendency to image \"male\" whenever this language is used. The hearer must reinterpret every time a mas\u00ac culine form is employed. This often leads to confusion and incorrect conclusions. For example, when we sing the hymn \"Men and Children Everywhere,\" each person must decide whether women are included. And what about the bulletin solicitation for \"men\" to help paint the par\u00ac sonage?"}
{"id": "expanding-images", "title": "Expanding Images", "year": 1990, "seq": 5, "text": "More and more I talk with friends who say they no longer attend church because the minister and the worship committee refuse to 'allow' them the use of inclusive language . These are women who have been life-long, active Christians, serving and working for a church that remains discriminatory and un- Biblical . They are Catholics and protestants, black and white, young and old. They feel the church is not relevant for their lives. I asked my twelve year old daughter , Maria , about her concept of God: What does she 'see' when she thinks about God stuff. She replied, 'It's like Jesus is the Controller (her word , not mine'.), the Big Honcho, bos\u00ac sing everyone around. ' I asked her what she thought of when the minister prayed 'in the name of the Father, Son and Holy Spirit. ' She replied that those were church words, sort of like a chant or something you say at the end of prayers or the benediction. She couldn't attach any meaning at all to them. When I changed those words to 'Creator , Redeemer and Sustainer , ' her face lit up and she excitedly exclaimed, 'Oh, I get it'. Is that what it really means?' I told her, 'Yes, that's what it's all about. \" (This is an edited version of the statement Cyndie Chris- toffersen Tidwell made as part of an optional panel dis\u00ac cussion sponsored by the Commission on the Status and Role of Women during the 1981 Minnesota Annual Conference. 1 wdats Iwjroblem ? Our words and the way we use language is central to each of us. Many women and men today are challenging us to expand our use of language so its images embrace all people. This is a crucial issue in a church which of\u00ac fers a message of liberating salvation to individuals and the society in which they live."}
{"id": "expanding-images", "title": "Expanding Images", "year": 1990, "seq": 6, "text": "The Commission on the Status and Role of Women (COSROW) of the Minnesota Annual Conference has long been concerned about the nature and use of language . They recognize ways that exclusive language reflects and helps maintain sys\u00ac tems in our society and churches that prevent women and men from realizing the potential intended by the Creator . When exclusive language is used, barriers are raised which inhibit full participation by all in our services of wor\u00ac ship . COSROW desired to motivate \" consciousness-raising \" among their brothers and sisters concerning the divisive effect that exclusive language has for some . We wanted to provide an opportunity for exploration of the expanded possibilities inclusive language invites . We found there were few resources which clearly and concisely helped peo\u00ac ple understand the variety of ways of imaging God - images that include both the feminine and masculine dimensions of the Divine . So we undertook the development of a study guide for groups, which could also be used individually . We hope this guide will help you, the reader, define the problems created by exclusive imagery for God and will suggest to you ways expanded images of God will better in\u00ac clude all people in the life of the church . One of our purposes is to raise issues for discussion . Some of the ideas and feelings may seem \" strong \" or \"harsh\u201d to some. But these voices challenge us to be sensitive to how exclusive terminology for God alienates some of our neighbors . As we consider how our pictures of God are shaped, perhaps we can be open to reclaiming other images out of our heritage and adding new ones from our own ex\u00ac perience. In doing so, we increase the possibilities for dialogue within our worshipping church community . This dialogue is ongoing. Our language is not static. We are still learning about its symbolism and meaning."}
{"id": "expanding-images", "title": "Expanding Images", "year": 1990, "seq": 7, "text": "How do they fit with your understandings of these words? The Biblical witness began at a time when writing was unknown. The stories found in the first five books of the Bible probably began as stories told around the camp\u00ac fire by the Hebrews. Even though the treasured stories were handled with care and attention to detail, varia\u00ac tions evolved over the years as they were repeated. In the New Testament, the Gospels also began as collections of stories and teachings of Jesus which had been remem\u00ac bered by and shared among groups of Jesus\u2019 followers as they gathered to sort out and understand what had hap\u00ac pened. Just as had been done by the Old Testament writ\u00ac ers, the various gospel writers later compiled and edited what had been initially shared orally. Many of us who were carefully taught not to question the Bible have read it dozens of times and never noticed duplication of its stories and the differences between them. We are surprised to learn that there are two cre\u00ac ation stories and that the plot of Genesis 2 is different from Genesis 1. We are astonished when we compare the Gospel accounts of Jesus\u2019 death and resurrection and find that there are significant variations. We have blocked ourselves from discovering the discrepancies in the Bible. In doing so, we also block ourselves from examing the layers of rich meaning to be unearthed when we dig into \u2019\u2019why\" and \u201dhow\u201d the witness to God's saving activity through history was recorded and preserved. Scholars today use methods such as literary and his\u00ac torical criticism to try to recover not only the meaning of the Biblical books but also their layers of composi\u00ac tion. Beside containing different accounts of the same event, the Bible connects stories which were once sepa\u00ac rate."}
{"id": "expanding-images", "title": "Expanding Images", "year": 1990, "seq": 8, "text": "First of all, we can correct the mistranslations. This can be done by individuals and groups of scholars by comparing the original Hebrew and Greek texts with the modern translation. We can change exclusive terms that were obviously intended to be inclusive of all persons. And we can support the efforts to produce a more faithful translation for publication and distribution. But more adequate translations will not eliminate all of the exclusive terminology or the patriarchal bias. In setting the scene for reading the Scriptures as writ\u00ac ten, the historical context of time, location, cast of characters, intended audience, use in the life of the community, etc., can be described. The bias needs to be recognized as a part of our heritage which must be trans\u00ac lated to the social context and experience of our lives today. On occasion, we might choose a paraphrase which is reliable and faithful to the Biblical witness. Con\u00ac trasting these with the original is often illuminating. It is also helpful to focus on passages which are least biased by the patriarchal content and most inclusive in their message. While it is erroneous to impose our own biases on the Scriptures, we must rely on interpretation to capture the essential meaning for us in the present. In our worship services, this responsibility often most heavily falls on the minister as worship leader or preacher. But she or he must not be alone in this task. We must all study carefully as we read and interpret the Bible so we might faithfully understand its truth as fully as possible. And it is essential that we dialogue with others about our interpretations so our shared understanding might be ex\u00ac panded and enriched. Each of us will find our own relationship to the Bible and its meaning in our personal journey."}
{"id": "expanding-images", "title": "Expanding Images", "year": 1990, "seq": 9, "text": "If we absolutize the names of God, if we fail to recognize our language about God as metaphorical, we risk becoming idolatrous, worshipping a limited, human fabri\u00ac cation of God. 28 EXPANDING IMAGES A metaphor associates two things - we say \u2019\u2019one thing is like another.\" The interaction goes both ways: God is fatherlike; father is godlike. This continued associ\u00ac ation reinforces the dominance of the patriarchal figure in our culture. We cannot disassociate the word \"father\" from its common everyday usage in the community. The re\u00ac tention of the symbol of God as father has functioned to sustain male dominated institutions and lifestyles. It provides them with an integrating spiritual base. The church has a heritage which includes many names for God. We can open our eyes and reclaim the Biblical images which have been hidden or ignored. And we can grow in our spiritual life by identifying metaphors and sym\u00ac bols for God which are not bound by male-dominated lang\u00ac uage. Our own experience of the holy can be valued and named in ways which more accurately reflect divine activ\u00ac ity in our lives. It isn't necessary to completely remove names for God which connote gender. That would only serve to further disassociate our sexuality, created, in God's image, from our spirituality. The fullness of God reflected in female and male would be lost. Instead, we can interweave a variety of addresses for God - some masculine, some femi\u00ac nine, some neutral - without losing the emotional intim\u00ac acy we treasure. One prayer can begin \"Our Father.\" An\u00ac other can call on God as \"Our Mother.\" In a litany we might identify with \"Our Brother\" or \"Our Sister\" who is with us in every aspect of life. As we come to confes\u00ac sion, \"Our Parent\" could be asked to forgive us and nur\u00ac ture us in becoming the whole people we are intended to be."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1981-05-01", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1981-05-01 : Volume LXXV, Issue 21", "year": 1981, "seq": 0, "text": "The Middlebury Campus Friday, May 1, 1981 editorial Game plan Without the support of two of its major participants, the proposed new environmental studies program will meet almost certain defeat at the hands of the faculty on Monday \u2014 if it comes to a vote at all. Because of Steven and Oran Young\u2019s delayed op\u00ac position, the months of work of the Ad Hoc Commit\u00ac tee, the Educational Council and others seem to have blown away with the wind. Certainly their colleagues have a right to be annoyed by the brothers\u2019 ill-timing in voicing their opinions. But before jumping down the Youngs\u2019 throats, perhaps we should look at the root of the problem. None of the involved academic units is enthusiastic about combining environmental studies, northern studies and the geography department. In fact, it seems as though the idea to merge these three disciplines originated in the administration as a way to ameliorate the situation in several troublesome areas. Furthermore, it seems to us that little thought has been given to the long-term implications of joining these disciplines. It is doubtful that those ad\u00ac ministrators who chose to eliminate the geography department gave any thoughtful consideration to what kind of geography presence is desired in the Col\u00ac lege curriculum several years down the road. In addition, we doubt that they really studied whether \"innovative\u201d programs such as these are simply \u201ctrendy\u201d and will disappear in a few years or whether they have real application at a college such as Middlebury. All of our doubts point to a much larger concern. Does Middlebury College have an academic game plan \u2014 not just in this tripartite area but throughout the curriculum? We question that the College\u2019s administrators and faculty have given any real thought to what kind of academics should be pursued and to what meaning a bachelor\u2019s degree from Middlebury carries."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1981-05-01", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1981-05-01 : Volume LXXV, Issue 21", "year": 1981, "seq": 1, "text": "Aspects of the Renaissance selections include a flowing elaboration on melodies through simple repetition as well as ornamentation by in\u00ac struments and families of in\u00ac struments. Another outstan\u00ac ding feature of this music is the richness and complexity of its rhythmn, of which syn\u00ac copation is a staple. The third part of the pro\u00ac gram included a suite of dances published in 1547 by Pierre Attaingmant. The various dances, of Italian, French and German origin, ranged from the stately pavane to lively galliards. The combinations of in\u00ac strumental ensembles , both those of one family and mixed ensembles, provided many different moods. The sweet and melancholy viol solo of a German \u201cbrans le simple\" gave way to a rhythmically exuberant fanfare of cornetto and sackbut. For the fourth and final part of the concert, Calliope played a pleasurable set of Italian instrumental music from the sixteenth century. The Italian selections were delightful, exploring the gamut of instrumental com\u00ac binations from a passionate viol duet to the sound of pipe- and-tabor. Calliope gave an entertain\u00ac ing and instructive conscert which endeared them to their audience. The four musicians demonstrated a wonderful versatility and virtuosity with their instruments. Their own excellent and tasteful musi\u00ac cianship provided an evening in honor of the sweetest of the mythological muses, Calliope. Vanacore marble on display By Tina Nef\u201984 Various marble sculptures carved by Thomas Vanacore \u201982 are on exhibit in the Johnson Pit. The exhibition, which opened Friday, April 24, consists of fifteen pieces Vanacore carved over the past two years both at Mid\u00ac dlebury and in surrounding areas. Although Vanacore has always been \u201cinterested in drawing and art,\u201d this is his first show of this kind. Vanacore started sculpting two years ago under the tutelage of Charles Wells who, along with Bill Harris of the classics department, taught a winter term course in marble sculpturing."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1981-05-01", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1981-05-01 : Volume LXXV, Issue 21", "year": 1981, "seq": 2, "text": "Other women who have stood out include talented freshmen Cheryl Whitney (hurdles and 200 meters) and Sue Kelliher (shot put), plus sophomore Anne Clarke in the 400 meters. Smith has been encouraged with the work and improve\u00ac ment the team has exhibited, and felt that having four women qualify for the Easterns to be \u201cfantastic!\u201d. He noted that women\u2019s track programs in New England are often small and hindered by few meets, but felt that Middlebury\u2019s competitors have contributed to a quality program. The women also closed their season on Apr. 29 at home against Norwich, St. Michael\u2019s, and Nichols, with the regional championships to be conducted the following weekend. 14 The Middlebury Campus Friday, May 1, 1981 Panther nine drops three By Red Mansfield '82 three runs to hold a 3-1 lead done. It was a frustrating week for the Panther nine as they dropped three games to University of Vermont, RPI, and Norwich. Frustrating, because although the Pan\u00ac thers have played some ex\u00ac cellent baseball, they have been unable to come up with the big runs when they need them. Last Wednesday, Mid\u00ac dlebury traveled to UVM where they faced an im\u00ac pressive and experienced squad. Although the Cata\u00ac mounts were obviously the better team, the Panthers were only down 2-1 at the end of five innings, due to some superb pitching by hurling ace Dave Levy \u201982. In the sixth, however, UVM started to hit, and when the until the sixth, when RPI pick\u00ac ed up another marker. Starter Bob Gulla '83 went the distance for the Panthers but was plagued with control pro\u00ac blems, and was continually battling out of difficult situa\u00ac tions. In the ninth, the hosts made a dramatic comeback by ty\u00ac ing the game with two out and a lone runner on second base, and in the 11th, they finally pushd across the game-winner."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1981-05-01", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1981-05-01 : Volume LXXV, Issue 21", "year": 1981, "seq": 3, "text": "For the Pan\u00ac thers, Ed Gunther '81 drilled three hits and freshman Carter Freeman collected a pair. On Monday, Apr. 27, Mid\u00ac dlebury travelled over the Gap to Norwich University and once again found itself unable to hold onto a lead. After falling behind 1-0, the Line shots by Jim Loveys 82, Peter Price '81 and Gun\u00ac ther provided the Panthers with three runs in the seventh, but Norwich iced the game with a final run in the eighth, for a final margin of 9-6. Although the final results have been disappointing, the Panthers have been playing some fine baseball and with a couple breaks, could have easily picked up a couple vic\u00ac tories. Aside from Levy, the mound staff has been ex\u00ac periencing control problems, but the fielding and hitting have been solid. After Williams two days ago, the Panthers travel to Castleton for a makeup game today, and then to Union for a doubleheader tomorrow. Photo by Lori Ceiger '82 Ed Gunther '81 Is a mainstay for the Panther nine. dust cleared, they had scored Panthers struck for three eight runs. Frank Burke '83 runs in the third, only to see looked strong in relief, but the the lead disappear in the bot- Panther bats were silent the tom of the inning. Starter \u201cB\u201d teams are 8-2 overall rest of the way as Vermont Burke looked impressive until showcased four tough pit\u00ac chers over the nine-inning stretch, as they wound up with a 14-1 win. On Friday, the Panthers made the long trek to dismal Troy, New York, to face RPI, and once again came up just short of a victory as the Engineers broke a 3-3 tie with the winning run in the 1 lth in\u00ac ning. Down 1-0 after the first inn\u00ac ing. the Panthers then scored the fourth when, with two out, a pair of walks and two hits plated two more runs for the Cadets."}
{"id": "militarychaplain40unse", "title": "The Military Chaplains' Review", "year": 1985, "seq": 0, "text": "Ill iv Leadership and Parish Development The Army theme for 85 is Leadership. This emphasis challenges the chaplaincy to give renewed attention to the art and science of leader- ship. Some people see the chaplaincy as being on the fringe of mili- tary life, and they think we have nothing to do with leadership. These people are wrong. It is our duty to be a moral influence on leaders at every level. But if we are to minister effectively to leaders in today's Army, we must love soldiers and speak for our faith. We must understand leadership and know our leaders \u2014 walk with them, listen to them, talk with them. Furthermore, we chaplains, chaplain assistants, and directors of religious education are leaders ourselves. We plan for future opera- tions, assess situations and make decisions. Because we care for and influence those whom we lead, we must do it with vision, insight, integrity and courage. In the Army chaplaincy over the past twelve years, we have integrated the insights of leadership, management, and the behavioral sciences with our understandings of Scripture and theology. The result is the process we call Parish Development. We don't speak of developing congregations, but rather see the whole Army \u2014 from the soldier in the squad to the general in the Pentagon \u2014 as our parish. This issue of the Military Chaplains' Review combines leader- ship and parish development. These articles come from a variety of sources: the chaplaincy, the church, and business. The articles address a variety of subjects concerning leadership, organizational change, and our efforts in the chaplaincy to make individuals, groups, and organizations more effective instruments of God's will. I com- mend this issue to you for reading and study, for discussion with colleagues, and most importantly, for application in your various fields of ministry. Our faith groups, the Army, and our God call us to be leaders."}
{"id": "militarychaplain40unse", "title": "The Military Chaplains' Review", "year": 1985, "seq": 1, "text": "He received his seminary training at Wesley The- ological Seminary and has subsequently received advanced degrees in counseling and business administration. He was chief of the Leader- ship/Management Division at the Chaplain School prior to his present assignment. training. They seemed to think that those with the most rank got all of the TDY and used all the training funds. The concerned supervisor realized the importance of the professional update and conferred with a major command chaplain. Shortly afterward a pronouncement was made: Every chaplain will be entitled to a minimum of one TDY each year. Initially the decision was applauded by most chaplains; but because the ruling had no connection with actual need, it proved to be a dreadful mistake which had to be retracted and which cost the originators considerable loss of credibility. Example No. 2: Rolling Retreats While in Germany I experienced a high degree of success with \"roll- ing retreats.\" Our brigade sponsored eight or more each year, and we always had an overflow registration and waiting list. The retreats were popular spiritual journeys for both single service members and families. Whether learning of the atrocities of Hitler in Dachau, or visiting the shrine of Martin Luther at Coburg, the impact on the troops was significant. The program was so well respected that the USAREUR Chaplain printed some of the after-action reports in a booklet called, \"Rolling Retreats.\" Almost a year after the booklet was distributed, I received a call from another chaplain who was obviously frustrated. With con- siderable anguish, he described the traumatic failure of his attempt to duplicate the rolling retreat program. He had some great ideas but the first two retreats were not well received and were canceled at a signif- icant loss of money to the chapel budget. The idea which seemed so bright in the beginning, was cruelly snuffed out."}
{"id": "militarychaplain40unse", "title": "The Military Chaplains' Review", "year": 1985, "seq": 2, "text": "In each of these cases there is a common error which underlies the failure or weakness of the program. Had one ingredient been added, the idea may never have been proposed, or maybe it would have been engineered in a way which insured a higher probability of success. Whenever we attempt to promote good ideas, we are dealing with probabilities. Our task is to increase the odds for achievement. In this way we maintain our credibility, provide meaningful ministry for soldiers and their families, and enhance support for ministry. Why the failures in the chaplain TDY policy, retreat program, Easter Sunrise Service and Creative Ministries Workshop? In each case the chaplain who originated the idea failed to ascertain whether or not the organization could support it. This leads me to my basic hypothesis: The good ideas of chaplains often turn into nightmares because they fail to test for organizational support prior to moving into the implementation stage. In organization effectiveness terms, the chaplains failed to utilize a systems approach. Systems Approach Simply stated, a systems approach means that the originator of an idea runs the idea through a number of \"acid tests\" before he takes it to the implementation stage. It means getting ready, aiming, and firing, in that order. The getting ready and aiming require some careful, and often tedious, planning which some originators may try to skip. What are these \"acid tests?\" Pure systems theory states five elements which must be consid- ered before an idea becomes a proposal. These elements are mission, technology, personnel, structure and environment. Adapting this con- cept, I want to suggest the following tests: Funding, Personnel, Logis- tics, Technology and Environment. Keep in mind that an idea is a product of a dream, a hunch, a clue, a suggestion or a past experience."}
{"id": "militarychaplain40unse", "title": "The Military Chaplains' Review", "year": 1985, "seq": 3, "text": "Secondly, TDY target was in short supply, and no more was obtainable from any source during the last nine months of the fiscal year. Money was just not available to support ongoing travel and training requirements for 24 chaplains, 32 chaplain assistants and 3 civilians. To implement the staff chaplain's idea was impossible. Although the staff chaplain was convinced that the funds could be obtained since he had already announced his policy, unfortunately, even he could not come up with the TDY target to support his idea. As a result, the proposal was abandoned six months after it was announced. In this case the idea could have passed several of the tests with reasonable success. The personnel test could have been passed, the logistics test could have been passed, the technology requirements were non-existent, and the chaplain environment was generally sup- portive of the idea even though the comptroller later raised a few questions. However, the idea could not pass the funds test. Had the staff chaplain run his idea through the five tests prior to implement- ing it, the shortfall of money would have become obvious rather quickly, and the idea might have been revised or scrapped at that point. Since the decision was made in relative isolation, the tests were not applied, and the idea failed. Example No. 2 Retreat Revisited The mistakes made in the case of the rolling retreats are among the most common programming errors made by chaplains. The chaplain attempting to implement the idea was bright and dedicated, and he was devoted to the troops. In addition, the chaplain had all the money he needed to run the program. He was only limited by his own initiative, and as we will see, by a couple of other less obvious factors. The retreat idea would have easily passed the money test."}
{"id": "militarychaplain40unse", "title": "The Military Chaplains' Review", "year": 1985, "seq": 4, "text": "There was neither the logisti- cal capability, the environmental support, nor the personnel to tackle such an idealistic project. Two years later the same good idea was given the tests, and the final proposal was designed in a practical manner. A magnificent sunrise service was held on the same hill and in conjunction with the ministers of the civilian community. Example No. 4 Creative Ministry Workshop The final example, was a Creative Ministries Workshop jointly spon- sored by the chaplains of Fort Sill, Fort Bliss, Fort Carson and the US Army Chaplain Board. There was sufficient logistical support, and no problems with funding since the installations had co-sponsored the program with a grant from the Chaplain Board. A superb planning task force from all of the sponsoring agencies met to provide the personnel support, and there were more people requesting registration than there were spaces. Finally, there were no issues around technology. However, no one seriously considered the environmental issues. The military environment was not ready for chaplains to deal publicly with such issues and methodologies as homosexuality and hypnosis. When it was known that the guest speaker for \"Ministry to the Homosexual Community\" was a homosexual, the conference was canceled. Although no one sponsoring the conference was advocating homosexuality or the use of hypnosis, the purpose of the conference was lost in the uproar regarding these volatile issues. A good idea had become a nightmare because the content of the seminar ran counter to the prevailing sentiments, values, beliefs, policies and regulations. Conclusion In the military we use the words coordination, staffing and planning regularly. We are encouraged to take our ideas out of our own little worlds and to subject them to a head-on examination by the systems which will support or fail to support them. The extent to which we \"get ready\" and \"aim,\" before we \"fire\" often means the difference between an idea which becomes a nightmare or an idea which becomes a truly significant experience for ministry. 13 The One Minute Manager is an Androgynous Manager Kenneth H."}
{"id": "militarychaplain40unse", "title": "The Military Chaplains' Review", "year": 1985, "seq": 5, "text": "Sargent is a consultant and management trainer in orga- nization development, managerial effectiveness, performance man- agement and affirmative action. She is the author of many articles and books, including The Androgynous Manager. 14 As the man sat and listened to these \"nice\" people answer the same question, he heard, \"I'm a democratic manager.\" \"Participa- tive.\" \"Supportive.\" \"Considerate.\" \"Humanistic.\" He heard the pride in their voices and their interest in people. But he was disturbed. It was as though most managers in the world primarily were interested in either results or people. The managers who were interested in results often seemed to be labeled \"autocratic,\" while the managers interested in people were often labeled \"democratic.\" The young man thought each of the managers - the \"tough\" autocrat and the \"nice\" democrat - was only partially effective. \"It's like being half a manager,\" he thought. He returned home tired and discouraged. Unfortunately, we, too, are discouraged. While there has been some progress in recognizing the importance of both results and people, most managers still act as half a manager-either autocratic or democratic, directive or supportive, rational or emotional. And to make matters worse, these extremes are often based on gender stereotypes. Masculinity traditionally has been associated with a task-ori- ented, directive approach that values rational problem solving. Femi- ninity, on the other hand, has been characterized as a people- oriented, supportive approach that values sharing feelings and caring for others. In the home, for example, fathers have been thought of as providers and disciplinarians, while mothers have been labeled as helpers and nurturers. Our cultural norms even seem to have been divided into organi- zation norms (male) and family norms (female). Men have been taught to value task-oriented achieving and have been socialized to fill the needs of the organization. Women have been taught to be expressive."}
{"id": "militarychaplain40unse", "title": "The Military Chaplains' Review", "year": 1985, "seq": 6, "text": "Assert the right to work for self-fulfillment, rather than to play the role of provider. 10. Listen empathically and actively without feeling responsible for problem solving. 1 1 . Touch and be close to both men and women. Today, compliance can not be produced through threats (a \"don't do as I do \u2014 do as I say\" style) because power is no longer centralized in a few hands but is disbursed throughout organizations. Managing by the \"Golden Rule\" (whoever has the gold, makes the rules) eventually produces resistance and stifles creativity. The number-one character- istic of high-performance managers is to hold high standards for themselves and others. This is the heart of behavior modeling. Thus, the effective manager today teaches behaviors through modeling, and that is why it is so critical for managers to have a repertoire, a range of both masculine and feminine behaviors. If we are going to recognize that productivity comes through people, the \"whole\" manager will need to express and accept emo- tions, nurture and support colleagues and subordinates, and promote interactions between bosses and subordinates and between leaders and members of work teams. These behaviors are desirable, not only for their own sake, but because they can increase organizational effec- tiveness and efficiency. Since many of these behaviors traditionally have been regarded as feminine, and therefore not been rewarded in the marketplace, both male and female managers have avoided them. Indeed, managers have been expected to be aggressive, rational, autonomous, task-oriented and tough-minded. The new style does not call for abandoning traditional masculine behaviors; it calls for blending them with feminine behaviors. For example, men would not give up the concern for power but would learn to balance it with a concern for people. That means broadening their range of responses in affiliation, trust, openness, intuition and the expression of feelings."}
{"id": "militarychaplain40unse", "title": "The Military Chaplains' Review", "year": 1985, "seq": 7, "text": "Be able to intellectualize and generalize. 7. Deal directly with anger and blame, thereby rejecting feelings of suffering and victimization; be invulnerable to destructive feedback. 17 8. Talk and cry at the same time. 9. Respond directly with \"I\" statements rather than \"you\" statements. 10. Be analytical and systematic and share abstract models. 1 1 . Take more risks with power. to abandon their concern for relationships and would supplement it with an increased focus on outcome. They would become more asser- tive, depersonalize some situations and, hence, use more instrumen- tal behavior, share their competition and generally increase their behavioral repertoire for managing conflict and dealing with power. The term androgynous manager* describes this new management mode encouraging a mix of masculinity and femininity. Andro and gyne are the Greek roots for male and female. The androgynous manager is an archetype that represents the coming together of male- ness and femaleness. The androgynous manager is both dominant and yielding, combining independence with spontaneity, and playful- ness, nurturance and competence with compassion. An androgynous manager is well developed in both the right brain (creative skills such as intuition, fantasy and imagination) and the left brain (intellectual skills such as linear, abstract, logical and deductive thinking). In essence, the effective manager is someone with both leader- ship skills and supporting and helping behaviors. This blend is exactly what sets the one minute manager apart from other managers. As the young man learned, the one minute manager has three secrets: He or she sets goals, praises and reprimands performance. This is the androgynous blend. \"One minute goal setting,\" the first secret of the one minute manager, starts the whole management process. Without people knowing what they are being asked to do (accountability) and what good behavior should be (performance standards), they cannot be expected to achieve excellence. The traditional masculine approach to management took that into account."}
{"id": "militarychaplain40unse", "title": "The Military Chaplains' Review", "year": 1985, "seq": 8, "text": "Tell them that this is unlike them and you don't intend to let them get away with it because they are better than that. While the first three parts of the reprimand are not difficult for most masculine approach managers, the last step, praising, is very hard. They can't understand why they would do that. So the last and probably the most important part of the reprimand, the praising, is more in the realm of the feminine stereotype. To become one minute managers, people have to behave androgynously. They must be able to use the best of both worlds: the masculine task-oriented, directive approach and the feminine people- oriented, supportive approach. Given the popularity of books on the subject, we believe the androgynous manager of the future is upon us now. 19 Leadership Styles and Chaplain Applications CH (MAJ) John K. Stake The chaplain stood near the rear of the formation and waited for the new commander of the headquarters company to complete his tirade. Angry and frustrated by the failure of the company to properly exe- cute a physical exercise called the lunger, the commander threatened the unit with extra repetitions of the exercise. \"You were shown once how to do this. Now do it right, or you'll stay here until you do!\" His voice quavered with anger as he returned control of the formation to the platoon sergeant. Tension and resentment gripped the people of the headquarters company. The chaplain knew he should speak to the commander, but what should he say? Leadership and the Chaplain Although the chaplain does not command, he advises the commander and staff on the ethical and moral quality of leadership, and he exercises operational supervision and control within the chaplain section. 1 This article addresses the chaplain's contributions to leadership and presents three leadership models which can be readily grasped and easily applied."}
{"id": "militarychaplain40unse", "title": "The Military Chaplains' Review", "year": 1985, "seq": 9, "text": "Given this set of variables, the leader in this situation probably will achieve the greatest success by tapping the information and opin- ions of his subordinates in a group setting, in which he retains the right to make the final decision. A leader can learn to assess a situa- tion's variables in this way and reach a rational conclusion regarding the nature and extent of participation. Myth II: Managers are paid to make decisions and should make them This myth prevails in predominantly autocratic organizations. Man- agers in this organizational culture believe that it is their duty to make decisions alone. Allowing their subordinates to contribute to the analysis or to participate in the final conclusion is somehow a shirking of responsibility, a weakness, a diminishing of authority. Traditional manufacturing organizations with strong plant managers and companies still led by their entrepreneur founders typically fall in this category. I would argue that in many \u2014 but certainly not all \u2014 situations, the manager who does not involve others in the decision-making process may be shirking his or her responsibility to ensure successful resolution. The two ingredients necessary for the successful resolu- tion of most situations are the quality of the decision and the com- mitment of the implementors. Quality involves the selection of the best available alternative. Commitment involves the active support, rather than mere compliance, on the part of those who will carry out the decision. While both of these factors are not critical in all situa- tions, they certainly need to be considered. In the organization structure decision described under Myth I, both the quality of the alternative selected and the commitment of 30 those who have to work within the structure are essential. In a deci- sion concerning the establishment of a travel expense reporting sys- tem, the quality of the system most likely would be important."}
{"id": "movingaroundpart00broo", "title": "Moving around : partnership at work in dance on tour", "year": 1993, "seq": 0, "text": "For the public to expe- rience the range and vitality of the art form, live dance performance is es- sential. We can't turn on the radio or television to a dance station or borrow a shelf of dance classics from most local libraries. Even the best dance films and television programs are no substitute for the live experience. Dance On Tour is a living lending library of dance. The universality of dance and the brilliance of our dance artists and forms have given American dance unmatched prominence. No other country sur- passes us in the excellence, vitality and range of our dance \u2014 we produce nothing better. Dance is among this country's most successful exports; indeed, the work of our dance artists is often better known abroad than at home. This is ironic, since dance in this country has been an extraordinarily fertile art: the devel- opment of the art form, the creation of new works, and the variety of forms, styles and traditions that make up the American dance landscape have no parallel. Touring dance is a moving canvas, a record and history of our time enlivened by the engagement of artists with audiences and communities. While touring in the United States has been the economic lifeblood of most dance companies, it is fraught with risk. Some things have improved in the decades since pioneer dancers \u2014 Anna Pavlova, Isadora Duncan, Ruth St. Denis, Ted Shawn and Katherine Dunham \u2014 crisscrossed this land on America's rail- roads to bring an appreciation for dance to millions. In those days dancers encountered ignorance and prejudice and were exhausted from grueling tour schedules and uncertain pay days. By and large, theaters were filthy and floors unsuitable for dancing, leading to frequent and serious injuries that had no time to heal. The most pleasurable stops were those hosted by enlightened and excited presenters."}
{"id": "movingaroundpart00broo", "title": "Moving around : partnership at work in dance on tour", "year": 1993, "seq": 1, "text": "The dozen profiles that follow illustrate the exciting varieties and possibilities for artists and communities that have been helped through the Arts Endowment's Dance On Tour program. Some artists crave unfettered. time in a theater to create and rehearse work to be presented later, as in the Trisha Brown Company profile. The Liz Lerman/Dance Exchange and Urban Bush Women profiles illustrate interplay with the community and with non-tradi- tional settings involving populations at risk \u2014 children, the incarcerated, caregivers, the aged and infirm \u2014 engaged in dance processes that are life- affirming and often healing. Local artists, often experiencing a sense of iso- lation in their communities, are given opportunities to study and perform with fellow artists from other communities, sharing ideas and exploring new av- enues for artistic growth as in the Mark Dendy profile. We see through all these stories that there is no end of possibilities for artists, presenters and communities to engage with each other in ways that nourish and stimulate creativity. All this takes wise planning, responsive management, an entrepreneurial spirit and the resources equal to the real costs involved. That is why subsidy is imperative. The National Endowment for the Arts recognized long ago that federal subsidy was needed to bring the best dance of all kinds to people living in all parts of the country. The profiles in this book attest to the creativity and energy and innovation that have made our dance artists and companies the envy of the world. Through Dance On Tour, the art and artists are \"moving around,\" engaging Americans in all walks of life and in many different ways. The twelve projects you read about here only hint at the almost limitless possibilities when creative artists and equally creative presenters have the resources available to engage, to enlighten and to inspire communities."}
{"id": "movingaroundpart00broo", "title": "Moving around : partnership at work in dance on tour", "year": 1993, "seq": 2, "text": "Drill team?' These people were called to meetings; they had no idea why. We'd show them videos, explain what services a dance company could provide in their com- munity.\" On the second visit, the residency design team planned specific activities. They brought along Grannan, a gifted dance teacher in his own right. Brad- ley, herself a former dancer, brought to the planning process her under- standing of what the company could conceivably accomplish in a single day. The residency design team struc- tured the dancers' time, dividing the company into small platoons so more territory could be covered simulta- neously. A community volunteer trav- eled with each small group. When they weren't teaching or performing, they were on the road; Easter Day was spent covering the 216 miles from Taos to Farmington; the following Sunday they drove 378 miles from Farmington to Silver City. The visiting performers gave gener- ously of their time and energy, and left feeling that they, too, had been edu- cated. New Mexico is a place people are curious about and eager to visit. \"That factor means a company can enjoy their time here even though we work them to the bone,\" laughs Rosenkranz. The Eugene Ballet performed Chil- dren of the Raven, a signature piece in their repertory. The dance is based on legends of people native to the Pacific Northwest coast. Among the residency 15 Eugene Ballet Company New Mexico Arts Division Various Presenters sites were several Native American communities. The Eugene contingent included a Native American storyteller who shared his knowledge, most of it completely unfamiliar to the New Mexicans, at workshops in schools and communities. But when they contacted the Navajo Teen Life Center, their li- aison said she really wanted to explore classical and contemporary works. \"The kids out there,\" says Rosenkranz, \"have no exposure to classical and contemporary forms.\" The New Mexico project allowed Eugene Ballet members to interact with people from other cultures."}
{"id": "movingaroundpart00broo", "title": "Moving around : partnership at work in dance on tour", "year": 1993, "seq": 3, "text": "The work explores the many ways people intimidate and oppress one another \u2014 racially, economically and in terms of gender and sexual orientation. In the course of the piece, several of the male dancers bare their bodies as well as their souls. The project premiered at two well-attended performances at the recently renovated Blackstone Theater. An openly gay African-American artist, native to Houston with Creole roots, Rousseve thrived in Chicago. Collaborat- ing with White, Shirley Mordine (artistic director at the Dance Center), and Susan Lipman (executive director of Performing Arts Chicago), Rousseve was able, he said, to reach out to a vast and various group of people. \"They really listened to what we were telling them about the piece and how it should be marketed \u2014 that its issues are political as well as spiritual.\" Sue Latham, Rousseve's producer in New York, did the planning in tight com- munication with Chicago. Julie Simpson, a Chicago manager, was put in charge of day-to-day operations. Woodie White made extraordinary efforts to build un- derstanding of the potentially controver- sial piece and to build audiences. He ar- ranged outreach events at the Harold Washington Library in Chicago's inner city, at a gay community center and at various churches. Master classes were held in the community. One of Rousseve's dancers, Aziza, taught a combination of hip-hop and modern dance technique three days a week for four weeks, to high- school-age kids from public housing who wanted to be there. \"Aziza lives in Harlem,\" says Rousseve, \"and African- American pride is a big part of her per- sonal agenda.\" He continues, \"The bottom line, artis- tically speaking? The Chicago residency had a profound effect on the piece. You can't focus in your home town the way you can in another city."}
{"id": "movingaroundpart00broo", "title": "Moving around : partnership at work in dance on tour", "year": 1993, "seq": 4, "text": "When you're out- of-town you have the dancers' undivided attention for four weeks; you can rehearse eight hours a day instead of two. They don't have to teach or go to work as waitresses. I'm convinced that the piece, [co-commissioned by the Walker Art Cen- ter in Minneapolis] which was performed in the Next Wave Festival at the Brook- lyn Academy of Music in mid-November would not have been such a success without Chicago. To get it up on stage and see what it looked like made a pro- found difference.\" \"What at first appeared as overwhelm- ing,\" says Rousseve, \"became, by the end, a great system. It was the first time that community outreach became really ful- 18 David Rousseve/Reality Arts Midwest Dance Center of Columbia College Chicago filling for us. Audiences knew what to expect when they came. It even was more valuable for me than for the audience. We decided to reach out to church-going African-American people and have 'informances/ and to ask them what they saw.\" It was the first time, says Rousseve, that \"any producer out-of-town has had the time, money and resources to make us the centerpiece of a lot of different things. We recruited six dancers locally; Woodie took a lot of time finding them. They had the ability to invest a lot of time and energy in the piece. And my dancers were completely giving; we kept saying 'Can we do more? You're taking us to an African-American cul- tural center in the middle of the projects? Great!!' The outreach was a pleasure rather than a chore.\" For the final performances, about 1,000 people a night filled the Black- stone Theater: gay, straight, young, old, black, white, the most diverse audience Rousseve had ever seen for experimen- tal work."}
{"id": "movingaroundpart00broo", "title": "Moving around : partnership at work in dance on tour", "year": 1993, "seq": 5, "text": "In both cases, an important ob- jective was audience development. \"When I came to the North Carolina Arts Council [as touring and presenting director] in 1989,\" says Pamela Martin Green, \"the cultural diversity work was just getting going. I decided to try and do something with a black dance com- pany that would address communities of color. A lot of the mainstream present- ers were complaining about not being able to get black folks in to see their perfor- mances. My idea was to get the two together to satisfy each other's needs \u2014 to partner the presenters with local com- munity organizations of color. \"We did the Robinson project in six locations \u2014 Asheville, Winston-Salem, Greensboro, Charlette, Chapel Hill and Pembroke \u2014 in four weeks. I think it was incredible for the communities, and very, very hard for the Cleo Parker Robinson Dance Ensemble. I don't know of another company that would have been willing to do what they did.\" What they did was appear in six com- munities, performing repertory including Spiritual Suite, a contemporary work to gospel music. For this piece, they incor- porated local dancers in each place. \"We'd audition in each city, rehearse and do a costumed performance \u2014 all in four days,\" laughed Robinson. In a couple of locales, they recruited and rehearsed live gospel choirs as well. The company also offered master classes and lecture dem- onstrations at each site. \"We spent a lot of our money on plan- ning. We brought Cleo in from Denver three times before the residency actually took place,\" says Green. \"I required all the partners to attend. It gave a sense of unity to the tour. Everybody got to know each other. The state arts council created a promotional package to go along with the tour: a poster, a public service an- nouncement."}
{"id": "movingaroundpart00broo", "title": "Moving around : partnership at work in dance on tour", "year": 1993, "seq": 6, "text": "\"And after that, the company explained how they had developed similar material into their own performance.\" Sixty minutes later, at the climax of an event that grew to feel like a \"revival meeting,\" says Garcia, the capacity au- dience of 360 white, black and Hispanic students jumped to their feet and cheered. The idea that art can be created from personal experience \u2014 that it need not be intellectually distant or inapproach- able\u2014 is a central tenet of Urban Bush Women's philosophy, a philosophy the company has been able to pass on all over the country through programs funded in part by Dance On Tour. In performance pieces that blend stories, games, songs and memories, artistic director Jawole Willa Jo Zollar ada- mantly affirms her own African-Ameri- can heritage, even as she and her pre- dominantly female company serve as role models for African-American kids. \"They are very interested in being role models, in showing kids that being an artist or dancer is something admirable and something to aspire to,\" says Chris Cowden, the executive director of the Center for Women & Their Work, the group's Austin presenter. \"That's very central to what they do, so that makes their appearance in schools a very good fit.\" And a good fit for Women & Their Work, too, an organization whose mis- sion is to encourage \"art as a profes- sion\"\u2014 especially for women. Cowden, who first presented Urban Bush Women in 1989, brought the group back as the centerpiece of \"Be- yond Borders,\" a series designed to showcase a wide range of culturally defined aesthetics. Accordingly, Cowden and her racially diverse board made special efforts to reach out to the African-American community in Aus- tin, which makes up approximately 12% of the city's half-million population. \"You have to market differently to different communities,\" explains Cowden, who says she has learned a lot about attracting black audiences through years of building cross-cultural alliances."}
{"id": "movingaroundpart00broo", "title": "Moving around : partnership at work in dance on tour", "year": 1993, "seq": 7, "text": "\"It's important to go through churches, through social groups, sorori- ties and fraternities \u2014 which have a dif- ferent meaning in the black community than they do in the white community.\" Black-oriented media can play an im- portant role too, she says. Zollar, for in- stance, was interviewed on the local Af- rican-American radio station, and ad- vertisements were placed in the black newspaper and other media that di- 24 Urban Bush Women Mid-America Arts Alliance Center for Women & Their Work rectly served the African-American population. The connections paid off. \"The phone started ringing on Mon- day and we got 500 calls that week,\" says Cowden, whose small office staff was unprepared for the onslaught. With ticket revenue from two sold-out per- formances, a grant of $3,160 from Dance On Tour through the Mid- America Arts Alliance and additional funds from the National Performance Network, the National Endowment for the Arts and the City of Austin, Women & Their Work was able to break even on its budget of $15,238. \"To call it a financial success would be kind of misleading,\" says Cowden with a chuckle, explaining that substan- tial in-kind donations and administra- tive costs are not included in this fig- ure. \"But we always look at the impact on Austin as the measure of success.\" For that, one must look again at Johnston High School which includes a sizeable African-American popula- tion. Except for the 400 students who attend the magnet Liberal Arts Acad- emy housed there, the majority of the school's 1,700 pupils come from single- parent homes in two of the poorest areas in Austin. More than half of the students at Urban Bush Women's lec- ture-demonstration were black, clearly hungry for the rare opportunity to wit- ness their heritage being explored and validated. \"We're seven strong women and one man, we wear our hair natural, we talk Urban Bush Women in Heat."}
{"id": "movingaroundpart00broo", "title": "Moving around : partnership at work in dance on tour", "year": 1993, "seq": 8, "text": "Making them in a cramped studio and seeing them performed on stage for the first time only days before a pre- miere had become unacceptable. Work looks different from the 15th row of an auditorium, she knows, than it does when you're right on top of it. But theaters are expensive to open and run. As well, Brown and her dancers were eager to open a school through which they could disseminate her technical innovations. They had re- ceived an Arts Endowment Challenge grant to explore some options. \"We figured there had to be presenters with facilities but without the money for residencies of at least four weeks,\" commented Brown's executive direc- tor, Susan Fait-Meyers. The well-equipped, 1,453-seat Flynn Theatre in downtown Burlington had been unused during July and August every year; during the short northern Vermont summer, people spend as much time outdoors as possible. The Flynn's director of programming, Philip Bither, wanted to keep the building in use without extending the performance season or his budget. He had met Fait-Meyers in the early developmental days of the Dance On Tour program at a presenters' confer- ence in Maryland. Bither and Brown's manager developed a residency plan which met all of their needs. Sup- ported by the New England Founda- tion for the Arts (NEFA), they found a way for Brown's ensemble to have that rarest commodity: weeks of relaxed resi- dency in a bucolic spot, the best possible environment for the development of new dance. The only question remaining was how to involve the Vermont community. They decided to concentrate outreach ac- tivities on one long weekend, so that the Vermonters wouldn't have to forgo the outdoor summer activities they craved, and the Brown company could focus uninterrupted time on their own work. A different company member taught a master class each Tuesday night during the three-week residency; between 20 and 30 people attended each session."}
{"id": "movingaroundpart00broo", "title": "Moving around : partnership at work in dance on tour", "year": 1993, "seq": 9, "text": "Early in the residency Brown presented a lecture-demonstra- tion in which she explored, in public, the movement problems she was in- vestigating with her dancers. During the open weekend, called \"Evolution of an Artist,\" Brown hosted more than 200 people. She talked about her work; offered a company demonstration of her major themes from the past two decades and of the piece she was developing at the Flynn; opened her rehearsal to the public; screened a series of videotapes of earlier works in a downstairs space; and held a \"meet the artist\" discussion. Interested visitors could view both process and product, as well as spend social time meeting and talking with Brown and her dancers. All activities other than master classes were free; full concerts featur- ing the work developed during the 26 Trisha Brown Company New England Foundation for the Arts Flynn Theatre - *' residency were scheduled for late Feb- ruary, 1993. The \"open-weekend\" at- tracted local participants as well as visitors from as far away as Montreal, Brooklyn, Ohio and Boston. About 400 community people participated in the resi- dency in one way or another. An ideal balance was struck between the company's need to cloister itself and create new work, and the community's desire for opportu- nities to study and to observe. \"Often a residency is about catering to the audience's needs,\" noted Fait- Meyers. \"Here, the center was taking care of the artist's and the company's needs; the audience responded strongly to that. Partly, it was because Burlington is an aware, progressive, inquisitive community.\" \"We struck the right balance between allowing enough time for the Trisha Brown Company to be on its own, and for it to give something back,\" said Bither. \"One of the final events was an informal discussion on dance/music collaborations. We invited all the lo- cal composers, many of whom collabo- rate with area dancers."}
{"id": "mod12modulationprinciples", "title": "Modulation", "year": 1998, "seq": 0, "text": "Written by, and with the advice of, senior technicians in these ratings, this series provides beginners with fundamental electrical and electronic concepts through self-study. The presentation of this series is not oriented to any specific rating structure, but is divided into modules containing related information organized into traditional paths of instruction. The series is designed to give small amounts of information that can be easily digested before advancing further into the more complex material. For a student just becoming acquainted with electricity or electronics, it is highly recommended that the modules be studied in their suggested sequence. While there is a listing of NEETS by module title, the following brief descriptions give a quick overview of how the individual modules flow together. Module 1, Introduction to Matter, Energy, and Direct Current, introduces the course with a short history of electricity and electronics and proceeds into the characteristics of matter, energy, and direct current (dc). It also describes some of the general safety precautions and first-aid procedures that should be common knowledge for a person working in the field of electricity. Related safety hints are located throughout the rest of the series, as well. Module 2, Introduction to Alternating Current and Transformers, is an introduction to alternating current (ac) and transformers, including basic ac theory and fundamentals of electromagnetism, inductance, capacitance, impedance, and transformers. Module 3, Introduction to Circuit Protection, Control, and Measurement, encompasses circuit breakers, fuses, and current limiters used in circuit protection, as well as the theory and use of meters as electrical measuring devices. Module 4, Introduction to Electrical Conductors, Wiring Techniques, and Schematic Reading, presents conductor usage, insulation used as wire covering, splicing, termination of wiring, soldering, and reading electrical wiring diagrams. Module 5, Introduction to Generators and Motors, is an introduction to generators and motors, and covers the uses of ac and dc generators and motors in the conversion of electrical and mechanical energies."}
{"id": "mod12modulationprinciples", "title": "Modulation", "year": 1998, "seq": 1, "text": "Module 6, Introduction to Electronic Emission, Tubes, and Power Supplies, ties the first five modules together in an introduction to vacuum tubes and vacuum-tube power supplies. Module 7, Introduction to Solid-State Devices and Power Supplies, is similar to module 6, but it is in reference to solid-state devices. Module 8, Introduction to Amplifiers, covers amplifiers. Module 9, Introduction to Wave-Generation and Wave-Shaping Circuits, discusses wave generation and wave-shaping circuits. Module 10, Introduction to Wave Propagation, Transmission Lines, and Antennas, presents the characteristics of wave propagation, transmission lines, and antennas. tv Module 11 , Microwave Principles, explains microwave oscillators, amplifiers, and waveguides. Module 12, Modulation Principles, discusses the principles of modulation. Module 13, Introduction to Number Systems and Logic Circuits, presents the fundamental concepts of number systems, Boolean algebra, and logic circuits, all of which pertain to digital computers. Module 14, Introduction to Microelectronics, covers microelectronics technology and miniature and microminiature circuit repair. Module 15, Principles of Synchros, Servos, and Gyros, provides the basic principles, operations, functions, and applications of synchro, servo, and gyro mechanisms. Module 16, Introduction to Test Equipment, is an introduction to some of the more commonly used test equipments and their applications. Module 17, Radio-Frequency Communications Principles, presents the fundamentals of a radio- frequency communications system. Module 18, Radar Principles, covers the fundamentals of a radar system. Module 19, The Technician's Handbook, is a handy reference of commonly used general information, such as electrical and electronic formulas, color coding, and naval supply system data. Module 20, Master Glossary, is the glossary of terms for the series. Module 21, Test Methods and Practices, describes basic test methods and practices. Module 22, Introduction to Digital Computers, is an introduction to digital computers. Module 23, Magnetic Recording, is an introduction to the use and maintenance of magnetic recorders and the concepts of recording on magnetic tape and disks. Module 24, Introduction to Fiber Optics, is an introduction to fiber optics."}
{"id": "mod12modulationprinciples", "title": "Modulation", "year": 1998, "seq": 2, "text": "The telegraph key, wire lines, and Morse code made possible almost instantaneous communications between points at great distances. Submarine cables solved the problems of transoceanic communications, but communications with ships at sea and mobile forces were still poor. In 1897 Marconi demonstrated the first practical wireless transmitter. He sent and received messages over a distance of 8 miles. By 1898 he had demonstrated the usefulness of wireless telegraph communications at sea. In 1899 he established a wireless telegraphic link across the English Channel. His company also established general usage of the wireless telegraph between coastal light ships (floating lighthouses) and land. The first successful transatlantic transmissions were achieved in 1902. From that time to the present, radio communication has grown at an extraordinary rate. Early systems transmitted a few words per minute with doubtful reliability. Today, communications systems reliably transmit information across millions of miles. The desire to communicate directly by voice, at a higher rate of speed than possible through basic telegraphy, led to further research. That research led to the development of MODULATION. Modulation is the ability to impress intelligence upon a TRANSMISSION MEDIUM, such as radio waves. A transmission medium can be described as light, smoke, sound, wire lines, or radio-frequency waves. In this module, you will study the basic principles of modulation and DEMODULATION (removing intelligence from the medium). In your studies, you will learn about modulation as it applies to radio-frequency communications. To modulate is to impress the characteristics (intelligence) of one waveform onto a second waveform by varying the amplitude, frequency, phase, or other characteristics of the second waveform. First, however, you will review the characteristics and generation of a sine wave. This review will help you to better understand the principles of modulation. Then, an important principle called HETERODYNING (mixing two frequencies across a nonlinear impedance) will be studied and applied to modulation."}
{"id": "mod12modulationprinciples", "title": "Modulation", "year": 1998, "seq": 3, "text": "What two conditions are necessary> for heterodyning to take place? AMPLITUDE-MODULATED SYSTEMS Amplitude modulation refers to any method of varying the amplitude of an electromagnetic carrier frequency in accordance with the intelligence to be transmitted by the carrier. The CARRIER frequency is a radio-frequency wave suitable for modulation by the intelligence to be transmitted. One form of this method of modulation is simply to interrupt the carrier in accordance with a prearranged code. CONTINUOUS WAVE (CW) The \"on-off' KEYING of a continuous wave (cw) carrier frequency was the principal method of modulating a carrier in the early days of electrical communications. The intervals of time when a carrier either was present or absent conveyed the desired intelligence. This is still used in modem communications. When applied to a continuously oscillating radio-frequency source, on-off keying is referred to as cw signaling. This type of communication is sometimes referred to as an interrupted continuous wave (icw). Development The use of a cw transmitter can be very simple. All that is required for the transmitter to work properly is a device to generate the oscillations, a method of keying the oscillations on and off, and an antenna to radiate the energy. Continuous wave was the first type of modulation used. It is still extensively used for long-range communications. When Marconi and others were attempting the transfer of intelligence between two points, without reliance on a conducting path, they employed the use of a practical coding system known as Morse code. You probably know that Morse code is a system of on-off keying developed for telegraph that is capable of passing intelligence over wire at an acceptable rate. Morse code consists only of periods of signal and no-signal. Figure 1-20 is the International Morse code used with telegraphy and cw modulation."}
{"id": "mod12modulationprinciples", "title": "Modulation", "year": 1998, "seq": 4, "text": "The capacitors and rf chokes in figure 1-26, views (A) and (B), prevent surges of current. In view (B), the choke coil causes a lag in the current when the key is closed, and the current builds up gradually instead of instantly. The capacitor charges as the key is opened and slowly releases the energy stored in the magnetic field of the inductor. The resistor controls the rate of charge of the capacitor and also prevents sparking at the key contacts by the sudden discharge of the capacitor when the key is closed. MACHINE KEYING. \u2014The speed with which information can be transmitted using a hand key depends on the keying ability of the operator. Early communicators turned to mechanized methods of keying the transmitters to speed transmissions. More information could be passed in a given time by replacing the hand-operated key with a keying device capable of reading information from punched tape. Using this method, several operators could prepare tapes at their normal operating speed. The tapes could then be read through the keying device at a higher rate of speed and more information could be transmitted in a given amount of time. Spectrum Analysis Continuous-wave transmission has the disadvantage of being a relatively slow transmission method. Still, it has several advantages. Some of the advantages of cw transmission are a high degree of clarity under severe noise conditions, long-range operation, and narrow bandwidth. A highly skilled operator can pick out and read a cw signal even though it has a high degree of background noise or interference. Since only a single-carrier frequency is being transmitted, all of the transmitter power can be concentrated in the intelligence. This concentration of power gives the transmission a greater range. The use of spectrum 1-32 analysis (figure 1 -27) illustrates the transmitted frequency characteristics of a cw signal."}
{"id": "mod12modulationprinciples", "title": "Modulation", "year": 1998, "seq": 5, "text": "This means that its antenna (which can present a varying impedance) must not be connected directly to the oscillator circuit. The rf oscillations must be sent through another circuit before they are fed to the antenna for good frequency stability to be obtained. That additional circuit is an rf power amplifier. Its purpose is to raise the amplitude of rf oscillations to the required output power level and isolate the oscillator from the antenna. Any transmitter consisting of an oscillator and a single-amplifier stage is called a master oscillator power amplifier transmitter (mopa), as shown in figure 1-29. Figure 1-29.\u2014Block diagram of a master oscillator power amplifier transmitter (mopa). Most mopa transmitters have only one tube amplifier in the power-amplifier stage. However, the oscillator may not produce sufficient power to drive a power-amplifier tube to the power output level required for the antenna. In such cases, the power-amplifier stages are designed to use two or more amplifiers which can be driven by the oscillator. Two or more amplifiers can be connected in parallel (with similar elements of each tube connected) or in a push-pull arrangement. In a push-pull amplifier, the grids are fed equal rf voltages that are 180 degrees out of phase. The main advantage of a mopa transmitter is that the power-amplifier stage isolates the oscillator from the antenna. This prevents changes in antenna-to-ground capacitance from affecting the oscillator 1-34 frequency. A second advantage is that the rf power amplifier is operated so that a small change in the voltage applied to its grid circuit will produce a large change in the power developed in its plate circuit. Rf power amplifiers require that a specific amount of power be fed into the grid circuit. Only in this way can the tube deliver an amplified power output."}
{"id": "mod12modulationprinciples", "title": "Modulation", "year": 1998, "seq": 6, "text": "What is the purpose of frequency-multiplier stages in a VHF transmitter? AMPLITUDE MODULATION The telegraph and radiotelegraph improved man's ability to communicate by allowing speedy passage of information between two distant points. However, it failed to satisfy one of man's other communications needs; that is, the ability to hear and be heard, by voice, at a great distance. In an effort to improve on the telegraph, Alexander Graham Bell developed the principles on which modem communications are built. He developed the modulation of an electric current by complex waveforms, the demodulation of the resulting wave, and recovery of the original waveform. This section will examine the process of varying an electric current in amplitude at an audio frequency. 1-36 Microphones If an rf carrier is to convey intelligence, some feature of the carrier must be varied in accordance with the information to be transmitted. In the case of speech intelligence, sound waves must be converted to electrical energy. A MICROPHONE is an energy converter that changes sound energy into electrical energy. A diaphragm in the microphone moves in and out in accordance with the compression and rarefaction of the atmosphere caused by sound waves. The diaphragm is connected to a device that causes current flow in proportion to the instantaneous pressure delivered to it. Many devices can perform this function. The particular device used in a given application depends on the characteristics desired, such as sensitivity, frequency response, impedance matching, power requirements, and ruggedness. The SENSITIVITY or EFFICIENCY of a microphone is usually expressed in terms of the electrical power level which the microphone delivers to a matched-impedance load compared to the sound level being converted. The sensitivity is rated in dB and must be as high as possible. A high microphone output requires less gain in the amplifiers used with the microphone."}
{"id": "mod12modulationprinciples", "title": "Modulation", "year": 1998, "seq": 7, "text": "The coil is located between the pole pieces of the permanent magnet. Any vibration of the diaphragm vibrates the armature at the same rate. This varies the magnetic flux in the armature and through the coil. 1-40 DRIVER ROD Figure 1-36.\u2014Magnetic microphone action. When the armature is in its resting position (midway between the two poles), the magnetic flux is established across the air gap. However, no resultant flux is established in the armature. When a compression wave strikes the diaphragm, the armature is deflected to the right. Most of the flux continues to move in the direction of the arrows. However, some flux now flows from the north pole of the magnet across the reduced gap at the upper right, down through the armature, and around to the south pole of the magnet. When a rarefaction wave occurs at the diaphragm, the armature is deflected to the left. Some flux is now directed from the north pole of the magnet, up through the armature, through the reduced gap at the upper left, and back to the south pole. The vibrations of the diaphragm cause an alternating flux in the armature which induces an alternating voltage in the coil. This voltage has the same waveform as that of the sound waves striking the diaphragm. The magnetic microphone is very similar to the dynamic microphone in terms of impedance, sensitivity, and frequency response. However, it is more resistant to vibration, shock, and rough handling than other types of microphones. Changing sound waves into electrical impulses is the first step in voice communications. It is common to all the transmission media you will study in the remainder of this chapter. We will discuss the various types of modulation that arc used to transfer this information to a transmission medium in the following sections."}
{"id": "mod12modulationprinciples", "title": "Modulation", "year": 1998, "seq": 8, "text": "FSK SIGNALS. \u2014In fsk the rf signal is shifted in frequency (not amplitude) between \"key-open\" and \"key-closed\" conditions. The signal amplitude remains essentially constant. View (A) of figure 2-3 represents the letter \"F\" keyed as a shift in frequency between mark and space. The normal frequency condition with the key open is a space. Recall that this may be either the lower or higher frequency. When the key is closed, the frequency instantly changes to the mark value and remains constant during the marking interval. Opening the key again returns the frequency to the space frequency. Midway between the mark and space frequencies is the assigned channel frequency. Also shown in view (A) is the variation along the amplitude axis caused by the same noise and interference mentioned earlier. The right-hand portion of view (A) illustrates the elimination of this noise by the receiving equipment. View (B) clearly shows that scanning the signal along the amplitude and time axes reproduces no amplitude variations from signal interference. However, if the scanning is accomplished along the frequency and time axes, the intelligence is reproduced, as shown in view (C). By this system, the intelligence can be recovered at the receiving station in its original form; it will be nearly unaffected by conditions in the radio path other than fading. As a matter of fact, fsk resists the effects of fading better than cw. FREQUENCY-SHIFT KEYING. \u2014In its simplest form, frequency-shift keying of a transmitter can be accomplished by shunting a capacitor (or an inductor) and key (in series) across the oscillator circuit. By locking the normal key of the transmitter and operating only the oscillator circuit key, you can change the oscillator frequency. The shift in frequency between mark (key-closed) and space (key-open) conditions is determined by the effect of the additional capacitance (or inductance) on the oscillator frequency."}
{"id": "mod12modulationprinciples", "title": "Modulation", "year": 1998, "seq": 9, "text": "ADVANTAGES OF FSK OVER AM. \u2014Frequency-shift keying is used in all single-channel, radiotelegraph systems that use automatic printing systems. The advantage of fsk over on-off keyed cw is that it rejects unwanted signals (noise) that are weaker than the desired signal. This is true of all fm systems. Also, since a signal is always present in the fsk receiver, automatic volume control methods may be used to minimize the effects of signal fading caused by ionospheric variations. The amount of inherent signal-to-noise ratio improvement of fsk over AM is approximately 3 to 4 dB. This improvement is because the signal energy of fsk is always present while signal energy is present for only one-half the time in AM systems. Noise is continuously present in both fsk and AM, but is eliminated in fsk reception. Under the rapid fading and high-noise conditions that commonly exist in the high frequency (hf) region, fsk shows a marked advantage over AM. Overall improvement is sometimes expressed as the RATIO OF TRANSMITTED POWERS required to give equivalent transmission results over the two systems. Such a ratio varies widely, depending on the prevailing conditions. With little fading, the ratio may be entirely the result of the improvement in signal-to-noise ratio and may be under 5 dB. However, under severe fading conditions, large amounts of power often fail to give good results for AM transmission. At the same time, fsk may be satisfactory at nominal power. The power ratio (fsk versus AM) would become infinite in such a case. Another application of fsk is at low and very low frequencies (below 300 kilohertz). At these frequencies, keying speeds are limited by the \"flywheel\" effect of the extremely large capacitance and inductance of the antenna circuits. These circuits tend to oscillate at their resonant frequencies."}
{"id": "OddJob_Script_Language_Interpreter_for_OS-9_1990_Technoteacher_Inc", "title": "Radio Shack CoCo Manual: OddJob Script Language Interpreter for OS-9 (1990)(Technoteacher Inc)", "year": 1990, "seq": 0, "text": "It is perfectly ok to use any amount of whitespace at the beginning of any command line, as well as between any two tokens. This makes it easy to show program structure, for example, by indenting the commands within an if, loop, or switch re- gion. It is also a good practice to indent continued lines to emphasize the fact that they are continued, as was done in the example above. 13 Section 6: MISCELLANEOUS SYNTACTICAL FEATURES This page deliberately left blank. 14 Variable Substitution There are really two distinct types of variable substitution at work in OJ. The main type, \"dollar substitution,\" is used for all commands, period. The other type, \"automatic substitu- tion,\" works only in calculational expressions (\"calc expression\" or \"calc exp\"), which are only found in certain parts of if, calc, loop, return, exit, and setprior commands. What makes things confusing, perhaps, is that both dollar and automatic substi- tution are at work in the commands that can contain calculational expressions. Dollar substitution is made available to the programmer via the $ character. As the inter- preter executes a script, each line of code undergoes tokenization, macro substitution, and then dollar substitution. In dollar substitution, if any token on the line begins with the $ character, that entire token is replaced by the entire contents of the variable whose name follows the $. At this point, the interpreter does not yet care which command is to be executed (i.e., what the first token on the line is); therefore all commands, including the calculational commands, are subject to dollar substitution. The second form of variable substitution, automatic substitution, is available without the use of the $ character. It only occurs in calculational expressions, however, and calculational expressions are found in only the following commands: if, calc, loop, exit, re- turn, and setprior. Here is a complete list of the places where calculational expressions can appear: if calc exp calc var = calcjexp loop label ; var = calcjexp ; calcjexp ; var = calc exp exit calcjexp return calcjexp set_prior calcjexp Please note that no calculational expression can be understood by the interpreter unless it appears in one of the above places."}
{"id": "OddJob_Script_Language_Interpreter_for_OS-9_1990_Technoteacher_Inc", "title": "Radio Shack CoCo Manual: OddJob Script Language Interpreter for OS-9 (1990)(Technoteacher Inc)", "year": 1990, "seq": 1, "text": "This output is from the second fprintf. NOTE: Quotation marks surround the control strings in the fprintf commands in order to allow those strings to contain spaces and yet become one and only one token. Please note that the quotation marks surrounding any token are stripped off when the lines are tokenized, as is evident if you look above at the output generated because of the show_to- kens_on command. When you want quotation marks to form a portion of the control string, precede them with backslashes. NOTE: When you look at the output generated by the show__tokens_on command, please note that each token is displayed on your screen as if it had been processed by the alphameric command. The single leading backslash has been converted into two back- slashes; otherwise the interpreter might think a single character was meant by the combination of the backslash and the character following it, like \\n. For more information about back- slash interpretation, see Section 10 and the alphameric command in Sermon 11. 20 Calculational Expressions The expressions found in calc, if, loop, exit, return, and set_prior com- mands are treated somewhat differently than the arguments of other commands. Variable names do not have to stand alone as individual tokens, and they do not have to be preceded by a $; the name will always be substituted for its value (a string) whether it is preceded by a $ or not (except, of course, for the variable on the left side of the assignment operator token = ). For a discussion of this automatic form of variable substitution, see Section 7 In OJ, calculational expressions may appear only in calc, if, loop, exit, return! and set_prior commands. Expressions may be of arbitrary complexity, although the number of levels of parenthesization is currently limited to a depth of 10."}
{"id": "OddJob_Script_Language_Interpreter_for_OS-9_1990_Technoteacher_Inc", "title": "Radio Shack CoCo Manual: OddJob Script Language Interpreter for OS-9 (1990)(Technoteacher Inc)", "year": 1990, "seq": 2, "text": "No two labels can be the same in any one script. A valid label can have only one token on the line. A label can be any length. 60 Section 11; COMMANDS memory management local format: local varname^l (...varname_n) purpose: Force all the varnames to be local variables henceforth within this script (but not within any done or doing scripts). notes: There are two classes of variables in OJ. One is called \"global,\" and the other is called \"local.*' Both kinds work the same way, and they are used in the same ways. Indeed, you can ignore the distinction entirely, in which case all your variables will be global, except for the system variables qreturn, ex- itstat, argc, and argv[0 . . .n] , which are always local regardless of anything you may do. Global variables are created automatically whenever you set them for the first time. They are available thereafter throughout the entire invocation of OJ, in all called and calling scripts. Similarly, any global variables created and/or set in any scripts called via the do command will continue to exist and retain their new values even after the done script has returned to the doing script. Local variables are created by the local command. Any script which uses local variables should declare them at the beginning of the script with one or more local commands; this practice will make the script easier to maintain. However, it is ok to use local before any other mention of the variable, even if the local does not appear at the beginning of the script. Whenever a variable is mentioned by name, OJ looks to see whether it exists. It always looks first in the banktof local variables, and if it is not there, it looks in the bank of global variables. If the variable does not exist and must be set to some value, the variable is created as a global variable."}
{"id": "OddJob_Script_Language_Interpreter_for_OS-9_1990_Technoteacher_Inc", "title": "Radio Shack CoCo Manual: OddJob Script Language Interpreter for OS-9 (1990)(Technoteacher Inc)", "year": 1990, "seq": 3, "text": "(... string_n) purpose: Write some bytes on a file (or to $stdout or $stderr). notes: qreturn will be set to a negative value if an error occurred, or it will be set to a positive value equal to the number of bytes written. All the string tokens will be concatenated and written to the file. Don't forget the $ before the file handle variable. To output text to the screen, use writefile $stdout or writefile $stderr. writefile uses fputc(), which means that when the output is to an SCF device (such as /tl) rather than to a file, the translations in effect for that device will be done. These translations may include the expansion of tab char- acters into some number of spaces, and the addition of a linefeed character to each carriage return character. If you do not wish these translations to take place, use the -writefile rather than the writefile form of the command, -writefile calls the low-level write() function rather than fputc(); write() does not perform the translation. (For more information about translation of char- acters, consult the documentation on the x mode program in your OS-9 manual.) writefile is a \"backslash-interpreting\" command. See also openf ile, fprintf, closefile, readfile, seekf- ile, and tellf ile. It's often handier to use fprintf. WARNING: Once a device or file has been opened, use either writefile or -writefile, but do not use both. Also, if you use -writefile, the only other i/o command you may use with its file handle is closefile! Do not attempt to use fprintf, readfile, seekfile or tellf- ile \u2014 the results will be unpredictable. 105 Section 11; COMMANDS This page deliberately left blank. 106 Interactive Script Debugger The debugger is built into the OJ interpreter. It allows the programmer to control and in- terrupt execution of scripts at arbitrary times, and, while execution is interrupted, to examine the contents of any or all variables\" To be in debug mode, use the --d option when invoking OJ."}
{"id": "OddJob_Script_Language_Interpreter_for_OS-9_1990_Technoteacher_Inc", "title": "Radio Shack CoCo Manual: OddJob Script Language Interpreter for OS-9 (1990)(Technoteacher Inc)", "year": 1990, "seq": 4, "text": "You will then see the first executable line of the script, followed by the prompt: OJdb: The line of your script which is displayed immediately above the OJdb : prompt is always the line which is about to be executed. At this prompt you may type any of the following single-letter commands (with their argu- ments] as appropriate), and then press the RETURN key. Each discussion of a single-letter command begins with a {mnemonic} word to help you remember what the letter means. Some effort has been made to make operation of the debugger similar to that of the OS-9 C language source debugger, although there are (of course) numerous differences. {Help} Lists information about the debugger on the screen. (Shell) Allows temporary escape to an OS-9 shell prompt. Logging out of the shell will return you to where you were, at an OJdb : prompt. Upon returning, you may wish to use the i and/or f commands to see where you are. WARNING: It is extremely dangerous to edit any script which has been left open by the 1 OJ interpreter you are temporarily escaping. When you come back and restart execution, literally anything can happen, including the destruction of valuable files. Be safe: fully exit OJ before editing any OJ scripts; do not use this shell escape for editing scripts. (Breakpoint) Displays the breakpoints currently in effect. Breakpoints are places in the script, descried as \"scriptname\\line_number\" (note the backslash between tro r ?ptname and the line number), where you wish to halt execution ard get an OJdb : prompt. If the line num- ber is 0, that means \"halt at the first executable line.\" 107 Section 12: INTERACTIVE SCRIPT DEBUGGER b scriptname {Breakpoint} Sets a breakpoint at the first executable line of script scriptname. One arrives at such a point immediately after any do or include command, at the first executable line of the included or done script When the breakpoint is encountered, execution halts and an O Jdb : prompt is displayed."}
{"id": "thegriefprocess", "title": "The grief process : analysis and counseling", "year": 1977, "seq": 0, "text": "Spiegel was most gracious with his time, and our discussions were extremely useful to me. I was especially impressed with his bibliographical card file on grief and bereavement, what I would imagine to have been the most complete bibliography on the subject in the world at that time. In addition, he had actually gotten his hands on most of the material and read it! It seemed to me at the time that a book that would come out of such resources would stand a good chance of making a major contribution. Two years later I had the opportunity to look over the two-volume* work that Dr. Spiegel had produced as it appeared in its publication by Kaiser-Grunewald in German. As I browsed through it, my judgment was confirmed to myself at least that the material and its organization would fulfill a useful role in the literature available in English. Now that Abingdon has arranged for its translation and publica\u00ac tion, I am happy to discover in reading the English manuscript both of my earlier judgments reconfirmed. Obviously, the writing of an introduction implies some stamp of approval on the book that follows. While I am not *The second volume consisted of detailed footnotes, some additional material, and an extensive bibliography. The primary references have been incorporated in this translation. Scholars who want to consult the more extensive technical material will find it in the annotations volume (Anmerkungsband) of the German edition. 8 FOREWORD uncritical of Spiegel\u2019s presentation, I do recommend it for those interested in the serious study of grief. It is not light reading in many places, but its theoretical discussions always issue in practical procedures for the minister. Spiegel\u2019s three professional orientations and competencies are reflected in the basic plan of the book, and the combination of these within one volume defines the volume\u2019s unique place in the literature on grief as I know it He is an ordained minister and theologian, a professor of practical theology."}
{"id": "thegriefprocess", "title": "The grief process : analysis and counseling", "year": 1977, "seq": 1, "text": "SWITZER 9 Preface to the German Edition The investigation undertaken in this book was accepted by the department of Protestant Theology at Ruhr University at Bochum as a dissertation in the field of practical theology. The text was edited and shortened for publication. The author is greatly indebted to the Deutsche Forschungsgemeinschaft for awarding him a habilitation scholarship and financing a trip to the U.S.A. for the purpose of study. His gratitude is extended to the Protestant Church of Berlin-Brandenburg, especially Bishop D. Kurt Scharf, for a contribution to the printing of the first volume and to the German Research Society for the second volume. Manfred Josuttis and Rolf Zerfass, as well as the experts Hans-Eckehard Bahr, Joachim Scharfenberg, and Johannes Schreiber, have made important contributions. Elisabeth Pracht and Helmut Strack have been of great help in scrutinizing citations and in the process of reading the galley proof. Rosemarie Kurte and Liza Walter undertook the difficult task of typing the final manuscript. I want to thank them all. This study appears in two volumes. The first volume contains the text together with an index of more detailed literature, including the most important and more frequently cited essays and monographs. Those who are interested in the exact bibliographical data of the citations and in special literature on that subject are referred to the second volume containing the annotations. There, the comments to the 11 THE GRIEF PROCESS notes in the main text, as well as additional references to the subject under discussion, and an extensive bibliography of grief and related subjects, such as death, funerals, and depression can be found. * Personal experiences were the reason for this study. They evoked the question of death and how to cope with it I want to dedicate this book to Ina-Susanne who did not succumb to helplessness, but in her own way\u2014in an intellectual struggle\u2014sought to solve this crisis."}
{"id": "thegriefprocess", "title": "The grief process : analysis and counseling", "year": 1977, "seq": 2, "text": "(2) The church, more than other organizations, is faced with the problem of dealing with grief. For reasons to be discussed in another context, the funeral has become more and more a function of the church. The frequency with which ministers are called upon to respond to the situation of grief makes such work an eminently practical theological task. (3) It is not uncommon that the pastor shows signs of confusion, anxiety, and cynicism during the process of the funeral. For instance, if the minister cannot comprehend the me aning of the ritual he has to perform, or if he does not know how to bring together the biblical message and the situation at the grave, he may feel unable and unprepared to talk to the bereaved in a helpful way. Anxieties arise in him because he himself is a mortal being, and each funeral reminds him of his own mortality. These anxieties are intensified through social as well as theological uncertainty. Because of this confusion and these anxieties, ministers as well as doctors will occasionally cynically devalue everything related to the funeral and the bereaved. They scorn the ritual that they carry out unwillingly. They accuse the mourners of insincere motives and they oppose the so-called death cult. It is the central, personal concern of this book to contribute to the provision of greater insight and better ways for the minister to cope with this very difficult part of his ministry. (4) Since the age of the Enlightenment, the nontheological disciplines have increasingly withdrawn from the question of life after death. With the end of classical German philosophy, that field has to a large extent ceased to include the question in the scope of its reflection. Explorations of the subject in the field of parapsychology have not gained recognition by the scientific community."}
{"id": "thegriefprocess", "title": "The grief process : analysis and counseling", "year": 1977, "seq": 3, "text": "Almost the same holds true in regard to the meaning and value of death. For the most part these questions have been dealt with only by existential philosophy 21 THE GRIEF PROCESS (and there perhaps in an exaggerated manner). But the questions of death and immortality did not expire with the decrease of scientific interest. They were only repressed into the popular philosophical underground and stored in the subconscious, from which they have been resurrected by psychoanalytical research, which tried to explain them by introducing the concept of the death wish. Theology deserves credit for keeping the question of death and immortality open, even though it was scorned by the academic world. These questions have on the whole been left to theology by university and society. Yet, although theology has been required by its own self-definition to deal with these issues, it is doubtful whether it has provided much insight concerning them. Nevertheless, it has guaranteed that the questions of death and resurrection would not be silenced, and therefore theology has been able to offer some real help to the bereaved. The death of a person always raises the question of the meaning of death and its conquest to the survivors. Theology has insisted that these are to be considered legitimate questions, questions that are not completely answered by considering death a natural event which has to be accepted without question and complaint. Seen in this light, theology makes an essential contribution to coping with grief. Certainly theology throws light on human thoughts and behavior as it deals with biblical material. Nevertheless, the theological approach also requires a study and utilization of secular knowledge, making its theological statements in the context of precise and sensitive observations of specific human phenomena. This approach is the particular problem of practical theology in which it presumably differs essentially from other theological disciplines."}
{"id": "thegriefprocess", "title": "The grief process : analysis and counseling", "year": 1977, "seq": 4, "text": "Theology therefore with good reason has adhered to the idea that man is a whole \u201cperson/* This study takes this theological premise seriously. But by working in an integrated manner it also strives to avoid the accusation of separation from other legitimate sources of knowledge. This means that the subject of grief and the mourner as a person will not be permitted to become split up into various scientific views but will be considered in their totality. As far as possible, this study intends to analyze the interrelated internal and external situation of the bereaved. The justifiable theological claim of keeping in mind the wholeness and unity of man is one aspect that legitimates this study as theological. (6) There is one concept of theology whose basic principle can be stated as follows: A theological task is given when, in a society, groups or individuals suffer under an oppressive social system without being able to help themselves effec\u00ac tively in their sufferings, or to experience sufficient help from others. Who the persons are who are suffering under the power structure may change from situation to situation. What tax collectors and Gentiles are in the New Testament may be the homeless and juvenile delinquents in another social context. Certainly mourners belong to one of those groups which are exposed to societal as well as internal pressures. They are avoided by others, and none of the \u201ccare giving agents/* whose profession it is to provide help and healing, feels himself responsible for them as long as the mourners keep within the limits of what is considered normal and do not fall into pathological forms of coping with grief. This makes it an urgent necessity for theology to take an interest in this issue. In many ways theology is less equipped for this task than other sciences."}
{"id": "thegriefprocess", "title": "The grief process : analysis and counseling", "year": 1977, "seq": 5, "text": "Engel has in a certain way avoided the difficulty by 54 ^ THEORY AND SYMPTOMATOLOGY OF GRIEF not making a distinction between \u201cnormal\u201d and pathological grief and characterizes grief generally as a disease: Certainly it involves suffering and an impairment of the capacity to function, which may last for days, weeks, and even months. We can identify a consistent etiologic factor, namely, real, threatened, or even fantasized object loss. It fulfills all the criteria of a discrete syndrome, with relatively predictable symptomatology and course. The grieving person is often manifestly distressed and disabled to a degree quite evident to an observer. 33 Engel then quickly responds to several objections made against the characterization of grief as a disease. To the objection that grief is simply a normal reaction, he replies by pointing to the fact that a wound or burn also is something normal. Like an injury, grief too constitutes suffering which is a part of life. To the argument that grief is a self-limited process requiring no medical attention, Engel responds that cultural expectations determine when symptoms are regarded as morbid and require medical attention by the physician. Actually, the mourner quite frequently consults the physi\u00ac cian, who just does not diagnose grief as an independent disease entity and treats the person suffering primarily from grief simply for insomnia or exhaustion. It is relatively easy to refute the objection that grief does not involve any somatic reactions and is not perilous: The experience of the disease and mortality rate 34 by mourners shows distinct increases over against corresponding control groups. In response to the argument that it is only a matter of a temporary and partial derangement in the functioning of the individual suffering a loss, Engel justifiably says one cannot speak of a disease only if every system on all levels of the person is disabled."}
{"id": "thegriefprocess", "title": "The grief process : analysis and counseling", "year": 1977, "seq": 6, "text": "Sudnow has reported that information about a death is clearly structured in the hospital . 2 Since the physician has the duty to give the death notice, it can happen that hospital personnel who long since knew about the death are employed in the waiting room or hallways without informing the waiting family members. When the doctor appears, his behavior already betrays what is to be expected. For example, after the successful birth of a child, the doctor approaches the family with quick strides and shouts the news from a distance. In contrast, in the case of bad news, the doctor proceeds gravely with measured steps right up to the waiting party and makes the announcement often in a soft voice. In anticipation of the coming reaction, when possible this does not take place in public but in a private room or a secluded part of the corridor. As Sudnow observes, the doctor\u2019s authority is so 62 THE PROCESS OF BEREAVEMENT great that the death notice given by the physician is in no way doubted or denied. If a doorkeeper or a nurse\u2019s aide were to bring the news, it would, on the other hand, be subject to doubt. When the doctor undertakes the task of giving information, exchange of polite phrases usually does not take place. The decisive message is communicated in the first or second sentence and at the same time contains a medical explanation of why death was unavoidable. Then silence is kept on his part, while the bereaved show different reactions, ranging from loud lamentation to silent, controlled acceptance. Although a doctor generally can, based on his experiences, estimate the reactions of relatives, he nevertheless cannot sufficiently structure the resulting interaction with them, since in such a case the bereaved are socially permitted to act uncontrolled and there is no duty to pull oneself together."}
{"id": "thegriefprocess", "title": "The grief process : analysis and counseling", "year": 1977, "seq": 7, "text": "In general three subjects dominate, the question of the cause, the question concerning the suffering of the deceased, and the question of un- avoidability. The bereaved frequently starts with the question: \u201cWhat was the cause of his death?\u201d With sudden deaths, such as those from heart attacks, the physician may respond by 63 THE GRIEF PROCESS asking whether such attacks have happened before. This is followed by a discussion of the history of the illness, which, however, does not have the character of a diagnostic inquiry about the disease but only provides material for talking about the actual circumstances of the death and explaining to the bereaved that the doctors have done everything possible. An important subject for discussion is whether the de\u00ac ceased suffered in a particular way while dying. Generally the answer is no, perhaps with some reference that the patient was under sedation. Sudnow supposes that doctors give such an answer even against their better judgment, just as the bereaved ask the question even though they were informed about the suffering. Finally, the question concerning the unavoidability of death is brought up. Even here the doctor most often takes the comforting position, that on the part of the family everything possible had been done in order to avoid the death. This has a therapeutic function, for the bereaved with great frequency reproach themselves about certain neglects and mostly overestimate them by far in their actual significance. Together with the relatively brief stage of shock and the stage of control by family, neighborhood, and \"transition technicians\" described in the following section, regressive behavior may have already set in. Still, a rapid breakdown of psychic organization in the second stage can be brought under control with the help of family members, if only for a short time. But it may also be the case that the bereaved either is so benumbed through the shock or summons so much self-control that regressive features during the stage of shock hardly become visible."}
{"id": "thegriefprocess", "title": "The grief process : analysis and counseling", "year": 1977, "seq": 8, "text": "The controlled stage then may permit the bereaved to dispense with self-control and let himself go, because he can be confident that his environment will take care of him. Shock or self-control can also persist during the stage controlled by others, just as, on the other hand, a breakdown during the phase of shock cannot be brought under control in the following stage, in spite of all efforts made by the family. How the death notice can trigger an overpowering shock is described by Fulcomer in a case study: 64 THE PROCESS OF BEREAVEMENT The bereaved wife was a young woman, thirty-three years of age, the wife of a newspaper reporter. Death came to her husband the eighth day after he had been struck by an automobile. All eight of those days he hovered between life and death. Present in the room at the time of his death were the bereaved wife, the hospital staff doctor, a nurse, and a brother of the deceased. As soon as the doctor announced the death, the wife uttered a loud gasp and slumped in her chair. The brother and nurse grabbed her and prevented her from falling to the floor. Her eyes remained open but stared blankly at nothing in particular. Hospital attendants had to place her on a bed in an adjoining room and administer stimulants. She was kept in the bed almost a half hour before hospital attendants informed her brother-in-law that he might take her home. By that time a second brother-in-law had arrived and together they managed to get her home. But they had to support her (almost carry her) on the way to the car and also half carried her into her apartment when they had arrived. On the trip back to the apartment the bereaved women sobbed quietly at times but said nothing."}
{"id": "thegriefprocess", "title": "The grief process : analysis and counseling", "year": 1977, "seq": 9, "text": "Two days later the brother-in-law wrote: \u201cShe acted so strange on the way home, too. She seemed to know what was going on but she didn\u2019t pay any attention to us. She certainly was struck dumb and I got worried about her. I felt a bit peculiar myself. Perhaps we were all in a trance.\u201d The bereaved wife ate no lunch. She remained in a state of collapse until her only son returned from school in the afternoon. As soon as he entered the apartment, she burst into tears and wept for at least ten minutes. Later she wrote the following in her journal: \u201cNo one ever knows what it is to lose a husband until it happens. Even though I knew it might happen, it came as a terrific shock to me. I was told what happened, but I do not remember anything until they put me into the car .\u201d 4 The collapse does not always take place in such a visible way. The psychic breakdown may also show up in an outbreak of tears, which is often accompanied by complaints and self-reproaches. During such a collapse the bereaved are difficult to talk to; they seem scarcely aware of their environment, questions, and answers. Frequently they are benumbed and incapable of having clear ideas or thoughts. On the other hand, the following case study by Fulcomer shows a bereaved who acts completely controlled. 65 THE GRIEF PROCESS The bereaved spouse in this case was a man fifty-four years of age. The death of his wife had been considered inevitable for only a few hours; but the possibility of death had been admitted for three years. Present in the house at the time of death were: the bereaved husband, the family doctor, a neighbor and his wife, and a ypung lady who had been a long-time friend of the family."}
{"id": "montereynews1992unse_10", "title": "Monterey news", "year": 1992, "seq": 0, "text": "Invariably, I run into many friends, whose interesting conversations keep me abreast of life in our community. Then, of course, there's the encounter with our Post Master, Walter Parks, who always leaves me with the feeling that I've just gotten the world's best bargain on a 29-cent stamp. But the real adventure comes when I actually open the post office box. You should see the type of mail a church receives \u2014 everything from denominational resources to religious advertisements to subscription bargains to financial statements to pleas for help from every worthy cause under the sun. And, as we all can attest to, there are many worthwhile causes in this world of ours to support. Recently, we received a letter addressed \u201cTo the Pastor of any Church or Member in Massachusetts.\u201d The return address was Stinnett, Kentucky. Inside was a brief, handwritten letter by a mother of three young children, asking for \u201cany used clothes or household items you no longer need.\u201d The letter went on to speak of her three children \u2014 Marina, a three-month-old girl, and two sons, nine-year-old Travis and Benjamen, aged three. I shared the letter with our Parish Council, and we were all touched by the sincerity and need this woman expressed. So I gave her a call (she had included her phone number) and I found out that her husband was a coal miner who had been laid off with 250 other workers. Her grandmother had just died and her father is battling skin cancer. They are members of the Stinnett Holiness Church and had heard about the town of Monterey from her mother, who had read {something about it in a magazine.\u201d I then learned that they lived in an area that I had visited several years ago when I was producing a movie for the Presbyterian Self-Development of People program."}
{"id": "montereynews1992unse_10", "title": "Monterey news", "year": 1992, "seq": 1, "text": "The Grange met again on November 4 for a variety program. Lecturer Mary Wallace gave an informative report on the State Grange session at Sturbridge. Our fund-raising raffle was a great success. The Grange would like to thank everyone who helped. Winners\u2019 names were drawn at the November 4 meeting. The gift certificate from the Monterey General Store was won by Susan Anderson. The gift certificate from Wards Nursery was won by Gail Heath. The gift certificate from Price Chopper was won by Gloria Lorkin. The basket of cheer from Domaneys was won by Louise Sweet. The basket of groceries donated by Monterey Grange members was won by Hazel Lee. The tote bag donated by Anne Vickerman was won by Arlene Stedman. The gourmet's delight, donated by Monterey Grange members was won by Alicia Brazie. The Grange met again on November 18 for Pirate Bingo, which was enjoyed by members and guests alike. Worthy Master Tillie Butler presented a blue ribbon and check to Eleanor Kimberley and Florence Brown for their work on the conservation exhibit at the Monterey Post Office during Grange Week in April. She also made the presentation of the National Grange Lecturer's Achievement Award to Mary Wallace. The next meeting will be December 2. The theme of the program is Preparing for Christmas. Members are asked to bring articles for Christmas cheer boxes. \u2014 Mary Wallace HUNTING REGULATIONS Deer season for shotguns is November 30- December 9, and for primitive firearms, December 21- 23. Asa result of the bylaw passed at the annual town meeting last May, new regulations are in force for hunting on private property in Monterey. All hunters on private property are required to have the written permission of the land owner on their persons. In order to facilitate the written permission, the town has made available triplicate, NCR-type forms."}
{"id": "montereynews1992unse_10", "title": "Monterey news", "year": 1992, "seq": 2, "text": "Asinkat the bottom ofa watershed? arecreational facility for fishing, water sports and swimming? a water resource? a biological ecosystem? a tax revenue enhancement? a living organism? an endangered species? Answer: All of the above. Recognizing that the lake is all these things, the Lake Management Committee has begun an assessment of the lake's well being. All who live in and use the land in the watershed are lake managers. What we can do to effect the best practices for optimal lake quality? We hope to find answers by looking at several aspects of the problem. The first step is to get baseline information and professional correlation with our past data. Berkshire Environmental Consultants, the agency approved at our August meeting, has reviewed our 1989 data and completed a survey. They will develop a set of recommendations for long-range care of the lake and evaluate the effectiveness of present practices. That report is in process and will be summarized here in the future. The Lake Management Committee is also investigating other resources for monitoring and maintaining the lake. To this end, I (Patricia Edelstein) joined Association Vice President Martin Cherneff at the Congress of Lakes and Ponds (COLAP) fall training session on October 24. Between us, we covered all available workshops and met with state limnologist Rick McEvoy. We were told that the Clean Lakes Program is at the end of its lifespan, with no new grants coming out. There is an ongoing restructuring of state agencies. The Department of Environmental Protection (DEP) is becoming a purely regulatory agency, with its limited management functions being transferred to the Department of Environmental Management (DEM). To partially fill the gap, there is a program located at the University of Massachusetts, Amherst called Massachusetts Waterwatch Partnership (MassWWP). Begun in 1990, this program isa statewide collaboration of scientists, educators and volunteer citizens to collect water quality information."}
{"id": "montereynews1992unse_10", "title": "Monterey news", "year": 1992, "seq": 3, "text": "Cherneff _ OUR TOWN O, Little Town This is the season of the year when we try to lose some of ourcynicism and find new reasons for faith and generosity. Andenduring popular figure for the season is Dickens\u2019 character, Scrooge, who changes hiscynical nature through sharing during the holiday season. So, in our town, we'll put our civic Scrooge down under the bridge and enter the spirit of the season. The first menorah candle will be liton the evening _ of December 19, to start the eight-day Hanukkah feast. Christmas celebrations and music start long before the 25th, and everyone cheers the winter solstice and anticipates the magic of New Year's Day. Something spiritual stirs in each of us as we resolve to live more joyfully and be more helpful to friends and neighbors. Of course, the old troll will keep muttering there, under the bridge: It's unsafe, you know. Taxes are bad; we can't fix River Road; the lake is too low. He's not about to recycle things; the town center is in terrible shape, and those crazy lines on the streets. We can't change our zoning bylaws \u2014 they're terrible. You can't succeed without going to college; they don't keep our streets sanded like they used to. Businesses have to get big or fail \u2014 we could never organize waste treatment for Lake Garfield or Lake Buel \u2014 people drive too fast. Why do they keep trying to close our kindergarten \u2014 leave Route 23 alone \u2014 composting toilets are not cool. Why don't they allow hunting in town any more \u2014 people aren't as friendly as they used to be, and it rains too much. We will give half an ear to old Scrooge \u2014 everyone needs to be listened to. But, during this season, we can especially celebrate the more positive and hopeful things we've seen and done in our town."}
{"id": "montereynews1992unse_10", "title": "Monterey news", "year": 1992, "seq": 4, "text": "All homeowners must have a say and not just a small minority speaking for the rest. Town residents will be asked to vote on a bylaw chance requested by the Lake Garfield Association to implement restrictions. These same town residents have no access to the lake whose fate they must decide. There is a boat ramp, but it is closed during the summer months. In order to launch a boat in the summer, atown resident must lower the boat in weed- and bug-infested water and paddle through a tube to enjoy the lake. How, covered with cobwebs and insect bites, are they to enjoy themselves? The year-round residents of Monterey should have access to the lake so they can also enjoy its recreation and beauty. The townspeople of Monterey will be asked to vote on this issue that directly impacts Lake Garfield residents, while Lake Garfield residents have no legal say. This puts both parties at a disadvantage. The townspeople have not had an opportunity to utilize the lake and see for themselves the things the Lake Garfield Association cites as concerns, yet, they must cast a vote. The Lake Garfield residents must put their fate into the townspeople's hands and trust in their fairness and integrity. Ihave lived on the channel, which is an area that is part of this debate, since 1956 and have raised my family here as summer residents. My children and most homeowners\u2019 children have completed the Coast Guard course in boating safety. If safety is the issue, then proper education in boating safety should be the solution. When I chose to purchase waterfront property, I also chose to accept the impact the waves might have on my shoreline, as well as the noise created with recreational boating. Recreation and fun on the lake means noise, but if you want quiet woods and peaceful tranquility, then you should live in the woods and not on a lake. | The state boating laws that are being discussed are not new and are being followed by most boats."}
{"id": "feminism-marxism-dorothy-ballan", "title": "Feminism and Marxism (1976)", "year": 1976, "seq": 0, "text": "About the Author Dorothy Ballan made her mark in the struggle for working women in the huge Cheektowaga plant (near Buffalo) of the Westinghouse Corporation, which is organized in Local 1581 of the International Union of Electrical Workers, CIO-AFL. She worked as a punch press operator, a low-paid, unskilled job, classified as Labor Grade 3. The company had divided the work force into 10 labor grades. Although the women in the plant constituted almost half the work force, they were all concentrated in Labor Grade 1 to 3, the lowest paid, unskilled jobs. The other 7 grades were, of course, for men. By defying the company\u2019s discriminatory practice and mobilizing the support of union men and women, she broke the ban and won a bid for a Labor Grade 7 job \u2014 that of die-setter \u2014 on the punch press\u2014never before performed by a woman. It was a first in the electrical industry. She also was a steward of a section of about 1000 workers; also an elected member of the Executive Board and one of the four top officers of Local 1581. Earlier she had been first a volunteer organizer and then a full-time organizer for Local 292 of United Paper Workers Union, CIO, in New York City. THE WOMAN IN HISTORY There is a profound revolutionary upsurge going on today that is shaking the very foundations of capitalist civilization. It can be seen in all phases of life: on the campus, on the picket line, more recently in the ranks of organized labor, above all in the Black liberation movement, and even in the church. So it is no surprise that there is also a widespread resurgence for women\u2019s liberation despite the campaign of the ruling class to ridicule and distort it in an effort to obliterate its very progressive character. Many young women throughout the country are beginning to inquire into the origins of present day social relations of women, particularly as applied to the family."}
{"id": "feminism-marxism-dorothy-ballan", "title": "Feminism and Marxism (1976)", "year": 1976, "seq": 1, "text": "Its development and transformation flowed from the material conditions of life and was most vitally affected by profound changes in the development of production. The historical epoch of mother-right For many hundreds of thousands of years, there was no such thing as a family as we know it today, anywhere on earth. The forms of organization that did exist were adaptations to the material needs. To survive and develop in the struggle against nature with little or no tools, men and women lived and worked cooperatively, equally and communally, with a division of labor between the sexes that came naturally. The period that began with the transformation of men and women from animal to human, and known as the period of mother-right, or the matriarchy, was a very long and complex period. If we were to reduce the many hundreds of thousands of years of human development to the scale of one year, the equivalent measurement would leave only a few days of historical time for the patriarchy; over 360 days of historical time belonged to the matriarchy. Cooperative social basis of matriarchy At the dawn of humanity, production was necessarily organized on a social and cooperative basis. Contrary to Hollywood stories of cave men who dragged passive women to their caves by the hair, and whose relations with each other was one of constant aggression and destruction\u2014there actually was a high degree of social cooperation among all the people in a group which was reflected in the division of labor between men and women. It was the only way for humanity to survive in a hostile environment. Not only Hollywood, but all the religious and social institutions of today, as well as some anthropologists, can only see the development of primitive society through private-property-tainted glasses."}
{"id": "feminism-marxism-dorothy-ballan", "title": "Feminism and Marxism (1976)", "year": 1976, "seq": 2, "text": "Home was the area where all the people of the gens lived in large buildings communally. The men left the home to hunt for food in the form of big game. Even when the men were fortunate enough to bring something back, it was the women who learned to use fire for cooking, develop utensils for eating, storing and preserving, processing leather for warm clothing plus an infinite variety of other necessary, useful and highly creative labor. Because the men were not always successful on the hunt, the women found other forms of food, first as a supplement to the hunt and later as a replacement. They learned to dig for potatoes, yams and other roots. Later they learned field cultivation and consciously planted a variety of foods. They first caught small bugs, lizards and animals for food and later learned to domesticate animals and breed them. This barely even touches on the enormous development they brought about in production and tools and a variety of useful labor. Engels: woman first to articulate speech Women worked together. A development or discovery of one was a development for all. They not only learned from each other but they taught the children and the men what they learned. Engels even speculates that it was probably women who first articulated speech. It was the men who were more isolated on the hunt and had to spend much time in silence. It was the women who were constantly experimenting and exchanging experiences and teaching the children who participated in the work as soon as they were old enough. Women were never thought of as being unable to do heavy work. It has been established that it was they who physically built the large community houses. There appears to have been no competitiveness between the sexes."}
{"id": "feminism-marxism-dorothy-ballan", "title": "Feminism and Marxism (1976)", "year": 1976, "seq": 3, "text": "Not only did this not appear to cause any loss of femininity in the eyes of the male or female, but on the contrary, earned her equal respect, and because of her childbearing capacity, greater than equal respect. And particularly the most respected members of primitive society were the old women whose advice and consideration were considered of prime importance in every significant undertaking. Development of the pairing family Engels explains that natural selection operated to gradually reduce the circle of marriage between large groups to its last unit, one man and one woman, known as the pairing family. Although this sounds like the modern family unit, we must remember once again not to look at primitive society through property-tinted glasses. This pairing family existed within the gens which meant that the woman was not materially dependent in any way on the man. The gens was responsible for the material subsistence of all its members, and also mother-right still prevailed. The marriage tie was very loose and could easily be dissolved by either party. If they separated the man would go back to his own gens, (that of his mother or his sister) and could take his personal property which most likely consisted of his instruments for procuring food. The household goods, the most important property, stayed with the woman in her gens, and so did the children. There was a similar procedure if one of them died. It provided no material problem for the woman. In this way her choice was as free as the man\u2019s on whether to live with him or not. The pairing marriage, Engels points out, placed at the side of the natural mother, the authenticated father for the first time. \u201cTf,\u201d he continues, \u201cno new social (his emphasis) driving forces had come into operation, there would have been no reason why a new form of the family should arise out of the pairing family."}
{"id": "feminism-marxism-dorothy-ballan", "title": "Feminism and Marxism (1976)", "year": 1976, "seq": 4, "text": "But these driving forces did commence to operate.\u201d Development of surplus \u2014 beginning of wealth There came a point when the men no longer went hunting. Learning from the women to domesticate and breed animals, they applied this knowledge to the larger animals. They developed herds of horses, camels, donkeys, oxen, sheep, goats and pigs. Such possessions required merely supervision and only elementary care. The animals could be bred in larger and larger numbers and provide much more than enough milk and meat than was needed for immediate or imminent use. Hunting was no longer a necessity. It was now only a luxury. To whom did this new wealth belong? Undoubtedly, says Engels, to the gens. At the time of the first available written literature, the Bible itself, as well as other literature and art, 1t becomes clear that everywhere herds were already the separate property of the family chiefs. After the herds developed, more people were needed to tend the cattle. And as field cultivation developed, more people were needed to care for the fields. The development of production had led to the development of a surplus of the means of subsistence. For the first time in history, they produced more than what it cost to maintain themselves. And so slavery was invented. In earlier times, when wars broke out among tribes (a multiple grouping of gens) the vanquished were either killed or adopted with their wives and children into the victorious tribe. Slavery was unheard of. <Chinese textile mill> nt factory> <New York garme Origin of private property -- destruction of mother-right Near the end of the development of primitive society, people found that not only were slaves useful to tend cattle and fields, but they could be bred like cattle. The accumulation of riches, \u201conce they had passed into the private possession of families and there rapidly multiplied, struck a powerful blow to a society founded on pairing marriage and mother-right gens."}
{"id": "feminism-marxism-dorothy-ballan", "title": "Feminism and Marxism (1976)", "year": 1976, "seq": 5, "text": "The man seized the reins in the house also; the woman was degraded, enthralled, the slave of the man\u2019s lust, a mere instrument for breeding children. This lowered position of women . . . has become gradually embellished and . . . clothed in milder form, but by no means abolished.\u201d Inheritance And so as property was transformed from public to private, and descent through the male was instituted to authenticate the heirs for purposes of bequeathing the property, the institution of the family was established. Despite all the protestations of state and church to the contrary, the origin of the family is rooted in material conditions and the development of private property\u2014and not in religious or spiritual conceptions. The origin of the word \u201cfamily\u201d meant slave, and the family included a man, his wife, children and slaves. The women were acquired into this economic unit for the purpose of procreating heirs to whom to bequeath private property\u2014and as such, the family served the interests of the possessing class. This was the real origin of the family. When social production became transformed into private production, the nature of the family changed from a socially cooperative foundation as it existed under the matriarchy to the private foundations of the patriarchy. This does not mean that human nature was more humane under the matriarchy. The material conditions required productive cooperation for survival, which was then reflected in the social relations. How private property made slavery The conversion of social property to private property eventually meant even the conversion of humans to private ownership. For primitive women, childbearing not only provided a greater impetus for her to participate in social production, but was virtually a form of social production itself. The husband had no authority over her, and she was never dependent upon him economically or materially."}
{"id": "feminism-marxism-dorothy-ballan", "title": "Feminism and Marxism (1976)", "year": 1976, "seq": 6, "text": "Usually, the female portion ruled the house. ...The stores were in common; but woe to the luckless husband or lover who was too shiftless to do his share of the providing. No matter how many children, or whatever goods he might have in the house, he might at any time be ordered to pick up his blanket and budge; and after such orders it would not be healthful for him to attempt to disobey. The house would be too hot for him; and... he must retreat to his own clan (gens); or as was often done, go and start a new matrimonial alliance in some other. The women were the great power among the clans (gentes), as everywhere else. They did not hesitate, when occasion required, \u2018 to knock off the horns, \u2019 as it was technically called, from the head of a chief, and send him back to the ranks of the warriors.\u201d Excerpt from The Origin of the Family, Private Property and the State by Frederick Engels. Despite all its exploitation and brutality, the capitalist system, more than any of the preceding social systems, is dependent on constantly revolutionizing the productive forces, even where this flies in the face of its most cherished religious and moral prejudices. Capitalism constantly perfects its technology, not in the interest of social progress, but rather of super-profit. <Los Angeles, \u201cMa Bell\u2019s\u201d first woman installer.> The development of the contraceptive pill, like many previous inventions and discoveries, has brought about a virtual revolution in the social relations of many women, particularly as it affects the younger generation. The Pill \u2014 weapon against involuntary procreation The fact that the Pill may not yet be fully perfected and may subject the user to hazards is another matter. The significant fact is that its simplicity of use has enabled the woman to control to a large degree her procreative function, and with little or no effort or discomfort."}
{"id": "feminism-marxism-dorothy-ballan", "title": "Feminism and Marxism (1976)", "year": 1976, "seq": 7, "text": "It is in fact, for her, a technically revolutionary development in her centuries- old struggle to achieve release from the slavery imposed upon her by her inability to control this vital body function. Despite the fact that this country is steeped in ancient prejudice and warped by what Marx called the \u201cmalignant furies\u201d of private material interests, a wide variety of statistics show how fully and quickly women understood and welcomed the Pill. It is interesting that a substantial number of young women in particular have taken this new opportunity to venture forth into the world and participate in all phases of life with the same freedom from unwanted pregnancy as men. The development of this simple contraceptive has enabled many more women to break through the overgrowth of prejudice and hypocrisy and gain greater freedom in sex relations, more nearly equal to that of men. For women, the accessibility of the Pill is in the nature of winning a civil right in the struggle for the rights of women. It obviously does not end oppression and discrimination against women, nor does it put an end to the ideology of male supremacy, but it helps clear some of the ground for the further development of the struggle. \"Free-love\u201d us. freedom to set love free Much of the attack by bourgeois elements on the use of the Pill centers on the alleged fear of the growth of promiscuity, as well as the fear that it will injure the \u201csanctity\u201d of the bourgeois family. Substantially the same arguments were used in earlier controversies on what they called \u201cfree love.\u201d It is easy for most women to see that what is for the most part being attacked is the possible promiscuity of women. Promiscuity for men has existed as part and parcel of the monogamous family since its inception and has never been considered as affecting the so-called sanctity of the bourgeois family to any substantial degree."}
{"id": "feminism-marxism-dorothy-ballan", "title": "Feminism and Marxism (1976)", "year": 1976, "seq": 8, "text": "The woman now needed the man for economic survival. And so, as Engels said, the final transformation of mother-right to father-right (descent through the father rather than the mother) marked the world historic overthrow of the female sex. The origin of bequeathing wealth to heirs This now powerful father was stimulated to bequeath his wealth to his heirs. To ascertain his heirs, he demanded complete fidelity of the wife under pain of death, while he pursued his own polygamous and adulterous adventures unendingly. And so the primitive pairing family of communal social relations under the matriarchy became transformed into the individual, monogamous family under the patriarchy. This development was the beginning of a new social and economic unit in the history of humanity. Marx said that this family unit contained in embryo form not only slavery, but serfdom also, since from the very beginning it is connected with agricultural services. It contains within itself in miniature all the antagonisms which later develop on a wide scale within society and its state. In his Origin of the Family, Private Property and the State, Engels traced the origins of, and analyzed the concrete conditions of the ancient Greek family, supposedly the most civilized and highly developed people of antiquity. He said this study showed monogamy \u201cwas not in any way the fruit of individual sex-love with which it had absolutely nothing in common, for the marriages remained marriages of convenience as before. . . . The rule of the man in the family, the procreation of children who could only be his, destined to be the heirs of his wealth\u2014these alone were frankly avowed by the Greeks as the exclusive aims of monogamy. For the rest, it was a burden. \u201cThus monogamy does not by any means make its appearance in history as the reconciliation of man and woman, still less as the highest form of such a reconciliation."}
{"id": "feminism-marxism-dorothy-ballan", "title": "Feminism and Marxism (1976)", "year": 1976, "seq": 9, "text": "It is the cellular form of civilized society, in which we can already study the nature of the antagonisms and contradictions which develop fully in the latter.\u201d Thus we can see that the modern family today is not what it is preached to be\u2014a unit of sex-love, marriage and fidelity. Rather it is the bourgeois outgrowth of what Engels describes about Greek antiquity. The modern monogamous family, like the ancient one, contains within it all of the class contradictions and class antagonisms which are characteristic of class society as a whole. It is in no way divorced from the incubus of private property in the epoch of imperialist decay. On the contrary, all the contradictions rampant in capitalist society are projected into the family relationship. Transformation of the family The family has of course undergone changes, and these changes are concomitant with the stages of development of class society. Just as class society has been transformed from slave society to feudal society, and then to capitalist society, each stage demarcated by a qualitative advance in the development of the means of production, so it is that the family, as an economic unit of private property, has also changed. Initially women were purchased by men for the purpose of procreating heirs to inherit the wealth of the owners of property. For the ruling class today, for the bourgeoisie, this basic purpose has not changed. Few indeed are the rich who marry outside their class. For the workers, however, the situation is different. They do not have the problem of procreating heirs, since they do not own the great sources of wealth. But their marriage relations nevertheless conform to the norms of bourgeois society, as very often do their aspirations. Marx explained that the ideas of any epoch reflect the ideas of the ruling class."}
{"id": "united-in-service", "title": "United in service : reflections on the presbyteral council.", "year": 1992, "seq": 0, "text": "Consensus / 16 Conclusion / 16 Introduction The Second Vatican Council, which so explicitly high\u00ac lighted the collegiality of the episcopate in the Church, also gave a new form to the life of priestly communi\u00ac ties, joined together by a special bond of brotherhood and united to the bishop of the respective local Church. The whole priestly life and ministry serve to deepen and strengthen that bond, and a particular responsibil\u00ac ity for the various tasks involved by this life and ministry is taken on by the priests\u2019 councils, which ... should be functioning in every diocese. 1 These words of JohnPaul II setthe tone for this reflection on the presbyteral council. A bond of brotherhood exists between priests and bishops. They are united in service by the sacrament of orders through which they share, in dif\u00ac ferent degrees, the priesthood of Christ. The presbyteral council, uniting priests and the diocesan bishop, is a visible expression of this sacramental bond. It represents the pres- byterate and aids the diocesan bishop in the governance of the diocese. Priests and bishop cannot remain in isolation from each other and expect to respond adequately to the pastoral needs of the people of God. Presbyteronun Ordinis of the Second Vatican Council recommended such a council. The motu proprio, Ecclesiae Sanctae (1966) and the Code of Canon Law (1983) mandated that there be a council of priests in each diocese. According to John Paul II, the diocesan bishop should establish a presbyteral council \u201cto seek and obtain counsel and sugges\u00ac tions from his priests, as well as insights into many serious diocesan problems and help in solving them.\u201d 2 The presbyteral council is not just another administra\u00ac tive structure in the Church. Rather, it is an expression of the profound sacramental communion that exists be\u00ac tween the bishop and his priests. They are united as co-workers and friends in the same ministerial priest\u00ac hood."}
{"id": "united-in-service", "title": "United in service : reflections on the presbyteral council.", "year": 1992, "seq": 1, "text": "In apostolic vicariates and prefectures the vicar or the prefect is to establish a council of at least three missionary presbyters whose opinion is to be heard in more serious matters, even by letter. Can. 496\u2014The presbyteral council is to have its own statutes approved by the diocesan bishop, in light of the norms issued by the conference of bishops. 2 The diocesan bishop is required to establish a pre\u00ac sbyteral council (see c. 495.1). The council represents the entire presbyterate of the diocese and functions like a senate to the bishop, aiding him in providing proper pastoral care for the people of God. Thus, the presbyteral council has a relationship to the bishop, to the presbyter\u00ac ate, and to the particular Church. The presbyteral council is described in law as a body of priests. Only the bishop and priests, since they have a unique relationship rooted in the sacrament of priestly ordination, may be members of the presbyteral council. The presbyterate necessarily includes the person of the bishop, since he is the fullness of the priesthood in the local Church. Lumen Gentium stated that \u201cpriests, prudent collaborators with the episcopal order and its aid and instrument, consti\u00ac tute one presbyterate with the bishop\u201d(28). Canon 495.1 calls the presbyteral council a \u201c coetus sacerdotum .\u201d The use of the term sacerdos and not presbyter emphasizes the unity of priestly ministry shared by the episcopacy and the presbyterate. Deacons are not members of the presbyteral council because, even though they share in the sacrament of orders, they are not ordained to the priesthood (see LG, 29; CD, 15). Although some presbyteral councils in the past have included deacons as a recognition of the valu\u00ac able ministry they perform in the Church, this is not envisioned in the present law. The statutes of the presbyteral council, which may be drafted by the council members themselves, are to be drawn up \u201cin light of the norms issued by the conference of bishops\u201d (c. 496)."}
{"id": "united-in-service", "title": "United in service : reflections on the presbyteral council.", "year": 1992, "seq": 2, "text": "These three bodies need careful coordination in the diocese, if they are to be effective. However, the Code of Canon Law gives no comprehensive guidelines to assist the bishop in his responsibility for coordinating them as well as other consultative bodies in the diocese. The diocesan pastoral council, when present in a diocese, is useful for discovering the major and urgent issues facing the diocese and for discerning what the faithful arc thinking. It provides a good forum to plan policy. The bishop might assemble the college of consultors, since it REFLECTIONS ON THE PRESBYTERAL COUNCIL 11 is a relatively small group, to discuss some delicate issue or an urgent problem that needs an immediate response. Finally, the bishop might consult the presbyteral council for several reasons: first, to seek counsel concerning the pastoral governance of the diocese; second, to encourage and to be encouraged by his priests, to listen to their concerns, and to be solicitous about their spiritual and material welfare. Bishops differ in the ways they coordinate the pre\u00ac sbyteral council and the diocesan pastoral council. Some dioceses use a two-tiered administrative approach: (1) the presbyteral council and the diocesan pastoral council work together in creating and developing poli\u00ac cies and programs; and (2) diocesan agencies, with the help of the deans, consultors, and the episcopal council (where it exists), implement them. Other dioceses have a coordinating office that acts as a secretariat for the presbyteral council and the diocesan pastoral council. The secretariat keeps abreast of what each group is working on and informs the bishop of its activities. In conclusion, we have seen that the canons give more general than specific norms regarding the presbyteral coun\u00ac cil. Most of the procedural details are determined by par\u00ac ticular law in each diocese with the approval of the diocesan bishop."}
{"id": "united-in-service", "title": "United in service : reflections on the presbyteral council.", "year": 1992, "seq": 3, "text": "Trust The effectiveness of the presbyteral council demands trust between the bishop and the council, among the members of the council, and between the council and the presbyterate. The collaboration of priests and the diocesan bishop working for the welfare of the diocese through the pre\u00ac sbyteral council is linked to their primary priestly obli\u00ac gation: the proclamation of the gospel of Christ to all people (see LG, 25 and PO, 4). The importance of the work of the council requires that all participants strive to develop an attitude of trust. When the presbyteral council meets in an atmosphere of trust, it becomes a valuable element in the decision\u00ac making process of the bishop. Because decision making is a process that involves several individuals, a variety of abilities, and many stages, trust is vital to the process. Trust between the bishop and the presbyteral council. At times, it may be difficult for the bishop to use the consultative process with his priests and for priests to share the sense of responsibility, which weighs upon the bishop. Positive experiences with the presbyteral coun\u00ac cil, characterized by mutual respect, dialogue, and the free exchange of opinions, serve to strengthen the trust between the bishop and the council and to convince the participants of the value of the council. The diocesan bishop as head of the presbyterate should actively participate in and preside at the meetings of the presbyteral council. Since the council is necessarily depen\u00ac dent on the bishop for the way it functions, it is incumbent upon the bishop to convey his trust in the council and his willingness to collaborate with it for the good of the Church. He should welcome and actively seek its advice. It is When the presbyteral council meets in an atmosphere of trust, it becomes a valuable element in the decision-making process of the bishop. essential that he communicate clearly his need for the assistance of the council."}
{"id": "united-in-service", "title": "United in service : reflections on the presbyteral council.", "year": 1992, "seq": 4, "text": "Similarly, the council must avoid a passive posture, whereby it fails to express the concerns and experiences of priests. Trust among the members of the presbyteral council. Many of the issues a presbyteral council addresses are complex; council members will have differing understand\u00ac ings about them. It is, therefore, important for members to encourage each other\u2019s diverse gifts for the good of the whole Church. Acollective discussion of ideas raises a wide variety of approaches that can enrich diocesan pastoral programs and foster creativity. If the council\u2019s work is to be beneficial, it is necessary that all parties engaged in it practice humility, charity, and patience. When members of the presbyteral council speak hon\u00ac estly and thoughtfully to one another, the council can be a forum for dialogue, mutual support, and mutual chal\u00ac lenge. It can also provide an opportunity for intellectual and spiritual growth. The reading of background mate\u00ac rial, the study of theological positions, and the discussion REFLECTIONS ON THE PRESBYTERAL COUNCIL 13 of plans and policies can be a kind of continuing educa\u00ac tion for the participants. Trust between the presbyteral council and the rest of the presbyterate. Members of the council must strive to discover the experiences and concerns of the otherpriests of the diocese. Anewsletter and occasional meetings with groups of priests can keep open the channels of commu\u00ac nication. The presbyteral council should consider care\u00ac fully the ways it consults with otherpriests in the diocese. It is critical that the presbyterate elect those priests as representatives to the council who have the requisite spirituality, interest, energy, and commitment. In order to ensure a genuinely representative body, it may be advis\u00ac able to nominate candidates according to geographic location, type of ministry, age, ethnic and racial back\u00ac ground, and diocesan or religious affiliation. The dioce\u00ac san bishop should exercise care in making appointments to the presbyteral council."}
{"id": "united-in-service", "title": "United in service : reflections on the presbyteral council.", "year": 1992, "seq": 5, "text": "The statutes should specify how the agenda is to be drawn up and indicate specific ways various segments of the diocese 14 UNITED IN SERVICE can be encouraged to suggest matters for the agenda. The council is to interest itself in the concerns not only of the local Church, but of the Church in the United States and, indeed, of the universal Church. A genuine ecclesial spiri\u00ac tuality helps priests broaden their vision beyond their own parish or particular ministry to the wider Church. The agenda, with appropriate background material, is to be distributed before the meeting to allow the members sufficient time to study the material and to consult with others. It is helpful if the agenda distinguishes between action items and information items. Canon law does not prescribe restrictions concerning items to be discussed by the presbyteral council. That decision is left to the discretion of the bishop. However, the Code of Canon Law, as we saw earlier, says that matters of greater moment and certain cases defined by the law are to be brought before the presbyteral council (see c. 500.2). Canon law does not prescribe restrictions concerning items to be discussed by the presbyteral council. In the early days of presbyteral councils, much time was spent on discussion of such issues as clerical salaries, health insurance, pension plans, stipends, sabbatical pro\u00ac grams, alternate living situations, and the seniority sys\u00ac tem. The presbyteral council, however, should not con\u00ac centrate solely or even primarily on the personal needs of priests. The council needs to be interested in the varied facets of diocesan life for which the bishop and priests are responsi\u00ac ble. Thus, any matter dealing with the pastoral governance and welfare of the diocese may be on the agenda, even though itmay also be discussed by otherconsultative bodies in the diocese."}
{"id": "united-in-service", "title": "United in service : reflections on the presbyteral council.", "year": 1992, "seq": 6, "text": "Conclusion This reflection has reviewed the historical, theologi\u00ac cal, canonical, and practical dimensions of the presbyte\u00ac ral council. It has focused on the idea of communion, which primarily refers to participation in the life of God through Christ in the Holy Spirit Because of incorpora\u00ac tion in Christ, Christians are united, and the Church itself is rightly called a communion. Ecclesial authority is at the service of this communion, and the purpose of all forms of ministry in the Church is to foster communion. The presbyteral council, sharing in the responsibility of the bishop as it does, makes an important contribution to communion in the local Church. The ideas and suggestions made here are intended to improve the effectiveness of the council in the local Church and to stimulate further study. It may be useful for the diocesan bishop to organize a forum or workshop for priests to discuss this document The presbyteral council needs continual evaluation and renewal if it is to serve the needs of an ever-changing society and Church. As a sign of unity in ministry, the presbyteral council enables the diocesan bishop and his priests to work collaboratively in preaching the saving truth of the gos\u00ac pel. Presbyteral councils have developed much in the years since the Second Vatican Council. Priests and bishops are to be commended for their generosity, enthu\u00ac siasm, and dedication in this particular priestly aposto- late. The bond that unites bishops and priests is rooted in the mystery of Christ and sustained by it. The Second Vatican Council says it clearly: By sacred ordination and by the mission they receive from their bishops, priests are promoted to the service of Christ, the Teacher, the Priest, and the King. They share in His ministry of unceasingly building up the Church on earth into the People of God, the Body of Christ, and the Temple of the Holy Spirit (PO, 1)."}
{"id": "microprocessorco00schl", "title": "Microprocessor control of a fast analog-to-digital converter for an underwater fiber optic data link", "year": 1988, "seq": 0, "text": "This was true regardless of whether the A/D converter and encoder operate in a synchronous or asynchronous manner. There were three possibilities considered for implementing the control portion of the system. They were a hardware implemented control logic circuit, an Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory (EPROM) controller and a microprocessor controller. Early in the project all three seemed feasible. The hardware controller could consist of a logic circuit with status inputs from the A/D converter, the signal multiplexer and the Manchester encoder. These inputs would generate appropriate control outputs back to the three main components to ensure synchronous operation of the entire system. This hardware controller would be simplified if all circuit components were supplied timing by one common clock. 15 An EPROM controller would simply consist of an EPRQM with its address bus connected to a clocked counter circuit and possibly the status lines from the three svstem components. The data bus -from the EPROM would provide the necessar / control inputs back to the components. By appropriate programming of the EPROM, system control could be achieved as the counter sequentially accessed the EPROM' s addresses. This controller implementation could possibly reduce the required hardware components and also allow for easier correction of design mistakes or future svstem expansion. The microprocessor controller is the most flexible of the three considered possibilities and probably the most expensive. A microprocessor could be used to control the system's components directly via the components' control inputs or to control the data bus and the components' access to it. The growth of the level of complexity of the system would seem almost endless with a microprocessor controller and this might very well be a hindrance in the Prototype's initial design. However, a microprocessor controller would provide the highest number of possible solutions for problems encountered during the initial design as well as flexibility in future system growth. 16 D."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1972-01-28", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1972-01-28 : Volume LXVII, Issue 11", "year": 1972, "seq": 0, "text": "Hunt also had to gain approval from the Vermont Highway Dept, for a access to Route 7, which involved turning lanes, center islands, and traffic control signals. The necessary arrangements for sewage disposal, water, and rubbish removal were also made. By December, the only remaining approval required before construction could begin was from the District En\u00ac vironmental Commission which was set up by Act 250. The title of Act 250 is \u201cAn Act to create an Environmental Board and District Commissions.\u201d It was passed in 1970 to aid in state\u00ac wide control of the environment of Vermont. One way in which the act works is in the area of controlling land developments. Any person wishing to develop an area greater than ten acres (for other than personal use) must submit an application to the Environmental Commission as well as to the local planning commission. The proposed shopping center came under the jurisdiction of District Com\u00ac mission which covers Addison and Chittendon counties. The Commission must then have a public hearing at which all persons can discuss the pros and cons of the proposal. On the basis of this and subsequent meetings, the Commission must then ap\u00ac prove or deny the application. Its decision is made on the grounds of specific criteria stated in Act 250 : l ) air and water pollution, 2) availability of water for the development, 3) soil erosion, 4) traffic conditions with respect to existing or proposed highways, 5) the effect on aesthetics, natural beauty, historic sites, and rare or irreplacable natural areas, ti) conforms with land use. regional, or local plans. The burden of proof rests either with the ap\u00ac plicant or with those opposed to the project, as outlined in Act 250. 0(H) Cars The final plans of the shopping center were given to the District Environmental Commission prior to the scheduled Jan. 17 meeting. The site is 10.4 acres, of which 8.4 will contain buildings or paved area for parking."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1972-01-28", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1972-01-28 : Volume LXVII, Issue 11", "year": 1972, "seq": 1, "text": "Community Council Approves VPIRG BY RICK vo n A The Community Council decided at its meeting of January 19 to declare the Middlebury Public Interest Research Group a school group pending the sub\u00ac mission of a constitution. This approval, however, does not solve the problem of how the group will be funded. Paul Gionfriddo and Richard Prario were present to represent the group and to lobby for ap\u00ac proval of the proposed funding system. This system entails the raising of the Student Activity Fee by six dollars each year. This fee would be refunded to any student (or student\u2019s parents) upon request. A petition made earlier this year revealed that 56% of the student body endorsed both the concept of VPIRG and the proposed funding arrangement. The opposition to this proposal lies in the interpretation of exactly what a student activity is. By definition, a student activity is an on-campus organization. The VPIRG representatives felt that their organization, while based in Montpelier, would in\u00ac volve a group of Middlebury students in a rewarding and educational experience. While it is a political organization, VPIRG is non-partisan and strictly for exposing inadequacies on both sides. Baseless Argument In Prario\u2019s words, \"VPIRG is an exciting new type of student activity.\" He went on to say that the off campus issue was a \u201cvery baseless argument.\u201d \"Some things must be based on their own merits.\" he said The issue, therefore, is no longer just the validity of VPIRG. The whole question of what a student activity really is has become a major issue A future meeting will have to solve the problem of funding, thereby deciding whether VPIRG will become a viable and influential organization. As Gionfriddo stated after the meeting, \"Any decision will have to live up to the expectations and goals of both the college and the members of VPIRG.\u201d middleburv campus E 0 HEWS composting -- an alternative?"}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1972-01-28", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1972-01-28 : Volume LXVII, Issue 11", "year": 1972, "seq": 2, "text": "This production is scheduled for March 2-5 as part of the Miss Julie observes his demands and will therefore be doing the show in the Hepburn Zoo where a close and comfortable at\u00ac mosphere can be created. Simon Barenbaum. the director of Middlebury's French plays, is advisor to the production, which features Linda Headley. John Martinuzzi and Lyon Filmer Bart Teush and Erie Volkert are also advisors to the project and have volunteered their time to the development and evaluation of the work. The students are experimenting with various ap\u00ac proaches to the creation of a dramatic Concert Film Drama Series. The show has already undergone some interesting developments and Mr. Volkert indicates that it may be a pointedly unconventional interpretation Andrew Bloch will por\u00ac tray Hamlet. The cast includes many newcomers to Middlebury\u2019s stage and the successful though dearly won approval of this third accredited production for the year is a great boost and encouragement to students who might not otherwise participate. We hope Middlebury will continue to sponsor at least three production seminars a year. Dance There are several non-dramatic per\u00ac formances in preparation during this term as well. The Music and Motion course led by Mr Todd and Miss Gulick is doing an evening of dance in relation to contrasting forms or periods of music. The students will dance in McCullough Gym on Feb. 2. Peter Driscoll, in addition to acting in Hamlet, is studying mime. He works with daily exercises and speaks of an informal workshop of stylized movements and illusions, tools of the mime, and the development of the situations which make up the mime\u2019s performance. Peter has been discovering the capacity of the body to say what words cannot. Still, despite a month\u2019s work, he feels he is just beginning to scratch the surface of art in movement."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1972-01-28", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1972-01-28 : Volume LXVII, Issue 11", "year": 1972, "seq": 3, "text": "The paper would concentrate on those areas presently not well-served by Vermont's media. These areas would include longer feature articles on human conditions in Vermont, investigative journalism, environment, a heavy coverage of the summer cultural scene, and a thorough study of some of the institutions in the state such as tax structures, the correctional institutions, the school system, and so on. While creative and independent in spirit, the paper would be low in tone in order to appeal to a broad segment of Vermont's population, and would document heavily its assertions of fact. The barriers to such a paper are many, not the least of which is financial. Even if the cost of the paper can be met. it is unlikely that participants in the project can be paid. Housing costs can probably be kept to a minimum, however, and personal expenses will probably not be high. Despite many frustrating problems that must be solved, the idea is promising and deserves an attempt. But it will need intensive and immediate attention. There will be a working meeting of people interested in such a project Monday at four in Proctor Lounge. Please bring ideas of specific areas in which you would like to work. page 4 \u2018THE CAMPUS' INTERVIEWS : Dean Lillian Johnson BY JAY Hl'LME The Dean\u2019s office has been strenghthened this year by the addition of Lillian Johnson, assistant Dean of Students. Tulsa Oklahoma is her hometown, and she graduated from Howard University in 1971, where she was a Political Science major. Dean Johnson feels that for her present work. Political Science was quite beneficial because it taught her about politics and government and also gave her a different perspective on people. When asked about Middlebury in general. Dean Johnson said that the tirst word that comes to mind would be \u201cclassic\u201d, regarding the surroundings, serenity, and beauty of the campus, but there are other aspects as well."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1972-01-28", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1972-01-28 : Volume LXVII, Issue 11", "year": 1972, "seq": 4, "text": "Dean Johnson, who is on the President\u2019s Health Service Committee, is also in favor of having birth control medication prescribed at the infirmary, and cannot understand why it is not being done now. When asked if she thought that she was hired because she is black, she replied \"I know I was hired because I'm black \u201c She feels that between Blacks and Whites on campus there is an ignorance of each others' cultures. Dean Johnson believes that Blacks and Whites really would like to get to know each other but are afraid to try. Ignorance, she suspects, is the cause of this hesitation. The \u201cBlack Table\" at Proctor is an example of this division, and she felt that a lot of Whites would like to sit down at this table, but will not simply becuase they are scared. Dean Johnson does not think that any group can solve this problem, but rather a fusion of the two cultures must occur on an individual basis. With regard to exact numbers, there are 1802 students on campus, 57 of whom are black, making Middlebury 3% black; Dean Johnson would like to see that percentage increase to about 10% and remain there as the college grows. She does not feelt that there is any racial discrimination in the admissions procedure, as the pictures in the ap\u00ac plication forms are only used for things like \u201cNew Faces.\u201d Blacks who come to Middlebury , she said, are helped by such things as the summer orientation program and also an Inter-Departmental Course which is open only to incoming freshmen. This course, which meets 5 times each week, gives four weeks of study in each of three dif\u00ac ferent departments, and is a two credit program. Even with these programs, Dean Johnson believes that the key to Black-White understanding is in the obliteration of the ignorance that exists between them in society."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1972-01-28", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1972-01-28 : Volume LXVII, Issue 11", "year": 1972, "seq": 5, "text": "I will simply describe one experience which presented to me some of the less visible (more covered up) realities of life in the Soviet Union. Through this description I hope to be able to convey to you something of the feeling of being in the Soviet Union, for these realities were indeed the sights and sounds one could have feelings about. We had been in Moscow for several days. We had been given tours of the city and of several major points of interest. All of us, at one time or another (at all hours, night and day) had haunted Red Square, gasping at St. Basil's Cathedral (with the multi-^lored onion cupolas, group such as ours, earnest students all, this attempt could only fail. We also knew that Intourist (our guide, mother hen, and keeper, depending on your point of view) was not about to present us with any \"stark realities\" that could survive all the postulating of fifty clumsy sociologists. Therefore, when the invitation came to spend an evening in the suburbs at the home of a friend of one of our group, I accepted readily. Mische, a smiling, confident young man of twenty-five met us at our hotel. He seemed unaware (or superaware) of the situation: talking to Americans in a very public place, but he remained soft-spoken and warm behind his horn-rimmed glasses, underneath his fur hat. He greeted us easily with very good English and we were drawn to him. As our group wa\u2019erfall was curiously peaceful, for above and below the swarm and noise were fantastic. So we rode like the chosen few from one melee to the next. The Moscow Metro system is beautiful and efficient, and the walls of the station are devoid of grafitti. Some of the art work is questionable (gilded statues of men and women carrying machine guns), but this again is a matter of perspective."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1972-01-28", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1972-01-28 : Volume LXVII, Issue 11", "year": 1972, "seq": 6, "text": "Instead, it is glutted with the waste we have thrown off, both material and human. Materially, we are burying ourselves in our own trash, and choking our own bodies in a bath of our effluents. We are hated throughout the world for our endless greed for more material things. The same is true of our human resources. For centuries we have wasted the resource which consists of the minorities of our society\u2014 Blacks, women, Indians, and Chicanos. We have wasted our productive minds by becoming obsessed with material things. These things are true for all society. They are true at Middlebury College. It is encouraging to see that in some areas, we are gradually learning that using our natural resources as efficiently and non-exploitatively as possible does not make our life worse. Instead, it adds to the quality of our existence, because we can feel a sense of harmony with our environment that would be otherwise impossible. At Middlebury, people are trying to use their resources less wastefully. We are discovering that it does not lower the quality of our lives to use a recycling box or to turn off a superfluous light. Slowly, we are discovering that to move ourselves with our own energy is better than to let the auto\u00ac makers haul us. Campaign GM, the movement for VPIRG, ancyhe Environmental Quality group are manifestations of student desire to bring our society into closer harmony with our surroundings. Our system of education, however, is moving in a direction that is causing more waste of an absolutely precious resource\u2014 the ability of students to teach themselves and others. Our system is becoming increasingly fascinated with technique, and as a consequence is becoming less human. We build Science Centers to teach the involved techniques of Science, but refuse to discuss the nature of Science."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1972-01-28", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1972-01-28 : Volume LXVII, Issue 11", "year": 1972, "seq": 7, "text": "Likewise the editors of the Campus are entitled to endorse whatever candidate they wish to. but such an endorsement should appear on the editorial page, not as implied in a \"news article\u201d. Douglas Rooks (Editor's note' : The present policy of this newspaper is to follow the \u201cequal time\" principle in the coverage of candidates. It has also been decided that it is best to allow the candidates to stand on their own feet with regard to issues; therefore, the Campus will attempt to offer the can\u00ac didates' own statements and criticisms on the issues. Last week's article came from pro-McGovern sources This week s statement isee page 2) comes from Muskie Campaign headquarters. We will attempt to solicit statements from all candidates and to present them fairly, in addition to any editorial in\u00ac terpretations that might be forthcoming. The date of Sept. 24. 1971 given as the time of McGovern's speech is inaccurate; a typographical error on our part The correct date is September 24. 1963 'erse Musical Elements nonization of the melody. (Counterpoint uses a second melody running underneath the first melody for harmony. This is opposed to traditional harmony which consists of melody plus chords. > In this case, the bass player supplied most of the harmonizing second melody. One of Bach\u2019s and Mozart's simplest variation techniques was to fill in the intervals between the notes of their melodies with scales and trills. This is exactly what Neil Wolfe did in his im\u00ac provisation section of \"All the Things You Are.\u201d Ternary Form The improvisation section ended as abruptly as it had begun, and the Trio swung back into the big show-tune style they had started with. This is a ternary form, A-B-A, where the A represents the show-tune style which opened and closed the arrangement, and the B stands for the middle improvisation section."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1972-01-28", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1972-01-28 : Volume LXVII, Issue 11", "year": 1972, "seq": 8, "text": "As mentioned above, Neil Wolfe often borrowed the brassy, exciting circus- music sound which opens Broadway shows. He also borrowed rhythms from many styles of music. He used waltz time from Old Vienna, a modified boogie- woogie rock beat, the dance rhythm of the jitterbug, the impressionistic broken chord bass used by Debussy, definite rock continued on page 13 To the Kditor: Last week's Campus article entitled \"There is a Difference\u201d did a disservice to both Senator Muskie and Senator McGovern. It was unfair to Senator Muskie because it distorted his views on two issues. It was equally unfair to Senator McGovern because it seems as though a juxtaposition of distorted Muskie positions to actual McGovern statements was the only way to stress the positive aspects of Senator McGovern\u2019s cam\u00ac paign. Particularly outrageous was the use of a statement Senator Muskie made in 1%f> as an accurate representation of his position on the war Senator Muskie has realized the error in his former position and has sincerely deplored the Indo- Chinese war in no uncertain terms as a moral, political, and military debacle. He has called for the f ixing of a terminal date for American involvement in Indo-China. Senator Muskie's position today\u2014 and that is what is most important\u2014 is second to none in opposition to the war On the question of amnesty. Senator Muskie's views are also misrepresented if the reader does not pay particularly close attention to the wording in both the Muskie and McGovern statements. Muskie believes that the terms of am\u00ac nesty should be discussed after the war is over. Notice how little substantive dif\u00ac ference there is with McGovern s position which calls for amnesty \"at the end of the war.\u201d Turning to the question of a black vice- president. it is necessary to consider Muskie's statement in the context in which it was said; Muskie was responding to a question before a group of California black leaders."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1972-01-28", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1972-01-28 : Volume LXVII, Issue 11", "year": 1972, "seq": 9, "text": "Throughout the concert, the great rapport between Taylor and his very competent bass player, Walter Robinson, was highly evident. This communal feeling included the audience as well, contributing to the overall quality of excellence of the concert. Taylor was called back for two encores, in the first of which he played a jazz version of \u201cGreensleeves\u201d on the flute, thus proving himself not only a master of the guitar and the piano, but a competent flautist as well. In an interview after the concert, Taylor commented, \u201cI can safely say that Cats slip by Panthers By Tim Katzman Perlman pulls off near-masterpiece 3 -O 3 On an unseasonably warm January evening, an emotionally charged Middlebury hockey team took to the ice at Gutterson Field House, in Burlington. Led by their acrobatic ace, Larry Perlman, the Panthers played an aggressive forechecking game, only to fall, 2-1. Outshot, outskated and generally outplayed, the Pan- fc* there were not out hustled. Led by \" the forechecking of Rob Mc- Callum, Charlie O\u2019Sullivan and Bill Everett, the Panthers were not embarrassed. \u00a3 The Catamounts displayed a crisp, heady passing attack that left the Panthers one step behind. But through gutsy, dogged hustle, tne Panthers were usually able to re-group and bolster Perlman\u2019s superb net-minding. The truth of the matter is that Middlebury, for the umpteenth time, ran into a superior team. The Cats possessed greater size, quicker shots, harder skaters and a more efficient team effort. With all their combined hustle and desire, the Panthers did not exactly blow Vermont off the ice in the opening period. At the onset of the game, Middlebury was extremely cautious; they appeared to be somewhat hesitant to go with the puck. Perhaps they felt they were unable to do so. Midd got untracked somewhat at the expense of an interference penalty to Tom Stillman at 5:19 into the period."}
{"id": "gamefans-killer-instinct-2-strategy-guide", "title": "Gamefan's Killer Instinct 2 Strategy Guide", "year": 1996, "seq": 0, "text": "You can still speed up the endspecial via hold-release in KI2, or you can just perform a speed combo. To perform a speed combo, you must actually input the commands faster than usual, this is known a \"Buffering\". After an opener con- nects, immediately score auto doubles, or manual auto dou- bles and interrupt the animation with your next move, either a linker or Endspecial. You are essentially buffering your next move, and by performing it early, speeds up the rate that it animates. The advantage of speed up combos, is that the window of opportunity for a combo breaker appears much quicker, and makes it harder for your opponent to rec- ognize which auto doubles to break. It also speeds up the endspecial without having to perform it as a hold release move. To really intimidate your opponent, open them up with a speed combo, throw in a super linker, speed up your auto doubles, and finish it with a slo-mo endspecial. CHARGE MOVES Charge moves are Special Moves which require the player to charge back or forward on the joystick for a few seconds, then immediately move the joystick the opposite direction while pressing the desired Punch or Kick button to perform the Special Move. damage from your opponent. It's best to keep \u0430 -KI2 as -Slo-Mo | or I SUPER BAR The addition of a Super Gauge adds a new level of gameplay to KI2. It consists of six blocks, and can be maxed out to twelve blocks. A full flashing red bar indicates the first level, a flashing indicates a second level Super gauge 12. It's designed to the Super gauge is only limiting themselves. Many characters have Special Super Moves that are Specifically designed to balance them out against more powerful characters. To charge up the Super gauge, you must either perform a Special Move or Pressure Combo on a blocking opponent, or take Endspecial dramaticall N ? | Slowly connects."}
{"id": "gamefans-killer-instinct-2-strategy-guide", "title": "Gamefan's Killer Instinct 2 Strategy Guide", "year": 1996, "seq": 1, "text": "HOLD RELEASE MOVE To speed up the rate a Special Move is performed, hold the required Punch or Kick button down, perform the joy- stick motion to achieve the Special Move, and release the Punch or Kick button at the point you would normally press it. This also applies to Endspecials and Ultras. Another use for hold-release moves is to first Open an opponent with a Punch or Kick attack, and hold the but- ton while performing an Opener joystick motion, then release the button at the end of the joystick motion to speed up the Opener. This is also referred to as a \"Two-in-One\". An example with Maya would be her low Medium Punch to Savage Blades Opener. First connect with a low Medium Punch while charging back and hold the button; the instant the low Medium Punch hits, move the joystick forward and release MP for her Savage Blades. Two-in-Ones are very useful when in close combat, and are yet another way to start Combos. SUPER MOVES One of the many refinements in KD is- ition of Super Moves. These moves are usually Super versions of regular Special Moves and do much more damage than regular Special Moves. Super Moves require 6 blocks, or one level of the This means up to two supers can be stored for later use. Due to uper Moves inflict, the motions to perform them are actice they can become second nature. up Moves. If timed right, they'll suck sombos or using them as Air Juggles is also very useful. - Each character also has a few Special Moves which require energy from the super gauge to perform. These moves are less damaging than Super Moves, but do more damage than conventional attacks. ULTRA The Ultra is a Special Move that can the Ja ofa the opponen is NO MERCYS Returning to \u041a\u04062 are Kl's No Mercy moves and Ultimate Combos."}
{"id": "gamefans-killer-instinct-2-strategy-guide", "title": "Gamefan's Killer Instinct 2 Strategy Guide", "year": 1996, "seq": 2, "text": "Age: 31 With the return of the demon lord to the land, Tusk leaves the arena to issue his challenge. Only by defeat- ing all adversaries can a hero earn the right to face the evil Gargos. Tusk is perhaps one of the most damaging characters in \u041a/2, as well as being the epitome of manliness. His only real weakness is not having any full-screen projectiles, but his Boot Kick and Skull Splitter are ideal for get- ting in close. His best Two-in-Ones are a low or high Medium Kick to a Medium Boot Kick or Fierce Punch Weh of Death. Tusk's Skull Splitter travels nearly a full screen's distance, and passes through Fireballs. The Skull Splitter also hits high; opening up a crouch- ing opponent and doubles as a Juggle Move. It can be Two-in-Oned after a Fierce Punch Overhead Move and when done out of range of Auto- Doubles, the Skull Splitter should be finished with an Endspecial or Quick Punch Conqueror. The Web of Death is also a very effective move. It's very quick and is \u0430, close to medium-range attack. However, you have to be close to an opponent to score an Auto-Double hit. If you are close enough to con- nect an Auto-Double, try using a Medium Punch or Kick as your Auto- Double, or go to a standing Fierce Kick to Medium Punch or Kick Manual Auto-Double. If, on the other hand, the Web of Death hits your opponent but you're too far to connect an Auto-Double, it's best to finish your Combo with a Quick Punch Conqueror, followed by the Skull Splitter Juggle Move. If the Web of Death is Two-in-Oned out-of Auto-Double range, go for an Endspecial followed by a Juggle Move."}
{"id": "gamefans-killer-instinct-2-strategy-guide", "title": "Gamefan's Killer Instinct 2 Strategy Guide", "year": 1996, "seq": 3, "text": "Not only does\u201d this move juggle your opponent, it is also a Linker. : The Conqueror is probably Tusk's most powerful and annoying Special Move due to its incredible range. Tusk's Quick Punch Conqueror can be used either as a Juggle Move or a Combo Finisher. It can then be followed by the Skull Splitter for a second Juggle. When performing the Conqueror, try to time it so it connects with the opponent when Tusk's sword is horizon- tal. This particular frame has the longest range in Tusk's Conqueror anima- tion. Knowing this range is crucial in playing Tusk efficiently. Tusk's Fierce Punch Conqueror is also an Endspecial. The Boot Kick is also very powerful and can knock down mid-air oppo- nents. It can also be used as a Juggle Move. Tusk's best Opener is a Medium Boot Kick because it's easier to Two-in-One, and it's also very quick. It's best to Two-in-One it after a Manual Crouching Fierce Kick/Medium Kick Chain, because the Fierce Kick will stop Overheads. Tusk's Fierce Boot Kick is too slow to Two-in-One, hut its range is almost full-screen. His Quick Boot Kick has little range but is very fast and can he Two-in-Oned. The Quick and Medium Boot Kicks act as Linkers, and the Fierce Boot Kick doubles as a Juggle Move and an Endspecial. Tusk's Back Stab is his least-used move in most arcades, but skilled Tusk players know that this is one of his best Openers. Although it only works when you are close to your opponent, it's a great move to use against char- acters with charge moves, who will often find themselves walking right into the Back Stab. It also works wonders on players who \"turtle,\" so learn to use it."}
{"id": "gamefans-killer-instinct-2-strategy-guide", "title": "Gamefan's Killer Instinct 2 Strategy Guide", "year": 1996, "seq": 4, "text": "Age: 23 Made Queen of the land of Amazonia after her part in banishing the Dark Lord Gargos. Cast out by her tribe as Gargos returns, Maya must vanquish him to regain her throne. Maya, the Queen of Amazonia, may also be informally addressed as | the \"High/Low\" Queen. Her close attacks are quick and are easily Two- in-Oned with any of her devastating Special Moves making her ideal for = an aggressive player. Maya's Flip Kick Special Move is one of her Opening attacks and is also a Linker. Although the Flip Kick isn't a long range attack, it is very speedy. It's best to alternate the Flip Kick and the Savage Blades spe- cial moves in Pressure Combos. By randomly switching between these two Openers, you will decrease the chance of a Pressure Counter and raise the chances of scoring an Opener. You can also Manually Chain Maya's Flip Kick after a standing or crouching MP, FP, MK or FK. Another effective use of the Flip Kick is to Manually Chain it after her overhead FP. This is one of Maya's quickest Openers and is ideal for starting her speed-up Combos. Maya also has a Super version of the Flip Kick called the Tree Cutter. Not only does the Tree Cutter move faster and have greater range than the Flip Kick, it also does much more damage. Unlike the Flip Kick, which is an Opener, the Tree Cutter Finishes a Combo. Her Savage Blades Special Move is very effective because of its long range and decent speed. The Savage Blades is a very important part of Maya's \"High/Low\" game. For example, you could start off a Combo with a crouching \u201clow\u201d MK, MP or FK and two-in-one it with the \"high\" hitting Savage Blades. As a further extension of the \"High/Low\" game, try alternating the Savage Blades with the Mantis (which hits crouching opponents)."}
{"id": "gamefans-killer-instinct-2-strategy-guide", "title": "Gamefan's Killer Instinct 2 Strategy Guide", "year": 1996, "seq": 5, "text": "Mixing up the TJ Tremor with the Super KO Move (which dizzies the opponent) keeps your opponent guessing whether to block or jump. Combo's Cyclone Move is back, but in \u041a/2 the Cyclone is much PAN i Ka more effective. It requires less charge time than be pressing back and then forth as you release Fierce takes a step forward for additional range. The Cycl used as an Air Juggle, followed up with a Powerlini tating double Air Juggle. | But perhaps TJ's greatest improvement the-Back move. Similar to Tusk's Backstab, can get you out of some preti. hairy Press Kai m ly, the Behind-the-Back Move can a daches for your opponents. For examp around to the back of your opponent, you could \u0435\u0448 quick cheese with a throw, go for an easy Two-in-( Fierce Kick or Medium Kick, or go for an Opener to sta or you could even come in with the Pressure Move and there. This is Combo's greatest advantage, and is. \u201aalso makes him one of \u041a/25 most aggressive characters. | As far as weaknesses go, Combo does lack a Fireball. However, if he is played aggressively, getting around a Fireball hurler is no big problem. One questionable move added to Combo's repertoire is his Fake Dizzy. The | y this is because the Dizzy Move can only be done when you're standing, and for your opponent to think they've magically made you dizzy by not touching you is a joke. If it works on someone you're play- ing against, please escort them away from the machine and let a real gamer jump in. My biggest gripe with the Fake Dizzy is that it could have really been an effective move, if it could be buffered with another move and/or done as your character is rising from being knocked down."}
{"id": "gamefans-killer-instinct-2-strategy-guide", "title": "Gamefan's Killer Instinct 2 Strategy Guide", "year": 1996, "seq": 6, "text": "If you dow \u0440 forward and then immediately perform the Wheel, Sabrewulf perfor Manual Super Wheel that rotates twice instead of once. By using dee, not.only can you surprise the oppo- nent, but also do double the damage in the process. Although Sabrewulf can\u2019t throw, he has a Dizzy Move which (unlike Combo's Dizzy Move) will stun the opponent from any part of the screen if they are not blocking. While this move may, be cheap, he needs it for overall balance. This is great.to use against Fireball-happy opponents, and works great as a Cross-Up Move as your opponent is rising from a fall. Sabrewulf also has a Sabre How! and a Fake Sabre Howl. Performing the Sabre Howl charges up Sabrewulf's Super gauge (hold- ing down the button will continually charge the Super gauge) but he is vulnerable to attacks during his Howl. The Fake Sabre Howl only leaves Sabrewulf vulnerable for a split second, yet it doesn't charge up | the Super gauge. A good use for the Sabre Howl is to perform it right after knocking down an opponent. If done correctly, Sabrewulf will fully | recover before the opponent can attack him. You can also use the Fake Howl to get your opponent to commit to an attacking move and then counter them. Mix up Fake Howls with real Howls to keep your oppo- nent guessing. Confident players can also use the Fake Howls in Combos for style points or as taunts. Overall, Sabrewulf is one of the easiest \u041a/2 characters to learn and is an excellent character for beginners. His easy-to-perform, no-charge moves are instinctive and give new players a chance to discover the depths of \u041a/2 rather than spend time and money mastering basic moves. His explosive nature is also appealing to experienced and aggressive players as well. 4 + TM SABREWULE \u042b Standing \u00cd Quick Punch Crouching Quick Punch Jumping Quick Punch Standing Medium Punch Gi \u2018Crouching Medium Punch Close mE LL."}
{"id": "gamefans-killer-instinct-2-strategy-guide", "title": "Gamefan's Killer Instinct 2 Strategy Guide", "year": 1996, "seq": 7, "text": "Resurrected by Gargos and forced to serve him, he goes up against the tyrant to win his freedom. Returning to K/2 is \u041a\u0407 refinement done to Spin motions for Special Move Spinal has a new Skeleskewer Special Move. of its speed, and the fact that it doesn't look like a Special Move, this a useful Opener. It has excellent range and a quick recovery time. \u0410 good use for this Opener is as a Two-in-One move. Because it sends Spinal lunging toward the opponent, it almost always puts you in range to score Auto-Doubles or a quick Finisher. A crouching MP Two-in-Oned into a Skeleskewer is very effective. To expand on this (and make the move more effective against overhead Counters), start with a crouching FK to MP Manual Chain, and Two-in-One the MP with a Skeleskewer. The new Flame Blade Special Move can be used as a cheap tactic. This Special Move shields Spinal from almost all jump-in attacks. Because Spinal is stationary when performing this move, it's better to use it as a Counter rather than an Opener. It's also one of Spinal's Linkers and can be Two-in-Oned. If the Flame Blade is too far away to score an Auto-Double, try using a standing FK to MP for the Manual Chain triple. Spinal's new Skull Skrape Special passes under most Fireballs, and works as a Juggle Move. Oddly enough, the Skull Skrape can also be performed with a crouching FK, although it has limited range and does- n't work as a Juggle Move. Alternating between the two Skull Skrapes can surprise opponents walking towards you. Although Spinal lacks a Parry Move, he still has his Power Devour. This will absorb most Special Moves, and add skulls to Spinal that rotate around his body, which powers him up for the Skeleport, or they can be thrown as projectiles."}
{"id": "gamefans-killer-instinct-2-strategy-guide", "title": "Gamefan's Killer Instinct 2 Strategy Guide", "year": 1996, "seq": 8, "text": "With Nintendo at the helm, do you feel that you've lost anything you could've had or done if you stayed an independent company? How has it been working with Nintendo? \u0410: To the development staff nothing has really changed, other than the fact that the company has steadily increased its staff. We still work in the same manner as we did before the Nintendo investment and this is thanks to their trust and faith in our gaming knowl- edge and ability to pro- duce some of the most exciting games today. They know us well enough to let us get on with the job. We enjoy working with Nintendo and appreciate their support and assis- tance with many of our products. Q: Which Nintendo games do you like, and which ones (if any) influenced any of Rare's games? A: It\u2019s not often that a Nintendo game comes out that we don't like. We enjoy all the popular clas- sics like Mario, Zelda, Pilotwings, Super Metroid, etc., but there's also some of their other titles which perhaps aren't so prominent or didn't receive the kind of glory they should have, like Kirby's Dream Course or Super Punch Out, which we think are both excellent games and still go back to play today. Nintendo has an incred- ible ability to structure their games that just makes them so much bet- ter than anything else on any other game system. When you ask which titles have influenced our products, you should also ask which Rare titles have influenced Nintendo prod- ucts. Did you ever see Atic Atac on a Sinclair Spectrum? The first Zelda games show some simi- larities! 0: With Rare \u0456\u043f England and Nintendo literally on the other side of the world, have you experi- enced any difficulty com- municating with them? A: Phones and faxes are marvelous inventions which always allow us to come to an amicable agreement or solve any problems at the end of the day."}
{"id": "gamefans-killer-instinct-2-strategy-guide", "title": "Gamefan's Killer Instinct 2 Strategy Guide", "year": 1996, "seq": 9, "text": "Q: Have you been working at all with NCL, or has it been strictly an NOA/Rare affair? A: The majority of our communications are through NOA but we cer- tainly have strong links with NCL and in particular Mr. Miyamoto, who had some involvement with the Donkey Kong games. Q: What future changes in Rare do you see resulting from the Nintendo invest- ment? A: The main change will evolve in the next two years, when we should hopefully have a new building designed and built for us, which will allow us to expand up to 200 people. It will be constructed on land about a mile away from our cur- rent site, so we will still be situated in the country- side, where we believe we supply the best possi- ble working environment for our staff. This will lead to more, and hopefully even hetter, Rare products. A STAR IS BORN Q: When speaking to other developers, they voice a huge amount of respect for Rare that dates back to the early eighties. Take us back to that time. A: When home computing first really took off in the early '80s with the release of the Sinclair machines, Tim and Chris Stamper transferred their skill and experience they'd acquired through working with arcade boards to the Spectrum, and \"Ultimate\u2014Play the Game\" was born. Ultimate was to attain near-legendary status among game players and critics alike over the next few years and it set out to establish its name from the very start with the launch of Jet-Pac in the summer of '83. This first release was a massive hit, selling 300,000 copies over a small UK user base, a practically unheard-of figure at that point in time. A string of 14 hit games followed, mainly on the Spectrum between \"83-786, each one earning critical acclaim and huge sales."}
{"id": "US.NN.FIT.SC.362.2.1.22.199305-06", "title": "Fashion International, May/June 1993", "year": 1993, "seq": 0, "text": "Standouts include the sleek black jersey full pants and matching tank, the midriff inset with sheer organza, and the long bias cut gown, also in black jersey, punctuated with triangular black satin waist detailing. ROBERT DANES is a relative newcomer to fashion, but not to the concept of cut and shape. Trained as an architect, his silhouettes and origami-like folding and pleating clearly echo this early influence. A simple form-like black crepe mid-calf dress features overlong sleeves, cut into geometric notches, with matching back- slit. In ivory crepe, a collarless jacket ripples into fluted pleats at the back of its long peplum, and is paired with coordi- nating easy pants. A navy crepe mid-calf dress with long sleeves incorporates a circular cut out neckline at the cleavage, and rises up to a high collar. A black crepe pantsuit features a cardigan-style jacket which buttons at the waist, revealing a black lace tank beneath. The sleeves on the jacket are extra long, extending over the fingers. In an Edwardian mode, an elongated fitted jacket with tailored, pleated peplum has a stand-up structured collar, and is teamed with a mid-calf matching black crepe slim skirt. For evening, he pleats and overlaps layers of sheer organza in a navy blouse and a long burnt orange sarong, creating an ethereal effect where no edge of the fabric is on the same level as another. And talking of ethereal ... what could be more so than the sleeveless, moss green organza, layered handker- chief hem dress, worn over a black lace catsuit. TRACY FEITH utilizes gray solids and pinstripe, beige, navy, red, brown, green, orange, and lots of black, together with a \u201cnewspaper\u201d print. Fabrics include wools (from felt and knits to crepe), as well as denim and velvet."}
{"id": "US.NN.FIT.SC.362.2.1.22.199305-06", "title": "Fashion International, May/June 1993", "year": 1993, "seq": 1, "text": "The mood is one of \"70s whimsy in this ultra contem- porary collection: Vests are key in this collection, often paired with bell- bottoms, or going solo over a sweater. One ankle-length black wool vest buttons down the front, is ruched into pleats and tied with leather thongs at the back, and tops a brown sweater. A black wool crop top backless jacket is paired with bell- bottoms that are seamed at the thigh, and feature button-on wool felt panels at the hem. Taking us back to psychedelic times is the multi-fabric patchwork long coat in hues of red, with matching shorts. A long A-line skirt combines contrasting tones of green in horizontal panels of wool and velvet; while slim flared pants are overlaid with matching beige wool \"apron\" which buttons onto the pants via grommets (reminiscent of chaps). Metal grommets also provide an accent on a long cape (actually two flaps), which affixes it to a belted jacket with side-slits, all in navy or red wool. The inspiration for KENNETH RICHARD\u2019s Fall collection is Edgar Allan Poe\u2019s \u201cThe Raven,\u201d creating a Gothic mood in black, plum, stone gray, white and peat wool crepe, viscose, acetate, cotton, wool knit, georgette and chiffon. The bird in question is inter- preted via feathers which adom an exotic neckpiece of black jersey with crisp cotton stand-up collar. But the beautifully man-tailored separates and dresses stem from the Edwardian era, exemplified by the \"dandy\" tailed single-breasted jacket with abbreviated, notched front. There\u2019s another version of this, with a short rounded tail which curves smoothly up to continued on page 4 \"The Innovation Generation\" continued from page 1 tropical wool. A gray wool knit crop top, with crocheted panel, tops a long gray wool wrap skirt; while an evening column in burgundy wool has a see- through bodice with crocheted sleeves."}
{"id": "US.NN.FIT.SC.362.2.1.22.199305-06", "title": "Fashion International, May/June 1993", "year": 1993, "seq": 2, "text": "High- lights include: an empire line, long wool jacket with gently curving hemline in black/gray stripe and long \u201chobble skirt\u201d in black wool with slit back; a period influenced \u201cbustle back\u201d suit in black and gray striped wool; and a forest green tapestry print long cutaway jacket with military stand-up collar, in velvet, with matching slim pants. There\u2019s also the option of a riding jacket in that same color/fabrication. Another vintage look takes the form of a 3/4 length black coat with spider lace trim and matching long, lace skirt. DEREK FARRAR Derek Farrar pays tribute to Audrey Hepburn in this ladylike, elegant collec- tion of gabardine, wool jersey, taffeta, and gazar, presented in red and black with white accents. A black jersey catsuit acts as the first layer under a red gabar- dine pant that looks like a skirt! Topping it off is a black squared-off gabardine vest. In a salute to the \u201850s a full, black gabardine long circle skirt pairs with a matching scoop neck vest, worn over a black jersey catsuit. And for a sparkling night on the town... look for the hand- beaded top and full black taffeta \u201cballgown\u201d asymmetrical skirt, complete with train. continued on page 6 3 FALL '93 continued from page 2 a single-button closure\u2014 both neatly top the slim button cuff or slightly pegged cuff pant. Tails are also a feature on the fitted vest, and a slim skirt which is cut into a button-front \u201cV\u201d dipping into points at the back. As a contrast, another jacket with an airy silhouette incorporates a high back-slit, and side-slits that rise to 4 inches from the armholes: A single- breasted style, it\u2019s extremely flattering for any size woman. High front and back- slits are also a feature on a long slim skirt, giving the illusion of culottes/ palazzos."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1977-04-27", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1977-04-27 : Volume LXXIb, Issue 18", "year": 1977, "seq": 0, "text": "The monetary saving is considerable. In addition to monetary and fuel savings, Eaton pointed out other benefits resulting from a spring closing. They include the reduction of electrical con\u00ac sumption during a shut down, the availability of the plant for necessary repairs, and a savings in manpower costs by scheduling vacations. Campus Bars Proposed By JOHN CRAWFORD Members of the Middlebury College community responded with mixed emotions when asked how they felt about the proposed \u201cRathskeller Bill\u201d now pending in the Vermont State Legislature. The bill, according to State Senator Hubert Ogden, would give colleges in Vermont the privilege to operate a drinking establishment on campus. It will be held over until the legislative session next January due to the lack of time before adjournment. Ogden, who is a member of the Senate Finance Committee which will study the bill in the future, predicted a very close vote in the Senate next year. The bill has already gone through both the Military and General Affairs Committee and the Appropriations Committee of the Vermont House of Representatives. The bill will have to be okayed by the Senate Finance Committee, approved by the Senate, and signed by Governor Snelling to be enacted into law. The only problem that Ogden foresees for the bill is if the state choses to raise the drinking age from eighteen to either nineteen or twenty. \u201cI think the Finance Com\u00ac mittee and the Senate would feel hesitant to facilitate drinking in such a case,\u201d remarked Ogden. Two members of the ad\u00ac ministration reacted negatively to the bill. College Treasurer Carroll Rikert, who testified at a Senate Finance Committee hearing against the bill, feels that Middlebury has little interest in seeing the bill passed. He em\u00ac phasised, however, that he testified on behalf of the ad\u00ac ministration and not the student body."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1977-04-27", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1977-04-27 : Volume LXXIb, Issue 18", "year": 1977, "seq": 1, "text": "Last year, a Jeffords amend\u00ac ment passed Congress setting supports at a minimum of 85% parity. The legislation the amendment was attached to called for quarterly adjustments. That legislation was vetoed, on the advice of then Agriculture Secretary Earl Butz. \u201cWhen Earl Butz was trying to destroy the small farmer, the committee fought against his policies,\u201d Jeffords said. \u201cNow the new Administration is trying to do essentially the same thing, arxi the majority of the com\u00ac mittee has caved in. This is pure hypocrisy, and partisan politics at its worst.\u201d Jeffords said he does not blame the current agriculture secretary, Bob Bergland, as the Administration's policy in this area is being set by the Office of Management and Budget. Even in its altered form, Jeffords said his amendment, as approved by the committee, \u201cis certainly better than nothing.\u201d Tony\u2019s Pizza DELICIOUS- Italian Food and Pizza Check Mama Neri's Specials Nightly Open 7 days a week me imuuieuuiy The Middlebury Campus, page 4 Aprii 27, 19 Editorials Wilderness Valuable Man\u2019s collision course with his environment has been vividly described by many writers. Politicians, economists, and conservationists haveaB pointed out the inevitable dangers of our modern growth ethic. We have become so con\u00ac cerned with maintaining and increasing our production and consumption of energy that we have ignored both the present realities and the unavoidable consequences of continued growth. The present realities are that while we concern ourselves with decreasing only the growth of energy consumption in the US from 4.6%o 27annually, millions of people in the world are doing without even the minimal amounts ot energy wmch could be used to support their impoverished, unstable societies. Ifwe continue in our present direction, we will damage, perhapseven destroy the ecosystem which supports us. The growth ethic by definition precludes possibilities of satisfactory growth. Increased production has always entailed increased pollution, and perhaps more dangerously, increased incentive lor consumption."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1977-04-27", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1977-04-27 : Volume LXXIb, Issue 18", "year": 1977, "seq": 2, "text": "The more we get, the more we want. Five or six years ago, there was no energy shortage. Not having immediately to confront an impending shortage of non-renewable resources, our society became more concerned with the protection of our rcmainhg wilderness and the restorationofacceptableenvironmental standards to places we haddamaged. Today there is an energy shortage. Having to make a decision between protection of our wilderness and production of more energy, we seemingly h ave decided to attempt the production of more energy. Although some emphasis has been placed on conservation of existing non\u2014renewable resources and development of alternative renewable resources, we have accepted the tenets of thegrowth philosophy. This decision has been madeat theexpense not only of our environment, but also at the expense of other members of the human communit v. The environment we know now is the only one nature provided us Our modifications are often irreversible and often undesirable. The root ot our continued modification is our acceptance of the growth ethic. The importance of wilderness throughout our energydebates has been dual. It offers solace to individuals seeking relief from the industrial society, andean be a collective symbol of a decision to disengage the growth mechanisms. When this society makes a commitment to wilderness, it will be proof that it has seen the dangers of the growth ethic. And presently wilderness is viewed as a mystical temple for the communion services of organic pagans. We must realize that wilderness supports us. The earth is not outs to tame; ta ming it would probably result in our destruction, because we arc so loolish. Even developing renewable resources from solar energy, wind, and water power will not reverse our course, because once energy becomes unlimited, the tendency toward societal self\u2014destruction will continue. Until mankind learns how to control itself, and share its resources and prohts, it will benefit from renewable energy only through a decrease in the pollution ot its environment."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1977-04-27", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1977-04-27 : Volume LXXIb, Issue 18", "year": 1977, "seq": 3, "text": "The Campus commends the 20 Middlebury students who will testily beiore Congress this week on behalf of the protection of the Alaskan wilderness. They are indicative of the type of educated, committed individuals who should lead cur generation in the years ahead. Student Forum Reform During the next week, various students will be running for the Student Forum. Resumes of candidates are due in at the Office of the Deans by Fnday if they are to be published in next week's issue of The Campus. Two students\u2014Ken Peters and Curtis Singleton\u2014have already madeknown iheir candidacies for the Forum and are determined to conduct a visible cam\u00ac paign. The Campus supports their aim of making the election of Forum members a more meaningful and representative process. Students often are dissatisfied with the responsiveness of the Forum to their interests. Rather than being the fault of the individuals, we believe such unresponsiveness is primarily the result of structural defects in the Forum. As it stands now, the Forum election process is not a readily visible process. Fomm representatives are not widely known by their student consUtuents. Little direct effort is made by representatives to sound out student opinion\u2014and stu dents arelax themselves in making their views known to their representatives. Greater visibility and responsiveness can perhaps be achieved through certain reforms. First, elections for at least the at-large delegates to theForum must take the form of an actual election campaign. Political campaigns are a vakiable, educative process. They serve both to generate awareness of issues among voters and also to force candidates to come into contact \u2014and become informed\u2014ot a community\u2019s views and moods. Rather than simply posting candidate resumes on the buletin board in Proctor, Student Forum should sponsor a series of class meetings and other activities in which candidates can publicly make brief statements of their views and then beavailable for questions from students at large."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1977-04-27", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1977-04-27 : Volume LXXIb, Issue 18", "year": 1977, "seq": 4, "text": "By SALLY NICHOLS College President Olin Robison emerged from his office on Tuesday, April 19, just long enough to deliver a short speech in commemoration of the late Martin Luther King Jr. ceremonial garb for the occasion, appeared at the pulpit ready to deliver his address. He looked confident and had a slight smile on his lips. His hair was cropped close to his ears. He befit his image as a sharp, young president, and seemed slightly majestic. Robison began his speech with a series of readings from the Hebrew Prophets and American Presidents Thomas Jefferson, Abraham Lincoln, and Lyndon Johnson. He talked about freedom, and his quotes enun\u00ac ciated the nation\u2019s historical struggle toward equality. Robison then began to discuss thelifeof Martin Luther King, Jr. He drew a parallel between the revival meetings that King founded, and the crowd gathered in the Chapel. He asserted that the meeting was a \u201cpublic re-commitment\u201d of faith in the principles that King lived for. Students were asked to take a second look at themselves, for Robison remined them that King \u201cwas called to ask this great nation to sit in judgement on itself.\u201d Robison then directed his speech toward the students, and began to pinpoint the strides that Middlebury has made in providing an educational op\u00ac portunity to students of minority backgrounds. He said King\u2019s influence was a direct cause of Mid die bury's new consciousness. The Statement of these advances was more self-glorification than emphasis on the deeper ideological implications. Robison's final point came from the biblical story of James and John. The moral of the story said that you don\u2019t have to be near power to understand the needs of the people. Adding a bit of humor, Robison quoted a friend by saying, \u201cIt\u2019s hard to remember that your central task is to drain the swamp when you're up to your waist in alligators.\u201d Robison returned to a serious level on the subject of King."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1977-04-27", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1977-04-27 : Volume LXXIb, Issue 18", "year": 1977, "seq": 5, "text": "For a brief moment, lie reflected on the personal convictions of the great man, his faith, understanding, and firm belief in the struggle for human freedom. Robison ended his speech with an appropriate quotation from King, \u201cThe arc of the universe is long, but it bends toward justice.\u201d The speech was short and perhaps sweet, it became ob\u00ac vious that Robison was not going to state specific achievements and details of King\u2019s life. Perhaps he could have illustrated his point better by citing just a few of the details, such as the Montgomery Bus Boycott, or his Letter from Birmingham Jail, for they were decidedly significant. Some students felt cheated; they wanted more Robison and less politician. Perhaps students expected ioo much from their president that day; like a rare bird, they wanted to see all his colors. Robison's central task, however, was simply to com\u00ac memorate Martin Luther King Jr. At this task he did not fail. News Analysis The Chapel was not jam- packed, but Middlebury students made an impressive showing. Some students went because of their deep conviction in King\u2019s principles; others went because special time was allotted for it and the SDU\u2019s were closed down. Perhaps a few even wondered what their fearless president looked like. Robison, dressed in full Minority Hiring Discussed Although Middlebury is not legaBy bound to make special efforts, the College yearly \u201caf\u00ac firms as an act of good faith its intent to comply with Title VII of the Civil Rights Act of 1964\u201d in an Affirmative Action statement included in the Handbook. It also appoints an Affirmative Action officer who is currently Vice- President of the College Paul Cubeta. \u201cSome aspects of Affirmative Action are easier for us to fulfill than others,\u201d said College President Olin Robison. Saul explained that the market for blacks and women is very competitive."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1977-04-27", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1977-04-27 : Volume LXXIb, Issue 18", "year": 1977, "seq": 6, "text": "Most of these people opt for large universities in an urban environment which leaves a very small portion that will even consider a small, rural college in Vermont. \u201cWe honestly publicize our openings,\u201d Saud said, \u201cWe make every attempt to reach minority and women candidates. But then we have to wait and see who answers\u2014it's a problem of at\u00ac traction.\u201d The College recruitment procedure does not leave much room for the discrimination for or against minority and womfen candidates. Department chairmen advertise openings in professional journals cross\u00ac country. After all applications have been received, four can\u00ac didates are selected and invited to the campus. Saul explained that the can\u00ac didate\u2019s race and of ten even their sex are not known until the person comes for an interview on campus. Robison said the important thing was to make opportunities \"available and not specious.\u201d He added that he\u2019d sensed no resistance to Affirmative Action, but a great deal of f rustration. The percentages of women and blacksclearly are low. McKinney suggested that the program\u2019s effectiveness could be improved if an administrator were given a much more central role in Af\u00ac firmative Action. Saul speculated that it would be possible for department chair\u00ac men to write letters to people they knew at other colleges who could help recruit minority and women candidates for Mid\u00ac dlebury. \u201cBut I\u2019m not sure it\u2019s a proper way to proceed,\" he said. \"Are we dealing with reverse discrimination?\u201d Saul also mentioned that all women and minority faculty members were clearly the most qualified choices at the time of their appointment. \u201cAll appointees were honestly and legit imately the finest people we could find in their fields,\" he said. By CAROL HUBREGSON Women and minority professors can bring \u201ca diversity of viewpoint and outlook\u201d to any college community said Vice President for Academic Affairs George P Saul."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1977-04-27", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1977-04-27 : Volume LXXIb, Issue 18", "year": 1977, "seq": 7, "text": "One of the important things is that people have a direct experience (with wilderness), and failing that, an indirect experience. In the conservation organizations and elsewhere we can still bring the wilderness to the people if we can\u2019t take them to the Yes, the energy crisis, the proliferation of nuclear weapons, the population problem are primary, immediate problems. But if while you\u2019re worrying about this you lose wilderness, then you\u2019ve won those for nothing, because you\u2019ve lost one of the most im\u00ac portant resources we have: the wild places on the earth where the forces of life have come through essentially uninterrupted by man and his technology. What we have is all that there will ever be; there are not going to be any more where they came from, and we can live on this earth without doing them in, if we have any capability at all. David Brower is the Founder and President of the environmental organization Friends of the Earth. wilderness. You can do that withpoetry, with music, with descriptions, with painting, with photography. This is the way you have to communicate things in our civilization and I think we can continue to do so. We should bear in mind that a good many people on earth still know what wilderness is all about. Those are primarily the ecosystem people, who have learned how to live with their en\u00ac vironment so that the wild things are still there, not overwhelmed by humanity. Part of the example then is to show how well in balance and how weD adjusted these people are and then relate them with the other forms of life\u2014without which we\u2019d be in very serious trouble practically, and emotionally, too. We can tell the story, and make it believable, that without wilderness the world becomes a cage. \u2018A good many people on earth still know what wilderness is about CAMPUS: What sort of alternative energy sources do you advocate for the salvation of the human race and protection of the wflderness?"}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1977-04-27", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1977-04-27 : Volume LXXIb, Issue 18", "year": 1977, "seq": 8, "text": "We've been hunting the only living yellow\u00ac breasted Killadillo for four years and we finally caught up with him on the campus of Middlebury College!\" were Terrence Bar- naby's words at the end of a busy day which didn't lead to the killing or the capture of the terrifying beast. \"The yellow\u00ac breasted Killadillo is as smart as it is rare,\" explained the Earl of Garth, \"it lives to be several hundreds of years old and eats its own weight in human flesh every 37 minutes. When the hunting party started, we were over 50, nc nv only two of us are left.\" he continued. Terrence Barnaby added that the Killadillo is the only bird which picks its nose: \"no other bird has hands to pick its nose with/' he commented. As the Killadillo flew off into the sunset, Barnaby announced: \"I quit\u2014where can I get a good drink?\" Four years of hunting works up a healthy appetite and the two adventurers celebrated their defeat in the best restaurant in town: Mister Up's. After delicious long drinks on the recently-opened terrace, our heroes had a sumptuous feast and they particularly enjoyed Mister Up's excellent imported house wine. After a few bottles, they commented: \"We're not drink!\" In a flash of generosity, they decided to give a case of this house wine to the student who can find it on campus. It has been hidden outside within the space delimited by a line which joins Old Chapel to Gifford to Mc\u00ac Cullough gym to Voter to Hep\u00ac burn and back to old Chapel. Draw a map, it will help. Terry and Earl hope it won't take you four years to find it! In case you don't find it, they recommend Mister Up's as the best place to celebrate your defeats and vie tiories."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1977-04-27", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1977-04-27 : Volume LXXIb, Issue 18", "year": 1977, "seq": 9, "text": "Following their arrival in Fairbanks, the two were flown in a Super Cub to a point twelve miles from the base of the mountain. Because of the tur\u00ac bulent weather they could land no closer. They started out hiking amidst freezing blasts of air to reach the morraine of Gillam Gla cier at the base of Deborah: a mass of nibble that had been pushed out and to the side of l,he glacier as it scoured the valley. The following day, skiing, they first reached the base of the north face. \u201cThe thing was just awesome,\" Radford recalled. \"We camped there that night and tried to plan our route.\" \"Looking around the basin, we could see an avalanche about every two minutes. The route onto the ridge that led toward the face passed through an ice fall. We saw a serac\"-a pinnacle of iceon a glacier--\"topple over and 'cause a huge avalanche that swept across our route. Because of the avalanches arid the fact that \u201cour packs were too heavy, because we would have to take eight days supply of food,\" Radford and Kitson decided to abandon the idea of scaling the north face. \u201cSo we went to the northwest ridge, started up the buttress, and got hit by a pretty incredible storm. The wind was just screaming, blowing sixty miles per hour. We decided to go back down to the base and set up a tent. There was a lull once when the wind shifted...then on the other side of the glacier we could hear a gust coming, steadily increasing. We were thinking that obviously a tent\u2019s got to go down sometime, but it was a good tent. Itheld-although completely bowed in the middle-even though there were times when we couldn\u2019t even stand up. \u201cThe next day was windy again and we were soaked."}
{"id": "minnesotalogging48blyt", "title": "Minnesota logging utilization factors, 1975-1976 : development, use, implications", "year": 1980, "seq": 0, "text": "Brad Smith, Associate Mensurationist RESULTS Saw Logs Logging utilization factors for saw logs were devel- oped for five species groups \u2014 white and red pine, other softwoods, aspen, other soft hardwoods, and hard hardwoods. For each species group, 95 percent or more of the saw log volume comes from growing stock; the remainder is from nongrowing stock such as tops and limbs of growing stock trees, cull trees, and cull logs. For each species group, except aspen, 92 percent of the saw log volume from growing stock came from the saw log portion of sawtimber growing stock trees (table 1). Aspen saw log output is distinctly different. One-fifth comes from poletimber, an indication of the strong competition for aspen that pulpmills have ex- perienced from sawmills. Growing stock logging residue is four to five times higher per unit of logs produced for soft hardwoods and hard hardwoods than for aspen and softwoods. Lack of markets for mixed hardwood pulpwood in Minnesota may be the cause. More than 50 cubic feet of nongrowing stock resi- due is generated per thousand board feet of \"other soft hardwood\" and red and white pine saw logs cut. Most of the nongrowing stock logging residue is in tops and limbs. Excluding aspen, hardwood cull trees and logs are significant sources of nongrowing stock residue. Less logging residue is created per unit of log out- put in aspen than in any other species group. Well- developed markets for joint products \u2014 aspen pulpwood and saw logs \u2014 may be the key reason for the low residue production. Per thousand board feet of log output, less growing stock (in cubic feet) is cut from white and red pine than for any other species group. This reflects the large high quality trees being harvested and good markets for pine saw logs. Pulpwood-Conventional Logging Pulpwood factors for conventional logging were established for four species groups \u2014 pine, other softwoods, aspen, and other hardwoods."}
{"id": "minnesotalogging48blyt", "title": "Minnesota logging utilization factors, 1975-1976 : development, use, implications", "year": 1980, "seq": 1, "text": "The sample volume included all growing stock in a sample tree plus all nongrowing stock from that tree that was used for pulpwood or saw logs. Saw log and pulpwood volumes in the sam- ple were recorded in their respective product catego- ries and growing stock logging residue was assigned to the major product cut from the tree. For example, if more saw log volume was cut from a tree than pulpwood, the growing stock logging residue was credited to the saw log sample requirement. Because the degree of tree utilization can vary between public and private land, the sample propor- tion for each owner class in each Survey Unit was approximately the portion of commercial forest land in that owner class for that Unit. Logging operations were found by talking to public timber sale administrators, sawmill operators, Figure 1. \u2014 Survey Units in Minnesota and number of loggers and trees sampled during conventional logging. pulpwood procurement personnel, and others know- ledgable about logging operations in a given area. At each logging operation, sample felled trees were measured until approximately 200 cubic feet of sam- ple was measured or until the logging was completed, whichever occurred first. The last sample tree on an operation was completely measured even though, as a result, the sample total went above 200 cubic feet. Large logging operations were those using feller- bunchers, or those using several fellers, and the num- ber of felled trees generally exceeded 10 at any given time. On large operations, every fifth tree per feller was measured and the sample volume per feller was limited to approximately 200 cubic feet divided by the number of fellers. On small logging operations, where the number of felled trees seldom exceeds 10 at any given time, all felled trees were sampled until the required volume was measured. Each tree was classified as live merchantable (poletimber or sawtimber), sapling, cull, or dead."}
{"id": "minnesotalogging48blyt", "title": "Minnesota logging utilization factors, 1975-1976 : development, use, implications", "year": 1980, "seq": 2, "text": "DEFINITIONS Bolewood. \u2014 Wood fiber in the central stem of a tree. Commercial forest land. \u2014 Forest land produc- ing or capable of producing crops of industrial wood and not withdrawn from timber utilization by statute or administrative regulation. Includes areas suitable for management to grow crops of industrial wood generally capable of producing in excess of 20 cubic feet per acre of annual growth. This includes both inaccessible and inoperable areas. Cull trees. \u2014 Live trees that do not contain at least one merchantable 12-foot saw log or two noncontigu- ous 8-foot or longer saw logs, now or prospectively, because of roughness, poor form, or rot. Growing stock. \u2014 Sawtimber and poletimber trees on commercial forest land. Growing-stock volume. \u2014 Volume of sound wood in the bole of sawtimber and poletimber trees from a 1-foot stump to a minimum 4.0-inch top diameter outside bark, or to the point where the central stem breaks into limbs. Hard hardwoods. \u2014 Dicotyledonous species with a hardness factor of 80 or more including white ash, green ash, yellow birch, hickory, hard maple, oak, and black walnut. Limbwood. \u2014 Volume of sound wood in limbs of trees. Logging residue. \u2014 The unused portions of trees cut for products. Nonforest land. \u2014 Land that has never supported forests, and land formerly forested where forest use is precluded by development for nonforest uses, such as cropland, improved pasture, residential areas, and city parks. Also includes improved roads and adjoin- ing rights-of-way, powerline clearings, and certain areas of water classified by the Bureau of Census as land. Unimproved roads, streams, canals, and non- forest strips in forest areas must be more than 120 feet wide, and clearings in forest areas must be more than 1 acre in size, to qualify as nonforest land. Nongrowing stock. \u2014 Cull trees, dead trees, sap- lings, cull sections of growing stock trees, limbwood, tops, stumpwood, and timber on nonforest land. 7 Poletimber trees. \u2014 Live trees of commercial spe- cies on commercial forest land at least 5 inches in diameter at breast height but smaller than sawtim- ber size, and of good form and vigor."}
{"id": "montanawaterstor1989mont", "title": "Montana water storage : status report", "year": 1989, "seq": 0, "text": "DNRC would also like to acknowledge the input provided by the Soil Conservation Service, the Bureau of Reclamation, and the Department of Fish, Wildlife and Parks. PURPOSE Some river basins in Montana have experienced chronic water shortages affecting aquatic habitats, irrigators, municipalities, recreationists , and hydro power generators. These water shortages have reduced crop revenues, degraded valuable fisheries, increased domestic water supply costs, reduced recreational opportunities, and decreased hydropower generation. Preceded by a series of dry years, the severe drought of 1988 has increased public interest in the development of additional water storage in Montana. Many see new storage as the best answer to irrigation, municipal, industrial, and instream water shortages. Others view water storage as too expensive and environmentally damaging. To resolve this issue in the best interests of all concerned, the director of the Department of Natural Resources and Conservation (DNRC) , at the request of the governor, created a public advisory task force. The task force assisted DNRC with the preparation of this water storage status report and made recommendations for further evaluation of the issues surrounding water storage. This report does not address the specific needs of the many river basins in Montana or the viability of water storage as a solution to specific water shortage problems. Such an effort would require a more detailed water planning study. Rather, the intent of this report is to provide general information that will serve as a foundation for the governor, legislature, and the State Water Plan Advisory Council to continue discussions about the need for and viability of additional water storage and its possible role in Montana water management. Such discussions will require detailed knowledge of the financial, economic, safety, social, and environmental aspects of additional water storage development. Managing the state's water resources should take into account the unique blend of natural surroundings, geologic features, economic needs, and social priorities of each river basin."}
{"id": "montanawaterstor1989mont", "title": "Montana water storage : status report", "year": 1989, "seq": 1, "text": "Dams inundate prime agricultural land and wildlife habitat, damage fisheries, and alter unique landscapes and historical sites. Clearly, the effects of water storage are many, varied, and unique (site-specific) to each reservoir. This complexity, coupled with differing social needs and priorities, suggests that the net effect of water storage is not easily understood or characterized. Water resources development has primarily been directed by the needs and priorities of the general public. In Montana's early days, water development consisted of short ditches and small reservoirs to meet the needs of miners and small farms. With the coming of electricity in the 1880' s, the demand for Montana's copper accelerated and hydroelectric power was developed near the state's copper smelters to meet this demand. Simultaneously, the coming of the railroads expanded agricultural markets and associated irrigation. As agriculture grew, there was a need for larger systems that were often beyond local development capabilities. About that time the federal government was interested in settling the west, and the Bureau of Reclamation was created to develop irrigation in the arid west. Many of Montana's early water storage projects were built by the Bureau under this mandate. The depression era represents a unique period for water resources development in Montana. The federal government created work programs to relieve unemployment. Montana was the only state able to put these programs to work developing water resource projects. To do this, a special legislative session created the State Water Conservation Board in 1935 for the purpose of using federal work program funds to relieve unemployment and develop water. After the depression, the federal work programs were eliminated and board activities slowly diminished to the point of maintenance and rehabilitation of state-owned projects. The board's successor, the Water Resources Division of the DNRC, continues to perform this maintenance and rehabilitation function."}
{"id": "montanawaterstor1989mont", "title": "Montana water storage : status report", "year": 1989, "seq": 2, "text": "As the country expanded to the west, there was public need for improved navigation for interstate commerce and additional electric power for economic development. This, coupled with the need for flood control and the ancillary benefit of flatwater recreation, fueled the drive for water storage development. Accordingly, water storage development was pursued by the federal government and typically was supported by the general public. This public support slowly eroded in the late 1950s and 1960s due to the great expense of water storage development and the less obvious need for additional storage in consideration of the existing benefits of storage. In the 1970s, federal water policy shifted markedly from water development toward preservation and enhancement of water quality. Development was no longer seen as a necessary or inevitable response to growing demand. In addition, a string of federal laws was passed to protect the nation's land and water resources, and these greatly complicated the prospects of new development. Consequently, Montana has not seen large-scale development since the construction of Libby Dam in 1972. The Bureau of Reclamation and the Soil Conservation Service have been the most active federal water development agencies in Montana and have generally offered the best opportunity for federal development in the past. Because of budget limitations, the SCS currently does not place a priority on water storage development, and the Bureau of Reclamation requires 50-percent cost share for planning and engineering and a negotiated cost share for construction, a significant departure from the 100-percent Bureau funding of the past. In addition, a recent executive order established a policy of no new federal construction starts. Considering the large national debt, the absence of past incentives, and an expanded national water resources agenda that includes pollution abatement, groundwater management, and other less traditional concerns, it is not likely that the federal role in water storage development will expand, and it may even diminish."}
{"id": "montanawaterstor1989mont", "title": "Montana water storage : status report", "year": 1989, "seq": 3, "text": "Currently, the biggest limitation to additional water storage development is the high cost of development and the lack of public (state or federal) funding due to changes in the social needs and priorities that drive public policy. In recent years the nation has placed a priority on other water issues such as water pollution control and groundwater management, which tend to divert resources away from water storage development. The result is a reduced availability of federal funds for storage development. Accordingly, water storage development in Montana might require resourceful financing methods and cooperation among local, state, and federal parties, and may also require considerable state expenditures. Environmental considerations in certain cases may also limit storage development. Past efforts to mitigate environmental impacts have allowed development to occur, though some have argued that the effectiveness of mitigation needs to be reexamined. The uncertainty of legal water availability also may tend to restrict water storage or delay it until water rights issues are resolved. The first step in the process of determining the role water storage might play in Montana water management should be to reach a consensus on the social objectives of water storage (e.g., irrigation, enhanced streamflow, etc.). Such consensus-building would be a considerable challenge and could require innovative approaches. Expenditure of state funds would be justifiable upon the establishment of common objectives for water storage that mutually benefit all Montanans. Such a scenario would require establishment of water storage criteria that control the decision-making process. When evaluating water storage, consideration should be given to all of the effects of water storage and to the many technical details associated with project feasibility. The site-specific and incremental nature of the effects of water storage suggest that the role of additional storage be evaluated on a case-by-case basis, subject to the relative merits of the project being considered."}
{"id": "montanawaterstor1989mont", "title": "Montana water storage : status report", "year": 1989, "seq": 4, "text": "Water storage projects were often built to regulate placer stream flow. Park Lake south of Helena is an example of early, mine-related storage. Homesteaders soon followed the miners, creating an agricultural industry around mining communities. To thrive in Montana's semi-arid climate, the homesteaders relied on small irrigation systems . Groyth of irrigation In the 1880s the railroads linked Montana to large markets for crops and cattle, and agriculture began to dominate water development. The development of short ditches from rivers was common, and the census of 1890 shows that 66 percent of the farms and stock ranches were irrigated. Early irrigation in the valleys largely exhausted opportunities for cheap development. Cooperative ventures and private ditch companies were formed in an effort to pool capital and labor. More ambitious projects were pursued, such as the Big Ditch, designed in 1883 to irrigate the Billings area. The Big Ditch Company is still in operation today. In fact, about half of the privately developed irrigation systems operated by canal companies today were built before 1900. But the capital required for larger projects exceeded local capability, and the state and federal governments were brought into the picture. A state convention was called in Helena in 1892, and a resolution was passed to demand that the federal government use the revenue from the sale of public lands for reclamation purposes through water development. In 1903, the state legislature formed the Carey Land Act Board to promote project development, and the Billings, Big Timber, and Valier projects were completed. The Valier project is still operated today by the Pondera Canal Company. Growth of private hYdropower Non-federal hydropower storage development followed the industrial, commercial, and residential demand for electricity that arose after the introduction of electric lighting in 1880. The electricity boom created a demand for copper (used as wire), and the copper industry grew rapidly, in turn requiring more electric power development to run mining and smelting operations ."}
{"id": "montanawaterstor1989mont", "title": "Montana water storage : status report", "year": 1989, "seq": 5, "text": "Targeting unemployment During the Great Depression, the federal government sought to alleviate unemployment by establishing public works programs. Though these programs were not specifically aimed at resource management, Montana legislators saw them as an opportunity to continue water development in the state. Several states attempted to take advantage of these public works programs to develop water resources, but Montana was the only one to endure the many federal requirements and successfully build water resource projects through the Public Works Administration (PWA) and the Works Progress Administration (WPA) . To do so, a special legislative session was called in 1933 to create the State Water Conservation Board. The State Water Conservation Board worked with the PWA, WPA, Reconstruction Finance Corporation, and the Civilian Conservation Corps (CCC) from 1934 to 1933, trying to develop water resource projects and reduce unemployment. The selection of a project for development was based not only on technical and economic issues, but also on maximizing the effect on unemployment. Thus, projects were more often built in areas of high unemployment, and the most economically viable sites were not always the ones selected. In all, 181 water projects were built in Montana by the board. One hundred and forty-one of these were reservoirs capable of storing, at that time, 438,017 acre-feet. The PWA received applications for 67 projects from the State Water Conservation Board and provided loans and grants for 18 projects. The Reconstruction Finance Corporation provided a loan for one project. Most of these projects are still in existence and include most of the larger state-owned projects. In addition, an agreement was reached with the WPA in 1935 to provide loans and grants to Montana for water conservation projects that relieved unemployment. One hundred and twenty-eight small projects were built using these funds. Some of these projects were not serviceable, and others have been turned over to the water users associations. 8 The Water Conservation Board also received cooperation from the CCC in building two other projects."}
{"id": "montanawaterstor1989mont", "title": "Montana water storage : status report", "year": 1989, "seq": 6, "text": "Serving many purposes These basin-wide plans tried to address most of the concerns associated with water development, and it was often necessary (and advantageous) to design projects that served more than one function. By the 1960s, the federal government was also paying more attention to state and local interests, scientific research, and water resources education. The creation of the National Water Commission in 1968 signaled a major turn in the direction of federal water management. The commission forecast a shift in priorities away from water development toward the preservation and enhancement of water quality. Development was no longer seen as a necessary or inevitable response to growing demand. Storage projects continued to be built, but resource managers began to rely more upon water conservation practices to meet demands. By the 1970s, concern over declining water quality and other environmental issues had nearly stopped the development of water projects. Economic viability was no longer the sole concern in deciding whether to build a project. A string of federal laws had been passed to protect the nation's water and land resources, and these greatly complicated the prospects of developing new sites. Federal funding was, and continues to be, in short supply, further limiting development opportunities. The passage of the Water Resources Development Act in 1986 required non-federal cost sharing and up- front, non-federal financing during construction. This is a significant departure from past policies of federally funding nearly 100 percent of project costs. In addition, the federal government has issued a recent executive order asserting a policy of no new water development construction starts. It is uncertain how long this policy will prevail, but it is likely to remain in place until most federal projects already under construction are completed. Federal projects have also been restricted recently by concern over double 10 subsidies; that is, providing irrigation cost share for projects that irrigate surplus, government-subsidized crops."}
{"id": "montanawaterstor1989mont", "title": "Montana water storage : status report", "year": 1989, "seq": 7, "text": "It should be noted that Montana produces a very small quantity of surplus, subsidized, irrigated crops. THE FEDERAL ROLE TODAY This brief history of water storage development in Montana has clearly illustrated the strong influence exerted by federal activities and policies on development in our state. With the exception of private hydropower development and small, scattered storage projects, essentially all of the state's water storage projects have been built or largely financed by the federal government. The federal role in water storage development is likely to diminish in the foreseeable future, as suggested by the constraints of a large national debt, the absence of past incentives, and an expanded national water resources agenda that includes pollution abatement, groundwater management, and other less traditional concerns. Presently, five federal agencies are involved in water resource development in Montana. They are the Bureau of Reclamation, the Army Corps of Engineers, the Soil Conservation Service, the Agricultural Stabilization and Conservation Service, and the Bureau of Indian Affairs. A discussion of the present status of these agencies follows, and Appendix A contains an inventory of existing water storage projects in Montana, including federally owned sites. Bureau of Reclamation The Bureau of Reclamation was created to facilitate the reclamation of the semi-arid regions in 17 western states. Its original mission was primarily irrigation development, but with time the agency was incorporated into the basin-wide planning process that evolved after World War II. Cooperating with the Corps of Engineers, the bureau developed multipurpose storage projects that were part of an overall basin plan. The Missouri River Pick-Sloan plan is an example of such a basin-wide plan. The bureau provides planning, engineering, contract administration, construction inspection services and, in many cases, operates and maintains the development. Large bureau projects are developed in stages (planning, engineering, and construction), with each stage receiving separate congressional authorization through specific acts."}
{"id": "montanawaterstor1989mont", "title": "Montana water storage : status report", "year": 1989, "seq": 8, "text": "Grants may be made for nonreimbursable portions of the project when the purposes are for public benefits, including flood control, outdoor recreation, and fish and wildlife purposes. Project proposals may be solely for irrigation or drainage of irrigated lands or may be for multipurpose projects eligible for authorization under federal reclamation laws. Multipurpose projects may include irrigation; drainage; domestic, industrial, or municipal water supply; hydropower; flood control; fish and wildlife enhancement; or outdoor recreation. The limit of federal funds that may be provided by loan or grant or combination thereof is $28.6 million (effective through December 1988). Corps of Engineers The Corps of Engineers is a regularly constituted branch of the United States Army with extensive military engineering and construction responsibilities. The Corps is also actively engaged in developing and implementing plans for flood control, navigation, and water conservation as primary civil functions under federal law. The Corps involvement in civil projects was initiated when Congress, in 1824, directed the Corps to work on waterways so that improved transportation could encourage settlement of the West. Since that time, the Corps has expanded its efforts into flood control, water supply, hydroelectric power, and recreation. The Corps planned, designed, built, and operates two large reservoirs in Montana--Libby Dam and Fort Peck. The Corps has also been involved in numerous flood control projects around the state. Corps projects are funded by direct congressional appropriations in specific water development acts, similar in many instances to how Bureau of Reclamation projects are funded. Soil Conservatiog Service The Soil Conservation Service offers water resource technical and financial assistance through the Watershed Protection and Flood Prevention Act of 1954 (P.L. 566) and the Resource Conservation and Development Program. These programs differ from the Bureau of Reclamation and the Corps of 12 Engineers in how the financial and technical assistance is budgeted."}
{"id": "montanawaterstor1989mont", "title": "Montana water storage : status report", "year": 1989, "seq": 9, "text": "One of the most striking examples of the adverse effect of water storage development is the blockage of spawning runs of migratory fish in the Columbia River Basin. Hydroelectric development in the Columbia, Snake, Kootenai and Clark Fork basins nearly destroyed a valuable and unique fishery resource in Washington, Oregon, and Idaho, and severely altered resident fisheries in Montana. Today, millions of dollars are being spent to mitigate this damage by retrofitting existing dams to improve salmon migration and water temperature regimes and enhance spawning tributaries. Although mitigation efforts have greatly improved the situation, they cannot recreate the uniqueness of the original fishery and the associated recreational opportunities . Many dams in the state in addition to those in the Clark Fork River Basin also disrupt spawning runs. Physically blocking spawning runs adversely impacts fish populations in streams or lakes where the migrating fish originate . Storage reservoirs are designed to catch most of the high spring flows that typically shape a stream channel. Consequently, the channel becomes smaller, and there is a tendency for vegetation to encroach on the channel. This reduces the carrying capacity of the channel and promotes overland flooding when large runoff events do occur. In addition, high spring flows reduce sediment accumulation that enhances aquatic habitat and fish populations. The reduced spring runoff (flushing) associated with reservoirs allows sediment to accumulate, which alters habitat for food organisms, degrades spawning habitat, and accordingly reduces fish populations and associated recreational opportunities. Reduced spring flows also inhibit upstream passage of spawning fish. Nevada Creek and Newlan Creek downstream of their respective dams are examples of streams that have been \u2022 adversely impacted by reduced flushing flows. It is important to note that reduced spring runoff can also enhance a downstream fishery, depending on the original sediment load of the stream and magnitude of the reduction in flushing flows."}
{"id": "microcomputerimp00wrig", "title": "Microcomputer Implementation of SANTA: A Personnel Management Model : Final Report", "year": 1986, "seq": 0, "text": "Egly The focus of this research was the implementation of the computer-based personnel management model known as SANTA; for Systematic Analysis of Noninferlor Transfer Assignments. The model is a multiobjective integer program that can generate the complete and precise tradeoff curve between the objectives of minimizing total distance that the reassigned workforce must travel from their respective homes to one of many site locations, and minimizing the maximum distance that any one worker must travel. System constraints include demand requirements for workers at each site and the limited availability of state-owned vehicles that may be issued to workers assigned to remote sites. Details of the model structure and solution procedure are presented together with the results of an actual application. A complete users guide for model operation is provided as an appendix to this report. The quality of services provided by public institutions is often very difficult to quantify. In contrast to the private sector where engineering management objectives are usually specified in terms of economic efficiency, government agencies strive to provide the \"best\" level of service possible as measured by public well-being and safety. These performance criteria are generally difficult to quantify for most public service activities. The removal of snow and ice from the intrastate highway system is a good case in point. In developing a strategy for winter season snow and ice control, the goal is to provide efficient service within the constraints on available resources, plowing and abrasive spreading equipment, sand and salt supplies, and maintenance personnel. While holding down overall cost is a primary consideration, the safety of the public is the major objective.1 Public safety in this context has two distinct, but related components: 1) the condition of the road surface, and 2) the performance of the snow removal fleet during the operation."}
{"id": "microcomputerimp00wrig", "title": "Microcomputer Implementation of SANTA: A Personnel Management Model : Final Report", "year": 1986, "seq": 1, "text": "While other decompositions of the problem A ft have been proposed, *\u00b0 they tend to focus on the optimal design of service routes and the location of storage sites, neglecting the importance of personnel management in general, and fleet mobilization in particular. In contrast, the present work looks at the problem of assigning individual workers (drivers and radio operators) to worksites in such a way that when a snow emergency occurs, service may be initiated as efficiently and as rapidly as possible. The Problem It is the responsibility of the Indiana Department of Highways (IDoH) to provide for the removal of snow and ice from the Indiana intrastate highway system during the winter months. The goal is to conduct snow removal as efficiently as possible while holding cost to a minimum. Efficiency is a function of the rapid and orderly mobilization of a fleet of snow removal vehicles (snowplows) and a force of trained drivers and radio operators. Snow removal is administered through the maintenance division of each of the six district offices of IDoH. Prior to the start of each snow season, available personnel are assigned to one of many unit locations for the duration of the winter months. Each unit location houses snow removal equipment and supplies necessary to maintain one or more snow routes. The number of workers required at each unit location depends on the number, length and priority of the snow routes maintained by that site and does not fluctuate dramatically from season to season. The maintenance departments do not have a sufficient work force to provide drivers and radio operators to adequately staff all site locations. However, other IDoH divisions, such as the construction division, do not have sufficient work during the winter months for their employees. PAGE 3 Consequently, to avoid costly seasonal hirings and firings, IDoH reassigns summer construction workers to winter snow removal teams; a worker assigned to Unit No. 14 for construction during the summer may be assigned to unit No. 5 for snow removal during the winter."}
{"id": "microcomputerimp00wrig", "title": "Microcomputer Implementation of SANTA: A Personnel Management Model : Final Report", "year": 1986, "seq": 2, "text": "The distance saved by assigning one worker to his/her closest site (thus avoiding issuance of a vehicle) is likely to be less than the added distance another person will have to travel to cover the original assignment. The objectives of minimizing total one-way travel distance and minimizing total vehicles issued to workers do not address one important aspect of public-sector engineering management; that of equity in the provision of services. The solution that minimizes total or average travel distance may have a great variation in assigned travel distances. If the average travel distance is, say 45 miles, a solution that assigns Worker A to a site 5 miles away and worker B to a site 85 miles away would be just as \"good\" as one that assigns both workers to sites 45 miles away from their homes. And yet these two solutions are clearly not identical in their impact on overall level of service. One approach to the specification of an equity objective is to seek that reassignment strategy that makes the deviation in travel distance about the mean travel distance as small as possible. Alternately, one might try to minimize absolute deviation in travel distance. While both of these objectives would result in solutions that may be more equitable than that which minimizes total travel distance, they would tend to promote assignment strategies that are inherently inefficient; workers might be assigned in such a manner that, in order to balance travel distances, they would pass each other as they drive to work. A more acceptable equity objective would be one that minimizes the travel distance of the person who must travel the greatest distance to work; minimize maximum travel distance. While this objective is also likely to be in \"conflict\" with that which minimizes total distance, it is also likely to be much more acceptable to both workers and management."}
{"id": "microcomputerimp00wrig", "title": "Microcomputer Implementation of SANTA: A Personnel Management Model : Final Report", "year": 1986, "seq": 3, "text": "Note also that it is possible for the problem to terminate infeasible if, for example, not enough workers are available to meet total demand, or if there are insufficient vehicles available for assignment, or if the distance restriction D is too small. However, if a feasible solution exists, an optimal assignment of workers to sites will be provided by the model. For the case where the constraint on available vehicles (Equation 4) is not binding, this solution represents that strategy requiring the largest number of vehicles; the utilization of one additional vehicle will not result in a strategy having a lower total distance measure. Mr nOCOMPUTER IMPLEMENTATION OF SANTA Wright & Egly PAGE 10 The second objective imbeded in the snow removal personnel reassignment problem as stated in the previous section is to keep the maximum distance traveled by any worker as small as possible. This problem may also be formulated as a single-objective model. Let DMAX be that distance traveled by the worker who must travel the greatest distance to work. The objective is to find that reassignment strategy that makes this distance as small as possible within system constraints. Equation 1 is replaced by a new objective function: Minimize Z = DMAX (5) In order to define DMAX as the maximum travel distance assigned to workers, the following set of constraints must be included: X d^ Xjj ss DMAX v i (6) jeN, No assigned travel distance dy will be larger than the value of DMAX which is being minimized. The rest of the model is identical to the formulation presented as Table 1. The complete formulation for minimizing maximum assigned travel distance is presented as Table 2. The solution provided by solving the model presented in Table 2 would result in an assignment strategy where the distance traveled by the person traveling the greatest distance to work is as small as possible."}
{"id": "microcomputerimp00wrig", "title": "Microcomputer Implementation of SANTA: A Personnel Management Model : Final Report", "year": 1986, "seq": 4, "text": "First, the model formulation presented in Table 1 - the formulation for minimizing maximum distance traveled - is solved as a single objective linear program. Experience has shown that the solution to this problem is integer (xjj=0,1) in excess of 97 percent of the times it was solved. In fact, fractional solutions occurred only when the constraint on available vehicles (Equation 4) was binding at optimality; removing this restriction from the formulation yields the classic transportation problem of operations research. In cases where fractional solutions were encountered, only a few branch-and-bound iterations were needed to secure an integer solution. This solution corresponds to point A on the graph, and represents the solution with the smallest possible total distance measure. For this example, the smallest possible total distance of any assignment strategy would be 2,133 miles. Provided there does not exist an alternate optimal solution where the maximum distance traveled by any one individual is less than 45 miles, this solution is the true endpoint of the tradeoff curve. Because there does not exist a solution where the total travel distance is less than this amount, we need not consider solutions having a maximum distance in excess of 45 miles; any such solution would be dominated by this solution. Next, the model presented in Table 2 - formulation for minimizing maximum travel distance - is solved, again, as a single objective problem. This solution for the sample problem is shown as point B on Figure 2. The smallest maximum travel distance possible for any feasible solution is 32 miles, and results from an assignment strategy requiring the workforce as a whole to travel a total of 2,212 miles to their work stations. Because there are no solutions with a shorter maximum distance measure (again, assuming there are no alternate optima with a lower total distance measure), we need not search for solutions having a longer total travel distance than that provided by this solution."}
{"id": "microcomputerimp00wrig", "title": "Microcomputer Implementation of SANTA: A Personnel Management Model : Final Report", "year": 1986, "seq": 5, "text": "Line three of the data file is called the \"Demand Line\" for obvious reasons. As with the Names Line, the Demand Line allows the use of the first 23 columns for a label. The five-column blocks under individual unit headings specify the person-power requirement at each of the units. It is recommended that demand numbers be right justified in these fields and that zero demand should be explicit (place a \"0\" in the demand field). These numbers may require annual adjustment and it is important to remember that SANTA will NOT perform unless total demand is equal to the number of people available. MICROCOMPUTER IMPLEMENTATION OF SANTA Wright & Egly PAGE 21 The fourth and last class of data line is called the \"Employee Line\" and will be used for all the employee information. The first eighteen columns of an Employee Line contain the individual's name. Upper case, lower case or mixed case names are at the discretion of the user. The names need not be in any particular order: SANTA will alphabetize all output lists. However, the user should be warned that SANTA will arrange these lists using characters from the beginning of the name field. Therefore, names should be in \"Last, First\" format to avoid lists which start with \"Abby\" and end with \"Zeke\". Columns 19 through 23 of Employee Lines can be used to \"fix\" individual personnel to specific units. The five character string within these columns must match a unit name precisely for a proper fix to occur. If unit names begin with a blank, the fix string must also begin with a blank. A fix will be attempted when ANY non-blank character appears in column 20. Currently, all faulted fixes (non-blank column 20 but SANTA unable to match with a unit name) are reported to the user during the execution of SANTA and subsequently ignored to allow a solution attempt."}
{"id": "microcomputerimp00wrig", "title": "Microcomputer Implementation of SANTA: A Personnel Management Model : Final Report", "year": 1986, "seq": 6, "text": "Pnlu PAGE 24 user should bear in mind that this number (15) is hard coded, and not calculated from the size of the problem. Actual run time will generally be a bit longer. After the first few local runs, the user should have a fairly good idea of the actual delay time. Once the number crunching is completed, SANTA will report to the user's monitor again. If a solution could not be found, SANTA will announce the difficulty and add a suggestion for improving the chances of finding a solution (\"increase mileage standard\", etc.). Otherwise, SANTA will present the Report Selection menu and the user will be asked to select a reporting \"depth\" by entering a number between one and six. Entries outside this range will produce and error message and bring the Report Selection menu up again. If selection six is chosen (\"save no output\"), SANTA will terminate and return the user to MS-DOS. After the report level has been specified, SANTA will prompt the user for a format selection. Format type two is suitable for the IBM Quietwriter, Proprinter, and other IBM compatible printers (double width lines, graphics characters, etc.). Format type one is more appropriate for viewing on the monitor or printing on incompatible printers, although type two is \"monitor acceptable\". Any user entry other than \"2\" will default to format type one. If the user has come this far, SANTA will remark that output is being written to the file \"output\" before returning the user to DOS. This is an important point: the current version of SANTA ALWAYS writes any pertinent output to this file. Therefore, the user should carefully archive solutions by moving or copying the \"output\" file (different directory, different name, etc.). Subsequent SANTA runs will overwrite any file called \"output\" in the local directory. This is the primary reason for Report Selection item number six, to allow the user a \"graceful\" exit without destroying the results of a prior run."}
{"id": "microcosm12unse", "title": "Microcosm", "year": 1985, "seq": 0, "text": "Eliot, in his poem, \"Journey of the Magi,\" presents his ideas of the wise men's thoughts and feelings on their trip to Bethlehem, thoughts and feelings still common among people today. Who were these men who traveled so far, with only a star to guide them, to give gifts to a child born in an obscure Judean village? \"And opening their treasures they presented to Him gifts of gold and frankincense and myrrh.\" (Matt. 2:11, New American Standard) The Magi were, according to the Peloubet's Bible Dictionary, a Median race who acted as priests of the Persians, but whose persistence as a race is frequently attested and occa- sionally causes violent conflicts. They were priests of Zoroaster, giving their time largely to astrology, the interpretation of dreams, natural science, and medicine, (pp. 378-379) Eliot begins his poem with a stark description of the weather and terrain through which the wise men traveled on their journey. He describes it as being \". . . the worst time of the year/The very dead of winter.\" Their caravan must have been very large, for these Magi were noble men, probably with many slaves and servants. It must have been extremely trying for an entourage of its size, probably 100 to 150 peo- ple, to travel the great distance they came, in the dead of winter, through the hazardous Judean wilderness. How many times did these sages want to turn back and return home? But a compulsion they did not understand led them on and they persevered, finally arriving at Bethlehem. Eliot begins the second stanza of the poem by saying that when the wise men get to Bethlehem, it is warm, as Eliot puts it \"... a temperate valley.\" The Magi find this Christ child in a warm, dry, easily accessible place. Perhaps his descriptions of the changes in climate reflect some of Eliot's feelings and some of ours."}
{"id": "microcosm12unse", "title": "Microcosm", "year": 1985, "seq": 1, "text": "Eliot had undergone a religious ex- perience, converting to Anglo-Catholicism in 1927, before writing this poem (Pierce, 16). Perhaps, Eliot is showing one's feelings toward God in his descriptions of the weather and terrain. When the Magi were far from Bethlehem, the weather was horrendous and the traveling hard. With Bethlehem symbolizing one's relationship to God, Eliot could be showing that away from God, in the wilderness, the way is rough go- ing. But, as the Magi are approaching Bethlehem, getting closer to God. \u20145\u2014 the traveling becomes easier, more pleasant. How close does this parallel one's personal life. When one is away from God, the \"travel- ing\" is hard. When one draws near to God, the going becomes easier. You will hear this idea brought out many times when a person gives a Christian testimony. The worst times of that person's life were the times he felt isolated from God. But, as the person came closer to God, his life became more peaceful and everything just seemed to work itself out. Next, Eliot describes the scene the Magi view as they descend in- to the valley. As they descend, the Magi see \". . . three trees on the low sky/And an old white horse galloped away into the meadow . . .\" The three trees are apparently a reference to the three crosses which stood on Golgotha the day of Christ's crucifixion. But what of the old white horse? Some critics have thought that perhaps this is an allusion to the white horse Christ rides upon Revelation. \"And I saw, and behold a white horse: and he that sat on him had a bow; and a crown was given unto him: and he went forth conquering, and to conquer.\" (Revelation 6:2, King James Version) But, Eliot's horse is riderless, while the horse in Revelation has a rider."}
{"id": "microcosm12unse", "title": "Microcosm", "year": 1985, "seq": 2, "text": "Maybe, he also realiz- ed that for this new birth to take place, part of himself must die. That part of himself that wants to control his life, make all the decisions, look out for number one, and be self-centered must die. Many people today, when they receive the new birth of Christ, do not want to die to self. They want to keep just a little part of their life to themselves, instead of turning their life totally over to Christ. Maybe this is why so many Chris- tians are apt to turn their backs to God. Without Christ in total control, the tiny bit of their own life gradually becomes more and more, until Christ is pushed out of the way and the person is back in control of his life. Not until persons relinquish every part of their life to Christ's con- trol will those persons be truly happy and content. The last stanza also says that when the Magi returned to his native land, he was ill at ease \"...with an alien people clutching their gods...\" After this journey, the kinship which the Magi had once felt for his native people no longer exists. The significant word in this line is the their before gods. These were the pagan gods the Magi had worshipped all his life; but, after the experience of meeting the Christ child and feeling the presence of the One True God, his return to his homeland was mark- ed by a reluctance to participate in the worship of the old gods. This wise man now views them as alien, as the gods of the people, but no longer his gods. This wise man had an experience with God that chang- ed his life. People today also have these kinds of experiences and peo- ple today still worship other gods."}
{"id": "microcosm12unse", "title": "Microcosm", "year": 1985, "seq": 3, "text": "Tom Martin First Place, Formal Essay \u20148\u2014 Numerical Symbolism In Sir Gawain And The Green Knight Throughout the ages, numbers have been thought of by people to hold mystical powers. Seven was considered by the Greeks as a lucky number, eight was considered in many ancient lands as the symbol for magic, and nine and five became known in some countries as the numbers of truth. For several members of the medieval Christian church, these superstitions were reinforced, rather than abolished, by the various rituals and symbols which were used by their priests and which were held to be sacred. Even today, many are preoccupied with recurring Biblical numbers such as seven and forty-nine and with the mysterious six hundred sixty-six of The Revelation. The unknown author of Sir Gawain and the Green Knight was aware of the enjoyment procured from the symbolic use of numbers in literature. In his poem, he set out to please his Christian readers by delicately weav- ing the mysticism of the number five within a section of Sir Gawain and the Green Knight. The author tells of a \"pentangle portrayed in purest of gold\" which hung from Sir Gawain's neck before he started his death ride to the Green Chapel. Drawn from five connecting lines, the pentangle, a five- pointed star, was also known as the endless knot. Although a mental exercise, to the medieval Christian, reading the passage of the pentangle would be both a joy and a pleasure. The pure gold of Sir Gawain's pentangle would have been seen to the readers as representing the purity of knighthood and of Sir Gawain himself, while the endless knot could be seen as representing, among other things, the courteousness of Gawain and the infinity of God. Just as love knots bind lovers, so does the endless knot bind Gawain to his Holy Father."}
{"id": "microcosm12unse", "title": "Microcosm", "year": 1985, "seq": 4, "text": "The sun was just beginning to rise as the ship made its way into New York Harbor Bay. The ship was a melting pot full of immigrants from far away lands filled with high hopes for a new life in a land they called America. As the sky lightens up with its first rays of sunlight you could hear the excitement in the voices of the people on board. A silent hush went through the crowd when they saw for the first time \"The Statue of Liber- ty.\" She was standing there with open arms, welcoming them to America. It was as if she were crying with silent lips: Give me your tired, your poor, your huddled masses, Yearning to be free. The wretched refuse of your teeming shore. Send these the homeless tempest tost to me. I lift my lamp beside the golden door. The Statue of Liberty has lightened the pathway to America for ninety-eight years. But now she has a different cry, a cry for help, for elements of time have taken their toll on Miss Liberty. She is in serious need of reconstruction, and she is turning once again to America for help. On close inspection you will find her brow is pockmarked with holes. The iron bars that support the statue's copper skin have deteriorated. The iron's contact with copper has resulted in electrolysis, a process that dissolves metal.1 Miss Liberty's arm holding the torch seems to sag a bit; it has been swaying since 1916. Her arm and torch are the most badly damaged sections of the statue. Architects have found out that the arm was im- properly connected at the shoulder, when Miss Liberty was built.2 \"Liberty Enlightening the World,\" was the name Frederic Auguste Bartholdi first gave to the statue while he was designing and building her."}
{"id": "microcosm12unse", "title": "Microcosm", "year": 1985, "seq": 5, "text": "Houpt pointed out that all race cars supported by his company bear the Miss Liberty emblem.8 The Nestle Corporation has designed a commemorative statue of solid milk chocolate to help raise money for our Lady. The statue is richly detailed and richly delicious: she's sure to melt hearts. For every unit mat is sold the people at Nestle will contribute twenty-five cents to the statue.9 Because of all these efforts, Miss Liberty has taken on a new look. Scaffolds are weaving their way around her allowing workmen to heal her ailing skin. It will take two years to complete the project, working from the inside out. The inside will be changed completely with the most striking change being the hollowing out of much of the colossal 154 foot high base; this will return the interior to its original vast proportions.10 Also, on the list of improvements is a new emergency elevator. Surveying for the new elevator was very important, engineers relied on a special application of laser beam technology. The elevator will travel a vertical distance of 250 feet from one shoulder to the statue's base, between her skeleton and her gown.11 The most badly damaged section is the arm holding the torch. The torch, itself, will be completely reconstructed with the original one be- ing placed in a museum. The arm which is unstable will be worked on in place. The statue was originally reddish brown. When copper corrodes, it forms a protective green film called patina or corroding.12 The washing off of the patina on the 300 copper plates that form the 151 -foot statue's outer skin and the placing of a protective coating that will protect her from further pollution will be the final task in her reconstruction. Almost half of all living Americans can trace their family histories to the arrival of a ship at nearby Ellis Island."}
{"id": "microcosm12unse", "title": "Microcosm", "year": 1985, "seq": 6, "text": "James Joyce, the author, uses the young boy's infatuation with a girl to illustrate the reality that reveals the uselessness of many childhood dreams. The boy, who remains nameless throughout the story, is very much a boy. He has a group of friends in his neighborhood, and they take part in their boyish games. He looks at the world through the eyes of a child\u2014 naive, not seeing the possibility of failure in anything. This quali- ty causes him a lot of grief, and yet it teaches him a valuable lesson about life. Although the boy is still very much like a child, he is experiencing something characteristic of an older person. He is obsessed with the older sister of one of his friends. The boy is so infatuated with this girl that she dominates his every thought. His life really comes to revolve around the girl. Every morning he would watch for her to leave for school, and when she left, he always followed her. He often found himself say- ing prayers about the girl. When the boy and his aunt go to the rough, noisy market, he imagines that he \"bore his chalice safely through a throng of foes.\" This signifies that the thought of her remained cons- tant in his mind and nothing could take it away. The boy's main problem is not being in love, but the fact that he is scared to talk to the girl. One day, though, he overcomes his shyness and has a conversation with her. During the conversation she brings up Araby, an oriental bazaar. She says she had wanted to go to it, but she couldn't. The boy says he might go, and if he does he would bring her something. This makes his situation worse because he becomes worthless in the days before the bazaar."}
{"id": "microcosm12unse", "title": "Microcosm", "year": 1985, "seq": 7, "text": "He thinks of nothing but the bazaar and what he will get for the girl. The day of the bazaar finally comes. Delayed by his uncle's com- ing home late, the boy is late for the bazaar. As he arrives it is closing. At this point a very painful truth is revealed to the boy. He finally sees himself \"as a creature driven and derided by vanity.\" All that time the boy had been so madly in love with the girl that he had overlooked the fact that his cause was utterly hopeless. He had failed to see that all his thoughts, all his emotions, and all his time were being spent in vain. Joyce treats this character as if he had gone through the same ex- perience himself. Although the story is not about Joyce, there are some details in the story which were a part of his own life. He treats the events in the story as if he knew of them first-hand. This first-hand approach plays a major role in bringing the character and his situation to life. Jay Holliday Copiah Academy Second Place, Formal Essay \u201417\u2014 The Hemingway Code Hero Ernest Hemingway's writing contains many concepts, but the most characteristic of his work is the concept of the Hemingway man or code hero. Hemingway's writings were enthusiastically received by the readers of his day. The concept of the code hero was largely responsi- ble for this phenomena because the character's life-style appealed strongly to the people of the Nineteen Twenties. These people were disillusioned with traditional Western society and were searching for new concepts and attitudes. The code hero was a character who was involved in various ac- tivities in which the typical American male did not participate. He was a character who was involved in a great deal of drinking and who mov- ed from one love affair to another."}
{"id": "microcosm12unse", "title": "Microcosm", "year": 1985, "seq": 8, "text": "He was often a bullfighter, a soldier, or a wild game hunter, each of whom faced death daily. Underlying the concept of the code hero is the disillusionment of the general public brought about by World War I. The people of this day realized that the traditional values inherent in Christianity and other ethical systems had not saved mankind from the atrocities of the First World War. The writers of this period began looking for a new set of values to replace the traditional Christian values that they believed had failed. Hemingway was at the forefront of this movement as he search- ed for a new set of rules and values based on order and discipline that would endure in any situation. The concept of death is the foundation for the actions of the Hem- ingway code hero. This concept lies behind all of the hero's actions. It is an extension of Hemingway's belief that \"when you are dead you are dead.\" There is no afterlife\u2014 nothing else. This means that man must emphasize obtaining or doing or performing something while he is still alive. Hemingway referred to this as \"carpe diem\" which means \"seize the day.\" Consequently, the code hero devotes himself to the gratifica- tion of carnal desires because these are the rewards offered in this life. This allows the code hero to live life at the fullest, attaining as much happiness and satisfaction as possible. Since death is the end of all things, the code hero must avoid death at almost any cost. It may seem strange, considering this view, that the code hero often confronts death. These confrontations serve as a showcase of the code hero's disciplined set of rules toward death. The code hero must not fear dying, but he realizes that death is the end and that it must be avoided if possible."}
{"id": "microcosm12unse", "title": "Microcosm", "year": 1985, "seq": 9, "text": "By this stance, the code hero shows the coolness, the grace, the courage, and the discipline that make him Hemingway's ideal man. The Hemingway code hero is a character shaped largely by chang- ing philosophies in the Nineteen Twenties. He is a character who adheres to a strict set of rules concerning death, but who lives life freely. He seeks to get the most from life while he is here while retaining at all times \"grace under pressure.\" For the character to become the code hero he must confront death and defeat it, while not fearing it. Art Kergosien Brookhaven High School Third Place, Formal Essay \u201419- A Pair of Trousers Seemingly unimportant events in our childhood sometimes make such impressions on us that we remember them always. A pair of long trousers, when considered in isolation, seems to be a totally insignifi- cant object, but when I see a young boy dressed for church or school in long trousers, I invariably recall my own boyhood problems with them. I must have been about seven or eight years old when I first realiz- ed that I was different \u2014 all of my friends wore long trousers to school, but I didn't. The most popular type of trousers at the time was made out of khaki material and was worn with a wide belt and a brightly col- ored shirt which never seemed to match. My grandmother, for reasons that I did not discover until several years later, thought that all young boys should wear knickers or shorts in public, with a matching shirt and socks. Consequently, I owned several pairs of knickers in every conceivable color, each with its very own mat- ching shirt and long socks. The knickers, when worn \"properly\" bagg- ed just over the knee, hiding the tops of their matching socks inside the elastic legs."}
{"id": "what-is-happening-in-the-area-and-whither", "title": "What Is Happening in the Area? And Whither?", "year": 1973, "seq": 0, "text": "The vital point in the whole issue is the manner of facing the imperialist, the Zionist aggression against our Nation and our land \u2014 that chronic aggression which assumed on June 1967 a very dangerous and humiliating form. While circumstances in the past years had provided many opportunities for some people to postpone the adoption of decisions, and try to alleviate the anxiety and anger of the masses, it is now certain and obvious that the forthcoming phase will not have room for such a game. A clear-cut and definite decision must be taken. In such a matter as this, there can be only two alternatives: either struggle against aggression, and achievement of complete victory, or at least a certain and acceptable amount of victory over the aggressors; or acceptance of aggression and compromise with the aggressors in one form or another. In fact, these two alternatives are entirely divergent and contradic- tory. There have been attempts in the past, and still are, at working out a formula combining the two solutions : a bit of struggle, or pretension of struggle, together with the search for a settlement formula amounting in essence to acceptance of, and capitulation to aggres- sion. There has been, in. many of these attempts a great deal of skill and subtlety, and they have been actually able to lull substantial sections of the masses. But the glaring actual facts, and the experience of the past years, have weakened these attempts, alth- ough we do not think that they have been finally done with. There is still a great illusion, dominating the minds of many people, and a hope to which they have clung in order to extricate themselves from the deadly impasse. But the major problems in the lives of nations are not solved by illusions, nor by illusioned people."}
{"id": "what-is-happening-in-the-area-and-whither", "title": "What Is Happening in the Area? And Whither?", "year": 1973, "seq": 1, "text": "The special association between the Jews scat- tered over numerous communities, had been an age- old phenomenon. Their negative attitude to those professing other religions, as well as the attitude of the latter towards them, had been a well known fact. But Zionism as a creed and a movement arose only in the nineteenth century, which represents the begin- ning of the era of imperialism. Hence, it was a move- ment which arose in the era of imperialism. This is not just a striking historical coincidence, but a fact of 10 grave significance. Zionism could only have arisen in such an era, with its political, economic and ideolo- gical conditions. All events and experience have proved that it is EXISTENTIALLY LINKED UP with imperialism, and that its course has been shifting with the shift of imperialist centres, and have been practically follow- ing the same path. As to the differences or contradictions between the methods and interests of Zionism and those of one or another imperialist state, they are only natural. The experience of mankind has proved that imperialism and all the movements and trends deriving from it, have had a common essence, but with various forms and methods. Contradictions between imperialist states may reach a dangerous point, such as war, as was the case in the First and Second World Wars, but they are all agreed on the same objective, namely, domination over peoples and plunder of their resources. The racist Zionist movement aspiring to usurp foreign territory and build a special state, was viewed by imperialism as a useful instrument for carrying out part of its policy and ensuring some of its interests. Had it not been for this fact, it would have been abso- lutely impossible for a \u201cJewish\u201d movement to obtain the help of \u201cChristian\u201d communities in the establish- ment of a Jewish home, at the same time when Chris- tianity views itself as a transcendence and abolition of Judaism !"}
{"id": "what-is-happening-in-the-area-and-whither", "title": "What Is Happening in the Area? And Whither?", "year": 1973, "seq": 2, "text": "During the nineteenth century, and at the outset of the twentieth century, Britain and France had the greatest colonial empires in the world. They had the greediest designs on the Arab Homeland and occupied important positions there, as well as, the whole Arab Maghreb \u2014 Egypt \u2014 the Sudan \u2014 the Gulf \u2014 South of the Arab Peninsula \u2014, and looked forward to the occupation of the remaining parts in the grip of the tottering Ottoman Sultanate. The establishment of a \u2018Jewish State\u201d allied to the West in Palestine, did not run counter to the interests and plans of imperialist 11 Britain and France, but in fact accorded fully with them. This state could become a secure base for them in an area which was not absolutely secure; and could also be employed as an instrument for guarding their interests and a spearhead for suppressing any moves endangering these interests. On the other hand, there is gold, oil and large territories for cotton planting in Palestine, and Britain and France had nothing to lose by turning it over to the Jews. Meanwhile, these two powers would get rid of the Jewish troubles inside them, and throughout the whole of Europe, and the careerist bourgeois poli- ticians would obtain material, electoral, moral, and other gains out of the Jews living there. It was really an integral compact, concluded between the Zionist offspring a land which they did not own and from which they extracted no profits, while the Zionist offspring pledged to serve their parents perpetually. The only negative outcome of this whole compact would be the Arabs ineffective anger'... The compact had retained its validity for both sides, and only trivial problems arose between some fanatic and impatient Zionists; on the one hand, and the British administration on the other, during the British Mandate on Palestine."}
{"id": "what-is-happening-in-the-area-and-whither", "title": "What Is Happening in the Area? And Whither?", "year": 1973, "seq": 3, "text": "The Zionist entity, as we have repeatedly said, constitutes an aggressive military base for achieving the objective of imperialism in the area. At the same time, it is an expansionist, seitler-colonialist, racist structure having special objectives which are essen- tially inseparable from those of imperialism, although not always coinciding with them one hundred per cent. As we have already said in a previous article, U.S. imperialism did not find the Arab area affairs completely reassuring for its interests in the future, although the Arab official affairs did not constitute any direct threat to those interests. The Arab liberation movement despite what it had sustained, and obstacles it had faced, had not met with a major defeat at the hands of imperialism. It was stubbornly looking for the possibility of a real growth and rise. Imperialism had been viewing the situation in a clearer manner, and analysing affairs and consequences more accurately oz than did the Arab regimes and many political forces in the Arab area. It felt the urgent need for directing a powerful blow to the Arab liberation movement to force it many years back paralyse its capacity for affairs of the area in a manner considerably ensuring its interests. The land-hungry Zionist enemy, espe- cially since the long-awaited opportunity came at last for imperialism and the Zionist entity. The imperialist-Zionist aggression has achieved many of its objectives. On one hand, it has resulted in enlarging the area of Zionist usurpation of Arab land and consequently its further consolidation, militarily and geographically, in face of the struggle, of the Arab people. On the other hand, this aggression has weak- ened Egypt and Syria which had, for many years, greately influenced the affairs of the area, placed them in a position of self defence, and made them subject to influences of other countries of the area."}
{"id": "electronicartsmailordermonsters", "title": "Electronic Arts Mail Order Monsters", "year": 1986, "seq": 0, "text": "Do not attempt to fight against the Horde with a morph that is both unarmed and slow. -1 \u25a0V;; \u25a0 : GREETINGS, SHREWD CUSTOMER. Welcome to Mail Order Monsters, Inc. Let these pages be your guide to the fantasies which can be yours through our services. Our Mail ORder Psychon Heroes (affectionately known as \"morphs\" for short) are the finest in the galaxy. Your wish is our command. Look on page 2 for information about how to take morphs out for a Free Trial (the Beginner option), so you can learn how combat works, and so you can get a feel for the different morph and weapon capabilities. When you're ready for something more complex, move on to our Rental Option (Intermediate) described on page 4. Spend 1000 psychons to put together your own combinations of morphs and weapons. Then choose the battlefield and the contest. Our Tournament competition, described on page 5, is for experts. The results of each contest are saved on your Owner Disk. Winners receive psychons and victory points which their owners can spend on better weapons and traits, or on new morphs. Begin with 500 psychons and earn your way to the top. For general information about morph traits, extras and weapons and the importance of each, turn to page 6. Important Note: For information about how to proceed as you use the Mail Order Monsters program, watch the top of the screen as you work. FREE TRIAL (BEGINNER) Select Free Trial to go straight to the morph vats to pick from our twelve basic morph stocks. Then use your joystick to move the highlight from morph to morph and press the button when you have the one you want. A Morph Summary screen will appear, and you must type in a name for the morph you have chosen. If you choose the one player option, you will be spirited to the battle\u00ac field as soon as you press Return (after typing in the name)."}
{"id": "electronicartsmailordermonsters", "title": "Electronic Arts Mail Order Monsters", "year": 1986, "seq": 1, "text": "Mail Order Monsters Inc. strongly urges that you practice selecting options - particularly weapons - while on the big map. It can be fatal to fumble with your options while your morph is being pursued by a determined enemy. Each morph comes equipped with differing strengths and weaknesses and with different extras, weapons and defenses. In the Intermediate and Tournament games, all extras (beyond the basic ones a morph stock comes with) and all weapons, rounds, energy, food, defenses and other devices must be purchased. Turn to page 6 for a description of the various traits, weapons, defenses and devices so that you might think about how to use each as you play. Even though you cannot change these items during Free Trial games, studying the information on those pages in combination with your trial contests will help you get ready for games in which you must make your own choices in these matters. RENTAL (INTERMEDIATE LEVEL) As in the Free Trial game, after each contest you will be given the opportunity to fight again, and if you're playing against the computer you may ask for a different opponent (which the computer will pick randomly) for the replay. There are two important differences between the Free Trial and Rental options. 1* In Morph Meadow - When the program finishes loading (after you make your choice of level and respond to the computer's prompt to type in a name for your owner), youll find your owner standing on Morph Meadow. Walk your owner (with your joystick) over the Vats to pick out a morph. Then lead the morph to the Weapon Shop to buy weapons and sundries (described on page 7). Finally lead it down to the Transmat (matter transmission) Booth for transmission to a battlefield. Youll have a total of 1000 psychons to spend on a morph plus any trait upgrades, extras and equipment you may want to purchase."}
{"id": "electronicartsmailordermonsters", "title": "Electronic Arts Mail Order Monsters", "year": 1986, "seq": 2, "text": "The maximum you may add on any one trip is 3 for the first four traits and 30 for life. Armor - The natural defense against attacks. A tough hide proves very useful in Beastfu (i.e. hand to claw to tentacle to jaw, etc.) bang-ups! Muscle - Your morph's ability to duke it out, to kick sand in other morphs' faces and live to tell about it. Also important for carrying heavy weapons and devices. Speed - Crucial for zipping around the terrain and the competition. Slow morphs are soon no morphs, if they aren't careful. Mind - Your morph's ability to solve philosophical problems. Perhaps more importantly, though, the ability to reload quickly after firing. Dumb morphs get nailed while fumbling with the ammunition. life- The longer, the better. life points are zapped every time an opponent scores a hit. MORPH EXTRAS There are eleven extras to choose among for each morph in the Intermediate and Tournament games - a total of 20 in all. They belong to 4 groups. 1) Means of movement. Burrow and Gills enable morphs to move at normal speeds through mountains and water respectively. Teleport brings normal speed in all terrain. 2) Means of attack. Spit and Sting (projectile attacks), Web (a chemical attack which freezes the opponent in place for a period of time) and Psi-blast (a psi, or mind, attack which robs your opponent of his mind force) are all effective at a distance. The other natural attacks\u2014fiery Breath (chemical), the shocking Electrotouch (energy), i and Claws and Fangs (Beastfu aids) - must be delivered at close range. 3) Defenses. Each of the five available reduces the damage to your morph from a specific type of attack. Anti-thump protects against physical attacks, Anti-e against energy attacks, Anti-chem against chemical attacks, Anti-proj against projectile attacks and Anti-psi against psionic (mind) attacks. 4) Natural aids."}
{"id": "electronicartsmailordermonsters", "title": "Electronic Arts Mail Order Monsters", "year": 1986, "seq": 3, "text": "Hands and Tentacles are required to operate certain weapons. Healing insures a slow regeneration of life energy. Photosynthesis guarantees its owner a small but steady supply of the energy needed for energy attacks and to operate certain defenses and devices. (But don't forget to buy an E-Pack.) WEAPONS Our weapons shop inventory is second to none in variety, power and reliability. Use our Rental option (Intermediate level) to learn what each weapon offers in the trade-offs between power, weight and ammunition consumption. Then, when you move on to ownership in the Tournament game, choose and use weapons appropriate to the strength and abilities of each morph in your stable. Here are some tips gleaned from successful owners: 1) If weight is a concern (because your morph isn't very strong and is already pretty slow), go for the Autorifle or the Boorang (always guaranteed to return to its sender) on a modest budget. Go for the Needier or Sword if you're all but broke, and for the Lapistol - a spiffy little laser number - if money is no object. (Lapistols, like all energy weapons, require their users to own and carry an Energy pack to hold the energy they need to fire. But in return for the extra weight and cost, they deliver a mighty wallop.) 2) If you'd like to be able to launch attacks on the big map, buy yourself some missiles or a bomb. But don't expect them to be light or to be a modest drain on your ammunition supply. (Note: If you're worried about weight, choose the Summary option for another look at your morph's basic traits. If you're trying to carry too much, that fact will be reflected in a decline in your Speed trait.) 3) The E-stealer is a handy little device which sucks the energy from your opponent's E-pack."}
{"id": "fallen-angel-a-magic-the-gathering-legend-1", "title": "Fallen Angel: A Magic: The Gathering Legend #1", "year": 1996, "seq": 0, "text": "Above, series artist Dennis Calero, captures another of these wretched creatures, trapped i in the unearthly form of.a Fallen Angel. veil what would beco Ss graphic novel id by Madeleine Robins There is something intriguing about hoods and thugs and minions of evil, from Captain Hook to Hannibal Lecter; they're fascinating, albeit uncom- fortable, characters to hang out with. Because of that discomfort, humans confront evil by trying to figure out the how, the why: Hitler\u2019s bad toilet-training, Jeffrey Dahmer\u2019s separation anxiety. The tension, when we can\u2019t find a reason, can lead to extraordi- nary drama (check out the current film version of Richard III for an example). On the other hand, the strictly, purely, virtuous and good tend also to be uncomfortable, for different reasons (my bedside reading table is not stacked high with biographies of Mother Teresa, how about yours?). As story-tellers and consumers, humans like our good guys to choose good after a struggle: we root for Han Solo because he\u2019s a good guy in spite of himself. So the very bad are gripping; the very good are uncomfort- able; it\u2019s the good gone bad who are, perhaps, the most fascinating of all. Human-kind loves tales of fallen angels. Why are fallen angels so compelling? They bridge the space between good and evil: they represent, in macrocosm, the struggle every human being has not to succumb to the Dark Side. We all experience the tension between doing the right thing and the wrong\u2014on the microscopic personal level of \u201cmust I give up my comfortable subway seat to that little old lady over there?\u201d Io see moral dilemma played out in heroic scale is not simply good dramatic: it vali- dates our small, and not so small, struggles."}
{"id": "fallen-angel-a-magic-the-gathering-legend-1", "title": "Fallen Angel: A Magic: The Gathering Legend #1", "year": 1996, "seq": 1, "text": "And who leads the fallen? Lucifer, the Morning Star, the angel who had shone most brightly at God\u2019s side. A powerful tale needs that \u2014 the glamour and magnificence of the fallen one. Would we really care about a ne\u2019er-do-well, kinda slipshod angel who'd already had a couple of warn- ings from God\u2019s personnel office? As I said earlier, humanity tends to like its ne\u2019er-do-wells rehab- ilitated (ike Han Solo) and its saints and angels fallen\u2014or struggling against the temptation to fall (as Luke Skywalker does over the course of the Star Wars trilogy). That struggle relies on the crucial notion of free will. Lucifer and his hordes fall from grace (as Adam did) by choosing wrongly. But what about the fallen Serra Angel Trine? She has the attributes of a tragic heroine, the fierce righteousness, the beauty, but her fall from grace comes through the trickery of Xarl, the wizard. If Trine has a flaw that drives her to her fall, it might be pride: a faith in her own power which never acknowledges that mortal man could be a threat, and therefore leaves her open to Xarl\u2019s wiz- ardry. And what of repentance and redemption? Trine does her vampiric evil with only a faint, amne- siac longing for the time when she was first among her sisters of glory. She longs for her former self but is powerless to choose good, to end her suffering, even to feel remorse for the carnage she causes. In fact, when she is released from her bondage by Xarl\u2019s death, she does not cease to do evil: Trine lays waste to Xarl\u2019s castle, and poises to destroy a human city\u2014 perhaps all of humanity. Whatever dim and poignant recollection she may have of her days of good, Trine does not have the power to change."}
{"id": "monograph166", "title": "NIDA Research Monograph Series #166: Treatment for Drug-Exposed Women and Children: Advances in Research Methodology", "year": 1996, "seq": 0, "text": "Strantz, James Farrow, and Shoni Davis INTRODUCTION Substance abuse during pregnancy continues to affect the lives of families across the United States. Most communities arc not organized to deal with the multiple problems that must be addressed when developing intervention and treatment programs for pregnant women. At the same time, many citizens and community organizations may be suspicious of outside investigators stepping in to design outreach and treatment programs within existing structures and organizations. These difficulties are multiplied if the community regards the research as an opportunity to take advantage of the community without providing any long-term benefit to the community members. There is little debate about the need for a wide-ranging assortment of services for indigent women who are involved with alcohol or other drugs. Rather, the debate revolves around how best to provide and assess comprehensive drug treatment services. The predominant issues of cost, convenience, and effectiveness inevitably have an effect on research. Centralized programs conducted at comprehensive health care facilities, such as a university medical center, provide a congenial environment wherein to conduct treatment services research but provide relatively little access to the populations at highest risk. By contrast, community-based providers with direct access to a sufficient number of clients have little or no experience in conducting or participating in clinical research projects and are less apt to buy into the values of the research culture or appreciate the need for objectivity and experimental control. Nevertheless, overcoming the many difficulties associated with conducting research in a community setting is important\u2014even essential\u2014because the majority of service providers and consumers are found in the community. It is here that empirical evidence of program effectiveness must be found. For this reason, there are strong incentives to identify and overcome the obstacles to conducting a research project in the community milieu."}
{"id": "monograph166", "title": "NIDA Research Monograph Series #166: Treatment for Drug-Exposed Women and Children: Advances in Research Methodology", "year": 1996, "seq": 1, "text": "This chapter identifies some potential banders to implementation of a community-based treatment research program. The issues described are derived from the experiences of four treatment research programs located 6 in four different parts of the country (i.e., Chicago, Illinois, Los Angeles, California, Landover, Maryland, and Seattle, Washington). Each project was established to develop, implement, and evaluate the effectiveness of a substance abuse treatment program for pregnant and postpartum women within a community setting in conjunction with a variety of services provided through State and local agencies. PROGRAM IMPLEMENTATION The NIMBY (Not In My Back Yard) syndrome is not unique to any one social, ethnic, racial, or economic group. In spite of the devastation wreaked on some communities by substance abuse, many neighborhoods are reluctant to allow drug treatment programs into the community. Although residents often view the substance abuser as a threat to community safety and as a harbinger of the deterioration of local values, the promise of the availability of treatment facilities does not alleviate these fears, and many community-based programs face an uphill battle in trying to find an appropriate location for service delivery. The Chicago program, operated by the National Association for Perinatal Addiction Research and Education (NAPARE), is a community partnership that includes treatment providers, health care agencies, and community hospitals in an inner-city neighborhood on the near west side of the city. This community has some of the highest rates of substance abuse, murder, infant and child mortality, and violence in the metropolitan area; drug deals are openly consummated on most street corners. However, many residents banded together to protest the opening of a treatment program in the neighborhood and worked to block changes in zoning restrictions that would allow the facility to operate. It took several months of attending community meetings and working with local leaders even to open the doors of the building."}
{"id": "monograph166", "title": "NIDA Research Monograph Series #166: Treatment for Drug-Exposed Women and Children: Advances in Research Methodology", "year": 1996, "seq": 2, "text": "Negotiations with the gangs to declare the area a \u201cgang-free zone\u201d took up more precious time before the program could be implemented fully. These delays caused the late startup of recruitment and service provision and affected the number of patients recruited into the study in the first year of funding. 7 BUDGET CONSTRAINTS Startup problems are the bane of treatment research programs, which typically have a lifespan of 3 to 5 years. Therefore, the design and management of a budget for treatment research often demand more care and scrutiny than a budget for service provision only. Reallocating funds from staff positions to facility or operating costs can have a critical effect on the number of research participants who can be enrolled in the study and exposed to the intervention. If the overall number of participants in the final database is too small, apparent changes occurring in certain study variables may fail to achieve statistical significance. Also, if the number of participants involved concurrently with the program is too small, with artificially low counselor caseloads and peer group memberships, any benefits derived from the treatment milieu may be impossible to replicate in other treatment settings. A treatment research program\u2019s budget can be affected by the seemingly simple task of ensuring the safety of staff members and program participants. A treatment research project is almost always a large investment in terms of carefully selected and trained staff members, and rapid turnover is an anathema. Therefore, to secure staff members for a long period, obtaining an attractive and safe facility is a major priority. In addition, research participants, particularly mothers with infants and toddlers, are not likely to participate in a treatment program where the setting is dangerous. In recent months, new concerns for the safety of research participants and staff members in inner-city research projects have been caused by escalating violence in the communities."}
{"id": "monograph166", "title": "NIDA Research Monograph Series #166: Treatment for Drug-Exposed Women and Children: Advances in Research Methodology", "year": 1996, "seq": 3, "text": "The researcher must deal with this new reality and include safety precautions (e.g., bulletproof windows, iron fences and gates, security guards, alarm systems) in the budget. In the original plan for the Los Angeles program, the community-based agency was to house both the experimental and control groups at two leased sites in south-central Los Angeles. However, after the grant was funded, it was necessary to modify the budget to provide for more costly leased space, especially for the experimental group, and an armed security guard at each site. Because of these budget changes, counselor positions were lost, which greatly reduced the ongoing treatment capacity at each site. However, it was concluded that research participants could be enrolled and tracked, in both the experimental and control groups, in sufficient numbers to provide for outcome comparisons that could reach statistical significance. Also, although the number of treatment slots at each site was reduced, the low counselor-to-client ratios and small therapy group sizes in the enhanced intervention program were preserved. (Nevertheless, it was decided to seek supplementary funding to restore lost treatment capacity.) Finally, as the demonstration treatment research grant nears its end, a transition for financial support for the treatment services must be made to State and local sources. This requires a realistic look at the budget with close attention to obtaining funding from a variety of agencies. The community will have come to expect the wide range of services made available by the large infusion of Federal funds that supported the treatment research, but few States or communities will be able to support that level of commitment over the long term. If the program ends at the conclusion of Federal funding, the community will have an even greater reluctance to welcoming the next treatment research program."}
{"id": "monograph166", "title": "NIDA Research Monograph Series #166: Treatment for Drug-Exposed Women and Children: Advances in Research Methodology", "year": 1996, "seq": 4, "text": "IMPLEMENTING THE RESEARCH PROTOCOL When a study protocol is to be made paid of a service delivery program at an existing community agency, its introduction can be facilitated if it is not viewed as a special case or as an activity of no lasting value to the organization\u2019s mission. For any new treatment program to be effective, the management and clinical staff members must understand and endorse its goals and philosophy and feel comfortable with their respective roles. Also, when a change in program content is being considered, there must be opportunities for staff members to provide input on the change to encourage a feeling of ownership and commitment. Therefore, all components of the program (e.g., relapse prevention, psychosocial and parenting education, mother-infant bonding activities), as well as the research instruments and schedule, should be developed or reviewed and accepted by a committee that includes members of the agency\u2019s drug treatment clinical and management staffs. By involving key drug treatment management and clinical staff members in each step of this process, some stereotypical, negative attitudes toward the research participants and the rich program of services and activities planned for them can be neutralized. From the outset, the Los Angeles researchers felt that there must be an underlying consistency with the existing community treatment system so that staff members in the new program would not be placed under great stress in the work environment. The community agency involved in the research project had used three of the components of the experimental treatment program (i.e., Rawson\u2019s relapse prevention model [Rawson et al. 1990] for cocaine abusers, parent education, 12-step Narcotics Anonymous groups) at two other treatment sites. However, staff members with the most experience with and understanding of these approaches were 9 not available to help implement the new program because they had been transferred to other positions."}
{"id": "monograph166", "title": "NIDA Research Monograph Series #166: Treatment for Drug-Exposed Women and Children: Advances in Research Methodology", "year": 1996, "seq": 5, "text": "In every human services system, experienced clinical staff members are routinely transferred or promoted in support of organization priorities. Therefore, it was determined that new personnel would be recruited and trained specifically for the day treatment program. INFORMATION OWNERSHIP Community-based treatment programs operate under a different set of priorities than those for university-based programs, especially with regard to the acquisition and use of information. From a research perspective, data are collected over a long period with only occasional delving into the database to evaluate progress and assess preliminary information. Treatment program personnel often want a more rapid turnaround of information, which may result in overinterpretation or premature use of data. In addition, if a research team uncovers information that could have implications for the treatment approach for a specific research participant, the question arises whether the researchers are responsible for reporting that information to the woman\u2019s therapist. This is an issue that frequently arose during the intensive individual interviews that were conducted as part of the research assessment of the women in the Chicago program. Clear guidelines for communication between the research and clinical teams were explained at the beginning of the project, and the working relationship between the two teams was under constant scrutiny throughout the term of the project. TREATMENT SITE STAFFING There are many benefits in collaborating with an established agency for the treatment intervention aspect of the study. In the Los Angeles study, as provided for by the grant, the University of Southern California contracted with a community-based agency to provide the specified drug treatment services to research participants. The agency, which was established soon after the 1965 Watts riot, provides a range of medical, public health, and substance abuse services to residents of south-central Los Angeles. At least three benefits resulted from the involvement of this agency in the collaborative treatment research effort. 1."}
{"id": "monograph166", "title": "NIDA Research Monograph Series #166: Treatment for Drug-Exposed Women and Children: Advances in Research Methodology", "year": 1996, "seq": 6, "text": "Among key agency staff members, there existed a body of knowledge and experience in the delivery of drug treatment services, including those that target pregnant and parenting women; thus, program implementation was not a trial-and-error activity. 10 2. Through the community-based agency, a variety of medical, public health, and mental health services were made readily accessible to the research participants and their infants and families. 3. African-American community leaders and agency staff members were involved in treatment research in a way that was positive and brought new services to the community. Furthermore, the agency was known and accepted by the research participants, which avoided any potential biases related to client refusal to participate because of suspicion regarding the motives of the treatment provider. However, established agencies have standardized job descriptions, salary schedules, hiring policies, and procedures, and various management reviews and approvals must be obtained before any personnel action can be taken. On the one hand, when many systems are already in place, it is easier to implement a new program in collaboration with an established agency. On the other hand, if the research program has personnel requirements that differ from the agency standard, much time can be lost in the review and approval process. For example, it often was found by all four research teams that although the counselor positions in the research protocol had duties and caseload standards different from those of the regular positions, it seemed easier to use existing personnel than hire new employees. A frequent difficulty in staffing treatment research programs is retention of staff. It is well known that supervisory and line staff workers are seriously underpaid in most publicly funded drug treatment programs. Even if a research grant budget can support higher salaries for supervisory and line staff workers at research sites, the community agency\u2019s salary schedule for drug treatment personnel usually cannot."}
{"id": "monograph166", "title": "NIDA Research Monograph Series #166: Treatment for Drug-Exposed Women and Children: Advances in Research Methodology", "year": 1996, "seq": 7, "text": "Therefore, the researcher needs to have \u201cfriends in high places,\u201d such as one or more key managers of the agency who support the research goals and will keep the researcher apprised of any organizational changes that might affect the research. The importance of this connection was demonstrated vividly in the Los Angeles study, where researchers depended on a collaborating agency for client referrals; they unexpectedly lost key manager support at the agency together with the promised flow of referrals. Unlike research in which investigators recruit research participants from a large pool of their service recipients, the women in the Los Angeles drug treatment study were drawn from the child protective services agency\u2019s caseloads. After being identified and reported to the agency at the time of delivery as probable drug abusers because of certain behavioral and physical indicators that they and their newborns exhibited, including a positive toxicology screen, the mothers were assessed further by agency workers. It was first determined whether there was endangerment to the infant if he or she was not placed with a relative or in foster care and then whether the mother would agree to complete a drug treatment program. If treatment was indicated, the worker referred the mother to this treatment research project or to another treatment program. Soon after being notified about the funding of this research proposal, the investigators in Los Angeles learned that there had been certain organizational changes in the child protective services agency. The clinical policy and management staff members who had helped design the program had been transferred to other positions within the agency, and their firsthand knowledge of study objectives and special commitment to the project were lost. The agency also hired a new director who reorganized the agency and established new regions, with the result that many new teams were handling the south-central Los Angeles target area."}
{"id": "monograph166", "title": "NIDA Research Monograph Series #166: Treatment for Drug-Exposed Women and Children: Advances in Research Methodology", "year": 1996, "seq": 8, "text": "Under this peculiar policy, the mother would have to initiate a telephone call to project personnel. This was an impossible way to form a sample, but it was an easy barrier to erect and to justify in the interest of patient confidentiality. This clash seemed related more to a turf problem or concerns about hospital image than to protection of confidentiality, but the motive never became completely clear. One neonatologist explained that any publicity that associated the hospital with area drug problems would have made it more difficult for operations personnel to implement their plans to build a new thoracic surgery center. On the other hand, the hospital had an ethical responsibility (and legal incentive) to protect patient confidentiality, and the operations department may have been genuinely motivated by such concerns. If this was the true motive, this particular type of barrier may have represented a case where assiduous risk control led to greater risk for mothers and their children (preventing access to remedial services) than would have occurred from a more measured degree of protection. This barrier was eventually circumvented by repeated visits with direct services providers in the hospital. Caregivers (social workers, midwives, nurses), who have a more personal understanding of this population and are the key personnel who can make or break a referral process, must be convinced of the value of a research program. Administrative and operations personnel have to be involved in setting up the program, but their agendas should not be allowed to become barriers to the project goals. It is also important to have multiple referral sources so that difficulty with any one source does not have the potential to shut down a project. RANDOM ASSIGNMENT AND COMPARISON GROUPS Caregivers are often hesitant to make referrals to treatment research programs that plan to randomly assign some referrals to comparison groups, 13 so this topic should be approached with care."}
{"id": "monograph166", "title": "NIDA Research Monograph Series #166: Treatment for Drug-Exposed Women and Children: Advances in Research Methodology", "year": 1996, "seq": 9, "text": "In the Landover project, it did not matter that the women in the comparison group were informed explicitly that they were free to take advantage of any public remediation services that would ordinarily be available to them independent of the research program. A great deal of \u201csales and marketing\u201d by researchers was required to overcome resistance from referring providers. This involved chatting, informing, and yielding when necessary. Some tactics included hosting an open house for caregivers, soliciting their advice about gifts to be included in \u201cgoodies\u201d bags provided to women (e.g., diapers, thermometers, coupons, etc.), providing inservice presentations, and sending periodic newsletters to keep the referral community informed. In addition, any evidence of the investigator\u2019s humanity that can be shown while engaging interest in and attention to the research project can help. The investigator should make it clear that even the comparison group of women will be better off in some way for having been involved in the project. In Landover the investigators conceded the need to provide case management services (but not direct treatment) to the comparison group as an incentive for cooperation, and this concession helped overcome the reluctance of caregivers to make referrals. Comparison groups should be studied carefully to log the extent of their involvement with nonproject-related supportive or treatment services and with outside resource people who play a role during the project period. This is always important in treatment research but may be particularly important with indigent mothers whose initial needs are often more basic than their need for drug treatment. Mothers often benefit as much from help with the practical aspects of living as from targeted drug treatment. In many cases, treatment may be premature because a sizable proportion of mothers will have little incentive to value treatment. That is, for many (or most) there are no expectations of a better life, no employer threats, no spousal threats, no legal threats, and surprisingly, only a rare possibility of action by child protective services (likely because of system overload [Ashery 1992, pp. 383-394])."}
{"id": "ecofeminism-sacred-matter-sacred-mother", "title": "Ecofeminism : sacred matter/sacred mother", "year": 1991, "seq": 0, "text": "Ecofeminism: Sacred Matter/Sacred Mother Bernice Marie-Daly Ecofeminism involves the intersecting concerns of the women\u2019s movement and the ecology movement. Since the primary vision of both share much in common, it is striking that feminists need to state a position at all. In light of the fact that women have historically provided a sig\u00ac nificant impetus for religious and social movements, from Buddhism to Marxism, and yet still remain subservient in a patriarchal culture , 1 there is reason to believe that \u201csaving the earth,\u201d for which women were committed long before it became fashionable, could easily repeat past patterns. Thus, articulation of an ecofeminist position becomes mandatory. While recognizing that patriarchy continues to reflect the normative cultural paradigm and current world view of our society, I will focus my comments primarily on the historical, scientific, and psychological con\u00ac ditions that have influenced our understanding of women and nature. On the wall of my office hangs the now familiar picture of our blue planet surrounded in blackness. For more than two decades, we humans have viewed this marvelous sight, and it has impacted our psyches with deep images of interconnection and beauty. This picture has become for many of us a mandala of spiritual renewal and hope, an image of our evolution toward oneness and global awareness that Teilhard foresaw. Two aspects are of particular importance to me: the healing I have always felt in the presence of water and secondly, confirmation of the notion of nation\u00ac states, or for that matter, \u201cprivate property\u201d as unrealistic and obsolete. However, for all its beauty, stillness, and simplicity, this earth portrait does not convey the existence of the particulars: the varied racial, ethnic, religious, economic, and cultural diversities among humans, as well as the variety and splendor of myriad species of our planet."}
{"id": "ecofeminism-sacred-matter-sacred-mother", "title": "Ecofeminism : sacred matter/sacred mother", "year": 1991, "seq": 1, "text": "In our efforts to return to the earth as sacred, it is of utmost importance that the impact of a privileged scientific methodology and resultant world view be clearly stated. This paradigm, initiated through the work of Bacon and others of the seventeenth century, champions a mechanistic approach to nature in general and women in particular. The confluence of nature and women as treated by the reigning patriarchy is crucial to an ecofeminist critique of the present ecological program. MOTHER EARTH Although our modem cosmology and physics 8 has displaced \"man\u201d 9 from the center of the universe and of creation, I believe man continues to tenaciously assert his own self-importance which leads to all manner of domination, the most fundamental of which is misogyny, and the most catastrophic, planetary devastation. While the significance of the fear of women is important unto itself, it is particularly so for environmentalists because of the strong association of women with a nature typically depicted as mother earth. Now this connection between women and nature has been much cel\u00ac ebrated within the ecology movement. The association, however, is both problematic and conflictual. \u201cMother Earth\u201d suggests an integral rela\u00ac tionship between mater and matter, women being considered the \u201cmother of matter.\u201d However, since matter has been perceived as corruptible, so has woman. Thus, the sacredness of matter can be realized only to the degree that mater is recognized as sacred. Since \u201cfeminine\u201d energy has been abstracted from the life of real women and analyzed dualistically through androcentric values, 10 the celebration of mother earth is largely an embrace of \u201cthe feminine\u201d qualities of nurturance and life-giving energies without having to deal with the reality of women as the primary carriers of feminine energy. Embracing the stereotypical feminine and maternal qualities of nature is reminiscent of pastoral depictions of nature as passive and benevolent, nonassertive, always accessible and supportive of man\u2019s needs. 11 3 While historically nature has typically been depicted as feminine 12 this has never been to women\u2019s advantage because we have continued to be socialized in a patriarchal culture."}
{"id": "ecofeminism-sacred-matter-sacred-mother", "title": "Ecofeminism : sacred matter/sacred mother", "year": 1991, "seq": 2, "text": "With any recognition of difference, as noted by Elizabeth Dodson Gray, \u201cwe are looking to ascertain rankings of power, moral or economic value, and aesthetic preference. We do this whether it is a different animal, a different culture, 9 resources. Since humans are not the children of women alone, there is no reason to assume women are the only resources for parental wisdom or responsibility . 36 Furthermore, women, as persons, have needs of their own which cannot be adequately described or fulfilled in maternal terms . 37 Second, the earth exercises elemental, impersonal power which cannot be adequately described in maternal terms. The earth itself, as a finite biosphere, is but one planet in a solar system in one galaxy among billions in the cosmos. While the womb/tomb analogy for both women and the earth is significant, it might be more appropriate to consider our earth home as a surrogate mother since we, humans and earth alike, are creations of a vast, mysterious, evolving universe. In light of the complexity and urgency of our personal and planetary dilemmas, it is paramount that we all do the inner and outer work necessary to come to terms with our conflicting messages about women and nature. Perhaps then we will be able to embrace a new level of imagination and creative energy that will enable us to act together differently. And perhaps then for the very first time we will discover who we really ate. PLANETARY CONSCIOUSNESS While the feminist and ecological movements share the same concerns , 38 in the minds of many the agenda of the ecology movement deserves top priority because its goal is to save the earth itself. Obviously, none of us, of whatever species or gender, will survive without a healthy biosphere. However, it would be shortsighted to diminish the role of feminism in creating the total revolution of consciousness so necessary if ecological goals are, in fact, to be fulfilled."}
{"id": "ecofeminism-sacred-matter-sacred-mother", "title": "Ecofeminism : sacred matter/sacred mother", "year": 1991, "seq": 3, "text": "Yet the interrelation among all facets, as Starhawk reminds us, is clear: it is the poor who are forced to work directly with unsafe chemicals, in whose neighborhoods toxic waste incinerators are planned, who cannot afford to buy bottled water and organic vegetables or pay for medical care.... And environmental issues are women\u2019s issues, for women sicken, starve, and die from toxics, droughts, and famines, their capacity to bear new life is threatened by pollution, and they bear the brunt of care for the sick and the dying, as well as for the next generation.... (Furthermore) we cannot responsibly approach questions of overpopulation without facing questions of women\u2019s power to make decisions about their own reproduction, to challenge traditional roles and restrictions . 40 In a truly interconnected world, in the \u201ccreative union\u201d of person, community and planet that Teilhard advocated, global issues and social justice issues would be mutually related. Patriarchy has become so ingrained in our lives that such an obvious reciprocity is overlooked. An ecofeminist perspective, however, offers a deep critique that reveals our dominant assumptions and an indispensible vision for reaching this alternative ecological age. CONCLUSION The task is formidable, even overwhelming. Yet there is wisdom. Let us remember that the day we are aching to create must indeed be built on justice. The making of justice simply means bringing about the natural balance inherent in the world in the first place . 41 A just society upon a sacred earth will become manifest when we commit ourselves to peace with the same vigor that we have committed ourselves to war and injustice. The implications are immediate. Personally and collectively we would share, conserve, and renew the vital resources; we would design edu\u00ac cational learning experiences that respect diversity and creativity; we would encourage imagination and the arts."}
{"id": "Robocop_1988_Tandy_26-3164", "title": "Radio Shack CoCo Manual: Robocop (1988)(Tandy)[26-3164]", "year": 1988, "seq": 0, "text": "The hits indicator shows you how many more times you can get hit and still live. To build up your power so you can take more hiJs. pick up Power Food whenever you find it. Whenever you pick up Power Food, the hits indicator shows your increased strength. All the enemies take some of your energy, and some of them will hit you. The best strategy is to get these sleazeballs before they get you. Don't let them get too close\u2014 they may hit you before you can do anything about it. And if you try to punch someone who's too close, you can take as much damage as you dish out. Remember that you need to keep enough energy and hits in reserve to take on the powerful villains who appear at the end of each stage. WEAPONS The picture under the word WEAPON on the screen shows you which weapon you re using. The number to the right of the bullet icon snows you how many bullets you have left for the weapon you re using If the number reaches zero, you can't use the weapon again until you come across more ammunition So don't use up your ammunition too quickly! Weapons Inventory You start out with the Autc-9. You can pick up the other weapons as you go along When you finish one stage and goon to the next, you take all the weapons you have with you. You will need them to fight the more powerful forces of evil on the new stage\u2014 so finishing a stage by using up all your ammunition is not the best strategy Auto-9. The Auio-9 is a special issue hand gun made for ROBOCOP alone. It's extremely effective for short and medium range situations. One shot is usually all that's necessary."}
{"id": "OnTheFurtherImprovementOfTheHealthServiceLetterToTheNational", "title": "On the further improvement of the health service : letter to the National Conference of Health Workers, April 21, 1985", "year": 1992, "seq": 0, "text": "Since then great advances have been made in health care under the wise guidance of the Party and the leader. The adoption of the PubUc Health Law, which is the crystallization of the Party's Juche-orientated idea on the health service, provided a legal guarantee for the consolidation of the socialist health service system in our country and for the development of health care. Over the past years the health service sector has worked hard to implement the Public Health Law. As a result, medical services have improved further, medical science and technology have developed rapidly, the ranks of health workers have in- creased, and the material and technical foundations of the health service sector have become stronger. Thanks to the measures taken by the Party and the state for the good of the people, the general standard of health care has risen, and our people's average life span has now reached 74 years and our country is gradually becoming a land where everyone enjoys a long and healthy life. The marvellous success achieved in health care during this period is thanks to the unrecognized efforts of the health workers who have devoted themselves to preserving the lives and improving the health of the people. These health workers have worked hard through thick and thin in order to carry out the Party's health policy and have discharged their noble mission and duty to the Party and the revolution with credit. A large number of medical workers have devoted their whole lives to the treatment and prevention of illness. They do not hesitate even to offer their own bones and flesh if it is for the sake of the lives and health of their fellow people. Many of them are unassuming heroes who have made a great contri- bution to the development of medical science and technology and to curative and preventive work in our country by displaying all their creative talents and overcoming all difficulties and hardships, believing only in the Party whether they receive recognition or not."}
{"id": "OnTheFurtherImprovementOfTheHealthServiceLetterToTheNational", "title": "On the further improvement of the health service : letter to the National Conference of Health Workers, April 21, 1985", "year": 1992, "seq": 1, "text": "An improvement in health care is essential to providing the people with a better chance to lead an independent and creative life. A man's physical strength and hygienic living conditions as well as his independent ideological consciousness are a guarantee for his independent and creative activity. Even if he has the revolutionary idea and is endowed with creative talents, he will be unable to carry out independent and creative activity satisfactorily and perform his role and responsibility as the master of nature and society unless he is physically strong. Nor can people lead a cultured and happy life to the full unless they are provided with hygienic living conditions. We must develop health care if we are to ensure that the people perform their role and responsibility well as masters of nature and society and lead a more independent and creative life. Improving health care is a major requirement for display- ing the advantages of our socialist system to a greater extent. The socialist system in our country is the best social system, under which the working masses are the masters of everything and everything in society serves them. The true superiority of this system finds clear expression in the people- orientated health service by which the state assumes full responsibility for the health care of the people. By the Public Health Law everyone in our country is entitled to medical treatment, and universal and entirely free medical care is given to the working people, so that they are reUeved of any worry about medical treatment. A well-organized medical service has been established, covering provinces, cities, coun- ties and ri. General medical centres and specialized curative and preventive organizations have been set up and provided with modem equipment, and the working people receive medical benefits from the state. Through their own experience our people are convinced that our socialist system which provides them with a cultured and happy life is, indeed, the best social system."}
{"id": "OnTheFurtherImprovementOfTheHealthServiceLetterToTheNational", "title": "On the further improvement of the health service : letter to the National Conference of Health Workers, April 21, 1985", "year": 1992, "seq": 2, "text": "In order to allow the superiority of the sociaUst system in our country to extend its influence, we must improve health care and consolidate and develop the people- orientated health service and see that medical benefits from the state reach the people more effectively. An improvement in health care is a major influence on accelerating the revolution and construction. Physical strength is the basis of the revolutionary struggle and of the building of a prosperous society. It is only when they are sturdy that the people can use all their creative power and talents in the revolution and construction. Putting a great effort into health care becomes all the more important as the building of socialism develops. Of course, the people's living conditions improve with the progress of socialist construction. Meanwhile, however, industrial es- tablishments are springing up throughout the country and all sorts of raw materials, power and technical equipment are used widely in production and, in consequence, the amount of harmful waste material discharged from factories is increas- ing gradually. In these circumstances, it is imperative to take far-sighted health measures to dispose of the harmful waste materials so as to protect and improve the health of the people and ensure that they make a better contribution to the building of socialism. Developing health care is also very important in success- fully carrying out the tasks of the cultural revolution for the building of socialism and communism. One important task of the cultural revolution is to wipe out all sources of disease and unhygienic practices which have been handed down from the old society, and to estabUsh thoroughly a new socialist way of life, modem work practices and a cultured lifestyle. The development of health care is essential to preventing epi- demics and all other diseases, to developing clean and healthy living environments in line with the socialist way of life, and to raising steadily the general level of cleanliness and hygiene in the country."}
{"id": "OnTheFurtherImprovementOfTheHealthServiceLetterToTheNational", "title": "On the further improvement of the health service : letter to the National Conference of Health Workers, April 21, 1985", "year": 1992, "seq": 3, "text": "They must step up the inspection and control of hygiene and anti-epidemic work and ensure that all sectors and units, particularly the produc- tion and construction, commercial and distribution, and communal service and public catering sectors, strictly observe hygiene and anti-epidemic regulations. It is necessary to apply appropriate administrative and legal sanctions against those units which neglect the proper upkeep of living environments and working conditions in violation of these regulations and make sure that such violations do not occur again. An increase in the effort to prevent disease is very important in carrying out the Party's policy on preventive medicine. The social causes of disease have now been completely eliminated in our country, many of the fatal diseases which had menaced the lives and health of the people for ages have been wiped out. Not all diseases, however, have been eliminated because some of the people's outdated habits still persist, as do the generally low standards of hygiene and preventive work and of medical science and technology in the country. The health service sector must continue to con- centrate a great effort on preventing disease. An important task in combatting disease is to take proper steps to prevent the diseases that affect the cardiovascular system, cancerous diseases, diseases of the metabolism and others which have a high rate of incidence and are very destructive to a man's ability to work. In order to prevent disease, it is necessary to develop the medical service given by preventive hospitals. This type of medical service is a positive and effective method of prevent- ing diseases or diagnosing them and curing them promptly. You must improve the hospitals for preventing dental disease and all other preventive hospitals and they must provide better medical services. The popularization of preventive care is an important way of preventing disease."}
{"id": "OnTheFurtherImprovementOfTheHealthServiceLetterToTheNational", "title": "On the further improvement of the health service : letter to the National Conference of Health Workers, April 21, 1985", "year": 1992, "seq": 4, "text": "Preventive medicine is an undertaking for the people and of the people themselves. We must conduct widespread campaigns such as the one for disease-free ri so that all the people join the struggle against disease. In particular, we must encourage the working people to make it a daily routine and a habit to take physical exercise to suit their age and constitution. An important task in the implementation of the Party's policy on preventive medicine is to press ahead with the work of preventing environmental pollution. Pollution is a major cause of fatal disease. Pollution control is not just a technical or business-like undertaking. It is an important political activity that preserves and improves the lives and health of the people and provides them with cleaner and more healthy living environments and working conditions. The health service sector must always pay par- ticular attention to the prevention of pollution. A system to monitor pollution is a prerequisite for pollution control. We must set up observation posts in the districts where they are needed and measure the state of the air, water and earth regularly so as to spot pollutants promptly and take steps to eliminate them. The effects on man's health of the harmful substances from factories and enterprises must be constantly monitored. If we are to prevent pollution, we must exercise strict control over industrial establishments and keep them from discharging pollutants at random. When factories and en- terprises are to be constructed, the health service sector must take an active part in examining how they are designed, in inspecting them in the interim period and in investigating the finished structures and discover polluting elements and take measures to eliminate them. In addition, they must keep themselves informed of the operation of the facilities to remove pollutants at factories and other enterprises and see that these facilities are operated properly."}
{"id": "OnTheFurtherImprovementOfTheHealthServiceLetterToTheNational", "title": "On the further improvement of the health service : letter to the National Conference of Health Workers, April 21, 1985", "year": 1992, "seq": 5, "text": "In order to carry out the Party's policy on preventive medicine, it is necessary to improve information about cleanliness and hygiene. The publication of this information is political work aimed at mobilizing the masses efficiently in the implemen- tation of the Party's preventive medicine policy. Only by intensifying this work can we equip the working people fully with the Party's health policy as it stands at any given moment, and encourage them to participate with the attitude of masters in raising their standards of cleanliness and hygiene and in creating healthy living environments and working conditions. If we are to intensify the publication of information about cleanliness and hygiene, wide sections of the population must be enlisted. Since this undertaking involves all members of society, health workers alone cannot do it successfully. A large number of people must become propagandists of cleanliness and hygiene, and this is the way to broadcast such information throughout society. The health service sector must mobilize not only its own propaganda forces and resources but also those of society. Students at universities, specialized schools and senior middle schools must be pro- vided with propaganda materials on cleanliness and hygiene and sent to circulate them among the population after school. The media such as radio, newspapers, and magazines must also be mobilized in this work. This propaganda must be conducted by different ways and means. This will enable you to do it without being limited by conditions and circumstances, and thus increase its effectiveness. Oral, visual, artistic and various other ways and means must be employed widely in this work. Information on cleanliness and hygiene is the basic way of doing this. The health service sector must compile this information in accordance with the Party's health policy as it stands at any given moment, by dealing with real problems in simple terms so that everyone can understand it when he reads or hears it."}
{"id": "OnTheFurtherImprovementOfTheHealthServiceLetterToTheNational", "title": "On the further improvement of the health service : letter to the National Conference of Health Workers, April 21, 1985", "year": 1992, "seq": 6, "text": "Health workers must improve medical services in line with any qualitative change undergone in the content of health care, and must raise the standard of health care for the inhabitants of the district in their charge. In particular, the system of medical responsibility for workshops and pits in the mining, metallurgical, chemical and other heavy industries must be improved so as to make sure that the standard of health care for the workers is raised. In order to strengthen the system of district medical care, it is necessary to appoint the units of responsibility properly and organize their assignments carefully. Although it is a good system of health care, the district medical care system cannot prove its worth to any great extent unless the units of responsibility are properly appointed and unless their assign- ments are organized carefully. The units of the district medical care system should be defined on the principle of combining production units and residential units. Assignments for each district should be given by taking into account the number of inhabitants, the status of their health, the conditions of cleanliness and hygiene, the doctors' qualifications, the amount of work to be done, and various other details. The doctors who take charge of districts should be selected from among the able people, and given the post for a long time so that they can make a systematic study of the health status of the inhabitants in their districts and take appropriate preventive measures. In order to improve the district medical care system, it is also necessary to review its work regularly. Only when you do this will you be able to correct any slight mistakes and shortcomings promptly, and develop the system steadily so as to meet the needs of the developing situation. You must keep yourselves familiar with the work of the district medical care system and review it weekly and every month in detail, correct the slight mistakes and shortcomings immediately, and publicize any useful experience. 3."}
{"id": "OnTheFurtherImprovementOfTheHealthServiceLetterToTheNational", "title": "On the further improvement of the health service : letter to the National Conference of Health Workers, April 21, 1985", "year": 1992, "seq": 7, "text": "ON IMPROVING MEDICAL SERVICES Medical services are an important undertaking that provides the people with adequate medical benefits which the Party and the state accord them under the system of free medical care. You can only preserve and improve the lives and health of the people and give full scope to the advantages and vitality of the universal free medical treatment system when the medical services are efficient. The health service sector must continue to improve medical services in conformity with Party policy on preserving and improving the lives and health of the people to a greater degree and with their desire to enjoy a long life, good health and unrestrained happiness under the socialist system. In order to provide good medical services, it is imperative to improve the way diagnosis and treatment are carried out. This is essential to raising the standard of medical services. It is only when you improve the way diagnosis and treatment are carried out that you can raise the level of treatment and preventive work and cure disease so that your patients recover their health quickly. The health service sector must con- centrate a great effort on improving its diagnosis and treatment methods. An important task in this regard is to adopt a wide range of advanced methods. The development of curative and preventive work and success in medical services depend largely on how advanced methods of diagnosis and treat- ment are adopted. Curative and preventive organizations must introduce in treatment and prevention such advanced methods of diagnosis and treatment as new ways of con- ducting clinical and laboratory tests, functional examina- tions, intestinal transplantation, microsurgery, the use of radioisotopes, laser and so on. The conventional method of depending totally on medicines for treatment must be eliminated, and natural elements such as hot springs, mineral water and mud which are all abundant in our country must be used widely for treatment and prevention."}
{"id": "OnTheFurtherImprovementOfTheHealthServiceLetterToTheNational", "title": "On the further improvement of the health service : letter to the National Conference of Health Workers, April 21, 1985", "year": 1992, "seq": 8, "text": "Next in importance in improving diagnosis and treatment is to combine Korean medicine and modem medical science properly. A good combination of the two is an important policy followed by our Party in curative and preventive work. It can ensure the optimum use of the advantages of both so as to take the correct measures for treatment in keeping with the living environments and habits of our people and their physical characteristics and increase the effectiveness of treatment. You must work hard to put the Korean methods of diagnosis and treatment onto a scientific basis, combine the modern method of diagnosis and the Korean method of treatment, organize the way folk medicine is used and apply it widely in treatment. Adopting widely new medicines and modern medical appliances is an important way to improve diagnosis and treatment. New methods of diagnosis and treatment require good medicines and modem medical appliances to suit the new methods. We must not hesitate to introduce in curative and preventive work new medicines and modern medical appliances which are based on the latest achievements of medical science and technology, and raise our methods of diagnosis and treatment to the world standard as soon as possible. If you are to improve medical services, the standard of specialization must be raised. This means subdividing curative and preventive organi- zations and medical specialization further and raising the scientific and technological levels of treatment and preven- tion. Only then will you be able to improve medical services to suit the people's physical characteristics and the symptoms of the diseases and achieve any notable success in your curative and preventive work. The rapid development of medical science and technology and the growing daily needs of the people for medical services require urgently that the standard of specialization in the medical services should be raised."}
{"id": "OnTheFurtherImprovementOfTheHealthServiceLetterToTheNational", "title": "On the further improvement of the health service : letter to the National Conference of Health Workers, April 21, 1985", "year": 1992, "seq": 9, "text": "To this end, you must set up many specialist hospitals and specialist departments in hospitals. You must do this as medical science and technology develop and as the real situation of medical services requires and make the advance in curative and preventive work from specialization by system to detailed specialization by organ and disease. We must also put a great effort into services provided by sanatoria and other means of recuperative treatment which need less expense and are highly effective. In order to raise the standard of specialization in medical services, consultation among doctors in specialist branches must be intensified. This is the way to enlist the collective wisdom of medical workers as much as possible so as to make a correct diagnosis and take the right steps in specialist treatment and quickly raise the scientific and technological level of curative and preventive work. The curative and preventive organizations must establish a correct system of consultation by specialists, hold doctors' consultations regularly, eliminate the subjective and arbitrary views of individual doctors so that every doctor can express his opinion fully. If you are to improve medical services, they must be properly organized. The efficient organization of the medical services can ensure that medical staff and facilities, medicines and other medical resources are used effectively and that medical services are provided efficiently to suit the characteristics of each district, section of population, occupation and disease. An important factor in improving the organization of medical services is to make the medical service network more rational and make effective use of medical appliances. It is necessary to investigate closely how the hospitals and clinics of the institutions and enterprises arc being run and then merge, adjust and rationalize those which are distributed illogically, concentrate efforts on supplying them with medical appUances and see that they use them as effectively as possible."}
{"id": "molecularcharact00duan", "title": "Molecular characterization of the nonstructural protein genes of tomato mottle virus and development of transgenic plants resistant to the virus", "year": 1996, "seq": 0, "text": "Powell Major Department: Plant Pathology Tomato mottle virus (TMoV), a whitefly-transmitted geminivirus, is an important pathogen of tomato in Florida. The AC3, AC4, BC1 and BV1 open reading frames encoding the nonstructural proteins of TMoV were cloned and expressed in Escherichia coli. Polyclonal antiserum to each of these expressed proteins was prepared and used in Western blot analysis to index the expression of AC 3, AC4, BC1 and BV1 genes in TMoV-infected and transgenic plants. The BC1 movement protein (MP) was detected in the extracts from both infected plants and transgenic plants. The BV1 MP was detected in the extracts from infected plants, and appeared to accumulate as leaves aged in contrast to the BC1 MP. The AC3 and AC4 proteins were also detected in the extracts from infected plants. VI Transgenic tobacco plants were generated by Agrobacterium-mediated transformation with the AC4, BC1 and BV1 gene constructs. Transgenic plants expressing the BC1 protein had a range of phenotypes from severe stunting and leaf mottling to no visible symptoms. Three different mutated forms of the BC1 gene were identified from these transgenic plants. Two mutated forms {BC1A and BClAt/r) were associated with asymptomatic phenotypes, whereas the third one (BCJS) was associated with the phenotypes that were more severe than those of TMoV infection. The BClAt/r mutant had an open reading frame with a deletion of 119 amino acid residues at the C-terminus of the BC1 and an addition of 26 amino acid residues from an unknown source. This asymptomatic BClAt/r suppressed the symptom-inducing effects of the symptomatic BCJS in tobacco plants containing both of these genes. Transgenic plants were evaluated for resistance to geminiviruses and to several RNA viruses. Plants expressing the mutated BC1 with asymptomatic phenotypes were found to be resistant to TMoV and cabbage leaf curl geminiviruses, whereas plants with symptomatic phenotypes accentuate systemic infection of tobacco mosaic tobamovirus or cucumber mosaic cucumovirus."}
{"id": "molecularcharact00duan", "title": "Molecular characterization of the nonstructural protein genes of tomato mottle virus and development of transgenic plants resistant to the virus", "year": 1996, "seq": 1, "text": "As a result, geminiviruses have received increasing research attention. So far, more than 60 different geminiviruses have been identified in the world with about a dozen infecting tomato (Briddon & Markham, 1995). The most economically important geminiviruses are the whitefly-transmitted African cassava mosaic virus (ACMV), tomato yellow leaf curl viruses (TYLCV), and the leafhopper-transmitted maize streak virus (MSV) (Fauquet & Fargette, 1990; Brown & Bird, 1992; Thottappilly, 1992). The detailed genetic and genomic information for a number of distinct geminiviruses led the International Committee for the Taxonomy of Viruses to recognize the family, Geminiviridae (Briddon & Markham, 1995). Based on their hosts, vector specificity and genome organization, three genera are currently recognized. Genus \"Subgroup I Geminivirus\"(Genus I) consists of monocot-infecting (with the exception of tobacco yellow dwarf virus), leafhopper-transmitted viruses with monopartite genomes and narrow host ranges. There are 12 species and 2 tentative species in this genus. Genus \"Subgroup II Geminivirus\"(Genus II) consists of dicot-infecting, leafhopper-transmitted (with the exception of tomato pseudo-curly top virus) viruses with monopartite genomes. The genus contains type species beet curly top virus (BCTV) and two other tentative species. The BCTV has a very wide host range, infecting over 300 species in 44 plant families. Genus \"Subgroup HI Geminivirus\" (Genus HI) is the largest group, containing 43 species and 9 tentative species. All viruses in Genus HI are dicot-infecting and whitefly-transmitted with relatively narrow host ranges, and most of them contain a bipartite genome (except for TYLCV and TYCV) (Briddon & Markham, 1995). Genome Organization The twinned particle morphology of geminiviruses is a unique feature, making them distinct from all other viruses. The incomplete icosahedral virions (about 18 x 30 nm) contain either a monopartite or bipartite genome with single-stranded (ss) circular DNA (Briddon & Markham, 1995). The genes in geminiviruses are arranged in two divergent overlapping clusters separated by an intergenic region of about 200 nucleotides (nt)."}
{"id": "molecularcharact00duan", "title": "Molecular characterization of the nonstructural protein genes of tomato mottle virus and development of transgenic plants resistant to the virus", "year": 1996, "seq": 2, "text": "Using site-directed mutagenesis, they confirmed that only one mutation (Arg to Cys) was responsible for the alteration of host range. Futhermore, mutational analysis revealed that both BV1 and BC1 proteins are involved in the determination of 11 host range of SqLCV, but only the BC1 protein was related to viral pathogenicity (Ingham et al., 1995). The movement proteins of plant viruses are essential for cell to cell spread of infection, and in part, determine the host range and pathogenesis (Heinlein et al., 1995). The pathogenic properties of bipartite geminivirus BC1 proteins have been demonstrated not only by mutational analysis but also by transgenic plant studies. Transgenic plants expressing the SqLCV BC1 protein display typical SqLCV disease symptoms, suggesting that the growth and development defects may result from misregulated phloem transport, which may be caused by the interaction between BC1 protein and host proteins (Pascal et al., 1994). However, the molecular and physiological mechanisms of the effects of the BC1 protein on the alteration of host metabolism remain to be investigated. Virus Movement The distribution of geminiviruses under natural field conditions is primarily determined by epidemiological constraints imposed on the whitefly and leafhopper vectors (Frischmuth & Stanley, 1993). Geminivirus movement within a plant and spread from plant to plant require the participation of the movement proteins (MPs) and/or coat proteins encoded by these viruses. The development of systemic infection of plant viruses involves two distinct types of movement, cell-to-cell and long distance transport via the vascular system. The intercellular movement of most, if not all, plant viruses requires virus encoded protein(s). The movement proteins encoded by plant viruses are essential for infection of the host plant but are not required for viral replication or encapsidation 12 (Hull, 1989; Maule, 1991). For cell-to-cell movement, there are two different mechanisms that illustrate how plant viruses conduct an active process for intercellular movement facilitated by their movement proteins."}
{"id": "molecularcharact00duan", "title": "Molecular characterization of the nonstructural protein genes of tomato mottle virus and development of transgenic plants resistant to the virus", "year": 1996, "seq": 3, "text": "One mechanism, exemplified by tobacco mosaic virus (TMV) (Wolf et al., 1989; Citovsky et al., 1990), indicates the movement of viruses as a nucleoprotein complex through plasmodesmata. The other mechanism, exemplified by cowpea mosaic virus (CPMV) (Van Lent, et al., 1990; 1991), involves a tubular structure formed by a movement protein, through which virions are moved from cell to cell. Geminiviruses, unlike RNA plant viruses, replicate and accumulate in the cell nucleus rather than in the cytoplasm. Prior to moving to adjacent cells, the virus requires a DNA binding protein and a means to transport of the viral genome in and out of the nuclei (Lazarowitz, 1992). The BC1 (BL1) and BV1(BR1) proteins encoded by DNA-B of the bipartite geminiviruses, bean dwarf mosaic virus (BDMV) and SqLCV coordinate the movement of gemini virus DNA in and out of nuclei and from cell to cell. Using microinjection of the in vitro expressed BDMV MPs labeled with fluroescein isothiocyanate, Noueiry et al. (1994) observed that the BC1 MP increased mesophyll plasmodesmal size and potentated the movement of dsDNA from cell to cell, while the BV1 MP mediates the movement of dsDNA out of the nucleus, and suggested that two MPs may coordinate the movement of viral DNA across both nuclear and plasmodesmal boundaries. The BC1 and BV1 MPs of SqLCV have also been demonstrated to coordinate the movement of viral DNA across both nuclear and cell wall boundaries. However, the SqLCV BV1 MP binds ssDNA functions as a nuclear shuttling protein, and 13 contains domains essential for interaction with BC1 and nuclear localization, whereas the SqLCV BC1 MP has very weak affinity for ssDNA and no apparent ability to bind dsDNA. In addition, the SqLCV BC1 MP not only localizes itself to the cell-periphery, but also brings SqLCV BV1 MP to the cell periphery through protein-protein interaction, indicating that the BC1 may provide directionality to the movement of viral genome (Pascal et al., 1994, Sanderfoot & Lazarowitz, 1995; Sanderfoot et al., 1996)."}
{"id": "molecularcharact00duan", "title": "Molecular characterization of the nonstructural protein genes of tomato mottle virus and development of transgenic plants resistant to the virus", "year": 1996, "seq": 4, "text": "After cloning a foreign gene into the cloning site under the control of a certain promoter such as CaMV 35S, the expression vector can be multiplied in E. coli and then mobilized into an Agrobacterium strain harboring a disarmed Ti plasmid (D-Ti) with a deletion of T-DNA and thereafter used for transformation of plant tissue or explants. The products of vir genes located in the D-Ti recognize the border sequences, and coordinately transfer the expression cassette into the plant chromosome(s). The expression of the selective marker gene (encoding for antibiotic resistance) allows selection of transformed plant cells on antibiotics-amended medium during plant regeneration (Joshi & Joshi, 1991). 15 Transgenic Resistance to Plant Viruses Viruses cause serious losses to crop production around the world. The losses result not only from virus diseases themselves but also from the costs of insecticides and chemicals used for vector control (Hull & Davies, 1992). The development of virus- resistant cultivars through conventional breeding programs, although effective, often proves to be difficult, time consuming, and the resistance can be overcome by rapid change of the adaptation to host in the virus population (Frischmuth & Stanley, 1993; Lomonossoff, 1995). An alternative way to produce virus resistance is so-called nonconventional breeding by which virus resistance may be developed in transgenic plants transformed with viral sequence(s). This phenomenon is known as \"pathogen-derived resistance\" (PDR). The theory of PDR implies that the transformation of a susceptible plant with genes derived from a pathogen's own genetic material may result in the development of heritable resistance in the plants (Sanford and Johnson, 1985). The first achievement of PDR was demonstrated by Powell-Abel et al. (1986), who reported that transgenic tobacco plants expressing TMV-CP were resistant to the virus. This discovery opened a new field of plant science research, and activity in this aspect of research has expanded rapidly in the past decade."}
{"id": "molecularcharact00duan", "title": "Molecular characterization of the nonstructural protein genes of tomato mottle virus and development of transgenic plants resistant to the virus", "year": 1996, "seq": 5, "text": "Transgenic tobacco plants carrying the 48 kDa MP gene of CPMV were highly resistant to Sb, SI, and S8 strains of CPMV, but not to other comovirus species such as cowpea severe mosaic virus (Sijen et al., 1995). These examples indicate that plants expressing MP or dMP may result in a broad- spectrum resistance, and that dMPMR interferes with the spread of infecting virus but not with virus infection. The TMV dMPMR, although not complete, restricts the local spread of tobamoviruses, and retards the systemic infection of heterologous viruses by delaying symptom expression and/ or reducing accumulation of virus in upper leaves in transgenic plants (Cooper et al., 1995). Based on the fact that transgenic plants expressing wild type TMV MP have increased their susceptibility, it is suggested that it is better not to use a wild type MP gene for PDR since plants expressing such a gene are likely to have increased susceptibility to certain other viruses (Cooper et al., 1995). The cellular and molecular mechanisms of dMPMR are not clear, but it was proposed that dMPMR prevents the accumulation of the MP of the challenging virus in 18 such a way as trans-dominant negative interference (Lapidot et al., 1993; Beck et al., 1994). This is an application of a concept called \"dominant negative mutation\", which was described by Herskowitz (1987) as the inhibition of the function of a wild-type gene product by an overproduction of the inhibitory variant of the same gene product. Because of the multifunctional properties of a MP, the interference may involve any aspect of the MP-associated functions such as multiprotein interaction, subcellular targeting to cell wall or to plasmodesmata, nucleic acid binding, or modification of plasmodesmatal structure and/or function (Lapidot et al., 1993; Cooper et al., 1995). In the scenario of TMV dMPMR, the dMP in transgenic plants reduces, but does not eliminate virus spread, suggesting that this may be the result of incomplete interference or incomplete competition (Lapidot et al., 1993)."}
{"id": "molecularcharact00duan", "title": "Molecular characterization of the nonstructural protein genes of tomato mottle virus and development of transgenic plants resistant to the virus", "year": 1996, "seq": 6, "text": "In order to exclude possible PCR artifacts, the sequence analyses were done in several different ways and with independent reactions. For the \"S\" phenotype line BC3- 11-5S and \"A\" phenotype line BC3-11-6A sequences were obtained with independent reactions by sequencing cloned PCR products and by direct sequencing of PCR products from cDNA and from genomic DNA. Three other lines with the \"S\" phenotype (including one single copy line and 2 multiple sequence repeat lines, not shown) were also sequenced after PCR amplification of genomic DNA and the sequences were identical to BCJS. The 66 sequence for BC3-6-3A line (multiple sequence repeat line) was resolved from two different clones of PCR product amplified from genomic DNA. The sequence for the BC1 gene in the pKYLX71:35S2 vector (identical to the BCJS sequence) from the Agrobacterium culture used for transformation was done once from a PCR amplification of isolated plasmid DNA (data not shown). In the latter case we can not exclude the possibility that other BC1 gene sequence variations exist in the plasmid population in the Agrobacterium culture. Symptomatic Phenotype Mimics Impaired Photoassimilate Partitioning One of the processes involved in plant virus disease induction is the reduction in translocation of fixed carbon out of the leaves (Bos, 1970). Starch accumulation in the leaf causes alterations in leaf texture and color. The symptomatic and asymptomatic BC1 transgenic tobacco as well as TMoV infected tobacco were tested for altered carbon partitioning, determined by the starch-iodine test (Fig. 3-8). Symptomatic plants showed high levels of starch accumulation. Starch accumulation was not detected in the asymptomatic transgenic plants or in control plants by this test. The mottling symptoms in the leaves as well as the starch accumulation in the symptomatic transgenic tobacco were accentuated by high light intensity growth conditions. The phenotype observed in the symptomatic, transgenic tobacco associated with impaired photoassimilate partitioning mimic the symptoms induced by geminivirus infections."}
{"id": "molecularcharact00duan", "title": "Molecular characterization of the nonstructural protein genes of tomato mottle virus and development of transgenic plants resistant to the virus", "year": 1996, "seq": 7, "text": "This BCl transgene (BClAt/r, Genbank #U65506) had undergone a recombinational event which resulted in an open reading frame with a deletion of 1 1 9 carboxy-terminal amino acid residues and an addition of 26 amino acids from an unknown source (Chapter 3). The low level of BCl protein detected in the BC3-1 1-6 line may be due to the loss of epitopes since more than 1/3 of the codons for carboxy-terminal amino acid residues were lost during the recombinational event (Chapter 3). Transgenic Tobacco Plants Resistant to TMoV Based on the asymptomatic phenotypes and virus resistance in T0 transgenic plants (data not shown), selected transgenic tobacco lines (Ti generation) at the 7-9 leaf stage were exposed to viruliferous (TMoV) whiteflies for a 72 hr inoculation exposure in a greenhouse (Table 4-1). All of the transgenic lines tested, except certain ones expressing mutated BCl protein, were highly susceptible to TMoV. Based on this test and others (data not shown) we focused our analysis of virus resistance on three BCl transgenic lines, BC-3-6, BC-3-11 and BC-3-31. The transgenic tobacco plants (Tt and T2 generations) carrying mutated BCl genes showed the following symptoms after inoculation: 85 1 . No visible symptoms throughout the life of the plants, indistinguishable from noninoculated plants (Fig. 4-2 D and on the right in A). 2. Marked delay of symptoms for several weeks after exposure to viruliferous whiteflies with new growth showing typical TMoV symptoms (Fig. 4-4). 3. Symptoms of vein chlorosis and mottling on early leaves after exposure to viruliferous whiteflies but subsequent growth with significant remission of symptoms, consistent with significant reduction of virions (Fig. 4-3). 4. Stunting, mottling, and vein chlorosis on the leaves, typical symptoms associated with TMoV infections in nontransformed tobacco plants (Fig. 4-2 C and on the left in A). In general, the leaves exposed to viruliferous whiteflies (72 hr inoculation exposure) in most of the transgenic plants expressing mutated BC1 protein(s) showed no symptoms after the plants were challenged with TMoV (Table 4-1 and 4-2)."}
{"id": "molecularcharact00duan", "title": "Molecular characterization of the nonstructural protein genes of tomato mottle virus and development of transgenic plants resistant to the virus", "year": 1996, "seq": 8, "text": "This phenomenon has been observed or implied in transformation with the BCl gene of two different bipartite geminiviruses (Pascal, et al. 1993, Chapter 3). 103 Using this approach, one may readily identify the naturally occurring mutants during transformation, which may confer virus resistance. CHAPTER 5 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS The AC3, AC4, BCl and BV1 open reading frames encoding for nonstructural proteins of tomato mottle virus (TMoV) were individually cloned into the pETh3C expression vector and expressed in Escherichia coli. The expressed proteins were purified from the cell lysates and were used as immunogens for polyclonal antiserum production in rabbits. The antisera were used in Western blot analysis to index the expression of the nonstructural genes, AC3, AC4, BCl and BV1 in TMoV-infected and transgenic plants. The BCl movement protein (MP) (33-kDa) was detected primarily in the membrane fraction and in the cell wall fraction of leaf extracts from TMoV-infected and transgenic plants. The BV1 MP (29-kDa) was detected in the soluble fraction and primarily in the membrane fraction of the leaf extracts of infected plants. The AC3 (16-kDa) and AC4 protein (10-kDa) were also detected in the membrane fraction of leaf extracts from transgenic plants and/or infected plants. These results are similar to those reported for bipartite geminiviruses, tomato golden mosaic virus (TGMV), squash leaf curl virus (SqLCV) and African cassava mosaic virus (ACMV) (Von Arnim et al., 1993, Pascal et al., 1993; Pedersen & Hanley-Bowdoin, 1994). However, It is the first time that the AC4 protein was detected in the extracts of tomato plants infected with a bipartite geminivirus. 104 105 Although both the TMoV MPs can be detected in the extracts from infected plants, the BV1 MP appeared to accumulate as leaves aged in contrast to the BC1 MP. Both MPs have been found to be phosphorylated in vivo (Pascal et al., 1994), but only the BC1 protein of bipartite geminiviruses shows an anomalous behavior."}
{"id": "molecularcharact00duan", "title": "Molecular characterization of the nonstructural protein genes of tomato mottle virus and development of transgenic plants resistant to the virus", "year": 1996, "seq": 9, "text": "All these transgenic plants were self-pollinated to produce the Ti generation, and selected Ti lines were propagated for the T2 generation. Transgenic plants expressing BC1 protein had phenotypes ranging from severe stunting and leaf mottling to no visible symptoms. Eight of the 19 transgenic To plants which expressed BC1 protein did not show any virus-like symptoms. The variations in the phenotype of transgenic tobacco plants were unexpected since similar levels of the BC1 mRNA and protein (with the exception for the truncated one from BC3-1 1-6 line) were 106 detected in the asymptomatic as well as symptomatic plants. The sequence data for the BCl transgene from the different phenotypes indicated at least three different mutated forms of the BCl gene in the transformed tobacco. All of the BCl transgenic plants from 6 lines analyzed revealed mutations in the BCl gene when compared with the viral sequence and with the sequence from the initial clone of PCR products used in the gene construction for transformation. Point mutations were found in all transgenes analyzed, and a recombination was found in one transgene. This BClAxJx had a modified BCl open reading frame with a deletion of 119 amino acid residues at carboxy-terminus and an addition of 26 amino acids from an unknown source. All the nucleotide changes with one exception resulted in an amino acid change. This high correlation of nucleotide changes with amino acid changes may be due to selection involved in mollifying the toxic effects of non-mutated BCl protein. The phenotype variations observed in the BCl transgenic plants appear remarkably similar to those reported for transgenic tobacco expressing SqLCV BCl by Pascal et al. (1993), who reported that 5 out of 17 lines expressing SqLCV BCl were symptomless, and the others showed a range of symptomatic phenotypes. Our results suggest that spontaneous point mutations in the transgene during Agrobacterium-mediated transformation and other modifications in the transgene by chromosomal rearrangements need to be considered in the interpretation of gene function and regulation experiments."}
{"id": "x-toward-the-truth", "title": "Toward the truth", "year": 1971, "seq": 0, "text": "Suzuki is probably the most famous, although he is no longer living. He has done more to popularize Zen in the West than has any other single individual. Among others in this category many are Westerners living in Asia, such as Nyanaponika Thera, a German bhikkhu (monk) residing in Ceylon. The paucity of information about contemporary Buddhist thinkers, especially those within the monastic community or priesthood (Sangha) greatly limits our understanding of the Buddhism taught and practiced in Asia today. This shortcoming, however, is not unique. Every age lacks the perspective of history on its own men and movements, a problem enhanced when we examine differing cultures, languages, and religions. This problem is particularly acute regarding Southeast Asia. Southeast Asian Buddhism has been studied in re\u00ac cent years by anthropologists and sociologists, but few have attempted to present it from the perspective of its own self-understanding. Of course, some argue that mod\u00ac ern Theravada Buddhism has not produced any notewor\u00ac thy intellectuals, whereas others contend that Theravada 10 PREFACE monks offer no significant interpretations of traditional doctrinal formulations. Both positions are inaccurate and question-begging. The present volume attempts to contribute to an un\u00ac derstanding of contemporary Theravada Buddhism by presenting translations from the writings of Bhikkhu Buddhadasa, widely acclaimed in Thailand as that coun\u00ac try\u2019s most provocative intellectual in the Buddhist Sangha. Buddhadasa is a prolific writer and speaker, and the chapters in this volume only begin to touch the depth of his thought. Some of his most important, longer works remain to be translated. We present the following selec\u00ac tions from Buddhadasa\u2019s writings, however, in the hope that it will make a contribution toward meeting an ob\u00ac vious need in the area of Buddhist studies. The works included here have been translated by a variety of hands."}
{"id": "x-toward-the-truth", "title": "Toward the truth", "year": 1971, "seq": 1, "text": "In the West we have long since given up the practice of taking names for the meaning they contain, but in the East, and especially in the case of Buddhadasa, the meaning of the name illustrates something of the character or the quality of being of the man. Buddhadasa, in his unique way, sees himself as a servant of the Lord Buddha not in a narrow, sectarian manner but as a vehicle through which the uni\u00ac versal truths of the Buddha\u2019s teachings might reach man. His service, then, is not simply to the Lord Buddha but to mankind. Buddhadasa 1 was born in 1906 in Chaiya, South Thai\u00ac land, a son of a merchant family. Unlike many Thai youths entering the monastic life, Buddhadasa was not INTRODUCTION 15 ordained as a novice but entered the Sangha at the age of twenty-one. After finishing the traditional levels of monastic study, and teaching for a short time, he fol\u00ac lowed the pattern of withdrawal and preparation set by Gotama the Buddha. He retired to the forest for a period of six years to meditate and study the scriptures of Thera- vada Buddhism, the form of Buddhism practiced in Thai\u00ac land, Ceylon, and other parts of Southeast Asia. He is reputed to have adopted a life of total isolation, seeing no one even to the point of having his brother leave his food hanging from a tree every day. Eventually he re\u00ac turned to a more normal monastic life and was appointed to head a temple in Chaiya, once an important center of Buddhism in Southeast Asia. During the past decade, however, he has devoted the bulk of his energy to the establishment of a forest hermitage several miles outside of Chaiya. If a religious genius is indicated by the number of fol\u00ac lowers he has attracted, Buddhadasa would not rank very high."}
{"id": "x-toward-the-truth", "title": "Toward the truth", "year": 1971, "seq": 2, "text": "One Christian re- 20 TOWARD THE TRUTH marked that if what Buddhadasa had to say were widely accepted, Christianity in Thailand would be put out of business. To the above kind of charge a number of observations must be made regarding Buddhadasa\u2019s point of view. It is true that for Buddhadasa all religions are similar; how\u00ac ever, their similarity is based primarily on two shared characteristics: their understanding of the human condi\u00ac tion and the nature of ultimate reality. With regard to the nature of the human condition Buddhadasa says: \u201cEvery human being, no matter in what country he be\u00ac longs, or what language he speaks, or what religion he professes, has but one universal problem, namely, over\u00ac coming evil or mental impurity or defilements. That which is called evil or mental impurity is to be found in each individual. It does not belong to or is not the problem of one particular religion only; each individual professing any religion has the problem of overcoming evil. As such, the way to solve this problem must be one that can be used by every human being. The way or instrument to destroy evil is named \u2018religion,\u2019 therefore true religion or religion in essence is universal in its application. The be\u00ac lief that there are literally many religions is something meaningful only in the eyes of those who see only the outer forms, or view religion only superficially. There are different outer forms or embodiments of religion, but every religion or what is embodied in different forms of religion is but one and the same thing.\u201d 3 For Buddhadasa all religions share the same, funda\u00ac mental soteriological purpose: the overcoming of evil, impurity, defilements, and sin which characterize the hu\u00ac man condition. The ways in which this condition is de\u00ac scribed may differ, and the theological conceptions in INTRODUCTION 21 relationship to which the human condition is viewed may also vary, but all religions see man in some sort of pro\u00ac fane state."}
{"id": "x-toward-the-truth", "title": "Toward the truth", "year": 1971, "seq": 3, "text": "For the person who \u201csees\u201d or understands the truth about the nature of things, language is no longer bound simply by sensorily perceived referents; rather, it becomes a vehicle expressive of the Truth that has been seen or understood. There are, indeed, dangers in this approach. It may be\u00ac come a vehicle for an uncritical lack of appreciation of the distinctiveness of religious traditions. For instance, one could criticize Buddhadasa\u2019s understanding of Chris\u00ac tianity at several points in his lectures at the Thailand 22 TOWARD THE TRUTH Theological Seminary. It might, furthermore, lead to an unduly subjective or arbitrary interpretation of a religious tradition if many of its historical and cultural aspects are written off as conventional or relative. On the other hand, if this approach is used as a means to provoke and awaken a religion from its \u201cdogmatic slumbers\u201d and to call into question the relevance and meaning of outdated forms, then Buddhadasa\u2019s understanding of the nature of religion bears a great deal of validity. Upon reading these chapters one will probably conclude that Buddhadasa has gone in both directions at once. It may be that in the process of recalling not only Buddhism but other religions as well to their essential truths about the nature of human existence and the quest for the ultimately real, Buddha\u00ac dasa\u2019s genius has led him to a kind of synthetic eclecti\u00ac cism. A fairer judgment would be, however, that Bud\u00ac dhadasa\u2019s sense of mission at this particular time in the history of Thai Buddhism has made his orientation less that of the analytical expositor and more that of the vi\u00ac sionary prophet or spokesman. Our comments up to this point have focused on Bud\u00ac dhadasa\u2019s understanding of Buddhism and religion but not so much on the kind of critique he offers."}
{"id": "x-toward-the-truth", "title": "Toward the truth", "year": 1971, "seq": 4, "text": "When we speak of the way to Buddha- Dhamma, bear in mind that by Buddha-Dhamma we mean the goal or state that Siddhattha Gotama attained in becoming a Buddha. What is the justification for focusing on the last mean\u00ac ing? Why not elaborate upon the first and second mean\u00ac ings, either of learning the teaching, the pariyatti - dhamma, or the way of practice, the patipatti-dhamma? By the pariyatti-dhamma, as is generally understood, we mean the study of the whole of the Tipitaka (the sacred books of Buddhism containing Lord Buddha\u2019s words and those of his disciples). The question for most people will be whether sufficient time is available to devote to their reading and assimilation. As for the patipatti-dhamma , few men are able to renounce the world to lead a strict religious life. If the Buddha-Dhamma is something to be attained only through learning the Tipitaka or through leading a strict monastic life, Buddha-Dhamma will suit only the few. But because Buddha-Dhamma is for the welfare of all, its most important meaning is the attain\u00ac ment of the Buddha. We can all reach this goal without going through the Holy Texts and even without leading a rigorous ascetic life. There is a parallel in regard to worldly attainments. Nearly everyone wants wealth, fame, and wide social contacts. Furthermore, these may be ob- 28 TOWARD THE TRUTH tained without necessarily having academic qualifications or greatness or even working hard, and when the former are possessed no account is taken of the latter. These three much-desired worldly goals are not limited only to those who are great men. In the same way Buddha- Dhamma is not limited to a select few. It is within the reach of everybody. Nana, or wisdom, is that kind of knowledge_which frees ma n of all desires."}
{"id": "x-toward-the-truth", "title": "Toward the truth", "year": 1971, "seq": 5, "text": "In this way we act as though they did not exist. Our senses deceive us to such a degree about the real naturejprthings that we are often totally mistaken. Some people, for example, firmly believe that visual colors have an essential reality; yet science has proven that color has no essential existence per se. The seeming existence of different colors is de\u00ac pendent on the ability of our eye to pick up various vibra\u00ac tions of light waves, thus giving rise to visual impressions of different colors. The same color may appear to be dif\u00ac ferent to different kinds of creatures, or by some it may not be seen at all. On these grounds we conclude that color as we ordinarily perceive it is an illusion. In the same way, all the five sense organs are liable to arouse the wildest delusions. The physical world itself is mys\u00ac terious and difficult to understand. As for Buddha-Dhamma, or the Truth of Buddhism, it is something beyond the sphere of the physical world. We might use the word \u201cmetaphysical\u201d to characterize it, and it can only be understood by turning within. It is imperceptible to our senses, including the ordinary mind. We can make contact with it only through meditation, that is, by a mind that is fully and rightly concentrated. If we want to attain Buddha-Dhamma we must see things by looking inward. To see things outwardly has become instinctual with us. We see, for example, a red rose and have an attitude of liking toward it. We are fascinated by its seeming color. Generally, however, we do not have the attitude of mind while seeing roses which enables us to understand that there is no such thing as a red color for which we have so great a fancy."}
{"id": "x-toward-the-truth", "title": "Toward the truth", "year": 1971, "seq": 6, "text": "The moment they cease to move, they cease to be. The so-called world is, therefore, nothing but organic and inorganic objects in constant motion. When these conditioned things are dissolved, an unconditioned, indestructible, self-existing state remains which is quite opposite to mundane phenomena in that it is not subject to motion or impermanence. It exists without being in motion. On the whole, therefore, we can divide things into two categories: conditioned, impermanent objects produced by causes and those without motion, free from the process of coming into being and ceasing. The former are called sankhata-dhamma, things created by causes, and the latter asankhata-dhamma, things uncreated by causes. Anyone who perceives both categories clearly is said to have perceived the Buddha-Dhamma, the Truth that Buddha found. To perceive in this case implies to have the insight or wisdom capable of changing our heart and min d to the extent that we become indifferent and unattached to worldly allurements and understand thor- TOWARD THE TRUTH OF BUDDHISM 35 oughly the supramundane state our mind has fully at\u00ac tained. In other words, when we see the interior of the mundane things dominating and covering the mind, we are free to see the supramundane state then and there, for both states are relative in much the same way as a chair and the state of chair-being-absent are relative. To perceive objects only outwardly means to see in terms of their shapes and forms, colors, tastes, and so on. The cause of our liking or disliking stems from this way of seeing things. Such liking or disliking things re\u00ac sembles a cancerous growth. It covers our heart and mind to the point that the light of lokuttara-dhamma, the su\u00ac pramundane state, can hardly penetrate. To see introvert- edly or to perceive the interior of mundane things, on the other hand, means to see in terms of their true char\u00ac acteristics, which allows us to transcend likes and dis\u00ac likes."}
{"id": "x-toward-the-truth", "title": "Toward the truth", "year": 1971, "seq": 7, "text": "To train the mind or to get control over the mind is not only the most important way to gain insight but also a simple process. Few people care to undertake it, however, for it seems to be overly difficult and beyond the power of the material\u00ac istic-minded man of our age. It is simple because the mind can be trained step by step if one earnestly wants to do so, in the same way that a person can develop his body by proper exercise. As we have often heard, the mind is fickle and flighty, quite resembling a monkey. In order to subjugate the monkey, the trainer ties the mon\u00ac key to a strong stake. To train the mind there must like\u00ac wise be a stake or focal ground. The most commonly known point of focus or subject of meditation, which the Buddha himself practiced and praised, is anapanasati , mindfulness of breathing. It is convenient and produces a calm state. We can practice it anywhere and at any time. With this meditation subject, inhalation and ex\u00ac halation are the points on which the mind is fixed. Sad (mindfulness) may be likened to a rope that ties the mind to the stake of breathing. Sampajahna, or discrimi\u00ac nation, is like the trainer\u2019s whip which prevents the mind from going its own way. Unless one is negligent, the rope of mindfulness will remain unbroken, and the mind, like the monkey tied with a rope, will not get loose to leap into the jungle of sense objects. The uncontrolled mind is like a wild animal. For ex\u00ac ample, an elephant that is caught to be tamed dashes to and fro trying to wrench himself free, sometimes so vio- 44 TOWARD THE TRUTH lently that the rope cuts into its flesh. When it was in the jungle it did not behave in this violent manner, as it was not then subject to any restraint; nor when it is well tamed does it behave fiercely, but becomes gentle."}
{"id": "x-toward-the-truth", "title": "Toward the truth", "year": 1971, "seq": 8, "text": "The moment we arrive at this stage, the mind is completely freed from the unwhole\u00ac some mental objects which are technically called the five nivarana-s or mental hindrances of lust, ill will, torpor and sloth, restlessness and mental worry, and doubt. This taste of meditation is powerful enough to check all unwholesome phenomena and create a calm satisfaction. The Fruit of Meditation The fruit of meditation is twofold. The first fruit is a new kind of happiness that we have never experienced before. This happiness is not based on sense objects which can only stimulate an emotional happiness leading to suffering. The happiness derived from meditation is inexpressibly cool or calm. We may say that it is like tasting the attainment of Nibbana or of freedom from the defilements. Although Nibbana has not yet been attained, this happiness may presumably be compared to TOWARD THE TRUTH OF BUDDHISM 49 its foretaste, the only differences being those of subtlety and quantity. This is the first fruit of meditation. It is technically called dittha-dhammikattha or immediate profit. If a person\u2019s energy is exhausted after having reached this stage, his effort will not be totally in vain. With the second fruit of meditation the mind reaches a penetrating insight into all phenomena, for practicing meditation is like sharpening a knife for exact cutting or like polishing a glass so as to see clearly. A well-trained mind is amenable like a tame monkey or elephant. It is active, strong, and unwavering under the impulses of passion, anger, hate, and envy. Such a mind cannot be overpowered by these defilements. Instead of succumbing to their power, the meditator laughs with the certain knowledge that the well-trained mind cannot be dis\u00ac tracted. When your mind is endowed with these two fruits of meditation, immediate profit and penetrating insight, you see the world through inward sight."}
{"id": "x-toward-the-truth", "title": "Toward the truth", "year": 1971, "seq": 9, "text": "Henceforth nothing in the world can attack you through your sense organs. Nothing can lead the eye, nose, ear, tongue, or body into temptation. The mind will be freed from all kinds of attachments. All worldly objects or allurements will ap\u00ac pear to be ludicrous and can be laughed away. You will feel as if the world as a whole were reduced to something completely within your grasp. The world cannot delude you when you see its inner or real nature. If you can establish your mind in this state and not lose your inward sight, no matter where you are or what posture you as\u00ac sume, your attainment will be stable. But without such skill your newly won intuition may easily fade away; therefore, you must guard it with all your effort. As the Scriptures say, just as a chief queen takes care of the 50 TOWARD THE TRUTH child in her womb who will one day be a \u201cwheel-turning monarch\u201d (a world emperor, ruling by righteousness) 8 lest she should have a miscarriage, so too one should guard diligently one\u2019s newly developed insight until it is stable. For its sake you should willingly give up worldly acquisitions in much the same way as we are ready to sacrifice everything upon contracting a fatal disease. To this end it is better to live in an environment suitable for meditation and avoid disagreeable persons and places, just as a sick person avoids taking things that disagree with him. The fruits of meditation should not be misunderstood, however. The practice of controlling the mind in this manner does not make you abnormal or unable to function in society. One does not sit meditating all the time, for after you have gained mastery through meditation its taste never leaves you. The defilements of passion, de\u00ac lusion, anger, hatred, and jealousy lose their control over you, so that whatever may be your occupation or pro\u00ac fession it can be done with greater self-sufficiency."}
{"id": "minimizingeffect1973weig", "title": "Minimizing the effects of insecticides on Montana's terrestrial wildlife, with special reference to game birds", "year": 1973, "seq": 0, "text": "The long term solution to grasshopper-livestock forage competition is proper range management. In Oklahoma, grasshoppers were eight times as abundant on overgrazed lands as on conservatively grazed lands (Weese In Rudd 1964:234). In Kansas, Smith (1958) found grasshoppers were more abundant on heavily grazed lands than on nearby ungrazed land. A study in British Columbia 50 years ago concluded: \"Judicious management of cattle within selected grazing limits is the keynote of success in grasshopper control on the range (Treherne and Bucknell In Rudd 1964:234). Drought conditions may continue to favor periodic grasshopper outbreaks even on well managed ranges. Restricted use of relatively \"safe\" insecticides can be justified in such cases. Continued use of insecticides to \"bail out\" the poor range manager cannot be endorsed. Carriers Problems occasionally arise from the type of insecticide-carrier employed. Pheasant eggs sprayed (on one side to simulate field application) with Number 1 diesel fuel resulted in complete embryo mortality (Kopischke, no date). This study concluded that oil-base carriers should not be used in areas where birds are nesting. Recommendations To minimize the effects of insecticides on wildlife two concepts must be recognized: 1. Insecticides are an environmental insult; they disrupt, in some manner, the natural processes of any given ecosystem; 2. Continued or increased ecosystem disruption can lead to a simplified, unnatural and unstable environment on which humans as well as wildlife depend for existence. Once these concepts are accepted it follows that insecticide use must be curtailed if their effects are to be minimized. The most important decision the land manager must make is whether the use of an insecticide is absolutely necessary. Changes in land management philosophy, which must precede changes in land use practices, could minimize the number of these decisions he may face in the future. When insecticide use is deemed absolutely necessary: 1. Insecticides causing the least environmental damage should be used; 2."}
{"id": "tomb-raider-ii-official-strategy-guide", "title": "Tomb Raider II Official Strategy Guide", "year": 1997, "seq": 0, "text": "How to Use This Book Tomb Raider II is all about puzzles. And so this book is all about solving them. The walkthroughs herein are detailed accounts of all Lara Croft\u2019s adventures in Tomb Raider II, from the Guardhouse Key to the final showdown for the Dagger of Xian, and all points in between. We break out every Secret for ease of access within each level section. And although there are only three Secrets per level, you might never find some of the more diaboli- cal hiding places without our help. (We're particularly proud of the Uzis in \"Bartoli's Hideout,\u201d and the M-16 through the trapdoor in the middle of the burner trap in ... Oh, but why spoil it? You'll see.) We'll start off with movement and combat tactics. Much of what you can accomplish in Tomb Raider II is next to impossible without a good grasp of Lara's movement para- meters, and a little consideration to applying each weapon in her arsenal appropriately. If you have a hard time grasping the basic Jump parameters via the sterling prose herein, take a quick side-trip to Lara's Home, accessible from the Title Screen menu. There's an obstacle course on the lawn, and Lara goes so far as to provide nar- ration for any aspect of it that causes you trouble. And, yes, Lara faces more foes in Tomb Raider II than in the original game, but that doesn't mean our heroine has traded in style and athleticism for a high body count. It figures that Lara would have to defend herself more vigorously en route to unraveling a mystery of epic proportions. For tips on weapon.selection and applications, see the second half of \"Movement and Combat\", There we highlight the tendencies of Lara's enemies, and offer specific combat recommendations and some movement insights gained from hundreds of hours of prowling the canals of Venice, the mountains of Tibet, and the briny deep."}
{"id": "tomb-raider-ii-official-strategy-guide", "title": "Tomb Raider II Official Strategy Guide", "year": 1997, "seq": 1, "text": "Lara Croft's world is very much her own, and it comes with a well-defined set of movement para- meters. Its that strict adherence to movement parameters\u2014the fact that Lara always jumps the same height and distance when certain keys are pressed\u2014that makes navigating through the game's most difficult movement puzzles possible. To that end, the walkthrough section of this book refers to specific movements\u2014and, more often, combinations of movements\u2014needed to defeat any movement puzzle. Lara Squared First, understand that the primary building block for all the levels in the game is a square sector. That\u2019s not to say that Lara\u2019s world entirely comprises square blocks, of course, but things very often are square\u2014or a readily recognizable collection of square sectors\u2014if you look at them from above. More to the point: If Lara can stand on it, and you can look down on it from above, what you'll see is a square. One edge may be higher than the opposite edge, or one corner may be higher than the opposite corner\u2014in either case creating a slope\u2014but it still looks square from above. The view from J altove: Laras world, in large part, it a Coeli of tidy Square sectors. Understanding this is key to understanding how Lara moves around in the world of Tomb Raider II. That's because when Lara jumps or steps or rolls or dives\u2014any horizontal action you can think of\u2014when she moves, she traverses a fixed number of squares (or segments of squares). So you can be sure that, if you're standing on one platform and trying to jump to another, all you have to do is come up with the prop- er movement commands. Lara will wind up wherever you intend, as long as it's with- in her ability to do so."}
{"id": "tomb-raider-ii-official-strategy-guide", "title": "Tomb Raider II Official Strategy Guide", "year": 1997, "seq": 2, "text": "Because so many of Lara\u2019s movement puzzles require precise aim as well as precise timing, it becomes important to point Lara in precisely the right direction. With Tomb Raider II's camera style, it's sometimes unclear from the view if such is the case. To check, simply hold down the Look button to swing the camera directly behind our heroine. Whatever you're aiming her at should appear center-screen. If it's an edge, it should make an almost perfectly horizontal line. To make adjustments, you have to release the Look button and re-position Lara with the directional commands; then check the view once more. Held down the book lotto te Cande the CAMA EV fe angle te swivel le di Press and hold the Action button to have Lara grab the edge of any ledge, and even the edges of some platforms she can't stand on, as long as the edge doesn't slope too radically. Place her at the base of a platform that's with- in her reach and press Action and Forward. Lara will leap. up to the exact height of the ledge and grab hold. This can be far more effective than combining Jump and Grab commands, because Jumping can over- shoot the ledge, and Lara would fall briefly before Grabbing. Although that's dan- gerous only if you're trying to leap from hazardous terrain, it's worth noting. In the rare instances where you want to Grab a ledge without Pulling Up, you must combine Jump and Grab commands. Otherwise Lara automatically tries to stand atop the ledge she's Grabbed hold of. Most often, Grab occurs in the walk- through after a specific type of Jump, and before a command like Shimmy or Pull Up. DOTT Tomb Raider II gives Lara a wide range of water-related movement options she lacked in the first game."}
{"id": "tomb-raider-ii-official-strategy-guide", "title": "Tomb Raider II Official Strategy Guide", "year": 1997, "seq": 3, "text": "In the original Tomb Raider, water came in one depth, practically speaking: If Lara was wet, she was completely submerged. In Tomb Raider Il, pools come in various depths, and quite a few are only knee- or waist-deep. When wading, learn the point where Lara has complete freedom for Jumping and Running, and the point where such movements are restricted: When Lara turns from her regular pinkish hue to a distinc- tive bluish one, consider her restricted in terms of certain movement parameters. Once she's blue, she can only Jump straight up in the air; you can't combine the move with some forward, backward, or Sideways component. Plus, she can only wade in waist-deep water, not swim. Try as you might, there's no way to get her to submerge in waist-deep water and move in any direction before she pops back to BH us the surface. f e \u00ed Pull Up/Drop Down Pull Up is just that\u2014Lara pulling herself up to the top of a ledge. As she hangs from a ledge (and, therefore, as you hold the Action button down), press the Forward com- mand and Lara will attempt to stand atop the ledge she\u2019s gripping. If the slope above is too steep, she'll slip back down, and you'll have to keep holding the Action button to keep her from falling. Also note that, in the brief instance after Lara Pulls Up and before she slips off of a steep slope, it's possible for her to execute a backflip by pressing Jump and Backward simultaneously. In the walkthrough, Pull Up usually appears in sequence after a Jump or Shimmy. Drop Down is the process whereby Lara hangs from a ledge, by Grabbing, before dropping to the floor below. This way, Lara can drop from ledges free of harm, when hopping from the height outright would injure her."}
{"id": "tomb-raider-ii-official-strategy-guide", "title": "Tomb Raider II Official Strategy Guide", "year": 1997, "seq": 4, "text": "Once she begins her Push or Pull animation, you $ - . can take your hands off the controls, and she'll complete the process on her own. Shimmy As she hangs from a ledge\u2014and you hold down the Action button\u2014Lara can Shimmy right or left when you press the right or left directional arrows. In the walkthrough, of course, that occurs as Shimmy Right or Shimmy Left. After you Shimmy, you either Drop Down or Pull Up, after avoiding some hazard or gaining some new area you couldn't reach directly by Jumping. The Tomb Raider II concept of combos is nothing like what Mortal Kombat fans are familiar with, in terms of results. But combining Lara\u2019s various moves properly is nonetheless a key to ultimate success. In the text of the walkthrough, we separate movements Lara must perform in rapid succession with a forward slash (for example, Jump Forward/Grab/Pull Up). Depending on circumstances, it can be crucial you combine and execute these moves with no lag time between. Usually, you must defeat some timer and/or avoid some hazard. But combining certain moves involves considerations beyond simply getting from point A to point B expeditiously. Run/Jump Forward As important as Jumping is in Tomb Raider II, preceding Lara\u2019s leap with a Run is just as commonplace and crucial. When Lara Runs a single sector before becoming airborne, she can travel considerably farther\u2014crossing two squares as opposed to one. This allows her to cross two squares and land on her feet at the same elevation, as opposed to Grabbing some ledge. Her trajectory will be lower than with a standing Jump Forward. Run/Jump Forward/Grab With this series of movements, Lara soars over three squares and grabs the edge of the fourth square. This is an essential means of travel in Tomb Raider II, and though it looks risky while you're in midair, remember that as long as you hit the commands at the right time, there's no error factor."}
{"id": "tomb-raider-ii-official-strategy-guide", "title": "Tomb Raider II Official Strategy Guide", "year": 1997, "seq": 5, "text": "Hold that Action button down, and she'll cling to that distant ledge. Of course, leaping farther and Grabbing as soon as Lara becomes airborne flattens the trajectory considerably. And the target ledge can be no higher than the one on which Lara begins her run. Pull Up/Jump Backward Another very useful combination is the one where Lara backflips from the edge of a plat- form that slopes too much for her to stand on. By Grabbing the edge of a sloped platform and then Pulling Up, Lara hesitates just a minute when she gets upright before she slips back down again. As soon as she begins the Pull Up, press Jump and Backward and hold them down and Lara will backflip from the ledge instead of slipping off. This is essen- tial for reaching some of the game's more difficult-to-access areas. Roll/Grab/Drop Down Tired of having to walk in a little semicircle before you hop and hang from every ledge? Just take two steps back, and then Roll and Grab. Lara hangs from the ledge you faced, and you're free to Drop Down to the area below. | | | Walk/Jump Forward (Dive) By holding down the Walk button and then Jumping Forward, you can make Lara dive. Although getting into small holes sometimes requires a dive's trajectory, often this is something you do just for style\u2014and to avoid screaming like a banshee as you fall a considerable distance into water. You can also dive on solid ground, but it's practical only a couple of times during the game. And if the drop in elevation is more than a few feet (relatively), Lara snaps her pretty neck. Walk/Forward/Action (Handstand) Hold down the Walk button and press the Forward arrow and the Action button at the base of a ledge and Lara will ascend via the Handstand, as opposed to the regular Pull Up animation."}
{"id": "tomb-raider-ii-official-strategy-guide", "title": "Tomb Raider II Official Strategy Guide", "year": 1997, "seq": 6, "text": "Many-Legged Foes (includes: Dobermans, Tigers, Leopards, Rats, Spiders) Another large category of Tomb Raider II opponents is the four-legged vari- ety\u2014and, on occasion, eight-legged. Most of these enemies appear in bunches, and most are much quicker than humans. Of course, you want to stay out of their way. But more than that, you want to kill them quickly, especially if there's nothing nearby to climb. You're just not going to have time to plink away at one while another gnaws your kneecaps. Our recommen- dation here has more to do with weapon selection than anything else: The Shotgun at very close range, or the Automatic Pistols if you have a few seconds to get them out. In targeting packs of pooches or couples of kitties, shoot the closest enemy. By let- ting go of the Action button briefly, you can re-select Lara's target. Sometimes you'll find that the Doberman or Leopard initially closest will pause in its advance, and you'll keep plugging away at that one while another rushes up to do damage. Keep an eye on the pack, and, if one lags, make sure you save it for last. Airborne Foes (includes: Crows, Eagles) The feathered fiends of Tomb Raider II don't require a lot of tactical analysis. You just have to get them in your sight and get off a few good shots to send them fluttering earthward. Still, it's worth noting that they cast shadows a couple of seconds before attacking\u2014a welcome tip-off\u2014and tend to travel in pairs or flocks. They'll also attempt to circle around behind you, so give Lara room to backpedal, and don't overlook the Roll as a means of quickly changing direction. Underwater Combat (includes: all enemies that swim) Our first note on underwater combat is the biggy."}
{"id": "tomb-raider-ii-official-strategy-guide", "title": "Tomb Raider II Official Strategy Guide", "year": 1997, "seq": 7, "text": "Don't do it unless you absolutely must. f The thing is, fish of all kinds travel in schools, and there\u2019s just & not enough time to kill three Barracudas. Two invariably close the 23 gap while you're hurling Harpoons at another. Get out of the water and shoot them from the shore, or Lara's probably fish bait. Sharks: Tough to kill before they close the gap, and fully capable of killing our heroine with one chomp. Swim in a straight line to get away from them, only dodging if you're swimming directly at one, or if one behind you opens its mouth to take a bite. Frogmen: It's possible to *dogfight\" with one in a large underwater area, but two (or more) are real trouble. They shoot Harpoons very rapidly, while Lara must pause LOS RAS E EE aines PEERS A Ki after every third shot to reload her own Harpoon Gun. If more than one is present, head for shore and whip out the heavy artillery on solid ground. If you're fighting with one, swim away from him. When you hear the plink of his weapon, change direc- tion quickly, and the Harpoon will miss the mark. When you've opened up a gap, Roll and fire. Lara\u2019s Arsenal Only a few weapons from the original Tomb Raider made it to the sequel, and some of the new toys provide its biggest combat thrills. A few notes, then, on properly applying Lara\u2019s arsenal, culled from extensive field tests. Pistols Use them whenever you can to conserve the other weapons\u2019 ammo. Use them to shoot fish in pools when you\u2019re standing on the shore, or enemies with no distance attack who face some structural impediment to closing the gap. Shotgun Use on packs of animals and on nearby human foes."}
{"id": "tomb-raider-ii-official-strategy-guide", "title": "Tomb Raider II Official Strategy Guide", "year": 1997, "seq": 8, "text": "As soon as you're on dry land, get mobile. Use the green terrain near the base of the Great Wall, and then Jump Up/Pull Up to reach the top to return to the locked Guardhouse door. Fig. |-4, The 4uardlonse Key waits BEC An WISMETivA Lev cave, in the nal valley lelow the Great Wall. Guardhouse Step back as you open the Guardhouse door and deal with the nasty group of Spiders that scuttle in your direction. Even after you can enter the Guardhouse without tar- geting arachnids, you'll hear those scuttling sounds. That's because there's one last pest up the ladder. It guards the Rusty Key that fits in the lock beside the interior Guardhouse door. Cobwebbed Hall/Skeleton Room Put the Rusty Key in the lock and traverse the hallway toward a room with a Skeleton. It lies near some Shotgun Shells and a Large Medi Pack. More Spiders drop in front of you as you enter the room, and another creeps up from behind. If you Roll when the Spiders drop into the room ahead, you can charge the one in the hall- way before turning to deal with the room\u2019s inhabitants. Pull the block and exit the room, sliding down a slope to a landing near a pool of water. Dart Trap Hop into the pool, turn left and wade over to the wall. Jump Up/Grab/Shimmy Right to the far corner to avoid the dart trap. Swim beneath the water to the exit, surfacing in the corner to avoid the @ darts coming from the center of the doorway. Pull Up into the hall- \u00a5 way, and save the game. \u2014 Rolling Boulders This is Tomb Raider IPs first real test. In the hallway ahead, 4} collapsing panels lie over pits of spikes. You must hurry over @ the panels and through the door at the far end of the hall, which seals behind you."}
{"id": "tomb-raider-ii-official-strategy-guide", "title": "Tomb Raider II Official Strategy Guide", "year": 1997, "seq": 9, "text": "You must charge down the hall, Jumping Forward over each blade in rapid succession. Once you make it past this initial gauntlet, you must deal with another set of crushing spiked walls. How you deal with them depends on whether or not you intend to stop for the level\u2019s second Secret. If not, simply zig left into the relative safety of the hallway beyond. There are collapsing panels in the floor there, as well, but the walls that threaten to close in and spike you actually stop halfway: You're safe if you stick to the right side of the hall. Hall of Spikes Stick to the right wall, and traverse the hallway with spikes closing in from the left. Panels collapse as you pass. Stop shy of the ramp at the end of the hall and pivot on the edge of the decline. Slide Backward/Hang/Drop/Jump Right to land on another collapsing panel that deposits Lara safely as another spiked wall closes in the room above. SECRET Secret 2: Jade Dragon Claiming the Jade Dragon from its obvious spot in the hallway is a risky endeavor. The trick is to run down the preceding hallway (the one with the blade traps) along the right wall. When you jump the last blade trap, Jump Forward and hold down the Left directional button. That should bend your trajectory in midair and deposit you atop the Jade Dragon. Press the Action button to claim the prize quickly and move into the adjacent hallway before the spiked walls can close. Cross the initial collapsing panels and hug the right wall: The spiked walls that threaten to puncture Lara from the left will stop halfway, so she\u2019s safe keeping to the right. Rolling Blades Step into the cavern and Walk Forward until you can bend down for the Small Medi Pack."}
{"id": "things-of-science-1970-electricity", "title": "Things Of Science (1970) Electricity", "year": 1970, "seq": 0, "text": "Gradually bring the rod toward the plastic strip. Note that it is repelled by the rod when it comes within a half inch or so of it. This is because a field of force exists around a charged body, called an electrostatic or electric field. A force is exerted on any charged body that 8 enters an electric field. If it is oppositely charged it is attracted and if it has a like charge it is repelled. ELECTROMOTIVE FORCE If a greater number of electrons are present at one end of a wire than at the other, a potential difference exists between the two. An electrical pressure is set up that pushes the free electrons toward the end with fewer electrons. This force that causes electrons to move toward the area deficient in electrons is called the electromotive force or voltage. For an electric current to flow, the electrons must move and in order for them to move there must be a difference in potential. The main purpose of batteries and generators that supply our electricity is to create and maintain a potential differ\u00ac ence to provide a constant flow of current. By convention, an electric current is said to flow in the direction a positive charge would move, i.e., toward the nega\u00ac tive charge. However, the actual flow of electrons, as in metallic conductors, we now know, is in the opposite direction\u2014 the negative charges move toward the positive. In the experiments in this unit, therefore, we shall always consider the current as flowing in the direction taken by the electrons. 9 CHEMICAL ACTION Electricity may be produced by several means\u2014friction, mechanical action, chemi\u00ac cal action, heat, light, pressure and nuclear energy. Mechanical action and chemical action are the most common means of producing electric energy. Mechanical action is used to supply the electricity in our homes and chemical action produces the electricity from cells and batteries."}
{"id": "things-of-science-1970-electricity", "title": "Things Of Science (1970) Electricity", "year": 1970, "seq": 1, "text": "The repelled hydrogen ions eventually come in contact with the copper. When this happens, each hydrogen ion takes on an electron from the copper wire causing the wire to be\u00ac come positively charged. Two hydrogen atoms combine to form hydrogen gas (H 2 ) seen as bubbles on the copper wire. The acetate ions (Ac - ) may combine with either the copper or zinc ions to form copper acetate and zinc acetate. Some of the copper ions are repelled by the zinc ions and return to the copper wire, pick up electrons and return to their solid state. As a result of these actions, an excess of electrons occurs at the zinc terminal and a deficiency at the copper end and an electromotive force is set up due to the potential difference. A flow of the excess electrons from the zinc to the copper terminal occurs along the insulated wire. These electrons are taken up by hydrogen ions and some of the copper ions. The zinc continues to go into solution, replacing the loss and at the same time pushing hydrogen and copper ions toward the copper terminal. The flow of electrons will continue until the zinc is all used up or the circuit is broken. You have constructed in this experiment, 13 the simplest form of electrochemical cell, called a primary cell. The copper and zinc are the electrodes, connected by an ex\u00ac ternal conductor (the insulated wire), and the acetic acid is the electrolyte. You can form a primary cell in a similar way using almost any two different metals, and a suitable electrolyte. Some metals ionize more readily than others and in making an electrochemical cell, the metals are chosen according to their relative activi\u00ac ties. The elements have been arranged in a table according to their tendency to ionize. This is known as the electromotive series."}
{"id": "things-of-science-1970-electricity", "title": "Things Of Science (1970) Electricity", "year": 1970, "seq": 2, "text": "The negative electrode is zinc, shaped into a can to hold the electrolyte, a solution of zinc chloride and ammonium chloride in water with manganese dioxide added to prevent bubbles from accumulating on the carbon rod. A dry cell is not really dry. It is called a dry cell because the electrolyte has been made into a paste so that it cannot spill. Electrochemical cells like those used in automobiles in which the solution is in liquid form are wet cells. The potential difference of a particular type of dry cell is always the same, whether large or small. The size of a cell does not affect its electromotive force and there\u00ac fore, its voltage, since the potential differ\u00ac ence is determined by the chemical re\u00ac action resulting from the composition of the electrodes and the nature of the electro\u00ac lyte. If you examine the wrapper on dry cells of different sizes, you will find that they are all marked 1.5 volts. Making a cell larger, however, will increase the amount of current it can deliver because there are more ions present to do the work. Although single cells are often called batteries, technically a battery consists of two or more cells. 16 If you wish to obtain more power, you may connect several cells together in series and form a battery. When cells are ar\u00ac ranged in series, the voltage of each cell is added to that of the others. With three cells, you would have a battery of 3 x 1.5 volts or 4.5 volts (Fig. 3). \u2014WV\u2014 3 load or resistance (R) Fig. 3 Batteries may also be formed by con necting the cells in parallel (Fig. 4). Fig. 4 In a parallel connection, all the negative terminals are connected together and all the positive terminals are joined. The emf of this battery is the same as that of a single cell and, therefore, is equal to 1.5 volts."}
{"id": "montereynews1988unse_4", "title": "Monterey news", "year": 1988, "seq": 0, "text": "In an effort to address this diversity the program will include New Orleans Dixieland, contemporary and fusion jazz, and jazz Brazilian style. As we have in the past, the council is working to bring the best available talent to Monterey; we have had to set the dates to suit those of these performers. As of now the program will begin on Friday evening, August 12, with the gala art show opening and reception. Included will be chamber music, jazz, and refreshments. Saturday, August 13, will be JAZZ from noon to early evening with three or four groups ina variety of jazz styles. On Sunday the art show will continue until three in the afternoon. The council is now preparing its annual mailing with all the details. Watch for it some time in late June or early July. \u2014 The Monterey Arts Council MONTEREY RESIDENT RELEASES FIRST RECORDING \u00ab Safe to Dream by Anson Olds presents his musical skills as contemporary folk singer, composer, guitar flat-picker and yodeler. Of special interest are five songs composed by Anson since he has been a Berkshire resident. Several other Monterey people assisted in the creation of the album including Bonner McAllester on hammered dul- cimer and Melinda Olds, recently of Monterey, on harmony. Storrs Olds co-produced the recording with Anson, and Emily Hyatt composed one of the songs as well as doing the photog- raphy for the record jacket. The Monterey Arts Council made a generous grant to Anson to assist in the cost of pro- ducing the album. Anson has been pursuing, for over ten years, his single-minded goal of being a skilled musician and performer. To implement this, he studied American music at The Evergreen State College in Olympia, Washington, and studied under champion guitar flat-picker Roger Ferguson and champion yodeler Bill Staines."}
{"id": "montereynews1988unse_4", "title": "Monterey news", "year": 1988, "seq": 1, "text": "From Cairo she went to Vir- ginia for two years of college, until her parents considered her old enough for her real goal \u2014the Art Institute in the big city of Chicago. After three years of study in the non-commercial course, she took an additional year at the University of Chicago and emerged with a\u2019Bachelor of Fine Arts. That was followed by study with Reginald Marsh at the Art Students League in New York. Together with Marjorie McLaughlin, a fellow graduate of the Institute, she opened Gallery House in Chicago. It served as a showplace and salesroom for the work of other young artists and was partially supported by the sale of antiques. But it burned, quickly and totally, after three years. Since it had been their residence too, Edith and Marjorie were freed of all types of material possessions. They put their dog, their cat, and their car on a train a few months later and came to Monterey in April of 1942. Raymond Ensign, Dean of the Art Institute in Chicago and owner of Brookbend Inn in Monterey, had introduced them to the town, and they had previously spent two summers here in a rented cottage. Almost immediately in 1942 they bought the house, outbuildings, and land where they have lived ever since, remodeling, enlarging, and gardening. Edith has painted and sculpted steadily down the years. She has a strong talent for portraiture and reads and remembers faces as others read print. Her works have been exhibited, among other places, at the Art Institute of Chicago, Oakland Art Gallery, Cleveland School of Art, Yale University, and- the Thayer Museum. Three of her portraits in oil hang in the Illinois State Capitol building in Springfield. Many of her pictures appear to be allegorical: the figures stand in dramatic or ceremonial relation to each other and are sometimes surrounded by emblematic objects and animals."}
{"id": "montereynews1988unse_4", "title": "Monterey news", "year": 1988, "seq": 2, "text": "Watching these five closely, I have noticed one is dominant. He often chases the others, though not assiduously. Probably. this is the territorial male, the one we hear singing in the tree- tops. He will tolerate the other four in his territory as long as they refrain from singing. If they start, he will drive them off for good. | These grosbeaks arrive here in early May, after a migration from Central or South America. By this time our winter gros- beaks, the evening grosbeaks, have moved north to their own breeding grounds. We usually see the rose-breasteds high above the ground, in the tops of the tallest trees, because that is where they com- monly sing. But they nest much closer to the ground, building \u2014 loose twiggy structures in bushes and lower branches on the . edges of clearings or fields, about ten feet above the ground. The male and female work together on nest-building, incuba- tion, and care of the young, and both sexes sing. 2 3 It is unusual, in a species in which he is so gaudy, for the male to incubate the eggs. Most incubating male birds are pro- _ tectively colored so they won't give away the location of the nest. But these nests are always in such dense foliage that they ! are difficult to spot, even with a carmine-breasted, high-contrast male on the eggs. Sometimes the males even risk singing on the nest: \u201cAt Concord, Mass., by the river side, there was at one time a nest in a tree that overhung the roof of the cabin, and the male bird sitting there commonly sang while on the nest. When a hawk flew overhead he continued to sing, but so reduced the volume of the song that it seemed to come from far away, rais- ing his voice again when the hawk had passed on."}
{"id": "montereynews1988unse_4", "title": "Monterey news", "year": 1988, "seq": 3, "text": "Eleanor Kimberley : MUCH DISCUSSION OVER BOAT RAMP ON BEACH At a public hearing held by the Monterey Conservation Commission on May 23 the Park Commission presented its Notice of Intent for a proposed boat access road across the southern end of the present Town Beach. As described in the Notice, the road will be 12 feet by 75 feet and will run adjacent to the fence between the beach and the Wilson/ McLaughlin property. Twelve inches of existing material will be removed and replaced by a stable combination of gravel and a blended material called \u201cairport mix.\u201d The road will provide entry to Lake Garfield from Tyringham Road to fishermen and duck hunters year round. However, it will only be open to motorized vehicles until June 15 of each year, remaining closed to these until September 1. This re- striction, the Park Commission feels, will enable swimmers to enjoy the beach undisturbed, except for hand-carried fish- ing boats and canoes, during the swimming season. No boats will be allowed to be refueled on the ramp, and there may be a restriction on size of motors allowed. Concern was expressed by the people who attended the hear- ing about safety, water pollution, increased wave action on the lake shores, parking, and the inappropriateness of the site as compared with other options. It was explained by Conservation Commissioner Jed Lipsky that some years ago, when the Town received state money to build a new road and dam on Lake Garfield, the obligation by the Town was to. provide a public boat ramp. One way or another the construction of that ramp has been postponed un- til now. Until this year, Kinne\u2019s Grove on Route 23 has pro- vided access to boats and sportsmen without restriction. Now | the owners of Kinne\u2019s Grove have limited the use of their ramp to residents of Lake Garfield, fishing boats, sailboats and canoes."}
{"id": "montereynews1988unse_4", "title": "Monterey news", "year": 1988, "seq": 4, "text": "Then back to the Keys to stay five months. Tim spent Chri \u2018 mas there with me, and my two nephews, both New Englande 5 and their families, visited me in the sun. Now I'm getting anxious to get home: getting my own na! from Wally, coffee at the store, the smell of the forest, and being with all my friends. ; Sincerely (and also lo\\ Joan W. Reed MONTEREY WASTELINES - In case you weren\u2019t at the Annual Town Meeting (you had a \u2018death in the family, say, or the cows got out), let me tell you that the good citizens went ahead and passed an old-fashioned recycling ordinance for our future solid waste handling. Some- where about the end of the year or early next year (the Select- men will announce when we will start) the state-owned plant in Springfield will be ready and we will start saving a separate trash can of tin cans, bottles & jars, foil, and certain other things, all mixed together. When we go to the transfer station we'll toss this co-mingled recrement in a separate dumpster, and it will get hauled to Springfield. We won't pay any tipping fees at all on that junk, and it will be cleaned up and sorted by machine and by workers, and sold to industries which can use the materials. This is an exciting program, and Monterey is in good com- pany supporting it. Sandisfield, Sheffield, Stockbridge and a bunch of other towns all over western Massachusetts have signed on, too. It will take some work later by all of us. But for the summer, let\u2019s congratulate ourselves on our civic wisdom and take a short break from garbage guilt. \u2014 Wayne Burkhart \u201cFREE TENNIS LESSONS On your court by Full-Time Teaching Pro (USPTR) 0 emcee ea Also: Free racket stringing in return for use of court for practice."}
{"id": "performanceanaly00send", "title": "Performance analysis of noncoherent DPSK with various diversity combining techniques over a Rician fading channel", "year": 1998, "seq": 0, "text": "The separation between successive time slots must equal or exceed the coherence time (A/)c of the channel. Here coherence time is defined as ML--5-. Bd (1) where Bd is the Doppler spread of the channel. A slowly fading channel provides a larger coherence time. Space diversity (antenna diversity), which is widely used because of its simple and economic implementation, uses a single transmitting antenna and several receiving antennas. The receiving antennas must be placed sufficiently apart to have significantly different propagation delays to each antenna. Generally a 10-wavelength separation between any two antennas is considered to be sufficient. Angle diversity (direction diversity) requires a set of directive antennas where each one responds independently to a wave to produce an uncorrelated faded signal. In Polarization diversity, only two diversity branches are available. This is achieved when signals that are transmitted use two orthogonal polarizations. The advantage of frequency and time diversity compared with space, angle and polarization diversity techniques is that the number of transmitting and receiving antennas does not need to be increased. On the other hand, they require a wider bandwidth. To obtain a performance improvement, the information from the diversity branches must be combined efficiently. For this purpose a number of powerful and robust diversity combining methods is examined to combine uncorrelated fading signals obtained from the diversity branches. Diversity combining can be accomplished before or after the signal detection. If the diversity combining is applied before the signal detection, it is called pre-detection combining. Conversely, if it is done after the signal detection, it is called post-detection combining. In reference 1, equal gain combining and different orders of selection combining techniques (SC, SC-2 and SC-3) are investigated for noncoherent Differential Phase Shift Keying (DPSK) in a Rayleigh fading channel. The bit-error rate performance of the diversity combining methods shows that combining the two or three largest signals (SC-2 or SC-3) offers significant performance improvement over just selecting the largest signal component and the performance improves as L increases."}
{"id": "nestar-file-transfer-servers-carry-loads-electronic-design-jun-82", "title": "Nestar File Transfer Servers Carry Loads Electronic Design Jun 82", "year": 1982, "seq": 0, "text": "Reprinted from ElecironicDesign OFTARE File-transfer servers carry big loads between LANs Large collections of data move efficiently from one local network to another, keeping distant offices closely linked. By transferring text, program, and data files be- tween work stations, local-area networks provide such automated services as data sharing, communications, and distributed processing within the office. The next step is to supply such services on an interoffice basis, by transferring files between different networks or between remote mainframes and local networks. But whereas the buffered packet-switching gateways nor- mally used between work stations are suitable for real-time exchanges of brief messages, they will prove inefficient for internetwork transfers of larger collec- tions of data. A more effective solution is specially programmed microcomputers called file-transfer servers. Packet-switching gateways transfer uninterpreted packets of bits, with no particular relationship nec- essary or recognized between packets and with no memory of previous operations. File-transfer servers, on the other hand, can recognize and manipulate whole, related collections of data compatible with high-level operating systems. Most local-area networks built around microcom- puters assign certain stations to the performance of specific network tasks (Fig. 1). For example, to allow users to share expensive peripherals, such as hard disks, all commands to access hard-disk data are ad- dressed to a station assigned to be a network file server. This microcomputer is the only machine that directly accesses data on the mass-storage devices in question. User work stations often communicate with server stations by creating request files that are stored on shared hard disks. For example, work stations shar- ing printers execute print-request software and cre- ate print requests via a file server (Fig. 2). A microcomputer assigned to be a print server runs Joseph Malone, Manager Nestar Systems Inc. 2585 E."}
{"id": "nestar-file-transfer-servers-carry-loads-electronic-design-jun-82", "title": "Nestar File Transfer Servers Carry Loads Electronic Design Jun 82", "year": 1982, "seq": 1, "text": "Bayshore Rd., Palo Alto, Calif. 94303 under applications software that allows the microcom- puter to control multiple printers. Print-request programs, run by the users, not only create print requests but also store them on system hard disks. The print server, via a network file server, reads these requests and fills them. Print-request files include such parameters as files to be printed, where on hard disks the files are to be found, printer setup (forms, ribbon, etc.) to be used, number of copies, page length, and page title. One or two file-server and print-server stations are usually sufficient to handle the needs of 30 or 40 user work stations on a given network. Gateway servers can help Should a user wish to communicate with a file server on another network, he may address his net- work file-server commands to a gateway server on his own network (Fig. 3). This machine, connected to both networks, functions as a real-time buffered packet repeater, relaying user keyboard information and re- quests from one network to another. If a user wishes to transfer text, data, or program files to or from storage devices on another network, the transfer command may be sent to a server station assigned to file-transfer activities. If the file-transfer server is connected to both networks, it can accom- plish all requested transfers by itself. If the second network is remote, the first file-transfer server may be connected via a modem or other communications link to the second one. Server work stations are software-intensive. In fact, network performance, often presented in terms of hardware and compatible operating systems, is quite sensitive to such server work station software, and may be degraded if it is poorly written. In a typical implementation, user and server sta- tions bootstrap according to a hierarchy of start-up files (both text and program) stored on shared system disks ( Fig. 4)."}
{"id": "nestar-file-transfer-servers-carry-loads-electronic-design-jun-82", "title": "Nestar File Transfer Servers Carry Loads Electronic Design Jun 82", "year": 1982, "seq": 2, "text": "Each type station maintains a set of virtual volumes in the shared memory; these are for- matted to look like floppy disks and contain the sta- tions\u2019 current operating systems, start-up files, data, text, and programs. Systems & Software: LAN file-transfer servers At power-on, the station automatically bootstraps from a ROM chip within it, and reads its network profile file. This file contains the name of the station\u2019s boot volume, whether the volume is to be boot- strapped automatically or not, access rights to be set for the station\u2019s volumes, the names of any shared network library volumes, and the station\u2019s name. Next, any start-up commands on the station\u2019s boot- strap volume are read and executed. These commands will specify which portions of the network\u2019s mass stor- age are to be made automatically accessible and which application programs are to be loaded and executed. In turnkey applications, consequently, the user need only turn on the work station. Automatic boots- trapping, profiling, and start-up files then configure the station automatically, setting system defaults and bringing the appropriate application prompting mes- sages onto the screen. Programs for server stations are loaded and run automatically in the same way. Command files and Cartridge tape backup Dual 8-in. floppy disk 14-in. Winchester disk Network Apple Il configuration commands within the program set the system parameters that determine the schedule of server activities (for example, how often electronic mail will be forwarded to a remote network). File-transfer servers run in two modes, which may overlap: a periodic, scheduled mode controlled by com- mand files and time-ordered command queues; and a demand-transfer mode controlled by real-time user input of commands and schedules (Fig. 5). In the scheduled mode, the program, using a net- work clock-calendar, checks shared memory for files (via the file servers) to be moved to other shared storage devices either on the same network or another network or to any CPU on those networks."}
{"id": "nestar-file-transfer-servers-carry-loads-electronic-design-jun-82", "title": "Nestar File Transfer Servers Carry Loads Electronic Design Jun 82", "year": 1982, "seq": 3, "text": "Data and program files on a local network are accessed via a microcomputer assigned to be a network file server. Real-time, buffered packet-switching with other networks and mainframes occurs using a microcomputer assigned to be a gateway server. A file-transfer server is used to move files between networks and to or from mainframes. Systems & Software: LAN file-transfer servers Say a branch office needs to obtain new product data from the main office immediately. A request is addressed to the file-transfer server, which passes it along to the main office. The required product infor- mation can be returned in the same way. Remote com- munications are available through dial-up, leased, and hard-wired communications circuits. In either mode, the FTS acts as a compiler and executer, keeping a time-ordered queue of commands to execute (Fig. 5). The two modes may overlap if, for example, a user Action on peripheral or internetwork transfer Server station Automatic bootstrap Server station profile Start command text file Application program files Application command files Format files Virtual volume issues a request that requires scheduled operations. In today\u2019s corporate world, mainframes own the data, and local-area networks frequently serve as data- analysis tools and adjuncts to the mainframes. In such systems, central mainframes and their connected lo- cal-area networks also provide support for branch- office local-area networks. These distributed branch networks receive administrative and product infor- mation daily from the central site and return sales and inventory information. User station Automatic bootstrap ROM ROM User station profile Data and commands Start command text file Application defaults text file User application program files Virtual volume Data and commands File server 4. User and server microcomputers run under network-application software. A nested series of start-up bootstrap programs allows fully secure turnkey systems."}
{"id": "nestar-file-transfer-servers-carry-loads-electronic-design-jun-82", "title": "Nestar File Transfer Servers Carry Loads Electronic Design Jun 82", "year": 1982, "seq": 4, "text": "Wait for next event Construct time- ordered queue of real-time or one-time-only request file events Requeue event for later action Check for incoming request Discard event 5. File-transfer servers run in two modes, which may overlap: a periodic, sheduled mode controlled by command files and time-ordered command queues; and a demand- transfer mode controlled by real-time user input of commands and schedules. Systems & Software: LAN file-transfer servers fault parameters, may be overridden by direct user transmissions to the FTS station, or by an FTS dis- covery of a set of request-for-service files that previ- ously have been created by users on the network\u2019s shared hard disks. In general, software for a file-transfer server is not particularly sensitive to the language in which it is written, although the low-level network access drivers and the drivers for communication-line access should be written in low-level language. Otherwise, the soft- ware need only be compatible with the operating sys- tem under which the server is running. It is important, however, that the file-transfer server understand all network protocols for naming files. In the case of the Cluster One system, file nam- ing is hierarchical, so that, the file-transfer server can manipulate complete trees and subtrees of network file server files with one command. In addition, the FTS will need to manipulate files formatted for use within various operating systems. Creates a message User (mail file) station 1 (sends message to user Stations 2, 3, and 4) Ret (reads and files messages) User station File server Branch office network Its software must know the internal structure of op- erating system disks in order to be able to extract and move files from within them. The software also must provide security and access control. Within the network, the network file server maintains a secure file system with controlled access governed by passwords."}
{"id": "FM34130IntelligencePreparationOfTheBattlefield", "title": "FM 34 130 Intelligence Preparation Of The Battlefield", "year": 1994, "seq": 0, "text": "It describes IPB, its use in directing the intelligence effort, and its role in driving the staff's planning for contingencey or combat operations. It prescribes the procedures followed in performing IPB and illustrates the application of IPB in various situations. This manual is intended to serve as a guide for the use of IPB by units of all types, at all echelons, across the entire spectrum of conflict, and during the conduct of any mission. It does not contain all the data required to conduct IPB, such as specific information on threat doctrine or equipment capabilities. Rather, it is intended as a guide for applying the fundamentals of the IPB process to any situation. No part of this document should be construed as limiting commanders' freedom of action or committing commanders to a fixed or particular course of action (COA). Nor should it be construed to imply that all IPB products must be prepared by all commands in all situations. Commanders should apply the doctrine and information presented in this manual in any manner appropriate to their particular situation and mission. This manual is intended for Army commanders and staffs at all echelons. It applies equally to the Active Component (AC), United States Army Reserve (USAR), and Army National Guard (ARNG). It is also intended to be of use to commanders and staffs of joint and combined commands; Marine and Naval forces; units of the Air Force; and the military forces of allied countries. This field manual is printed in multicolors to clearly portray the IPB process. This color is unique to this manual and is not to be confused or related to the color keys normally associated with standard topographical symbols. This manual does not implement any International Standardization Agreements. Unless this publication states otherwise, masculine nouns and pronouns do not refer exclusively to men."}
{"id": "FM34130IntelligencePreparationOfTheBattlefield", "title": "FM 34 130 Intelligence Preparation Of The Battlefield", "year": 1994, "seq": 1, "text": "This is a listing and discussion of the COAs available to the threat. These COAs should exactly correspond with the enemy COA models developed in step 4 of the IPB process. 1-5 FM 34-130 Paragraph 5, CONCLUSIONS, is derived from the evaluations made during the IPB process. Here you summarize the effects of the battlefield environment on friendly and enemy COAs, list the set of probable threat COAs (in order of probability of adoption), and list the threat's exploitable vulnerabilities. IPB and the Decision Making Process Commanders and staffs use the decision making process to select a COA and develop an operations plan (OPLAN), operations order (OPORD), or fragmentary order (FRAGO) that implements it. The results and products of IPB, conveyed in the intelligence estimate, are essential elements of the decision making process. Accordingly, the major IPB effort occurs before and during the first of five steps in the decision making process. The decision making process is a dynamic and continuous process. The staff continues to estimate the situation as the operation progresses, adapting the command's COA to unforeseen changes in the situation. The IPB which supports the decision making process must also remain dynamic, constantly integrating new information into the initial set of facts and assumptions. The relatio nship of the IPB process to each step in the decision making process is discussed below (see Figure 1-1). Mission Analysis: In this step IPB products enable the commander to assess facts about the battlefield and make assumptions about how friendly and threat forces will interact on the battlefield. The description of the battlefield's effects identifies constraints on potential friendly COAs and may reveal implied missions. It also identifies opportunities the battlefield environment presents, such as avenues of approach, engagement areas, and zones of entry, which the staff integrates into potential friendly COAs ana their staff estimates."}
{"id": "FM34130IntelligencePreparationOfTheBattlefield", "title": "FM 34 130 Intelligence Preparation Of The Battlefield", "year": 1994, "seq": 2, "text": "Battlefield areas. 2-5 FM 34-130 each of the characteristics of the battlefield environment you identified as exerting an influence on available COAs or command decisions. Base the limits of the AI on the ability of the threat to project power or move forces into the AO. Also consider the geographical locations of other activities or characteristics of the environment which might influence COAs or the commander's decisions. Consider also any anticipated future mission or \"be prepared\" and \"on order\" missions identified during mission analysis, and determine their effect on the limits of the AI. Finally, consider changes in the command's battle space as a result of maneuver. An additional consideration would be to divide the AI into several components, such as a ground AI, an air AI, or a political AI. Such a division accommodates the types of information relevant in each AI as well as their usually different geographical limits. The air AI, for example, is usually larger than the ground AI. Within this extensive area, however, only activity related to the projection of air power is of interest. Although you might develop ana consider the various Als separately, at some point you must consider them as an integrated whole to ensure that you present the commander with a complete, integrated description of the battlefield. For the air AI, include a consideration of altitude. When conducting air defense related IPB, the AI should extend upwards to the maximum service ceiling of the threat's aircraft. When conducting aviation related IPB, the AI should extend to the maximum service ceiling of the friendly aircraft or the maximum effective altitude of threat air defense systems, whichever is greater. One of the primary considerations in establishing the limits of the AI is time. Base the time limit not only on the threat's mobility, both ground and air, but also on the amount of time needed to accomplish the friendly mission."}
{"id": "FM34130IntelligencePreparationOfTheBattlefield", "title": "FM 34 130 Intelligence Preparation Of The Battlefield", "year": 1994, "seq": 3, "text": "Although observation is essential to effective control of fire, the best observation does not guarantee the best field of fire; you must also consider the availability of cover. For indirect fire weapons, consider only the nature of the terrain in the target area and the amount of protection it provides from those weapons. Combine the analysis of each factor limiting observation and fields of fire into a single product. This is usually an overlay with areas of poor observation and fields of fire marked by parallel diagonal lines or cross-hatching. It identifies the areas where a unit is vulnerable to observation by intelligence collection systems or engagement by threat forces. Use these products to help you identify potential engagement areas and evaluate A As. To complete the analysis, identify areas that offer positions overmatching areas of vulnerability. This helps you to identify defensible terrain, potential battle positions, and possible locations for intelligence collectors. If time and resources permit, prepare terrain factor overlays to aid in evaluating observation and fields of fire. Consider the following: \u2022 Vegetation or building height and density. \u2022 Canopy or roof closure. \u2022 Relief features, including micro-relief features such as defiles (elevation tinting techniques are helpful). \u2022 Friendly and threat target acquisition and sensor capabilities. \u2022 Specific LOSs. Another technique which aids an evaluation of observation and fields of fire is to conductor request LOS studies. Some commands ( such as sign al units, MI units, and ADA units) have a great need for LOS analysis (see Figure 2-6), LOS studies aid in site selection for specific systems requiring direct LOS. Normally, you request or conduct LOS studies after the evaluation of the terrain's effects on observation have identified areas for likely employment of these systems. Concealment and Cover: Concealment is protection from observation. It can be provided by woods, underbrush, snowdrifts, tall grass, and cultivated vegetation."}
{"id": "FM34130IntelligencePreparationOfTheBattlefield", "title": "FM 34 130 Intelligence Preparation Of The Battlefield", "year": 1994, "seq": 4, "text": "Evaluating observation may require LOS analysis \u2022 Identify and evaluate AAs. \u2022 Identify defensible terrain and potential battle positions. \u2022 Identify potential assembly and dispersal areas. Concealment and cover are desirable for both the attack and the defense: \u2022 If an attacking force can move forward under concealment, the chances of achieving surprise increase. If a force can move protected from the threat's fire, the attack will be more effective. Concealed and covered approach routes are important to reconnaissance units, dismounted infantry, and insurgent or terrorist forces. 2-13 FM 34-130 \u2022 Defending forces seek to defend in an area which offers both concealment and cover to themselves but which does not provide covered approaches for the threat. Rear area units seek deployment areas and movement routes that are concealed from threat intelligence collection systems and provide cover from deep attack systems, including Levels I, II, and III rear area threats. Concealment and cover are desirable during force movements by any means. Units always seek to maximize\u2014 \u2022 The concealment and cover of their own forces. \u2022 Their observation and fields of fire into potential threat positions or threat AAs. Obstacles: Obstacles are any natural or manmade terrain features that stop, impede, or divert military movement. Some examples of obstacles to ground mobility are buildings, steep slopes, rivers, lakes, forests, deserts, swamps, jungles, cities, minefield, trenches, and military wire obstacles. Obstacles to air mobility include features that exceed the aircraft's service ceiling, restrict nap-of-the-earth (NOE) flight or that force the aircraft to employ a particular flight profile. Examples are tall (greater than 75 feet) trees, towers, buildings, rapidly rising terrain features, mountains, and smoke or other obscurants. An evaluation of obstacles leads to the identification of mobility corridors. This in turn helps identify defensible terrain and AAs. To evaluate obstacles\u2014 \u2022 Identify pertinent obstacles in the AI. \u2022 Determine the effect of each obstacle on the mobility of the evaluated force. \u2022 Combine the effects of individual obstacles into an integrated product."}
{"id": "FM34130IntelligencePreparationOfTheBattlefield", "title": "FM 34 130 Intelligence Preparation Of The Battlefield", "year": 1994, "seq": 5, "text": "If standard symbology does not exist, such as in the case of unfoldable rivers, depict them using wide solid lines, ad hoc symbology, or 2-15 FM 34-130 cross-hatching as appropriate. Ensure that all nonstandard symbols are explained in the graphic's legend. Terrain mobility classifications are not absolute but reflect the relative effect of terrain on the maneuver of combat formations. They are based on the ability of a force to maneuver in combat formations, usually linear, or to transition from one type formation to another, as opposed to simply moving through a piece of terrain. Identifying an area as SEVERELY RESTRICTED terrain, for example, does not imply that movement through that area is impossible, only that it is impractical. Units moving in column formations along roads generally have little trouble traversing SEVERELY RESTRICTED terrain. Additional Considerations: Obstacles perpendicular to an axis of attack favor the defender by slowing the attacker, forcing him into concentrations while crossing or negotiating obstacles, and holding the attacker for longer periods under the fires of tne defender. Obstacles parallel to an axis of advance may give the attacker flank protection but they may also interfere with his lateral movement, employment of reserve forces, and coordination between adjacent imits. To be effective the defender must cover obstacles by observation and fire. However, even undefended obstacles may canalize an attacker into concentrations which are easier to detect and attack. Terrain considered SEVERELY RESTRICTED for one unit may pose no obstruction to the mobility of another unit. For example, a dismounted infantry unit could easily negotiate a hilly, forested area that a mounted infantry unit might consider SEVERELY RESTRICTED. Similarly, an attack helicopter unit may consider an area containing several tall towers ana many high tension wires as SEVERELY RESTRICTED terrain while the same terrain would pose little or no obstacle to high performance aircraft operating at higher altitudes."}
{"id": "FM34130IntelligencePreparationOfTheBattlefield", "title": "FM 34 130 Intelligence Preparation Of The Battlefield", "year": 1994, "seq": 6, "text": "The classifications are not absolute. Key Terrain: Key terrain is any locality or area the seizure, retention, or control of which affords a marked advantage to either combatant. An example of key terrain is a bridge over an unfoldable river which gives access to the opposite shore without requiring an assault crossing. Another example is a level clearing in rough terrain which is the only accessible landing field for airmobile operations. Key terrain is often selected for use as battle positions or objectives. Evaluate key terrain by assessing the impact of its seizure by either force upon the results of battle. Techniques that aid this evaluation are\u2014 \u2022 Evaluate the other four aspects of military terrain first and integrate the results into the evaluation of key terrain. For example, if you identify only one valid avenue of approach to the command's objective, then the choke points on that avenue will probably become key terrain (compared to a situation where several A As are available). Ti me permitting , SeejAppendlxA conduct \"mini-wargaming\" to visualize possible outcomes of battle, for a discussion on now to do this. A common technique is to depict key terrain on overlays and sketches with a large \"K\" within a circle or curve that encloses and follows the contours of the designatedterrain. On transparent overlays use a color, such as purple, that stands out. In the offense, key terrain features are usually forward of friendly dispositions and are often assigned as objectives. Terrain features in adjacent sectors may be key terrain if their control is necessary for the continuation of the attack or the accomplishment of the mission. If the mission is to destroy threat forces, key terrain may include areas whose seizure helps ensure the required destruction. Terrain which gives the threat effective observation along an axis of friendly advance may be key terrain if the threat must be denied its possession or control."}
{"id": "FM34130IntelligencePreparationOfTheBattlefield", "title": "FM 34 130 Intelligence Preparation Of The Battlefield", "year": 1994, "seq": 7, "text": "Likewise, fog will affect US thermal sights less than it will affect vehicles with optical sights only. 2-28 FM 34-130 \u2022 Remember that \"other characteristics\" may sometimes influence threat actions more than terrain or weather considerations. Remember, also, to account for the cultural bias the threat operates within. They will evaluate the same legal, political, economic, and demographic aspects in a completely different manner than US personnel would. The bottom line is to evaluate the battlefield completely from the perspective of the threat. Remember to express this evaluation in terms of UOAs, not detailed descriptions of the analytical factors that led to the conclusions. Focus the commander on concluding statements such as, \"Sir, the battlefield environment best supports insurgent attacks on US and host nation (HN) forces near Daleytown. The next best place for their operations is Elkinsville.\" Be prepared to back these conclusions with the detailed analysis prepared in the previous steps. Communicate the final conclusions from the description of the battlefield environment in written reports such as the analysis of the AO or the intelligence estimate. Distribute the graphic products developed during the analysis and evaluation as needed to support the remainder of the staff and other commands in their own IPB and planning efforts. Evaluate the Threat What Is It? Definition: The determination of threat force capabilities and the doctrinal principles and TTP threat forces prefer to employ. An Example: While planning a contingency show of force operation, a J2 directs the Joint Intelligence Center (JIC) to study the decisions on record of the targeted country's dictator. As a result of this research, the intelligence center produces a model of how the dictator makes decisions, with special emphasis on his tendencies during political crises. Meanwhile, the S2 of the brigade which will conduct the operation does his own evaluation of the threat."}
{"id": "FM34130IntelligencePreparationOfTheBattlefield", "title": "FM 34 130 Intelligence Preparation Of The Battlefield", "year": 1994, "seq": 8, "text": "Doctrinal templates are tailored to the needs of the unit or staff section creating them. For example, a division G2 creates a template that differs in scope from that constructed by a battalion S2; the template constructed by an EW section differs drastically from that constructed by an air defense unit. An air defense doctrinal template, for example, would include a description of normal strike package composition, altitudes, time spacing between groups of aircraft, and so forth. Some doctrinal templates consider the threat unit or force as a whole, while others focus on a single BOS, such as intelligence or fire support. Description of Tactics and Options: The threat model includes a description of the threat's preferred tactics. It addresses the operations of the major units or elements portrayed on the template and the activities of the different battlefield operating systems. It also contains a listing or description of the options available to the threat should the operation fail (branches), or subsequent operations if it succeeds (sequels). Even if the threat's preferred tactics can be depicted graphically, the threat model includes a description. This allows the template to become more than a \"snapshot in time\" of the operation being depicted. It aids in mentally wargaming the operation over its duration during the development of threat COAs and situation templates. The description should address typical tin-dines and phases of the operation (maneuver and support), points where units transition from one formation to another, and how each BOS contributes to the operation's success. Describe the actions of the supporting BOS in enough detail to allow the later identification of HVTs and HPTs. Since the target's value usually varies with its role in each phase of the operation, ensure that you examine each phase separately. Like the template itself, you develop the description of the threat's tactics and options from an evaluation of his doctrine and past or current operations."}
{"id": "FM34130IntelligencePreparationOfTheBattlefield", "title": "FM 34 130 Intelligence Preparation Of The Battlefield", "year": 1994, "seq": 9, "text": "As a result, the threat's actual capabilities usually will not mirror the ideal capabilities represented by the complete set of threat models. For example: \u2022 The threat's doctrine may call for penetration attacks when possible. Your evaluation of his current strength, however, may indicate that the threat lacks the force ratio he normally considers adequate for a penetration attack. \u2022 A terrorist group's normal tactics may call for the use of car bombs or similar devices to tie down emergency services while they conduct raids in other parts of town. Your evaluation of the threat's current logistics status, however, might indicate a critical shortage of explosive materials. 2-37 FM 34-130 Additional Considerations: \u2022 Use all available intelligence sources in the evaluation of the threat's current situation. Focus on the effects each incident or fact has on threat capabilities rather than simply enumerating details. \u2022 Use the OB files for the particular threat force you are evaluating. Most forces differ from the ideal portrayed in threat doctrine or tables of organization and equipment (TOE). They may be equipped or organized differently, train for special missions, or have a particular record or combat experiences that give them a unique set of capabilities. \u2022 In addition to identiying actual threat capabilities, the evaluation may identify additional threat strengths or vulnerabilities caused by the current situation. Ensure you incorporate them into the threat models, the intelligence estimate, and the threat CO As you develop in the next step of the IPB process. \u2022 Consider the threat's ability to operate in darkness or adverse weather. This is more than the technical capability of selected items of threat equipment. For example, the threat's tank fleet may be equipped with the latest in night vision devices but the supporting infantry and other arms may not be. \u2022 Also consider training levels. A force that frequently trains in night combat may have a better capability for such operations than a better equipped force that seldom trams at night."}
{"id": "montananaturalre1989montrich", "title": "The Montana natural resource information subject and geographic index (MNRI) : guidelines for the use of the index", "year": 1989, "seq": 0, "text": "The next prompt will appear- 'Enter a character string:' Type in a keyword and press enter. Quotation marks are not needed around the keyword. The next prompt will appear: 'Do you wish to search for another character string? Y/N' If you have only one keyword then type 'N' and press Enter. Otherwise type \"Y' and press Enter; a prompt will appear for the next keyword and press Enter. The computer will automatically bring up the 'Output Choice' menu. Keywords should be typed in exactly as they would appear in a document. If normally separated by a dash in print, then type them in separated by a dash. You will need to properly capitalize any letters normally capitalized, if in doubt use the ADHOC Search option. The program will search for the keywords exactly as they have been typed in. If you type in two keywords the computer will search for all sources with both keywords contained in the keywords, and only those sources with. both keywords wall be retrieved. For example if you enter both Clark Fork and Silver Bow Creek, then only sources containing both Clark Fork and Silver Bow Creek will be retrieved. If you want everything on the Clark Fork as well as everything on Silver Bow Creek, then you must either do two single keyword searches or use the Ad Hoc option. [B] County - Searches the county field for one, or two counties. The county search screen is shown in figure 19. The following prompt will appear: 'Type in the first four letters of the county name:' Type in the first four characters of the county name and press enter. If you want to search for records with more than one particular county in them, answer Y to: 'Do you with to search for another county?' You will be prompted to enter the second county."}
{"id": "mirroryearbook3919unse", "title": "The Mirror [yearbook]", "year": 1994, "seq": 0, "text": "The Itawamba Community College Indians had a suc- cessful '93 season, finishing with an 8-2 record. Mis- sissippi Delta and East Mississippi handed the Indians the two losses, but they were big. The outstanding players were Shawn Young, Steve Tutor, Darrell Nicklow, Derick Burks and Chris Wash- ington. Several sophomores including Young, Nicklow, Burks, Washington, Tutor, John Casey and Chris Bu- chanan were selected to play in the Mississippi Junior College AU-Star game held at Northeast, December 4. Young and Nicklow also made the All-Region XXIII team as did freshman kicker Lee Miller and lineman Jason Ferguson. The head coach of the Indians is Jay Miller who finished his first year in that capacity. Miller served as head coach of the North All-Star squad which won the game. This season was Miller's eighth in the Mississippi junior/community college system. The offensive coordinator is Tommy Morton, who has been with the Indians for two years. He has 23 years of coaching experience including 10 years as head coach of the Pontotoc High School Warriors. Anthony Brewer was also in his second year at ICC as defensive backs coach. His experience includes student assistant at Murray State University and defensive back coach at Caledonia High School. Buddy Collins was in his first year as offensive line coach for the Indians. His experience includes assistant coach at Aberdeen, Grenada and Tupelo High School. \"Because of what my high school and junior college coaches meant to me, I hope to have the same in- fluence on other people.\" Coach Jay Miller Football Mini-Division / 53 Indians. . on a roll! FOOTBALL GULF COAST The Indians started with a winning season when they defeated the Gulf Coast Bulldogs in the rain at Fulton, 28-27 in a game dominated by penalties and fumbles, Darrell Nicklow ran the opening kick-off for 92 yards and a touchdown."}
{"id": "mirroryearbook3919unse", "title": "The Mirror [yearbook]", "year": 1994, "seq": 1, "text": "Members of the ICC men's basket- ball team include (front, from left) Greg Morris, Tim Crump, Joe Mc- Coy, Cletus Hodges, and Chris Smith; (middle) Jerel Scott, Dustin Wright, Craig Matthews, William Long; (back) manager Eugene Ad- ams, manager Rob Logan, Benjie Ewing, Bradd Ball, Chris McGhee, Obra Carter, Curtis Johnson and Coach Wayne Newsom. Basketball / 69 Lori Russell of Saltillo gets in position to hit the ball. Michelle Minga of Shannon gives it her all as Kim Schukei attempts to tag an op- she hits a ball out. ponent out on first base. 70 / Softball Mini-Division LADY INDIANS SHOW PROMISE The Lady Indian softball team practiced long hard hours in order to strengthen their playing abilities last spring. They played hard and gave all they had to strive for victory. It was a long, hard season, but the Lady Indians played to the fullest extent of their abilities. Due to the number of young players on the team, there were times when the Lady Indians revealed their inexperience. The team was able to overcome the disadvan- tage, and they pulled together as a great group of Softball players. The more experienced players helped their teammates, and this effort enabled them to form a strong team that gave their all. The Lady Indians went 7-13 for the sea- son, but they were each looking forward to returning in the spring of '94 to better that record. \"We started to develop a strong building block for future teams. I've seen the talent level rise steadily over the last three years and with future improve- ment, the teams will be a contender for state cham- pionships.\" Coach David Kelly Softball Mini-Division / 71 ICC Lady Indians give 100% SOFTBALL The ICC Lady Indians put forth a valiant effort during the 1993 season. The Lady Indians played several tough teams."}
{"id": "mirroryearbook3919unse", "title": "The Mirror [yearbook]", "year": 1994, "seq": 2, "text": "In playing tennis, the key is how quickly you move and how precisely you swing the tennis racket. Tennis at ICC is played by both men and women. The women's team is coached by Linda Partlow while Paul Johnson directs the men's team. Both teams worked hard during the past season. Members of the teams spent long hours in practice on the court in all kinds of weather to prepare for doing their best. Practice began for both teams in February. Tennis involves both singles and doubles with fast-moving action. Decisions of quick- ness and preciseness are required. The women finished the season with a state crown and Coach Partlow was named coach of the year. \"This year's team was very young, but worked hard to have a successful season.\" Coach Paul Johnson Tennis Mini-Division / 75 Just serve it up, ICC MEN'S TENNIS The ICC men's tennis team was hop- ing to cause a racket this year, and that's just what they did. They longed for a better tennis team and that's just what they got. They defeated Gulf Coast, 8 to 1 and Southwest, 6-3 in early season match- es. They also beat Northwest with a big victory. Although the team didn't finish the season as they had wished, their spirit and optimism made up for it. The play- ers kept on trying as hard as possible. The team also had a \"rather unique\" member. Bob Willis, a 46-year-old stu- dent. Willis was a history major and part-time preacher. He said he enjoyed playing on the team. This year's team consisted of lots of talent and each player used his talents to have a winning season. \"I've had a lot of fun and it's been a great experi- ence.\" Brian Quinn \"Playing tennis was fun. Hopefully, my injury will heal and I'll be back in full swing next year.\" Shane Homan \"I had a great time."}
{"id": "mirroryearbook3919unse", "title": "The Mirror [yearbook]", "year": 1994, "seq": 3, "text": "I'm ready for next season.\" Tommy Miller \u2022\u2666 76 / Men's Tennis Brian Quinn shows off his back- hand during a match. Steve Ward aims at the ball before he swings. Tommy Miller shows off his fore- hand while Coach Paul Johnson ex- plains the game plan. Men's Tennis / 77 Tennis swings into action WOMEN'S TENNIS The women's tennis team started out slow but finished the season with a winning record. The team consisted of four freshmen and two sophomores, but the inexpe- rience didn't stop their determination to win. The team finished the season with a 7-4 overall record and 5-2 in the con- ference. The team's only losses were to Meridian and Hinds. They also won the state championship title. The state winners were Cashenna McCullough, Crystal Senter and Stacy Christian. Coach Linda Partlow was again named coach of the year in the Mis- sissippi Junior/Community College As- sociation. \"Playing tennis at ICC has been a great experi- ence. I have enjoyed every minute of it.\" Crystal Senter \"I've enjoyed playing ten- nis. It has been a fun sea- son with lots of compe- tition.\" Karen Killough \"Winning the state title was very memorable for all of us. This has been a great year.\" Cashenna McCullough 78 / Women's Tennis Cashenna McCuUough aims high to win the point j Crystal Senter shows off her back- hand. Stacy Christian sets up for a fore- hand. Members of the ICC women's ten- nis team include (front, from left) Crystal Senter, Heidi Grubbs, Ka- ren Killough; (back) Coach Linda Partlow, Stacy Christian, Shae Ow- ens, and Cashenna McCullough. Women's Tennis / 79 Gary Enis is congratulated by the other In- Jeff Harmon attempts to pick the dians after another victory. runner off at first base. 80 / Baseball Mini-Division M INDIANS EXCITED ABOUT SEASON Coach Roy Cresap and his assistant coach Mike Patterson are ready for a new season, and so are the players."}
{"id": "mirroryearbook3919unse", "title": "The Mirror [yearbook]", "year": 1994, "seq": 4, "text": "\"We were exceptionally young with only two sophomores on the team. We did improve as the season went along and should be better in '94.\" Coach David Rather Golf / 87 Rob Whitehead prepares to return the ball as he participates in an intramural ping-pong tournament. Concentration is the key word for a partic- ICC students play hard as they ipant in the intramural pool tournament. compete in the intramural volley- ball tournament. 88 / Intramurals INTRAMURALS ASSIST IN RELAXATION Intramural sports help students get away from the day to day grind of going to classes and studying. Intramurals also help students to get to know new people and make new firends. The challenge and competition of intramural sports add excite- ment to the lives of the students. Intramurals also teach the participants valuable lessons in good sportsmanship that will continue throughout their lives. ICC offers several different areas of intramural competition during the school year. The sports provide fun and excitement for the participants as well as for those who watch the fun and games. \"Intramurals are impor- tant because they give the students the opportunity to have fun and compete.\" Carrie Ball Intramurals / 89 Clubs offer ICC student involvement Clubs, study groups, teams and band are great ways to be involved in the many ac- tivities at Itawamba Community College on both campuses. ICC offers a wide variety of clubs from dra- ma to nursing to publications and \"just for fun'' organizations. Clubs help to get students involved with other students and to spark their interest in either a major field of study or a special interest group. These clubs expand the student's future horizons, leading them down the right career path. Many clubs held fund raisers, and some were in charge of various activities throughout the year. Involvement in student organizations and activities helps to build character and friend- ships that last a lifetime."}
{"id": "mirroryearbook3919unse", "title": "The Mirror [yearbook]", "year": 1994, "seq": 5, "text": "Cosmetology Club members include Kim Carpenter, Camille McKinney, Tabitha Harris, Mimi Prather, Tanya Richardson, Michelle Lofton, advisor Tommie Whiteside, Lori Saxon, Cindy Williams, Roxane Hollingsworth, Patricia Norman, Christi Davis, Pierre Keys, Dawn Motes and Mitzi McNinch. Agribusiness Club members include Charlie Hudson, Shannone Hudson, Rosanne Maxcy, Nolan Cochran, advisor Stephen Banes, Jeremy Wood, Marc Payne, Jennifer McMillen, Jason Dickinson, Rose McMillen, and Brian McCarty. Career-Related / 95 ICC students are involved in the arts Itawamba Community College stu- dents who are majoring in art or theatre have an opportimity to enhance their interest by joining a related organization. Delta Psi Omega is a national frater- nity for the dramatic arts. Members par- ticipate in the dinner theatre, the Miss ICC pageant and the spring musical. The Drama Club is for students who display an active interest in theatre and drama. The club's main goal is to help its members acquire an appreciation of the performing arts. The Art Club is open to all students interested in all phases of art. It promotes an interest and understanding of campus and community art. Members traveled to Chicago to tour the Chicago Museum of Art. Art Club members are (first row, from left) Latasha Holt, Jermifer Hood, Marcia Griffen, M, VanDommelen, Tutricia Holt; (second row) Russell Stafford, James Price, Cashenna McCullougl Gina Schrock; (third row) Anthony Patterson, Jason McMillian, Rickey Adams, Mickey Adami! (fourth row) advisors Robert Ring and Tom Douglas. Instructor Tom Douglas gives art students a few pointers about sculpture technique. Art Club members visited the Chicago Museum of Art on their annual field trip. 96 / Theatrical Society /Delta Psi/ Art CLUBS fji^f-^^^ Doris Smith, Stacey Cowsert, Chad Davis and Renae Bullock perform in \"A Case of Belong- ing\", one of the three-act plays which were part of the Dinner Theatre."}
{"id": "mirroryearbook3919unse", "title": "The Mirror [yearbook]", "year": 1994, "seq": 6, "text": "Students receive a $100 scholarship and one hour credit. The Fashion Tribe is chosen through tryouts at the beginning of the semester. The Fashion Tribe not only recruits for ICC, but they gain experience in fashion design and modeling. They also partic- ipate at various luncheons, dinner the- atre, homecoming, and fimd raisers. The Fashion Tribe and Indian Dele- gation are great ways to meet new peo- ple and have lots of fun. Members of the Fulton Campus Indian Delegation include (front, from left) Mary Ellen Boyd, Patricia Enoch, Pil Rae Curtis, Brandie Brown, Brandie Gordon, Leslie Russell; (middle) Allison Ford, ; Carla Chrestman, Cindy Burnette, Kristi Tapp, Merry Gillespie, Candy Cooper, Karen Umfress, Nikki Wilemon; (back) Jay Humphries, Joy Young, Jason Dickinson, James O'Neal, and Mark Duvall. Charlotte King and John Gordon show their style. Amanda Spradling and Joy Young take time out to pose. 102 / Fashion Tribe/Indian Delegation CLUBS Kristi Holcomb, Allison Wallace, Charlotte Bow- en, and Heather Rollison enjoy modeling for the Fashion Tribe. Members of the Tupelo Campus Indian Del- egation include (front, from left) Amanda Hinds, Stephany Whitworth, Suzanne Tacker; (back) Jacqueline Ray, Tiffany McGreger, Shelia Goines, Deborah Douglas, Mary Sheffield, Amy Boutwell, Linda Handle, and Diane Rogers. Not pictured: Julie Rogers Indian Delegation members Trisha Enoch, Kristi Tapp and Allison Ford Brandie Brown, Dawn Malone, and Pil Rae Curtis assist with registration visit with Delbert Turner, ICC alumnus, at a reunion at homecoming. at Homecoming. Fashion Tribe/Indian Delegation / 103 Students work to improve technology The Data Processing Management As- sociation is very active with 45 members. They not only work but also have field trips and social activities including a piz- za party in October and volleyball. The Computer Club has helped many pursue careers in computer-related fields. Some members of the club served as work-study students in the lab."}
{"id": "mirroryearbook3919unse", "title": "The Mirror [yearbook]", "year": 1994, "seq": 7, "text": "BSU/Wesley / 107 Clubs make political difference Both the Political Science Club and the Student Government Association teach students about government procedures. The purpose of the Political Science club is to promote the analysis of politics, to perform functions beneficial to the students, school and community; and to provide congenial company for those showing an interest in the organization. One of the purposes of the Student Government Association is to serve as the supreme student instrument for ef- fecting the fulfillment of the objectives of the Preamble of the Constitution. SGA also promotes wholesome school spirit and establishes the highest standards of ethical conduct. The Student Court is responsible for appeals for students. Fulton Campus Student Government officers include (from left) Nan Davis, secretary; Charlotte King, treasurer; Cashenna McCulIough, vice president; and Stacey Jones, president. i Tupelo Campus Student Government Associ- ation members conduct business at their regular meeting. Jennifer Tanner is one of several ICC Fulton Campus students who cast their ballots in the Homecoming election. 108 / SGA/Pol Sci/Student Court ^. CLUBS Mike Eaton, Student Government Association sponsor, discusses plans for the new year. Student Government Association members on the Tupelo Campus are (front, from left) Teresa Swanson, Amanda Hinds, Suzanne Tacker, June Young, and Becky Whitt; (back) Mitzi Chism, Wes Grissom, Jack Tate, Debbie Douglas, Amy Birmingham and not pictured: Natacia Payne. Political Science Club members are (front, from left) Scott Green, Wesley Holley, Shannon Clark, Thomas Jackson; (back) Danni Bessey, Mandy Tutor, Jessica Waldrop, Kathy Bagwell, Pil Rae Curtis and Charlotte King. Student Court members are (front, from left) Pil Rae Curtis, Tracy Evans, Jennifer Coleman; (back) Scott Todd, Lamorris Shelton and Kathy Bagwell. SGA/Pol Sci/Student Court / 109 Students learn to communicate with others The French and Spanish Clubs at Itawamba Community College give their members the opportu- nity to understand and experi- ment with the cultures of foreign countries."}
{"id": "mirroryearbook3919unse", "title": "The Mirror [yearbook]", "year": 1994, "seq": 8, "text": "Through trips and guest speakers, members learn to ap- preciate their neighbors. Writing is also an important fac- et of communication. The Projec- tions staff on the Fulton Campus is responsible for the college lit- erary magazine. It also provides an avenue of self-expression for students through poems and sto- ries. Spanish Club members are (front, from left Taylor Riley, Brian Loden, Ted Sheffield, Charles Lockhart, Shannon Ward; (back) Rinna West, Pil Rae Curtis, Lakeita Williams, Stephanie Gaveau, Alana Tucker, Jennifer Freeland, Kim HoUey, Mandy Cockrell, Tammy Lockridge, Emily Lauderdale, Tammy Cannon and sponsor Pat Bishop. Rinna West and Emily Lauderdale look at a foreign culture magazine. Rinna West shows Tammy Lockridge a souvenir from Mexico. 110 / French/Spanish/Projections CLUBS Advisor Pat Bishop and Chris Cook look at fa- mous French paintings. French Club members include (from left) Jen- nifer Freeland, advisor Pat Bishop, Kim Easley, Amanda Bray, Carly Martin, Carla Williams, La- Wanda Prude, Stephen Davis, Phyllis Murry, Justin Pittman, Stacy Jones, Angela Owens, Chris Cook, and Tom Wood. Projections staff members are (front, from left) advisor Ken Bishop, Emily Bean, LaWanda Butler, Benny Glasgow, Kelley Young; (back) Brandt Ham- mock, Stephen Davis, Thomas Jackson and Jesse Espinosa. Advisor Pat Bishop and Chris Cook read about France. French/Spanish/Projections / 111 PTK recognizes achievement Phi Theta Kappa is a national honors society recognizing the academic excel- lence of community college and univer- sity students. Students must have at least a 3.6 grade point average to become a member. Throughout the school year, PTK sponsors several events and activities to promote academic excellence including Honors Day, which recognizes the out- standing students in each department and division on the Fulton Campus. The tutoring program is a major ac- tivity for the chapter. Students who need assistance in a variety of subjects can benefit from the program which is free."}
{"id": "mirroryearbook3919unse", "title": "The Mirror [yearbook]", "year": 1994, "seq": 9, "text": "HOSA/Phi Theta Kappa / 113 Students strive for successful future careers Students in business-oriented careers may take advantage of membership in Students in Free Enterprise and Phi Beta Lambda. SIFE is a Fulton Campus organization that informs the nation and the com- munity about the budget and what cit- izens can do to help in times of economic crisis. This year, SIFE members partic- ipated in Free Enterprise Month and En- tiepreneur Day, both held in February. Phi Beta Lambda is a business-related organization with chapters on both the Fulton and Tupelo campuses. The club's main objective is to prepare students to take their place in the job market. Fulton Campus members sponsored the Most Beautiful pageant in October. Members of both chapters worked toward com- petition in the spring. SIFE members are (front, from left) advisor Susan Loden, Heather Davis, Trisha Enoch, Nan Davin Charlotte King, Jamie Owen; (middle) Stacey Jones, Sonya Montgomery, Wesley HoUey, Jennifet! Coleman, Kim Vaughn; (back) Sandra Wilson, Rhonda Hardin, Charissa Garrison, Chris Cook, Grant Spradling, and Amy Johnson. SIFE vice president Stacy Jones talks about the club's upcoming events. Jacqueline Ray, a member of the Tupelo Campus PBL Chapter, talks with Dean Charles Chrestman. 114 / SIFE/PBL CLUBS SIFE secretary/treasurer Nan Davis talks about club projects at a meeting of the business ad- visory board. Tupelo Campus PBL members are (front, from left) Raffieal Wallace, Lisa Southward, Diane Bean, Annette Hampton, Sonya Craven, Mary Ann Wallace, Stephany Whitworth, Becky Whitt; (middle) Sandra Lindsey, Kathy Cope- land, Tammy Jackson, Jacqueline Ray, Teresa Swanson, Mary Sheffield, Tiffany McGregor, Cindy Russell; (back) Doris Buchanan, Marsha Ray, and Travis Westbrooks. Fulton Campus PBL members include Shannon Clark, Arline Halloway, Teresa Hamner, Donald Bowden, Michelle Pierce, Amie Gillentine, Yvonne Lavanchy, Regina Brown, Christy Young, Jennifer Young, Kim Goree, Pam Bishop, Tammy Lockridge, Michelle Moss, Jennifer Dees, Michelle Burrell and Deidre Chambers."}
{"id": "montjune1970anaeconomicsvol3rich", "title": "Montana economic study; research report", "year": 1970, "seq": 0, "text": "L 5.2 Most of the industries classified as trade, service, or finance share a number of common characteristics. In the first place, they are derivative industries, serving the local population and dependent upon what this study calls primary industries (agriculture, mining, manufacturing, 3 railroads, and federal government) for grov.th. There are exceptions, of course: those retail and service establishments which serve out-of-state travelers and vacationers can be regarded as export industries, and thus they too can provide a basis for economic growth. Special services- - medical services, for example- -which attract large numbers of persons from outlying areas can also frequently be termed growth industries . In the pages that follow, special attention will be given to the place of these industries in the state econc: . The trade, sendee, and finance industries are labor-intensive; productivity per worker is low and is not increasing very rapidly. The small size of many firms, particularly in sendees, tends to limit the economies of scale which could accrue to larger units. The limited increase in output per worker is one reason why employ- ment in these industries since World War II has grown more rapidly than inmost other industries. While agriculture, manufacturing, and mining, for example, have met increasing demand for their output with fewer em- ployees and thus account for a declining share of total employment, the trade, service, and finance industries have required an increasing share of total employment to satisfy the growth in demand for their services. Tnis is true both in Montana and the United States. 3. \"The Montana Economy,\" Research Report of the Montana Economic Study , pt. 1, chap. 2 (Missoula, Montana: Bureau oF Business and Economic Research, University of Montana, in progress) , p. 2.14. 5.3 Low productivity usually means low wages, and workers in Montana's trade, service, and finance industries are paid some of the lowest wages in the state- -especially those in retail trade and services."}
{"id": "montjune1970anaeconomicsvol3rich", "title": "Montana economic study; research report", "year": 1970, "seq": 1, "text": "Department of Commerce, Census^f Business: 1967, Selected Services, Montana, table 1, p. 28-5. 5.26 places, automobile agencies and gas stations, and hotels and motels--has increased more rapidly than the total number of nonagricultura] wage and salary workers in the state, but at the same rate as total employment in the trade and service industries. What changes, if any, may be occurring among the mix of travelers --Montana residents versus out-of-state persons, business versus nonbusiness travelers- -remain a mystery. The only posi- tive statement which can be made is that overall travel appears to be increasing, but no more rapidly than other activities which affect the trade and service industries. In view of the dearth of information about Montana's tourist industry, it is well to keep in mind that when enthusiastic supporters of travel promotion label tourism \"the state's third most important industry\" they do so without documentation or proof. It is not surprising that people would look to travel and tourism as a vehicle for development in Montana. The state's natural beauty, the presence of Glacier and Yellowstone National Parks, the mountains, the lakes, and the fishing streams offer many opportunities for outdoor recreation, Yet forecasts as to the extent of the growth of travel and recreation fre- quently seem unrealistic. In the foreseeable future, most Americans will continue to work five days a week and most annual vacations will last only two or three weeks. This will be true particularly for those in professional or managerial positions- -members of those affluent groups whom the state would like most to attract. There is also the problem of competition; the hopeful dialogue about the rich possibilities of tourist travel is being repeated in all of the western states. These states also have national parks, lakes, and ski 5.27 areas. Several of them are closer to major population centers than Montana; frequently their public transportation facilities, particularly for air travel, arc superior to ours; often they offer a greater variety of attractions, with metropolitan centers a; well as well-developed out- door recreational facilities."}
{"id": "montjune1970anaeconomicsvol3rich", "title": "Montana economic study; research report", "year": 1970, "seq": 2, "text": "Because of the lack of data, it was not possible to project the number of self-employed persons in these industries. The tendency toward fewer small businesses in retail trade has already been noted; however, it is possible to envision some increase in the number of self-employed service workers. Among the conclusions that can be drawn from these projections are the assumptions that, one, the overall expansion of retail trade in Montana may slow rather dramatically and, two, that the growth of employment in the service industries probably will exert downward pressure on per capita income in the state. Such generalities, of course, conceal many different influences at local levels. There are cities and towns in Montana which in recent years have experienced a respectable growth, among them Billings, Bozeman, 39. Table 5.1; and \"The Montana Economy,\" Research Report of the Montana Economic Study, pt. 1, chap. 4. 5.46 it Falls, Havre, Helena, Kalispell, and Missoula. It. should be noted that only 4 of the towns --Billings, Missoula, Havre, and Helena iched or exceeded the 28 percent increase In retail sales recorded nationally, and that Havre showed up poorly in the service industries. 4\u00b0 It is worth noting, too, that three of these cities- -Bozeman, Great Falls, and Helena- - are heavily dependent upon government activities. Nevertheless, Ln most cases these cities will continue to increase their stature as trade centers during the next few years. The outlook for many small towns in Montana can only be described as grim. Some are close enough to larger cities for residents to commute to work. Some, especially in western Montana, are supported by activities (such as wood products) which can be expected to continue or even expand. But many a small town in rural Montana, with a clientele limited to farmers and ranchers, has almost no way to go but down."}
{"id": "montjune1970anaeconomicsvol3rich", "title": "Montana economic study; research report", "year": 1970, "seq": 3, "text": "Fuel plants are privately owned and must be deducted from total privately owned capacity before computing the proportion of hydroelectric capacity in private ownership. 6.21 \u2022 Ly because other national priorities have evolved. With the exception of the most recent federal Installations --Yellowtail Ham 011 the Big Horn River near Hardin (completed in 1967) and Llbby Dam--recent additions to generating capacity have been In the form of privately owned steam-general Lng plants using coal for fuel. One remaining hydro site- -the Knowles Dam site on the Clark Fork- -has been recommended to Congress for authorization by the Corps of Engineers; a counter proposal for its development has been made by The Montana Power Company. Most of the direct sales of public power in Montana go to two industrial firms- -the Anaconda Aluminum Company at Columbia Palls and Stauffer Chemical at Butte. Both these operations were established in the 1950s to take advantage of low-cost power from Hungry Horse Dam. The Bonneville Power Administration, which markets federal power west of the Continental Divide, and the Bureau of Reclamation in eastern Montana also sell power to private utilities and to rural electric cooperatives. Because of the federal dams located within its borders , Montana is a net exporter of electric power. With the completion of Libby Dam, which will offer no low-cost at-site power and will transmit most of its power to the Pacific North- west states, the proportion of power exported from Montana will increase. Montana's private utilities west of the Continental Divide --Montana Power and Pacific Power and Light- -also are a part of the Northwest regional power system. Montana -Dakota Utilities in eastern Montana is tied to the West Central system. The discussion on coal ~n the minerals chapter of thi~ report indicates that steam plants will in the future assume greater importance in Montana, and that such plants producing power strictly for export are I I I I 6.22 a possibility."}
{"id": "montjune1970anaeconomicsvol3rich", "title": "Montana economic study; research report", "year": 1970, "seq": 4, "text": "As a result six state institutions are located in that area. They arc the state capitol at Helena, the prison at Deer Lodge, the state hospitals at Warm Springs and Galen, the Boulder River School at Boulder, and the Mountain View School at Helena. Thirty-one percent of the population of the state now lives more than 200 miles from these institutions- -and 200 miles is still at oo least a 3 -hour drive under the best of conditions. Other cases could be cited; the dearth of public health services in sparsely settled eastern Montana has drawn considerable attention in recent months. It would be pleasant to be able to report that a satisfactory solution was in sight, that there was a more or less painless way to provide more and better government services for Montana residents. Unfortunately, the outlook for economic growth in the state gives little hope that revenues for state and local government will become more abundant without new sources of tax revenue and a heavier per capita tax burden. Readers interested in the state's fiscal problems should consult the Montana Fiscal Affairs Study, to be published in 1970. The foregoing paragraphs and the accompanying tables have provided a brief survey of changes in state and local government employment in Montana and have compared the number of workers providing various govern- ment services and the amount of per capita expenditures for these services with the averages for the 50 states . The intent has been to provide some idea of the financial effort Montanans make to provide governmental services and to point out some of the difficulties involved. 28. Based on \"Population Estimates for Montana Counties as of July 1, 1968\" (Bureau of Business and Economic Research) . 7.30 But employment in state and local government, like that in any other industry group, also has an economic effect on the state."}
{"id": "freedoms_way_vol._v_-_1988_special_issue", "title": "\u1015\u1015\u103a\u1089 \u1075\u103d\u107c\u103a\u1038\u1076\u1031\u1083 \u1019\u1062\u1086 5 freedoms way vol.5 (1988) English", "year": 1988, "seq": 0, "text": "Many leaders in the same mold can be produced by the adoption of this type of leadership. After victory, a rehabilitation program needs to be chalked out on democratic lines. This will permit contenders to inititiate competative measures to work in constructive ways in all spheres of life. 22 > \u201c> -- REscSSs Freedom's Way Without progress and prosperity, there can be no peace. Therefore, to attain peace all will have to co-operate to work hard together. In short, winning freedom is our priority, after which we must up a systematic program to build up peace and pros- perity, It isto this end that we are following our leader. However, there may be certain groups of people who are not in favour of our movement, especially our enemies, who try to undermine the movement by calling it a gang plagued by Warlordism, Fascism, Dictatorship and the likes, We must be careful of such kinds of subversive rumuors, and turn a deaf ear to such gossip. Such remarks are coined with the aim of splitting our unity, We must not let ourselves be misled by them. Should there be anyone who is lacking in conviction among our group, it is our duty to clarify the facts and defend our policy It is to be remembered that there are two distinct types of people: ideologists and pragmatists. None can be both an ideologist and a pragmatist. For instance, Alexander the Great and Aristotle; each was an expert in his way, and neither could act in place of the other. In the same way, there have been various types of leaders in the world, such as Fede] Castro of Cuba, Dr. Sun Yat Sen of China, Dr. Rizal of the Philippines, etc. All these men possessed qualities needed to lead their respective countries. Likewise, a Shan State leader needs particular qualities, and the most important quality is the ability to lead the Shan State people to freedom."}
{"id": "freedoms_way_vol._v_-_1988_special_issue", "title": "\u1015\u1015\u103a\u1089 \u1075\u103d\u107c\u103a\u1038\u1076\u1031\u1083 \u1019\u1062\u1086 5 freedoms way vol.5 (1988) English", "year": 1988, "seq": 1, "text": "Later on, when it was decided that the place was ideal for putting up the Aung San statue, the blackmarketeers, presumably was ideal for putting up the Aung San statue, the blackmarketeers, presumably afraid to 24 : 88x88 Freedom\u2019s Way embarass the fallen martyr\u2019s eyes, moved to the party mem- bers\u2019 quarters. After serving the families of party members, it finally settled down in the new Sao Sarm Htun Market, thriving better than it ever was. And it was only one of the thousands of towns and cities in the Socialist Burma, which had supposedly freed itself from the yoke of decadent capital- ism more than two and a half decades ago. The obvious fact is that The Burmese Government is in a state of economic bankruptcy. To satisfy their people\u2019s needs, they must either have the means or adeguete foreign currency. And their obvious trouble is they are shockingly short of both. The happy people of Burma, prospering under socialism, need every import item from a cap down to a pair of slippers. Yes, even headache tablets, dry cells for their radios and torchlights, toothpastes, lipsticks and even underwears. And what do the Burmese people have in exchange in order to buy these things without any hard foreign cash? No, the Thais don\u2019t want to have the lowgrade Burmese rice for their meals. No, sir, they are also not interested in trying out the Meittila tetoron fabrics. And of course, why should they wish to ride the Maung Bama bicycles? The only viable mediums of exchange for the cross- border transactions at the present are cattle, antiques, jade and, inevitably, opium. Cattle exports, however, do not constitute as a major medium of exchange for the under-industrialised nation, which for the greaterpart still has to rely on these beasts of burden for their faming."}
{"id": "freedoms_way_vol._v_-_1988_special_issue", "title": "\u1015\u1015\u103a\u1089 \u1075\u103d\u107c\u103a\u1038\u1076\u1031\u1083 \u1019\u1062\u1086 5 freedoms way vol.5 (1988) English", "year": 1988, "seq": 2, "text": "Mongnainite. 31 China is now practising an Open Door trade policy, and likewise Russia and Vietnam are now trying to open their doors to foreign investors. Only Burma, despite calling itself a socialist country. is not daring to follow the lead of other socialist gover tents. It seems ironic that whileeven the mightiest and most media-exposed leftist countries are ready to experi- \u2018ment with adapting their policies to.allow free enterprise and private ownership. such a poverty-stricken and under developed country as Burma.with nothing to lose, is reluc- tant to try relaxing its tightly controlled eceonomy. The reason, however, is very clear. The dictator Ne Win and hisgovernment do not dare open their doors for fear of exposing the t of their cruel and oppressive stranglehold economic ruin. They are choking under the yokeof the government's policy of land nationalization. The constant threat that the military will confiscate their fields has drained them of allincentive to improve their yields. The farmers in Burma have no sophisticated technology. They plough with cows and harvest with sickles. The gover -nment has not even the means to provide them with simple, cheap, insecticide sprays. And yet the government expects the farmers to produce yields that will bring profits on the world market. The farmers are thus caught in a vicious circle. \u201cgeese * PErcSSs Freedom's Way They are forced to grow what the government orders, because otherwise they will have their fields confiscated. and yet they have neither the incentive nor the proper technology to produce a satisfactory harvest. The government is now taxing the farmers over ten times more than. in the pre-coup days of parliamentary rul In the past. an acre was usually taxed a mere 5 kyats a year. Now each acre is taxed 2 baskets of paddy. which fetches 18 kyats at the government rate. and 25 kyats on the black market."}
{"id": "freedoms_way_vol._v_-_1988_special_issue", "title": "\u1015\u1015\u103a\u1089 \u1075\u103d\u107c\u103a\u1038\u1076\u1031\u1083 \u1019\u1062\u1086 5 freedoms way vol.5 (1988) English", "year": 1988, "seq": 3, "text": "Shan State is our own home-land and the Burmans had usurped from us and made it their own. The Rangoom Government tried to run down us by ex- aggerating about the surrender personnel. Actually it was only one or two defectors or quislings. But the Rangoon Government makes a mountain out of a mole and big cere- monies are made just to raise the morale of their troops whose death toll and casualties are awfully higher than ours. Sai Namkhone (24.12.87) \"a PEACE AND STABILITY Durma and Shan State Se In any country, whether communist or socialist, or other- wise, PEACE and STABILITY are most important for the well-being of the country and its people. In Burma and Shan State, however, war has been raging for 24 to 30 years with no end in sight. Because the war has been raging for so long, one cannot help but wonder if the people of Burma are not all raving lunatics - the most serious cases holding the reins of power in Rangoon, and the lesser ones commanding various rebel armies. Rangoon says the war is on because the rebels, either feudal or leftist extremists, and as well as narcotics traffick- ers, are opposed to national unity and progress. 37 oS BEscSS: Freedom's Way On the other hand, rebels claim that Rangoon is oppres- sive, racist, dictatorial, and lawless as well - a bunch of rob- ber barons and Hitlerites. In this war, Rangoon has an upper hand because it is able to obtain funds and assistance from various governments, multinational organizations, international agencies, the World Bank - among others - with which to pay its officers, soldiers, buy weapons, and other logistic and military requirements. It is doing its best to portray itself as a force of civilization, law and order, the force of light and reason etc -- blaming every- thing bad ranging from drought to flood, from economic re- gression and collapse, breakdown of social cohesion etc to narcotics, on the rebels."}
{"id": "freedoms_way_vol._v_-_1988_special_issue", "title": "\u1015\u1015\u103a\u1089 \u1075\u103d\u107c\u103a\u1038\u1076\u1031\u1083 \u1019\u1062\u1086 5 freedoms way vol.5 (1988) English", "year": 1988, "seq": 4, "text": "There are at least three households in each village (at least one member of each such family) suffering from leprosy in the following areas: Muang Sawng-Nong Tao Village circle; Keng Tong-Keng Kham Village circle (the worst afflicted); Nong Lom village circle; Wan Haat Village circle; and Salong Village circle. These areas are along the strip south of Muang Yai bordered by the Salween to the East, and in the West by the Loikaw- Hopong-Loilem-Muang Kung-Kehsi Mansam motor road. As far as can be perceived, no attention is being paid to this serious health hazard by the Burmese government. Leprosy is according to the locals a curse of the gods. Victims are treated as outcasts and thus live separately, a few hundred metres from the main village, preferably upstreams -- from the belief that leprosy germs or carriers do not swim down- stream. This is the only leprosy prevention in force! 55 OV 8 20881 Freedom's Way But how effective this is can be judged from the increase in the number of victims, The locals of course know nothing, and cannot be blamed especially since they are, due to their ignorance, potential victims as well. It is doubtful if Burmese authorities know how many leprosy victims there are in the areas mentioned, and most possibly, do not care. Even if there are local headmen aware of the true nature of leprosy, or that it is curable, nothing can be done because there is absolutely no leprosy treatment or eradication pro- gramme in Shan State. Before 1962-63, there were missiona- ries dealing in leprosy in Panglong and Muang Nai, and slow Progress was being made in keeping leprosy in check. But since the expulsion of missionaries due to their con- nections, as alleged by Burmese authorities, with CIA and SEATO, absolutely nothing has been done in this direction."}
{"id": "freedoms_way_vol._v_-_1988_special_issue", "title": "\u1015\u1015\u103a\u1089 \u1075\u103d\u107c\u103a\u1038\u1076\u1031\u1083 \u1019\u1062\u1086 5 freedoms way vol.5 (1988) English", "year": 1988, "seq": 5, "text": "There wererumors saying that ex-Brigadier KYAW ZAW (formerly Burma Army but drummed out for commu- nist connections in the late 50s and in late 60s joined the BCP via Lashio, Shan State) & several hundred followers had broken with BA THEIN TIN, current BCP Chairman, and had set up a vietnam spons ored faction in the Shan-Laos border area. The problem with CPB RY one\u2019s judgements of Maa BCP MILITARY 7 Ne orm; Presence the BCP\u2019s strength or otherwise on Rangoon\u2019s reports is that, like all governments with communist insurgency problem, it tends to cut the cloth to fit the needs of the moment, exag- gerating when necessary, and vice versa. Rangoon\u2019s politicking nonetheless, it is amply clear that the BCP is comfortably dug-in in the 60,000 square miles comprising Shan State, & as well, in KARENNI and KA- CHIN states, 61 BEcS8s Freedom's Way In Shan State, BCP units move at will. and, in platoon & company sized fire fights are able to bloody the much praised Burma Army. In fact, BCP fighters have but scant respect for the army\u2019s fighting ability and there is very little the army can do against swift and experienced communist jungle fight- ers. When the army moves in strength, not only do BCP forces disappear, but the army\u2019s practice of press-ganging villagers as coolies and indicipline rampant among Burmese armymen further ALIENATES the local populace -- contri- buting to BCP\u2019s grassroot support. In contrast, BCP troopers behave according to the rules laid down for the Eight Route Army by Mao, and the fact that they are local boys or non - Burmese tribesmen also helps a good deal. What is most important is that the BCP\u2019s Voice of the people radio broadcassts in Shan and tribal languages daily."}
{"id": "modelingsimulat00chen", "title": "Modeling and simulation of a continuous fluidized-bed dryer", "year": 1986, "seq": 0, "text": "Grain Marketing Research Laboratory. vi CHAPTER I INTRODUCTION 1-1 Fluidized-bed drying is one of the modern methods for drying. In comparison with the conventional packed-bed or moving-bed dryers, fluidized-bed dryers possess the following significant features: 1. Drying gas is locally mixed intensively during its passage through the bed; consequently, the rate of mass and heat transfer between gas and solids are high. 2. This extremely rapid heat transfer enables relatively high inlet gas temperature to be used. 3. The time of drying is relatively short. Because of its numerous advantages, fluidized-bed drying has been increasingly applied in diverse industries in either the batch or continuous mode. While batch fluidized bed dryers are often used when the production scale is small or products are heat sensitive, continuous fluidized-bed dryers are extensively used in processes closely integrated with continuous production without intermediate storage. Besides, the cost of drying per unit mass of product is relatively smal 1 . Although the theory of fluidization has developed rapidly in the last two decades, this development is not amply reflected in the study and practice of fluidized-bed drying. Conventional models for a fluidized-bed dryer are mainly based on the overall mass and ener- gy balances around the entire dryer. In addition to these mass and energy balances, the models for a continuous fluidized-bed dryer co- mmonly impose assumptions that 1. The bed temperature is uniform. 2. The outlet streams are in thermal and concentration equili- brium. 1-2 3. The fluid-mechanistic behavior of the drying gas is homoge- neous; in other words, the drying gas is not partitioned into different phases of the fluidized bed, such as emulsion and bubble phases. Hence, all these models involve postulates which are not adequately representative of the complicated phenomena occuring in a fluidized bed dryer. This inevitably limits their range of applicability."}
{"id": "modelingsimulat00chen", "title": "Modeling and simulation of a continuous fluidized-bed dryer", "year": 1986, "seq": 1, "text": "In this review, we shall present several n-a examples of each category. For additional examples, readers are refered to the references listed in Tables 1 and 2. Single-stage dryers The best known dryers in this category are cylindrical ones (Fig. 1). Their main advantages are simplicity in construction and operation, ease in maintenance. low cost and the possibility of complete automation. Among disadvantages must be included the relatively large unevenness of drying in comparison with other types of f luidized-bed dryers, and convection of fine particles of the dried material. To increase the uniformity of drying, some dryers are built in a slightly conical form, with a tapered angle of 30-40\u00b0 (Fig. 2). The ratio of the cross section diameter of the upper part of the chamber to the lower varies within the range of 10:1 to 50:3. Multi-stage dryers Multi-stage dryers are used mainly where, due to the sensitivity of the dried material to relatively long exposure to elevated temperatures, the drying temperature must be low. and. al the same time, where a final low moisture content in the material is required. A two-stage dryer with back- mixing/plug-flow bed (Fig. 3) is suitable for products that initially release their moisture readily and later have a drying curve of decreasing drying rate. These stages are so arranged that the product flow in the counter-current mode to the drying gases, thereby reducing considerably space requirements and construction costs as well as energy consumption. Another example of multi-stage dryers is given in Fig. 4. 1 1 -3 Centrifugal-bed dryers The centrifugal fluidized bed allows table, smooth fluidizalion for large irregular particles of low bulk density at air velocities well above those required for pneumatic transport. High velocities of air flowing in the radial direction permit intensive heat transfer at relatively low temperatures. Thus, this type of dryers (Fig. 5) can be used for initial moisture reduction of sticky, high moisture and heat sensitive materials."}
{"id": "modelingsimulat00chen", "title": "Modeling and simulation of a continuous fluidized-bed dryer", "year": 1986, "seq": 2, "text": "A vibro- fluidized bed can be obtained in apparatus of different construction by means of vibration of the drying chamber, the bottom or baffles of the bed, and also by using special vibrating devices inserted directly into the drying chamber. It has been shown (Slenov and Mikhailov, 1972) that drying in the vibrated fluidized bed significantly intensifies the drying process; the drying rate is increased several folds with the effect of vibration; and sticking of the particles is avoided. II-4 PHENOMENA OF FLUID1ZATION When a fluid flows upward through a bed of solid particles at a rela- tively low flow rate, the particles remain immobile or fixed. As the flow rate of the fluid increases, the drag force acting on the particles will also increase until a point is eventually reached where the drag force is equal to the gravitational force holding the particles within the bed. At this point. the particles will begin to move apart, becoming suspended in the flowing fluid, and the bed will expand upwards. Under this condition, the frictional force between a particle and fluid counterbalances the effec- tive weight of the particle, and the bed is considered to be in the state of minimum or incipient f luidization . If the flow rate of the fluid is in- creased further, the movement of particles is intensified, and bubbling and channeling of the fluid are observed. Such a bed is called a dense-phase fluidized bed, bubbling fluidized bed or, simply, fluidized bed. A still higher fluid velocity results in the solid particles being transported out of the bed with the flowing fluid. A bed under such a condition is termed a lean phase fluidized bed or. simply, entrained bed. Recycling of these carried-away particles by means of a mechanical device, e.g., a cyclone, to the bottom of the bed will give rise to the so-called \"fast f luidizat ion\" regime, characterized by a high degree of particle turbulence."}
{"id": "modelingsimulat00chen", "title": "Modeling and simulation of a continuous fluidized-bed dryer", "year": 1986, "seq": 3, "text": "Although a substantial number of correlations have been proposed for the bubble size velocity, the semi - empi rica 1 equation proposed by Davidson and Harrison (1963) is overwhelmingly popular; it is Ub \" (V\u00b0-f> + 0-71K8V0-5 <22\u00bb This expression has been shown experimentally to give a good estimation of the bubble rise velocity (Kowe and Partridge, 1965, Kunni and Levenspiel, 1969) . Gas movement and gas mixing. The pioneering work by Davidson and Harrison (1963) on the characteristic features of a fluidized bed in the light of fluid mechanics has paved the way for the later systematic studies on the subject. The model suggested by Davidson and Harrison inciudes some bold assumptions: (1) the original two-phase theory of Twoomey and Johnstone (1952) is valid and (2) the bubbles are circular in shape and behaves as if they were in inviscid liquid. Although the model is simple, it correctly predicts some significant flow characteristics, including the flow pattern of gas and movement of solids in the vicinity of bubbles, pressure distribu- tion, and the formation of cloud verified experimentally by Rowe (1964). The assumption of circular bubbles is obviously an over-simplified one. Experimental evidences show that a bubble normally has an indented base of solid particles, which is defined as the wake region. A theory based on this more realistic picture of bubbles has been proposed by Murray (1965). A variety of models have been proposed for the mixing of gas in the emulsion and bubble phases. These include, among others, the plug flow, perfect mixing and dispersive flow models. The flow of gas bubbles is usually assumed to be in the plug flow mode, that is, individual bubbles rise at a uniform velocity without coalescence. This is obviously an over- simplified assumption. Nevertheless, it is widely employed and yields surprisingly good predictions. No definitive experimental evidence is available to base the assumption about the flow pattern through the emulsion phase; thus, widely varied flow patterns are assumed in different models."}
{"id": "modelingsimulat00chen", "title": "Modeling and simulation of a continuous fluidized-bed dryer", "year": 1986, "seq": 4, "text": "DRYING CHARACTERISTICS OF SOLIDS The drying characteristics or a given species of solid under specified conditions of the drying medium are required to set up drying schedules and to determine the size of a dryer. These characteristics are often reflected in the drying rate curve. A typical drying rate curve is represented in Pig. 11. While different soiids and different conditions of drying often give rise to curves of very different shapes, a drying rate curve usually exhibits two major parts. the so-called constant and the failing rate periods, as marked on the figure. Constant Drying Rate Period The mechanism of constant rate drying is that of evaporation from a liquid surface with little interference by the presence of the solid (Nonbehel S Moss, 1970). The resistance to mass transfer is usually assumed to be completely in the boundary layer of the drying gas. Though solid may aTfect the properties of the liquid surface so that the rate of evaporation is somewhat different from that obtained with a pure liquid, this solid effect is relatively small. It. often corresponds to a reduction in the evaporation rate of not exceeding 20% (Nonbehel & Moss, 1970). The rate of drying in the constant, drying rate period is determined by the rate of vaporization of the liquid from the drying surface into the main body of the gas stream. The entire surface of a solid particle tends to stay at the wet-bulb temperature corresponding to the temperature, humidity and quantity of the drying gas. If the condition of the drying gas at the surface of solids remain constant, the surface or wet bulb temperature will also be constant. Consequently, the partial pressure and humidity at the 11-37 surface will be the saturation partial pressure and the saturation humidity at the wet-bulb temperature, respectively. The velocity of the drying gas affects the mass transfer coefficient or equivalently; the resistance to the mass transfer."}
{"id": "modelingsimulat00chen", "title": "Modeling and simulation of a continuous fluidized-bed dryer", "year": 1986, "seq": 5, "text": "These models have incorporated the effect of bubbling characteristics and various mechanisms of transport processes in the bed. Model proposed by Viswanathan and Rao As previously stated, Viswanathan and his co-workers have published a series of papers which eventually have culminated in a comprehensive model for a batch f luidized-bed dryer (Viswanathan and Ran, 1984). Their model is essentially based on the three phase theory of f luidization , which includes 'bubble, cloud-wake and emulsion phases (see Fig. 12 for schematic repre- sentation). The tanks-in- series model is assumed to be applicable to the emulsion phase; in other words, the emulsion phase is treated as being composed of a number of compartments, with emulsion gas being completely mixed in each compartment. Both the downflow and upflow modes (the latter is illustrated in Fig. 14) have been assumed separately for the overall flow of the emulsion gas. In the bubble and cloud-wake phases, the drying gas is considered to be in plug flow. The solids in the dryer are regarded as 11-45 being homogeneous with negligible internal resistance to mass and heat transfer. They are considered to be throughly mixed in the bed. Consequently, the temperature of the bed, the moisture content of the par- ticles and hence the equilibrium surface moisture content of the drying gas are independent of the position in the bed. Furthermore, the drying gas is assumed to be at quasi-steady state with respect to the solids in the bed. This is due to the fact that the residence time of the drying gas is much shorter than the time needed to dry the solids. Thus, the moisture and energy transfer in the gas phase in conjunction with the solids is ap- proximated by that under the steady state conditions. Hased on these assumptions for the change of moisture and energy in various phases, a set of governing equations has been derived."}
{"id": "modelingsimulat00chen", "title": "Modeling and simulation of a continuous fluidized-bed dryer", "year": 1986, "seq": 6, "text": "II -69 Continuous Operation In contrast to a batch fluidized-bed dryer whose content of solid particles is fixed, the solids in a continuous fluidized-bed dryer are constantly added to and removed from the bed. Though a single particle can be viewed as a batch dryer, the performance of a continuous fluidized-bed dryer confining a multitude of particles can not be evaluated by merely considering the behavior of an individual particle. This is due to the fact that the state of the drying gas by which drying characteristics of solids are affected depends also on the flow of solids. Consequently, the modeling of a continuous fluidized-bed dryer is even more complicated than that of a batch fluidized-bed dryer. Relatively little has been published on the modeling of continuous fluidized-bed drying. In the few existing models (see, e.g., Vanecek et al. , 1966; Kunni and Levenspiel, 1969; Palancz and Part.. 1973). it is often assumed that the bed temperature: Is constant and Lho outlet streams are in thermal or concentration equilibrium. The fluid mechanical behavior of the drying gas is considered homogeneous; In other words, the drying gas is not partitioned into different phases of the fluidized-bed, such as the emulsion and bubble phases. Instead, these models are based on the overall heat, and mass balances over the dryer. They do not take into account the intricate transport processes of moisture and energy among various phases, and thus these models are often restricted to specific applications. Mode] proposed by Palancz Recently, a mechanistic mode] has been developed for continuous fluidized bed drying (Palancz, 1983). Inessenced, the proposed model is based on the two phase theory of f luidization . The bubbling behavior and 11-70 its effect on the performance of the dryer are characterized by the visualization that a soiid-free bubble phase exists in the bed and that this phase constantly interacts with the emulsion phase."}
{"id": "modelingsimulat00chen", "title": "Modeling and simulation of a continuous fluidized-bed dryer", "year": 1986, "seq": 7, "text": "The underlying assumptions of this theory are that the bed is divided into two phases, a bubble phase and an emulsion phase (which remains in minimum fluidization conditions), and that the excess flow of the fluidizing fluid above minimum fluidization passes through the bed as bubbles. The fluid in the bubble and emulsion phases and the solid particles are considered to be continua. Additional simplifying assumptions imposed in deriving the present model are as follows: 1. The bubble phase is solid-free and the size of bubbles is uniform and fixed at the so-called effective bubble size. 2. The movement of bubbles through the bed is of plug flow. 3. The clouds surrounding the rising bubbles are very thin, and therefore, the bubble phase exchanges mass and energy only with the emulsion gas. 4. The emulsion gas and solid particles are perfectly mixed. 5. Solid particles are added and removed at a constant rate. 6. The inlet temperature and moisture content of solids are assumed to be uniform. 7. The internal resistance of solids to mass and heat transfer is negligible. 8. Particles are considered to be uniform in size, shape and physical properties. 9. The temperature and moisture content of each particle depend on its age, t , that is, the length of its stay in the dryer. III-2 As a consequence of assumptions 4 and 5, the residence time distribution function for solids under a steady-state condi- tion is 1 Cs f(t ) - ^ exp(- 3 (1) 10. Viscous dissipation is negligible. 11. The changes in Che physical properties of both solids and drying gas due to the change of temperature are negligible. These assumptions give rise to the mass and energy conservation equa- tions for each phase of the f luidized-bed dryer. Mass Conservation Equations A- Bubble phase. A steady-state moisture balance around the controlled volume depicted in Fig. 2 gives (see APPENDIX A) Ub dxb b with the boundary condition: 0 (2-b) Integration of eqn."}
{"id": "modelingsimulat00chen", "title": "Modeling and simulation of a continuous fluidized-bed dryer", "year": 1986, "seq": 8, "text": "It has given rise to a fairly rigorous mechanistic model for a continuous f luidized-bed dryer. Based on the model, the numerical simulation has been conducted for the purpose of investiga- ting the influence of the various operating parameters. The results indicate that the performance characteristics of the dryer are affec- ted significantly by the superficial gas velocity, inlet temperature of the drying gas, mean residence time of the solids and dryer-wall temperature . In drying, the moisture content of the drying gas is appreciably increased by evaporation of moisture from the solids. Consequently, a substancial amount of energy is transfered through this moisture migration. This factor is taken into account in the present model. In contrast, the existing comparable model proposed by Palancz assumes that the specific heat of the drying gas remains invariant. Results of simulation have proved that this assumption leads to an over-estimation of the temperature and moisture content of the solids. It is unlikely that the moisture content of the drying gas on the surface of a particle can undergo a discontinuity as suggested by the existing model. The present model does not contain such a discontinuity, and thus is more rational in expressing the heat and mass transfer relationships between the drying gas and solids. In the modeling, it has been assumed that cloud does not exist around the bubble. This is often true in the case where bubbles are small as they leave the distributor and move slowly to the top. When IV-2 the bubble has grown sufficiently large to have cloud, three-phase model should be employed to include the transport processes occuring in the cloud. It is worth pointing out that even though particles in both the emulsion and cloud-wake phases are commonly assumed to have residence time distribution of the completely mixed type, they should be treated differently because of their different moisture contents and mean residence times."}
{"id": "montanaoutdoors521970mont", "title": "Montana outdoors", "year": 1970, "seq": 0, "text": "Bureau of Land Managemeni Photo Breedng pairs of Canada geese are attracted to islands on small and large water areas throughout the Hi-line area of the ]Malta Bureau of Land Manage- ment District. This region is but ten percent of the continent's total duck production area, but it produces more than half of North America's ducks. Up to 80 per cent of all mallards and pintails are produced in the pothole country in addition to great numbers of blue- winged teal, baldpate, and gadwall. These \"puddle\" ducks prefer the small water habitat characteristic of the prairies in contrast to \"divers\" such as redheads and canvasback which normally nest in larger marsh- es or wetlands. Much of the loss of critical water- fowl breeding and nesting habitat has been offset through construction of stock ponds, particularly in eastern Montana. Nearly 8,000 of these ponds have been developed by the Bureau of Land Management in eastern Montana, and these attract breeding pairs of mallards, pintails, teal, gadwalls, and baldpates, the blue-ribbon ducks of the Central fly- way. An untold number of ponds have also been constructed on pri- vate and state lands in the same area. In addition, this prairie region con- tains a large number of potholes of glacial depressions which fill during wet years providing additional \"bonus\" habitat. The pond construction program has taken on even greater dimen- sions within the past ten years. Canada geese now nest on stock ponds as small as two surface acres if suitable nest sites are available. This local breeding population of geese has established itself naturally as a result of this attractive \"new\" habitat. With such a natural breeding base, an expansion of this population to other pond areas with suitable nesting habitat is inevitable. The Canada \"honker\" is known to have a strong homing instinct."}
{"id": "montanaoutdoors521970mont", "title": "Montana outdoors", "year": 1970, "seq": 1, "text": "The Bureau of Land Management has now modified the reservoir de- velopment program to provide bene- fits beyond the initial purpose of livestock water. Stock ponds are an excellent example of modifying a going program to provide additional benefits fcr wildlife. Frequently, if the modifications are initiated at the time of construction, they can be done with little or no additional cost. Guidelines for certain modifications have been developed through a joint effort by personnel from Mon- tana State University, the Montana Fish and Game Department, and BLM Vv''ildlife Specialists and Engineers. Emphasis is presently being placed ori guidelines involving island con- struction and shoreline manipulation. Small islands are frequently planned into the actual construction phase. The value of islands to nest- ing geese and various species of ducks, such as gadwalls, scaup, and teal, is well known. Island habitat provides greater security for nesting waterfowl and will enhance brood survival to the flight stage. Nesting success for geese on islands has been reported as high as 90 per cent compared to 20 per cent on the mainland. Island construction is pos- sible by cutting off peninsulas, throwing up dirt mounds on delta areas, and isolating natural knolls or humps during the construction op- eration. Opporlunities also exist for island construction on existing ponds under the regular reservoir maintenance program. Islands are easily thrown up during periods of low water levels with earthmoving equipment or with a dragline. Other modifica- tions include leaving irregular shore- lines and short peninsulas to produce ideal breeding and loafing areas for many species of ducks. Such irregu- larities, rather than a smooth \"bowl- shaped\" effect, adds that bit of pri- vacy which nesting waterfowl seem to prefer. Future pond construction on public lands will be justified more on the basis of multiple-use benefits rather than single purpose."}
{"id": "montanaoutdoors521970mont", "title": "Montana outdoors", "year": 1970, "seq": 2, "text": "Bureau of Land Manayenienl Photo An existing stock dam where islands are being thrown up with a dragline during maintenance operations. benefits for waterfowl. Nesting cover adjacent to ponds is important to ducks and geese and are of special interest to BLM's new livestock graz- ing systems. Habitat losses will continue to be paramount in the minds of persons having a deep interest in the well- being of migratory waterfowl. Like- wise, the responsibility for creating and maintaining suitable habitat for these unique birds will be a keynote for BLM resource people managing the public lands of Montana and the Dakotas. Director's Column Season Setting Procedure Early in March, the Commission will meet and set f nal deer, elk and bear seasons for 1970. The tentatives, which are the Department's re:om- mendations for seasons, were com- piled in early-January. They were mailed to sportsmens' and agricul- tural organizations and other inter- ested conservation groups for evalu- ation and comment. It is hoped that anyone who desires to comment on these recommendations will do so. This is an extre.mely important part of our season setting procedure. The public must be brought into the pro- gram and a review of the procedures the Department uses for seasons may be in order. A Commission policy governs the opening date of the general big game season. This date has teen set o'-. the third Sunday in October. It is neiessary to establish a firm opening date so that people can plan their hunting well in advance. Consider- able time was spent in analyzing the various land-use patterns and land user conflicts before it was de- termined that the third Sunday in October is best suited to the Mon- tana situation. The Departments recommendations for seasons, the tentatives, have been available for the public to examine for some time."}
{"id": "montanaoutdoors521970mont", "title": "Montana outdoors", "year": 1970, "seq": 3, "text": "We cannot make total counts of game animals in herd units. This is an almost impossible task; however, we can deal with trend information showing whether the basic herds are increasing or de- creasing. Classification counts are also made that give information on animal productivity. These counts show how many calves or fawns were produced per adult. When all information is evaluated, game man- agers have necessary information to determine whether the food supply on critical winter areas is adequate, whether the trend in animal popula- tions utilizing this food supply is up or down, and how game is produc- ing. The harvest situation is evaluated. This is done on the basis of checking station information and mail ques- tionnaires. This information is com- piled by hunter districts. When hunt- et harvest information is plugged into other data relating to welfare of the animals, the type of season nec- essary to maintain, increase, or in certain instances, decrease the size of a herd can be recommended. The information is then presented on a district basis where all of the field personnel are involved. They may accept or change the recommenda- tions according to other local infor- mation available. The district super- visors forward their recommenda- tions to the State headquarters. The Fish and Game director's staff exam- ines all district recommendations and makes necessary changes in order to make the separate proposals fit the state-wide game management pic- ture. These proposals, then, become the tentatives and are mailed to co- operators for comment. This is an important step in the entire process. It gives our personnel an opportunity to meet with the various interested groups and discuss the seasons rec- ommendations. It provides the de- partment and cooperators with an avenue of communication and through this avenue, we the public can be better informed."}
{"id": "montanaoutdoors521970mont", "title": "Montana outdoors", "year": 1970, "seq": 4, "text": "By Ken Greer The Montana Fish and Game Com- rr.ission has been given the author- ity by legislation to nnanage grizzly bears as a rare species, which they are. In order to manage the bears properly, such things as ages, sexes, and numbers of grizzlies annually harvested must be knov^/n as accu- rately as possible. It's a matter of record that some black bear are mistakenly reported as grizzlies, and this is understandable. In order to keep these mistakes to a minimum, the Commission v\\/ill be requested to pass regulations requiring that hunt- ers turn in both the hides and sculls of their grizzly trophies for tagging. The skulls will be cleaned in the GRIZZLY BEAR department's laboratory at Bozeman and then examined to make certain of the species and to gather age and o'fher information. They will then be returned to the hunters. One might think that it's a simple matter to distinguish between black and grizzly bears, but the fact is that it is sometimes difficult even in a nose to nose situation. Size, color and texture of the fur, and body conformation vary greatly among both black and grizzly bears. The dish-faced nose and forehead area commonly believed a distinguishing feature of grizzlies is not entirely reliable because it also occurs among black bears. On the other hand, the rather straight nose-forehead profile RIGHT FRONT FOOT typical of black bears can also be found among grizzlies. When identification is difficult, there are telltale clues if the animal can be examined closely. Persons who know what to look for can us- ually distinguish between a grizzly and black bear hide by looking at the feet. When even foot examination leaves a question, the skull, and particularly the teeth, affords a final check. After examining a host of grizzly bears at the fish and game laboratory in Bozeman, guidelines have been devised for identification of bear species from feet and skulls."}
{"id": "montanaoutdoors521970mont", "title": "Montana outdoors", "year": 1970, "seq": 5, "text": "Peters Montana is blessed with a ir of high quality water-oriented recreation. Several of our rivers \u2014 the Madison, Yellowstone, and Big Hole \u2014 rank among the top ten trout fishing streams in the United States. In addition to a number of large man-made lakes built as multi-purpose water development projects by state and federal agencies, Montana has many large natural lakes. The most noteworthy natural lake is Flathead which covers an area of 188 square miles and is the third largest lake west of the Mississippi River drain- age. Within our state, we have several thousand high mountain lakes, many of which are isolated and get little use. It is unfortunate that these waters are not equally distributed throughout the state. The western third of the state is water-rich, the central portion lacks water especially in the northern part, and the eastern third is just plain water-poor. Most water development projects have been built in the western and central parts of the state, leaving the water-poor eastern area even relatively poorer. The Fish and Game Department has been able to work rather success- Tully with the road building commun- ity protecting trout streams as a result of Montana's Stream Preservation Law which was first enacted in 1963. Because of the good working rela- tionships that have developed over the years, Montana highway officials asked the department how recrea- tion lakes could be built in conjunc- tion with highway construction. It was pointed out that lakes could be developed from borrow pits or by utilizing road embankments as dams where the roads cross drainages. Suc- cessful programs developed by fish and game and highway people in other states were used as a basis to describe depths, area, water quality, etc., necessary to make a lake suit- able for recreation."}
{"id": "wacci-54", "title": "Wacci 54", "year": 1992, "seq": 0, "text": "I never had any trouble with CP/M+, but my whole system went suddenly dead while trying to save some Forth screens. I switched off everything and tried to restart, but nothing would work. Power was going into the keyboard unit, but no response was forthcoming from the VDU; not even a raster; it appeared to be dead. I removed all the peripherals, ROMs, printer and disc drive and tried again. To my relief, the monitor lit up again, but when I added the ROM box, and tried again, all was as dead as Hector. I then replaced the other bits and pieces and tried without the ROM box and everything worked happily. This seemed to indicate a problem with the ROMS, so I removed them, one by one, (Switching off before doing so.) The first one from the box happened to be ROMDOS, and when I restarted the gear, Protext and all the rest came up as usual. I replaced the ROMDOS and all failed again, so that was where the problem lay. It would seem that something had done-in my ROMDOS, whilst I was trying to save the screens. I have obtained another copy of ROMDOS, but I decided to remove the ROM board before using Forth again. It also occurred to me that someone else might have some idea what to do about that. Another version of Forth that would work with CP/M+, might be the best answer. Recently I read somewhere that one cannot use 3.5\u00b0 drives with CP/M, and I concluded that such a statement was nonsense, since I use both together all the time. Now I am wondering if the person who said that was trying to use CP/M 2.2 with a 3.5\" drive. I know that RODOS cannot work with CP/M of any kind at all but, as I have already said, I have had no problems with ROMDOS and CP/Mt."}
{"id": "wacci-54", "title": "Wacci 54", "year": 1992, "seq": 1, "text": "I was preparing a booklet file for the FORTH DOC files when the crash took place. I removed my new ROMDOS and went on with that work. I noticed that when I tried to load the FORTH.DOC file from the WACCI PD Disc 1 there was an unusual effect on the screen - almost as if the fault that had hurt ay ROMDOS was trying to recur. The YDU seemed to be experiencing an overload and was on the point of failing. Now, my colour monitor does suffer from overload if I try to use it to load a tape into my 464 - evidently some problem with the power supply - but my green-screen monitor does not suffer from this fault. The result of such an overload causes the same symptoms, monitor-wise, as the ROMDOS failure. I noticed that the phenomenon didn\u2019t appear when loading other files from the disc. What to do about it? I decided to save the file, which I had managed to load into PROTEXT, and try again. I put a fresh disc in the drive and saved the file. I then tried to load it again and it loaded without a problem. After fooling around with both discs for a while, observing the effects on the VDU I decided that the problem was in the FORTH.DOC file that had been copied with NSWP to the PD disc - and nowhere else. Just what the problem was I know not, but it had been shed between the loading and re-saving from PROTEXT. I concluded that copying the file with NSWP, PIP or FILECOPY had taken the fault along with the file, but saving from PROTEXT had left it behind. I returned to my original PD disc and deleted the offending file which I then saved to it again from PROTEXT."}
{"id": "wacci-54", "title": "Wacci 54", "year": 1992, "seq": 2, "text": "A series would be most welcome, Colin. You write it, we'll print it. How will making doughnuts square help headless beings to ingest them? Surely your other sphincter would be able to cope with anything. -Mike.>> IMPRESSED, THANKFUL AND HOPEFUL Dear Mike, Thank you for the help you and Tony Walker gave over the phone on 3rd and 4th April regarding 3rd drives for my CPC 6128. I want to tell you of some excellent service that I have received from Arnor. About a month ago I was having trouble with my Protext ROM which I have had for six years. I contacted Arnor on a Wednesday and they asked me to return it to them for checking. Three days later I received a replacement ROM free of charge and it was the latest issue of Protext. Does anybody know of any reliable places where I can buy ROMdos, a 3rd drive switch and MAXIdos please? When I bought the May issue of Amstrad Computer User there were no firms advertising them. I could get Amstrad Action but that has a cover tape and a high price, (which is no use when I have a CPC 6128.) I am impressed with the quality of the WACCI CP/M PD software. The DC-CPC Spreadsheet is just about the noisiest spreadsheet I have come across. Just about every other key I press except the cursor keys gives a beep. However upon reading the instructions for it I had to make a work disc which I was glad of because it gave me an idea of how to auto start my DR Logo disc. Does the Mikedit Word-processor have any means of loading in a text file, I can find the save file option on the menus but no load options. I have even tried entering a text file name in the command tail at the A> prompt when loading Mikedit but that makes no difference except for loading the word-processor."}
{"id": "the-historical-mission-of-the-working-class-and-the-contemporary-international-revolutionary-process", "title": "The Historical Mission of the Working Class and the Contemporary International Revolutionary Process", "year": 1973, "seq": 0, "text": "This assumes, under various conditions, that the consideration of any political and class question any- where in the world should proceed from the workers\u2019 re- volutionary standpoint and stem from the theoretical start- ing point of socialist revolution. The diversification and complexity of peoples\u2019 is- sues are in need of this most radical concept which is capable of unifying such issues; and without this most radi- cal concept, viz: the workers, it will be impossible to unify peoples\u2019 issues in a developed militant manner. A superficial, or confirmist, concept can provide a stumbling and precarious combination of human struggle issues, which may achieve simple and narrow coordination and collaboration but such consequences are far from of- fering any methodological course of common struggle per- fected by the strategy of contemporary international revo- lution. The international life of the working class has pro- vided, through irrefutable and radical experiences, evidence of the fact that the working class itself has been capable of steering the variables of human struggle and transforming them into constant socialist transformation principles which have imposed the socialist reconstruction in vast areas of the world. Following the glorious Soviet October Revolution, the positions of socialist struggle have been consolidated and basic opportunities provided for the liberation and social progress of peoples, within the framework of the ever- 8 growing prestige and historical role of the working class in the orientation of social struggle and liberation. As the Soviet October Revolution represented the great starting point of the international revolutionary movement, the assimilation of the process and comprehen- sion of its specific conditions makes it basically inevitable to devote serious attention to two points - 1. Intensive deduction of revolutionary lessons and ex- periences introduced by the October Revolution, close maintenance of revolutionary inspiration and an ever- vital revision of the October Revolution. 2."}
{"id": "the-historical-mission-of-the-working-class-and-the-contemporary-international-revolutionary-process", "title": "The Historical Mission of the Working Class and the Contemporary International Revolutionary Process", "year": 1973, "seq": 1, "text": "The working class in the imperialist West should either acclimatise itself within the classical imperialist system and abandon the world revolutionary process, or merge itself with the revolutionary and liberation movements the world over, within the role it can efficiently undertake and thus assume in a pioneering manner; there is no other alter- native. THE \u00abTHIRD WORLD\u00bb AND NATIONAL REVOLU- TION : To begin with, reference should be made to the fact that the East is a permissive expression referring to the peoples of Asia, Africa and Latin America, to qualify the ferocious national revolutionary struggle launched by the oppressed masses against world imperialism and capitalism. The term of national revolution implies the following basic concepts : a) Struggle against imperialism and neo-colonialism b) Struggle against foreign occupation. c) Unification of the masses belonging to one nation. 24 d) Unification of the territory belonging to one nation. A glance at these concepts would reveal a fact related to the possibility of their orientation within a bourgeois democratic channel or a socialist development. This implies that the polarisation of class struggle and _ the significant role of the working class within its context are the two basic guarantees to define the socialist course of national revolution. For several considerations, it can be argued that on certain occasions an improper divergence took place between the world workers\u2019 struggle and national strug- gle in the colonised, occupied and oppressed territories, which resulted in popularising an experience within most national movements through which the middle and petit-bourgeois leadership managed to leave _ their im- prints. Should the common intuitive concept in the theo- retical and political analysis of scientific socialism indi- cate that any national and nationalist struggle, after the October Revolution, joins the great human effort in re- sisting capitalism and its vices, then ascribing the char- acteristic of planning practices to such a postulate is indis- pensible."}
{"id": "the-historical-mission-of-the-working-class-and-the-contemporary-international-revolutionary-process", "title": "The Historical Mission of the Working Class and the Contemporary International Revolutionary Process", "year": 1973, "seq": 2, "text": "The forces of world imperialism have endeavoured to destroy the nations of the East, humiliate their masses, plunder their material resources and deny them the op- portunity of liberty and progress. In this, the imperialist forces relied on the reactionary forces of the oppressed nations to draw up long-range exploitation schemes. 26 In the wake of the compound, long-range programme for the exploitation, colonisation and impoverishment of the oppressed nations, class struggle was growingly in- corporated into national conflicts. For instance, the Arab nation, with a population of 100 million, has been suffering for more than three cen- turies under the yoke of imperialism and foreign occupa- tion, subject to contrasted domination of the Ottomans and local feudalists, to be followed by British and French imperialism, Zionism and the big bourgeoisie. Now this contractual plunder is shared by the U.S. imperialists, Zionists, Arab royal regimes, the reactionary monarchy in Iran and all other pockets of neo-colonialism which have collaborated to dedicate the occupation of Arab Palestine, other Arab territories and the Arab Gulf. the plunder of Arab oil and conversion of Arab territory into military bases. Hence, it is obvious that the struggle waged by the masses of the Arab nation is ironically both complex and simple; it combines several forms of class and national struggle, which are vividly clear to the Arab masses which consider Arab unity a central slogan to maintain their historical entity as a nation and safeguard their Arab homeland against occupation. The most ferocious imperialist and Zionist techni- ques which aim to subdue the Arab masses, plunder their resources and impoverish their forthcoming generations is that of occupying the Arab territories, deporting Arab natives and coercively bringing in alien settlers. Zi Hand in hand with this technique goes another im- perialist technique represented in aggravating disruption. fragmentation and class conflicts."}
{"id": "InThePresenceOfGriefARe", "title": "Smith - In The Presence Of Grief A Re", "year": 1986, "seq": 0, "text": "Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. in fact, provide a more biblical vision of the God who is present in the midst of life, suffering, and even in loss. Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 5 CHAPTER 1 THE IMPACT OF LOSS Loss not death is the normative metaphor for understand\u00ac ing those experiences in human life that produce grief. The Christian congregation's ministry in the presence of grief requires a recognition of the impact that loss has upon persons. Behind all grief there is a form of loss. Bertha Simos explained: Loss is defined as being deprived of or being without something one has had and valued and includes the exper\u00ac ience of separation. The term is applied both to the act of severance leading to the loss, as well as to a tempo\u00ac rary loss and to the fear of loss. These experiences, loss, separation, and fear of loss, are universal to all people at every stage of the life cycle. 2 Perhaps because persons are more accustomed to hear\u00ac ing about the dramatic losses that occur, especially losses resulting from death, there is a tendency to overlook many of the other loss experiences of life. \"Loss touches every\u00ac one throughout life,\" reminds John Schneider, \"yet its exis\u00ac tence is frequently unrecognized, except in extreme cases ^Kenneth R. Mitchell and Herbert Anderson, All Our Loss, All Our Griefs (Philadelphia: Westminster Press, 1983) 19. ^Bertha G. Simos, A Time to Grieve (New York: Family Service Association of America, 1979) I\". Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. ,-dt- 6 such as death, war or disasters.\" 3 How often is loss recog\u00ac nized as a part of a major promotion, a cross-country move, the fulfillment of a dream, or of the marriage of a child?"}
{"id": "InThePresenceOfGriefARe", "title": "Smith - In The Presence Of Grief A Re", "year": 1986, "seq": 1, "text": "Loss is hazardous to human health and well\u00ac being; therefore it must be given serious recognition and attention in the Christian community and the larger society. Loss affects the total person: emotionally, physi\u00ac cally, mentally, socially and spiritually. Loss also comes in jnany forms and often with multiple aspects. For a more systematic presentation of the various types of loss, I have grouped loss into four basic categories: 1) loss of rela- 7 Schneider, 12. Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 11 tionships, 2) loss related to oneself, 3) loss of material objects, and 4) loss related to life stages and social sys\u00ac tems. Loss of Relationships The first conscious awareness of loss for many people comes during childhood when a first \"best friend\" moves away, or when an aged grandparent dies and one sadly recognizes that one of significance has gone from the circle of relation\u00ac ships. Life and living encompass a complex of attachments to and separations from other human beings through each stage of life, from womb to grave. Through our lives pass a steady stream of persons, many we hardly know, a few we live with in the most intimate of ways, but sooner or later we are separa\u00ac ted from them all. These losses are an inescapable part of our human lives. They occur through divorce, physical sepa\u00ac ration, accident, illness, rejection, advanced age, natural and manmade tragedy, imprisonment and death. Significant to the grief that comes from such loss of relationship is the intensity and ratio of both positive and negative feelings held toward the person who is gone. No amount of love can keep a person forever by one's side. Nor would feeling hatred toward another person remove the possibility of ex\u00ac periencing grief when that person is gone. Recognition of the ratio of love and hate in a relationship broken by loss is a key element in healthy grief work."}
{"id": "InThePresenceOfGriefARe", "title": "Smith - In The Presence Of Grief A Re", "year": 1986, "seq": 2, "text": "Nevertheless we are attached to them and what they represent, and their loss would cause us pain. The grief evoked by the loss of a favorite object may arise from the identification we have made between the object and some significant person in our life. When my family eats the last jar of my deceased mother's watermelon pickles, one more tangible expression of her loving presence will disappear from our home. I have no doubt that the spe\u00ac cial tablecloth she made for us will seem just a little more important when all the pickles are gone. Our pets may be regarded as possessions, yet because we tend to speak of and relate to pets as though they are human, we experience intense grief over their loss. Death of a pet is often one of a child's first and most traumatic losses. A child also experiences loss and real pain when a Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 14 favorite toy breaks and Daddy cannot \"fix it,\" or when the precious security blanket finally wears out, or the first +imp. a balloon pops, or when the child innocently tosses a kitten into the air like a stuffed toy and its neck is bro\u00ac ken. The parent's behavior and attitude toward the child at these times of loss will have influence upon the young\u00ac ster's first feelings of grief. As children tend to be more overt arui expressive of feelings, the parental acceptance or rejection of these feelings will either encourage or discour\u00ac age future expressions of grief as the child grows and faces other losses in life. And thus the child internalizes what his parent figures communicate is \"okay\" or \"not okay\" to feel and to express at times of loss. Loss Related to Life Stages and Social Systems Loss occurs in the normal development of life and in the evolution of the social systems in which we live."}
{"id": "InThePresenceOfGriefARe", "title": "Smith - In The Presence Of Grief A Re", "year": 1986, "seq": 3, "text": "Each new step of growth and change for us as human beings is built upon giving up or leaving behind a familiar object or self-image. When the baby develops the ability to drink in\u00ac dependently from a glass and to eat solid food, he also ex\u00ac periences the loss of the comfort of the mother's breast. Graduation from high school signals the passing of familiar routines of our school days, and while society celebrates this accomplishment with festive rituals, some youth experience Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 15 graduation as a time of loss and confusion and resent the new expectations placed upon them. Young adults experience the loss of personal freedom when they choose a specific career and exclude other possibilities, or decide to share life with one person, or assume the responsibilities of parenthood with its accompanying loss of time and resources for personal pleasures. Later stages in life bring possible loss of phy\u2014 sical mobility or health, and changes affecting judgment, 8 memory and decision-making powers. Human beings tend to live in a variety of social and interacting systems that develop dependable or at least pre\u00ac dictable patterns of behavior. Workers on an assembly line may experience the loss of the need for skills they have de\u00ac veloped over a lifetime because of advances in automation that change or completely eliminate their familiar jobs. When my oldest son moved from home to live with friends, the whole family experienced feelings of pain and emotions of grief that we had not anticipated as we experienced a change w ithin our family system and realized that life would never be the same again. We recognized that within this normal, to-be-expected development of our children growing up and \"going out on their own\" there is even there a kind of loss and grief to be worked through. \u00aeSimos, 13-18."}
{"id": "InThePresenceOfGriefARe", "title": "Smith - In The Presence Of Grief A Re", "year": 1986, "seq": 4, "text": "I 18 seems \u2022\u00bb nhirman to treat our dying loved ones to some kind of facadical relationship because we think it will make their burden greater if we let them see a little of the pain we experience at their leaving. The nurturing of open and loving communication between the living as well as between the living and the dying is always a vital part of the church's ministry with persons. Let us also be aware that loss can be experienced differently, depending on whether we are the one leaving a relationship or the one being left. Feeling resentful at being left is a frequent experience of survivors even in a case of death. Guilt, on the other hand, may be a strong feeling with persons who leave home, or a marriage, or a job, or a love relationship. Summary Loss, in any form, whether related to things, rela\u00ac tionships, or very significant persons, is at base a loss of a part of our self. Our lives are formed so much by the many attachments we make, and loss represents a taking away of some part of our personal totality. Loss is inescapably painful precisely because attachment is a human necessity. Our attachment to objects other than human beings is a recognition not only that the un\u00ac conscious continues to be indiscriminate throughout adult\u00ac hood, it is also an affirmation of our linkage with the Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 19 whole of creation that God has given us as a sacred trust. To be human is to be a griever for all kinds of losses.10 Aware that losses come in all shapes and sizes, and that the recognition and identification of our losses is important to our total well-being and growth, we now turn to consider grief - the reaction we have to loss. 10 Mitchell and Anderson, 51-52."}
{"id": "InThePresenceOfGriefARe", "title": "Smith - In The Presence Of Grief A Re", "year": 1986, "seq": 5, "text": "Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 30 a reminder that though the loss may be permanent, life and relationships do go on, and the grief process will not have to last forever. Grief is spiral shaped. Beginning at the point of the loss with its emotional shock and acute pain, the griever progresses in a circular movement which from time to time brings him back to a point directly above the starting and many of the initial feelings burst out again. This is very likely to occur during special holidays or on an anniversary of a time which had special meaning for the bereaved and the one lost. The further one moves away from the loss, the less powerful these emotions become, although they may never com\u00ac pletely fade. The spiral model provides a meaningful image for talking about the process of grief, allowing for the un\u00ac predictability of emotions and also offering a sign of hope 14 for the successful completion of the grief work. Grief is temporarily self-centered . Persons in grief need to have opportunity, at least momentarily, to shut out the rest of the world while they face the initial shock waves of their pain and loss. This does not mean that the person should be left alone; it does mean allowing the bereaved some time to get started on his grief work before the usual social l^Kenneth R. Mitchell and Herbert Anderson, All Our Losses, All Our Griefs (Philadelphia: Westminster Press, 1983) 91. Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 31 pressures or economic necessity push him back into the socia* world. Temporary withdrawal and tending to one's intraper\u00ac sonal experience is an important part of the healing process anH should not be viewed as unhealthy escapism unless it be\u00ac comes a long-term condition. 16 Grief i f : work because it is a hard and painful exper\u00ac ience which takes a lot of energy."}
{"id": "InThePresenceOfGriefARe", "title": "Smith - In The Presence Of Grief A Re", "year": 1986, "seq": 6, "text": "Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 35 when they are experiencing personal troubles and grief. I could not understand why persons who had been regular in wor\u00ac ship attendance, had participated in other church activities, and who appeared dependable and enthusiastic about their church, suddenly turned it all off when loss entered their lives. Didn't they realize that the church was one place wh&rs they could really confront the dark side of life? Did they blame God for their loss, or feel that there was no reason to continue in the church since all their participa\u00ac tion had not prevented pain from entering their lives? Had their church activities been a kind of insurance policy against trouble? Or could it be that they felt that sorrow, anger, guilt, and feelings of despair just did not fit or would not be acceptable to all those bright, smiling faces at Sunday morning worship? I have come to believe that the problem was even more basic than all these popular reasons \u2014 it usually involved the core of a person's beliefs about God. In spite of the persistent myth of popular religion that \"It doesn't matter what you believe, just so you believe in God,\" in times of crisis persons find that what they believe about God impacts directly upon how they deal with and feel about the crisis itself. The question to be faced is not whether or not one believes in God, but what is the nature of the God one be\u00ac lieves in? Even prior to the question about the nature and Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 36 characteristics of God is the question: What is faith? Paul Tillich has contributed much to clarify our thinking about the nature of faith with his definition that faith is \"a state of being ultimately concerned.\" 3 Tillich's exploration of faith as ultimate concern helps separate faith as a dyna\u00ac mic state of being totally committed from the content of our ultimate concerns."}
{"id": "InThePresenceOfGriefARe", "title": "Smith - In The Presence Of Grief A Re", "year": 1986, "seq": 7, "text": "Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 39 result from th e social and individual abuse of free will. The finite freedom which God has given and which might appear to be a self-imposed limitation on God's goodness and power can really be seen as a positive witness to these aspects of divinity. Only an all-powerful God can take such a risk as to create historical beings with such radical freedom. Thus God, who transcends this creation and history with its free\u00ac dom that allows for the event of evil and suffering, is also the God who continues to struggle against the creation's abu\u00ac sive use of freedom. Tillich reminds us that in our devotional and rela\u00ac tional life with God the two main symbolic spheres by which we relate to God, that of God as Lord and God as Father, are not to be seen as conflicting images but as manifestations of God's being. The concept 'Lord' expresses the holy power, the distance between God and creation. The concept Father expresses the holy love, the unity between God and creation. If the content of our faith does not include both concepts, then our image of God is less than complete. The image of 'Lord' alone can become a tyranny, while the image of 'Father' 8 alone tends to become sentimentality. Now we turn to identify those theological concepts drawn from the life of Jesus which address the existential issues common to the grief process. 8 Paul Tillich, Systematic Theology .(Chicago: Univer\u00ac sity of Chicago Press, 1951) I, 286-288. Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 40 In the manifestation of Christ in our created exist\u00ac ence we meet God as Lord and as Father, and we meet Christ as Son as Brother.^ The confession of Jesus as the Christ, the God-sent-one, focuses our attention on how God partici\u00ac pates in this historical creation."}
{"id": "InThePresenceOfGriefARe", "title": "Smith - In The Presence Of Grief A Re", "year": 1986, "seq": 8, "text": "As we observe Jesus through the eyes of the Gospel writers and of the early church community, we become aware of God's involvement, en\u00ac countering the abuse of freedom by sinful man, and encourag\u00ac ing responsible choice of a lifestyle of love and justice. In the previous chapter, grief was defined as a pro\u00ac cess involving recognition, acceptance and resolution of loss in a person\u2019s life. Recognition coincides in grief with the initial im\u00ac pact or shock of a loss. Many different emotions may be ex\u00ac pressed but the dominant state is one of anxiety resulting from the separation and threatening radical change in one's life style. In an extreme case, as in death of a spouse who was one's primary source of love and security, the loss may be perceived as a direct attack on the content of a person s faith. The theological issue here is the need for the courage to be, the need to be heard and sustained in a time when basic life trust has been threatened or attacked. Here the model of Jesus, praying in great anxiety in the garden ^Tillich, Systematic Theology, I, 289. Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 41 (Mark 14:32-34), and enduring the overwhelming sense of aban\u00ac donment on the cross (Mark 15:34), can be cathartic paradigms of our own experience. And perhaps in this initial period of recognition of loss we need to hear and sense that \"we are not alone in our struggles, (II Corinthians 1:1-8); and that our God promises to be with us in our struggles. (Phillipians 3:10).\" 10 As the grief process moves toward acceptance of the loss, the energy invested in the attachment begins to be re\u00ac gained by the ego. There is a lessening of emotional pain and the beginning of the creation of memories and the estab\u00ac lishment of perspective."}
{"id": "InThePresenceOfGriefARe", "title": "Smith - In The Presence Of Grief A Re", "year": 1986, "seq": 9, "text": "A positive approach to anger is to accept and express it, to work with the anger until some resolution, is found. This is a more productive approach than today's common ten\u00ac dency to deny or hide our anger, or to separate ourself from what we consider to be the source of our anger. God can be approached in anger as well as in love anH obedience if God is understood as being beyond all our gods and ideas of god, as the inclusive ground and power of being who is able to overcome our anger through acceptance and grace. God heals by accepting and absorbing our anger, even anger toward God, just as God absorbed evil and death in the crucifixion of Jesus Christ, thus overcoming the abuses of finite freedom and transforming them into new life. Thus \"the Cross stands as the central effective manifestation of God's taking the abusive consequences of finite freedom upon himself.\" 12 12 Paul Tillich, Systematic Theology, II, 176. Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 43 As grief proceeds toward resolution, the realization grows that one is now faced with the demands and circum\u00ac stances of a new reality. The death of a spouse especially confronts the bereaved with the need for a reorganization of one's life style. New patterns of behavior will be formed as new relationships are established, both with new and old friends. The content of belief needed for the final phase of the grief process as the new life style of the bereaved begins to take shape is the concept of divine love. This divine love is manifest in the conditions of existence in Jesus the Christ. 13 This love is the power that can help the bereaved reconstruct their lives, gain confidence and trust to live through grief, absorb the pain and begin to participate in the new reality of their lives."}
{"id": "mississippi_star_1997-08", "title": "Mississippi Star, August 1997, Vol. 1 No. 12", "year": 1997, "seq": 0, "text": "I want them to know that we are preparing them to make a difference in the world. Each person should strive to make a differ- ence. We strive to make a difference in children\u2019s lives.\u201d Elaine LaFontaine, a friend and fellow third grade teacher, said that Stewart is an inspiration to all. \u201cShe is a tremendous role model in her com- munity as well as in her school. Portia is always willing to help others.. She is a caring, loving person who has helped many students in our school. She has 8 Mississippi Star PORTIA STEWART been a dedicated teacher and friend to many in the Bay-Waveland School District for the past twenty-four years.\u201d Stewart is serving in the second year of her second term as _ president of the Pass Christian School Board. She is a graduate of Randolph High School and Alcorn State University. She serves her church, Goodwill Baptist Church as director of the youth department which includes the youth choir and drill team; and she sings in the inspirational choir. Portia and her husband Robert, a horologist in the jewelry department at Service Merchandise in Gulfport, have four children, two girls and two boys, and they reside in Pass Christian. Chantel is a senior at William Carey on the Coast. Nikita is planning to begin her junior year at USM Gulf Park; Ryan is a junior in the band and on the track team at Pass High; Robyn is a member of the Pass High band and is an honor student. Ms We\u2019ve Been Putting People First For 100 Years We believe in our community and the power of the dreams of the people who live here. Over the past 100 years, we ve helped a lot of dreams come true \u2014 family vacations, new cars, home improvements, family businesses."}
{"id": "mississippi_star_1997-08", "title": "Mississippi Star, August 1997, Vol. 1 No. 12", "year": 1997, "seq": 1, "text": "They have confidence, they are assertive and they are aggres- sive. They believe that they can tack- le anything. They all remain bright eye and bushy tail all the way through.\u201d Shelia Williams, principal of Mt. Carmel Alpha II Christian School confirms Fairley\u2019s assessment. \u201cNinety-eight percent of the students who leave Alpha are honor roll stu- dents when they attend other schools,\u201d she said. The reason for this success accord- ing to Williams is very basic. \u201cI believe that above all our school is a ministry. We minister first as well as teach in an atmosphere of excellence. All of our children are introduced to Christ. This is one of the first things that we do. The first class of every 24 Mississippi Star day is Bible study. \u201cYou have to minister to the underlying problems before you can reach the students academically,\u201d she explained.. \u201cMany of our students are male and must be ministered to in the area of self-esteem. Some have been pre- viously labeled as having behavioral Once the self-esteem is problems. Edna Toler is director of Mt. Carmel\u2019 Alpha I. established, we have found that the behavioral problem is also corrected. This is one of the main reasons ACS came into existence. \u201cOne of the first things we do is to let them know who they are in Christ,\u201d Williams revealed. \u201cThey learn that J can do all things through Christ which strengtheneth me. They learn that they can achieve. They learn that they can strive to be any- thing that they want to be.\u201d Williams revealed that her role at the school was also the result of \u201cT had worked about every type of sales a spiritual discovery. job from direct mail, radio sales and I\u2019ve even sold cars. I prayed to the Lord to reveal to me my purpose."}
{"id": "mississippi_star_1997-08", "title": "Mississippi Star, August 1997, Vol. 1 No. 12", "year": 1997, "seq": 2, "text": "A new school year sounds great to some, but not everyone believes that is so. Everyone is not open to the idea that a new school year pro- vides the opportunity for a fresh start to reach new heights and to accomplish the things that will make you feel proud of y-o-u. Your friends will be there, but you shouldn't have to terminate friend- ships unless the friendship is in the way of you going after your goals. If, in the past, you have been the class clown, pull away from that role. Surprise your friends by showing them that there are brains in your head. If you have cheated on a test or assignment, develop study habits which will allow you to make the grade without having to cheat - solo, if necessary. If you are having a serious problem in a class, talk with your teacher and seek out a tutor or a friend or class- mate who has a good grasp of the subject. If you have been a party animal in the past, | would advise you to begin practicing the theory: Hard work before trifling play makes stu- dent get the grade to mosey on down the aisle and receive diplo- ma. You will be rewarded in a major way for all of the partying you suspend. Finally, there is no doubt that school is stressful. Each class deliv- ers a different feeling and a differ- ent aspect. The only way to grasp these things is by being alert. Take advantage of all the opportunity to learn and to prepare yourself for a productive future. Apply yourself, push yourself and think better of yourself. Always reach higher than the sky! Adrienne Bradley is a_ recent graduate of Our Lady Academy in Bay St. Louis and will begin her freshman year at the University of South Alabama in September. s August 1997 33 CALENDAR | AUGUST 16 & 17 AUGUST 21 Gulf Coast Par Busters Third Annual Gulf Coast of Gulfport Business and Golf Tournament Marketing Fair The Great Southern West Harrison Golf Clulo Community Center Gulfoort 4470 Esopy Avenue 7:00 a.m."}
{"id": "montereynews1997unse_4", "title": "Monterey news", "year": 1997, "seq": 0, "text": "The sun is shining on the water It is very peaceful I am Sitting on a big rock The rock is warm from the sun I take off my shoes Christina Gregor The Goldfish Why do you die so soon? How come you picked the water? Why are you So timid? How come your scales are so pretty? How do you like the bowl? Where do you get your bubbles? How did you get here? Because I get sick It suits me Something may drop on me The sunrays hit me Its like a prison cell That happens when I breath out My ancestors evolved into many Tess Hardcastle Why is hair so hairy? How do you get so curly? How do you get so straight? And dirty Why do you turn grey? Why do you fall out? Our long lost friend When you get cut off When you are on the floor It is a tragedy Lindy Ann Marcel 13 LATE SEASON MAPLER: THE SAPSUCKERS Sugaring is over for us this year. When people ask me what kind of season we had, I say, \u201cWe did real well, consid- ering.\u201d I can go on to explain that the sap was good and sweet, but we didn\u2019t have much dry wood put up and ready this year. Things went well in the sugarhouse, with good help from our kids and others, and nice visits with old friends and neigh- bors. Unfortunately we weren\u2019t actually in the sugarhouse all that much because there were three weeks in March so cold the sap couldn\u2019t run. Then before we knew it, April was here. It was full of snow, but the trees knew it was spring and the sap turned cloudy or \u201cbuddy,\u201d and we shut down. I put in some time in the bottling department, filling orders, and now the operation is all cleaned up and packed away except for a hundred buckets stacked in the woodshed waiting to be washed."}
{"id": "montereynews1997unse_4", "title": "Monterey news", "year": 1997, "seq": 1, "text": "Don Clawson Box 26 Monterey 01245 (413) 528-3257 BREAKFAST WITH A NUCLEAR REACTOR: MEDITATIONS ON ENERGY Nestled at the bottom of a mountain in Rowe, MA, surrounded by incredible natural beauty, the 365 ton engine of the decomissioned Yankee Rowe facility was driven through large steel gates, and, at one mph, crossed a specially recon- structed bridge over the Deerfield River. It was on its way to a wide-load car on a train that would take its low-level radio- active waste to a burial plot in Barnwell, South Carolina. I had every reason not to go, but curiosity got the best of me. I watched the sun rise over the eastern summit in Florida, MA on Sunday, April 27, and wound down the mountain in the dark, thinking that the directions from my bu- reau chief about going down the last stretch in a low gear were understated. The people who work there are trust- ing. I stood 10 yards from the reactor core vessel, alarge cannister laying on its side, with a \"\"Project Green Field - Safe from Start to Finish\" logo on either end. The employees told me - with straight faces, and no protective gear - how the decommissioning was 70 percent com- plete, and would be finished by the end of the year. They were safely \"completing the cycle of nuclear energy.\" They also told me what a great employer Yankee Rowe had been. I asked about the high-level waste. The reactor core was low level from having been the container for the nuclear reactions that generate the energy, but what about the really \u201chot\" stuff? It was on site, I was told, in something called \"spent-fuel pools.\" When the fuel rods wear out, they get dumped in a protected area, and sit there, waiting ten thousand years fer to decontaminate. I was told that the solution for this, and the way to return the site to it's previous condition (green field) was for the federal government to decide on one national site for all of this toxicity (God bless the neighbors) so that the fuel could be removed."}
{"id": "montereynews1997unse_4", "title": "Monterey news", "year": 1997, "seq": 2, "text": "It is believed to have belonged to Metacomet, the Wampanoag war chief who led tribal nations on a war path to drive the English out of New England. Better described as a series of bloody frontier skirmishes, they went down in history as \u201cKing Philip\u2019s War.\" \u201cKing Philip\u201d was a royal title given to Metacomet by the Pilgrims, asa native son of Massasoit, the benevolent chief who had befriended the fragile new settle- ment at Plymouth. After surviving the first winter, the Pilgrims invited Massasoit to the first Thanksgiving, and King James I of England sent him a sterling silver pipe in appreciation of his protection and support. When King Philip became Chief, he bore the burden of his title in name only, and followed in his father\u2019s foot-steps to maintain good relations with the new arrivals to his country. However by 1675, Wampanoag hunting grounds were over- run with settlers, and mounting un-re- solved Indian grievances led to his decla- ration of war. The offensive that followed brought Philip through this part of the country along the Indian trail known as \u201cBig Path,\" in an effort to get support from the tribal nations living in the Housatonic and Hudson river valleys. As Philip and some 600 warriors threaded their way through the hills to cross the Housatonic, they had already burned a number of villages, but fortunately they found no settlers here at that time. Their presence was tolerated by the local Mohicans, but the Mohicans knew better than to take part in his strong arm tactics, and they refused to join his failing cause. Philip was forced further west into what is now New York State, hoping to enjoin the Mohawks of the mighty Iroquois federation. Instead they attacked his camp with such a devastating blow to be a turning point ultimate defeat and death in June of 1676."}
{"id": "montereynews1997unse_4", "title": "Monterey news", "year": 1997, "seq": 3, "text": "The Mohicans in this area wit- nessed the incredible journey of General Knox dragging heavy artillery over the snow from Ft. Ticonderoga to help Gen- eral Washington drive the British out of Boston harbor. Although the Mohicans were gener- ally inclined to pass the peace-pipe around the council fires, they may have been impressed by this extraordinary over- land military maneuver and elected to fight on the side of the colonists against England. They subsequently took to the war path toward Boston to join in the battle, a path that would be put on the map as The Knox Trail. (Route 23 from Great Barrington through Monterey and Otis) When, on July 4 later that year, the Colonies declared their independence from Great Britain, with an otherwise masterful stroke of Jefferson\u2019s brilliant penmanship, endowing all men with in- alienable rights, this did not include Indi- ans or anyone else who did not own property. After another hundred years, this omission was still in contention in the far West, as tribal nations whose land hold- ings were substantial tried to defend their birth-rights. In 1876 the battle of the Little Big Horn only temporarily stemmed the tide of transgression. Not until 1976 with the culmination of the American Indian Movement did congress vote to pay one hundred and fifty million dollars to the tribal descen- dants of this conflict for property taken from them without due process of law. Congress has since passed a REPA- TRIATIONS ACT, declaring that Na- tive American artifacts must be returned to descendants of tribes of the artifact\u2019s origin. This may prove to be a difficult but honorable process. King Philip\u2019s war club remains as a symbol of a clash of cultures on a war path that finally extended across the en- tire country. Brave people on both sides fought and died in a struggle that still has repercussions to this very day."}
{"id": "montereynews1997unse_4", "title": "Monterey news", "year": 1997, "seq": 4, "text": "But local officials are also justifiably frustrated that the state has not lived up to its financialcommitment of fully funding the PILOT account for state-owned land which is exempt from conventional local property taxes. If state agencies don\u2019t pay for their share of local expenses such as fire protection and road maintenance, local officials may feel forced to make up the difference by embracing potentially inappropriate private development which will pay its taxes. In order to work toward full funding of the state\u2019s PILOT obligation, I am asking that language be added to the Fiscal Year 1998 state budget to provide a 20% increase over the PILOT funds recommended by the Weld/Cellucci ad- ministration. It will take some convinc- ing to demonstrate to legislators from urban districts the importance of these PILOT funds to the small, rural towns in this district, but I intend to fight for this vital financial support. The Department of Housing and Community Development (DHCD) re- cently announced a new round of fund- ing for the Municipal Incentive Grant Program. The program is designed to assist local officials in the planning, management and operation of cities and towns and the training of local officials. In past years, municipalities were re- quired to have an approved \u201cCommunity Action Statement\u201d (CAS) on file with the state in order to apply for these grants. Few small towns in western Mass. felt able to pull together the paperwork for the CAS, so few of these grants were awarded in this part of the state. This year, communities are being asked to submit only a letter of interest before submitting a formal application. If you have amunicipal program or project whic h might meet the grant criteria, contact your Board of Selectmen, Planning Board or another local agency about working with you on this grant."}
{"id": "montereynews1997unse_4", "title": "Monterey news", "year": 1997, "seq": 5, "text": "PO BOX 01245 Dear Editor: I am not a member of the congrega- tion of the Monterey Church and never have been. I go to Quaker Meeting in Great Barrington and probably always will, but I know that I also will always feel myself to be a member of the Monterey Church family. Since I started living in Monterey full time in 1974 the church building has been important to me. I was living in a tipi beside Hunger Brook and joined the Monterey Food Co-op, which meets in the church basement or social room ev- ery month. Twenty years later I am still in the co-op, still meeting my community family to parcel out the food order and exchange news and opinions there. Every summer I take Monterey chil- dren on a series nature walks, an inde- pendent program that meets at the church and makes use of the social room, espe- cially on rainy days. All through the years the Monterey Church has been gen- erous to me and my family and has made a town center for our spread-out rural town. We had a memorial service there for my mother three years ago and felt com- forted and most welcome, as did our many friends from far away who came on that day to our town center. Like a lot of people in this town, when I say \u201cdowntown\u201d I mean that triangle om Church to Post Office to General Store. Now one of the three, the church building or meeting house, needs fixing up. We in the co-op know that whenever it rains we have to duck a major cataract right in front of the door to 20 Years' Service - Rick Mielke Seasonal Caretaking Professional Year-Round Maintenance of Your House and Grounds 528-0864 We Return Your Calls Fully Equipped - P."}
{"id": "GauldMediumship", "title": "Mediumship and Survival", "year": 1982, "seq": 0, "text": "Along with his friends - chief among them Henry Sidgwick and Edmund Gurney - Myers became one of the iounder members ol the Society for Psychical Research, when it was formed in 1882 to put these ideas into practice, and this series is being published to mark the Society's centenary. The phenomena of the 'unseen world' to which Myers referred were originally for convenience put into live categories, each of which a committee was set up to investigate: telepathy, hypnotism, 'sensitives', apparitions and 'the various physical phenomena commonly called Spiritualistic'. Over the years the emphasis has to some extent shilted - in particular hypnotism, which at that time was dismissed as an occult delusion, was just about to be accepted as a reality, so it ceased to be on the psychic side of the fence. But broadly speaking, the phenomena under investigation are the same, and the ways in which they have been investigated have remained as Myers planned. The terminology, however, was changed - and changed rather often, which made for some confusion. Myers himself introduced xii Mediumship and Survival 'telepathy', as 'thought reading' was ambiguous; it could refer to the way in which Sherlock Holmes picked up what was in Watson s mind by watching his expression. 'Supernormal', however, which Myers thought preferable to supernatural to describe the class of phenomena with which the Society would be dealing, has since itself been replaced by 'paranormal'; and 'parapsychology' has been easing out 'psychical research' - though some researchers prefer to restrict its use to laboratory-type work, leaving 'psychical' for research into spontaneous phenomena. 'Psi' has also come in as an all-purpose term to describe the forces involved, or to identify them - for example, in distinguishing a normal from a paranormal event. If evidence were lacking for 'parascience' - as it might now more embracingly be described, because the emphasis of research has been shifting recently away from psychology to physics- it could be found in the composition of the Society, from its earliest beginnings."}
{"id": "GauldMediumship", "title": "Mediumship and Survival", "year": 1982, "seq": 1, "text": "Out of happenings of the last kind, further peculiar phenomena developed. Certain subjects began to manifest the ability to 'see' not just diseased and malfunctioning aspects of their own internal workings, but those of other people, sometimes even of distant people. A class of professional and semi-professional sensitives grew up, whose members, usually female and usually under the influence of one particular mesmeric operator, would diagnose, predict and prescribe for all comers. Now if the 'clairvoyant' vision of these ladies could reach inside people, or reach distant people, or predict the course of diseases, why should it not reach inside other kinds of closed containers, e.g. sealed boxes, or reach distant or even future scenes and events? Before long, entranced clairvoyantes were purportedly giving demonstrations of just these abilities. Some, indeed, believed that their vision extended beyond this world altogether, and regaled admiring wonder-seekers with visions of heaven, angels, other planets, guardian spirits, and the souls of deceased human beings. Out of the 'rapport' between mesmeric operator and mesmeric subject (supposedly due to the transmission of the quasi-electrical 'magnetic fluid' from the former to the latter) arose other alleged 'paranormal' phenomena. Subjects could, it was believed, read the thoughts of the operator, feel pinpricks inflicted upon him, taste substances placed in his mouth. An operator might be able to entrance or influence the subject by the sheer exercise of his will - it was supposed that he exercised this control by directing the magnetic fluid Introduction 3 into appropriate parts of his subject's nervous system. Indeed, towards the middle years of the nineteenth century, some mesmeric subjects purportedly fell under the 'control' of departed spirits and other exalted beings, and thus became 'mediums' for communication between this world and the next. The second category of phenomena falling within the SPR's field followed immediately from the first and was closely related to it."}
{"id": "GauldMediumship", "title": "Mediumship and Survival", "year": 1982, "seq": 2, "text": "Lewis, brought out a pamphlet containing the signed statements of twenty-two witnesses (90). Sight- seers began to come from miles around to witness the wonders. Eventually it became apparent that the phenomena centred not upon the house, but around the two youngest Fox children, Margaretta (aged fifteen) and Kate (aged eleven), described by Slater Brown (19, p. 99) as 'simple, corn-fed country girls'. Others discovered that they had similar gifts. The phenomena spread by a kind of infection. Persons who visited Hydesville found on their return home that the spirits would also rap for them. The Fox sisters went on the road, exhibiting their 'mediumship' in New York and other large cities, and by the early 1850s 'Spiritualism' had begun to spread quite 4 Mediumship and Survival widely through the Eastern United States. Spiritualist associations and Spiritualist newspapers sprang up, and soon the phenomena were exported (with somewhat limited success) to Britain and the Continent of Europe. (On the early history of Spiritualism, see 19 and 122c.) The relationship between mesmerism and Spiritualism was twofold. The mesmeric movement had accustomed the public to the supposed phenomena of clairvoyance, and to the idea that certain gifted sensitives might perceive, or be influenced by, the inhabitants of the next world. Thus it had prepared the ground for the acceptance of Spiritualism. But the mesmeric movement also had its own press and its own supporters, its own operators and its own clairvoyantes. These were very readily transferred to or absorbed by the growing Spiritualist movement. Mesmeric clairvoyantes, or the type of person who would previously have become such, now emerged as the first 'mental mediums' - mediums whose contact with the spirits was through 'interior' vision or hearing, or through the spirits 'taking over' and controlling their bodies or parts thereof, especially, of course, the parts required for speech and writing."}
{"id": "GauldMediumship", "title": "Mediumship and Survival", "year": 1982, "seq": 3, "text": "Of course many of these phenomena required darkness or near-darkness for their production (delicate ectoplasmic structures were, it was claimed, liable to be damaged by light, especially short-wavelength blue light), a fact which led cynics to suggest that darkness was merely a cover for fraud. This Introduction 5 suggestion received support, especially in and after the 1870s, from a series of unsavoury 'exposures'. Other phenomena of physical mediumship included: levitation of the medium, elongation of the medium's body, the production of 'spirit lights', 'apports' (small objects brought into the seance room by the spirits), the precipitation of paintings onto blank cards or canvases, and 'psychic photography' (the appearance of 'extras', often veiled in clouds of 'ectoplasm', on studio photographs of pay- ing sitters). Exposures of psychic photographers were numerous and devastating. The third category of phenomena falling within the provenance of psychical research was less directly linked with the other two, though still having some connections with them. It was that of traditional ghost stories - apparitions, hauntings, and linked perhaps thereto, assorted cases of visions, crystal visions, and so forth. It was thus, I think, in the historical setting of 1 882, fairly clear what phenomena could be designated as the subject matter of 'psychical research'. They included the phenomena of mesmerism and hypnotism; of paranormal healing; of clairvoyance, thought- transference and precognition; of mental and physical mediumship; and of apparitions and hauntings. There is no doubt, of course, that many of the founders of the SPR hoped for a positive outcome to their inquiries; hoped, that is, that impartial investigation would prove that some at least of the phenomena under scrutiny were genuine. The 1870s had been a decade in which 'scientific' materialism of a rather crude kind had made unparalleled advances at the expense of all varieties of religious belief."}
{"id": "GauldMediumship", "title": "Mediumship and Survival", "year": 1982, "seq": 4, "text": "Myers - took a similarly exalted view of the Introduction ' achievements and potentialities of psychical research. I wonder what they would make of the present state of the art. Investigations of mediumship, apparitions, and other survival-related phenomena have been to a considerable extent displaced by laboratory experiments on telepathy, clairvoyance and precognition. Problems of statistics and experimental design loom large in the literature. Computers and other electronic gadgets are widely used in both the running of experiments and the assessment of the results. There have been innovations in terminology. The Continental and American term 'parapsychology' is beginning to replace 'psychical research\", to which it is largely equivalent. From America has come the term 'extrasensory perception' (ESP) to cover any instance of the apparent acquisition of non-inferential knowledge of matters of fact without the use of the known sense organs. ESP is usually said to have three varieties: 'telepathy', in which the knowledge is of events in another person's mind, 'clairvoyance', in which the knowledge is of physical objects or states of affairs; and 'precognition' (telepathic or clairvoyant), where the knowledge relates to happenings still in the future. The word 'knowledge' is, however, not entirely appropriate, for there may be telepathic or clairvoyant 'interaction', in which a person's mental state or actions may be influenced by an external state of affairs, though he does not 'know' or 'cognize' it. Another American term is 'psychokinesis' (PK), the direct influence of mental events on physical events external to the agent's body. The term ' psi' (Greek letter 4* ) is sometimes used to cover both ESP and PK. I cannot, in the space available to me, undertake a general review and assessment of the evidence for psi-phenomena. That a fairly good case can be made out for ESP will be taken for granted in much of the rest of this book."}
{"id": "GauldMediumship", "title": "Mediumship and Survival", "year": 1982, "seq": 5, "text": "Despite changes of emphasis the parapsychological enterprise today is recognizably continuous with the undertaking set afoot by those distinguished and earnest Victorians one hundred years ago. There has in fact been in the last decade or so something of a revival of interest among parapsychologists in the problem of survival. It is my task in 8 Mediumship and Survival this book to review some of the factual evidence, old and new, which has been thought to bear one way or another upon this problem. I emphasize the 'some', for it is both impossible and undesirable to attempt to be comprehensive. The quantity of potentially relevant material is enormous (a select bibliography will be found in 44e), and those who have not taken a serious look at complete sets of the Proceedings and Journal of the SPR and the ASPR have perhaps little idea of its extent. Some of this material I can cut out at once, because it consists mainly of evidence for fraud and self-deception. I omit it with regret, for much entertainment is to be derived from studying the methods of psychic photographers and fraudulent physical mediums. Another class of material which I shall omit is much harder to define satisfactorily. It consists of evidence, maybe sound, maybe not, for phenomena which, if genuine, could with some degree of plausibility be interpreted in terms of the survival hypothesis if that were antecedently established, but which do not by themselves even begin to constitute evidence for that hypothesis. Phenomena such as the production of 'spirit lights' at a seance, or the elongation of the medium's body, or the levitation of the medium into the air, will perhaps serve as examples. Such phenomena have often been attributed to the activities of 'the spirits', and they may well be very difficult to explain; but there is nothing about them, taken just in themselves, to suggest to us that they are manifestations of a personality, still less of the personality of a deceased human being."}
{"id": "GauldMediumship", "title": "Mediumship and Survival", "year": 1982, "seq": 6, "text": "A simulacrum or shell, or a hollow voice mouthing empty words, need have 'behind' them no personality, no surviving sentient mind. Further evidence would be required before we could begin to take the survivalist explanation seriously. And it is easy, up to a point, to see what such evidence would have to consist in. We would need evidence ol intelligence, ol personality characteristics, ol goals, purposes and allections, and ol a stream of memory, that are largely or recognizably continuous with those once possessed by a certain formerly incarnate human being. That is the sort of evidence Introduction 9 we are concerned with, and a materialization, 'direct voice', or tape- recorded spirit voice, would have to provide it in addition to mere physical similarity before we could begin to take it seriously as evidence lor survival. For that reason phenomena of these classes will not often be mentioned in this book. I shall instead, and by the same token, concentrate upon classes of phenomena - certain sorts of apparitions, and some cases of mental mediumship and of ostensible reincarnation - which do sometimes appear to provide evidence for the survival of a personality. Of course the notion of personal identity is a complex and elusive one, and some people would say that personal identity is logically as well as factually linked to bodily continuity, so that it makes no sense to talk of a person surviving the dissolution of his body. I shall touch brielly on this issue later on. Another possibility to be borne in mind - one with which not a little of the evidence could be squared - is that there is survival, but survival only of a diminished and truncated something, capable ol manifesting as a quasi-person in certain circumstances, but not ordinarily to be thought of as a person at all."}
{"id": "GauldMediumship", "title": "Mediumship and Survival", "year": 1982, "seq": 7, "text": "I do not, however, want to spend too much time discussing such issues in the abstract before I have given some concrete examples ol the evidence, or supposed evidence, with which we have to deal. Most of the material which I shall cite will, as I have said, come from the publications of the SPR and the ASPR. Occasionally I shall draw upon evidence of comparable quality from other sources; and where I cite cases of more dubious authenticity, it will be mainly to illustrate possibilities. Of course the question immediately arises of what, in this context, would constitute evidence of appropriate quality. Some writers of sceptical tendency are apt to deny not just that we have, but that we ever could have, evidence strong enough to establish the genuineness of such paranormal phenomena as telepathy or precognition, let alone to establish human survival of bodily death. The position of these extreme disbelievers was discussed by Edmund Gurney in an illuminating essay first published in 1887 (54). Many ol them have implicitly based themselves on principles derived from a celebrated essay on miracles by the eighteenth century Scottish philosopher, David Hume. Hume's argument (suitably emended) is, in essence, this. The cumulative evidence in favour of certain basic 10 Mediumship and Survival 'laws of nature' is immensely strong, so strong, in fact, that no evidence in favour of an event contravening one of them, in favour, that is, of a paranormal phenomenon, could ever outweigh it. Hence whenever we encounter supposed evidence for a paranormal event, we are always justified in dismissing that evidence. The 'laws of nature' taken by upholders of this doctrine as 'basic' are commonly ones which they think fundamental to a rather crudely materialistic view of the universe. If practising scientists as a body had ever come to take this argument seriously we would, I suppose, still believe ourselves to inhabit a universe whose leading features would be conceived precisely as they were conceived at the moment of mass conversion to Hume's doctrines."}
{"id": "GauldMediumship", "title": "Mediumship and Survival", "year": 1982, "seq": 8, "text": "The first of these possibilities does not strike me as a very serious one, at least so far as the cases investigated by the SPR are concerned. It is true that several hoaxes have come to light alter the publication of the case reports. But in the great majority of cases the witnesses have been persons of unblemished reputation, with no apparent motive for deceit. They have as a matter ol routine given signed statements to the Society's representatives, they have submitted to questioning, their 12 Mediumship and Survival friends have given corroborative testimony, all relevant supporting documents, e.g. death certificates, have been obtained and put on file; and so forth. I do not think that under these circumstances it is reasonable to postulate wholesale hoaxing as a general explanation of the inflow of case reports. The matter stands somewhat differently with regard to possible fraud by mediums. Many physical mediums, and some mental mediums, have been caught in the most egregious trickery. Still, I shall not in this book be dealing with physical mediumship to any extent, and the mental mediums whom I shall principally discuss - most notably Mrs Piper and Mrs Leonard - were never caught in fraud despite some rigorous precautions. In the case of Mrs Piper these precautions included opening her mail and having her shadowed by detectives to ascertain whether or not she employed agents. Mrs Leonard was also at one time shadowed by detectives. I do not think that the fraud hypothesis will help us here. 2. Mistaken Testimony That eyewitness testimony, especially as to unusual or bizarre happenings, cannot be relied upon, is a commonplace of sceptical assaults upon the credibility of evidence for the sorts of phenomena we are considering; and it is a commonplace which can be substantiated by an appeal to a large body of psychological findings."}
{"id": "GauldMediumship", "title": "Mediumship and Survival", "year": 1982, "seq": 9, "text": "These findings, however, bear somewhat unequally upon different parts of our subject- matter. Testimony concerning the phenomena of physical medium- ship, which are commonly exhibited under conditions of near darkness and of emotional stress, is notoriously unreliable. However I shall present very little of such testimony. When it comes to mental mediumship the case is different. We usually have complete contemporary records of what such mediums say or write, so that the question of mistaken testimony rarely arises. It is over stories of apparitions and related phenomena that the problem impinges most directly upon the subject-matter of this book. Some writers (see, e.g., 169a) appear to want to dismiss almost all testimony concerning apparitions on the following grounds: (a) In only a lew cases did the percipients immediately write down a lull account of their experience. Stories told months or even years after the event are likely to be seriously in error, for memory is notoriously fallible, and tall stories tend to grow with retelling. In one celebrated case, the principal witness, Sir Edmund Hornby, claimed that he saw Introduction 1 3 an apparition whilst he was in bed with his wife, who also confirmed the story. However it was later established that at the date of the supposed apparition Sir Edmund was not yet married, (b) Numerous experimental investigations have cast doubt on the reliability ol eyewitness testimony even when that testimony has been given immediately alter the event. I do not think that these objectives are very powerful. With regard to (a) we do have the witnesses' contemporary statements in a modest number of cases. Furthermore there is no reason to believe that percipients ol apparitions have a general tendency towards retrospective exaggeration. Stevenson (153b) gives a number of instances in which witnesses have written a second account many years alter the first without introducingsubstantialchangesorexaggerations."}
{"id": "NicaraguasSlowMarchToCommunism", "title": "Nicaraguas Slow March to Communism", "year": 1987, "seq": 0, "text": "Nine months after the revolution- ary junta look office, its two \"bourgeois\" representatives resigned in disillusion- ment. One, Violetta Chamorro, insisted disingenuously that she resigned only for reasons of health, citing a fractured bone in her foot. The other, Alfonso Robelo, Tounded the Social Democratic Party. This was hardly the behavior of a class- conscious bourgeoisie. Thus, when Somoza fell, the Sandinistas were somewhat surprised to discover the extent of their own dominance. As the movement's leadership explained to the Sandinista Assembly two months after Somoza's ouster: \"Sandinism repre- sents the sole domestic force, . . . Our failure to exercise full power has been more pro forma and quantitative than real and qualitative.\" Had the Sandinistas been willing to live with the moderate program of the junta that they themselves had helped to write, their pride of place in the broad coalition that had toppled Somoza and in any revolutionary government would have been secure. This would have been assured not only by their military strength but because virtually everyone in Nicaragua recognized their leader- ship of the anti-Somoza rebellion and admired their courage and self-sacrifice. But to be the leaders of a coalition government with moderate goals, to wield power only within limits, was not for them. As their leaders put it many times in that period: \"we have a project.\" That project was to remake Nicaraguan society according to their particular conception of socialism. What made the \"project\" especially difficult is that the FSLN was so small. In their penultimate offensive of September 1978, the Sandinistas had thrown 1 50 fighters into the battle, according to Humberto Ortega, their chief military commander. That was almost certainly the bulk of their membership. Hundreds, 5 perhaps a few thousand, flocked to fight under the Sandinista banner during the ensuing months, but though welcomed as combatants, few were accepted as members."}
{"id": "NicaraguasSlowMarchToCommunism", "title": "Nicaraguas Slow March to Communism", "year": 1987, "seq": 1, "text": "The Sandinistas have coped with this dilemmas in two ways. One is to import large numbers of cadres from Communist countries, especially Cuba. The other is to extend the tentacles of social control from the bottom up, reaching Nicaraguans where they live, work, study, and shop, while leaving in place the most visible symbols of opposition and \"pluralism\" so as not to enrage the beast to the north. The U.S. government estimates that there are 7,500 Cubans stationed in Nicaragua, of whom about 3,000 are assigned to the military and security services, as well as several hundred Russians and East Europeans and several score Libyans and PLO, Cuban military personnel serve with each unit of the Nicaraguan army from the company level up. In the security services, Cubans are reported to have charge of the unit providing personal bodyguards to the Lommandantes, and provide guidance in all fields, except \"high tech\" intelli- gence methods for which East Germans are preferred. In one case, and perhaps more, a Cuban has been given Nicaraguan citizenship and been made one of the official chiefs of Nicaraguan intelligence. Bulgarians serve in the Ministry of Planning as the chief economic advisers. Non-communist governments that offered to send personnel to Nicaragua were rebuffed by the Sandinistas. This included not only the United States, which offered Peace Corps volunteers, but also Costa Rica which offered ii .1. Ik-is and Panama which offered military advisors. These two governments wne rebuffed despite the fact that they provided critical assistance to the FSLN in lis wai against Somoza, including the transshipment and \"laundering\" of the ( uban supplied weapons on which the revolution depended. This is only one piece of a vast amount of evidence that refutes the ' iindiniflas' claim to be \"nonaligned,\" as well as the argument of some western \u25a0 >l''.n vers that they are aligned only ambiguously or reluctantly."}
{"id": "NicaraguasSlowMarchToCommunism", "title": "Nicaraguas Slow March to Communism", "year": 1987, "seq": 2, "text": "Borge said that these officials had gained their positions as a \"refuge to avoid punishment and repudiation.\" But leading Nicaraguan dissidents say that the FSLN deliberately recruited these Somocistas, using their known former affiliations as blackmail to assure their obedience. Since anyone holding an official position in the CDS was certainly checked out by Borge's State Security force (DGSE), and indeed since defectors from the DGSE say that CDS officials report to or are employed by State Security, it is hard to believe that Borge was unaware of the role played by ex-Somocistas. More likely, Borge's belated acknowledgment of that role is prelude to the tirne-honored Communist practice of purging underlings as scapegoats to assuage popular discontent. The CDS's and the workplace party Base Committees stamp Nicaragua with one of the distinct characteristics of totalitarian systems \u2014 citizens are not allowed to be politically neutral or uninvolved. Merely not to belong to the CDS or Base Committee marks someone as derelict from the Sandinista norms of good citizenship and invites suspicion. The consequences may not be dire, but the act requires courage. Every individual, thus, faces a choice of either participating in the institutions that enforce conformity or being their victim. The CDS's also exemplify another feature of Nicaraguan society that severely vitiates its claim to \"pluralism.\" This is the intertwining of party and state institutions. As pro~Sandinist academic Richard Fagen has explained it, the FSLN's definition of its \"vanguard\" role is \"that FSLN hegemony . . , ought to be a structural, not just a temporary, feature of the political economy of the nation.'\" Thus, for example, although the CDS's are party institutions, they distribute ration cards. Salaries for top CDS officials, and other party expendi- tures, are paid out of public revenues. In the schools, students are required to sing both the Sandinista and Nicaraguan anthems and to salute both the national and the Sandinista flags."}
{"id": "NicaraguasSlowMarchToCommunism", "title": "Nicaraguas Slow March to Communism", "year": 1987, "seq": 3, "text": "It also lured the priest who serves as spokesman for Radio Catolica to the home of a female parishioner where he was seized, stripped of his clothes and then pushed out of the house naked to be filmed by a Sandinista TV crew, which just happened to be waiting outside. And it apparently sent a group of agents, posing as representatives of the Interna- tional Red Cross, to a Miskito village, where they asked to be directed to the hideouts of local Miskito resistance forces, in order to bring them humanitarian aid. On the other hand, the Sandinistas have indulged in little eye-catching violence. A relatively small number of executions have been attributed to them, and physical torture of prisoners is far less common than psychological abuse. This has distinguished the FSLN from many other triumphant Communist parties and has gone far toward softening Western perceptions of them. Their behavior seems all the more commendable in view of the sanguinary political traditions of Nicaragua, and the fact that the Somoza regime, though in most 13 w;iys less restrictive than the Sandinistas, had a reputation for crude brutality. One major exception to this relatively benign pattern of Sandinista behavior has been in their war with the Miskito Indians. Numerous instances of executions and torture, as well as rapes and other abuse of Miskito civilians have been documented to the satisfaction of all impartial observers. In addition, lecent testimony from some DGSE defectors raises questions about whether, in other situations far from public view, the Sandinistas have indulged in more killing and physical torture than has previously been realized. Although the FSLN has refrained, for whatever reasons, from unleashing an outright reign of terror, it instead conducts a reign of intimidation. Opposition figures are often arrested for brief periods of interrogation, during which they are sometimes subjected to death threats both against themselves and their families."}
{"id": "NicaraguasSlowMarchToCommunism", "title": "Nicaraguas Slow March to Communism", "year": 1987, "seq": 4, "text": "Brooklyn Rivera, one of the Miskito leaders, commented: \"They try to control an organization. If that fails, they try to divide it. If that fails they form another organization with a simi- lar name.\" For the moment, the parallel organizations contribute to the process of weakening and discouraging the original ones. In the long term, the Sandinistas may foresee mergers between various of the parallel groups and their counter- part originals, as a graceful, relatively non-controversial way for the latter to expire. After more than six years of rule, the Sandinistas have brought ruin to the Nicaraguan economy. According to official Nicaraguan figures, the economy has been shrinking while inflation and foreign debt have been soaring. GNP per eapita has fallen to the levels of twenty years ago. Immense increases in the price of food and clothing, without any commensurate wage increases, mean that the average Nicaragua's standard of living has plummeted. This of course has been exacerbated by the civil war and the U.S. embargo, but its fundamental cause is irrational economic policies that transformed a food exporting country into a land of severe shortages. It is not clear how much this distresses the Sandinistas. \"Our economy might drop to 1940 levels,\" said Jaime Wheelock, but \"the important thing is . . . the ability to make the revolution prevail\" against its enemies. And although the economy drops, the Sandinista rulers themselves don't share in the privations. They have taken for themselves the homes, cars and luxuries left behind by Somoza and expropriated from other wealthy Nicaraguans. Las Colinas, a luxury neighborhood of Managua, is now largely populated by the Sandinista due, guarded by a roadblock that keeps ordinary Nicaraguans away. Borge and some of the other commandantes are known to each have several homes and \u00bb .11 s, justified on the grounds that this improves their security."}
{"id": "tibook_users-reference-guide", "title": "User's reference guide : a complete, detailed guide to using and enjoying your Texas Instruments TI-99/4A computer", "year": 1981, "seq": 0, "text": "SELECT\" switch on the modulator and the channel selector on your television are set to the same channel (either 3 or 4, whichever is not a broadcasting channel in your area). User's Reference Guide 1-3 General Information A TOUR OF YOUR COMPUTER Your computer console is the central part of your computer system. It's designed so that all of the other units of the system easily connect to this console. No tools are required. Getting Started Let's look at the front and right side of your computer. 1 1 This is the ON/OFF switch. The small light next to the switch indicates when the computer is ON. 2 Command Module software* snaps into this oudet. 3 This keyboard is used to type information into the computer. 4 This outlet is for optional peripheral accessories. Details are included with the appropriate peripheral. This is the back and left side of the console: 7 5 The Cassette Interface Cable* connects to the console at this 9-pin \"D\" outlet. 6 The Power Cord attaches to the console at this 4-pin outlet. 7 This 5-pin connector (also called a DIN connector) is for audio-out and video-out. This connector will insert easily when properly aligned. 8 The Wired Remote Controllers connect to this 9-pin outlet. Details are included with the accessory. {Note: Do not confuse this 9-pin outlet with the 9-pin outlet on the back of the console. They are not interchangeable.) *sold separately General Information A Tour of the Keyboard Let's take a close look at the keyboard. The keyboard is like a standard typewriter, with keys of several types. Pressing any key causes its lower-case (small capital) character to display on the screen, and holding down the SHIFT key while pressing any other key returns the uppercase (large capital) character for that key. Except for the alphabetical keys, each key's upper-case character is printed at the top of the key face, while the lower-case character is printed at the bottom."}
{"id": "tibook_users-reference-guide", "title": "User's reference guide : a complete, detailed guide to using and enjoying your Texas Instruments TI-99/4A computer", "year": 1981, "seq": 1, "text": "Built-in Numeric Functions A glossary of often-used terms is found in the back of this manual. Notational Conventions At the beginning of the discussion for each TI BASIC command or statement, a line appears which shows the general format for entering the command or statement. Certain notational conventions have been used in these format lines. These conventions are discussed here to help you understand how they are used. { } - The braces indicate that you have a choice of what to use. You may use only one of the items given within the braces. []- The brackets indicate that the item within is optional. You may use it if you wish, but it is not required. ... - The ellipsis indicates that the preceding item may be repeated as many times as you desire. italics - Words appearing in italics are a general description of the item or items that need to appear there. When words are printed in italics, you need to enter your own choice in place of the italicized words when you enter the statement or command. Examples For each statement or command in this manual, program examples are shown at the right. Each line you must enter is indicated by the prompt character (>) to the left of the line, just as it appears on the screen. Lines which the computer places on the screen do not show the prompt character. The examples shown in this book are printed in upper-case (large capital) letters. If you want to reproduce the examples exactly as you see them here, press down the ALPHA LOCK key. In most cases the computer accepts either upper-case or lower- case letters. However, when you LIST a program, the screen displays all reserved words, variable names, and subprogram names as large capitals. \u2022 User's Reference Guide II-3 General Information Introduction Once your computer is set up, it is a simple process to begin using TI BASIC."}
{"id": "tibook_users-reference-guide", "title": "User's reference guide : a complete, detailed guide to using and enjoying your Texas Instruments TI-99/4A computer", "year": 1981, "seq": 2, "text": "FCTN *- (LEFT) - The Left- Arrow (backspace) key moves the cursor one position to the left every time it is pressed. When the cursor moves over a character it does not delete or change it in any way. If the cursor reaches the beginning of the line, pressing the Left-Arrow key has no effect. FCTH -* (RIGHT) - The Right- Arrow (forwardspace) key moves the cursor one position to the right each time it is pressed. Using this key allows you to move the cursor over a character without deleting or changing it in any way. If the cursor reaches the end of the line (4 screen lines), pressing the Right-Arrow key has no effect. FCTH 2 (INS) - The Insert key is used to insert characters in the middle of a program line. To insert characters, position the cursor (using FCTH - or FCTH - ) over the character immediately to the right of the place where you wish to insert characters, then press the Insert key. After you have pressed the Insert key, each time you press a character, the cursor and every character of the program line that is not to the left of the cursor is moved one position to the right. The character corresponding to the key you pressed is then inserted in the blank position left by the shifting of the cursor and other characters. Note that characters shifted off the end of the program line are deleted from the line. When you have finished inserting characters, press any other special key listed above, except QUIT. User's Reference Guide II-5 Special Keys FCTN 1 (DEL) - The Delete key is used to delete characters from the program line. To delete characters, position the cursor (using FCTN - or FCTN - ) over the character you wish to delete, then press the Delete key. When you press the Delete key, the character under the cursor is deleted and all characters of the program line to the right of the cursor are moved one position to the left."}
{"id": "tibook_users-reference-guide", "title": "User's reference guide : a complete, detailed guide to using and enjoying your Texas Instruments TI-99/4A computer", "year": 1981, "seq": 3, "text": "The cursor does not move. A blank space is used to fill the position at the right end of the program line left by the shifting of the characters. FCTN 4 (CLEAR) - The Clear or Break key has two functions, depending on when you use it. \u25a0 When this key is pressed while a program is running, a breakpoint will be taken at the next program line to be executed. This key allows you to temporarily stop a program while it is running. Note that you must continue to hold the Break key until the program stops running. When you stop running a program using the Break key, the message \"BREAKPOINT AT line-number\" is displayed. The program line designated by the line-number has not been performed. You can start the program running again where you stopped by entering the CONTINUE command. \u25a0 When the Clear key is pressed while typing in a program line, the line scrolls up on the screen and is not entered. This key has additional functions in Edit Mode and in Number Mode. FCTN 3 (ERASE) - The Erase key erases the entire program line which you are typing. The line is not entered. This key works differently in Edit Mode and Number Mode. SPACE BAR The Space Bar moves the cursor one position to the right each time it is pressed. If you move the cursor over a character using the Space Bar, that character is replaced by the space character. Blank Spaces In general, a blank space can occur almost anywhere in a program without affecting the execution of the program. However, any extra blank spaces you put in that are not required will be deleted when the program line is displayed by the EDIT, NUM, or LIST command. There are some places where blank spaces must not appear, specifically: (1) within a line number (2) within a reserved word (3) within a numeric constant (4) within a variable name The following are some examples of incorrect use of blank spaces."}
{"id": "tibook_users-reference-guide", "title": "User's reference guide : a complete, detailed guide to using and enjoying your Texas Instruments TI-99/4A computer", "year": 1981, "seq": 4, "text": "Note that when an existing program line is displayed in Number Mode, the prompt character ( >) is not shown to the left of the line number. This indicates the line is an existing program line and you may choose to edit the line. For information on editing, see the section below. If you do not want to change the existing line, simply press ENTER when the line is displayed and it will not be changed. After you press ENTER, the next line number is generated. In Number Mode, if you enter a program line and an error occurs, the appropriate error message is displayed as usual and then the same line number is displayed again. Retype the line correctly and then enter it again. If a line number would be generated in Number Mode which is greater than 32767, the computer leaves Number Mode. Editing in Number Mode Whether you are entering new lines or changing existing program lines while in Number Mode, all of the special editing keys may be used. Since some of the keys work differently in Number Mode than in Command Mode, the keys and how they work in Number Mode are discussed here. ENTER - This key has different functions depending on the situation. The functions and situations are described below. \u25a0 If you press ENTER immediately after a line number is generated, then the computer leaves Number Mode. \u25a0 If you type in a statement after the line number is generated and then press ENTER, the new line is added to the program. Then the next line number is generated. \u25a0 If an existing program line is displayed and you press ENTER immediately after it is displayed, the line remains the same in the program. Then the next line number is generated. \u25a0 If an existing program line is displayed and you erase the entire text of the line (leaving only the line number on the screen) and then press enter, the computer leaves Number Mode."}
{"id": "tibook_users-reference-guide", "title": "User's reference guide : a complete, detailed guide to using and enjoying your Texas Instruments TI-99/4A computer", "year": 1981, "seq": 5, "text": "When you enter Edit Mode, the program line you requested is displayed on the screen. The prompt character (>) is not displayed to the left of the line when you are in Edit Mode. When the requested line is displayed, the flashing cursor is positioned in the second character position to the right of the line number. Changes may be made to any character on the line except the line number using the special keys described below and typing over the characters you wish to change. You cannot move the cursor back over the line number. Thus, you cannot change the line number in Edit Mode. The special editing keys and their functions in Edit Mode are discussed here. ENTER - When you press the ENTER key, all changes you have made to the program line become permanent and the computer leaves Edit Mode. If you have erased the entire text of the program line and then press ENTER, the program line is deleted. Note that the cursor does not have to be at the end of the line for the entire line to be entered. FCTN t (UP) - When you press the Up-Arrow key, all changes you have made to the program line are entered and become permanent. The next lower numbered line in the program is then displayed for editing. If no lower numbered program line exists, then the computer leaves Edit Mode. Note that the cursor does not have to be at the end of the line for the entire line to be entered by the Up-Arrow key. FCTN I (DOWN) - When you press the Down-Arrow key, all changes you have made to the program line are entered and become permanent. The next higher numbered program line is then displayed for editing. If no higher numbered program line exists, then the computer leaves Edit Mode."}
{"id": "tibook_users-reference-guide", "title": "User's reference guide : a complete, detailed guide to using and enjoying your Texas Instruments TI-99/4A computer", "year": 1981, "seq": 6, "text": "FCTN 4 (CLEAR) \u2014 If you press the Clear key at any time while in Edit Mode, the current line scrolls up on the screen and the computer leaves Edit Mode. Any changes which had been made on the line before you pressed the Clear key are ignored. Thus, the existing program line does not change. FCTN 3 (ERASE) \u2014 The Erase key erases the entire text of the program line currently displayed for editing. The line number is not erased. User's Reference Guide 11-39 SAVE SAVE file-name The SAVE command allows you to copy the current program in the computer's memory onto an accessory device. By using the OLD command, you can later put the program into memory for running or editing. A brief explanation of using a cassette recorder as a storage device is given here. (For a more detailed discussion, see the \"Cassette Interface Cable\" section of this manual.) Instructions for using the TI Disk Memory System are given in the owner's manual that accompanies the TI Disk Drive Controller. You select which cassette recorder the computer will use by entering the file-name CSl or CS2 following the keyword SAVE. After you have connected your recorder to the computer, type the SAVE command, and press ENTER. The computer then begins printing instructions on the screen to help you understand the SAVE procedures. Follow the directions as they appear on the screen. On the right are the computer-generated SAVE instructions. CSl is used in the example, but the same procedures apply for CS2 also. When you enter the SAVE command, the computer tells you how to use the recorder, as shown on the right. After the program has been copied, the computer asks if you want to check the tape to be sure your program was recorded correctly. If you press N, the flashing cursor will appear at the left of the screen."}
{"id": "tibook_users-reference-guide", "title": "User's reference guide : a complete, detailed guide to using and enjoying your Texas Instruments TI-99/4A computer", "year": 1981, "seq": 7, "text": "The \"File Processing\" section helps you construct the statements used with accessory devices. And, since your TI computer is enhanced by graphics, color, and sound, many built-in subprograms also serve an input-output function. The \"Color Graphics and Sound\" section shows you how to use these features. User's Reference Guide INPUT INPUT [input-prompt:] variable-list (For information on the use of the INPUT statement with a file, see the \"File Processing\" section.) This form of the INPUT statement is used when entering data via the keyboard. The INPUT statement causes the program to pause until valid data is entered from the keyboard. Although the computer usually accepts up to one input line (4 lines on your screen) for each INPUT statement, a long list of values may be rejected by the computer. If you receive the message \"LINE TOO LONG\" after entering an input line, you will need to divide the lengthy INPUT statement into at least two separate statements. Entering the Input Statement The input-prompt is a string expression that indicates on the screen the values you should enter at that time. Including an input-prompt in the INPUT statement is optional. When the computer performs an INPUT statement that does not have an input-prompt, it displays a question mark (?) followed by a space and waits for you to enter your data. If you use an input-prompt, the string expression must be followed by a colon. When the computer performs this type of INPUT statement, it will display the input-prompt message on the screen and wait for you to enter your data. The variable-list contains those variables which are assigned values when the INPUT statement is performed. Variable names in the variable-list are separated by commas and may be numeric and/or string variables."}
{"id": "tibook_users-reference-guide", "title": "User's reference guide : a complete, detailed guide to using and enjoying your Texas Instruments TI-99/4A computer", "year": 1981, "seq": 8, "text": "Data in the data-lists are obtained via READ statements when the program is run. The data-list contains the values to be assigned to the variables specified in the variable-list of a READ statement. Items in the data-list art separated by commas. When a program reaches a DATA statement, it proceeds to the next statement with no other effect. DATA statements may appear anywhere in a program, but the order in which they appear is important. Data from the data-lists are read sequentially, beginning with the first item in the first DATA statement. If your program includes more than one DATA statement, the DATA statements are read in ascending line-number order unless otherwise specified by a RESTORE statement. Thus, the order in which the data appears within the data-list and the order of the DATA statements within the program normally determine in which order the data is read. Data in the data-list must correspond to the type of the variable to which it is assigned. Thus, if a numeric variable is specified in the READ statement, a numeric constant must be in the corresponding place in the DATA statement. Similarly, if a string variable is specified, a string constant must be in the corresponding place in the DATA statement. Remember that a number is a valid string, so you may have a number in the corresponding place in the DATA statement when a string constant is required. When using string constants in a DATA statement, you may enclose the string in quotes. However, if the string you include contains a comma, a leading quote mark, leading spaces, or trailing spaces, it must be enclosed in quotes. If the list of string constants in the DATA statement contains adjacent commas, the computer assumes you want to enter a null string (a string with no characters)."}
{"id": "tibook_users-reference-guide", "title": "User's reference guide : a complete, detailed guide to using and enjoying your Texas Instruments TI-99/4A computer", "year": 1981, "seq": 9, "text": "BASIC program is cleared by insertion of a Command Module. REMEDY Check that transformer power cord is plugged into the wall. Ensure that power cord is connected to the rear of the console. Check that power is on, and screen controls are set for optimum picture. Ensure that cables are properly connected as specified in the Color Monitor Operating Guide and Warranty. See that volume control is turned to proper level. Check connection of cables. Ensure that cassette is connected to the 9-pin connector on the rear of the unit . See \"General Information.\" Remember that the cassette motor is controlled by the computer. Read the instructions in the \"Cassette Interface Cable\" section. Ensure that unit is connected to the 9-pin connector on the leftside of the computer console, and that ALPHA LOCK is in the off (up) position. Remember that only certain software is designed for use with the Remote Controls. This is a normal reset procedure designed to protect your color screen. Stray characters appear or other erratic operation occurs or computer will not respond to keyboard input. Static electricity discharges from the user to the console can alter program data stored in the internal memory. To correct this problem turn the console off and then on. A Command Module especially designed to verify proper operation of the major functions of your system is available at your retailer. You can also purchase the Diagnostic module for use at home. User's Reference Guide V-1 Maintenance and Service Information When returning your computer for repair or replacement, return the computer console, power cord, and any Command Modules which were involved when the difficulty occurred. For your protection, the computer should be sent insured; Texas Instruments cannot assume any responsibility for loss or damage to the computer during shipment. It is recommended that the computer be shipped in its original container to minimize the possibility of shipping damage."}
{"id": "minutesofannuals98pres", "title": "Minutes of the ... annual sessions of the Synod of North Carolina ... [serial]", "year": 1983, "seq": 0, "text": "This is the more .significant because there is an a(5lual falling off of over I500 for this source. We further observe that this year there are only 125 .societies of all kinds contributing to this cause against 190 last year. It is, however, pleasing to record that through the increased liberality of the smaller number, the gifts from this .source exceed last year by $257. We find still further that from these two channels there have been brought into the Lord's treasury, for the spread of the Gospel, $9,627. This is not far from half of the whole contribution by our Synod. Since these represent the .small gifts, the mites of our people, nothing could more pointedl}- emphasize the great importance of fostering these socie- ties and the careful training of the children in our Sunday schools to give of their little or large savings for this great work. The fourth matter of interest which we gather from these reports is that the subscription li.st to the missionary periodicals is deplorably small. One thousand, four hundred and seventy-seven copies of the \" Mi.s.sionary \" and S16 copies of the \" Children's Missionary \" are taken in our Synod, with its membership of 33,490 Chri.stians. Compared with the previous year, this is a slight decrease (13) in the number of sub- scribers. It is thus made clear that our pastors are not doing their duty in this matter. The price of the \"Missionary\" was put at 50 cents with the hope and expe(ftation of largely increasing the circulation of tl.is invalu- able magazine. This has not been the case, and to-day the pi.tlication of the \" Mis.sionary \" puts a tax upon the funds of our mission treasury. Synoid of NoR^rtt Carolina. 71 Foreign IVIissions. This is more than a matter of business, it indicates spiritual loss that is verv significant."}
{"id": "minutesofannuals98pres", "title": "Minutes of the ... annual sessions of the Synod of North Carolina ... [serial]", "year": 1983, "seq": 1, "text": "To the Synod of North Carolina : Synod's Connnittee of Chnrch and Christian Education beg leave to report : It is with profound gratitude that we are able to report increased and increasing interest in every department of this work. 1. Davidson College was never so prosperous as during the last year. One hundred and ninety-one students were enrolled. Sixty candidates for the niinistn,- and ministers' sons were taught free of charge for tuition. Plans are on foot to build a Science Hall adequate to future needs ; to se- cure an abundant supply of water for all purposes, and also to put a financial agent to work to increase endowment. 2. Peace Institute has been more prosperous than ever before, with /promise of yet larger efficiency in all departments. The four Presbyterial female schools recently established at Charlotte, Statesville, Red Springs and Kenansville are entering upon their third vear under the best prospects, and the success of some of them has been phenomenal. The policy of all of these schools is to reduce expenses to the lowest possible point compatible with efficiency, so as to compete with all comers, and offer the besffacilities to the largest possible num- ber. We are assured that none need go further from home to find thorough scholarship and training in all departments, and a social and religious culture unsurpassed. 3. The number of high schools and academies under positive Presby- terian influence and control is on the increase, and their success is more and more assured, so that their example is a stimulus to found and foster others. 4. Parochial schools, as recommended by the Synod, are engaging the attention of some of our churches, and a number of such schools are re- ported to your committee. It would be well for the Synod to emphasize the importance of establishing such schools wherever the conditions will allow, and again to commend the constitution for parochial schools adopted bv the Synod."}
{"id": "montanaskyoffici89mont", "title": "Montana and the sky : official monthly publication of the Montana Aeronautics Commission", "year": 1993, "seq": 0, "text": "Airworthiness Directives and the Aircraft Owner/Operator By: Richard A. Pemberton, Airworthiness Unit Supervisor Columbus, FSDO (Reprinted with permission) \"No person may operate a product to which an airworthiness directive applies ex- cept in accordance with the requirements of that airworthiness directive.\" This is the ex- act working from FAR 39.3 that specifies compliance with airworthiness directives (AD). As owner/pilots of FAR 9 1 type aircraft you should be aware of your obligation to ensure that all AD's which pertain to your aircraft are documented and complied with per FAR 91.417(a)(2)(v). Let us examine what an AD is, and what it is designed to do for aviation safety. This will help us to un- derstand the regulations more clearly. One safety function charged to the FAA is to require correction of unsafe conditions discovered in any product (aircraft, engine, propeller, or appliance) when that condition is likely to exist or develop in other prod- ucts of the same type design. ADs are used by the FAA to notify aircraft owners and operators of unsafe condition and to require their correction. ADs prescribe the condi- tions and limitations, including inspections, repairs, or alterations under which the prod- uct may continue to be operated. Remember, registered owners receive the AD; therefore, it is important that own- ers of leased aircraft make the AD information available to the operators leas- ing their aircraft as expeditiously as possible. Compliance requirements specified in ADs are established for safety reasons and may be stated in numerous ways. Some ADs are so serious in nature that they re- quire compliance before further flight. In some instances, the AD authorizes flight, provided a ferry permit is obtained, but without such authorization in an AD, further flight is prohibited. Other ADs express compliance in terms of a specific number of hours of operation, for instance, \"compli- ance required within the next 100 hours time in service after the effective date of this AD.\" When a direct relationship between air- worthiness and calendar time is identified, compliance may be expressed as a calendar date."}
{"id": "fichte-the-science-of-knowledge-with-the-first-and-second-introductions", "title": "Fichte The Science Of Knowledge With The First And Second Introductions", "year": 2000, "seq": 0, "text": "This is all the more remarkable because Fichte labors under a number of severe handicaps, not the least of which is his cumbersome, unnecessarily complex style. His thought, which may be difficult enough to follow on the clearest exposition, is obscured by the vagueness and the ambiguities of his writing. Bad punctuation, idiosyncratic sentence structure, and a dismaying overabundance of nonfunctional expletives interfere with the task of understanding, and it is ironic that a thinker in whose philosophy the requirement of unity plays such an exalted role, could have endowed this work with no more readily discernible structure than it displays. On a charitable interpretation we could say that Fichte was so intent upon his ideas that he could pay little attention to the way he communicated them. It may be more nearly correct to say that he was one of that ever increasing host of philosophers who never quite learn to write well. Infelicities of expression are by no means the only obstacles to appreciating Fichte\u2019s work. His literary persona, alternating be- tween arrogance and mock humility, and always ready for vitriolic personal attacks, is thoroughly unbearable. In addition, he can be infuriatingly careless and inconsistent in his views. Consciousness and self-consciousness, for example, are central concepts in his system, but not once throughout the Science of Knowledge and its two Introductions (written subsequently to the main work) does he attempt to give a serious account of them: some of his cursory vil Vili Preface remarks about them are plainly contradictory. Finally, he also suffers from the fault that has discredited much of speculative philosophy: his arguments frequently seem shallow and verbal. Not only are the meaning and referent of some of his words unclear, many of his syntheses in the theoretical part of the main work turn on what appear to be forms of obscure linguistic sleight of hand."}
{"id": "fichte-the-science-of-knowledge-with-the-first-and-second-introductions", "title": "Fichte The Science Of Knowledge With The First And Second Introductions", "year": 2000, "seq": 1, "text": "We may well come away with the feeling that such dialectical involutions can have little to do with reality. In the light of such an impressive list of faults, the reader may ask what Fichte might have to offer to him, and even what conceiv- able reason we might have had to spend our time translating his work. It is not easy to answer such a blunt challenge without simply asking the reader to complete the book and see for himself. What one finds interesting or profitable is surely a personal matter; but it should be possible to give some reasons for going to the trouble of reading such a difficult volume, or at least to mention some of the features that seem to us to recommend it. From the first page of the First Introduction it is evident that we are dealing with a major and independent voice, a philosophical principal. Although Kant set the stage, developed the terms, and even largely determined the rules with which Fichte operates, it would be wrong to view our author simply as a follower of Kant or an expositor of Kant\u2019s system. Part of the interest of Fichte\u2019s work derives precisely from the fact that, accepting so much of both the matter and form of the critical philosophy, he is in a position to explode it from the inside. The person interested in the remarkable logic shown in the history of philosophical systems will find Fichte\u2019s work a fascinating case study. Whatever we may think of its ultimate success, the scope and conception of the Fichtean enterprise are truly impressive. The aim is to present an account of the nature of man that would at once be an account of the nature of reality. Fichte wishes to show the essential unity of human faculties and to establish that as acting, willing agents we are independent of the sensible world and enjoy a radical, untrammelled freedom."}
{"id": "fichte-the-science-of-knowledge-with-the-first-and-second-introductions", "title": "Fichte The Science Of Knowledge With The First And Second Introductions", "year": 2000, "seq": 2, "text": "It is the self through its cognitive faculties that creates and determines the objects which constitute the external world: reality exists only in and for the conscious mind. Fichte attempts, in short, to establish a tenable idealism as a Preface ix natural outgrowth of the Kantian critical philosophy. A careful study of his work shows that he draws freely on Spinoza and Leibniz; but he wishes to retain their positive insights incorporated in a more sophisticated, critical system than they could develop. Use of the Kantian transcendental method of proof and an elabo- rate dialectic indeed made it possible for Fichte to work out the details of his system with a subtlety and sophistication that are difficult to match. Even his apparently sophistical arguments bear second scrutiny: such intensive reading is frequently rewarded with surprising insights into their meaning or significance. It is clear that Fichte\u2019s philosophy represents one of the few major attempts to develop and defend a complete idealism: this by itself would make it well worth serious study. The author of the Science of Knowledge is not alone among philosophers in paying too little attention to his fundamental presuppositions and in making virtually no attempt to com- municate them. For this reason, it may be appropriate for us to spend a little time discussing them here. We might begin by asking what Fichte thought he was doing when he engaged in the task of developing a philosophy. Fichte was convinced that there is a single, fundamental question of philosophy, which functions as a watershed: our answer to it determines the total complexion of our philosophical commit- ments. The task of philosophical science according to Fichte is to explain how our experience of a world of spatio-temporal, law- governed objects is possible. The question that must be answered first and foremost concerns the ground or foundation of experience."}
{"id": "fichte-the-science-of-knowledge-with-the-first-and-second-introductions", "title": "Fichte The Science Of Knowledge With The First And Second Introductions", "year": 2000, "seq": 3, "text": "There are only two possible answers: one identifies the self- conscious self as the sole source of experience, the other maintains that cognition of an objective world could never arise without the influence on the self of independently existing objects. Accordingly, there are only two fundamental types of philosophy: idealism, with its insistence on the all-sufficiency of the self, and what Fichte variously calls \u201crealism\u201d or \u201cdogmatism,\u201d with its claim that ob- jects exist independently of the mind. It is clear to Fichte from the first that dogmatism is not a tenable philosophy. His main argument against it is that it cannot account for the existence of conscious selves. But, interestingly x Preface enough, he is of two minds about the force of this argument against the dogmatist. In some places he asserts that, given their premises, both philosophies are consistent and, that since argument about fun- damental principles is impossible, each is secure in its sphere and irrefutable. On this view, the choice between the theories is a matter of \u2018inclination and interest,\u201d and what can be said for idealism is not so much that it is true as that it is something we ought to believe, for only according to the idealist are we free and responsible agents. Fichte cannot resist taking this opportunity to intimate that his Opponents, since they believe in a \u201cmechanically\u201d determined world of which the self is a part, themselves lack the free agency which is the mark of the human and the indispensable condition of morality. In other places, however, he argues that idealism is demonstrably superior to a realistic view, but such a demonstration is, in fact, nowhere provided. It is fairly obvious that Fichte thought the view that the conscious self is \u2018\u2018an accident of unconscious physical nature\u201d nearly absurd, and was convinced that if his idealist deductions could be successfully accomplished, realism, even in the minimal form in which it involves the existence of a mind-independent but unknowable thing-in-itself, would lose all its plausibility."}
{"id": "fichte-the-science-of-knowledge-with-the-first-and-second-introductions", "title": "Fichte The Science Of Knowledge With The First And Second Introductions", "year": 2000, "seq": 4, "text": "This latter method of proof enables us to argue from some actual structure of experience to the conditions indis- pensable for it: for Kant, to \u201cdeduce\u201d a certain concept in this sense is simply to show that the activity it designates is a necessary prerequisite for having the sort of experience we in fact have. Now Fichte is in fundamental agreement with Kant about the correct method of philosophizing. But whereas Kant takes as his conditioned, whose conditions he is to discover, our experience of spatio-temporal objects in causal connection with each other, Fichte maintains that the deduction must have as its point of de- parture our immediate but nonsensible acquaintance (what he calls \u201cintellectual intuition\u2019) with an absolute and infinite self. The task of the philosopher is to inquire into what is contained in or required by the concept of an absolute self. When the deduction is completed and the concept has yielded up all that was tacitly present in it or implied by it, we should arrive at nothing short of the totality of all the structures of experience. If any of the fundamental structures of experience could not be deduced from the concept of the absolute self, critical idealism would be shown to be an inadequate philos- ophy. This interpretation of Fichte\u2019s method is borne out by various hints throughout the works in this volume, as well as by his actual procedure in the Science of Knowledge. It also helps to explain the obscure passage at the end of the First Introduction, which com- pares the philosopher to the chemist. The philosopher does indeed \u2018see\u2019 the a priori: without any reference to experience he develops the system of conditions of the pure activity Fichte calls the absolute self. The test of the correctness and adequacy of critical idealism is that this system of conditions derived from the absolute self is identical with the structures or generic features of experience xii Preface (the \u201c\u2018a posteriori\u201d in the passage at issue) as actually lived."}
{"id": "fichte-the-science-of-knowledge-with-the-first-and-second-introductions", "title": "Fichte The Science Of Knowledge With The First And Second Introductions", "year": 2000, "seq": 5, "text": "One could argue that this procedure of seeking out the condi- tions of the self goes counter to Fichte\u2019s original postulation of the self as absolute. The absolute self must be unconditioned: the cur- rent procedure exhibits it as the most highly conditioned of all activities. The objection is well founded but is not, for that reason, damaging to Fichte\u2019s method. In characteristic fashion, he em- braces both the thesis that the self is simple and unconditioned and the view that it is the most dispersed and highly conditioned of realities. The point strikes at the heart of Fichte\u2019s metaphysics, and we shall have more to say about it presently. For now it is enough to remark that in his view nothing can be an absolute self without at once limiting itself; this determination or limitation is what gives rise to the finite, conditioned self and its counterpart, the objective world of the non-ego. It is this necessary and immediate, we could almost say automatic, self-limitation of the self that Fichte has in mind when he describes the philosopher's task as that of simply observing the self-development of his fundamental concept. Once the concept of the absolute self is clearly in focus, it appears to generate, as if without our help and by means of its dialectical force alone, an entire galaxy of subsidiary judgments and ideas. There are two further comments that should be made in con- nection with Fichte\u2019s ideas on philosophical method. It is interest- ing to note that it never occurred to him to question the adequacy of the transcendental method to yield philosophical truth. Had he reflected on his use of that method as distinct from the use made of it by Kant, Fichte might have considered that in seeking out the necessary conditions of experience, the sets of conditions deduced will vary according to the experiential structure selected as our point of departure."}
{"id": "fichte-the-science-of-knowledge-with-the-first-and-second-introductions", "title": "Fichte The Science Of Knowledge With The First And Second Introductions", "year": 2000, "seq": 6, "text": "Kant\u2019s deductions may be no less impeccable than Fichte\u2019s, and other philosophers could no doubt develop scores of faultless, imaginative, and characteristically different accounts of the conditions of experience. How could we con- ceivably choose between them? Surely not by the consistency and skill with which they are carried through. Instead, we would have to argue that a certain structure of experience is more fundamental, and hence better adapted to serve as a starting point than all the others. With this argument, however, the transcendental method of Preface xiii proof offers us no help. Fichte himself is silent on the issue, and in choosing self-connectedness as the fundamental structure of all experience (as distinct, say, from temporality), he has laid him- self open to the charge of assuming what he set out to prove, or at least of loading the dice in his own favor. Secondly, it is appropriate to call attention to a subsidiary method Fichte uses in his elaborate deduction of the conditions of experience. This dialectical procedure is the means by which the transcendental deduction actually progresses. The first moment of the dialectic is the analysis of a given concept until apparently con- tradictory results are reached. Since such contradictions could not be allowed to stand without detriment to the unity of consciousness and hence to\u2019 the unity of the self, they have to be reconciled or \u201csynthesized.\u201d\u201d The synthesis of the apparently contradictory judg- ments always occurs by the introduction of a new concept which, in turn, is itself soon found to contain an apparent contradiction. Perhaps the clearest example of this procedure is the original synthesis of the Science of Knowledge, which proceeds to derive from the concept of the absolute self the opposition of self and not-self, only to unite the two apparently incompatible concepts through the new idea of divisibility."}
{"id": "fichte-the-science-of-knowledge-with-the-first-and-second-introductions", "title": "Fichte The Science Of Knowledge With The First And Second Introductions", "year": 2000, "seq": 7, "text": "The particular feature of the word-\u2014 lost in translation but central for Fichte\u2014is that when used in connection with the assertion of propositions, it makes contact with the intellect, while when signifying affirmation, it properly belongs in the sphere of will. Reason, Fichte points out, is the capacity for positing: through the creative power of reason what- ever is posited is made real. Positing, then, is a primordial act, in which the theoretical and the practical coincide, and in which an undivided self is totally engaged in a single creative, all-encompass- ing enterprise. The fundamental premise of Fichte\u2019s philosophy is just such a self positing or asserting itself, and positing itself as engaging inthis enterprise of self-assertion. This thought invites comparison with the concept of Aristotle's Prime Mover, eternally engaged in con- templation of himself, and would perhaps be identical with it, were it not for the practical, volitional element involved in self-assertion. A more compelling similarity is with Spinoza\u2019s idea of the eternal potency-in-act\u2014the inner core of his one Substance. The striking similarity to Spinoza is sustained throughout the Science of Knowl- edge, and Fichte frequently pays tribute to him as the greatest and most consistent of dogmatists. Fichte appears to be saying that only the fundamental premise of Spinoza was wrong; he gave the wrong answer to the watershed question of philosophy, conceiving of this potency-in-act in impersonal terms. Preface XV Unfortunately, Fichte does not think it necessary to explain what it means for a primordial, undifferentiated activity to be personal. He quickly answers the charge of egotism by reminding us that his absolute self is no member of a world of finite persons, and altogether lacks the individuated subjectivity essential to it if such an accusation is to have meaning."}
{"id": "fichte-the-science-of-knowledge-with-the-first-and-second-introductions", "title": "Fichte The Science Of Knowledge With The First And Second Introductions", "year": 2000, "seq": 8, "text": "But if the primordial activity is devoid of all the features of individual personality (and that is the only idea of personality we have), what sense could it make to call it a self? In a number of passages Fichte suggests that the absolute self is conscious of itself, or at least that it consists of an activity that is conscious: perhaps for Fichte these are the features that render the primordial activity a self. In one place indeed he goes so far as to exclaim categorically: Was fiir sich nicht ist, ist kein Ich\u2014what is not conscious of itself is not a self. But both of these suggestions appear to go against other central views he espouses, for he frequently assures us that no consciousness is possible with out self-consciousness, and no self-consciousness without a con- sciousness of objects. But the absolute self, as such, is logically prior to all objects, and hence must be at best a necessary condition of consciousness, without itself being conscious. Another possible reason Fichte might offer for calling the infinite potency-in-act a self is that it is within the experience of a knowing subject that we have immediate nonsensible contact with it. But this suggestion comes to immediate grief: it is simply a fallacy to suppose that whatever a self cognizes is, for that very reason, itself a self. That the primordial activity cannot bear the features of person- ality is further supported by the fact that its reality must be affirmed in what Fichte calls a \u201cthetic judgment.\"* Such a judgment, of which \u201cTam\u201d is \u201cthe first and foremost\u201d example, is devoid of what we would conventionally call a predicate. The concept of its subject, therefore, remains unrelated to any other concept: only the reality of the subject is asserted without any reference to what class it might belong to or what property it may possess."}
{"id": "fichte-the-science-of-knowledge-with-the-first-and-second-introductions", "title": "Fichte The Science Of Knowledge With The First And Second Introductions", "year": 2000, "seq": 9, "text": "But if the original potency-in-act must be infinitely indeterminate, it certainly cannot possess the property of being a conscious self. In this primordial activity\u2014conceived perhaps on the model of Aristotle's energeia\u2014agent, activity, and product are indistinguish- ably united. Even though some passages appear to contradict this, Xvi Preface it is evident that Fichte thinks of his absolute self as unitary and singular, There is but one such activity, not a different one for each empirical self. This single activity is the source of all there is, not through arbitrary choice but in a necessary, yet perfectly free fashion. Its operation is both free and necessary for the same reason: it acts by the necessity of its own nature independently of any external influence. It gives rise to the totality of all experience, including our experience of an external world, by an inevitable, non-temporal activity of self-determination. Since to be is to have some limitations, the absolute self could not even be real if it were perfectly indeterminate. But the un- avoidability of its self-determination, which is at once a self- fragmenting and self-limitation, is best understood by reflecting that as soon as we add a single predicate to the thetic judgment which affirms the reality of the self, we have related it to a class or property and thereby made it to some extent determinate. If we attach the predicate of infinity\u2014certainly an appropriate one\u2014to the absolute self, we instantly destroy its infinite indeterminateness. The moment, therefore, that the primordial activity is conceived as infinite, it sheds its infinity and displays itself as finite. We could also say that its infinity requires its finitude and, if we wished to identify such a dialectical relation with causation, that the infinite necessarily gives rise to the finite."}
{"id": "montanaonlineref01montrich", "title": "[Montana Online Reference Service online report]", "year": 1978, "seq": 0, "text": "Library Carroll Collage Library State Agency Libraries (over) Page two: Online Report, July 15, 1978 Montana Online Reference Service Usage A statistical report on online usage is attached (\"Report to the Montana State Library Commission\" - July 7, 1978). This shows that academic libraries are the biggest users (38%) followed by state government agencies (33%) and by public libraries (23%). These figures do not reflect the number of online requests which we have chosen not to search online but which are, rather, treated as subject requests and searched manually. An Interesting observation made by a Broad Valleys Federation librarian Is that the presence of the online service is bringing requests Into the library which the patron would not normally have associated v/ith information available through the library. Whether these are filled by the computer or by hand Is not Important. What is important is that the patron is associating more kinds of Information with the library, beyond recreational reading. Spreading the Word ~ Public Libraries A very important aspect of this demonstration period of online searching (of which one year is left) is its usage for public library patrons. City and county government workers, planners, mental health professionals, writers researching new books and magazine articles, parents interested in educational and health information for the family, grants writers, farmers and ranchers, businesspersons ~ all have Information needs which the public library can meet through the online search service. I v/ouid encourage you to publicize the online service and will help you in any way that 1 can. Word of mouth Is probably the best way that new online users can be reached. Other means are articles in the newspaper and letters to key potential users. We still have plenty of orange MORS pamphlets available upon request. We also have a collection of news releases from around the state on the online service as well as sample letters to key potential users which could be modified for your own use."}
{"id": "cawsahs_000240", "title": "West Sacramento News-Ledger 1998-08-05", "year": 1998, "seq": 0, "text": "And I would do just about the world.\" said anything for my parents. If and dad said they you of my many the best parents a person mother s recipes at could have. \u201cThey let us make up our mind about going into the own family business.\u201d said Pete Jr., who along with Paul, With the filing period ex- ard B. Drew, an equipment pected to close on Friday, six operator/minister; Edward people have filed candidacy \u201cEd\" Hocking, a government for three available program analyst; Machschefes. an elementary school teacher; and James own Karl papers seats on the Washington Uni\u00ac fied School Board ballot in J C. Myers II, a pastor Also on the November bal- November. ArdeeneWestvik. a retired educator who currently holds lot will be two seats of the one of the two available four- West Sacramento City Coun- year terms, has filed to run again. She is joined by chal\u00ac lenger Stanley Dal Butler, who lists his occupation as a fleet superintendent. The other incumbent in position to run for a four year term is David Farmer, a po- lice lieutenant, who told the ers James Cahill and Marna Miller (both veterans of the 1996 city council race) in tak\u00ac ing out candidacy papers in preparation for filing Cabaldon has announced that he will indeed run cil. As ofTuesday. no one had filed candidacy papers for this race. But incumbents W'es Beers and Christopher Cabaldon (the current mayor and mayor pro tern, respec\u00ac tively) have joined challeng- was my res of the animals before and prosper. care after school. Plus we were pretty much out in the middle in of nowhere, and 1 didn\u2019t even began to attract even more cus- have a bicycle because there tomers. Plus that is about the time our children began playing bigger role in the family busi- New s-I,\u00abdger he plans to file later this week."}
{"id": "quake-ii-strategies-secrets_202507", "title": "Quake II Strategies & Secrets", "year": 1998, "seq": 0, "text": "However, they usually can't keep up with you if you keep moving. The easiest way to dispose of them is from shore, but, of course, that isn't always possible. If you're chased by a pack of hungry sharks, the best tactic is to swim back- wards and give them a few blasts in the face with the weapon of your choice. The super shotgun works wonders in these situations and saves pre- cious slugs and cells. BERSERKER The berserker is a towering, close-range menace. Its arms end in fearsome spikes and hammers, each with a deceivingly long range. The berserker can hit you from nearly 10 paces away and send you flying across the room. You don't want to fight him next to lava. ENFORCER TACTICS Like all close-range creatures, beserkers are fast, but you can outrun them. The easiest way to take them down is to run backwards, shooting as you go. They'll zigzag to avoid your fire, so duck into a narrow corri- dor to slow them down enough so that you can finish them off without incident. Just remember- it's usually safer to face them where you stand than to back into a corridor you haven't explored yet. BRAIN Hobbling, fat, and slow, the brain looks more deadly than it actually is. The brain attacks at close range with two hooked claws, or rips open its chest to reveal writhing, life-sucking tentacles. It's fortunate that its tentacle range is even less than its arm range. However, it does have a power shield (energy armor), which absorbs much of the damage from any weapon. This makes the brain harder to deal with, but in the end, it still winds up as cannon fodder. Berserker rg YE 41\u20ac TACTICS If there aren\u2019t other enemies around, choose the weapon with the most ammo and take your time."}
{"id": "quake-ii-strategies-secrets_202507", "title": "Quake II Strategies & Secrets", "year": 1998, "seq": 1, "text": "FLYER Airborne creatures can be painful to deal with\u2014the flyer is no exception. It has a very small outline while facing you, making it a hard target. Also, its hyper blaster sends an accurate, extremely fast, high-volume burst in your direction. If you stop moving, even for a split second, you'll probably get hit. Up close, the flyer uses its razor-sharp wings to tear chunks from your flesh and armor. Enforcer GLADIATOR TACTICS Flyers attack in droves, so you never face only one at a time. It\u2019s lucky that they have very little health, compared to most other creatures. Choose a high-scatter or an instantaneous weapon (the super shotgun and shot- gun work well, as do the machine gun and chain gun) and take potshots while dodg- ing around corners. Flyers will chase you into narrow corri- dors, and if your aim is good, this can work to your advan- tage. Switch to the rocket launcher and blast the walls of the corridor\u2014the radius damage should do the trick. GLADIATOR One of the most powerful common monsters, the gladiator is armed with a shoulder-mounted rail gun for medium- to extreme-range attacks and a pincer claw for close encounters. If you stop moving for more than a second, you'll see the all-too-familiar blue spiral, but this time it'll be aimed straight at you. Strafing helps, but take out the gladiator fast to avoid trouble later. rg aid bh VQ l'ACTICS Although the rail gun is an instantaneous Gladiator weapon, the gladiator is a bit slow with it. It takes him a second to aim the weapon, allowing you to step out of the weapon's path. However, the simple solution is to keep moving and strafe in one direc- tion, because the gladiator cannot lead his shots."}
{"id": "quake-ii-strategies-secrets_202507", "title": "Quake II Strategies & Secrets", "year": 1998, "seq": 2, "text": "Remember, though, that all guards can duck under your attacks\u2014so, aim below the belt. Be aware that there are usually more powerful enemies around, which may work toward you as you fight the guards. After you drop a light guard, he sometimes has enough life left in him to fire off a few extra shots\u2014don't let down your guard. MACHINE-GUN GUARD The toughest of the three guard classes, the black-clad machine-gun guards travel in tight groups, patrolling corridors and open areas. When they train their sights on you, be prepared for a painful burst of machine-gun fire\u2014they rarely miss. Light Guard TACTICS Later in the game, health and armor become an issue, and even the seemingly insignificant peckings of a machine- gun guard will seem substantial. At close range, take out your super shotgun and get ready for some gibbing. At longer ranges, a single rocket-launch should end all of the guards' ambitions. Just remember to get out of their line of sight once they start to attack. MEDIC The medic is a monstrosity that belongs in an emergency room. Armed with a hyper blaster, the medic forces you to take cover while it revives the creatures that you've wasted. Needless to say, this is bad news. It's fortunate that you rarely encounter medics in Quake II. However, when you do encounter them, be prepared for a fight. Machine-Gun Guard MUTANT TACTICS One medic is not much of a threat, but you never see just him. If you're attacked in droves by a variety of powerful enemies, don't be surprised if you find a medic nearby. They can revive creatures that have been killed, but they can't revive creatures that have been gibbed. MUTANT The mutant somewhat resembles the fiend from Quake I, with a notable exception\u2014mutants are a lot more deadly."}
{"id": "quake-ii-strategies-secrets_202507", "title": "Quake II Strategies & Secrets", "year": 1998, "seq": 3, "text": "If something in the environment appears out of the ordinary\u2014like a constantly sparking flood light, or a discolored wall texture or panel\u2014don't be afraid to investigate it. Shoot it, push it, jump, or crash through it to see if anything happens. LIQUID BODIES its not uncommon to encounter a variety of pools, canals, rivers, lakes, and other liquid bodies in Stroggos. For the most part, these are safe to swim in, although some are murky and offer very poor visibil- ity. Sometimes you have no choice but to waddle through a canal, or swim deep undertow to get to a destination or avoid or seek out an enemy. The most dan- ger you can face in liquid bodies comes from the local variety of shark. (See the description of the barracuda shark in Chapter 2.) But liquid bodies can also be your friend. You can swim undetected past a troop of Strogg guards and other Strogg varieties by electing to go under (Fig- ure 3.2). Also, you can shoot all your weapons under water and hit targets on land. If you happen to have an underwater breather, you can extend your time underwater considerably and travel great distances. And if you must make a desperate get-away, you can always dive from great heights and cushion your landing in water. But just as there are relatively safe waterways, a large portion of Stroggos is crisscrossed with pernicious liquid substances: lava, acid, and other disagree- able chemicals, such as those used by the Strogg to process and treat organic matter so it is suitable for grafting into their patchwork physiognomy. SOLID OBJECTS Nota very tidy species, Strogg installations are often littered with broken equipment, crates, rubble, rocks, dead bodies and other assorted solid objects. Much of this is simply junk that gets in the way when you are attempting to move swiftly."}
{"id": "quake-ii-strategies-secrets_202507", "title": "Quake II Strategies & Secrets", "year": 1998, "seq": 4, "text": "A few light guards watch over the canal, making your entry into the tunnels difficult. But before heading for the tunnels, you're better off liquidating the opposition around the Communication Center. ll. Jump the broken bridge. After thinning out the guards in and around the canal, take a running start and jump over the broken bridge to reach the landing across the way. The entry to the left leads to a large room where a few enforcers and guards will try to keep you from going any further. At the far end of the room, you'll also be able to discern a small red sign identifying the Communication Center, your ultimate destination. But for now, you will not be able to reach that area. You simply want to take out the enforcers and the guards. 2. Explore the tunnel on the left and score a secret. Dive into the canal and reach the tunnel on the left at the far end. Hugging the wall to your right, follow the path around the rusted metal pillars until you see a narrow crack on the wall. A couple of laser pistol blasts should cause the thin wall to break open and reveal a shot- gun next to a decapitated corpse (Figure 4.5). Grab the gun and exit the tunnel. 9, Enter the next tunnel. There might be a new contingent of guards when you exit the tunnel. Moving inside the next tunnel, you'll come upon a darkened square room with a faint switch on the CHAPTER 4: UNT ONE FIGURE 4.5: The trip down the left tunnel affords you a secret and a shotgun for your troubles. wall. Take the medkit near the corner, push the switch, and watch two massive doors unhinge into a large cylindrical hole. Jump into the hole to access the larger tunnel network that eventually will bring you near the entrance to the coveted Communication Center."}
{"id": "quake-ii-strategies-secrets_202507", "title": "Quake II Strategies & Secrets", "year": 1998, "seq": 5, "text": "Be ready to pound hard on a berserker the moment you cross the bridge and open the door. The corridor behind the berserker is littered with stimpacks. Turning left, you will come upon a small chamber closed off by a force field. 2, Reduce the Strogg numbers. Before you're free to maneuver the switches in the dark chamber, fend off the flyer, the numerous guards, and the berserker in the area. 9. Lower the force field. Hit the impact switch inside the force field chamber and then proceed up the steps. Push the switch on the platform to activate the overhead cargo pod. It will go careening directly into the door at the far end, letting you explore further. CHAPTER 5: UNrr Two REACH THE WATER-LOGGED CHAMBERS This leg of your journey through the Ammo Depot involves passing through a few treacherous hallways where enforcers and guards like to surprise you by jumping at you unexpectedly from behind crates and dark corners. Eventually, you will get to a dark, split-level chamber that is lit only by red light fixtures. The floor space is crawling with berserkers and guards. As you've done before, leap into the lower floor of the dark chamber and exchange hot lead and energy blasts with the Strogg. When you reach the door at the corner of the lower floor, you're ready to continue the action. You'll ride a platform to a narrow chamber with two large crates held by cranes. After you push a switch to release the heavy boxes on unsuspecting berserkers below, you're ready to continue through a few more hallways. At the end, there's a platform that brings you in view of a narrow bridge crossing over a lethal acidic solution. Your goal is then to reach and negotiate the water- logged storage chambers. |, Race across the bridge."}
{"id": "quake-ii-strategies-secrets_202507", "title": "Quake II Strategies & Secrets", "year": 1998, "seq": 6, "text": "Push the switch next to a floor plate and descend into the stairs as it slides open. Fight off the enforcer and step over the lowering platform on the left side. Survive the onslaught in the darkness. Gun down the berserker and the guards and find the switch that activates the two ascend- ing and descending metal plates on one side of the room. It's the only way you can get back up and onto the elevated area of the storage room above. Grab the last cube and scram. Push the door to the side of the elevated area and step onto a small storage room with an enforcer and the first gleaming power cube. As soon as you take the cube, another door slides open to reveal a much larger storage facility. Do your best to overcome the gunner and berserker and then climb the ladder at the opposite end. Activate a small green switch and start up the stairs through the door that opens below. Grab a super shotgun on your way out. Follow the stairs, first up and then down, to emerge into a dark passage protected by a berserker. Take the super shotgun on the middle of the floor and then push the last switch to open the door that leads back to the sunken floor of the initial chamber. Ride the small elevator, get out of the front door, cross the bridge, and slide back into the Ammo Depot. Head for the Warehouse. After emerging back in the Ammo Depot, cross directly ahead straight into the Warehouse. You are now in a position to power up the entrance into the last level of Unit Two. WAREHOUSE WAREHOUSE After you've secured all four power cubes back in the Supply Station, you are now ready to storm the Warehouse and navigate its various chambers by pow- ering up key installation areas."}
{"id": "quake-ii-strategies-secrets_202507", "title": "Quake II Strategies & Secrets", "year": 1998, "seq": 7, "text": "At the doughnut-shaped room, press the button to lower the circular stairs. Descend the stairs, but stop at the first . window and shoot it. The glass will shatter. Look out the window and down at a > stack of boxes. You can just see the corner of an impact switch hidden behind OTHER Secrets IN Unir Two them. Shoot the switch and continue down the stairs. Instead of stopping in front of the stack of boxes, the circular stairs now continue downward to a secret hidden chamber with health, armor, and other goodies. QUAD DAMAGE Near the exit, in the room behind the plexiglas, look up and shoot the impact switch. Then climb over the emerging ladder to take the quad damage above. Ae his is arguably one of your toughest assignments and certainly one of the longest. In Unit Three you re to continue moving north, wreaking havoc with the Strogg installations and eventually knock- g out the security grid to the heavily guarded industrial 4 gantic jail facility. \u2018HAPTER 6: Unir THREE NIT THREE OBJECTIVES The Strogg are a totally industrialized race and few things could hurt them more than compromising their industrial regions. The detail for Unit Three is simple and direct (Figure 6.1). Unit Three consists of six levels: Main Gate up Detention Center Ww Security Complex \" Guard House \" Torture Chambers \" Grid Control Destroy the security Grid protecting the industrial region. Fenetrate the outer jail defenses. Secrets gu FIGURE 6.1: Expose their industrial region and the Strogg will suddenly seem vulnerable. MAIN GATE At the center of your objective is a pyramid structure in the Security Com- plex. Once you scour all other levels to obtain the pyramid's key and access pass, you'll be able to get to your ultimate destination, the Grid Control level. To accomplish your monumental mission: \" Find your way past the heavy jail defenses in the Main Gate."}
{"id": "quake-ii-strategies-secrets_202507", "title": "Quake II Strategies & Secrets", "year": 1998, "seq": 8, "text": "Cut a straight line from the door near the Security Complex all the way through the Detention Center's courtyard and directly into the portal marked with the red key symbol in its top-right corner. Squelch the enforcers and their parasite companions. Move briskly into the hallways, always ready for an enforcer and para- site assault. When you come upon a wide courtyard with a hold- ing cell below and a ledge on the far wall, pummel your way to reach the door across the floor. Ride a platform to the key terminal. Endure another tussle with a couple of enforcers and their quadruped parasite. Then hop onto the lift platform and ride up into the balcony you might remember seeing the first time you entered the Detention Center. Moving cau- tiously, so the gladiator won't know you're there, push the terminal's keyboard and watch the yellow laser beams vanish. The same thing is happening back in the Security Complex, where you're bound next. A pyra- mid key cries for rescue in the Guard's House. Dash back to the Security Complex. Upon arriving, check your updated computer instructions and don't be misled. To open the con- trol pyramid, you must first possess the pyramid key. To obtain the access pass (to be used inside the computer), you must tour the Torture Chambers first. So, without another thought, pivot 180 degrees to your left and march toward the door leading to the Guard House. Persevere to the Guard House door. A platoon of berserkers and enforcers will do its best to keep you from reaching the Guard House's entrance. Don't let the first berserker just on the other side of the door catch you by surprise. When you come up to a larger room, grab the combat suit and continue toward the small outdoor courtyard."}
{"id": "quake-ii-strategies-secrets_202507", "title": "Quake II Strategies & Secrets", "year": 1998, "seq": 9, "text": "Circle the elevator shaft to grab the ammo and step out onto the open area. Turn immediately to your right, climb onto the ledge and follow it to the end, and jump directly onto a small landing to get the energy armor and some stimpacks. Then, jump as far as you can and take the draining lava heat no more than necessary. Move forward to reach the small rock land- ing. A second hop from there lands you directly on top of the hyper blaster and a cell. Explore every corner of the open area to get additional ammo. Use the medkits to restore any health you might have lost. 2. Move into the tunnel and score the Main Entrance's only secret. Make a couple of quick turns on the walkway to the right of the factory's main entrance and you come upon another wide open area divided by a large lava river. Blow a hole through the elec- tronic consoles by the flak jacket. Then EE WARNING grab a rocket launcher. 39. Build some stairs and col- lect more goods. Step through the door into the first mine enclosure. Shoot the impact switch high above and to the left to produce a set of stairs. \u20ac MAIN UNTRANCU Climb over them and walk around the platform to collect addi- tional cells. Start down the tunnel to the main entrance. Push into the narrow tunnel and come out next to a large curving metal shield and watch out for icarus hovering nearby. Turn right at the end of the shield to take in a panoramic view of the mines' Main Entrance below. Proceed down the stairs. Down the mutant and another berserker before stepping through the mines' Main Entrance. CHAPTER 7: UNrr FOUR UPPER MINES For a lesser marine, it would be very easy to get lost and succumb to panic and claustrophobia in the stuffy corridors and dark chambers of the Upper Mines."}
{"id": "montanahighwayfu00mena", "title": "Montana Highway functional classification and needs study (1970-1990) : an engineering study report for the Montana State Highway Commission Planning Survey Section; in cooperation with the Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration", "year": 1971, "seq": 0, "text": "Purpose and Scope The United States Department of Transportation has the statutory responsibility to pro- vide recommendations on transportation policy to the United States Congress and to administer a number of federal transportation programs. To meet these responsibilities, the Department of Trans- portation has initiated a National Transportation Planning Study that will study all domestic modes of transportation in every state and metropohtan area in the United States, the District of Columbia, and Puerto Rico. Both public and privately owned transportation facilities will be investigated in this Study, which will be the first of a continuing program to assess the Nation's transportation system, with biennial reports to Congress. Involved in the development of information will be many federal government agencies, transportation equipment manufacturing firms, firms concerned with interstate transportation, com- mon carriers, and state and local governments. The Department of Transportation will coordinate the collection and analysis of information at the national level and will determine a set of transportation development alternatives to be submitted to Congress. The state and local governments will provide a major part of the input into the National Transportation Planning Study, and their maximum involvement has been solicited so that individual state and local needs will be reflected. To insure consistency of input so that valid comparisons be- tween states can be made, a series of manuals has been written by the Department of Transportation to instruct the state and local governments in their collection and analysis of data. These manuals of instruction are: Manual 'A' - General Instructions Manual 'B' - Highway Functional Classification and Needs Study Manual 'C - Urban Public Transportation Manual 'D' -Airports and Other Intercity Terminals The instructions contained in these manuals are relatively explicit so that reasonable con- sistency on a nation-wide scale can be achieved. In addition to their statutory requirements, the man- uals are intended to encourage continuing comprehensive planning of publicly used transportation facilities and service, and to aid in evaluating recommended methods of allocation of federal resources."}
{"id": "montanahighwayfu00mena", "title": "Montana Highway functional classification and needs study (1970-1990) : an engineering study report for the Montana State Highway Commission Planning Survey Section; in cooperation with the Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration", "year": 1971, "seq": 1, "text": "All of the available Comprehensive Development Plans in the State done under the provisions of Section 701 of the Housing Act of 1954, as amended. 4. The Comprehensive State Water and Sewer Plans that were available at the time the projections were done. 5. Any individual population estimates and economic studies that could be found. Agencies that were consulted included: (1) The Bureau of Business and Economic Research of the University of Montana in Missoula; (2) The Center for Planning and Development of Montana State University in Bozeman; (3) The State Department of Planning and Economic Development in Helena; (4) The Office of Economic Opportunity in Helena; (5) various city planning or- ganizations; and (6) The Bureau of the Census. It was found that no agency made population projections for all of the counties and ur- ban areas in the State, and that very few projections of any sort could be found. The exceptions were projections for individual counties and urban areas that were done for the Comprehensive Develop- ment Plans and the State Water and Sewer Plans, and urban area projections from the Upper Midwest Economic Study. When the 1970 Census of Population figures became available, it showed that the major- ity of the available forecasts were overly optimistic. Consequently, the figures that were available were tempered with the knowledge of the 1970 Census, and projections were made that were more compat- ible with the current Census figures. Certain assumptions were made in these population projections: (1) the rural population in the eastern farming counties would remain relatively stable; (2) the rural-urban distribution in the western mountainous counties would remain stable; and (3) in general, the major population changes would be in the urban areas. Populations for the 56 counties were projected independently based upon historical pop- Illation trends, and any projections available for that county. These projections assumed that the coun- ties which lost population rapidly between I960 and 1970 had reached relative equilibrium, and would not change in population a great deal between now and 1990."}
{"id": "montanahighwayfu00mena", "title": "Montana Highway functional classification and needs study (1970-1990) : an engineering study report for the Montana State Highway Commission Planning Survey Section; in cooperation with the Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration", "year": 1971, "seq": 2, "text": "Rural Systems The rural highway functional systems are comprised of principal arterials, minor arterials, major and minor collectors, and local roads. (1) Rural Principal Arterials Rural principal arterials are the highest level of rural highway functional classifica- tion and were developed first. This system of highways is characterized by the longest- trip lengths and heaviest travel densities, and is intended to serve most large urban areas. In addition, this system is an interconnected network of continuous routes without stub 18 connections. The interstate system is an automatic component of this classification of highway. The percentage guidelines on rural principal arterials, specified by the Federal Highway Administration, are from 2-4 percent of the total rural miles. The 1990 airal principal arterial system developed for Montana consists of 4.7 per- cent of the total rural mileage. This is .7 percent above the upper limit of 4 percent speci- fied by the Federal Highway Administration. However, it is felt that the State of Montana consisting of large undeveloped areas having little or no road mileage (almost 30 percent of the State is federally owned of which the vast majority is national park, wilderness and national forest area, or Indian reservation) is a valid exception from the percentage limits. These large areas of little or no road mileages decrease the number of total rural miles, which consequently increases the percent of rural principal arterial mileage. The rural principal arterial system that was designated is considered to be the minimum highway network required for travel of the type that is specified for this system. (2) Rural Minor Arterials Rural minor arterials are the next level of rural highway functional classification. These highways link cities and larger towns not connected by a rural principal arterial, are spaced so that all developed areas of a state are within a reasonable distance of an ar- terial highway, and provide service to travel of primarily intrastate importance."}
{"id": "montanahighwayfu00mena", "title": "Montana Highway functional classification and needs study (1970-1990) : an engineering study report for the Montana State Highway Commission Planning Survey Section; in cooperation with the Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration", "year": 1971, "seq": 3, "text": "Rural Areas In an investigation to determine areas of the State where uniform costs occur, it was found that the State of Montana could be divided into two cost areas; a western area with mountain- ous terrain prevailing, and an eastern area with rolling terrain prevailing. The western cost area con- tains 19 counties and the eastern cost area 37 counties. In an effort to determine homogeneous areas for sampling, it was decided that the State could logically be divided into six sampling areas. The western cost area served as two sampling areas, while the eastern cost area was separated into four sampling areas. This resulted in relatively uniform sampling areas; four of which contained nine counties and two of which contained ten counties (see Figure No. 4). The needs appraisal on rural principal arterials was made on representative samples of each rural principal arterial route. To obtain these representative samples, each route within a sample area was divided into the sections that are reported in the 1969 Sufficiency Rating report of the Montana State Highway Commission. Every other section was selected from these route sections. The remainder of the rural functional systems were sampled on a cluster sampling basis by county units. The counties falling within a sample area were grouped, and sample counties se- lected randomly from the group until the mileage requirement for the minor arterial system was satisfied. Then, the counties that were sampled for the minor arterial system were grouped, and sam- ple counties chosen from this group until the mileage requirement for collectors was satisfied. Lastly, the counties that were sampled for the collector system were grouped, and sample counties chosen 33 from this group until the mileage requirement for local roads was satisfied. This method yielded maxi- mum reliability with a minimum of duplication and effort. The minimum sampling rates required by the Federal Highway Administration and the actual sampling rates used for the rural systems are as follows: Rural System Completed Interstate ...."}
{"id": "montanahighwayfu00mena", "title": "Montana Highway functional classification and needs study (1970-1990) : an engineering study report for the Montana State Highway Commission Planning Survey Section; in cooperation with the Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration", "year": 1971, "seq": 4, "text": "Urban Local Streets (1) Stratification of Mileage The first step in analyzing local street mileage was to stratify the existing and pro- posed mileage into design types so that applicable design standards could be applied in a consistent manner. The stratification was done by taking a random field sample of the local street mileage. The sample consisted of five percent or more of the 1990 mileage in each urbanized area and each small urban area category. Existing industrial and commer- cial mileage was measured from the Urban-In-Fact Area Land Use Maps, and the distribu- 44 tion of mileage in the industrial and commercial areas determined from the sampled mile- age was applied to the total measured (existing) industrial and commercial mileage. Resi- dential mileage was determined by subtracting the industrial and commercial mileage from the total local street mileage in each urban area, and the distribution of mileage in the residential areas determined from the sampled mileage was applied to the total exist- ing residential mileage. (2) Appraisal of Present Adequacy After the mileage had been stratified into design types, the number of miles that were presently intolerable was determined. Minimum tolerable conditions provided by the Federal Highway Administration aided in determining the streets that were intoler- able. In addition to the minimum tolerable conditions, a street could be rated as intoler- able if the pavement condition was so poor that it could not be corrected through routine maintenance. (3) Development of Construction Costs Initial construction costs were to be estimated for each design type so that the fac- tors for determining annual costs could be applied to arrive at an annual average cost per mile. These costs are categorized into: (1) base and surfacing; and (2) grade and drain. Base and surfacing costs for the local streets were estimated for each design standard at the same time as the base and surfacing costs of the classified systems."}
{"id": "montanahighwayfu00mena", "title": "Montana Highway functional classification and needs study (1970-1990) : an engineering study report for the Montana State Highway Commission Planning Survey Section; in cooperation with the Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration", "year": 1971, "seq": 5, "text": "This entailed multiplying the mileage in each design type by the corresponding annual average costs per mile. Mass Analysis Schedules MA-9 through MA-12 were provided by the Federal Highway Administration for these calculations. Mass Analysis Schedules MA-9 through MA-12 also provided for the inclusion of maintenance and administration costs, which were obtained from the Maintenance Sched- ule and the Administration Schedule described in detail under that section in this report. The total average annual costs for each urbanized area and each small urban area category were recorded on Mass Analysis Schedules MA-9 through MA-1 2. These sched- ules are shown in Appendix 'C. Rural Local Roads (1) Stratification of Mileage Stratification of local road mileage into design types was done by taking an office in- ventory sample of six randomly sampled counties (see sampling procedures and rates for the selection of the counties). The sample consisted of five percent or more of the 1990 mileage in each of the six rural sample areas. Stratification of the local road mileage also required that the mileage be broken down by cost area and terrain type, and the mass analysis forms provided by the Federal Highway Administration are arranged to accept only one terrain type in a cost area. How- ever, the cost areas were set up so that variations in terrain did not constitute a new cost area, but were analyzed as flat, rolling, or mountainous construction within a cost area. Therefore, it was necessary to prorate the local road mileage in each cost area to each ter- rain type. The method used was to examine the topography of each county, and estimate the mileage of local roads in each terrain type. Since there were two cost areas this break- down gave effectively six categories of local roads: (1) Cost Area 1\u2014 Flat; (2) Cost Area 1 -Rolling; (3) Cost Area 1 -Mountainous; (4) Cost Area 2-Flat;(5) Cost Area 2- Rolling; and (6) Cost Area 2-Mountainous."}
{"id": "montanahighwayfu00mena", "title": "Montana Highway functional classification and needs study (1970-1990) : an engineering study report for the Montana State Highway Commission Planning Survey Section; in cooperation with the Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration", "year": 1971, "seq": 6, "text": "The stratification of the total local road mileage was done by expanding the sampled mileage (broken down by design type) to the total local road mileage in each cost area. This mileage was then prorated to flat, rolling, and mountainous terrain types according to the miles in each terrain type in each cost area. 46 (2) Appraisal of Present Adequacy After tlic iiiiloagc had been stratified into design and terrain types, the number of miles which were presently intolerable was determined. Minimum tolerable conditions provided by the Federal Highway Administration aided in determining the roads that were intolerable, in addition to the minimum tolerable conditions, a road could be rated as intolerable if the pavement condition was so poor that it could not be corrected through routine maintenance. (3) Development of Construction Costs Initial construction costs were estimated for each design type so that the annual cost factors could be applied to arrive at an annual average cost per mile. These costs are cate- gorized into: (1) base and surfacing; (2) grade and drain; and (3) structure costs. Base and surfacing costs for the local roads were estimated for each design standard at the same time as the base and surfacing costs of the classified systems. Grade and drain costs were estimated from historical costs of comparable highways on the secondary system. Unit costs for structures were obtained from the State Highway Commission's Bridge Division. Costs for rights-of-way are not included because it is assumed that they have an in- definite economic life on existing facilities, and on new facilities would be supplied by the abutting landowners or land developers. (4) Determining Average Annual Costs Per Mile The initial construction costs determined in step 3 were multiplied by the appropri- ate annual cost factors to arrive at an annual average cost per mile to either reconstruct intolerable (or construct new) facilities and retain them in service, or retain in service presently tolerable facilities, for each rural local road design type."}
{"id": "montanahighwayfu00mena", "title": "Montana Highway functional classification and needs study (1970-1990) : an engineering study report for the Montana State Highway Commission Planning Survey Section; in cooperation with the Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration", "year": 1971, "seq": 7, "text": "(5) Structures There is a discrepancy in the handling of bridge structures in the rural local roads mass analysis procedure prescribed by the Federal Highway Administration. This discrep- ancy arises because there is no relation of the tolerability or intolerability of a structure to the road on which the structure occurs. In many cases in the field sample, roads were found intolerable with bridges that were tolerable, and visa-versa. However, on the mass analysis forms, there are no provisions made for the independent analysis of bridges. In- stead the bridges, both tolerable and intolerable, are tied to the tolerability of the road. The information as to the tolerability of the bridges can not be used in the analysis. The approach to this situation was to determine the feet of bridge structure per 47 mile of local road for each local road design type. The square feet of bridge structure per mile of local road was then determined according to the width of bridge required in the design standards. Then appropriate unit costs were applied to this bridge area to arrive at an initial construction cost per mile of local road for the bridge structures for each local road design type. This initial construction cost was multiplied by the appropriate annual cost factor to arrive at an average annual cost per mile to either reconstruct intolerable (or construct new) facilities and retain them in service, or retain in service presently toler- able facilities for each design type. This procedure does not allow the independent analysis of tolerable and intolerable bridges, but relates the bridges to the tolerability of the road on which it occurs. The difference in bridge costs which result froiii analyzing the bridges independently as compared to analyzing the bridges as an integral part of the local roads is shown in the following table."}
{"id": "montanahighwayfu00mena", "title": "Montana Highway functional classification and needs study (1970-1990) : an engineering study report for the Montana State Highway Commission Planning Survey Section; in cooperation with the Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration", "year": 1971, "seq": 8, "text": "Development of Maintenance Estimates The criteria for maintenance estimates is that maintenance estimates will include all phys- ical maintenance and traffic services as described in the AASHO Manual; Uniform Highway Account- ing Procedures. Betterments (minor replacement construction) are excluded from the maintenance estimates. The development of maintenance costs are complicated by the requirement of the Fed- eral Highway Administration that: 'Cost estimates should assume adequate levels of maintenance ex- penditures at 1969 prices as distinguished from actual expenditures which may reflect arbitrary budget restrictions. ' It is difficult to apply an exact definition to the term 'adequate level of maintenance', be- cause the term itself, without being qualified, is not exact. To take an example, it could mean to keep the road just passable to traffic under normal conditions, or, it could mean keeping the roadway and appurtenances in like-new condition at all times. The assumption is made, for the purposes of this Study, that existing budget restrictions do not permit maintenance levels to rise to a level that would be considered 'adequate'. Therefore, the following factors, which are considered to be reasonable and consistent, were applied to the actual maintenance expenditures to approximate an 'adequate' level of maintenance. 50 SYSTEM FACTOR Rural Federal-aid Primary 1.10 Federal-aid Secondary 1.20 Non-Federal-aid 1.30 Urban All Systems 1.20 Interstate Urban and Rural 1.20 C. Systems Other Than Interstate The development of actual maintenance expenditures per mile for the rural systems con- sisted of analyzing state and county maintenance records, and determining a per-mile maintenance cost for federal-aid primary, federal-aid secondary, and non-federal-aid systems sub stratified by pave- ment type. These figures were adjusted by applying the appropriate factor to arrive at an 'adequate' level of maintenance. The adjusted figures were then prorated through the classified systems according to the proportions of roads in each category of jurisdictional responsibility of each system."}
{"id": "montanahighwayfu00mena", "title": "Montana Highway functional classification and needs study (1970-1990) : an engineering study report for the Montana State Highway Commission Planning Survey Section; in cooperation with the Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration", "year": 1971, "seq": 9, "text": "Interstate System For the interstate system, the maintenance costs to be determined are the total main- tenance costs for the twenty-year period, 1970 to 1990, reported by rural, each urbanized area, and the three small urban area groups. Since the oldest section of four-lane interstate in Montana is about 12 years old, it was not feasible to use existing historical maintenance records without adjustment. Since the interstate is programed to receive an overlay at 13-year intervals, the decision was made to set the maintenance age of the interstate on a 13-year recurrence interval. This approach makes the assumption that the interstate maintenance cost per year after an overlay will revert back to 51 the maintenance cost per year of a new interstate. Since no interstate lias yet liad an overlay on this program, this assumption can not be validated. However, it seems a reasonable assumption to make. Maintenance expenditures per mile were then developed for four-lane interstate with ages of 1\u20143 years, 4 6 years, and 7 years and over. These costs were applied to the corresponding miles of interstate that fell in each of the three maintenance age categories, the adjustment factor to provide an 'adequate' level of maintenance applied, and a total cost for the maintenance of the four-lane in- terstate for the twenty-year period was calculated. The two-lane interstate is scheduled to be upgraded to four-lane interstate by 1976. Therefore, an average cost per mile, regardless of age, was developed based upon past expenditures for existing two-lane interstate. This cost per mile was adjusted to provide for an 'adequate' level of main- tenance, and the total amount estimated for maintenance of two-lane interstate for the period the two-lane interstate is in service. (Maintenance for four-lane interstate is estimated when the two-lane interstate is upgraded to four-lane.) An analysis showed that expenditures for maintenance items generally associated with ur- ban areas, such as lighting, beautification, and additional ramp mileage, could be prorated into the urban interstate on a per-mile basis."}
{"id": "fncomibasu", "title": "Faizulla Khodzhaev: National Communism in Bukhara and Soviet Uzbekistan, 1896-1938", "year": 1992, "seq": 0, "text": "Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 2 of Osh resulted in further casualties. Regardless of how or why these incidents occurred (and the speculation continues), it appears that all is not well in the Uzbek republic.? With a population of roughly 20 million, the Uzbek SSR is the third most popuious republic in the USSR. \u2018This, coupled with the fact that it is the central Muslim republic in the Soviet Union, means that what happens in Uzbekistan often has a direct impact on the surrounding Muslim republics and the Soviet Union as a whole. With the opening up of discussions on topics ranging from health issues to political reform, Gorbachev\u2019s glasnost\u2019 policy has indirectly abetted in the re-emergence of nationalism in Uzbekistan. Uzbeks are more willing to find fault with their system and often put the blame on the shoulders of \"Russian colonizers\" and the Soviet government. Already, political organizations are emerging that express anti- Soviet, or at least pro-Uzbek feelings in the republic. In recent discussions and protests, alternative economic and political structures have been proposed as solutions to the current problems. One such course of action has been a re- examination of its own revolutionary past. Ideas of individuals who had previously been considered non-persons by the Soviet state are being evaluated in an effort to find *William Fierman, ed., Soviet Central Asia: The Failed Transformation (Boulder: Westview Press, 1991), pp.2-3; The Washington Pos: Post, September 16, 1991:A18. Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 3 alternatives to the present political arrangement in the region. Much of the debate involves the Jadidist period in Uzbek history, as it was during this time that national- based state structures were being addressed.? Prior to the 1900s and the Jadidist period, there was no real national identification in the region currently called Soviet Uzbekistan."}
{"id": "fncomibasu", "title": "Faizulla Khodzhaev: National Communism in Bukhara and Soviet Uzbekistan, 1896-1938", "year": 1992, "seq": 1, "text": "On September 2, 1920, the Emirate of Bukhara collapsed as the Bolshevik-supported forces of the Bukharan Communist Party seized the capital. The Emir of Bukhara escaped the city and joined the growing Basmachi movement, and, in his place, Faizulla Khodzhaev assumed the leadership of the newly-created Bukhara Peoples\u2019 Soviet Republic. Barely 24 years old, this former Young Bukharan and now Communist Party member sought to create a nation based on the ideals of the Jadidist movement and shaped by the principles of the Bolshevik regime in Moscow. Eighteen years later, Khodzhaev was tried and shot for the crimes of extreme nationalism (\"Sultangalievism\") and conspiring to overthrow the Soviet government. The BPSR had ceased to exist, and, by 1938, the last remnants of the Uzbek revolutionary elite had been systematically eliminated. Jadidism was the driving ideological force behind Khodzhaev\u2019s policies and the source of his ultimate conflict with the newly-created Soviet government. Derived from the term usul-i jadid, which means \"new method or principle,\" Jadidism was a movement that initially concerned itself with educational reform, and only later branched out to address Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 13 issues of political reform. Founded upon the ideals of Ismail Bey Gasprinskii, a Crimean Tatar, this school of thought advanced a Western approach to education. Instead of strict recitation and memorization of Koranic verse, the Jadidists stressed such subjects as foreign languages, mathematics, the sciences, and literature. Their goal was not only to prepare students to work within the Russian realm (specifically in commerce), but also to loosen the religious schools\u2019 monopoly on education in Bukhara. In sum, most Jadidists felt that in order to become a successful modern nation, Bukhara would have to adopt modern ways. Traditionally, these views were expressed in numerous short-lived journals and publications, published primarily in Russian-controlled Tashkent."}
{"id": "fncomibasu", "title": "Faizulla Khodzhaev: National Communism in Bukhara and Soviet Uzbekistan, 1896-1938", "year": 1992, "seq": 2, "text": "SCarrere d\u2019Encausse writes that: \"By its xeligious fundamentalism, by its conservatism and even at times by its fanatical stance, Bukhara\u2019s ruling caste -- which was largely made up of gadimi clerics -- could think it was defending the Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 14 The push for educational reforms was only the minimum demand of the Jadidist circle. Soon, Bukharan intellectuals and businessmen such as Abdulla Khodzhaev (Faizulla\u2019s father) and Abdul Rauf Fitrat began calling for political change. The latter left for Ottoman Turkey to complete his education, where he studied the contemporary Young Turk movement.'4 His political tract written at this time, entitled Munazira, is considered to be the manifesto of the future Young Bukharans movement. In it, Fitrat expresses the belief that Islam was the cause of cultural stagnation and ignorance in the region of Turkestan.5 The Emir\u2019s despotic and corrupt government had to be overthrown. The Young Bukharan movement was formed to do just this, but members went underground or into exile due to the predominantly conservative nature of Bukharan society and the government\u2019s repressive measures. Faizulla Khodzhaev began his political career in this setting. Born in 1896 to the family of Abdulla Khodzhaev, a wealthy merchant in Bukhara, Faizulla Khodzhaev was afforded integrity of a Muslim Turkestan.\" Carrere d\u2019Encausse, Reform and Revolution, p.115. Simply put, the Jadids were seen as a foreign (Russian) imposition on existing indigenous power structures. \u201cErnest Ramsaur, Jr., The Young Turks: Prelude to the Revolution of 1908 (Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1957). \u201cBriefly, Turkestan refers to the general geographical area known as Central Asia. At this time, there existed two quasi~independent khanates, Bukhara and Khiva, that were wedged among the Russian holdings. Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 15 all the opportunities available to the growing educated class in this Muslim emirate.\u2019 In 1907, Faizulla Khodzhaev travelled to Moscow to continue his education in a Western environment."}
{"id": "fncomibasu", "title": "Faizulla Khodzhaev: National Communism in Bukhara and Soviet Uzbekistan, 1896-1938", "year": 1992, "seq": 3, "text": "Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 22 Turkmenistan, and the autonomous regions of Kirghizia, Kazakhstan, and Tadzhikistan.2! After the territorial consolidation, the Central Asian elite that had hitherto supported the Bolshevik cause and had, at the same time, received military assistance from the Red Army, now found themselves in conflict with the new central government. Many, such as the members of the former Bukharan Central Executive Committee, found refuge in the growing forces of the Basmachi rebellion. Another segment simply emigrate to the West, and left for Istanbul at the earliest possible moment.\u201d The remaining individuals, Faizulla Khodzhaev among them, opted to work out their differences with their Russian superiors on the political battlefield. During the years of 1924-38, Soviet policy focused on training a new cadre of Central Asian leaders who would be more cooperative with their own ideals. After the debacles of the BPSR experiment and the Basmachi uprising, the new Soviet leadership began a campaign of centralizing the political and economic institutions, and laid the groundwork for the inevitable incorporation of the Central Asian republics into the Soviet system. To achieve this goal, the Soviet government implemented a policy of korenizatsiia (nativization) in the For a discussion of the delimitation\u2019s significance, see Pipes, Formation. park, Bolshevism in Turkestan, and Fraser. Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 23 late 1920s and early 1930s.\u00a5% Ideally, the aim was to promote Uzbek, Tadzhik, Kazakh, and other ethnic minorities throughout the system in hopes of cultivating local elites sympathetic to the Soviet cause. In Uzbekistan, numerous key positions were filled by writers and political figures who had been at least partially supportive of the Bolsheviks, the most prominent being Khodzhaev and Akmal Ikramov, the First Secretary of the Uzbek Communist Party, in the Uzbek SSR."}
{"id": "fncomibasu", "title": "Faizulla Khodzhaev: National Communism in Bukhara and Soviet Uzbekistan, 1896-1938", "year": 1992, "seq": 4, "text": "Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 24 these measures would be successful.\u2122* Khodzhaev, for one, remained loyal to the Soviet leadership during this period, and was one of the few Bukharans to remain in office for this entire period. In 1924 he was named head of the Central Executive Committee of the Uzbek SSR, holding this position until 1937.% Within a few years, Khodzhaev had become disillusioned with the Soviet government and his support for it. On issues such as education, economic development, and religious freedom, it gradually became evident that the opinions and views of the indigenous leaders were not being considered in Moscow. As petitions and debates ensued, it was clear that a new variation of socialism was developing in Central Asia, one which was not to be looked on favorably by the Soviet regime. Driving this move was the desire to incorporate the needs and gain the support of the Uzbek peasants, as well as achieve their own national goals. Socialism, as practiced by the Bolshevik government, was simply inapplicable to the nationalist elites. Khodzhaev appears to have taken an interest in the ideals of Mir Sa\u2019id Sultangaliev, a Tatar National 4park, pp.184-90. *Khodzhaev\u2019s position as head of the government was paralleled by Akmal Ikramov\u2018s position as First Secretary of the Uzbek Communist Party (1925-1937). Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 25 Communist.** Based on the notion of fusing Marxism with nationalism, Sultangaliev\u2019s National Communism was a belief that stressed the notion of proletariat nations and political independence for ethnic groups. Marxism was thus a means to achieve national aspirations. This clearly contradicted the ideological guidelines of national self- determination set out by Lenin and modified by Stalin, and became a justification for the purging of the Central Asian elite once again in the 1930s."}
{"id": "fncomibasu", "title": "Faizulla Khodzhaev: National Communism in Bukhara and Soviet Uzbekistan, 1896-1938", "year": 1992, "seq": 5, "text": "The nationalists sought to cooperate with the rising Bolshevik movement as a Means to their own nationalist ends. For the national communists, socialism was viewed as a viable political ideology for several reasons. First of all, the Bolsheviks offered a strategy of revolutionary change. Socialism as a political movement offered a technique for mass action, specifically, strikes, protests, and boycotts. The inability to sway and influence the masses was a severe shortcoming of the intelligentsia, who sought any option to correct this deficiency. There was also the advantage in the possibility for outside support. As the nationalist elite numbered several hundred at most, assistance from the Red Army and Bolshevik Party was deemed essential in at least initiating the anticipated revolution. Finally, the possibility of *For a detailed account of Sultangaliev, see Alexandre Bennigsen and S. Enders Wimbush, Muslim National Communism in the Soviet Union (Chicago: The University of Chicago Press, 1979). Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 26 independence and national equality, which as least was given lip-service by the Bolshevik\u2019s call for \"national self- determination,\" further drew the nationalists into the socialist camp. It should be noted that the nationalist intelligentsia was not unanimously in favor of the socialist alternative. Factions within the elite emerged because of this issue, and how best employ the socialist tactics once sought. In spite of a vocal minority that firmly believed in the tenets of socialist doctrine as interpreted by the various Russian parties, most felt that socialist strategies could be adopted without fundamentally altering their own nationalist stance. In short, Stalin\u2019s ideal of \u201csocialist in content and nationalist in form\" was to be turned on its head.\u201d The Bolshevik leadership permitted such opinions in the short run as it accelerated their overall policy of territorial consolidation."}
{"id": "fncomibasu", "title": "Faizulla Khodzhaev: National Communism in Bukhara and Soviet Uzbekistan, 1896-1938", "year": 1992, "seq": 6, "text": "Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 30 The published pamphlets and books are all from the post-1924 period with a noticeable pro-Soviet slant in the writing. Two works in particular, K istorii revoliutsii v Bukhare (On the History of the Revolution in Bukhara) and \"O mlado-bukhartsakh\" (\"About the Young Bukharans\"), are detailed accounts of the events surrounding the period of the Bukharan Peoples\u2019 Soviet Republic (1920-1924). The remaining works emphasize the period after the national delimitation. In each instance, I have been able to obtain the original edition. The revisions of the 1930s editions are in and of themselves an interesting topic of discussion and will be explored later in the dissertation. As for secondary sources, I have consulted the major works anc list them in the bibliography. Suffice it to say that most focus on the process of the Soviet incorporation of Central Asia and rely heavily upon the Russian perspective. There are a few exceptions, Carrere d\u2019Encausse in particular, but the literature remains traditional in their approach, giving valuable historical information. They do not, however, explain why the nationalist movements developed, and subsequently failed, in their effort to create an autonomous nation-state in Central Asia. Outside of the very real issue of Soviet military and organizational \u201cIn my research, I have found that the 1930s re- publications are substantially \"corrected.\" Thus, I have acquired original editions of Khodzhaev\u2019s publications whenever possible. Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 31 superiority, the issues of nationalism and ethnic identification are rarely addressed. Soviet scholarship, as noted above with respect to the rehabilitation of Khodzhaev, is substantial in volume, but not very useful in a discussion of the role of indigenous leaders. These include the standard histories of the Uzbek SSR and the Communist Party of Uzbekistan."}
{"id": "fncomibasu", "title": "Faizulla Khodzhaev: National Communism in Bukhara and Soviet Uzbekistan, 1896-1938", "year": 1992, "seq": 7, "text": "This work is a revised version of a 1955 study, that places greater emphasis on the roles of indigenous leaders. Prior to this publication, works on the subject of early Soviet Central Asian history were discussions of Lenin, Stalin, Frunze and the Red Army, but never of such figures as Khodzhaev, Ikramov, or Fitrat. Indeed, of the hundreds of pages written on the subject, only a handful of references to the local figures are made, and these are simply condemnations of \"bourgeois- nationalists.\" The 1971 study, Istoriia Bukharskoi i Khorezmskoi Narodnykh Sovetskikh Respublik, has also been helpful. As with Ishanov\u2019s work, this publication of the Uzbek Academy of Sciences offers a more neutral perspective of this period. Granted, while both remain silent on the conflict between the local leaders and Moscow, there is greater discussion of the historical evolution of the BPSR, with particular focus placed on the anti-Basmachi stance of the Bukharan leadership. I have found the collection of Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 32 official documents published in 1976 entitled Istoriia Bukharskoi Narodnoi Sovetskoi Respubliki (1920-1924aq.}: sbornik dokumentov, to be useful in understanding the Soviet government\u2019s role in the development and eventual elimination of the BPSR.\u201c And finally, during the past several years, short articles about, or references to Khodzhaev have appeared in both Russian and Uzbek. These will be of particular importance for chapter eight, when I discuss the current role of the re-examination of the early Soviet past in Central Asia. With these works laying the foundation for the my inquiry into Khodzhaev\u2019s actions and policies, I plan to address the questions raised earlier in this introduction. To repeat, the basic objective of this dissertation will be to lay out a theoretical framework of emerging nationalism with special emphasis placed on the role of the elites."}
{"id": "fncomibasu", "title": "Faizulla Khodzhaev: National Communism in Bukhara and Soviet Uzbekistan, 1896-1938", "year": 1992, "seq": 8, "text": "In most case studies of modernizing nations, the elite play the primary role in transmitting nationalist ideals, and Bukhara and Uzbekistan are no exceptions. Afterwards, I will examine the issues that confronted the nationalist elite and Khodzhaev in particular. I will present these in a rough chronological sequence for the sake of organization, although it will be evident that the issues did not rise and fall in any convenient fashion. Finally, I will study the \u201ctT also list works written in the 1950s in the bibliography, but in my research, the more contemporary works remain the most useful. Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 33 impact of this period on the contemporary Uzbek political scene, especially as it relates to the developing nationalist movement today. The push for greater rehabilitation and recognition of the first generation of Uzbek leaders has been a \"battle cry\" for some of the Uzbek nationalists in recent years. In chapter two, I outline a theoretical framework within which to place the historical account of Khodzhaev. Specifically, I define and discuss the concepts of national identity and nationalism, focusing on the issue of elite- mass cooperation. I will discuss the significance of nationalist movements, addressing the actors and issues that can create conditions for a successful nationalist program. In this analysis, I focus on the Jadidist (reformist) tradition that developed among the Bukharan intelligentsia prior to the First World War, and contrast it to the emerging power of the Bolshevik party and the nationalities policy gradually formulated by Lenin and Stalin. I define and signify the importance of such terms as \"nation,\" \"nationalism,\" and \"intelligentsia.\" By laying out definitional guidelines, a framework will be set within which to place the events covered in the dissertation. Finally, I review the Marxist-Leninist perception of nationalism."}
{"id": "fncomibasu", "title": "Faizulla Khodzhaev: National Communism in Bukhara and Soviet Uzbekistan, 1896-1938", "year": 1992, "seq": 9, "text": "Then, I detail the Leninist application of these ideals to the multi-ethnic Russian state. In theory and in the policy application subsequently after the Revolution, it is clear that the Soviet regime and the Jadids of Bukhara fundamentally at odds with each other, in spite of an initial cooperative effort. The split between the local elite and the Soviet government and the resulting exacerbation of tensions are the subjects of chapters three through seven. In chapter three, I lay out the historical background of Khodzhaev\u2019s early life. The central theme of this section is to explore and define the critical features of Bukharan society that shaped Khodzhaev\u2019s formative years. Chapter four centers around the formation of the Bukharan Communist Party and the emergence of Faizulla Khodzhaev as the political leader of the Bukharan intelligentsia. At this early state (1917- 1920), divisions within the group are already forming and will be the subject of greater discussion in the subsequent chapters. In chapter five, I examine the \"Jadidist experiment\" of the Bukharan Peoples\u2019 Soviet Republic (1920-24) and the attempted creation of a Bukharan nationality. It was during these four years that the Jadids had the greatest opportunity to implement their reform measures. As will be seen, pressures from within the Republic, specifically the armed Basmachi movement and fiscal crises, and from without create an unbearable Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 35 situation for the Bukharan leadership. Khodzhaev had to deal with crises on both the domestic and foreign fronts, and never really had the chance to address any one issue fully. In chapters six and seven, I address the social/cultural, economic, and political conflicts between the local elites and the regime in Moscow during the early Soviet period (1924-38). In each area of policy formation, the clash between the national government and Communist Party in Moscow and the local leaders dictates the events of the period."}
{"id": "millsapscollegec1979mill", "title": "Millsaps College Catalog, 1978-1979", "year": 1978, "seq": 0, "text": "A supple- mentary transcript will be required after admission. Freeman applicants must submit results of either the American College Test (ACT) or Scholastic Aptitude Test (SAT) . COUNSELING PROGRAM Counseling services are designed to help students accomplish maximum success in their academic work. Many members of the college community participate in counseling, and specialists are used as referral resources when problems require specialized therapy. Pre-Registration Counseling: The College provides counseling services to any pro- spective student who wants to explore vocational and educational objectives before entering classes in the fall. Students who are admitted are urged to take advantage of this service. Orientation: Freshmen and transfer students are expected to be on campus on dates specified in the college calendar. Orientation is planned and activated cooperatively by students and faculty to help entering students prepare for campus life. Faculty Advisers: New students are assigned to faculty members who serve as academic program advisers. When a student chooses a major field, the major professor becomes the adviser. Personal Counseling: The Student Personnel Office counsels students on vocational choices, selection of fields of study, study and reading skills, emotional adjustments and related matters. Testing: Individual testing services are available to help with self-analysis and planning in terms of aptitudes, interests and personality. STUDENT HOUSING The deans of men and women coordinate campus housing in cooperation with residence hall hostesses, counselors and assistants. Men who are active members of a fraternity may live in its house. Out-of-town students must reside in college housing unless they have written permis- sion from the Office of Student Affairs to live off-campus. Applications for permission to live off-campus are in the Student Affairs Office and must be completed and approved prior to any intended move. Out-of-town students below the junior level are not permitted to live off-campus...except in special cases as defined by the deans of men and women."}
{"id": "millsapscollegec1979mill", "title": "Millsaps College Catalog, 1978-1979", "year": 1978, "seq": 1, "text": "Students who wish to live with relatives must have written permission from the Office of Student Affairs. Residence hall rooms are designed to house two students each. Students wishing to room together should make every effort to pay room deposits at the same time and to specify their desire to room together. Single rooms are limited and those desiring a single room should pay their room reservation fees as eariy as possible. Assignments are made in the order in which this fee or completed applications are received, whichever is later. Room preferences are honored unless the rooms are already taken by students who are eligible for them. Room rent cannot be refunded after the semester begins. 10 Residence halls open at 10 a.m. on the day preceding each term and close at 10 a.m. on the day following the last scheduled examination of each term. During Thanksgiving and spring holidays, the residence halls will close at 3 p.m. on the last day of scheduled classes and reopen at noon on the day preceding the resumption of classes. Students are not housed in the residence halls during Thanksgiving, Christmas or spring holidays. MEDICAL SERVICES Millsaps provides medical services for minor illnesses to those students living in the residence halls and fraternity houses. The services of a physician are available through the nurse on duty or one of the residence hostesses. Serious illnesses of those requiring long- term care are referred to a local hospital or to home on a private patient basis. The College will pay for the initial visit to the school physician, however, any addi- tional visits to the school physician or any visits to another physician or specialist is the financial responsibility of the student. Students who make their own appointments with the school physician or any other physician, except in emergencies, will accept financial responsibility of the appointment."}
{"id": "millsapscollegec1979mill", "title": "Millsaps College Catalog, 1978-1979", "year": 1978, "seq": 2, "text": "Upon approval and pay- ment of a $15 fee, the following schedule of payments will apply: 50% at registration 25% October 1 or March 1 25% November 1 or April 1 To meet the additional expenses of bookkeeping and collecting, an additional charge is imposed when accounts are not paid on the day they are due. A ten-day grace period will be allowed from the day the payment is due. At the expiration of the ten-day period, all past-due accounts will be assessed a $5 late charge. If a student on the deferred payment plan withdraws after the refund period, the un- paid balance on the account is due and payable in full. Any accounts due for any preceding semester must be paid before a student will be enrolled for the succeeding semester. The registrar is not permitted to transfer credits until all outstanding indebtedness to the College is paid. No student will graduate unless (s)he has settled all indebtedness, including library fines and the graduation fee. CASHING PERSONAL CHECKS\u2014 Personal checks for a maximum of $25 may be cashed in the Business Office and a maximum of $10 in the Bookstore upon proper iden- tification. A charge of $3 per check is made for all returned checks. REFUNDS.\u2014 Room rent cannot be refunded after the semester has begun. Unused amounts paid in advance for board are refundable. A student who withdraws with good reason from a course or courses within one week after the date of the first meeting of classes on regular schedule will be entitled to a refund of 80% of tuition and fees; within two weeks, 60% ; within three weeks, 40% , and within four weeks, 20% . If a student re- mains in college as long as four weeks, no refund will be made except for board. The date of withdrawal from which all claims to reductions and refunds will be re- ferred is the date on which the registrar is officially notified by the student of the intention to withdraw."}
{"id": "millsapscollegec1979mill", "title": "Millsaps College Catalog, 1978-1979", "year": 1978, "seq": 3, "text": "Stimulation and coordination of campus religious life are the functions of the Com- mittee on Religious Activities, the Chaplain, and the Chaplain's Committee of the College Senate.\" The office of the Chaplain attempts to maintain direct contact with student religious groups to encourage and support their activities, and to provide religious and personal counseling both to individuals and to groups. Both the Religious Activities Com- mittee and the Chaplain's Committee, consisting of faculty and student members, attempt to determine the religious needs of the college community and to provide special pro- grams and emphases as required. Student religious groups vary widely and have become less formal. Students desiring the more structural type of young adult programs are encouraged to affiliate with established activities in local churches of their choice. Some campus groups are organized along denominational lines, while others have a more ecumenical orientation and attempt to provide discussion, study, activities, and projects which will appeal to all students, whether or not they are affiliated with a specific church. The office of the chaplain reflects a desire for the religious life on the campus to in- volve an organized concern for the total needs of the Millsaps community. Persons and committees related to this office plan for concerns that are narrowly religious in nature as well as those that represent efforts to minister to personal needs of individuals. The Fellowship, an organization of persons preparing for professional Christian voca- tions, attempts to create programs and field work appropriate to the needs of student members. PUBLIC EVENTS COMMITTEE The Public Events Committee receives funds from the student government to spon- sor programs of general interest to the campus and community. Its major activity is the Fri- day Forum Series\u2014 a continuing slate of speakers presented each Friday during the academic year."}
{"id": "millsapscollegec1979mill", "title": "Millsaps College Catalog, 1978-1979", "year": 1978, "seq": 4, "text": "Competitive sports conducted in an atmosphere of good sportsmanship and fair play can make a significant contribution to the complete physical, emotional, moral, and men- tal development of the well-rounded individual. They are thus an integral part of a pro- gram of liberal education. An attempt is made to provide a sports-for-all program and to encourage as many students as possible to participate. Intercollegiate The program for men includes football, basketball, baseball, and tennis. Soccer is played on a club basis. The women's program includes basketball and tennis. The programs are conducted on guidelines established by the National Collegiate Athletic Association and the Association of Intercollegiate Athletics for Women of which Millsaps College is a member. Those who participate in intercollegiate athletics are required to observe and maintain the same academic standards as other students. Intramural The program for men provides competition among campus organizations in basket- ball, volleyball, softball, tennis, track, soccer, and golf. Rules are made and administered by the Intramural Council, composed of student representatives with the intramural direc- tor as an ex-officio member. The program for women is administered by The Women's Intramural Council, whose student members head the teams that compete in such sports as touch football, badmin- ton, volleyball, tennis, basketball, and softball. Election to the Majorette Club provides recognition for athletic participation. PUBLICATIONS The Purple and White is the official student newspaper of the College, and its staff is composed of individuals interested in campus journalism. The P&W endeavors to pro- vide coverage of all Millsaps events, as well as to serve as a forum for discussion and ex- ploration of ideas. Now in its seventy-second year, the Bobashela is the annual student publication of Millsaps College, attempting to give a comprehensive view of campus life. \"Bobashela\" is an Indian name for good friend."}
{"id": "millsapscollegec1979mill", "title": "Millsaps College Catalog, 1978-1979", "year": 1978, "seq": 5, "text": "The Judicial Council is composed of three ex-officio advisors and seven appointed members. The Dean of Men, the Dean of Women, and the Dean of the Faculty act in a non- voting advisory function. Seven voting student members in addition to three alternate members are nominated by a special committee of the Student Senate and are confirmed by the Student Senate, with a view to appropriate balance in regard to race, sex, and place of residence. No member of the Student Senate or the College Senate may be a voting member of the Judicial Council. Council members serve a term of one year. They are appointed before September 15. The Millsaps Judicial Council has jurisdiction over all student disciplinary cases except when an individual's eligibility to continue as a student is put into question because of academic or medical difficulties. Its decisions shall be appealable to the President of the College. 26 Honor Societies Alpha Epsilon Delta is an honorary pre-medical fraternity, founded at the University of Alabama in 1926. Leadership, scholarship, expertness, character, and personality are the qualities by which students are judged for membership. Alpha Epsilon Delta strives to bridge the gap between pre-medical and medical schools. Alpha Psi Omega, a national honorary dramatic fraternity, recognizes members of the Millsaps Players for their effective participation in acting, directing, make-up, stage management, costuming, lighting, or publicity. Each year the name of the outstanding graduating senior member of the organization is engraved on a trophy which is kept in the college trophy case. Beta Beta Beta, established at Millsaps in 1968, is a national honor fraternity for students in the biological sciences. Its purposes are to stimulate sound scholarship, to pro- mote the dissemination of scientific truth, and to encourage investigation of the life sciences. Monthly meetings are held to discuss new ideas, research, and other material pertinent to biology and related sciences."}
{"id": "millsapscollegec1979mill", "title": "Millsaps College Catalog, 1978-1979", "year": 1978, "seq": 6, "text": "Gamma Gamma is a Greek leadership honorary established at Millsaps College in 1965. Its purpose is to recognize and to encourage meritorious service to the Greek system and to the College. Kappa Delta Epsilon, a professional education sorority, promotes the cause of education by fostering high scholastic standing and professional ideas among those preparing for the teaching profession. Kit Kat is a literary fraternity with a selected membership of men students and faculty members who have literary ambition and ability. Programs consist of original papers read by the members and criticized by the group. Medical Technology Club, organized in 1975 within the Department of Biology, brings together students interested in careers in medical technology, promotes career ob- jectives, stimulates interest, disseminates ideas, coordinates educational planning, and assists in the preparation for admission to clinical training. The programs of the monthly meetings are designed to assist club members in the pursuance of their educational goals. Tours of clinical laboratories and conferences with educational supervisors of schools of medical technology are included. Omicron Delta Kappa is a leadership society with chapters in principal colleges and universities. Pi Circle at Millsaps brings together members of the student body and faculty interested in campus activities, together with a limited number of alumni and supporters who plan for the betterment of the College. Membership in Omicron Delta Kappa is a distinct honor. Pi Delta Phi is a national French honor society which recognizes attainment and scholarship in the study of the French language and literature. Its purpose is to honor 27 those students having earned a minimum of 18 semester hours in French, and who have a high scholastic average in all subjects. Honorary members are chosen from among the faculty, alumni, and townspeople who have a special interest in the activities of this organization. Psi Delta Chi is a local honorary recognizing both interest and ability in the social sciences."}
{"id": "millsapscollegec1979mill", "title": "Millsaps College Catalog, 1978-1979", "year": 1978, "seq": 7, "text": "To be eligible for initiation, a student must have earned in his most recent semester of residence as many as 24 quality points, and in the same semester as many as 12 semester hours of academic credit, and must not have fallen below D in more than one subject. 2. A student who drops a course after the end of the half semester shall receive an F for sorority or fraternity purposes as well as for academic averages. 3. The two terms of summer school combined shall count as one semester for sorority or fraternity purposes. ACTIVITY GROUPS Deutscher Verein was founded to provide an organization for the informal study of various aspects of German and Austrian cultural life. At Christmas the annual \"Weih- nachsfest\" is a campus tradition. The Millsaps Black Students Association is designed to stimulate and improve the social and academic atmosphere for black students at Millsaps College. The Millsaps Circle K Club is a service organization jointly sponsored by the College administration and the Capital City Kiwanis Club. With membership open upon petition to all interested and qualified male students, Circle K is active both on the campus and in the community. Various service projects promote cultural, social, and individual enrich- ment, as well as the development of responsible leadership. MEDALS AND PRIZES The Albert Godfrey Sanders Award in French is given to a student in intermediate French on the basis of academic excellence in the language and for general interest and contributions in the dissemination of French culture and civilization. The award is in- tended to encourage students on the intermediate level to continue their studies in the field of French literature, and it carries with its honor a certificate of excellence and a handsome volume, devoted to some aspect of French culture, donated by the Cultural Services of the French Embassy in New York."}
{"id": "millsapscollegec1979mill", "title": "Millsaps College Catalog, 1978-1979", "year": 1978, "seq": 8, "text": "Majors: In addition to taking the prescribed work for the degree, the student rriust major in one of the following areas: Art, Biology, Chemistry, Economics, Accounting, Administra- tion, Education, English, Finance, Geology, German, History, Mathematics, Music, Philosophy, Physics, Political Science, Psychology, Religion, Romance Languages, Theatre, Sociology and Anthropology. Specific requirements for the major can be found under the appropriate department of instruction. Students may be permitted to major in a subject only after careful consideration and with the consent of the head of the department. A major for each student must be approved by one of the department heads not later than the beginning of the junior year. Three cards will be signed by the major professor to show approval of the choice of a major; and these cards will be kept on file, two in the Registrar's Office, and one with the major professor. No junior or senior registration will be accepted as complete by the Registrar's Office without the signed approval of the major professor. 10. Comprehensive Examinations: Before receiving a bachelor's degree the student must pass a satisfactory comprehen- sive examination in his major field of study. This examination is given in the senior year and is intended to cover subject matter greater in scope than a single course or series of 36 courses. The purpose of the comprehensive examination is to coordinate the class work with independent reading and thinking in such a way as to relate the knowledge acquired and give the student a general understanding of the field which could not be acquired from individual courses. The comprehensive examination requires at least three hours and is part written and part oral, the division of time between the two to be at the discretion of the members of the department concerned. The oral examination will be conducted by a committee com- posed of members of the department, and, if desired by the department, one or more members of the faculty from other departments or other qualified persons."}
{"id": "millsapscollegec1979mill", "title": "Millsaps College Catalog, 1978-1979", "year": 1978, "seq": 9, "text": "The object is to provide a direct contact with the work of governmental departments and other national and international agencies that are located in Washington, thus acquainting the students with possible careers in public service and im- parting a knowledge of government in action. Under this arrangement qualified students of demonstrated capacity from the par- ticipating colleges will spend a semester at the School of Government and Public Ad- ministration of The American University in Washington. They may earn fifteen hours toward graduation in their home colleges. Six hours of credit are earned in a Conference Seminar, in which high-ranking leaders of politics and government meet with students. Three hours of credit are earned in a Research Course which entails the writing of a paper by utilizing the resources available only at the nation's capital. The remainder of a student's course load constitutes electives which are taken from the normal offerings of American University. In Washington the program is coordinated by faculty members of The American University. Millsaps will ordinarily send two students in each spring semester. These will be either juniors or first semester seniors and will be selected by a faculty committee in April of each year. Exceptionally well-qualified sophomores are occasionally accepted. The student technically remains an enrollee of his home college for the purpose of scholarships and loans, which are thus not affected by participation in the program. The United Nations Semester A cooperative progra'm with Drew University in Madison, New Jersey, enables Millsaps political science majors to spend a semester making a first-hand study of the work of the United Nations. Participants may earn fifteen hours of credit toward graduation. Three hours of credit are earned in a Conference Seminar, which meets two days of each week in the United Nations Plaza."}
{"id": "TheResurrectionOfTheHouse", "title": "Anthis - The Resurrection Of The House", "year": 1970, "seq": 0, "text": "It has been used to prove points on both sides of arguments, from how man got into the world, to how man leaves the world. The art of arguing a point continues today. In the recent past, one of the main questions has dealt with the involvement of the church in the world. Was the church a social action power body or was it a group concerned only with man's inner life or spirit? We have said earlier that the worship service sent its people into the world joyously, with great concern for the world. That the primitive church was concerned about the world there can be little question. But if one looks to the scriptural witness of the New Testa\u00ac ment churches to find the fiery radical approach to social issues, he will be disappointed and he will be well advised to turn the pages back to the Old Testament and the prophets. Yet the concern of the world to know that Jesus Christ is Lord and Saviour and that all men are brothers seems central to the New | Testament witness. Their type of ministry would nevertheless be more that of pastoral care or pastoral concern toward a small group. The primitive church was a small, politically powerless group of individuals \u2019i Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 37 jj who were very much alive with the great joy of a risen Lord and the li !l Si great hope of a world in which He would be forthcoming. They worshipped :| !; in this faith and set out to build a community within it. ij They had, basically, a threefold task. The first was to become ji jj a community of people. The second was to develop a style of ministry | that would carry out the ministry of their risen Lord."}
{"id": "TheResurrectionOfTheHouse", "title": "Anthis - The Resurrection Of The House", "year": 1970, "seq": 1, "text": "When honesty prevails and a group is asked their first image when the word church is mentioned, most likely the first response will be the large Gothic stone building at the comer of Elm and Main Street. Some are so tied to their building that if the build\u00ac ing were to go there would be nothing left. In one midwestem city, a large downtown church building was condemned so the congregation relocated a few blocks away in their new building. Several of the old- timers quit the church, saying, \"our old building is the church, if we can't have it, we don't have a church. The new building isn't our church.\" It is a positive sign to see the big church building boom coming to an end and to see resolutions being accepted to curtail church building in favor of money going to the needy of the world. It has amazed me that ministers are so puzzled about congrega\u00ac tions' sense of values in keeping things for themselves, when in their deeds they act in the same way. One large prestigious church minister preached a series of sermons on the \"inner-city needs\" to meet the demands of the denomination's urban crisis program. Members of the congregation subscribed a modest sum which had been asked and everyone seemed pleased that they had met the need. Shortly thereafter, an undesignated gift of $10,000 was received by the church but when a couple of alert laymen suggested the money be used for the \"inner-city crisis,\" the minister was most defensive, saying, \"We need this money to repave our parking lot (which was actually in good repair) and to put up new drapes in the sanctuary. We have already done our part in the crisis.\" The board readily accepted the minister's suggestion to Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner."}
{"id": "TheResurrectionOfTheHouse", "title": "Anthis - The Resurrection Of The House", "year": 1970, "seq": 2, "text": "Tokenism can be seen in church membership. Much like the busi- t', : ness that hires a few blacks to give a good appearance, some congrega- j tions allow one or two quiet reserved blacks as members to give the appearance of inclusiveness. ! A distinction needs to be made between social action and service I; |: projects. Many of the activities we term social action fit better ; under the title, \"service projects.\" The illustrations of the giving t; ) of baseball equipment to Watts and the summer camp for the Harlem chil- | dren would be service projects rather than social action. Service |j projects treat symptoms of diseases, while social action treats the \u2022 causes of the symptoms so that future service projects would be unneces\u00ac sary. Social action is \"preventive medicine.\" Service is generally , done for the individual or family after a tragedy; action is for the benefit of, before the tragedy occurs. j Another illustration of the difference between service projects and social action is within a congregation I served in a rural area. In three years, three families within the congregation had their homes destroyed by fire. Each time the church responded with food, clothing, furniture, etc.(service projects). Social action by the congregation s ] would have been to put pressure on the city leadership to provide \u2018 ] j better fire fighting equipment and training so when the next house caught fire, the fire department could control it before it was destroyed. ! Personal service projects are more likely to be done by a congre\u00ac gation than is social action because members derive a better personal * i i Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. j satisfaction and subjective feeling from the response of those with whom they work. | Others take pride in what they have done by the hiring of per\u00ac sonnel to do what they feel is important but would rather not do them- selves."}
{"id": "TheResurrectionOfTheHouse", "title": "Anthis - The Resurrection Of The House", "year": 1970, "seq": 3, "text": "In the remaining rural areas of our !: country, church sponsored bake sales, white elephants, and the making and selling of recipe calendars are reported under ! i Social News. j; Events like these are important socially for the church, but the j: basic motivation seems more for the benefit of the group or church than i ! |i for mankind. Again, one cannot but question the deep underlying moti- '\u25a0 vation for action, especially when it is compared to the dynamic primi- l! . tive church. I j A third institutional problem is that discussion of social prob- ii lems remains just that, discussion, and seldom moves into action. Many ? f \\ sermons lift up great idealistic theories concerning brotherhood, peace, and love but give no specific directions for action for the layman who is ready to act. Many ministers have learned that it is proper to at ! least give lip service to social issues, but safe to remain unspecific .! j in example and suggestions for action. Also it is hard to give con- \\ \\ I Crete instructions so social action stops with the great idea. ) Orlando Tibbetts lifts the problem of vague generalities up as i one of the great problems in the church today. One of the great weaknesses of the church is to talk in general about mission but not to focus the concern on specific targets. Many years ago, when an internationally famous Boston preacher was at the height of his popularity, a newspaper reporter asked a man on the street what he thought of him. The response was, \u2019Me thinks he loves everyone in general but no one in particular.\u2019 The church falls into the trap of talking about its general mission goals without zeroing in on specially desig\u00ac nated targets.^ ^Peggy Way, \"Women in the Church: Comic Strip, Society Section or Front Page?\" in Stephen Rose (ed.) Who's Kilting the Church?"}
{"id": "TheResurrectionOfTheHouse", "title": "Anthis - The Resurrection Of The House", "year": 1970, "seq": 4, "text": "Hoekendijk, The Church Inside Out (Philadelphia: West\u00ac minster Press, 1966), p. 93, quoting Martin Luther, \"Preface to the German Mass.\" Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. as an aid in education for the parish or an aid for fellowship, or an aid in worship, or as a tool for mission. If the House Church is a church in microcosm it does all of these and must be free of the parish church. I am not saying that the House Church should not have connec- tional ties with other House Churches or perhaps a denomination or even a parish, but rather it must not be a subdivision of a parish. In fact, connectional ties with others are vital if the House Church is to be effective in mission and social witness. Probably the most effective group to make ties with is other House Churches, since they too, would have the freedom to act without relying upon other responsibilities. House Church clusters could be the most effective units. Another basic problem with the strict parish tie is that for those ready to pick up the task of the church, this tie could produce barriers. When there are no denominational ties, it gives those with varied church backgrounds more freedom to be and to grow. Denomina\u00ac tional barriers are not felt, for the group is more concerned with being the \"Body of Christ,\" and in being a new community for worship and witness today than in arguing past history of differences. The most basic criticism of the House Church and one that must be dealt with here, is that the House Church has no tie to historic Christianity. Therefore House Church members may experiment without any sense of responsibility to the greater or historic church. To perpetuate historical tradition, the denominations must train | and ordain men to the leadership of House Churches as a special form Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner."}
{"id": "TheResurrectionOfTheHouse", "title": "Anthis - The Resurrection Of The House", "year": 1970, "seq": 5, "text": "Worship is not a gathering of the down\u00ac hearted of the world, but of the joyous people who know and experience authentic life\u2014people who rejoice, praising God, and celebrating the \"Good News\" concerning life. Our early meetings consisted solely of the common meal and a \"Celebration of Life\" service. The service which we used was simple. Since the service was a successor to one which some of us had used previously, it would be helpful to know how we came into existence as a House Church. In the fall of 1968, I joined the staff of a downtown Hollywood church as the associate minister. The senior minister had a denomina\u00ac tional office and was gone much of the time, leaving most of the Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. jj program planning in my hands. The Hollywood area abounds with youth Si and a few attended the \"rap\" sessions provided by the church, but none I; attended the formal worship on Sunday. a ji For several years the congregation had discussed providing a is !j midweek worship for the purpose of reaching those unable to attend i j] services on Sunday. Between this desire and a desire to reach the f) ! j youth of the area, I worked out an experimental service. | As I prepared it, I kept in mind the importance of taking the !' traditional acts of worship and setting them in a contemporary format, i l meaningful to Hollywood youth. I tried to find ways to help them ' express joy, confess sin, feel absolution, and find practical ways to j express this in the world. I used three of the four guidelines sug- \u25a0i gested by Keith Watkins, one of the most authoritative voices today in the Disciples of Christ on the subject of relevant worship."}
{"id": "TheResurrectionOfTheHouse", "title": "Anthis - The Resurrection Of The House", "year": 1970, "seq": 6, "text": "The common worship of the local congregation ties together study, service, and witness and without it those activities lose their vital meaning in understanding the faith and the common loyalty within the community. Worship points to our common loyalty in Jesus Christ, our common witness in the world, and our responsibility to each other. Worship is at the center of our understanding of the church. In true worship the community comes together to understand itself \"before the Word of God in Christ.\" The hearing of the Word is the reason that the Christian community gathers. This is the center of worship\u2014to receive and to proclaim the good Word. According to the Ecumenical Institute understanding of worship, the Word is said corporately to another and heard corporately from another. Each person is a priest as he declares the living Word to another. We can hear the Word for ourselves only, but we hear it from another, and another hears it from us. At the Institute worship is never separated from life or wit\u00ac ness. As the Word is heard, the community scatters to witness to it, each in his own way, and in his own situation. After the witness is made, the community gathers again to hear the Word. To be a Christian in the world today is to have \"decisive awareness\" of God's love which 1 the Life of the Church\" (Chicago: Ecumenical Institute). Unless otherwise noted, the basic thoughts are those of the Institute through the paper by Matthews. Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. gives one the possibility of living a life of service. The central question which must be posed concerning any worship service is, \"What is the Body of Christ doing when she gathers to wor\u00ac ship?\" Those at the Institute remind us that worship is symbolic activity, symbolizing the self-understanding of man before God."}
{"id": "TheResurrectionOfTheHouse", "title": "Anthis - The Resurrection Of The House", "year": 1970, "seq": 7, "text": "They point out that only in the last two hundred years have men been con\u00ac scious of symbols, and that their worship is an attempt to dramatize, through symbols, the God and Man encounter. Matthews observes that this understanding of worship has three implications: One is that to worship as a Christian is not to be a spectator watching a drama performed by others, such as the clergy and the choir. It is to be involved as one of the actors. The community as a whole is involved. Functions differ but the play is a unit and there are no star roles. Secondly, the Christian who goes to worship in search of 'reli\u00ac gious feelings' to be experienced or of 'religious ideas' to which he can assent has not yet grasped the meaning of common worship of God. Christian worship is the response of the total man pre\u00ac cisely because it involves the core of the self. The question put to the worshiper is not how do you feel or what do you know, but who do you choose to be in the light of God's activity in Christ? A third implication which has particular significance for the comprehension of the inner meaning of Christian worship is that the God that is worshipped and the self-understanding given in worship determine the basic structure or form of worship. . . . In Christian worship the God in Christ determines the inner struc\u00ac ture or the dramatic movement of the service.^ Matthews relies heavily on the format of Edward Hobbs, who examined John Wesley's Order for Morning Prayer.^ ^Ibid., p. 4. 1 4 i Edward C. Hobbs, \"Rehearsing the Drama of Salvation: John Wes\u00ac ley's Order for Morning Prayer,\" Motive a XVII:8 (May, 1957). The { Wesley Orders of Common Prayer (Nashville: National Methodist Student Movement, 1957). Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner."}
{"id": "TheResurrectionOfTheHouse", "title": "Anthis - The Resurrection Of The House", "year": 1970, "seq": 8, "text": "The idea follows the style !: Q : of a game in the magazine Psychology Today , called \"Black and White.\" The purpose of the game is to keep the problems of the frustrations of * being young before the group. The game is closed with a time of \u00a3 reflection upon how the members felt while playing it. I 1 Another way of coming at this would be through role playing, letting the youth be parents and the parents, youth. Again, reflec\u00ac tion is vital to the accomplishment of the task. We then move into the second lecture and workshop period. The first pedagogue lifts up the fact that some church experimenters are struggling creatively with a pioneer ministry. The teacher then builds his lecture around one form of youth 1 ministry, the coffee house. It is important to help the house church \\ to see that this is only one form, but one that has worked and needs 'i I j consideration and evaluation. j ! The reading seminar follows. Once again the church is divided \u25a0 into groups for reading concerning different types of coffee houses. ! - - ! 8 \"Black and White,\" Psychology Today, 111:10 (March, 1970), , pp. 39-53. j .'l Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 129 g We are using readings from three books: Call to Commitment , Journey Inward, Journey Outward and The Coffee House Ministry . ^ The mem\u00ac bers then discuss within their groups what they have read and have found relevant for our house church. At the close of the reading seminar is a workshop in which we pick out those aspects of the various coffee house ministries that could be used by the House Church of Los Angeles. In Hollywood, many phases of these ministries would be irrelevant, but the group will propose those aspects that could be meaningful and workable in their own locality."}
{"id": "TheResurrectionOfTheHouse", "title": "Anthis - The Resurrection Of The House", "year": 1970, "seq": 9, "text": "I \u2022# ij I 130 ! t After the conversation, we once again break into groups, brain- | storming for half of the period, and developing a specific ministry to j: Hollywood youth during the last half. This would include specific time, place, funding, and staffing. At this point a time line sketch would be built. The workshop closes with a plenary session, pulling together the i work that all the groups have done to meet, in a concrete way, the i needs of youth which we set out to consider in the morning. The ideas \u2022v ; and materials are then compiled so that the leadership and task forces may further develop them for the next workshop. Due to the depth and \u25a0 complexity of this concern, many more workshops will be held before the final project is inaugurated. ( The day closes with the Celebration of Life II service, the \u2022; proclamation being the song, \"A New Day Coming\" by Mama Cass Elliott, l | a song of hope for a community that has used a full day of its life to plan the future in behalf of all mankind. The day closes with I Alleluia! | This type of intentional, serious work and planning is of l extreme benefit to the individual and to the group as a whole. As we consider our mission we discover that as we work for others, we receive | a great lift in our own spirit journey in life. Our intention has not j been to receive this lift, but to meet the need before us; the need \u25a0 .i 1 j of those to whom society does not minister. 1 Our next step in witness is to do that which we do the most i 1 j effectively. In this project, we are beginning by having a series of ' I Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner."}
{"id": "miscellaneousfar00unit", "title": "Miscellaneous farm-related tax proposals : hearing before the Subcommittee on Energy and Agricultural Taxation of the Committee on Finance, United States Senate, One Hundred Third Congress, second session, on S. 226, S. 531, S. 545, S. 882, S. 1615, S. 1691, and S. 1814", "year": 1994, "seq": 0, "text": "I am very pleased to have the opportunity to appear before you today and meike a brief statement. I am also very pleased that the subcommittee has agreed to re- view the issue of how export trading companies, known as ETCs, are taxed. This matter is of great importance to Hercules, Inc. and several other companies. I am pleased to see that a number of my constituents, mostly from Delaware, are here today. My constitu- ents are all from Delaware. Hercules people, mostly from Delaware, are here today. They will explain the impact of the changes in the tax regulations for ETCs on their company. In addition, my col- league from Delaware, Senator Bill Roth, has been seeking to ad- dress this issue for a number of years, and can share his experi- ence and knowledge with the subcommittee. In my view, the key questions before the subcommittee are Con- gressional intent and fairness. Was the intent of Congress in the 1986 Tax Reform Act, to eliminate the favorable tax treatment for the few remaining export trading companies? And, was it fair for these changes to be made through the regulatory process without any review by Congress? It is my understanding that the 1986 Tax Reform Act intended to end the practice of some financial companies establishing off- shore mutual funds to protect them from U.S. taxation. However, when implementing the 1986 Act, the Treasury Department in 1988 established new rules for passive foreign investment compa- nies, PFICs, which also included export trading companies like Hercules and its export trading company, HINTCO. Prior to this action by the Treasury Department, whenever Con- gress had modified the law on this subject, it had always given ex- isting ETCs the option to protect or change their status. The 1988 action by Treasury essentially changed the rules in the middle of the game for Hercules and other companies without any review by Congress to determine the fairness of the change."}
{"id": "miscellaneousfar00unit", "title": "Miscellaneous farm-related tax proposals : hearing before the Subcommittee on Energy and Agricultural Taxation of the Committee on Finance, United States Senate, One Hundred Third Congress, second session, on S. 226, S. 531, S. 545, S. 882, S. 1615, S. 1691, and S. 1814", "year": 1994, "seq": 1, "text": "Farming, as we all know, is a highly capital intensive business. To the extent that the average family farmer reaps any profits at all, much of that income is directly reinvested into the farm. Rarely are there opportunities for farmers to place money aside in Individual Retirement Accounts. Instead, farmers tend to rely on the sale of their accumulated capital assets to sustain them in their retirement. All too often, however, farmers find that the lump-sum payments of capital gains taxes levied on those assets leave little room for re- tirement. S. 882 would address that problem by providing retiring farmers the opportunity to roll over the proceeds of the sale of their farms into a tax-deferred retirement account. Instead of paying a large lump sum capital gains tax at the point of sale, that income would be taxed only as it would be withdrawn fi\"om the retirement account. Such a change in method of taxation could help prevent the financial distress that many farmers now face upon retirement. Certainly another concern that is facing rursd America is the di- minishing interest in our younger generation in continuing in farm- ing. In close, this will facilitate the transition of our older farmers into a successful retirement. The Family Farm Retirement Act will also pave the way for a more graceful transition of our younger farmers toward farm ownership. While low prices and low profits in farming will continue to take their toll on our younger farmers, I believe that this will be one tool that we can use to make farming more viable for the next generation. I thank the committee for its interest in this legislation, and I welcome Mr. Harris here today to offer his testimony on behalf of this legislation. While I will not be able to stay for the hearing, I will look for- ward to reviewing the hearing record on this important matter."}
{"id": "miscellaneousfar00unit", "title": "Miscellaneous farm-related tax proposals : hearing before the Subcommittee on Energy and Agricultural Taxation of the Committee on Finance, United States Senate, One Hundred Third Congress, second session, on S. 226, S. 531, S. 545, S. 882, S. 1615, S. 1691, and S. 1814", "year": 1994, "seq": 2, "text": "Only a very few export trading corporations declined to take advan- tage of this incentive during the time period provided, and Hercu- les one of these few. In 1986, the Congress then enacted a regime designed to broadly curtail the benefits of tax deferral for certain foreign corporations that were predominately passive in nature. That is to say, most of their income derived from interest, dividends, and similar passive income. This anti-deferral regime was called the PFIC regime, which stands for the passive foreign investment company regime. This new law made few exceptions, and the application of its rules was to treat the Hercules Corporation as a PFIC, as a passive foreign investment corporation, because of the financing income it earned from financing the exports of unrelated exporters. We understand that the Hercules Corporation has made several distributions since the PFIC rules went into effect, and it now 8 seeks to have these distributions retroactively treated as tax-free distributions. The Administration's position is to oppose this proposal. Any ex- port trading company that failed to take advantage of the Congres- sional incentive provided during a specific time period cannot rea- sonably claim to have been guarsinteed the status quo in perpetu- ity. Such taxpayers must be seen to have effectively assumed the risk that the law might change to their disadvantage, and should not now be provided retroactive relief from the PFIC rules. I would also note that the proposal would treat as tax free those earnings accumulated since 1984, which, had Hercules or any other ETC in a similar line of business converted or dissolved in 1984, as encour- aged by the Congress, would have been currently taxed during the last decade. As it is, Hercules had three extra years of treatment more favor- able than other financing entities before the PFIC rules did come into effect."}
{"id": "miscellaneousfar00unit", "title": "Miscellaneous farm-related tax proposals : hearing before the Subcommittee on Energy and Agricultural Taxation of the Committee on Finance, United States Senate, One Hundred Third Congress, second session, on S. 226, S. 531, S. 545, S. 882, S. 1615, S. 1691, and S. 1814", "year": 1994, "seq": 3, "text": "The Administration opposes this proposal. The proposal would provide tax-favored treatment to farmers over other taxpayers, such as small business owners, whose situations may not be appre- ciably different. In addition, the proposal would provide a disincentive for farmers to set up traditional qualified retirement plans covering other workers in addition to themselves. The sixth proposal before the committee is S. 1615, a bill to ex- pand the existing law regarding elections to defer recognition of in- come from the sale of livestock in cases of Federally-declared drought. The bill would extend the opportunity to make these elections to sales of livestock on account of any weather-related condition, such as floods, tornadoes, or hurricanes. The Administration does not oppose this proposal, provided an acceptable revenue offset is provided. The proposal would allow the farmer to avoid the biinching of in- come due to disasters, in circumstances beyond the farmer's con- trol. It allows the taxpayers to take income into account when it would have been taken into account under the taxpayer's normal business practice. The seventh proposal before the committee is S. 1691, a bill to provide certain taxpayers with a tax credit for expenditures for the purchase of certain pollution control property, as well as for soil and conservation expenditures made for the primary purpose of complying with Federal, state or local environmental laws. 10 The Administration opposes this proposal. The Administration does not beUeve that it is appropriate to provide a tax incentive to encourage compliance with environmental laws beyond those provi- sions already in the tax law. Moreover, the proposed benefit would again be restricted to one class of taxpayers, to the exclusion of others having to comply with the same environmental laws. The eighth and final proposal before the committee is S. 1814, a bill to allow taxpayers to elect to include certain disaster pay- ments and crop insurance proceeds in income in the year of the de- struction of or damage to crops, even if the pa5rments or proceeds are received in the following year."}
{"id": "miscellaneousfar00unit", "title": "Miscellaneous farm-related tax proposals : hearing before the Subcommittee on Energy and Agricultural Taxation of the Committee on Finance, United States Senate, One Hundred Third Congress, second session, on S. 226, S. 531, S. 545, S. 882, S. 1615, S. 1691, and S. 1814", "year": 1994, "seq": 4, "text": "You and Senator Conrad have both already addressed this committee at length on this measure which provides a tax credit for pajdng for machinery, equipment, and other items that are made necessary in order to comply with Federal, state and local environmental laws. We also support S. 226, the estate tax issue dealing with cash leasing, as well as Senator Dave Durenberger's legislation, S. 531, which would increase the Federal estate tax exemption up to $1 million. Let me address also, briefly, just two or three other tax matters that are not on the program for today, but are of particular concern to our members. We have a very strong policy position in favor of the reinstate- ment of income averaging. Boom and bust cycles in agriculture are 19 nothing new, but fanners and rsinchers lost the ability, of course, to use income averaging in 1986. We believe very strongly that re- instating income averaging would help shield family farm income from threats that are being imposed by weather and by various marketing opportunities, or lack thereof. We would also like to see the full reinstatement of the invest- ment tax credit, and believe that, if it is reinstated, it should also cover used equipment and machinery. Also, we urge very strongly for Congress, in the remaining days of this session, to look at reinstating the deduction for health care costs for the self-employed at 100 percent on a permanent basis. This would mean a good deal to our members and, of course, as this committee is very well aware, the 25 percent deduction for those purposes expired at the end of 1993. So, if something is not done, there will not be an ability to utilize that deduction in any fashion for 1994. With that I will conclude my remarks. I will be happy to answer any questions or to respond to any questions in writing more fiilly for the record."}
{"id": "miscellaneousfar00unit", "title": "Miscellaneous farm-related tax proposals : hearing before the Subcommittee on Energy and Agricultural Taxation of the Committee on Finance, United States Senate, One Hundred Third Congress, second session, on S. 226, S. 531, S. 545, S. 882, S. 1615, S. 1691, and S. 1814", "year": 1994, "seq": 5, "text": "I would first like to thank you, and particularly Tom Bias and Alex Deane of your staff, for your yeoman's work in getting agreements from this Administra- tion so we could take advantage of the GATT appropriately. We hope, in the waning hours of Congress here, that you guys see fit to move the process forward. We think it is in the best interests not only of cattlemen, but of many in agriculture and other busi- nesses. So I do want to thank you for your leadership on that. I also want to thank you for holding this hearing, because there are a number of tax issues that have been debated in this Con- gress. Some have been dealt with farther down the line than oth- ers. Estate taxes, for example, have been a priority for our associa- tion for a number of years. To just give you a figure to show you why it is so important, nearly 50 percent of the cattle operations in this country have been in the same family for more than 50 years. If you go to a hundred years, it is nesirly 15 percent, so you can see that the ability to keep these operations together from gen- eration to generation is a top priority. So, along those hnes, we support both the cash leasing between heirs and the increasing of the unified credit to allow an estate to pass nontaxable from $600,000 to $1 million. We would also like to encourage you, as you proceed with your investigation of estate taxes into the next Congress, to look at ways of making of making 2032A more user-fiiendly. There are a num- ber of things that I would like to provide in a letter for the record. But, for example, if you look at areas like California and Florida, where you have a lot of pressure on urban land prices, this $750,000 reevaluation figure is just inadequate."}
{"id": "miscellaneousfar00unit", "title": "Miscellaneous farm-related tax proposals : hearing before the Subcommittee on Energy and Agricultural Taxation of the Committee on Finance, United States Senate, One Hundred Third Congress, second session, on S. 226, S. 531, S. 545, S. 882, S. 1615, S. 1691, and S. 1814", "year": 1994, "seq": 6, "text": "For brevity, the bill may be referred to as FFRA, standing for Farmers Ranch Retire- ment Account, in this presentation. FFRA reestablishes the farm assets as a farmer's retirement fund, correcting the hardships caused by the capital gains tax pro- vision of 1986, \u00a3ind the oversight or failure of the Congress to rec- ognize that the farm investment unit more than satisfies the intent and criteria for investment of funds required of the IRA concept. The bill is unique in that, in the agricultural economy, it neither advantages nor disadvantages any farm region, product or activity. It will provide great incentive for substantial long-term investment commitment to rural America, and also to the farm unit because the farmer can, without reservation, devote all assets to the farm development, keeping his retirement funds at home, not Texas S&Ls or South African gold mines. I was rather appalled by the Treasury's suggestion that we should direct our very limited capital into areas where we have no expertise, away from areas where we have much expertise. And, as we all know, the shortage of capital on the farm is very critical. The bill recognizes the need of the special tenant farming situa- tions which hold little or no real estate, but have large investments in crops, animals and machinery. To date, most long-term tax ad- vantages have been targeted to real estate holdings, not working assets. Our object here is to treat a portion of the family farm assets as a self-directed IRA, with income tax deferral, rollover and make-up privileges comparable to those granted to other taxpayers' self-di- rected IRAs. Farming is an extremely capital intensive profession/occupation. Long-term growth and success of the family farm requires all the farmer's capital resources. One dollar of a farmer's income may yield 10 cents going to the kitchen, 90 cents to the bank, to borrow another $10 for farm operations and expansions, leaving nothing to invest in IRAs."}
{"id": "miscellaneousfar00unit", "title": "Miscellaneous farm-related tax proposals : hearing before the Subcommittee on Energy and Agricultural Taxation of the Committee on Finance, United States Senate, One Hundred Third Congress, second session, on S. 226, S. 531, S. 545, S. 882, S. 1615, S. 1691, and S. 1814", "year": 1994, "seq": 7, "text": "In the 1984 Tax Act, after some 20 years of Congressionally au- thorized export sales, Congress offered existing export trade cor- porations three choices. They could continue to operate; they could remain in business and transfer their assets tax free to a foreign sales corporation; or they could exit the export sales business alto- gether and repatriate their accumulated export trade income tax free to the United States. Hercules chose option number one as the most advantageous business choice for the corporation. We believed, based on the af- firmative action of the House Ways and Means and Senate Finance Committees, as well as the full Congress, first in 1971 and then again in 1984, that Hercules would be eligible under the reauthor- ized ETC program for continued tax deferral on the HINTCO ex- port trade income. Just 2 years later, however, without consideration by a single member of Congress, or review by any appropriate committees of the Congress, and certainly without an open hearing, tax deferral for ETCs such as ours was, in the Treasury Department's view, ef- fectively halted by the 1986 Tax Act. That position is underscored by the current interpretation of the passive foreign investment company rules issued by the Treasury Department. Contrary to Mr, Richter's testimony earlier, no ETC had any rea- son to expect they were at risk if they chose to continue operating after 1984. It is my understanding that the 1986 Tax Act did not specifically address ETCs. In the last several years, we have pursued this matter in the Congress and at the Treasury. We have been advised that the 1986 provision was specifically aimed elsewhere, and not at export trade corporations. The 1986 Act's passive provision was directed at ending the de- ferral of taxes on income eeimed by passive investment entities lo- cated overseas, such as offshore mutual funds. ETCs are authorized under their own section of the Federal law, and if restrictions had been aimed at this incentive program, we believe that their existence in the 1986 Tax Act would have been specifically noted."}
{"id": "miscellaneousfar00unit", "title": "Miscellaneous farm-related tax proposals : hearing before the Subcommittee on Energy and Agricultural Taxation of the Committee on Finance, United States Senate, One Hundred Third Congress, second session, on S. 226, S. 531, S. 545, S. 882, S. 1615, S. 1691, and S. 1814", "year": 1994, "seq": 8, "text": "Presented in 1984 with a Congressionally offered option to: (1) continue as an ETC; (2) to transfer its assets tax-free to a FSC; or (3) to quit the export sales business and repatriate its export trade income tax free to the U.S., KoUmorgen chose to continue operating KAG as an ETC. Even though KoUmorgen could have repatriated all of KAG's accumulated earnings from export sales tax free by terminating its operations, KoUmorgen wanted KAG to continue in its traditional export business with the same tax consequences. Moreover, KoUmorgen had the explicit blessing of Congress to take this route. Certainly KoUmorgen believed, based on the protection of the ETC system by Congress, first in 1971, and then again in 1984, that KAG would be able to continue operating as a tax-de- ferred ETC as long as it remained in the export business. KoUmorgen continued to actively operate its ETC and was doing so on April 20, 1990 when the Chief of Staff of the Joint Tax Com- mittee publicly proposed the elimination of the ETC regime as a simplification measure. When it became likely that the ETC regime would be closed down, and that accumulation of income, even for redeployment in export trade activities, could give rise to PFIC issues, KoUmorgen was forced to reevaluate the economic utiUty of maintaining its Swiss subsidiary. As a result of this review, KoUmorgen during 1991 withdrew the accumulated export trade income from invest- ment in export assets, in order to redeploy those resources to more productive uses. Since no relief simUar to the 1984, and earUer 1971, reUef had been proposed or seemed available, KoUmorgen was required to in- clude such withdrawals in taxable income in accordance with the normal ETC provisions. This has unreasonably affected KoUmorgen and other companies testifying here, compared to all other ETCs which had the opportunity to convert tax free their export trade as- sets into a FSC, or to withdraw these assets tax free for redeploy- ment."}
{"id": "miscellaneousfar00unit", "title": "Miscellaneous farm-related tax proposals : hearing before the Subcommittee on Energy and Agricultural Taxation of the Committee on Finance, United States Senate, One Hundred Third Congress, second session, on S. 226, S. 531, S. 545, S. 882, S. 1615, S. 1691, and S. 1814", "year": 1994, "seq": 9, "text": "Gentlemen, thank you very much for your answers. The hearing record will re- main open for five legislative days for any additional comment. If there are any other remarks that any of you wish to make, and add as an addendum to what you have already said, they would be more than welcome. [Whereupon, at 3:20 p.m., the hearing was adjourned.] APPENDIX Additional Material Submitted Prepared Statement of Michael N. Castle Chairman Daschle, Senator Hatch and members of the subcommittee, I appreciate the opportunity to appear before you today. I am very pleased the subcommittee has agreed to review the issue of how export trading companies, known as ETCs, are taxed. This matter is of great importance to Hercules Incorporated and several other companies. I am glad to see a number of my constituents from Delaware here today. They will explain the imact the changes in the tax regulations for ETCS have had on their company. In addition, my coUeague from Delaware, Senator Bill Roth has been seeking to address this issue for a number of years and can share his experi- ence and knowledge with the subcommittee. In my view, the key questions before the subcommittee are congressional intent and fairness. Did Congress intend for the 1986 Tax Reform Act to eliminate the fa- vorable tax treatment for the few remaining export trading companies? And was it fair for these changes to be made through the regulatory process without any review by Congress? It is my imderstanding that the 1986 Tax Reform Act intended to end the practice of some financial companies establishing off-shore mutual funds to protect them from U.S. taxation. However, when implementing the 1986 Act, the Treasury Department, in 1988, established new rules for Passive Foreign Investment Companies (PFICS) which also included export trading companies like Hercules Compsmy, HINTCO."}
{"id": "montanaaug1979employrich", "title": "Montana employment and labor force", "year": 1979, "seq": 0, "text": "Generally, Montana experienced a 20% drop in tourism statewide. Shorter and closer to home trips have thus far accounted for this dropoff. Construction activities have also fallen off in the State. A tight money market with high interest rates has caused a slowdown in new home construction. This has left a majority of the construction in commercial building with residential construction being federal housing projects. Monies from the State Housing Authority were released recently which will help residential construction. Additional federal monies were made available to the State in the development of energy resource alternatives. Energy exploration, particularly oil and natural gas, continued strong in most areas of the State. Proposals have been made to develop an ethanol plant near Great Falls, which adds to the spectrum of Montana's energy resources. Estimates of crop harvests put 80% of the winter wheat and 10% of the spring wheat harvested. Winterkill of winter wheat and an unseasonally dry July will keep yields below average. Oats, barley, and spring wheat harvest were behind as much as two weeks in normal harvest time. The dry weather curtailed lumber harvesting operations in July as well. With several forest fires in the State and extremely dry forest conditions, many forests were closed causing layoffs of loggers and mill workers. Rehires occurred in most areas as rains swept Montana in early August. End-of-month fuel shortages are expected to be less severe than in months past. Allocations of fuel supplies to Montana were obtained that should prevent wide- spread shortage. Some spot shortages short in duration may occur in agricultural intense areas during harvest. Montana's Composite Index of six economic indicators shows improvement over the previous month. Although the Index did not reach the level it had the same month one year ago, it did have an impressive gain over the previous month."}
{"id": "montanaaug1979employrich", "title": "Montana employment and labor force", "year": 1979, "seq": 1, "text": "The jobless rate for the Billings SMSA fell to 3.1% from June's 3.2% rate and was well below last July's rate of 4.2%. These indicators of employment and unemployment point to a moderation in the economic activities of the SMSA in comparison to last year's June to July change. This moderation is explained in the reduction of tourism and tight money market for con- struction. Economic Highlights and Employment Outlook Construction highlights economic activity in the SMSA this report period. Major projects still under construction include the expansion of a large medical facility, new highrise hotel, and renovation of a former hotel into offices and restaurant. The restaurant nears completion and is expected to hire between 20 and 30 workers while offices are 3 to 4 months until completion. A building permit was issued for the construction of a $1.7 million elementary school. Still in the planning stage is a $6.4 million sports complex. Remodeling and additions to single family units well out-pace last year's January to July count. Building permits for the construction of single family units is down nearly one-third of last year's year-to-date tally. This reflects the tight money market prevalent nationwide. New business formation is another indicator of economic activity for the SMSA. This year's tally year-to-date of 519 is slightly ahead of last year's January through July count. New business formation this year is keeping pace with new businesses last year. Tourism activities continue to be affected in the SMSA. High gasoline prices ac- companied by possible end of month fuel shortages account for much of the tourism downturn. Consumer activities are also down because of the gasoline and fuel situa- tion. Isolated layoffs directly or indirectly related to fuel shortjages have been noted but not to any significant degree. End of month spot shortages may occur next month as harvest operations statewide will certainly limit fuel resources. 6."}
{"id": "mondayreport1972", "title": "GWU Monday Report", "year": 1972, "seq": 0, "text": "Public Schools, the Health and Welfare Council, Juvenile Court, Boys Clubs, the Occupational Training Center, the GW Com- munity Health Clinic, citizen environmental agencies, community development organiza- tions, D.C. Social Services, consumer protection groups, and Spanish community groups. Eighty per cent of all the agencies involved reported that the students made \"solid contributions.\" One student even landed a grant in support of his agency's program. In addition to the opportunity to participate in GW's new Service-Learning Program, juniors and seniors also may elect \"Supervised Work-Study courses\" offered in Experimen- tal Humanities. These courses will emphasize field-study projects appropriate to the arts and to the humanities. Next fall, for example, students in Experimental Humanities 101 will undertake an oral history project, whereby they will initiate recorded inter- views as a technique for studying ethnic communities, recent political campaigns, family -mate- -3- histories, the history of technology, and the status of women. Faculty from Anthro- pology, History and American Studies will be involved in the project. The Experimental Humanities section of the Service-Learning Program (SLP - Humanities 150), replaces work-study courses previously listed as Experimental Humanities 101-102. In SLP - Humanities 150, work-study assignments will be divided under four sections: Legal Services, Health Care Institutions and Programs, Educa- tion, and Drug Abuse Education. Among other courses in Experimental Humanities are two new ones developed primarily for freshmen, but open to all students: One -- The Computer and Society: the Search for New Alternatives (Fall 1972, three credit hours) -- will be team-taught by professors of Engineering, Chemistry, and Political Science. It will include orientation to computer language and the computer, small-group study of policy issues related to new computer technologies, and a continuing examination of ethical and philosophical issues implicit in the new inter- dependencies of man and machine. Class visitors and field visits will orient students to major Washington users of the computer and to important new applications of computer technology ."}
{"id": "mondayreport1972", "title": "GWU Monday Report", "year": 1972, "seq": 1, "text": "During the first semester, there are special readings and related group discussions with specialists from the faculty, from government, and from industry. Topics include the effect of different urban environments on the attitudes and actions of people; the problems faced by minorities; and the characteristics of urban government and justice. Areas of field-study include Washington's first totally planned suburb, the inner city, and historic Georgetown. In the second semester, each student identifies one or two areas of urban life in which he is deeply interested; seeks out, with faculty help, a municipal agency or community organization active in that area; and then spends six to -moAe- - 4 - eight hours each week in field involvement with that agency. -- Urban Ecology Workshop (Summer 1972, four credit hours). It explores the legal, scientific, political; and ethical aspects of specific environmental issues in the Washington area, and is offered jointly by the Office of Program Development and the Department of Education. Offered for the first time this summer will be a special institute on the prob- lems of The Washington Spanish-American Community (three credit hours). This institute will examine the populous, inner-city, Spanish-speaking community as a means of developing policy recommendations for the improvement of social services to that systematically neglected group. For the student who qualifies, there is a special climax to all of the above-- an annual Conference on Policy Studies and the Humanities, which deals with a \"public policy\" issue. In the spring of 1973, the topic will be related to urban health care, with special attention to drug abuse and control. Students from the liberal arts, the sciences, and the professions will divide into task forces, study selected aspects of the policy issue, and develop recommendations to be addressed to a panel of individuals actually making policy decisions in the area of concern."}
{"id": "mondayreport1972", "title": "GWU Monday Report", "year": 1972, "seq": 2, "text": "At its meeting on April 16, the Faculty Senate passed Resolution 70/13, which recommended that in special circumstances exceptions to this policy might be consid- ered. The Senate resolution provides that in individual cases and upon the recom- mendation of the faculty of a department, supported by a showing of its program need, a faculty .member over 65 may be recommended for reappointment for a maximum of one year in full-time service and one additional year in a half-time capacity. Resolution 70/13 has been accepted by the Provost and will constitute an amendment to the retire- ment policy stated in his memorandum of Jan. 27. GW LAUNCHES HEALTH MAINTENANCE PLAN \u2014 The George Washington University Health Plan for 5,000 prepaid subscribers within the District of Columbia was launched last Thursday in contract signing ceremonies at the District Building with GWUHP, D.C. Human Resources, and Blue Cross/Blue Shield officials participating. Inauguration of the prepaid health maintenance plan is viewed by participants as a \"partnership\" among the District government, the University, and the area's largest health insurance company. The GWUHP membership will include 2,000 Medicaid-eligible citizens of the Dis- trict and 3,000 additional subscribers who may enroll through employee groups. (con- tinued) -mofid- -4- Outpatient services will be provided in the facilities of the Community Care Center of the University Clinic. The GWU Hospital and Children's Hospital will provide inpatient care for the GWU Health Plan. Children's Hospital is the major pediatric affiliate of the University Medical Center. Primary care will be provided by the faculty members of the Division of General Medicine of GW's Department of Medicine. Specialty services will be provided by the faculty of the School of Medicine. Each primary physician heads a team of health professionals to include nurses, physicians' assistants, and student trainees. Teams are augmented by social workers, dietitians, and health care expeditors acting as advocates for the subscriber population."}
{"id": "mondayreport1972", "title": "GWU Monday Report", "year": 1972, "seq": 3, "text": "Parris, (R-Va.), who was elected from the 8th Congressional District of Virginia to the United States House of Represen- tatives; and Harriet Bernstein and Thomas S. Israel, who were both elected to the Board of Education of Montgomery County in Maryland. SPONSORED RESEARCH GUIDELINES \u2014 Members of the University Community, when in the process of preparing grant applications and in carrying out their research, are respectfully requested by the Committee on Sponsored Research, to keep the 1969 research guidelines in mind. In addition it would greatly assist the Committee's review task if the abstracts were written in nontechnical language and included not only the problem to be investigated, but the method and possible implications as well. The Committee on Sponsored Research, consisting of faculty and students, reviews all sponsored research proposals to assure conformity with the research policy of the University. The Guidelines pursuant to this policy were adopted in 1969 and may be obtained from department heads of the Office of Sponsored Research, Sixth Floor, Rice Hall. The procedure has been for Committee members to first review the ab- stracts. If there are questions about or ambiguities in the abstract, then the full proposal is reviewed. OPINION SOUGHT The Educational Policy Committee of the Faculty Senate is soliciting the views of the University Community on the desirability of continuing the publication of the Academic Forum . The University Community is asked to send any comments or suggestions to Professor Arthur Kirsch, Department of Statistics . -mom- - 2 - FLU SHOTS Inoculation will be given at no charge to faculty, students, and employees on Wednesday, November 15, in the Lower Lounge of Lisner Auditorium, from 12:30 to 4:00 p.m. The shots will not be administered to anyone with a cold or any other upper respiratory infection. Nor will it be given to those allergic to chicken feathers or chicken eggs."}
{"id": "montereynews1978unse_4", "title": "Monterey news", "year": 1978, "seq": 0, "text": "May it not be in spite of the pro- cess rather than because of it? The psychotherapist part of me is forced to do some fresh questioning as to whether there may not be more productive ways of achieving good than by the usual preoccupation with the dysfunctional. Nee Stating this from the other side of the coin, if we knew better how to work within the processes whereby good health forms within persons this might properly be the main focus of our attention. As it is, we are so busy analyzing what is going wrong we can't give the proper weight to studying how things \"go rights! We look back with wonder that blood-letting was once such a popular form of treatment In a strange way it partly worked. To be sure, it was not dealing at a deep enough level with the difficulty, but indeed people felt a certain amount of relief when their blood was let. looking back, we say it was a primitive form of treatment. Perhaps our current methods of treatment before too long will look primitive. My guess is that once health care is more soundly rooted in studying the processes that produce health, rather than the character of dysfunction, we will look back to the 1970's as quite a primitive time. At those times in which the Church has been much more focused upon sin than the wholeness that exists in God it produced a\" sin-oriented\" people. Now that govern- ment is so heavily focused upon \u201cregulating\u201d the ways in which people shall order their life together, many more people are focusing their attention on how to \"beat the system\" than upon building a truly cooperative society. Whichever way we turn we find ourselves creating whatever our attention is focused upon."}
{"id": "montereynews1978unse_4", "title": "Monterey news", "year": 1978, "seq": 1, "text": "John lives in Lex- ington, Massachusetts. He is a graduate of Keene, New Hampshire, State College. Bretta Oellig and Steve Blosser, both volunteer work\u2014 ers from the Church of the Brethren, have announcec their engagement. Bretta is staying on for a thire year as a regular staff member. Steve is house~parent at McKee House, the Farm's third residential unit. Gordon \"Skip\" Winchell is a resident of Lincoln, Massachusetts, where he met Virgil Stucker, resident director of Farrington House. at least through January. Skip has completed one year at Andover-Newton Theoligical School. to spend the summer at the Farm. North Adams State College, where he heard of Gould Farm. He plans Chester \"Chet\" Olson of Pittsfield is a graduate of He expects to stay on here The spring Variety Show was produced Thursday evening, June 8, before an en LOSS tate: audience. \"Variety\" was the word. The large cast of staff and guests Pleo piano, flute, clarinet, bassoon, banjo and guitar. : er ; ad libbed. From start to finish it was a good show, in which Sally Va ae group, as usual, played a vigorous and talented part. Adee Moke See The Historical Museum Annex will be open from 10 to 12 They sang, they pantomimed, they pp itat ORICALY on Saturday mornings and will be manned by members of the Historical Society. There are old books, samplers, fur= niture, photographs, musical instruments from the Monterey Drum and Bugle Corps, a ledger from the Langdon Store, and more. Downstairs there is a collection of old farm im- plements. Everyone is welcome. a he renin, rere een, GE #29] On May 3 the 3r do and 4th degree were conferred un five candidates and one from Umpachene Grange. The third degree was conferred by the Ladies' Degree Team, with Mary Walla The ce a8 Master and members from Monterey and Sandisfield taking part. fourth degree was conferred by regular officers, with Daniel MacW/hinnie acting as Master."}
{"id": "montanacommittee92montrich", "title": "Montana Committee for the Humanities newsletter", "year": 1982, "seq": 0, "text": "(Final figure to be identified following discussion with project director re speakers' travel.) Corona Record, Featuring Sam Windy Boy and Neva Pilgrim, sponsored by Corona. $3,341. Montana Week in Review, sponsored by Montana Week in Review Advisory Board. $10,000. The Phantom Cowboy, sponsored by The Watershed Foundation and the Student Action Center, University of Montana. $6,046. Making Peace a Reality, sponsored by the Student Action Center, University of Montana. (Final figure to be identified following discussion with project director re speakers' travel.) Jeannette Rankin: The Woman Who Voted No, sponsored by The Fine Tuning Company (Outreach phase). $4,978. Planning a Humanities Project As you may recall, our last Newsletter stressed that MCH, in spite of cuts in federal spending, still has funds for worthy humanities projects. We want you to apply for these funds. And because we hope you'll apply and we want your project to succeed, we've devoted some space here to suggestions to help you begin planning. Know the Ground Rules If you've reached the planning stage of a humanities project, you already have a topic in mind, presumably. But it may be a somewhat nebulous one that could possibly take several directions. To make our job at MCH easier and to better your chances for shaping a fundable grant proposal, you'll want to keep in mind a few basic questions. First, because the definition of \"humanities\" seems to vary a good deal, we think it wise to state here what we at MCH take the humanities to be: those branches of knowledge that deal with men and women as social and moral beings: with what it has been and is to be human, to make choices and value judgments. Does your project have a humanities focus^ Next, does your project include at least one iprofessional humanities scholar^. To get a grant from MCH, your proposal must include someone who devotes his or her professional life to the study of history, literature, philosophy, ethics, comparative religion, languages, linguistics, jurisprudence, archaeology, history and criticism of the arts, or certain aspects of the social sciences."}
{"id": "montanacommittee92montrich", "title": "Montana Committee for the Humanities newsletter", "year": 1982, "seq": 1, "text": "This person produces (Continued on Page 4) 4 Humanities Project . . . (Continued From Page 3) and coordinates publicity\u2014 public service an- nouncements for radio and TV, posters, flyers, invitations and the like. This job is critical: community interest in your project increases in direct proportion to your promotional efforts. MCH doesn't insist on enormous audiences, but the Committee does expect that everyone interested in the program is not only informed about it, but invited. Representatives from the Sponsoring and Cospon- soring Organizations promote the project within their respective groups and advise the steering committee on topics or themes, formats, scheduling and local resources. One of them may be put in charge of fund- raising; another, room arrangements for the program, or transportation and accommodations for any out-of- town guests, receptions, audio-visual equipment if needed, and so on. The Representative of your Target Audience, as the voice of the community, ensures that your program speaks to community interests, experience and capabilities. S/he can also be expected to know the best times for your program\u2014 times that don't conflict with other community activities. Involve Your Committee in the Proposal Writing The entire steering committee should read through the application materials and take part in writing the proposal. In other words, each member should write up for the committee those aspects of the project for which s/he is primarily responsible. For instance, the fiscal agent should lay out the budget, the promotion chairman should explain the promotion strategy and schedule, the humanities scholar, how the humanities will be used in the project, and so on. This will make the project a collaborative effort that people will support because it is theirs. Also as you write your proposal, seek input from people whose views may be important, but who may not have the time or commitment to be a part of the steering committee."}
{"id": "montanacommittee92montrich", "title": "Montana Committee for the Humanities newsletter", "year": 1982, "seq": 2, "text": "Proceed on an \"As-lf\" Basis Tackle your project as if it were funded \u2014 but with the clear understanding that it might not be. This will require you and your committee to pin down clear statements about the substance, form and timing of events, and the participation of presenters, panelists, etc. Allow Yourself Plenty of Lead Time We recommend that you submit a draft of your proposal at lest two weeks before the application deadline. The MCH staff will review it and make comments and suggestions based upon its experience with humanities projects. Then you can write your final draft and submit the required number of copies. Be sure to send each major presenter a copy of your proposal narrative and budget. It takes several weeks to process, review, and act on regular grant requests (less than $10,000). Once MCH approves a proposal for funding, it needs still more timei to notify applicants and to complete the preliminary paperwork before funds can be released. If and when you as grantee receive MCH funds, your steering committee should spend at least four weeks promoting the program to ensure a good audience. Plan, then, on about 90 days between your application deadline and the date of your first public program. Keep in Touch Please call the MCH office if you have any suggestions. The staff will be glad to help you. Also, all 19 MCH members are eager to help you in any way they can, so feel welcome to contact any of them. The MCH application form lists their names. Help is Available MCH field humanists are available to assist you in planning a project. Just write the MCH office requesting such assistance. NEH Makes Media Catalog Available If you're a teacher, librarian, museum coordinator or community group leader looking for exciting humanities programs, you can send for a free copy of NEH's new MediaLog."}
{"id": "weba-00853", "title": "Cyberthon Documentation Proposal", "year": 1990, "seq": 0, "text": "Beckman) To: Point Foundation The interest in virtual reality is now high, and the timing seems right for a show like the one that could be produced from the footage taken at Cyberthon. In fact, time is of the essence in producing this show, since there are other groups also producing virtual reality documentaries. We also want to have some kind of plan in time for announcement in the next Whole Earth Review, since it will have other Cyberthe ated content. This plan could include not only <Videotape documentary, put ancneracive > deod aS well -- the content is perfectly suited for such a treatment. We feel that there is a potential here for a very exciting product that we could produce in partnership with you. The first thing to clarify is exactly what goals we each have for the project. 1.Who Wants What from a Cyberthon Documentary? The Point Foundation would benefit in a number of ways fram a well-produced Cyberthon documentary. Perhaps mo importantly, it would get a videotape that (it could sell) directly to Whole Earth readers or others interested in what went on at Cyberthon. It could also benefit from an interactive videodisc and the attendant publicity from releasing it, which would further the reputation for innovation to which the Whole Earth Catalog CD-ROM contributed. Finally, the interest level is high enough in such a documentary that some return over and above operating expenses is possible, in which case Point could benefit financially from the project. We ar\u00e9 eager to work on this project not only because of our professional interest in the subject material, but because of an interest in the interactive opportunities that such material provides, There is also an opportunity to do a radio piece on - e DEC a3 798 @3: 38 Cyberthon. Naturally, we are also interested in the possibility this offers for getting paid. 2."}
{"id": "weba-00853", "title": "Cyberthon Documentation Proposal", "year": 1990, "seq": 1, "text": "How will the documentary be produced? We've split the production of the documentary into phases in order to proceed in the most economical way possible. a. Stage 1 : Initial Organization and Volunteer Logging The goal of the first stage of production has been to catalog the raw 66 hours of tape which were shot at Cyberthon. This will give us an idea of what kind of documentary we can produce, and will provide a list of available material for other producers that might be interested in the footage. Our first step was to copy all of the footage to VHS tape, and spread these tapes around to volunteer loggers (including ourselves). We will collect the logging sheets from these volunteers and compile them into a master log. Also, there is some off-format copying to be done on donated Art Institute equipment, and initial contacts to be made to possible producers for the show. All told, the costs for this phase of the project will be approximately $700 for equipment rentals and tapes (already paid by Whole Earth); and $3000 for our labor (which has been done on spec -- to be paid by whatever producer we find). Deliv ablo\u2014 We should point out that we started calculating our \u201con spec\u201d was tA prope? *|time only after the completion of Cyberthon -- that is, at the beginning of this initial phase -- and that we are not including our own volunteer time spent logging tapes. Also, it\u2019s important to remember that the logs we\u2019re currently getting from volunteers will be very useful for constructing a general list of what footage is available to show to potential funders. They may be less useful for the actual editing process, where more precise locations are required. b. Stage 2: Preparing a Rough Copy of the Tape for Sales Purposes This stage involves taking the logged tapes down to a \u201cselects\u201d reel of no more thafi four hours in length."}
{"id": "weba-00853", "title": "Cyberthon Documentation Proposal", "year": 1990, "seq": 2, "text": "An added advantage to Point in committing to minimal funding for this stage is that the end product -- a very-rough-cut version of the show -- is a step closer to what is needed to market a tape directly through the magazine. . Stage 3: Actual Production of the Documentary (and interactive) Our rough estimate is that the production of a quality 1-hour show will cost somewhere around $40,000. Our final budget will be determined after talking to potential producers and assessing their desires. This price could change depending on tox the production level desired, content of the program (for AS vs 20 \\4net 40,009 30Ce \\4 | instance, is it about VR in general or just Cyberthon?) and whether the show is 30 minutes or an hour. \" Additionally, we estimate that the extra cost for producing an interactive project will be approximately $20,000 above the cost of producing the video alone. This cost covers extra post-production for the videodisc and software costs. This figure will vary even more han the previous one, since the interactive software can be extremely complex or very simple. 4. What is the Agreement between Point and the Doc Squad? As we envision this project, the Doc Squad will be the primary agent for producing both a videotape documentary and an interactive program about Cyberthon. This includes coordinating logging, editing, providing post-production, obtaining or shooting additional footage where necessary, selling footage to interested parties, and arranging distribution (except for direct tape sales by Point, and wherever distribution is handed off to a third producer -- &.g., Pioneer for the disc). Point Foundation will provide the original Cyberthon footage and perhaps some small amount of bee Wo \u201cSU Wyi4l rate startup funding. We propose that all funding for the project be channelled through Point Foundation, in order to take advantage of non-profit status."}
{"id": "minutes1987arts", "title": "Minutes", "year": 1983, "seq": 0, "text": "Theilen, at the request of Commissioner Paterson, reported that the Mission Cultural Center's Memorandum of Understanding compliance meeting will be held at the Arts Commission Offices - 3rd-floor conference room at 9:00 a.m. on January 8th. She stated also that work is in motion to have a prepared contract, rather than a MOU, ready by July 1987, for all Cultural Centers. Music Committee Report - Vernon Alley, Chair Commissioner Alley reported that the Committee is ahead of schedule on programming for the 1987 POPS concerts. Director Isaacs reported that discussion and consideration is being given for the possibility of inviting a community music organization as a prelude to opening night concert or as an intermission program. Commissioner Alley reported that ideas are being considered to replace the annual champagne cork-popping contest, for another type activity to precede the opening night concert. Arts Festival Committee Report - Jo Hanson, Chair Assistant Director Michael Bell reported that the final figures for the 1986 Arts Festival reflect that the deficit is $2,100; this is the lowest deficit so far. The Commission applauded the news. Director Isaacs reported that plans are proceeding on the young people's component of the 1987 Arts Festival and that candidates are being considered for coordination of this component of the Festival; she requested the Commission's authorization to i=et aside $9,000 of the Hotel Tax Fund's allocation for this position. She reported 'also that she is having considerations relative to the Festival being held the same weekend as the Golden Gate Bridge Celebration and she invited comments and suggestions from the Commission. Other considerations are being given to the location of the chldren's art festival being held indoors in Brooks Hall/Civic Auditorium versus Civic Center Plaza. Anne Marie Theilen stated that the School Superintendent would like the exhibit and festival to be indoors. Commissioner Warburg stated that Moscone Center and the Palace of Fine Arts should be investigated as alternate spaces for the Festival."}
{"id": "minutes1987arts", "title": "Minutes", "year": 1983, "seq": 1, "text": "PRESIDENT'S REPORT Excused: William Paterson 18) George Rockrise Peter Rodriguez Roselyne Swig Ex-Of f icio Mayor Feinstein Edward Bransten Eugene Friend Alexandra Phillips Toby Rosenblatt President Nemerovski reported to the Commission that El Paso Natural Gas Company will, again, underwrite the POPS Concerts with a gift of $50,000 and funds for the opening night party. She added that she will write a grant application to Burlington Northern Foundation, as she did last year. Burlington Northern is the funding agent for El Paso Natural Gas Company. Additionally, she reported that she has met with Mark Gallon for arrangements and that Ida Brown would administer arrangements for the pre-concert party and that there will also be a meeting with Dennis Rumsey, POPS Consultant, to streamline the ticket distribution for the party. The Commission applauded the announcement. The President announced also that Mr. Don Portman of the Portman Hotel , planned for San Francisco, is greatly interested in the arts and has agreed to hold the hotel's only opening benefit for the Arts Commission in support of publication of A Guide to the Public Art in San Francisco. The costs and staff support of publicizing this booklet for the Arts Commission will be provided by Amidei and Company of San Francisco. Commissioner Alley moved approval of the Resolution and it was seconded by Commissioner Warburg. RESOLUTION NO. 22-87-131: In Appreciation of Portman Hotel Company \"RESOLVED, That this Commission does hereby thank the Portman Hotel Company for making the arts in San Francisco a priority of their operation here.\" The motion was carried Unanimously. Minutes -2- ARTS COMMISSION 2 February 1987 PRESIDENT'S REPORT (cont'd.) In conclusion of her report, President Nemerovski requested that each Committee Chair have prepared for the March Commission Meeting, one objective to achieve the Committee's goal that was presented at the December, 1986 Arts Commission Meeting."}
{"id": "minutes1987arts", "title": "Minutes", "year": 1983, "seq": 2, "text": "F22-87-160: Authorization to Transfer $3,200 from the Public Art Fund to the Friends of the Arts RESOLVED, That this Commission does hereby authorize transfer of $3,200 from the Public Art Fund to the Friends of the San Francisco Arts Commission for payment of refinishing of the floors and the drapery cleaning at the Bayview Opera House. Relative to the State/Local Partnership Program's request to the Committee for authorization for the F 0 A to fundraise for that program, Commissioner Duncan stated that it was apparent that the Commission needed to have a roundtable meeting to discuss development policy for the Commission, very soon. He reported that the Committee had put over their approval for the State/Local's request, not to be punitive , but to have put before the whole Commission the subject for discussion andih fairness to the other programs of the Commission. A breakdown of expenses of the State/Local Program's request for $5,000 and the $11,700 shortfall that is expected, was distributed to the Commission. President Nemerovski reported that the Commissionknew, last year, when it applied for the Level I funding that the amount would decrease and that the match would be required and the Commission approved and supported the grant application. She stated also that a long-term commitment plan had not been made and that decisions were made from year to year and she stated that consideration had to be made for the $5,000 request from the State/Local Program. Director Isaacs reported that the $5,000 request was independent of the funds required for the CAC match of funds and that she felt that this request was essential, and that she supported it. President Nemerovski called for a motion to approve the request of funds from the Public Art Fund. Commissioner Duncan Moved the approval of the request; it was seconded by Commissioner Metwally and unanimously adopted: RESOLUTION NO."}
{"id": "minutes1987arts", "title": "Minutes", "year": 1983, "seq": 3, "text": "Forbes distributed pre-released copies of the Economic Impact Report for the Commissioners' perusal. She requested that these reports be returned for further correction and inclusion of the final chapter. Relative to the decision at last month's meeting to give a draft to the Mayor's Offfice and President of the Board of Supervisor's, President Nemerovski reported that she had received a request from Chamber of Commerce not to distribute the report prior to their press release for the report. She stated that the Chamber has developed a public relations strategy and had been planning for months on the release of the report and they feared if the information contained in the report were made public prior to their release it would dilute the effectiveness of the report. Discussion ensued and Commissioners Hanson and Swig stated their considerations about with- holding the report from the Mayor's office and the President of the Board. President Nemerovski stated thac she would call the President of the Board and the Mayor's office and explain the need for confident- iality and tell them the date of the Chamber of Commerce press conference for the report. Statewide Local Arts Agencies Relative to the local arts agencies, Ms. Forbes reported that there is movement afoot to form a statewide local arts agency and that she and Director Isaacs had attended a meeting in January regarding these plans and that another is planned in Contra Costa County on March 6th. She invited Commissioners to attend, also. California State Summer School for the Arts Commissioner Swig reported that she had recently been appointed a trustee of a newly-formed summer school for the arts that will be funded by the state and private sector, 50% each. She stated that the student body of this summer school will comprise of 600 highschool students with out- standing talentand that the campus would float from year to year - this year in Valencia, California."}
{"id": "minutes1987arts", "title": "Minutes", "year": 1983, "seq": 4, "text": "Director Isaacs stated she would be going and invited Commissioners to attend also. The workshop costs $20, payable at the door. AAM Conference Director Isaacs reported that the conference ended quite splendidly and the Arts Commission had a high profile there; members of the staff volunteered time to work, in return for the opportunity to attend lectures. There had been, she continued reporting, fine sessions on retreats, trustees, and staff personnel that was presented by the Fine Arts Museums and the Asian Art Museum. The Director passed around a copy of \"The Guide to Bay Area Museums\" that the Arts Commission had provided funds for, from the Public Art Fund. She stated that as soon as another funder is located, reprints will be published. Commissioner Rodriguez requested that if a reprinting of the Guide is done, a map indicating where the museums ' locations are, would be helpful to tourists. NALAA Conference - Portland Oregon Director Isaacs reported to the Commission about her recent trip to Portland Oregon to attend the National Association of Local Arts Agencies Conference. She reported that Portland has an excellent public art program and sculpture. She reported also that she had opportunity, while there, to visit the open studio of artist, Larry Kirkland who has been commissioned by the Arts Commission for a sculpture for the Airport. She stated she witnessed the sculpture in progress. Director Isaacs reported on the conference and stated that within the NALAA organi- zation, sub groups had been formed such as the California Assembly of Local Arts Agencies, and a group of government art agency representives and the U.S. Urban Arts Federation had their genesis in the NALAA. The Director reported that the Urban Arts representatives had met with NEA's Frank Hodsel. Questions addressed to Mr. Hodsel, stated the Director, relative to affirmative action and civil rights were not satisfactorily answered and questions had been put in writing for presentation at the open meeting and a resolution in support of civil rights was presented to the NALAA members."}
{"id": "minutes1987arts", "title": "Minutes", "year": 1983, "seq": 5, "text": "Forbes reported that national and state issues were reported on in the local Arts Issues paper because the paper developed when there were congressional candidates. The idea now, she stated, is to reverse the order and have local issues first. Street-Artists Program Committee Report - Jo Hanson, Chair Commissioner Hanson stated that there was no report. Director Isaacs interjected that she had attended the Board of Permit Appeals hearing and that Board had upheld the Commission's finding to revoke Mr. Quiarte's street license certificate for violations of the street artists rules and regulations. Visual Arts Committee Report - Robert LaRocca, Chair Commissioner Hanson reported that an advisory board meeting had been convened to review the proposal of various art conservators and recommended selection of Anne Rosenthal to do the restoration work. A complaint had been made to the Human Rights Commission that the Arts Commission had not followed procedures. The Visual Arts Commission voted to rescind the previouswork, convening another group of advisors and begin the process again. Another advisory committee was formed of qualified art conservators and they, again, read all the proposals from the conservators who wanted to do this project and again selected the same people. Commissioner Hanson then moved that the authorization to enter into contract be approved; the resolutions were seconded by Commissioner Alley and unanimously approved. M i n u t -8- 3 August 1987 ARTS COMMISSION Visual Arts Committee Report (cont'd.) Resolution No. 83-87-352; Authorization to Enter Into Contarct - Anne Rosenthal Resolved, That this Commission does hereby authorize the Director of Cultural Affairs to enter into contract with Anne Rosenthal for conservation of the Lucien Labaudt murals at the Beach Chalet for the amount of $62,000. Resolution No. 83-87-353: Authorization t Enter Into Contract - Genevieve Baird Resolved, That this Commission does hereby jauthorize the Director of of Cultural Affairs to enter into contract with Genevieve Baird for conservation of the mosaic and woodwork at the Beach Chalet in the amount of $25,500."}
{"id": "minutes1987arts", "title": "Minutes", "year": 1983, "seq": 6, "text": "A Study in Urban Form.\" He stated the document was a companion piece to the needs study which was referred to in a recent news article about the Mayor's State of the City statement, relative to space needed for the Civic Center. He reported that the AIA and the Planning Deprtment had compiled this study in urban form and that he would like to present it to the Civic Design Committee for review, and ultimate adoption by the Commission. President Nemerovski affirmed the request and thanked Commissioner Rockrise. MINUTES -5- ARTS COMMISSION 5 October 1987 COMMITTEE REPORTS Neighborhood Arts Program Committee Report - William Paterson, Chair Commissioner Rockrise reported that he had been invited to a meeting between the DPW Bureau of Architecture and representatives of Rosekranz & Broder Architects, to define responsibilities for renovation of the cultural centers between the supervising architects (City architects) and the executive architects (private architects contracted) . Commissioner Rockrise reported that he had recommended both entities write a joint scope of responsi- bilities for each standard and/or specific project that would be presented to the Civic Design Committee for approval. He stated that the Bureau of Architecture would like to have some written authority to work with the Arts Commission on these renovations. The Bureau of Architecture would then report to the Committee and standards would be set for how the renovation projects would be managed. He stated that Mr. Russ Abel (DPW/Bureau of Architecture) would be the project architect, and would report to the Civic Design Committee on the status of each construction and/or renovtion project of the cultural centers. Director Isaacs stated her appreciation, to Commissioner Rockrise on behalf of the staff, for his taking active and detailed interest and bringing about clarification of this situation that had existed for many years. In conclusion of his report, Commissioner Rockrise requested that NAP Director, Anne-Marie Theilen, attend the Civic Design Committee Meetings when Mr."}
{"id": "minutes1987arts", "title": "Minutes", "year": 1983, "seq": 7, "text": "Continuing, the Director also reported that her concerns about the rejection were because the CAO had not only denied the proposal because the sounds might have been intrusive to the City Hall workplace, but that he had judged the artistic aesthetics and had stated in a telephone conversation that further pursuit of the proposal might jepro- dize future proposals. The Director requested input/direction from the Commission. Lengthy discussion ensued and in conclusion Commissioner LaRocca enjoined the Director to obtain, from the CAO, clarification of procedures and guidelines for future proposals; it was the concensus of the Commission in that the CAO had stated one reason was the possibility of intrusive sounds on the workplace, that the Director should not further pursue the issue. In conclusion, and in reply to Commissioner Eichelbaum's query, the Gallery Director, Ms. Meissner reported that the artist, Bill Fontana had proposed an alternative project for the outdoor Gallery space. Civic Design Review Committee Report - George Rockrise, Chair Market Street Improvement Program Commissioner Rockrise reported that it is within the perogrative of the Arts Commission to approve or disapprove proposals for the Market Street Improvement Program relative to detail and quality of the workmanship. He reported on the Committee's activities and the subsequent events that had taken place. Commissioner LaRocca stated that he had been interviewed by Channel 4 television and that he had stated that the Market Street cross walk had been torn up because the work and materials used had been inferior and that, had the Commission approved the work, it would have been a remission of duty and a further waste. The City would be saving approximately $300,000 per year that is currently expended for replacement and maintenance of the brick sidewalks by laying the proposed sandblasted concrete with small, agregate chips and granite set in the concrete."}
{"id": "mineralexplorati1976botz", "title": "Mineral exploration adit, Johns-Manville Sales Corporation, West Fork Stillwater River, Sweet Grass County, Montana : preliminary environmental review", "year": 1976, "seq": 0, "text": "Elk previously moved between Horseman Flats and the Picket Pin area during most of the winter. In late spring (April and May), a portion of the herd moved to the steep east-facing slopes of Horseman Flats above the Stillwater River. After the 1974 hunting season, most of the herd was on the Picket Pin portion of the winter range, where it stayed until late January 1975, then moved to Horseman Flats. It remained on the flats for only three or four days and then appeared on the slopes above the Stillwater River and used this area for the remainder of the winter. Elk definitely avoided the Horseman Flats area in 1974-75 -- the first year Johns-Manville kept the road open all winter.\" \"Some observers suggested that heavier snow packs in 1974-75 caused this shift in the elk winter range patterns. However, the snow was not excessive and domestic horses wintered on the flats without supplemental feed. In fact, the shift in elk use was probably due to a combination of traffic on the road and deeper than normal snow. Elk used the timbered slopes above the road for bedding and, particularly during periods of heavy snow, crossed the road and ventured out onto the open flats for feeding. Road traffic disrupted -6- this pattern and probably caused elk to move elsewhere. This is supported by the fact that in June -- when snow was no longer a factor -- few elk used the flats. They remained above the road for both feeding and bedding.\" \"Horseman Flats is also an important elk calving ground and researchers found that fewer elk calved here in 1975 than in 1974.\" \"The adit also affected elk migration to the summer range. The 1974 information indicated the West Fork of the Stillwater River was a major migration route, with about 57% of the winter herd using this route."}
{"id": "mineralexplorati1976botz", "title": "Mineral exploration adit, Johns-Manville Sales Corporation, West Fork Stillwater River, Sweet Grass County, Montana : preliminary environmental review", "year": 1976, "seq": 1, "text": "The presence of naturally \"toxic\" groundwater is not unique, but is rare. General geochemistry and climatic conditions associated with the Stillwter Complex are basically not conducive to formation of toxic waters. Water encountered in the adit will be monitored using bioassays before release to the groundwater system. The technique of drilling test holes in advance of the adit face will allow testing of waters before they are encountered by the adit. Water zones containing toxic waters can be grouted and sealed off from the adit before the adit is advanced into the water-bearing zone. The probability of encountering toxic waters is very low, but the contingency of a water-tight seal for the mine would prevent damage to the river if no other water control or treatment is possible. Compliance with discharge permit conditions and available water control and testing technology will avoid adverse impacts of toxic waters. AQUATIC LIFE AND HABITATS The West Fork of the Stillwater River is a high quality mountain stream characterized by steep gradients and a bottom composed of rubble and boulders. As the West Fork approaches the Stillwater River, the character of the stream is changed to some extent by a decreased gradient and the entry of Castle Creek which is a large, warm tributary that enters the West Fork approximately three miles upstream from the mouth. Hydrologic characteristics of the West Fork of the Stillwater (described in a previous section) is that of a high mountain stream with a short period of high flow during the spring runoff period and a relatively stable base flow during the remainder of the year. Only three fish species are present in the West Fork. These are rainbow trout, brown trout, and mountain whitefish. Whitefish are found in small numbers only in the lower five or six miles of the West Fork, and they apparently do not reproduce to any extent in the West Fork."}
{"id": "mineralexplorati1976botz", "title": "Mineral exploration adit, Johns-Manville Sales Corporation, West Fork Stillwater River, Sweet Grass County, Montana : preliminary environmental review", "year": 1976, "seq": 2, "text": "Brown trout occur in the West Fork from the mouth to a point approximately one-half mile below the adit. The Brown trout standing crop is moderately high downstream of Castle Creek, and decreases upstream. -13- Brown trout spawn in shallow areas in November with eggs hatching the following spring. The fry leave the gravel environment and move into shallow, slow pools at the stream margins. The older fish utilize faster waters and are especially dependent on undercut banks, deep pools, and pockets behind boulders. Growth rates are moderate downstream of Castle Creek and slow at upstream locations. Rainbow trout are present in the West Fork from the mouth to at least several miles upstream from the adit. Near the adit and upstream for at least five miles, it is the only fish species present. The standing crop is moderately high in the lower few miles of the West Fork and decreases upstream. Growth rates are moderate below Castle Creek and quite slow at upstream locations, where fish reach total lengths of only two inches after the first summer's growth. At least four to five years are required to produce a fish of 10 inches total length. Rainbow spawn in spring, hatch in July, and swim actively later in the summer. Both brown and rainbow trout species are sedentary in the West Fork and they do not appear to move any great distances. Stream bottom communities are dominated by aquatic insect nymphs and larvae. The orders Plecoptera (stoneflies) , Tricoptera (caddis flies) and Ephemeroptera (mayflies) are the most abundant organisms. Small aquatic annelid worms also are present in significant numbers. These worms are increasingly abundant in a downstream direction. Aquatic insects present are largely fast water organisms living on undersides and margins of gravel, rubble, and boulders. The orders Plecoptera, Tricoptera and Ephemeroptera are considered clean water forms and they are sensitive to most pollutants."}
{"id": "mineralexplorati1976botz", "title": "Mineral exploration adit, Johns-Manville Sales Corporation, West Fork Stillwater River, Sweet Grass County, Montana : preliminary environmental review", "year": 1976, "seq": 3, "text": "Acute toxicity of ammonia to fish and aquatic insects can occur at levels as low as 0.2 to 0.3 mg/1. Concentrations of some metals can be dangerous to fish at levels as low as a few micrograms per liter (ug/1) . Even small additions of these substances to the West Fork could cause acute or chronic toxicity problems. Addition of nutrients to the West Fork of the Stillwater probably would not result in a problem of toxicity; however, additional nutrients may alter the abundance and composition of aquatic organisms in the stream. No measurable impact is expected on stream organisms, including fish, if the J-M discharge meets Water Quality Bureau permit conditions. -14- GEOLOGY AND SOILS The Stillwater Complex contains one of the world's richest collec- tions of minerals - chrome, copper, nickel, platinum, palladium, silver, gold and iron. Geologically, the area is a Precambrian layered basic and ultrabasic complex (2.7 to 3.2 billion years old), according to information from the Johns -Manville Corporation. The complex is exposed along the northeast front of the Beartooth Mountains, and dips steeply to the north and strikes east-southeast for a length of 28 miles and a width of 4.5 miles. It is bordered on the south by a large highland area of ancient Precambrian metasediments (3.2 billion years old) and a young intrusion of granite (1.55 billion years old) . The northern contact of the complex is covered unconf ormably by Cambrian sediments which completely mask the upper sequences of the complex. The effects of repeated tectonic movements are shown by multiple cross faulting toward basal section, while later Laramide mountain building has given rise to considerable uplift, with associated strike and thrust faulting. In terms of soils, the Forest Service has classified soil near the adit as being in the Rock Outcrop Ecosystem. The adit is at the base of a massive rock outcrop."}
{"id": "mineralexplorati1976botz", "title": "Mineral exploration adit, Johns-Manville Sales Corporation, West Fork Stillwater River, Sweet Grass County, Montana : preliminary environmental review", "year": 1976, "seq": 4, "text": "The case is on appeal to the Ninth Circuit Court of Appeals. Judge Battin's opinion described why it is not possible to prepare an environmental impact statement during the exploratory states of develop- ment. Based on this case and in examination of facts in the present J-M situation, there appears to be insufficient legal grounds to require the preparation of an EIS. Impacts of the additional 3,000 feet of adit exploration on the physical environment and on the human environment is described and sum- marized in Sections III and IV. Although the continuation of the adit does have an impact on both the physical and human environment, it is the opinion of the Water Quality Bureau, that the impact does not con- stitute a significant impact. It can be argued that the entire exploration activity of the Johns- Manville Sales Corporation on the West Fork of the Stillwater River does have a significant impact on the physical and/or human environment. This PER, however, addresses only additional impacts created by additional exploration activity at the adit. The impact of the initial adit develop- ment, although of significant interest, is not the focus of this PER and impacts from this initial development have already occurred. Onlv impacts that will be caused by the additional development are under consideration in this statement. This constraint in the scope of this PER is an important factor in consideration of the need for an EIS. Based on the impact on the physical environment, the impact on the human environment and in consideration of the rules of the State, it is the opinion of the Water Quality Bureau that an EIS is not needed for the additional exploration activity planned by the Johns -Manvi 1 le Sales Corporation on the West Fork of the Stillwater River. -23- VII."}
{"id": "monetarypolicyr00poligoog", "title": "The Monetary Policy Reform Act of 1991 : hearing before the Subcommittee on International Finance and Monetary Policy of the Committee on Banking, Housing, and Urban Affairs, United States Senate, One Hundred Second Congress, first session, on S. 1611 ... November 13, 1991", "year": 1992, "seq": 0, "text": "The committee will come to order. Chairman Riegle is on the floor. We're dealing with a motion to proceed to the banking bill. He had very much wanted to be here to open this hearing, but hopefully, he'll be able to join us later in the morning. The Senate Banking C!ommittee meets today to discuss S. 1611, the Monetary Policy Reform Act of 1991, which would vest full re- sponsibility for the conduct of monetary policy with the Federal Reserve's Board of Governors. The bill is based on a fundamental tenet of democracy \u2014 ^those who make public policy must be ac- countable to the people. The Federal Reserve is both the most important actor in the Na- tion's banking sjrstem and the Government agency in charge of monetary policy. It consists of a seven member Boarid of Governors in Washington and 12 regional Federal Reserve banks. Within that sjrstem, the Federal Open Market C!ommittee is the most important policy making group. It sets the targets for money supply growth and interest rates, decisions which affect the eco- nomic well-being of all Americans and decisions which should pro- mote the Nation's broad economic goals. The Federal Open Market C!ommittee consists of the seven mem- bers of the Federal Reserve Board of Governors and five of the 12 regional bank presidents. The president of the New York Fed alwajrs has a vote; the other four have votes on a rotating basis. All of the bank presidents may attend and, as I understand, they usu- ally do attend the FOMC meetings and participate in the discus- sions. The seven Governors of the Federal Reserve are appointed by the President and confirmed by the Senate. They are publicly account- able for their conduct in office. The bank presidents, on the other hand, are selected by the board of directors of the regional banks."}
{"id": "monetarypolicyr00poligoog", "title": "The Monetary Policy Reform Act of 1991 : hearing before the Subcommittee on International Finance and Monetary Policy of the Committee on Banking, Housing, and Urban Affairs, United States Senate, One Hundred Second Congress, first session, on S. 1611 ... November 13, 1991", "year": 1992, "seq": 1, "text": "Government and has no parallel cunong central banking systems in other major industrialized na- tions. Many Governments agencies use private citizens as advisers, but in no other agency are megor policy decisions made directly by indi- viduals who are not publicly accountable. A recent study for the Joint Economic Committee on central bank-government relations in other major industrialized countries found that in every megor OECD country, those who govern the central bank and set monetary policy are nominated or appointed by public officials. In Germany, for example, the President appoints the members of the Bundesbank Directorate, while the upper house of Parliament appoints the 11 Central bank presidents. Tne directors of the Bank of Canada are appointed by the Finance Minister. The voting mem- Digitized by Google bers of the Policy Board of the Bank of Japan are appointed by the Cabinet with the consent of the Diet. In Switzerland, members of the governing board are appointed by the Federal Council. The study, Central Bank-Government Relations in Msgor OECD Coun- tries, was prepared for the Joint Economic Committee by Professor John B. Goodman of Harvard Business School. The bank presidents have voting rights on the FOMC as the result of a political compromise made in the 1930's. Marriner Eccles, President Roosevelt's choice as Federal Reserve Chairman, sought some fundamental changes in the conduct of monetary policy, among them that the Federal Reserve Board should have complete control of all open-market operations. At the time, the district banks had that power, and Eccles suggested that their \"narrow banking rather than broad social point of view'' contribut- ed to the Great Depression. Eccles prevailed on some of the changes, but not all. Open market operations were to be decided by O^n Market Committee, on which the Board of Governors would share power with the re- gional bank presidents."}
{"id": "monetarypolicyr00poligoog", "title": "The Monetary Policy Reform Act of 1991 : hearing before the Subcommittee on International Finance and Monetary Policy of the Committee on Banking, Housing, and Urban Affairs, United States Senate, One Hundred Second Congress, first session, on S. 1611 ... November 13, 1991", "year": 1992, "seq": 2, "text": "Chairman, I would first like to thank you for calling today's hearing. I commend your continuing efforts to direct the committee's attention towards the important economic issues that affect our country. This guidance is extremely important as we are continuing to experience a State of economic decline. In my State, and throughout the Nation, Americans are anxious about the economy. Most are unsure about the security of their jobs, while many have no jobs at all. There is a growing despair as millions of American families worry about making ends meet. These are difficult times for much of America, and these difficult times demand immediate, yet prudent responses. The country is overburdened with debt, arid the overwhelming dimensions of the deficit make an economic recovery increasingly more difficult. Clearly we are experiencing economically criticcd times. We must use every tool at our Government's dispc^al to dig ourselves out of this hole. One such Governmental tool, used to affect our economy, is the regulation of the money supply by the Federal Reserve. Through their actions, important changes and modifications can help stabi- lize the economy and steer it in the right direction. It is exceeding- ly important, therefore, to see that this sjrstem functions appropri- ately. The hearing today examines S. 1611, which would alter the role of the presidents of the individual Federal Reserve banks. These 12 presidents participate in monetary policy decisions VIA member- ship in the Federal Open Market Committee, where they cast 5 of the 12 votes that determine monetary policy and interest rates. Consequently these individuals, who are not appointed by the President, nor confirmed by the Senate, hold critical responsibility for our economic well being. I look forward to hearing from the Digitized by Google witnesses assembled here today r^arding the role of these 12 bank presidents and their influence on monetcuy policy."}
{"id": "monetarypolicyr00poligoog", "title": "The Monetary Policy Reform Act of 1991 : hearing before the Subcommittee on International Finance and Monetary Policy of the Committee on Banking, Housing, and Urban Affairs, United States Senate, One Hundred Second Congress, first session, on S. 1611 ... November 13, 1991", "year": 1992, "seq": 3, "text": "It only makes two changes in present law. It dissolves the Federal Open Market Committee, as- signs sole responsibility for open market operations to the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System. That's the first change. The second change is that it establishes a new Federal Open Market Advisory Committee through which the presidents of the 12 r^onal Federal Reserve banks can advise the Board of Gover- nors on open market operations and monetary policy. Digitized by Google 10 The whole point of this is simply to make the Federal Reserve properly accountable to the American people. The impetus for it comes from the history that you have mentioned a moment ago. It grew out of reports earlier this year that proposals by the Federal Reserve Beard Chairman, Alan Greenspan, to lower interest rates were being resisted by some of the regional Federal Reserve bank presidents who serve on the Federal Open Market C!ommittee. Those reports were for many of us disturbing reports. It indicat- ed the Fed was moving too slowly at a time when the economy was in some difficulty, in recession, moving too slowly to take the nec- essary steps to lower interest rates. But what strikes me most of all is that in a democratic Govern- ment, it really is not unusual for policy makers to disagree. But this was not in this instance a split among public officials. Instead, it was a split between, on the one hand, a small handful of individuals, presidents of Federal Reserve banks, who essentially represent private interests. They were impeding the efforts by public officials to conduct monetary policy in the way that they thought was best for the Nation's economy. As youVe said, the status of the Federal Reserve Bank presidents and the Federal Reserve system is an anomaly in our Government."}
{"id": "monetarypolicyr00poligoog", "title": "The Monetary Policy Reform Act of 1991 : hearing before the Subcommittee on International Finance and Monetary Policy of the Committee on Banking, Housing, and Urban Affairs, United States Senate, One Hundred Second Congress, first session, on S. 1611 ... November 13, 1991", "year": 1992, "seq": 4, "text": "But nowhere other than the Federal Reserve, so far as I've been able to deter- mine, are private interests permitted to have a vote on Govern* ment policy. So that's the concern that we have in bringing this bill forward. Now there was a day when perhaps it didn^ make all that much difference. Bank presidents on the FOMC did not cause the kind of Digitized by Google 11 concern that they're generating today because the Federal Reserve did not exercise all that much influence over our economy, or at least not as much influence as it does today. I think all of the economists that are testifying now before the Joint Economic Committee, and Fm sure other committees of Con- gress, are saying that the economic action in this town today is at the Fed, not in the Congress and not with the President. So today, then, it is very well known that the Fed is the chief way in which the Government influences the economy. I m impressed in my own constituency that people are now asking a lot of questions about the Federal Reserve and Federal Reserve policies. It makes a lot of difference today how the Fed is structiu-ed. Perhaps it didn't make all that much difference some years ago. Policy making is the function of public officials, who have either been elected by the people or appointed in the appropriate manner. Tliat's the way it is everywhere else in Government. That's the way it ought to be in the Federal Reserve System at all. The Monetary Policy Reform Act addresses this concern by as- signing the conduct of monetary policy and the open market oper- ations to the seven member Board of Governors of the Federal Re- serve System, and that lodges responsibility among appointed public officials."}
{"id": "monetarypolicyr00poligoog", "title": "The Monetary Policy Reform Act of 1991 : hearing before the Subcommittee on International Finance and Monetary Policy of the Committee on Banking, Housing, and Urban Affairs, United States Senate, One Hundred Second Congress, first session, on S. 1611 ... November 13, 1991", "year": 1992, "seq": 5, "text": "Simultaneously, Senator Saibanes and Senator Sasser ~ both Members of this Committee ~ introduced it hi the Senate, vdiere it has been assigned the number S. 1611. The Monetary Policy Reform Act would make two changes in the structure of the Federal Reserve. First, it would dissolve the Federal Open Market Committee and assign sole responsibility for open market operations to the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System. Second, it would establish a new Federal Open Market Advisory Committee through which the presidents of the 12 regional Federal Reserve Banks could advise the Board of Governors on open market operations and monetary policy. Together, diese changes woukl make the Federal Reserve propeiiy accountable to the American people. While the need for change has long been recognized, the inq>etus for this legislation grew out of reports earlier this year that proposals by Federal Reserve Board Chairman Alan Greenspan to lower interest rates were being resisted by some of the regional Federal Reserve Bank presidents serving on the Federal Open Market Committee. These were disturbing reports. The nation's economy was in a recession. Output was falling and unemployment was rising. There was widespread agreement that the economy could be helped by lower interest rates and that the Fed should reduce interest rates. Yet, as a consequence of this split among the policy-makers on the Federal Open Market Committee, the Fed moved slowly - some think too slo^^ - to take the necessary steps to lower interest rates and stimulate the economy. In a democratic government, it is not unusual for policy-makers to disagree. But this was not simply a split among public officials. Instead, a small handful of individuals - presidents of the Federal Reserve Banks - who essentially represent private interests was impeding efforts by public officials to conduct monetary policy in the way they thought was best for the nation's economy."}
{"id": "monetarypolicyr00poligoog", "title": "The Monetary Policy Reform Act of 1991 : hearing before the Subcommittee on International Finance and Monetary Policy of the Committee on Banking, Housing, and Urban Affairs, United States Senate, One Hundred Second Congress, first session, on S. 1611 ... November 13, 1991", "year": 1992, "seq": 6, "text": "Hie status of the Federal Reserve Bank presidents in the Federal Reserve System is an anomaly in our system of govermnent. It requires some explanation. The Federal Reserve System was created by Congress in 1913 to manage the nationfs financial Digitized by Google 13 affoiis. It consists of the Board of Governors in Washington, which oversees the system and sets most of the policies, and the twelve regional Federal Reserve Banks, which cany out the day-by-day functions of the system. The Board of Governors has seven mexnbers, who are appointed by the President and confirmed by the Senate to 14-year terms. The Governors of the Federal Reserve are thus du]y\u00abppointed government officials who are accountable to the President and Congress, and throu^ them to the American people, for their conduct in office. At the Federal Reserve Banks, the top officials, in contrast, do not go throu^ the normal appointment process. The Federal Reserve Bank presideiits owe their jobs to the Boards of Directors of the regional Banks, subject to the approval of the Board of Governors. These regional Boards of Directors are dominated by local commercial banks, who appoint six of the nine directors. Neither the President nor Congress has any role in selecting either the directors or the presidents of the Federal Reserve Banks. Some of the Bank presidents are career employees, others have backgrounds in banking, business and academics; they are talented and respected individuals. But none are properly-appointed government officials, and they are not accountable to the American people for their performance in office. Nonetheless, they participate in monetary policy decisions througjh their membership on the FOMC, where they cast five of the twelve votes that determine monetary policy and interest rates. This situation, in which private individuals participate in monetary polky decisions, is an anomaly in our system of democratic government."}
{"id": "monetarypolicyr00poligoog", "title": "The Monetary Policy Reform Act of 1991 : hearing before the Subcommittee on International Finance and Monetary Policy of the Committee on Banking, Housing, and Urban Affairs, United States Senate, One Hundred Second Congress, first session, on S. 1611 ... November 13, 1991", "year": 1992, "seq": 7, "text": "The participation of private members on the FOMC cannot be easily reconciled with the focus on accotmtability underiying our system of separated powers.... The proposed bills would rectify that constitutional flaw by limiting the role of the private bank presidents to advice, a function fully compatible with the private status of the bank presidents. The ctorent structure of tiie Federal Reserve, and the Federal Open Market Committee in particular, is not locked in stone. Over the years, there have been many changes. In fact, between the founding of the Federal Reserve System in 1913 and the enactment of the major banking laws in 1935 and 1936, there was no Federal Open Market Committee to guide open market operations. The regional Federal Reserve Banks boug^ and sold Treastiry securities on their own initiative, and the process frequentiy proved disruptive to Treasury financing plans and to the economy. When Marriner Ecdes became Chairman of the Federal Reserve Board under President Roosevelt, his list of proposals to make the Federal Reserve more accountable included giving the Board of Governors full authority over open market operations. The current structure is the result of a compromise. In order to consolidate open market operations under the nevdy-created Federal Open Market Committee, Ecdes and Roosevdt had to conqxromise with supporters of the Banks by giving the regional Federal Reserve Banks five of the 12 votes on the FOMC. It is now time to move further and take the next step to make the Federal Reserve more accountable. During the eariy decades of the Federal Reserve, anomalies such as the role of the Bank presidents on the FOMC did not cause the concern they do today because the Federal Reserve did not exercise the influence over our economy that it does today. Not much was known about the Fed years ago and people didn't feel it had much impact on their lives."}
{"id": "monetarypolicyr00poligoog", "title": "The Monetary Policy Reform Act of 1991 : hearing before the Subcommittee on International Finance and Monetary Policy of the Committee on Banking, Housing, and Urban Affairs, United States Senate, One Hundred Second Congress, first session, on S. 1611 ... November 13, 1991", "year": 1992, "seq": 8, "text": "Government The Fed would submit its budget for the current year and the two following years to the President by October 16 of each year, and the President would be required to print the Fed's budget in the Government Budget without change. The Monetary Policy Reform Act would add a sixth change to this list, by making the duly-appointed public officials on the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve solely responsible for the conduct of monetary policy. During the last Congress, the Subcommittee on Domestic Monetary Policy of the House Committee on Banking, Finance, and Urban Af6Birs conducted a hearing on the Federal Reserve Reform Act, and I would like to submit my statement from that hearing for the hearing record. In summary, the status of the Federal Reserve Bank presidents is an anomaly in our system of government. They do not go througjh the ncnmal appointment process but, nonetheless, they participate in monetary policy dedsioDS through their membership on the FOMC, where they cast five of the twdve votes that determine monetary policy and interest rates. In earlier times, when the Fed was less powerful, this was not a major concern. But today, it is widely recognized that the Federal Reserve is the chief way the government influences the economy. Decisions made by policy-makers at the Federal Reserve affect the lives and well-being of all Americans. Power vdthout accountability does not fit the American system of democracy. We have changed the Federal Reserve in the past. It is now time to move further and take the next step to make the Federal Reserve more accountable. Monetary policy today must be the responsibility of properfy-^qypointed public officials, who are accountable to the American people for thek perframance m office. The Monetary Policy Reform Act of 1991 would apply this principle of democracy to the Federal Reserve."}
{"id": "monetarypolicyr00poligoog", "title": "The Monetary Policy Reform Act of 1991 : hearing before the Subcommittee on International Finance and Monetary Policy of the Committee on Banking, Housing, and Urban Affairs, United States Senate, One Hundred Second Congress, first session, on S. 1611 ... November 13, 1991", "year": 1992, "seq": 9, "text": "Senator Sarbanes, thank you very much. You and my colleague, Congressman Hamilton, have covered this subject in some detail and I think with great clarity. In an act of mercy, I shall be very brief, and Fm going to be brief because I can probably add very little to the two excellent state- ments. The recession that we now experience follows on the heels of a decade of almost dangerous and reckless fiscal policy, such that we don't have much capability in fiscal policy to respond the way Con- gress would have traditionally responded to recessions. The result is that monetcury policy has to bear the burden and carry much of the load. And as a result of that, most all of the spotlights are now shining on the same spot in this town with re- spect to what is being done to try to respond to the recession. That spot that the spotlights are shhiing on is the Federal Re- serve. The Fed is the center of attention at this moment. This is, it seems to me, an appropriate time to be discussing the Fed because of that. If you read economic history and financial his- tory in this country, you discover that in the last century, the sub- ject of money, interest rates, and related policies were widely dis- cussed as political topics in barber shops and bars all across this country. In this century, we've not seen much of that, largely because we created early in this century the Federal Reserve Board, which has grown to become an institution shrouded in some mystery, operat- ing in some secrecy. I think a lot of people don't quite understand how monetary policy works or how, if they chose to, they could impact or affect monetary policy. For that reason, I think this kind of a discussion is an appropri- ate discussion at the appropriate time."}
{"id": "monmouthcoll197475monm", "title": "Monmouth College Catalog", "year": 1974, "seq": 0, "text": "Yet day by Jay . . . with each new experience and challenge . . . :jreat changes seem to come over your life Wing college years. Each day as it comes, seems ittle different than the one before. But look Dack just a few weeks, and already your perspective seems to have become broader, your outlook nore real, your expectations more sure. There are so many ways to grow and learn st Monmouth College. By doing something fou might never have dared to undertake before . . . because it is expected of you. By strongly nteracting with and reacting to others . . . because ton feel sure of your beliefs. By achieving far Detter in your studies . . . because your professor took the time to help you become aware Df the broad scope of what you're learning. You'll find study at Monmouth College has all the marks of a quality liberal arts education. Even nore, you'll find learning for everyday living \u2014 in education which prepares you to approach any jecision-making situation with thoughtful creativity and strength. You will be educated with skills :o help you achieve your professional goals and /vith understanding to insure a meaningful creative life. experiencing Life on any campus has a unique quality all its own. The personal touch reigns high among Monmouth's students. They find it in the classroom, together in living centers, in student activities and organizations, in associations with their instructors, in their everyday lives on campus and in the Monmouth community. Monmouth students, all part of this close-knit community, come from 32 states and 7 foreign countries. They have a variety of economic and sociological backgrounds with a variety of interests and goals, but they are all interested in personalized education \u2014 a Monmouth characteristic. Recognizing that college students are mature, young adults and individuals, student life is developed around an aura of realism and responsibility."}
{"id": "monmouthcoll197475monm", "title": "Monmouth College Catalog", "year": 1974, "seq": 1, "text": "Their experience and expertise are for your benefit. Each Monmouth professor takes a deep personal interest in the subject he or she is teaching, and in the students in the class. The Largest freshman classes average 30 students; upper division seminars may have only three or four students. The educational process is an active, informal, personal experience. Each department at Monmouth College has a wide number of courses from which to choose to complete your specific major. In addition, you will be taking two or three courses from all other divisions \u2014 providing the broad liberal arts background you are seeking. At Monmouth, we feel this part of your education is very important. Sure, it's important to prepare for a career through your major. It's equally important that you are prepared to adapt your knowledge and your talents to the changing needs and demands that will crop up throughout your lifetime. achieving The traditional departmental major typically consists of no less than eight term courses in one topical area, Spanish, for example. At Monmouth College, juniors and seniors are allowed a broad scope of independent study projects and special seminars with the topic determined by the students and the instructor. The divisional major combines a minimum of 12 term courses from one division. A divisional major in the natural sciences, for example, might include eight courses in biology, chemistry and physics for a broader look at the sciences. A topical major is almost unique to Monmouth College. You may have a particu.ar interest, urban ecology, for example, which does not fit any of the traditional major possibilities. You and your advisor would design a program of courses especially for you which might include sociology, statistics, economics, biology and chemistry courses. You would then complete the requirements of your special program as you would for any other major."}
{"id": "monmouthcoll197475monm", "title": "Monmouth College Catalog", "year": 1974, "seq": 2, "text": "Students are encouraged to make commitments, define goals, and develop competences to enable them to choose wisely and to take initiative in directing their own and their society's destiny. At Monmouth, one purpose of education is to help each man experience more fully, live more broadly, perceive more keenly and feel more deeply in order to gain self-fulfillment and widsom to see that his own fulfillment is intricately involved with the general welfare. Diversity and individuality, both in the student body and the academic program, are a part of Monmouth's purpose also. Monmouth students, all part of a community of learners, come from 32 states and 7 countries. Students have a variety of economic and sociological backgrounds including a wide array of religious affiliations. Monmouth students are encouraged to be tolerant, to seek understanding and to develop abilities to make informed and responsible decisions characterized by reason and imagination, insuring freedom and the dignity of man. All members of the Monmouth College community share in the responsibility for the development and respect of conditions that encourage this freedom to learn and develop. The governance structure is designed to encourage candid and reasoned evaluation of academic, administrative and social issues. GOVERNANCE Monmouth's system of governance basically involves three bodies who work together to make decisions regarding the nature and operation of the College. The Monmouth College Senate. The Senate of Monmouth College is the ultimate authority of the corporation and is the final authority in the management, conduct and control of college matters. The body is composed of not fewer than 18 nor more than 33 directors, together with 9 trustees. Senate members come from widely varied geographical areas and represent a broad range of occupations and professions. Three students serve in an advisory capacity to the College Senate. Their participation insures student voice on the highest governing board of the college."}
{"id": "monmouthcoll197475monm", "title": "Monmouth College Catalog", "year": 1974, "seq": 3, "text": "Honor societies are in abundance at Monmouth College. In addition to national freshman honoraries, upperclass honoraries such as Mortar Board for senior women and Beta Beta Beta, national honorary biology fraternity, have chapters on campus. Other examples are Eta Sigma Phi (classics), Psi Chi (psychology), Pi Gamma Mu (social science) and Blue Key (service and scholarship). A variety of fine arts organizations include Crimson Masque, the college dramatic society. Musical organizations include the Chamber Choir, the Monmouth College Highlanders, the Sound of Five, the Jazz Band, Small Instrumental and Vocal Ensembles, the Concert Choir and the Wind Ensemble. Other organizations on campus include the Women's Recreational Association, International Club, Black Action and Affairs Council, \"M\" Club (for letter winners in varsity sports), Modern Dance Club, and Flying Club to mention a few. Four social sororities and six fraternities are represented on the Monmouth campus. The fraternities, Alpha Tau Omega, Sigma Alpha Epsilon, Sigma Phi Epsilon, Tau Kappa Epsilon, Theta Chi, and Zeta Beta Tau, have individual chapter houses. The four sororities, Alpha Xi Delta, Kappa Delta, Kappa Kappa Gamma, and Pi Beta Phi, do not have individual chapter houses but jointly use Marshall Hall, where they maintain chapter rooms. Approximately one-third of the student body are members of fraternities and sororities. VOLUNTEER EDUCATIONAL EXPERIENCES The Monmouth College Community and the city of Monmouth have, for many years, enjoyed a fine relationship. Much of this is due to the support of civic programs by the College and by continuing support of the College by the citizens of Monmouth. Possibilities for volunteer service and rewarding educational experiences in the Community and the Monmouth area are many. Among them are: Warren Achievement Center \u2014 Provides students opportunities to work in a variety of social service programs including facilities for mentally handicapped children and adults and community programs for the aged and culturally handicapped."}
{"id": "monmouthcoll197475monm", "title": "Monmouth College Catalog", "year": 1974, "seq": 4, "text": "Services of the audio-visual department, its director and staff, are available to faculty members and students preparing communication projects for class assignments, special projects, individual study, independent study and campus activities. ATHLETICS AND RECREATION Monmouth is a member of the Midwest Intercollegiate Athletic Conference, which maintains competition at the varsity level among 10 of the institutions in the Associated Colleges of the Midwest. Monmouth's \"Fighting Scots\" battle in ten varsity sports: football, cross country, basketball, swimming, wrestling, baseball, track, golf, soccer and tennis. Freshmen are eligible to compete in all varsity sports. Monmouth has a proud record of support for its athletic teams, and approximately one of every six men participates in intercollegiate athletics. The Women's Sports Program includes competition in basketball, softball, and volleyball with other Illinois universities and colleges. The Intramural Sports Program provides an opportunity for every student to participate in some type of competitive sports activity as regularly as his or her interest, ability, and time will permit. Students representing dormitories, fraternities, sororities, and independents are organized into teams competing for trophies and awards. Activities include tennis, volleyball, cross country, table tennis, wrestling, swimming, basketball, bowling, handball, billiards, track, badminton, golf, softball, archery, and decathlon. Lighted tennis courts and ice skating facilities are available on campus. RESIDENT LIFE At Monmouth College, living in one of the residence units offers opportunity for personal growth, intellectual development, social interaction and involvement through active participation. There are a wide variety of living styles from which to select, and students working with the Community Life Committee maintain and review this breadth of choices. Within each living unit, which is self-governed by the students, a small micro-community is developed which works toward individual growth and the development of a rational, effective and humane learning community. The coordinator 14 of Residence Life works with and supervises the staff of each of the living units."}
{"id": "monmouthcoll197475monm", "title": "Monmouth College Catalog", "year": 1974, "seq": 5, "text": "Gibson Center is constructed in a series of quads (four double rooms) around a shared bath with private outside entrances to each student room. Students living in Gibson have unlimited guest visitation hours. Quads for men and quads for women are available in Gibson for those student who are 18 years of age or older or who have parental permission. Winbigler Center for men is built in the traditional residence hall style with a comfortable lounge and TV room. It is carpeted to eliminate excessive noise. Winbigler residents also have unlimited guest visitation hours and students living there must be 18 or have parental Dermission. All room furnishings are movable. McMichael Center for women features large rooms, wash basins in the rooms, large closets, high ceilings, carpeted lounges and proximity to the Student Center, dining room and classroom buildings. All furniture in student rooms is movable and room decor is almost imitless. McMichael has a restricted visitation policy. Liedman Center has eliminated the long corridor effect Df the more traditional centers. The twenty-four women Dn each floor live in double rooms or suites of four surrounding a floor lounge, bathrooms, and extra storage closets. The furniture in the rooms is of modern design and largely \"built-in\" for efficiency. There is also a large recreation room in the basement to provide group socializing to remove noisier activities away from the iving areas. Liedman has unlimited guest visitation hours and women living there must be 18 years old or have Darental permission. Cleland Center is built in towers with men housed n one tower and women housed in the other tower. It :eatures modern design and lounges in each wing that are adequate to serve as living rooms or entertaining areas, [\"he room furniture is \"built-in\" for efficiency and maximum utilization of space."}
{"id": "monmouthcoll197475monm", "title": "Monmouth College Catalog", "year": 1974, "seq": 6, "text": "AUSTIN HALL, home of the music department, contains practice rooms, classrooms, record and music library, and faculty offices. Located on the east side of the campus is the ART CENTER, with library, foundry, gallery, as well as painting, drawing and print-making studios. College theatrical productions are held in the LITTLE THEATRE or in the experimental theatrical space located in Carnegie Hall. WOODBINE HALL houses the Education and the Economics and Business Administration Departments and classrooms. The Monmouth College STUDENT CENTER is a center for all members of the college community, providing social, recreational and cultural activities. A snack bar, coffee house, billiard room, bowling alley, radio station, dining room, conference rooms and lounge areas characterize the building physically. Student Association, Ravelings, the Coordinator of Campus and Center Activities, and SAGA Food Service offices are in the Center. The activities of the Center are governed by the Community Activities Board, composed of both faculty and students. Many students serve on committees which operate the Center. STUDENT DEVELOPMENT SERVICES Today's student body is characterized by a growing diversity of experiences, academic preparation, socio- economic background, general ability, career goals and value orientation. Some students may be haunted 17 by self-doubts and insecurities about the future. Others may have clarified their educational and vocational goals and have satisfying value systems. In addition, this diversity within the student bodies of the 70's is cast in an extraordinarily rich, complicated and intense culture. Probably more so than ever, students today are consciously seeking to establish enduring commitments, a sense of purpose and meaning in their immediate and future lives, and a sense of belonging to a rewarding and humanly responsive community. The Student Development staff is committed to foster through efforts of personal contact, skills, services, programs, residential living, and personal example, a community that is responsive to each person's needs of importance, purpose, community and love, i.e. the needs of personal satisfaction."}
{"id": "monmouthcoll197475monm", "title": "Monmouth College Catalog", "year": 1974, "seq": 7, "text": "A faculty member is assigned as an adviser based on the student's initial college major interest. Students may change advisers at any time through initiating a request with the Registrar. A college counseling service is available to all students to help them effectively deal with concerns about self, education, relationships with others, sexuality, study habits, home problems, etc. In addition to a full time counselor, members of the student development staff and living center staffs are available for consultation. The development of confidence in self and the establishment of independent resourcefulness in life planning are important parts of education. For the benefit of all students seeking to determine educational and career goals, the Career Development Office provides a variety of services. Students are provided assistance individually, in special group meetings, and through publications. As an adjunct to pre-enrollment achievement testing, interest surveys and personality inventories are administered to assist students in arriving at realistic career and educational goals. Materials for self-help in career planning include a large collection of recorded career interviews, including a number made by alumni, and a vast collection of books, brochures and pamphlets describing careers and companies. Students contemplating graduate study are offered assistance in applying for graduate school acceptance and financial aid. A large collection of catalogs of graduate and professional schools is available. 18 Placement services are also provided by the Career Development Office which includes establishment and maintenance of centralized, cumulative professional credentials and resumes, coordination of on-campus job interviewing, and the publication of job information. HEALTH CENTER -Monmouth College maintains a campus nursing service and liaison with the Community Memorial Hospital and local physicians. Registered nurses are on duty during the day for referral and emergency treatment. Medical advice by the staff and non-prescription medicines are available without charge at the Health Center."}
{"id": "monmouthcoll197475monm", "title": "Monmouth College Catalog", "year": 1974, "seq": 8, "text": "Testing dates and locations as well as other information may be obtained from the high school guidance counselor or the Director of Admissions. Students planning to enroll in a mathematics course or foreign language course are required to take the SAT Achievement Test in Mathematics or the Achievement Test in the language in which they were enrolled in high school. 3. Request the high school guidance counselor or principal and the English teacher to complete and return the Monmouth College recommendation forms. 4. Submit a high school transcript after the completion of the junior year of high school. A final transcript will be required at the completion of the senior year. 5. Freshman applicants who have been out of high school a year or more and have not begun their college education must prepare a statement indicating their activities since graduation from high school. Candidates for admission must present 15 secondary school units including English, history, social science, mathematics, and natural science. A unit is a subject carried for one school year. Transfer Applicants Students wishing to transfer to Monmouth College from other four-year colleges and universities or from two-year colleges will find the transition to Monmouth College can be accomplished with minimal disruption of their educational program. All applicants must complete the procedures indicated below: 1. Submit the application for admission. 2. Request the high school to send a transcript of grades and test scores. 3. Request official transcripts to be sent from each college or university attended. Failure to do so may result in the student's inability to register for the succeeding term. 4. Request the Dean of Students at the last institution attended to complete and return the Monmouth College recommendation form. 5. If a transfer applicant has been out of college one or more terms, a statement must be provided indicating why the student left college, what he has been doing since leaving college, and why he wishes to return."}
{"id": "monmouthcoll197475monm", "title": "Monmouth College Catalog", "year": 1974, "seq": 9, "text": "(Private lessons in music on a credit basis are available at no extra tuition charge to those students registered as full-time students who qualify for credit status through auditions. Private lessons in music on a non-credit basis are available at $25 per term.) Payments All fees and charges are due and payable prior to the beginning of the term in which the student is enrolled. Students will not be permitted to register until their account has been paid in full or completed loan arrangements. Official enrollment is completed when fees due have been paid. Students having outside scholarships or loans, not already credited to their account by day of registration, must have written confirmation from the source before they will be permitted to register. Disabled Veterans will be treated as paid students if the Business Office has received VA Form 21E-1905 (Authorization and Certification of Entrance or Re-entrance Into Training) from the Veteran's Administration. Students shall pay all accounts due the College in accordance with regulations set forth for such payments by the College. While Monmouth College makes every effort to keep tuition and other expenses as low as possible, the College reserves the right to adjust tuition and fee schedules annually as required to maintain high quality educational programs. Monmouth College participates in two Federal Loan programs which aid in the financing of a student's 27 education. These include the College Student Guaranteed Loan Program and the National Direct Student Loan Program. Parents who desire to spread payment over several months may use the Monmouth College Pre-Payment Plan or one of several commercial plans available. Detailed information about these plans is available on request from the Business Office. Advance Deposit (a) A Tuition Deposit of one hundred dollars ($100.00) is required of all regular students accepting admission to the College."}
{"id": "microcosm1992simm", "title": "Microcosm", "year": 1992, "seq": 0, "text": "There's so much action in Boston.\" Dawn Gagne, a senior at Simmons, interns at the Greater Boston Convention and Visitors Bureau. She works in the Public Relations Department as an Assistant to the Public Relations Director and Coordinator. This Bureau plans major city-wide functions, such as a press trip scheduled for the press from all over the country, as well as the United Kingdom and Canada. Rather than interning only during her second semester as most students chose to do, Dawn works 8 hours a week and also takes classes. She plans to continue interning during the second semester. Interestingly, Dawn got this job almost by accident. The Four Seasons was one of the places that she applied to, but because her application was a bit late, they did not have a position for her. However, her resume was noted, and they regretted not being able to take another intern. One afternoon, the manager at Four Seasons was having lunch with the Public Relations Director and Coordinator of the Greater Boston Convention and Visitors Bureau. She mentioned Dawn as an excellent candidate for an intern position, and the next day, Dawn received a call from the Bureau; they were looking to set up an interview. Dawn enjoys working much more than school, mostly because one can get into the inner workings of a company and begin to apply what was learned in classes. Boston, a world in itself, has a variety of attractions for all to enjoy. Some of the more noted are the Museum of Fine Arts and the Children 's Museum, which are shown here. The John Hancock and Prudential buildings can be seen from almost every point in Boston. IIIIIIHIHIP'! 15 Freshmen Lured With $500 K \u2022 New Student Activities Director Briddell Happy to be at Simmons \u2022 The Simmons News Faculty Groups Ask Holmes to Resign by Jill Harmacinski Editorial Staff When William J."}
{"id": "microcosm1992simm", "title": "Microcosm", "year": 1992, "seq": 1, "text": "These goals were chosen during a brainstorm session at the SGA officers' annual retreat on October 6. According to SGA presi- dent Caitlin Carroll, each potential accom- plishment brought up at the session seemed to fall naturally into one of those categories. Under the diversity goal, SGA hopes to improve the college by forming a multi- cultural course that each Simmons student would be required to take before graduating. A committee will be in charge of researching the possible content and schedul- ing of the multi-cultural course. Nazli Gurer, SGA vice-president, said that rather than the mandatory four semester language requirement, students might be more interested in learning about different cultures. \"The core curriculum here is too narrow,\" Gurer said. \"It doesn't let you take the classes you want\" SGA is also looking to develop a faculty group that will support a collective group on campus. The group will consist of Simmons community members that are not considered \"mainstream,\" such as commuters, Carroll said. Monthly cultural programs may also be experienced on the Simmons campus this year. Carroll describes these as programs that will \"advance awareness and acceptance of diversity.\" Their first major retention plan is to renovate the gym in the Main Campus Building into a student activities center. Gurer said that a floor plan for the renovation may include office space for student organizations as well as a student union area. 'It's not going to occur this year, but we'd like to set it in motion,\" Carroll said. \"We think this will add to the student life at Simmons.\" SGA plans to raise the money for the project through grants or fundraisers that Simmons students can participate in. Two women's conferences are also in the works under the retention plan. The first potential conference will be held for one day, just for Simmons students."}
{"id": "microcosm1992simm", "title": "Microcosm", "year": 1992, "seq": 2, "text": "What were the worst moments? It was at the Coast Guard Academy in CT. There were four of us sailing J-22's and none of us have any experience on how to fly a spinnaker. It filled through the shrouds on the side of the boat instead of the bow. Therefore we were pulled toward the bridge and we almost capsized. What are your hopes for next year? I hope we can get more sailers to commit their time. It would give us a chance to place better. And we all hope to get our spring season back. Words that describe the team. Ambitious Any other feelings you would like to add? Sailing is my favorite sport. It is relaxing and challenging. I have the best of both worlds. It is also the best sport when it comes to communication and working together. It is time consuming but it is worth it. y. -jffS\u00ae&'*~ riXSKiffl L to R Coach Jack Carney, Brandy Herget, Kristi Winer, Karen Markowicz, Jennifer Ziepniewski Missing Heidi von Ludewig, Melinda Pepin 59 SMALL BUT HARDY The 1991 Simmons College soccer team, led by new coach Darren Darwent, faced many challenges this season. After losing eight seniors, and with only three freshmen this year, they were the smallest team in their league. The team consists of only fourteen players, five players shy of a full team. With their talent and positive attitude, they were able to come up with several wins. Leading the team were junior co-captain Rachel Gladstone and senior co-captain Beth Fioretti. Gladstone at center mid-field gave any opponent a challenge. Whether a score was made of not, Fioretti, junior Susan Mattia, sophomore Lorena Martinez, junior Bonnie Slayter, and junior Dana Spangler produced outstanding offensive plays. Sophomore Alexis Boryczk and Heather Parsons showed talent and effort on the forward line."}
{"id": "minoritymalegran00uns", "title": "Minority Male Grant Program Coalition Development Grant Evaluations and Coalition Demonstration Grant Evaluation Design, Final Report", "year": 1991, "seq": 0, "text": "Page 11-4 Defined role for each member\u2014The roles and responsibilities of each member were usually defined by the lead agency early in the development process, but not always explicitly. The lead agency recruited members based on the skills, clout, or credibility they could bring to the coalition, which implicitly defined what their roles were. Some coalitions required their members to define their roles and/or responsibilities in letters of intent submitted with the grant application or in quarterly reports. Some coalitions were greatly helped by the fact that many of the agencies and individuals they wanted to recruit were very receptive to forming a coalition. These people wanted to encourage interagency cooperation and referrals and better serve clients with multiple needs. Coalition spokespersons said that potential recruits often turned down invitations to join the coalition at the outset, usually because past attempts in the community to form coalitions and coordinate services did not work out. Many of these recruits later approached the coalition and asked to join, after they saw that it had become a viable, effective presence in the community. In the initial stage of coalition development, it is common for members and potential members to be anxious about the issues of control and competition. This is especially true when members have a history of either not working together or not working well together. Time is needed to learn to trust other coalition members, particularly the lead agency and competing agencies. Required level of resource participation\u2014The majority of coalitions did not formally require resources from their members. In extreme cases, this fostered the belief of all coalition members that the coalition could survive only as long as it was supported by OMH. There were many implicit, informal understandings for members to provide in- kind resources as the need arose, such as voluntary staff time, meeting space, and transportation."}
{"id": "minoritymalegran00uns", "title": "Minority Male Grant Program Coalition Development Grant Evaluations and Coalition Demonstration Grant Evaluation Design, Final Report", "year": 1991, "seq": 1, "text": "A few coalitions asked members to specify the resources they would provide in letters of support. Most coalitions were wary of requesting too many resources from members, particularly monetary support, and especially from those members with limited finances and resources. Documentation\u2014 Most coalitions found it useful to document their efforts as a way of informing members and the public of what they have accomplished. Written minutes from coalition meetings were the most common form of documentation. Some recorded all that was discussed, while others provided overviews of the discussions. Minutes usually were furnished to all members, both those who were present and those who were absent from the meeting. Sometimes they were mailed and sometimes they were distributed in person. Minutes from one meeting usually were completed and distributed before the next meeting. One coalition tape-recorded meetings, and another videotaped a conference it sponsored. Establish relationships with the coalition and other members\u2014 All grantees reported that the level and type of relationship with the coalition and other members are a function of members' histories with one another. The four Birch & Davis Associates, Inc. Page II\u2014 5 modified coalitions exhibited the most mature relationships with the coalition and other members because many members had been working together prior to the grant award and had overcome adverse situations together as well. New coalitions whose members did establish positive relationships tended to be those which existed as working groups or task forces prior to the grant award. These coalitions had a long-standing commitment to the idea of working together and formalizing their ties in a coalition, which encouraged strong, lasting relationships. Grantees were innovative in tailoring approaches to their situations. This expedited their work in a number of areas, including recruiting members, delivering services, and obtaining future support. Some coalitions combined one of more of the key variables to facilitate development."}
{"id": "minoritymalegran00uns", "title": "Minority Male Grant Program Coalition Development Grant Evaluations and Coalition Demonstration Grant Evaluation Design, Final Report", "year": 1991, "seq": 2, "text": "Members provided in-kind services such as photocopying, postage, and meeting space. Two coalitions asked members to pay dues to help cover some operating expenses. 3.3 Successful Projects Followed Four Major Steps In Their Development We identified four fundamental steps in coalition development. According to their individual needs, coalitions emphasized some steps over others and focused on them at different times during the year. Each step helped the coalitions develop into viable and responsive bodies for delivering services by working to foster maximum cooperation among members and to retain and encourage their commitment to the coalition. \u2022 Develop Support For A Shared Vision\u2014Coalitions generally begin to form when a community leader expresses a vision of how to address an identified problem facing the community. The leader shares this vision with community members and persuades them to identify and obtain needed resources. \u2022 Define The Organizational Purpose\u2014 Defining the coalition's purpose lays the foundation for the coalition's work. The coalition's members need to agree on the target population and coalition goals and objectives. Some coalitions ask representatives of the target population, such as current agency clients, to define their own needs by serving as members of the coalition, participating in focus groups, or responding to surveys. Coalitions that involved members of the target population always reported success in meeting target population needs. \u2022 Develop Consensus On Coalition Norms And Values\u2014 Gaining explicit consensus on key norms and values of the group appears to be a precondition for successful operations. The group must develop a common understanding of what it means to develop culturally sensitive approaches for delivering services to the target Birch & Davis Associates, Inc. Page 11-7 \u2022 population, and what is required to have attained the standard of cultural sensitivity. The group must also agree on organizational structure for the coalition, including how and when to conduct meetings, document progress, and attract and retain members. \u2022 Obtain Necessary Resources \u2014 Coalitions must identify and obtain necessary resources."}
{"id": "minoritymalegran00uns", "title": "Minority Male Grant Program Coalition Development Grant Evaluations and Coalition Demonstration Grant Evaluation Design, Final Report", "year": 1991, "seq": 3, "text": "Most coalitions were said to have really gained momentum when key staff were identified and hired. Recruiting members is an ongoing effort in resource acquisition for most coalitions. Members are a key labor resource because they play a critical role in building and sustaining the coalition by providing essential support, including staff, funds, and in-kind services. Recruiting members because they have specific skills, clout, or credibility is key for gathering together a group of people capable of coping with the issues and challenges coalitions face in both developmental and delivery stages. OMH Coalition Development Grant Program dollars were said to have been a valuable resource, for reasons cited earlier. It was rare for coalitions not to mention that they had experienced delays with grant start up because of a lag of at least several months between notification of the grant award and actual receipt of funds. Some coalitions had requested no-cost time extensions to their grants; these extensions were always granted, although notification was not always said to be timely. Many coalitions were addressing the need to identify and obtain funding for the coalition when OMH funds ran out. Although most coalitions intended to continue working after the end of the grant period, only one had the funds to do so at the same level. This coalition had been awarded a demonstration grant. Most of the other coalitions began looking for additional funding as the grant year was ending, and some had even submitted proposals to other agencies and private foundations. Others were investigating RFPs and RFAs, meeting with foundation staff, or holding fundraisers. None of the grantees had a long-range plan for continued funding. Most coalition spokespersons told us they initially had assumed that their development grants would roll over into demonstration grants at the end of the first year of operation."}
{"id": "minoritymalegran00uns", "title": "Minority Male Grant Program Coalition Development Grant Evaluations and Coalition Demonstration Grant Evaluation Design, Final Report", "year": 1991, "seq": 4, "text": "Then we modified the initial design to incorporate our findings. Projects that we visited are highlighted on Exhibit III- 1 . We learned that the coalition demonstration evaluation must provide useful information for OMH. These are the key study questions: \u2022 What services/interventions are being provided? \u2022 To whom are services/interventions being provided? \u2022 What factors facilitate or inhibit the implementation of the services and interventions? \u2022 How can implementation of the services/interventions be improved? We also learned that a feasible evaluation approach must consider data requirements such as availability, accessibility, and quality. Information is a basic resource for the evaluation, so data issues are a key concern. Other feasibility concerns are time, staffing, and cost. These are the resources needed for conducting the evaluation. 2. WE DEVELOPED THREE EVALUATION DESIGN OPTIONS Based on our understanding of the types of issues to be addressed by the study, the range of potential uses of the information, and possible constraints on evaluation conduct, we developed three potentially viable design options: \u2022 Case study \u2022 Self-assessment \u2022 Quasi-experimental The next section describes each design option in a standard fashion. We present a synopsis of each option along with a description of its purpose; population/sample; data requirements, collection techniques, and collection instruments; procedures; analysis; and product descriptions. Next, we identify strengths and weaknesses, along with possible approaches to overcoming the weaknesses. Exhibit III-2 summarizes key features of each option. 2.1 The Case Study Option Describes Projects The case study design option highlights the unique characteristics of individual projects and promotes the collection of detailed information on project implementation or outcome, or both. This design offers a qualitative approach to evaluating project implementation and outcome. Key characteristics of the case study option are: Purpose\u2014The purpose of the case study option is to provide OMH with a ricl qualitative description of the implementation, operation, and outcomes of the rich le demonstration grant projects."}
{"id": "minoritymalegran00uns", "title": "Minority Male Grant Program Coalition Development Grant Evaluations and Coalition Demonstration Grant Evaluation Design, Final Report", "year": 1991, "seq": 5, "text": "We know as well from study activities that little information is available at this time about either the process or outcome of implementing the demonstration grant projects. Thus we suggest a two-stage evaluation plan that generates useful data as early in the grant period as possible. \u2022 Stage One: Formative Evaluation- -The focus is understanding how coalition demonstration projects are implemented. The evaluation findings generate recommendations on how to (1) implement a project and (2) improve coalition demonstration management processes. Stage One is planned for the end of Year One. This allows the projects sufficient lead time to become operational, generate implementation data, and begin to identify areas that could benefit from improvement. Beginning this type of effort relatively early in the project benefits both OMH and grantees. Each demonstration project receives technical assistance. \u2022 Stage Two: Outcome Evaluation- -The focus is the results of project interventions. The evaluation assesses projects' effectiveness in achieving their objectives and their impact on the target population. These findings can identify strategies that appear successful in achieving program and project aims. Stage Two is planned for the end of the last year of the three-year grant. At this point the projects have sufficient experience to be able to generate performance data over time and identify areas that could benefit from improvement. Conducting an outcome evaluation at the end of the grant period provides time after Stage One to refine operations and implement recommendations generated by the formative evaluation. Conducting the evaluation in two stages is useful for both OMH and the projects because it allows them to address problems or potential problems during the grant period. Changes can be made in service delivery or interventions during the course of the grant period, when OMH maintains some leverage over the projects1 implementation. 3.3 We Recommend The Case Study Option For Stage One We recommend the case study option for Stage One because of its strength in providing descriptive information at the earliest possible stage in the grant period."}
{"id": "ExtendingRecoveryIntoTheLi1", "title": "Jahnke - Extending Recovery Into The Li ( 1)", "year": 1991, "seq": 0, "text": "Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 6 which can hinder integration of recovery program and church life. These realities have been recognized by recovering people since the formation of AA. None of these works seriously acknowledge that an intentional and mutual integration of Program-life and church-life has been difficult for people to achieve. Few attempts have been able to respect, fully, the basic integrity of the Program and the ongoing integrity of the local congregation, at the same time. Specific attention has not been given to what educational structures and methods might provide bridges between the life of the Program and the life of the church. It is observed in this writing project that Twelve Step members sometimes ask the question \"Is the church a place for me?\" at some point in their recovery. They can be helped to answer this question through educational experiences and various teaching approaches. Through educational experiences recovering people can be integrated into some key dimensions of the life of the church. Through these experiences they can come to feel grounded in the church as well as their program. Various teaching approaches can then be used to help people reflect on what it means for them to participate in both institutions. In following an educational approach the integrity of each entity, Program and church, can be respected and intercourse between the two can be encouraged to the overall benefit of Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 7 the individual. Obstacles to this intercourse can be acknowledged and retained or resolved. The emphasis on an educational approach to helping people extend recovery into the life of the church takes place with awareness of other integrative points in the life of the church for them."}
{"id": "ExtendingRecoveryIntoTheLi1", "title": "Jahnke - Extending Recovery Into The Li ( 1)", "year": 1991, "seq": 1, "text": "Steps to Self-Parenting (Deerfield Beach, Fla: Health Communications, 1988). There are other programs of spiritually based recovery through twelve steps, which substantially alter the language of the original Twelve Steps, eg. \"twelve steps to self parenting.\" Such programs are considered as attempts to integrate the Twelve Step program with psychotherapy, behavior modification, or religion. The terms Twelve Step program and the Program will be reserved for those programs which use the Twelve Steps of AA or have gained permission from AA to identify a problem other than alcohol in the language of Steps 1 and 12. For example the group called Emotional Health Anonymous has substituted the word \"emotions\" for alcohol in the first Step, but would still be considered a Twelve Step program. Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 14 the Twelve Steps and Traditions for living during established meetings, and prayer. One problem in describing a Twelve Step program is that of distinguishing between a treatment program and the individual who is working the program. The question is whether the Program has an existence of its own, apart from individuals who are working the program. In the understanding of this writer there is not a Program apart from the working of it by persons even though components of the Program can be identified apart from the individuals who are employing them toward recovery. Twelve Step members may often be heard to describe their recovery program as a \" spiritual^progra m..\" Those who invite or guide members' inquiry about the church will benefit from understanding the difference between a \"spiritual\" program and \"religion\" in the philosophy of the Twelve Step program. Recovery is spiritual in the sense of \"being possessed of a new sense of power and direction\" after one admits that they are not able to manage their dependency problem. 27 For many recovering people, the Twelve Step group itself is the first expression of power and direction, but there is a spirit which transcends the group process."}
{"id": "ExtendingRecoveryIntoTheLi1", "title": "Jahnke - Extending Recovery Into The Li ( 1)", "year": 1991, "seq": 2, "text": "According to Taylor, \"The social element may get a man sober but in the last analysis only God can keep 27 M. 54. Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 15 him sober.\" 28 To the originators of the Twelve Steps, abstinence from alcohol was the immediate and lasting goal of the Program, but a lifetime of spiritual growth was the reward as well. The personality of the one who is growing spiritually through the Program is characterized by a willingness to be transformed by honesty and open- mindedness. These qualities which run counter to the rigidity, judgmentalism and denial of life before the Program are evidence of \"an almost childish faith.\" 29 Twelve Step participants make a distinction between this spiritual program and religion . Religion is typically thought of as the external forms of a particular faith tradition. Religion is the combination of rituals, symbols, and stories adhered to by that tradition, denomination or congregation. Spirituality involves the living engagement with a power and presence mediated through the many forms of religion, a power greater than the self or the group. Religion can have a positive or negative meaning for the recovering person depending on their past experience. However, religion is to be distinguished from religiosity if it is to have a positive connotation. Religiosity may be thought of as religion divorced from honesty about one's life problems, openmindedness to the spiritual journeys of 28 Taylor, 4. 29 aa. 54. Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 16 others and willingness to change in personal feelings and outlook. In this case, religion is reduced to a set of doctrines, rituals, and values which are not subject to an ongoing transformation. Exclusive adherence to a particular idea of God can be both a symptom and a root of religiosity. Those who have given in to religiosity accept a sense of goodness which is imputed to them as a reward for conforming to a religious system."}
{"id": "ExtendingRecoveryIntoTheLi1", "title": "Jahnke - Extending Recovery Into The Li ( 1)", "year": 1991, "seq": 3, "text": "Seymour, eds., Contemporary Approaches to Christian Education (Nashville: Abingdon Press, 1982), 15. Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 18 integration of spiritual recovery with participation in the church. With recovering people, education will be done with particular forms such as study groups, forums, lectures, and individual mentoring. The decision as to which forms to use, who to use them with, and how to use them, can be guided by an overall approach, theory, or model of parish education. 32 The Shape and Direction of this Project There are several questions which have stimulated and shaped the research of this project. What does the presence of a program of spiritual renewal in one's personal life mean for the future of one\u2019s corporate religious life? Why might people who are working Twelve Step Recovery Programs feel a need for or take interest in participation in the life of a church? How might they integrate their Program with the life of the church? What are the obstacles or resistances which will hinder participation in the life of the church? How might educational leaders aid the process of integration? What educational approaches and resources might be drawn together to provide an effective integration process for these people? Responding to these questions has provided the basic plan for researching the problem of a 32 Miller and Seymour, 31. In their schema of approaches, \"religious instruction,\" \"faith community,\" \"spiritual development,\" \"liberation,\" and \"interpretation\" models are described. They are roughly parallel to the models which will be described in Chapter 4. Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 19 lack of integration of Twelve Step and church life for some recovering people. The thesis that intentionally developed educational experiences can be bridges for integration is explore as well in responding to these questions."}
{"id": "ExtendingRecoveryIntoTheLi1", "title": "Jahnke - Extending Recovery Into The Li ( 1)", "year": 1991, "seq": 4, "text": "The methods of research into these questions vary from question to question. Chapter 2 will review stories of recovering individuals, giving a basic feel for the Twelve Step Program. One of the Twelve Steps will be used as a point of entry, as it helps answer the question of why an interest in church participation might develop during the recovery cycle. A review of literature on the Twelve Step Program and its relation to the church will be taken up in Chapter 3 to uncover the hindrances or obstacles to church participation for recovering people. Comments by recovering people about their experience of recovery, as it relates to church participation, will be noted and attended to as well. Chapter 4 will explore how Twelve Step members might be helped to integrate their Program and church life and to extend the recovery process through educational ministry. The example of one church's integrating ministry will be shared. A pedagogical method will be suggested for helping recovering people intentionally reflect upon the integration process. Several approaches to Christian education will be considered as well as an overall model for parish ministry. These will be suggested as both complimenting the suggested pedagogical method and overcoming some of the hindrances to Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 20 participation in the church which Twelve Step members may experience. With the scope of the project outlined above, some parameters of the project can be stated. It is the intention of this project to consider how English-speaking adults in Twelve Step recovery programs can be guided toward a satisfying and empowering interaction with a local churches. While certain limitations of both Twelve Step programs and local congregations will be recognized, the integrity of each is to be highlighted. This rule will also be followed in regard to whether or not the church should replace the Program, or vice versa, in the life of the recovering person."}
{"id": "ExtendingRecoveryIntoTheLi1", "title": "Jahnke - Extending Recovery Into The Li ( 1)", "year": 1991, "seq": 5, "text": "This study will not explore deeply the origins of dependency problems nor its prevention. While the origins and prevention of addictions need to be understood, an investigation of these things is not rewarding for the explicit purpose of this paper. In fact, most recovering people do not concentrate attention upon them. The exploration of the recovery process will be limited to the lives of individuals and their existing or potential relationship with the church, and will not deal with their past experiences. The family nature of dependency problems and recovery has been well established in research and practical experience, but will not be dealt with directly in this project. Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 21 This study will be an exploration of the spiritual dimension of recovery from dependency; a recovery which is guided by a certain history and community described in the Twelve Steps and visited by yearnings and resistances toward organized religious life with its own history and community. Twelve Step recovery will be described not only as a spiritual process but as an educational process as well. This educational process can be be supported and extended through Christian education with Twelve Step members in the context of the church. A start will be made toward evaluating the educational approaches with recovering people which may be most helpful to integrating them into the life of the church for extension of their recovery into the religious dimension of life. Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 22 CHAPTER 2 A Spiritual Program with Religious Possibilities Twelve Step programs have provided a way of life renewal for millions of people since its birth in Alcoholics Anonymous 50 years ago. From the beginnings of the Program, significant numbers of recovering people have extended their recovery into the life of the church."}
{"id": "ExtendingRecoveryIntoTheLi1", "title": "Jahnke - Extending Recovery Into The Li ( 1)", "year": 1991, "seq": 6, "text": "Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 24 What these steps describe is an ethical, theological and religious discipline that had impressed itself upon them because it helped them stay sober. These precepts were rigorous, interlocked, and consistent with the logic of coming to sobriety. For Wilson and his friends, these steps stood between life and death, or at least sanity and insanity. These steps grew out of the unique experience of alcoholics within the Oxford Group. This Christian confessional movement had begun in the early 1920s when a Lutheran clergyman named Frank Buchman felt called to employ an evangelistic method which could renew a vital Christian life in people through these points: \"surrender, sharing, restitution, quiet time, guidance, witness, fellowship.\"3 The group had no official membership and met in private homes or rooms in a church. It was especially popular among upper middle-class Protestants. A number of prominent clergy were involved in Oxford Groups, but the emphasis was on group process and individual discipline, rather than coming under the ministry of some professional clergy. The attraction of successful men in the community to the fellowship and practice of the Group was one of the means by which the movement grew. It may seem surprising, from one viewpoint, that the Oxford movement would be open 3 Morreim, 21. Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 25 to alcoholics, who were no models of success. However, the process of mutual confession in the Group offered a strong ministry to the needs of men whose consciences tended to be ridden with guilt. At the same time, it may have been because of the confessional nature of the Group's discussions that a parting of the ways took place between the Group's alcoholic and non-alcoholic members."}
{"id": "ExtendingRecoveryIntoTheLi1", "title": "Jahnke - Extending Recovery Into The Li ( 1)", "year": 1991, "seq": 7, "text": "Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. program can be seen in the following section of the case study: 27 He [W.3 phoned his ex-wife and said, \"I'm sick and I need help.\" His ex-wife and his mother brought an AA member to see him.... \"The fellow came into the room.... I was going to brush him off. I thought he was talking about me [as he talked about alcoholism] but found out he was talking about himself. This was the first indication I had that anybody in the world understood how I felt.... I half promised him I'd go to a meeting.\" W. admits to someone else his need of help. 6 W.'s experience can be described as a \"deflation of the ego\" to use a phrase coined by Bill Wilson. 7 First he realizes that he cannot help himself. Then he realizes that he is not the only one living in an alcoholic universe. From a more positive perspective, W.'s private hell was visited by another who understood. He was encountered by someone who identified with him and who had a story with which he could identify. He was invited to come out of his private world to a meeting of others who understood. His psychological defenses against getting help were breaking down. He was invited, by the testimony of another, to acknowledge his own dependency problem. He was invited to a meeting of alcoholics. A stark contrast existed between how W. felt and how alcoholics at his first AA meeting appeared to him. 6 Clinebell, 521. 7 Kurtz, 54. Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 28 The next two days were agony. The more I tried to get sober the more I shook. My wife took me by the hand and led me to a meeting at the clubhouse."}
{"id": "ExtendingRecoveryIntoTheLi1", "title": "Jahnke - Extending Recovery Into The Li ( 1)", "year": 1991, "seq": 8, "text": "Both Bill Wilson and Doctor Bob Smith, co-founder of AA with Wilson, could acknowledge that the spiritual awakening of recovery had origins in forces beyond the human. In 1937 they reflected on the fact that at least 40 alcoholics were staying sober: \"Suddenly it burst upon us- Something new has come into the world-a new life...where there was none before.\" 14 The \"Something new\" which Bill Wilson and Dr. Bob Smith spoke of may be thought of as originating in the same mystery as that of any spiritual renewal or revival. On the other hand, some of its roots can be traced. It can be argued that the spiritual awakening in recovery grows out of the fact that the steps which grew out of the Oxford Group experience describe a religious program which is tried and true. Clinebell described the program as it existed in the early 1950s: Alcoholics Anonymous was found to be a radical modification of the Oxford Group theory and technique. AA is the most effective religious approach to the problem extant. Its strength lies in its acceptance of the sickness conception of alcoholism, its non-emotional techniques for inducing sobriety, its orderly program for personality change, its emphasis on mutual self- 14 Kurtz, 56-57. Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 33 help, and its ability to provide an accepting and permissive group experience. 15 It is not difficult to see how Clinebell could describe the original AA program as a \"religious approach\" as he reviewed the origins and guiding principles of the Twelve Step movement. Program members themselves, question whether it is a religious program. The AA philosophy is that it is a \"spiritual rather than a religious program.\" 16 Why have they insisted on this distinction? Kurtz, for one, located the motivation for the distinction in the fact that alcoholics have \"had more than their fill of pious admonitions to be good, and moralistic adjurations to be responsible. 1,17 A second answer is that the God described in the Program is a non-sectarian God."}
{"id": "ExtendingRecoveryIntoTheLi1", "title": "Jahnke - Extending Recovery Into The Li ( 1)", "year": 1991, "seq": 9, "text": "By 1945, Twelve Traditions were being regularly reviewed at Twelve Step meetings. The Traditions are listed here in the language of AA's auxiliary group for spouses of alcoholics: 1. Our common welfare should come first; personal progress for the greatest number depends upon unity. 2. For our group purpose, there is but one authority--a loving God as He may express Himself in our group conscience. Our leaders are but trusted servants; they do not govern. 3. The relatives of alcoholics may call themselves a...family group, provided that they have no outside affiliation. 4. Each group should be autonomous, except in matters affecting another group or Al-Anon or AA as a whole. 5. Each...group has but one purpose; to help families of alcoholics. We do this by practicing the Twelve Steps of AA ourselves, by encouraging and understanding our alcoholic relatives, and by welcoming and giving comfort to families of alcoholics. 6. Our groups ought never endorse, finance, or lend our name to any outside enterprise, lest problems of money, property or prestige divert us from our primary spiritual aim. Although a Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. 37 Steps Toward the Church Any spiritual awakening is a complex process. Surrender to a transcendent power, discovering the goodness of God in an accepting fellowship, and learning willingness, honesty and openmindedness, all play their part in life renewal. Spiritual awakening can take place within the life of the church or outside of it. In honoring AA's distinction between a spiritual program and religion an important question arises. Can organized religion be beneficial to a recovery program characterized by spirituality? In W.'s spiritual awakening, for example, could the church could help him expand, deepen, continue is spiritual recovery experience? The answer is not obvious in his case. W. appears to feel comfortable separate entity we should always cooperate with Alcoholics Anonymous. 7."}
{"id": "modelofmultinati147hino", "title": "A model of multination multiplant operation", "year": 1974, "seq": 0, "text": "This study develops a linear program model representing such an operation consisting of three production stages and a distribution stage. A solution to the linear program maximizes the sum of net revenues produced by operating units at various stages of operation located in different countries by optimally determining the volumes of goods handled by the units and the sequences of these units . The total cost of operation consists of production and distribution costs, transportation cost, and import duty. The import duty depends on whether the good is a purchased item or a consigned item returning to the owner. INTRODUCTION Labor cost represents a crucial factor of success in market competi- tion for firms producing labor-intensive products. Hence, many of these firms have seriously considered the use of low-cost labor available in other countries. For this reason s some of them have already established or are considering to establish plants in some of the countries in Asia, Latin America, or Southern Europe. In this type of operation, components requiring capital intensive processes are usually produced by plants in more industrialized countries and then shipped to plants in low-cost labor countries for subsequent labor intensive processes such as hand machining, assembly, and testing. Products, thus assembled and tested, are then shipped out 'of these plants to distribution centers located in more industrialized countries. In this multinational operation, there- fore , it is not uncommon to find that all stages of operation are per- formed in different countries . This study considers a simple case of the above multination multi- plant operation in which only one product line is produced and distri- buted through a sequence of four stages , including three production stages -- component production, assembly, and test \u2014 and the final stage, or the distribution of completed products. The total operating cost consists of costs for the three production processes , transportation be- tween operating units, transfer of goods or processing of goods under con- signment, distribution of finished products, and import duty."}
{"id": "milestones198200harp", "title": "Milestones 1982", "year": 1982, "seq": 0, "text": "This event, sponsored by the Student Councils of both schools, offered entertainment of the Old West. Students had the opportunity to demonstrate their agility in dances such as the Four Leaf Clover, the Ocean Wave, and Threading the Needle; however, most students spent quite a bit of time on their \"pardna's\" feet. Red and white checked skirts, flying petticoats, clicking boots, and artfully positioned cowboy hats provided a decorative atmosphere. Although both the caller and the students were exhausted by the end of the evening, all enjoyed the dance immensely. Fall Combo One reason for the success of the Student Council Fall Combo in November was the request of the Council that the entire student body assist in its preparation. The seniors purchased food while the freshmen bought soft drinks. The juniors decorated the gym to accompany the backdrop painted by the sophomores. Decorations of suspended silver stars and an illuminated city skyline backdrop reflected the theme of \"Between the Moon and New York City.\" The band, the \"White Animals,\" played medleys from their album as well as other selections. As usual, many freshmen asked dates to the dance four weeks in advance and were very enthusiastic. Even senior participation was good, considering! 118 Fall Combo Club Challenges For the first year under the new two club system, the challenges proved enjoyable and successful. The challenge system was originated to raise the level of school and club spirit by reducing competition to only two clubs. Each challenge match added five to ten points to the cumulative scores of each club which also included points won in intramural championships. The Ar-Tri and An-Ecco co-captains designed the challenges as both athletic and academic contests, and they alternated their supervision. For the first challenge, the Ar-Tries proposed a cross-campus bicycle race involving twenty members of each team."}
{"id": "milestones198200harp", "title": "Milestones 1982", "year": 1982, "seq": 1, "text": "A spirited group of pub members, orphans, Londoners, and gang members compeleted the cast. Under the capable stage and musical direction of Mrs. Sandra Davis and Mrs. Ray Berry and with technical assistance of Mr. James Poston, the cast and crew succeeded in presenting a pro- fessional production. 126 Fall Assemblies: Senior Recognition During the Senior Capping ceremony, which took place during the annual Senior Week ear- ly this fall, the members of the Class of 1982 received their red and white beanies. The as- sembly began as the Seniors processed into the auditorium in their traditional white dresses. After Senior Class chaplain Jennifer Harwell offered a prayer, Louisa Gibbs, the Senior Class president, delivered her speech. Her mes- sage expressed the class motto, \"We are a part of all that we have met,\" taken from Tenny- son's \"Ulysses.\" Finally, the officers capped their classmates in recognition of their new sen- ior status. 128 Fall Assemblies Between announcements of on-campus events and a concert with Joe Bias, fall assemblies brightened every day. For monthly club competi- tion, the spelling bee, kickball game, and bike race raised school spirit. Performances of the Glee Club and Choral Ensemble exposed the tal- ents of the Upper School students. Kathy La- zenby entertained the student body with her mu- sic, and Jennifer Harwell inspired students to reach for excellence in her Cum Laude address. Other exciting programs included a slide presen- tation of the Tennessee countryside taken from the photographs of Mr. Robin Hood in the book, THE TENNESSEANS, and a ski movie to pro- mote interest in the outing club's annual ski trip. In addition to these presentations, assemblies fea- tured scenes from the Drama Club's fall produc- tion, OLIVER! Winterim At Harpeth Hall, the special January Winterim program provides in a relaxed atmosphere alternative learning experiences in addition to those of the regular academic year."}
{"id": "milestones198200harp", "title": "Milestones 1982", "year": 1982, "seq": 2, "text": "Among travel programs, the school offered a student exchange program in France, a guided tour of England, a home stay program in Mexico, and an internship under the Honorable Bill Boner in Washington, D.C. A few students opted for Bible study in Switzerland. The rest of the juniors and seniors spent an exciting month working in various fields of study such as student teaching, special education, law, medicine, government, the music industry, volume food services, communication, banking, merchandising, and veterinary medicine. On-campus programs provided many choices for freshmen and sophomores. One new course offered was \"A New Approach to Improving Your Grades.\" Faculty members also presented such courses as \"A Glimpse of Life in France,\" \"Cosas Mexicanas,\" \"The Nuclear Age,\" \"Colleges??!!\" and \"Fabulous Fifties\" (taught by Mr. Wood) as well as courses in money management, jazz, bridge, basic modeling, and typing. All freshmen took a CPR course while sophomores attended conversational art and music appreciation classes. 1 30 131 Interim The Middle School Interim during the third week in January provided a meaningful and amusing learning experience for sixth, seventh, and eighth graders and offered a relaxing break between semesters. Students had the opportunity to explore new areas of interest while working with girls from other grades and with new teachers. In choosing their courses. Middle Schoolers practiced decision-making and prepared for course selecton in the Upper School. The curriculum provided a balance of academic, physical, and hobby-like activities. The course titles offered for Interim 1982 included Chisambop, Mad Scientist, Historic Nashville, Creative Writing, and Primary Animation. Also offered were courses in careers, Chinese cooking, choreography, tennis, and a history of Harpeth Hall. Students especially enjoyed offerings in calligraphy, personal improvement, and cake decorating, all of which were offered again by popular demand. Some eighth graders learned about education from a different perspective as they spent each morning as teachers' aides at St."}
{"id": "milestones198200harp", "title": "Milestones 1982", "year": 1982, "seq": 3, "text": "During the Student Council's Career Week, successful women in professions ranging from medicine to the media presented their views on the different aspects of their careers. Topics raised in formal speeches to the student body continued in informal discussions with students over lunch. In March, two workers at the Rape Center where two Harpeth Hall students had interned over Winterim addressed the student body on this serious subject. At one assembly, the Davidson College Choir demonstrated its talent by performing several popular and classical songs. With the eighth grade participating. Upper School Student Council officer elections were underway by the end of March. In April, the Cum Laude Society of Harpeth Hall initiated its new members; and a meaningful speech delivered by Miss Hensley, the honorary speaker, highlighted this occasion. At a later assembly, select members of the faculty and board were honored by the Harpeth Hall Men's Club. Composition Red and Green, the joint arts week with M.B.A., began at Harpeth Hall with the showing of short film clips, the performance of select scenes of THE CURIOUS SAVAGE, and satirical performances by members of the Gonzo Theater. A part of many days at Harpeth Hall, assemblies enabled the students to relax for a half hour as well as benefit from intellectual enrichment. 136 Faculty Recognition Day On April 14, 1982, the Harpeth Hall Men's Club recognized three ladies for their achievements and contributions to the Harpeth Hall community. Each recipient was awarded a Harpeth Hall chair with an inscription commemorating her services. Barbara Fittz Carden, chairman of the French Department, leader of Winterim student exchange trips to France, and sponsor of the Upper School French Club, was honored for her excellence in classroom teaching and for her concern for students. Bettye Curry Abernathy, the eighth grade algebra teacher, received the same honor for ten years of dedication and superb teaching."}
{"id": "locke-berkeley-hume-central-themes-jonathan-bennett", "title": "Locke, Berkeley, Hume Central Themes, Jonathan Bennett", "year": 1998, "seq": 0, "text": "This is the translation view of language: wishing to share with you something in my mind, I translate it 1Essay III. i. 1-2. into the public medium of articulate sounds; you hear the objective, interpersonal noises that I make, and re-translate them back into something in your mind; and so communication is complete. Thus Locke, explicitly: Man, though he have great variety of thoughts, and such from which others as well as himself might receive profit and delight; yet they are all within his own breast, invisible and hidden from others, nor can of themselves be made to appear. The comfort and advantage of society not being to be had without communication of thoughts, it was necessary that man should find out some external sensible signs, whereof those invisible ideas, which his thoughts are made up of, might be made known to others. . . . Thus we may conceive how words, which were by nature so well adapted to that purpose, came to be 2 made use of by men as the signs of their ideas. = This surely has truth in it. We do have private thoughts which we communicate through language, and when communication succeeds--when you and I attach the same meaning to my words --it is reasonable to say that I, through my words, transmit my thought to you. mm@aVicleslelay) Are you a developer? Try out the HTML to PDF API pdfcrowd.com An important detail: as sentences are built out of words, Locke implies, so 'thoughts' are built of 'ideas'; an idea is an atom of meaning, expressible by a word which is an atom of language. This deserves tolerance too, for is it not natural to say 'His idea of communism is different from mine', for example, meaning 'He does not mean by \"communism\" what I do'?"}
{"id": "locke-berkeley-hume-central-themes-jonathan-bennett", "title": "Locke, Berkeley, Hume Central Themes, Jonathan Bennett", "year": 1998, "seq": 1, "text": "Locke might strengthen the conditions for understanding thus: I understand something by your words if they excite in mea thought which I take to be like the one you used your words to \u2018stand for\u2019. That would be a move in the right direction, since, broadly speaking, what I understand by your words is what I take you to mean by them. But just because the concept of 'hearer'\u2019s meaning\u2019 is in this way dependent upon that of 'speaker's meaning\u2019, Locke's failure with the latter is also a failure with the former. My second criticism of Locke's theory is addressed to a single aspect of it, namely its implying that meaning is something which one does or undergoes while uttering. mm@Vicleslelay) Are you a developer? Try out the HTML to PDF API pdfcrowd.com Because one can utter words without meaning anything by them, \u2018He uttered S and meant something by it' says more than 'He uttered S'. It does not follow, though, that the former statement conjoins a report on one thing he did (uttering) with a report on another thing he did at the same time (meaning). If it did follow, we should have to say that two synchronous activities are reported by 'He criticized Kant and thereby made a fool of himself\u2019 or by 'He gave John ten dollars and thereby discharged his debt'--and that would clearly be wrong. So the conclusion that to utter-and-mean is to do two things at once is not adequately supported by the true premiss that one can utter without meaning. The conclusion is not just inadequately supported, but is false. I proceed to argue this by reductio ad absurdum. If meaning something by what you utter involves uttering while doing or undergoing something else, then the 'something else' must be an /nner activity or process."}
{"id": "locke-berkeley-hume-central-themes-jonathan-bennett", "title": "Locke, Berkeley, Hume Central Themes, Jonathan Bennett", "year": 1998, "seq": 2, "text": "This is just Chomsky's suggestion with the wraps off, and I submit that it is obviously untenable. His phrase 'unconscious mm@)Vicleslelay) Are you a developer? Try out the HTML to PDF API pdfcrowd.com theory of English' is misleading: it suggests that what Chomsky is supposing is indeed \u2018rather like\u2019 the sort of unconscious mental structure to which he alludes at the start of the quoted passage; but really it is not like that to any significant extent. I am not here objecting to anything in Chomsky's suggestion about what is involved in knowing English: for purposes of my present argument I do 'admit that the mind can incorporate unconscious theories\u2019 etc. But I deny that it is therefore 'conceivable' that what we mean by some expression should vastly outrun the limits of our conscious knowledge. Of course, Chomsky's suggestion might be plausible if it were watered down to this: we unconsciously accept a theory of the form 'If x's behaviouris..., then x has whatever mental structure would account for this behaviour\u2019, and we mean by 'x knows English\u2019 something of the form 'x has whatever mental structure would account for his behaviours being .. .'. Iam not sure that this differs significantly from the Wittgensteinian thesis that what we mean by 'x knows English' is just something about how x does behave and how x would behave if... . In any case, the watered-down version cannot be what Chomsky wants to defend: if it were, then the \u2018familiar argument\u2019 could obviously be rebutted without appealing to a further double dose of unconscious theory. Let us now return to my first criticism of Locke's theory. It amounted to this: the theory makes no satisfactory provision for the notion of what is meant or understood by, an utterance; to escape connecting the utterance to the meaning far too loosely, it has to invoke a connexion (\u2018standing for\u2019) which begs too much of the question."}
{"id": "locke-berkeley-hume-central-themes-jonathan-bennett", "title": "Locke, Berkeley, Hume Central Themes, Jonathan Bennett", "year": 1998, "seq": 3, "text": "Quinton, \"'Properties and Classes\", Proceedings of the Aristotelian Society, vol. 58 ( 1957-8). kind--cannot follow any rules or instructions. The instructions must take the form: \u2018Classify x in such and such a way if and only if Fx'; and the novice can follow them only if he already knows how to determine whether Fx. But if he can establish some truth, no matter what, about x, then he is not a novice of the kind we want, for he can already classify without the aid of the proffered rule. A rule for classifying as such, then, could be followed only by someone who did not need it; any such rule must be competence- presupposing. The crucial statement about x which the rule or instructions embodied might be a relational one, but the argument still stands. A relation is just a property of pairs, trios, etc., and so someone who can determine whether Gxy or whether Hxyz is someone who can classify and is therefore not our novice. This use of 'classify' might be arbitrary or wrong in some contexts, but not here. There are no grounds for demanding a technique for monadic classifications--the kind involved in applying adjectives and general nouns to individuals--while assuming that no such aid is needed for dyadic, triadic, etc., classifications of the kind involved in relational statements about pairs, trios, etc., of individuals. mm@Vicleslelay) Are you a developer? Try out the HTML to PDF API pdfcrowd.com The foregoing argument predicts that any supposed rule or technique for classifying will be in some specific way competencepresupposing. This prediction is certainly fulfilled by what I shall call 'universalism\u2019, i.e. the theory that we classify particulars by attending to the universals which they instantiate. 121 want to know whether a given particular, x, is of the same kind as certain others, because I want to know whether to describe x as \u2018green\u2019, say."}
{"id": "locke-berkeley-hume-central-themes-jonathan-bennett", "title": "Locke, Berkeley, Hume Central Themes, Jonathan Bennett", "year": 1998, "seq": 4, "text": "In criticizing attempts to base classifications on an all-purpose technique, I have taken a 'technique' to be something expressible in the form 'If .. ., do A\u2019 which comes into play only if someone's doing A arises from his accepting the conditional and knowing (or thinking, or seeing, etc.) that its antecedent fits his given situation. It was of the essence of my argument that something like knowledge had to be brought to bear upon the antecedent. But there can also be conditionals of the form \u2018If. .., then x does A', not embodying techniques or rules or recipes for doing A, but offering causal explanations of doings of A. A conditional of this sort bears upon my doing A just so long as the conditional is true and its antecedent fits my situation--I needn't accept the conditional or be in any way cognitively or intellectually involved with its antecedent. So a theory might, without circularity, explain every human achievement of classifying or recognizing. In explaining any intellectual feat of someone's, one must start from some fact about him; but this may be a fact about his brain or his bloodstream or his eyes, and need not be a fact about some preliminary intellectual feat which has helped him to the one being explained. Even a theory of this sort might come under fire from someone whose interest is not in human functions but in the Nature of Generality. Some philosophers--probably including Locke--have been inclined to ask 'What makes it possible for generality to be 29Gibson, Locke's Theory of Knowledge, p. 40. imposed upon a world of particulars?\u2019 This seems to demand that our ability to classify mm@aVicleslelay) Are you a developer? Try out the HTML to PDF API pdfcrowd.com be explained, and yet it is plausible to say that even a causal-explanatory theory of classification would subtly beg this question, or pseudo-question."}
{"id": "locke-berkeley-hume-central-themes-jonathan-bennett", "title": "Locke, Berkeley, Hume Central Themes, Jonathan Bennett", "year": 1998, "seq": 5, "text": "I can offer no clear rules or reliable techniques for doing this; but examples may help, and the main purpose of this section is to provide some. (1) Locke was an empiricist about meanings: he held that no classificatory word makes sense to us unless either (2) we have sensorily encountered things to which it applies, or (b) we can define it in terms of words which satisfy (a). I shall discuss this theory, in Hume's version of it, more fully in chapter IX; just now, one aspect of it will serve to illustrate the sensory-intellectual assimilation. According to Locke, one makes sense of a word by associating it with a kind of idea, and ideas are also the items one has in ordinary perception; and so he can drastically oversimplify meaning-empiricism by taking it to say merely that one cannot have ideas in one way without first having them in another. A doctrine which is so complex that no one has yet stated it adequately thus appears to Locke to have the same logical form as the simp/e untruth: 'You cannot see a mm@Vicleslelay) Are you a developer? Try out the HTML to PDF API pdfcrowd.com play without first reading it.' This spurious simplicity of meaning-empiricism probably also increases Locke's confidence in its truth. Any kind of idea must have entered my mind in the first place--ex nihilo nihil fit-which is just to say that it must have entered from the outside, i.e. have first been had in sensory encounters with things. So we find Locke saying: If it shall be demanded then, when a man begins to have any ideas, I think the true answer is,--when he first has any sensation. For, since there appear not to be any ideas in the mind before the senses have conveyed any in, I conceive that ideas in the understanding are coeval with sensation. \u00a9 The words 'there appear not to be' suggest that Locke is offering a tentative empirical conjecture (see \u00a7 47 below)."}
{"id": "locke-berkeley-hume-central-themes-jonathan-bennett", "title": "Locke, Berkeley, Hume Central Themes, Jonathan Bennett", "year": 1998, "seq": 6, "text": "But auditory intensity is just volume; and hearing a tune in the mind's ear is not, for me at least, exactly like hearing it played extremely quietly. Nor, for many people, is seeing something in the mind's eye just like actually seeing it in conditions which give the colours a washed-out appearance. Proposals other than Hume's seem likely to meet the same fate, namely challenge by someone who says 'That is not what the difference is in my case\u2019. The question 'How does one's state when forming an image of a o differ from one's state when perceiving a 6?' may not admit of a general answer. The differences may vary from person to person, or from sense to sense for a single person, or even from time to time with respect to one sense of one person--so that his 'mind's-eye' visual images differ from his visual sense-data sometimes in one way and sometimes in another. Any or all of these possibilities would be consistent with our having a public use for \u2018see in the mind's eye\u2019 and the like, and they would explain our failure to agree on any general account of how the images of imagination differ from those of perception. Anyway, I shall leave it at this: when someone voluntarily forms an image of a 6 he is Significantly like the way he is when he perceives a 9. I suspect that the 'significantly like' cannot be replaced by any one more specific expression; but even if it can-even if it serves merely to hold the place open for a still-undiscovered empirical or analytic theory- -still we can advance from mm@Vicleslelay) Are you a developer? Try out the HTML to PDF API pdfcrowd.com this point to a better grasp of what it is to form an abstract or undetailed image.How much detail can be omitted from an image of a o?"}
{"id": "locke-berkeley-hume-central-themes-jonathan-bennett", "title": "Locke, Berkeley, Hume Central Themes, Jonathan Bennett", "year": 1998, "seq": 7, "text": "The following suggestion (made to me by Michael Tanner) seems right: one can omit from an induced image of a o only such details as one could fail to notice when actually perceiving a o and noticing that it was a o. This suggests an answer to the deeper question of what it is to form an undetailed image of something, i.e. the question of how the third of these relates to the first two: 1. I have an image of a face 2. I have an image of a smiling face 3. I have an image of a face, but not one of a smiling or of an unsmiling face. If we want to translate these in accordance with the anti-reification thesis, while also employing the notion of noticing, the following look plausible: 1. Iam significantly like the way I am when I see a face and notice that it is a face. 2. Iam significantly like the way I am when I see a smiling face and notice that it is a smiling face. 3. Iam significantly like the way I am when I see a face and notice that it is a face but do not notice whether or not it is smiling. I offer those as instances of a general analysis of the notion of abstractness or undetailedness as applied to images. The use of \u2018significantly like' may represent an incompleteness in the analysis; and \u2018notice\u2019 may need to be replaced by something more careful--I have not attended to differences between noticing, being aware of, taking in, etc. But I submit that the analysis solves in principle the problem of what it is for an image to be abstract; that it shows how imagined things, like fictional things, can break the law of excluded middle. (Soberly speaking, no thing breaks that law: \u2018imagined things' and \u2018fictional things' ought not to be reified, are not things.) mm@Vicleslelay) Are you a developer?"}
{"id": "locke-berkeley-hume-central-themes-jonathan-bennett", "title": "Locke, Berkeley, Hume Central Themes, Jonathan Bennett", "year": 1998, "seq": 8, "text": "Try out the HTML to PDF API pdfcrowd.com example, of a supposed key phrase in Locke's metaphysics Berkeley says: To me it is evident those words mark out either a direct contradiction, or else nothing at all. And to convince others of this, I know no readier or fairer way, than to entreat they would calmly attend to their own thoughts: and if by this attention, the emptiness or repugnancy of those expressions does appear, surely nothing more is requisite for their conviction. 48 45Principles, Introduction \u00a7 25. 46First Dialogue, p. 194. 47Second Dialogue, p. 222. 48Principles \u00a7 24. There, in the context of a ground-floor philosophical argument, Berkeley makes an explicit methodological remark betraying wholly Lockean assumptions about meaning. Also here: It is but looking into your own thoughts, and so trying whether you can conceive it possible for a sound, or figure . . . to exist without the mind, or unperceived. This easy trial may make you see, that what you contend for, is a downright contradiction. #2 Nothing would be known about public meanings if Locke were right about them, and so Berkeley cannot actually apply the inaccessible criteria laid down by Locke's theory. Like Are you a developer? Try out the HTML to PDF API pdfcrowd.com everyone else 22 he must base his specific judgements about meanings on criteria which are available to him, i.e. the ones highlighted by Wittgenstein, and this fact naturally Shows up in some things he says. But he does not make anything of these passing nonLockean remarks: he does not see as a live possibility the replacement of an associated-idea theory of meaning by a comprehensive theory which relates meaning to use. In response to a suggested definition of 'matter', for example, Berkeley says: I answer, you may, if so it shall seem good, use the word matter in the same sense, that other men use nothing, and so make those terms convertible in your style."}
{"id": "locke-berkeley-hume-central-themes-jonathan-bennett", "title": "Locke, Berkeley, Hume Central Themes, Jonathan Bennett", "year": 1998, "seq": 9, "text": "Substance BERKELEY attacked Locke's doctrine of material substance, as everyone knows. But Locke had no doctrine of material substance: he was the victim of exegetical and philosophical mistakes initiated by Berkeley and inherited by many later writers. Locke did discuss the concept of substance, and he had a theory of reality. These two bits of work contributed to the hybrid which Berkeley called his theory of 'material substance\u2019; and in this chapter I shall expound them, stressing the issues raised by Berkeley's mistake. In Chapter IV I shall consider the third ingredient in the doctrine of \u2018material substance', namely Locke's theory about primary and secondary qualities. Only then will it be possible, in Chapters V and VI, to focus on the work of Berkeley's which most interests us today, namely his dislodgement of Locke's theory of reality. First, then, the concept of substance. Locke entertained--I would not say adopted--a 1 certain line of thought about substance, which runs as follows. = What concepts are involved in the subject of the statement that The pen in my band is valuable? Certainly, the concepts of being a pen and of being in my hand; but these are not all, for the statement is about a thing which falls under these two concepts. What thing is this? It is the purple thing which I now see; but when I say that the purple thing I now see is a pen and is in my hand, I speak of a thing which is purple etc., and so I have still failed to capture the whole concept of the subject in my original statement. Any further expansion along these lines can only be a delaying action, for it must omit an essential element from the concept of the pen in my hand. What will be missing from any list of descriptive concepts is the concept of a \u2018thing which.. .': this is an /ngredient Are you a developer?"}
{"id": "dark-dominion-04-1994", "title": "Dark Dominion 04 1994", "year": 1994, "seq": 0, "text": "Why was his best friend a bag lady named Mercy? Granted, it was a fas- cinating story, which is par for DEFIANT, but I felt like I had missed something. This was supposed to be the first issue, after all. Anyway, I waited a few weeks, and finally my local comic shop received two boxes of the Zero Issue Trading Cards. After much debate and indecision, I broke down and bought one of the boxes (with the agree- ment that the owner would buy back any unopened packs if I put together the set and had leftovers). At first I decided to open only five packs a day, but within an hour I was frantically cutting open pack after pack after pack, trying to fill in all the blanks of the story. I especially enjoyed the character cards, because a lot of the characters hadn't been introduced in the comic book, and the critters on the backs of those cards were hilarious! (Have they invented a spray to get rid of \u201cSexualice\u201d yet?) As I got through 25 packs, I began to fill in the gaps, while building quite an impressive stack of doubles. Finally, with two packs left to go, I only needed one card to complete a full set. Although the odds of getting that card were ridiculous, I found two copies of it in the first pack I opened! I decided to bring the last pack back to the comic shop for resale, but then, a few hours later, changed my mind and opened it as well. To my surprise, there was a level-two chase card inside! What I'm trying to relate to you with this letter is the fun, excitement, and pleasure that I've gotten from your fan- tastic idea of putting out comics in trading card form."}
{"id": "microprocessoras00lind", "title": "Microprocessor as aircraft monitors", "year": 1977, "seq": 0, "text": "INTRODUCTION When loads are repeatedly applied to a metal specimen , failure can be produced at load levels which would not cause failure with only a single application. In aircraft, flight loads on the wing produced by maneuvers and wind gusts cause the wings to be cyclicly loaded through a random history, making fatigue a matter of serious concern in aircraft design. In actuality, structural fatigue is the factor that determines the life of the airplane and is often the driver in establishing dimensions of structural components. Each airplane of a given type flies such a completely different profile, although designed to perform the same mission, that the loading history is quite unique. As a consequence, there is a need to monitor every airplane and record the number, magnitude and sequence of the repeated loads. This requirement can be nicely fulfilled through application of an onboard microprocessor data acquisition system. The system which was developed is comprised of two major subsystems: the WRITE subsystem and the READ subsystem. The WRITE subsystem is tasked with the airborne collection of data. It makes use of a microprocessor, various components for signal processing, a magnetic tape recorder, and a strain gage network to monitor strain-generated signals, identify significant events, and record the collected data. The READ subsystem is tasked with the retrieval of the data from the WRITE subsystem recorder. A desk-top calculator and cassette tape reader accomplish this task, which includes the read-back of the magnetic tape, the pre-processing of data, and the operation of a data file retrieval system. A prototype system has been built and tested by controlling input signals and comparing them with the output which was retrieved. Consistent data correlation indicated that the system is feasible. The employment of the system, as envisioned, is discussed herein, as well as the options which already exist with the rapid advance of microcomputer technology."}
{"id": "microprocessoras00lind", "title": "Microprocessor as aircraft monitors", "year": 1977, "seq": 1, "text": "Peripheral Inputs The header switch is a two-position toggle switch used to advance the tape beyond its leader and to write identifying information at the beginning of the tape. Activating the switch advances the tape, ensuring that the tape leader does not interfere with the recording process. This also provides a blank portion at the beginning of the magnetic tape and further reduces the uncertainty involved in locating the recorded data when attempting to read it back. Deactivation of the switch causes the header information to be written on the tape, and the system enters the data collection mode. The thumbwheel switches are a series of six, 10-position switches. The six switches allow the 6-digit aircraft bureau number to be indicated. These switches then become a source for identifying information to be included in the header. The weight-on-wheels switch is a two-position switch, which indicates that the aircraft is on deck or airborne by sensing the extension of the landing gear oleo. The switch is activated while the oleo is compressed, which indicates to the system that a removal of power may be imminent. The system responds by recording the data which are located in the volatile RAM to prevent its loss upon removal of power to the system. Software Package The WRITE system software package is a single program of instructions for the 8008 CPU. The total number of instructions is less than 1000 words, which are stored in the four PROMs of the MPS-803 microprocessor. The pro- gram was written in PL/M, a higher-level programming language for micropro- cessors, and coverted to 8008 instructions by the PLM8 compiler, a resident program on the Naval Postgraduate School IBM-360 computer. The INTELLEC 8 microcomputer was used as the means for programming the PROMs and was also used as a developmental tool to simulate the MPS-803 microprocessor, since both utilize the 8008 CPU and 8008 instruction set."}
{"id": "microprocessoras00lind", "title": "Microprocessor as aircraft monitors", "year": 1977, "seq": 2, "text": "The first step of the poogram starts an initialization process which assigns the desired initial values for various variables used later in the program. Because the program operates by comparing successive signal inputs, the initialization provides for the first sampling of each channel to be stored in order to establish a basis of comparison for subsequent samplings. After initialization the system enters a repetitive process , which will con- tinue until the removal of power. The header switch is examined to determine its status. If it has been activated, the recorder motor drive is energized to advance the tape for approximately nine seconds, which is sufficient to ensure that the head of the recorder is positioned beyond the tape leader. Upon deactivation of the header switch, the thumbwheel switches are examined and the header information derived is recorded on the tape. The weight-on-wheels switch is then examined. An activated switch in- dicating the aircraft is on deck causes a programmatic timer to be started which provides for the recording of data at intervals of 30-35 seconds in order to prevent loss of data in RAM upon removal of power. An airborne indication results in the normal continuation of the program, which provides for the recording of data only when the RAM capacity has been exceeded. After the switches have been examined, the signal input channels are multiplexed. Each channel's signal is compared with its previous sample. If, as a result of this comparison, it is determined that no changes have occurred; then, the program continues by re-examining the header and weight- on-wheels switches and re-sampling the signal input channels repetitively until a change is identified. The change of a signal is the first indication that an event may be strain significant. The sign of the slope of the change is determined and compared with the sign of the slope of the previous change."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1998-04-30", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1998-04-30 : Volume 96, Issue 21", "year": 1998, "seq": 0, "text": "Harrison\u2019s team walked away as the fourth-place novice team at the tournament. The team of Wiser and Chini attained the first-place novice award and ninth place over\u00ac all. Additionally, Chini took the third-place novice speaker award and Wiser won the first-place novice speaker award. Middlebury sent two teams to the Columbia University Tourna-' ment held from October 31-No\u00ac vember 1. Wiser and Adil Husain \u201801 placed eighth out of the 20 novice teams competing. Novices Wiser and Husain upset a highly favored team from Co\u00ac lumbia Law School which made them the talk of the tournament. Wiser placed sixth in individual rankings out of 52 novice speakers. Gabe McCrary \u201900 and Dwayne Nash \u201999 pulled a surprising upset against Massachusetts Institute of Technology. Chini, McCrary, Harrison and first-time debater Darin Sands \u201900 led Middlebury on the first trip north of the border, to the Couni- han Cup at Concordia University in Canada on November 14-16. The Counihan Cup was a Worlds\u2019 Prep tournament, with eight-person British-style debate, and provided Middlebury debaters with valuable experience. At Brown University on Novem\u00ac ber 21-22, Husain and Wiser set out alone to defend the honor of Middlebury. Results from this tournament were never received. At the North American Debat\u00ac ing Championships at McGill Uni\u00ac versity on January 29-February 1st, Wiser, Harrison and Chini led Middlebury. The team of Wiser and Chini placed forty-ninth out of 84 teams present. Middlebury sent its largest group of the year to Georgetown University on February 7-8 and there \u201cbroke\u201d into the quarterfinal rounds for the first time. Sands and Chini went 4-1 in The Middlebury debate team has enjoyed a challenging yet successful year. Retirement means little to Martin By Kate Barch Staff Writer In 1997, Professor Edward Mar\u00ac tin, known to his friends and col\u00ac leagues as Sandy, announced his re\u00ac tirement."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1998-04-30", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1998-04-30 : Volume 96, Issue 21", "year": 1998, "seq": 1, "text": "It\u2019s a good thing he\u2019s working 50 hours a week, buying-out small scale farms for Cargill International so he can afford such prestige. Perhaps I\u2019m being a bit harsh, but from those I\u2019ve met in the back- country riding in planes like that called SGA representatives and asked them if they knew enough about the case. Now, if the pro\u00ac ceedings at that hearing were meant to be impartial, with each case presented by each side so that members could make a objective decision, why was this petition passed out? If SGA members were going to hear each side of the story anyway, why Were those phone calls made? And so how am I supposed to have faith in the procedures of my student govern\u00ac ing body when one of its own rep\u00ac resentatives does not even have faith in it? I will not leave that question open for you to answer - I cannot. That being said, I know that one person could not have swayed the entire SGA. The fact of the matter is most SGA members had their minds made up before the proceedings even began. What members who voted against Lela\u2019s resignation saw that night was a young woman, a senior who had five weeks left in school, and they said to themselves, \u201cHow can we ruin this woman\u2019s life? She made a mistake.\u201d Lela also said that work- and dressed as he is, I\u2019d put my money on not being too far off. I flip through the pages only to further my disgust. The stories are all about these corporate hooligans on their fairy-tale escapes. Worst of all, the climax of the stories all describe the quantitative informa\u00ac tion of their catch, but don\u2019t even touch on the qualitative."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1998-04-30", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1998-04-30 : Volume 96, Issue 21", "year": 1998, "seq": 2, "text": "One hundred years after the Civil War, which supposedly reaffirmed of this months past events) back on route to the aforementioned goals that we all agreed to make an attempt to reach upon ou^ enrollment or employment at Middlebury College. The events during the month of April either brought to light or began a situation on campus that has impeded our path towards the goals of a true Middlebury educa\u00ac tion. The Middlebury College Mission was also destroyed by the events of the month of April. There are students, myself includ\u00ac ed, that have had their ability for freedom of discussion (or speech, depending on your view) limited by these past events. Who is at fault in this situation is of no con\u00ac sequence to me at this point in time (we are well past that). What does matter, is the fact that while students roam freely throughout the campus, issues that affect all of us, should not be issues that separate us. We attend this institution of higher learning for the purpose of broadening our minds, and broadening our expe\u00ac diences. Open discussion and working together on problem solving within a diverse community is the only way to achieve any form of higher learning. However, the ways of reaching higher learning the United States Constitution\u2019s claim that \u201call men are created equal,\u201d African Americans stood up to white America and won. It was a battle fought in the court\u00ac rooms and the universities and even in the White House itself. It was not a revolution, it was an evolution long past due. But at the same time, it had a great many revolutionary ele\u00ac ments to it. Riots, demonstra\u00ac tions, assassinations... it was not a safe nor a pretty time to be politi\u00ac cally active in America. The judges, the politicians, and the educators of the time could not ignore this, and it seems to stand to reason that the \u201crevolution\u201d in America spurred the \u201cevolution\u201d of American law and politics."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1998-04-30", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1998-04-30 : Volume 96, Issue 21", "year": 1998, "seq": 3, "text": "At the same time, wind was spreading radiation throughout Ukraine, Russia and Belarus taking the lives of more than 7,000 people. Not until the Swedes noticed a dramatic increase in radiation in some parts of Sweden (700 miles away from Chernobyl) did the communist government of the Soviet Union admit the disaster. Had the wind blown on to Soviet Asia, the world would never have known about the tragedy. During the week that followed the accident, neither the citizens of Ukraine, nor those of Russia received any kind of warning or advice on precautions. Only on the third day was the population of the nearby villages and towns evacuated, but this delay was fatal in the extreme. Almost 800 chil\u00ac dren in the contaminated regions had developed thyroid cancer, and several thousands had been committed to hospitals for coun\u00ac seling and treatment of emotional trauma. As many as 65 million people in Russia received doses of radia\u00ac tion, and as many as 7,000 died immediately. Ukraine\u2019s capital, Kiev, a city of four million people, located 80 miles away from the (see Dubok, page 10) Thomas apologizes for racial assualts, ignorance What really made me start thinking deeply about the current issues now swamping this paper was one of the flyers that was dis\u00ac tributed by the Student Coalition Emily Thomas \u201998 for Community. At the top of the list, at the top of the page, it said, \u201cTwo women last year were called \u201cniggers\u201d by another student; no judicial action was taken.\u201d Reading this made my jaw drop, because I was involved in this incident. It occurred outside of the Mill, during my term as presi\u00ac dent in the spring of 1997.1 want to apologize again to the students (in my recollection there were three) who, while passing by my social house, were verbally assaulted by someone (a non\u00ac member) leaving a party there."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1998-04-30", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1998-04-30 : Volume 96, Issue 21", "year": 1998, "seq": 4, "text": "Professor Cornwall is an outspoken member of the queer community here and moqa values his voice, but in no way can that be construed as direct affiliation with or spokesmanship for moqa. The two Student apologizes for bomb threat, stupidity (continued from page 6) have calmed myself down and told the truth then and there. I did not, and that was also wrong of me. The moments when I should have acted rationally were preceisely the moments when I acted com\u00ac pletely irrationally: I acted in a cavalier manner throughout the morning (I suppose in order to cover up my guilty conscience at having inconvenienced and scared so many people). My behavior was inappropriate, no matter what the circumstances; I should have acted very differently from the way I did. Fortunately, no one was hurt as a result of my actions. I confessed by about 1 p.m. that day\u2014some seven hours after the alarm had been pulled, but by then the incident had become more than a college matter, and I became a police suspect. The police did not overreact in any way; I understand why people would believe that I acted mali\u00ac ciously\u2014after all, I kept the full truth from the authorities for seven full hours. Two days later, I was having my mug shot taken and I got finger\u00ac printed. On Monday, April 20, 1998, I was arraigned at the Addison County Court House on this misdemeanor charge: initiat\u00ac ing a false bomb threat knowing that it would likely cause the evac\u00ac uation of Le Chateau. Some members of the College community were directly inconve\u00ac nienced by my actions. They became involved in what was, for them, a potentially life-threatening situation. I would like to apologize to my dorm-mates, the Residential Life Office staff, Campus Security, the Provost\u2019s \u00a9ffice, the Dean of Students\u2019 Office, my teachers, and the rest of College community."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1998-04-30", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1998-04-30 : Volume 96, Issue 21", "year": 1998, "seq": 5, "text": "Some of you are very disappointed in me. I hope that I shall never dis\u00ac appoint you again, and I hope that I can work to slowly regain the past trust you placed in me. I have learned my lesson as a result of my stupid actions and inconsiderate behavior. I have become much more aware of the consequences of my speeches and deeds as a result of this incident; I have thought long and hard about my lack of common sense and about taking full responsibility for my actions; I have reflected on the way I interact with people, and on how I react to difficult situations. I made a terrible mistake. What one intends as a joke is not always per\u00ac ceived as a joke (e.g. telling a bomb joke in an airport or on an air\u00ac plane). I understand why people would think I was malicious. My irresponsible and even deceitful behavior could lead them to think that. I take full responsibility for their mistrust of me and my inten\u00ac tions. To the community at large, I again offer my sincere apologies. The lessons that I have learned these past weeks will remain with me for the rest of my life. These lessons will make me a better and more responsible individual. I only wish that there would have been a more appropriate and an earlier opportunity for me to have learned them\u2014perhaps there was, but it took this jolt for me to real\u00ac ize it. I\u2019m sorry that these hard- learned lessons came at the expense of so many other people. The self-reflection that I have been compelled to make this late in my College career has been the most intense in my four years here. I never fully realized until now how much.I still have to learn in order to become a truly serious and fully responsible person and citizen."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1998-04-30", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1998-04-30 : Volume 96, Issue 21", "year": 1998, "seq": 6, "text": "In regard to a question of popu\u00ac lar opinion, McCardell says, \u201cThat may be the opinion of one hundred people who gathered on a sunny day prompted by a specific group.....\u201d (emphasis ours) We must assume that President McCardell is referring here to moqa since in all previous instances the \u201cparticular group\u201d he refers to is moqa. And again, this assertion is erroneous, moqa did not in any way initiate the Rally. The impetus for the creation of that particular public forum was a discussion in a Women\u2019s Studies class which included straight, white, queer, and black students. To address an earlier point, that this response \u201cwas coming less vigor\u00ac ously and vehemently and publicly from the students of color than from other groups,\u201d we would like to say that, yes this is true and that this should in no way be used to slight support for the Rally. One reason is that the students of color had already made a very powerful pub\u00ac lic statement at the forum spon\u00ac sored by The Campus and the SGA. The other reason is that the women from that class who organized the Rally, and the students who partici\u00ac pated in it, took the initiative to step up to the challenge that it is time for others in the community to help shoulder the burden of fighting for recognition for students of color. They reailzed that it is not, in fact, the job of minority students to edu\u00ac cate the rest of the student body. It is the job of every individual on campus to educate themselves, to make everyone\u2019s issues their own, and to take responsibility for creat- ing change. After several columns of print where no mention of the Rally, nor of moqa, has been made, McCardell says, \u201c Your private lives are your private matter, like your sexual ori\u00ac entation."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1998-04-30", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1998-04-30 : Volume 96, Issue 21", "year": 1998, "seq": 7, "text": "Why should someone\u2019s sexual orientation be thrust in your face.....\u201d In response, we would like to pose several questions for the President to consider: Do you wear a wedding ring? Do you have a pic\u00ac ture of you and your wife, or of your wife and children, on your office desk or wall? Did your wife take your last name in marriage? do you ever attend official functions as a couple? Do you mention your wife, your marriage, or your wedding anniversary in casual conversation? These are all public expressions of sexual orientation\u2014in this particu\u00ac lar case, they happen to be expres\u00ac sions of the heterosexual orienta- (see MOQA page 11) D\u2019Avella defends Campus majority (continued from page 7) ligence. And what of Frank Pandolfe. Well, he was voted to be removed but, that decision lies in the hands of Lela Moore. If you want to know why he has not been removed, as Dave Thomas asked the night of the hearing, ask Lela Moore. Now that I have gotten many people riled up, let\u2019s address what some people may be thinking. 1. The majority of the editorial staff is just trying to save face and find a scapegoat. The definition of scapegoating is blaming someone without justification. First of all, find another word or phrase because there is ample justifica\u00ac tion for blame here. The editor is constitutionally positioned to accept blame. Second of all, we have always believed that remov\u00ac ing Lela Moore would not solve race issues on this campus or that it would cleanse our reputation and restore trust in The Campus. But, by failing to be an effective leader and by neglecting her defined obligations as editor-in- chief, we felt she should not be running the mouthpiece of Middlebury. 2. Viscount Mostar Baron Belgrade Damjan de Krnjevic y Miscovic \u201998, SGA voting mem\u00ac ber, asked the question that.Tf the issue was anything else but race, would this have gone so far."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1998-04-30", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1998-04-30 : Volume 96, Issue 21", "year": 1998, "seq": 8, "text": "Never underestimate Thank you to Stephanie Hunt and you to every member of the teaching me how to deal with the you to Community Council for the power of protest, but never Nick Lauriat for helping me create General Assembly who wrote a devil. Thank you to John Bertolini helping me do it. Thank you to underestimate the power of the the Web page that I haven\u2019t bill this year like you were sup- for managing to keep my comic anyone who wasn\u2019t afraid to make system either. After this year, I touched since September. Thank posed to, and everlasting damna- book safe for an entire year, a little noise for the right reasons, suppose I can come out of the you to Dave Thomas, who is not tion to those of you who didn\u2019t. Thank you to John Elder for being Thank you to Mom and Dad closet as an idealist. the founder of Wendy\u2019s but man- Thank you to the Weird Sisters John Elder. Thank you to Stephen for unwavering support and for My definition of an idealist is aged a damn fine cookout despite \u2014 Jon Howard, Clark Freeman, Donadio for giving me a reason to being the best role models the one who works towards a better that, as well as all the Monks, hon- Matt Longman, and Alex come\u2019 to faculty meetings. Thank Reverend President could wish future which s/he never expects to orary Monks, and non-cloistered Zwerdling \u2014 for keeping me sane you to Carla Mortensen for reas- for. Thank you to Steve and Sarah live to see. Whether you express persons who paid for it and and letting Mister Sister say the suring me that I have marketable for putting up with your older that by saying that you have a staffed it."}
{"id": "middleburyNewspapers_1998-04-30", "title": "Middlebury Campus 1998-04-30 : Volume 96, Issue 21", "year": 1998, "seq": 9, "text": "David Barreda Mountain surroundings provide a serene and cozy location for the College. ing. The level of apathy that most students seemed to share after the MOQA closet was destroyed during coming-out-week shocked me. The same incident at Swarthmore would' have been followed with a drastical\u00ac ly different response. I decided to apply for a transfer. I believed that Swarthmore was the place where I could grow intel\u00ac lectually, where I would be sur\u00ac rounded by students who would force me to expand my views. That weird quality in the students was something that I craved. I wanted to be challenged every day by my classmates, something that was not happening at Middlebury where I felt so comfortable. Since then, I have changed my mind about this school. My impres\u00ac sion of Middlebury students was based entirely on a small group of people with whom I spent most of my time. Once I made that realiza\u00ac tion and decided to attend more lec\u00ac tures, music performances, open fo\u00ac rums, and discussions, I saw a different Middlebury. Sure, many of us wear North Face jackets (under\u00ac standable considering Vermont winters), sure, many of us came straight out of a J. Crew catalog (for this there is no excuse). But we are a diverse community; you just have to look a little deeper into people. We can be challenged by our classmates, in and out of the class\u00ac room. This school has massive con\u00ac centrations of potentially-gifted stu\u00ac dents, dedicated, caring professors, and state-of-the-art facilities. Once I learned to take advantage of these resources, I realized how much I could do in my four years here. I am glad that I am at Middle\u00ac bury and I know I made the right decision. After all, there are much better looking girls here."}
{"id": "modelofcareerori00lens", "title": "A model of career orientation for military Nurse Corps Officers.", "year": 1984, "seq": 0, "text": "In a recent review of 12 civilian and military turnover Stolzenberg and Winkler discussed the importance of gender in turnover studies. In studies of the civilian sector, \"Gender... as a significant demographic factor, is held to have a significant impact on the extent to which workers quit in response to their job or personal characteristics\" [Ref. 9: p. 37]. However, these authors then ignore this variable in their review of mili- tary turnover research. Although females represent less than nine percent of the military population, current plans propose to increase their numbers in the near future [Ref. 10]. Furthermore, most nurses are females. Therefore, studies of the factors which affect retention of a predominantly female group should be of interest to the military's decision makers. Military nurses have specialized skills and training which were primarily acquired outside the military. The nature of basic nursing education is recognized by civilian health care institutions. Consequently, the skills and training of military nurses are usually readily transferable to civilian nursing jobs. This is not necessarily true for most military officer personnel. A better understanding of the career decision making process for military officers in different occupational groupings would assist manpower plan- ners and policy makers to tailor personnel policies and accommodate for the differences which may exist in the career orientation of the diverse military occupational groups . Studies of nursing turnover and retention have described several factors which result in an individual's intention to leave a job. Most of these studies have been descriptive in nature and not prescriptive. They describe the demographic characteristics or the job attributes of nurses who leave or who intend to leave an organization. Some of the studies of nursing turnover include registered nurses as well as 13 para-nursing personnel such as nursing aides, orderlies and licensed practical nurses in the population sample."}
{"id": "modelofcareerori00lens", "title": "A model of career orientation for military Nurse Corps Officers.", "year": 1984, "seq": 1, "text": "TURNOVER TAXONOMY Turnover is measured as the number of persons hired within a period to replace those leaving or dropped from the working force. This meaning connotes a cyclical phenomena which is measured by a numerical ratio.. Price has defined turnover as, \"...the degree of individual movement across the membership boundary of a social system\" [Ref. 12: p. 4]. Implicit in this definition is the movement of an individual instead of an organization. The word 'movement' is a key to turnover as a dynamic concept, a flow of individuals. 15 Initially, turnover may be classified into a category of behaviors called 'withdrawal behaviors'. Other forms of withdrawal behaviors include absenteeism and tardiness. Muchinsky and Tuttle have suggested that some forms of with- drawal may act as a substitute for turnover it is difficult for the individual to leave the organization [Ref. 13]. Steers has suggested that these forms of behavior act as an escape from a dissatisfying job [Ref. 14]. In addition to absenteeism and tardiness, withdrawal behavior includes alcoholism, drug abuse, sabotage and work slow downs. Although this thesis considers only the intention to leave or remain in the military, the other forms of substitute behavior should be of special interest to organizations such as the military in which the members incur a very binding contractual constraint. In many cases the individual is unable to leave prior to the end of his contract without incurring severe disciplinary action. Perhaps the most common disaggregation of turnover is into voluntary and involuntary categories. If the indi- vidual 'quits' or 'resigns' the turnover is voluntary. Involuntary turnover is usually initiated by the organiza- tion. Forms of involuntary turnover include dismissals, layoffs, and retirements. Price, on the other hand, cautions against using a totally dichotomous view of turn- over and gives the examples of a wife who leaves at her husband's insistance."}
{"id": "modelofcareerori00lens", "title": "A model of career orientation for military Nurse Corps Officers.", "year": 1984, "seq": 2, "text": "This turnover is really initiated by the marriage partner. Involuntary turnover has been defined as, \"...a residual concept that refers to all movement not initiated by the member\" [Ref. 12: p. 9]. Seybolt et al. have reported that although some turnover is unavoidable, 64 percent to 75 percent of nursing personnel turnover is asso- ciated with voluntary causes [Ref. 15]. The assumption is frequently made that turnover is 'bad', i.e. it is dysfunctional for the organization. 16 Dysfunctional turnover is described as occurring when an individual leaves but the organization in which he is a member wants him to stay. Functional turnover occurs when the individual wants to leave an organization and his leaving may actually benefit the organization [Ref. 16]. Although functional turnover may also represent a cost to the organization, it is seen in the long run as a positive factor. Dalton et al. [Ref. 16] propose still another view in the taxonomy of the turnover phenomena by differentiating voluntary turnover into controllable and uncontrollable turnover. If the purpose of the turnover research is to enable the organization to reduce voluntary turnover, the assumption is made that turnover is under the control of the organization. It is also frequently assumed that voluntary turnover is caused by job dissatisfaction. This may not always be the case. Employees leave the organization for reasons other than job dissatisfaction. These authors give the example of individuals who leave to further their educa- tion, for family commitments, or for health matters. The question posed is whether or not this type of turnover is under the control of the organization even though it is voluntary in nature. If it is not under organizational control, should data about these voluntary leavers be grouped with data about the voluntary leavers whose termi- nation is caused by job dissatisfaction? According to these researchers, voluntary turnover does not sufficiently define the variable."}
{"id": "modelofcareerori00lens", "title": "A model of career orientation for military Nurse Corps Officers.", "year": 1984, "seq": 3, "text": "Therefore, it may be necessary to identify that part of voluntary turnover which is controllable. On the other hand, it seems that uncontrollable turnover may really be a disguise for controllable turnover. In Dalton' s example those individuals who leave for health matters may have developed health problems from job related causes. For example, job stress has been known to lead to 17 numerous medical problems including high blood pressure, strokes, heart attacks, as well as psychological disorders. Individuals who leave for family commitments may have found that job related conditions, such as unrealistic schedules or unnecessary shift rotations, interfere with family commitments. These are aspects of a job which could be changed. Finally, turnover caused by a need to further one's education may be readily solved by tuition assistance programs or changes in work schedules so that the employer does not have to recruit, hire, and train a new person. Several organizations, including the military, \"grow\" their personnel to fit the organizations needs for future manpower requirements in an attempt to keep the trained reliable worker who has demonstrated leadership, loyalty, and commit- ment through past performance. Turnover has been studied from various units of analysis and from multiple conceptual frameworks. It is considered to be an individual as well as an aggregate phenomena. As an aggregate phenomena, relationships are found between turnover rates and the level of economic activity, occupa- tional group, organization, industry, as well as geographic area [Ref. 12]. Each individual turnover occurrence is tallied for an annual period. The sum of these numbers represents an aggregate phenomena of interest to the military . A final note on the definition of the turnover concept is concerned with the measurement of turnover. One of the difficulties encountered with evaluating research on turn- over or empirical research on retention is to determine what measure of turnover was used in a particular study."}
{"id": "modelofcareerori00lens", "title": "A model of career orientation for military Nurse Corps Officers.", "year": 1984, "seq": 4, "text": "Expectancy theory developed by Vroom which utilizes a general cognitive framework to view the individual decision [Ref. 20] . 2. Causal models developed by Price of processes leading to voluntary separation using antecedents of job satisfaction [Ref. 12]. 3. Causal models of the space between job satisfaction and voluntary separations developed by Mobley et al. [Ref. 21]. 4. Research by Porter et al. on antecedents and conse- quences of a single variable, organization commitment [Ref. 22]. With the exception of expectancy theory which was used as an underlying cognitive framework for many of the models, most models of the turnover process deal with similar exogenous and endogenous variables. The primary differences appear to be in the sequencing of the causal order of variables and in the amount of variance in actual turnover behavior or inten- tion to leave explained by the various antecedents and intervening variables. Expectancy theory states that the attractiveness of an outcome (valence) and the perceived probability that a given behavior will lead to a specified outcome (expectancy) are multiplied together to determine the motivation for a person to act. Motivation to act = Expectancy X Valence A second cognitive framework for understanding voluntary turnover has been utilized by Stolzenberg and Winkler [Ref. 9] in describing voluntary turnover from military 21 service. This framework is based on Thibaut and Kelley's [Ref. 23] model of behavior of individuals who are thought to evaluate their experiences in groups, such as military organizations, according to the costs and benefits involved in maintaining membership in the group. The primary concepts involve a comparison level or CL, and a comparison level for alternatives, CLalt. Comparison level is \"...the standard by which the person evaluates the rewards and costs of a given relationship in terms of what he feels he deserves.\" The comparison level of alternatives is \"...the lowest level of outcomes a member will accept in light of alternative opportunities\" [Ref. 23 :p. 21-22]."}
{"id": "modelofcareerori00lens", "title": "A model of career orientation for military Nurse Corps Officers.", "year": 1984, "seq": 5, "text": "Stolzenberg has summarized the Thibaut-Kelley model as follows, The key point about the CL is that it determines whether or not workers are happy with their jobs, but it does not determine whether or not they leave them. The key feature of the CLalt is that it determines whether or not workers leave their jobs. but not whether or not they are happy with them. Accordingly, workers some- times leave jobs that they like, or stay in jobs that they do not like, depending upon the relative magnitudes of the CI and CLalt {Ref. 9: p. 8]. According to these authors , previous turnover research has focused on the comparison levels (CL), but future research should focus on identifying which job characteristics workers use when forming their comparison levels of alterna- tives (Clalt). Decisions to leave an organization will occur only when the attraction of the worker's present job drops below the comparison level for alternative jobs. Therefore, information about specific job characteristics which an employee uses in developing the CLalt may be espe- cially valuable for policy makers. The second cluster of turnover studies was developed by Price using path analytic techniques which attempted to determine causal sequencing of turnover antecedents. The Price model of turnover was developed and tested on nurses. 22 The following section of this thesis deals with nurse reten- tion and turnover. Consequently, the Price model will be discussed in greater detail in that section on models of turnover for nurses . The Mobley et al. model of turnover published in 1979 (henceforth called the 'Mobley model') is a comprehensive and sophisticated conceptual model of the turnover process.2 The purpose of the model is to identify factors which initiate the individual person's intention to leave an organization. The model attempts to understand variables involved in the complex relationships between job-related and non job-related factors that initiate the individual's decision making process."}
{"id": "modelofcareerori00lens", "title": "A model of career orientation for military Nurse Corps Officers.", "year": 1984, "seq": 6, "text": "The models previously discussed demonstrate the complexity of the turnover phenomena and the need for multivariate analyses to enable a better understanding of the variables which affect the turn- over process. The following review of studies on nurse retention and turnover will concentrate primarily on those published studies which utilized a multivariate approach to the problem. Weisman investigated organizational and non- organizational determinants of turnover in a twelve month longitudinal study of approximately 1000 staff nurses in two university affiliated hospitals. The conceptual framework was a causal sequence in which turnover was the result of individual characteristics, job attributes and work organi- zations. This framework is given in Figure 2.3. The vari- ables representing personal attributes included marital status, length of employment, number of children, first hospital position, baccalaureate degree, and internal control. Sex was not an attribute in this study because 97 percent of the sample was female. Job attributes included overtime worked, rotating shifts, position level, work load, proportion of baccalaureate nurses on the unit, proportion of nurses on the unit who were in their first position, head nurse responsiveness, communication with head nurse, and adequacy of time for professional development. Exogenous variables used as the dependent and intervening variables were autonomy, job satisfaction, intent to leave, and turnover. [Ref. 27] 28 Personal Attributes Job-Related Attributes > Turnover Intent to Leave Autonomy ^ Job Satisfaction Figure 2.3 Weisman's Theoretical Model. The framework shown in Figure 2.3 was tested using a series of regression equations. Findings indicated that the sequential decisions which lead to turnover include perceived autonomy, job satisfaction, and intent to leave. The only significant direct effects on turnover were intent to leave and short job tenure. The findings at both hospi- tals were quite similar indicating that the group of vari- ables had the same predictive power to both settings. Turnover increased the shorter the employment tenure and the greater the number of job hunts."}
{"id": "modelofcareerori00lens", "title": "A model of career orientation for military Nurse Corps Officers.", "year": 1984, "seq": 7, "text": "Job satisfaction predicted intent to leave and autonomy predicted job satisfaction. Perception of responsiveness of the head nurse was the strongest predictor of autonomy. The authors concluded the 29 turnover \"...appears to create a vicious cycle, as turnover necessitates hiring new nurses to replace resigners who in turn are at high risk for resignations\" [Ref. 27: p. 440]. Although the external environment was not included in the study design, it was noted to be an important factor in turnover \"...as available job opportunities affect job hunting and job switching\" [Ref. 27: p. 440]. Commitment predictors of nursing personnel's intent to leave was studied by Martin using a sample of registered nurses, licensed practical nurses, and ward secretaries employed in a small rural hospital. Commitment is thought to increase organizational effectiveness by reducing turn- over. However, the concept of commitment can have several definitions. Four facets of the concept include community, career, organizational and job commitment. Community commitment is an attitudinal loyalty to one's geographic area. Career commitment involves a desire to adhere to a series of positions and increased responsibilities in one's occupation. Definitions of organizational commitment abound. Martin defined it as \"...the degree of attitudinal dedication to the social institution where one's occupa- tional skills are regularly performed [Ref. 28: p. 1150]. Job commitment is the disposition toward a set of work tasks, given one's current occupation. Each of the above aspects of the commitment concept were measured by a 44 item questionnaire which also included a measure of intent to leave. Multiple regression techniques were used to determine the importance of each predictor on intentional behavior by determining the decrease in R-square which resulted when a predictor was removed from the equa- tion, and then testing the equation to determine its signif- icance. Results indicated that only job commitment was predictive of intent to leave."}
{"id": "modelofcareerori00lens", "title": "A model of career orientation for military Nurse Corps Officers.", "year": 1984, "seq": 8, "text": "Possible implications of this study may be that turnover may be decreased by 30 developing increased employee job commitment [Ref. 28]. However, the diversity of the sample population and size (110 nursing personnel) detract from any generalizations to a military nurse population or even to an all nurse popula- tion in the civilian sector. In a longitudinal study of approximately 1,110 non- supervisory nurses, Price and Mueller tested a causal model of voluntary nursing turnover. The variables which were identified are listed and defined in Table 2. An interpre- tation of the pluses and minuses in Figure 2.4 is that increased opportunity would increase turnover and an increase in routinization would decrease job satisfaction. The relationships in the model are depicted in Figure 2.4 Job satisfaction and intent are intervening variables between the determinants and turnover. The only determinant which has a direct effect on turnover was the availability of alternative jobs as defined by the opportunity variable [Ref. 29]. Seven determinants have an indirect effect on turnover through job satisfaction. All variables increase satisfaction with the exception of routinization. Three variables have a direct effect on intent to stay. Professionalism and generalized training variables relate to the strength of an individual's dedication to role standards and socialization and have a negative effect on intent to stay. Intent to stay is included as one indicator of commitment. Kinship responsibilities increase intent to stay. Data was collected using a questionnnaire which requested information on the factors listed in Table 2. Additionally, information was collected on age, length of service, and amount of time worked (whether full time or part time). The number of nurses who had voluntarily left 15 months after completing the questionnaire was determined. 31 TABLE 2 Price's Determinants and Intervening Variables Variable Opportunity Rout inizat ion Participation Instrumental Communication Integration Pay Distributive Justice Promotional Opportunity Professionalism General Training Kinship Responsibility Definition The availability of alterna- tivefjobs in the organiza- tion's environment."}
{"id": "modelofcareerori00lens", "title": "A model of career orientation for military Nurse Corps Officers.", "year": 1984, "seq": 9, "text": "Several factors related to retention or loss of novice Army nurses were studied based on the March-Simon inducement- contribution balance theory of organ- izational participation. The novice Army nurse was defined as a former member of the Army Student Nurse Program whose first nursing employment was with the Army. The sample consisted of nurses who had no more than four months remaining in their initial two-year or three-year Army commitment at the time of the data collection. The purpose of the study was to determine the relationship between expressed intention to remain in or to leave the military service and the expressed satisfaction with selected working and living experiences, controlling for importance, alterna- tives, and perceived ease of movement from the organization [Ref. 30]. Approximately 180 novice nurses completed a question- naire which contained biographical data, an index which determined ease of movement, and a 30 item index of working 35 and living experience data which was rated on three separate scales, importance to the individual, satisfaction with the Army and opportunity for satisfaction in a civilian job as compared to the Army. The respondents were grouped into two dicotomous groups according to their intention to stay or leave after completing their obligation. A second dicoto- mous groups consisted of the respondents perception of the degree of difficulty in moving from the Army into a civilian life and in finding the type of job he would like. Results of the research indicated that stayers were more satisfied than leavers (p<.001). Groups who perceived more difficulty in moving from the Army to civilian life were also more satisfied. However, the lack of significant interaction between satisfaction and perceived mobility indicated that the difference in satisfaction did not depend on the perceived ease of movement. Additionally, significant differences were found between stayers and leavers in perceived opportunity for satisfaction with alternatives."}
{"id": "mysticism-of-guru-nanak", "title": "Mysticism of Guru Nanak", "year": 1973, "seq": 0, "text": "He includes among these \u2018transcendent powers of Mystics\", premonition, precognition, telepathy or clairvoyance; a vision or & dream or a strange misic or rythm etc. CP. also Dean Inge: \"Visions, locutions, auditions, and so forth are accepted as miraclous fact.\" Mysticism in Religion, p.28. = 162 = and cognitive faculties rendering him almost senseless, insane and md in the ywrldly sense;\u00b0\u00b0 waiea actually speaking he is a hyper-sensuous and intensely passionate and enthusiastic person in his loving desire for the divine union. It is the intuition- al \u2018faith\u2019 in the loving and saving grace of the Divine Beloved that leads the mystic to acquiring gifts of these inner-powers called miracles. Goethe rightly says: \"Miracle is faith's dearest chia.\" Guru Nanak, however, characteristically rejected the association of miracle-working to his name and personality because he regarded all pride in miraculous power as something extraneous to the mystic proper. To him it was utterly futile to possess or to display miracles because it would distract and confuse the true votary of God from loving Him whole-heartedly. It would create a spurious sense of \u2018otherness\u2019 and duplicity in the mind of the mystic -- a sort of easy compensation or reward for certain meritorious spiritual acts; a delimitation of 85. The great Sufi mystic Abu Said, referring to his severe penances and inner absorption, says: \u201cIn all my acts, I was a follower of the prophet. Every four and twenty hours I completed a recitation of the Koran. In my seeing I was blind, in my hearing deaf, in my speaking dumb. For a whole year, I conversed with no one. People called me a lunatic and f allowed them to give me that name, relying on the tradition that a man's faith is not made perfect until he is supposed to be mad.\" Nicholson, op.cit. p.15."}
{"id": "mysticism-of-guru-nanak", "title": "Mysticism of Guru Nanak", "year": 1973, "seq": 1, "text": "In hbanmai is there maya and in haumai is superstition (chhaya). By producing haumai, the world was created. If one under- stands haumai, he will find the door of salvation. Without true knowledge, the man tires himself by too mich talking. Nanak says, by Hykam are recorded the signs of fate, Just as God makes you see, you my perceive,\" 121 In the same composition another exquisite passage by Guru Angad on the subject of haumaj is worth quoting: \"HWaymaji has this age? that in bhaumji man indulges in action. In hayumal this is the condition that it causes repeated rebirth, From where comes this haumail and how can it be discarded? Haymai is the same Hukam which causes preconditioned avocations. Haumaj is gadeep malady and the remedy also lies in itself. If it pleases God, then one contemplates the Sabpad. Nanak says, listen O' Friend, in this way, the sorrow is removed.\" 122 Haymai is basically speaking \u2018the pride of selfhood' or the 'vanity of life'. A vain feeling of self-existence and the transient human powers added to it, create in the ordinary man a sense of false capability and a false Security which make him totally oblivious of an uncertain tS dee fupupe and a disastrous end. But if a man overcomes this spr ious complacency and abasement and instead takes refuge in the worship of God and the Guru, he is saved. When thre is no Self-pride, there is no change of self-abasement, in fact, of any entanglement or involvement whatsover , Guru Nanak says: 121, Var_Asa, Slok (Pauri 7, AG.,466. 122, Yar Asa, Slok (Guru Angad), AG. ,466. = 273 = \"One who thinks he is, says Nanak, will be grabbed (by death). (While) I have no paumai and hence no chance of getting into rebirth.\" 123 The ruinous haumai which separates men from their has ruined myriads of beings, who lost their lives in mere indulgence: \"Forgetting the Lord, they enjoyed sensual acts."}
{"id": "mysticism-of-guru-nanak", "title": "Mysticism of Guru Nanak", "year": 1973, "seq": 2, "text": "Cf. rattan Singh Jagei, op. cit., p.406. am sh sa = em ler UlUC OU lo eee ne Oe | | The first concern in the thesis under study is to ascertain and define mysticism as a higher branch of human knowledge and experience and in doing so, to verify and establish its nature and characteristics. Having recourse to the vrocess of elimination, the foremost point of discussion is to recognize two types of mysticism, the hicher and the lower and to state at once that our concern in this thesis is with the former. Though it is easy to distinguish the hieher mysti- cism from the lower, the latter oeing the corrupt or aberrant form and thus not mysticism proper, yet it is not enouzh to and the psychical mysticism The real question involved is to distinguish mysticism from its kindred and allied fields. Our next point of study relates to this matter. Mysticism is a subject of study in its omright. It is a suigeneris. It may have some common and corresnvonding points of similarity with Psychology, Spiritualism, Metaphysics, Philosophy and Religion, but it is not difficult to find out points of variance and divergence between mysticism on the one hand and these allied fields on the other. The nearest approach to mysticism, however, is the hightened or interiorized aspect of religion, which may be called inner religion or mystical religion. Then the problem of the indefinability of mysticism has to be tackled. There have been advanced numberless = 305 = definitions and countless notions and view-points in connection with this recondite subject. Some authorities have emphasized the intellectual or cognitive aspect while other have highlighted the emotional or esoteric aspect. These are, however, the two main areas of approach. But within this wide range, there are myriads of ramifications relevant to the subject."}
{"id": "mysticism-of-guru-nanak", "title": "Mysticism of Guru Nanak", "year": 1973, "seq": 3, "text": "Mvery mystic has to accent a mystical heritage or background, though as a mystic he transcends the bounds of Time, Space and causation, Guru Nanak's mysticism accordingly has to be correlated with and studied in the context of the rich Indian mystic tradition. Guru Nanak may have intuitively inherited or assimilated some of the fundamental principles of Indian mysticism (a postulate which cannot be intellectually perceived or ascertained) , yet it can be positively suggested and affirmed that Guru Nanak was not an eclectic or syncretic mystic, but a mystic in his own richt. The Indian mystic tradition beginning with the Upanishadic and Vedanta mysticism (which may be called the fundamental matrix of all Indian mysticism, ancient and modern) gradually passed through an historical evolutionary pageant comprising Bhagavadgita mysticism, Yoga mysticism Bhakti mysticism and Sufi mysticism Guru Nanak's mysticism, as sugzested by Dr. Mcleod, can be properly placed in the - O07 = historical and spiritual context of the Nirgun-Sant tradition which evinced a close affinity with the Nath-Yoga mysticism and the Bhakti mysticism on the one hand and with sufi mysticism on the other. Guru Nanak, however, steered his mystical path clear of all these earlier and contemporary cults and in many respects, evolved and constructed an original mystical system of his own to match his own peculiar conditions within his soul as well as outside, in his particular milieu. Guru Nanak's mysticism may be regarded as predominantly a Devotional (Bhakti) or Love mysticism, though it has also many other manifestations such as God mysticism, Nature mysticism, Soul mysticism, and Bsoteric mysticism. (Chapter III), The real problem, however, starts with the study of Guru Nanak as a mystic. It basically involves consideration of the person or personality of Guru Nanak as a Fakir or Wali, Sant or Bhagat, Guru or Gurmukh, Mero or Teacher, God-man or Perfect-man and above a11, as a mystic."}
{"id": "patternsystemfor318barn", "title": "PATTERN : a system for land management planning", "year": 1981, "seq": 0, "text": "The home is located 10 miles from the school and 8 miles from the major shopping center. The family is outdoor oriented\u2014 skiing, camping, fishing, and hunting. They have a dog that often travels with them. The car they are driving now is 1 1 years old and needs a major overhaul. James spends 1 hour each day traveling to and from work. He needs a car that is easy to handle for all weather and road conditions. He is interested in a car with low maintenance, because his free time is limited and he is dependent on the car for transportation. Because of this dependency, he has decided to replace the car every 3 years; so he wants a car that will also have a good trade-in value. This briefly covers the Walsh's situation. You should be able to picture the needs and desires for transportation. To use PATTERN you must first construct what is called a relevance tree. To keep the example simple, we will forego several options that could be developed in this tree. A simple relevance tree might look like figure 1. We have purposely limited the number of automobile makes and models. In actual practice, these choices can be limited because of availability, agreement of concerned parties, or by the fact that these might be the reasonable choices. Once the tree has been developed, we can present it in matrix form or table (fig. 2). The axes of the matrix have special names: first-order and second-order relevance components. First-order relevance components are the most important items to consider and are listed down the left-hand column of the matrix. The user ranks each first-order component on a percentage basis according to its importance to the objective within the confines of the situation described. Second-order relevance components are those listed along the horizontal axis of the matrix."}
{"id": "patternsystemfor318barn", "title": "PATTERN : a system for land management planning", "year": 1981, "seq": 1, "text": "To apply the system to land planning, we could utilize the same general sequence of events outlined in the car example. First of all, we need an objective for the specific land area in question. We would also need a statement outlining the planning situation, including available resources, area being considered, and outputs expected. A separate statement should be developed for each planning alternative anticipated in the planning activity. In the following example, the alternatives and the statements will be purposely less complete than they might be in a real planning situation. Nevertheless, these examples should indicate how the process might be used in land planning. Our general statement might go like this: you are developing a multiple-use management program for an undeveloped roadless area. The area is several townships in size, with virtually no developed access. It is adjacent to an established wilderness area. Potential resources include timber, wildlife, water, range, and recreation. One management alternative emphasizes timber and wildlife, with the use of other resources as appropriate. A second management alternative emphasizes wildlife and recreation, with modest utilization of timber, and utilization of remaining resources as appropriate. The third management alternative considers wilderness the primary management objective. Having outlined the general situation and three broad management alternatives, we can proceed to utilize PATTERN in our planning. Again, as in ourexamplefor pur- chasing a car, we must develop the relevance tree for ranking the importance of various components. Figure 5 depicts a relevance tree for our situation. Several variations on this basic relevance tree certainly could have been developed; however, we decided that we would discuss resource potential for the planning area, which includes the traditional values, and then the site factors and forces that change resource flows, depending upon how they are developed. We therefore must consider basic site factors, basic biological factors, and dynamic forces that affect the site and biological components."}
{"id": "patternsystemfor318barn", "title": "PATTERN : a system for land management planning", "year": 1981, "seq": 2, "text": "AN OPERATIONAL EXAMPLE Let us suppose you want to use this technique in your land management planning. It might be useful within the interdisciplinary team to develop individual and team values. The tool could also be used with special interest groups as an objective means for quantifying relative values. Once the planning objectives are developed along with the situation description, the general procedures for PATTERN are outlined to the group. A very simple example of PATTERN might be presented to the group, perhaps similar to the car example. Work a sample exercise, allowing enough time to insure that everyone understands the process. This example can be used to show participants how relevance trees are developed and relevance values are determined. Before moving into a land management PATTERN exercise, answer all questions. Based on our own experience, this introductory exercise is well worth the time. Upon completion of the sample exercise and question period, the real exercise can begin. All participants can be told something similar to the following: Review the situation statement and the planning alternatives. Remember, decisions are usually made using an array of inputs. The relevance tree may not be all inclusive. Inputs from several other individuals and sources and feedback may be desirable. However, your general responses are provided on the basis of the factors considered most important in the planning and management of the described alternative. The participants can then be told: Indicate the relative weights (in percentage) of each of the components for the planning alternative described. Values you assign to the site factors and forces in the left-hand column should total 100 percent. (These values are called first-level relevance scores.) It is not necessary to have numbers in each cell; some cells may be left blank and will be treated as if zeros had been entered."}
{"id": "patternsystemfor318barn", "title": "PATTERN : a system for land management planning", "year": 1981, "seq": 3, "text": "The quartile summary for this situation shows a clus- tering of upper quartile values. The upper quartile accounted for over 50 percent of the total tree. Critical Decisions Our use of PATTERN has illustrated the respondents' opinions of important considerations for one planning alternative. Agreement and disagreement can be identified among, between, and within various respondent stratifi- cations. These relevance tree data provide the interacting priorities for the management alternatives presented. In our example, 25 percent of the adjusted relevance scores accounted for approximately 50 percent of the entire rele- vance tree value. Pooling data for all respondents tends to to mask the diversity found on a stratified basis. The smoothing further tends to hide internal differences. Data generated by this technique can tell managers and planners how others view alternatives. These kinds of data can also help indicate important constraints in various situations. Through a more complete understanding and a more objective evaluation of important factors, planners and managers can better evaluate activities as well as better understand the public perceptions. The relevance trees, quartile diagrams, and other types of data stratification depict the respondents' concepts of the various relationships of pertinent factors. As indicated by Shafer and others (1974), this type of analysis can also be helpful in developing decision games for evaluating the consequences of various alternatives. Furthermore, results can be used for determining changes in attitude in the future. The technique used, PATTERN, appears to be useful for developing individual management plans. The process provides an objective procedure to assess, order, and even- tually integrate multiple factors in a two-dimensional matrix. Planning teams can use such a procedure to quanti- tatively assess their posture or the position of various publics on various planning issues for which relevance trees can be constructed. Individuals outside of planning might also be included in the process, especially in situa- tions of great diversity of opinion."}
{"id": "csdu_000427", "title": "Southern Cross 1981-07-09", "year": 1981, "seq": 0, "text": "The priest suffered a broken leg April 8 during a motorcycle crash, and had been hospitalized ever since. Doctors said the injury probably did not contribute to his death, but an autopsy was performed. 55 killed at mission. KAMPALA, Uganda (NC)\u2014 Ugandan soldiers killed 55 people and wounded 100 when they attacked a Catholic mission \u2018station in northwestern Uganda June 24. The mission is run by the Verona Fathers, an Italian missionary order. A Red Cross worker said the attack had been preceded by shooting in the vicinity between the troops and guerrillas loyal to deposed dictator Idi Amin. Because of the recent fighting, about 10,000 people had taken refuge in the mission, the worker added. Western diplomats in the capital of Kampala speculated that the soldiers had suspected the mission was harboring guerrillas. In a tradition going back to the apostles, the bishop placed his hands upon the heads of each, and by the sacrament of holy orders the new Fathers Navarra and Orsborn were ordained priests of the Roman Catholic Church for the Diocese of San Diego. ONE BY ONE the other priests . filed past the two new priests in silence, each in turn laying on his hands in a gesture which expressed the unity of the priests with each other and their bishop. And in what seemed almost like a reversal of roles at the end of the ordination Mass, Bishop Maher knelt before Father Navarra and Father Orsborn. They in turn placed their hands on Bishop Maher\u2019s head, imparted their first priestly blessings and were embraced by the bishop. THE ORDINATIONS of both young men represented years of study and preparation on their part, and the efforts of the many people who contributed to the joy and solemnity of the liturgy at Our Mother of Confidence. Father Navarra, 28, was born in San Diego, and is the son of James and Maria Navarra of Our Lady of Guadalupe Church."}
{"id": "csdu_000427", "title": "Southern Cross 1981-07-09", "year": 1981, "seq": 1, "text": "FIRST BLESSINGS \u2014 Bishop Maher knelt in turn before Father Navarra (left) and Father Orsborn to receive their blessings, the first each gave as a newly ordained priest. Bishop Maher then embraced both young men: THE BODY OF CHRIST\u2014 Fathers Orsborn and Navarra distributed Communion after joining Bishop Maher as concelebrants of the Mass and for the first time saying the words of consecration over the bread and wine. PROUD PARENTS \u2014 As the ordination Mass began, Peter Navarra (left of center aisle) stood next to his parents, James and Maria, while on the other side Bruce Orsborn was with his mother and father, Patricia and James. July 9, 1981, Southern Cross\u20143 Editorial By Brother William Bilton, CIM Will there ever be an Irish solution? As the starvation deaths in Northern Ireland mount up, the violence mounts and the influx of recruits to the IRA mounts. Will there ever be an answer? \u2018Not long ago, the Irish Republican Army (IRA) was not in favor among the average Irishman. They were considered terrorists and destroyers of any hope of peace. But the rigid stance of the government on IRA prisoners has so alienated the nationalist population that the IRA is receiving support as the best way to defend its own community. The pleas of the Irish bishops for an end to violence go unheeded, even though the longing. for peace is real enough. _ The division of the sides into Catholic and Protestant is a journalese short-hand to distinguish the two factions more easily. It does so happen the sides are Catholic and Protestant, but their continuing struggle is political, not religious. Ireland has a unique political history, spanning some 800 years, which includes a 1921 treaty which granted a measure of independence to the 26 counties of southern Ireland\u2014the Irish Free State. In 1949, the Irish government enacted a law naming the state the Republic of \u00a9 Ireland and withdrew from the British Commonwealth."}
{"id": "csdu_000427", "title": "Southern Cross 1981-07-09", "year": 1981, "seq": 2, "text": "Scotch Presbyterians had been encouraged to settle in the six northern counties of Ireland, and they became a majority loyal to the British and were established as the | province of Northern Ireland. Less than half of the population of Northern Ireland is Catholic, whereas 94 percent of the Republic of Ireland is Catholic. The Republic of Ireland is not convinced of union with ~ the six northern counties, because the IRA not only seeks the union of all Ireland, but is calling for the replacement of \u2018the present government and constitution of the Republic. Is the situation in Ireland an unsolvable curse or can something be done about it? It seems almost too late. England holds the answer, according to those who try to _ come up with a cool-headed solution. For the 60 years of the existence of Northern Ireland, England has held the purse strings. The province would have long ago passed into history,-if it were not for the steady flow of a constant British subsidy. Irish Catholics and Protestants have gotten along well in the rest of Ireland, and around the world, where they live next door to each other. Never has the British government seriously demanded that the two factions come together. Never have they issued an ultimatum that the differences be settled or the subsidies will stop. The British were very successful in Zimbabwe (Rhodesia) with the ultimatum \u2018\u2018Live in peace or go it alone.\u2019 For some time, a new peace-keeping force has been suggested from the Common Market countries. More daring yet, the suggestion has been made for a non- Christian force from some newly-independent nation. Some positive, daring move is needed and needed at once. \u2018 Southern Cross Official newspaper of the Diocese of San Diego. Published every Thursday except the first Thursday in July and the last Thursday in December."}
{"id": "mirrorwalthamhig1978walt", "title": "...Mirror : Waltham High School", "year": 1978, "seq": 0, "text": "He was working at the White House on Bacon Street when he was appointed Principal of Waltham High in 1967. He is married and has one daughter. In 1 970, the Jewish War Veter- ans voted him their \"Man of the Year;\" and in 1978, we proudly dedicate the \"Mirror\" to him, our principal. Memorial Dedication Fondest Memories of Our Friend Ricky Poirier \"To have known him was to have loved him,\" He made you feel next of kin. His days of life were full of love, With the light of his love like the flight of a dove. He fought hard to win his battle, Ready and willing with bull and saddle. Why so young and eager at heart, As he pushed and pushed that hefty cart. Harder and harder were we to pray, Hoping our voices were heard each day. Our voices were heard hour after hour, When Ricky was taken and given special power His friendship remains within our minds, For he was much more than kind, Memories we share are stronger than force, That we some day will also follow his course. As different each course can and will be, We share and cherish each memory. In Memory of Our Friend Greg Aborn God took you from this earth Without explaining why. There must have been a reason Why he chose you to die. You were such a young man With a whole life to live. You never did take much Yet you had so much to give. You'll always be remembered By that twinkle in your eye, That silly smirk, your sense of humor It's hard to say good-bye. Those of us who knew you well Are hurting deep inside, For we've lost such a dear friend Whom we'll remember with pride. We love you, oh, so dearly And know you love us, too."}
{"id": "montereynews1989unse_4", "title": "Monterey news", "year": 1989, "seq": 0, "text": "Pearson Sketches at Town Meeting by Edith Wilson CHURCH NEWS In the last issue | commented on the symbols of closet, house, sanctuary and street, and how they represented a__ holistic view of the church\u2019s ministry. May has been a time for our congre- gation to explore these symbols in preparation for planning the direction of our ministry. We took a large empty box and transformed it into a closet, then a house, a sanctuary and then added a street. Each week in worship we focused on the shape of our ministry. After all that preparation we met together to plan programs that would affirm expressions of individual faith (closet), the need to learn and share together in small groups (house), the congregational gathering for celebration and ritual (sanctuary), and the commitment to reach out and minister to the needs of others (street). Here, then, are the priorities we saw in each area: CLOSET: 1. share devotional materials by establishing a library of printed and taped resources. 2. continue utilizing the Sunday bulletin as a meditation booklet. 3. hold retreats / workshops that emphasize spirituality and meditation. HOUSE: 1. expand bible study on a regular basis. 2. have monthly, Sunday potluck dinners that include fellowship, study and recre- ation. 3. develop an \u201cAdult Forum\u201d series where people can learn about and share their views On important issues. SANCTUARY: 1. expand our music program by hiring a piano/organ accompanist. -2. involve more lay people in the planning and participation of worship. 3. plan special worship events on specific 7 themes that emphasize creativity. STREET: 1. develop an organized response (mission) that addresses specific social issues and the needs of the Monterey community. 2. create a calling program that would reach ~ out to people in the community utilizing personal and printed contact. 3. continue and expand our ministry to children through the \u201cGood News Gang.\u201d As of now these are only priorities."}
{"id": "montereynews1989unse_4", "title": "Monterey news", "year": 1989, "seq": 1, "text": "Ona path in the woods? No doubt the person who swats, bombs or otherwise obliterates ants in the kitchen will leave them alone in the woods. This situation reminds me of a definition I once read of a weed: \u201ca plant out of place.\u201d Hot spring weather, after a cool rainy spell, has brought quite a few plants out of place to my garden, as well as ants to the kitchen, I\u2019m fighting the weeds, tooth and claw, but the ants | leave alone. For me this represents an attitudinal evolution. | have not always enjoyed ants in the house. We built this house ten years ago of red pine logs, cutting and peeling each one ourselves, hauling them in to our site, pulling them onto the walls with a block and tackle and ramps. We thought long and hard about pesticides and fungicides for our sill logs before bolting them down to the concrete founda- tion walls where they were sure to gather moisture. In the end we sold our gallons of wood preservative to a brave neighbor who was also building. He was afraid of carpenter ants and dry-rot; we were afraid of dioxins and cancer. In a few years we had ants. They scrounged meals in our kitchen and ran along the logs in long single-file trails. When we discovered they were carpenter ants, Camponotus herculeanus pennsylvanicus, we got worried. It was easy, when the sills were new, to say we'd rather die by house-collapse than by dioxin-induced cancer. Now that the little creatures were actually at work, we realized we weren't quite ready to die either way. Carpenter ants are big black ants. They do not eat wood, the way termites do, but they have a similar \u201ceconomic importance\u201d because they are so destructive to wood."}
{"id": "montereynews1989unse_4", "title": "Monterey news", "year": 1989, "seq": 2, "text": "There was so much traffic on it that where it crossed our own path into the house it left a discernible cleared track about half an inch wide. It was only travelled at night, so | went out witha flashlight and discovered the ants, big black carpenter ants, left our house, crossed the path, went up the hillside through pine needles and saplings and finally right up a big poplar tree. We were so relieved not to have found a hole in a sill and a big pile of sawdust that we have felt quite neighborly toward these ants ever since. A few years ago, though, we did discover a nest ina sill. The wood: was damp and punky, easy carving for ants, and the cavity they had made was about the size ofa nice big mango. It consisted of \u201cgalleries\u201d or tunnels and we scooped.it out, filled it with bricks, patched over it, and, yes, we bombed the ants. The way they writhed and struggled before expiring has made me doubly grateful that our current crop of ants lives out in the woods. I\u2019m glad we didn\u2019t poison our whole house in an effort to keep out ants, but the localized poisoning of bi colony in the sill was hard to bear. We have other ant neighbors, most noticeably the little 2: amber ones in the driveway. Every day their tiny crumbly vol- _ canoes show up new moist grains of driveway subsoil as they _ make their underground nests. | can\u2019t imagine what their life must be like every time the UPS truck goes thundering over- head, but they obviously don\u2019t mind it enough to move. We also have ants in the orchard, black ones witha reddish section. These live in mounds which they create by dragging \u2014 material over and building up from the outside."}
{"id": "montereynews1989unse_4", "title": "Monterey news", "year": 1989, "seq": 3, "text": "Steadman, a native from Tyringham, and, wanting a place to live, was able to persuade my aunt and uncle to sell to us the house and part of the land. When we became owners of the property we had to remodel to our liking. There had beena large porch around the front and north side of th\u00e9 house which we took off and built a stone entrance with stone steps to the front door. To retain the lawn in front of the house we built a retaining wall of cobblestone. On the east side, beyond the bay window, a lean-to had been built, consisting of a kitchen, water room, where water was piped froma well on the hillside, flow- ing to the barn and house and then to a large water trough beside the road where horses and cattle could have a cool drink of water. It was in 1927 that we exchanged a three-holer fora bathtub, stool and sink and put in town water, steam heat, and later on built the breezeway with a two-car garage. This garage was very expensive for a ledge of rock had to be blasted by an expert, Ray Blivin from Otis. It was my first attempt at laying cement blocks, but I learned by watching others. But | got what I wanted; the most convenient way of entering a car in bad weather. We did the upstairs into an apartment and have no trouble renting. I have no idea how old this house is, but it is not one of the first in town. The house where I was born has tapered posts in all corners of every room, and for the Bidwell Store that I tore down where my garage stands in the village, hand made nails were used. I saved all the nails I could and sold them at 5\u00a2 apiece to some builder in New York. \u2014 from History of Monterey ms, by A."}
{"id": "montereynews1989unse_4", "title": "Monterey news", "year": 1989, "seq": 4, "text": "We were impressed with their professionalism and courtesy. The purpose of this letter is to inform all responsible parties of Mr. Hadsell\u2019s highly unprofessional actions in the hopes that such a situation can be avoided in the future. After speak- ing with my neighbors and other residents of Monterey, it has come to my attention that this is not the first time Mr. Hadsell has abused and intimidated residents of this town while on the job. It is not my intention to create unnecessary problems for a community that, on the whole, offers an excellent level of services to its citizens and residents. | am a resident of New York City and have bought weekend property in Monterey for the enjoyment of peace, quiet and solitude. I trust what- ever steps are necessary will be taken to prevent ugly confron- tations like this from happening again. \u2014 Dro Proudian To the Editor: Thank you for keeping me up to date with the News. It always brings back such wonderful memories. | love Monterey but am not able to visit since living in Largo and Plymouth. Charles and I were Brooklyn neighbors of Harold and Bea Schwab for 40 years and Lake Garfield neighbors from 1962 to 1982, when Charles became terminally ill and we sold to the Cash family. _ I still-have many friends in Monterey. The Makucs, Hastedts, McVeys, Colodnys, Helen Hanley and Irene, Walter Parks: many have moved or passed away. The New's lets me know when friends and former neighbors die \u2014recently Rose Zilka and Ted Falcon. Is Father Heberle still in Sheffield and saying Saturday night Mass in July and August? I think of him often \u2014he is such a devout and kind priest. \u2014 Yvonne Wocel A NEW LOCAL NEWSPAPER The Berkshire Record, a weekly newspaper serving southern Berkshire County, will be on the stands in mid-June."}
{"id": "montanasoiccnewsv4n3wtr1986rich", "title": "Montana SOICC newsletter", "year": 1986, "seq": 0, "text": "The Micro-OIS is free to non-profit agencies, THf NOiCC/SOICC NETWORK For most Americans, work \u2014 or the lack of it--matters. Their lifestyles as well as their livelihoods are influenced by their occupation and the employment and income opportunities it offers. Few decisions affect an individual's future more than choosing an occupation and the education and training needed to enter and succeed in it. To choose wisely, people need sound information about the world of work. Preparing people for the work they seek serves both public and personal interests, if the preparation is solid and suited to labor market needs. Vocational education and training require substantial human and financial resources--rescurces too precious to risk on programs that do not offer sound preparation for the future. In making judgments about which programs to offer and what the curriculum should include, educational planners and job training officials need relevant and timely occupational information. Helping people make career-related decisions calls for special counseling and vocational guidance skills. Counselors working in schools, job training programs, state and local employment services, vocational rehabilitation agencies, and other settings are in a position to assist people at various stages of career exploration or decision making. To help their clients make better-informed choices, they also need comprehensive occupational information. To attract new industries or anticipate shifts ir the labor market, state and local planners need data on current and projected employment, the supply of skilled workers, and sources of training available in their state or local area. Increasingly, occupational information is being used to support economic development initiatives and human resources planning in both the public and private sector. Sensible decisions, whether they affect one life or many, often depend on ready access to relevant and timely information about the labor market. Helping people get the occupational information they need is what the National Occupational Information Coordinating Committee (NOICC) and its network of state offices (SOICCs) are about."}
{"id": "montanasoiccnewsv4n3wtr1986rich", "title": "Montana SOICC newsletter", "year": 1986, "seq": 1, "text": "They ^vq characteristics of the applicants, characteristics of the job and firm, and characteristics of the rater. The questions and answers below summarize the results from analyzing the influence of the first of these factors, applicant characteristics. How important to employers are high school grades? High school grade point average had the strongest positive influence of any school experience variable for all three occupations. Does the course of study or major in high school influence employability ratings? In machine trades occupations, a machine trades vocational education program had a significant positive influence on ratings. In clerical and retail occupations, the high school curriculum did not influence ratings. Does participation in a cooperative education program or an occupational work experience program increase the employability ratings? Cooperative distributive education program participation had a significant positive influence for retail applicants. Other cooperative or occupational work experience program participation had a positive, but not statistically significant influence on ratings. Does attending a postsecondary institution improve employability? Attencing a postsecondary school improved ratings in all occupations. The positive effect was virtually doubled if the applicant had obtained a certificate or degree. How important is postsecondary grade point average? Postsecondary grade point average was statistically insignificant for all occupations. The important postsecondary school characteristics were that applicants completed programs and that the programs were relevant to the jobs bpipg sought. -4- What are the effects on employability ratings if an applicant has no work experience? Having no prior work experience was a serious disadvantage to an applicant. Employers usually coach applicants to list activities such as babysitting, yard work, or volunteer work to indicate the ability to accept res pons ibil ity. What kinds of part-time jobs improve employability ratings? Employers favored employees who held part-time jobs at large organizations and had work experience relevant to the job for which they are applying."}
{"id": "cum_000918", "title": "UCSF Newsbreak, June 5, 1998, Volume 13, Number 12", "year": 1998, "seq": 0, "text": "Ponton, professor of clinical psychiatry, Kathryn A. Lee, associate professor of family health nursing and Pilar Bernal de Pheils, assistant clini- cal professor of family health nursing. Mouse model yields genetic clues to Down syndrome Researchers at UCSF report that they have developed a mouse model that should enable them for the first time to delineate the role of specific genes in par- ticular aspects of a Down syndrome-like disorder in mice. Researchers have known for decades that Down syndrome is associated with an extra copy of all or part of one of these: chromosome 21. However, scientists had yet to identify the particular genes on this extra chro- mosome that cause the mental and phys- ical abnormalities associated with the disorder. And this lack of knowledge has stymied drug development because drugs need targets, either the genes or the pro- teins they produce. But in a recent issue of Proceedings of the National Academy of Science, senior author Ting-Ting Huang, an assistant adjunct professor of pediatrics in the pe- diatric-medical genetics laboratory of Charles Epstein, a professor of pedi- atrics, says this new mouse model offers new hope. Ultimately, of course, the researchers hope such research would lead to the de- velopment of drugs to treat humans with Down syndrome, which causes mental retardation, major and minor physical abnormalities, often including heart dis- orders, and, in later life, Alzheimer\u2019s disease. The researchers say it is too early to draw strict parallels between the cogni- tive deficits in humans with Down syn- drome and the learning, behavioral and structural abnormalities observed in the genetically engineered mice. However, they say, their new mouse model should yield insights into the chromosomal re- gions and the genes they contain that have the capability of disturbing neu- ronal structure and function when pre- sent in an extra copy."}
{"id": "cum_000918", "title": "UCSF Newsbreak, June 5, 1998, Volume 13, Number 12", "year": 1998, "seq": 1, "text": "And the mechanisms by which these perturba- tions occur, they said, are likely to be rel- evant to the human situation. \u2014 Jennifer O\u2019Brien Paul Fusco Es Chris T. Anderson Kids strike a chord at concert 3 Study looks at MD- vs MBA-man- aged health care 4-5 School of Medicine salutes the Class of 1998 7 Tour of the Toland Hall murals Chiare Hwang, 12, plays a piece by Ibert at the Young Artists Recital on May 30. Sponsored by UCSF Arts & Performances, the concert fea- tured children of UCSF faculty, staff and students and the community and benefitted the \u201cSave the Steinway\u201d fund for upkeep of instru- ments. Hwang, who started playing piano when she was 5, has been honored at several musical events. She is the daughter of Peter Hwang, associate researcher, department of biochemistry. Physicians begin testing marijuana in HIV patients By CORINNA KAARLELA 4% group of physician-scientists in ff \u00bb, San Francisco has begun a clini- \u201ccal trial on the effects of marijua- na in patients with HIV infection. Supported by a $1 million grant from the National Institutes of Health, the two-year study is a combined project of UCSF and the Community Consortium, a Bay Area association of 200 health care providers who care for the majority of HIV/AIDS patients in the region. Donald Abrams examines a patient at SFGH. The trial will examine the influence of marijuana on the immune system and on the amount of virus in the body, as well as on its potential interactions with an- tiviral drugs such as protease inhibitors. \u201cWith this study, Bay Area AIDS spe- cialists continue to be at the pioneering edge of clinical research in HIV,\u201d says Donald I. Abrams, who is principal inves- tigator of the study. \u201cThe findings will help us provide better treatment to pa- tients and to plan future clinical re- search protocols.\u201d A total of 63 patients is scheduled to be enrolled over the next 18 months in the study."}
{"id": "cum_000918", "title": "UCSF Newsbreak, June 5, 1998, Volume 13, Number 12", "year": 1998, "seq": 2, "text": "Want to follow 4 message bourd thread on iron stains and liver biopsies? How about a discussion an the livers response to common household toxins? Maybe ever a chat with a doctor who knows something about hepatitis C? Now that we've covered the basics, what if we said we could get you the answers 1 all of the questions you have about your own nique sym ploms and struggles? to gain insights into patient perspectives through population studies and aggre- gate-level market research. Through this activity, SHN helps instill the patient perspective in the product development, marketing and delivery systems of its healthcare customers. SHN has ten online communities that cover 16 disease topics for its members: asthma, breast cancer, heart disease, de- pression, diabetes, fibromyalgia, chronic fatigue immune deficiency syndrome, he- patitis C, weight control, prostate cancer and the Women\u2019s Health Place, including endometriosis, incontinence, menopause, irregular or heavy bleeding, ovarian cancer and osteoporosis. Hospitalists key to shorter, less costly hospital stays t a time when managed care is fAevins hospitals to cut costs, a new UCSF study has found that increasing the involvement of faculty doctors who specialize in hospital care may be a key to shorter, less costly hospi- tal stays that don\u2019t compromise quality or teaching. The study, published in the May 20 edition of the Journal of the American Medical Association, found that patients spend less time in the hospital \u2014 and their care costs less as a result \u2014 when ae their cases are man- aged by doctors, called hospitalists. The role of the re- cently emerged spe- cialty is a departure from the way faculty doctors traditionally have functioned in academic hospitals. Under the traditional model, faculty members serve as advi- sors to the residents, who as medical school graduates in the late stages of training, manage inpatient care in teach- ing hospitals."}
{"id": "cum_000918", "title": "UCSF Newsbreak, June 5, 1998, Volume 13, Number 12", "year": 1998, "seq": 3, "text": "Patients were randomly divided into the two groups. There was no significant difference be- tween how patients in both groups fared healthwise, or how satisfied they were with the care they received, Wachter says. That finding is based on a wide range of observations, including patient outcomes and hospital readmissions, as well as a patient survey. The study also may ease concerns of residents that the increasing involve- ment of hospitalists could cost them their autonomy and compromise the quality of their education, Wachter says. A survey showed that a majority of resi- dents who worked side-by-side with the hospitalists were highly satisfied with the experience. In fact, the majority pre- ferred it to the traditional system. Also allayed were the concerns of other specialists, who questioned whether they would get fewer referrals as a result of greater reliance on hospi- talists, Wachter says. The findings further support the in- creasingly popular idea of using hospital- ists to improve the efficiency, and possibly the quality, of inpatient care, he says. The concept of the dedicated inpa- tient physician was first described by Wachter and co-author Lee Goldman, UCSF professor of medicine and chair of the UCSF department of medicine, in a seminal 1996 New England Journal of Medicine article, in which the term \u201chos- pitalist\u201d was coined. Since managed care forces health care providers to look for ways to cut costs without harming quality or patient satis- faction, Wachter says, these methods are now standard procedure. Co-investigators include Goldman; Patricia Katz, UCSF assistant professor of medicine; Jonathan Showstack, UCSF professor of medicine; and Andrew Bindman, UCSF associate professor of medicine. Wachter 3 Chancellor Haile Debas, dean of the UCSF School of Medicine, welcomed graduating students, family, friends and faculty to the May 22 commencement ceremonies for the Class of 1998."}
{"id": "cum_000918", "title": "UCSF Newsbreak, June 5, 1998, Volume 13, Number 12", "year": 1998, "seq": 4, "text": "Here is what he had to say. Chancellor Haile Debas The doctor-patient relationship is a dynamic and mutually rewarding one. Do not let managed care turn you into a factory worker and your patients into widgets. Graduates, pictured at top left corner, Simerjot Jassal, runner-up for the Gold- Headed Cane Award, and Robert Rosenbloom will both pursue internal medicine at UCLA Medical Center. Rosenbloom will then move on to practice emergency medicine. Celebrating the commencement of their careers in medicine are, from left, Michael Pham, who will pursue internal medicine at UCSF; Michelle Randolph, who will do the same only at UCLA and Gerard Carvalho, who will train in surgery leading to specializing in head and neck surgery | for Stanford Health Services. T he journey through medical school would not be possible without the support and sacrifice of families and friends. I want to acknowledge and thank all of you who have shared in the process that is culminating here this afternoon. I also want to acknowledge the support that our faculty have shown to the student body. Today, we have 110 faculty participating in this graduation ceremony and all of them have, in one way or another, contributed to the students\u2019 medical education and well- being. UCSF would not be one of the top med- ical schools in the nation without our extraordinary faculty. I especially want to ac- knowledge and thank those of you on the UCSF clinical faculty who have generously volunteered your precious time to teaching and mentoring our students. I now direct my remarks to our newly mint- ed physicians \u2014 our graduating students. I know that the past four years have been \u2014 at different times \u2014 exciting, exhausting, scary, and inspiring. You have been challenged, frus- trated, defeated, and triumphant. You have been profoundly moved and intensely angered."}
{"id": "cum_000918", "title": "UCSF Newsbreak, June 5, 1998, Volume 13, Number 12", "year": 1998, "seq": 5, "text": "And you have survived it all to reach this moment when you will finally become doctors. You are formally assuming the role and responsibilities of physician and healer \u2014 a special and privileged role in all societies and cultures. That is why the joy of this occasion is balanced by the seri- ousness of your responsibility as a physician. Upon leaving this auditorium you enter into a covenant between you and ve your patients, between you and your community, between you and your profession. This covenant is to uphold your patients\u2019 interests above all else; as a physician it is your moral com- pass. The world of managed medical care will challenge your loyalty and commitment to your patients. You will have clini- cal productivity goals to meet. When you are tempted to skip a test in the interest of economy, to cut short a patient\u2019s history in the interest of time, check your compass. This covenant is as real as earth and water, as real as every patient you will see throughout your professional life. I submit to you that honoring this social contract will give you a life of fulfillment and meaning; breaking it is a betrayal of your patients, of your profession and of yourself. You have been generous in praise of the education you have received at UCSF and of the quality of our faculty. We are pleased that you feel your time has been well spent. But I sv want you to know that we have received as much as we have given \u2014 you have been our teachers and our inspiration. When you leave today your formal status as a student ends and your role as lifelong learner and teacher begins. Take the time to learn from your patients, to teach your pa- tients. The doctor-patient relationship is a dynamic and mutu- ally rewarding one."}
{"id": "cum_000918", "title": "UCSF Newsbreak, June 5, 1998, Volume 13, Number 12", "year": 1998, "seq": 6, "text": "These statistics make lung cancer by far the most deadly can- cer among both men and women, ac- counting for nearly 30 percent of all cancer deaths. About 90 percent of lung cancer is the result of smoking. Most lung tumors are not detected until cancer cells have spread to lymph nodes or to the opposite lung, a late stage that makes the disease difficult to eradi- cate. The combined five-year survival rate for lung cancers at all stages aver- ages just 14 percent. the highest dose is delivered to the tumor. UCSF physicians are participating in several clinical trials aimed at improving this dismal statistic. Preliminary results suggest that novel recombinations and refinements of established surgery, chemotherapy and radiation treatment modes can modestly improve outcomes in lung cancer, according to David Jablons, assistant professor of surgery. Jablons and his UCSF colleagues also are investigating whether or not advanced cases of lung cancer are vulnerable to a new generation of chemotherapy agents, including \u201canti-angiogenesis\u201d drugs that block the formation of the new blood ves- sels that nourish growing tumors. UCSF physicians who treat lung can- cer will participate in Phase II clinical trials of an anti-angiogenesis drug, Genentech\u2019s anti-VEGF, and of Agouron\u2019s AF3340, a protease inhibitor drug that has anti-angiogenic properties. Anti- VEGF already is under study at UCSF, the only site for a clinical trial to investi- gate the drug\u2019s potential to combat prostate cancer, and it will also be evalu- ated as a colon cancer treatment. No quick fix Cancer specialists nationwide have been besieged with requests for experimental Using computers to calculate deliverable treatment doses in three dimensions, radiation oncologists at UCSF Stanford Health Care are more precisely targeting radiation to lung and chest tumors, such as this cancer of the chest lining, while better protecting healthy tissue."}
{"id": "cum_000918", "title": "UCSF Newsbreak, June 5, 1998, Volume 13, Number 12", "year": 1998, "seq": 7, "text": "The tumor is highlighted in white in the left-facing torso pictured above. Similar to the way elevation is indicated on a topographic map, concentric circles mark \u201cisodose\u201d lines of con- stant radiation. The lowest isodose centers on healthy lung, while anti-angiogenesis treatment ever since the New York Times, in its May 3 Sunday edition, reported that a combination of two such drugs could eliminate tumors in mice. The piece reported little beyond what had already been published in Nature and written up in the Times last Nov. 27. But the more recent Times arti- cle ran on page one and featured a quota- tion \u2014- or misquotation, according to the source, one of the nation\u2019s best known sci- entists, James Watson \u2014- claiming that the drugs\u2019 discoverer, Judah Folkman, of Children\u2019s Hospital in Boston and Harvard Medical School, would cure can- cer within two years. Stock of drug li- cense-holder EntreMed Inc. soared. The earlier Times story was more re- strained in tone, for example, quoting UCSF\u2019s anti-angiogenesis expert Doug Hanahan on the doubtfulness of complete- ly reproducing the extraordinary mouse results in humans. In fact, although the touted drugs, endostatin and angiostatin, have eliminated tumors in mouse models of cancer, they have not yet been tested in humans. The National Cancer Institute estimates that quantities of the drugs sufficient to con- duct human trials will not become available until next year. UCSF Cancer Center scientist Marc Shuman notes that UCSF re- searchers earlier tested the now experimentally available anti-VEGF in mice, where the drug stopped growth of some human tumors -- breast, colon and prostate -- and the spread of these tumors beyond their tis- sues of origin. Anti-an- giogenesis drugs, unlike standard chemotherapy agents, are not likely to drive tumors to develop drug resistance, Shuman explains, because they are not aimed at cancer cells."}
{"id": "cum_000918", "title": "UCSF Newsbreak, June 5, 1998, Volume 13, Number 12", "year": 1998, "seq": 8, "text": "Because breast cancer can take five or more years to become detectable, Cummings says that the study will continue for at least another four years to determine the long-term ben- efits of raloxifene in women. He added that the women who are participating in the clinical trials are making enor- mous contributions to the fight against breast cancer. \u201cIf we continue to see positive re- sults from the study, as we expect, women who are concerned about breast cancer should consult their doctors about whether raloxifene is a treatment they should consider,\u201d Cummings says. Approved for the prevention of os- teoporosis by the Food and Drug Administration in December 1997, raloxifene is marketed as Vista by Eli Lilly and Co., which sponsored the clinical trials of the treatment as a method of preventing breast cancer. \u2014 Abby Sinnott significant increase in event-free sur- vival for children who received autolo- gous purged bone marrow transplants. Results were even more dramatic for those whose initial therapy was fol- lowed up with high doses of 13-cis retinoic acid, a Vitamin A derivative commonly prescribed for acne under the trade name Accutane. Most dramatic of all were results for a combination of the two treatments: 55 percent of the children who re- ceived bone marrow transplants sur- vived free of relapse for three years after beginning follow-up treatment with retinoic acid. That rate compares to 16 percent for children treated with consolidation chemotherapy alone. A cancer of the sympathetic ner- vous system, neuroblastoma is the most common solid tumor, other than brain tumors, to occur in children. The average age of diagnosis is two-and-a- half years, and one in 6,000 children is diagnosed with neuroblastoma by the age of five. The majority of pa- tients who received treatment as part of the Children\u2019s Cancer Group Study had tumors that had metastasized to other sites."}
{"id": "cum_000918", "title": "UCSF Newsbreak, June 5, 1998, Volume 13, Number 12", "year": 1998, "seq": 9, "text": "One drug, called Tissue Plasminogen Activator, or TPA, has the potential to re- duce significantly the severity of stroke symptoms if administered within three hours after strokes occur, Johnston says. Other drugs currently under study \u2014 in- cluding other clot-busting drugs and brain-protecting drugs that paramedics could administer \u2014 also offer promise, experts say. In some cases, drugs such as TPA can make a big difference in a person\u2019s recov- ery, Johnston says. For example, a 28-year-old San Fran- ciscan suddenly lost his ability to speak clearly and stand on his own when he had a stroke while having lunch with a friend in March. He rushed to UCSF Medical Center, where he was treated immediately with a clot-busting drug called Urokinase. Today, the man is walking well, has re- gained his ability to think clearly and is looking forward to going back to work as a consultant. Yet although he, and others like him, may be doing well, the clot- busting drugs are not widely used, Johnston says. Many stroke victims simply wait too long to get treatment, even when they experience common stroke symptoms such as the sudden onset of weakness or numbness on one side, trouble speaking or understanding and balance problems, Johnston says. That, Johnston says, is why it\u2019s essen- tial that people learn to recognize the symptoms of a stroke, which is the third- biggest killer and the No. 1 cause of dis- ability in the US. They also need to know where to get help should they need it. Though more than 70 percent of stroke victims are age 65 and over, anyone, at any age, who experiences a sudden change in the ability to speak or think clearly, no matter how subtle, may have had a stroke. Stroke victims also may ex- perience a sudden change in the ability to walk or use one-half of their body."}
{"id": "fm-7-72-light-infantry-batalion-1987", "title": "FM 7-72 Light Infantry Battalion 1987", "year": 1987, "seq": 0, "text": "Commanders must seek out the enemy where he is most vulnerable. Commanders must study the enemy, learn his strengths and weaknesses, and know how to create new vulnerabilities which can be exploited to decisive effect. Combat power must be concentrated to reach points of enemy vulnerability quickly without loss of synchronization. Designate, Sustain, and Shift the Main Effort. It is imperative that commanders designate, sustain, and shift the main effort as necessary during operations. The main effort is delegated to the unit with the most important task to accomplish within the commander\u2019s concept. If conditions change and success of the overall mission can be obtained more cheaply or quickly another way, the commander shifts his main effort to another force. 1-3 Press the Fight. Commanders must press the fight aggressively. Battles are won by the force that is successful in pressing its main effort to a conclusion. Knowledge of the enemy and his unit\u2019s capabilities enables the commander to extract the most from his unit before exceeding the culmi- nating point. Light forces must be physically and mentally capable of extended and continuous operations. Leaders must accept risks and press soldiers and systems to the limits of endurance for as long as necessary. Move Fast, Strike Hard, and Finish Rapidly. Light infantry has greater mobility than motorized or armored forces in close and restrictive terrain. This allows them to move quickly from position to position to attack the enemy from the flank and rear. Engagements are characterized by brief, violent action and maximum surprise. Light infantry destroys the enemy before he can recover from surprise and react. Use Terrain and Weather. Reconnaissance and intelli- gence collection give the commander a decisive edge in anticipating and overcoming difficulties with terrain and weather. He must use both to his advantage. Rough terrain and foul weather are useful to light infantry."}
{"id": "fm-7-72-light-infantry-batalion-1987", "title": "FM 7-72 Light Infantry Battalion 1987", "year": 1987, "seq": 1, "text": "Commanders must conserve the strength of their forces to be stronger at a decisive time and place, especially in the light infantry where the effects of soldier load and physical strain are visible. Commanders must also keep troops secure, protected, healthy, disciplined, and in a high state of morale. Units must be maintained in a high state of training. Combine Arms and Sister Services to Complement and Reinforce. Combat power results when arms and services complement and reinforce each other. This combination poses a dilemma for the enemy. As he evades the effects of one weapon, arm, or service, he exposes himself to attack by another. Effectiveness can be increased in a variety of ways, such as integrating engineer-sappers in the battalion task organization to assist in preparing obstacles, survivability positions, and breaching obstacles. Understand the Effects of Battle on Soldiers, Units, and Leaders. Commanders and their staffs must understand the effects of battle on soldiers, units, and leaders because war is fundamentally a contest of wills, fought by men not machines. Leaders must be alert for indicators of fatigue, fear, loss of discipline, and reduced morale. They must take 1-4 measures to deal with these before the cumulative effects drive a unit to the threshold of collapse. Well-trained, physically fit soldiers in well-led, cohesive units remain aggressive in combat situations. Section II ORGANIZATION The light infantry battalion is composed primarily of footmobile fighters, who are organized, equipped, and trained to conduct effective combat actions against light enemy forces. Under the concepts of AirLand Battle doctrine, the battalion is organized to have utility at all levels of intensity and is capable of mission accomplishment under all environmental conditions. Battalions are fully prepared to engage in small-unit independent operations at considerable distances from command and control headquar- ters."}
{"id": "fm-7-72-light-infantry-batalion-1987", "title": "FM 7-72 Light Infantry Battalion 1987", "year": 1987, "seq": 2, "text": "Probable courses of action \u2014 What is his likely mission or objective, and how will he probably attempt to achieve ri bie Enemy factors should be examined in relation to friendly factors. A deduction about the enemy should result in an action that friendly troops must carry out to counter or defeat the enemy. As enemy and friendly factors are examined together, relative strengths and weaknesses, and advantages and disadvantages will become evident. The deductions and subsequent plan should seek to exploit enemy weaknesses and negate or reduce friendly weaknesses, counter enemy strengths, and take advan- tage of friendly strengths. In analyzing both enemy and friendly factors, the battalion commander should consider the brigade and division plan, ensuring that he understands the operation and commander\u2019s intent in its overall perspective. An analysis of the enemy can be described as an understanding of his METT-T factors: What will he attempt to accomplish (his mission)? What friendly strengths or weaknesses will he attempt to overcome or exploit (his enemy analysis)? How will he use terrain to accomplish this? What troops and equipment will he have? And what time and space limitations will he be under? Aside from the relative size of forces, the type of enemy units and their equipment must be compared with the friendly weapon systems of the light infantry. Meanwhile, light infantry prepares to engage enemy infantry and armor units in depth. The friendly forces capitalize on restrictive terrain to degrade the mobility of armor and maximize the effectiveness of their small arms and medium and light antitank weapons. 2-21 (G: Terrain. In all military operations, terrain analysis involves observation and fields of fire, cover and concealment, obstacles, key terrain, and avenues of approach (OCOKA). (1) Observation and fields of fire. Observation applies to what can be seen; fire determines what can be hit."}
{"id": "fm-7-72-light-infantry-batalion-1987", "title": "FM 7-72 Light Infantry Battalion 1987", "year": 1987, "seq": 3, "text": "Its location is determined by where the commander can best command and control the battle. The composition of the command group depends on the situation and the desires of the commander. It generally consists of the commander, $3, fire support officer, ALO, and ANGLICO, if attached. b. The tactical CP is not a permanent organization and is normaily prescribed by SOP and modified as necessary. It is highly mobile, enabling the commander to move about the battlefield as necessary. 2-26 The commander positions himself so that he can see the battle and issue appropriate orders at critical times. However, \u201cseeing the battle\u2019 consists of more than being well forward in a location to observe critical actions. It implies that the TAC is in a position to receive reports on those key indicators that the commander has discussed with his subordinates and, upon receipt of these reports, he isin a position to order decisive action. The FSO must be in a position to coordinate indirect fires and respond to changes in the situation or mission with recommended changes to the fire support plan. The TACP must also be in a position to see the battlefield in order to coordinate close air support, shift preplanned CAS targets, and advise the commander on CAS issues. The command group normally operates on foot but, on occasion, may operate with vehicles. The drivers and operation sergeants assist in operating radios, posting maps, moving the vehicles, providing security, and freeing the commander and S83 to concentrate on the battle. An alternate command post is designated to ensure continuous command and control. The alternate CP may be the battalion mortar platoon or the admin-log center in the combat trains. On most occasions, the light infantry operates where terrain or the tactical situation preclude the use of vehicles, and a walking TAC is required."}
{"id": "fm-7-72-light-infantry-batalion-1987", "title": "FM 7-72 Light Infantry Battalion 1987", "year": 1987, "seq": 4, "text": "Attacks by light infantry battalions may be initiated to defeat a particular enemy force, secure terrain for subsequent operations, or to protect an adjacent unit\u2019s flank. Attacks may also disclose enemy strength, disposition, and intentions. Attacks are also used to deceive the enemy or draw strength away from an objective area. b. Light infantry battalions can attack in a variety of ways and in a variety of situations. Light infantry battalions prefer to 3-2 attack under cover of darkness and bad weather, using approaches that are impossible or unlikely for other forces. The following are a few examples of likely light infantry offensive missions: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) Attack to penetrate a defensive position by infiltrating gaps and taking fortifications from the rear in prepa- ration for the continuation of the attack by other forces (ight infantry, motorized, mechanized, or armor) to greater depths. Attack to destroy reserves, C3, CS, or critical CSS installations in the enemy\u2019s rear (behind forward regiments) by penetrating through infiltration, air assault, or stay-behind tactics. This can be in support of attack or defense by other forces. The battalion may be a part of a brigade-size force making mutually supporting attacks. Attack by infiltration or air assault to seize an isolated enemy strongpoint in close terrain. This could be a guerrilla base camp or an isolated outpost guarding a defile or mountain pass in mid- to high-intensity warfare. Attack by infiltration or air assault to seize and hold a bridge, defile, or mountain pass to assist the passage and continuation of the attack of a larger mechanized or armored force or to deny passage to an enemy counter- attacking reserve force. Infiltration or stay-behind to ambush a mechanized column in the enemy\u2019s rear area in a defile, mountain pass, or densely wooded terrain."}
{"id": "fm-7-72-light-infantry-batalion-1987", "title": "FM 7-72 Light Infantry Battalion 1987", "year": 1987, "seq": 5, "text": "An exploitation is conducted to take advantage of initial success in battle. It prevents the enemy from reconstituting an organized defense or conducting an orderly withdrawal. It may follow a hasty or deliberate attack. The exploitation focuses on the enemy, speeds the disintegration of his units, and destroys his will to resist. It is an integral part of all attack planning. Exploitation may be characterized by rolling up enemy flanks, isolating and capturing command and control centers, overrunning supply bases, and attacking units from the rear. b. The light infantry battalion may exploit its own success to a limited extent; but it normally participates in the exploitation as part of a larger force. Opportunities for exploitation are indicated by an increase in the number of prisoners captured; an increase in abandoned materiel; the overrunning of artillery, command facilities, signal installations, and supply dumps; and a decrease in enemy resistance. c. Exploiting force missions include securing objectives deep in the enemy rear, cutting lines of communication, surrounding and destroying enemy units, denying escape routes to an encircled force, and destroying enemy reserves. d. The battalion advances rapidly to the enemy rear area, destroying enemy combat units and lightly defended and undefended CS and CSS activities. Bypassed enemy forces are reported to higher headquarters for reduction by follow- and-support forces. e. The successful exploitation can turn into a pursuit with the end goal being total eradication of the enemy\u2019s ability to fight. 3-23 3-17. Pursuit. ae A pursuit normally follows a successful exploitation. The object of a pursuit is to maintain pressure on the enemy and intercept, capture, or completely destroy him. Maximum use for all fire support assets is made to slow, disrupt, and confuse the enemy withdrawal. The battalion can participate in a pursuit as part of a larger force."}
{"id": "fm-7-72-light-infantry-batalion-1987", "title": "FM 7-72 Light Infantry Battalion 1987", "year": 1987, "seq": 6, "text": "This pursuit is conducted using a direct pressure force, an encircling force, and a follow-and-support force. The battalion may be part of these types of forces. (1) The direct pressure force denies enemy units the (2) (3) opportunity to rest, regroup, or resupply by staying in direct contact with them and forcing them to stay on the move. At every opportunity, the direct pressure force envelops, cuts off, and destroys enemy elements. The encircling force moves to get in the rear of the enemy, block his escape, and, in conjunction with the direct pressure force, attacks to destroy the enemy force. The enveloping force advances along routes parallel to the enemy\u2019s line of retreat to reach defiles, communication centers, bridges, and other key terrain ahead of the enemy main force. The follow-and-support force is not a reserve, but it is committed to destroy bypassed enemy units, relieve direct pressure force elements (which have halted to contain enemy forces), secure lines of communication, secure key terrain, or guard prisoners at key installations. Section IV TECHNIQUES Techniques refer to general and detailed methods used by commanders and units in carrying out offensive operations. The techniques in this section represent only one example of how to apply the forms of maneuver to a specific situation. The techniques are the links between the five forms of maneuver and tactics \u2014 they are not missions. Each form of maneuver has principles, considerations, problems, and practical applications and solutions that are embodied in each technique. This section discusses techniques for four of the five forms of maneuver. The leader should fit the technique and form of maneuver to the situation, rather 3-24 than trying to make the situation fit the technique. He must recognize opportunities to execute a particular form of maneuver or technique and exploit it."}
{"id": "fm-7-72-light-infantry-batalion-1987", "title": "FM 7-72 Light Infantry Battalion 1987", "year": 1987, "seq": 7, "text": "The expanding torrent technique is used to conduct a penetration. The purpose of the expanding torrent is to quickly convert an initial breach in an enemy linear defense in depth into a full scale penetration, leading to destruction of the 3-28 enemy force. Light infantry battalions may execute the expanding torrent technique, but they will normally do so as part of a brigade attack. The intention of the expanding torrent is to quickly capitalize on success and continue the attack along the path of least resistance. It is also useful in helping heavy forces bypass strong enemy defenses. This technique may be executed from a movement to contact, hasty attack, or deliberate attack. Deliberate attacks offer the best chance of success. The execution allows for a rapid flow of forces through an ever widening breach in the enemy defense. In order to effectively conduct the expanding torrent, the battlion is organized into four elements \u2014 breach, assault, follow-and-support, and reserve. The use of the follow-and- support has usually been assigned to units no lower than battalion (during exploitation). In light infantry, follow-and- support is used to give specific tasks to committed elements other than the reserve. These tasks are very specific and detailed. This permits units to conduct prior planning and to prepare for their execution during the conduct of the attack. The expanding torrent technique is used when there are no flanks to exploit by a turning movement or envelopment, or there is not sufficient time to do an infiltration or to rapidly capitalize on an unexpected opportunity. Expanding torrents executed from a hasty attack differ from those executed from a deliberate attack in that there is less time for reconnaissance, the exact point of penetration is unknown, and the battalion\u2019s internal task organization must be altered."}
{"id": "fm-7-72-light-infantry-batalion-1987", "title": "FM 7-72 Light Infantry Battalion 1987", "year": 1987, "seq": 8, "text": "The commander may choose to maximize the search potential of his force by designating specific methods to be used to locate the enemy. Several options exist: reconnaissance and search teams, observation posts, company and platoon zones, and hide positions. The reconnaissance and search teams provide active elements that are constantly moving, checking, and scanning to find the enemy, confirm his locations, and fix him. An alternative to reconnaissance and search teams is the use of observation posts. The location of these posts is 3-39 (based on the result of the IPB process) to cover likely movement routes, assembly areas, and base camp locations. Companies and platoons may be given separate zones to cover. However, the activities must be integrated so that units can respond in a coordinated manner to enemy contacts. The last option, hide positions, employs teams operating in alternating active and passive modes. The teams are passive in the hide positions as they rest and reorganize. When the teams leave the hide positions, it is to conduct reconnaissance during periods of likely enemy activity. The search and attack technique must employ a variety of search techniques to avoid a linear sweep. If the unit operates in a linear manner, the enemy will sidestep the search units and avoid contact. The scouts may be used to reconnoiter within an assigned sector, assist other units, or to screen a vulnerable flank. The antiarmor platoon may not be able to support the battalion with fire because of the masking effect of terrain. Their contribution as an information collection and surveillance force cannot be minimized. Positions should be selected to provide direct fire support. If this is not possible, then the capabilities of the TOW sights should be exploited. TOW vehicles can be located where they can monitor areas where the enemy can be expected to travel at night."}
{"id": "fm-7-72-light-infantry-batalion-1987", "title": "FM 7-72 Light Infantry Battalion 1987", "year": 1987, "seq": 9, "text": "The battalion organization is tailored for the conduct of the urban storm attack. Three elements are organized to assault the area \u2014 assault, support, and reserves. Each element is based upon reconnaissance and the charac- teristics of the objective. The assault group is tasked to break into the building or area. The assault element, under one commander, breaks swiftly into the area and battles to secure a foothold. The assault is lightly armed with automatic weapons and grenades and should be prepared to engage in hand-to-hand combat. Additional assets, such as engineer- sappers, may be task organized with the assault element to facilitate the breakin. The support element not only supports the assault element but also reinforces it. Initially, the support element provides suppression fire for the assault force. Light artillery firing HEP-T in the direct fire mode is extremely effective as a complement of the support element. Once the assault force signals the building or area is secure, then the support element enters from various directions and quickly establishes firing positions to create a defensive position. The reserve supple- ments the assault element, secures the flanks, or establishes blocking positions, as necessary. Urban storm attacks are almost always executed at night or under cover of obscurants. Success is generated through timing and surprise. Urban storm attacks are characterized by decentralization, flexibility, and initiative. 3-43 fs Companies will perform the following missions during a battalion urban storm attack: e Isolate a portion of the urban area. (Establish overwatch positions, use indirect fire, smoke, and high explosives [HE], and establish aggressive patrols.) e Secure a foothold on the edge of the urban area. (Identify a weakness through reconnaissance; mass fires against the break-in point; and conduct swift and violent attack against the point.) e Clear a portion of the urban area."}
{"id": "middleagedloves00bacogoog", "title": "Middle aged love stories", "year": 1971, "seq": 0, "text": "An' I said yes. An' she come into this ol' vault of a suller, an' she pointed to that ol' heap o' wood, an' she tol' me ter move it over ter that corner. An' I done so fer half an hour. An' I says to that blitherin' fool over there, who was workin' in that ol' wood- house, what the devil did she care w'ich corner the darned stuff was in ? An' he says that she didn't care a hang, but that she'd tell the next man that come along to move it back to where I got it from; he said 'twas a matter er principle with her not to give a man a bite fer nothin' ! So I shut him in his ol' house, an' w'en she come down I gave her a piece of my mind. I don't mind a little work, mis- ter, but when it come to shufflin' kind- lin's round in this ol' tomb fer half an hour an' makin' a fool o' myself fer nothin', I got my back up. My time ain't so vallyble to me as 'tis to some, gov'nor, but it's worth a damn sight more'n that ! \" [49] A PHILANTHROPIST Miss Gould's lodger shuddered as he remembered the quarter he had surrepti- tiously bestowed upon the man, and the withering scorn that would be his portion were the weakness known. He smiled as he recalled the scene in the cellar when he had helped Miss Gould up the stairs and returned to soothe Henry, who re- gretted that he had left one timber of the woodhouse upon another. \" Though I'm bound to say, Mr. Welles, that I see how he felt. I've often felt like a fool explainin' how they was to move that wood back an' forth. It does seem strange that Miss Gould has to do it that way."}
{"id": "middleagedloves00bacogoog", "title": "Middle aged love stories", "year": 1971, "seq": 1, "text": "Waters remarked triumphantly, as he summoned his second pair of twins from [64] A PHILANTHROPIST the yard and demanded of them if the gentleman had given them nickels or dimes. The gentleman in question became un- comfortably conscious, in the course of their walk home, of an atmosphere not wholly novel, that lost no strength in this case from its studied repression. That afternoon, as they sat in the shade of the big elm, he in his flexible wicker chair, she in a straight-backed, high- seated legacy from her grandfather, the whirlwind that Mr. Waters had so lightly sown fell to the reaping of a victim too amiable and unsuspecting not to escape the sentence of any but so stern a judge as the handsome and inflexible represen- tative of the moral order now before him. Miss Gould was looking her best in a crisp lavender dimity, upon whose frills Mrs. Waters had bestowed the grate- ful exercise of her highest art. Her sleek, dark coils of hair, from which no one A PHILANTHROPIST stray lock escaped, framed her fresh cheeks most admirably ; her strong white hands appeared and disappeared with an absolute regularity through the dark- green wool out of which she was evolving a hideous and useful shawl. To her lodger, who alternately waved a palm-leaf fan and drank lemonade, reading at in- tervals from a two-days-old newspaper, and carrying on the desultory and amus- ing soliloquy that they were pleased to consider conversation, she presented the most attractive of pictures. \" So firm, so positive, so wholesome,\" he murmured to himself, calling her attention to the exquisite effect of the slanting rays that struck the lawn in a dappled pattern of flickering leaf-shadows, and remarking the violet tinge thrown by the setting sun on the old spire below in the mid- dle of the village."}
{"id": "middleagedloves00bacogoog", "title": "Middle aged love stories", "year": 1971, "seq": 2, "text": "He laughed softly to himself, and touched the strings of the guitar that she had struck. \" I shall save the wor- thy Thomas much,\" he murmured to himself, \"and of course I do it to reform her \u2014 I cannot pull down the village and die with the Philistines ! \" She went up the long main street, Mr. Waters at her side and Annabel Riley behind her. Her lodger watched her out of sight, and prepared to lock up the Rooms. \"So firm, so positive, so wholesome!\" he said, as he started after her. [89] A A REVERSION TO TYPE A REVERSION TO TYPE SHE had never felt so tired of it all, it seemed to her. The sun streamed hot across the backs of the shining seats into her eyes, but she was too tired to get the window-pole. She watched the incoming class listlessly, wondering whe- ther it would be worth while to ask one of them to close the shutter. They chat- tered and giggled and bustled in, rattling the chairs about, and begging one an- other's pardon vociferously, with that in- sistent politeness which marks a sharply defined stage in the social evolution of the young girl. They irritated her exces- sively \u2014 these little airs and graces. She 1931 A REVERSION TO TYPE opened her book with a snap, and began to call the roll sharply. Midway up the room sat a tall, dark girl, not handsome, but noticeably well dressed. She looked politely at her ques- tioner when spoken to, but seemed as far in spirit as the distant trees toward which she directed her attention when not par- ticularly addressed. She seemed to have a certain personality, a self-possession, a source of interest other than collegiate ; and this held her apart from the others in the mind of the woman who sat before the desk."}
{"id": "middleagedloves00bacogoog", "title": "Middle aged love stories", "year": 1971, "seq": 3, "text": "She was passing through the chapel. Two scrubbing-women were straightening the chairs, their backs turned to her. \" From all I hear,\" said one, with a [103] A REVERSION TO TYPE chuckle and a sly glance, \"we'll be afther gettin' our invitations soon.\" \" An' to what ? \" demanded the other quickly, \" Sure, they say it's a weddin'.\" \"Ah, now, hush yer noise, Mary Nolan ; 'tis no such thing, I've had enough o' husbands. I know when I'm doin' well, an' that's as I am ! \" \" 'Tis strange that the men sh'd think different, now, but they do ! \" They laughed heartily and long. The German assistant looked at the broad backs meditatively. Just now they seemed to her more consistent than any other women in the great building. She walked quickly across the greening campus. The close-set brick buildings seemed to press up against her; every window stood for some crowded, narrow room, filled with books and tea-cups and clothes and photographs \u2014 hundreds of them, and all alike. In her own room she tried to reason herself out of this [104] A REVERSION TO TYPE intolerable depression, to realize the ad- vantages of a quiet life in what was surely the same pleasant, cultured atmosphere to which she had so eagerly looked for- ward three years ago. Her room was large, well furnished, perfectly heated ; and if the condition of her closet would have appeared nothing short of appall- ing to a householder, that condition was owing to the hopeless exigencies of the occasion. With the exception of that whited sepulchre, all was neat, artistic, eminently habitable. She surveyed it critically : the \" Mona Lisa,\" the large \"Melrose Abbey,'* the Burne-Jones dra- peries, and the \" Blessed Damozel \" that spread a placid if monotonous culture through the rooms of educated single women. A proper appreciation of pol- ished wood, the sanitary and aesthetic values of the open fire, a certain scheme in couch-pillows, all linked it to the dozen other rooms that occupied the same rela- tive ground-floor corners in a dozen other [105] A REVERSION TO TYPE \u25a0 houses."}
{"id": "middleagedloves00bacogoog", "title": "Middle aged love stories", "year": 1971, "seq": 4, "text": "For almost an hour she sat looking fixedly at the unlit logs, hardly conscious of the wasted time. Much might have gone into that hour. There was tea for her at one of the college houses \u2014 the hostess had a \"day,\" and went so far as to aspire to the exclusive serving of a certain kind of tinned fancy biscuit every Friday \u2014 if she wanted to [no] A REVERSION TO TYPE drop in. This hostess invited favored students to meet the faculty and towns- people on these occasions, and the two latter classes were expected to effect a social fusion with the former \u2014 which linked it, to some minds, a little too ob- viously with professional duties. She might call on the head of her de- partment, who was suffering from some slight indisposition, and receive minute advice as to the conduct of her classes, mingled with general criticism of various colleagues and their methods. She might make a number of calls; but if there is one situation in which the futility of these social mockeries becomes most thoroughly obvious, it is the situation presented by an attempt to imitate the conventional society life in a woman's college. And yet \u2014 she had gone over the whole ques- tion so often \u2014 what a desert of awk- wardness and learned provincialism such a college would be without the attempt ! How often she had cordially agreed to [111] A REVERSION TO TYPE the statement that it was precisely be- cause of its insistence upon this connec- tion with the forms and relations of normal life that her college was so suc- cessfully free from the tomboyishness or the priggishness or the gaucherie of some of the others ! And yet its very success came from begging the question, after all. She shook her head impatiently, A strong odor of boiling chocolate crept through the transom."}
{"id": "middleagedloves00bacogoog", "title": "Middle aged love stories", "year": 1971, "seq": 5, "text": "I mus' run now to somesing else, but I come ag-gain, and you teach me immedi- [154] A HOPE DEFERRED ately ag-gain, for I have forgotten it all. But zere is no time to lose \u2014 no, indeed!\" She was amazed at the bitterness of his tone; she could hardly understand, he poured out the words so quickly, but she could see that this was more than a passing irritation, that his years of teach- ing were beginning to tell on him. Be- fore she could reply he had risen and opened the door, and she found herself passing through to the porch without the formula of invitation that preceded the coffee. When he joined her with the neglected cups the storm had passed, and as he talked quietly of the prepara- tion for the voyage that had formed the subject of their evening conversation for weeks, she could hardly realize the depths of weariness and loathing that the sudden glimpse of exhausted patience had shown her. That night Miss Sabina did not sing. She played through two or three of the stiff, sweet little preludes, but the lilacs [155] A HOPE DEFERRED were so strong, the old melodies waked such confused, excited sadness in her, that the songs would not come. The sight of that keen, drooping profile dark against the orange glow reproached her somehow with its loneliness \u2014 how many weeks he would sit alone! \u2014 and she rose hastily and went out again. \"You do not sing? You have not ze mood, hein ? Eh bien^ not to sing, it is well sometimes.\" . . . And they sat in silence long after the stars came out. That night Miss Sabina slept lightly. Strange, confused dreams, half-conscious delusions, troubled her with voices that she knew were unreal, that yet murmured and muttered and droned, till, in her effort to dismiss them and sink to deeper sleep, she woke with a start."}
{"id": "middleagedloves00bacogoog", "title": "Middle aged love stories", "year": 1971, "seq": 6, "text": "\" A great remorse rose in him. Poor child \u2014 poor, young, unknowing creature, that, after all, was only twenty-two ! She felt it, then, the strange mist that seemed to muffle his words and actions, to hold him back. And she had given him so much ! He took her hands and drew her to him. \" My dear, dear child,\" he said gently, \"forgive a selfish middle-aged bachelor [205] THE COURTING OF LADY JANE if he cannot come up to the precious ideals of the sweetest girlhood in the world ! I am no more worthy of you. Lady dear, than I have ever been, but I have never felt more tender toward you, more sensible of all you are giving me. I cannot pretend to the wild love of the poets you read so much ; that time, if it ever was, is past for me. I am a plain, unromantic person, who takes and leaves a great deal for granted \u2014 I thought you knew that. But you must never doubt \u2014 \" He paused a moment, and for the first time she interrupted him nervously. \"I never will \u2014 Clarence,\" she said almost solemnly ; and it struck him for the first time that she had never called him by his name before. He leaned over her, and as in one of her rare con- cessions she lifted her face up to him, he bent lower than her forehead ; what com- pelled him to kiss her soft cheek rather than her lips he did not know. Unexpected business summoned him [206] THE COURTING OF LADY JANE to New York for a fortnight the next day, and the great city drew him irresist- ibly into its noisy maelstrom. The cur- rent of his thoughts changed absolutely. Old friends and new took up his leisure. His affairs, as they grew more pressing, woke in him a keen delight in the strug- gle with his opponents ; as he shook hands triumphantly with his lawyer after a well-earned victory he felt years younger."}
{"id": "middleagedloves00bacogoog", "title": "Middle aged love stories", "year": 1971, "seq": 7, "text": "\" I should hope she'd arrive at the point where she could buy her own din- ners,\" she remarked. \" To be beholden for your bread \"... Here were two points of view as little [227] JULIA THE APOSTATE likely to coincide as the parallel lines of science, and at some such stage as this the discussions were wont to cease. To-day the apartment was swept and garnished for a social function long planned by the nieces. Carnations leaned from tall glass vases, intricate little cakes jostled carefully piled sandwiches, and a huge brass samovar, borrowed for the occasion, gave dignity to the small parlor. Miss Trueman had learned by now the unwritten law that prevented the various objects in the once proudly segregated \" drawing-room set \" from association with each other, and made no attempt to correct their intentional isolation. The samovar she refused utterly to med- dle with, assuring them that she would as soon think of running a locomotive. As the guests began to arrive Miss Trueman found herself regarding them even more critically than usual; an argu- mentative spirit rose in her, and her calm contradiction of Mrs. Ranger, who dis- [228] JULIA THE APOSTATE cussed with great subtlety the notable advantages \u2014 even from the artistic point of view \u2014 of the approaching spring when experienced in the city, in comparison with that be-rhymed season's vaunted country beauties, startled more than one person. \"Just because they're more delicate, just because you must look harder to discover them, just because you must get as much from a pot of hyacinths on the Avenue as from a whole field of prim- roses in the backwoods, you know,\" she concluded, and the little circle nodded sagely and congratulated themselves on an unpublished paragraph. \" I don't agree with you, Mrs. Ranger,\" said Aunt Ju-ju flatly, to the absolute amazement of her nieces and the tolerant amusement of the assembly."}
{"id": "middleagedloves00bacogoog", "title": "Middle aged love stories", "year": 1971, "seq": 8, "text": "DUD'S SISTER neat little kitchen-garden; parsley was there in plenty, and other vaguely famil- iar green things, curly-leaved and spear- pointed. A warm gust of wind brought mint to his nostrils. A second plot held a small crab-apple tree covered with pink and orange globes. A great tortoise-shell cat with two kittens ornamented the third, and in the middle of the fourth, be- side a small wooden table, a woman sat with her back toward the intruder. On the table were one or two tin boxes and a yellow earthen dish ; in her left hand, raised to the shoulder-level, was a tall thin bottle, from which an amber fluid dripped in an almost imperceptibly thin stream; her right arm stirred vigorously. She was a middle-aged woman with lightly grayed hair \u2014 a kind of premoni- tory powdering. Over her full skirt of lavender-striped cotton stuff fell a broad, competent white apron. Except for the thudding of the spoon against the bowl, and a faint, homely echo of clashing [260] MRS. DUD'S SISTER china and tin, mingled with occasionally raised voices and laughter from some farther kitchen region, all was utterly, placidly still. Varian stood chained to the open gate. Something in the calm sun-bathed pict- ure tugged strongly at his heart. He thought suddenly of his mother and his Aunt Delia \u2014 he had been very fond of Aunt Delia. And what cookies she used to make! Molasses cookies, brown, moist, and crumbly, they had sweetened his boyhood. What was it, that delighted sense of congruity that filled him, every passing second, with keener familiarity, so strangely tinged with sorrow and regret ? Ah, he had it ! He bit his lip as it came clear to him. His little namesake neph- ew, dead at eight years old, and dear as only a dearly loved child can be, had delighted greatly in the Kate Greenaway pictures that came in \" painting-books,\" with colored prints on alternate pages [261] MRS."}
{"id": "missourimariasba1980vold", "title": "Missouri-Marias Basin, Voldseth Dams and Reservoir, Meagher County, Montana, MT-1153, MT-1590", "year": 1980, "seq": 0, "text": "Army Corps of Engineers' Report to the United States Congress on National Program of Inspection of Dams\" in May 1975. The recommended guidelines were prepared with the help of engineers and scientists highly experienced in dam safety from many federal and state agencies, professional engineering organizations and private engineering consulting firms. Consequently, the evaluation criteria presented in the guidelines represent the comprehensive consensus of the engineering community. Where necessary the guidelines recommend a two-phased study procedure for investigation and evaluating existing dam conditions so deficiencies and hazardous conditions can be readily identified and corrected. The Phase I study is: 0) a limited investigation to assess the general safety condition of the dam. (2) based upon an evaluation of the available data and a visual inspection. (3) . performed to determine if any needed emergency measures and/or if additional studies, investigations and analyses are necessary or warranted. (4) not intended to include extensive explorations, analysis or to provide detailed alternative correction recommendations. The Phase II investigation includes all additional studies necessary to evaluate the safety of the dam. Included in Phase II, as required, should be additional visual inspections, measurements, foundation explora- tion and testing, material testing, hydraulic and hydrologic analyses and structural stability analyses. The authority for the Corps of Engineers to participate in the inspection of non-federal ly owned dams is limited to Phase I investigations with the exception of situations of extreme emergency. In these cases the Corps may proceed with Phase II studies but only to the extent needed to answer serious questions relating to dam safety that cannot be answered otherwise. The two phases of investigations outlined above are intended only to evaluate project safety and do not encompass in scope the engineering required to perform design or corrective modification work. Recommendations contained in this report may be for either Phase II safety analyses or detailed design study for corrective work."}
{"id": "missourimariasba1980vold", "title": "Missouri-Marias Basin, Voldseth Dams and Reservoir, Meagher County, Montana, MT-1153, MT-1590", "year": 1980, "seq": 1, "text": "The igneous rocks are alkalic and are composed of syenites and other alkalic-rich varieties. With the intrusion of the igneous bodies and the thrust faulting, the older Pre-Cambrian and Paleozoic rocks were uplifted and exposed as in the case of the Big Belt Mountains. The attendant foothills of the ranges are of later Paleozoic and Lower Mesozoic sediments. During this mountain-building phase, the basinal sediments were formed into a dome containing smaller anticlines and synclines. The most prominent of these are the Little Belt Mountains and the Snowy Mountains. 3 Subsequent to the mountain building came erosion. Erosional debris from the mountians swept down by rivers and streams covered the earlier Cretaceous sandstones and shales and formed the Eocene Fort Union formation consisting of sandstone, shale, and bituminous coal. Subsequent erosion of this domed basin has produced the present topography which shows a rim of Fort Union deposits with succeedingly older Cretaceous deposits toward the center of the present smaller basins. These Cretaceous deposits are predominantly the sandstones and shales of the Livingston Formation. The oldest formation exposed in the basins is the Colorado Shale. Later Tertiary gravels and sands form the terraces and benches of the Musselshell River with Pleistocene alluvium along the recent bed of the river. 1.2.3. Seismicity The reservoir and dams lie in Seismic Zone 3 as indicated by the Seismic Zone Map (Reference 1). The seismic probability of Zone 3 is one of a potential for major damage and is based on the know distribution of damaging earthquakes in the region. Although the Zone Map is based on a known distribution of damaging earthquakes, it does not necessarily reflect accurate or adequate seismic design parameters for this site. No major faults have been mapped in the immediate vicinity of the reservoir although the traces of minor faults can be inferred from aerial photographs and topographic maps."}
{"id": "missourimariasba1980vold", "title": "Missouri-Marias Basin, Voldseth Dams and Reservoir, Meagher County, Montana, MT-1153, MT-1590", "year": 1980, "seq": 2, "text": "The crest is very irregular, varying as much as 2.0 feet in height. Variations in crest width were not measured, but are estimated to be as much as \u00b15 feet from the value state above. These variations seem to have been caused by erosion on the upstream face. Variat- ions in slopes and in the crest elevations appear to be a result of construction Riprap is inadequate. 10 ) Borrow for the West Dam was obtained from below the downstream toe. Additional borrow was probably obtained from the reservoir area. Some weathered shale was obtained from above the right abutment of the West Dam. The borrow source for the East Dam is not known. 2.3.2 Foundation Conditions, Seepage, and Drainage The foundations of both dams appear to be composed of silts, gravels, and cobbles similar to the materials found in the embankments. The thickness of these alluvial and colluvial materials appears to increase from north to south, but the exact thicknesses are unknown. The foundation material is Comb Creek valley fill, the edge of which can be seen in a borrow pit at the north abutment of the West Dam. The foundation alluvial silts, gravels, and cobbles are very permeable in their natural state, and only slightly less so when compacted as em- bankment. According to the owner, the dam embankments contain no internal drainage systems. Because of these facts, seepage or the vegetative evidence of seepage was found along almost the entire length of West Dam. . The evidence of seepage consisted of greener grass and higher suscepti- bility to animal damage than the remainder of the embankment and a multitude of small shear failures with scarps 2 to 6 feet high. At two locations on the downstream face of the West Dam, there are unrepaired slope failures, the larger at station 14+50 and the smaller centered on the outlet conduit at station 12+00."}
{"id": "missourimariasba1980vold", "title": "Missouri-Marias Basin, Voldseth Dams and Reservoir, Meagher County, Montana, MT-1153, MT-1590", "year": 1980, "seq": 3, "text": "An investigation of the East Dam needs to be conducted to determine whether any remedial steps are needed to provide required stability. According to Gary Yoldseth, the owner's son, an attempt was made a few years ago to seal a portion of the reservoir with Bentonite. The degree of success is not known. 11 2.3.3 Stability The presence of unrepaired slope failures in the downstream face of the West Dam associated with an apparent high phreatic surface, indicates that the dam is in imminent danger of failure under the condition of steady seep- age from the maximum pool. For this condition the safety factor of the down- stream slope is estimated to be nearly 1.00. A safety factor of 1.5 is recommended by inspection guidelines. No stability evaluation of the East Dam could be made at the time of the inspection due to snow cover on the downstream toe area. The existence of failures in the downstream face of the West Dam requires an immediate temporary remedy, followed by a detailed investigation, analysis, and any necessary modifications. We recommend the investigation and analysis also include the East Dam. The investigation and analysis needs to be performed and the remedy selected with full consideration of the seepage problems, the apparent marginal stability of West Dam under normal pool conditions and potential earthquake effects. Riprap coverage is inadequate both in thickness and in extent. Although new riprap is apparent in some locations, most notably in the vicinity of the gate tower of the West Dam, it is completely absent above the normal high-water line on about half of the West Dam and all of the East Dam. In unprotected areas the crest of the West Dam has eroded as much as 5 feet toward the centerline (see Photo 7) and the crest of the East Dam has eroded as much as 10 feet, with no recent repairs visible (see Photo 13 and Plate 2). 2.4 PROJECT OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE 2.4.1 Dams There is no formal plan for performing periodic maintenance of the Yoldseth Dams."}
{"id": "missourimariasba1980vold", "title": "Missouri-Marias Basin, Voldseth Dams and Reservoir, Meagher County, Montana, MT-1153, MT-1590", "year": 1980, "seq": 4, "text": "This dam is 35 feet high and impounds approximately 3000- acre- feet of water (based on total volume capability). In accordance with inspection guidelines, Voldseth West Dam is intermediate in size with a high downstream hazard potential rating. The recommended spillway design flood (SDF) for this dam is 100 percent of the PMF. Voldseth West Dam will not be overtopped during the PMF; however, on the basis of its physical cond- ition. West Dam is considered unsafe and requires emergency action. 3.1.2 Embankment Dams Two slope failures in the downstream face of the West Dam were observed dur- ing the inspection. Additionally, many small slope failures at the downstream toe of the same dam were found. Failures seem to be related to the large quan- ity of seepage water and high phreatic surface emerging 2 to 6 feet vertically above the downstream toe which occurs for most of the length of the dam. Based upon the results of our investigation, we conclude that the embankment stability of the West Dam does not conform to the recommended guidelines and the embankment is in need of immediate attention. Most of the downstream face of the East Dam was covered by a snowdrift at the time of the inspection, and a visual evaluation was not possible. The riprap on both, dams, wh^ere present, is generally too thin to offer adequate protection. There is no riprap present in about half the area above the high-water level on the West Dam and in all the area above the high-water level on the East Dam. The vertical distance above high-water line is about 3 feet on East Dam and 6 feet on West Dam. Erosion in the unprotected areas above high water has progressed toward the centerline about 5 feet on the West Dam and 10 feet on the East Dam. Rodent burrows were visible on all exposed surfaces of both dams."}
{"id": "missourimariasba1980vold", "title": "Missouri-Marias Basin, Voldseth Dams and Reservoir, Meagher County, Montana, MT-1153, MT-1590", "year": 1980, "seq": 5, "text": "The spillway channel would obviously erode downstream of its crest at discharges anywhere near its capacity. The spillway channel is some distance away from the downstream toe of the East Dam at the south abutment. It is our opinion that erosion in the channel would not encroach on the dam. The flood resulting from the PMP of 72-hour duration for the 1.0 square mile drainage area, including the reservoir, is computed to have a volume of 990 acre- feet. The combination of reservoir surcharge storage and total spill ing discharge capacity is insufficient to prevent overtopping of the East Dam during the PMF. The PMF routings indicate the West Dam would not be over- topped. 3.1.5 Operation and Maintenance Operation and maintenance are performed by Mr. Voldseth and his son, Gary. They both live about 1% miles below the reservoir and visit the site when necessary. Water is diverted to the reservoir from Comb Creek. '\\ It is then released as needed for irrigation through the low-level out- lets of either the East or West Dams. As a consequence, the reservoir level fluctuates seasonally. Maintenance of the dams is not adequate. Slope failures in the down- stream slope of West Dam have existed for a least a year with no visible attempts to repair. There is extensive rodent infestation. Trees and brush on the upstream faces of the embankments have not been regularly removed. Although some riprap has been added in some critical areas, there is serious, unrepaired erosion on crests and upstream faces of both dams. 15 There is no formal warning system or plan of action to alert downstream in- habitants in the event of dam failure. 3.2 \u2022 RECOMMENDATIONS 1. Immediately develop, implement and periodically test an emergency warning plan to alert persons and downstream interests in event of imminent structural failure. \u2022 ^ 2. Immediately hire a qualified engineer to develop and implement in- terim measures to provide adequate- embankment stability and a new reser- voir operating plan that maintains the reservoir level not higher than 18 feet below the top of West Dam while interim embanlcment modifications are being constructed. 3."}
{"id": "modaltestinganal00andb", "title": "Modal testing and analysis of the NPS Space Truss.", "year": 1997, "seq": 0, "text": "INTRODUCTION Spacecraft launch cost is the major part of the total cost of any space mission. This often prohibitive cost of launching payloads into orbit has driven engineers and scientists to develop lighter construction materials and weight saving designs, without compromising the dynamic stability and strength required for mission accomplishment. With these new materials and designs, however, comes the added challenges of modeling, measuring, and controlling the vibration of advanced, lightweight, space structures. The Naval Postgraduate School (NPS) Space Truss provides a key platform for the development and test of models and modeling techniques. Once a Finite Element Model (FEM) has been developed for the NPS Space Truss, it can be experimentally verified in the laboratory. Specifically, using accelerometers attached to the truss's nodes and exciting the truss via an impulse hammer (with a built-in force transducer) striking a node, the frequency response function can be obtained. The resulting Frequency Response Functions (FRFs) can be compared to the FEM using a computer tool such as X-MODAL thereby validating the FEM. Our goal should be to develop an accurate FEM (which could subsequently be used to predict other truss characteristics that may be unfeasible to produce in the laboratory), and then to validate that FEM through modal testing and analysis. Once a model has been verified as accurate, control methods can be applied and tested as well. A new and advanced dynamic and strain detection system is comprised of Fiber Bragg Grating Sensors (FBGS). Employing light weight, low power fiber optics, this recently developed technology provides the spacecraft designer with a simple, yet highly accurate measurement tool for detecting both static and dynamic strain on the structure. Once detected via FBGS, a control system may be implemented to bring the structure's strain condition to within acceptable levels. Current applications include long- term static strain sensing, dynamic strain sensing (frequencies are presently low, about 50 Hz, but faster systems will soon be available), temperature and pressure sensing, magnetic and electric field sensing, and chemical sensing."}
{"id": "modaltestinganal00andb", "title": "Modal testing and analysis of the NPS Space Truss.", "year": 1997, "seq": 1, "text": "Deviation from this geometric configuration will cause a fatal error when creating the mass and stiffness matrices. Also, the elemental mass matrices in the code are constructed using a local coupled mass matrix, as opposed to local lumped or consistent mass matrices. Equations (2.1) and (2.2) describe the elemental stiffness and mass matrices for the rod model, respectively. The NRLFEMI program is presently available on several computers in the Dynamics Lab at the Naval Postgraduate School. The code used in the program and a better description of how to modify the truss properties are included in the appendices. For now, a brief description of the program's implementation and its results are all that is necessary. 2. FEM Implementation and Results We have already collected the truss properties required to build an accurate model of the structure. Specifically, we know the masses of different elements, we know the effective axial stiffness values for the longerons and diagonal elements, and we know how the truss is constructed (which element connects to which node, etc.). After we input 12 this data into the NRLFEMI program, we get the natural frequencies of the NPS Space Truss. Although these frequencies provide a good estimate to compare actual frequencies with, there are several limitations to the model. The first such limitation comes from the actual truss's mass deviations from the calculated truss mass. Referring back to Table 2.1, Truss Mass Breakdown, we know that there was some additional, unaccounted for mass on the actual weighed truss. This was attributed. to vibe tight, heat shrink, and lubrication. It should now be pointed out that the bare truss is not the same as the actual, tested truss. Likewise, the bare truss's mass is not the mass used in determining the truss characteristics for NRLFEMI. Specifically, the test mass of the NPS Space Truss includes the combined mass of eight accelerometers and 40 aluminum dummy masses (see Figure 7)."}
{"id": "modaltestinganal00andb", "title": "Modal testing and analysis of the NPS Space Truss.", "year": 1997, "seq": 2, "text": "Each of its four pedestal legs contain a piston which, when charged with compressed air (or N2 via a storage tank in our case), floats the table. The advantage of using such a mounting platform is that it filters out unwanted disturbance vibrations. Specifically, disturbances in the frequency range above 12 Hz are attenuated by more then 99% by the table. [Ref. 9] Accelerometers are highly sensitive measuring devices (sensitivities range from 100 to 500 mV/g). Any outside disturbance could corrupt the data being taken. Since we only have eight accelerometers, we will need to run the experiment several times, while moving the accelerometers to different nodes between each test, in order to test the frequency response at every node. Ultimately, we will run the experiment six times, each time measuring the response on eight different nodes, to get a global picture of the truss's response. After successfully testing each node, we can alter the pattern of the accelerometer placement, tailoring the experiment to the type of data we wish to collect. The final piece to our modal testing relationship is the input. Our input will be provided via an impulse force hammer. By striking a predetermined node such that the force is distributed equally along all three axis, we can excite the truss through its range of natural frequencies. Two nodes were selected as impulse hammer targets: node 41 and node 24 (see Figure 9). Nodes 41 and 24 were chosen so that we may excite the lower natural frequencies with a certain degree of force as well as the higher natural 18 frequencies, respectively. Node 41 is located on the extreme end of the truss where the first mode shape, corresponding to its first natural frequency, will have its greatest amplitude (nodes 15, 52, and 26 would work equally as well). Node 24 is located midway down the length of the truss, where the higher mode shapes have their greatest energy, and hence the higher natural frequencies."}
{"id": "modaltestinganal00andb", "title": "Modal testing and analysis of the NPS Space Truss.", "year": 1997, "seq": 3, "text": "Accelerometer Placement (w/ Impact Point) Now with the accelerometer in place, the cable connected and fastened to the truss, we want to level and align the accelerometer. The Newport table and NPS Space 23 Truss are already leveled to acceptable testing tolerances. Each accelerometer should have an ordinary, carpenter's torpedo level placed on all horizontal surfaces to check for level. Any adjustments necessary can be made by applying firm, finger pressure and a slight twisting motion (similar to the mounting technique) and then rechecking with the level until they are satisfactorily in place. Horizontal alignment (parallel with the long axis of the truss) is a more subjective alignment. Basically, one should stand so that their line of sight is along the line of accelerometers. By \"eyeballing\" the accelerometers in this fashion, a reasonable alignment can be made. When it is necessary to move (or remove) the accelerometers, simply twist and gently pull them off the thumb screws. Usually, a finite amount of wax is left on the mounting surface and the accelerometer. Sometimes it may not be necessary to reapply the wax adhesive to a new surface. This way, the remounting process is greatly expedited and the whole testing process takes less time. It is up to the tester and the type of data being sought, that determines the accelerometer placement. To get a complete picture of the truss's response to input, every node should be tested. With eight accelerometers, this will require six separate tests in order to cover 48 nodes (excluding the four nodes fixed to the base plate). However, there are many other accelerometer placement scenarios to be explored. Several scenarios were used in the initial modal testing of the truss covered in this thesis. These placement scenarios will be covered briefly now, and in greater detail in Appendix D, Laboratory Experimental Test Log."}
{"id": "modaltestinganal00andb", "title": "Modal testing and analysis of the NPS Space Truss.", "year": 1997, "seq": 4, "text": "Description of Fiber Bragg Gratings \"Fiber Bragg gratings (FBG) reflect a specific wavelengtrfTthat shifts slightly depending on the strain applied to the FBG sensor.\" [Ref. 4: p. 2] Inother words, a Fiber Bragg Grating Sensor (FBGS) is a type of optical strain gage. Additional FBGS applications include: long-term static strain sensing (health monitoring), dynamic strain sensing, temperature and pressure sensing, magnetic and electric field sensing, and chemical sensing. There are several unique characteristics separating FBGSs from other, conventional sensors. Large numbers of FBGSs can be placed at predetermined locations, all co-located on the same strand of fiber. This string of quasi-distributed, quasi-point sensors can be interrogated simultaneously using wave division multiplexing or time division multiplexing. Additionally, due to the material and geometry characteristics of the fiber itself, FBGSs can be embedded in composite smart structures. After briefly discussing the many applications of FBGSs, a physical description and discussion of their fabrication is given. Optical fibers are made of fused silica, an ideal, high-temperature elastic material. Actually, silica filaments may have ultimate tensile strengths on the order of 1 Mpsi for a small segment. [Ref. 5] This translates into a fiber being able to withstand strain approaching 8%. Fibers used in FBGSs can potentially tolerate a higher strain-to-failure than most of the reinforcing filaments used to construct high-performance composites. Hence any sensor embedded in a composite should live as long as the structure and not induce premature failure. After drawing the silica fiber core, a coating is applied. In quality fibers, this coating is a high- temperarure/high-modulus polymer, such as a polyimide. This coating increases the overall diameter of the fiber by only 10 |im. This polyimide coating provides good adhesion to epoxies, important when attaching FBGSs to a structure, while not degrading during the epoxy curing process."}
{"id": "modaltestinganal00andb", "title": "Modal testing and analysis of the NPS Space Truss.", "year": 1997, "seq": 5, "text": "The ability to predetermine the filter's wavelength is important when employing multiple FBGSs on one strand of fiber. Usually, a FBGS's wavelength is recorded during manufacture. When several FBGSs are connected in series, they are usually arranged in increasing (or decreasing) wavelengths. In this fashion, it is easy to determine which wavelength corresponds to which measurement a FBG interrogation system is returning. As long as their position on a structure is properly documented (i.e. which FBGS wavelength corresponds to which element), a real-time picture of the structure's strain is readily available. There are some very desirable characteristics of the Bragg gratings in a FBGS. First, the linear response of the center wavelength prevents any direction ambiguity 43 during measurements. When the grating region of the fiber is disturbed in a manner that modifies the distributions of the gratings, the index of refraction changes accordingly. A small (non-permanently deforming) change along the longitudinal axis of the FBGS causes the narrow spike, or peak, in the returned wavelength, to shift to longer wavelengths during tension and shorter wavelengths during compression. Disturbances in the grating can be due to mechanical strain, temperature change, or any other physically- altering condition. Second, absolute measurement is possible since the Bragg grating center wavelength determines the measured value in terms of arreference state. Third, the grating tends to reject the effect of strain fields not aligned with the longitudinal axis. In fact, the unidirectional, transverse components are attenuated by a factor of 500 or more compared with the longitudinal response. FBGSs are ideally suited for real-time evaluation of load, strain, vibration, and other health monitoring functions of structures. A string of FBGSs on a single strand of fiber in a multiplexed network can provide light weight, highly durable, low power, and accurate feedback for use in controlling smart structures."}
{"id": "modaltestinganal00andb", "title": "Modal testing and analysis of the NPS Space Truss.", "year": 1997, "seq": 6, "text": "Once bonded, a fiber will be destroyed if it is removed. Make sure that all necessary calculations and 45 planning have take place prior to applying FBGS to a structure. Avoid allowing the M-Bond Adhesive to come into contact with unprotected skin. The greatest potential for erroneous or false data when taking FGBS readings arises in the application of the sensor itself. The FBGSs are relatively fool-proof. Due to their linear feedback, and increased attenuation in the off-axis transverse components, FBGSs provide very reliable data. However, if the data that they are measuring (strain, vibration, etc.) is not accurately transmitted through the bonding agent, the data that the fibers return is useless. Therefore, it is imperative that a bonding agent with a completely linear transmission and minimum attenuation of the transmitted information be used in the application of FBGSs. 3. NPS Fiber Bragg Grating equipment The Naval Postgraduate School's dynamics laboratory employs BRAGG Photonics FBGSs connected to a Micron Optics Inc., picoWave\u2122 Fiber Bragg Grating Interrogation System (FBG-IS Serial Number 3005). This interrogation system can effectively monitor up to 31 FBGSs multiplexed on a single fiber. However, as the number of FBGSs increases on a fiber, their individual bandwidth decreases, compromising their overall dynamic range. Micron Optic's picoWave\u2122 can resolve changes in the optical wavelengths as fine as 1pm (<1 jistrain) and achieve calibrated wavelength accuracy of \u00b1 5 pm (4 distrain). The following schematic (Figure 26) is representative of the picoWave\u2122 interrogation system: \u2022 ELED (light source) k_ FBGSi FBGS: FBGS31 50:50 Coupler Photo-detector FFP - Tunable Filter picoWave Reference \u2022 Figure 26. Schematic of picoWave\u2122 Interrogation System 46 A drawback to the picoWave FBG-IS resides in its sampling frequency. Currently, the picoWave FBG-IS can perform dynamic strain sensing up to 25 Hz. [Ref. 4] Its sampling frequency is 50 Hz. To properly take dynamic measurements, specifically in regards to spacecraft sensing applications, much higher sampling frequencies are necessary."}
{"id": "moultoncreekdamn1979butt", "title": "Moulton Creek Dam, no. 1, MT-1467 and Basin Creek Dams no's 1 and 2, MT-374, MT-868, Butte, Montana", "year": 1979, "seq": 0, "text": "Is Based on its height, the inspection criteria classify Moulton Creek Dam No. 1 as intermediate in size and, because the downstream effects of failure are believed to be not exces- sive, the downstream hazard potential is classified as significant. Although no emergency conditions were, found, the report does list defi- ciencies which need attention; the major deficiency being the project's inability to safely handle the recommended spillway design flood. Inspection criteria for an intermediate-sized dam with a significant downstream hazard potential requires the project to safely handle at least one-half the probable maximum flood (PMF). Reservoir routing of the preliminary PMF showed the dam was overtopped at 34 percent of the peak flow and 28 percent of the 6-hour flood volume. We believe the embankment would fail if overtopped. A sudden release of the impoundment could jeopardize the nearby resi- dent operator's home, but flow would then traverse an undeveloped stream course to where the Anaconda Company's Yankee Doodle Tailings Pond would intercept and contain it. This report recommends actions ranging from maintenance to engineering studies. The major recommenda- tion is for the owners to develop a design PlIF and rehabilitate the structure(s) to safely handle at least one-half the PMF. The recom- mended spillway design flood of at least one-half PMF is based on pre- sent day conditions. Should the downstream flood plain area be con- sidered for further development, consideration should be given to requiring a larger spillway design flood capability or restricting new growth by appropriate zoning laws . b. Basin Creek Dam No. 1; Based on either height or storage, the inspection criteria classifies this dam as intermediate in size. Our vi visual inspection of the downstream area indicates the hazard in case of dam failure would be high. Inspection criteria requires an inter- mediate-sized dam having a high downstream hazard potential to safely handle the full PMF."}
{"id": "moultoncreekdamn1979butt", "title": "Moulton Creek Dam, no. 1, MT-1467 and Basin Creek Dams no's 1 and 2, MT-374, MT-868, Butte, Montana", "year": 1979, "seq": 1, "text": "Chelton, Photographer, Seattle District, Corps of Engineers . 1 .2 Description of Project. 1.2.1 General . The Butte Water Company was organized in 1898, and its present system is composed of a series of dams, reservoirs, and pumping plants, which supply water to the city of Butte and the Butte Mining District (plates 1 and 2). Two dams and reservoirs are located north of Butte on Moulton Creek: Moulton Creek Dams Nos. 1 and 2. Southwest of Butte, water is taken from the Big Hole River and pumped into South Fork Reservoir and then over the Continental Divide into West Reser- voir, a holding reservoir. South Fork and West Reservoirs were not inspected because their sizes do not qualify them for inclusion under the Dam Safety Program. Two dams and reservoirs are located south of Butte on Basin Creek: Basin Creek Dams Nos. 1 and 2. Water is also taken from nearby creeks through gravity pipes and fed into some of the storage reservoirs. This inspection report covers one dam on Moulton Creek (Moulton Creek Dam No. 1) and both dams on Basin Creek. Moulton 2 Creek Dam No. 2, located about 1 mile upstream from Moulton Creek Dam No. 1, was not physically inspected because its reservoir content and location are such that a failure of the dam would not have significant downstream impact. 1.2.2 Regional Geology. The Butte, Montana, region exhibits a samp- ling of almost the entire geologic history of western Montana. Twenty miles south of Butte in the Highland Mountains, the 2-billion-year-old metamorphic basement complex is exposed beneath the slightly metamor- phosed Belt Supergroup Sedimentary Strata which is as old as 1 billion years. The Precambrian history of the region is incomplete because of erosional intervals hundreds of millions of years in duration. The Paleozoic formations are found as remnants of formerly continuous strata deposited upon the eroded surface of the Belt Supergroup."}
{"id": "moultoncreekdamn1979butt", "title": "Moulton Creek Dam, no. 1, MT-1467 and Basin Creek Dams no's 1 and 2, MT-374, MT-868, Butte, Montana", "year": 1979, "seq": 2, "text": "From the time of Belt deposition through the end of the Paleozoic era, the region was a stable continental shelf close to sea level. Marine fos- sils indicate long-term cycles of sea level changes without deformation of the earth's crust. The Mesozoic era is represented only by thin formations of Triassic and Cretaceous sediments. The period of stability within the crust ended in Cretaceous time with the extrusion of the Elkhom Mountains Volcanics and equivalent vol- canics surrounding the Butte area. The region was intruded by granitic plutons before the completion of the volcanic episode. Large thrust faults accompanied the granite intrusion. The mineral deposits of the region were formed between 68 to 78 million years ago during the intru- sion of the granitic plutons. The main granitic mass is called the Boulder Batholith, although the formation of the batholith required repeated intrusions of granitic rocks with different mineralogies. Igneous activity ceased approximately 68 million years ago, although thrust faulting associated with the intrusions continued for several million years afterward. The Cenozoic era has been characterized by uplift of the mountain ranges and by block faulting which may still be in progress. The result of deep erosion and down-dropped valleys has been the accumula- tion and preservation of intermontane lacustrine strata not consoli- dated into rock. These lakebeds are common throughout the Montana Rocky Mountains, The present action of erosion has carved valleys in the lakebeds, deposit- ing stream alluvium in the channels. Some of the higher peaks had gla- ciers during the last ice age, but the effects of glaciation were restricted to the mountainous areas. 3 1.2.3 Physiography and Climatology. The climate of the area is gen- erally continental in nature, characterized by mild summers, cold win- ters, and a semiarid precipitation regime. These basins are located on the western slope of the Continental Divide."}
{"id": "moultoncreekdamn1979butt", "title": "Moulton Creek Dam, no. 1, MT-1467 and Basin Creek Dams no's 1 and 2, MT-374, MT-868, Butte, Montana", "year": 1979, "seq": 3, "text": "A formal project emergency warning plan does not exist. 2.6 Potential for Downstream Damage. Overtopping of Moulton Creek Dam No. 1 would result in relatively rapid failure of the embankment, although the concrete core wall would likely slow down the failure rate to some degree. The valley downstream from the dam is essentially undeveloped. Visual observation and discussion with dam owners indi- cate that the dam operator's residence is the only residence subject to damage as a result of an embankment failure. The entire contents of the reservoir could be contained in the 765-acre Yankee Doodle Tailings Pond, about 4 miles downstream from the dam, resulting in an approxi- mate 1.5-foot maximum rise in the water surface at the tailings pond, well within the normally maintained freeboard. However, Moulton Creek Dam No. 1 is a water supply facility which supplies approximately 15 percent of the area's needs, and a loss of the project could impose economic hardship and loss. 15 CHAPTER 3 - FINDINGS AND RECOMMENDATIONS 3.1 Moulton Creek Dam No. 1. 3.1.1 Findings . Visual inspection of the dam, examinations of records and reports, and independent analysis of the project in terms of guide- line performance standards result in the findings discussed below. 3. 1.1.1 Size and Hazard Potential. Based upon height, the Corps of Engineers' criteria classify Moulton Creek Dam No. 1 as intermediate in size. The National Dam Inventory for Montana identifies Moulton Creek Dam No. 1 with the designation MT-1467 and lists it as having a No. 1 (high) downstream hazard potential in case of failure. However, during the inspection, the downstream valley was found to be undeveloped and habitated by only one dwelling, and the entire reservoir contents could be safely contained in the Yankee Doodle Tailings Pond downstream from the project. Loss of the reservoir would, however, impact the area's water supply. Therefore, based upon the guidelines, the downstream hazard potential for Moulton Creek Dam No. 1 is reclassified to \"significant ."}
{"id": "moultoncreekdamn1979butt", "title": "Moulton Creek Dam, no. 1, MT-1467 and Basin Creek Dams no's 1 and 2, MT-374, MT-868, Butte, Montana", "year": 1979, "seq": 4, "text": "The dam is structurally safe for all design conditions, including over- topping with the reservoir 20 feet above the deck at the top of the dam. Some small cracks may develop near the top of the dam for this overtopping condition. The dam can resist earthquake forces consider- ably higher than 0.1 gravity with reservoir filled. 2.4 Project Operation and Maintenance. Operation and maintenance information was obtained from discussion with Butte Water Company per- sonnel, as no formal project operation and maintenance programs exist. Also, no formal emergency warning plan exists for the Basin Creek Dams Project . 31 Operations are accomplished at the direction of the water company offi- cials. Standard operating procedure is to try and keep this reservoir full until 1 July for use during the remainder of the season. The Big Hole pumping station supplies a good portion of the water to the city water system. As consumption increases during the hot days of summer, Basin Creek Reservoir No. 1 is used which helps reduce pumping costs. During August, the reservoir typically drops 0.5 to 1 foot per day. As consumptive demand decreases in the fall, the Big Hole pump continues to operate which fills Basin Creek Reservoir No. 1 through the water system. During late summer, the flow is typically out of the reservoir during the day and into the reservoir at night. Two of the outlet works pipes are tied directly to the city water system, but have blow- offs along the waterline. A third pipe is a direct blowoff at the toe. When flow over the spillway exceeds about 1 inch in depth, damage occurs to a road below the dam. When this happens, the blowoff at the toe of the dam is opened. If this is not sufficient to lower the res- ervoir below the spillway crest, then blowoff s along the water supply line are opened."}
{"id": "moultoncreekdamn1979butt", "title": "Moulton Creek Dam, no. 1, MT-1467 and Basin Creek Dams no's 1 and 2, MT-374, MT-868, Butte, Montana", "year": 1979, "seq": 5, "text": "The spillway rating curve shown on plate 14 was developed from backwater computations through the spillway structure with critical depth at the control section and roughness coefficient, \"n\" = 0.02. Upstream from the control section, the spillway structure is obstructed by brush overhanging the left wall, the remnants of a steel pipe ini- tially intended to convey flow around the dam, and a pier supporting a wooden bridge crossing the spillway. The bridge may be readily dis- placed during high spillway flows and could block the spillway control section resulting in a reduction in spillway capacity. The concrete floor and walls of the spillway structure have deteriorated from weathering and would likely be further damaged if subjected to sus- tained high discharges. The effects of these obstructions have been included in the spillway rating computations by assuming the obstruc- tions to result in head losses varying as functions of velocity. At the control section, the height of chute walls are 2.2 feet and the chute transitions through an abrupt contraction; therefore, the chute walls are subject to overtopping with spillway discharges of about 70 percent of maximum capacity. Downstream from the control section, the chute becomes steep, maintaining supercritical flow. About midway down the chute, the right wall abruptly changes alinement. This geometric configuration will result in formation of a wave \\diich will undoubtedly overtop the chute walls at discharges less than maximum spillway capa- city. Brush is overhanging the left wall of the chute essentially along its entire length and will impede flow down the chute, contribut- ing to overtopping of chute walls. Considerable erosion has occurred at the terminus of the chute because adequate means of energy dissipa- tion does not exist. Although the above conditions will result in unacceptable flow conditions in the spillway and chute, the structure appears to be located on rock, and overtopping of the spillway chute is not expected to result in failure of the dam. 2.1.2 Outlet ."}
{"id": "moultoncreekdamn1979butt", "title": "Moulton Creek Dam, no. 1, MT-1467 and Basin Creek Dams no's 1 and 2, MT-374, MT-868, Butte, Montana", "year": 1979, "seq": 6, "text": "Upstream slope (note rock protection, slump , and exposed concrete cut-off wall) 42 The downstream slope is about as designed, with a slope of 1 vertical on 1.5 horizontal. The downstream slope is supporting a considerable number of large trees with sparse grass cover. Several animal pathways exist on the downstream slope. One pathway near the embankment toe is about 1 foot wide by 1.5 feet deep, presumably from channeling surface runoff. A depression and sinkholes were observed on the downstream slope directly above the gate valve tunnel (see plate 10). A Butte Water Company representative reported that the observed depression and sinkholes were probably the result of the embankment material caving into the old vertical access chamber to the pipeline valves. The cham- ber was reportedly covered with earth after a new access tunnel was completed. Should the dam overtop, the embankment will probably fail because of the easily erodable fine-grained embankment materials. The concrete core wall and older timber crib dam would impede failure, but probably would not prevent it. 2.3.2 Foundation and Seepage Conditions. The foundation for Basin Creek Dam No. 2 is unknown; however, the design drawing does indicate the concrete core wall may extend to bedrock. While the foundation characteristics of the right abutment are unknown, the dam embankment on the left abutment appeared to be tied to exposed bedrock, and the concrete spillway structure appeared to be founded on bedrock. During our inspection, seepage was issuing from and above the base of the rock retaining wall adjacent to the gate valve tunnel entrance (see plate 10). A Butte Water Company representative reported that this seepage exit face enlarges and rises to about 4 feet above the base of the retaining wall when the pool is held at spillway crest elevation. (Pool elevation on inspection date was elevation 6,195 feet.) Seepage was also issuing from cracks in the upstream concrete wall of the gate valve tunnel with sand deposits noted near and downstream of the tunnel entrance and outlet; however, seepage water in all cases was clear."}
{"id": "monthlybondd1979", "title": "Monthly performance report : Bond Construction", "year": 1979, "seq": 0, "text": "The solar energy system has an array of flat-plate collectors with a gross area of 465 square feet. The array faces south at an angle of 37 degrees to the horizontal. A propylene glycol solution is the transfer- medium that delivers solar energy from the collector array to an external heat exchanger. Water is the transfer medium that delivers solar energy -From the external heat exchanger to storage and from storage to the hot v/ater \"load and liquid-to-air heat exchanger in the furnace. Air is the transfer medium that delivers solar energy to the space heating load. Solar energy is stored in the basement in an 800-gallon steel storage tank with walls approximately 1/4-inch thick. The storage tank has 4-inch polyurethane insulation on the bottom and 8-inch fiberglass insulation on the top and sides. Preheated city water is stored in an 82-gallon DHW tank. When solar energy is insufficient to satisfy the space heating load, a gas furnace provides auxiliary energy for space heating. Similarly, an electrical immersion heater in the DHW tank provides auxiliary energy for heating the supply water. Solar energy Is transferred from the storage tank to the hot-air heating system by a liquid- to-air heat exchanger contained in the furnace ductwork; solar energy is transferred from the storage tank to the DHW tank by an annular heat exchanger jacket around the hot water tank. The house also contains a fireplace with an integral fan; the fireplace is only instrumented for monitoring fan power- consumption. The system, shown schematically in Figure 1, has 5 modes of solar operation. Mode 1 - Col lector- to-Storage: This mode activates when there is a tempera- ture difference of 20\u00b0F between a control sensor located at the collector and a control sensor located inside the storage tank (near the bottom)."}
{"id": "monthlybondd1979", "title": "Monthly performance report : Bond Construction", "year": 1979, "seq": 1, "text": "PERFORMANCE EVALUATION INTRODUCTION The site was unoccupied in May and the solar energy system operated contin- uously during the month. Total solar energy collected was 25.7 million Btu and the total solar energy used was 2.5 million Btu or 10 percent of the collected energy. The change in stored energy was 0.34 million Btu and the total system losses amounted to 3.8 million Btu. Solar energy satisfied 96 percent of the space heating requirements. The solar energy system incurred an electrical energy expense of 0.23 million Btu and provided a fossil fuel energy savings of 0.34 million Btu. The control problem that caused intermit- tent cycling of mode 1 during periods of good insolation continued throughout the month. There was no hot water load in May because the water was turned off. WEATHER CONDITIONS During the month, total incident solar energy on the collector array was 25.7 million Btu for a daily average of 1780 Btu per square foot. This was above the estimated average daily solar radiation for this geographical area during May of 1712 Btu per square foot for a south-facing plane with a tilt of 37 degrees to the horizontal. The average ambient temperature during May was 64\u00b0F the same as the long-term average. The number of heating degree-days for the month (based on a 65\u00b0F reference) was 98, as compared with the long-term average of 127. The number of cooling degree-days was 81, as compared with the long-term average of 99. THERMAL PERFORMANCE System - During May the solar energy system performed approximately the same as expected. The expected performance was determined from a modified f-chart analysis using measured weather and subsystem loads as input. Solar energy used by the system was estimated by assuming that all energy collected would be applied to the load. Actual solar energy used was 2.5 million Btu and was equal to the estimated 2.5 million Btu."}
{"id": "montreatanderson19711973", "title": "Montreat-Anderson College Student Handbook", "year": 1971, "seq": 0, "text": "Carole Tyler Dean of Students THE HONOR SYSTEM Life at Montreat-Anderson College is based on the belief that the ideal community is made up of honorable individuals. Mutual trust and consideration are essential to such a community, and it is for these that we strive. Each student and faculty member has a responsibility for himself and for every other member of the college community. The failure of one person to live honorably is in part the failure of all. The movement of one individual toward complete understanding of Christian living is a step toward honorable living for the whole college. For this reason the students of Montreat-Anderson College have accepted the \"Honor System\", under which each student agrees to try to discipline his own life and to be ready to help all others to discipline their lives toward the goal of a community in which each member will merit trust and respect. It is in large part due to the acceptance of faculty and students of the Honor System as a way of life, that the \"Spirit of Montreat\" is a reality, not only on the campus, but wherever former Montreat students are found. THE HONOR CODE Under the Honor Code, the student is on his honor not to lie, cheat, or steal, and, if he does,- he is on his honor to report himself within twenty-four hours to a member of the Honor Court. If he sees another student lying, cheating, or stealing, he is also on his honor to confront him by asking him to report himself to a member of the Honor Court, and, if he does not do so within twenty-four hours, he is to report him. The Honor Code places upon you a dual responsibility. First, you are responsible to see that you conduct yourself in accordance with the Honor Code."}
{"id": "montreatanderson19711973", "title": "Montreat-Anderson College Student Handbook", "year": 1971, "seq": 1, "text": "To be eligible to serve on the Student Legislature or Honor Court a student must be registered for a minimum of 12 semester hours for the preceding and current semester and must have at the time of election and maintain thereafter, an overall 1.5 average (Grades to be used in determining the average will be final semester grades). In addition, both the officers mentioned above and members of the Student Legislature and Honor Court must not have been, nor in the future be convicted of an Honor Code Violation and must have a good citizenship record. Failure to uphold these qualifications, as confirmed by the executive committee of the SGA, will require that the officer relinquish his office immediately. Presidents of all other organizations and clubs (those not serving on the Student Legislature) must be registered for a minimum of 12 semester hours for the preceding and current semester and must have at the time of election and maintain thereafter, an overall 1.5 average. First semester freshman must be registered for a minimum of 12 semester hours and receive no more than one D and no F's when mid-term notices are given in order to be eligible for election to any office. 16 SECTION 5 VOTING PROCEDURES In order to win an election a candidate must obtain a majority vote. A majority vote is any vote over half the number of votes cast, ignoring blanks. If no candidate receives a majority in the primary voting, a run-off vote between the two candidates receiving the vote closest to the majority shall be held to determine the winner. The following procedures will be observed in all voting: 1. Voting for all offices under the SGA shall be by secret ballot. 2. The Elections Committee shall tabulate the votes. 3. All voting must take place at the place designated by the Elections Committee. 4."}
{"id": "montreatanderson19711973", "title": "Montreat-Anderson College Student Handbook", "year": 1971, "seq": 2, "text": "The Hall Counselor will be expected to exert a positive attitude and influence on the entire dorm but especially his own hall and to help create cooperative resident hall living and cooperation with the College Community generally. c. The Hall Counselor will serve as a student counselor and when the occasion warrants notify the Dorm President and the Deans of Students about students who need special assistance in their studies or citizenship. d. At the end of each four weeks, each Hall Counselor will provide a written report of conditions on his floor to the Dorm President, Head Resident, and Deans of Students. The necessary forms will be provided by the Deans of Students for this purpose. e. The Hall Counselor will assist the Head Resident in the inspection of rooms and will serve as host at the desk for six hours each week at a time agreed upon by the Head Resident and the President of the dormitory. f. In case of illness or injury, the Hall Counselor will be responsible for contacting the Head Resident and in his absence the Infirmary. g. In case of emergencies the Hall Counselor is the head officer on his floor. h. The Hall Counselor will hold membership on the Social Standards Committee for the dormitory, i. The Hall Counselor will work with the Assistant Hall Counselors, President, and Head Resident in planning social events for his floor and cooperate with the Social Chairman and the above in helping with social events involving the entire dormitory. Council Positions\u2014 The following are positions to be filled on the Dormitory Council. a. Each Woman's Dormitory will have a Head Resident, a Student President and sufficient Hall Counselors to supervise each floor of the Dormitory. b. Each Man's Dormitory will have a Student President and sufficient Hall Counselors to supervise each floor of the dormitory."}
{"id": "montreatanderson19711973", "title": "Montreat-Anderson College Student Handbook", "year": 1971, "seq": 3, "text": "It is expected that each student will keep the room he occupies clean and orderly. Rooms will be inspected regularly and a report made to the Dean of Students wno will determine when violations require disciplinary action. 2. Any damage to a room or its furnishings will be paid by the student involved or by the students occupying the room. 35 Damage to any part ot one of the college dormitories (other than the individual student rooms) must be borne equally by all residents of the particular dormitory involved when the responsible party or parties are not apprehended. The proportionate share shall be the total cost of the repairs or replacements divided by the total number of residents in the given dormitory at the time of the damage or destruction. The obligations incurred above shall constitute a debt to Montreat-Anderson College and shall be subject to all provisions and regulations pertaining to such debts. 3. Any student guilty of vandalism (deliberate destruction of property), shall be subject to discipline by the Administrative Committee. He shall be required to pay the full cost of the damage, plus a fine equal to the full cost, but not less than ten dollars ($10.00). He shall be subject to disciplinary probation, suspension or expulsion. In every case in which his parents are providing financial support, they shall be informed of the offense and the action taken. 4. Property not owned or supervised by the College is off limits to the student unless he has written permission from the owner with prior approval from the Dean of Students. Room Decorations There shall be no public display in windows or in hallways or other public rooms of decorations or materials which could give offense. Since it is recognized that accepted standards of good taste and propriety impose certain limits on room decorations, it shall be left to the individual student's discretion, subject to the regulations in the Handbook, as to the appropriatness of the internal decorations of individual rooms."}
{"id": "montreatanderson19711973", "title": "Montreat-Anderson College Student Handbook", "year": 1971, "seq": 4, "text": "Diethylamide from the effective data of determination of such finding by said state board of health. Alcoholic Beverages (Action by Dean of Students) Montreat-Anderson College is opposed as a matter of principle to the use of alcoholic beverages by students. 37 2. Drinking or being in possession of alcoholic beverages in the dorm, on campus, or being under the influence on campus will result in a minimum of disciplinary probation or a maximum of expulsion. 3. Students are responsible for seeing that their dates abide by the regulation. 4. The above regulations apply equally to day students when they are on the Montreat-Anderson College campus and when they are dating a resident student. 5. Any misconduct by a student involving the use of alcoholic beverages, even when off campus, shall subject the offender to a minimum of disciplinary probation or a maximum of expulsion. Gambling (Action by Honor Council) Gambling by students is forbidden. Hazing (Action by Honor Council) Any type of physical or verbal punishment, humiliation, or intimidation by any student of another is forbidden. Firearms and Explosives (Action by Interdormitory Council) The possession of firearms (except in accordance with regulations governing the Conservation Club), BB guns, pellet guns, air guns, firecrackers, or explosives of any kind is prohibited on the campus. New Organizations (Action by Administrative Committee) The College does not approve of secret organizations, social fraternities, or sororities of any kind or of special groups whose membership is limited other than by interest. A new organization (i.e. one not included in the list of Clubs and Organizations) may be authorized only by the Administrative Committee, to whom a written statement of purpose and procedure must be presented with the name of the faculty member who is to act as sponsor. Living Off Campus (Action by the Administrative Committee) All regular students are required to register as dormitory residents unless they are commuting students living with their family or when because of special circumstances some other arrangement has been made with the Dean of Students."}
{"id": "montreatanderson19711973", "title": "Montreat-Anderson College Student Handbook", "year": 1971, "seq": 5, "text": "Supplies of all kinds may be purchased here. MOORE CENTER (College Union) (Known to students as \"The S.U.\") This center and its adjoining facilities is the social, recreational, cultural and service center for the entire college community. As the College Union, Moore Center is the nerve complex for a wide variety of programs designed to bring the many diverse elements of college life into a properly integrated perspective. The Union brings together concerned persons involving them in programs of meaningful and purposeful activity. It is likewise a training ground for learning to work with others toward a common goal, which is fundamental in developing effective 50 community leaders. In short, it is a living organism created for the purpose of bringing into being and sustaining a dynamic community of learners and for the development of integrated persons. Moreover, the union is an invaluable tool for shaping a feeling of community solidarity and the individuals' sense of social responsibility. It is a natural Laboratory for living and learning where all who will may have a part in developing a mentally, physically and spiritually liberating community. Moore Center will be open each afternoon and evening for snacks, bridge, or just good conversation. There is also a jukebox. BOOK STORE Textbooks, paperbacks of general interest, greeting cards, supplies, gym outfits, Montreat-Anderson shirts, etc., can be purchased in the centrally located Book Store in Moore Center which is open from 12:00-3:30, and more often at the beginning of the semester. POST OFFICE The Montreat Post Office is located in the shopping center near the grocery store and laundry. This building houses all the mailing for Montreat, since it is a United States facility. Students rent post office boxes here, purchase postage and money orders. Since mail does not go to a dormitory or a building in Montreat, it is absolutely necessary to rent a box and have all mail addressed to that box number, Montreat, North Carolina, Zip Code 28757."}
{"id": "montreatanderson19711973", "title": "Montreat-Anderson College Student Handbook", "year": 1971, "seq": 6, "text": "SCHOOL CARS School cars may be used, if available, for the following purposes only: 1. Medical Take food to infirmary Take students to infirmary when deemed necessary by college nurse. Take students to school physician and/or hospital. (The initial trip for each accident or illness will be provided at no charge to the student.) 2. Official school functions away from campus as designated, in writing in advance, by the instructor or sponsor. This notice must be sent to the Business Office. (Fees for these trips are Group Rate.) 3. Individual student transportation to and from airport, train, and bus stations. (These will be made if school transportation is available, otherwise, students must procure their own way to and from these destinations.) (Requests must be made at least twenty-four hours in advance.) Keys to all College cars are to be kept in the Business Office and only authorized drivers will be permitted to drive them. Fees must be paid in advance for use of cars. Personal use of College cars is prohibited. 51 SELF-HELP SCHOLARSHIPS Self-help scholarships are granted for the mutual benefit of the student and the college. If a student is found to be careless in his work obligation, he will be given a warning, and if the carelessness continues, he will be required to forfeit his scholarship. If a student finds it necessary to be absent from his work obligation, he must get permission from his supervisor beforehand and must secure a substitute who has been approved by the supervisor. In case of sickness, either the resident counselor or the person in charge of the infirmary must be asked to notify the supervisor, before the hour when work is due to begin, of the student's inability to work. STUDENT BANK The bank is located in the Business Office of the College for the convenience of the students."}
{"id": "money00walkgoog", "title": "Money", "year": 1972, "seq": 0, "text": "Kogers says '} \"A little reflection will show that some common measure of value must needs be adopted in all societies whose condition is superior to mere barbarism. . . . Even if money were not a physical object it would still be necessary as a symbol or calculus. We need some common measure of value as we need measures of length and capacity, even though we never transfer that which is designated by the name, money. ... So necessary is this process to trade, that we are told of nations who have no mioney, properly so called, but who have been constrained to invent afcti\" tious measure in order to express values. In short, the functions of money in the act of exchange present a close analogy to the functions of language in relation to thought. As there may be a rude barter, so there may be a rude language of signs. But there is no true com- munication of thought except by articulate speech, and similarly there can be no real and effectual trade except by the use of a common measured And Mr. Mill :* \"In order to understand the manifold functions of a circulating medium, there is no better way than to consider what are the principal inconveniences which we should experience if we had not such a medi- um. The first and most obvious would be the want of a common measure for values of different sorts. If a tailor had only coats and wanted to buy bread or a horse, it would be very troublesome to ascertain how much bread he ought to obtain for a coat, or how many coats he should give for a horse. The calculations must be re- commenced on different data, ever}- time he bartered his ooats for a different kind of article ; and there could be \u25a0 Political Economy, p. 22. \u2022 Principles of Political Economy, iii, 7, 1."}
{"id": "money00walkgoog", "title": "Money", "year": 1972, "seq": 1, "text": "That which is to measure most as Prol Bowen sa js, be of a kind with the thing measured ; of a kind, that is, in the respect of which the comparison is made. Not that we need cloth to measure cloth ; but to measure the weight of cloth, we must hare that which itself pos- sesses weight ; and to measure the length of cloth, that which itself possesses length. So to measure value, an article must possess value. But values being measured may be expressed, relatively to each other, by a simple scale of numbers; just as the ratios between lengths that have been measured may be expressed without reference to feet or inches. If I say that three objects are, in length, respectively, as 1, 7 and 4, 1 use no fictitious meas* ure of length. And so, if I say that the values of three commodities are as 1, 7 and -1, 1 am using no \" fictitious measure of value'* (Bogers). I take a unit, and say that there are in the one case 4 of these, in another 7, in the last only 1. This is the function of the common de- nominator, not of the common measure. The distinction is vital. In it lies the germ of the whole controversy between the advocates of Ideal Money and the advocates of Beal Money. The former admit all that \\a claimed for the importance of having a common denominator through which to register the relative values of the 100 commodities, for instance, of which Prof. Jevons makes account, and thus save the necessity of 4950 quotations in the price-current ; but for this, thoy But A mere \u00abymbol or calculus cannot be a measure of lenjrth or of capacity. In like mannor Mr. Mill shows the importance of h.ivint* \" a common lanffnage in which values may be expressed \" under the title ** Uie want of a common measure for values.\" s."}
{"id": "money00walkgoog", "title": "Money", "year": 1972, "seq": 2, "text": "Senior, in his lectures (1830) on \"The Cost of Obtaining Money,\" writes: \"The mine worked by England is the general market of the world. The miners are those who produce those commodities by the export of which the precious metals are obtained.\" It will be observed that Mr. Ricardo makes Price the agent in effecting this movement of gold and silver. It is because the purchasing power of money falls when it is supplied in excess, that the excess tends to run away. bition cannot, however, have been so entirely insignificant as it has been supposed to be by writers on the subject. The facts adduced by Mr. Fullarton show that it required a greater percentage of dif- ference in vaUie between coin and buUiqn than has commonly been imagined, to bring tlie coin to the melting-pot\" \u2014 [Political Economy, III, ix, 1.] \" The conscience of the exporter, and the value of a false oath,** says Mr. Bosanquet, \" are correctly stated by the committee at four and one half per cent\" \u2014 [Practical Observations, etc., p. 30.] The market price of consciences would seem to have fallen in the course of a century, for \"A. V.,\" in his letter to Lord Godolphin, in 1696, speaks of twenty per cent as \" a good alloy for any scruple of con- science \" in the melting of the coin. RELATION OF MONEY TO PRICES, 57 It is because the purchasing power of money rises where its quantity is deficient, that gold and silver set in Hke a tide ^ towards whatever country lacks its due distributive share of the volume in existence. And in the case of a new supply, as from an opened mine, the added amount, wherever produced, is swiftly and surely apportioned among all the nations having commercial relations, just as a bucket of water poured upon the centre of a lake will not long disturb the general level."}
{"id": "money00walkgoog", "title": "Money", "year": 1972, "seq": 3, "text": "Jevons, \"has imitated European nations, and intro- duced a gold coinage of 20, 10, 5, 2, and 1 yen pieces, the yen being only 3 per mille less in value than the American gold dollar. The new fractional money of Japan is to consist of 50, 20, 10 and 5 sen pieces in sil- ver (the sen corresponding to a cent), and forming a token-money, at the fineness of eight parts in ten.\" The double standard is nominally maintained in Eu- rope* by France, Italy, Belgium and Switzerland, con- \u25a0 The currency of Canada, says Prof. Jevons, can hardly be classed at all, at present \u2022 Of Holland, Sir Edward Harris writes under date of April 12, 1876 : \" The whole question of the currency, especially that of the standard to be ultimately adopted in this country, is now under the consideration of the government\" \u2014 [See Mr. GKischen's Report, p. 128.] r / I 40 MONET, stituting the Latin Union, and by Spain, Greece and Roumania, and in the New World, by Peru, Eciusuloi and Grenada. Several of these, hqwever, like Austria and Eussia of the single silver standard, and the United States, Brazil and Turkey of the single gold standard countries, have at present an irredeemable paper money in circulation, so that they contribute little to the ac- tual demand for either or both metals. Upon a review of the situation thus disclosed, Pro\u00a3 Jevons, whom I cite especially because he has been conspicuously fair towards the Bi-metallists, as ther indeed, recognize him to be,* concludes that the teD<^ ency towards the adoption of gold as the sole princip^ medium of exchange, is unmistakable. \" The gold standard has thus made great progre^ and it will probably continue to progress. When United States return to specie payments, they will tainly adopt gold ; aud Canada, whose currency hardly be classed at all at present, must do the The Latin nations, having once abandoned the dou\"' standard, in practice, are not likely to return to it ; f Austria must follow."}
{"id": "money00walkgoog", "title": "Money", "year": 1972, "seq": 4, "text": "Cernusclii's name : *' Whether now Cernuschi believes that it costs, and 260 MONET. must always cost, just fifteen and a half times as much to produce gold as to produce silver, or not, we cannot determine. At any rate, lie knows that for the cost of producing one pound of gold, several pounds of silver can be produced. What happens then, when the law decrees that one pound of gold shall exchange for one pound of silver? Cemuschi understands perfectly that the value of the circulating medium depends on the demands of business and the amount of money. He knows and makes use of the fact in arguing for his electron, that if the demands of business remain the same, the purchasing power of the stock of money in the country, or in the world, remains the same. He knows, therefore, that the ten thousand million dollars stock of the precious metals in the western world most possess the same purchasing power as now, if the ratio of value between the two metals which constitute it were altered. Now this ten thousand million dollars stock of the precious metals is made up of seventeen million pounds of gold for two-thirds of the value, and one hundred and eighty million pounds silver for one- third of the value. Hereafter, therefore, if the bi-me- tallic electron were made out of this stock there would be one hundred and ninty-seven million pounds of it, worth just what the whole is now ; that is, each pound of it would be worth fifty dollars. Bringing the two metals to an equality of value, therefore (ratio 1:1), would have the eflfect of more than doubling the value of silver, and reducing gold to less than one-seventh the value which it now has on the market What would be the eflfect on production?"}
{"id": "money00walkgoog", "title": "Money", "year": 1972, "seq": 5, "text": "The author of the tract on the \"Currencies of the British Plantations\" charges bad faith against the South Carolinians of this time. \" Their legislatures have been most notoriously guilty of breach of public faith in not canceling their bills.\" Writing in 1740, he declares that there were then outstanding about \u00a3250,000 in province bills, whereof above \u00a3100,000 were \" without fund or period.\" \" The whole amount issued in bills of credit by provincial South Carolina,\" says Dr. Bamsay, \" in the sixty-eight years which intervened between the first and last emissions of paper, was \u00a3605,000, of which more than two-thirds were secured by mortgaged prop- erty.\" THE PAPER MONEY OP THE REVOLUTION. Of the emissions of Paper Money during the Revolu- tionary period of our history, wp have accounts from a great variety of sources. Inasmuch as those author- ized by the Continental Congress were made under a single and constant impulse, viz., the overwhelming financial necessities of the new government, engaged in a desperate struggle for existence, the facts can be briefly stated. The question has sometimes been raised by econo- mists whether issues of Inconvertible Paper Money are ever really necessary, even in time of war. However REVOL UTIONAR T PAPER 327 lis question might be decided with reference to ordi- Eiry governments, the situation of the Continental Con- fess must be admitted to have been highly exception- L In only a qualified sense was it a government at IL It had no coercive power. It could not levy taxes. Iven its moral authority over the constituent States was \u25a0ery slight. Its requisitions for money, its reconlmen- lations of policy, were treated with neglect, if not with >pen contempt. The States, with one or two honorable xceptions, hardly made a show of doing their duty by be government of the Confederation. There are few ore distressing chapters in history than that which re- \u00bbrd8 the delinquency of the States which had pledged e, fortune and sacred honor to the cause of American dependence."}
{"id": "money00walkgoog", "title": "Money", "year": 1972, "seq": 6, "text": "And here appeared a fresh basis for issues. The pa- per money had been put forth on the security of the confiscated estates of the Church. The seizure of the lands of the emigrant nobles, as the enemies of France, oflFered a larger ground for these issues, which Mirabeau had assured the nation could never become excessive. Still, as the assignats poured from the treas- ury in increasing volume, the cry of the scarcity of the circulating medium grew louder. Soon that cry gave way to another, not unfamiliar in the same connection. \"Bread or Blood\" riots took place in the streets; stores and shops were plundered by famished wretches ; the government was driven by sheer stress of violence to feed the capital.^ The government service itself was scarcely to be maintained, for the wholesale resignations of officials, driven out by the depreciation of the money in which their salaries were paid. In logical order came the next resort of baffled power. Maximum laws were enacted, as has been related of the American Revolutionary government, with only the eflfect still further to diminish supplies of food and fuel, as producers withheld the goods for which they were forbidden to take a price which would enable them to replace their stock. The inhabitants of the cities of France were put on an allowance of food, like sailors drifting at sea in open boats. Still the depreciation of this money, based unshakably on \" the only real prop- erly, the sole source of production, the soil on which we tread,\" went on. Against the Premium on Silver, the revolutionary government which had struck down * \" To supply five armies and a vast Capital, with the mere power of issuing assignats.\" \u2014 [Thiers, The Consulate and the Empire.] 844 MONEY. Church and State, which had confiscated one-third and more of the real property of France, and was strong enough to send every morning tumbril-loads of freshly convicted Frenchmen \u2014 ^peasants, priests, and nobles \u2014 to the guillotine, directed its utmost force."}
{"id": "money00walkgoog", "title": "Money", "year": 1972, "seq": 7, "text": "With bad money in circulation, the laborer, in making his demand on his employer for wages, must follow blindly around after prices, guided only by a general sense of the inadequacy of what he is at pres- ent receiving. Acting without intelligence, it is a matter of course that his interests are in some degree sacrificed. It was in view of this inability of the laboring classes, through poverty, ignorance, and inertia, to meet sudden and violent changes of condition, that Mr. Mill assigned to \"Custom\" in economics the same beneficent function which it has performed in government, as \"the most powerful protector of the weak against the strong.\" Usage, habit, constitute a barrier which in a degree preserves the economically weak from the bustlings and jostlings of the market-place, and gives them room to stand. A fluctuating paper money breaks down this barrier and involves all classes in a furious and inces- sant struggle, in which the feeblest are sure to go down and be trampled on. But it is not alone in competition with the employer that the laborer is put at a disadvantage. If it is diffi- cult for him to secure the adjustment of his wages to the varying cost of living, much more difficult is it for him to hold his own in the contest with the retail deal- er. He expends his earnings in hundreds of small pur- chases. If those earnings come to him in depreciated paper, and are to be expended in commodities at inflat- ed prices, how can he tell what he ought to pay per pound, per bushel, or per yard? He knows nothing about the conditions of the production of the articles he purchases, and has no longer a traditional' price to guide him. Formerly, if an article of domestic con- sumption rose, he was in the mood to resist the advance."}
{"id": "money00walkgoog", "title": "Money", "year": 1972, "seq": 8, "text": "Though the same pieces of money, whether paper or metal, may be employed sometimes in the one circulation, and sometimes in the other, yet, as both are constantly going on at the same time, each requires a certain stock of money of one kind or another to carry it on. \"Paper money may be so regulated as either to con- fine itself very much to the circulation between the dif- ferent dealers, or to extend itself likewise to a great part of that between the dealers and the consumers. Where no bank-notes are circulated under ten pounds value, as in London, paper money confines itself very much to the circulation between the dealers. When a ten pound bank-note comes into the hands of a consumer, he is generally obliged to change it at the first shop where he has occasion to purchase five shillings' worth of goods, so that it often returns into the hands of a dealer before the consumer has spent the fortieth part of the money. Where bank-notes are issued for so small sums as twenty shillings, as in Scotland, paper money extends itself to a considerable part of the circulation between dealers and consumers.\" \u2014 [Wealth of Nations, i, 323.] Upon these paragraphs, Mr. Tooke remarks : \"Adam Smith is the first, I believe, who pointed out the dis- tinction between bank-notes of the lower denominations, which served chiefly for the purposes of retail trade, and the higher, which were in use principally between dealers and dealers.* The higher ones do not circulate * Mr. Hubbard, Governor of the Bank of England, 1853-5, testified before the Committee of 1857, that within the five years preoedin;?, an addition of \u00a32,000,000 had been made to the circulation of X\") and j&lO notes, and an equal diminution had taken place in \u00a350 to X10<>} notes, the aggregate issues remaining unchanged but the purchasing power being increased by the substitution."}
{"id": "money00walkgoog", "title": "Money", "year": 1972, "seq": 9, "text": "In the reign of William III, considerable amounts of exchequer bills were issued as low as \u00a35 and \u00a310, \"which,\" says Dr. Drake, \"answered the necessities of commerce, among the meaner people, for the necessaries of life.\" \" These bills,\" he adds, \"passed in payment as so many count- ers.\" When, however, as is more commonly the case, treasury notes or exchequer bills bear interest, that fact, in a considerable degree, retards their circulation. As the weight of interest accumulates towards maturity, they gradually sink out of circulation, dropping to the level of ordinary investments jrielding interest. Such notes or bills, when in large denominations, are commonly not money at all. Perhaps already some reader has exclaimed impa- tiently, what is the eflfect of these distinctions but to render any conclusive definition of money impossible? If bills of exchange or checks may, here and there, now and then, become money; if bank-notes, on the other hand, may, in possible circumstances, fall out of the category of money, how are we ever to know what money is and what is money? Would it not be better to say that gold and silver are money and that nothing ejse is : and adopt some other term for* those forms of paper which are substituted for gold and silver in trade ? But we do not get rid of the difficulty of saying, in any given case, just what is money and what is not mon- ey, if we contemplate gold and silver alone. On tlie contrary, a money of the precious metals only must al- ways be subject to two peculiar deductions of large but indefinite extent. In the first place, gold and silver are MONET IS TEA T MONET D OES. 407 \\>^iiig continually taken in exchange for other commod- i\"fcic38 where they are not received as money."}
{"id": "US.NN.FIT.SC.362.2.1.21.199212", "title": "Fashion International, December 1992", "year": 1992, "seq": 0, "text": "Pants and jackets are key pieces for Spring. Pants also provide a natural alternative during the ongoing hem- line transition. Evolving from the Fall\u2019s tailored versions, they take on soft fluid silhouettes, often in drapey fabrications flowing from gently MICHAEL KORS | pleated or drawstring waists. The favored pant has a wide leg. Palaz- zos are back for day and evening, and bell-bottoms run the gamut from sub- tle flares to full fledged elephant bells. The jacket is long and contour skim- continued on page 2 \u201cA Stroll\u201d continued from page 1 ming, with slouchy blazers, Nehru and collarless styles, and asymmetri cal closures. Layered dressing, associated with the \u201870s, makes an important and sophis- ticated statement. The vest, a major component of this layered look, is soft and fluid in silhouette and colora- tion. Dusty pastels and neutrals are offered in a monochrome combina- tion or juxtaposed with subtle pat- terns, such as the Prince of Wales checks and tiny floral prints. Very visible in this season\u2019s layering trend, vests often extend beneath the jacket, from thigh-high to ankle brushing. After receiving overwhelming cus- tomer acceptance, the longer hemline continues with elan, in the lean, slit skirt silhouette, and its softer, swingy cousin. Slashed thigh-high or incor- porating car wash panels which expose the leg, these skirt silhouettes are also incorporated into day and evening dresses, most often with a simple chemise or tank bodice. The sensual slim column with mandatory slit is one of the leaders for evening, and the halter dress, a staple in most collections, fits nicely into the Spring \u201cbare\u201d look. The midriff gets maximum exposure with crop tops, tie-front shirts/blouses, and bras; while deep \u201cV\u201d backs ensure dramatic exits. Shorts, from taps to Bermudas, pair with these tops, as well as with tanks, vests, and jackets."}
{"id": "US.NN.FIT.SC.362.2.1.21.199212", "title": "Fashion International, December 1992", "year": 1992, "seq": 1, "text": "For day, JAMIE KREITMAN tops her long slim skirt with a double-breasted shawl collar jacket in a leopard print. Settling for the middle ground, continued on page 3 \"A Stroll\u201d continued from page 2 NESLIHAN DANISMAN\u2019s ribbed knit asymmetrical hem skirt dips from short to ankle length at the back, and is paired with a linen tunic jacket with cut-out detailing. This season, layering becomes an art form. CALVIN KLEIN, leads the way with an entire collection built around an ethereal layered look, in floaty and often transparent fab- rications. One outfit combines a cobweb like plum washed see-through cashmere poncho, with a long washed silk organza wrap skirt. He also opts for vest over vest with a barley tweed vest over a longer bron- zed washed silk organza vest and fluid sisal crepe linen pants. MICHAEL KOR\u2019s also prefers layer- ing, as slouchy blazers, cashmere kimonos, and riding jackets are worn over sleeveless robes, tank tops, vests, tunics, and cardigan dresses; these, in turn, go atop slim pants, palazzos, slouch trousers, and pajamas. Favor- ites include the check linen gauze slouch blazer and tobacco AN INNERWEAR/OUTERWEAR SPRING he innerwear/outerwear trend i is stronger than ever for Spring 1993. Vests and bustiers are showing up in every price category. Stretch continues to be part of the look, because of comfort, fit, and fashion qualities \u2014 very important in bras, panties, bodysuits, etc. Texture is prominent in every cate- gory. Laces, pleated and puckered fabrics, pointelles, and ribs appear. Cross dyed laces are giving way to a tone-on-tone look. There\u2019s also an increased interest in matte or dull fabrications and the popularity of natural fibers remains strong. Also maintaining strength is the look of sheer. See-through fabrics are increa- singly used as inserts in garments, or as cover-ups in sleep sets, etc."}
{"id": "YogiandHisToy6", "title": "Yogi and His Toy #6", "year": 1972, "seq": 0, "text": "A big monk-key !Absolutely right ! | here's your prize! * Never mind, Magilla - be quiet and nt dh the new colour TV: LEARNING WITH YOGI T ices is something about gold that is exciting for it has a colour that always looks bright. Look at your gift from Yogi this week and you will see that no other colour looks quite so rich. Gold is almost the most precious metal we can find in the rocks and dig out of the earth. Not only is it a beautiful colour but it never rusts. But gold is expensive because it is not easy to find, so it has to be used carefully. Thousands of years ago in Egypt men found that gold could be hammered until a tiny lump spread and spread till it became thinner than anything human beings could make with other materials. This kind of gold is called gold leaf and it is used to make special books beautiful with gold letters on the outside. Before printing was invented and every book had to be copied by hand, letters at the start of each chapter were written in gold leaf. These ancient books are called illuminated manuscripts because the gold shines just as it did when put there as long ago as a thousand years. To make gold leaf is very hard work, a tiny piece of gold being banged and banged to spread it out. One grain, no larger than a grain of rice, can be hammered out until the gold leaf would cover the whole of this Sh} oul $Hreu ie arttls page of your favourite comic. ipleat teyahe o olfanie To make gold leaf, gold beaters take a big lump of S} vibe as Hag queatencianss | gold weighing nearly four pounds. A machine rolls this merge a ky aneeerats atk etry into a ribbon of gold which is as long as a football pitch, on. dada ml but as thin as this page."}
{"id": "arabic-thought-in-the-liberal-age-1798-1939", "title": "Arabic Thought In The Liberal Age, 1798 1939", "year": 1983, "seq": 0, "text": "Reading this work for the first time after twenty years, I can see clearly that it reflects a certain way in which I and perhaps others looked at Middle Eastern history during the 1950\u2019s and 1960\u2019s. The underlying assumption of the book is that a small group of writers, who were set apart from those among whom they were living by education and experience, nevertheless could express the needs of their society, and to some extent at least their ideas served as forces in the process of change. Without making such an assumption, it would scarcely have been worthwhile to write at such lengths about thinkers some of whose ideas had a certain intrinsic interest, but none of whom were of the highest calibre. I do not think this was a false assumption, and if I were to write a book on the same subject today I think I should write about these thinkers, and perhaps a few others, in much the same way. I would try to give it another dimension, however, by asking how and why the ideas of my writers had an influence on the minds of others. To answer such questions would involve a fuller and more precise study of changes in the viil Preface structure of society from one generation to another, with careful dis- tinctions between what was happening in different Arab countries, and also some attempt to study the process of communication, both direct and indirect. The ideas I was concerned with did not spread only through the writings of those whose work I studied, but were mediated to a larger public in writings of another kind, and above all in poetry. I am aware that there might be a completely different way of looking at these writers, by regarding their ideas not as expressing what they really believed, but as half-revealing, half-hiding their pursuit of their own interests."}
{"id": "arabic-thought-in-the-liberal-age-1798-1939", "title": "Arabic Thought In The Liberal Age, 1798 1939", "year": 1983, "seq": 1, "text": "As such, they were \u2018protected peoples\u2019, allowed life and property, the exercise of their religion and the preservation of their laws and customs, in return for loyalty and the payment of a special tax. The Shari\u2018a told men what right action was, but it also laid down precise worldly penalties for doing wrong. It was a system of laws as well as a system of morality. To uphold the Shart\u2018a and impose the penalties, to watch over the performance of all duties commanded by God, to defend the umma against its enemies, to spread the bounds of the faith by holy war (jzhad) : all these involved a leader with authority, in other words political power. Thus the Islamic community could not be complete unless it was also a State, and political action was a way of serving God: \u2018it is a duty to consider the exercise of power as one of the forms of religion, as one of the acts by which man draws near God\u2019.? Thus, according to the belief of most Muslims, to found and lead a community was part of the essential function of the Prophet and of his legitimate successors. They did not all agree, however, about the succession to the Prophet. The Shi\u2018is held that Muhammad\u2019s authority had passed first of all to his son-in- law \u2018Ali, then to a line of his descendants, the last of whom had disappeared; they differed among themselves about whether this was the fifth, seventh, or twelfth of the line. The members of this line, the imams, possessed, in Shi\u2018i belief, not only political * Ibn Taymiyya, al-Siyasa, p. 174 (Fr. trs. pp. 173-4). The Islamic State 5 authority but the power of infallible interpretation of the Quran. The Sunnis, on the other hand, held that Muhammad\u2019s authority had passed to the caliphs, leaders designated and accepted by the community, but that the caliphs inherited a part only of the Prophet\u2019s functions and powers."}
{"id": "arabic-thought-in-the-liberal-age-1798-1939", "title": "Arabic Thought In The Liberal Age, 1798 1939", "year": 1983, "seq": 2, "text": "According to the theory generally held, the ruler should consult the leaders of the community (shura) and they should give him moral advice and exhortation (nastha), although there was no clear idea who exactly should be consulted and should warn, and how far the ruler should be bound by what they said. For thinkers of the earlier period, the duty of obedi- ence only held so long as the caliph ordered nothing which was contrary to the Shari\u2018a. In later thought, as we shall see, obedience tended to become an absolute duty, and even an unjust ruler was regarded as better than none at all; only a minority of later thinkers taught that revolt could be legitimate, but even the majority, while teaching that obedience should be general, did not assert that it should be given without reserve. Thus al-Ghazali (1058-1111), after teaching the duty of obedience to unjust princes, points out that one must not, through obedience, condone their injustice. The devout Muslim should avoid the court and company of the unjust ruler, and should rebuke him: by words if he can safely do so, by silence if words might encourage rebellion.* In the Islamic view of the true society there was implicit a series of interrelated contrasts. First and most fundamental, while the world worshipped idols or joined their worship to that of God (shirk), Muslims proclaimed and worshipped the one God alone (tawhid). Secondly, and connected with this, came a contrast in the ordering of society. The society which did not know Islam was ruled by custom, evolved by men for their own purposes and in ignorance of the commandments of God (jahiltyya\u2014ignorance of the truths of religion); Islamic society, as well as those founded by earlier prophets to the degree to which they had not corrupted their scriptures, was ruled by the Shari'a."}
{"id": "arabic-thought-in-the-liberal-age-1798-1939", "title": "Arabic Thought In The Liberal Age, 1798 1939", "year": 1983, "seq": 3, "text": "The Islamic State II authority between \u2018Abbasid caliph and Turkish dynast was irreversible, just as was the shift of power from Baghdad to other capitals. After the Mongols destroyed Baghdad in the middle of the thirteenth century, the caliph continued to exist only as a shadow, at the court of the Mamluke sultans of Egypt, and few jurists were prepared to recognize his claims in this form. The transfer of power brought with it a change in political institutions. The new States which arose, and of which the Mamluke sultanate of Egypt was the culmination, had a different structure from the caliphate. Power lay in the hands of a military group, central Asian, Turkish, Kurdish, or Caucasian by origin \u2014the sultan, his freedmen, and their dependants. It originated in seizure, its first alm was to maintain itself, and for this purpose it kept in its own hands control of the army and all officials. The link which held the ruling group together was that of common interest and the natural solidarity of language although not of origin. Where the interests of the State were concerned, its laws were the edicts of the sultan, administered directly by him or his governors and derived from considerations of State interest. In essence then it was natural kingship (mulk); but it was mulk tempered by respect for Islam, for the caliph and the doctors of religion (\u2018alim, pl. \u2018ulama\u2019), and indeed deriving from this its moral claim. The shadow-caliph was in effect an official of the sultan\u2019s court, deprived of power, but serving as a guarantee of orthodoxy, against the insidious threat of Shi\u2018ism in its many forms, and as a moral basis for the sultan\u2019s power. Having in- stalled himself by the seizure of power, the sultan was formally invested by the caliph and his authority then acknowledged by the leaders of the people at the ceremony of bay\u2018a."}
{"id": "arabic-thought-in-the-liberal-age-1798-1939", "title": "Arabic Thought In The Liberal Age, 1798 1939", "year": 1983, "seq": 4, "text": "They were the guardians of Islamic morality and law, and of the Arabic language and culture which went with them. The law they studied and interpreted, and the judges who dispensed it, were protected and honoured by the sultan, even if\u2014exercising the right given to the ruler by the law itself\u2014he delimited the cases with which the judges were competent to deal. He maintained also the schools (madrasa) where Islamic law and the Arabic language were transmitted, and by drawing the permanent officials of the State from these schools he strengthened the Arabic character of the government. The \u2018ulama\u2019 were not only 12 Arabic Thought in the Liberal Age judges, teachers, and officials; they were consulted and used for foreign negotiations, they took part in the politics and revolutions of the palace. Although in general docile towards the princes, and reluctant to participate in revolts against their power, they served in a sense as leaders of the indigenous opinion of Egypt and Syria against the Turkish or Caucasian military class.\u2019 These changes raised once more the whole question of authority. The caliphate had been one, at least in principle; it had been universal, resting on a formal equality of rights and functions as between all believers; its head had been, by his own claim and general recognition, the successor of the Prophet in his political function, and he had exercised his function in accordance with the Shari\u2018a. None of this was true of the sultans who had taken over his power. Their rule was territorially limited. The limits, it is true, were de facto only, there was no idea of a legal frontier separating one Muslim State from another, and by maintaining the caliph at their court the Mam- lukes legitimized in advance any conquests they might make; nevertheless, neither they nor any other ruler of the time could claim to be ruling the whole umma."}
{"id": "arabic-thought-in-the-liberal-age-1798-1939", "title": "Arabic Thought In The Liberal Age, 1798 1939", "year": 1983, "seq": 5, "text": "The Islamic State 13 tribes into the Syrian desert and across Sinai into the Nile valley and the North African littoral, and they brought with them into the heart of the settled world the \u2018asabiyya of the tribe and the pagan customs of the age of ignorance. The reign of secular kingship seemed to have come again; but on the other hand the power of the Turks and Caucasians was necessary for the umma. They defended it against dangers from within and without; they had restored the rule of doctrinal orthodoxy as against the challenge of Shi\u2018ism and Isma\u2018ilism. It was difficult to fit the sultanates into the political doctrine of the caliphate, but it was impossible to condemn them out of hand. Once more then the fundamental problem of political thought was posed: in what sense could the new rulers be said to have the right to rule in the Islamic community? If they had no right, did the community founded by the Prophet and entrusted to his successors still exist? Writing while the transfer of power was still incomplete, al-Mawardi had tried to answer this question. The caliph, he said, could delegate his power to a military commander (amir) in an outlying region of the empire, and to a \u2018minister by delegation\u2019 (wazir) in its heart. This delegation could be made freely, or else in view of conquest or other circumstances. In this way the legal and moral basis of government could be preserved: \u2018a defective state of affairs is thus regularized and what was for- bidden becomes admissible\u2019 .\u2019 In return, the amir should recognize the necessity of the caliphate, show a pious obedience, preserve the Shari\u2018a and apply the fiscal principles it contained. More- over he could only exercise power for the caliph; the caliph kept his political and administrative functions even if he no longer exercised them directly."}
{"id": "arabic-thought-in-the-liberal-age-1798-1939", "title": "Arabic Thought In The Liberal Age, 1798 1939", "year": 1983, "seq": 6, "text": "Ibn Sina (Avicenna, 980- 1037), for example, while maintaining that prophetic illumina- tion was a natural state, declared that it was a state of the in- tellect, not the imagination alone, and indeed that it was the highest state of the human intellect. Its essential function was to give laws which all men must obey; but the content of the divine law was attainable in principle by the unaided human intellect, and failing a prophet a good system of law could grow up in society in other ways. To the strictly orthodox, however, this view was no more acceptable than that of al-Farabi; both alike tended to \u2018rationalize\u2019 the process of revelation, to turn the relationship of divine and human wills into one of theoretical intelligences. As the orthodox reaction gathered force, the study of the philosophers became marginal if not suspect, although individual scholars carried it on and the tradition of Ibn Sina remained strong in the Shi\u2018i schools of the east. But no move- ment of thought vanishes without remainder, and there was a submerged philosophical element in all later Islamic thought. The philosophers had taught that rulers were to be judged by their intentions rather than their title-deeds, and that the unity of the umma was derived from its common good; the jurists of the later period accepted this even when they rejected the general ideas of the philosophers. So much is apparent in the political treatise of Ibn Taymiyya, al-Siyasa al-shar\u2018iyya. The author (1263-1328) was an adherent of the Hanbali school of theology and jurisprudence, which was strongly opposed to all attempts at reducing the principles of Islam to a construction of the human intelligence, but showed great flexibility in applying them to the problems of social life. The problem which he faced was that of the two systems of government\u2014the ideal government of the caliphs, which no longer existed, and the actual government of the Mamluke sultans of which he was an official\u2014and of two 14 a]-Farabi, al-Madina, p. 123 (Fr. trs. p. 96)."}
{"id": "arabic-thought-in-the-liberal-age-1798-1939", "title": "Arabic Thought In The Liberal Age, 1798 1939", "year": 1983, "seq": 7, "text": "All Sunni schools of law regarded reasoning by strict analogy (qiyas) as a necessary process of legal interpretation, but each of them had found it necessary to add some further principle by which qtyas could be directed (for example, when it was necessary to choose between two analogies) or, within strict limits, supplemented. One such principle was that of maslaha: since God\u2019s purpose in giving laws was human welfare, the choice between different interpretations of the law should be directed by concern for welfare. Like other jurists, Ibn Taymiyya did not apply this principle in the sphere of worship (\u2018thadat); in these matters there was no way of knowing what God\u2019s purposes were. In the sphere of human relations (mu\u2018amalat), however, the principle should be applied. Every- thing which conduced to human welfare, and was not speci- fically forbidden, was not only allowed but even by implication enjoined. The task of gytthad, of deciding what conduced to The Islamic State 21 human welfare, could never cease. There could be an infallible ijma\u2018 of the Companions of the Prophet, who had been faithful to his words and deeds; there could be no infallible 1jma\u2018 of later jurists. This could easily have been a justification of the status quo, but in Ibn Taymiyya\u2019s hands it became something else. His doctrine assured the legitimacy of the Mamluke government, but also contained precepts about how it should be carried on. Good government depended on an alliance between amirs, political and military leaders, and \u2018ulama\u2019, interpreters of the law. In the Mamluke State where the amirs were Caucasians or Turks while the \u2018ulama\u2019 were mainly of Arabic speech and culture, this theory carried with it a plea that government should not be in exclusively foreign hands. But Ibn Taymiyya was not only thinking of the Mamluke State; he was prepared to generalize his idea, and maintain that in a Muslim State power should not be in the hands of any limited group."}
{"id": "arabic-thought-in-the-liberal-age-1798-1939", "title": "Arabic Thought In The Liberal Age, 1798 1939", "year": 1983, "seq": 8, "text": "For Ibn Khaldun, the Islamic State, like all stable and virtuous States, is a blend of kingship (mudk) and Shari\u2018a State. True as this was of the sultanates of its time, it was true also of the Ottoman Empire, which in a sense was the heir of the whole political development of Islam. First of all it was a dynastic kingdom, with its loyalty focused upon an individual\u2014or rather a group of individuals, a family. It was never thought to be illegitimate to depose a sultan regarded as unfit to rule and declared to be so by the guardians of the law, but with rare exceptions those who rebelled did not question the right of the house of Osman to rule. The right was maintained by a military group held together, and kept fast in its loyalty, by natural \u2018asabtyya or its equivalent. This group, however, changed its nature (as Ibn Khaldun maintained that all such groups must) once the ruling family had seated itself firmly on the throne. The group which had created the empire was formed of free- born Turks or turkized Muslims of other ethnic origin who were the cavalry and made the conquests of the early sultans. As the Ottoman domains expanded, the group assumed the position of a ruling class: their leaders were given by the sultan the right to collect and keep the land-tax from a certain district in return for military service, and from being warriors they became land- owners. There was at first, and there remained in principle, a sharp distinction between \u2018askar and ra\u2018aya: between the mili- tary group from whom the ruling positions were filled, and the subjects, whether Muslim or Christian, who paid taxes but were excluded from an active share in government. In course of time, however, the distinction became blurred."}
{"id": "arabic-thought-in-the-liberal-age-1798-1939", "title": "Arabic Thought In The Liberal Age, 1798 1939", "year": 1983, "seq": 9, "text": "But its Sunni orthodoxy was that of its age, the product of the whole long development of the uwmma, not in any sense an attempt to revert to the pristine simplicity of the early caliphs. It protected the schools where the orthodox doctrines were taught, and founded new ones in Istanbul, and it drew its officials largely from their graduates; but it protected even while it controlled the brother- hoods of mystics (tariga, pl. turug). Their leaders were given The Ottoman Emptre 27 financial support, and a special reverence was given to their spiritual fathers: the shrine of Jalal al-Din al-Rumi in Konya was maintained as a place of pilgrimage, and a splendid tomb was built for Ibn al-\u2018Arabi in Damascus. By this time, indeed, the theology of the schools and that of the mystics had made peace with one another, in spite of the differences between them; and many of the \u2018ulama\u2019 were affiliated to one or other of the brotherhoods. While the sultan, along with the Moghul emperor in India, was the greatest of Sunni rulers, the defender of Sunnism against the Shah of Persia, no attempt was made (until the end of the eighteenth century) to claim that he was also the caliph, in the sense in which the immediate successors of Muhammad had been caliphs. The great scholar Sayyid Murtada al-Zabidi (1732-91), writing his commentary on al-Ghazali\u2019s Ihya\u2019 \u2018ulum al-din at the end of the eighteenth century, had no doubt at all, even if he had a note of regret, that the caliphate had passed away. The caliphate, he points out, is acquired by merit, the sultanate by force. If the caliph, besides merit, has also force and \u2018asabryya to rely on he can rule, otherwise sultans and amirs must rule, while keeping the name of caliph."}
{"id": "midlander54midd", "title": "Midlander", "year": 1979, "seq": 0, "text": "Kaufman and Edna Ferber created a strange lot in the eccentric Cavendish family and the University Theatre brought them to life with vigor and aplomb in their season opening production. With strong direction by Dorethe Tucker, the cast, a blend of old and new faces, presented a fine ensemble performance that infected the audience with enthusiasm. As Julie Cavendish (the most beautiful woman on Braodway), Barbara Ambrose did a remakable job. Her graceful sweep down the stairs in her first entrance did more for the men in the audience than a whole year of Farrah Fawcett-Majors could. Bob Forsythe, the versatile University Theatre veteran, did a fine job as Julie's matinee-idol brother, Tony. His dashing entrance in a long black cape rivaled that of Ambrose for sheer effect. As Fanny Cavendish, the family matriarch, Carolyn Jones was faced with the task of being believeable in the role of a much older woman. She succeeded with a blend of speech patterns and nuances which did not possess even a trace of false airs. 28/Royal Family ...M 4r' * As Julie's daughter, Lisa Davis gave a strong performance in a role totally unfamiliar to her \u2014 that of an ingenue. Martin McGeachey and Vickie Stegall as Fanny's brother and sister-in-law were among the strong supporting cast giving their all in \"The Royal Family.\" Clay Hawes' set depicting the Cavendish's fashionable New York apartment, was nothing short of stunning. Many long hours of work were required to produce the set which made the shoe pleasing to look at. Patricia Lane's costumes were tasteful and elegant (although the satin gowns were a bit overdone), but they were definitely 30's fashions for a play set in the 20's. Although the first act was a bit weak, the performers warmed to their task, making the second and third acts examples of fine acting and direction."}
{"id": "midlander54midd", "title": "Midlander", "year": 1979, "seq": 1, "text": "\"It's been one of our better years,\" Smith reflected, while boasting about how smoothly the Contest of Champions ran. With over 50 bands from ail over the Southeast competing for the grand championship and Tennessee bands fighting to receive the governors Cup, there is bound to be a lot of confusion, delays and hassles. However, Smith, Assistant Band Director Linda Mitchell and the b. nd students ironed out most of these problems. \"Our schedule ran on time, and we got letters back from other bands raving about how smoothly the day turned out,\" Cindy Houston, french horn player said. Most surprisingly, it did not even rain. You may have seen the contest on television Nov. 14 or 29, since for the first time, the contest was beamed off a satellite and received national television coverage. \"We had a hard working group this year,\" Smith said, still reminiscing over the past year. The 20 flag girls and six rifles came to band camp three days early to begin preparing their drills for marching season. Remember the Russian dance they performed during halftime, and their feature number in \"Phantom of the Opera?\" During \"Espanio,\" Martha Kelly, from Oak Ridge, captivated the audience with her baton-twirling abilities. You know, the band deserves more credit than just that of marching a half-time show. Trumpet solo's and drum rolls aid the cheerleaders and add to the spirit at football games. The pre-game show gives early game arrivers something to watch. The band exits the field now to drum taps, the football team rushes back on. Taking their seats in the section reserved especially for them, the band members are pretty content, but there is always room for improvements, so between now and their next appearance, the band will practice just as hard learning new drills or improving old ones."}
{"id": "midlander54midd", "title": "Midlander", "year": 1979, "seq": 2, "text": "Murphy Athletic Center and the Learning Resources Center, with their unique archetectral designs, top the list of new facilities added to MTSU since the arrival of Scarlett. A library physical plant, computer center, Graphics Arts Building, 325-acre Stark Dairy Farm and the Hickman farm, art annex, renovated James Union Building and the Davis Science Building are other additions to the university during the Scarlett decade. Expansion of the University Center, appropriation for a music annex and improved atheletic facilities are also among Scarlett's improve- February 28, 1978, Scarlett told faculty, administration and students he was submitting a resignation letter for the March meeting of the Board of Regents. . //, l- i . u\u00bb \u00bb Scarlett refused to comment on questions pertaining to rumors that he was being forced to resign. I think I ought to say no comment on that question. I'm sorry, but I think I better say no comment.\" Rumors of Scarlett's resignation began in December in the Nashville Banner. The Nashville Banner reported that Scarlett was being forced to resign in order for former Governor Ray Blanton to appoint Sam Ingram as president of MTSU. , , L \u25a0 \u2022 \"The world's poorest kept secret,\" was Scarlett's explanation of his resignation. Scarlett said that MTSU had the opportunity to go beyond its present scope and become \"more than a regional university.\" Scarlett called upon the \"university family\" to dedicate themselves to serving the students. \"I hope I see this helping of students from whereever I am,\" the president said. \"We could really be a great university. I want you to turn back to being a great university.\" With the help of President Scarlett, MTSU has become a great university and we, the students of MTSU, wish to thank Dr. Scarlett for his help and concern of MTSU's climbing toward the top in providing a university that offers an atmosphere of both educational and social enlightment."}
{"id": "midlander54midd", "title": "Midlander", "year": 1979, "seq": 3, "text": "Main Street, the City Cafe is known primarily for steaming homemade rolls that ooze with butter. \"Our lemon icebox pie and rolls are what brings everyone back,\" Jane Gordon, a waitress for the past three years at the City Cafe, boasted. \"But I think we have a lot to do with it because people like coming in everyday and having the same waitress.\" Among the City Cafe's many regular customers is one who have been going there for 23 years. \"Vera Jackson comes in here three times a day every day except Saturday. She sits at the same table and in the same seat,\" Miss Cordon proclaimed. \"If she doesn't get her regular seat at first when she comes in, she will go around the table to each seat when it is vacated until the person sitting in her seat leaves. She will then move her food, drink, coat and whatever she has to that seat.\" Miss Jackson is very special to the employees of the City Cafe, but other important and special people have made their appearance at this famous restaurant. Many well-known citizens have been served by the City Cafe, including Porter Waggoner, Lamar Alexander, Jake Butcher, Jerry Reed and Charlie Daniels. \"I waited on Norm Woodel (Eye On The Road reporter for Chanel Five in Nashville) one time and 1 didn't know who he was. He was acting a fool over the Hawaiian salad,\" Miss Gordon recalled. \"He wanted to know what it was and I guaranteed him it would make him do the hula and it just got crazier from there on. I didn't even know who he was until I turned on the news that night. I nearly died.\" \"We get all kinds of people in here, from the country club people to VA patients, but 80 percent are college students, Mrs."}
{"id": "midlander54midd", "title": "Midlander", "year": 1979, "seq": 4, "text": "I.MM Imr -yjs, fu \u00bbi 1....,\". 50/Academics Accounting And Information Systems Academics/51 52/Academics Aerospace The Department of Aerospace expands to meet the needs of a growing industry. A new program emphasis. Maintenance Management provides supervisory training for those in the mechanical aspect of aviation. Students prepare for careers as air traffic controllers, pilots, mechanics, and various positions with commercial and private transportation companies. Some students aim toward employment with the National Aeronautics and Space Administration or military careers. Boasting one of the top rated aerospace programs in the United States, Middle Tennessee State University attracts students from all areas of the country. Academics/53 54/Acaclemics fe Agriculture Cultivation of basic substances vital for perpetuation of human existence \u2014 food. Agriculture at Middle Tennessee State University is more than that. Economics, ecology, and technology clarify the perspective of productivity. Yet, the students and faculty in this department realize the importance of their careers and society's dependence upon their work. Agriculture comes natural to many students here, because living off the land has been the pursuit of their families for years. Often we take for granted the extra hours of sleep we get each morning while agriculture majors and departmental personnel are up early to feed and care for the animals. Nor do we survey farmers' financial losses when we complain about the rising cost of groceries. Sensitivity to the risks and rewards of the agrarian lifestyle is basic to our survival. Academics/55 Art Art is ubiquitous in our lives. It substantiates its presence in our environment through building design, entertains us in the galleries, attracts us as consumers in the form of jewelry, informs us through graphics, and provides a stage for our imagination and a theatre for self expression. Throughout the year, the Department of Art offers workshops for the community in the areas of pottery, jewelry, macrame, and other mediums."}
{"id": "midlander54midd", "title": "Midlander", "year": 1979, "seq": 5, "text": "The closet door will not open all the way because of the box of twelve dozen rolls of calculator tape for the electric model. The desk drawer comes unglued from the strain of one thousand 9-volt batteries for the pocket calculator. Consumer law books sit around trying to disguise themselves as coffee tables. Instead of asking you to clean up your part of the room, you recieve a copy of The Organization Man for your birthday. The Department of Business Education advocates a concentration of basic business skills as tools and literacy in economics, business procedures, consumerism, and administration. Curricula encompasses distributive education teaching programs, office management, and advanced office skills. 60/ Academics Academics/61 62/Academics Chemistry And Physics Caschromatograph. Does that blow your mind? It's just a name for a useful machine that does something very relevant to our lives. Simply, it is used for analysis to separate mixtures into their components. Chemistry and physics are often dismissed as \"not pertaining to me right now.\" But it permeates our existance. Bread rising in the oven and wine fermenting in the vat are practical examples. Professional examples are industrial quality control, pollution detection, food additive analysis, metal compostion, and medical technology. Chemistry and physics offer a wide horizon for an awareness of the makeup of our world, and enhances the ability to evaluate the environment and use it advantageously. The department provides excellent opportunities for research, preventing stagnation of interest while fostering growth of professional literature. Basic research is ongoing to add to the body of general knowledge. Practical research is conducted to design new or more efficient or immediate use in society. Whether examining the enzyme level in crayfish or analyzing the content of pesticides, the department is well equipped to deal with all aspects, simple and complex. Often viewed as prerequisite study for health careers, chemistry and physics are ends in themselves with positions in industry, education, and government agencies."}
{"id": "midlander54midd", "title": "Midlander", "year": 1979, "seq": 6, "text": "I had heard lots of things about living in this complex, but I had no idea of seeing such bizarre behavior. Tumbling the basket and contents to the ground, she began jumping from one place to another, cupping her hands close to the ground with each landing. Slightly blunt and somewhat nosey, I approached her. \"What's with you, lady?\" \"I'm trying to catch this grasshopper. I need it for my science methods class in education.\" I felt relieved to hear a rational explanation and pleased to find a motivated student. As we talked, she enlightened me on all the projects and activities required in education courses, preparing students for the ultimate task \u2014 student teaching. These courses are more than philosophical theories. Applicable methods, psychological patterns of interaction, and a well rounded academic knowledge gathering process characterize the education department. Middle Tennessee State University was founded as a school for teachers. The Education Department has diversified, specialized, and traditionally carries on the task of providing opportunities for students preparing to teach in elementary schools, secondary schools, and working in special education capacities, library service, supervision, and educational administration. Education as an institution generates philosophies for growth structure which know no zenith. Academics/71 72/ Academics Foreign Language Foreign language majors indulge themselves in an unparalleled discourse. Culture, cooking, dress, and customs reflect the humanistic side of the study of foreign language. Examination of literature, films and history enhance the challenge of learning to speak, write and experience another culture. Whether the student is planning to teach, interpret, travel, or just become aware, foreign language courses offer a vital insight, accentuating the ability to understand the world through better communication. Academics/73 Geography And Earth Science ^ 74/Academics If the Department of Geography and Earth Science had a marque on its office door, it would most likely read: Now Showing \u2014 Satellite Mapping."}
{"id": "midlander54midd", "title": "Midlander", "year": 1979, "seq": 7, "text": "Academics/75 History History fosters the cultivation of knowledge of our predecessors and cultural heritage, it enlightens the ideologies we have inherited and provides new perspectives through research, restoration, and preservation. The History Department recognizes the convergence of culture, economics, demography, religion, education, technology, and philosophy as the foremost factors of change and presents objective and thorough coverage through a variety of media. Students are inspired to seek local resources to enhance interest and gain firsthand knowledge of Tennessee history. One of the best sources, sometimes overlooked, are the descendants of the people whose values molded the past of Tennesseans. Studies of the roles played by immigrants and various ethnic populations give us insight to the role of the United States as the \"melting pot\" of cultures and advocator of human rights. The department's Historic Preservation emphasis trains students for professional careers in preservation planning and promotes an awareness of the potentiality for the study of history in the public school classroom. 76/Acaclemics Dr. James Huhta is Director of the Historical Preservation Program here at Middle Tennessee State University and serves as the Chairman of the National Council for Historic Preservation Education. Academics/77 HPERS A synthesis of mind and body equates the program of the Health, Physical Education, Recreation, Safety Department. Rigorous activity for health, concepts for the mind, recreation -for the psychological well-being as well as the fun of it, and safety for awareness constitue a balanced program here at Middle Tennessee State University. Benefits of physical education stem far beyond the anatomical aspect. Social interaction in team sports and public relations with the community highlight the other side of the HPERS program. Through required courses all students are acquainted with a wide variety of activities and are encouraged to develop skills and pursue the objectives of increased strength and endurance to improve health and realize the importance of leisure."}
{"id": "midlander54midd", "title": "Midlander", "year": 1979, "seq": 8, "text": "By the way, so are those long walks in the snow to get to class. Once I figured it out ... if 1 walk briskly on Tuesdays and Thursdays, burning X number of calories per meter, 1 should be able to lose enough weight to get into that outfit that is going to cost X number of dollars that I will save in gas . . . By providing instruction and opportunities for learning through experience, the Home Economics department seeks to augment resources for the enrichment of individual and family life. Home Economics prepares men and women for careers in consumer services, early childhood education, nutrition, merchandise management, interior design, and vocational home economics education. These various career opportunities are the culmination of numerous interdisciplinary courses. Academics/81 Industrial Studies 82/ Academics Slowly moving his fingers over the graceful, curvaceous beauty brought to maturity like a work of art by his own hand, he felt proud. The solemn expression on his face turned gently to a smile as he imagined someday passing on his knowledge and experience to another who would encounter the apprehensive moments and final joy he had known. A voice broke the silence. \"That's a fine table leg. You are developing a pride in your work typical of most aspiring young teachers. Your students will see that quality in you right away.\" Creativity reflected in the finished product is a hallmark of Industrial Studies. Design, materials handling, and mathmatical calculations accent laborious pre-engineering and pre-architecture programs. Employment opportunities include teaching, industrial technology, and related management positions. Academics/83 Management And Marketing Management majors find themselves wading through a myriad of case problems, trying to make that managerial, rational decision. \"it is the principle of the thing that counts. More money must be put into these things for the student's welfare.\" \"I agree, but we must have guidelines for setting our priorities.\" \"Having the functional authority to make such a decision unlocks the way for a wide course of action."}
{"id": "midlander54midd", "title": "Midlander", "year": 1979, "seq": 9, "text": "Yes, this is Push 'N Plug Ad Agency. Yes, we do handle their accounts. Of course, we refute any claims that the meat is not one hundred percent! What do you mean one hundred percent what? Certainly you don't think we were implying ...\" Sometimes it is a rough way to go but marketing techniques handle a large part of every consumer dollar. 84/Academics Academics/85 Mass Communications We live in a environment, its impact besieges our daily lives and leaves its mark on the theories of the social forces which shape our lives. The power of the mass media is very evident and ranks with the family, education, and religion as an indicator of norm structure. Middle Tennesse State University is one of a few, if not the only unviersity which incorporates Mass Communication courses into its general educational requirements, an apparent testimonial to our innovative faculty. The Mass Communications Department prepares men and women for professional positions in the area of television, radio, print media, public relations, advertising, and recording industry management. It is an advancing department, keeping pace with a growing and competitive industry. Compared with other nations, its sophistication is unparrallelled and the growth potential is enormous due to its theoretical foundation, advocation of the First Amendment. 86/ Academics Acadennics/87 Mathematics And Computer Science Synonymously relevant to a progressive, verbally fluent society such as ours, math and computer science are chronometrically paired to educate future teachers, pro- grammers, and statisticians. Computers are such an inte- gral part of our lives now that very iew jobs escape their impact. Due to increasing technology, data is increasing at rates beyond imagination. Students at Middle Tennessee State University articulate the language of the sciences for use today and reference tomorrow. 88/Academics Computers can sing, make decorative placemats for tables, or transform a T-shirt into a good place to hang a picture. 1 knew those math and computer science majors couldn't stay sane doing ail that straight stuff."}
{"id": "mississippilawjo46dani", "title": "Mississippi Law Journal Fall 1975 Book 5", "year": 1975, "seq": 0, "text": "A steam engine was placed by its owner on his land to furnish power for a planing mill. The engine was attached to a concrete founda- tion by eight steel bolts, and a building constructed over it. The owner conveyed the land by a deed which apparently made no mention of the engine. A judgment creditor of the landowner levied execution on the engine, and the plaintiff bought it at the execution sale. The plaintiff brought a replevin action against the grantee to recover the engine. Despite its affixation to the land, the plaintiff contended that the engine remained personal property, did not pass under the deed, and could, therefore, be sold in execution of a judgment against the landowner. The trial court gave a peremptory instruction in favor of the grantee.53 On appeal, the decision was reversed and the case remanded. The critical question was whether the engine had been so annexed to the realty as to become a fixture. The court held it had not: \"Tested by the rules announced in Weathersby v. Sleeper, ... it cannot be said that the character of the engine was changed from that of a chattel to realty.\"54 Boone naturally leads to further inquiry: What are the rules of Weathersby v. SleeperV* Decided in 1869, Weathersby involved a dis- pute over a steam saw and grist mill. The machinery, owned by Solomon Weathersby, was loaned to his brother Lewis Weathersby, with the un- derstanding that Lewis would install it on land to be furnished by Sleeper. Apparently Lewis Weathersby and Sleeper planned to operate the machinery in partnership. Lewis turned the machinery over to Sleeper, who installed it on land which he possessed but did not own. The owner of the land consented to the installation. Subsequently, Solo- mon Weathersby sold the machinery to Margaret Weathersby, and she demanded possession from Sleeper."}
{"id": "mississippilawjo46dani", "title": "Mississippi Law Journal Fall 1975 Book 5", "year": 1975, "seq": 1, "text": "In its deference to those administrative interests the Goss Court may have oversimplified the problems. First, the Court pointed out that the informal conference applied only \"to the short suspension, not exceeding 10 days.\"156 What additional protections, if any, attach when a student is suspended for 11 days? \"Longer suspensions or expulsions for the remainder of the school term, or permanently, may require more formal procedures.\"157 The Court's acknowledgment that a case-by-case analysis is required for slightly longer suspensions indicates that strict due process should require the same analysis for short-term suspensions. Uniform procedure cannot be fully effective because no two cases are alike. As one court has stated, \"[a] suspension of even one hour could be quite critical\" depending on circumstances.158 Secondly, the situations in which students can be excluded without prior notice and hearing must be delineated. Goss stated a preference for antecedent safeguards159 but identified three instances in which students \"may be immediately removed from school.\"190 Two of the situations \u2014 persisting danger to persons or to property as a result of the student's pres- ence\u2014 unquestionably warrant summary action. However, the third situation, \"an ongoing threat of disrupting the academic process,\"161 if applied too broadly, could render Goss of little practical consequence. Lacking a more clearly articulated standard this third exception could be employed against such relatively innocuous behavior as repeated talking in class, thereby far transcending the original \"emergency\" ra- tionale of the exceptions.162 Thirdly, Goss does not address the problem of self-incrimination inherent in any hearing which might lead from suspension to additional adjudicative proceedings. If juvenile or crimi- nal court proceedings against the student are contemplated, his inter- ests may require presence of counsel at the \"informal\" suspension hear- ing, no matter how short the suspension. That the suspension hearing is characterized as civil should not be dispositive."}
{"id": "mississippilawjo46dani", "title": "Mississippi Law Journal Fall 1975 Book 5", "year": 1975, "seq": 2, "text": "Applying Goss How Goss will be interpreted and applied by the lower federal courts is problematic. In any event, the following recommendations fall well within the Goss guidelines if employed in routine suspensions not exceeding 10 days: (1) When an infraction believed to warrant suspension has been reported, the accused student should be called to the office of the school official charged with maintaining discipline, usually an assistant princi- pal. If more than one student is involved, each should be interviewed separately. (2) The student should be informed of the details of the charge against him. A statement of the suspected violation should be put in writing along with a statement that the student has been advised of the charge prior to any adjudication. The student should sign the writing and be given a copy. (3) If the student contests the allegations of the charge, the disci- plinarian should hear the student's full account or denial of the incident. If possible the student should write down his version, and a copy should be filed with a copy of the charge; in this manner a rudimentary record will be made, lessening the necessity for an impartial tribunal. Addi- tionally, the disciplinarian should ask about students, faculty members, or others whom the student believes would corroborate his version. (4) The student should then be allowed to return to class unless this would be disruptive; he should be told that he will be able to confer with the principal before any disciplinary action is taken against him. (5) The disciplinarian should conduct a brief informal investiga- tion of the alleged incident, including talks with the accuser and wit- nesses, if there are any. This inquiry should be low-key to avoid disturb- ance of the educational environment; teachers and students should be approached during lunch, study hall, or free periods."}
{"id": "mississippilawjo46dani", "title": "Mississippi Law Journal Fall 1975 Book 5", "year": 1975, "seq": 3, "text": "Generally speaking, in a case in which an emergency order has been signed by the youth court judge, the designated youth counselor will notify counsel as soon as the child is removed from the parent's home. In other instances counsel may be notified when the date of the hearing is placed on the docket, or at least 3 days before the hearing. The role of the court-appointed counsel in the child abuse proceed- ing is similar to that of a guardian ad litem.92 In conjunction with these duties, counsel appointed to represent the interest of the child talks to both the county prosecuting attorney and the youth counselor who has compiled the investigative report on the suspected battered child. If the data obtained from these sources is deemed insufficient by counsel, a request can be made to the court for more data. During the course of the hearing, the attorney will often question the parents of the child about their concept of corporal punishment and the severity with which they believe it may be administered. The attorney also assists in the determination of a suitable placement for the child if the outcome of the hearing is removal of the child from the custody of its parents. Reporting to the youth court instances of suspected child abuse in Hinds County is most frequently made by medical personnel at the University of Mississippi Medical Center in Jackson, Mississippi. This is primarily because the University Hospital is a state institution.93 The examining physician is required to complete a \"Report of Suspected Battered Child,\" and the designated counselor at the youth court is notified, sometimes jointly by the social services division of the hospital and the pediatrics division. The process after notification by medical personnel is for the youth court to make preliminary inquiry determining whether the interest of the child or the public requires the court to take further action."}
{"id": "mississippilawjo46dani", "title": "Mississippi Law Journal Fall 1975 Book 5", "year": 1975, "seq": 4, "text": "Taylor* As a \"quick reference outline\" this booklet should be very helpful to all who are interested in the subject of estate planning, whether they be lawyers, law students, teachers, accountants, trust officers, investment or insurance counsel- ors, or property owners. The publication does an excellent job of explaining the federal estate, gift, and income taxes, and their interrelationships. It brings to mind the diverse property interests and problems that must be considered by the estate planner. It is current to the extent that any annual publication can be in the continually changing field of tax law. Filled with citations of code sections, regulations, rulings, cases, and IRS policy statements, it is a good starting point for research. This reference work can be as useful to the lawyer who specializes in estate planning as it is to the lawyer who occasionally drafts a will or sets up a trust. At the price of $3, it is within the reach of every practicing lawyer. The subject of estate planning encompasses problems of the accumulation, use, conservation, and disposition of wealth, great and small, of protection of desired beneficiaries, and of the prevention of unnecessary erosion by taxes, expenses, and inflation. A \"quick reference outline\" could scarcely give notice of all the problems in the field or attain perfect balance between essential items. Some increased emphasis upon \"non-tax\" problems in estate planning would improve coverage of the subject. Very little is presented on the \"accumulation\" phases of estate planning, of advisable investment programs, of the choice of types of life insurance, of stretching meager means in small estates, of family procedures trusts, of plans for survivorship property at the survivor's death, or of planning for gaps in social security payments. Imaginative and innovative planners will find a succession of helpful guides for community property laws, analyzing the estate, estimating taxes and costs (of present and proposed plans in alternative events of earlier death of husband or wife), and planning to conserve assets."}
{"id": "mississippilawjo46dani", "title": "Mississippi Law Journal Fall 1975 Book 5", "year": 1975, "seq": 5, "text": "Wallace* Knowledge and Politics begins with a disclaimer which is not uncommon among political science writers, a caveat that the author does not assert solu- tions to the problems of the world but merely establishes a framework within which those problems may be addressed. Modesty in intellectual affairs is to be applauded, but all too often such disclaimers serve as rationalization for a lack of substance: if an author has nothing new to say he simply says something old in a different way. Unger has some new things to say, though the manner in which he says them often fails to avoid the turgidity which generally characterizes philosophi- cal political discourse. If his initial premises are granted, his essay provides a coherent set of concepts with which to analyze the object of the author's interest. That object is the set of ideas known as liberalism. Liberalism in this context means something quite different from the jour- nalistic use of the terms \"liberal\" and \"conservative\" to distinguish between such disparate figures as, for example, Edward Kennedy or George McGovern on the one hand and Barry Goldwater or William F. Buckley on the other. It refers to what political scientists call classical liberalism \u2014 that body of thought commonly associated with Western democratic theory. It includes almost all American political thought, the views of the Kennedys and Buckleys alike, and excludes on the right such classically conservative notions as monarchy and fascism and on the left the radical doctrines of socialism and communism. To Unger liberalism has been the dominant force in the realm of ideas since the mid- 17th century. Liberalism contains within itself, however, essential con- tradictions which stem from the incompatibility of reason and desire. These contradictions result in liberal distinctions between facts and values, means and ends, and immanence and transcendence."}
{"id": "mississippilawjo46dani", "title": "Mississippi Law Journal Fall 1975 Book 5", "year": 1975, "seq": 6, "text": "The authors, sons of Ethel and Julius Rosenberg, use letters received from their incarcerated parents as the principal source material for the book. Al- though this method of presentation takes the reader into the thoughts and anxieties of the Rosenbergs as they languished in prison, the dramatic effect is diminished by the fact that the perpetuation of the letters was preconceived and that they were written in duplicate, obviously for ultimate public use. The authors give little evidence to support their contention of the innocence of their parents who were convicted by a jury after an extended trial. Instead, they refer the reader to other works which, they contend, establish their parents' innocence. The emotional impact on the two young sons was severe, and their confusion, anxieties, and frustrations are ably set forth. That they survived the trauma as well as they did is amazing. The book raises two points: (1) The Rosenbergs were innocent, and (2) the death penalty was unjustified, unreasonable, and inappropriate in the light of sentences given in other contemporary \"spy\" trials. The guilt or innocence of the Rosenbergs to the specific charges is highly debatable. Their case is pre- sented as one where the fact they were avowed Communist sympathizers was exploited to the fullest by the prosecution as a warning to other would-be sym- pathizers and the general public. The death sentence criticism appears justified since it was so inconsistent with other sentences, a fact which the authors adequately document. The book is somewhat tedious to read and boring in parts because of the repetitious content of the letters which comprise a large part of the subject matter. Current disclosures of past governmental misconduct and illegal activi- ties, however, increase one's interest in the book. * Attorney, Pascagoula, Mississippi. 1126 1975] BOOK REVIEWS 1127 Any reader familiar with the post war years will be drawn to reflect about the vast changes which have occurred since the Rosenbergs were caught in the web of a vindictive bureaucracy."}
{"id": "fm-7-93-long-range-surveillance-units-operations-1995", "title": "FM 7-93 Long Range Surveillance Units Operations 1995", "year": 1995, "seq": 0, "text": "Operations by teams in areas forward of friendly soldiers can create possibilities for fratricide. To protect the LRS teams from friendly fires, the following coordination is conducted before insertion. 2-10 (1) Hide site and surveillance site locations are normally included in coordination of restricted areas (no-fire areas) established by the controlling headquarters. The controlling headquarters informs higher, lower, and adjacent headquarters of the no-fire areas. For security reasons, the nature of the mission is not normally stated and additional dummy or false no-fire areas are added to reduce the signature of the LRS teams. To maintain operation security, all no-fire areas are listed as on order. (2) Teams may operate in areas in which fires cannot be restricted. In such instances, the committed team is briefed on known strikes and warning procedures of impending friendly fires, air strikes, and nuclear and chemical operations. (3) Detailed planning is required in situations where an LRS team may link up with advancing friendly units. The team must be familiar with general linkup procedures. As details become available, the commander informs the team of frequencies, call signs, and code words. The LRS team is normally the stationary element. The linkup unit is briefed to the lowest level possible. A liaison team is sent from the company operations base or detachment operations base or alternate operations base (AOB) to ensure that this coordination takes place. Once linkup has occurred, the team debriefs the S2 of the linkup unit. This ensures that information gets to the organization that needs it the most. The team is then expedited to the COB or DOB for further debriefing and refitting operations. (4) Detailed planning is required if the team must infiltrate or exfiltrate by foot. Formal passage of lines coordination is essential to prevent fratricide. A liaison team from the COB, DOB, or AOB provides assistance and information to the team or the friendly forward unit."}
{"id": "fm-7-93-long-range-surveillance-units-operations-1995", "title": "FM 7-93 Long Range Surveillance Units Operations 1995", "year": 1995, "seq": 1, "text": "MOVEMENT TO THE DEPARTURE AREA The departure area is where the transporting unit will pickup the team for delivery to the insertion point; or if infiltrating on foot, to the passage point near the forward edge of the battle area. Teams can be infiltrated or exfiltrated by land, sea, or air, or a combination thereof. The most common method is by air insertion\u2014more specifically, by helicopter. Setting patterns that the enemy could exploit must be avoided. 3-5. STAY-BEHIND This method is used during retrograde operations or withdrawal of covering forces in defensive operations. When possible, the hide site and the surveillance site should be one site to minimize movement. a. The advantages of stay-behind operations are not having to infiltrate an LRS team into the area of operations, and the ability to pre-position mission-essential equipment and supplies. b. The disadvantages of this employment are the disruption of C2 associated with the passing advance of enemy forces and the inability to pinpoint locations of interest in the advancing enemy lines of communication. 3-6. INFILTRATION Infiltration is the first critical phase of an LRS operation, because the team often has to pass through heavily defended terrain where sophisticated detection devices may be used. The selected method of infiltration depends on the mission, enemy situation, resources available, weather and terrain, depth of penetration, training of the team, team survival, and simplicity. The best method is the one that is least likely to be detected. Security and secrecy of movement must not be sacrificed for convenience. The team must maintain the advantage of operating by stealth regardless of the infiltration method. Infiltration requires the support of the corps or division staff to include the G2, G3, fire support officer, air defense artillery officer, and air liaison officer. Certain fundamentals apply to every infiltration."}
{"id": "fm-7-93-long-range-surveillance-units-operations-1995", "title": "FM 7-93 Long Range Surveillance Units Operations 1995", "year": 1995, "seq": 2, "text": "They require frequent transportation support, primarily to move the surveillance teams and the operations section. 4-11, MAINTENANCE Neither the LRSC nor LRSD have organizational maintenance personnel. The communications platoon or section of the LRSC or LRSD perform operator maintenance on communication and electronic equipment. Organizational and direct support maintenance is requested through the unit assigned to provide support. 4-12. MEDICAL Organic medical support in an LRSU 1s limited to self and buddy aid. Due to the remote placement of teams, primary care is not readily available. LRS soldiers should attend combat lifesaver and emergency medical technician training. a. Additional medical support is requested as needed. When possible, medical evacuation of team members is delayed until the whole team is evacuated from the area of operations. Wounded team members are sent directly to the nearest medical facility that can provide definitive care and treatment. b. Combat stress is another medical aspect with which surveillance teams must cope. Due to the nature of LRS missions, the teams are subjected to stress in rnanv wavs. Some of these contributors are \u2014 * Limited visibility (darkness, smoke, fog, rain, snow, ice, and glare). This requires the extended use of night vision goggles. * Disrupted sleep cycles. Performance suffers from the disruption of the normal sleep schedule. \u00a2 Mental fatigue. This results from having to make decisions of serious consequences in too little time, with too little information, and while exposed to danger. \u00a2 Physical fatigue. This results from conducting physical activity ex- cessive to current conditioning or at a strenuous level without rest. c. Combat stress, however, is not solely a medical problem. It is also a command problem in terms of reduced performance and personnel lost from duty. It is a command responsibility to take actions to increase the individual team member\u2019s resistance to stress. This can be done by extensive training under simulated combat conditions and a high level of physical training."}
{"id": "fm-7-93-long-range-surveillance-units-operations-1995", "title": "FM 7-93 Long Range Surveillance Units Operations 1995", "year": 1995, "seq": 3, "text": "Once the team reaches the launch point, which is outside of the surf zone and small-arms weapons fire, the team leader sends out a scout swim team to reconnoiter the beach landing site. d. Before leaving the main body, the scout swimmers receive last-minute instructions or adjustments to the original plan based on observations made during the infiltration thus far. The scout swimmers\u2019 rucksacks are left with the main body (in the inflatable boat). To keep their direction, the scout swimmers use a dive compass or guide on prominent terrain features or lights on the beach. Scout swimmers use the sidestroke to allow all-round observation while approaching the surf zone or the beach landing site. Swimmers face each other using opposite sidestrokes and observe the area beyond the other swimmer. e. As the scout swimmers reach the surf zone or when they get close to the beach landing site, they use the breaststroke to observe the beach. The scout swimmers must use stealth and caution while approaching the beach and keep a low profile in the water as well as when on the beach. One scout swimmer should periodically keep watch to the rear to warn of large waves that may injure the swimmers or separate them from their equipment. When the scout swimmers reach shallow enough water and when they determine that the situation is safe enough, they remove their fins. There are two methods the scouts may use to move across the beach to begin their reconnaissance and secure the beach landing site. (1) If the wood line can be seen easily from the waterline, one scout remains in the water just at the waterline and covers the movement of the other scout as he moves quickly across the beach. Once the inland scout has moved to the edge of the wood line, he covers his partner while he moves across the beach to the same position."}
{"id": "fm-7-93-long-range-surveillance-units-operations-1995", "title": "FM 7-93 Long Range Surveillance Units Operations 1995", "year": 1995, "seq": 4, "text": "These commands or directives are given in conjunction with the crew chief, whose primary attention is to the safety of the aircraft, and any possible interference of the tail rotor. (3) The team should hookup the same as in familiarization procedures and sling individual weapons over the shoulders. Weapons and equipment are secured to withstand the wind. Rifles should have a safety line attached to prevent a lost weapon during SPIES operations. The team leader gives the thumbs-up signal. (4) During the extraction, the team radio operator maintains communications with the extraction helicopter. He gives an oral backup to the thumbs-up signal and also relays any other information during the flight. His location should be near or at the bottom hookup point to assist in giving accurate information about the extraction, the clearing of obstacles, and the descent. (5) Liftoff of the extraction aircraft must be vertical until the SPIES rope has cleared all obstacles. Team members can fire their individual weapons, using the hip position and with the barrel directed downward at a 45-degree angle and outward. (6) Once the aircraft has cleared vertical obstacles, the RATELO, who is the lowest man on the SPIES rope gives the signal to the pilot that the team has cleared the obstacle. This is especially important during limited visibility even when the pilot is using night vision goggles, because of the difficulty in determining depth perception 120 feet below the aircraft. (7) On descent, the RATELO along with the SPIES master communicates to the pilot the altitude, drift, forward speed and whether or not oscillation of the rope is great enough to cause injury on impact. The RATELO should use the countdown method in 10-foot increments (\u201c\u2018fifty, forty, thirty, twenty, ten, nine, eight . . . one; one man down, two . ..\u201d) until the team is down. During limited visibility, the SPIES master may not be able to see this action."}
{"id": "fm-7-93-long-range-surveillance-units-operations-1995", "title": "FM 7-93 Long Range Surveillance Units Operations 1995", "year": 1995, "seq": 5, "text": "The following is a priority of actions in landing on an LZ. (1) The team leader obtains the landing direction from the pilot; then informs all team members before landing. This aids in orientation to the LZ, particularly during night operations. (2) Unloading of the aircraft does not begin until directed by the crew chief or pilot. (3) Once the aircraft has landed, personnel unbuckle their seat belts and exit the aircraft as fast as possible with all equipment. (4) Individuals move 15 to 20 meters out from the side of the aircraft and assume the prone position facing away from the aircraft, weapons at ready position, until the aircraft has departed the LZ. (5) The LRS team should then move to an assembly area out of sight and sound of the LZ (500 meters) long enough to adjust their senses to the surrounding environment and to verify the location of the LZ using map checks or global positioning systems. After unloading from the aircraft, the 6-35 FM 7-93 6-36 team leader moves the team to a predetermined location, using moving techniques appropriate to the terrain. Once at the concealed assembly point, the team leader makes a quick count of personnel and equipment, and then proceeds with the mission. (6) Soldiers maneuver off the LZ to the closest side offering cover and concealment. (7) The team may elect to have the aircraft wait in the vicinity for 5 to 10 minutes to allow for the hasty extraction of the team if compromised. (8) If soldiers are engaged by nearby enemy positions, they treat it as a near ambush by immediately returning fire. Soldiers who consider them- selves in the kill zone may assault the enemy position(s) or attempt to leave the kill zone. Soldiers not in the kill zone provide supporting fire to support the movement of soldiers in the kill zone. (9) The LRS team leader calls for close air support, if it is available."}
{"id": "fm-7-93-long-range-surveillance-units-operations-1995", "title": "FM 7-93 Long Range Surveillance Units Operations 1995", "year": 1995, "seq": 6, "text": "If regular antenna wire is not available, the radio operator can use field telephone wire (WDI/TT.) to build antennas. Field wire consists of two insulated wires. Each insulated wire is made up of four copper strands and three steel strands of wire. (1) When making electrical connections with field wire, the operator uses the copper strands. To identify the four copper strands, he removes about | inch of insulation from one end of the insulated wire. He holds the wire where the insulation ends and the strands are bent to the side. When he releases bending pressure, the steel strands snap back to their original position while the copper strands remain bent. These copper strands can then be wrapped around the steel strands to present a copper surface for a good electrical connection. (2) If field wire is used as the radiating element of an antenna, the two insulated wires in the twisted pair must be connected together at the ends so that electrically the two wires act as one. First, the radio operator tightly twists together all six steel strands from the two wires (for strength). He twists the eight copper strands together (for electrical connection). Then, he twists the copper strands around the steel strands. (3) When used as a feed line for a dipole antenna, the radio operator connects each of the two insulated wires of the twisted pair to a separate leg of the dipole. At the radio, he connects one wire (any wire) to the center connector of the radio antenna terminal and the second wire to a screw on the antenna case. (4) In an emergency, any wire of sufficient length can be used for an antenna; for example, barbed wire, electrical wire, fence wire, and metal-cored clothesline. Communication has been successful using metal house gutters and even metal bed springs."}
{"id": "pennywise20n1", "title": "Penny-Wise", "year": 1986, "seq": 0, "text": "In 1 692, a group of young girls who lived in the Salem, Massachusetts area began to act strangely, as if they were suffering from sort of seizures. The young girls - actually, they were trying to conceal their own misbehavior - claimed that they were the victims of an evil spell which had been cast upon them by some local women. Their accusations resulted in the strange and shameful reign of terror which is known today as the Salem witch trials. Superstition, family feuds, revenge, greed, and church politics all played a part in this grim drama. Ultimately, 19 innocent women were hanged; one man was smothered under a heavy pile of rocks; and others were falsely accused and imprisoned for as long as 2 years. During this period, a common superstition was held that one could be safe from witches if he or she carried a bent shilling or six pence . The Pine T ree coinage was an easy source for these amulets because the coins were readily available and were thin enough to be bent easily. In the m id-1 970\u2019s, a large West Coast coin firm promoted bent Pine Tree shillings as \"witch pieces\" and sold them in what appeared to be fairly large numbers. Although authentication would be difficult, for it\u2019s hard to tell if the teeth-marks on the coins were those of God-fearing Puritans or your average run-of-the-mill vandals, the promotion did add some charm and a sense of history to a few damaged coins of limited collector interest. During the 1700\u2019s, the Massachusetts silver coinage continued to play a slowly declining role in the New England economy. Contrary to the impression one gains when reading the RED BOOK, the American coins listed in that guide constituted only a fraction of the money which was used in the colonies and the early days of the United States."}
{"id": "pennywise20n1", "title": "Penny-Wise", "year": 1986, "seq": 1, "text": "The quantity of coins available in the premium category is usually very small. The most accessible source for them is the major auctions although dealer specialists in the Colonials will have these coins from time to time. Most of the premium coins are from the era of the small planchet Pine Tree shillings. The 'dogs' are coins with serious defects resulting from abuse while in circulation, less often from John Hull's mint. The most common circulation- related defects are planchet clips followed closely by bent, holed, and mutilated coins. Many of the pieces which have been clipped have been cut down all the way to the second circle of beads. Such coins, even though they are of historical interest, are 'slow movers' from the dealers' point of view. A surprising number of small dealers in the New England area have one or two of these orphans laying around, often with AN ACS papers to improve the chances of selling them . Prices in the 'dog' category range from $100. or less for a pitted ground- salvage (metal detector) 'hurtin' puppy' to perhaps $400. for a halfway-decent- looking 'cross breed'. In this area of the market there is room to dicker with the dealer on price, but be forewarned that financial liquidity is not an attribute for the 'dog' Massachusetts silver coinage. A special breed of 'dog' coin is the severe mint-caused defect group. Theoretically, the best of these pieces should fall into the premium category since the coins are as struck, but their appearance is so poor that price-wise they are treated as 'dogs'. The best such example what I have seen of this was a Noe 6 Oak Tree shilling owned by a Boston collector. All known examples of this rare variety have an unattractive damaged reverse (tree side) from the original die."}
{"id": "pennywise20n1", "title": "Penny-Wise", "year": 1986, "seq": 2, "text": "Although the coin in question was as good as the Noe plate coin, the ultimate selling price for the piece from a popular Boston area bid wall (which normally draws good prices) was about $425., the top of the price category for 'dogs'. Beside the 'dogs' category, there are the fakes, and in this area there are good fakes and bad fakes. The bad fakes are those pieces which may be used to deceive the inexperienced or casual buyer. Many of these items were sold in the Boston area tourist attractions before the Hobby Protection Act required that the word COPY be placed on all reproductions . About 3 years ago, a co- worker showed me a 'Pine Tree shilling' which he had found on a football field. The piece was bad, of course; but, to the casual observer, it could have been quite deceptive. I could imagine someone placing such an item in a 3x3 holder with a velvet pouch and offering it as a special deal to an investor. The good fakes fall into 2 categories. The first category is the contemporary counterfeits and the classic 19th century reproductions which have become part of the Massachusetts silver series for some collectors. Although these pieces do have their place, I think that they are largely of interest to the advanced die variety collector who is looking to add some historical items to - 8 - an already established collection. As a general Colonial\u2014 type coin collector, I would prefer to have one or more examples of the 'real thing' before I would want to get involved in that area. The second 'good fake' area is the series of town medals and related items which have been issued over the years. These pieces usually commemorate an event or anniversary on one side and a facsimile of a Massachusetts silver piece on the other."}
{"id": "pennywise20n1", "title": "Penny-Wise", "year": 1986, "seq": 3, "text": "Collector interest is limited in this area and so the selling prices usually never exceed a few dollars. These pieces can be especially interesting when the original boxes or containers and the historical notes are included. About a year ago at a local coin club auction, I purchased a medal which commemorated the Tercentenary of the Massachusetts Bay Colony. The piece, which was issued in 1930, came in a cute little round box and featured a reproduction of the reverse of a Pine Tree shilling on one side and a picture of John Hull's daughter, Hannah, seated on a scale on the other. There was also a slip of paper in the box which contained the information used earlier in this series of articles concerning her marriage to Judge Samuel Sewall. Not a bad deal for a buck! A Personal Experience I became interested in the Massachusetts silver coinage about 6 years ago when I moved to Boston. I purchased copies of Crosby and Noe, read them over, and decided to acquire a representative example of a Pine Tree shilling. In the fall of 1979, I noticed a Pine Tree shilling in one of Catherine Bullowa's mail bid sales. She was kind enough to send the coin to me for a 24-hour inspection. I liked the coin and placed a bid on that piece and on another coin of interest, a 1 795 half dime. When the sale was settled, I had won the half dime at a bid well below my maximum but had missed out on the Pine Tree shilling . After this sale, the bull coin market raised its ugly head and forced every- one except the high rollers out of numismatics. Since I did not want a low grade example of the Pine Tree shilling, I stayed on the sidelines. In 1982, the great bull market had become the land of the bear and I now had hope of owning a decent shilling."}
{"id": "pennywise20n1", "title": "Penny-Wise", "year": 1986, "seq": 4, "text": "Lapp: In the November Penny-Wise just received, Robert Schonwalter speculates on the cause of the plain over reeded edge on his 1841 Proof half cent. He quotes from the Robinson catalogue the explanation attributed to Richard Picker and later Walter Breen, that Apparently the planchets were prepared with reeding, then in the final striking a plain collar was used which flattened out the reeding.\" Schonwalter is of the opinion that this explanation did not seem to make sense. He goes on to ask how, and why, a planchet could be prepared with a reeded edge. The how is easy. Before the Mint began striking reeded edge dimes in reeded collars in mid-1828, with other denominations following in later years, the edges of the planchets for reeded edge coins such as Half Dimes, Dimes, Quarters, Quarter Eagles, Half Eagles and Eagles were reeded on the Castaing machine prior to the strike. The coins were struck without a collar to avoid crushing the reeding. The introduction of the reeded collar eliminated the need to reed the planchet before the strike, but not the need to upset the edge of planchet. Without this upsetting, which previously occured as a fringe benefit of the reeding process, there was not enough metal near the edge of the planchet to properly form the rim. Thus the planchets still had to be upset on the Castaing machine, though with plain pressure bars rather than reeded ones. It is my supposition that the Mint experienced problems with the planchets slipping between the plain pressure bars, so that part of the circumfrence of a planchet was not upset. A similar problem commonly occured on the Bust half dollars, where the pressure bars were plain except for the well-spaced letters FIFTY CENTS OR HALF A DOLLAR. To combat this problem the Mint experimented with various space fillers on the edges of some 1809 halves, and added fine parallel lines between the words in 1830 I believe that the Mint tried to solve its slippage problem by using finely reeded pressure bars on the Castaing machine, at least on the thinner denominations like the Half Dime, Dime and Quarter."}
{"id": "pennywise20n1", "title": "Penny-Wise", "year": 1986, "seq": 5, "text": "However, they are more often kept which only serves to encourage this mean practice. It is small wonder that interest in coin collecting has declined in recent times or indeed that it survives at all. Isn't it time to end this \"caveat emptor\" (let the buyer beware; policy and demonstrate the courage to confront or expell the numismatic quacks from our ranks? If you feel extreme measures are unnecessary and that stricter grading enforcement should be a gradual process, maybe the best place to begin is your own collection. How long has it been since you checked your grades? If you have not checked recently or worse yet you still list the grades assigned by previous owners, re-examination - 17 - XX /1 1 2 is definitely in order. Even if you have a large collection, checking is important because your early grading may differ significantly from that of recent acquisitions. Why wait until someone reveals that many of your coins are overgraded or risk disappointment at sale time when an anticipated profit may become an unexpected loss? Your best protection is to become familiar with the standards, study many coins, do your own grading and periodically review your collection. You really can't afford to rely on someone else's judgment. OK, so you believe that you already grade conservatively but try this experiment anyway. Without prior reference to source or cost, assemble all your specimens of the same grade and type into, groups for comparison. If you do not have enough coins for grouping, line up those you own according to grade. Check each specimen for wear and move those of higher or lower grade to their proper position or group. Coins with serious problems (i.e. porosity, roughness, scratches, digs, etc.) which are inconsistent with normal wear should be reduced in grade to adjust for the full impact of such disfigurement."}
{"id": "pennywise20n1", "title": "Penny-Wise", "year": 1986, "seq": 6, "text": "If you have enough varieties for grouping, select the coin that most closely represents the group grade level and you will have a reasonably accurate grading guide . Before you decide that this is an exercise for beginners, give it a try. You may be surprised how you have been fooled or have fooled yourself but infatuation with a pretty lady is often responsible for strange behavior. You may also find that you grade more accurately after you have owned a coin for a while than you did when you bought it or when you are planning to sell. If we wish to preserve grading standards, we must maintain accuracy within our own collections. In a recent WALL STREET JOURNAL article, Daniel Boostin, the librarian of Congress, said, \"I write to discover what I think.\" I believe that how we grade reveals what we are. In 1980 I attended my first EAC Convention and have never for- gotten the wonderful spirit of camaraderie which I experienced. Immediately after registering, I made my way to the bourse floor and found myself at John Ashby's table. I had not met John before and knew him only through brief correspondence . but he greeted me warmly and asked what he could show me. I advised him of my interest in draped bust large cents and John handed me a double row box. He then pointed to comfortable chairs and a table in the center of the floor and said, \"Good hunting! If you find something you like, bring it over and we'll talk about it.\" John acted as if he had known me for years, but more important, he demonstrated a trust not only in me but in all who came to his table. I thought this was unique but soon learned that most dealers present were doing business in the same way."}
{"id": "pennywise20n1", "title": "Penny-Wise", "year": 1986, "seq": 7, "text": "A Mid-West EAC Regional meeting was held on November 29, in conjunction with the Michigan State Coin Show. The following signed the roster for the evening: Don Valenciano, Jr. Steve Fischer Jim McGuigan Tom Matthews Joan Widok Rod Widok John Sype John Wright Mike Rintz Gene Braig Steve Hayden Tom Reynolds Tom DeLorey Larry Bolema Kevin Bolema Mike Sugamele Ken Mote Joseph Tomasko Dennis Mendelson John Wright led an informal discussion and then showed his collection of 1801 , 1802, and 1839 large cents which were very impressive. REGIONAL EAC MEETING, NY-NJ SECTION Robert Martin A regional meeting of EAC's NY-NJ section was held on Saturday, November 2, 1985 in conjunction with the Grand Central Coin Convention held in New York City. Those present were: Chuck Heck Frank Stillinger Doug Walcutt Vincent Manna Joel Spingarn John Brady Robert Miller Arlene Holl William Pearson Robert Matthews David Hensley Herman Halpern David Palmer Harry Colborn Roger Geary HarryJ. Rescigno Joel Geoffrey Robert Saltisiak Burnett Anderson Sal Zambuto Robert Slobbins Warren Weiss Walter Chincy Rick Leonard Kenny Kugler Rona Kugler George Cuhaj Enoch Blackwell Robert Martin The featured event of the meeting was a presentation by Chuck Heck on the various aspects of collecting the middle date (1816-1839) large cents. Chuck opened his discussion with a review of the reference works on the middle date series which had been published by Frank Andrews in 1881 and by Howard Newcomb in 1944. Recent updated articles by John Wright were also mentioned. He also recommended as useful supplements to the aforementioned reference works notable auction catalogues of sales containing major offerings of middle date cents such as Stack's Floyd Starr sale. Chuck then provided the members with a line drawing which would aid in the identification of the various middle date varieties. The line drawing illustrated the relationship of star points to the coronet tip and denticles for use in identifying obverses and the relationship of leaf points to the legends for use in identifying the reverses."}
{"id": "pennywise20n1", "title": "Penny-Wise", "year": 1986, "seq": 8, "text": "I also pay finders' fees for reliable leads. - 37 - XX /1 1 2 HISTORIC SITES IN PHILADELPHIA Leo Shane Recently, I accompanied my son's Cub Scout Park on a tour of some historic sites in Center City, Philadelphia. Along with a stop at the Liberty Bell, we toured Independence Hall. We followed the park guide (the Independence Mall area was declared a National Park in 1975) through the various rooms to a room in the East Wing called the Assembly Room. It was in this room that our Founding Fathers discussed the words of the Constitution and approved the final ve rsion . It was also in this room that George Washington presided over this Assembly during which time he was seated in a chair which caught the interest of none other than Benjamin Franklin. In his book on the Fugio cents, Alan Kessler wrote: \"At the first Constitutional Convention in Philadelphia, George Washington used a chair which had a sun-with-rays design carved on the back. During the conven- tion which he attended, Franklin became enthralled with the chair's design. At the successful conclusion of the convention, Franklin was heard to say: 'It is a rising sun, not a setting sun.' \" This sun-with-rays design on Washington's chair is virtually identical with the pointed rays on the Fugio cent and may very well have been the inspiration and model for the sun-and-rays used on the Fugios. Although the guide knew of the chair and of Franklin's interest in it, he did not know of the connection to our first federally authorized coin. I could not resist informing him of this connection and he seemed appreciative of learning about it. Needless to say, I had to get pictures of the room and the chair and found postcards of both at the Mall's book store."}